Columtiia  ^Hnitosiitj^ 
mtijeCitj>ofi5ehj|9ork 

COLLEGE  OF  PHYSICIANS 
AND   SURGEONS 


Reference  Library 

Given  by 


e-<_  . 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 

Open  Knowledge  Commons 


http://www.archive.org/details/textbookofphysio1905howe 


Copyright,  1905,  by  W.  B.  Saunders  &  Company. 


PRESS    OF 
W.   B.   SAUNDERS    &    COMPANY,    PHILADA. 


PREFACE. 


In  the  preparation  of  this  book  the  author  has  endeavored  to 
keep  in  mind  two  guiding  principles:  first,  the  importance  of 
simphcity  and  lucidity  in  the  presentation  of  facts  and  theories; 
and,  second,  the  need  of  a  judicious  limitation  of  the  material 
selected.  In  regard  to  the  second  point  every  specialist  is  aware 
of  the  bewildering  number  of  researches  that  have  been  and  are 
being  published  in  physiology  and  the  closely  related  sciences,  and 
the  difficulty  of  justly  estimating  the  value  of  conflicting  results. 
He  who  seeks  for  the  truth  in  any  matter  under  discussion  is  often- 
times forced  to  be  satisfied  with  a  suspension  of  judgment,  and 
the  writer  who  attempts  to  formulate  our  present  knowledge 
upon  almost  any  part  of  the  subject  is  in  many  instances  obliged 
to  present  the  literature  as  it  exists  and  let  the  reader  make  his 
own  deductions.  This  latter  method  is  doubtless  the  most  satis- 
factory and  the  most  suitable  for  large  treatises  prepared  for  the 
use  of  the  specialist  or  advanced  student,  but  for  beginners  it  is 
absolutely  necessary  to  follow  a  different  plan.  The  amount  of 
material  and  the  discussion  of  details  of  controversies  must  be 
brought  within  reasonable  limits.  The  author  must  assume  the 
responsibility  of  sifting  the  evidence  and  emphasizing  those  con- 
clusions that  seem  to  be  most  justified  by  experiment  and  obser- 
vation. As  far  as  material  is  concerned,  it  is  evident  that  the 
selection  of  what  to  give  and  what  to  omit  is  a  matter  of  judg- 
ment and  experience  upon  the  part  of  the  writer,  but  the  present 
author  is  convinced  that  the  necessary  reduction  in  material 
should  be  made  by  a  process  of  elimination  rather  than  by  con- 
densation. The  latter  method  is  suitable  for  the  specialist  with 
his  background  of  knowledge  and  experience,  but  it  is  entirely 
unfitted  for  the  elementary  student.  For  the  purposes  of  the 
latter  brief,  comprehensive  statements  are  oftentimes  misleading, 
or  fail  at  least  to  make  a  clear  impression.  Those  subjects  that 
are  presented  to  him  must  be  given  with  a  certain  degree  of  full- 
ness if  he  is  expected  to  obtain  a  serviceable  conception  of  the 
facts,  and  it  follows  that  a  treatment  of  the  wide  subject  of  physi- 
ology is  possible,  when  undertaken  with  this  intention,  only  by 
the  adoption  of  a  system  of  selection  and  elimination. 

The  fundamental  facts  of  physiology,  its  principles  and  modes 

3 


4  PREFACE. 

of  reasoning  are  not  difficult  to  understand.  The  obstacle  that 
is  most  frequently  encountered  by  the  student  lies  in  the  com- 
plexity of  the  subject, — the  large  number  of  more  or  less  dis- 
connected facts  and  theories  which  must  be  considered  in  a  dis- 
cussion of  the  structure,  physics,  and  chemistry  of  such  an  intri- 
cate organism  as  the  human  body.  But  once  a  selection  has  been 
made  of  those  facts  and  principles  which  it  is  most  desirable  that 
the  student  should  know,  there  is  no  intrinsic  difficulty  to  prevent 
them  from  being  stated  so  clearly  that  they  may  be  comprehended 
by  anyone  who  possesses  an  elementary  knowledge  of  anatomy, 
physics,  and  chemistry.  It  is  doubtless  the  art  of  presentation 
that  makes  a  text-book  successful  or  unsuccessful.  It  must  be 
admitted,  however,  that  certain  parts  of  physiology,  at  this  par- 
ticular period  in  its  development,  offer  peculiar  difficulties  to  the 
writers  of  text-books.  During  recent  years  chemical  work  in  the 
fields  of  digestion  and  nutrition  has  been  very  full,  and  as  a  result 
theories  hitherto  generally  accepted  have  been  subjected  to  crit- 
icism and  alteration,  particularly  as  the  important  advances 
in  theoretical  chemistry  and  physics  have  greatly  modified  the 
attitude  and  point  of  view  of  the  investigators  in  physiology. 
Some  former  views  have  been  unsettled  and  much  information 
has  been  collected  which  at  present  it  is  difficult  to  formulate  and 
apply  to  the  explanation  of  the  normal  processes  of  the  animal 
body.  It  would  seem  that  in  some  of  the  fundamental  problems 
of  metabolism  physiological  investigation  has  pushed  its  experi- 
mental results  to  a  point  at  which,  for  further  progress,  a  deeper 
knowledge  of  the  chemistry  of  the  body  is  especially  needed.  Cer- 
tainly the  amount  of  work  of  a  chemical  character  that  bears  di- 
rectly or  indirectly  on  the  problems  of  physiology  has  shown  a  re- 
markable increase  within  the  last  decade.  Amid  the  conflicting 
results  of  this  literature  it  is  difficult  or  impossible  to  follow  always 
the  true  trend  of  development.  The  best  that  the  text-book  can 
hope  to  accomplish  in  such  cases  is  to  give  as  clear  a  picture 
as  possible  of  the  tendencies  of  the  time. 

Some  critics  have  contended  that  only  those  facts  or  conclu- 
sions about  which  there  is  no  difference  of  opinion  should  be  pre- 
sented to  medical  students.  Those  who  are  acquainted  with 
the  subject,  however,  understand  that  books  written  from  this 
standpoint  contain  much  that  represents  the  uncertain  compromises 
of  past  generations,  and  that  the  need  of  revision  is  felt  as  fre- 
quently for  such  books  as  for  those  constructed  on  more  liberal 
principles.  There  does  not  seem  to  be  any  sound  reason  why  a 
text-book  for  medical  students  should  aim  to  present  only  those 
conclusions  that  have  crystallized  out  of  the  controversies  of  other 
times,  and  ignore  entirely  the  live  issues  of  the  day  which  are 


PREFACE.  5 

of  SO  much  interest  and  importance  not  only  to  physiology,  but 
to  all  branches  of  medicine.  With  this  idea  in  mind  the  author 
has  endeavored  to  make  the  student  realize  that  physiology  is  a 
growing  subject,  continually  widening  its  knowledge  and  read- 
justing its  theories.  It  is  important  that  the  student  should 
grasp  this  conception,  because,  in  the  first  place,  it  is  true;  and, 
in  the  second  place,  it  may  save  him  later  from  disappointment 
and  distrust  in  science  if  he  recognizes  that  many  of  our  conclu- 
sions are  not  the  final  truth,  but  provisional  only,  representing 
the  best  that  can  be  done  with  the  knowledge  at  our  command. 
To  emphasize  this  fact  as  well  as  to  add  somewhat  to  the  interest 
of  the  reader  short  historical  resumes  have  been  introduced  from 
time  to  time,  although  the  question  of  space  alone,  not  to  men- 
tion other  considerations,  has  prevented  any  extensive  use  of  such 
material.  It  is  a  feature,  however,  that  a  teacher  might  develop 
with  profit.  Some  knowledge  of  the  gradual  evolution  of  our 
present  beliefs  is  useful  in  demonstrating  the  enduring .  value  of 
experimental  work  as  compared  with  mere  theorizing,  and  also  in 
engendering  a  certain  appreciation  and  respect  for  knowledge 
that  has  been  gained  so  slowly  by  the  exertions  of  successive 
generations  of  able  investigators. 

A  word  may  be  said  regarding  the  references  to  literature 
inserted  in  the  book.  It  is  perfectly  obvious  that  a  complete 
or  approximately  complete  bibliography  is  neither  appropriate 
nor  useful,  however  agreeable  it  may  be  to  give  every  worker  full 
recognition  of  the  results  of  his  labors.  But  for  the  sake  of  those 
who  may  for  any  reason  wish  to  follow  any  particular  subject 
more  in  detail  some  references  have  been  given,  and  these  have 
been  selected  usually  with  the  idea  of  citing  those  works  which 
themselves  contain  a  more  or  less  extensive  discussion  and  litera- 
ture. Occasionally  also  references  have  been  made  to  works  of 
historical  importance  or  to  separate  papers  that  contain  the  experi- 
mental evidence  for  some  special  view. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


SECTION  I. 
THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

PAGE 

Chapter   I. — The    Phenomenon   of  Contraction 17 

The  Histological  Structure  of  the  Muscle  Fiber,  18. — Its  Appearance  by 
Polarized  Light,  19. — The  Extensibility  and  Elasticity  of  Muscular  Tissue, 
19. — The  Independent  Irritability  of  Muscle,  22. — Definition  and  Enumera- 
tion of  Artificial  Stimuli,  23. — The  Duration  of  the  Simple  Muscle  Contrac- 
tion, 25. — The  Curve  of  a  Simple  Muscle  Contraction,  25. — The  Latent  Pe- 
riod, 26. — The  Phases  of  Shortening  and  Relaxation,  26. — Isotonic  and  Iso- 
metric Contractions,  27. — Maximal  and  Submaximal  Contractions,  27. — 
Effect  of  Temperature  upon  the  Simple  Contraction,  28.  —  Effect  of  Veratrin 
on  the  Simple  Contraction,  .30. — Contracture,  32. — Fatigue,  the  Treppe,  and 
Effect  of  Rapidly  Repeated  Stimulation,  33. — The  Wave  of  Contraction  and 
Means  of  Measuring,  33 — Idiomuscular  Contractions,  34. — The  Energy  Liber- 
ated During  a  Muscular  Contraction,  34. — Ihe  Proportional  Amount  of  this 
Energy  Utilized  in  Work,  35. — The  Curve  of  Work  and  the  Absolute  Power 
of  a  Muscle,  36. — Definition  of  Tetanus  or  Compound  Contraction,  39. — The 
Summation  of  Contractions,  39. — Discontinuity  of  the  Processes  of  Contraction 
in  Tetanus,  41. — The  Muscle-tone,  41. — The  Rate  of  Stimulation  Necessary 
for  Complete  Tetanus,  42. — The  Tetanic  Nature  of  Voluntary  Contractions, 
43. — The  Ergograph,  45. — Results  of  Ergographic  Experiments,  47. — Sense 
of  Fatigue,  47. — Muscle  Tonus,  47. — Rigor  Mortis  and  Rigor  Caloris,  49. — 
The  Occurrence  and  Structure  of  Plain  Muscle  Tissue,  52. — Distinctive  Prop- 
erties of  Plain  Muscle,  52. — The  General  Properties  of  Cardiac  Muscular  Tis- 
sue, 54. — The  Contractility   of   Cilia  and  Their  General  Properties.  54. 

Chapter  II. — The  Chemical  Composition  of  Muscle  and  the  Chemi- 
cal Changes  of  Contraction  and  op  Rigor  Mortis 57 

The  Composition  of  Muscle  Plasma,  57. — The  Proteids  of  Muscle,  58. — The 
Carbohydrates  of  Muscle,  58. — Phosphocarnic  Acid,  60. — Lactic  Acid  in 
Muscle,  60. — The  Nitrogenous  Extractives  of  Muscle,  61. — Pigments  of  Mus- 
cle, 61. — Enzymes  of  Muscle,  61. — Inorganic  Constituents  of  Muscle,  62. — 
The  Chemical  Changes  in  Muscle  during  Contraction,  62. — The  Chemical 
Changes  during  Rigor  Mortis,  66. — The  Relation  of  the  Waste  Products  to 
Fatigue,  the  Chemical  Theory  of  Fatigue,  66. — Theories  of  the  Mechanism  of 
the  Contraction  of  Muscle,  68. 

Chapter  III. — The    Phenomenon   of  Conduction.      Properties   of 

THE   Nerve  Fiber 72 

General  Statement  Regarding  Property  of  Conductivity,  72. — Structure  of 
the  Nerve  Fibre,  73. — Function  of  the  Myelin  Sheath,  73. — The  Nerve  Trunk 
an  Anatomical  Unit  Only,  74. — Definition  of  Afferent  and  Efferent  Nerve 
Fibers,  75. — Classification  of  Nerve  Fibers,  75. — The  Bell-Magendie  Law  of 
the  Composition  of  the  Anterior  and  the  Posterior  Roots  of  the  Spinal  Nerves, 
77. — Cells  of  Origin  of  the  Anterior  and  Posterior  Root  Fibers,  78. — Origin 
of  the  Afferent  and  Efferent  Fibers  in  the  Cranial  Nerves,  79. — Independent 
Irritability  of  Nerve  Fibers,  Artificial  Nerve  Stimuli,  80. — Du  Bois-Reymond's 
Law  of  Stimulation  by  the  Galvanic  Current,  82. — Electrotonus,  83. — Pflijger's 
Law  of  Stimulation,  84. — The  Opening  and  the  Closing  Tetanus,  86. — Mode 
of  Stimulating  Nerves  in  Man,  86. — Motor  Points  of  Muscles,  88. — Physical 
and  Physiological  Poles,  89. 

Chapter  IV. — The  Electrical  Phenomena  Shown  by  Nerve  and 

Muscle 91 

The  Demarcation  Current,  91 . — Construction  of  the  Galvanometer,  92. — Con- 
struction of  the  Capillary  Electrometer,  94. — Non-polarizable  Electrodes,  95. — • 
Action  Current  or  Negative  Variation,  96. — Monophasic  and  Diphasic  Action 
Currents,  98. — The  Rheoscopic  Frog  Preparation,  99. — Relation  of  Action 
Current  to  the  Contraction  Wave  and  Nerve  Impulse,  100.  — The  Electrotonic 
Currents,  101.— The  Core-model,  102. 

7 


5  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Chapter  V. — The  Nature  of  the  Nerve  Impulse   and   the   Nutri- 
tive Relations  of  Nerve  Fiber  and  Nerve  Cell 104 

Historical,  104. — Velocity  of  the  Nerve  Impulse,  105. — Relation  of  the  Nerve 
Impulse  to  the  Wave  of  Negativity,  107. — Direction  of  Conduction  in  the 
Nerve,  107. — Effect  of  Various  Influences  on  the  Nerve  Impulse,  109. — The 
Fatigue  of  Nerve  Fibers,  110. — The  Metabolism  of  the  Nerve  Fiber  during 
Functional  Activity,  112. — Theories  of  the  Nerve  Impulse,  U3. — Qualitative 
Differences  in  Nerve  Impulses,  11.5. — Doctrine  of  Specific  Nerve  Energies, 
116. — Nutritive  Relations  of  Nerve  Fibers  and  Nerve  Cells,  116. — Nerve  De- 
generation and  Regeneration,  118. — Degenerative  Changes  in  the  Central  End 
of  the  Neuron,  120. 

SECTION  II. 
THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  CENTRAL   NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

Chapter  VI. — Structure  and  General  Properties  of  the  Nerve 

Cell  122 

The  Neuron  Doctrine,  122. — The  Varieties  of  Neurons,  124. — Internal  Struc- 
ture of  the  Nerve  Cell,  126. — General  Physiology  of  the  Nerve  Cell,  128. — 
Summation  of  Stimuli  in  Nerve  Cells,  130. — Response  of  the  Nerve  Cell  to 
Varying  Rates  of  Stimulation,  131. — The  Refractory  Period  of  the  Nerve  Cell, 
132. 

Chapter  VII. — Reflex  Actions 133 

Definition  and  Historical,  133.— The  Reflex  Arc,  133.— The  Reflex  Frog,  135.— 
Spinal  Reflex  Movements,  135. — Theory  of  Co-ordinated  Reflexes,  137. — Spinal 
Reflexes  in  Mammals,  138. — Dependence  of  Co-ordinated  Reflexes  upon  the 
Excitation  of  the  Sensory  Endings,  1.38. — Reflex  Time,  139. — Inhibition  of 
Reflexes,  139. — Influence  of  the  Condition  of  the  Cord  on  its  Reflex  Activities, 
141. — Reflexes  from  Other  Parts  of  the  Nervous  System,  142. — Reflexes 
Through  Peripheral  Ganglia,  Axon  Reflexes,  142. — The  Tonic  Activity  of  the 
Spinal  Cord,  144. — Effects  of  Removal  of  the  Spinal  Cord,  144. — Knee-jerk, 
146. — Reinforcement  of  the  Knee-jerk,  146. — Is  the  Knee-jerk  a  Reflex  Act? 
148. — Conditions  Influencing  the  Extent  of  the  Knee-jerk,  149. — The  Knee- 
jerk  and  Spinal  Reflexes  as  Diagnostic  Signs,  150. — Location  of  the  Centers 
for  the  Different  Spinal  Reflexes,  151. 

Chapter  VIII. — The  Spinal  Cord  as  a  Path  of  Conduction..  .....    154 

Arrangement  and  Classification  of  the  Nerve  Cells  in  the  Cord,  154. — The 
Gross  Relations  of  the  Gray  and  White  Matter  in  the  Cord,  156. — The  Methods 
of  Determining  the  Tracts  of  the  Cord,  156. — General  Classification  of  the 
Tracts  of  the  Cord,  157. — The  Names  and  Locations  of  the  Long  Tracts,  159. 
— The  Termination  in  the  Cord  of  the  Fibers  of  the  Posterior  Root,  160. — 
Ascending  or  Afferent  Paths  in  the  Posterior  Columns,  161. — Ascending  or 
Afferent  Paths  in  the  Lateral  Columns,  164. — The  Spinal  Paths  for  the  Cutane- 
ous Senses  (Touch,  Pain,  Temperature),  165. — The  Homolateral  or  Contra- 
lateral Conduction  of  the  Cutaneous  Impulses,  166. — The  Descending  or  Ef- 
ferent Paths  in  the  Anterolateral  Columns  (Pyramidal  System),  167. — Less 
Well-known  Tracts  in  the  Cord,  169. 

Chapter  IX. — The  General  Physiology  of  the  Cerebrum  and  Its 

Motor   Functions 171 

The  Histology  of  the  Cortex,  172. — The  Classification  of  the  Systems  of  Fibers 
in  the  Cerebrum  (Projection,  Association,  and  Commissural),  173. — Physici- 
logical  Deductions  from  the  Histology  of  the  Cortex,  175. — Extirpation  of 
the  Cerebrum,  178. — Localization  of  Functions  in  the  Cerebrum,  Historical, 
179. — The  Motor  Areas  of  the  Cortex,  183. — Differences  in  Paralysis  from 
Injury  to  the  Spinal  Neuron  and  the  Pyramidal  Neuron,  185. — Voluntary 
Motor  Paths  Other  than  the  Pyramidal  Tract,  185. — The  Crossed  Control  of 
the  Muscies  and  Bilateral  Motor  Representation  in  the  Cortex,  186. — Are  the 
Motor  Areas  Exclusively  Motor?  186. 

Chapter  X. — The  Sense  Areas  and  the  Association  Areas  in  the 

Cortex 188 

The  Body-sense  Area,  188.— The  Course  of  the  Fillet,  190.— The  Center  for 
Vision,  192. — Histological  Evidence  of  the  Course  of  the  Optic  Fibers,  193. — 
The  Decussation  in  the  Chiasma,  195. — The  Projection  of  the  Retina  on  the 
Occipital  Cortex,  195. — The  Function  of  the  Lower  Visual  Centers,  197. — 
The  Auditory  Center,  198. — Course  of  the  Cochlear  Nerve,  199. — The  Physio- 
logical Significance  of  the  Lower  Auditory  Centers,  201. — Motor  Responses 
from  the  Auditory  Cortex,  202.— The  Olfactory  Center,  202.— The  Olfactory 
Bulb  and  its  Connections.  202. — The  Cortical  Center  for  Smell,  204. — The 
Cortical  Center  for  Taste,  204.— Aphasia,  204.— Sensory  Aphasia,  206.— The 
Association  Areas,  207. — Subdivision  of  the  Association  Areas,  209. — The 
Development  of  the  Cortfca  Areas,  210. — Physiology  of  the  Corpus  Callosum, 
213. — Physiology  of  the  Corpora  Striata  and  Optic  Thalami,  214. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  9 

PAGE 

Chapter  XI. — The  Functions  of  the  Cerebellum,  the  Pons,  and 

THE  Medulla 216 

Anatomical  Structure  and  Relations  of  the  Cerebellum,  216. — General  State- 
ment of  Theories  Regarding  the  Cerebellum,  219. — Experiments  upon  Abla- 
tion of  the  Cerebellum,  220. — Interpretation  of  the  Experimental  and  Clinical 
Results,  221. — Conclusions  as  to  the  General  Functions  of  the  Cerebellum, 
223. — The  Psychical  Functions  of  the  Cerebellum,  224. — Localization  of 
Function  in  the  Cerebellum,  224. — The  Functions  of  the  Medulla  Oblongata,  • 
225. — The  Nuclei  of  Origin  and  the  Functions  of  the  Cranial  Nerves,  226. 

Chapter  XII. — The  Sympathetic  or  Autonomic  Nervous  System  . .   231 

General  Statements,  231. — Autonomic  Nervous  System,  232. — The  Use  of 
the  Nicotin  Method,  233. — General  Course  of  the  Autonomic  Fibers  Arising 
from  the  Cord,  233. — General  Course  of  the  Fibers  Arising  from  the  Brain, 
234. — General  Course  of  the  Fibers  Arising  from  the  Sacral  Cord,  236. — - 
Normal  Mode  of  Stimulation  of  Autonomic  Nerve  Fibers,  236. 

Chapter  XIII. — The   Physiology  of  Sleep 238 

General  Statements,  238. — Physiological  Relations  during  Sleep,  238. — The 
Intensity  of  Sleep,  239. — Changes  in  the  Circulation  during  Sleep,  242. — 
Effect  of  Sensory  Stimulation,  243. — Theories  of  Sleep,  244. — Hypnotic  Sleep. 
248. 

SECTION  III. 

THE  SPECIAL  SENSES, 

Chapter  XIV. — Classification  op  the  Senses  and  General  State- 
ments     249 

Classification  of  the  Senses,  249. — The  Doctrine  of  Specific  Nerve  Energies, 
251. — The  Weber-Fechner  Psychophysical  Law,  253. 

Chapter  XV. — Cutaneous  and   Internal  Sensations 2.56 

General  Statements,  256. — The  Punctiform  Distribution  of  the  Cutaneous 
Senses,  256. — Specific  Nerve  Energies  of  the  Cutaneous  Nerves,  258. — The 
Temperature  Sen.ses,  259. — The  Sense  of  Pressure,  260. — The  Threshold  Stimu- 
lus and  the  Localizing  Power,  260. — The  Pain  Sense,  262. — Localization  or 
Projection  of  Pain  Sensations,  263. — Reflected  or  Misreferred  Pains,  263. — 
The  Muscle  Sense,  264. — The  Quality  of  the  Muscle  Sense,  266. — Sensations 
of  Hunger  and  Thirst,  267.— The  Sense  of  Thirst,  268. 

Chapter  XVI. — Sensations  of  Taste  and   Smell 270 

The  Nerves  of  Taste,  270.— The  End-organ  of  the  Taste  Fibers,  272.— Classi- 
fication of  Taste  Sensations,  272. — Distribution  and  Specific  Energy  of  the 
Fundamental  Taste  Sensations,  273. — Method  of  Sapid  Stimulation,  275. — 
The  Threshold  Stimulus  for  Taste,  275.— The  Olfactory  Organ,  275.— The 
Mechanism  of  Smelling,  276.— Nature  of  the  Olfactory  Stimulus,  277.— The 
Qualities  of  the  Olfactory  Sensations,  277. — Fatigue  of  the  Olfactory  Apparatus, 
279. — Delicacy  of  the  Olfactory  Sense,  280. — Conflict  of  Olfactory  Sensations, 
281. — Olfactory  Associations,  281. 

Chapter  XVII. — The  Eye  as  an  Optical  Instrument.     Dioptrics 

of  the   Eye 282 

Formation  of  an  Image  by  a  Biconvex  Lens,  282. — Formation  of  an  Image 
in  the  Eye,  285. — The  Inversion  of  the  Image  on  the  Retina,  287. — The  Size 
of  the  Retinal  Image,  288. — Accommodation  of  the  Eye,  289. — Limit  of  the 
Power  of  Accommodation  and  Near  Point  of  Distinct  Vision,  292. — Far 
Point  of  Distinct  Vision,  292. — The  Refractive  Power  of  the  Surfaces  in  the 
Eye,  293. — Optical  Defects  of  the  Normal  Eye,  293. — Spherical  Aberration, 
294. — Abnornaalities  in  the  Refraction  of  the  Eye,  Myopia,  295. — Hyperme- 
tropia,  296. — Presbyopia,  297. — Astigmatism,  297. — Innervation  and  Control 
of  the  Ciliary  Muscle  and  the  Muscles  of  the  Iris,  299. — The  Accommodation 
Reflex  and  the  Light  Reflex,  301. — Action  of  Drugs  upon  the  Iris,  303. — 
The  Antagonism  of  the  Sphincter  and  Dilator  Muscles  of  the  Iris,  304. — The 
Ophthalmoscope,  305. 

Chapter  XVIII. — The  Properties  of  the  Retina.     Visual  Stimuli 

AND    Visual    Sensations 308 

The  Portion  of  the  Retina  Stimulated  by  Light,  308. — The  Action  Current 
Caused  by  Stimiulation  of  the  Retina,  .309. — The  Visual  Purple,  Rhodopsln, 
310. — Extent  of  the  Visual  Field,  Perimetry,  312. — Central  and  Peripheral 
Fields  of  Vision,  313. — Visual  Acuity,  .315. — Relation  Between  Stimulus  and 
Sensation,  Threshold  Stimulus,  317. — The  Light  Adapted  and  the  Dark  Adapted 


10  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Eye,  318. — Luminosity  or  Brightness,  319. — Qualities  of  Visual  Sensations, 
320. — The  Achromatic  Series,  320. — The  Chromatic  Series,  321. — Color  Satu- 
ration and  Color  Fusion,  321. — The  Fundamental  Colors,  322. — The  Com- 
plementary Colors,  323. — After  Images,  Positive  and  Negative,  323. — Color 
Contrasts,  324. — Color  Blindness,  325. — Dichromatic  Vision,  326. — Tests  for 
Color  Blindness,  327. — Monochromatic  Vision,  327. — Distribution  of  Color 
Sense  in  the  Retina,  328. — Functions  of  the  Rods  and  Cones,  330. — Theories 
of  Color  Vision,  331. — Entoptic  Phenomena,  336. — Shadows  of  Corpuscles 
and  Blood-vessels,  336. — Shadows  from  Lens  and  Vitreous  Humor,  337. 

Chapter  XIX. — Binocular  Vision 338 

Movements  of  the  Eyeballs,  338. — Co-ordination  of  the  Eye  Muscles,  Muscular 
Insufficiency  and  Strabismus,  339. — The  Binocular  Field  of  Vision,  340. — 
Corresponding  or  Identical  Points,  340. — Physiological  Diplopia,  342. — The 
Horopter,  343. — Suppression  of  Visual  Images,  343. — Struggle  of  the  Visual 
Fields,  344. — Judgments  of  Solidity,  344. — Monocular  Perspective,  345. — 
Binocular  Perspective,  346. — Stereoscopic  Vision,  347. — Explanation  of  Binoc- 
ular Perspective,  349. — Judgments  of  Distance  and  Size,  349. — Optical  De- 
ceptions, 350. 

Chapter  XX. — The  Ear  as  an  Organ  for  Sound  Sensations 353 

The  Pinna  or  Auricle,  354. — The  Tympanic  Membrane,  354. — The  Ear  Bones, 
355. — Mode  of  Action  of  the  Ear  Bones,  356. — Muscles  of  the  Middle  Ear, 
358. — The  Eustachian  Tube,  359. — Projection  of  the  Auditory  Sensations, 
360. — Sensory  Epithelium  of  the  Cochlea,  360. — Nature  and  Action  of  the 
Sound  Waves,  361. — Classification  and  Properties  of  Musical  Sounds,  362. — 
Upper  Harmonics  or  Overtones,  364. — Sympathetic  Vibrations  and  Reso- 
nance, 366. — Functions  of  the  Cochlea,  366. — Sensations  of  Harmony  and  Dis- 
cord, 369. — Limits  of  Hearing,  370. 

Chapter  XXI. — Functions  op  the  Semicircular  Canals  and  the 

Vestibule 372 

Position  and  Structure  of  the  Semicircular  Canals,  372. — Flourens's  Experi- 
ments upon  the  Semicircular  Canals,  372. — Temporary  and  Permanent  Effects 
of  the  Operations,  374. — Effect  of  Direct  Stimulation  of  the  Canals,  374. — 
Effect  of  Section  of  the  Ampullary  or  the  Acoustic  Nerve,  375. — Is  the  Effect 
of  Section  of  the  Canals  Due  to  Stimulation?  375. — Theories  of  the  Functions 
of  the  Semicircular  Canals,  375. — Summary  of  the  Views  upon  the  Function 
of  the  Semicircular  Canals,  378. — Functions  of  the  Utriculus  and  Sacculus,  379. 

SECTION  IV. 

BLOOD  AND  LYMPH. 

Chapter  XXII. — General   Properties  of  Blood.     Physiology  of 

THE    Corpuscles 381 

Histological  Structure  of  Blood,  381. — Reaction  of  the  Blood,  382. — Specific 
Gravity  of  the  Blood,  383.— The  Red  Corpuscles,  384.— Conditi9n  of  the 
Hemoglobin  in  the  Corpuscles,  385. — Hemolysis,  385. — Hemolysis  Due  to 
Variations  in  Osmotic  Pressure,  386. — Hemolysis  Due  to  Action  of  Hemoly- 
sins, 387. — Nature  and  Amount  of  Hemoglobin,  389. — Compounds  of  Hemo- 
globin with  Oxygen  and  Other  Gases,  391. — The  Iron  in  the  Hemoglobin, 
392. — Crystals  of  Hemoglobin,  393. — Absorption  Spectra  of  Hemoglobin  and 
Oxyhemoglobin,  394. — Derivative  Compounds  of  Hemoglobin,  398. — Origin 
and  Fate  of  the  Red  Corpuscles,  401. — Variations  in  the  Number  of  Red  Cor- 
puscles, 402. — Physiology  of  the  Blood  Leucocytes,  404. — Variations  in  Num- 
ber of  the  Leucocytes,  405. — Functions  of  the  Leucocytes,  405. — Physiology 
of  the  Blood  Plates,  406. 

Chapter  XXIII. — Chemical  Composition  of  the  Blood  Plasma; 
Coagulation;  Quantity  of  Blood;  Regeneration  After 
Hemorrhage 408 

Composition  of  the  Plasma  and  Corpuscles.  408. — Proteids  of  the  Blood 
Plasma,  410. — Serum  Albumin,  410. — Paraglobulin  (Serum  Globulin),  411. — 
Fibrinogen,  412. — Less  Well-known  Proteids  of  the  Blood,  413. — Coagula- 
tion of  Blood,  414.— Theories  of  Clotting,  415.— Why  Blood  Does  Not  Clot 
Within  the  Vessels,  419. — Intravascular  Clotting,  421. — Means  of  Hastening 
or  of  Retarding  Coagulation,  421. — Total  Quantity  of  Blood  in  the  Body, 
423. — Regeneration  of  the  Blood  after  Hemorrhage,  424. — Blood  Transfu- 
sion, 426. 

Chapter  XXIV. — Composition  and  Formation  of  Lymph 427 

General  Statements,  427. — Formation  of  Lymph,  428. — Lymphagogues  of  the 
First  Class,  430. — Lymphagogues  of  the  Second  Class,  431. — Summary  of 
the  Factors  Controlling  the  Flow  of  Lymph,  432. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  11 


SECTION  V. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  CIRCULATION  OF  THE 
BLOOD  AND  LYMPH. 

PAGE 

Chapter  XXV. — The  Velocity  and  Pressure  of  the  Blood  Flow  .  .   434 

The  Circulation  as  Seen  Under  the  Microscope,  434. — The  Velocity  of  the 
Blood  Flow,  435. — Mean  Velocity  in  the  Arteries,  Veins,  and  Capillaries,  438. — 
Cause  of  the  Variations  in  Velocity,  440. — Variations  of  Velocity  with  the 
Heart  Beat  or  Changes  in  the  Blood-vessels,  440. — Time  Necessary  for  a  Com- 
plete Circulation  of  the  Blood,  441. — The  Pressure  Relations  in  the  Vascular 
System,  442. — Methods  of  Recording  Blood-pressure,  442. — Systolic,  Dias- 
tolic, and  Mean  Arterial  Pressure,  446. — Method  of  Measuring  Systolic  and 
Diastolic  Pressure  in  Animals,  447. — Data  as  to  the  Mean  Pressure  in  Arteries, 
Veins,  and  Capillaries,  450. — Methods  of  Determining  Blood-pressure  in  the 
Large  Arteries  of  Man,  453. — Normal  Pressure  in  Man  and  Its  Variations,  458. 

Chapter  XXVI. — The   Physical   Factors  Concerned  in  the  Pro- 
duction OF  Blood-pressure  and  Blood-velocity 460 

Side  Pressure  and  Velocity  Pressure,  460. — The  Factors  Concerned  in  Pro- 
ducing Normal  Pressure  and  Velocity,  463. — General  Conditions  Influencing 
Blood-pressure  and  Blood-velocity,  464. — The  Hydrostatic  Effect,  465. — Ac- 
cessory Factors  Aiding  the  Circulation,  466. — The  Conditions  of  Pressure 
and  Velocity  in  the  Pulmonary  Circulation,  467. — Variations  of  Pressure  in 
the  Pulmonary  Circuit,  468. 

Chapter  XXVIL— The  Pulse 469 

General  Statement,  469. — Velocity  of  the  Pulse  Wave,  470. — Form  of  the 
Pulse  Wave,  iSphygmography,  472. — Explanation  of  the  Catacrotic  Waves, 
474. — Anacrotic  Waves,  475. — The  Kinds  of  Pulse  in  Health  and  Disease, 
475. — Venous  Pulse,  475. 

Chapter  XXVIIL— The  Heart  Beat 477 

General  Statement,  477. — Musculature  of  the  Auricles  and  Ventricles,  478. — 
Contraction  Wave  of  the  Heart,  479. — The  Electrical  Variation,  480. — Change 
of  Form  during  Systole,  481. — The  Apex  Beat,  482. — Cardiogram,  482. — In- 
traventricular Pressure  during  Systole,  484. — The  Heart  Sounds,  485. — Events 
Occurring  during  a  Cardiac  Cycle,  488. — Time  Relations  of  Systole  and  Dias- 
tole, 489. — Normal  Capacity  of  Ventricle  and  Work  Done  by  the  Heart,  489. — 
Coronary  Circulation  during  the  Heart-beat,  491. — Suction-pump  Action  of 
the  Heart,  492. — Occlusion  of  the  Coronary  Vessels,  494. — Fibrillar  Contrac- 
tions of  Heart  Muscle,  495. 

Chapter   XXIX. — The    Cause    and    the    Sequence    of  the   Heart 

Beat.     Properties  of  the  Heart  Muscle 496 

General  Statement,  496. — The  Neurogenic  Theory  of  the  Heart  Beat,  497. — 
Myogenic  Theory,  498. — Autornaticity  of  the  Heart,  500. — Action  of  Calciuin, 
Potassium,  and  Sodium  Ions  on  the  Heart,  501. — Connection  of  Inorganic 
Salts  with  the  Causation  of  the  Beat,  503. — Maximal  Contractions  of  the 
Heart,  504. — Refractory  Period  of  the  Heart  Beat,  504. — The  Compensatory 
Pause,  506. — Normal  Sequence  of  the  Heart  Beat,  507. — Tonicity  of  the 
Heart  Muscle,  510. 

Chapter   XXX. — The   Cardiac    Nerves    and    Their    Physiological 

Action 512 

Course  of  the  Cardiac  Nerves,  512. — Action  of  the  Inhibitory  Fibers,  512. — 
Analysis  of  the  Inhibitory  Action,  514. — Effect  of  Vagus  on  the  Auricle  and 
the  Ventricle,  516. — Escape  from  Inhibition,  517. — Reflex  Inhibition  of  the 
Heart-beat,  the  Cardio-inhibitory  Center,  517. — The  Tonic  Activity  of  the 
Cardio-inhibitory  Center,  518. — The  Action  of  Drugs  on  the  Inhibitory  Ap- 
paratus, 520. — The  Nature  of  Inhibition,  520. — Course  of  the  Accelerator 
Fibers,  522. — Action  of  the  Accelerator  Fibers,  52.3.— Tonicity  of  the  Accel- 
erators and  Reflex  Acceleration,  524. — The  Accelerator  Center,  525. 

Chapter  XXXI. — The  Rate  of  the  Heart  Beat  and  Its  Variations 

Under  Normal   Conditions 526 

Variations  in  Rate  with  Sex,  Si/.e,  and  Age,  526. — Variations  Through  the 
Extrinsic  Cardiac  Nerves,  527. — Variations  with  Blood-pressure,  527. — With 
Muscular  Exercise,  528. — With  the  Gases  of  the  Blood,  529. — With  Tempera- 
ture of  the  Blood,  529. 


12  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Chapter  XXXII. — The  Vasomotor  Nerves  and  Their  Physiologi- 
cal Activity 531 

Historical,  531. — Methods  Used  to  Determine  Vasomotor  Action,  532. — The 
Plethysmograph,  533. — General  Distribution  and  Course  of  the  Vasocon- 
strictor Nerve  Fibers,  535. — Tonic  Activity  of  the  Vasoconstrictors,  538. — 
The  Vasoconstrictor  Center,  539. — Vasoconstrictor  Reflexes,  Pressor  and 
Depressor  Fibers,  540. — Depressor  Nerve  of  the  Heart,  543. — Vasoconstrictor 
Centers  in  the  Spinal  Cord,  543. — Rhythmical  Activity  of  the  Vasocon- 
strictor Center,  544. — Course  and  Distribution  of  the  Dilator  Fibers,  645. — 
General  Properties  of  Vasodilator  Fibers,  545. — Vasodilator  Center  and 
Reflexes,    546. — Vasodilatation  Due  to  Antidromic  Impulses,  548. 

Chapter   XXXIII. — The-   Vasomotor    Supply    of    the    Different 

Organs 550 

Vasomotors  of  the  Heart,  550. — Vasomotors  of  the  Pulmonary  Arteries, 
551. — Circulation  in  the  Brain  and  Its  Regulation,  552. — Arterial  Supply, 
552. — Venous  Supply,  553. — The  Meninsjeal  Spaces,  554. — Intracranial  Pres- 
sure, 556. — Effect  of  Changes  in  Arterial  Pressure  upon  the  Blood -flow  Through 
the  Brain,  557. — The  Regulation  of  the  Brain  Circulation,  559. — Vasomotor 
Nerves  of  the  Head  Region,  561.— Of  the  Trunk  and  the  Limbs,  562.— Of 
the  Abdominal  Organs,  562.— Of  the  Genital  Organs,  662.— Of  the  Skeletal 
Muscles,  563. — The  Vasomotor  Nerves  to  the  Veins,  564. — The  Circulation 
of  the  Lymph,  564. 

SECTION  VI. 

PHYSIOLOGY   OF  RESPIRATION. 

Chapter    XXXIV. — Historical    Statement.     The    Organs    op   Ex- 
ternal  Respiration  and  the    Respiratory  Movements.  .   566 

Historical,  566. — Anatomy  of  Organs  of  Respiration,  570. — Thorax  as  a 
Closed  Cavity,  571. — Normal  Position  of  the  Thorax,  571.— Inspiration  by 
Contraction  of  the  Diaphragm,  572. — Inspiration  by  Elevation  of  the  Ribs, 
573. — The  Muscles  of  Inspiration,  574. — Muscles  of  Expiration,  574. — Quiet 
and  Forced  Respiratory  Movements,  Eupnea  and  Dyspnea,  575. — Costal  and 
Abdominal  Types  of  Respiration,  676. — Accessory  Respiratory  Movements, 
677. — Registration  of  the  Respiratory  Movements,  577. — Volumes  of  Air 
Respired,  Vital  Capacity,  Tidal  Air,  Complemental  Air,  Supplemental  Air, 
Residual  Air,  Minimal  Air,  579. — Size  of  the  Bronchial  Tree,  581. — Arti- 
ficial Respiration,  681. 

Chapter   XXXV. — The    Pressure    Conditions   in   the    Lungs   and 

Thorax   and   Their   Influence   Upon   the   Circulation.  .  .   583 

The  Intrapulmonic  Pressure  and  Its  Variations,  683. — Intrathoracic  Pressure, 
584. — Variations  of,  with  Forced  and  Unusual  Respirations,  685. — Origin  of 
the  Negative  Pressure  in  the  Thorax,  686. — Pneumothorax,  587. — Respiratory 
Action  of  the  Thorax,  687. — Respiratory  Waves  of  Blood-pressure,  588. 

Chapter  XXXVI. — The  Chemical  and   Physical  Changes  in  the 

Air  and  the  Blood  Caused  by  Respiration 592 

The  Inspired  and  Expired.  Air,  592. — Physical  Changes  in  the  Expired  Air, 
592. — Injurious  Action  of  Expired  Air,  693. — Ventilation,  595. — The  Gases 
of  the  Blood,  596. — The  Pressure  of  Gases,  599. — Absorption  of  Gases  in 
Liquids,  599. — The  Tension  of  Gases  in  Solution,  601. — The  Condition  of 
Nitrogen  in  the  Blood,  602.^Condition  of  Oxygen  in  the  Blood,  603. — Con- 
dition of  Carbon  Dioxid  in  the  Blood,  604. — The  Physical  Theory  of  Respira- 
tion, 606. — Gaseous  Exchanges  in  the  Lungs,  606. — Exchange  of  Gases  m 
the  Tissues,  608. — Secretory  Activity  of  Lungs,  608. 

Chapter  XXXVII. — Innervation  of  the  Respiratory  Movements.  610 

The  Respiratory  Center,  610.— Spinal  Respiratory  Centers,  611.— Automatic 
Activity  of  the  Respiratory  Center,  612. — Reflex  Stimulation  of  the  Center, 
612. — Afferent  Relations  of  the  Vagus  to  the  Center,  614. — The  Inspiratory 
and  Inhibitory  Fibers  of  the  Vagus,  616.— Respiratory  Reflexes  from  the 
Larynx,  Pharynx,  and  Nose,  617. — Voluntary  Control  of  the  Respiratory 
Movements,  618. — Nature  of  the  Respiratory  Center,  618. — Respiratory  Cen- 
ters in  the  Midbrain,  619. — Automatic  Stimulus  to  the  Respiratory  Center, 
619. — Cause  of  the  First  Respiratory  Movements,  621. — Dyspnea,  Plyperpnea 
and  Apnea,  622. — Innervation  of  the  Bronchial  Musculature,  625. 

Chapter  XXXVIII. — The  Influence  of  Various  Conditions  Upon 

the  Respiration 627 

Effect  of  Muscular  Work  on  the  Respiratory  Movements,  627. — Effect  of 
Variations  in  the  Comoosition  of  the  Air,  627. — High  and  Low  Barometric 
Pressures,  Mountain  Sickness,  Caisson  Disease,  629. — The  Respiratory  Quo- 
tient and  Its  Variations,  631. — Modified  Respiratory  Movements,  632. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  13 

SECTION  VII. 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF  DIGESTION  AND  SECRETION. 

PAGE 

Chapter  XXXIX. — Moveaients  of  the  Alimentary  Canal 634 

Mastication,  634. — Deglutition,  634. — Nervous  Control  of  Deglutition,  638. — 
Anatomy  of  the  Stomach,  639. — Musculature  of  the  Stomach,  640. — Move- 
ments of  the  Stomach,  640. — Effect  of  the  Nerves  on  the  Movements  of  the 
Stomach,  643. — Movements  of  the  Intestines,  644. — Peristaltic  and  Pendular 
Movements  of  the  Intestines,  646. — Nervous  Control  of  the  Intestinal  Move- 
ments, 647. — Effect  of  Various  Conditions  on  the  Intestinal  Movernents,  648. — 
Movements  of  the  Large  Intestines,  648. — Defecation,  650. — Vomiting,  651. — 
Nervous  Mechanism  of  Vomiting,  652. 

Chapter  XL. — General  Consideration   Upon  the  Composition  of 

THE  Food  and  the  Action  of  Enzymes 654 

Foods  and  Foodstuffs,  654. — Accessory  Articles  of  Diet,  656. — Enzymes, 
Historical,  657. — Reversible  Reactions,  659. — Specificity  of  Enzyrnes,  661. — 
Definition  and  Classification  of  Enzymes,  661. — General  Properties  of  En- 
zymes, 663. — Partial  List  of  Enzymes,  664. — Chemical  Composition  of  the 
Enzymes,  664. 

Chapter  XLI. — The  Salivary  Glands  and  Their  Digestive  Action.   666 

Anatomy  of  the  Salivary  Glands,  666- — Histological  Structure,  668. — Com- 
position of  the  Secretion,  669. — The  Secretory  Nerves,  670. — Trophic  and 
Secretory  Nerve  Fibers,  672. — Histological  Changes  duririg  Activity,  674. — 
Action  of  Drugs  Upon  the  Secretory  Nerves,  676. — Paralytic  Secretion,  677. — 
Normal  Mechanism  of  Salivary  Secretion,  678. — Electrical  Changes  in  Glands, 
679. — Digestive  Action  of  SaUva;  Ptyalin,  679. — Conditions  Influencing 
the  Action  of  Ptyalin,  681. — Functions  of  the  Saliva,  681. 

Chapter  XLII. — Digestion  and  Absorption  in  the  Stomach 683 

Structure  of  the  Gastric  Glands,  683. — Histological  Changes  during  Secretion, 
684. — Metlaod  of  Obtaining  the  Gastric  Secretion  and  Its  Normal  Composition, 
685.— The  Acid  of  Gastric  Juice,  687.— Origin  of  the  HCl,  687.— Secretory 
Nerves  of  the  Gastric  Glands,  688. — Normal  Mechanism  of  the  Secretion  of 
the  Gastric  .luice,  689. — Nature  and  Properties  of  Pepsin,  691. — Artificial 
Gastric  Juice,  692. — Pepsin-hydrochloric  Digestion,  693. — The  Rennin  En- 
zyme, 695. — Digestive  Changes  in  the  Stomach,  696. — Absorption  in  the 
Stomach,  699. 

Chapter  XLIII. — Digestion  and  Absorption  in  the  Intestines.  .    700 

Structure  of  the  Pancreas,  700. — Composition  of  the  Secretion,  701. — Secre- 
tory Nerve  Fibers  to  the  Pancreas,  701. — The  Curve  of  Secretion,  702.— Nor- 
mal Mechanism  of  Pancreatic  Secretion,  703. — Secretin,  703. — Enterokinase, 
704. — Digestive  Action  of  Pancreatic  Juice,  705. — Significance  of  Tryptic 
Digestion,  707. — Action  of  the  Diastatic  Enzyme  (Amylopsin),  708. — Action 
of  the  Lipolytic  Enzyme  (Lipase,  Steapsin),  709. — The  Intestinal  Secretion 
(Succus  Entericus),  710. — Absorption  in  the  Small  Intestine,  712. — Absorp- 
tion of  Carbohydrates,  713. — Absorption  of  Fats,  714. — Absorption  of  Pro- 
teids,  716. — Digestion  and  Absorption  in  the  Large  Intestine,  717. — Bacterial 
Action  in  the  Small  Intestine,  718. — Bacterial  Action  in  the  Large  Intestine, 
719. — Physiological  Importance  of  Intestinal  Putrefaction,  719. — Composi- 
tion of  the  Feces,  720. 

Chapter  XLIV. — Physiology  op  the  Liver  and  Spleen 722 

Structure  of  the  Liver,  722. — Composition  of  Bile,  722. — The  Bile  Pigments, 
724. — The  Bile  Acids,  725. — Cholesterin,  726. — Lecithin,  Fats,  and  Nucleo- 
albumins,  727. — Secretion  of  the  Bile,  727. — Ejection  of  the  Bile — Function  of 
the  Gall-bladder,  728. — Occlusion  of  the  Bile-ducts,  730. — Physiological  Im- 
portance of  Bile,  730. — Occurrence  of  Glycogen,  731. — Origin  of  Glycogen, 
732. — Function  of  Glycogen,  Glycogenic  Theory,  734. — Glycogen  in  the 
Muscles  and  Other  Tissues,  736. — Conditions  Affecting  the  Supply  of  Glyco- 
gen, 736. — Formation  of  Urea  in  the  Liver,  737. — Physiology  of  the  Spleen,  738. 

Chapter  XLV. — The  Kidney  and  Skin  as  Excretory  Organs.  .  .  .    741 

Structure  of  the  Kidney,  741. — The  Secretion  of  Urine,  742. — Function  of 
the  Glomerulus,  744. — Function  of  the  Convoluted  Tubule,  746. — Action  of 
Diuretics,  748.— The  Blood-flow  Through  the  Kidneys,  749.— The  Composi- 
tion of  Urine,  751. — The  Nitrogenous  Excreta  in  the  Urine,  752. — Origin  and 
Significance  of  Urea,  753. — Origin  and  Significance  of  the  Purin  Bodies  (Uric 
Acid,  Xanthin,  Hypoxanthin),  756. — Origin  and  Significance  of  the  Creatinin, 
758. — Hippuric  Acid,  759. — The  Conjugated  Sulphates  and  the  Sulphur  Ex- 
cretion, 759. — Secretion  of  the  Water  and  Inorganic  Salts,  760. — Micturition, 
761. — Contractions  of  the  Bladder,  762. — Nervous  Mechanism  of  Micturition, 
765. — Excretory  Functions  of  the  Skin,  766. — Composition  of  Sweat,  766. — 
Secretory  Fibers  of  Sweat  Glands,  767. — Sweat  Centers,  769. — Sebaceous 
Secretion,  769. — Excretion  of  Carbon  Dioxid  Through  the  Skin,  770. 


14  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


Chapter  XLVI. — Secretion    of   the    Ductless   Glands — Internal 

Secretion   771 

Internal  Secretion  of  Liver,  771. — Internal  Secretion  of  the  Thyroid  Tissues, 
772. — Extirpation  of  Thyroids  and  Parathyroids,  772. — Function  of  the  Para- 
thyroids, 773. — Theories  of  General  Functions  of  Thyroid  and  Parathyroids, 
774. — Cyon's  View  of  Function  of  Thyroid,  775. — Structure  and  Properties 
of  Adrenal  Bodies,  775. — General  Function  of  Adrenals,  777. — Pituitary 
Body,  777. — Internal  Secretion  of  Testis  and  Ovary,  778. — Internal  Secretion 
of  Pancreas,  780. — Internal  Secretion  of  Kidney,  782. 

SECTION  VIII. 

NUTRITION  AND   HEAT  PRODUCTION  AND   REGULATION. 

Chapter    XLVIL— General    Methods.     History    of    the   Proteid 

Food 783 

General  Statement,  783. — Nitrogen  Equilibrium,  783. — Carbon  Equilibrium 
and  Body  Equilibrium,  785. — Balance  Experiments,  785. — Respiration 
Chamber,  785. — Effect  of  Non-proteid  Food  on  Nitrogen  Equilibrium,  786. — 
Nutritive  History  of  the  Proteid  Food,  786. — Tissue  Proteid  and  Circulating 
Proteid,  787. — Amount  of  Proteid  Necessary  in  Normal  Nutrition,  Question 
of  Luxus  Consumption,  788. — Specific  Character  of  Proteid  Metabolism,  790. — 
Nutritive  Value  of  Albuminoids,  791. 

Chapter  XLVIII. — Nutritive  History  of  Carbohydrates  and  Fats.  793 

The  Carbohydrate  Supply  of  the  Body,  793. — Fate  of  the  Carbohydrates  in  the 
Body,  793.— Functions  of  the  Carbohydrate  Food,  794. — Nutritive  Value 
of  Fats,  796.— Fate  of  Fats  in  the  Tissues,  797.— Origin  of  Body  Fat,  797.— 
Origin  of  Body  Fat  from  Carbohydrates,  798. — Origin  of  Body  Fat  from  Food 
Fat,  798. — Cause  of  the  Formation  of  Fat,  Obesity,  799. — General  Functions 
of  Fat,  800. 

Chapter  XLIX. — Nutritive   Value   of  the   Inorganic  Salts  and 

the   Accessory  Articles   of   Diet 801 

The  Inorganic  Salts  of  the  Body,  801. — Effect  of  Ash-free  and  Ash-poor 
Diets,  802. — Special  Importance  of  Sodium  Chlorid,  Calcium  and  Iron 
Salts,  802. — The  Condiments,  Flavors,  and  Stimulants,  804. — Physiological 
Effects  of  Alcohol,  805. 

Chapter    L. — Effect    of    Muscular    Work  and    Temperature    on 

Body  Metabolism;    Heat  Energy  of  Foods;    Dietetics.  .   809 

The  Effect  of  Muscular  Work,  803.- Effect  of  Sleep,  810.— Effect  of  Variations 
in  Temperature,  811. — Effect  of  Starvation,  812. — The  Potential  Energy  of 
Food,  814.— Dietetics,  817. 

Chapter  LI. — The  Production  of  Heat  in  the  Body;  Its  Measure- 
ment AND  Regulation;  Body  Temperature;  Calorimetry; 
Physiological  Oxidations 820 

Historical  Account  of  Theories  of  Animal  Heat,  820. — Body  Temperature  in 
Man,  821. — Calorimetry,  823. — Heat  Regulation,  828- — Regulation  of  Heat 
Loss,  823. — Regulation  of  Heat  Production,  829. — Existence  of  Heat  Centers 
and  Heat  Nerves,  830. — Theories  of  Physiological  Oxidations,  833. 

SECTION  IX. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  REPRODUCTION. 
Chapter  LII. — Physiology  of  the  Female  Reproductive  Organs.  .  .   839 

General  Statement,  838. — The  Graafian  Follicle  and  the  Corpus  Luteum,  839. 
— Menstruation  and  Puberty,  841.— Structural  Changes  in  the  Uterus  durmg 
Menstruation,  842. — The  Phenomenon  of  Heat  in  Lower  Animals,  842. — The 
Relation  of  the  Ovaries  to  Menstruation,  843. — Physiological  Significance  of 
Menstruation,  845. — Effect  of  the  Menstrual  Cycle  on  Other  Functions,  845. — 
Passage  of  the  Ovum  into  the  Uterus,  846. — Maturation  of  the  Ovum,  847. — 
Fertihzation  of  the  Ovum,  850. — Implantation  of  the  Ovum,  851. — Nutrition 
of  the  Ovum;  Physiology  of  the  Placenta,  852. — Changes  in  the  Maternal 
Organism  during  Pregnancy,  854. — Parturition,  854. — The  Mammary  Glands, 
855. — Connection  between  the  Uterus  and  the  Mammary  Glands,  856. — 
Composition  of  Milk,  858. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  15 

PAGK 

Chapter  LIII. — Physiology  of  the  Male  Reproductive  Organs.  .   860 

Sexual  Life  of  Male,  860. — Properties  of  the  Spermatozoa,  860. — Chemistry 
of  the  Spermatozoa,  862. — The  Act  of  Erection,  863. — Reflex  Apparatus  of 
Erection  and  Ejaculation,  864. 

Chapter   LIV. — Heredity;     Determination  of  Sex;    Growth   and 

Senescence 860 

Definition  of  Heredity,  866- — Evolution  and  Epigenesis,  866. — Determination 
of  Sex,  868. — Growth  and  Senescence,   871. 


APPENDIX. 


I. — Proteids  and  Their  Classification 874 

Definition  and  General  Structure  of  Proteids,  874. — Reactions  of  Proteids,  875. 
—Classification  of  Proteids,  877.— The  Albumins,  878.— The  Globulins,  878. — 
The  Albuminates,  878. — Nucleo-albumins  or  Phosphoproteids,  878. — Pro- 
teoses and  Peptones,  879. — Protamins  and  Histons,  879. — The  Compound 
Proteids,  880.— The  Albuminoids,  880. 

II. — Diffusion  and  Osmosis 881 

Diffusion,  Dialysis,  and  Osmosis,  881. — Osmotic  Pressure,  881, — Electrolytes, 
882. — Gram-molecular  Solutions,  883. — Calculation  of  Osmotic  Pressure  in 
Solutions,  883. — Determination  of  Osmotic  Pressure  by  the  Freezing  Point, 
884. — Application  to  Physiological  Processes,  884. — Osmotic  Pressure  of 
Proteids,  884. — Isotonic,  Hypertonic,  and  Hypotonic  Solutions,  885. — Diffu- 
.-^ion  or  Dialysis  of  Soluble  Constituents,  885. — Diffusion  of  Proteids,  886. 

Index 887 


A  TEXT-BOOK 


PHYSIOLOGY 


SECTION  I. 
THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONTRACTION. 

The  tissues  in  the  mammaUan  body  in  which  the  property  of 
contractihty  has  been  developed  to  a  notable  extent  are  the  mus- 
cular and  the  ciliated  epithelial  cells.  The  functional  value  of  the 
muscles  and  the  cilia  to  the  body  as  an  organism  depends,  in  fact, 
upon  the  special  development  of  this  property.  The  muscular 
tissues  of  the  body  fall  into  three  large  groups,  considered  from 
either  a  histological  or  a  functional  standpoint, — namely,  the  striated 
skeletal  muscle,  the  striated  cardiac  muscle,  and  the  plain  muscle. 
These  tissues  exhibit  certain  marked  differences  in  properties  which 
are  described  farther  on.  In  each  group,  moreover,  there  are 
certain  minor  differences  in  structure  which  are  associated  with 
differences  in  properties;  thus,  skeletal  muscle  from  different  re- 
gions of  the  same  animal  may  show  variations  in  properties, — ^for 
instance,  in  the  rapidity  of  contraction;  and  similar,  perhaps  more 
marked  differences  are  observed  in  the  plain  muscular  tissue  of 
various  organs.  The  muscular  tissues  from  animals  belonging  to 
different  classes  exhibit  naturally  even  wider  variations  in  proper- 
ties, and  these  differences  in  some  cases  are  not  associated  with 
visible  variations  in  structure. 

2  17 


18 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUCLES  AND  NERVE. 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  SKELETAL  MUSCLE  TISSUE. 

This  tissue  makes  up  the  essential  part  of  the  skeletal  muscles  by 
means  of  which  our  voluntary  movements  are  effected.  Each  muscle 
fiber  arises  from  a  single  cell  and  in  its  fully  developed  condition 
may  be  regarded  as  a  multinuclear  giant  cell.  It  is  inclosed  entirely 
in  a  thin,  structureless,  elastic  membrane,  the  sarcolemma.  The 
material  of  the  fiber  is  supposed  to  be  semifluid  or  viscous  when 
in  the  living  condition;  it  is  designated  in  general  as  the  muscle 
plasma. 

There  is  on  record  an  interesting  observation  by  Kiihne*  which  seems 
to  demonstrate  the  fluid  nature  of  the  living  muscle  substance.  He  hap- 
pened, on  one  occasion,  to  find  a  frog's  muscle  fiber  containing  a  nematode 
worm  within  the  sarcolemma.  The  animal  swam  readily  from  one  end  of 
the  fiber  to  the  other,  pushing  aside  the  cross  bands,  which  fell  into  place 


Fig.  1. — A  cross-section  of  muscle 
fiber  of  rabbit.  The  bundles  of  fibrils  are 
dark ; .  the  intervening  small  amount  of 
sarcoplasm  is  represented  by  the  clear 
spaces. — {Kolliker.) 


Fig.  2. — Cross-section  of  two  muscle 
fibers  of  the  fly:  Ms,  The  columns  of 
fibrils;  Sp,  the  sarcoplasm. — {Schieffer- 
decker.) 


again  after  the  animal  had  passed.  At  one  end,  where  the  fiber  had  been 
injured,  the  worm  was  unable  to  force  its  way.  The  muscle  substance  at 
this  point  was  dead  and  apparently  had  passed  into  a  solid  condition.  The 
fact  that  the  cross  bands  were  displaced  only  temporarily  by  the  movement 
and  fell  back  into  their  normal  position  would  indicate  that  they  may  have 
a  more  solid  structure. 

Disregarding  the  nuclei,  the  muscle  plasma  consists  of  two 
different  structures:  the  fibrils,  which  are  long  and  thread-like  and 
run  the  length  of  the  fiber,  and  the  intervening  sarcoplasm.  The 
fibrils  consist  of  alternating  dim  and  light  discs  or  segments,  which, 
coming  together  in  the  different  fibrils,  give  the  cross-striation 
that  is  characteristic.  In  mammalian  muscles  the  fibrils  are  grouped 
more  or  less  distinctly  into  bundles  or  columns,  between  which  lies 
the  scanty  sarcoplasm.  The  relative  amount  of  sarcoplasm  to 
fibrillar  substance  varies  greatly  in  the  striped  muscles  of  different 
*  Kiihne,  "Archiv  fiir  pathologische  Anatomie,"  26,  222,  1863. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION. 


19 


animals,  as  is  indicated  in  the  accompanying  illustration.  The 
evidence  from  comparative  physiology  indicates  that  the  fibrils 
are  the  contractile  element  of  the  fiber,  while  the  sarcoplasm,  ,it 
may  be  assumed,  possesses  a  general  nutritive  function.  Com- 
parative histology  suggests  that,  in  the 
fibrils,  we  possess,  so  to  speak,  a  mechanism 
adapted  to  rapid  contraction,  and  that  the 
perfection  of  the  mechanism — that  is,  the 
rapidity  of  its  contraction — is  indicated  by 
the  clearness  of  the  cross-striation.  The 
fibril,  moreover,  shows  two  kinds  of  sub- 
stance, the  alternating  dim  and  light  sub- 
stance, and  these  two  materials  are  obviously 
different  in  physical  structure  as  seen  by 
ordinary  light.  When  examined  by  polarized 
light  this  difference  becomes  more  evident, 
for  the  dim  substance  possesses  the  property 
of  double  refraction.  When  the  muscle  fiber 
is  i3laced  between  crossed  Nicol  prisms 
the  dim  bands  appear  bright,  while  the 
light  bands  remain  dark,  as  is  shown  in 
Fig.  3.  From  this  standpoint  the  material 
of  the  light  bands  in  the  normal  fibrils  is 
spoken  of  as  isotropous,  while  the  dim  bands 
are  anisotropous.  The  anisotropic  material 
of  the  dim  bands  is  composed  of  doubly 
refracting  positive  uniaxial  particles,  and 
Engelmann  has  shown  that  such  particles 
may  be  discovered  in  all  contractile  tissues. 
The  inference  made  by  him  is  that  this 
anisotropic  substance  is  the  contractile 
material  in  the  protoplasm,  the  machinery, 
so  to  speak,  through  which  its  shortening 
is  accomplished.  In  the  striated  fiber  this 
conclusion  is  supported  by  the  fact,  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  3,  that  during  contraction 
liquid  passes  from  the  isotropous  (fight)  band 
into  the  anisotropous  (dim)  band.* 

The    Extensibility    and    Elasticity    of 
Muscular  Tissue. — The  muscular   tissue  when   acted    upon   by 
a  weight  extends  quite  readily,  and  when  the  weight  is  removed 
it   regains   its    original   form  by  virtue  of  its  elasticity.     In  our 
bodies  the  muscles  stretched  'from  bone  to  bone  are,  in  fact,  in 

*  Biedermann,   "Electro-physiology,"  vol.  i,  translated  by  Welby,  and 
Engelmann,  "Archiv  fiir  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  18,  1. 


Fig.  3.— To  show  the 
appearance  of  the  dim 
(anisotropic)  and  light 
(isotropic)  bands  at  rest 
and  in  contraction,  as  seen 
by  ordinary  and  by  polar- 
ized light.  The  figure  rep- 
resents a  muscle  fiber 
(beetle)  in  which  the  lower 
portion  has  been  fixed  in  a 
condition  of  contraction. — 
{Engelmann.) 


20 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 


a  state  of  elastic  tension.  If  a  muscle  is  severed  by  an  incision 
across  its  belly  the  ends  retract.  The  extensibility  and  elasticity 
of  the  muscles  add  to  the  effectiveness  of  the  muscular-skeletal 
machinery.  A  muscle  that  is  in  a  state  of  elastic  tension  con- 
tracts more  promptly  and  more  effectively  for  a  given  stimu- 
lus than  one  which  is  entirely  relaxed.  Moreover,  in  our  joints 
the  arrangement  of  antagonists— flexors  and  extensors— is  such 
that  the  contraction  of  one  moves  the  bone  against  the  pull  of 
the  extensible  and  elastic  antagonist.  It  would  seem  that  the 
movements  of  the  skeleton  must  gain  much  in  smoothness  and 
delicacy  by  this  arrangement.  The  physical  advantages  of  the 
extensibility  and  elasticity  of   muscular  tissue    are  evident  not 


"Fig.  4. — n,  Curve  of  extension  of  a  rubber  band,  to  show  the  equal  extension  for  equal 
increments  of  weight.  The  band  had  an  initial  load  of  17  gms.,  and  this  was  increased 
by  increments  of  3  gms.  in  each  of  the  nine  extensions,  the  final  load  being  44  gms.  The 
line  joining  the  ends  of  the  ordinates  is  a  straight  line,  b,  Curve  of  extension  of  a  frog's 
muscle  (gastrocnemius).  The  initial  load  and  the  increment  of  weight  were  the  same  as  with 
the  rubber.  The  curve  shows  a  decreasing  extension  for  equal  increments.  The  line  join- 
ing the  ends  of  the  ordinates  is  curved. 


only  in  the  contractions  of  our  voluntary  muscles,  but,  as  we  shall 
see,  in  a  striking  way  also  in  the  circulation,  in  which  the  force  of  the 
heart  beat  is  stored  and  economically  distributed,  as  it  were,  by 
the  elastic  tension  of  the  distended  arteries.  The  extensibility  of 
muscular  tissue  has  been  studied  in  comparison  with  the  extensi- 
bility of  dead  elastic  bodies.  With  regard  to  the  latter  it  is  known 
that  the  strain  that  the  body  undergoes  is  proportional  within  the 
limits  of  elasticity  to  the  stress  put  upon  it.  If,  for  instance, 
weights  are  attached  to  a  rubber  band  suspended  at  one  end 
the  amount  of  extension  of  the  band  will  be  directly  proportional 
to  the  weights  used.  If  the  extensions  are  measured  the  relation- 
ship may  be  represented  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  figure, 
the  equal  increments  in  weight  being  indicated  by  laying  off  equal 


THE    PHENOMENON    OP    CONTRACTION. 


21 


distances  on  the  abscissa,  and  the  resulting  extensions  by  the 
height  of  the  ordinates  dropped  from  each  point.  If  the  ends  of 
the  ordinates  are  joined  the  result  is  a  straight  line.  When  a 
similar  experiment  is  made  with  a  living  muscle  it  is  found  that 
the  extension  is  not  proportional  to  the  weight  used.  The  amount 
of  extension  is  greatest  in  the  beginning  and  decreases  propor- 
tionately with  new  increments  of  weight.  If  the  results  of  such 
an  experiment  are  plotted,  as  above,  representing  the  equal  incre- 
ments of  weight  by  equal  distances 
along  the  abscissa  and  the  resulting 
extensions  by  ordinates  dropped  from 
these  points,  then  upon  joining  the 
ends  of  the  ordinates  we  obtain  a  curve 
concave  to  the  abscissa.  At  first  the 
muscle  shows  a  relatively  large  exten- 
sion, but  the  effect  becomes  less  and 
less  with  each  new  increment  of  weight, 
the  curve  at  the  end  approaching  slowly 
to  a  horizontal.  If  the  weight  is  in- 
creased until  it  is  sufficient  to  overcome 
the  elasticity  of  the  muscle  the  curve 
is  altered — it  becomes  convex  to  the 
abscissa,  or,  in  other  words,  the  amount 
of  extension  increases  with  increasing 
increments  of  weight  up  to  the  point 
of  rupture,  as  is  shown  in  the  accom- 
panying curve*  (Fig.  5).  Haycraftf 
calls  attention  to  the  fact  that  under 
normal  conditions  the  physiological 
extension  of  the  frog's  muscles  in  the 
body  is  equal  to  that  produced  by  a 
weight  of  10  to  15  gms.,  and  that 
when  the  excised  muscle  is  extended 
by  weights  below  this  limit  it  follows 
the  law  of  dead  elastic  bodies,  giving 
equal  extensions  for  equal  increments 

of  weight.  It  is  only  after  passing  this  hmit  that  the  law  stated 
above  holds  good.  It  should  be  added  also  that  the  amount  of 
extension  exhibited  by  a  muscle  or  other  living  tissue  placed 
under  a  stress  varies  with  the  time  that  the  stress  is  allowed 
to  act.  The  muscle  is  composed  of  viscous  material,  and  ^delds 
slowly  to  the  force  acting  upon  it.  In  experiments  of  this  kind, 
therefore,  the  weights  should  be  allowed  to  act  for  equal  intervals 

*  See  Marey,  "Du  mouvement  dans  les  fonctions  de  la  vie,"  1868,  p.  284. 
t  Haycraft,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  31,  392,  1904. 


Fig.  5. — Curve  given  by 
Marey  to  show  the  effect  upon 
the  extension  of  muscle  caused 
by  increasing  the  load  regularly 
to  the  point  of  rupture:  o-x. 
The  abscissa  gives  the  normal 
length  of  muscle;  at  a  the  limit 
of  elasticity  is  passed  and  the 
muscle  lengthens  by  increasing 
extensions  for  equal  increments; 
at  X  rupture  (750  gms.  for  frog's 
gastrocnemius) . 


22  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

of  time.  It  has  been  shown  that  the  extensibility  of  a  muscle  is 
greater  in  the  contracted  than  in  the  resting  state. 

The  curve  of  extension  described  above  for  skeletal  muscle 
holds  also  for  so-called  plain  muscle.  This  latter  tissue  forms  a 
portion  of  the  walls  of  the  various  viscera,  the  stomach,  bladder, 
uterus,  blood-vessels,  etc.,  and  the  facts  shown  by  the  above  curve 
enter  frequently  into  the  explanation  of  the  physical  phenomena 
exhibited  by  the  viscera.  For  instance,  it  follows  from  this  curve 
that  the  force  of  the  heart  beat  will  cause  less  expansion  in  an 
artery  already  distended  by  a  high  blood-pressure  than  in  one  in 
which  the  blood-pressure  is  lower. 

The  Irritability  and  Contractility  of  Muscle. — Under  normal 
conditions  in  the  body  a  muscle  is  made  to  contract  by  a  stimulus 
received  from  the  central  nervous  system  through  its  motor  nerve. 
If  the  latter  is  severed  the  muscle  is  paralyzed.  We  owe  to  Haller, 
the  great  physiologist  of  the  eighteenth  century,  the  proof  that 
a  muscle  thus  isolated  can  still  be  made  to  contract  by  an  artificial 
stimulus — e.  g.,  an  electrical  shock — applied  directly  to  it.  Tliis 
significant  discovery  removed  from  physiology  the  old  and  harmful 
idea  of  animal  spirits,  which  were  supposed  to  be  generated  in  the 
central  nervous  system  and  to  cause  the  swelling  of  a  muscle  during 
contraction  by  flowing  to  it  along  the  connecting  nerve.  But  to 
remove  a  muscle  from  the  body  and  make  it  contract  by  an  artificial 
stimulus  does  not  prove  that  the  muscle  substance  itself  is  capable 
of  being  acted  upon  by  the  stimulus,  since  in  such  an  experiment 
the  endings  of  the  nerve  in  the  muscle  are  still  intact,  and  it  may 
be  that  the  stimulus  acts  only  on  them  and  thus  affects  the  muscle 
indirectly.  In  a  number  of  ways,  however,  physiologists  have 
found  that  the  muscle  substance  can  be  made  to  contract  by  a 
stimulus  applied  directly  to  it,  and  therefore  exhibits  what  is 
known  as  independent  irritability.  The  term  irritability,  according 
to  modern  usage,  means  that  a  tissue  can  be  made  to  exhibit  its 
peculiar  form  of  functional  activity  when  stimulated, — e.  g.,  a 
mLiscle  cell  will  contract,  a  gland  cell  will  secrete,  etc., — and  inde- 
pendent irritability  in  the  case  under  consideration  means  simply 
that  the  muscle  gives  its  reaction  of  contraction  when  artificial 
stimuli  are  applied  directly  to  its  substance.  This  conception 
of  irritabihty  was  first  introduced  by  Francis  Ghsson  (1597-1677), 
a  celebrated  English  physician.*  Subsequent  writers  frequently 
used  the  term  as  synonymous  with  contractihty  and  as  apphcable 
only  to  the  muscle.  But  it  is  now  used  for  all  living  tissues  in 
the  sense  here  indicated.  A  simple  proof  of  the  independent 
irritability  of  a  striated  muscle  is  obtained  by  cutting  the  motor 
nerve  going  to  it  and  stimulating  the  muscle  after  several  days. 
*See  Foster's  "  History  of  Physiology,"  p.  287. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION. 


23 


We  know  now  that  in  the  course  of  several  days  the  severed  nerve 
fibers  degenerate  completely  down  to  their  terminations  in  the 
muscle  fibers,  and  the  muscle,  thus  freed  from  its  nerve  fibers  by 
the  process  of  degeneration,  can  still  be  made  to  contract  by  an 
artificial  stimulus.  The  classical  proof  of  the  independent  irri- 
tability of  muscle  fibers  was  given  by  Claude  Bernard,  the  great 
French  physiologist  of  the  nineteenth  century.  He  made  use 
of  the  so-called  arrow  poison  of  the  South  American  Indians. 
This  substance  or  mixture  of  substances  is  known  generally  under 
the  name  curare;  it  is  prepared  from  the  juices  of  several  plants 
(strychnos)  (Thorpe).  The  poisonous  part  of  the  material  is  soluble 
in  water,  and  Bernard  showed  that  when  such  an  extract  is  injected 
into  the  blood  or  hypodermically  it  paralyzes  the  motor  nerves 
at  their  peripheral  end,  so  that  direct  stimulation  of  these  nerves 


Fig.  6. — The  induction  coil  as  used  for  physiological  purposes  (du  Bois;Reymond 
pattern):  A,  The  primary  coil;  B,  the  secondary  coil;  P',  binding  posts  to  which  are  at- 
tached the  wires  from  the  battery,  they  connect  with  the  ends  of  coil  .4;  P",  binding  posts 
connecting  with  ends  of  coil  B,  through  which  the  induction  current  is  led  off;  S,  the  slide, 
with  scale,  in  which  coil  B  is  moved  to  alter  its  distance  from  A. 


is  ineffective.     Direct  stimulation  of  the  muscle  substance,  on  the 
contrary,  causes  a  contraction.* 

Artificial  Stimuli. — If  we  designate  the  stimulus  that  the 
muscle  receives  normally  from  its  nerve  as  its  normal  stimulus, 
all  other  forms  of  energy  which  may  be  used  to  start  its  contraction 
may  be  grouped  under  the  designation  artificial  stimuh.  Experi- 
ments have  shown  that  a  contraction  may  be  aroused  by  mechanical 
stimuli, — for  instance,  by  a  sharp  blow  applied  to  the  muscle;  by 
thermal  stimuh, — that  is,  by  a  sudden  change  in  temperature;  by 
chemical  stimuli, — for  example,  by  the  action  of  concentrated  solu- 
tions of  salts,  and  finally  by  electrical  stimuli.  In  practice,  however, 
only  the  last  form  of  stimulus  is  found  to  be  convenient.  The 
mechanical  and  thermal  stimuli  cannot  be  well  applied  without  at 
the  same  time  injuring  the  muscle  substance,  and  the  same  is  prob- 
ably true  of  chemical  stimuli,  which  possess  the  disadvantage,  more- 
over, of  acting  separately  on  the  different  fibers  of  which  the  muscle 

*  "  LeQons  sur  les  effets  cles  substances  toxiques  et  medicamenteuses," 
1857,  pp.  238  et  seq. 


24  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

is  composed.  Electrical  stimuli,  on  the  contrary,  are  applied  easily, 
are  readily  controlled  as  regards  their  intensity,  and  affect  all  the 
fibers  simultaneously,  thus  giving  a  co-ordinated  contraction  of 
the  entire  bundle,  as  is  the  case  with  the  normal  stimulus.  For 
electrical  stimulation  we  may  use  the  galvanic  current  taken  directly 
from  the  battery,  or  the  induced  or  so-called  faradic  current  ob- 
tained from  an  induction  coil.  Under  most  conditions  the  latter 
is  more  convenient,  since  it  gives  brief  shocks,  the  strength  and 
number  of  which  can  be  controlled  readily.  The  form  in  which 
this  instrument  is  used  in  experimental  work  in  physiology  we 
owe  to  du  Bois-Reymond  (1849-);  hence  it  is  frequently  known 
as  the  du  Bois-Reymond  induction  coil.     Experimental  physiology 

B 


Fig.  7. — Schema  of  induction  apparatus. — (Lombard.)  b  represents  the  galvanic 
jaattery  connected  by  wires  to  the  primary  coil,  A.  On  the  course  of  one  of  these  wires 
is  a  key  (A;)  to  make  and  break  tlie  current.  B  shows  the  principle  of  the  secondary 
coil,  and  the  connection  of  its  two  ends  with  the  nerve  of  a  nerve-muscle  preparation. 
When  the  battery  current  is  closed  or  made  in  A,  a  brief  current  of  high  intensity  is 
induced  in  B.  This  is  known  as  the  making  or  closing  shock.  When  the  battery  current 
is  broken  in  A,  a  second  brief  induction  current  is  aroused  in  B.  This  is  known  as  the 
breaking  or  opening  shock. 

owes  a  great  deal  to  this  simple  and  serviceable  instrument.  A 
figure  and  brief  description  of  the  apparatus  is  appended  (Figs.  6 
and  7). 

SIMPLE  CONTRACTION  OF  MUSCLE. 

Experiments  may  be  made  upon  the  isolated  muscles  of  various 
animals,  but  ordinarily  in  physiological  laboratories  one  of  the 
muscles  (gastrocnemius)  of  the  hind  leg  of  the  frog  is  employed. 
If  such  a  muscle  is  isolated  and  connected  with  the  terminals  from 
an  induction  coil  it  may  be  stimulated  by  a  single  shock  or  by  a  series 
of  rapidly  repeated  shocks.  The  contraction  that  results  from  a 
single  stimulus  is  designated  as  a  simple  contraction.  In  the  frog's 
muscle  it  is  very  brief,  lasting  for  0.1  second  or  less;  but  in  this, 
as  in  other  respects,  cross-striated  muscular  tissue  varies  in  different 
animals,*  as  is  shown  by  the  accompanying  table,  which  gives  an 
idea  of  the  range  of  rapidity  of  contraction. 

*  Cash,  "Archiv  f.  Anat.  u.  Physiol.,"  1880,  suppl.  volume,  p.  147. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION,  25 

DURATION  OF  A  SIMPLE  MUSCULAR  CONTRACTION. 

Insect 0.003  sec. 

Man 0.050     " 

Frog  0.100     " 

Terrapin 1.000     " 

The  series  may  be  continued  by  the  figures  obtained  from  the 
plain  muscle,  thus: 

The  involuntary  muscle  (mammal) 10.00 

Foot  muscle  of  slug*  (Ariolimax) 20.00 

There  is  reason  to  believe  that  the  rapidity  of  contraction  is  re- 
lated to  the  distinctness  of  the  cross-striation.  This  is  indicated 
by  the  properties  of  the  so-called  red  and  pale  muscles  that  occur 
in  some  animals — the  rabbit,  for  instance.  The  pale  muscles  con- 
tract much  more  rapidly  than  the  red  ones,  and  corresponding  with 


Fig.  8. — Curve  of  simple  muscular  contraction. 

this  fact  it  is  found  that  the  cross-striation  is  more  distinct  in  the 
former.  As  was  explained  above,  the  active  agent  in  contraction 
is  contained  in  the  dim  bands  of  the  fibers,  and  the  more  highly 
differentiated  this  structure  becomes  the  more  perfect  apparently 
is  its  work  as  a  mechanism  for  shortening.  According  to  Cash,  the 
duration  of  contraction  of  the  soleus  muscle  (red)  in  rabbits  is  one 
second,  while  that  of  the  gastrocnemius  medialis  (white)  is  only 
0.25  second. 

The  Curve  of  Contraction. — When  a  contracting  muscle  is 
attached  to  a  lever  this  lever  may  be  made  to  write  upon  a  smoked 
surface  and  thus  record  the  movement,  more  or  less  magnified 
according  to  the  leverage  chosen.  If  the  recording  surface  is  sta- 
tionary the  record  obtained  is  a  straight  line  and  indicates  only  the 
extent  of  the  shortening.  If,  however,  the  recording  surface  is  in 
movement  during  the  contraction  the  record  will  be  in  the  form  of  a 
curve,  which,  making  use  of  the  system  of  right-angled  co-ordinates, 
*  Carlson,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  10,  418,  1904. 


26  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

will  indicate  not  only  the  true  extent  of  the  shortening,  but  also 
the  amount  of  shortening  or  subsequent  relaxation  at  any  moment 
during  the  entire  period.  To  obtain  such  records  from  the  rapidly 
contracting  frog's  muscle  it  is  evident  that  the  recording  surface 
must  move  with  considerable  rapidity  and  with  a  uniform  velocity. 
A  curve  of  this  kind  is  represented  in  Fig.  8,  on  page  25.  C  rep- 
resents the  axis  of  abscissas  and  gives  the  factor  of  time.  A 
vertical  ordinate  erected  at  any  point  on  C  gives  the  extent  of 
shortening  at  that  moment.  Below  the  curve  of  the  muscle  is 
the  record  of  the  vibrations  of  a  tuning  fork  giving  50  double  vibra- 
tions per  second ;  that  is,  the  distance  from  crest  to  crest  represents 
an  interval  of  -^^  of  a  second.  Three  principal  facts  are  brought 
out  by  an  analysis  of  the  curve:  I.  The  latent  period.  By  this  is 
meant  that  the  muscle  does  not  begin  to  shorten  until  a  certain 
time  after  the  stimulus  is  applied.  On  the  curve  the  stimulus 
enters  the  muscle  at  S,  and  the  distance  between  this  point  and  the 
beginning  of  the  rise  of  the  curve  interpreted  in  time  is  the  latent 
period.  II.  The  phase  of  shortening,  which  has  a  definite  course 
and  at  its  end  immediately  passes  into  III — the  phase  of  relaxation. 

The  Latent  Period. — In  the  contraction  of  the  isolated  frog's 
muscles  as  usually  recorded  the  latent  period  amounts  to  0.01  sec, 
but  it  is  generally  assumed  that  this  period  is  exaggerated  by  the 
method  of  recording  used,  since  the  elasticity  of  the  muscle  itself 
prevents  the  immediate  registration  of  the  movement.  By  improve- 
ments in  methods  of  technique  the  latent  period  for  a  fresh  muscle 
may  be  reduced  to  as  little  as  0.005  or  even  0.004  sec.  Under  the 
conditions  in  the  body,  however,  the  muscle  contracts  against  a 
load,  as  when  lifting  a  lever;  hence,  we  may  assume  that  normally 
there  is  a  lost  time  of  at  least  0.01  sec.  after  the  stimulus  enters  the 
muscle.  In  addition  to  the  latent  period  due  to  the  elasticity 
of  the  muscle  it  is  probable  that  a  brief  amount  of  time  actually 
elapses  after  the  stimulus  enters  the  muscle  before  the  act  of 
shortening  begins ;  some  time  is  taken  up  in  the  chemical  changes 
and  the  effect  of  these  changes  in  putting  the  mechanism  of  con- 
traction into  play  (see  below  on  the  Theory  of  Muscle  Contractions). 
The  latent  period  varies  greatly  in  muscles  of  different  kinds,  and  in 
thQ  same  muscle  varies  with  its  conditions  as  regards  temperature, 
fatigue,  load  to  be  raised,  etc. 

The  Phases  of  Shortening  and  of  Relaxation. — In  the  normal 
frog's  muscle  the  phase  of  shortening  for  a  simple  contraction  occu- 
pies about  0.04  second,  while  the  relaxation  is  a  trifle  longer,  0.05  sec. 
Naturally  in  muscles  whose  duration  of  contraction  differs  from 
that  of  the  frog  the  time  values  for  the  shortening  and  the  relaxation 
exhibit  corresponding  differences.  Many  conditions,  some  of  which 
will  be  described  below,  alter  the  duration  of  the  simple  contraction. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION.  27 

and  it  is  noteworthy  that,  in  general,  it  is  the  phase  of  relaxation 
which  is  most  readily  affected  by  these  changes. 

Isotonic  and  Isometric  Contractions. — In  the  method  of  recording  the 
shortening  of  the  muscle  that  is  described  above  the  muscle  is  supposed  to  con- 
tract against  a  constant  load  which  it  can  lift.  Such  a  contraction  is  spoken 
of  as  an  isotonic  contraction.  If  the  muscle  is  allowed  to  contract  against 
a  tension  too  great  for  it  to  overcome — a  stiff  spring,  for  instance — it  is  prac- 
tically prevented  from  shortening,  and  a  contraction  of  this  kind,  in  which 
the  length  of  the  muscle  remains  unchanged,  is  spoken  of  as  an  isometric 
contraction.  A  curve  of  such  a  contraction  may  be  obtained  by  magnifjdng 
greatly,  by  means  of  levers,  the  slight  change  in  the  stiff'  s])ring  against  which 
the  muscle  is  contracting.  Such  a  curve  gives  a  picture  of  the  liberation  of 
energy  within  the  muscle  during  contraction. 

The  usual  oval  form  of  dynamometer  employed  to  record  the  grip  of  the 
flexors  of  the  fingers  gives  an  isometric  record  of  the  energy  of  contraction 
of  these  muscles. 


Fig.  9. — Effect  of  varying  the  strength  of  stimulus.  The  figure  shows  the  effect  upon 
the  gastrocnemius  muscle  of  a  frog  of  gradually  increasing  the  stimulus  (breaking  induction 
shock)  until  maximum  contractions  were  obtained.  The  stimuli  were  then  decreased  in 
strength  and  the  contractions  fell  off  through  a  series  of  gradually  decreasing  submaximal 
contractions.  The  series  up  and  down  is  not  absolutely  regular  owing  to  the  difficulty  of 
obtaining  a  regular  increase  or  decrease  in  the  stimulus.  (The  prolongations  of  the 
curves  below  the  base  line  are  due  to  the  elastic  extension  of  the  muscle  by  the  weight  dur- 
ing relaxation.) 

Effect  of  Strength  of  Stimulus  upon  the  Sknple  Contraction. 

— ^The  strength  of  electrical  stimuli  can  be  varied  conveniently  and 
with  great  accuracy.  When  the  stimulus  is  of  such  a  strength  as 
to  produce  a  just  visible  contraction  it  is  spoken  of  as  a  minimal 
stimulus  and  the  resulting  contraction  as  a  minimal  contraction. 
Stimuli  of  less  strength  than  the  minimal  are  designated  as  sub- 
minimal. If  one  increases  gradually  the  intensity  of  the  electrical 
current  used  as  a  stimulus  without  altering  its  duration,  beginning 
with  a  stimulus  sufficient  to  cause  a  minimal  contraction,  the  result- 
ing contractions  increase  proportionally  up  to  a  certain  maximum 


28 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 


beyond  which  further  increase  of  stimulus,  other  conditions  remain- 
ing the  same,  causes  no  greater  extent  of  shortening.  Contrac- 
tions between  the  minimal  and  the  maximal  are  designated  as 
submaximal.*     (See  Fig.  9.) 

Effect  of  Temperature  upon  the  Simple  Contraction. — Varia- 
tions in  temperature  affect  both  the  extent  and  the  duration  of  the 
contraction.  The  relationship  is,  however,  not  a  simple  one  in  the 
case  of  the  frog's  muscle  upon  which  it  has  been  studied  most  fre- 
quently. If  we  pay  attention  to  the  extent  of  the  contraction  alone 
it  will  be  found  that  at  a  certain  temperature,  0°  C,  or  slightly  below, 
the  muscle  loses  its  irritability  entirely.  As  its  temperature  is 
raised  a  given  stimulus,  chosen  of  such  a  strength  as  to  be  maximal 
for  the  muscle  at  room  temperatures,  causes  greater  and  greater 


.iiiiiiiiMiiiuiuiuaiiim 

/<j-    'O'A  n  4  '?  ^o 


-L 


Fig.  10. — Curve  showing  the  effect  of  temperature.  The  temperatures  at  which  the 
contractions  were  obtained  are  indicated  on  the  figure.  In  this  experiment  a  large  resis- 
tance was  introduced  into  the  secondary  circuit  so  that  changes  in  the  resistance  of  the 
muscle  itself  due  to  heating  could  not  affect  the  strength  of  the  stimulus. 


contractions  up  to  a  certain  maximum,  which  is  reached  at  about 
5°  to  9°  C.  As  the  temperature  rises  beyond  this  point  the  con- 
tractions decrease  somewhat  to  a  minimum  that  is  reached  at  about 
15°  to  18°  C.  Beyond  this  the  contractions  again  increase  in 
extent  to  a  second  maximum  at  about  26°  to  30°  C,  this  maxi- 
mum being  in  some  cases  greater,  and  in  others  less  than  the  first 
maximum.  Beyond  the  second  maximum  the  contractions  again 
decrease  rather  rapidly  as  the  temperature  rises  until  at  a  certain 
temperature,  37°  C,  irritability  is  entirely  lost  (Fig.  10).  If  the  tem- 
perature is  raised  somewhat  beyond  this  latter  point  heat  rigor  makes 
its  appearance,  and  the  muscle  may  be  considered  as  dead.  The  re- 
lationship between  temperature  and  extent  of  contraction,  therefore, 

*  Tick,    "  Untersuchungen    uber    elektrische     Nervenreizung,"     Braun- 
schweig, 1864. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION. 


29 


may  be  expressed  by  a  curve  such  as  is  represented  in  Fig.  11,  in 
which  there  are  two  maxima  and  two  points  at  which  irritability  is 
lost.  The  second  maximum  indicates  a  fact  of  general  physiological  in- 
terest,— namely,  that  in  all  of  the  tissues  of  the  body  there  is  a  certain 
high  temperature  at  which  optimum  activity  is  exhibited,  and  if  the 
temperature  is  raised  beyond  this  point  functional  activity  becomes 
more  and  more  depressed.  The  point  of  optimum  effect  is  not  identi- 
cal for  the  different  tissues  of  the  same  animal,  much  less  so  for  those 


g'       16' 


2S' 


Fig.  11. — Curve  to  show  the  effect  of  a 
rise  of  temperature  from  0°  C.  to  38°  C.  upon 
the  height  of  contraction  of  frog's  muscle. 
The  first  maximum  at  9°  C,  the  second  at 
28°  C.  Beyond  38°  C.  the  muscle  lost  its 
irritability  and  went  into  rigor  mortis. 


J^ 


^5' 


6°  10'  IS'  io'  2i'  JO'  js-  jr  jr  •»/" 

Fig.  12. — Curve  to  show  the  effect 
of  a  rise  of  temperature  from  5°  C.  to 
39°  C.  upon  the  duration  of  contraction 
of  frog's  muscle.  The  relative  dura- 
tions at  the  different  temperatures  are 
represented  by  the  height  of  the  cor- 
responding ordinates. 


of  different  animals,  but  the  fact  may  be  emphasized  that  in  no 
case  do  protoplasmic  tissues  withstand  a  very  high  temperature. 
Functional  activity  is  lost  usually  at  45°  C.  or  below.  The  duration 
of  the  contraction  shows  usually  in  frog's  muscles  a  simple  relation- 
ship to  the  changes  of  temperature.  At  low  temperatures,  4  or  5°  C, 
the  contractions  are  enormously  prolonged,  particularly  in  the  phase 
of  relaxation;  but  as  the  temperature  is  raised  the  duration  of  the 
contractions  diminishes,  at  first  slowl}^,  then  rapidly,  to  a  certain 
point — about  18°  to  20°  C,  beyond  which  it  remains  more  or  less 
constant  in  spite  of  the  changes   in  extent  of  shortening.     The 


30  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

relationship  between  duration  of  contraction  and  temperature  may 
therefore  be  expressed  by  such  a  curve  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  12,  in 
which  the  height  of  the  ordinates  represents  the  relative  duration  of 
the  contractions.  Muscles  from  different  frogs  show  considerable 
minor  variations  in  their  reactions  to  changes  in  temperature,  and 
we  may  suppose  that  these  variations  depend  upon  differences  in 
nutritive  condition.  In  this,  as  in  many  other  respects,  the  reactions 
obtained  from  so-called  winter  frogs  after  they  have  prepared  for 
hibernation  are  more  regular  and  typical  than  those  obtained  in  the 
spring  or  summer. 

Effect  of  Veratrin. — The  alkaloid  veratrin  exhibits  a  peculiar 
and  interesting  effect  upon  the  contraction  of  muscle.  A  muscle 
taken  from  an  animal  that  has  been  veratrinized  and  stimulated 
in  the  usual  way  by  a  single  stimulus  gives  a  contraction  such  as 
is  exhibited  in  the  accompanying  curve  (Fig.  13).  Two  peculiarities 
are  shown  by  the  curve :  (1)  The  phase  of  shortening  is  not  altered, 
but  the  phase  of  relaxation  is  greatly  prolonged.     (2)  The  curve 


Fig.   13. — Curve  showing  the  effect  of  veratrin. 

shows  two  summits, — that  is,  after  the  first  shortening  there  is  a. 
brief  relaxation  followed  by  a  second,  slower  contraction.  The 
cause  of  this  second  shortening  is  not  known.  Biedemann  has 
suggested  that  it  is  due  to  the  presence  in  the  muscle  of  the 
two  kinds  of  fibers — red  and  pale — which  were  spoken  of  on  p. 
25,  and  that  the  veratrin  dissociates  their  action,  but  this  expla- 
nation, according  to  Carvallo  and  Weiss,*  is  disproved  by  the 
fact  that  muscles  composed  entirely  of  white  or  red  fibers  show 
a  similar  result  from  the  action  of  veratrin.  Although  the  explana- 
tion is  not  forthcoming,  the  fact  that  a  single  stimulus  gives  under 
these  conditions  two  processes  of  contractions  is  interesting  as  an 
exception  to  the  general  rule.  It  may  be  added  that  a  curarized 
frog's  muscle,  when  heated  to  the  point  of  optimum  activity  (28°  C.) 
sometimes  shows  also  a  double  contraction  for  a  single  stimulus. 
The  very  prolonged  relaxation  is,  however,  the  most  peculiar  effect 
of  the  veratrin.  A  somewhat  similar  effect  is  produced  by  the; 
*  "Journal  de  la  physiol.  et  de  la  path,  generale,"  1899. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION. 


31 


action  of  glycerin.     We  have  in  such  substances  reagents  that  affect 
one  phase  of  the  contraction  process  without  materially  influencing 


the  other.  As  regards  the  veratrin  effect,  it  becomes  less  and  less 
marked  if  the  muscle  is  made  to  give  repeated  contractions,  but 
reappears  after  a  suitable  period  of  rest.     The  peculiar  action  of 


32  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

the  veratrin  is  therefore  antagonized  seemingly  by  the  chemical 
products  formed  during  contraction. 


Fig.  15. — Effect  of  repeated  stimulation;  complete  curve,  showing  late  contracture. 
The  muscle  was  stimulated  by  induction  shocks  at  the  rate  of  50  per  minute.  The  separate 
contractions  are  so  close  together  that  they  can  not  be  distinguished. 

Contracture. — The  prolonged  relaxation  that  is  so  character- 
istic of  the  veratrinized  muscle  may  be  observed  in  frog's  muscle 
under  other  circumstances,  and  is  described  usually  as  a  condition 
of  contracture.     By  contracture,  therefore,  we  mean  a  state  of  con- 


Fig.  16. — Effect  of  repeated  stimulation,  curve  showing  no  contracture  or  very  little. 
The  muscle  was  stimulated  by  induction  shocks  at  the  rate  of  50  per  minute.  A  very 
slight  contracture  is  shown  in  the  beginning,  but  subsequently  the  contractions  show 
only  a  diminished  extent,  the  rate  of  relaxation  remaining  apparently  unchanged. 

tinuous  contraction,  or,  looking  at  it  from  the  other  point  of  view, 
a  state  of  retarded  relaxation.  This  condition  is  apparent  in 
muscles  that  have  been  cooled  to  a  low  temperature,  and  is  shown 
also  as  a  result  of  repeated  stimulations.     In  Fig.   14    the   phe- 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION.  33 

nomenon  is  exhibited  very  clearly  in  the  form  in  which  it  was  first 
described  by  Kronecker  and  Tiegel,*  while  in  the  following  j&gure 
(Fig.  15)  the  phenomenon  is  shown  as  it  usually  appears,  that  is, 
after  many  contractions,  and  at  a  time  when  fatigue  is  beginning 
to  make  itself  felt. 

The  Effect  of  Rapidly  Repeated  Contractions. — When  a 
muscle  is  stimulated  repeatedly  by  stimuli  of  equal  strength  that 
fall  into  the  muscle  at  equal  intervals  the  contractions  show  certain 
features  that,  in  a  general  way,  are  constant,  although  the  precise 
degree  in  which  they  are  exhibited  varies  curiously  in  different 
animals.  Such  curves  are  exhibited  in  Figs.  14,  15,  and  16,  and 
the  features  worthy  of  note  may  be  specified  briefly  as  follows : 

1.  The  Introductory  Contractions. — The  first  three  or  four  con- 
tractions decrease  slightly  in  extent,  showing  that  the  muscle  at 
first  loses  a  little  in  irritability  on  account  of  previous  contractions. 
This  phenomenon  is  frequently  absent. 

2.  The  Staircase  or  "  Treppe." — After  the  first  slight  fall  in 
height  has  passed  off  the  contractions  increase  in  extent  with  great 
regularity  and  often  for  a  surprisingly  large  number  of  contractions. 
This  gradual  increase  in  extent  of  shortening,  with  a  constant 
stimulus,  was  first  noticed  by  Bowditch  upon  the  heart  muscle, 
and  was  by  him  named  the  phenomenon  of  "treppe,"  the 
German  word  for  staircase.  It  indicates  that  the  effect  of  activity 
is  in  the  beginning  beneficial  to  the  muscle  in  that  its  irritability 
steadily  increases,  and  the  fact  that  the  same  result  has  been  ob- 
tained from  heart  muscle,  plain  muscle,  and  nerve  fibers  indicates 
that  it  may  be  a  general  physiological  law  that  functional  activity 
leads  at  first  to  a  heightened  irritability. 

3.  Contracture. — -This  phenomenon  of  retarded  relaxation  has 
been  described  above.  In  frog's  muscles  stimulated  repeatedly  it 
makes  its  appearance,  as  a  rule,  sooner  or  later  in  the  series  of 
contractions;  but  there  is  a  curious  amount  of  variation  in  the 
muscles  of  different  individuals  in  this  respect. 

4.  Fatigue. — After  the  period  of  the  "treppe"  has  passed  the 
contractions  diminish  steadily  in  height  until  at  last  the  muscle 
fails  entirely  to  respond  to  the  stimulus.  This  progressive  loss  of 
irritability  in  the  muscle  caused  by  repeated  activity  is  designated 
as  fatigue.  It  will  be  considered  more  in  detail  under  the  head  of 
Compound  Muscular  Contractions. 

The  Contraction  Wave. — Under  ordinary  conditions  the  fibers 
of  a  muscle  when  stimulated  contract  simultaneously  or  nearly  so, 
and  the  whole  extent  of  the  muscle  is  practically  in  the  same  phase 
of  contraction  at  a  given   instant.      It   is   comparatively  easy  to 

*  Tiegel,  "Pfliiger's  Archiv  fiir  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  etc.,  13,  71, 
1876. 


34    .  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

show,  however,  that  the  process  of  contraction  spreads  over  the 
fibers,  from  the  point  stimulated,  in  the  form  of  a  wave  that  moves 
with  a  definite  velocity.  In  a  long  muscle  with  parallel  fibers  one 
may  prove,  by  proper  recording  apparatus,  that  if  the  muscle  is 
stimulated  at  one  end  a  point  near  this  end  enters  into  contraction 
before  a  point  farther  off.  Knowing  the  difference  in  time  between 
the  appearance  of  the  contraction  at  the  two  points  and  their 
distance  apart,  we  have  the  data  for  determining  the  velocity  of  its 
propagation.  In  frog's  muscles  this  velocity  is  found  to  be  equal 
to  3  to  4  meters  per  second,  while  in  human  muscle,  at  the  body 
temperature,  it  is  estimated  at  10  to  13  meters  per  second.  Know- 
ing the  time  it  takes  this  wave  to  pass  a  given  point  (d)  and  its 
velocity  (v),  its  entire  length  is  given  by  the  formula  1=  vd.  In  the 
frog's  muscle,  therefore,  with  a  velocity  of  3000  mm.  per  second, 
and  a  duration  of,  say,  0.1  second,  the  product  3000  X  0.1  =  300 
mms.  gives  the  length  of  the  wave  or  the  length  of  muscle  which 
is  in  some  phase  of  contraction  at  any  given  instant.  Under 
normal  conditions  the  muscle  fibers  are  stimulated  through  their 
motor  plates,  which  are  situated  toward  the  middle  of  the  fiber, 
or  perhaps  one  muscle  fiber  may  have  two  or  more  motor  plates, 
giving  two  or  more  points  of  stimulation.  It  follows,  therefore, 
from  this  anatomical  arrangement  and  the  great  velocity  of  the 
wave,  that  all  parts  of  the  fibers  are  in  contraction  at  the  same 
instant  and,  indeed,  in  nearly  the  same  phase  of  contraction.  Under 
abnormal  conditions  muscles  may  exhibit  fibrillar  contractions ;  that 
is,  separate  fibrils  or  bundles  of  fibrils  contract  and  relax  at  different 
times,  giving  a  flickering,  trembling  movement  to  the  muscle. 

Idiomuscular  Contractions. — In  a  fatigued  or  moribund  muscle  mechan- 
ical stimulation  may  give  a  localized  contraction  which  does  not  spread  or 
spreads  very  slowly,  showing  that  the  abnormal  changes  in  the  muscle  prevent 
the  excitation  from  traveling  at  its  normal  velocity.  A  localized  contraction 
of  this  kind  was  designated  by  Schiff  as  an  idiomuscular  contraction.  It  may 
be  produced  in  a  healthy  muscle  by  localized  mechanical  stimulation,  as  by 
drawing  a  blunt  instrument — e.  g.,  the  handle  of  a  scalpel — across  the  belly 
of  a  muscle.  The  point  thus  stimulated  stands  out  as  a  weal,  owing  to  the 
idiomuscular  contraction. 

The  Energy  Liberated  in  the  Contraction. — When  a  muscle 
contracts,  energy  is,  as  we  say,  liberated  in  several  forms,  and 
can  be  measured  quantitatively.  First  there  is  a  production  of 
heat,  which  is  indicated  by  a  rise  in  temperature  of  the  muscle. 
According  to  Heidenhain,  the  temperature  of  the  frog's  muscle 
is  increased  in  a  single  contraction  by  0.001°  C.  to  0.005°  C.  Larger 
muscles,  such  as  those  of  the  thigh  of  the  dog,  when  repeatedly 
stimulated  may  cause  a  rise  of  temperature  of  from  1°  to  2°  C. 
The  thermometer  does  not,  of  course,  measure  the  amount  of  heat 
produced,  but  only  the  temperature  of  the  muscle.     Heat  is  esti- 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF   CONTRACTION.  35 

mated  quantitatively  in  terms  of  calories.  By  a  calorie  is  meant 
the  quantity  of  heat  necessary  to  raise  1  gm.  of  water  1°  C. 
Knowing  the  specific  heat  and  weight  of  muscle,  we  can  readily 
calculate  the  number  of  calories  produced.  Thus,  if  a  frog's 
muscle  weighing  2  gms.  shows  a  rise  of  temperature  of  0.005°  C. 
from  a  single  contraction  the  production  of  heat  in  calories  is  given 
by  multiplying  the  weight  of  the  muscle  by  its  specific  heat, 
0.83,  to  reduce  it  to  an  equivalent  weight  of  water,  and  this 
product  by  the  rise  in  temperature:  2  X  0.83  X  0.005  =  0.0083 
calorie.  The  fact  that  muscular  exercise  increases  the  produc- 
tion of  heat  in  the  body  is,  of  course,  a  matter  of  general  obser- 
vation. Second.  Some  electrical  energy  is  developed  during 
the  contraction.  The  means  of  detecting  and  measuring  this 
energv  will  be  described  in  a  subsequent  chapter.  Considered 
quantitatively,  the  amount  is  small.  Third.  Work  is  done  if  the 
muscle  is  allowed  to  shorten  during  the  contraction.  By  work  is 
meant  external  or  useful  work — that  is,  the  muscle  lifts  a  weight 
or  overcomes  an  opposing  resistance.  If  a  muscle  contracts  against 
a  weight  too  heavy  to  be  lifted  or  a  resistance  too  strong  to  be 
overcome  it  does  no  external  work,  although,  of  course,  much 
energy  is  liberated  as  heat  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  internal 
work.  The  work  done  by  a  muscle  during  contraction  is  measured 
in  the  usual  mechanical  units,  by  the  product  of  the  load  into  the 
lift.  That  is,  if  a  muscle  lifts  a  weight  of  40  grams  to  a  height 
of  10  millimeters,  the  work  done  is  40  X  10  =  400  gram-milli- 
meters, or  0.4  grammeter.  We  can  in  calculations  convert  ex- 
ternal work  into  heat  or  internal  work  by  making  use  of  the  ascer- 
tained mechanical  equivalent  of  heat,  according  to  which  1  calorie 
=  425  grammeters  of  work.  The  work,  0.4  grammeter,  supposed 
to  be  done  in  the  above  experiment  would  be  equivalent,  there- 
fore, to  0.4  H-  425,  or  about  0.001  of  a  calorie. 

The  Proportion  of  the  Total  Energy  Liberated  that  may 
be  Utilized  in  Work. — All  of  the  energy  liberated  in  the  muscle 
has  its  origin  in  the  chemical  changes  that  follow  upon  stimulation. 
We  assume  that  these  changes  are  such  that  complex  molecules 
are  broken  down,  with  the  formation  of  simpler  ones,  and  that 
some  of  the  so-called  chemical  or  internal  energy  that  holds  together 
the  atoms  in  the  complex  molecule  is  liberated  and  takes  the  three 
forms  described  above.  It  is  a  matter  of  interest  to  inquire  as 
to  the  proportion  of  this  total  energy  which  may  be  converted 
into  useful  w^ork  and  the  conditions  under  which  this  optimum 
amovmt  of  work  may  be  realized.  Regarded  from  this  standpoint, 
the  muscle  may  be  considered  as  a  piece  of  machiner}^  comparable, 
let  us  say,  to  a  gas  engine.  In  the  latter  the  heat  generated  by 
the  explosive  chemical  change  is  converted  partially  into  external 


36  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE    AND    NERVE. 

work  by  a  properly  adapted  mechanism — and  in  a  well-constructed 
engine  as  much  as  15  to  25  per  cent,  of  the  total  energy  may  be 
obtained  as  work.  In  the  muscle  there  is  also  a  mechanism  of 
some  kind,  not  as  yet  understood,  by  means  of  which  a  part  of  the 
energy  liberated  may  be  converted  into  work.  Experiments  made 
by  Fick  with  frogs'  muscles  indicate  that  the  proportion  of  the 
total  energy  which  under  optimum  conditions  may  be  utilized 
as  work  is,  in  round  numbers,  from  25  to  30  per  cent.  Chauveau,* 
in  experiments  made  upon  the  elevator  of  the  upper  lip  in  the 
horse,  found  a  proportion  of  only  12  to  15  per  cent.  The  last  ob- 
server points  out  that  this  proportion  must  vary  greatly  for  dif- 
ferent muscles  and  for  muscles  in  different  animals,  while  for  the 
same  muscle  it  will  vary  with  the  extent  and  duration  of  the  con- 
tractions and  other  conditions.  From  experiments  made  upon  dogs 
in  which  a  measured  amount  of  work  was  done  and  in  which 
the  energy  changes  were  estimated  from  the  oxygen  absorbed 
and  carbon  dioxid  eliminated,  Zuntzf  calculates  that  somewhat 
more  than  -J-  of  the  total  chemical  energy  liberated  in  the  muscles 
may  be  applied  to  external  work,  the  other  f  taking  the  form  of 
heat.  Similar  experiments  made  by  the  same  observer  J  upon 
men  have  indicated  that  the  muscles  work  most  economically  in 
lifting  the  weight  of  the  body,  as  in  mountain-climbing.  In  this 
form  of  muscular  work  he  estimates  that  from  35  to  40  per  cent,  of 
the  heat  energy  yielded  by  the  material  oxidized  in  the  body  may 
take  the  form  of  external  work.  When  the  muscular  work  per- 
formed was  effected  by  the  muscles  of  the  arms  and  upper  part 
of  the  body,  as  in  turning  a  wheel,  a  smaller  yield  (25  per  cent.) 
was  obtained.  It  appears  from  these  figures  that  the  muscular 
machine  is  an  especially  efficient  one  as  regards  the  amount  of 
external  work  that  can  be  obtained  from  the  oxidation  of  a  given 
amount  of  material.  Steam  engines  are  said  to  be  capable  of 
yielding  only  10  to  15  per  cent,  of  the  heat  energy  of  the  fuel  in 
the  form  of  mechanical  or  useful  work. 

The  Curve  of  Work  and  the  Absolute  Power  of  a  Muscle. — 
The  statements  in  the  preceding  paragraph  prove  that  the  muscle, 
judged  from  the  standpoint  of  a  machine  to  do  work,  compares  most 
favorably  in  its  efficiency  with  machinery  of  human  construction. 
But  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  in  this  as  in  other  respects  the 
properties  of  cross-striated  muscular  tissues  vary  greatly.  In  some 
animals  or  individuals  it  is  a  much  more  efficient  machine  than  in 
others.  This  fact  is  indicated  by  our  general  experience  regarding 
variations  in  muscular  strength  in  different  individuals,  and  is  proved 

*  Chauveau,  "Le  travail  musculaire,  etc.,"  Paris,  1891. 

t  Zuntz,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  68,  191,  1897. 

j  Zuntz  and  Schumberg,  "Physiologie  des  Marsches,"  Berlin,  1901. 


THE    PHENOMENON   OF   CONTRACTION.  37 

more  precisely  by  direct  experiments  on  single  muscles.    A  frog's 


Fig.  17. — To  show  the  decrease  in  extent  of  contraction  of  the  gastrocnemius  muscle 
of  a  frog  with  increase  in  load.  In  the  first  contraction,  to  the  right,  the  load  was  14.2 
gms.  At  each  successive  contraction  the  load  was  increased  by  5.3  gms.  With  a  load  of 
182  gms.  the  lever  gave  only  the  slightest  indication  of  a  shortening,  and  this  may  have 
been  due  to  some  lateral  movement. 


■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■«■■■■ 


mi 


Fig.  18. — The  curve  of  work  obtained  by  plotting  the  results  shown  in  Fig.  17.  The 
initial  contraction  was  made  with  a  load  of  14.2  gms.,  and  the  work  done  in  gram-milli- 
meters is  represented  by  the  ordinate  erected  at  this  point.  The  maximum  work  was  done 
with  a  load  of  88.6  gms.,  and  the  absolute  power  of  this  particular  muscle  was  found  to  be 
equal  to  182  gms. 


muscle  may  be  isolated  and  the  extent  of  its  contractions  and  the 
work  done  may  be  estimated  directly.     Under  such  conditions  it 


38  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE    AXD    NERVE. 

will  be  found  that,  while  the  height  of  the  successive  contractions 
diminishes  as  the  load  increases  (see  Fig.  17),  the  work  done — that 
is,  the  product  of  the  load  into  the  lift — first  increases  and  then 
decreases.     For  example : 


Work- 

Done  in   Gram-millimeters. 

lOad  in  Grams. 

Lift  in  Millimeters. 

Load  X  Lift. 

5 

27.6 

13S.0 

15 

25.1 

376.5 

25 

11.45 

2S6.25 

35 

6.3 

220.5 

A  series  of  experiments  of  this  kind  ftirnishes  data  for  construct- 
ing a  curve  of  work  by  plotting  off  along  the  abscissa  at  equal  inter- 
vals the  equal  increments  in  load  and  erecting  over  each  load  an 
ordinate  showing  the  proportional  amount  of  work  done.  The 
curve  has  the  general  form  indicated  in  Fig.  18.  Three  facts  are 
expressed  b}'  this  curve:  First,  that  if  the  muscle  lifts  no  weight 
no  work  will  be  done;  this  follows  theoretically  from  the  formula 
W  =  LH,  in  which  W  represents  the  work  done,  L  the  load,  and 
H  the  lift.  If  either  L  or  H  is  equal  to  zero  the  product,  of  course, 
is  zero;  that  is,  no  external  work  is  done;  the  chemical  energy- 
liberated  in  the  contraction  takes  the  form  of  heat.  Under  such 
circumstances  the  amount  of  heat  given  off  from  the  muscle  should 
be  greater  than  when  a  load  is  hfted.  In  accordance  with  this 
fact  it  is  found  that  a  muscle  lifting  a  light  load  gives  off  more  heat 
during  the  contraction  than  when  lifting  a  heavier  load.  Second. 
There  is  an  optimum  load  for  each  muscle  with  which  the  greatest 
proportion  of  work  can  be  obtained.  Third.  When  the  load  is  just 
sufficient  to  counteract  the  contraction  of  the  muscle  no  work  is 
done,  H  in  the  above  formula  being  zero.  This  amount  of  load 
measures  what  Weber  called  the  absolute  power  of  the  muscle. 
As  will  be  seen  from  the  above  cur^-e,  it  is  measured  by  the 
weight  which  the  muscle  cannot  lift  and  which,  on  the  other 
hand,  cannot  cause  any  extension  of  the  muscle  while  contracting. 
Or,  in  more  general  terms  (Hemiami),  the  absolute  power  of  a 
muscle  is  the  maximum  of  tension  which  it  can  reach  without 
alteration  of  its  natural  length.  This  absolute  power  can  be 
measured  for  the  muscles  of  different  animals  and  for  convenience 
of  comparison  can  then  be  expressed  in  terms  of  the  cross-area 
of  the  muscle  given  in  square  centimeters.  Weber  has  shown 
that  the  absolute  power  of  a  muscle  varies  ^ith  the  cross-area,  since 
this  depends  upon  the  number  of  constituent  fibers  whose  united 
contraction  makes  the  contraction  of  the  muscle.  Expressed  in 
this  way,  it  is  found  that  the  absolute  power  of  human  muscle  is, 
size  for  size,  much  greater  than  that  of  frog's  muscle.  For  in- 
stance, the  absolute  power  of  a  frog's  muscle  of  1  square  centimeter 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION.  39 

cross-area  is  estimated  at  from  0.7  Icilogram  to  3  kilograms,  while 
that  of  a  human  muscle  of  the  same  size  is  estimated  by  Hermann 
at  6.24  kilograms.  Taken  as  a  whole,  the  human  muscle  is  a  better 
machine  for  work,  but  it  seems  possible,  although  exact  figures  are 
lacking,  that  the  absolute  power  of  the  muscles  of  some  insects 
reckoned  for  the  same  unit  of  cross-area  would  be  much  greater 
than  in  human  muscle. 

COMPOUND  OR  TETANIC  CONTRACTIONS. 

Definition  of  Tetanus  — When  a  muscle  receives  a  series  of 
rapidly  repeated  stimuli  it  remains  in  a  condition  of  contraction  as 
long  as  the  stimuli  are  sent  in  or  until  it  loses  its  irritability  from 
the  effect  of  fatigue.  A  contraction  of  this  character  is  described 
as  a  compound  contraction  or  tetanus.  If  the  stimuli  follow  each 
other  with  sufficient  rapidity  the  muscle  shows  no  external  sign 
of  relaxation  in  the  intervals  between  stimuli,  and  if  its  contractions 
are  recorded  upon  a  kymographion  by  means  of  an  attached  lever 
a  curve  is  obtained  such  as  is  shown  at  5  in  Fig.  19.  A  con- 
traction of  this  character  is  described  as  a  complete  tetanus.  If, 
however,  the  rate  of  stimulation  is  not  sufficiently  rapid  the  mus- 
cle will  relax  more  or  less  after  each  stimulus  and  its  recorded 
curve,  therefore,  will  present  the  appearance  shown  in  1,2,  3,  and 
4  of  Fig.  19.  A  tetanus  of  this  character  is  described  as  an  incom- 
plete tetanus.  It  is  obvious  that  according  to  the  rate  of  stimu- 
lation there  may  be  numerous  degrees  of  incomplete  tetanus,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  19,  extending  from  a  series  of  separate  single  con- 
tractions, on  the  one  hand,  to  a  perfect  fusion  of  the  contractions, 
a  complete  tetanus,  on  the  other.  Tetanic  contractions  present 
two  peculiarities  in  addition  to  the  mere  matter  of  duration, 
which  is  governed,  of  course,  by  the  duration  of  the  stimu- 
lation: First,  the  more  or  less  complete  fusion  of  the  contrac- 
tions due  to  the  separate  stimuli.  This,  as  stated  above,  is  the 
distinctive  sign  of  a  tetanus.  Second,  the  phenomenon  of  sum- 
mation in  consequence  of  which  the  total  shortening  of  the  muscle 
in  tetanus  may  be  considerably  greater  than  that  caused  by  a  maxi- 
mal simple  contraction. 

Summation. — The  facts  of  summation  may  be  shown  most  read- 
ily by  employing  a  device  to  send  into  the  muscle  two  successive 
stimuli  at  varying  intervals.  If  the  second  stimulus  falls  into  the 
muscle  at  the  apex  of  the  contraction  caused  by  the  first  stimulus, 
then,  even  if  the  first  contraction  is  maximal,  the  muscle  will  shorten 
still  farther;  the  first  and  second  contractions  are  summated,  giv- 
ing a  total  shortening  greater  than  can  be  obtained  by  a  single  stim- 
ulus (see  Fig.  20).  The  extent  of  the  summation  in  such  cases 
varies  with  a  number  of  conditions,  such  as  the  intervals  between  the 


40 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 


Fig.  19. — Analysis  of  tetanus.  Experiment  made  upon  the  gastrocnemius  muscle  of  a 
frog  to  show  that  by  increasing  the  rate  of  stimulation  the  contractions,  at  first  separate 
f  1),  fuse  more  and  more  through  a  series  of  incomplete  tetani  (2,  3,  4)  into  a  complete  tetanus 
(5)  in  which  there  is  no  indication,  so  far  as  the  record  goes,  of  a  separate  effect  for  each- 
stimulus. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION.  41 

stimuli,  the  relative  strengths  of  the  stimuli,  the  load  carried  by  the 
muscle,  etc.  Taking  the  simplest  conditions  of  a  moderately  loaded 
muscle  and  two  maximal  stimuli,  it  is  found  that  the  greatest  sum- 
mation occurs  when  the  stimuli  are  so  spaced  that  the  second  contrac- 
tion begins  at  the  apex  of  the  first.  If  the  stimuli  are  closer  together, 
so  that,  for  instance,  the  second  contraction  follows  shortly  after 
the  first  has  begun,  the  total  shortening  is  less,  and  the  same  is  true 
to  an  increasing  extent  as  the  second  contraction  falls  later  and 
later  in  the  period  of  relaxation  after  the  first  contraction.*  If 
instead  of  two  we  use  three  successive  stimuli,, falling  into  the  muscle 


Fig.  20. — Summation  of  two  successive  contractions.  Curve  1  shows  a  simple  con- 
traction due  to  a  single  stimulus,  the  latent  period  being  indicated  at  the  beginning  of  the 
contraction.     Curve  2  shows  the  summation  due  to  two  succeeding  stimuli. 

at  proper  intervals,  a  still  further  summation  occurs.  In  this  way 
the  total  extent  of  shortening  in  a  muscle  completely  tetanized  may 
be  several  times  as  great  as  that  of  a  single  maximal  contraction. 

The  Discontinuous  Character  of  the  Tetanic  Contraction 
— The  Muscle-tone. — In  complete  tetanus  the  muscle  seems  to 
be  in  a  condition  of  continuous  uniform  contraction;  the  re- 
corded curve  shows  no  sign  of  relaxation  between  stimuli  and  no 
external  indication,  in  fact,  that  the  separate  stimuli  do  more  than 
to  maintain  a  state  of  uniform  contraction.  It  can  be  shown,  how- 
ever, that  in  reality  each  stimulus  has  its  own  effect,  and  that  the 
chemical  changes  underlying  the  phenomenon  of  contraction  are 
probably  not  continuous,  but  form  an  interrupted  series  correspond- 
ing, within  limits,  to  the  series  of  stimuli  sent  in.  The  clearest 
proof  for  this  belief  is  found  in  the  electrical  changes  that  result 
from  each  stimulus,  and  the  facts  relating  to  this  side  of  the  question 
will  be  stated  subsequently  in  the  chapter  on  The  Electrical 
*  Von  Kries,  "Archiv  fiir  Physiologie,"  1888,  p.  537. 


42  THE   PHYSIOLOGY   OP   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

Phenomena  of  Muscle  and  Nerve.  Another  proof  is  found  in  the 
phenomenon  of  the  muscle-tone.  When  a  muscle  is  stimulated 
directly  or  through  its  motor  nerve  a  musical  note  may  be  heard 
by  applying  the  ear  or  a  stethoscope  to  the  muscle.  The  note  that 
is  heard  corresponds  in  pitch,  up  to  a  certain  point,  with  the  num- 
ber of  stimuli  sent  in, — that  is,  the  muscle  vibrates,  as  it  were,  in 
unison  with  the  number  of  stimuli,  and,  although  the  vibrations 
are  not  sufficient  to  affect  the  recording  lever,  they  can  be  heard 
as  a  musical  note.  This  fact,  therefore,  may  be  taken  as  a  proof 
that  during  complete  tetanus  there  is  a  discontinuous  series  of 
changes  in  the  muscle  the  rate  of  which  corresponds  with  that  of  the 
stimulation.  The  series  of  electrical  changes  corresponding  with  the 
series  of  stimuli  sent  in  may  be  made  audible  by  applying  a  telephone 
to  the  muscle.  Making  use  of  this  method,  Wedenski*  has  shown 
that  the  ability  of  the  muscle  to  respond  isorhythmically  to  the 
rate  of  stimulation  is  limited.  In  frog's  muscle  the  pitch  of  the 
musical  tone  may  correspond  with  the  rate  of  stimulation  up  to 
about  200  stimuli  per  second.  In  the  muscle  of  the  warm-blooded 
animal  the  correspondence  may  extend  to  about  1000  stimuli  per 
second.  If  the  rate  of  stimulation  is  increased  beyond  these 
limits  the  musical  note  heard  does  not  correspond,  but  falls 
to  a  lower  pitch,  indicating  that  some  of  the  stimuli  under  these 
conditions  become  ineffective.  It  should  be  added  that  the  high 
figures  given  above  for  the  correspondence  between  the  stimuli  and 
the  muscle-tone  hold  good  only  for  entirely  fresh  preparations. 
The  lability  of  the  muscle  quickly  becomes  less  as  it  is  fatigued;  so 
that  in  the  frog,  for  instance,  the  correspondence  in  long-continued 
contractions  is  accurate  only  when  the  rate  of  stimulation  does 
not  exceed  30  per  second. 

The  Number  of  Stimuli  Necessary  for  Complete  Tetanus. — 
The  number  of  stimuli  necessary  to  produce  complete  tetanus 
varies,  as  we  should  expect,  with  the  kind  of  muscle  used  and  in 
accordance  with  the  rapidity  of  the  process  of  relaxation  shown 
by  these  muscles  in  simple  contractions.  The  series  that  may  be 
arranged  to  demonstrate  this  variation  is  quite  large,  extending 
from  a  supposed  rate  of  300  per  second  for  insect  muscle  to  a  low 
limit  of  one  stimulus  in  5  to  7  seconds  for  plain  muscle.  The  frog's 
muscle  goes  into  complete  tetanus  with  a  rate  of  stimulation  of 
from  20  to  30  per  second.  Inasmuch  as  the  rapidity  of  relaxation 
of  the  muscle  is  much  retarded  by  certain  influences,  such  as  a 
low  temperature  or  fatigue,  it  follows  that  these  same  influences 
affect  in  a  corresponding  way  the  rate  of  stimulation  necessary  to 
give  complete  tetanus.     A  frog's  muscle  stimulated  at  the  rate  of 

*  Wedenski,  "Du  rhythme  musculaire  dans  la  contraction  normals," 
"Archives  de  physiologic, "  1891,  p.  58. 


THE    PHENOMENON   OF   CONTRACTION. 


43 


10  stimuli  per  second  may  record  an  incomplete  tetanus,  but  if  the 
stimulus  is  maintained  for  some  time  the  tetanus  finally  becomes 
complete  in  consequence  of  the  slowing  of  the  phase  of  relaxation. 
Voluntary  Contractions. — After  ascertaining  that  muscles 
may  give  either  simple  or  tetanic  contractions  one  asks  naturally 
whether  in  our  voluntary  movements  we  can  also  obtain  both 
sorts  of  contractions.  In  the  first  place,  it  is  obvious  that  most 
of  our  voluntary  movements  are  too  long  continued  to  be  simple 
contractions.  The  time  element  alone  would  place  them  in  the 
group  of  tetanic  contractions,  and  this  is  the  usual  conclusion 
regarding  them.  In  voluntary  movements  a  neuromuscular 
mechanism  comes  into  play.  This  mechanism  consists,  on  the 
motor  side,  of  at  least  two 
nerve  units  or  neurons  and  the 
muscle,  as  indicated  in  the 
accompanying  diagram  (Fig. 
21).  If  in  ordinary  voluntary 
movements  the  muscular  con- 
tractions are  tetanic,  we  must 
suppose  that  the  motor  nerve 
cells  discharge  a  series  of  nerve 
impulses  through  the  motor 
nerve  into  the  muscle.  The 
contraction  of  voluntary  muscle 
has  been  investigated  therefore 
in  various  ways,  to  ascertain 
whether  there  is  any  obtainable 
evidence  of  the  number  of 
separate  contractions  that  are 

fused  together  to  make  this  normal  tetanus.  In  the  first  place, 
the  normal  movements  of  the  muscles  have  been  recorded  graph- 
ically by  levers  or  tambours.  The  records  thus  obtained  show 
that  our  usual  contractions  are  not  entirely  complete  tetani, — 
that  is,  there  is  an  indication  in  some  part  of  the  curve  of 
the  single  contractions  that  are  being  fused.  According  to  most 
observers,*  these  records  show  that  our  normal  contractions  are 
compounded  of  single  contractions  following  at  the  rate  of  10 
per  second,  or,  in  other  words,  the  motor  neurons  discharge 
about  10  impulses  per  second  into  the  muscle.  The  so-called 
natural  muscle-tone  has  been  used  for  the  same  purpose.  When 
one  places  a  stethoscope  or  lays  his  ear  upon  a  contracting  muscle  a 
low  tone  is  heard  the  pitch  of  which  corresponds  with  40  vibrations 
per  second.  It  is  assumed,  however,  that  this  note  does  not  represent 
the  actual  rate  of  stimulation  of  the  muscle,  since  the  number 
*  Horsley  and  Schafer,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  7,  96,  1886. 


Fig.  21. — Schema  to  show  the  innerva- 
tion of  the  skeletal  (voluntary)  muscles:  1, 
the  intercentral  (pyramidal)  neuron;  2,  the 
spinal  neuron;  3,  the  muscle. 


44  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

is  higher  than  that  obtained  by  other  methods.  The  ear  cannot 
perceive  a  musical  note  much  lower  than  40  vibrations  per  second, 
and  if  the  muscle  were  really  vibrating  10  or  20  times  per  second 
we  could  not  perceive  this  fact  directly  by  the  ear.  Vibrating 
bodies,  however,  give  out  overtones  of  a  higher  pitch,  and  it  is 
supposed,  therefore,  that  the  normal  muscle  tone  (40)  represents 
either  the  first  octave  of  the  muscle  vibrations,  20  per  second,  or 
the  second  octave,  10  per  second.  Helmholtz  made  use  of  a  simple 
and  direct  method  to  determine  this  point.  He  utilized  the  prin- 
ciple of  sympathetic  vibrations,  according  to  which  a  vibrating 
body  will  be  set  into  movement  most  easily  by  vibrations  that 
correspond  in  number  to  its  own  period.  Helmholtz  attached  to 
the  muscle  watch  springs  that  had  different  periods  of  vibration 
and  found  that  when  the  muscle  was  contracted  the  spring  that 
vibrated  20  times  per  second  was  set  into  most  active  movement. 
He  concluded,  therefore,  that  the  muscle  receives  20  stimuli  per 
second  in  ordinary  contractions  and  that  the  tone  that  is  heard, 
40  vibrations  per  second,  represents  the  first  overtone.  The  agree- 
ment among  the  results  of  those  who  have  made  graphic  records 
of  voluntary  contractions  would  lead  us,  however,  to  suppose  that 
10  stimuli  per  second  is  more  probably  the  true  rate  of  stimulation 
and  that  the  muscle-tone  heard  represents  the  overtone  correspond- 
ing to  the  second  octave  of  this  vibration.  It  is  to  be  borne  in  mind, 
however,  that  the  motor  nerve  cells  do  not  necessarily  discharge 
their  impulses  into  the  muscle  at  a  perfectly  uniform  rate.  The 
rate  is,  in  fact,  liable  to  vary  in  different  individuals  or  in  the  same 
individual  under  different  circumstances.  Von  Kries,*  for  instance, 
states  that  the  rate  of  stimulation  in  voluntary  movements  may 
vary  according  to  the  character  of  the  movement.  In  slow,  sus- 
tained movements  the  rate  is  from  8  to  12  per  second,  while  in 
short,  sharp,  rhythmical  movements  of  the  fingers  the  rate  may  be 
as  rapid  as  40  per  second.  The  fact  that  movements  of  this  latter 
character — the  trilling  movements  of  the  fingers  of  the  pianist, 
for  instance — may  last  for  only  -^  of  a  second  or  less,  is  considered 
by  some  authors  as  a  proof  that  they  are  not  tetanic  contractions, 
and  that  therefore  we  can  voluntarily  make  either  long-continued 
tetanic  contractions  or  quick,  simple  contractions.  Von  Kries 
has  shown,  however,  that  when  these  quick,  rhythmical  movements 
of  the  fingers  are  recorded  the  curves,  even  of  such  brief  contractions, 
show  that  they  are  short-lasting  tetani.  It  is  the  usual  belief,, 
therefore,  that  all  voluntary  movements  are  tetanic  in  character 
and  that  it  is  not  possible  for  us,  by  a  so-called  act  of  the  will,  to 
cause  a  simple  contraction, — that  is,  to  cause  the  motor  nerve  cells 
to  discharge  a  single  motor  impulse.  This  general  conclusion  is  sup- 
*  Von  Kries,  "Archiv  fiir  Physiologie,"  suppl.  volume,  1886,  p.  1. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION. 


45 


ported  by  the  results  of  artificial  stimulation  of  the  motor  regions 
of  the  brain.  In  experiments  of  this  kind  made  by  Horsley  and 
Schiifer  it  was  shown  that,  at  whatever  rate  the  stimulus  might 
be  applied  to  the  motor  cells,  they  responded  by  motor  discharges 
of  about  10  per  second,  so  far  as  this  could  be  determined  from 
the  contractions  of  the  muscle.  The  interesting  conclusion  from 
the  whole  discussion,  therefore,  is  that  our  motor  centers,  under 
the  stimulus  of  the  will,  discharge  motor  impulses  at  a  certain  low 
rate,  which,  while  somewhat  variable,  averages  in  ordinary  move- 
ments about  10  per  second. 

The  Ergograph. — Voluntary  contractions  in  man  may  be  re- 
corded in  a  great  many  ways,  but  Mosso  has  devised  a  special  in- 


Fig.  22. — Mosso's  ergograph:  c  is  the  carriage  moving  to  and  fro  on  runners  by  means 
of  the  cord  d,  which  passes  from  the  carriage  to  a  holder  attached  to  the  last  two  phalanges 
of  the  middle  finger  (the  adjoining  fingers  are  held  in  place  by  clamps) ;  p,  the  writing  point 
of  the  carriage,  c,  which  makes  the  record  of  its  movements  on  the  kymographion ;  w,  the 
weight  to  be  lifted. 


strument  for  this  purpose,  known  as  the  ergograph.  It  has  been 
much  used  in  quantitative  investigations  upon  muscular  work 
and  the  conditions  influencing  it.  The  apparatus  is  shown  and 
described  in  Fig.  22.  The  person  experimented  upon  makes  a 
series  of  short  contractions  of  the  flexor  muscles  of  the  middle 
finger,  thereby  lifting  a  kno^vn  weight  to  a  definite  height 
which  is  recorded  upon  a  drum.  In  a  set  of  experiments  the 
rate  of  the  series  of  contractions — that  is,  the  interval  of  rest 
between  the  contractions — is  kept  constant,  as  also  is  the  load  lifted. 
Under  these  conditions  the  contractions  become  less  and  less  ex- 
tensive as  fatigue  comes  on,  and  finally,  with  the  strongest  voluntary 
effort,  the  contraction  of  the  muscles  is  insufficient  to  lift  the  weight. 
In    this    way  a  record  is  obtained  such    as  is  shown  in    Fig.  23 


46  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

In  such  a  record  we  can  easily  calculate  the  total  work  done  by 
obtaining  the  product  of  the  load  into  the  lift  for  each  contrac- 
tion and  adding  these  products  together.  By  this  means  the 
capacity  for  work  of  the  muscle  used  can  be  studied  objectively 
under  varying  conditions,  and  many  suggestive  results  have  been 
obtained,  some  of  which  will  be  referred  to  specifically.*  It  should 
be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  the  ergograph  in  this  form  does 
not  enable  us  to  compute  the  total  work  that  the  muscle  is  capable 
of  performing.  It  is  obvious  that  when  the  point  of  complete 
fatigue  is  reached,  as  illustrated  in  the  record,  Fig.  23,  the  muscle  is 


Fig.  23. — Normal  fatigue  curve  of  the  flexors  of  the  middle  finger  of  right  hand.     Weight, 
3  kilograms,  contractions  at  intervals  of  two  seconds. — (Maggiora.) 

still  capable  of  doing  work,  that  is  external  work,  if  we  replace  the 
heavy  load  by  a  lighter  one.  For  this  reason  some  investigators 
have  substituted  a  spring  in  place  of  the  ]oad,t  giving  thus  a 
spring  ergograph  instead  of  a  weight  ergograph.  Although  with  the 
spring  ergograph  every  muscular  contraction  is  recorded  and  the 
entire  work  done  may  be  calculated,  it  also  possesses  certain  theo- 
retical and  practical  disadvantages,  for  a  discussion  of  which  refer- 
ence must  be  made  to  the  authors  last  quoted. 

*Mosso,  "Archives  italiennes  de  biologie,"  13,  187,  1890;  also  "Archiv 
f.  Physiologie,"  1890,  p.  191,  342.  Lombard,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  1, 
1892. 

t  Franz,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  4, 348, 1900;  also  Hough,  ibid., 
5,  240,  1901. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF   CONTRACTION.  47 

The  weight  ergograph  has  so  far  at  least  given  us  the  most  sug- 
gestive results.  Among  these  the  fohowing  may  be  mentioned: 
(1)  If  a  sufficient  interval  is  allowed  between  contractions  no  fatigue 
is  apparent.  With  a  load  of  6  kilograms,  for  instance,  the  flexor 
sublimis  showed  no  fatigue  when  a  rest  of  10  seconds  was  given 
between  contractions.  (2)  After  complete  fatigue  with  a  given 
load  a  very  long  interval  (two  hours)  is  necessary  for  the  muscle  to 
make  a  complete  recovery  and  give  a  second  record  as  extensive  as 
the  first.  (3)  After  complete  fatigue  efforts  to  contract  the  muscle 
greatly  prolong  this  period  of  complete  recovery, — a  fact  that  dem- 
onstrates the  injurious  effect  of  straining  a  fatigued  muscle.  (4) 
The  power  of  a  muscle  to  do  work  is  diminished  by  conditions  that 
depress  the  general  nutritive  state  of  the  body  or  the  local  nutrition 
of  the  muscle  used;  for  instance,  by  loss  of  sleep,  hunger,  mental 
activity,  anemia  of  the  muscle,  etc.  (5)  On  the  contrary,  im- 
proved circulation  in  the  muscle — produced  by  massage,  for  ex- 
ample— increases  the  power  to  do  work.  Food  also  has  the  same 
effect,  and  some  particularly  interesting  experiments  show  that 
sugar,  as  a  soluble  and  easily  absorbed  foodstuff,  quickly  increases 
the  amount  of  muscular  work  that  can  be  performed.  (6)  Marked 
activity  in  one  set  of  muscles — the  use  of  the  leg  muscles  in  long 
walks,  for  example — will  diminish  the  amount  of  work  obtainable 
from  other  muscles,  such  as  those  of  the  arm.  It  is  very  evident  that 
the  instrument  may  be  used  to  advantage  in  the  investigation  of 
many  problems  connected  with  gymnastics,  dietetics,  stimulants,* 
medicines,  etc.  A  point  of  general  physiological  interest  that  has 
been  brought  out  in  connection  with  the  use  of  the  ergograph  calls 
for  a  few  words  of  special  mention.  Mosso  found  that  if  a  muscle 
— e.  g.,  the  flexor  sublimis — is  stimulated  directly  by  the  electrical 
current  and  its  contractions  are  recorded  by  the  ergograph,  it  will 
give  a  curve  similar  to  that  figured  above  for  the  voluntary  con- 
tractions, except  that  the  contractions  are  not  so  extensive.  Under 
these  conditions  the  muscle,  when  completely  fatigued  to  electrical 
stimulation,  will  respond  to  voluntary  stimulation  from  the  nerve 
centers.  It  seems  likely,  as  suggested  by  Hough,  that  this  result  is 
due  mainly  to  the  fact  that  the  electrical  current  can  not  be  applied 
to  a  muscle  in  its  normal  position  so  as  to  excite  uniformly  all  the 
constituent  muscle  fibers,  although  it  is  also  quite  possible  that 
what  we  call  the  normal  or  voluntary  stimulus  is  more  effective,  or, 
to  use  a  physiological  term,  more  adequate  to  the  muscle  fibers  than 
the  electrical  shock.  On  the  other  hand,  after  fatigue  from  a  series 
of  voluntary  contractions  it  has  been  observed  that  the  muscle  will 
still  give  contractions  if  stimulated  directly  by  electricity.  This  fact 
has  been  interpreted  to  mean  that,  in  the  neuromuscular  complex 
*  Schumberg,  "Archiv  f.  Physiol,"  1899,  suppl.  volume,  p.  289. 


48  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

involved  in  a  muscular  contraction — namely,  motor  nerve  cell, 
motor  nerve  fiber,  and  muscle  fiber — the  first  named  fatigues  most 
easily,  and  that  the  ordinary  fatigue  curve  obtained  from  the  ergo- 
graph  does  not  represent  pure  muscle  fatigue,  but  fatigue  of  the 
neuromuscular  apparatus  as  a  whole,  the  point  of  complete  fatigue 
being  reached  in  the  neural  component  of  the  mechanism  before 
the  muscle  itself  loses  its  power  of  contraction.  This  interpreta- 
tion, however,  is  not  entirely  certain.  Recent  work  by  Wedenski 
has  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  in  the  neuromuscular  apparatus 
the  motor  end-plate  is  a  sensitive  link  of  the  chain,  and  that,  when 
the  nerve  is  stimulated  strongly  with  artificial  stimuli  at  least,  this 
structure  falls  into  a  condition  (parabiosis)  in  which  it  fails  to  con- 
duct the  nerve  impulse  to  the  muscle.  It  may  be,  therefore,  that 
in  sustained  voluntary  contractions  the  end-plate  fails  first,  and 
thus  is  directly  responsible  for  the  appearance  of  fatigue.  This 
view  explains  readily  why  in  such  conditions  the  muscle  is  still  irri- 
table to  direct  electrical  stimulation. 

Sense  of  Fatigue. — It  should  be  noted  in  passing  that  in  con- 
tinued voluntary  contractions  we  are  conscious  of  a  sense  of  fatigue, 
which  eventually  leads  us,  if  possible,  to  discontinue  our  efforts. 
This  sensation  must  arise  from  a  stimulus  of  sensory  nerve  fibers 
within  the  muscle  or  its  tendons,  and  may  be  regarded  as  an  impor- 
tant regulation  whereby  we  are  prevented  from  pushing  our  muscular 
exertions  to  the  point  of  "  straining." 

Muscle  Tonus, — In  addition  to  the  conditions  of  contraction 
and  of  relaxation  the  living  muscle  exhibits  the  phenomenon  of 
''tone."  By  muscle  tone  we  mean  a  state  of  continuous  shortening 
or  contraction  which  under  normal  conditions  is  slight  in  extent 
and  varies  from  time  to  time.  This  condition  is  dependent  upon 
the  connection  of  the  muscle  with  the  nerve  centers,  and  we  may 
assume  that  under  normal  circumstances  the  motor  centers  are 
continually  discharging  subminimal  nerve  impulses  into  the  muscles 
which  cause  chemical  changes  similar  in  kind  to  those  set  up  by 
an  ordinary  voluntary  effort,  but  less  in  degree;  the  result  being 
that  the  muscles  enter  into  a  state  of  contraction  which,  while 
slight  in  extent,  is  more  or  less  continuous.  According  to  this  view, 
the  whole  neuromuscular  apparatus  is  in  a  condition  of  tonic  ac- 
tivity, and  this  state  may  be  referred  in  the  long  ran  to  the  con- 
tinual inflow  of  sensory  impulses  into  the  central  nervous  system. 
The  tone  of  any  particular  muscle  or  group  of  muscles  may  be 
destroyed,  therefore,  by  cutting  its  motor  nerve,  or  less  completely 
by  severing  the  sensory  paths  from  the  same  region.  If,  for  in- 
stance, one  severs  in  a  dog  the  posterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves 
innervating  the  leg  there  will  be  a  distinct  loss  of  muscular  tone, 
although  the  motor  nerves  remain  intact.     While  we  speak  of  this 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF   CONTRACTION.  49 

muscle  tone  as  a  state  of  continuous  contraction,  it  may  be 
that  the  apparently  uniform  condition  is  only  superficial;  that,  in 
fact,  this  phenomenon  is  substantially  only  a  minimal  tetanus,  due 
to  a  series  of  feeble  but  discontinuous  stimuli  received  through 
the  motor  nerve,  each  of  which  stimuli  sets  up  its  own  chemical 
change  in  the  muscle.  However  this  may  be,  the  fact  of  muscle 
tone  is  important  in  a  number  of  ways.  It  is  of  value,  without 
doubt,  for  the  normal  nutrition  of  the  muscle,  and,  as  is  explained 
in  the  chapter  on  animal  heat,  it  plays  a  very  important  part  in 
controlling  the  production  of  heat  in  the  body.  The  extent  of  mus- 
cle tone  varies  with  many  conditions,  the  most  important  of  which, 
perhaps,  are  external  temperature  and  mental  activity.  With 
regard  to  the  first,  it  is  known  that,  as  the  external  temperature 
falls  and  the  skin  becomes  chilled,  the  sensory  stimulation  thus 
produced  acts  upon  the  nerve  centers  and  leads  to  an  increased 
discharge  along  the  motor  paths  to  the  muscle.  The  tone  of  the 
muscles  increases  and  may  pass  into  the  visible  movements  of 
shivering.  By  this  means  the  production  of  heat  within  the  body 
is  increased,  as  it  were,  automatically.  Similarly,  an  increase  in 
mental  activity,  so-called  mental  concentration,  whether  of  an 
emotional  or  an  intellectual  kind,  leads,  by  its  effect  on  the  spinal 
motor  centei"s,  to  a  state  of  greater  muscle  tonus,  the  increased 
muscular  tension  being,  as  it  were,  visible  to  our  eyes. 

The  Condition  of  Rigor. — When  the  muscle  substance  dies 
it  becomes  rigid,  or  goes  into  a  condition  of  rigor:  it  passes  from 
a  fluid  to  a  solid  state.  The  rigor  that  appears  in  the  muscles  after 
somatic  death  is  designated  usually  as  rigor  mortis,  since  its  occur- 
rence explains  the  death  stiffening  in  the  cadaver.  It  is  charac- 
terized by  several  features:  the  muscles  become  rigid,  they  shorten, 
they  develop  an  acid  reaction,  and  they  lose  their  irritability  to 
stimuli.  Whether  all  of  these  features  are  necessary  parts  of  the 
condition  of  rigor  mortis  it  is  difficult  to  say;  the  matter  will  be 
discussed  briefly  below.  Some  of  the  facts  which  have  been  ob- 
served regarding  rigor  mortis  are  as  follows:  After  the  death  of  an 
individual  the  muscles  enter  into  rigor  mortis  at  different  times. 
Usually  there  is  a  certain  sequence,  the  order  given  being  the  jaws, 
neck,  trunk,  upper  limbs,  lower  limbs,  the  rigor  taking,  therefore,  a 
descending  course.  The  actual  time  of  the  appearance  of  the  rigidity 
varies  greatly,  however;  it  may  come  on  within  a  few  minutes  or  a 
number  of  hours  may  elapse  before  it  can  be  detected,  the  chief  de- 
termining factor  in  this  respect  being  the  condition  of  the  muscle 
itself.  Death  after  great  muscular  exertion,  as  in  the  case  of  hunted 
animals  or  soldiers  killed  in  battle,  is  usually  followed  quickly  by 
muscle  rigor;  indeed,  in  extreme  cases  it  may  develop  almost  imme- 
diately. Death  after  wasting  diseases  is  also  followed  by  an  early 
4 


50  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE, 

rigor,  which  in  this  case  is  of  a  more  feeble  character  and  shorter 
duration.  The  development  of  rigor  is  very  much  hastened  by  many 
drugs  that  bring  about  the  rapid  death  of  the  muscle  substance,  such 
as  veratrin,  hydrocyanic  acid,  caffein,  and  chloroform.  A  frog's  mus- 
cle exposed  to  chloroform  vapor  goes  into  rigor  at  once  and  shortens 
to  a  remarkable  extent.  Rigor  is  said  also  to  occur  more  rapidly 
in  a  muscle  still  connected  with  the  central  nervous  system  than 
in  one  whose  motor  nerve  has  been  severed.  After  a  certain 
interval,  which  also  varies  greatly, — from  one  to  six  days  in  human 
beings, — the  rigidity  passes  off,  the  muscles  again  become  soft  and 
flexible;  this  phenomenon  is  known  as  the  release  from  rigor.  In 
the  cold-blooded  animals  the  development  of  rigor  is  very  much 
slower  than  in  warm-blooded  animals.  Upon  an  isolated  frog's 
muscle  the  most  striking  fact  regarding  rigor  mortis  is  the  shortening 


Fig.  24. — Curve  of  normal  rigor  mortis,  gastrocnemius  muscle  of  frog.  The  curve 
was  obtained  upon  a  kymographion  making  one  revolution  in  eight  days.  The  marks  on 
the  line  below  the  curve  indicate  intervals  of  six  hours.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  shortening 
required  eighteen  hours,  the  relaxation  about  seventy-two  hours. 

that  the  muscle  undergoes.  This  shortening  or  contraction  comes 
on  slowly,  as  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  figure,  but  in  extent 
it  exceeds  the  simple  contraction  obtainable  from  the  living  muscle 
by  means  of  a  maximal  stimulus.  This  part  of  the  phenomenon 
is,  however,  much  less  marked  apparently  in  mammalian  muscle, 
and  Folin*  states  that,  if  rigor  be  caused  in  frog's  muscle  by 
lowering  its  temperature  to  — 15°  C,  the  muscle  becomes  rigid 
merely  without  undergoing  any  shortening  or  change  in  translu- 
cency.  The  usual  explanation  that  is  given  of  rigor  is  that  it  is 
due  to  a  coagulation  of  the  fluid  substance,  the  muscle  plasma,  of 
which  the  fibers  are  constituted.  During  life  the  proteids  exist  in 
a  liquid  or  viscous  condition;  after  death  they  coagulate  into  a 
solid  form.  This  view  is  referred  to  again  in  the  chapter  dealing 
with  the  chemistry  of  muscle  and  nerve;  it  has  received  much 
*  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  9,  374,  1903. 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF    CONTRACTION.  51 

support  from  the  investigations  of  Kiihne,*  who  proved  that  the 
muscle  plasma  is  really  eoagulable.  After  first  freezing  and  mincing 
the  muscles  he  succeeded  in  squeezing  out  the  plasma  from  the 
living  fibers  and  showed  that  it  subsequently  clotted.  While  the 
coagulation  theory  of  rigor  explains  the  greater  rigidity  of  the 
muscle,  it  does  not  furnish  in  itself  a  satisfactory  explanation  of 
the  shortening,  and  the  fact,  as  stated  above,  that  the  rigidity 
may  occur  without  the  shortening  indicates  that  this  latter  process 
may  possibly  be  due  to  changes  that  precede  the  appearance  of 
rigidity.  In  addition  to  the  rigor  mortis  that  occurs  after  death 
at  ordinary  temperatures  a  condition  of  rigor  may  be  induced 
rapidly  by  raising  the  temperature  of  the  muscle  to  a  certain  point. 
Rigor  induced  in  this  way  is  designated  as  heat  rigor  or  rigor  caloris. 
Much  uncertainty  has  prevailed  as  to  whether  heat  rigor  is  different 
essentially  from  death  rigor.  According  to  some  physiologists,  the 
processes  may  be  regarded  as  the  same,  the  heat  rigor  being  simply 
a  death  rigor  that  is  rapidly  developed  by  the  high  temperature, 
this  latter  condition  accelerating  the  chemical  changes  leading  to 
rigor,  as  is  the  case,  for  instance,  in  the  action  of  chloroform.  This 
view  is  supported  by  a  study  of  the  chemical  changes  that  take  place 
under  the  two  conditions,  as  will  be  described  later,  and  by  the  fact 
that  some  of  the  conditions  that  influence  one  phenomenon  have  a 
parallel  effect  upon  the  other.  For  instance,  death  rigor  is  accel- 
erated by  previous  use  of  the  muscle,  and  the  same  is  true  for  heat 
rigor.  While  a  resting  frog's  muscle  begins  to  go  into  heat  rigor, 
as  judged  by  the  shortening,  at  37°  to  40°  C;  a  muscle  that  has 
been  greatly  fatigued  shows  the  same  phenomenon  at  25°  to 
27°  C.f  According  to  other  observers,  heat  rigor  is  due  to  an 
ordinary  heat  coagulation  of  the  proteids  present  in  the  muscle 
fiber.  It  has  been  pointed  out,  J  for  instance,  that  in  frogs'  muscles 
three  different  proteids  are  known  to  be  present,  with  three  dif- 
ferent temperatures  of  heat  coagulation, — namely,  myogen  fibrin, 
35°  to  40°  C. ;  myosin,  47°  to  50°  C. ;  and  myogen,  58°  to  65°  C,  and 
that  when  the  living  muscle  is  heated  what  is  ordinarily  designated 
as  the  contraction  of  heat  rigor  comes  on  at  the  first  temperature, 
35°  to  40°  C,  while  small  additional  contractions  occur  at  the 
temperatures  of  coagulation  of  the  other  two  proteids.  This  view, 
however,  does  not  make  clear  why  the  first  of  these  coagulations, 
that  of  myogen  fibrin  at  40°,  should  produce  such  a  large  contrac- 
tion, 80  to  90  per  cent,  of  the  total  shortening,  although  this  proteid 
is  present  in  smaller  quantities  than  the  other  two.     As  long,  how- 

*  Kuhne,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1859,  p.  788. 
t  Latimer,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  2,  29,  1899. 
j  Brodie  and   Richardson,  "  Philosophical  Trans.,  Roy.  Soc,"  London, 
1899,  191,  p.  127. 


52  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

ever,  as  it  remains  uncertain  whether  or  not  the  shortening  and 
the  coagulation  are  necessary  features  of  death  stiffening,  it  seems 
premature  to  speculate  upon  the  identity  or  difference  between 
the  coagulation  and  shortening  caused  by  death  and  the  similar 
phenomenon  caused  by  high  temperatures. 

PLAIN  OR  LONG  STRIATED  MUSCULAR  TISSUE. 

Occurrence  and  Innervation. — Plain  or  long  striated  muscular 
tissue  occurs  in  the  walls  of  all  the  so-called  hollow  viscera  of  the 
body,  such  as  the  heart  and  blood-vessels,  the  alimentary  canal, 
the  genital  and  urinary  organs,  the  bronchi,  etc.,  and  in  other 
special  localities,  such  as  the  intrinsic  muscles  of  the  eyeball,  the 
muscles  attached  to  the  hair  folUcles,  etc.  In  structure  it  differs 
fundamentally  from  cross-striated  muscle,  in  that  it  occurs  in  the 
form  of  relatively  minute  cells  each  with  a  single  nucleus,  which 
are  united  to  form,  in  most  cases,  muscular  membranes  constituting 
a  part  of  the  walls  of  the  hollow  viscera.  These  muscle  cells,  in 
most  cases  at  least,  are  supplied  with  nerve  fibers  which  originate 
directly  from  the  so-called  sympathetic  nerve  cells,  and  only  in- 
directly, therefore,  from  the  central  nervous  system. 

Speaking  generally,  the  contractions  of  this  tissue  are  removed 
from  the  direct  control  of  the  will,  being  regulated  by  reflex  and 
usually  unconscious  stimulations  from  the  central  nervous  system. 
All  the  important  movements  of  the  internal  organs,  or,  as  they 
are  sometimes  called,  the  organs  of  vegetative  life,  are  effected 
through  the  activity  of  this  contractile  tissue.  From  this  stand- 
point their  function  may  be  regarded  as  more  important  than  that 
of  the  mass  of  the  voluntary  musculature,  since  so  far  as  the  mere 
maintenance  of  the  life  of  the  organism  is  concerned,  the  proper 
action  and  co-ordination  of  the  movements  of  the  visceral  organs 
is  at  all  times  essential. 

Distinctive  Properties. — The  phenomena  of  contraction  shown 
b}'^  plain  muscles  are,  in  general,  closely  similar  to  those  already 
studied  for  striated  muscle,  the  one  great  difference  being  the 
much  greater  sluggishness  of  the  changes.  Plain  muscles  differ 
among  themselves,  of  course,  as  do  the  striated  muscles,  but,  speak- 
ing generally,  the  simple  contractions  of  plain  muscle  have  a  very- 
long  latent  period  that  may  be  a  hundred  or  five  hundred  times 
as  long  as  that  of  cross-striated  muscle,  and  the  phases  of  shortening 
and  of  relaxation  are  also  similarly  prolonged;  so  that  the  whole 
movement  of  contraction  is  relatively  slow  and  gentle  (see  Fig. 
25).  Plain  muscle  responds  to  artificial  stimuli,  but  the  electrical 
current  is  obviously  a  less  adequate — that  is,  a  less  normal — stimulus 
for  this  tissue  than  for  the  striped  muscle.     The  amount  of  current 


THE    PHENOMENON    OF   CONTRACTION.  53 

necessary  to  make  it  contract  is  far  greater.  The  amount  of  con- 
traction varies  with  the  strength  of  stimulus, — that  is,  the  tissue 
gives  submaximal  and  maximal  contractions.  Two  successive 
stimuli  properly  spaced  will  cause  a  larger  or  summated  contraction, 
and  a  series  of  stimuli  will  give  a  fused  or  tetanic  contraction.  The 
rate  of  stimulation  necessary  to  produce  tetanus  is,  of  course,  much 
slower  than  for  cross-striped  muscle.  The  stomach  muscle  of  the 
frog,  for  instance,  requires  only  one  stimulus  at  each  five  sec- 
onds to  cause  tetanus.*  A  distinguishing  and  important  charac- 
teristic of  the  plain  muscle  is  its  power  to  remain  in  tone, — that 
is,  to  remain  for  long  periods  in  a  condition  of  greater  or  less  con- 
traction. Doubtless  this  tonic  contraction  under  normal  relations 
is  usually  dependent  upon  stimulation  received  through  the  ner- 
vous system,  but  the  muscle  when  completely  isolated  from  the 


Fig.  25.— Curve  of  simple  contraction  of  plain  muscle.  The  middle  line  is  the  time 
record,  marking  intervals  of  a  second.  The  lowermost  line  indicates  at  the  break  the  mo- 
ment of  stimulation  (short-lasting,  tetanizing  current).  It  will  be  seen  that  the  latent  period 
between  beginning  of  stimulation  and  beginning  of  contraction  was  equal  to  about  three 
seconds. 


central  nervous  system,  whether  in  or  out  of  the  body,  continues 
to  exhibit  the  phenomenon  of  tone  to  a  remarkable  degree.  In 
most  of  the  organs  in  which- plain  muscle  occurs  there  are  present 
also  numerous  nerve  cells,  and  it  is  therefore  still  a  question  as  to 
whether  the  tonic  changes  shown  by  this  tissue  depend  upon  a 
property  of-  the  muscle  itself  or-  upon  their  intrinsic  nerve  cells. 
Most  observers  adopt  the  former  view.  The  importance  of  this 
property  of  tone  in  the  plain  muscle  tissues  will  be  made  fully 
apparent  in  the  descriptions  of  the  physiology  of  the  organs  of  cir- 
culation and  digestion.  Plain  muscle  may  exhibit  also  the  phenome- 
non of  rhythmical  activity, — that  is,  under  proper  conditions  it  may 

*  Schultz,  "Zur  Physiologie  der  langsgestreiften  (glatten)  Muskeln," 
"Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  suppl.  volume,  1903,  p.  1.  See  also  Stewart,  "Amer- 
ican Journal  of  Physiology,"  4,  185,  1900. 


54  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE    AND    NERVE. 

contract  and  relax  rhythmically  like  heart  tissue.*  Such  movements 
have  been  observed  and  studied  upon  the  plain  muscle  of  the  ureter, 
the  bladder,  the  esophagus,  stomach,  and  other  portions  of  the 
alimentary  canal,  the  spleen,  the  blood-vessels,  etc.  This  property 
seems  to  be  very  unequally  distributed  among  the  different  kinds 
of  plain  muscle  found  in  the  same  or  different  animals,  but  this 
fact  serves  only  to  illustrate  the  point  already  sufficiently  empha- 
sized, that  grouping  one  kind  of  tissue — e.  g.,  plain  muscle — into 
a  common  class  does  not  signify  that  the  properties  of  all  the  mem- 
bers of  the  group  are  identical.  The  question  as  to  how  far  the  phe- 
nomenon of  rhythmical  contraction  is  entireh^  muscular  and  how  far 
it  depends  upon  intrinsic  nerve  cells  is  a  complex  one;  the  answer 
will  probably  vary  for  different  organs,  and  the  subject  will  therefore 
be  considered  in  the  organs  as  they  are  treated. 

Cardiac  Muscular  Tissue. — As  the  muscle  cells  of  cardiac 
tissue  are  somewhat  intermediate  in  structure  between  the  striated 
fibers  of  voluntary  muscle  and  the  cells  of  plain  muscles,  so  their 
physiological  properties  to  some  extent  stand  between  these  two 
extremes.  The  rate  of  contraction,  for  instance,  while  slower  than 
that  of  the  fibers  of  skeletal  muscles,  is  more  rapid  than  that  of 
plain  muscle.  The  most  striking  peculiarity  of  heart  muscle  is, 
however,  its  power  of  rhythmical  contractility,  and  this,  as  well  as 
its  other  properties,  are  so  directly  concerned  with  its  functions 
as  an  organ  of  circulation  that  they  may  be  discussed  more  profit- 
ably in  that  connection. 

Ciliated  Cells. — In  the  mammalian  body  the  phenomenon  of 
contractility  is  exhibited  not  only  by  the  well-defined  muscular 
tissue,  but  also  by  the  leucocytes  and  especially  by  the  cilia  of  the 
ciliated  epithelium.  Epithelium  with  motile  cilia  is  found  lining 
the  mucous  membrane  of  the  air-passages  in  the  trachea,  larynx, 
bronchi,  and  nose,  in  the  lacrimal  duct  and  sac,  in  the  genital  pas- 
sages, uterus  and  Fallopian  tubes  and  the  tubules  of  the  epididymis, 
and  in  the  Eustachian  tube  and  part  of  the  middle  ear.  Similar 
cells  are  found  lining  the  ventricles  of  the  brain  and  the  central 
canal  of  the  cord.  The  cilia  in  this  latter  position  have  been  demon- 
strated to  be  motile  in  the  frog,  but  whether  this  is  true  for  the  mam- 
mal has  not  been  shown.  So  also  in  the  neck  of  the  uriniferous  tubule 
ciliated  cells  are  said  to  occur,  but  whether  they  are  motile  or  not  has 
not  been  demonstrated.  In  the  internal  ear  and  the  olfactory  mucous 
membrane  the  so-called  sense  cells  are  also  ciliated,  but  here  at  least 
the  cilia  are  probably  not  motile.  Ordinarily  each  ciliated  epithelial 
cell  carries  a  bunch  of  cilia,  all  of  which  contract  together,  but 
motile  protoplasmic  prolongations  of  the  cell  may  occur  singly,  as 

*  Engelmann,  "Archiv  f.  d.  ges.  Physiologie,"  2,  243,  1869.  Stiles, 
"Amer.  Jour,  of  Physiology,"  5,  338,  1901. 


THE    PHENOMENON   OF   CONTRACTION.  55 

is  illustrated  in  the  spermatozoa,  for  instance,  and  in  many  of  the 
protozoa  and  plant  cells.  In  the  lower  forms  of  life  cilia  play 
obviously  a  very  important  role  in  locomotion,  the  capture  of  food, 
and  respiration,  and  their  form  and  manner  of  movement  vary 
greatly.  The  form  of  movement  or  manner  of  contraction  was 
formerly  described  under  four  heads, — the  hook  form,  the  pendular, 
the  undulatory  or  wave-like,  and  the  funnel  form  or  infundibulary. 
With  the  exception  of  the  spermatozoa,  the  cilia  met  in  mam- 
mals show  the  first  form  of  contraction.  The  little  processes  are 
contracted  quickly  in  one  direction,  so  as  to  form  a  hook  shape, 
and  then  relax  more  slowly,  the  relaxation  taking  several  times 
as  long  as  the  contraction.  The  whole  movement  is  rhythmical  and 
very  rapid.  The  cilia  of  the  epithelium  of  the  frog's  pharynx  and 
esophagus,  which  have  been  the  most  frequently  studied  among 
the  higher  animals,  contract,  according  to  Engelmann,  at  the  rate 
of  12  times  per  second.  When  a  field  of  epithelium  is  observed 
under  the  microscope  the  contractions  pass  over  it  in  a  defi- 
nite direction,  but  so  rapidly  that  the  eye  is  not  able  to  analyze 
them,  one  obtains  the  impression  simply  of  a  swiftly  flowing  current. 
As  the  ciha  begin  to  die,  their  movements  become  less  rapid,  and 
the  nature  of  the  contractions  and  their  progress  from  cell  to  cell 
can  be  satisfactorily  determined.  In  the  mammalia  the  function 
of  the  ciliated  epithelium  is  supposed  to  be  entirely  mechanical, — 
that  is,  they  move  along  substances  lying  upon  them.  In  the  ovi- 
ducts they  move  or  help  to  move  the  ovum  toward  the  uterus, 
and  in  this  position,  moreover,  their  motion  is  supposed  to 
guide  the  spermatozoon  from  the  uterus  toward  the  oviducts, — that 
is,  the  resistance  offered  to  the  motile  spermatozoon  guides  its 
movements.  So  in  the  respiratory  passages  foreign  particles  of 
various  sorts,  together  with  the  secretion  of  the  mucous  glands, 
are  moved  toward  the  mouth,  the  effect  being  to  free  the  air- 
passages  from  obstruction.  The  contraction  and  relaxation  of  the 
cilia  are  assumed  to  be  phenomena  of  essentially  the  same  order 
as  those  exhibited  by  the  muscle  tissue.  A  theory  that  will  ade- 
quately explain  one  will  doubtless  be  applicable  to  the  other. 
Many  interesting  facts  have  been  established  regarding  ciliary 
movements.  The  contractions  of  the  cilia  in  any  given  field — 
the  trachea,  for  instance — follow  in  a  definite  sequence  and  are 
co-ordinated.  The  waves  of  contraction  progress  in  a  definite 
direction.  This  fact  increases  greatly  the  effectiveness  of  the  cilia 
in  performing  work.  Thus,  in  spite  of  their  extremely  minute  size 
it  is  estimated  that  an  area  of  a  square  centimeter  is  capable  of 
moving  a  load  of  336  gms.  The  contractions  are  automatic, — 
that  is,  the  stimulus  causing  them  is  not  dependent  upon  a  con- 
nection with  the  nervous  system,  but  upon  processes  arising  within 


56  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

the  cell  itself;  the  cilia  of  a  single  completely  isolated  cell  may 
continue  to  contract  vigorously.  The  movement  may  continue 
for  several  days  after  the  death  of  the  individual,  thus  again  showing 
the  physiological  independence  of  the  structure.  The  ciliated  cells 
may  conduct  a  stimulus  or  impulse  to  other. cells  even  after  its 
own  cilia  have  lost  their  contractility.  This  fact  is  particularly 
significant  in  general  physiology,  as  it  aids  in  showing  that  the 
property  of  conductivity  which  is  exhibited  in  such  high  degree 
by  nerve  fibers  is  possessed  to  a  lower  degree  by  other  tissues. 
The  ciliary  movement  is  affected  by  variations  in  temperature,  and 
if  the  temperature  passes  beyond  an  optimum  point  the  cilia  fall 
into  a  condition  resembling  heat  rigor  in  the  muscle.  Their  move- 
ments are  affected  also  by  the  reaction  of  the  medium,  being  at 
first  accelerated  and  then  slowed  or  destroyed  by  a  slight  degree 
of  acidity  and  favored  by  a  very  slight  degree  of  alkalinity.* 

*  References  for  physiology  of  ciliary  movement:  Verworn,  "General 
Physiology,"  English  translation  by  Lee;  Piitter,  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiol- 
ogie,"  1902,  vol.  ii,  part  ii;  Engelmann,  article,  "Gils  vibratils,"  in  Richet's 
"  Dictionnaire  de  Physiologie,"  vol.  iii,  1898. 


CHAPTER   II. 

THE  CHEMICAL  COMPOSITION  OF  MUSCLE  AND  THE 

CHEMICAL  CHANGES  OF  CONTRACTION  AND 

OF  RIGOR  MORTIS. 

Muscle  Plasma. — The  beginning  of  our  present  knowledge  of 
the  chemical  composition  of  muscle  is  found  in  some  interesting  ex- 
periments made  by  Kiihne  upon  frog's  muscle.  Kiihne  froze  the 
living  muscle  to  a  hard  mass,  cut  it  into  fine  shavings  with  cold 
knives,  and  ground  the  pieces  thoroughly  in  a  cold  mortar.  The 
fine  muscle  snow  thus  obtained  was  put  under  high  pressure  and 
a  liquid  expressed  which  was  assumed  to  represent  the  fluid  living 
substance  in  the  normal  fiber.  This  muscle  plasma  clotted  on  stand- 
ing, much  as  blood  does,  the  muscle  clot  shrinking  and  squeezing 
out  a  muscle  serum.  Similar  experiments  have  since  been  per- 
formed by  Halliburton*  on  mammalian  muscle.  This  spontaneous 
clotting  of  the  living  plasma  has  been  held  to  be  important  in 
showing  the  probable  cause  of  death  rigor. 

Composition  of  the  Muscle  Plasma. — Using  the  term  muscle 
plasma  to  designate  the  entire  contents  of  the  muscle  fiber  within 
the  sarcolemma,  it  is  obvious  that  it  should  contain  all  the  con- 
stituents that  properly  belong  to  the  muscle,  in  contradistinction 
to  the  substances  found  in  the  connective  tissue  binding  the  muscle 
fibers  together. 

The  constituents  in  addition  to  water  that  are  known  to  occur 
in  muscle  are  very  numerous  indeed,  and  difficult  to  classify.  They 
may  be  grouped  under  the  following  heads:  (1)  Proteids.  (2)  Car- 
bohydrates and  fats.  (.3)  Nitrogenous  waste  products.  (4)  Special 
substances,  such  as  lactic  acid,  inosite,  inosinic  acid,  phosphocamic 
acid.  (5)  Pigments.  (6)  Ferments.  (7)  Inorganic  salts.  Very 
little  that  is  positive  can  be  stated  regarding  the  physiological  role 
of  most  of  these  constituents,  the  interest  that  attaches  to  them 
at  present  being  largely  on  the  chemical  side. 

The  Muscle  Proteids.f — The  proteids  of  the  muscle  have  been 
investigated  by   a  number  of  observers,  but  unfortunately  the 

*  Halliburton,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  8,  133,  1888. 

t  Von  Fiirth,  "Archiv  f.  exper-'Path.  u.  Pharmakol.,"  36,  231,  1895.  See 
also  Halliburton,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  8,  133,  1888;  and  Stewart  and 
Sollman,  ibid.,  24,  427,  1899. 

57 


58  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE    AND    NERVE. 

terminology  employed  has  not  been  uniform,  and  the  facts  so  far 
as  they  are  known  to  us  seem  to  be  obviously  incomplete.  Ac- 
cording to  von  Fiirth,  two  proteids  may  be  obtained  from  mam- 
malian muscle  by  extracting  it  with  dilute  saline  solutions, — namely, 
myosin  and  myogen,  the  latter  existing  to  three  or  four  times  the 
amount  of  the  former.  Myosin  belongs  to  the  globulin  group  of 
proteids  (see  appendix);  it  is  coagulated  by  heat  at  44°  to  50°  C, 
it  is  precipitated  by  dialysis  or  by  weak  acids,  it  is  easily  precipi- 
tated from  its  solutions  by  adding  an  excess  of  neutral  salts,  such 
as  sodium  chlorid,  magnesium  or  ammonium  sulphate.  With 
the  last  salt  it  is  completely  precipitated  when  the  salt  is  added 
to  one-half  saturation  or  less.  Its  most  interesting  property,  how- 
ever, is  that  on  standing  at  ordinary  temperatures  it  passes  over 
into  an  insoluble  modification  which  separates  out  as  a  sort  of 
clot.  Following  the  terminology  used  for  the  blood,  this  insoluble 
modification  is  called  myosin  fibrin.  Myogen,  the  other  proteid, 
seems  to  fall  into  the  group  of  albumins  rather  than  globulins. 
It  is  not  precipitated  by  dialysis  and  requires  more  than  half 
saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  for  its  complete  precipitation. 
It  is  coagulated  by  heat  at  a  temperature  of  55°  to  65°  C.  Solutions 
of  myogen  on  standing  also  undergo  a  species  of  clotting,  the  in- 
soluble proteid  that  is  formed  in  this  case  being  called  myogen  fibrin. 
It  appears,  however,  that  in  changing  to  myogen  fibrin  the  myogen 
passes  through  an  intermediate  stage,  designated  as  soluble  myogen 
fibrin,  in  which  its  temperature  of  heat  coagulation  is  as  low  as 
30°  to  40°  C, — the  lowest  temperature  recorded  for  any  proteid. 
As  was  stated  in  the  paragraph  on  muscle  rigor,  it  is  known  that 
frog's  muscle  goes  into  heat  rigor  at  about  37°  to  40°  C,  and  in 
accordance  with  this  fact  it  is  stated  that  this  proteid,  soluble 
myogen  fibrin,  which  is  not  present  in  mammalian  muscle,  occurs 
normally  in  the  muscle  of  the  frog  and  also  of  the  fishes.  On  the 
basis  of  these  facts  the  rigidity  of  death  rigor  is  explained  by  as- 
suming that  both  of  these  proteids  exist  in  the  living  muscle,  and 
that  after  death  they  undergo  a  partial  or  complete  coagulation 
according  to  the  following  scheme : 

Myosin.  Myogen. 

t  T 

Myosin  fibrin.  Soluble  myogen  fibrin. 

I 

t 
Myogen  fibrin. 

In  the  dead  muscle  we  should  find,  therefore,  the  insoluble 
myosin  fibrin  and  myogen  fibrin,  together  with  more  or  less  of  the 
original  myosin  and  myogen.     Myogen  is  said  not  to  occur  in  the 


THE    CHEMISTRY   OF   MUSCLE.  59 

muscles  of  the  invertebrates.  It  should  be  added  that  after  the 
most  complete  extraction  with  saline  the  muscle  fibers  still  retain 
much  proteid  material,  and  its  structural  appearance,  so  far  as 
cross-striation  is  concerned,  remains  unaltered.  The  portion  of 
proteid  material  thus  left  in  the  muscle  fiber  as  a  sort  of  skeleton 
framework  is  designated  as  the  muscle  stroma.  It  is  not  soluble 
in  solutions  of  neutral  salts,  but  dissolves  readily  in  solutions  of 
dilute  alkalies.  It  is  at  present  uncertain  whether  the  myosin  and 
myogen  represent  the  proteid  constituents  of  the  contractile  ele- 
ments of  the  muscle  fibers  or  of  the  undifferentiated  portion,  the 
sarcoplasm.  The  proteids  of  plain  muscle  tissue  and  of  cardiac 
muscle  have  not  received  so  much  attention  as  those  of  voluntary 
muscle.  It  is  stated,  however,  that  the  proteids  extracted  from 
these  tissues  by  salt  solutions  are  coagulable  on  standing,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  extracts  of  voluntary  muscle.  In  plain  muscle 
two  proteids,  in  addition  to  some  nucleoproteid,  are  described, 
one  belonging  to  the  albumin  and  one  to  the  globulin  class,  but 
the  identity  or  relationship  of  these  proteids  to  those  above  de- 
scribed has  not  been  established.  In  heart  muscle,  myosin  and 
myogen  occur  in  practically  the  same  proportions  as  in  voluntary 
muscle.* 

The  Carbohydrates  of  Muscle. — Muscle  contains  a  certain 
amount  of  sugar,  dextrose  or  dextrose  and  isomaltose,  and  also 
under  normal  conditions  a  considerable  quantity  of  glycogen,  or 
so-called  animal  starch.  The  formation  and  the  consumption  of 
glycogen  in  the  body  constitute  one  of  the  most  interesting  chapters 
in  the  physiology  of  nutrition,  and  the  relations  of  glycogen  will 
be  treated  more  fully  under  that  head.  It  may  be  stated  here, 
however,  that  the  muscular  tissue  has  the  power  of  converting  the 
sugar  brought  to  it  by  the  blood  into  glycogen.  This  glycogenetic 
action  of  the  muscle  is  represented  in  principle  by  the  reaction 

CeHiaOg  —  HjO  =  CjHioOj. 
Dextrose.  Glycogen. 

The  glycogen  thus  formed  is  stored  in  the  muscle  and  forms 
a  constant  constituent  of  well-nourished  muscle  in  the  resting 
condition,  the  amount  varying  between  0.5  and  0.9  per  cent,  of 
the  weight  of  the  muscle.  The  glycogen  thus  stored  in  the  muscle 
is  consumed  by  the  tissue  during  its  activity,  and  it  is  assumed 
that  before  it  is  thus  consumed  it  is  converted  back  into  sugar. 
The  glycogen,  therefore,  itself  represents  a  local  deposit  of  carbo- 
hydrate nutritive  material,  resembling  in  this  respect  the  fat.  The 
sugar  and  the  glycogen  must  be  considered  as  one  from  the  stand- 

*  Vincent  and  Lewis,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  26,  445,  1901;  also  "  Zeit- 
schrift  f.  physiolog.  Chemie,"  34,  417,  1901-2;  and  Stewart  and  Sollman, 
loc.  cit. 


60  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

point  of  the  nutrition  of  the  muscle.  During  muscular  activity 
the  store  of  glycogen  is  used  up,  and  if  the  activity  is  sufficiently 
prolonged  may  be  made  to  disappear  entirely.  Among  the  many 
uncertain  and  contradictory  statements  regarding  the  chemical 
changes  in  active  muscle,  this  fact  stands  out  in  pleasant  contrast 
as  one  that  is  satisfactorily  demonstrated. 

Phosphocarnic  Acid  (Nucleon). — A  peculiar  substance  con- 
taining phosphorus  was  discovered  by  Siegfried  in  the  muscle  ex- 
tracts.* This  substance  seems  to  resemble  the  proteids,  but  has  a 
complex  and  peculiar  structure,  as  is  shown  by  its  split  products 
when  hydolyzed  by  boiling  with  baryta  water.  Under  these  condi- 
tions there  are  formed  carbon  dioxid,  phosphoric  acid,  a  carbohy- 
drate body,  succinic  and  lactic  acids,  and  a  crystallizable  nitrogenous 
acid  body  which  is  designated  as  carnic  acid  (CjgHjgNgOg).  Siegfried 
assumes  that  this  latter  substance  is  identical  with  one  of  the  pep- 
tones (antipeptone)  formed  during  digestion,  and  conceives,  there- 
fore, that  his  phosphocarnic  acid  is  a  complex  substance  built 
up  from  a  peptone  and  a  phosphorus-containing  compound.  Com- 
pounds of  simple  proteids  with  phosphorus-containing  bodies 
(nucleic  acids)  are  designated  usually  as  nucleins;  for  this  com- 
pound of  a  peptone  with  a  phosphorus-containing  complex  Sieg- 
fried suggests  the  name  of  nucleon.  By  the  addition  of  ferric 
chlorid  the  nucleon  is  precipitated  readily  from  muscle  extracts 
as  an  iron  compound,  carniferrin,  and  under  this  name  has  come 
into  the  market  as  a  presumably  efficient  therapeutic  preparation 
of  iron.  The  discoverer  of  nucleon  has  attributed  to  it  a  very- 
great  physiological  importance,  as  a  source  of  energy  to  the  muscle, 
and  as  an  efficient  means  of  transportation  of  iron,  calcium,  potas- 
sium, and  magnesium  into  the  muscle  substance,  particularly  in  such 
articles  of  diet  as  soups,  bouillons,  meat  extracts,  etc.  It  must  be 
stated,  however,  that  there  still  remains  some  doubt  as  to  the 
chemical  individuality  of  the  nucleon  or  the  nucleons,  their  existence 
in  normal  muscle,  and  their  physiological  role.  The  substance, 
whether  a  well-defined  chemical  individual  or  not,  is  most  interest- 
ing. Its  properties  are  such  as  would  aid  in  explaining  the  occur- 
rence of  some  of  the  known  products  of  the  chemical  changes  during 
contraction;  but  obviously  further  investigation  is  still  needed 
before  such  an  application  can  be  made  with  confidence. 

Lactic  Acid  (CgHgOg). — Lactic  acid  is  found  in  varjdng  amounts 
in  the  extracts  of  muscle.  The  acid  that  is  obtained  is  the  so-called 
ethidene  lactic  acid  or  a-hj^droxypropionic  acid  (CH3CHOHCOOH), 
and  differs  from  the  lactic  acid  as  found  in  sour  milk  in  that  it  ro- 
tates the  plane  of  polarized  light  to  the  right.     The  lactic  acid  in 

*  Siegfried,  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  21,  360,  1896;  also  28,  524, 
1899. 


THE    CHEMISTRY   OF   MUSCLE.  61 

sour  milk  is  produced  by  bacterial  fermentation,  and  is  inactive  to 
polarized  light,  because  it  exists  in  racemic  form;  that  is,  it  con- 
sists of  equal  amounts  of  the  right-handed  form  which  turns  the 
plane  of  polarization  to  the  right  and  of  the  left-handed  form 
which  turns  it  to  the  left.  In  the  muscle  the  right-handed  form 
is  found  mainly  or  only,  and  this  form  therefore  is  frequently 
designated  as  sarcolactic  (or  paralactic)  acid. 

The  Nitrogenous  Extractives  (Nitrogenous  Wastes). — 
Muscle  extracts  contain  numerous  crystallizable  nitrogenous  sub- 
stances which  are  regarded  as  the  end-products  of  the  disassimila- 
tion  or  catabolism  of  the  living  proteid  material  of  the  muscle. 
The  number  of  these  substances  that  has  been  found  in  traces  or 
weighable  quantities  is  rather  large.  They  have  aroused  great 
interest  because  their  structure  throws  some  light  on  the  nature 
of  proteid  catabolism.  The  one  that  occurs  in  largest  amount  is 
creatin,  C4HgN302,  or  methyl-guanidin-acetic  acid,  NHCNH2NCH3- 
CH2COOH.  Creatin  may  be  present  in  amounts  equal  to  0.3  per 
cent,  of  the  weight  of  the  muscle.  It  is  given  off  to  the  blood 
and  eventually  excreted  in  the  urine  as  creatinin  (C4H7N3O),  which 
is  formed  from  creatin  by  the  loss  of  a  molecule  of  water.  The 
creatinin  itself  may  occur  in  the  muscle  in  small  quantities.  In 
addition  there  is  a  group  of  bodies  supposed  to  represent  the  end- 
products  of  the  breaking  up  of  the  nucleins  of  the  muscle  all  of 
which  belong  to  the  so-called  purin  bases.  These  are:  Uric  acid 
(C5H4N4O3),  xanthin  (CjH.N.O^),  hypoxanthin  (CH^N^O),  guanin 
{C5H5N5O),  adenin  (C5H5N5),  and  carnin  (C^HgN^Og).  They  will 
be  referred  to  more  fully  in  the  section  on  nutrition.  Still  other 
bodies  of  similar  physiological  significance  have  been  described 
from  time  to  time.  These  nitrogenous  extracts  are  found  in  the 
various  meat  extracts  and  meat  juices  used  in  dietetics.  While 
they  possess  no  direct  nutritive  value,  it  seems  probable  (see 
chapter  on  gastric  digestion)  that  they  may  be  very  effective  in- 
directly by  stimulating  the  secretion  of  the  gastric  glands.. 

Pigments. — The  red  color  of  many  muscles  is  believed  to  be 
due  to  the  presence  of  a  special  pigment  which  resembles  in  its 
structure  and  its  properties  the  hemoglobin  of  the  red  blood 
corpuscles,  and  perhaps  is  identical  with  it.  This  pigment  is  known 
as  myohematin  or  myochrome.  It  belongs  presumably  to  the 
group  of  so-called  respiratory  pigments,  which  have  the  property 
of  holding  oxygen  in  loose  combination,  and  by  virtue  of  this 
property  it  takes  part  in  the  absorption  of  oxygen  by  the  muscular 
tissue. 

Enzymes. — A  number  of  unorganized  ferments  or  enzymes 
have  been  described  by  one  observer  or  another.  In  this  tissue 
as  in  others  the  processes  of  nutrition  seem  to  be  connected  with 


62  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

the  development  of  special  enzymes.  A  proteolytic  enzyme  capable 
of  digesting  proteids  has  been  described  by  Briicke  and  others; 
an  amylolytic  enzyme  capable  of  converting  the  glycogen  to  sugar 
by  Nasse;  a  glycolytic  enzyme  capable  of  destroying  the  sugars 
by  Brunton,  Cohnheim^  and  others;  a  lipase  capable  of  splitting 
the  fats  by  Kastle  and  Loevenhart;  and,  finally,  a  coagulating 
enzyme  responsible  for  the  coagulation  of  the  muscle  plasma  after 
death  by  Halliburton. 

The  Inorganic  Constituents.— Muscle  tissue  contains  a  number 
of  salts,  chiefly  in  the  form  of  the  chlorids,  sulphates,  and  phos- 
phates of  sodium,  potassium,  calcium,  magnesium,  and  iron.  As 
in  other  tissues,  the  potassium  salts  predominate  in  the  tissue  itself. 
These  inorganic  constituents  are  most  important  to  the  normal 
activity  of  the  muscle,  and,  indeed,  in  two  ways:  first,  in  that  they 
maintain  a  normal  osmotic  pressure  within  the  substance  of  the 
fibers  and  thus  control  the  exchange  of  water  with  the  sur- 
rounding lymph  and  blood;  second,  in  that  they  are  necessary^ 
to  the  normal  structure  and  irritability  of  the  hving  muscular 
tissue.  Serious  variations  in  the  relative  amounts  of  these  salts 
cause  marked  changes  in  the  properties  of  the  tissues,  as  is  ex- 
plained in  the  section  on  nutrition,  in  which  the  general  nutritive 
importance  of  the  salts  is  discussed,  and  also  in  connection  with, 
the  cause  of  the  rhythmical  activity  of  the  heart. 

Chemical  Changes  in  the  Muscle  during  Contraction  and. 
Rigor. — Perhaps  the  most  significant  change  in  the  muscle  during; 
contraction  is  the  'production  of  carbon  dioxid.  After  increased 
muscular  activity  it  may  be  shown  that  an  animal  gives  off  a 
larger  amount  of  carbon  dioxid  in  its  expired  air.  In  such  cases 
the  carbon  dioxid  produced  in  the  muscles  is  given  off  to  the; 
blood,  carried  to  the  lungs,  and  then  exhaled  in  the  expired  air.. 
Pettenkofer  and  Voit,  for  instance,  found  that  during  a  day  in. 
which  much  muscular  work  was  done  a  man  expired  nearly  twice 
as  much  CO2  as  during  a  resting  day.  The  same  fact  can  be 
shown  directly  upon  an  isolated  muscle  of  a  frog  made  to  con- 
tract by  electrical  stimulation.  The  carbon  dioxid  in  this  case- 
diffuses  out  of  the  muscle  in  part  to  the  surrounding  air,  and 
in  part  remains  in  solution,  or  in  chemical  combination  as  car- 
bonates, in  the  hquids  of  the  tissue.  It  has  been  shown  by 
Hermann*  and  others  that  a  muscle  that  has  been  tetanized  gives 
off  more  carbon  dioxid  than  a  resting  muscle  when  their  contained 
gases  are  extracted  by  a  gas  pump.  This  COj  arises  from  the 
oxidation  of  the  carbon  of  some  of  the  constituents  of  the  muscle, 
and  its  existence  is  an  indication  that  in  their  final  products  the 

*  Hermann,  " Untersuchungen  iiber  den  Stoffwechsel  der  Muskeln,  etc.,"' 
Berlin,  1867. 


THE    CHEMISTRY    OF    MUSCLE.  63 

changes  in  the  muscle  are  equivalent  to  those  of  ordinary  combus- 
tion at  high  temperatures,  the  burning  of  wood  or  fats,  for  instance. 
Moreover,  the  formation  of  the  COj  in  the  muscle  is  accompanied 
by  the  production  of  heat,  as  in  combustion;  and  for  the  same 
amount  of  COg  produced  in  the  two  cases  the  same  amount  of  heat 
is  liberated.  It  has  been  shown,  however,  in  the  frog's  muscle 
freshly  removed  from  the  body,  that  the  COj  is  produced  whether  or 
not  any  oxygen  is  supplied  to  the  muscle, — that  is,  when  the  muscle 
is  made  to  contract  in  an  atmosphere  containing  no  oxygen,  or 
in  a  vacuum.  In  this  respect  the  parallel  between  physiological 
oxidation  and  ordinary  combustion  fails.  Wood,  oil,  and  other 
combustible  material  cannot  be  burnt  at  high  temperatures  in 
the  absence  of  oxygen.  We  must  believe,  therefore,  that  in  the 
muscle  there  is  a  supply  of  stored  oxygen,  and  that  the  muscle 
will  give  off  CO2  as  long  as  this  supply  lasts.  One  suggestion 
that  is  made  is  that  the  oxygen  is  stored  as  intramolecular  oxygen, 
— that  is,  the  oxygen  taken  in  by  the  muscle  tissue  while  the  blood 
is  circulating  through  it  normally,  is  assimilated  or  combined  by 
the  living  molecules.  When  these  molecules  break  down  as  a  con- 
sequence of  the  stimulus  applied  to  the  muscle  the  excess  of  oxygen 
unites  with  some  of  the  carbon  to  form  the  COj.  The  oxidation, 
instead  of  being  direct,  as  in  the  case  of  combustions,  is  indirect. 
This  and  other  views  regarding  the  nature  of  the  oxidations  in 
the  body  are  treated  in  the  section  on  nutrition. 

The  oxygen  is  absolutely  necessary  to  the  normal  activity  of 
the  muscular  tissue,  but  the  tissue,  by  storing  the  oxygen,  can 
function  for  some  time  when  the  supply  is  suspended.  As  Pfliiger 
has  expressed  it,  in  a  most  interesting  paper,*  the  oxygen  is  like 
the  spring  to  a  clock:  once  wound  up,  the  clock  will  go  for  a  cer- 
tain time  without  further  winding.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind, 
however,  that  different  tissues  show  considerable  variation  in  the 
time  during  which  they  will  function  normally  after  suspension 
of  their  oxygen  supply.  The  cortex  of  the  brain,  for  instance, 
loses  its  activity, — that  is,  unconsciousness  ensues,  almost  imme- 
diately upon  cessation  or  serious  diminution  in  the  supply  of  blood. 
In  the  cold-blooded  animals,  with  their  slower  chemical  changes, 
the  supply  of  stored  oxygen  maintains  irritability  for  a  longer 
time  than  in  the  warm-blooded  animals. 

Disappearance  of  the  Glycogen. — An  equally  positive  chemical 
change  in  the  muscle  during  contraction  is  the  disappearance  of  its 
contained  glycogen.  Satisfactory  proof  has  been  furnished  that  the 
amount  of  glycogen  in  a  muscle  disappears  more  or  less  in  proportion 
to  the  extent  and  duration  of  the  contractions,  and  that  after  pro- 

*  Pfliiger,  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  10,  251,  1875. 


64  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

longed  muscular  activity,  especially  in  the  starving  animal,  the 
supply  may  be  exhausted  entirely.  In  what  way  the  glycogen  is 
consumed  is  not  completely  known.  It  is  possible  that  it  may 
be  burnt  or  oxidized  as  glycogen  or  sugar,  with  the  production  of 
CO  2  and  HjO,  the  oxidation  in  some  way  being  under  the  control 
of  the  living  tissue;  or  it  may  first  be  split  into  lactic  acid  and 
other  products,  which  then  undergo  oxidation.  It  is  possible,  on 
the  other  hand,  that  the  glycogen,  after  conversion  to  sugar,  is  first 
combined  with  the  living  proteid  material  before  undergoing  oxi- 
dation. Attention  has  already  been  called  to  the  fact*  that  the 
rigor  of  muscle  comes  on  at  a  much  lower  temperature  when  the 
sugar  is  used  up,  and  it  has  been  found  that  supplying  new  sugar 
will  restore  the  muscle  to  its  normal  condition  in  this  respect, — a 
fact  which  seems  to  indicate  that  the  sugar  enters  into  a  combination 
in  the  living  tissue.  In  this  process  of  the  consumption  of  the  gly- 
cogen two  or  more  enzymes  are  supposed  to  be  concerned.  Under 
the  influence  of  one,  amylolyase,  the  glycogen  is  changed  to  sugar, 
dextrose;  while  other  so-called  glycolytic  enzymes  are  necessary 
for  its  final  destruction  or  oxidation.  The  fact  that  the  glycogen 
disappears  as  a  result  of  the  contractions  does  not  mean  necessarily 
that  this  substance  or  the  sugar  into  w^hich  it  is  converted  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  for  the  chemical  changes  of  contraction.  It  is 
stated  that  the  muscle  will  continue  to  contract  after  all  its  glycogen 
is  used  upt ;  still  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  using  up  of  the 
local  store  of  glycogen  does  not  mean  that  all  the  sugar  supply  of 
the  body  is  consumed.  After  the  most  prolonged  starvation  the 
blood  contains  its  normal  supply  of  sugar,  and  we  can  only  suppose 
that  this  sugar  comes  from  the  material  of  the  body  itself,  perhaps 
from  its  proteids,  and  it  remains  quite  possible  that  a  constant 
supply  of  sugar  from  some  source  is  necessary  to  the  chemical 
changes  that  occur  in  normal  contractions. 

The  Formation  of  Lactic  Acid. — The  lactic  acid  that  is  present 
in  the  muscle  is  believed  to  be  increased  in  quantity  by  muscular 
activity.  Attention  was  first  called  to  this  point  by  du  Bois- 
Heymond,  who  showed  that  the  reaction  of  the  tetanized  muscle 
is  distinctly  acid,  while  that  of  the  resting  muscle  is  neutral  or 
slightly  alkaline.  This  fact  can  be  demonstrated  by  the  use  of 
litmus  paper,  but  perhaps  more  strikingly  by  the  use  of  acid  fuchsin.i: 
If  a  solution  of  acid  fuchsin  is  injected  under  the  skin  of  a  frog  it 
is  gradually  absorbed  and  distributed  to  the  body  without  injuring 
the  tissues.  In  the  alkaline  media  of  the  body  this  solution  remains 
colorless  or  nearly  so.    If  now  one  of  the  legs  is  tetanized  the  muscles 

*  Latimer,  loc.  cit. 

t  Jensen,  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  35,  525. 

%  Dreser,  " Centralblatt  fiir'Physiologie,"  1,  195,  1887. 


THE    CHEMISTRY    OF    MUSCLE.  65 

take  on  a  red  color,  showing  that  an  acid  is  produced  locally. 
The  supposition  generally  made  is  that  the  acidity  during  activity 
is  due  to  an  increased  production  of  sarcolactic  acid.  Experiments 
have  been  made  by  a  number  of  observers  to  determine  quantita- 
tively the  amount  of  lactic  acid  in  the  resting  and  the  worked 
muscle,  respectively.  Several  have  stated  that  the  amount  is  actu- 
ally less  in  the  worked  muscle;  others  have  found  an  increase.* 
The  balance  of  evidence  seems  to  show  that  there  is  actually  an 
increased  production,  but  that  this  increase  may  be  obscured  in  the 
living  animal  by  the  fact  that  the  acid  is  removed  by  the  circulating 
blood.  In  accordance  with  this  view  we  find  that  the  alkalinity 
of  the  blood  may  be  decreased  after  muscular  activity.  That 
lactic  acid  is  produced  in  the  living  muscle,  is  sho^vn  by  experi- 
mentsf  in  which  blood  was  transfused  for  several  hours  through  the 
legs  of  a  freshly  killed  animal.  In  such  cases  the  amount  of  lactic 
acid  in  the  blood  was  distinctly  increased.  We  must  believe,  there- 
fore, that  lactic  acid  is  a  constant  product  of  the  chemical  changes 
of  nutrition  going  on  in  the  muscle,  and  that  its  production  is  in- 
creased by  the  greater  chemical  activity  during  visible  contraction. 
This  lactic  acid  may  be  partly  destroyed  within  the  muscle  itself  by 
oxidation,  but  in  part  it  may  be  carried  off  by  the  blood  as  a  lactate 
to  be  removed  probably  by  the  action  of  the  liver.  The  increased 
acidity  of  the  muscle  during  activity,  especially  when  the  circulation 
is  interrupted,  is  referable,  in  the  long  nm,  to  this  greater  produc- 
tion of  lactic  acid;  but  as  the  acid  after  its  formation  probably 
reacts  with  the  alkaline  salts  present  it  is  usually  stated  that  the 
actual  acidity  shown  to  litmus  or  other  indicator  is  due  to  acid 
salts  produced  by  reaction  with  lactic  acid,  presumably  the  acid 
phosphate  of  potassium  (KHjPOJ. 

Much  interest  has  been  shown  in  the  question  of  the  origin  of 
the  lactic  acid.  According  to  some  observers,  it  arises  from  the 
carbohydrates  in  the  muscle,  the  glycogen  or  the  sugar.  In  support 
of  this  view  it  has  been  claimed  that  in  contraction  and  especially 
in  rigor  mortis  the  glycogen  disappears  as  the  lactic  acid  increases. 
This  relationship,  however,  is  denied,  as  far  as  rigor  mortis  is  con- 
cerned, by  competent  observers|;  and,  so  far  as  the  processes 
during  contraction  are  concerned,  the  fact  that  lactic  acid  increases 
as  the  glycogen  disappears  is  not  a  very  logical  proof  that  the  former 
arises  from  the  latter.  Another  suggestion  is  that  the  lactic  acid 
arises  from  the  phosphocarnic  acid  described  above.  This  com- 
pound, when  split  by  hydrolysis,  yields  lactic  acid;  so  that  if 
we  could  obtain  convincing  proof  that  such  a  compound  exists  in 

*Werther,  "Pfliiger's  Archiv,"  46,  63,  1890. 
t  Berlinerblau,  "Archiv  f.  exp.  Path.  u.  Pharm.,"  23,  333,  1887. 
t  Bohm,  "Pfliiger's  Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  23,  44,  1880. 
5 


66      •    THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

living  muscle  it  would  serve  very  well  to  explain  the  production 
of  lactic  acid.  From  experiments  made  in  general  nutrition  it 
has  been  shown  that  in  birds  especially  the  uric  acid  in  the  urine 
is  replaced  largely  by  lactic  acid  (ammonium  lactate)  when  the  liver 
is  excised.  Under  these  conditions  the  quantity  of  lactic  acid 
secreted  varies  with  the  albumin  destroyed  in  the  body,  and  man}' 
physiologists  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  lactic  acid  produced  in 
the  muscle  or  in  other  tissues  is  derived  from  the  breaking  down 
of  the  living  proteid  material.  On  the  other  hand,  a  study  of  the 
action  of  the  enzymes  present  in  muscle  leads  to  the  other  conclu- 
sion,— namely,  that  the  lactic  acid  arises  from  a  splitting  of  the 
sugar.     (Consult  section  on  nutrition.) 

The  Formation  of  Creatin. — Creatin  constitutes  the  chief  nitrog- 
enous waste  product  in  the  muscle,  and  we  should  expect  that  the 
greater  metabolism  during  activity  would  result  in  an  increase  in 
the  creatin.  Some  observers  state  positively  that  the  creatin  is 
increased  during  contraction. 

Chemical  Changes  during  Rigor  Mortis. — The  chemical 
changes  during  rigor  have  been  referred  to  above,  but  may  be 
summarized  here  in  brief  form: 

1.  There  is  a  coagulation  of  the  proteid  material  of  the  muscle 
plasma,  which  at  present  is  explained  by  supposing  that  the  con- 
tained myosin  and  myogen,  spontaneously,  or  under  the  action  of 
an  enzyme,  pass  into  their  insoluble  forms, — namely,  myosin  fibrin 
and  myogen  fibrin. 

2.  There  is  an  increased  acidity,  due  doubtless  to  a  production 
of  lactic  acid. 

3.  There  is  a  production  of  COj.  Hermann,  in  his  original  ex- 
periments, asserts  that  in  rigor  there  is,  so  to  speak,  a  maximal 
production  of  CO2, — that  is,  all  of  the  material  in  the  muscle  capable 
of  yielding  CO2  is  broken  down  during  rigor.  The  amount  of  CO2 
given  off,  therefore,  by  a  resting  muscle  when  it  goes  into  rigor 
is  greater  than  in  the  case  of  a  worked  muscle,  since  in  the 
latter  some  of  the  material  capable  of  yielding  CO3  has  been  used 
up  during  contraction. 

4.  The  consumption  of  glycogen.  According  to  some  observers, 
glycogen  disappears  during  rigor  as  it  does  during  contraction; 
but  others  find  that  the  amount  is  not  changed  during  this  process. 
As  the  glycogen  after  death  is  converted  to  sugar  with  some  rapidity 
it  is  possible  that  the  disappearance  noted  by  the  former  observers 
was  not  due  to  the  rigor  process,  but  to  postmortem  fermentation. 

The  Relation  of  the  Chemical  Changes  during  Contraction 
to  Fatigue;  Chemical  Theory  of  Fatigue. — As  we  have  seen,  a 
muscle  kept  in  continuous  contraction  soon  shows  fatigue;  it 
relaxes  more  and  more  until,  in  spite  of  constant  stimulation,  it 


THE    CHEMISTRY    OF    MUSCLE.  67 

becomes  completely  imirritable.  We  may  define  fatigue,  there- 
fore, as  a  more  or  less  complete  loss  of  irritability  and  contractility 
brought  on  by  functional  activity.  But  even  when  the  fatigue  is 
complete  and  the  muscle  fails  to  respond  at  all  to  maximal 
stimulation,  a  very  short  interval  of  rest  is  sufficient  to  bring  about 
some  return  of  irritability.  For  a  complete  restoration  to  its 
normal  condition  a  long  interval  of  time  may  be  necessary.  If 
the  muscle  is  isolated  from  the  body  and  thus  deprived  of  its  cir- 
culation the  recovery  from  fatigue  is  less  rapid  and  less  complete 
than  under  normal  conditions.  In  such  an  isolated  muscle,  more- 
over, if  provision  is  made  to  irrigate  its  blood-vessels  with  a  solution 
of  physiological  sahne  (NaCl,  0.7  per  cent.)  the  recovery  from  fatigue 
is  hastened.  These  facts  seem  to  indicate  clearly  that  fatigue  is 
not  due  to  a  complete  consumption  of  the  material  in  the  muscle 
that  supplies  the  energy  for  the  contractions.  In  other  words, 
fatigue  as  it  usually  presents  itself  to  us  in  Ufe  or  under  experi- 
mental conditions  is  a  phenomenon  different  from  exhaustion. 
Ranke,*  who  made  the  first  complete  study  of  this  subject,  was 
convinced  that  a  muscle  when  tetanized  to  the  point  of  complete 
fatigue  consumes  only  a  fraction  of  the  oxidizable  or  energy-yielding 
material  contained  in  its  substance.  He  believed  that  there  exists 
in  the  fatigued  muscle  a  something  brought  into  existence  by  the 
contraction  itself,  which  retards  or  prevents  further  physiological 
oxidation.  In  support  of  this  view  he  found  that  if  an  extract 
was  made  from  the  fatigued  muscles  of  one  frog  and  injected  into 
the  circulation  of  a  second  frog,  the  muscles  of  this  latter  animal 
gave  evidence  of  fatigue, — that  is,  they  showed  diminished  power 
of  contraction  upon  stimulation.  A  similar  experiment  made  with 
an  extract  from  resting  muscle  gave  no  such  effect.  Investigation 
of  the  separate  products  formed  in  a  muscle  during  contraction 
demonstrated  that  the  acid-reacting  substances,  sarcolactic  acid 
and  acid  potassium  phosphate,  are  apparently  responsible  for  this 
effect.  According  to  these  experiments,  the  accumulation  of  these 
acid  products  is  responsible  for  the  appearance  of  fatigue;  the 
muscle's  own  waste  products,  therefore,  serve  to  limit  its  responsive- 
ness to  stimulation,  and  thus  form  a  protective  mechanism  that 
saves  it  from  complete  exhaustion.  Under  normal  conditions  these 
products  are  quickly  removed  by  the  blood,  and  even  in  the  isolated 
muscle  we  may  suppose  that  their  depressing  effect  upon  the  irri- 
tabiUty  of  the  muscle  is  rapidly  removed  by  the  neutralizing  effect 
of  the  alkaline  lymph  in  the  muscle;  perhaps,  also,  the  lactic  acid 
is  further  oxidized.  This  chemical  theory  of  fatigue  does  not,  how- 
ever, explain  all  the  phenomena,  particularly  the  after- results. 
As  was  stated  in  describing  the  experiments  made  with  the  ergograph. 
*  Ranke,  "  Tetanus,"  lieipzig,  1865. 


68  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

a  very  short  rest  suffices  to  make  the  muscle  again  capable  of 
lifting  its  load,  but  a  very  long  interval  of  rest,  two  hours,  may 
be  required  before  the  muscle  is  restored  entirely  to  its  normal 
condition.  Such  a  long  interval  is  evidently  not  necessary  for 
the  removal  of  the  acid  products,  and  we  must  recognize  that  a 
part  of  the  fatigue  is  due  to  a  using  up  of  the  material  from  which 
the  energy  is  obtained.  That  is,  during  contraction  the  processes 
of  disassimilation  or  catabolism  are  in  excess  of  those  of  assimilation 
or  anabolism,  so  that  at  the  end  of  prolonged  muscular  activity 
the  muscle  contains  a  diminished  supply  of  oxidizable  or  energy- 
yielding  material.  To  supply  this  deficiency  new  food  material, 
including  under  this  term  also  the  necessary  oxygen*  must  be 
assimilated  by  the  muscle.  We  must  suppose,  therefore,  that 
two  factors,  accumulation  of  waste  products  and  exhaustion  of 
energy-yielding  material,  co-operate  to  produce  the  conditions 
actually  observed;  but  the  former  of  these,  the  formation  of  acid 
waste  products,  seems  to  be  the  protective  mechanism  that  is 
especially  adapted  to  save  the  muscle  from  complete  exhaustion. 
In  what  way  the  acid  products  depress  the  irritability  and  con- 
tractility of  the  muscles  is  not  known;  their  presence  may,  as 
Ranke  supposed,  prevent  the  underlying  chemical  changes,  the  so- 
called  physiological  oxidations,  or  their  action  may  be  exerted  on 
the  contractile  machinery  alone, — that  is,  the  mechanism  by  means 
of  which  the  shortening  is  effected. 

Theories  of  Muscle  Contraction. — It  is  universally  admitted 
that  the  ultimate  cause  of  the  muscle  contraction  is  the  chemical 
change  caused  by  the  stimulus.  While  the  nature  of  this  chemical 
reaction  is  not  known,  it  is  admitted  also  that  it  consists  in  a  process 
of  splitting  and  oxidation  whereby  large  and  relatively  unstable 
molecules  are  reduced  to  smaller  and  more  stable  ones,  such  as 
H2O  and  the  CO2  and  lactic  acid  which  we  recognize  among  the 
products.  This  reaction  is  exothermic, — that  is, some  of  the  chemical 
or  internal  energy  of  the  complex  compound  is  liberated  as  heat; 
some  also  as  electrical  energy,  as  is  explained  in  a  later  chapter. 
Both  of  these  results  are  so  frequently  observed  in  other  chemical 
reactions  that  they  call  for  no  special  comment  in  this  case.  The 
particular  problem  regarding  the  muscle  is  how  this  chemical 
reaction  leads  to  the  shortening  of  the  muscle  and  thereby 
makes  it  do  mechanical  work.  We  rnust  assume  that  there  is  some 
mechanism  in  the  muscle  by  means  of  which  the  energy  liberated 
during  the  chemical  change  is  utilized  in  causing  movement,  some- 
what in  the  same  way  as  the  heat  energy  developed  in  a  gas-engine 
is  converted  by  a  mechanism  into  mechanical  movement,  or  the 
electrical  energy  in  the  coils  of  a  motor  is  utilized  by  a  device  to 
*  Verworn,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1900,  suppl.  volume,  p.  152. 


THE    CHEMISTRY    OF    MUSCLE. 


69 


develop  movement.  Regarding  the  means  used  in  the  muscle  to 
transform  the  original  chemical  or  internal  energy  to  mechanical 
movement  we  have  no  or  very  little  positive  knowledge.  Numer- 
ous theories  of  a  more  or  less  figurative  character  have  been  pro- 
posed. It  has  been  suggested  (Weber)  that  the  muscular  force  is 
essentially  due  to  the  elasticity  of  the  muscle.  It  is  known  that  the 
elasticity  of  substances  may  change  with  conditions,  and  it  is 
assumed  that  after  stimulation  the  physical  condition  of  the  muscle 
is  changed  and  that  the  increased  elastic  attraction  between  the 
particles  gives  it  the  form  of 
the  contracted  muscle.  Ac- 
cording to  others  (Fick),  the 
mechanical  contraction  is  a 
direct  result  of  an  increased 
chemical  affinity,  while  others 
(Miiller)  find  an  explanation  in 
supposed  electrical  charges 
upon  the  doubly  refractive 
particles  of  the  muscle  in  conse- 
quence of  which  there  are  de- 
veloped electrical  attractions 
and  repulsions  at  the  different 
poles.  The  most  specific  and 
comprehensible  hypothesis  ad- 
vanced is  that  formulated  by 
Engelmann.*  This  author  has 
shown  that  all  contractile 
tissues  contain  doubly  refrac- 
tive particles,  that  in  the 
striped  muscle  fiber  these  par- 
ticles are  arranged  in  discs, — 
the  dim  bands, — with  the  singly 
refracting  material  forming  the 
light  bands  on  either  side.  Dur- 
ing   contraction   it    has   been 


Fig.  26.— Engelmann's  artificial  muscle. 
The  artificial  muscle  is  represented  by  the 
catgut  string,  m.  This  is  surrounded  by  a 
coil  of  platinum  wire,  w,  through  which  an 
electrical  current  may  be  sent.  The  catgut 
is  attached  to  a  lever,  h,  whose  fulcrum  is  at 
c.  The  catgut  is  immersed  in  a  beaker  of 
water  at  50°  to  55°  C,  and  "  stimulated " 
by  the  sudden  increase  in  temperature  caused 
by  the  passage  of  a  current  through  the  coil. 
— (After  Engelmann.) 

shown  that  the  material  of  this 

latter  structure  is  absorbed  by  the  doubly  refractive  substance. 
Engelmann  has  shown,  moreover,  that  dead  substances,  which 
contain  doubly  refractive  particles,  such  as  catgut,  when  soaked 
with  water  will  shorten  upon  heating  and  relax  again  upon  cooling. 
His  explanation  of  the  mechanics  of  contraction  in  brief  is  that 
the  chemical  change  brought  about  in  the  muscle  liberates  heat, 
and  that  the  effect  of  this  heat  upon  the  adjacent  doubly  refractive 

*  Engelmann,  "Ueber  den  Ursprung  der  Muskelkraft,"   Leipzig,  1893; 
see  also  "Pfliiger's  Archiv,"  7,  155,  1873. 


70  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE    AND    NERVE, 

particles  is  to  make  them  imbibe  the  surrounding  water.  If  we 
further  suppose  that  these  particles  in  the  resting  muscle  are  hnear 
or  prismatic  in  shape,  then  upon  imbibing  water  they  will  tend 
to  become  spherical,  causing  thus  a  shortening  in  the  long  diameter 
and  an  increase  in  the  cross  diameter.  The  muscle,  in  other  words, 
is  an  apparatus  comparable,  let  us  say,  to  a  gas  engine:  each 
stimulus,  like  a  spark,  causes  the  physiological  oxidation  of  a  portion 
of  the  usable  material  in  the  muscle,  and  the  lieat  thus  produced 
acts  upon  the  doubly  refractive  material  as  upon  a  piece  of  machin- 
ery and  causes  it  to  shorten  by  imbibition.     Contraction,  in  a  word, 


Fig.  27.— Curve  of  simple  contraction  obtained  from  an  artificial  muscle.  The  dura- 
tion of  the  stimulus  (heating  effect  caused  by  the  current)  is  shown  by  the  break  in  the 
line  beneath  the  curve. 

is  a  phenomenon  of  thermic  imbibition.  Engelmann  has  given  an 
appearance  of  verisimilitude  to  this  hypothesis  by  constructing 
an  artificial  muscle  from  a  piece  of  violin  string.  The  apparatus 
used  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  26.  A  catgut  string  (m)  is  surrounded 
by  a  coil  of  platinum  wire  {w)  through  which  an  electrical  current 
may  be  sent.  The  object  of  this  arrangement  is  to  heat  the  catgut 
suddenly.  The  platinum  coil  should  not  actually  touch  the  catgut. 
The  catgut  is  attached  to  a  lever,  as  shown  in  the  figure.  The 
catgut  is  thoroughly  soaked  by  immersing  it  in  a  beaker  of  water 
and  the  temperature  is  then  raised  to  50°  to  55°  C.  If  then  a 
current  is  turned  into  the  coil  the  slight  but  somewhat  rapid  heating 


THE    CHEMISTRY    OF    MUSCLE. 


71 


of  the  catgut  will  cause  it  to  shorten,  owing  to  the  imbibition  of 
more  water.  When  the  current  is  broken  the  catgut  cools  and 
relaxes  slowly.  Records  may  be  obtained  in  this  way  which  are 
altogether  similar  or  identical  with  those  given  by  a  strip  of  plain 
muscle  when  stimulated  (see  Figs.  27  and  28).     The  model  may  be 


Fig.  28. — Imitation  of  incomplete  tetanus  by  the  artificial  muscle.  The  time  and 
duration  of  the  successive  heatings  are  indicated  by  the  breaks  in  the  lower  line.  Each 
such  heating  causes  a  separate  contraction,  and  the.se  contractions  are  summated  as  in  the 
tetanic  contraction  of  muscle. 


used  to  show  the  effect  of  temperature  upon  the  extent  and  dura- 
tion of  the  contractions,  the  effect  of  variations  in  strength  of 
stimulus  as  expressed  in  the  amount  of  current  used,  the  summation 
of  successive  stimuli,  etc.  Under  all  of  these  conditions  it  imitates 
closely  the  behavior  of  plain  muscular  tissue. 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION— PROPERTIES 
OF  THE  NERVE  FIBER. 

Conduction. — When  living  matter  is  excited  or  stimulated  in 
any  way  the  excitation  is  not  localized  to  the  point  acted  upon, 
but  is  or  may  be  propagated  throughout  its  substance.  This  prop- 
erty of  conducting  a  change  that  has  been  initiated  by  a  stimulus 
applied  locally  is  a  general  property  of  protoplasm,  and  is  exhib- 
ited in  a  striking  way  by  many  of  the  simplest  forms  of  life.  A 
light  touch,  for  instance,  applied  to  a  vorticella  will  cause  a  retrac- 
tion of  its  vibrating  cilia  and  a  shortening  of  its  stalk.  In  the  most 
specialized  animals,  such  as  the  mammalia,  this  property  of  con- 
duction finds  its  greatest  development  in  the  nervous  tissue,  and 
indeed,  especially  in  the  axis  cylinder  processes  of  the  nerve  cells, 
the  so-called  nerve  fibers.  But  this  property  is  exhibited  also  to 
a  greater  or  less  extent  by  other  tissues.  When  a  muscular  mass 
is  stimulated  at  one  point  the  excitation  set  up  may  be  propagated 
not  only  through  the  substance  of  the  cells  or  fibers  directly  affected, 
but  from  cell  to  cell  for  a  considerable  distance.  In  the  heart 
tissue  especially  and  in  plain  muscle  it  has  been  shown  that  a 
change  of  this  sort  may  be  conducted  independently  of  the  phe- 
nomenon of  visible  contraction.  A  stimulus  applied  to  the  venous 
end  of  a  frog's  heart,  for  instance,  may,  under  certain  conditions, 
be  conducted  through  the  auricular  tissue  without  causing  in  it  a 
visible  change,  and  yet  arouse  a  contraction  in  the  ventricular 
muscle  (Engelmann).  The  change  thus  conducted  may  be  spoken 
of  as  a  muscle  impulse.  Under  normal  conditions  a  muscle  fiber 
is  stimulated  through  its  motor  nerve  fiber  at  some  point  near  the 
middle  of  its  course,  but  the  stimulus  thus  applied  must  be  con- 
ceived as  arousing  a  muscle  impulse  that  travels  over  the  length  of 
the  muscle  fiber  and  precedes  the  change  of  contraction.  Similarly 
it  can  be  shown  that  ciliary  cells  can  convey  an  impulse  from  cell 
to  cell.  A  stimulus  applied  to  one  point  of  a  field  of  ciliary  epi- 
thelium may  set  up  a  change  that  is  conveyed  as  a  ciliary  impulse 
to  distant  cells.  The  universality  of  this  property  of  conduction 
in  the  simpler,  less  differentiated  forms  of  life,  and  its  presence  in 
some  form  in  many  of  the  tissues  of  the  higher  forms  would  justify 
the  assumption  that  the  underlying  change  is  essentially  the  same 
in  all  cases.     But  in  nerve  fibers  this  property  has  become  special- 

72 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  73 

ized  to  the  highest  degree,  and  in  this  tissue  it  may  be  studied 
therefore  with  the  greatest  success  and  profit. 

Structure  of  the  Nerve  Fiber. — The  peripheral  nerve  fiber, 
as  we  find  it  in  the  nerve  trunks  and  nerve  plexuses  of  the  body, 
may  be  either  medulla  ted  or  non-medullated.  All  the  nerve  fibers 
that  arise  histologically  from  the  nerve  cells  of  the  central  nervous 
system  proper — that  is,  the  brain  and  cord  and  the  outlying  sensory 
ganglia  of  the  cranial  nerves  and  the  posterior  spinal  roots — are 
medullated.  These  fibers  contain  a  central  core,  the  axis  cylinder, 
which  is  usually  regarded  as  an  enormously  elongated  process  of 
the  nerve  cell  with  which  it  is  connected.  The  axis  cylinder  shows 
a  differentiation  into  fibrils,  neurofibrils,  and  interfibrillar  sub- 
stance,— neuroplasm.  All  of  our  evidence  goes  to  show  that  the 
axis  cylinder  is  the  essential  part  of  the  nerve  fiber  so  far  as  its 
property  of  conduction  is  concerned.  It  is  further  assumed  that 
the  neurofibrils  in  the  axis  cylinder  form  the  conducting  mech- 
anism rather  than  the  interfibrillar  substance.  Surrounding  the 
axis  cylinder  we  have  the  medullary  or  myelin  sheath,  varying 
much  in  thickness  in  different  fibers.  This  sheath  is  composed  of 
peculiar  material  and  is  interrupted  or  divided  into  segments  at  cer- 
tain intervals,  the  so-called  nodes  of  Ranvier.  Outside  the  myelin 
there  is  a  delicate  elastic  sheath  comparable  to  the  sarcolemma  of 
the  muscle  fiber  and  designated  as  the  neurilemma.  Lying  under 
the  neurilemma  are  found  nuclei,  one  for  each  internodal  segment 
of  the  myelin,  surrounded  by  a  small  amount  of  granular  proto- 
plasm. The  non-medullated  fibers  have  no  myelin  sheath.  They 
are  to  be  considered  as  an  axis  cylinder  process  from  a  nerve  cell, 
surrounded  by  or  inclosed  in  a  neurilemmal  sheath.  These  fibers 
arise  histologically  from  the  nerve  cells  found  in  the  outlying 
ganglia  of  the  body,  the  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  system  and 
its  appendages. 

The  Function  of  the  Myelin  Sheath. — The  myelin  sheath  of 
the  cerebrospinal  nerve  fibers  is  a  structure  that  is  interesting  and 
peculiar,  both  as  regards  its  origin  and  its  composition.  Much 
speculation  has  been  indulged  in  with  regard  to  its  function,  but 
practically  nothing  that  is  certain  can  be  said  upon  this  point.  It 
has  been  supposed  by  some  to  act  as  a  sort  of  insulator,  preventing 
contact  between  neighboring  axis  cylinders  and  thus  insuring 
better  conduction.  But  against  this  view  it  may  be  urged  that 
we  have  no  proof  that  the  non-medullated  fibers  do  not  conduct 
equally  as  well.  The  view  has  some  probability  to  it,  however, 
for  we  must  remember  that  the  non-medullated  fibers  do  not  run 
in  large  nerve  trunks  that  supply  a  number  of  different  organs, 
and  therefore  in  them  a  provision  for  isolated  conduction  is  not  so 
necessary.     Moreover,  in  the  medullated  fibers  the  myelin  sheath 


74  THE   PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

is  lost  toward  its  peripheral  end  after  the  nerve  has  entered  the 
tissue  to  which  it  is  to  be  distributed,  indicating  that  its  function 
is  then  no  longer  necessary.  According  to  the  older  conceptions 
of  the  process  of  conduction  in  nerve  fibers,  not  only  anatomical 
but  also  physiological  continuity  is  necessary.  Mere  contact  of 
living  axis  cylinders  would  not  enable  the  nerve  impulse  to  pass 
from  one  to  the  other.  The  newer  views,  included  in  the  so-called 
neuron  theory,  assume  that  mere  contact  of  living,  entirely  normal 
nerve  substance  does  permit  an  excitatory  change  to  pass  from  one 
to  the  other.  So  that  it  is  not  impossible  that  the  myelin  sheath  may 
serve  to  prevent  one  axis  cylinder  from  influencing  the  neighboring 
axis  cylinders  in  a  nerve  trunk.  Others  have  supposed  that  the 
myelin  sheath  serves  as  a  source  of  nutrition  to  the  inclosed  axis 
cylinder,  or  as  a  regulator  in  some  way  of  its  metabolism.  No  fact 
is  reported  that  would  make  this  suggestion  seem  probable.  In 
general,  it  is  found  that  the  myelin  sheath  is  larger  in  those  fibers 
that  have  the  longest  course;  the  size  of  the  sheath,  in  fact,  in- 
creases with  that  of  the  axis  cylinder.  It  is  known  also  that  the 
medullated  fibers  in  general  are  more  irritable  to  artificial  stimuli 
than  the  non-medullated  ones,  and  that  when  induction  shocks 
are  employed  the  non-medullated  fibers  lose  their  irritability  more 
rapidly  at  the  point  stimulated.  None  of  these  facts  are  sufficient, 
however,  to  indicate  the  probable  function  of  the  myelin.  The 
embryological  development  of  the  sheath  also  fails  to  throw  light  on 
its  physiological  significance.  For,  while  it  is  usually  supposed  that 
the  axis  cylinder  itself  is  simply  an  outgrowth  from  the  nerve  cell, 
and  the  myelin  sheath  arises  from  separate  mesoblastic  cells  which 
surround  the  axis  cylinder,  this  view,  so  far  as  the  myelin  is  con- 
cerned, is  not  beyond  question,  and  the  study  of  the  process  of 
regeneration  of  nerve  fibers  indicates  that  the  actual  production 
of  myelin  is  controlled  in  some  way  by  the  functional  axis  cylinder. 
The  axis  cylinder  outgrowths  from  the  sympathetic  nerve  cells 
found  in  the  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  chain  and  in  the  peripheral 
ganglia  generally  of  the  body  are  usually  non-medullated,  although 
apparently  this  is  not  an  invariable  rule.  In  the  birds  all  such 
fibers,  on  the  contrary,  are  medullated.  (Langley.*)  Nothing  is 
known  as  to  the  conditions  that  determine  whether  a  nerve  fiber 
process  shall  or  shall  not  be  surrounded  by  a  myelin  sheath. 

Union  of  Nerve  Fibers  into  Nerves  or  Nerve  Trunks. — ^The 
assembling  of  nerve  fibers  into  larger  or  smaller  nerve  trunks  resem- 
bles histologically  the  combination  of  muscle  fibers  to  form  a  muscle. 
Physiologically,  however,  there  is  no  similarity.  The  various 
fibers  in  a  muscle  act  together  in  a  co-ordinated  way  as  a  physio- 
logical unit.  On  the  other  hand,  the  hundreds  or  thousands  of 
*  Langley,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  30,  221,  1903;   20,  55,  1890. 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  75 

nerve  fibers  found  in  a  nerve  may  be  entirely  independent  in  their 
physiological  activity.  In  the  vagus  nerve,  for  instance,  we  have 
nerve  fibers  running  side  by  side,  some  of  which  supply  the  heart, 
some  the  muscles  of  the  larynx,  some  the  muscles  of  the  stomach 
or  intestines,  some  the  glands  of  the  stomach  or  pancreas,  and  so 
on.  Nerves  are,  therefore,  anatomical  units  simply,  containing 
groups  of  fibers  which  have  very  different  activities  and  which  may 
function  entirely  independently  of  one  another. 

Afferent  and  Efferent  Nerve  Fibers.^ — The  older  physiologists 
believed  that  one  and  the  same  nerve  or  nerve  fiber  might  conduct 
sensory  impulses  toward  the  central  nervous  system  or  motor  im- 
pulses from  the  central  nervous  system  to  the  periphery.  Bell  and 
Magendie  succeeded  in  establishing  the  great  truth  that  a  nerve 
fiber  cannot  be  both  motor  and  sensory.  Since  their  time  it  has 
been  recognized  that  we  must  divide  the  nerve  fibers  connected 
with  the  central  nervous  system  into  two  great  groups :  the  efferent 
fibers,  which  carry  impulses  outwardly  from  the  nervous  system 
to  the  peripheral  tissues,  and  the  afferent  fibers,  which  carry  their 
impulses  inwardly, — that  is,  from  the  peripheral  tissues  to  the 
nerve  centers.  Under  normal  conditions  the  afferent  fibers  are 
stimulated  only  at  their  endings  in  the  peripheral  tissues,  in  the 
skin,  the  mucous  membranes,  the  sense  organs,  etc.,  while  the 
efferent  fibers  are  stimulated  only  at  their  central  origin, — that 
is,  through  the  nerve  cells  from  which  they  spring.  The  difference 
in  the  direction  of  conduction  depends,  therefore,  on  the  anatomical 
fact  that  the  efferent  fibers  have  a  stimulating  mechanism  at  their 
central  ends  only,  while  the  afferent  fibers  are  adapted  only  for 
stimulation  at  their  peripheral  ends. 

Classification  of  Nerve  Fibers. — In  addition  to  this  funda- 
mental separation  we  may  subdivide  peripheral  nerve  fibers  into 
smaller  groups,  making  use  of  either  anatomical  or  physiological 
differences  upon  which  to  base  a  classification.  For  the  purpose 
here  in  view  a  classification  that  is  physiological  as  far  as  possible 
seems  preferable.  In  the  first  place,  experimental  physiology  has 
shown  that  the  effect  of  the  impulse  conveyed  by  nerve  fibers  may 
be  either  exciting  or  inhibiting.  That  is,  the  tissue  or  the  cell 
to  which  the  impulse  is  carried  may  be  thereby  stimulated  to  ac- 
tivity, in  which  case  the  effect  is  excitatory,  or,  on  the  contrary, 
it  may,  if  already  in  activity,  be  reduced  to  a  condition  of  rest  or 
lessened  activity;  the  effect  in  this  case  is  inhibitory.  Many 
physiologists  believe  that  one  and  the  same  nerve  fiber  may  carry 
excitatory  or  inhibitory  impulses,  but  in  some  cases  at  least  we 
have  positive  proof  that  these  functions  are  discharged  by  separate 
fibers.  We  may  subdivide  both  the  afferent  and  the  efferent  sys- 
tems into  excitatory  and  inhibitory  fibers.     Each  of  these  sub- 


76 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OP   MUSCLE    AND    NERVE. 


groups  again  falls  into  smaller  divisions  according  to  the  kind  of 
activity  it  excites  or  inhibits.  In  the  efferent  system,  for  instance, 
the  excitatory  fibers  may  cause  contraction  or  motion  if  they  ter- 
minate in  muscular  tissue,  or  secretion  if  they  terminate  in  glandu- 
lar tissue.  For  convenience  of  description  each  of  the  groups  in 
turn  may  be  further  classified  according  to  the  kind  of  muscle  in 
which  it  ends  or  the  kind  of  glandular  tissue.  In  the  motor  group 
we  speak  of  vasomotor  fibers  in  reference  to  those  that  end  in  the 
plain  muscle  of  the  walls  of  the  blood-vessels;  visceromotor  fibers, 
those  ending  in  the  muscular  tissue  of  the  abdominal  and  thoracic 
viscera;  pilomotor  fibers,  those  ending  in  the  muscles  attached  to 
the  hair  follicles.  The  classification  that  is  suggested  in  tabular 
form  below  depends,  therefore,  on  three  principles:  first,  the  direc- 
tion in  which  the  impulse  travels  normally;  second,  whether  this 
impulse  excites  or  inhibits;  third,  the  kind  of  action  excited  or 
inhibited,  which  in  turn  depends  upon  the  kind  of  tissue  in  which 
the  fibers  end. 


AfiFerent 


Excitatory 


Inhibitory 


Excitatory 


Inhibitory 


Motor 


Secretory 

Inhibito-iuo- 

tor 
Inhibito-se- 

cretory 


Sensory 


^-  Reflex 


Inhibito-re- 
flex 


f  Motor. 

Vjisomotor. 

Cardiomotor. 

Visceromotor. 

Pilomotor. 

Salivary. 

Gastric. 

Pancreatic. 

Sweat. 

Subdivisions  corresponding  to  the  varieties  of  mo- 
tor fibers  above. 

Subdivisions  corresponding  to  the  varieties  of  se- 
cretory fibers  above. 

Visual. 

Auditory. 

Olfactory. 

Gustatory. 

Pressu  le. 

Temperature. 

Pain. 

Hunger. 

Thirst,  etc. 

According  to  the  efferent  fibers  affected. 

Inhibitory  effects  upon  the  conscious  sensations  are 
not  demonstrated. 

The  reflex  fibers  that  cause  unconscious  reflexes 
are  known  to  be  inhibited  in  some  cases  at  least. 


That  the  final  action  of  a  peripheral  nerve  fiber  is  determined 
by  the  tissue  in  which  it  ends  rather  than  by  the  nature  of  the 
nerve  fiber  itself  or  the  nature  of  the  impulse  that  it  carries  is  indi- 
cated strongly  by  the  regeneration  experiments  made  by  Langley.* 
For  instance,  the  chorda  tympani  nerve  contains  fibers  which  cause 
a  dilatation  in  the  blood-vessels  of  the  submaxillary  gland,  while 
the  cervical  sympathetic  contains  fibers  which  cause  a  constriction 
of  the  vessels  in  the  same  gland.  If  the  lingual  nerve  (containing 
the  chorda  tympani  fibers)  is  divided  and  the  central  end  sutured 

*  Langley,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  23,  240,  1898;  ibid.,  30,  439,  1904; 
"Proceedings  Royal  Society,"  73,  1904. 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  77 

to  the  peripheral  end  of  the  severed  cervical  sympathetic,  the 
chorda  fibers  will  grow  along  the  paths  of  the  old  constrictor  fibers 
of  the  sympathetic.  If  time  is  given  for  regeneration  to  take  place, 
stimulation  of  the  chorda  now  causes  a  constriction  in  the  vessels. 
The  experiment  can  also  be  reversed.  That  is,  by  suturing 
the  central  end  of  the  cervical  sympathetic  to  the  peripheral  end 
of  the  divided  lingual  the  fibers  of  the  former  grow  along  the  paths 
of  the  old  dilator  fibers,  and  after  regeneration  has  taken  place 
stimulation  of  the  sympathetic  causes  dilatation  of  the  blood- 
vessels in  the  gland.  These  results  are  particularly  instructive,  as 
vasoconstriction  is  an  example  of  the  excitatory  effect  of  the  nerve 
impulse,  being  the  result  of  a  contraction  of  the  circular  muscles 
in  the  vessels,  while  vasodilatation  is  an  example  of  inhibitor}' 
action,  being  due  to  an  inhibition  of  the  contraction  of  the  same 
muscles.  Yet  obviously  these  two  opposite  effects  are  determined 
not  by  the  nature  of  the  nerve  fibers,  but  by  their  place  or  mode 
of  ending  in  the  gland. 

Separation  of  the  Afferent  and  Efferent  Fibers  in  the  Roots 
of  the  Spinal  Nerves. — According  to  the  Bell-Magendie  discovery, 
the  motor  fibers  to  the  voluntary  muscles  emerge  from  the  spinal 
cord  in  the  anterior  roots,  while  the  fibers  that  give  rise  to  sensa- 
tions enter  the  cord  through  the  posterior  roots.  These  facts  have 
been  demonstrated  beyond  all  doubt.  Magendie  discovered  an 
apparent  exception  in  the  phenomenon  of  recurrent  sensibility. 
When  the  anterior  root  is  severed  and  its  peripheral  end  is  stimu- 
lated only  motor  effects  should  be  obtained.  Magendie  observed, 
however,  upon  dogs  that  in  certain  cases  the  animals  showed  signs 
of  pain.  This  apparent  exception  to  the  general  rule  was  after- 
ward explained  satisfactorily.  It  was  shown  that  the  fibers  in 
question  do  not  really  belong  to  the  anterior  root, — that  is,  they  do 
not  emerge  from  the  cord  with  the  root  fibers;  they  are,  in  fact, 
sensory  fibers  for  the  meningeal  membranes  of  the  cord  which 
are  on  their  way  to  the  posterior  roots  and  which  enter  the  cord 
with  the  fibers  of  the  latter.  Since  the  work  of  Bell  and  Magendie 
it  has  been  a  question  whether  their  law  applies  to  all  afferent  and 
efferent  fibers  and  not  simply  to  the  motor  and  sensory  fibers  proper. 
The  experimental  evidence  upon  this  point,  as  far  as  the  mammals 
are  concerned,  has  accumulated  slowly.  Various  authors  have  shown 
that  stimulation  of  the  anterior  roots  of  certain  spinal  nerves  may 
cause  a  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels,  an  erection  of  the  hairs 
(stimulation  of  the  pilomotor  fibers),  a  secretion  of  sweat,  and  so 
on,  while  stimulation  of  the  posterior  roots  in  the  same  regions  is 
without  effect  upon  these  peripheral  tissues.  One  apparent  excep- 
tion, however,  has  been  noted.  A  number  of  observers  have  found 
that  stimulation  of  the  peripheral  end  of  the  divided  posterior 


78  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERA^E. 

roots  (fifth  lumbar  to  first  sacral)  causes  a  vascular  dilatation  in 
the  hind  limb.  The  matter  has  been  particularly  investigated  by 
Bayliss,*  who  gives  undoubted  proof  of  the  general  fact.  At  the 
same  time  he  shows  that  the  fibers  in  question  are  not  efferent 
fibers  from  the  cord  passing  out  by  the  posterior  instead  of  the  an- 
terior roots.  This  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  they  do  not  degenerate 
when  the  root  is  cut  between  the  ganglion  and  the  cord,  as  they 
should  do  if  they  originated  from  cells  in  the  cord.  Bayliss's  own 
explanation  of  this  curious  fact  is  that  the  fibers  in  question  are 
ordinary  afferent  fibers,  but  that  they  are  capable  of  a  double  ac- 
tion: they  can  convey  sensory  impulses  from  the  blood-vessels  to 
the  cord  according. to  the  usual  type  of  sensory  fibers,  but  they 
can  also  convey  efferent  impulses,  antidromic  impulses  as  he  desig- 
nates them,  to  the  muscles  of  the  blood-vessels.  In  other  words, 
for  this  special  set  of  fibers  he  attempts  to  re-establish  the  view 
held  by  physiologists  before  the  time  of  Bell, — namely,  that  one 
and  the  same  fiber  transmits  normally  both  afferent  and  efferent 
impulses.  An  exception  so  peculiar  as  this  to  an  otherwise  general 
rule  cannot  be  accepted  Avithout  hesitation.  It  is  possible  that 
future  work  may  give  an  explanation  less  opposed  to  current  views 
than  that  offered  by  Bayliss. 

Cells  of  Origin  of  the  Anterior  and  Posterior  Root  Fibers. — 
The  efferent  fibers  of  the  anterior  root  arise  as  axons  or  axis  cylinder 
processes  from  nerve  cells  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord  at  or  near 
the  exit  of  the  root.  The  motor  fibers  to  the  voluntary  muscles 
arise  from  the  large  cells  of  the  anterior  horn  of  gray  matter;  the 
fibers  to  the  plain  muscle  and  glands,  autonomic  fibers  according 
to  Langley's  nomenclature,  take  their  origin  from  spindle-shaped 
nerve  cells  lying  in  the  so-called  lateral  horn  of  the  gray  matter.f 
According  to  the  accepted  belief  regarding  the  nutrition  of  nerve 
fibers,  any  section  or  lesion  involving  these  portions  of  the  gray  mat- 
ter or  the  anterior  root  will  be  followed  by  a  complete  degeneration 
of  the  efferent  fibers.  In  the  case  of  the  fibers  to  the  voluntary 
muscles  this  degeneration  will  extend  to  the  muscles  and  include 
the  end-plates.  In  the  case  of  the  autonomic  fibers  the  degenera- 
tion will  extend  to  the  peripheral  ganglia  in  which  they  terminate, 
involving,  therefore,  the  whole  extent  of  what  is  called  the  pre- 
ganglionic fiber  (see  the  chapter  on  the  autonomic  nerves  and  the 
sympathetic  system).  The  posterior  root  fibers  have  their  origin 
in  the  nerve  cells  contained  in  the  posterior  root  ganglia.  These 
cells  are  unipolar,  the  single  process  given  off  being  an  axis  cylinder 
process  or  axon.  It  divides  into  two  branches,  one  passing  into 
the  cord  by  way  of  the  posterior  root,  the  other  toward  the  periph- 

*  Bayliss,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  26,  173,  1901,  and  28,  276,  1902. 
t  Herring,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  29,  282,  1903. 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  79 

eral  tissues  in  the  corresponding  spinal  nerve  in  which  they  form  the 
peripheral  sensory  nerve  fibers.  It  follows  that  a  section  or  lesion 
of  the  posterior  root  will  result  in  a  degeneration  of  the  branch 
entering  the  cord,  this  branch  having  been  cut  off  from  its  nutri- 
tive relationship  with  its  cells  of  origin.  The  degeneration  Mdll  in^ 
volve  the  entire  length  of  the  branch  and  its  collaterals  to  their 
terminations  among  the  dendrites  of  other  spinal  or  bulbar  neurons 
(see  the  chapter  on  the  spinal  cord).  After  a  lesion  of  this  sort 
the  stump  of  the  posterior  root  that  remains  in  connection  with 
the  posterior  root  ganglion  maintains  its  normal  structure.  On  the 
other  hand,  a  section  or  lesion  involving  the  spinal  nerve  will  be 
followed  by  a  degeneration  of  all  the  fibers,  efferent  and  afferent, 
lying  to  the  peripheral  side  of  the  lesion,  since  these  fibers  are  cut 
off  from  connection  with  their  cells  of  origin,  while  the  fibers  in  the 
central  stump  of  the  divided  nerve  will  retain  their  normal  structure. 
Afferent  and  Efferent  Fibers  in  the  Cranial  Nerves. — The 
first  and  second  cranial  nerves,  the  olfactory  and  the  optic,  contain 
only  afferent  fibers,  which  arise  in  the  former  nerve  from  the  olfac- 
tory epithelium  in  the  nasal  cavity,  in  the  latter  from  the  nerve 
cells  in  the  retina.  The  third,  fourth,  and  sixth  nerves  contain 
only  efferent  fibers  which  arise  from  the  nerve  cells  constituting 
their  nuclei  of  origin  in  the  midbrain  and  pons.  The  fifth  nerve 
resembles  the  spinal  nerves  in  that  it  has  two  roots,  one  containing 
afferent  and  the  other  efferent  fibers.  The  efferent  fibers,  consti- 
tuting the  small  root,  arise  from  nerve  cells  in  the  pons  and  mid- 
brain, the  afferent  fibers  arise  from  the  nerve  cells  in  the  Gasserian 
ganglion.  This  ganglion,  being  a  sensory  ganglion,  is  constituted 
like  the  posterior  root  ganglia.  Its  nerve  cells  give  off  a  single 
process  which  divides  in  T,  one  branch  passing  into  the  brain  by  way 
of  the  large  root,  while  the  other  passes  to  the  peripheral  tissues  as  a 
sensory  fiber  of  the  fifth  nerve.  The  seventh  nerve  may  also  be 
homologized  with  a  spinal  nerve.  The  facial  nerve  proper  consists 
of  only  efferent  fibers,  which  arise  from  nerve  cells  constituting 
its  nucleus  of  origin  in  the  pons.  The  geniculate  ganglion,  attached 
to  this  nerve  shortly'  after  its  emergence,  is  similar  in  structure  to 
the  Gasserian  or  a  posterior  root  ganglion.  Its  nerve  cells  send  off 
processes  which  divide  in  T  and  constitute  afferent  fibers  in  the 
so-called  nervus  intermedins  or  nerve  of  Wrisberg.  The  eighth 
nerve  consists  only  of  afferent  fibers  which  arise  from  the  nerve 
cells  in  the  spinal  ganglion  of  the  cochlea,  cochlear  branch,  and  from 
there  constituting  the  vestibular  or  Scarpa's  ganglion,  the  vestibu- 
lar branch.  Both  of  these  ganglia  are  sensory,  resembling  the 
posterior  root  ganglia  in  structure.  The  ninth  nerve  is  also  mixed, 
the  efferent  fibers  arising  from  the  motor  nucleus  in  the  medulla, 
while  the  sensory  fibers  arise  in  the  superior  and  petrosal  ganglia 


80  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

found  on  the  nerve  at  its  emergence  from  the  skull.  The  tenth  is  a 
mixed  nerve,  its  efferent  fibers  arising  in  motor  nuclei  in  the  me- 
dulla, the  afferent  fibers  in  the  nerve  cells  of  the  ganglia  lying  upon 
the  trunk  of  the  nerve  at  its  exit  from  the  skull  (ganglion  jugulare 
and  nodosum).  The  eleventh  and  twelfth  cranial  nerves  contain 
only  efferent  fibers  that  arise  from  motor  nuclei  in  the  medulla. 

It  will  be  seen  from  these  brief  statements  that  in  all  the  nerve 
trunks  of  the  central  nervous  system — that  is,  the  spinal  and  the 
cranial  nerves — the  cells  of  origin  of  the  efferent  fibers  lie  within 
the  gray  matter  of  the  brain  or  cord,  while  the  cells  of  origin  of  the 
afferent  fibers  lie  in  sensory  ganglia  outside  the  central  nervous 
system, — namely,  in  the  posterior  root  ganglia  for  the  spinai 
nerves,  in  the  ganglion  semilunare  (Gasseri),  the  g.  geniculi,  the 
g.  spirale,  the  g.  vestibulare,  the  g.  superius,  and  g.  petrosum  of  the 
glossopharyngeal,  and  the  g.  jugulare  and  g.  nodosum  of  the  vagus. 
These  various  sensory  ganglia  attached  to  the  cranial  nerves  corre- 
spond essentially  in  their  structure  and  physiology  with  the  posterior 
root  ganglia  of  the  spinal  nerves. 

Independent  Irritability  of  Nerve  Fibers. — Although  the 
nerve  fibers  under  normal  conditions  are  stimulated  only  at  their 
ends,  the  efferent  fibers  at  the  central  end,  the  afferent  at  the 
peripheral  end,  yet  any  nerve  fiber  may  be  stimulated  by  artificial 
means  at  any  point  in  its  course.  Artificial  stimuli  capable  of 
affecting  the  nerve  fiber — that  is,  capable  of  generating  in  it  a  nerve 
impulse  which  then  propagates  itself  along  the  fiber-^may  be  divided 
into  the  following  groups : 

1.  Chemical  stimuli.  Various  chemical  reagents,  when  applied 
directly  to  a  nerve  trunk,  excite  the  nerve  fibers.  Such  reagents 
are  concentrated  solutions  of  the  neutral  salts  of  the  alkalies,  acids, 
alkalies,  glycerin,  etc.  This  method  of  stimulation  is  not,  however, 
of  much  practical  value  in  experimental  work,  since  it  is  difficult  or 
impossible  to  control  the  reaction. 

2.  Mechanical  stimuli.  A  blow  or  pressure  or  a  mechanical  in- 
jury of  any  kind  applied  to  a  nerve  trunk  also  excites  the  fibers. 
This  method  of  stimulating  the  fibers  is  also  difficult  to  control 
and  has  had,  therefore,  a  limited  application  in  experimental  work. 
The  mechanical  stimulus  is  essentially  a  pressure  stimulus,  and  the 
difficulty  lies  in  controlling  this  pressure  so  that  it  shall  not  actually 
destroy  the  nerve  fiber  by  rupturing  the  delicate  axis  cylinder. 
Various  instruments  have  been  devised  by  means  of  which  light 
blows  may  be  given  to  the  nerve,  sufficient  to  arouse  an  impulse, 
but  insufficient  to  permanently  injure  the  fibers.  The  results  ob- 
tained by  this  method  have  been  very  valuable  in  physiology  as  con- 
trols for  the  experiments  made  by  the  usual  method  of  electrical 
stimulation.     It  may  be  mentioned  also  that  under  certain  condi- 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  81 

tions — for  instance,  at  one  stage  in  the  regeneration  of  nerve  fibers — 
mechanical  stimuli  may  be  more  effective  than  electrical, — that  is, 
may  stimulate  the  nerve  fiber  when  electrical  stimuli  totally  fail 
to  do  so. 

3.  Thermal  stimuli.  A  sudden  change  in  temperature  may 
stimulate  the  nerve  fibers.  This  method  of  stimulation  is  very 
ineffective  for  motor  fibers,  only  very  extreme  and  sudden  changes, 
such  as  may  be  obtained  by  applying  a  heated  wire  directly  to 
the  nerve  trunk,  are  capable  of  so  stimulating  them  as  to  produce 
a  muscular  contraction.  On  the  other  hand,  the  sensory  nerve 
fibers  are  quite  sensitive  to  changes  of  temperature.  If  a  nerve 
trunk  in  a  man  or  animal  is  suddenly  cooled,  or  especially  if  it  is 
suddenly  heated  to  60°  to  70°  C,  violent  pain  results  from  the 
stimulation  of  the  sensory  fibers  in  the  trunk,  while  the  motor 
fibers  are  apparently  not  acted  upon.  We  have  in  this  fact  one 
of  several  differences  in  reaction  between  motor  and  sensory  fibers 
which  have  been  noted  from  time  to  time,  and  which  seem  to 


Fig.  29. — Stimulating  (catheter)  electrodes  for  nerves :  h,  Binding  posts  for  attachment 
of  wires  from  the  secondary  coil;  s,  insulating  sheath  of  hard  rubber;  p,  platinum  points 
laid  upon  the  nerve. 

indicate  that  there  is  some  essential  difference  in  structure  or  com- 
position between  them. 

4.  Electrical  stimuli.  Some  form  of  the  electrical  current  is  be- 
yond question  the  most  effective  and  convenient  means  of  stimulat- 
ing nerve  fibers.  We  may  employ  either  the  galvanic  current — that 
is,  the  current  taken  directly  from  a  battery — or  the  induced  current 
from  the  secondary  coil  of  an  induction  apparatus  or  the  so-called 
static  electricity  from  a  Ley  den  jar  or  other  source.  In  most  experi- 
mental work  the  induced  current  is  used.  The  terminal  wires  from 
the  secondary  coil  are  connected  usually  with  platinum  wires  im- 
bedded in  hard  rubber,  forming  what  is  known  as  a  stimulating  elec- 
trode. (See  Fig.  29).  By  this  means  the  platinum  ends  which  now 
form  the  electrodes,  anode  and  cathode,  can  be  placed  close  together 
upon  the  nerve  trunk,  and  the  induced  current  passing  from  one  to 
the  other  through  a  short  stretch  of  the  nerve  sets  up  at  that  point 
nerve  impulses  which  then  propagate  themselves  along  the  nerve 
fibers.  The  induction  current  is  convenient  because  of  its  intensity, 
which  overcomes  the  great  resistance  offered  by  the  moist  tissue ;  be- 
cause of  its  very  brief  duration,  in  consequence  of  which  it  acts  as  a 
sharp,  quick,  single  stimulus  or  shock,  and  because  of  the  great  easa 
6 


82 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OP  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE, 


with  which  it  may  be  varied  as  to  rate  and  as  to  intensity.  Each 
time  that  the  battery  current  in  the  primary  coil  is  made  or  broken 
there  is  an  induction  current  established  in  the  secondary  coil, 
and  if  the  nerve  is  on  the  electrode  the  current  passes  through  it 
and  stimulates  it.  This  induced  current  is,  however,  extremely 
short,  and  alternates  in  direction,  passing  in  one  direction  when  the 
primary  current  is  made  and  in  the  opposite  direction  when  it  is 
broken.  The  induced  current  set  up  by  the  making  of  the  battery 
current  in  the  primary  coil  we  designate  as  the  making  shock,  that 
set  up  by  the  breaking  of  the  current  in  the  primary  as  the  breaking 
shock.  On  account  of  the  very  brief  duration  of  the  induced  cur- 
rent it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  between  the  effects  of  its  opening 
and  closing. 

The  Stimulation  of  the  Nerve  by  the  Galvanic  Current. — When 

however,  we  employ  the  galvanic 
current,  taken  directly  from  a  bat- 
tery, as  a  stimulus,  we  can,  of 
course,  allow  the  current  to  pass 
through  the  nerve  as  long  as  we 
please  and  can  thus  study  the  effect 
of  the  closing  of  the  current  as 
distinguished  from  that  of  the  open- 
ing, or  the  effect  of  duration  or 
direction  of  the  current,  etc. 

Du  Bois-ReymoncV s  Law  of  Stim- 
ulation.— When  a  galvanic  current 
is  led  into  a  motor  nerve  it  is 
found,  as  a  rule,,  that  with  all 
moderate  strengths  of  currents  there 
is  a  stimulus  to  the  nerve  at  the 
moment  it  is  closed,  the  making  or 
closing  stimulus,  and  another  when 
the  current  is  broken,  the  breaking 
or  opening  stimulus,  while  during 
the  passage  of  the  current  through  the  nerve  no  stimulation  takes 
place:  the  muscle  remains  relaxed.  We  may  express  this  fact 
by  saying  that  the  motor  nerve  fibers  are  stimulated  by  the  mak- 
ing and  the  breaking  of  the  current  or  by  any  sudden  change 
in  its  intensity,  but  remain  unstimulated  during  the  passage  of  cur- 
rents whose  intensity  does  not  vary. 

The  Anodal  and  Cathodal  Stimidi. — -It  has  been  shown  quite  con- 
clusively that  the  nerve  impulse  started  by  the  making  of  the  current 
arises  at  the  cathode,  while  that  at  the  breaking  of  the  current 
begins  at  the  anode,  or,  in  other  words,  the  making  shock  or 
stimulus  is  cathodal,  while  the  breaking  stimulus  is  anodal.     This 


Fig.  30. — Schema  of  the  arrange- 
ment of  apparatus  for  stimulating  the 
nerve  by  a  galvanic  current:  b,  The 
battery ;  A;,  the  key  for  opening  and 
closing  the  circuit ;  c,  the  commutator 
for  reversing  the  direction  of  the  cur- 
rent; -|-  the  anode  or  positive  pole; 
—  the  cathode  or  negative  pole. 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  8.3 

fact  is  true  for  muscle  as  well  as  nerve,  and  possibly  for  all  irritable 
tissues  capable  of  stimulation  by  the  galvanic  current.  This 
important  generalization  may  be  demonstrated  for  motor  nerves 
by  separating  the  anode  and  cathode  as  far  as  possible  and  re- 
cording the  latent  period  for  the  contractions  caused  respect- 
ively by  the  making  and  the  breaking  of  the  current  in  the  nerve. 
If  the  cathode  is  nearer  to  the  muscle  the  latent  period  of  the  mak- 
ing contraction  of  the  muscle  will  be  shorter  than  that  of  the  break- 
ing contraction  by  a  time  equal  to  that  necessary  for  a  nerve  impulse 
to  travel  the  distance  between  anode  and  cathode.  If  the  position 
of  the  electrodes  is  reversed  the  latent  period  of  the  making  con- 
traction will  be  correspondingly  longer  than  that  of  the  breaking 
contraction.  It  is  very  evident  from  these  facts  that  w-hen  a 
current  is  passed  into  a  nerve  or  muscle  the  changes  at  the  two 
poles  are  different,  as  shoMH  by  the  differences  in  reactions  and 
properties  of  the  nerve  at  these  points.  It  is  interesting  to  add 
that  Bethe  has  showTi  recently  that  this  difference  may  be  demon- 
strated histologically.  After  the  passage  of  a  current  through  a 
nerve  for  some  time  the  axis  cylinders  stain  more  deeply  than 
normal  at  the  cathode  with  certain  dyes  (toluidin  blue),  while  at 
the  anode  they  stain  less  deeply. 

Electrotonus. — The  altered  condition  of  the  nerve  at  the  poles 
during  the  passage  of  the  galvanic  current  is  designated  as  electro- 
tonus, the  condition  at  the  anode  being  known  as  anelectrotonus, 
on  the  cathodal  side  as  catelectrotonus.  The  electrotonus  expresses 
itself  as  a  change  in  the  electrical  condition  of  the  nerve  which  gives 
rise  to  currents  known  as  the  electrotonic  currents, — a  brief  descrip- 
tion of  these  currents  will  be  given  in  the  next  chapter, — and  also 
by  a  change  in  irritability  and  conductivity.  The  latter  changes 
w^ere  first  carefully  investigated  by  Pfliiger,  who  showed  that  when 
the  galvanic  current,  or,  as  it  is  usually  called  in  this  connection, 
the  polarizing  current,  is  not  too  strong  there  is  an  increase  in 
irritability  and  conductivity  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  cathode, 
the  so-called  catelectrotonic  increase  of  irritability,  while  in  the 
region  of  the  anode  there  is  an  anelectrotonic  decrease  in  irrita- 
bility and  conductivity.  These  opposite  variations  in  the  state 
of  the  nerve  are  represented  in  the  accompanying  diagram.  Be- 
tween the  two  poles — that  is,  in  the  intrapolar  region — there  is, 
of  course,  an  indifferent  point,  on  one  side  of  which  the  irritability 
of  the  nerve  is  above  normal  and  on  the  other  side  below  normal. 
The  position  of  this  indifferent  point  shifts  toward  the  cathode 
as  the  strength  of  the  polarizing  current  is  increased.  In  other 
words,  as  the  current  increases  the  anelectrotonus  spreads  more 
rapidly  and  becomes  more  intense,  and  the  conductivity  in  this 
region  soon  becomes  so  depressed  as  to  block  entirely  the  passage 


84  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OP  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

of  a  nerve  impulse  through  it.  The  changes  on  the  cathodal  side 
are  not  so  constant  nor  so  distinct.  Later  observers*  have  shown, 
in  fact,  that  if  the  polarizing  current  is  continued  for  some  time 
the  heightened  irritability  at  the  cathode  soon  diminishes  and 
sinks  below  normal,  so  that  in  fact  at  the  cathode  as  well  as  at 
the  anode  the  irritability  may  be  lost  entirely.  If  the  polarizing 
current  is  very  strong  this  depressed  irritability  at  the  cathode 
comes  on  practically  at  once.  Moreover,  when  a  strong  current 
that  has  been  passing  through  a  nerve  is  broken  the  condition  of 
depressed  irritability  at  the  cathode  persists  for  some  time  after 
the  opening  of  the  current. 

Pfliiger's  Law  of  Stimulation. — It  was  said  above  that  when 
a  galvanic  current  is  passed  into  a  nerve  there  is  a  stimulus  (catho- 
dal) at  the  making  of  the  current  and  another  stimulus  (anodal) 


Fig.  31. — Electrotonic  alterations  of  irritability  caused  by  weak,  medium,  and  strong 
battery  currents:  A  and  B  indicate  the  points  of  application  of  the  electrodes  to  the  nerve,  A 
being  the  anode,  B  the  cathode.  The  horizontal  line  represents  the  nerve  at  normal  irri- 
tability; the  curved  lines  illustrate  how  the  irritability  is  altered  at  different  parts  of  the 
nerve  with  currents  of  different  strengths.  Curve  y^  shows  the  effect  of  a  weak  current,  the 
part  below  the  line  indicating  decreased,  and  that  above  the  line  increased  irritability;  at  x^ 
the  curve  crosses  the  line,  this  being  the  indifferent  point  at  which  the  catelectrotonic  effects 
are  compensated  for  by  anelectrotonic  effects;  y-  gives  the  effect  of  a  stronger  current,  and 
y^,  of  a  still  stronger  current.  As  the  strength  of  the  current  is  increased  the  effect  becomes 
greater  and  extends  farther  into  the  extrapolar  regions.  In  the  intrapolar  region  the  in- 
different point  is  seen  to  advance,  with  increasing  strengths  of  current,  from  the  anode 
toward  the  cathode. — (Lombard.) 

at  the  breaking  of  the  current.  This  statement  is  true,  however, 
only  for  a  certain  range  of  currents.  Of  the  two  stimuli,  the  making 
or  cathodal  stimulus  is  the  stronger,  and  it  follows,  therefore, 
that  when  the  strength  of  the  current  is  diminished  there  will  come 
a  certain  point  at  which  the  anodal  stimulus  will  drop  out.  With 
weak  currents  there  is  then  a  stimulus  only  at  the  make.  On  the 
other  hand,  when  very  strong  currents  are  used  the  stimuli  that  act 
at  the  two  poles  set  up  nerve  impulses  whose  passage  to  the  muscle 
may  be  blocked  by  the  depressed  conductivity  caused  by  the  electro- 
tonic  changes.     Whether  or  not  the  stimulus  will  be  effective  in 

*Werigo,  "Pfluger's  Archiv,"  84,  547,  1901.  See  Biedermann,  "  Elec- 
trophysiology,"  translated  by  Welby,  vol.  ii,  p.  140. 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION.  85 

causing  a  contraction  in  the  attached  muscle  will  depend  naturally 
on  the  relative  positions  of  the  electrodes, — that  is,  on  the  direction 
of  the  current  in  the  nerve.  In  describing  the  effect  of  these  strong 
currents  we  must  distinguish  between  what  are  called  ascending 
and  descending  currents.  Ascending  currents  are  those  in  which 
the  direction  of  the  current  in  the  nerve  is  away  from  the  muscle, 
a  position  of  the  poles,  therefore,  in  which  the  anode  is  closer  to 
the  muscle.  In  descending  currents  the  positions  are  reversed. 
Pfliiger's  law  of  contraction  or  of  stimulation  takes  account  of 
the  effect  of  extreme  variations  in  the  strength  of  the  current 
and  is  usually  expressed  in  tabular  form  as  follows :  The  letter  C 
indicates  that  the  nerve  is  stimulated  and  causes  a  contraction  in 
the  attached  muscle,  and  O  indicates  a  failure  in  the  stimulation 
(weak  currents)  or  a  failure  in  the  nerve  impulse  to  reach  the  muscle 
owing  to  blocking  (strong  currents) . 


Fig.  32. — Schema  to  show  the  arrangement  of  apparatus  for  an  ascending  and  a  descending 
current:   A,  ascending;   D,  descending. 

Ascending  Current.     Descending  Current. 
Making.     Breaking.  Making.     Breaking. 

Very  weak  currents  .  .  C  O  C  O 

Moderate  "     .  .  .  .C  C  C  C 

Very  strong     "     .  .  .  .  O  C  C  O 

The  effects  obtained  with  the  strong  currents  are  readily  under- 
stood if  we  bear  in  mind  the  facts  stated  above  regarding  electro- 
tonus.  When  the  current  is  ascending  the  stimulus  on  making 
starts  from  the  cathode,  but  cannot  reach  the  muscle  because  it 
is  blocked  by  a  region  of  anelectrotonus  in  which  the  conduc- 
tivity is  depressed.  The  stimulus  on  breaking  takes  place  at 
the  anode  and  the  impulse  encounters  no  resistance  in  its  passage 
to  the  muscle.  With  the  descending  current  the  cathode  lies  next 
to  the  muscle  and  the  making  or  cathodal  stimulus  of  course  causes 
a  contraction.  On  breaking,  however,  the  impulse  that  is  started 
from  the  anode  is  blocked  by  the  depressed  irritability  in  the 


86  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

cathodal  region,  which,  as  has  been  said,  comes  on  promptly  with 
strong  currents  and  persists  for  a  time  after  the  current  is  broken. 

The  Opening  and  the  Closing  Tetanus. — While  the  du  Bois- 
Reymond  law  stated  above  expresses  the  facts  as  usually  observed 
upon  a  nerve-muscle  preparation,  there  are  a  number  of  observa- 
tions which  indicate  that  the  excitation  at  the  anode  and  the 
cathode  during  the  passages  of  a  current  may  give  rise  to  a  series 
of  stimuli  instead  of  a  single  stimulus.  Thus  with  sensory  nerves 
it  is  well  known  that  the  stimulation,  as  judged  by  the  sensations 
aroused,  continues  while  the  current  is  passing  instead  of  being 
limited  to  the  moment  of  making  or  of  breaking  of  the  current.  In 
this  respect,  as  in  stimulation  by  high  temperatures,  the  sensory  fibers 
differ  apparently  from  the  motor.  When  a  galvanic  current  is  passed 
through  the  ulnar  nerve  at  the  elbow  sensations  are  felt  during  the 
entire  time  of  passage  of  the  current.  But  in  an  ordinary  nerve- 
muscle  preparation  it  is  also  frequently  observed  that  at  the 
moment  of  opening  the  current  a  tetanic  contraction,  persisting  for 
some  time,  is  obtained  instead  of  a  single  twitch.  This  phenomenon 
is  known  as  the  opening  tetanus  or  Ritter's  tetanus,  and  Pfliiger 
has  sho'wn  that  the  continuous  excitation  proceeds  from  the  anode, 
since  in  the  case  of  a  descending  current  division  of  the  nerve  in 
the  intrapolar  region  brings  the  muscle  to  rest.  In  the  same  way 
it  frequently  happens  that  upon  closing  the  current  through  a  nerve 
the  muscle,  instead  of  giving  a  twitch,  goes  into  a  persistent  tetanic 
contraction.  The  tetanus  in  this  case  is  designated  as  the  closing 
or  Pfliiger's  tetanus.  Both  of  these  phenomena  are  observed 
especially  when  the  irritability  of  the  nerve  is  for  any  reason  greater 
than  normal, — for  instance,  when  it  has  been  cooled  to  a  low  tem- 
perature. It  seems  probable,  therefore,  to  many  observers  that 
the  excitation  at  the  cathode  persists  in  reality  during  the  passage 
of  the  current  even  in  motor  fibers,  although  ordinarily  the  exci- 
tation makes  itself  felt  upon  the  muscles  only  at  the  moment  of 
closure;  the  excitations  during  the  passage  of  the  current  being 
either  too  -weak  to  affect  the  muscle  or  the  condition  of  the  nerve 
being  such  as  to  prevent  their  conduction  to  the  muscle.  It  should 
be  added  that  the  opening  and  the  closing  tetanus  may  be  observed 
also  in  a  muscle  when  the  galvanic  current  is  passed  through  it. 

Stimulation  of  the  Nerves  in  Man.- — For  therapeutic  as  well 
as  diagnostic  and  experimental  purposes  it  often  becomes  desirable 
to  stimulate  the  nerves,  particularly  the  motor  nerves,  in  man. 
We  may  use  for  this  purpose  either  the  induced  (faradic,  alternat- 
ing) current  or  the  direct  battery  current  (galvanic  or  continuous 
current).  In  such  cases  the  electrodes  cannot  be  applied  of  course 
directly  to  the  nerve;  it  becomes  necessary  to  stimulate  through 
the  skin,   and  the  so-called  unipolar  method  is  employed.     The 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION. 


87 


unipolar  method  consists  in  placing  one  electrode,  the  active  or 
stimulating  electrode,  over  the  nerve  at  the  point  which  it  is  desired 
to  stimulate,  while  the  other  electrode,  the  inactive  or  indifferent 
electrode,  is  applied  to  the  skin  at  some  more  or  less  remote  part, 
usually  at  the  back  of  the  neck.  The  indifferent  electrode  is  made 
large  enough  to  cover  several  square  centimeters  of  the  skin  and 
one  may  conceive  the  threads  of  current  passing  from  it  into  the 
moist  tissues  of  the  body  and  thence  to  the  active  electrode.  As  the 
threads  of  current  condense  to  this  electrode  they  pass  through 
the  motor  nerve  which  lies  under  it,  and  if  sufficiently  intense  will 


Fig.  33. — Schema  to  show  the  unipolar  method  of  stimulation  in  man.  The  anode, 
-f,  is  represented  as  the  stimulating  pole,  applied  over  the  median  nerve.  The  cathode, 
- — ,  is  the  indifferent  pole. 

stimulate  the  nerve.  The  arrangement  is  represented  in  the  accom- 
panying schema  (Fig.  33),  showing  the  disposition  of  the  electrodes 
for  stimulating  the  median  nerve.  At  the  indifferent  electrode  the 
sensory  nerves  of  the  skin  are  of  course  stimulated,  but  no  motor 
response  is  obtained,  as  no  motor  nerve  lies  inunediately  under  the 
skin.  Moreover  the  large  size  of  this  electrode  tends  to  diffuse  the 
current  and  thus  reduce  its  effectiveness  in  stimulating.  The  active 
or  stimulating  electrode  is  small  in  size,  particularly  when  induction 
currents  are  employed,  so  that  the  current  may  be  condensed  and 
thus  gain  in  effectiveness.     The  dry  surface  of  the  skin  is  a  poor 


88  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OP   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

conductor  of  the  electrical  current,  and  to  reduce  the  resistance  at  the 
points  at  which  the  electrodes  come  in  contact  with  the  skin  each  is 
covered  with  cotton  or  chamois  skin  kept  moistened  with  a  dilute 
saline  solution. 

Motor  Points. — By  means  of  the  unipolar  method  nearly  every 
voluntary  muscle  of  the  body  may  be  stimulated  separately.  All 
that  is  necessary,  when  the  induced  current  is  used,  is  to  bring  the 
active  electrode  as  nearly  as  possible  over  the  spot  where  the 


HaV  tfinam| 


AL  flexor  cflTpi  nloaris 


M,  lnmbricale3-< 


M.  deltoideus 

AfejT,  musciilocuianeus 
M,  biceps  brachii 
M«  brach-  interous 


>  Nerv,  medianus 
M.  supinator  longtis 
M.  pronator  teres 
M.  flei.  carpi  radialis 

IL  flexor  digitor.  subllm. 

BI,  flex,  pollicis  longu3 
„_  Nerv.  medianus 

M,  abductor  polUc  brev, 
M.  opponens  polIici3 

M.  flex.  poll,  brev, 

M,  adductor  poUIa  brev- 


Fig.  34. — Motor  points  in  upper  extremity. 


muscle  receives  its  motor  branch.  A  diagram  showing  these  motor 
points  for  the  arm  is  given  in  Fig.  34.  In  the  same  v^ay  the  nerves 
of  the  brachial  plexus  and  other  nerve  trunks  may  be  stimulated  very 
readily  through  the  skin.  When  the  induction  current  is  used  no 
distinction  can  be  made  betv^een  the  cathodic  and  anodic  effects. 
When,  however,  the  battery  current  is  employed  one  may  make 
the  stimulating  electrode  either  anode  or  cathode,  and  under  these 
circumstances  a  marked  difference  is  observed  in  the  strength  of 


THE  PHENOMENON  OF  CONDUCTION. 


89 


the  current  that  it  is  necessary  to  use  to  get  a  response.  With  the 
battery  or  galvanic  current,  in  fact,  one  may  distinguish  four  stimuli, 
the  closing  and  the  opening  shock  when  the  stimulating  electrode 
is  the  cathode  and  the  closing  and  the  opening  shock  when  it  is 
the  anode.  The  contractions  resulting  from  these  four  stimuli  are 
designated  usually  as  follows:  The  cathodal  closing  contraction, 
CCC;  the  cathodal  opening  contraction,  COC;  the  anodal  clos- 
ing contraction,  A  C  C ;  and  the  anodal  opening  contraction, 
A  0  C.  Their  relative  efhciency  as  stimuli  is  given  by  the  sequence 
CCOACOAOOCOC,  although  this  sequence  is  subject, 
so  far  as  the  first  two  members  are  concerned,  to  some  individual 
variation.  Certain  pathological  or  traumatic  lesions  that  cause  the 
degeneration  of  the  nerves  may  be  revealed  by  the  use  of  these 


f^^~ 


—  ^,C 


C^^ 


-±J^^ 


-Af^l 


/I  \  \ 


yo-  /a.    JO. 


I 


u 


Fig.  35. — Two  schemata  to  show  the  relation  between  the  physical  and  the  physio- 
logical electrodes  or  poles.  Each  schema  represents  the  forearm  with  the  median  nerve, 
M.  In  /  the  stimulating  electrode  is  the  cathode ;  the  threads  of  current  which  have  started 
from  the  anode  (the  indifferent  electrode)  placed  elsewhere,  converge  to  this  pole.  Where 
these  threads  enter  the  nerve  we  have  a  series  of  physiological  anodes,  a;  where  they  leave, 
a  series  of  physiological  cathodes,  c.  In  //  the  stimulating  electrode  is  the  anode.  The 
threads  of  current  leave  this  pole  to  traverse  the  body  toward  the  indifferent  electrode 
(cathode).  Where  they  enter  and  leave  the  nerve  we  have,  as  in  the  first  case,  physio- 
logical anodes  and  cathodes,  now,  however,  on  the  opposite  sides  of  the  nerve. 


methods  of  stimulation.  The  nerve  trunk  under  such  circum- 
stances fails  to  respond  to  either  form  of  stimulus,  induced  or  gal- 
vanic. The  muscle,  on  the  other  hand,  while  it  fails  to  respond  to 
induction  shocks,  is  stimulated  by  the  galvanic  current  and  shows 
certain  qualitative  changes  in  its  reactions  to  this  latter  form  of 
stimulation.  For  instance,  under  these  conditions  the  A  C  C  is  ob- 
tained with  less  current  than  the  C  C  C,  a  relation  which  is  just  the 
reverse  of  the  normal.  This  qualitative  and  quantitative  change 
in  reaction  to  the  galvanic  current,  and  the  loss  of  irritability  to  the 
induced  current,  constitute  what  is  known  as  the  reaction  of  degen- 
eration. 

Distinction  between  Physical  and  Physiological  Poles. — The 
facts  stated  above  seem  to  show,  at  first  sight,  that  by  the 
unipolar  method  we  may  obtain  both   an   opening  and  a  closing 


90  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

shock  at  either  the  cathode  or  anode, — a  result  which  is  in 
apparent  contradiction  to  the  general  law  that  the  making  or 
closing  stimulus  occurs  only  at  the  cathode  and  the  breaking 
or  opening  stimulus  only  at  the  anode.  This  apparent  contra- 
diction is  readily  explained  when  we  remember  that  in  the 
unipolar  method  the  active  electrode  rests  upon  the  skin  over  the 
nerve,  and  that  the  threads  of  current  radiating  from  this  point 
enter  the  nerve  at  one  point  and  leave  it  at  another.  Evidently, 
therefore,  so  far  as  the  nerve  is  concerned,  there  will  be  an  anode 
where  the  current  is  considered  as  entering  the  nerve  and  a  cathode 
where  it  leaves  it,  so  that  under  the  active  electrode,  whether  this 
is  physically  an  anode  or  cathode,  there  will  be,  as  regards  the 
nerve,  a  series  of  what  may  be  called  physiological  cathodes  and 
anodes.  The  closing  shock  arises  at  these  cathodes,  the  opening 
shock  at  the  anodes.  The  position  of  the  series  of  anodes  and 
cathodes  will  vary  according  as  the  active  electrode  is  an  anode 
or  cathode,  as  is  indicated  in  the  accompanying  diagram  (Fig.  35). 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  ELECTRICAL  PHENOMENA  SHOWN  BY  NERVE 
AND  MUSCLE. 

The  Demarcation  Current. — Our  definite  knowledge  of  the 
electrical  properties  of  living  tissue  began  with  the  celebrated  in- 
vestigations of  du  Bois-Reymond*  (1843).  When  a  muscle  or 
nerve  is  removed  from  the  body,  and,  in  the  case  of  the  muscle, 
one  tendinous  end  is  cut  off,  it  is  found  that  the  cut  end  has  an 
electrical  potential  that  differs  from  that  of  the  uninjured  longi- 
tudinal surface  of  the  preparation.  Following  the  usual  nomen- 
clature, the  cut  end  is  electronegative  as  regards  the  longitudinal 
surface.  If,  therefore,  the  longitudinal  surface  is  connected  by 
a  conductor  with  the  cut  surface  a  current  will  flow  from  the 
former  to  the  latter,  as  is  indicated  in  the  accompanying  diagram. 


Fig.  36. — Schema  showing  the  course  of  the  demarcation  current  in  an  excised  nerve, 
"when  a  point  on  the  longitudinal  and  one  on  the  cut  surface  are  united  by  a  conductor. 

While  the  direction  of  the  current  through  the  conductor  con- 
necting the  two  points  is  from  the  longitudinal  to  the  cut  surface 
the  current  may  be  considered  as  being  completed  in  the  opposite 
■direction  within  the  substance  of  the  muscle  or  nerve,  as  shown 
in  the  diagram.  We  may,  in  fact,  consider  an  excised  nerve  or 
muscle  as  a  battery,'  the  cut  end  representing  the  zinc  plate  and 
the  longitudinal  surface  the  copper  plate.  Within  the  battery 
the  direction  of  the  current  is  from  zinc  to  copper,  from  cut  end 
to  longitudinal  surface;  outside  the  battery  the  direction  is  from 
copper  to  zinc,  from  longitudinal  to  cut  surface.  If  two  wires 
are  connected  with  the  muscle  or  nerve  the  end  of  the  one  attached 
to  the  longitudinal  surface  will  represent  the  positive  pole  or  anode, 
the  end  of  the  one  attached  to  the  cut  end  will  represent  the  cathode 

*  "Untersuchungen  iiber  thierische  Elektricitat,"  du  Bois-Reymond, 
1848-1860. 

91 


92 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 


or  negative  pole.     On  joining  the  ends  of  the  wires  a  current  will 
pass  from  positive  to  negative  pole. 

A  current  of  this  character  from  an  excised  nerve  or  muscle 
is,  of  course,  small  in  amount  and  to  detect  it  one  must  make 
use  of  a  delicate  electrometer  of  some  sort  (see  below).  Du  Bois- 
Reymond  considered  that  the  difference  in  electrical  potential 
which  gives  rise  to  this  current  exists  normally  in  the  muscle, 
although  masked  by  an  opposite  condition  in  the  tendinous  ends, 
and  he  therefore  spoke  of  the  currents  as  the  natural  muscle  or 
natural  nerve  current.     It  has  since  been  shown  by  Hermann 

that  this  view  is  incorrect,  that  the 
perfectly  normal  uninjured  muscle  or 
nerve  has  the  same  electrical  potential 
throughout  and  will  therefore  give  no 
current  when  any  two  points  are  con- 
nected by  a  conductor.  Moreover,  the 
completely  dead  muscle  or  nerve  shows 
no  current.  The  difference  in  poten- 
tial that  is  found  in  the  excised 
nerve  or  muscle  is  due,  according  to 
Hermann,  to  the  fact  that  at  the  cut 
end  the  nerve  or  muscle  is  injured.  The 
chemical  changes  that  take  place  as  a 
result  of  the  injury  make  the  tissue 
electronegative  as  regards  the  un- 
changed living  substance  elsewhere. 
For  this  reason  Hermann  described 
the  current  obtained  as  a  demarcation 
current;  others  have  called  it  the  cur- 
rent of  injury. 


0 


Fig.  37.  —  Schema  showing 
the  principle  of  construction  of 
the  galvanometer :  M,  The  mag- 
net suspended  by  a  thread;  B, 
the  battery,  with  the  wires  lead- 
ing off  the  current  encircling  the 
magnet. 


Means  of  Demonstrating  the  Demarcation  Current. — The  demarca- 
tion current  and  other  electrical  conditions  to  be  described  require  especial 
apparatus  for  their  study.  To  detect  the  existence  of  a  current  physiologists 
use  either  a  high-resistance  galvanometer  or  a  capillary  electrometer.  The 
galvanometers  employed  are  usually  of  two  types,  the  Kelvin  reflecting 
galvanometer  or  the  d'Arsonval  form.  The  principle  of  the  galvanometer 
lies  in  the  fact  that  a  magnetic  needle  is  deflected  when  an  electrical  current 
passes  through  a  wire  in  its  vicinity.  As  shown  in  the  accompanying  dia- 
gram, if  a  magnetic  needle  is  swung  by  a  delicate  thread  so  as  to  move  easily 
it  will  come  to  rest  in  the  magnetic  meridian  with  its  north  pole  pointing 
north.  If  now  a  wire  is  curved  round  it  and  a  battery  current  is  sent  through 
this  wire  the  needle  will  be  deflected  to  the  right  if  the  current  passes  in  one 
direction  and  to  the  left  if  it  passes  in  the  opposite  direction.  The  move- 
ment of  the  needle  is  an  indication  of  the  presence  and  direction  of  the  electrical 
current  in  the  wire.  The  extent  of  deflection  of  the  needle  may  be  used  to 
measure  the  strength  of  the  current  by  ascertaining  the  amount  of  deflection 
caused  by  a  standard  battery.  The  effect  of  the  current  upon  the  needle 
increases  with  the  number  of  turns  of  wire,  so  that  delicate  galvanometers 
constructed  upon  this  principle  are  spoken  of  as  high  resistance  galvanom- 


ELECTRICAL    PHENOMENA. 


93 


eters,  the  great  length  of  wire  used  making,  of  course,  a  high  resistance. 
Instead  of  having  the  coil  through  which  the  current  passes  kept  in  a  fixed 
position  and  the  magnet  delicately  swung  or  poised,  the  re\-erse  arrangement 
may  be  used, — that  is,  the  coil  may  be  swung  bet\\een  the  poles  of  a  fixed 
magnet.  Under  these  circumstances  if  a  current  is  sent  through  the  coil 
this  latter  will  move  with  reference  to  the  magnet.  A  galvanometer  con- 
structed on  this  principle  is  designated  as  a  d'Arsonval  galvanometer,  after 
the  physiologist  who  first  employed  this  arrangement.  The  d'Arsonval  form 
of  galvanometer  possesses  many  practical  advantages  for  physiological  work, 
and  it  may  suffice  to  give  the  details  of  this  form  alone.  In  the  d'Arsonval 
form  the  magnet  is  fixed  while  the  coil  of  wire  through  which  the  current 
passes  is  swung  by  a  very  delicate  thread  of  quartz,  silk  fiber,  or  phosphor- 
bronze.  The  principle  of  the  arrangement  is  shown  in  the  accompanying 
diagram  (Fig.  39)  and  the  complete  instrument  in  Fig.  38.  A  large  horse- 
shoe magnet  {n,  s)  is  fixed  permanently  and  between  the  poles  is  swung  a 
coil  (c)  of  delicate  wire,  the  two  ends  of  the  wire  being  connected  with  binding 


Fig.  38. — D'Arsonval  galvanometer  as  modified  by  Rowland. 


posts  in  the  frame  of  the  instrument.  The  coil  is  held  in  place  below  by  a 
delicate  spiral.  In  Fig.  39  it  will  be  seen  that  the  delicate  thread  suspending 
the  coil  carries  just  above  the  coil  a  small  mirror,  m,  and  a  plate  of  thin  mica 
or  aluminum.  The  mirror  is  deflected  with  the  coil,  and  when  viewed  through 
the  telescope  pictured  in  Fig.  38  the  image  of  the  scale  above  the  telescope  is 
reflected  in  this  mirror.  As  the  coil  and  mirror  are  tAvisted  by  the  action 
of  the  current  passing  through  the  former  the  reflection  of  the  scale  in  the 
mirror  is  displaced.  By  means  of  a  cross  hair  in  the  telescope  the  angle  of 
deflection  may  be  read  upon  the  reflected  scale.  The  aluminum  vane  back  of 
the  mirror  makes  the  system  dead-beat  so  that  when  a  deflection  is  obtained 
the  sy.stem  comes  quickly  to  rest  with  few  or  no  oscillations.  If  the  coil  of  wire 
contains  sufficient  turns,  enough  to  give  a  total  resistance  of  two  to  three 
thousand  ohms,  and  the  poles  of  the  magnet  are  brought  very  close  to  the 
coil,  the  instrument  may  be  given  a  delicacy  sufficient  to  study  accurately 
the  muscle  and  nerve  currents.  In  such  an  instrument  the  effect  of  the  earth's 
magnetism  may  be  neglected  and  the  galvanometer  may  be  hung  upon  any 
support  without  reference  to  the  magnetic  meridian. 


94 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 


The  Capillary  Electrometer. — The  movable  system  of  a  galvanometer 
possesses  considerable  weight,  therefore  inertia;  so  that  it  will  not  indicate 
accurately  the  presence  or  extent  of  very  brief  electrical  currents  such  as  have 
to  be  studied  in  physiology  in  some  cases.  For  purposes  of  this  kind  a  simple 
instrument  known  as  the  capillary  electrometer  is  employed.  The  principle 
of  the  construction  of  this  instrument  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  40.  A  glass  tube, 
a,  is  drawn  out  at  one  end  into  a  very  fine  capillary  the  end  of  which  dips 


Fig.  39. — Diagram  of  struc- 
ture of  the  d'Arsonval  galvanom- 
eter, c  is  the  coil  of  fine  wire 
through  which  the  current  is 
passed.  It  is  swung  by  a  fine 
thread  of  phosphor-bronze  so  as 
to  lie  between  and  close  to  the 
poles — (re)  north  pole,  and  (s) 
south  pole — of  the  magnet.  Just 
above  the  magnet  the  thread  car- 
ries a  mica  or  aluminum  vane  to 
which  is  attached  a  small  mirror. 
The  scale  of  the  instrument  is  re- 
flected in  this  mirror  and  is 
observed  through  the  telescope 
shown  in  Fig.  38. 


Fig.  40. — Schema  of  capillary  electrometer 
arranged  to  show  the  demarcation  current  in 
muscle  {Lombard):  a.  The  glass  tube  containing 
mercury  and  drawn  to  a  fine  capillary  below ;  c, 
the  receptacle  containing  mercury  by  raising 
which  the  mercury  can  be  driven  into  the  capil- 
lary of  a;  f,  a  vessel  with  glass  sides  containing 
mercury  below,  and  above  dilute  sulphuric  acid 
into  which  the  capillary  of  a  dips;  E,  the  micro- 
cope  for  observing  the  mercury  thread  in  the 
capillary ;  m,  the  muscle ;  g  and  h,  the  wires 
touching  the  longitudinal  and  cut  surfaces  of  the 
muscle.  The  current  flows  as  indicated  by  the 
small  arrows ;  d,  the  capillary  thread  of  mercury 
as  seen  under  the  microscope. 


into  some  diluted  .sulphuric  acid  contained  in  the  vessel  (/) .  At  the  bottom 
of  this  vessel  is  a  layer  of  mercury  connecting  with  a  wire,  g,  fused  into  the 
glass  vessel.  The  tube  a  is  partially  filled  with  redistilled  mercury,  which 
penetrates  for  a  short  distance  into  the  capillary.  By  means  of  pressure  ap- 
l^lied  from  above  c,  the  mercury  can  be  forced  through  the  capillary.  Then 
toy  diminishing  the  pressure  the  mercury  can  be  brought  back  into  the  capil- 
lary a  certain  distance,  drawing  after  it  some  of  the  dilute  .sulphuric  acid. 
The  mercury  in  tube  a  is  connected  with  the  other  pole  of  the  battery  by  a. 


ELECTRICAL    PHENOMENA. 


95 


i-'-S 


wire  fused  into  its  wall  and  dipping  into  the  mercury  By  regulating  the 
pressure  on  the  mercury  the  point  of  contact  between  the  thread  of  mercury 
and  the  sulphuric  acid  in  the  capillary,  d,  can  be  brought  to  any  desired  posi- 
tion. An  equilibrium  is  then  established  which  will  remain  constant  as  long 
as  the  conditions  are  not  changed.  If  now  the  circuit  from  a  battery  or 
other  source  of  electricity — for  example,  the  excised  nerve  or  muscle — is  closed, 
the  current  entering  by  wire  g,  if  this  represents  the  anode,  traverses  the  sul- 
phuric acid  and  mercury  in  the  capillary  and  returns  by  the  wire  h.  At  the 
moment  of  the  establishment  of  the  current  the  equilibrium  of  forces  that  holds 
the  mercury  at  a  certain  point  in  the  capillary  is  disturbed,  the  end  of  the  mer- 
cury thread  moves  upward  with  the  current  for  a  certain  distance,  depending 
on  the  strength  of  the  current  and  the  delicacy  of  the  capillary.  If  the  cur- 
rent be  passed  in  the  opposite  direction  the  mercury  will  move  downward  a 
certain  distance.  The  meniscus  of  contact  moves  up 
or  down  with  the  direction  of  the  current,  owing,  it  is 
supposed,  to  a  change  in  the  surface  tension  at  this 
point.  The  capillary  tube  as  used  for  physiological 
purposes  is  too  small  for  the  movements  of  the  mer- 
cury to  be  detected  with  the  eye.  It  is  necessary  to 
magnify  it  either  with  a  microscope  or  a  projection 
lantern.  Ordinarily  the  electrometer  is  so  made  that  it 
can  be  placed  upon  the  stage  of  the  microscope  and 
the  capillary  be  brought  into  focus  at  the  meniscus, 
as  shown  in  d,  Fig.  40.  By  means  of  proper  apparatus 
the  movement  can  be  photographed  and  thus  a  per- 
manent record  be  obtained  of  the  direction  and  e.xtent 
of  movement  of  the  mercury. 

N on-'polarizable  Electrodes. — In  connectmg  a 
muscle  or  nerve  to  an  electrometer  or  galvanometer 
it  is  necessary  that  the  leading  off  electrodes — that  is, 
the  points  of  contact  between  the  wires  and  the 
muscle  or  nerve — shall  be  iso-electrical  and  non-polar- 
izable.  By  iso-electrical  is  meant  that  the  two  elec- 
trodes shall  have  the  same  electrical  potential,  and  it 
is  obvious  that  the  leading  off  electrodes  must  fulfill 
this  condition  appro.ximately  at  least,  since  otherwise 
the  current  obtained  from  the  muscle  or  nerve  could 
not  be  attributed  to  differences  in  potential  in  the 
tissue  itself;  it  would  be  shown  by  any  other  moist 
conductor  connecting  the  two  electrodes.  Two  clean 
platinum  electrodes  would  fulfill  this  condition.  A 
more  serious  difficulty  is  found  in  the  polarization  of 
metallic  electrodes.  Whenever  a  metal  conductor 
and  a  liquid  conductor  come  into  contact  there  is  apt 
to  be  polarization.  This  polarization  expresses  itself 
by  changes  at  the  metal  poles  during  the  passage  of 
the  current,  changes  of  such  a  character  that  a  cur- 
rent is  set  up  between  the  poles  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection to  the  main  current,  thus  weakening  the  lat- 
ter. This  polarization  current  is  due  to  the  accumulation  of  hydrogen  gas 
at  the  negative  pole  or  cathode  and  of  oxygen  at  the  anode.  What  takes" 
place  may  be  represented  by  the  following  diagram,  in  which  a  current  is 
supposed  to  be  passing 

^ 

+  +  +  + 

Na       Na        Na        Na 


-Z 


Fig.  41. — To  show 
the  structure  of  a  non- 
polarizable  electrode: 
1 ,  The  pad  of  kaoHn  or 
filter  paper  moistened 
with  physiological  sa- 
Hne  (NaCl,  0.7  per 
cent.)  (this  is  placed  on 
the  tissue) ;  2,  the  sat- 
urated solution  of  zinc 
sulphate;  (3)  the  bar 
of  amalgamated  zinc. 


-I- 

A 


CI 


CI 


CI 


CI 


between  the  poles  A  and  C  through  a  solution  of  sodium    chloric!.      During 
the  passage  of  the  current  the  cations,  Na,  with  their  positive  charges  move 


96  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

toward  the  cathode;  at  the  cathode  the  free  sodium  ion  acts  upon  the  water, 
HHO,  forming  NaOH  and  liberating  hydrogen,  which  gives  its  charge  to  the 
cathode  and  accumulates  upon  it  in  the  form  of  gas.  The  anions,  CI, 
with  their  negative  charges  move  toward  the  anode;  there  the  chlorin  acts 
upon  the  water,  forming  HCl  and  liberating  oxygen.  It  is  obvious  that  in 
quantitative  studies  of  the  electrical  currents  of  animal  tissues  polarization 
will  destroy  the  accuracy  of  the  results ;  the  demarcation  current  wiU  show 
a  diminution  due  not  to  changes  in  the  nerve,  but  to  physicochemical  changes 
at  the  leading  off  electrodes.  To  prevent  polarization  du  Bois-Reymond  devised 
the  non-polarizable  electrodes  consisting  of  zinc  terminals  immersed  in  zinc 
sulphate.  Theoretically  any  metal  in  a  solution  of  one  of  its  salts  may  be  used, 
but  experience  shows  that  the  zinc-zinc  sulphate  electrode  is  most  nearly 
perfect.  Each  electrode  where  it  comes  into  contact  with  the  tissue  is  made 
of  one  of  these  combinations.  Various  devices  have  been  used.  For  instance, 
the  electrode  may  be  constructed  as  shown  in  the  diagram  (Fig.  41).  A 
short  glass  tube  of  a  bore  of  about  4  mms.  is  well  cleaned — one  end, 
which  is  to  come  into  contact  with  the  nerve,  is  fiUed,  as  shown,  by  a  plug  of 
kaolin  made  into  a  stiff  putty  with  physiological  saline  (solution  of  NaCl,  0.7  per 
cent.).  The  kaolin  should  have  a  neutral  reaction  and  unless  good  kaolin  is 
obtainable  it  is  better  to  use  a  plug  made  of  clean  filter  paper  macerated  in 
physiological  saline  and  packed  tightly  into  the  end  of  the  tube.  Above  this 
plug  the  tube  is  filled  in  for  a  part  of  its  length  with  a  saturated  solution  of 
zinc  sulphate  into  which  is  immersed  a  bar  of  amalgamated  zinc  with  a  copper 
wire  soldered  to  its  end.  With  a  pair  of  such  electrodes  the  conduction  of 
the  current  through  the  nerve  or  muscle  to  the  metallic  part  of  the  circuit 
may  be  represented  as  follows: 


-^ 


+ 
Zn 


+  +  +  +  +  +  + 

Zn        Zn        Na        Na       Na       Zn        Zn 

SO,       SO,     CI         CI        CI         SO,      SO, 


Zn 


The  liquid  part  of  the  circuit  comes  into  contact  with  the  metallic  part 
at  the  junction  of  Zn  and  ZnSO,.  At  the  cathode  it  may  be  supposed  that 
the  Zn  cation  instead  of  acting  upon  the  water  and  liberating  hydrogen, 
deposits  itself  upon  the  zinc  electrode;  at  the  anode  the  sulphion  (SO,) 
attacks  the  zinc  instead  of  the  water,  forming  ZnSO,.  In  this  way  polarization 
is  prevented,  and  by  the  construction  of  the  electrode  the  living  tissue  is 
brought  into  contact  only  with  the  plug  of  kaolin  moistened  with  physio- 
logical saline.  Such  electrodes  are  indispensable  in  studying  the  electrical  phe- 
nomena of  living  tissues,  and  also  in  all  investigations  bearing  upon  the  polar 
effects  during  the  passage  of  an  electrical  current  from  a  battery.  Ordinarily, 
however,  when  it  is  only  desired  to  stimulate  a  nerve  or  muscle,  metal  (plat- 
inum) electrodes  are  employed. 

The  Action  Current  or  Negative  Variation. — Du  Bois-Rey- 
mond proved  that  when  the  excised  muscle  or  nerve  is  stimulated 
its  demarcation  current  suffers  a  diminution  or  negative  variation. 
If,  for  instance,  the  excised  nerve  gives  a  demarcation  current  suf- 
ficient to  cause  a  deflection  in  the  galvanometer  of  50  mms.,  then 
if  the  nerve  is  stimulated  by  a  series  of  induction  shocks  the  galva- 
nometer will  show  a  lessened  deflection,  say,  one  of  40  mms.  The 
negative  variation  in  this  case  is  equal  to  10  mms.,  on  the  scale  of 
the  galvanometer  used.  It  has  been  shown  that  this  negative  varia- 
tion is  due  to  a  current  in  the  opposite  direction  whose  strength,  in 


ELECTRICAL   PHENOMENA.  97 

the  example  given,  relative  to  that  of  the  demarcation  current  is  as 
10  to  50;  so  that  frequently  the  phenomenon  of  the  negative  varia- 
tion is  known  also  as  the  action  current.  The  explanation  given 
for  this  action  current  is  that  the  nerve  or  muscle  when  excited 
takes  on  an  electrical  condition  which  is  negative  as  regards  any 
unexcited  or  less  excited  portion  of  the  nerve.  The  effect  upon  the 
demarcation  current  is  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  diagram. 
The  demarcation  current  in  a  nerve  is  led  off  to  a  galvanometer 
by  electrodes  placed  at  b  and  c.  When  the  nerve  is  stimulated  at 
a  the  excitation  set  up  passes  along  the  nerve,  and  wherever  it  may 
be  that  portion  of  the  nerve  is  thrown  into  an  electronegative  con- 
dition. When  this  condition  reaches  a  point  where  it  can  influence 
the  galvanometer — that  is,  when  it  reaches  b,  it  will  diminish  the 
difference  in  potential  that  exists  between  b  and  c,  and  therefore 
reduce  the   current 

flowing  from  6  to  c.  _j_ 

Bernstein*  has 
shown  that  this  neg- 
ative condition 
moves  in  the  form  of 
a  wave.  That  is,  at 
any  point  the  nega- 
tivity grows  to  a  jr;g  42.— schema  to  indicate  the  method  of  detecting 
maximum  and  then  ^^®  action  current  in  a  stimulated  excised  nerve :  6  and  c, 
.  ^ .  the  leading  off  electrodes,  one  on  the  longitudinal,  one  on 
diminishes.  More-  ttie  cut  surface;  the  demarcation  current  passes  through 
.  ,  the  galvanometer,  3,  in  the  direction  of  the  arrows;  a,  stimu- 
O Ver,  it  travels  at  a  lating  electrodes  from  induction  coil ;  the  stimulus  causes  a 
^  n  -1.  1  -J.  negative  condition, — which  passes  along  the  nerve;  when 
Clennite  velocity  this  reaches  b  it  causes  a  partial  reversal  of  the  demarca- 
■wViifVi       i«!    '  pflssilv       ^^""^  current,  giving  the  negative  variation   or  action  cur- 

measured.  Accord- 
ing to  his  experiments,  the  velocity  of  this  wave  in  the  frog's 
motor  nerve  is  from  25  to  28  meters  per  second,  and  the  length 
of  the  wave  is  about  18  mms.  Hermann,  on  the  contrary,  be- 
lieves that,  in  the  excised  nerve  at  least,  the  length  of  the  wave 
may  be  greater,  reaching  perhaps  140  mms. 

These  figures  will  vary  naturally  for  the  nerves  of  different  ani- 
mals or  for  different  nerves  in  the  same  animal,  for  it  must  always 
be  remembered  that  nerve  fibers,  whose  functions  in  general  are  so 
similar,  differ  much  in  obvious  microscopical  structure  and  probably 
more  widely  in  their  chemical  composition.  Using  an  analogy  that 
is  familiar,  we  may  say  that  when  a  stimulus  acts  upon  a  living 
nerve  a  wave  of  electronegativity  spreads  from  the  stimulated 
spot  and  travels  in  wave  form  with  a  definite  velocity,  just  as  water 
waves  radiate  from  the  spot  at  which  a  stone  is  thrown  into  a  quiet 

*  Bernstein,    "  Untersuchungen  iiber  den  Erregungsvorgang  im  Nerven- 
und  Muskelsysteme,"  Heidelberg,  1871. 
7 


98  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

pool.  A  similar  phenomenon  occurs  in  muscle  fibers  when  stimu- 
lated, but  the  negative  condition  travels  over  the  muscle  fiber  at  a 
slower  speed,  3  to  4  meters  per  second  in  frog's  muscle,  and  with  a 
wave  length,  according  to  Bernstein,  of  only  10  mms.  This  wave 
of  negativity  or  of  excitation  in  the  muscle  precedes  the  actual 
wave  of  contraction. 

This  phenomenon  of  a  negative  electrical  condition  traveling 
over  the  nerve  or  muscle  and  giving  us  an  active  current  when  led 
off  through  a  galvanometer  is  of  the  greatest  physiological  impor- 
tance, particularly  in  the  study  of  nerves.  It  has  been  shown 
that  in  the  nerve  this  wave  of  negativity  marks  the  progress  of  the 
wave  of  excitation,  and,  since  we  can  study  its  progress  by  means 
of  the  galvanometer  or  capillary  electrometer,  we  can  thus  study  the 
excitability  and  conductivity  in  nerves  when  removed  from  con- 
nection with  their  end-organs.  That  the  negative  wave,  or  the 
action  current  that  it  gives  rise  to,  is  an  invariable  sign  of  the 
passage  of  an  excitation  or  nerve  impulse  is  shown  by  the  facts 
that  it  is  absent  in  the  dead  nerve,  and  that  in  the  living  nerve  it  is 
produced  by  mechanical,*  chemical,!  and  reflext  stimulations,  as 
well  as  by  the  more  usual  method  of  electrical  stimulation. 

Herzen  has  claimed  that  under  certain  conditions  of  local  narcosis  the 
nerve  fibers  when  stimulated  may  give  an  action  current,  but  no  muscle  con- 
traction,— a  fact  which  if  true  would  seem  to  show  that  the  excitation  wave 
or  nerve  impulse  and  the  wave  of  negative  potential  are  not  associated 
invariably.  This  result,  however,  has  been  denied  by  other  competent 
observers  (Wedenski,  Boruttau). 

Monophasic  and  Diphasic  Action  Currents. — According  to 
the  conception  of  the  action  current  given  above,  it  is  evident  that 
it  should  be  obtained  upon  stimulation  when  a  living  normal  nerve 
is  connected  at  any  two  points  of  its  course  with  a  galvanometer  or 
capillary  electrometer.  The  detection  of  the  current  under  such 
conditions  offers  more  difficulties,  because  it  is  diphasic,  as  will 
be  seen  from  the  accompanying  diagram  (Fig.  43).  The  figure  rep- 
resents a  normal  nerve  led  off  to  the  galvanometer  from  two  points, 
b  and  c,  of  its  longitudinal  surface.  As  these  points  in  the  uninjured 
nerve  have  the  same  potential,  no  current  is  shown  by  the  galvanom- 
eter. If  the  nerve  is  stimulated  at  a  by  a  single  stimulus  a  neg- 
ative condition  or  charge  passes  along  the  nerve.  When  it  reaches 
the  point  b  there  will  be  a  momentary  current  through  the  gal- 
vanometer from  c  to  b;  as  the  charge  passes  on  toe  this  point  in 
turn  will  become  negative  to  b,  and  there  will  be  a  momentary  cur- 

*Steinach,  "Pfiiiger's  Archiv,"  55,  487,  1894. 

tGriitzner,  "  Pfiiiger's  Archiv,"  25,  255,  1881. 

t  Boruttau,  "  Pfiiiger's  Archiv,"  84  and  90,  1901-1902. 


ELECTRICAL   PHENOMENA.  99 

rent  through  the  galvanometer  in  the  other  direction.  The  diphasic 
current  that  occurs  under  these  conditions  cannot  be  detected  by 
a  galvanometer,  even  when  a  series  of  stimuli  is  sent  into  the  nerve 
at  a,  since  the  movable  system  in  this  instrument  has  too  much 
inertia  to  respond  to  such  quick  changes  in  opposite  directions. 
With  the  more  mobile  capillary  electrometer  the  diphasic  currents 
have  been  demonstrated  successfully.  In  laboratory  investiga- 
tions one  of  the  leading  off  electrodes,  c,  is  usually  placed  on  the 
cut  end  of  the  nerve.  Under  this  condition  the  action  current  be- 
comes monophasic  and  shows  itself  as  a  negative  variation  of  the 
demarcation  current.  This  difference  is  due  to  the  fact  that  a  nega- 
tive condition  upon  excitation  depends  upon  a  living  condition 
of  the  nerve,  and  it  can  not,  therefore,  affect  the  nerve  at  the 
electrode  c  if  this  latter  is  placed  upon  the  cut  end  where  the  nerve 
is  dead  or  dying.  It  will  affect  only  the  electrode  6,  and  give  only 
the  monophasic  current,  which  can  now  be  shown  by  the  galvanom- 
eter provided  a  series  of  stimuli  is  thrown  in  at  a. 


Fig.  43. — Schema  to  show  the  arrangement  for  obtaining  a  diphasic  action  current. 
The  arrangement  differs  from  that  in  Fig.  42  only  in  that  both  leading  off  electrodes,  b  and 
c,  are  placed  on  the  longitudinal  surface.  No  demarcation  current  is  indicated.  When 
the  nerve  is  stimulated  at  a  the  negative  charge  reaches  b  first,  causing  a  current  through 
the  galvanorneter  from  c  to  b.  Subsequently  it  reaches  c  and  causes  a  second  current 
in  the  opposite  direction  from  b  to  c. 

The  Positive  Variation. — It  happens  not  infrequently  that  when  one 
electrode  is  placed  upon  the  cut  end,  the  nerve  upon  stimulation  with  a  series 
of  induction  shocks  gives  a  positive  instead  of  a  negative  variation  of  the 
demarcation  current.  This  result  is  usually  explained  as  being  due  to  a  pre- 
dominance of  the  anelectrotonic  currents  (see  below) ,  but  Wedenski  has  con- 
tended recently  that  it  is  due  to  a  peculiar  condition  of  excitation  in  the  nerve 
at  the  cut  end,  a  condition  to  which  he  gives  the  name  of  parabiosis.  When 
this  phenomenon  occurs  it  can  usually  be  removed  by  making  a  fresh  section 
at  the  end  of  the  nerve. 

Detection  of  the  Action  Currents  by  the  Rheoscopic  Frog 
Preparation  or  by  the  Telephone. — The  motor  nerve  of  a  nerve- 
muscle  preparation  from  a  frog  is  so  extremely  irritable  to  electrical 
currents  that  it  may  be  used  instead  of  a  galvanometer  to  detect 
the  action  currents  in  a  stimulated  muscle.  A  nerve-muscle  prep- 
aration used  for  this  purpose  is  knowm  as  a  rheoscopic  preparation. 
The  way  in  which  it  is  used  is  indicated  in  the  accompanying 
diagram,  h  represents  the  rheoscopic  preparation,  its  nerve  being 
laid  upon  the  muscle  whose  currents  are  being  investigated,  a,  so  as 


100  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

to  touch  the  cut  end  (x)  and  the  longitudinal  surface  (g) .  When  a  is 
stimulated,  either  directly  or  through  its  nerve,  as  represented  in  the 
diagram,  the  negative  charges  that  pass  along  the  muscle  fibers  of 
a  with  each  stimulus  cause  action  currents  that  will  be  led  off 
through  the  nerve  of  b  from  x  to  g.  If  the  nerve  is  in  a  sensitive  con- 
dition it  will  be  stimulated  by  the  action  currents  and  thus  a  series  of 
excitations  will  be  sent  into  h  corresponding  exactly  in  rate  with 
the  artificial  stimuli  given  to  the  nerve  of  a.  The  rheoscopic 
preparation  may  be  used  very  beautifully  to  demonstrate  the 
action  current  in  the  contracting  heart  muscle.  If  the  nerve  of 
b  is  laid  upon  the  exposed  beating  heart  of  an  animal,  the  muscle 
of  b  will  give  a  single  twitch  for  each  beat  of  the  ventricle.  An- 
other interesting  method  of  detecting  the  action  currents,  particu- 
larly in  nerves,  is  by  means  of  the  telephone.  Wedenski  has  made 
especial  use  of  this  method,  the  telephone  being  connected  with 


Fig-  44. — Schema  to  show  the  arrangement  of  a  rheoscopic  muscle-nerve  preparation; 
0,  The  rheoscopic  muscle-nerve  preparation,  the  nerve  being  arranged  to  touch  the  cut  sur- 
face and  the  longitudinal  surface  of  the  muscle,  a,  whose  action  currents  are  to  be  detected. 
When  the  nerve  of  a  is  stimulated  each  contraction  of  this  muscle  is  followed  by  a  contrac- 
tion of  b,  since  each  contraction  of  a  is  accompanied  by  an  action  current  which  passes 
through  the  nerve  of  b  and  stimulates  it. 

the  nerve  in  place  of  the  galvanometer.  The  method  has  obvious 
advantages  in  the  fact  that  it  may  be  used  with  a  nerve  to  which 
the  muscle  is  also  attached,  so  that  the  excitation  processes  in 
the  nerve  and  their  effect  upon  the  muscle  may  be  studied  simul- 
taneously. In  matters  of  rate  the  telephone  method,  appealing 
to  the  ear,  as  it  does,  is  more  delicate  than  the  galvanometer  or 
electrometer. 

Relation  of  the  Action  Current  to  the  Contraction  Wave 
in  Muscle  and  to  the  Excitation  Wave  (Nerve  Impulse)  in 
Nerve. — The  action  current,  or,  to  be  more  accurate,  the  moving 
negative  charge  which  gives  rise  to  an  action  current  when  two 
points  of  the  muscle  are  led  off  to  a  galvanometer,  has  been  shown 
by  Bernstein  to  precede  the  wave  of  contraction  in  muscle.  That 
is,  in  a  stimulated  muscle  fiber  the  electrical  change  at  any  point 
precedes  the  mechanical  process  of  shortening.  The  electrical  change 
passes  over  the  fiber  from  the  point  stimulated  in  the  form  of  a 


ELECTRICAL   PHENOMENA. 


101 


wave  of  definite  velocity,  but  at  any  one  point  the  electrical  change 
reaches  its  maximum  before  the  process  of  contraction  is  visible. 
We  may  suppose,  therefore,  that  the  electrical  change  is  an  indication 
of  the  excitation  or  possibly  constitutes  the  excitation  that  sets 
up  the  chemical  change  of  contraction,  or  else  that  the  change  in 
electrical  potential  is  caused  by  the  chemical  change  of  contraction 
and  precedes  the  mechanical  result  of  shortening,  since  the  latter 
process  will  have  a  certain  latent  period.  It  has  been  shown, 
indeed,  by  Demoor  that  a  completely  fatigued  muscle  may  still 
conduct  an  excitation  (muscle  impulses),  although  unable  to  con- 
tract, and  the  same  fact  has  been  demonstrated  by  Engelmann 
for  the  heart  muscle.  In  the  nerve  the  action  current,  or  the 
negative  change  causing  it,  has  been  considered  as  simultaneous 
with  or  possibly  identical  with  the  nerve  impulse.  The  velocity 
of  the  two  is  identical;  the  action  current  is  given  whenever  the 
nerve  is  stimulated, 
and,  so  far  as  experi-       i  A 

ments  have  gone, the       ^ — ''—^ ^ f — — — ^i ' — — — '' — '^ 

nerve  can  not  enter 
into  activity  with- 
out showing  an  ac- 
tion current, — that 
is,  without  showing 
a  moving  electrical 
charge.  Whether 
this  electrical  charge 
constitutes  the 
nerve  impulse  or 
is  simply  an  accom- 
panying phenome- 
non will  be  discussed  briefly  in  the  paragraph  upon  the  nature  of 
the  nerve  impulse  in  the  following  chapter. 

The  Electrotonic  Currents. — In  speaking  of  the  effect  of 
passing  a  galvanic  current  through  a  nerve  attention  was  called 
to  the  fact  that  the  condition  of  the  nerve  is  altered  at  each  pole. 
At  the  anode  there  is  a  condition  of  decreased  irritability  and  con- 
ductivity known  as  anelectrotonus;  at  the  cathode,  in  the  begin- 
ning, at  least,  a  condition  of  increased  irritability  kno^^Ti  as  cate- 
lectrotonus.  In  addition  to  these  changes  in  the  physiological  prop- 
erties of  the  nerve  there  is  a  change  also  in  its  electrical  conditions 
at  each  pole  of  such  a  character  that  if  the  nerve  is  led  off  from 
two  points  on  the  anode  side  a  current  will  be  indicated.  The 
current  can  be  obtained  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  anode, 
and  is  known  as  the  anelectrotonic  current,  while  the  electrical  con- 
dition in  the  nerve  that  makes  it  possible  is  designated  as  anelec- 


Fig.  45. — Schema  to  show  the  direction  of  the  elec- 
trotonic currents  in  an  excised  nerve:  P,  The  battery  for 
the  polarizing  current  sent  into  the  nerve  at  +,  the  an- 
ode, and  emerging  at  — ,  the  cathode;  g',  galvanometer 
arranged  with  leading  off  electrodes  to  detect  the  anelec- 
trotonic current,  the  direction  of  which  is  indicated  by 
the  arrows  (in  the  nerve  it  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  po- 
larizing current);  g,  galvanometer  similarly  arranged  to  de- 
tect the  catelectrotonic  current.  The  anelectrotonic  and 
catelectrotonic  currents  continue  as  long  as  the  polarizing 
current  is  maintained. 


102 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE    AND    NERVE. 


trotonus.  A  similar  current  can  be  led  off  from  the  nerve  on  the 
cathode  side  for  a  considerable  distance  beyond  the  cathode ;  this 
is  known  as  the.catelectrotonic  current,  and  the  electrical  condition 
leading  to  its  production  as  catelectrotonus.  Within  the  nerve 
these  electrotonic  currents  have  the  same  direction  as  the  battery  or 
polarizing  current,  as  is  shown  in  the  diagram  (Fig.  45).  The  terms 
anelectrotonus  and  catelectrotonus  are  used,  therefore,  in  physiology 
to  designate  both  the  physiological  and  the  electrical  changes 
around  the  poles  when  a  battery  current  is  led  into  a  nerve. 
Whether  the  physiological  and  the  electrical  changes  have  a  causal 
connection  or  are  two  independent  phenomena  is  at  present  un- 
decided. 

Bethe*  has  recently  shown  that  during  the  passage  of  the  polarizing  cur- 
rent the  neurofibrils  in  the  axis  cylinder  lose  at  the  anode  their  power  of  stain- 
ing with  certain  basic  dyes  (e.  g.,  methylene  blue),  while  at  the  cathode  the 
affinity  for  these  dyes  is  increased.  He  assumes,  that  in  the  neurofibrils  there 
is  an  acid  substance — fibril  acid — and  that  at  the  anode  the  combination 
with  this  body  and  the  neurofibrils  is  loosened;  hence  the  loss  of  staining 
power.     At  the  cathode  the  reverse  change  takes  place.     He  assumes  further- 


Fig.  46. — To  show  the  action  of  the  core-model:  p.  The  polarizing  current;  g'  and 
g,  the  galvanometers  with  leading  off  electrodes  to  detect  the  anelectrotonic  and  catelec- 
trotonic  currents,  respectively. 


more,  that  when  the  affinity  between  neurofibril  and  fibril  acid  is  increased 
at  the  cathode  an  electronegative  ion  is  liberated  (anion),  while  at  the 
anode  at  the  time  that  the  combination  between  fibril  and  fibril  acid  is  dis- 
sociated an  electropositive  ion  (cation)  is  liberated.  In  this  way  he  constructs 
an  hypothesis  of  a  complex  of  neurofibril,  fibril  acid,  and  electrolyte  which 
is  capable  of  accounting  for  the  electrotonus,  both  as  regards  the  electrical  and 
the  physiological  phenomena,  and  which  refers  both  phenomena  to  a  single 
reaction  in  the  nerve. 

Another  explanation  of  the  electrotonic  currents  which  has  been  much 
discussed  is  that  first  developed  by  Hermann.!  This  author  constructed 
a  model  consisting  of  a  conductor  surrounded  by  a  less  conductive  liquid 
sheath,  and  showed  that  such  a  model  is  capable  of  giving  the  electrotonic 
currents.  This  model  may  be  made  as  represented  in  the  accompanying 
diagram,  of  a  glass  tube  A-B  through  the  middle  of  which  is  stretched  a 
platinum  wire,  P,  the  rest  of  the  tube  l^eing  filled  with  a  saturated  solution 
of  zinc  sulphate.  The  glass  tube  is  provided  with  vertical  branches  by  means 
of  which  a  polarizing  current,  p,  can  be  sent  into  the  solution  of  zinc  sulphate 
and  the  electrotonic  currents  be  led  off  to  galvanometers,  g' ,  g,  on 
each  side.     Under  these  conditions  a  current  similar  to  the  anelectrotonic 

*  Bethe,  "  Allgemeine  Anatomie  u.  Physiol,  des  Nervensystems,"  Leipzig, 


1903. 


tHermann,  "  Handbuch  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  ii,    p.  174. 


ELECTRICAL    PHENOMENA,  103 

current  can  be  detected  on  the  side  of  the  anode  {g')  and  one  equivalent  to 
the  catelectrotonic  current  on  the  side  of  tlie  cathode  {g).  The  explanation 
given  to  these  currents  is  that  as  the  threads  of  current  pass  into  the  platuium 
core  there  is  a  polarization  at  the  surface  between  the  core  and  the  zinc  sul- 
phate solution  which  extends  to  a  considerable  distance  on  each  side  of  the 
electrodes  and  causes  diffusion  currents  from  sheath  to  core.  It  is  these 
threads  of  current  that  may  be  led  off  as  electrotonic  currents.  Hermann 
suggested  that  ua  the  nerve  we  have  a  structure  essentially  similar  to  that 
of  the  core  model.  He  thought  that  the  axis  cylinder  might  be  considered 
as  representing  the  core  and  the  myelin  the  less  conductive  sheath  correspond- 
mg  to  the  zinc  sulphate  solution.  Others  (Boruttau)  have  suggested  that  the 
neurofibrils  in  the  axis  cylinder  may  represent  the  core  or  cores  and  the  sur- 
rounding neuroplasm  the  sheath,  thus  providing  for  the  possibility  of  electro- 
tonic  currents  in  non-meduUator  fibers.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  non-medul- 
lated  fibers  in  mammals  give  very  slight  electrotonic  currents  compared  with 
the  meduUated  fibers.* 

According  to  the  "core-model"  explanation,  the  electrotonic  currents 
represent  a  purely  physical  phenomenon,  which  is  dependent,  however,  upon 
a  certain  structure  of  the  nerve.  That  is,  a  completely  dead  nerve  will  not 
show  these  currents,  although  an  anesthetized  nerve,  in  the  mammal  (Waller) 
at  least,  continues  to  show  them,  and,  according  to  Sosnowsky,  excised  rab- 
bits' nerves  kept  in  a  moist  atmosphere  may  show  them  for  several  days. 
While  the  core-model  hypothesis  has  led  to  much  investigation  in  physiology 
and  has  been  made  the  basis  for  a  purely  physical  explanation  of  the  nerve 
impulse  (see  next  chapter),  it  is  still  very  uncertain  whether  it  furnishes  any 
positive  information  concerning  the  processes  that  actually  take  place  in  the 
living  nerve  when  submitted  to  the  action  of  electrical  currents  or  other  arti- 
ficial stimuli. 

*  Alcock,  "Proceedings  Royal  Society,"  1904,  73,  p.  166. 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE  AND  THE 

NUTRITIVE  RELATIONS  OF  NERVE  FIBER 

AND  NERVE  CELL. 

The  question  of  the  nature  of  the  nerve  impulse  has  always 
aroused  the  deepest  interest  among  physiologists.  It  has  consti- 
tuted, indeed,  a  central  question  around  which  have  revolved  vari- 
ous hypotheses  concerning  the  nature  of  living  matter.  The  impor- 
tance of  the  nerves  as  conductors  of  motion  and  sensation  was 
apparent  to  the  old  physiologists,  and  the  nature  of  the  conduction 
or  the  thing  conducted  was  the  subject  of  many  hypotheses  and 
many  different  names.  For  many  years  the  prevalent  view  was 
that  the  nerves  are  essentially  tubes  through  which  flows  an  ex- 
ceedingly fine  matter,  of  the  nature  of  air  or  gas,  known  as  the 
animal  spirits.  Others  conceived  this  fluid  to  be  of  a  grosser  struc- 
ture like  water  and  described  it  as  the  nerve  juice.  With  Galvani's 
discovery  of  electricity  the  nerve  principle,  as  it  was  called,  became 
identified  with  electricity,  and,  indeed,  this  view,  as  will  be  ex- 
plained, prevails  in  modified  form  to-day.  Du  Bois-Reymond, 
after  discovering  the  demarcation  current  and  action  current  in 
muscle  and  nerve,  formulated  an  hypothesis  according  to  which  the 
nerve  fibers  contain  a  series  of  electromotive  particles,  and  by 
this  hypothesis  and  the  facts  upon  which  it  was  based  he  thought 
that  he  had  established  that  "hundred-year-old  dream"  of  phys- 
icists and  physiologists  of  the  identity  of  the  nerve  principle 
and  electricity.  His  theory  to-day  has  fallen  into  disrepute,  but 
the  facts  upon  which  it  was  based  remain,  as  before,  of  the  deepest 
importance.  In  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century  those  who 
were  not  convinced  of  the  identity  of  the  nerve  principle  with 
electricity  believed,  nevertheless,  that  the  process  of  conduction 
in  the  nerve  is  a  phenomenon  of  an  order  comparable  to  the  trans- 
mission of  light  or  electricity,  with  a  velocity  so  great  as  to  defy 
measurement.  But  in  this  same  period  a  simple  but  complete 
experiment  by  Helmholtz  demonstrated  that  its  velocity  is,  rela- 
tively to  light  or  electricity,  exceedingly  slow, — 27  meters  per 
second.  To  many  minds  this  slow  movement  and  the  absence 
of  a  complete  circuit  made  the  electrical  theory  impossible.  Modern 
views  have  taken,  therefore,  divergent  directions;  the  movement 
or  excitation  that  is  conducted  along  the  fiber  has  been  named 

104 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE. 


105 


the  nerve  principle,  the  nerve  energy,  the  nerve  force,  the  nerve 
impulse.  As  the  latter  term  is  less  specific  regarding  the  nature 
of  the  movement,  and  emphasizes  the  fact  of  the  conduction  of  an 
isolated  disturbance  or  pulse,  it  seems  preferable  to  employ  it 
until  a  more  satisfactory  solution  of  its  nature  has  been  reached. 
The  Velocity  of  the  Nerve  Impulse. — The  determination  of 
the  velocity  of  the  nerve  impulse  was  first  made  by  Helmholtz* 
upon  the  motor  nerves  of  frogs.  His  experiment  consisted  in 
stimulating  the  sciatic  nerve,  first,  near  its  ending  in  the  muscle 


Fig.  47. — Record  to  show  the  method  of  estimating  the  velocity  of  the  nerve  impulse 
in  a  motor  nerve.  The  experiment  was  made  upon  a  nerve-muscle  preparation  from  the 
frog,  the  contractions  bring  recorded  upon  the  rapidly  moving  plate  of  a  pendulum  myo- 
graph. Two  contractions  were  obtained,  the  first  (a)  when  the  nerve  was  stimulated 
near  the  muscle,  the  second  (h)  when  the  nerve  was  stimulated  as  far  as  possible  fr9m  the 
muscle.  The  latent  period  of  the  second  contraction  was  longer,  as  shown  by  the  distance 
between  the  curves  measured  on  the  line  x.  The  value  of  this  distance  in  time  is  obtained 
by  reference  to  the  record  of  a  tuning  fork  vibrating  100  times  per  second,  which  is  given 
on  the  lower  line.  In  the  experiment  the  length  of  a  turning  fork  wave  (0.01  sec.)  was  21 
mms.,  the  distance  between  the  two  muscular  contractions  was  3.35  mms.,  and  the  dis- 
tance between  the  points  stimulated  upon  the  nerve  was  49  mms.  Hence  the  velocity  of  the 
nerve  impulse  in  this  experiment  was  49  divided  by  ^fW  o^  30716  mms.  (30.716  m.)  per 
second. 

and,  second,  near  its  origin  from  the  cord,  and  measuring  the  time 
that  elapsed  in  each  case  between  the  moment  of  stimulation  and 
the  moment  of  the  muscular  response.  It  was  found  that  when 
the  nerve  was  stimulated  at  its  far  end  this  time  interval  was 
longer,  and  since  all  other  conditions  remained  the  same  this  dif- 
ference in  time  could  only  be  due  to  the  interval  required  for  the 
nerve  impulse  to  travel  the  longer  stretch  of  nerve.     In  the  accom- 

*  Helmholtz,  "MiiUer's  Archiv  f.  Anat.  u.  Physiol.,"  1852,  p.  199. 


106  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

panying  figure  the  record  of  a  laboratory  experiment  of  this  kind 
is  reproduced.  Knowing  the  difference  in  time  and  also  the  length 
of  nerve  between  the  points  stimulated,  the  data  are  at  hand  to 
calculate  the  velocity  of  the  impulse.  The  velocity  varies  with  the 
temperatures.  According  to  Helmholtz,  this  variation  lies  between 
24.6  and  38.4  m.  per  second  for  a  range  of  temperature  between  11° 
and  21°  C.  For  average  room  temperatures  we  may  say  that  in 
the  motor  nerves  of  the  frog  the  impulse  travels  with  a  velocity 
of  28  to  30  meters  per  second.  Similar  experiments  upon  man  and 
■other  mammals  indicate  that  the  velocity  in  the  medullated  motor 
nerves  does  not  vary  greatly  in  different  animals.  Helmholtz 's 
average  figure  for  man  was  34  meters  per  second. 

It  is  interesting  to  recall  that  only  six  years  before  Helmholtz's  first  pub- 
lication .Johannes  Miiller  had  stated  that  we  should  never  find  a  means  of 
■determining  the  velocity  of  the  nerve  impulse,  since  it  would  be  impossible 
to  compare  points  at  great  distances  apart,  as  in  the  case  of  the  movement 
of  light.  "  The  time,"  said  he,  "  required  for  the  transmission  of  a  sensation 
from  the  periphery  to  the  brain  and  the  return  reflex  movements  of  the  mus- 
cles is  infinitely  small  and  unmeasurable."  The  mode  of  reasoning  by  which 
Helmholtz  was  led  to  doubt  the  validity  of  this  assertion  is  interesting.  He 
says  ("  Miiller's  Archiv,"  1852,  3.30) :  "  As  long  as  physiologists  thought  it 
necessary  to  refer  nerve  actions  to  the  movement  of  an  imponderable  or 
psychical  principle,  it  must  have  appeared  incredible  that  the  velocity  of  this 
movement  could  be  measured  within  the  short  distances  of  the  animal  body. 
At  present  we  know  from  the  researches  of  du  Bois-Reymond  upon  the  electro- 
motive properties  of  nerves  that  those  activities  by  means  of  which  the  con- 
duction of  an  excitation  is  accomplished  are  in  reality  actually  conditioned 
by  or  at  least  closely  connected  with  an  altered  arrangement  of  their  material 
particles.  Therefore  conduction  in  nerves  must  belong  to  the  series  of  self- 
propagating  reactions  of  ponderable  bodies,  such,  for  example,  as  the  con- 
duction of  sound  in  the  air  or  elastic  structures,  or  the  combustions  in  a  tube 
filled  with  an  explosive  mixture."  One  of  the  first  fruits,  therefore,  of  the 
scientific  investigation  of  the  electrical  properties  of  the  nerve  fiber  was  the 
■discovery  of  the  important  fact  of  the  velocity  of  the  nerve  impulse. 

Numerous  efforts  have  been  made  to  determine  the  velocity 
■of  the  nerve  impulse  in  medullated  sensory  fibers.  The  results 
have  not  been  entirely  satisfactory.  The  end-organ  in  this  case  is 
the  cortex  of  the  cerebrum,  and  its  reaction  consists  in  arousing  a 
sensation,  or  a  reflex  action.  Neither  end-reaction  can  be  meas- 
ured directly.  Attempts  have  been  made  to  determine  it  indi- 
rectly by  noting  the  time  of  a  voluntary  muscle  response  for  sensory 
stimuli  applied  to  the  skin  at  different  distances  from  the  spinal 
•axis.  In  such  cases  the  sensory  impulse  travels  to  the  cord,  thence 
to  the  brain,  and  the  return  motor  impulse  travels  from  brain  to 
cord  and  then  by  the  motor  nerves  to  the  muscle  used  for  the  re- 
sponse. The  results  of  this  method  have  been  discordant,  owing 
probably  to  the  fact  that  the  central  paths  from  two  different  points 
on  the  skin  are  not  identical.  It  is  usually  assumed — without, 
liowever,  very  convincing  proof — that  the  velocity  of  the  impulse 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE.  107 

in  the  medullated  afferent  nerve  fibers  is  the  same  as  in  the  efferent 
fibers.  A  large  number  of  observations  are  on  record  which  show 
that  the  velocity  varies  greatly  in  the  non-medullated  nerves  of 
different  animals.  In  the  mammal,  according  to  Chauveau,  the 
velocity  for  the  non-medullated  fibers  is  only  8  meters  per  second; 
in  the  lobster  it  is  6  meters  per  second;  in  the  octopus,  2  meters; 
in  the  olfactory  (sensory)  nerve  of  the  pike  -g-  meter,  and  in  the 
anodon  only  y^Q-  meter  per  second. 

Relation  of  the  Nerve  Impulse  to  the  Wave  of  Negativity, — 
A  fact  of  great  significance  is  that  the  velocity  of  the  impulse  in  the 
motor  nerves  of  the  frog  corresponds  exactly  to  the  velocity  of  the 
wave  of  negativity  as  measured  by  Bernstein.  Evidently  the  two 
phenomena  are  coincident  in  their  progress  along  the  fiber,  and 
physiologists  generally  have  accepted  the  existence  of  an  action  cur- 
rent as  a  proof  of  the  passage  of  a  nerve  impulse.  This  belief  is 
strengthened  by  the  fact  that,  as  stated  above,  the  negative  wave  ac- 
companies the  nerve  impulse  not  only  when  the  nerve  is  stimulated 
by  electrical  currents,  but  also  after  mechanical,  chemical,  or  reflex 
stimulation.  The  ciuestion  has  been  raised  as  to  whether  this  elec- 
trical phenomenon  accompanies  the  normal  nerve  impulse, — that  is, 
the  nerve  impulse  that  originates  in  the  nerve  centers,  in  the  case 
of  motor  nerves,  or  in  the  peripheral  sense  organs  in  the  case  of  sen- 
sory nerves.  In  regard  to  the  latter  relation  we  have  positive  evi- 
dence that  when  light  falls  upon  the  living  retina  an  electrical  distur- 
bance is  produced  by  the  visible  rays  of  the  spectrum,*  and  there 
is  every  reason  to  believe  that  the  passage  of  visual  impulses  along 
the  optic  nerve  is  accompanied  by  an  electrical  change.  With 
regard  to  normal  motor  impulses,  the  evidence  is  also  positive  that 
motor  discharges  from  the  central  nervous  system  are  accompanied 
by  a  wave  of  electrical  disturbance.  This  fact  may  be  shown  by 
stimulating  the  motor  areas  in  the  cerebral  cortex  and  testing  the 
efferent  nerves,  such  as  the  sciatic,  for  an  action  current;  or  by 
stimulating  a  posterior  root  on  one  side  in  the  lumbar  region  and 
testing  the  sciatic  nerve  on  the  other  side  with  a  galvanometer.f 
Moreover,  all  influences  that  alter  the  velocity  or  strength  of  the 
nerve  impulse  affect  the  electrical  disturbance  in  the  same  manner. 
It  is  believed  generally,  therefore,  that  the  electrical  alteration  is 
an  invariable  accompaniment  of  the  excitatory  wave,  and  the  dem- 
onstration of  an  action  current  in  a  nerve  is  tantamount  to  a  proof 
of  the  passage  of  a  nerve  impulse. 

Direction  of  Conduction  in  the  Nerve.— The  fact  that  under 
normal  conditions  the  motor  fibers  conduct  impulses  only  in  one 

*  Consult  Gotch,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  31,  1,  1904. 
tGotch  and  Horsley,  "Phil.  Trans.,  Royal  Soc,"  London,    1891,  vol. 
182  (B),  and  Boruttau,  "  Pfluger's  Archiv,"  1901. 


108  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

direction — i.  e.,  toward  the  periphery — and  the  sensory  fibers  in 
the  opposite  direction — that  is,  toward  the  nerve  center — suggests, 
of  course,  the  question  as  to  whether  the  direction  of  conduction  is 
conditioned  by  a  fundamental  difference  in  structure  in  the  two 
kinds  of  fibers.  No  such  difference  in  structure  has  been  revealed 
by  the  microscope,  although  in  two  respects  at  least  it  will  be  re- 
membered that  the  sensory  nerve  fibers  react  differently  from  the 
motor  fibers — namely,  in  the  fact  that  they  are  readily  stimulated 
by  high  temperatures  and  that  during  the  passage  of  a  galvanic 
current  of  constant  strength  they  are  stimulated  continuously  in- 
stead of  only  at  the  opening  or  closing  of  the  current.  These  latter 
differences,  however,  may  rest  simply  upon  a  difference  in  irrita- 
bility and  have  no  bearing  upon  the  question  in  hand.  It  is  the 
accepted  belief  in  physiology  that  any  nerve  fiber  may  conduct  an 
impulse  in  both  directions,  and  does  so  conduct  its  impulses  when  the 
fiber  is  stimulated  in  the  middle  of  its  course.  An  entirely  satisfactory 
proof  for  this  belief  is  difficult  to  furnish  unless  the  conclusion  in 

the  preceding  para- 
graph is  admitted, 
— the  conclusion, 
namely,  that  the 
electrical  change  is 
a  necessary  and  in- 
variable accompani- 

Fig.  48.— Schema  to  show  the  arrangement  for  proving        meut    of    the    Uerve 
the  propagation  of    the  negative  charge  in  both  directions:        •  ^  Tf    '  + 

a.   The    stimulating    electrodes;    g    and    g',    galvanometers        impUlSe.        it   IS   UOU 

virikt\'on  on^fchSde™'^''  ''"^"^^'^  '"^  "^""^  '^^  °'^^*'''^        difficult  tO   shoW  by 

means  of  a  galva- 
nometer that  when  a  nerve  trunk  is  stimulated  the  negative 
charge  spreads  in  both  directions  from  the  point  stimulated  and 
gives  an  active  current  on  either  side,  as  indicated  in  the  accom- 
panying diagram.  This  fact  holds  true  for  motor  or  for  sensory 
fibers.  The  older  physiologists  attempted  to  settle  this  question 
in  a  more  direct  way,  but  by  methods  which  later  experiments 
have  proved  to  be  insufficient.  They  attempted,  for  instance,  to 
unite  a  motor  and  sensory  trunk  directly,  to  cut  the  hypoglossal 
(motor)  and  the  lingual  (sensory)  and  suture,  say,  the  central  stump 
of  the  lingual  to  the  peripheral  stump  of  the  hypoglossal.  If  stimu- 
lation of  this  latter  trunk,  after  union  had  been  established,  gave 
signs  of  sensation  it  was  considered  as  proof  that  the  efferent  hypo- 
glossal fibers  were  now  conducting  afferently.  We  now  know  that  in 
such  a  case  the  old  hypoglossal  fibers  degenerate  completely,  and 
although  the  new  ones  that  are  eventually  formed  in  their  place  may 
not  be  outgrowths  from  the  lingual  stump  they  are  at  least  not  the 
old  efferent  fibers,  and  hence  experiments  of  this  kind  are  not  so 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE.  109 

conclusive  as  they  seemed  to  be  at  the  time  when  it  was  supposed 
that  severed  nerve  fibers  can  unite  immediately,  by  first  intention, 
without  previous  degeneration.  A  similar  objection  applies  to 
Paul  Bert's  often  quoted  experiment.  Bert  implanted  the  tip  of  a 
rat's  tail  into  the  skin  of  its  back.  After  union  had  taken  place  the 
tail  was  severed  at  the  base,  and  the  stump  now  attached  to  the 
back  was  tested  from  time  to  time  as  to  its  sensibility.  Sensation 
returned  slowly.  At  first  it  was  indefinite,  but  by  the  end  of  a 
year  was  apparently  normal. 

Modification  of  the  Nerve  Impulse  by  Various  Influences — 
Narcosis. — The  strength  of  the  impulse  and  its  velocity  may  be 
modified  in  various  ways:  by  the  action  of  temperature,  narcotics, 
pressure,  etc.  Variations  of  temperature,  as  stated  before,  change 
the  velocity  of  propagation  of  the  impulse,  the  velocity  increasing 
with  a  rise  of  temperature  up  to  a  certain  point.  So  also  the  irri- 
tability and  the  conductivity  of  the  nerve  fiber  are  influenced 
markedly  by  temperature.  If  a  small  area  of  a  nerve  trunk  be 
cooled  or  heated  the  nerve  impulse  as  it  passes  through  this  area 
may  be  increased  or  decreased  in  strength  or  may  be  blocked 
entirely.  Different  fibers  show  somewhat  different  reactions  in 
this  respect;  but,  speaking  generally,  the  limits  of  conductivity 
in  relation  to  temperature  lie  between  0°  C.  and  50°  C.  Cooling 
a  nerve  to  0°  C.  will  in  most  cases  suspend  the  conductivity,  but 
this  function  returns  promptly  upon  warming.*  This  fact  fur- 
nishes a  convenient  means  of  blocking  the  nerve  impulses  in  a 
nerve  trunk  for  any  desired  length  of  time.  In  the  same  way 
anesthetics  and  narcotics,!  such  as  ether,  chloroform,  cocain, 
chloral,  phenol,  alcohol,  etc.,  may  be  apphed  locally  to  a  nerve 
trunk  and  if  the  application  is  made  with  care  the  conductivity 
and  irritability  may  be  lessened  or  suspended  entirely  at  that  point, 
to  be  restored  again  when  the  narcotic  is  removed.  It  is  an  inter- 
esting fact  that  the  conductivity  of  the  nerve  may  be  suspended 
also  by  deprivation  of  oxygen,  J — that  is,  by  local  suffocation  or 
asphyxia.  A  nerve  fiber  surrounded  by  an  oxygen-free  atmosphere 
will  slowly  lose  its  conductivity,  and  this  property  will  be  restored 
promptly  upon  the  admission  of  oxygen.  Compression  of  a  nerve 
will  also  suspend  its  conductivity  without  permanently  injuring 
the  fibers  provided  the  pressure  is  properly  graduated.  Lastly,  as 
was  explained  in  a  preceding  chapter,  the  conductivity  of  the  nerve 
may  be  increased  or  decreased  or  suspended  entirely  by  the  action 
of  a  galvanic  (polarizing)  current.  This  method  of  suspending 
-conductivity  temporarily  has  been  frequently  employed  for  ex- 

*  Howell,  Budgett,  and  Leonard,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  16,  298,  1894. 
t  Frohlich,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  allgemeine  Physiol,"  3,  75,  1903. 
t  Baeyers,  ibid.,  2,  169,  1903. 


no 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 


perimental   purposes,   the   arrangement   being   as  represented  in 
Fig.  49. 

When  the  conductivity  of  the  nerve  is  interrupted  by  any  of  the  methods 
described  above,  certain  peculiar  reactions  may  be  obtained  in  the  inter- 
mediate stages  before  conduction  is  entirely  abolished.  The  most  interest- 
ing of  the  stages  is  the  paradoxical  condition.  In  this  stage  a  weak  stimulus 
applied  at  a  will  cause  a  contraction  of  the  muscle,  while  a  stronger  stimulus 
will  prove  ineffective.  Wedenski,*  who  has  studied  these  reactions  with 
great  care,  believes  that  the  nerve  in  the  narcotized  area  is  thrown  into  a 
pecuhar  condition  of  continued  excitation  to  which  he  gives  the  name  of 
parabiosis.  The  condition  is  supposed  to  be  characterized  physiologically 
by  a  loss  of  labihty  of  the  living  material.  It  seems  possible,  however,  that 
the  reactions  which  are  taken  as  characteristic  of  the  parabiotic  condition 
may  be  explained  upon  the  assumption  that  the  narcotics  and  other  reagents 
mentioned  so  alter  the  nerve  as  to  make  it  more  susceptible  to  fatigue  (see 
following  paragraph). 

The    Question  of    Fatigue    of   Nerve   Fibers. — An   important 
question  in  connection  with  the  nature  of  the  nerve  impulse  has 

been  that  of  the  suscep- 
tibiHty  of  the  nerve  fibers 
to  fatigue.  The  obvious 
fatigue  of  muscles  and 
of  nerve  centers  has  been 
referred  to  the  accumula- 
tion of  the  products  'of 
metabolism  of  their  tis- 
sues or  to  the  actual, 
consumption  of  the  en- 
ergy-yielding material  in_ 
them.  Functional  activ- 
ity in  these  tissues  im- 
plies the  breaking  down 
of  complex  organic  material  (catabolism)  and  the  setting  free 
of  the  so-called  chemical  energy.  The  potential,  chemical,  or  internal 
energy  of  the  compound  is  liberated  as  kinetic  energy  of  heat,  etc. 
It  has  been  accepted,  therefore,  that,  if  the  nerve  fiber  could  be 
demonstrated  to  show  fatigue  as  a  result  of  functional  activity, 
this  fact  would  be  probable  proof  that  the  conduction  of  the  im- 
pulse is  associated  with  a  chemical  change  of  a  catabolic  nature  in 
the  substance  of  the  fiber.  Experimental  work,  however,  has 
shown  that  under  normal  conditions  the  nerve  fiber  shows  no 
fatigue.  The  experiments  made  upon  this  point  have  been  nu- 
merous and  varied.  The  general  idea  underlying  all  of  them  has 
been  to  stimulate  the  nerve  continuously,  but  to  interpose  a  block 
somewhere  along  the  course  of  the  nerve  so  that  the  impulses  should 
not  reach  the  end-organ.  This  precaution  is  necessary  because: 
*  Wedenski,  "  Pfluger's  Archiv,"  100,  1,  1904. 


Fig.  49. — Schema  to  show  the  method  of  block- 
ing the  nerve  impulse  by  means  of  a  polarizing  cur- 
rent: a.  The  stimulating  electrodes;  b,  the  battery, 
the  current  of  which  is  led  into  the  nerve.  The  de- 
pressed irritability  at  both  anode,  +,  and  cathode,  ; — , 
prevents  the  nerve  impulse  started  at  a  from  reaching 
the  muscle. 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE.     •        111 

the  end-organ — muscle,  gland,  etc. — is  subject  to  fatigue,  and 
must  therefore  be  protected  from  constant  activity.  From  time 
to  time  or  at  the  end  of  a  long  period  of  stimulation  the  block  is 
removed  and  it  is  noted  whether  or  not  the  end-organ — for  in- 
stance, the  muscle — gives  signs  of  a  stimulation.  The  removable 
block  has  been  obtained  by  the  action  of  a  polarizing  current,  by 
cold,  by  narcotics,  by  curare,  etc.  Using  curare,  for  instance, 
Bowditch*  found  that  the  sciatic  nerve  might  be  stimulated  continu- 
ously by  induction  shocks  for  several  (four  to  five)  hours  without 
complete  fatigue,  since  as  the  curare  effect  wore  off  the  muscle 
whose  contractions  were  being  recorded  (M.  tibialis  ant.)  began 
to  respond,  at  first  with  single  and  finally  with  tetanic  contractions. 
The  curare  in  this  case  may  be  supposed  to  have  blocked  the  nerve 
impulse  at  the  motor  end-plate  and  thus  protected  the  muscle 
from  responding  until  the  lapse  of  several  hours,  although  the 
nerve  during  this  entire  time  was  conducting  tetanic  stimuli.  This 
experiment  has  since  been  repeated  by  Durig,t  who  has  made  use 
of  the  fact  that  the  effects  of  curare  can  be  removed  within  a  few 
minutes  by  the  salicylate  of  physostigmin.  Durig  stimulated  the 
nerve  for  as  much  as  ten  hours  and  then  upon  removing  the  curare 
block  found  from  the  contraction  of  the  muscle  that  the  nerve 
was  still  conducting.  Edesf  and  others  have  shown  that  the 
same  result  is  obtained  when  the  nerve  is  tested  by  a  capillary 
electrometer  instead  of  by  the  response  of  an  end-organ.  Under 
such  conditions  the  nerve  exhibits  an  undiminished  action  cur- 
rent, although  constantly  stimulated  by  tetanizing  shocks  from  an 
induction  apparatus.  Brodie  and  Halliburton  §  have  found  that 
the  non-medullated  fibers  in  the  splenic  nerve  can  also  be  stimulated 
for  many  hours  without  losing  their  power  of  conduction, — that 
is,  without  showing  fatigue.  Many  other  observers  have  obtained 
similar  results,  which  have  confirmed  physiologists  in  the  belief 
that  the  nerve  fibers  may  conduct  impulses  indefinitel}^,  or,  in 
other  words,  that  their  normal  functional  activity  may  be  carried 
on  continuously  without  fatigue.  If  this  belief  is  entirely  correct 
it  would  place  the  nerve  fibers  in  a  class  by  themselves,  since  all 
other  tissues  that  have  been  studied  show  evidence  of  fatigue  when 
kept  in  continuous  functional  activity.  Moreover,  if  this  belief  is 
entirely  correct  it  would  imply  that  the  conduction  of  an  impulse 
in  the  nerve  fiber  is  not  associated  with  a  consumption  of  material, 
a  metabolism,  and  in  this  respect  also  the  functional  activity  of 
the  nerve  would  be  placed  in  contrast  with  that  of  other  organs. 

*  Bowditch,  "  Journal  of  Physiology,"  6,  133,  1885. 

t  Durig,  "  Centralblatt  f.  Physiol.,"  15,  751,  1902. 

iEdes",  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  431,  1892. 

§  Brodie  and  Halliburton,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  28,  181,  1902. 


112        •  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MUSCLE  AND  NERVE. 

It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that,  although  the  above  experi- 
ments demonstrate  the  practical  "  unf atigueableness "  of  nerve 
fibers  under  ordinary  conditions  of  stimulation,  there  are  some 
reasons  to  make  us  hesitate  in  supposing  that  these  structures 
function  absolutely  without  fatigue.  In  all  the  experiments  re- 
ferred to  the  nerve  was  stimulated  by  induction  shock,  and  although 
these  stimuli  followed  very  rapidly  there  was  a  short  period  of 
rest  after  each  stimulus,  and  possibly  this  interval  of  rest  is 
quite  sufficient  in  the  normal  nerve  for  recovery  from  the  effect 
of  the  previous  stimulus.  It  has  been  shown,*  for  instance,  that,  if 
two  stimuli  be  applied  to  a  nerve  vdth  a  very  brief  interval  between 
(0.006  sec.  or  less,  according  to  the  temperature),  the  second  stimu- 
lus is  ineffective  so  far  as  can  be  determined  by  the  response  of  an 
attached  muscle  or  by  means  of  a  capillary  electrometer.  And  it 
may  very  well  be  that  in  this  case  the  lack  of  response  to  the  second 
stimulus  is  due  to  a  short-lasting  fatigue  from  the  first  stimulus. 
This  point  of  view  is  strengthened  by  the  fact  that,  when  the  irrita- 
bility of  the  nerve  is  greatly  depressed  by  narcotics,!  this  critical 
interval  is  much  lengthened;  so  that  stimuli  with  a  rate  of  more 
than  10  per  second  may  give  an  effect  only  for  the  first  stimulus. 
Garten  has  shown  also  that  one  nerve,  the  olfactory  of  the  pike, 
when  stimulated  by  induction  shocks,  with  an  interval  between 
the  stimuli  of  as  much  as  0.27  sec,  gives  evidence  of  fatigue,  since 
its  action  current  as  measured  by  the  capillar}^  electrometer  dimin- 
ishes in  extent  quite  rapidly,  and  recovers  after  a  short  rest.t 

Does  the  Nerve  Fiber  Show  any  Evidence  of  Metabolism 
during  Functional  Activity? — The  functional  part  of  a  nerve 
fiber  in  conduction  is  the  axis  cylinder,  and,  indeed,  probably  the 
neurofibrils  in  the  axis  cylinder.  The  mass  of  this  material  even 
in  a  large  nerve  trunk  is  small,  and  its  chemistry  is  but  little  known. 
The  efforts  that  have  been  made  to  prove  a  metabolism  in  the 
nerve  fiber  during  activity  have  been  directed  along  the  lines 
indicated  by  what  is  known  of  muscle  metabolism.  In  a  muscle 
during  contraction  heat  is  produced,  the  substance  of  the  muscle 
shows  an  acid  reaction,  and  among  the  products  formed  carbon 
dioxid  gas  is  perhaps  the  most  prominent.  Efforts  to  show  similar 
reactions  in  stimulated  nerves  have  been  unsuccessful.  Rolleston  § 
investigated  the  question  of  heat  production  with  the  aid  of  a 
delicate  bolometer  capable  of  indicating  a  difference  of  temperature 
of  5-^oT°^-  "^^^  frog's  sciatic  was  used,  but  no  increase  in  tem- 
perature during  stimulation  could  be  demonstrated.     No  change 

*  Gotch  and  Burch,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  24,  410,  1899. 
t  Frohlich,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  allgemeine  Physiol.,"  8,  468,  1904. 
i  Quoted  from  Biedermann,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  ii,  part  ii, 
p.  129. 

§    Rolleston,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  11,  208,  1890. 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE.  113 

in  reaction  can  be  obtained  by  means  of  the  usual  indicators  for 
acidity.  Waller  has  given  some  experiments  to  show  that  carbon 
dioxid  is  produced  during  activity,  but  they  are  far  from  being  con- 
clusive. His  line  of  argument  is  as  follows:  He  has  found  that  the 
action  current  of  a  nerve  that  is  being  stimulated  is  increased  by  the 
presence  of  very  slight  amounts  of  carbon  dioxid,  higher  percentages 
cavising  again  naturally  a  decrease.  This  reaction  for  the  presence 
of  carbon  dioxid  is  apparently  a  very  delicate  one.  When  now  a 
normal  nerve  is  stimulated  its  action  current  after  some  minutes 
of  tetanic  stimulation  is  increased  in  the  same  way  as  would 
happen  if  a  little  carbon  dioxid  was  passed  over  it.  He  con- 
siders that  this  temporary  increase  in  the  action  current  is  due 
to  the  formation  of  carbon  dioxid  from  a  functional  metabolism. 
The  only  significant  evidence  that  we  have  of  a  chemical  change  in 
the  fiber  during  activity  is  found  in  two  facts  already  mentioned: 
one  is  the  discovery  that  oxygen  is  requisite  for  normal  conduction. 
A  nerve  placed  in  an  atmosphere  free  from  oxygen  loses  its  irrita- 
bility, and  regains  it  again  quickly  upon  the  admission  of  oxygen. 
The  other  is  found  in  the  statement  of  Bethe,  that  when  a  nerve  is 
stimulated  a  definite  change  in  the  staining  property  of  the  neuro- 
fibrils may  be  noted  (see  p.  102).  At  present  we  must  admit, 
therefore,  that  so  far  as  the  nerve  fiber  is  concerned,  we  have  no 
positive  proof  of  a  functional  metabolism.  This  negative  state 
of  our  knowledge,  considering  the  difficulties  involved  in  obtaining 
proofs,  hardly  warrants  a  positive  denial  of  the  existence  of  such 
a  metabolism.  All  tissues  whose  chemistry  can  be  studied  show 
a  metabolism  during  functional  activity,  and,  reasoning  from 
analogy,  it  seems  probable  that  the  same  fact  will  eventually  be 
demonstrated  for  the  axis  cylinder. 

Views  as  to  the  Nature  of  the  Nerve  Impulse.— The  older  con- 
ceptions of  the  nerve  principle,  while  they  varied  in  detail,  were 
based  upon  the  general  idea  that  the  nervous  system  contains  a 
matter  of  a  finer  sort  than  that  visible  to  our  senses.  This  matter 
was  pictured  at  first  as  a  spirit  (animal  spirits),  and  later  as  a  ma- 
terial comparable  to  the  luminiferous  ether  or  to  electricity.  Since 
the  discovery  that  the  nerve  impulse  travels  with  a  relatively  slow 
velocity  and  is  accompanied  by  a  demonstrable  change  in  the  electrical 
condition  of  the  nerve,  two  main  views  regarding  its  nature  have  been 
entertained.  Many,  perhaps  most,  modern  physiologists  conceive 
the  nerve  impulse  as  a  progressive  wave  of  chemical  change  which 
is  started  at  one  end  by  the  stimulus  and  is  then  self-propagated 
along  the  fiber.  The  conception  in  general  is  represented  by  the 
transmission  of  a  spark  along  a  line  of  gunpowder.  The  flame 
applied  at  one  end  causes  an  explosive  chemical  change,  which  is 
then  propagated  from  point  to  point.     The  analogy  is  obviously 


114  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

very  incomplete,  since  in  the  train  of   gunpowder  the  material 
is  entirely  consumed,  whereas  in  the  nerve  an  indefinite  series  of 
impulses  may  be  transmitted  and  with  a  strength  varying  with 
the    intensity    of    the    originating    stimulus.     This    general    view 
implies  that  a  disassimilation  or  catabolism  occurs  in  the  nerve, 
a  breaking  down  of  complex  material  with  the  liberation  of  the 
potential  chemical  energy ;  it  assumes,  in  other  words,  that  the  wave 
of  chemical  change  that  sweeps  along  a  nerve  fiber  is  similar  to  the 
wave  of  chemical  change,    contraction  wave,  that  passes  over  a 
muscle  fiber.     As  was  stated  in  preceding  paragraphs,  there  is  no 
evidence  for  this  view.     It  has  not  been  shown  that  in  the  conduct- 
ing nerve  there  are  any  detectible  waste  products  formed.    There  is 
no  rise  in  temperature,  no  change  in  reaction,  no  formation  of  carbon 
dioxid.     The  view  rests  entirely  upon  analogy  with  what  is  known 
to   occur  in  other  tissues,   especially  muscle,   during  functional 
activity.  The  electrical  change  that  accompanies  the  nerve  impulse 
is  considered  as  a  by-action,  so  to  speak,  clue  probably  to  the 
liberation  of  electronegative  ions   (anions)   in  the  reaction  that 
constitutes  the  nerve  impulse.     The  second  general  view  of  the 
nature  of  the  nerve  impulse  assumes  that  it  is  a  physical  or  physico- 
chemical  process  transmitted  along  the  fiber  without  involving  a 
metabolism  of  the  living  nerve  substance.     One  may  find  an  analogy 
for  such  a  process  in  the  wave  of  pressure  transmitted  through  a 
tube  filled  with  liquid  or  the  electrical  current  conveyed  through  a 
metallic  conductor.     This  view  rests  upon  the  fact  that  no  con- 
sumption of  material  can  be  demonstrated  in  the  acting  nerve  fiber, 
and  that  apparently  the  fiber  can  conduct  indefinitely  without  show- 
ing fatigue.  Various  suggestions  have  been  offered  as  to  the  character 
of  this  physical  change,  but  the  one  that  is  perhaps  most  worthy 
of  consideration  identifies  the  nerve  impulse  with  the  negative 
electrical  charge  that  is  known  to  pass  along  the  fiber.  It  is  assumed 
that  this  electrical  charge  constitutes  the  nerve  impulse.  To  ex- 
plain the  physics  of  the  conduction  it  is  supposed  that  the  nerve 
fiber  has  a  structure  essentially  similar  to  the  "core  conductor" 
(see  p.  102)  in  that  it  contains  a  central  thread  surrounded  by  a 
liquid  sheath  of  less  conductive  material.     The  central  thread  may 
be  supposed  to  be  the  axis  cylinder  and  the  less  conductive  sheath 
the  surrounding  myelin,  or  perhaps,  to  follow  another  suggestion, 
that  fits  the  non-medullated  as  well  as  the  medullated  fibers,  the 
central  threads  are  represented  by  the  neurofibrils  within  the  axis 
cylinder  and  the  surrounding  sheath  by  the  perifibrillar  substance. 
The  point  of  importance  is  that,  with  a  core  model  (see  Fig.  46) 
consisting  of  a  glass  tube  with  a  core  of  platinum  wire  and  a  sheath 
of  solution  of  sodium  chlorid,  0.6  per  cent.,  electrical  phenomena 
can  be  obtained  similar  to  those  shown  by  the  stimulated  nerve. 


NATURE    OF   THJC    NERVE   IMPULSE.  115 

If  an  induction  shock  is  sent  into  such  a  model  at  one  end  and 
two  leading  off  electrodes  are  connected  at  another  point,  an 
action  current  may  be  detected  for  each  stimulus.  It  is 
evident,  therefore,  that  in  such  a  model,  as  in  an  ocean  cable,  an 
electrical  charge  may  be  transmitted  in  a  wave-like  form  when  a 
current  is  applied  at  one  end.  And,  as  such  a  moving  electrical 
disturbance  is  the  only  objective  phenomenon  known  to  occur  in 
the  stimulated  nerve,  it  is  assumed  that  it  constitutes  the  nerve 
impulse.  When  this  electrical  disturbance  reaches  the  end- 
organ, — the  muscle,  for  instance, — it  initiates  the  chemical  changes 
that  characterize  the  activity  of  the  organ.  This  kind  of  theory 
makes  the  nerve  impulse  an  electrical  phenomenon,  and  assumes 
that  the  nerve  fibers  have  become  differentiated  to  form  a  specific 
kind  of  conductor,  the  efficiency  of  which  depends  upon  its  having 
a  structure  similar  to  that  of  a  "core  conductor."  It  should  be 
added  that  this  and,  indeed,  all .  specific  theories  of  the  nature  of 
the  nerve  impulse  are,  at  present,  matters  for  discussion  and  experi- 
ment among  specialists.  The  subject  is  referred  to  here  solely  to 
indicate  the  trend  of  modern  discussion.  We  are  far  from  having 
an  explanation  of  the  nerve  impulse  resting  upon  such  an  experi- 
mental basis  as  to  command  general  acceptance.* 

Bethe  has  proposed  a  new  theory  of  the  production  and  conduction  of 
the  nerve  impulse  which  varies  somewhat  from  the  types  given  above.  It 
is  founded  upon  an  observed  histological  fact  already  referred  to  (p.  102)  The 
nerve  impulse  is  defined  in  his  hypothesis  as  a  wave  of  chemical  affinity  be- 
tween the  fibrils  and  fibril  acid  which,  starting  at  the  point  stimulated,  is 
transmitted  along  the  nerve.  There  is  thus  conceived  a  kind  of  chemical 
reaction  which  involves  no  liberation  of  combined  energy.  To  account  for 
the  electrical  changes,  it  is  assumed  that,  when  the  fibril  and  fibril  acid 
combine,  electronegative  ions — anions — are  liberated,  so  that  as  the  wave 
of  affinity  progresses  it  is  accompanied  by  an  electronegative  condition. f 

Qualitative  Differences  in  Nerve  Impulses  and  Doctrine  of  Spe- 
cific Nerve  Energies. — Whether  or  not  the  nerve  impulses  in  vari- 
ous nerve  fibers  differ  in  kind  is  a  question  of  great  interest  in  physi- 
ology. The  usually  accepted  view  is  that  they  are  identical  in 
character  in  all  fibers  and  vary  only  in  intensity.  According  to 
this  view,  a  sensory  nerve — the  auditory  nerve,  for  instance — car- 
ries impulses  similar  in  character  to  those  passing  along  a  motor 
nerve,  and  the  reason  that  in  one  case  we  get  a  sensation  of  hearing 
and  in  the  other  a  contraction  of  a  muscle  is  found  in  the  manner 

*  For  a  summary  of  the  literature  upon  the  nature  of  the  nerve  impulse 
consult  Boruttau,  "Zeit.  f.  allg.  Physiologie,"  1,  1,  Sammelreferate,  1902; 
Biedermann,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  ii,  part  ii,  1903;  Hering, 
"Zur  Theorie  der  Nerventhatigkeit,"  1899;  Gotch,  Schafer's  "Text-book 
of  Physiology,"  vol.  ii,  1900. 

t  Bethe,  "AUgemeine  Anatomic  u.  Physiologie  des  Nervensystems,"  p. 
301,  1903. 


116  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

of  ending  of  the  nerve,  one  terminating  in  a  special  part  of  the  cortex 
of  the  cerebrum,  the  other  in  a  muscle.  In  this  respect  and  from 
this  standpoint  the  nerve  fibers  may  be  compared  to  electrical  wires. 
The  current  conducted  by  the  wires  is  similar  in  all  cases,  but  may 
give  rise  to  very  different  effects  according  to  the  way  in  which 
the  wires  terminate,  whether  in  an  explosive  mixture,  an  arc  light, 
or  solutions  of  electrolytes  of  various  kinds.  We  have  in  physi- 
ology what  is  known  as  the  doctrine  of  specific  nerve  energies, 
first  formulated  by  Johannes  Miiller.  This  doctrine  expresses  the 
fact  that  nerve  fibers  when  stimulated  give  only  one  kind  of  reac- 
tion, whether  motor  or  sensory,  no  matter  in  what  way  they  may  be 
stimulated.  The  optic  nerve,  for  instance,  gives  us  a  sensation  of 
light,  usiially  because  light  waves  fall  on  the  retina  and  thus  stimu- 
late the  optic  nerve.  But  if  we  apply  other  forms  of  stimulation 
to  the  nerve  they  will  also,  if  effective,  give  a  sensation  of  light. 
Cutting  the  optic  nerve  or  stimulating  it  with  electrical  currents 
gives  visual  sensations.  On  the  identity  theorj^  of  the  nerve  im- 
pulses the  specific  energies  of  the  various  nerves — that  is,  the  fact 
that  each  gives  only  one  kind  of  response — is  referred  entirely  to 
the  characteristics  of  the  tissue  in  which  the  fibers  end.  If,  as  has 
been  said,  one  could  successfully  attach  the  optic  nerve  to  the  ear 
and  the  auditory  nerve  to  the  retina  then  we  should  see  the  thunder 
and  hear  the  lightning. 

The  alternative  theory  supposes  that  nerve  impulses  are  not 
identical  in  different  fibers,  but  vary  in  quality  as  well  as  intensitj^, 
and  that  the  specific  energies  of  the  various  fibers  depend  in  part  at 
least  on  the  character  of  the  impulses  that  they  transmit.  On 
this  theory  one  might  speak  of  visual  impulses  in  the  optic  nerves 
as  something  different  in  kind  from  the  auditory  impulses  in  the 
auditory  fibers.  With  our  present  methods  of  investigation  the 
question  is  one  that  can  not  be  definitely  decided  by  experimental 
investigation;  most  of  the  discussion  turns  upon  the  applicability 
of  the  doctrine  to  the  explanation  of  various  conscious  reactions 
of  the  sensory  nerves. 

So  far  as  experimental  work  has  been  carried  out  on  efferent 
nerves,  it  is  undoubtedly  in  favor  of  the  identity  theory.  The 
action  current  is  similar  in  all  nerves  examined;  the  reactions  to 
artificial  stimuli  are  essentially  similar.  Moreover,  nerves  of 
one  kind  may  be  sutured  to  nerves  of  another  kind,  and,  after  re- 
generation has  taken  place,  the  reactions  are  found  to  be  deter- 
mined solely  by  the  place  of  ending  (see  p.  76). 

The  Nutritive  Relations  of  the  Nerve  Fiber  and  Nerve  Cell. 
— In  recent  times  in  accordance  with  the  so-called  neuron  doctrine 
(see  p.  122)  every  axis  cylinder  has  been  considered  as  a  process  of 
a  nerve  cell,  and  therefore  as  a  part,  morphologically  speaking,  of 


NATURE  OP  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE. 


117 


that  cell.  However  this  may  be,  there  is  excellent  experimental 
evidence  tq  show  that  the  physiological  integrity  of  the  axis  cylinder 
depends  upon  its  connection  with  its  corresponding  nerve  cell.  This 
view  dates  from  the  interesting  work  of  Waller,*  who  showed  that 
if  a  nerve  be  severed  the  peripheral  stump,  containing  the  axis  cyl- 
inders that  are  cut  off  from  the  cells,  will  degenerate  in  a  few  days. 
The  process  of  degeneration  brought  about  in  this  way  is  known 
as  secondary  or  Wallerian  degeneration.  The  central  stump,  on 
the  contrary,  remains  intact,  except  for  a  short  region  immediately 
contiguous  to  the  wound,  for  a  relatively  long  period,  extending 
perhaps  over  years.  Waller,  therefore,  spoke  of  the  nerve  cells  as 
forming  the  nutritive  centers  for  the  nerve  fibers,  and  this  belief 
is  generally  accepted.  In  what  way  the  cell  regulates  the  nutrition 
of  the  nerve  fiber  throughout  its  whole  length  is  unknown.  Some  of 
the  cells  in  the  lumbar  spinal  cord,  for  instance,  give  rise  to  fibers  of 
the  sciatic  nerve  which  may  extend  as  far  as  the  foot,  and  yet 


Fig.   50.' — Diagram  to  show  the  direction  of  degeneration  on  section  of  the  anterior 
and  the  posterior  root,  respectively.     The  degenerated  portion  is  represented  in  black. 


throughout  its  whole  length  the  nutritive  processes  in  these  fibers 
are  dependent  on  influences,  of  an  unknown  kind,  emanating  from 
the  nerve  cells  to  which  they  are  joined.  By  means  of  his  method 
Waller  investigated  the  location  of  the  nutritive  centers  for  the 
motor  and  sensory  fibers  of  the  spinal  nerves.  If  an  anterior 
root  is  cut  the  peripheral  ends  of  the  motor  fibers  degenerate 
throughout  the  length  of  the  nerve,  while  the  fibers  in  the  stump 
attached  to  the  cord  remain  intact ;  hence  the  nutritive  centers 
for  the  motor  fibers  must  lie  in  the  cord  itself.  Subsequent  histo- 
logical work  has  corroborated  this  conclusion  and  shown  that  the 
motor  fibers  of  the  spinal  nerves  take  their  origin  from  nerve  cells 
lying  in  the  anterior  horn  of  gray  matter  in  the  cord,  the  so-called 
motor  or  anterior  root  cells.     If  the  posterior  root  is  cut  between 

*  Waller,    "  Miiller's   Archiv,"    1852,  p.  392;    and    "Comptes  rendus  de 
I'Acad.  de  la  Science,"  vol.  xxxiv,  1852. 


118  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND   NERVE. 

the  ganglion  and  the  cord,  the  stump  attached  to  the  cord  degener- 
ates; that  attached  to  the  gangUon  remains  intact,  and  there  is  no 
degeneration  in  the  nerve  peripheral  to  the  ganglion.  Fig.  50.  If, 
however,  this  root  is  severed  peripherally  to  the  ganglion  degenera- 
tion takes  place  only  in  the  spinal  nerve  beyond  the  ganglion.  The 
nutritive  center,  therefore,  for  the  sensory  fibers  must  lie  in  the  pos- 
terior root  ganglion,  and  not  in  the  cord.  This  conclusion  has  also 
been  abundantly  corroborated  by  histological  work.  It  is  known 
that  the  sensory  fibers  arise  from  the  nerve  cells  in  these  ganglia. 
By  the  same  means  it  has  been  shown  that  the  motor  fibers  in  the 
cranial  nerves  arise  from  nerve  cells  (nuclei  of  origin)  situated 
in  the  brain,  while  the  sensory  fibers  of  the  same  nerves,  with  the 
exception  of  the  olfactory  and  optic  nerves  which  form  special 
cases,  arise  from  sensory  ganglia  lying  outside  the  nervous  axis, 
such,  for  instance,  as  the  spiral  ganglia  of  the  cochlear  nerve,  or 
the  ganglion  semilunare  (Gasserian  ganglion)  of  the  fifth  cranial 
nerve. 

Nerve  Degeneration  and  Regeneration. — When  a  nerve 
trunk  is  cut  or  is  killed  at  any  point  by  crushing,  heating,  or  other 
means  all  the  fibers  peripheral  to  the  point  of  injury  undergo  de- 
generation. This  is  an  incontestable  fact.  The  older  physiolo- 
gists thought  that  if  the  severed  ends  of  the  nerves  were  brought 
together  by  sutures  they  might  unite  by  first  intention  without 
degeneration  in  the  peripheral  end.  We  know  now  that  this  de- 
generation is  inevitable  once  the  living  continuity  of  the  fibers  has 
been  interrupted  in  any  way.  Any  functional  union  that  may 
occur  is  a  slow  process  involving  an  act  of  regeneration  of  the 
fibers  in  the  peripheral  stump.  The  time  required  for  the  degen- 
eration differs  somewhat  for  the  different  kinds  of  fibers  found  in 
the  animal  body.  In  the  dog  and  in  other  mammalia  the  degenera- 
tion begins  in  a  few  (four)  days,  while  in  the  frog  it  may  require 
from  thirty  to  one  hundred  and  forty  days,  depending  upon  the 
season  of  the  year.  In  the  dog  it  proceeds  so  quickly  that  the 
process  seems  to  be  simultaneous  throughout '  the  whole  peripheral 
stump,  while  in  the  frog,  and,  according  to  Bethe,  in  the  rabbit  it 
can  be  seen  clearly  that  the  degenerative  changes  begin  at  the  wound 
and  progress  peripherally.  The  fibers  break  up  into  ellipsoidal  seg- 
ments of  myelin,  each  containing  a  piece  of  the  axis  cylinder,  and 
these  segments  in  turn  fragment  very  irregularly  into  smaller  pieces 
which  eventually  are  absorbed  *  (Fig.  51) .  The  central  stump  whose 
fibers  are  still  connected  with  the  nerve  cells  undergoes  a  similar 
degeneration  in  the  area  immediately  contiguous  to  the  wound,  but 
the  degenerative  processes  extend  for  only  a  short  distance  over 
an  area  covering  a  few  intemodal  segments.     Although  the  central 

*  See  Howell  and  Huber,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  335,  1892. 


fT-!^    "      Jjfe^^^B^  • — 


Fig.  51. — Histology  of  a  degenerating  nerve  fiber. 


Fig.  52. — Embryonic  fibers  in  a  regenerating  nerve. 


Fig.  53. — A  newly  developed  fiber  in  a  regenerating  nerve  fiber. 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE.  119 

ends  of  the  fibers  remain  substantial!}'  intact,  it  is  interesting  to 
find  that  the  nerve  cells  from  which  they  originate  undergo  dis- 
tinct changes,  which  show  that  they  are  profoundly  affected  by 
the  interruption  of  their  normal  connections  (see  p.  121).  In  the 
peripheral  end  the  process  of  regeneration  begins  almost  simul- 
taneously with  the  degenerative  changes,  the  two  proceeding,  as 
it  were,  hand  in  hand.^  The  regeneration  is  due  to  the  activity 
of  the  nuclei  of  the  neurilemmal  sheath.  These  nuclei  begin  to 
multiply  and  to  form  around  them  a  layer  of  protoplasm,  so  that 
as  the  fragments  of  the  old  fiber  disappear  their  place  is  taken  by 
numerous  nuclei  and  their  surrounding  cytoplasm.  Eventually 
there  is  formed  in  this  way  a  continuous  strand  of  protoplasm  with 
many  nuclei,  and  the  fiber  thus  produced,  which  has  no  resemblance 
in  structure  to  a  normal  nerve  fiber,  is  described  by  some  authors 
as  an  '^ embryonic  fiber";  by  others  as  a  "band  fiber"  (Fig.  52). 
In  the  adult  animal  the  process  of  regeneration  stops  at  this  point 
imless  an  anatomical  connection  is  estabhshed  with  the  central 
stump,  and,  indeed,  such  a  connection  is  usually  established  unless 
special  means  are  taken  to  prevent  it.  The  central  and  peripheral 
stumps  find  each  other  in  a  way  that  is  often  remarkable,  the  union 
being  guided  doubtless  by  intervening  connective  tissue. 

Forsmanns*  has  emphasized  this  pecuUar  attraction,  as  it  were,  be- 
tween the  peripheral  and  the  central  ends,  giving  some  reason  to  believe  that 
it  is  a  case  of  chemotaxis  or  chemotropism.  When  the  ends  of  the  nerves 
were  given  very  unusual  positions  by  means  of  coUodium  tubes  into  which 
they  were  inserted  they  managed  to  "  find  "  each  other.  Moreover,  he  states 
that  a  central  stump,  if  given  an  equal  opportunity  to  grow  into  two  collo- 
dium  tubes,  one  containing  liver  and  the  other  brain  tissue,  wiU  chose  the 
latter,  a  fact  which  would  indicate  some  underlying  chemical  attraction  or 
affinity  in  nerve  tissue  for  nerve  tissue.  A  directive  influence  of  this  kind 
depending  upon  some  property  connected  with  chemical  relationship  is  desig- 
nated as  "  chemotaxis." 

If  the  central  and  peripheral  stumps  are  brought  together  by 
suture  or  grow  together  in  any  way,  then,  under  the  influence  of  the 
central  end,  the  "  band  fiber  "  gradually  becomes  transformed  into 
a  normal  nerve  fiber,  with  myelin  sheath  and  axis  cylinder  (Fig.  53). 
It  is  usually  believed  that  the  axis  cylinders  are  formed  as  out- 
growths from  those  of  the  fibers  of  the  central  stump.  These  latter 
penetrate  the  "  band  fibers"  and  grow  throughout  their  length. 

From  a  practical  standpoint  it  is  interesting  to  note  that  this  influence 
of  the  central  stump  may  be  exerted  months  or  even  years  after  the  injury 
to  the  nerve.  The  peripheral  stump  after  reaching  the  stage  of  "  band  fibers  " 
is  ready,  as  it  were,  for  the  influence  of  the  central  end,  and  cases  are  on  record 
in  which  a  secondary  suture  was  made  a  long  time  after  the  original  injury, 
with  the  result  that  functional  activity  was  restored  to  the  nerv^e. 

Bethef  has  thrown    some  doubt  upon  this  view,  for  he  has 

shown  apparently  that  in  young  mammals  (eight  days  to  eight 

*  Forsmanns,  "  Ziegler's  Beitrage,"  27,  216,  1902. 

t  Bethe,  "  AUgemeine  Anat.  u.  Physiologie  des  Nervensystems,"  1903. 


120  •     THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   MUSCLE   AND    NERVE. 

weeks)  the  regeneration  of  the  fibers  in  the  peripheral  stump  does 
not  stop  at  the  stage  of  "  band  fibers,"  but  progresses  until  per- 
fectly normal  nerve  fibers  are  produced,  even  though  no  connec- 
tion is  made  with  the  central  stump.  It  should  be  added,  however, 
that  the  fibers  so  formed  do  not  persist  indefinitely  unless  they 
become  connected  with  the  central  stump.  If  this  connection  fails 
to  take  place  the  newly  formed  fibers  will  degenerate  after  an 
interval  of  some  months.  Still,  the  fact  that  in  the  young  fiber 
the  regeneration  is  complete  seems  to  indicate  definitely  that  the 
axis  cylinder  may  arise  independently  of  the  fibers  in  the  central 
stump.  The  power  of  regeneration  in  the  older  animals  is  more 
limited  and  carries  the  fiber  only  to  the  stage  of  the  "  band  fiber." 
If  under  the  influence  of  the  central  stump  an  axis  cylinder  and 
myelin  sheath  is  now  formed  in  this  band  fiber  it  is  possible  that 
this  result  is  due  to  local  processes  in  the  band  fiber  stimulated 
by  nutritive  influences  of  some  kind  from  the  central  stump,  in- 
stead of  being  due  to  an  actual  downgrowth  of  the  axis  cylinder 
from  the  central  ends. 

Degenerative  Changes  in  the  Neuron  on  the  Central  Side 
of  the  Lesion. — According  to  the  Wallerian  law  of  degeneration, 
the  nerve  fiber  on  the  central  side  of  the  injury  and  the  nerve  cell 
itself  do  not  undergo  any  change.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  central 
stump  immediately  contiguous  to  the  lesion  undergoes  typical  de- 
generation and  regeneration  similar  to  that  described  for  the  fibers 
of  the  peripheral  stump.  The  degenerative  changes  in  the  fibers 
in  the  central  stump  were  supposed  to  extend  back  only  to  the  first 
node  of  Ranvier, — to  affect,  therefore,  only  the  internodal  segment 
actually  injured.  As  a  matter  of  observation,  however,  it  is  found 
that  the  degeneration  may  extend  back  over  a  distance  of  several 
internodal  segments.  This  limited  degeneration  on  the  central 
side  must  be  considered  as  traumatic, — that  is,  it  involves  only 
those  portions  directly  injured  by  the  lesion.  The  central  end  of 
the  fiber  in  general  remains  intact  as  long  as  its  cell  of  origin  is  nor- 
mal. It  was  thought  at  first  that  after  simple  section  of  a  nerve 
trunk,  in  amputation,  for  instance,  the  nerve  cells  and  central  stumps 
remain  normal  throughout  the  life  of  the  individual.  Dickinson, 
however,  in  1869  *  showed  that  in  amputations  of  long  stand- 
ing the  motor  cells  in  the  anterior  horn  of  the  cord  decrease  in  num- 
ber and  the  fibers  in  the  central  stump  become  atrophied.  This 
observation  has  been  corroborated  by  other  observers,  and  it  is 
now  believed  that  after  section  of  a  nerve  chronic  degenerative 
changes  ensue  in  the  course  of  time  in  the  central  fibers  and  their 
cells,  resulting  in  their  permanent  atrophy.  We  have,  in  such 
cases,  what  has  been  called  an  atrophy  from  disuse.  A  fact  that 
*  "  Journal  of  Anatomy  and  Physiology,"  3,  176,  1869. 


NATURE  OF  THE  NERVE  IMPULSE.  121 

has  been  discovered  more  recently  and  that  is  perhaps  of  more  im- 
portance is  that  the  nerve  cells  do  under2;o  certain  definite  although 
usually  temporary  changes  immediately  after  the  section  of  the 
nerve  fibers  arising  from  them.  It  has  been  shown  that  when  a 
nerve  fiber  is  cut  the  corresponding  cell  may  show  distinct  histor 
logical  changes  within  the  first  twenty-four  hours.  These  changes 
consist  in  a  circumscribed  destruction  of  the  chromatin  material 
in  the  cells  (chromatolysis)  which  in  a  short  time  extends  over 
the  whole  cell,  so  that  the  primary  staining  power  of  the  cell  is 
lost  (condition  of  achromatosis)  (see  Fig.  58).  The  cell  also  be- 
comes swollen  and  the  nucleus  may  assume  an  excentric  position. 
These  retrogressive  changes  continue  for  a  certain  period  (about 
eighteen  days).  After  reaching  their  maximum  of  intensity  the  cells 
usually  undergo  a  process  of  restitution  and  regain  their  normal 
appearance,  although  in  some  cases  the  degeneration  is  permanent. 
After  section  of  the  nerve  fibers,  therefore,  two  processes  of  degenera- 
tion may  occur  in  the  central  cells:  one  temporary,  that  reaches  its 
maximum  in  two  to  three  weeks,  and  from  which  the  cell  recovers 
completely,  as  a  rule,  in  about  three  months;  and  one  permanent, 
which  comes  on  only  after  many  months  or  even  years  and  is  to 
be  regarded  as  the  result  of  prolonged  inactivity.* 

*Nis.sl,   "Allgemeine    Zeitschrift  f.   Psychiatrie,"  48,   197,    1892.     Also 
Bethe,  loc.  cit. 


SECTION  II. 

THE   PHYSIOLOGY   OF  THE   CENTRAL 
NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


STRUCTURE  AND  GENERAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE 
NERVE  CELL. 

The  Neuron  Doctrine. — Since  the  last  decade  of  the  nineteenth 
century  the  physiology  of  the  nervous  system  has  been  treated 
from  the  standpoint  of  the  neuron.  According  to  this  point  of 
view,  the  entire  nervous  system  is  made  up  of  a  series  of  units, 
the  neurons,  which  are  not  anatomically  continuous  with  each 
other,  but  communicate  by  contact  only.  It  has  been  taught  also 
that  each  neuron  represents  from  an  anatomical  and  ph3^siological 
standpoint  a  single  nerve  cell.  The  typical  neuron  consists  of 
a  cell  body  with  short,  branching  processes,  the  dendrites,  and  a 
single  axis  cylinder  process,  the  axon  or  axite,  which  becomes  a 
nerve  fiber,  acquiring  its  myelin  sheath  at  some  distance  from  the 
cell.  According  to  this  view,  the  peripheral  nerve  fibers  are  simply 
long  processes  from  nerve  cells.  Within  the  central  nervous  system 
each  neuron  connects  with  others  according  to  a  certain  schema. 
The  axon  of  each  neuron  ends  in  a  more  or  less  branched  "  terminal 
arborization,"  forming  a  sort  of  end-plate  which  lies  in  contact 
with  the  dendrites  of  another  neuron,  or  in  some  cases  with  the 
body  of  the  cell  itself,  the  essentially  modern  point  of  view  being 
that  where  the  terminal  arborization  of  the  axon  meets  the  dendrites 
or  body  of  another  neuron  the  communication  is  by  contact,  the 
neurons  being  anatomically  independent  units.  It  is  usually  ac- 
cepted also  as  a  part  of  the  neuron  doctrine  that  the  conduction 
of  a  nerve  impulse  through  a  neuron  is  always  in  one  direction, 
that  the  dendrites  are  receiving  organs,  so  to  speak,  receiving  a 
stimulus  or  impulse  from  the  axon  of  another  unit  and  conveying 
this  impulse  toward  the  cell  body,  while  the  axon  is  a  discharging 
process  through  which  an  impulse  is  sent  out  from  the  cell  to  reach 
another  neuron  or  a  cell  of  some  other  tissue.     The  neuron,  so 

122 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    NERVE    CELL, 


123 


far  as  conduction  is  concerned,  shows  a  definite  polarity,  the  con- 
duction in  the  dendrites  being  celluHpetal,  in  the  axons,  celluhfugal. 

The  neuron  doctrine,  so  far  as  the  name  at  least  is  concerned,  dates  from 
a  general  paper  by  Waldeyer,*  in  which  the  newer  work  up  to  that  time  was 
summarized.  The  main  facts  upon  which  the  conception  rests  were  furnished 
by  His  (1886),  to  whom  we  owe  the  generally  accepted  belief  that  the  nerve 
fiber  (axis  cylinder)  is  an  outgrowth  from  the  cell,  and  secondly  by  Golgi, 
Cajal,  and  a  host  of  other  workers,  who,  by  means  of  the  new  method  of  Golgi, 
demonstrated  the  wealth  of  branches  of  the  nerve  cells,  particularly  of  the 
dendrites,  and  the  mode  of  connection  of  one  nerve  unit  with  another.  The 
view  that  these  units  are  anatomically  independent  and  on  the  embryological 


Fig.  54.- 


-Motor  cell,  anterior  horn  of  gray  matter  of  cord.     From  human  fetus  (Lenhos- 
sek) :    *  marks  the  axon ;    the  other  branches  are  dendrites. 


side  are  derived  each  from  a  single  epiblastic  cell  (neuroblast)  has  proved 
acceptable  and  most  helpful;  but  the  validity  of  this  hypothesis  is  again 
called  into  question.  As  was  stated  on  p.  119,  Bethe  has  shown  apparently 
that  in  young  animals  the  nuclei  of  the  neurilemmal  sheath  may  regenerate 
a  new  nerve  fiber  containing  axis  cyhnder  and  myelin  sheath,  and  this  fact 
at  once  brings  into  question  the  hitherto  accepted  belief  that  the  axis  cylin- 
der can  be  formed  only  as  an  outgrowth  from  a  nerve  cell.  In  fact,  it  indi- 
cates strongly  the  probability  of  an  older  view,  according  to  which  the  axis 
cylinder  is  formed  by  the  fusion  of  a  series  of  cells  whose  origin  is  the  same 
as  those  represented  by  the  nuclei  of  the  neurilemma.  Some  histologists — 
Apathy,  Bethe,  Nissl^have  also  attacked  the  most  fundamental  feature  of 
the  neuron  doctrine, — the  view,  namely,  that  each  neuron  represents  an  inde- 

*  "Deut.  med.  Wochenschrift,"  1891,  p.  50. 


124        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

pendent  anatomical  element.  These  authors  contend  that  the  neurofibrils  of 
the  axis  cylinder  pass  through  the  nerve  cells  and  enter  by  way  of  a  network 
into  direct  connection  with  the  neurofibrils  of  other  neurons  (see  Fig.  59). 
The  neurofibrils  form  a  continuum  through  which  nerve  impulses  pass  without 
a  break  from  neuron  to  neuron.  According  to  this  conception,  the  ganglion 
cells  play  no  direct  part  in  the  conduction  of  the  impulse  from  one  part  of  the 
nervous  system  to  another;  the  neurofibrils  alone,  and  the  intracellular 
and  pericellular  networks  with  which  they  connect,  form  the  conducting 
paths  that  are  everywhere  in  continuity.  In  the  explanation  given  below 
•  of  the  activities  of  the  nervous  system  the  author,  following  the  usual  cus- 
tom, makes  use  of  the  neuron  doctrine,  since  it  is  at  present  impossible  to 
say  whether  or  not  the  newer  views  of  the  continuum  of  neurofibrils  will  be 
corroborated.  While  the  physiological  facts  remain  the  same  whichever  view 
prevails,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  point  of  view  of  the  physiologist 
would  be  greatly  changed  if  the  present  simple  conception  of  a  series  of  neu- 
rons of  a  definite  polarity  as  regards  conduction  were  replaced  by  the  more 
complex  schema  of  independent  neurofibrils  and  a  central  reticulum  in  which 
a  basis  for  polarity  and  definite  paths  of  conduction  is  lacking. 

The  Varieties  of  Neurons. — The  neurons  differ  greatly  in 
size,  shape,  and  internal  structure,  and  it  is  impossible  to  classify 
them  with  entire  success  from  either  a  physiological  or  an  anatomical 
standpoint.  Neglecting  the  unusual  forms  whose  occurrence  is 
limited  and  whose  structure  is  perhaps  incompletely  known,  there 
are  three  distinct  types  whose  form  and  structure  throw  some 
light  on  their  functional  significance: 

I.  The  bipolar  cells.  This  cell  is  found  in  the  dorsal  root  gan- 
glia of  the  spinal  nerves  and  in  the  ganglia  attached  to  the  sensory 
fibers  of  the  cranial  nerves,  the  ganglion  semilunare  (Gasserian) 
for  the  fifth  cranial,  the  g.  geniculi  for  the  seventh,  the  g.  vestibu- 
lare  and  g.  spirale  for  the  eighth,  the  g.  superius  and  g.  petrosum 
for  the  ninth,  the  g.  jugulare  and  g.  nodosum  for  the  tenth. 

The  typical  cell  of  this  group  is  found  in  the  dorsal  root  ganglia. 
In  the  adult  the  two  processes  arise  as  one,  so  that  the  cell  seems  to 
be  unipolar,  but  at  some  distance  from  the  cell  this  process  divides 
in  T,  one  branch  passing  into  the  spinal  cord  via  the  posterior 
root,  the  other  entering  the  spinal  nerve  as  a  sensory  nerve  fiber 
to  be  distributed  to  some  sensory  surface.  Both  processes  become 
medullated  and  form  typical  nerve  fibers.  That  these  apparently 
unipolar  cells  are  really  bipolar  is  shown  not  only  by  this  division 
into  two  distinct  fibers,  but  also  by  a  study  of  their  development 
in  the  embryo.  In  early  embryonic  life  the  two  processes  arise 
from  different  poles  of  the  cell,  and  later  become  fused  into  an  ap- 
parently simple  process  (Fig.  55).  The  striking  characteristics  of 
this  cell,  therefore,  are  that  it  gives  rise  to  two  nerve  fibers,  and  that 
it  possesses  no  dendritic  processes.  On  the  physiological  side  these 
cells  might  be  designated  as  sensory  cells,  since  they  appear  to  be 
associated  always  with  sensory  nerve  fibers.  So  far  as  the  sensory 
fibers  of  the  spinal  and  cranial  nerves  are  concerned,  it  is  worth 
noting  also  that  all  of  them  arise  from  cells  lying  outside  the  main 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    NERVE    CELL. 


125 


axis  of  the  central  nervous  system.  The  sensory  impulses  brought 
to  the  cell  by  the  process  arising  in  the  peripheral  tissue  doubtless 
pass  into  the  body  of  the  cell  before  entering  the  process  that 
leads  to  the  cord  or  brain, — that  is,  it  is  not  probable  that  the  im- 
pulse passes  from  one  process  to  the  other  at  the  T  junction,  since 
the  really  conducting  elements  in  the  axis  cylinder,  the  neurofibrils, 
are  not  in  connection  at  this  point  but  in  the  network  or  reticulum 
of  the  cell  itself. 

II.  The  multipolar  cells.  The  processes  of  these  cells  fall  into 
two  groups:  the  short  and  branching  dendrites  with  an  inner 
structure  resembling  that  of  the  cell  body,  and  the  axon  or  axis 
cylinder  process  (Fig.  54) .  According  to  the  structure  of  this  last 
process,  this  type  may  be  classified  under  two  heads :  Golgi  cells  of 


Fig.  55. — Bipolar  cells  in  the  posterior  root  ganglion.  Section  through  spinal  gan- 
glion 9f  newborn  mouse  (Lenhossek) :  a.  The  spinal  ganglion ;  b,  the  spinal  cord ;  c,  the 
posterior,  d,  the  anterior  root. 


the  first  and  the  second  type.  The  cells  of  the  first  type  are  charac- 
terized by  the  fact  that  the  axon  leaves  the  central  gray  matter  and 
becomes  a  nerve  fiber.  This  nerve  fiber  within  the  central  nervous 
system  ma}^  give  off  numerous  collaterals,  each  of  which  ends  in  a 
terminal  arborization.  By  this  means  the  neurons  of  this  tj-pe  may 
be  brought  into  physiological  connection  with  a  number  of  other  neu- 
rons. This  kind  of  nerve  cell  is  frequently  described  as  the  typical 
nerve  cell.  Golgi  supposed  that  it  represents  the  motor  type  of  cell, 
and  this  ^dew  is,  in  a  measure,  borne  out  by  subsequent  investiga- 
tion. The  distinctly  motor  cells  of  the  central  nervous  system — 
such,  for  instance,  as  the  pyramidal  cells  of  the  cerebral  cortex,  the 
anterior  horn  cells  of  the  spinal  cord,  the  Purkinje  cells  of  the 
cerebellum — all  belong  to  this  type.     But  within  the  nerve  axis 


126 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


most  of  the  conduction  from  neuron  to  neuron,  along  sensory  as 
well  as  motor  paths,  is  made  with  the  aid  of  such  structures,  the 
dendrites  being  the  receptive  or  sensory  organ  and  the  axon  the 
motor  apparatus. 

The  Golgi  cells  of  the  second  type  (Fig.  56)  are  relatively  less 
numerous  and  important.     They  are  characterized  by  the  fact  that 
the  axon  process  instead  of 
forming  a  nerve   fiber  splits  \^  , 

into  a  great  number  of 
branches  within  the  gray 
matter.  Assuming  that  in 
such  cells  the  distinction  be- 
tween the  axon  and  the  den- 
drites is  well  made  and  that 
as  in  the  other  type  the 
dendrites  form  the  receiving 
and  the  axon  the  discharging 
apparatus,  these  cells  would 
seem  to  have  a  distributive 
function.  The  impulse  that 
they  receive   may  be   trans- 


m 


Fig.  56.— Golgi  cell  (second  type). 
The  axon,  a,  divides  into  a  number  of 
fine  branches. — (From  Obersteiner,  niter 
Andriezen.) 


Fig.  57.  — Normal  anterior  horn  cell 
(Warrington),  showing  the  Nissl  granules  in  the 
cell  and  dendrites:  a,  The  axon. 


mitted  to  one  or  many  neurons.     They  are  sometimes  spoken  of  as 
intermediate  or  association  cells. 

Internal  Structure  of  the  Nerve  Cell. — Within  the  body  of 
the  nerve  cell  itself  the  striking  features  of  physiological  significance 
are,  first,  the  arrangement  of  the  neurofibrils,  and,  secondly,  the 


PROPERTIES    OP   THE    NERVE    CELL.  127 

presence  of  a  materia]  in  the  form  of  granules,  rods,  or  masses 
which  stains  readily  with  the  basic  anilin  dyes,  such  as  methylene 
blue,  thionin,  or  toluidin  blue.  Tliis  latter  substance  is  spoken  of 
as  the  "chromophile  substance,"  tigroid,  or  more  frequently  as 
Nissl's  granules,  after  the  histologist  who  first  studied  it  success- 
fully. These  masses  or  granules  are  found  in  the  dendrites  as  well 
as  in  the  cell,  but  are  absent  from  the  axon  (see  Fig.  57).  Little  is 
known  of  their  composition  or  significance,  but  their  presence  or  ab- 
sence is  in  many  cases  characteristic  of  the  physiological  condition 
of  the  cell.  After  lesions  or  injuries  of  the  neuron  the  material  may 
become  dissolved  and  diffused  through  the  cell  or  may  decrease  in 
amount  or  disappear,  and  it  seems  probable,  therefore,  that  it  repre- 
sents a  store  of  nutritive  material  (Fig.  58).  The  non-staining 
material  of  the  cell,  according  to  most  recent  observers,  contains 
neurofibrils  which  are  continued  out  into  the  processes,  dendrites  as 


Fig.  58. — Anterior  horn  cell  fourteen  days  after  section  of  the  anterior  root  (Warring- 
ton) :   To  show  the  change  in  the  nucleus  and  the  Nissl  granules,  beginning  chromatolysis. 


well  as  axons.  These  fibrils  may  be  regarded  as  the  conducting 
structure  along  which  passes  the  nerve  impulse.  The  arrangement 
of  these  fibrils  within  the  cell  is  not  completely  known,  the  results 
obtained  varying  with  the  methods  employed.  A  matter  of  far- 
reaching  importance  on  the  physiological  side  is  the  question  of 
the  existence  of  an  extracellular  nervous  network.  Most  recent 
histologists  agree  in  the  belief  that  there  is  a  delicate  network 
surrounding  the  cells  and  their  protoplasmic  processes.  This 
pericellular  net  or  Golgi's  net  is  claimed  by  some  to  be  a  ner- 
vous structure  connecting  with  the  neurofibrils  inside  the  cell 
and  forming  not  only  a  bond  of  union  between  the  neurons,  but 
possibly  also  an  important  intercellular  nervous  structure  that 
may  play  an  important  role  in  the  functions  of  the  nerve  centers. 
This  view  is  represented  schematically  in  Fig.  59.  According  to 
others,  this  network  around  and  outside  the  cells  is  a  supporting 
tissue  simply  that  takes  no  part  in  the  activity  of  the  nerve  units. 


128        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM, 

General  Physiology  of  the  Nerve  Cell. — Modern  physiologists 
have  considered  the  cell  body  of  the  neuron,  including  the  den- 
drites, as  the  source  of  the  energy  displayed  by  the  nervous  system, 
and  it  has  been  assumed  that  this  energy  arises  from  chemical 
changes  in  the  nerve  cell,  as  the  energy  liberated  by  the  muscle 
arises  from  the  chemical  changes  in  its  substance.  It  would  follow 
from  this  standpoint  that  evidences  of  chemical  activity  should  be 
obtained  from  the  cells  and  that  the  elements  should  exhibit  the 
phenomenon  of  fatigue.  Regarding  this  latter  point,  it  is  believed 
in  physiology  that  the  nerve  cells  fatigue  readily.  The  nerve 
centers  show  fatigue  as  the  result  of  continuous  activity,  as  is  evident 
from  our  personal  experience  in  prolonged  intellectual  or  emo- 
tional activity  and  as  is  implied  in  the  necessity  of  sleep  for  re- 


Fig.  59. — Bethe's  schema  to  indicate  the  connections  of  the  pericellular  network: 
Rz,  A  sensory  cell  in  the  posterior  root  ganglion ;  the  fibrils  in  the  branch  that  runs  to  the 
cord  are  indicated  as  connecting  directly  with  the  pericellular  network  of  the  motor  cells, 
Gz. 

cuperation  and  the  rapidity  with  which  functional  activity  is  lost 
on  withdrawal  of  the  blood  supply.  Objectively,  also,  it  has  been 
shown  in  the  ergographic  experiments  (see  p.  45)  that  the  well- 
known  fatigue  of  the  neuromuscular  apparatus  probably  affects 
the  nerve  centers  as  well  as  the  muscle.  Assuming  that  the  nerve 
cells  are  the  effective  agent  in  the  nerve  centers,  such  facts  indicate 
that  they  are  susceptible  to  fatigue.  But  we  have  no  very  direct 
proof  that  this  property  is  shown  universally  by  the  nerve  cells 
nor  any  indication  of  the  probable  differences  in  this  regard  shown 
by  nerve  cells  in  different  parts  of  the  central  nervous  system. 
It  seems  probable  that  under  normal  conditions — that  is,  under 
the  influence  of  what  we  may  call  minimal  stimuli — some  portions 
of  the  nerve  centers  remain  in  more  or  less  constant  activity  during 


PROPERTIES  OF  THE  NERVE  CELL.  129 

the  day  without  showing  a  marked  degree  of  fatigue,  just  as  our 
muscles  remain  in  a  more  or  less  continuous  state  of  tonic  con- 
traction throughout  the  waking  period  at  least.  Doubtless  when 
the  stimulation  is  stronger  the  fatigue  is  more  marked,  because  the 
processes  of  repair  in  the  nerve  centers  can  not  then  keep  pace 
with  the  processes  of  consumption  of  material.  Evidence  of  a 
probable  chemical  change  in  the  nerve  cells  during  activity  is  found 
also  in  the  readiness  with  which  the  gray  matter  of  the  nervous 
system  takes  on  an  acid  reaction.*  In  the  fresh  resting  state  it 
is  probably  alkaline,  but  after  death  it  quickly  shows  an  acid 
reaction,  due,  it  is  said,  to  the  production  of  lactic  acid.  Its 
resemblance  to  the  muscle  in  this  respect  leads  to  the  inference 
that  in  functional  activity  acid  is  also  produced.  Mosso  states 
that  in  the  brain  increased  mental  activity  is  accompanied  by  a 
rise  in  the  temperature  of  the  brain. f  His  experiments  were  made 
upon  individuals  with  an  opening  in  the  skull  through  which  a 
delicate  thermometer  could  be  inserted  so  as  to  lie  in  contact  with 
brain.  So  also  the  facts  briefly  mentioned  in  regard  to  the  Nissl 
granules  give  some  corroborative  evidence  that  the  activity  of 
the  nervous  system  is  accompanied  by  and  probably  caused  by 
a  chemical  change  within  the  cells,  since  the  excessive  activity  of 
the  nerve  cells  seems  to  be  accompanied  by  some  change  in  these 
granules,  and  in  abnormal  conditions  associated  with  loss  of  func- 
tional activity  the  granules  undergo  chromatolysis, — that  is,  they 
are  disintegrated  and  dissolved.  Obvious  histological  changes  which 
imply,  of  course,  a  change  in  chemical  structure,  have  been  observed 
by  a  number  of  investigators.|  All  seem  to  agree  that  activitj'  of 
the  tissue,  whether  normal  or  induced  by  artificial  stimulation, 
may  cause  visible  changes  in  the  appearance  of  the  cell  and  its 
nucleus.  Activity  within  normal  limits  may  cause  an  increase  in 
the  size  of  the  cell  together  with  a  diminution  in  the  stainable 
(Nissl)  substance,  and  excessive  activity  a  diminution  in  size  of  the 
cell  and  the  nucleus,  the  formation  of  vacuoles  in  the  cell  body, 
and  a  marked  effect  upon  the  stainable  material.  Hodge  has 
shown  that  in  birds,  for  instance,  the  spinal  ganglion  cells  of  a 
swallow  killed  at  nightfall  after  a  day  of  activity  exhibit  a  marked 
loss  of  substance  as  compared  with  similar  cells  from  an  animal 
killed  in  the  early  morning  (Fig.  60). 

It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  our  knowledge  of  the 
nature  of  the  chemical  changes  that  occur  in  the  cell  during  activity 
is  very  meager.     Presumably  carbon  dioxid  and  lactic  acid  are 

*  Langendorff,  "  Centralbl.  f.  d.  med.  Wiss.,"  1886.  See  also  Halliburton, 
"The  Croonian  Lectures  on  the  Chemical  Side  of  Nervous  Activity,"  1901. 

t  Mosso,  "  Die  Teniperatur  des  Gehirns,"  1894. 

j  See  especially  Hodge,   "Journal  of  Morphology,"    7,  95,    1892,   and 
9,  1,  1894. 
9 


130 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    CENTRAL   NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 


formed  as  in  muscle,  and  we  know  that  oxygen  is  consumed. 
Enough  is  known  perhaps  to  justify  the  general  view  that  the  energy 
exhibited  by  the  nervous  system  is  derived,  in  the  long  run,  from 
a  metabolism  of  material  in  the  nerve  cells,  a  metabolism  which 
consists  essentially  in  the  splitting  and  oxidation  of  the  complex 
substances  in  the  protoplasm  of  the  cell. 

Summation  of  the  Effects  of  Stimuli. — In  a  muscle  a  series 
of  stimuli  will  cause  a  greater  amount  of  shortening  than  can  be 
obtained  from  a  single  stimulus  of  the  same  strength.  In  this  case 
the  effects  of  the  stimuli  are  summated,  one  contraction  taking 
place  on  top  of  another,  or  to  put  it  in  another  way,  the  muscle 
while  in  a  condition  of  contraction  from  one  stimulus  is  made  to 


Fig.  60. — Spinal  gana;lion  cells  from  English  sparrows,  to  show  the  daily  variation  in 
the  appearance  of  the  cells  due  to  normal  activity:  A.  Appearance  of  cells  at  the  end  of 
an  active  day;  B,  appearance  of  cells  in  the  morning  after  a  night's  rest.  The  cytoplasm 
is  filled  with  clear,  lenticular  masses,  which  are  much  more  evident  in  the  rested  cells  than 
in  those  fatigued. — (.Hodge.) 


contract  still  more  by  the  following  stimulus.  In  the  nerve  fiber 
such  a  phenomenon  has  not  been  demonstrated.  The  strength  of 
the  nerve  impulse  can  be  determined  only  by  means  of  the  effect 
on  the  end-organ, — e.  g.,  the  muscle, — in  which  case  the  properties 
of  the  end-organ  must  be  taken  into  account,  or  by  the  aid  of  the 
electrical  response.  Now,  when  a  nerve  is  stimulated  so  rapidly 
that  the  second  stimulus  falls  into  the  nerve  before  the  electrical 
change  due  to  the  first  stimulus  has  passed  off,  the  second  stimulus, 
instead  of  adding  its  effect  to  that  of  the  first,  simply  has  no  effect 
at  all;  it  finds  the  nerve  unirritable.*  According  to  this  result, 
we  should  expect  that  a  summation  of  the  effects  of  rapidly 
*  Gotch  and  Burch,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  24,  410,  1899. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    NERVE    CELL.  131 

following  stimuli  is  not  possible  in  the  case  of  the  nerve  fiber. 
In  the  nerve  cell,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  usually  taught  that  the 
power  of  summation  is  a  characteristic  property,  although  it 
may  be  said  that  the  proofs  for  this  belief  are  not  very  direct. 
It  is  pointed  out  that,  while  a  single  stimulus  applied  to  a  sensory 
nerve  may  be  ineffective  in  producing  a  reflex  response  from  the 
central  nervous  system,  a  series  of  such  stimuli  will  call  forth  a 
reaction.  In  this  case  it  is  assumed  that  the  effects  of' the  suc- 
ceeding stimuli  are  summated  within  the  nerve  cells  through  which 
the  reflex  takes  place,  and,  generally  speaking,  it  is  assumed  in 
physiology  that  the  nerve  centers  are  adapted  by  their  power  of 
summation  to  respond  to  a  series  of  stimuli  or  to  continuous  stimu- 
lation. The  best  examples  of  this  kind  of  action  are  obtained 
perhaps  from  sensory  nerves,  in  which  case  we  judge  of  the  intensity 
of  the  cell  activity  by  the  concomitant  sensation,  or  by  a  reflex 
response. 

Response  of  the  Nerve  Cell  to  Varying  Rates  of  Stimula- 
tion.— The  various  parts  of  the  neuromuscular  apparatus — 
namely,  the  nerve  cell,  the  nerve  fiber,  and  the  muscle  fiber — have 
different  degrees  of  responsiveness  to  repeated  stimuli,  and  this 
responsiveness  varies,  moreover,  for  the  different  kinds  of  mus- 
cles and  of  nerve  fibers,  and,  probably  for  the  different  kinds 
of  nerve  cells.  The  motor  cells  of  the  brain  discharge  their 
motor  impulses  normally  at  a  rate  probably  of  about  10  per  second 
(see  p.  43),  and  it  is  very  interesting  to  find  that,  if  these  cells 
are  stimulated  artificially,  their  rate  of  motor  discharge  does  not 
keep  pace  with  that  of  the  stimulation  employed,  but  occurs  at 
about  the  same  rate  as  the  normal, — namely,  at  about  10  per 
second.  Thus,  Horsley  and  Schafer*  found  that  in  monkeys,  dogs, 
cats,  and  rabbits,  stimulation  of  the  motor  regions  of  the  cortex 
or  the  motor  cells  in  the  cord  gave  tetanic  muscular  contractions, 
which  from  their  graphic  records  were  evidently  composed  of 
simple  contractions  following  at  an  average  rate  of  10  per  second, 
although  the  stimuli  applied  to  the  center  might  vary  in  rate  from 
10  to  50  per  second.  Similar  results  by  a  somewhat  different 
method  were  obtained  by  Broca  and  Richet.f  These  authors  point 
out,  moreover,  that  no  mental  act  can  be  repeated  more  rapidly 
(on  the  average)  than  10  times  per  second.  If  one,  for  instance, 
attempts  to  think  a  series  of  syllables  or  words  in  a  given  phrase 
the  maximum  of  rapidity  with  which  each  syllable  can  be  clearly 
thought  is  at  the  rate  named.  The  authors  last  named  believe, 
therefore,  that  the  minimal  duration  for  an  intellectual  act  is 
probably  approximately  about  yV  ^^  ^  second.     These  facts,  so 

*  Horsley  and  Schafer,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  7,  96,  1886. 

t  Broca  and  Richet,  "Journal  de  physiol.  norm,  et  pathol.,"  1897,  p.  864. 


132  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 

far  as  they  go,  would  indicate  that  in  the  cerebrum  and  the  cord 
the  nerve  cells  react  with  a  certain  rhythm. 

The  Refractory  Period  of  the  Nerve  Cell. — The  peculiar 
rhythm  of  the  active  nerve  cell  just  referred  to  in  the  para- 
graph above  is  explained  most  satisfactorily  by  an  assumption 
first  used  in  connection  with  the  rhythmical  beat  of  the  heart.  As 
will  be  explained  more  fully  in  the  section  on  the  physiology  of 
the  heart,  it  has  been  found  that  after  the  contraction  of  the 
heart  begins  it  is  unirritable  to  artificial  stimuli,  and  that  its 
irritability  is  recovered  during  the  period  of  rest, — the  diastole. 
The  heart  has,  therefore,  alternate  periods  of  irritability  and 
unirritability.  The  latter  phase,  the  condition  in  which  the  heart 
muscle  will  not  respond  to  stimulation,  is  known  as  the  refractory 
period,  or  refractory  phase.  Inasmuch  as  it  appears  immediately 
after  the  contraction,  it  is  usually  explained  as  being  due  to  some 
product  of  the  chemical  reaction  causing  the  contraction, — in  fact, 
a  state  of  temporary  fatigue.  A  similar  conception  has  been  applied 
to  the  nerve  cell.  The  experiments  cited  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph would  indicate  that,  after  the  discharge  of  an  impulse,  the 
cell  falls  into  a  refractory  phase  for  a  period  of  time  lasting  about 
0.1  sec.  The  idea  is  a  convenient  one,  although  we  have  no  explana- 
tion of  what  is  the  immediate  cause  of  this  temporary  loss  of  irrita- 
bility. Reasoning  from  analogy  with  the  muscle,  we  might  suppose 
that  in  this  case  also  it  is  due  to  some  product  of  the  chemical  reaction 
that  is  assumed  to  underlie  nervous  activity.  Using  this  terminol- 
ogy, it  is  probable  that  the  cells  in  different  parts  of  the  nervous 
system  may  have  different  refractory  periods.  In  the  case  of  the 
normal  nerve  fiber  (see  p.  112)  it  will  be  recalled  that  the  refractory 
period  is  very  brief, — say,  0.006  sec, — but  varies  with  the  condi- 
tion of  the  fiber,  since  in  the  narcotized  fiber  it  may  be  as  much 
as  0.1  sec. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
REFLEX  ACTIONS. 

Definition  and  Historical. — By  a  reflex  action  we  mean  the 
involuntary  production  of  activity  in  some  peripheral  tissue  through 
the  efferent  nerve  fibers  connected  with  it  in  consequence  of  a 
stimulation  of  afferent  nerve  fibers.  The  conversion  of  the  sensory 
or  afferent  impulse  into  a  motor  or  efferent  impulse  is  effected  in 
the  nerve  centers,  and  may  be  totally  unconscious  as  well  as  invol- 
untary,— for  instance,  the  emptying  of  the  gall-bladder  during 
digestion,  or  it  may  be  accompanied  by  consciousness  of  the  act, 
as,  for  example,  in  the  winking  reflex  when  the  eye  is  touched. 
The  application  of  the  term  reflex  to  such  acts  seems  to  have  been 
made  first  by  Descartes*  (1649),  on  the  analogy  of  the  reflection 
of  light,  the  sensory  effect  in  these  cases  being  reflected  back,  so 
to  speak,  as  a  motor  effect.  The  attention  of  the  early  physiologists 
was  directed  to  these  involuntary  movements  and  many  instances 
were  collected,  both  in  man  and  the  lower  animals.  Their  invol- 
untary character  was  emphasized  by  the  discovery  that  similar 
movements  are  given  by  decapitated  animals, — frogs,  eels,  etc. 

Some  of  the  earlier  physiologists  thought  that  the  reflex  might 
occur  in  the  anastomoses  of  the  nerve  trunks,  but  a  convincing 
proof  that  the  central  nervous  system  is  the  place  of  reflection 
was  given  by  Whytt  (1751).  He  showed  that  in  a  decapitated  frog 
the  reflex  movements  are  abolished  if  the  spinal  cord  is  destroyed. 
Modern  interest  in  the  subject  was  excited  by  the  numerous  works 
of  Marshall  Hall  (1832-57),  who  contributed  a  number  of  new 
facts  with  regard  to  such  acts,  and  formulated  a  view,  not  now 
accepted,  that  these  reflexes  are  mediated  by  a  special  set  of  fibers — 
the  excitomotor  fibers. 

In  describing  reflexes  the  older  physiologists  had  in  mind  only 
reflex  movements,  but  at  the  present  time  we  recognize  that  the 
reflex  act  may  affect  not  only  the  muscles, — voluntary,  involuntary, 
and  cardiac, — but  also  the  glands.  We  have  to  deal  with  reflex 
secretions  as  well  as  reflex  movements. 

The  Reflex  Arc. — It  is  implied  in  the  definition  of  a  reflex 
that  both  sensory  and  motor  paths  are  concerned  in  the  act.     Ac- 

*  See  Eckhard,  "  Geschichte  der  Entwickelung  der  Lehre  von  den  Reflex- 
erscheinungen,"  "  Beitrage  zur  Anatomie  u.  Physiologie/'  Giessen,  1881,  vol. 
ix. 

133 


134        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

cording  to  the  neuron  theory,  therefore,  the  simplest  reflex  arc 
must  consist  of  two  neurons:  the  sensory  neuron,  whose  cell  body 
lies  in  one  of  the  posterior  root  or  cranial  nerve  ganglia,  and  a 
motor  neuron,  whose  nerve  cell  lies  in  the  anterior  horn  of  gray 
matter  of  the  cord  or  in  the  motor  nucleus  of  a  cranial  nerve.  The 
reflex  arc  for  the  spinal  cord  is  represented  in  Fig.  61.  The  arc 
may,  however,  be  more  complex.  The  sensory  fibers  entering 
through  the  posterior  roots  may  pass  upward  through  the  entire 
length  of  the  cord  to  end  in  the  medulla  and  on  the  way  give  off 
a  number  of  collaterals  as  represented  in  Fig.  62,  or  they 
may  make  connections  with  intermediate  cells  which,  in  turn,  are 
connected  with  one  or  more  motor  neurons  (Fig.  63).     According 


Fig.  6L — Schema  to  show  the  connection  between  the  neuron  of  the  posterior  root  and  the 
neuron  of  the  anterior  root, — the  reflex  arc. 

to  these  schemata,  one  sensory  fiber  may  establish  reflex  connections 
with  a  number  of  different  motor  fibers,  or,  a  fact  which  must  be 
borne  in  mind  in  studying  some  of  the  well-known  reflex  activities 
of  the  cord  and  medulla  especially,  a  sensory  fiber  carrying  an- 
impulse  which  eventually  reaches  ^he  cortex  of  the  cerebrum  and 
gives  rise  to  a  conscious  sensation  may,  by  means  of  its  collaterals, 
connect  with  motor  nuclei  in  the  cord  or  medulla  and  thus  at  the 
same  time  give  origin  to  involuntary  and  even  unconscious  re- 
flexes. Painful  stimulation  of  the  skin,  for  example,  may  give 
us  a  conscious  sensation  of  pain  and  at  the  same  time  reflexly 
stimulate  the  vasomotor  center  and  cause  a  constriction  of  the 
small  arteries.  The  fact  that  in  this  case  two  distinct  events  occur 
does  not  necessitate  the  assumption  that  the  impulses  from  the 


REFLEX   ACTIONS, 


135 


skin  are  carried  to  the  cord  by  two  different  varieties  of  fibers. 
It  may  well  be  that  one  variety  of  sensory  neuron,  the  so-called 
pain  fibers,  effects  both  results,  because  of  the  opportunities  in 
the  cord  for  connections  with  different  groups  of  nerve  cells. 

The  Reflex  Frog. — The  motor  reflexes  from  the  spinal  cord 
can  be  studied  most  successfully  upon  a  frog  in  which  the  brain 
has  been  destroyed  or  whose  head  has  been  cut  off.  After  such 
an  operation  the  animal  may  for  a  time  suffer  from  shock,  but 
a  vigorous  animal  will  usually  recover  and  after  some  hours  will 


Fig.  62. — Kolliker's  schema  to  show 
the  direct  reflex  arc.  It  shows  the  pos- 
terior root  fiber  (black)  entering  the 
cord,  dividing  in  Y»  and  connecting  with 
motor  cells  (red)  by  means  of  collater- 
als. 


Fig.  63. — Kolliker's  schema  to 
show  the  reflex  arc  with  intercal- 
ated tract  cells.  Posterior  root  fiber, 
black;  intercalated  tract  cell,  blue; 
motor  cells,  red. 


exhibit  reflex  movements  that  are  most  interesting.  The  funda- 
mental characteristics  of  reflex  movements  in  their  relations  to  the 
place,  intensity,  and  quality  of  the  stimulus  can  be  studied  with 
more  ease  upon  an  animal  whose  cord  is  thus  severed  from  the 
brain  than  upon  a  normal  animal.  In  the  latter  case  the  connec- 
tions in  the  nervous  system  are  more  complex  and  the  reactions 
are  therefore  less  simple  and  less  easily  kept  constant. 

Spinal  Reflex  Movements. — The  reflex  movements  obtained 
from  the  spinal  cord  or  from  parts  of  the  central  nervous  system 


136        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

may  be  divided  into  three  groups  by  characteristics  that  are  physio- 
logically significant.  These  classes  are:  (1)  Simple  reflexes,  or 
those  in  which  a  single  muscle  is  affected.  The  best  example  of 
this  group  is  perhaps  the  winking  reflex,  in  which  only  the  orbic- 
ularis palpebrarum  is  concerned.  (2)  Co-ordinated  reflexes,  in 
which  a  number  of  muscles  react  with  their  contractions  so  grad- 
uated as  to  time  and  extent  as  to  produce  an  orderly  and  useful 
movement.  (3)  Convulsive  reflexes,  such  as  are  seen  in  spasms, 
in  which  a  number  of  muscles — perhaps  all  the  muscles — are  con- 
tracted convulsively,  without  co-ordination  and  with  the  pro- 
duction of  disorderly  and  useless  movements.  Of  these  groups, 
the  co-ordinated  reflexes  are  by  far  the  most  interesting.  They 
can  be  obtained  to  perfection  from  the  reflex  frog.  In  such  an 
animal  no  spontaneous  movements  occur  if  the  sensory  surfaces  are 
entirely  protected  from  stimulation.  A  sudden  stimulus,  however, 
of  sufficient  strength  applied  to  any  part  of  the  skin  will  give  a 
definite  and  practically  invariable  response  in  a  movement  which 
has  the  appearance  of  an  intentional  effort  to  escape  from  or  remove 
the  stimulus.  If  the  toe  is  pinched  the  foot  is  withdrawn — in  a 
gentle  manner  if  the  stimulus  is  light,  more  rapidly  and  violently, 
but  still  in  a  purposeful  and  co-ordinated  fashion,  if  the  stimulus 
is  strong.  If  the  animal  is  suspended  and  various  spots  on  its 
skin  are  stimulated  by  the  application  of  bits  of  paper  moistened 
with  dilute  acetic  acid  the  animal  will  make  a  neat  and  skillful 
movement  of  the  corresponding  leg  to  remove  the  stimulating  body. 
The  reactions  may  be  varied  in  a  number  of  ways,  and  in  all  cases 
the  striking  features  of  the  reflex  response  are,  first,  the  purposeful 
character  of  the  movement,  and,  second,  the  almost  mechanical 
exactness  with  which  a  definite  stimulus  will  give  a  definite  re- 
sponse. This  definite  relationship  holds  only  for  the  external 
integument,  the  skin  and  its  organs.  It  is  obvious,  in  fact,  that 
a  muscular  response  can  be  effective  only  for  stimuli  originating 
from  the  external  surface.  Stimuli  from  the  interior  of  the  body 
exert  their  reactions,  for  the  most  part,  upon  the  plain  musculature 
and  the  glands.  The  convulsive  reflexes  may  be  produced  by 
two  different  means:  (1)  By  very  intense  sensory  stimulation. 
The  reflex  response  in  this  case  overflows,  as  it  were,  into  all  the 
motor  paths.  A  variation  of  this  method  is  seen  in  the  well- 
known  convulsive  reaction  that  follows  tickling.  In  this  case  the 
stimulus,  although  not  intense  from  an  objective  standpoint,  is 
obviously  violent  from  the  standpoint  of  its  effectiveness  in  sending 
into  the  central  nervous  system  a  series  of  maximal  sensory  im- 
pulses. (2)  By  heightening  the  irritability  of  the  central  nervous 
system.  Upon  the  reflex  frog  this  effect  is  obtained  most  readily 
by  the  use  of  strychnin.     A  little  strychnin  injected  under  the 


REFLEX   ACTIONS.  137 

skin  is  soon  absorbed  and  its  effect  is  shown  at  first  by  a  greater 
sensitiveness  to  cutaneous  stimulation,  the  slightest  touch  to 
the  foot  causing  its  withdrawal.  Soon,  however,  the  response, 
instead  of  being  orderly  and  purposeful,  becomes  convulsive.  A 
mere  touch  of  the  skin  or  a  current  of  air  will  throw  every  muscle 
into  contraction,  and  the  extensors  being  stronger  than  the  flexors 
the  animal's  body  becomes  rigid  in  extension  at  every  stimulation. 
The  explanation  usually  given  for  this  result  is  that  the  strychnin, 
acting  upon  some  part  of  the  nerve  cells,  increases  greatly  their 
irritability,  so  that  when  a  stimulus  is  sent  into  the  central  nervous 
system  along  any  sensory  path  from  the  skin  it  apparently  radiates 
throughout  the  cord  and  acts  upon  all  the  motor  cells.  This  latter 
supposition  leads  to  the  interesting  conclusion  that  all  the  various 
motor  neurons  of  the  cord  must  be  in  physiological  connection,  either 
direct  or  indirect,  with  all  the  neurons  supplying  the  cutaneous  sur- 
face. The  further  fact  that  under  normal  conditions  the  effect  of  a 
given  sensory  stimulus  is  manifested  only  on  a  limited  and  practically 
constant  number  of  the  motor  neurons  seems  to  imply,  therefore, 
that  normally  the  paths  to  these  neurons  are  more  direct  and  the 
resistance,  if  we  may  use  a  somewhat  figurative  term,  is  less  than 
by  other  possible  paths.  Muscular  spasms  are  observed  under  a 
number  of  pathological  conditions, — for  instance,  in  hydrophobia. 
We  are  at  liberty  to  assume  in  such  cases  that  the  toxins  produced 
by  the  disease  affect  the  irritability  of  the  cells  in  much  the  same 
way  as  the  strychnin. 

Theory  of  Co-ordinated  Reflexes.— The  purposeful  character 
of  the  co-ordinated  reflexes  in  the  frog  gives  the  impression  to  the 
observer  of  a  conscious  choice  of  movements  on  the  part  of  the 
brainless  animal.  Most  physiologists,  however,  are  content  to  see 
in  these  reactions  only  an  expression  of  the  automatic  activity 
of  a  mechanism.  It  is  assumed  that  the  sensory  impulses  from 
any  part  of  the  skin  find,  on  reaching  the  cord,  that  the  paths  to 
a  certain  group  of  motor  neurons  are  more  direct  and  offer  less 
resistance  than  any  others.  It  is  along  these  paths  that  the  reflex 
will  take  place,  and  we  may  further  assume  that  these  paths  of 
least  resistance,  as  they  have  been  called,  are  in  part  preformed 
and  in  part  are  laid  down  by  the  repeated  experiences  of  the  indi- 
vidual. That  is,  in  each  animal  a  definite  structure  may  be  sup- 
posed to  exist  in  the  cord;  each  sensory  neuron  is  connected  with 
a  group  of  motor  neurons,  to  some  of  them  more  directly  than  to 
others,  and  we  may  imagine,  therefore,  a  system  of  reflex  apparatuses 
or  mechanisms  which  when  properly  stimulated  will  react  always 
in  the  same  way.  And,  indeed,  in  spite  of  the  purposeful  character 
of  the  reflexes  under  consideration  their  automaton-like  regularity 
is  an  indication  that  their  production  is  due  to  a  fixed  mechanical 


138        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

arrangement.  Whether  or  not  the  reactions  of  the  nervous  system 
in  such  cases  are  accompanied  by  any  degree  of  consciousness  can 
not  be  proved  or  disproved,  but  the  assumption  of  such  an  accom- 
paniment does  not  seem  necessary  to  explain  the  reaction. 

Spinal  Reflexes  in  the  Mammals. — Experiments  upon  the  lower 
mammals,  such  as  the  dog,  show  that  co-ordinated  reflex  move- 
ments may  be  obtained  from  the  lower  portion  of  the  cord  after 
severance  of  its  connections  with  the  brain.  The  spinal  cord 
may  be  severed,  for  instance,  in  the  thoracic  region  and  the  animal 
be  kept  alive  and  in  good  condition  for  an  indefinite  period.  In 
such  an  animal  reflex  movements  of  the  hind  legs  or  tail  may  be 
obtained  readily  from  slight  sensory  stimulation  of  the  skin.  The 
knee-jerk  and  similar  so-called  deep  reflexes  are  also  retained.  ,  But 
it  is  evident  that  these  movements  are  not  so  complete  nor  so 
distinctly  purposeful  as  in  the  frog.  The  muscles  of  the  body 
supplied  by  the  isolated  part  of  the  cord  retain,  however,  a  normal 
irritability  and  exhibit  no  wasting.  In  man,  on  the  contrary, 
it  is  stated  that  after  complete  section  of  the  cord  the  deep  reflexes, 
such  as  the  knee-jerk,  as  well  as  the  skin  reflexes,  are  very  quickly 
lost.  The  muscles  undergo  wasting  and  soon  lose  their  irritability.* 
The  monkeys  exhibit  in  this  respect  a  condition  that  is  somewhat 
intermediate  between  that  of  the  dog  and  man.  It  seems  evident 
from  these  facts  that  in  the  lower  animals  like  the  frog  a  much 
greater  degree  of  independent  activity  is  exhibited  by  the  cord 
than  in  the  more  highly  developed  animals.  According  to  the  degree 
of  development,  the  control  of  the  muscles  is  assumed  more  and 
more  by  the  higher  portions  of  the  nervous  system,  and  the  spinal 
cord  becomes  less  important  as  a  series  of  reflex  centers,  its  func- 
tions being  more  dependent  upon  its  connections  with  the  higher 
centers. 

Dependence  of  Co-ordinated  Reflexes  upon  the  Excitation 
of  the  Normal  Sensory  Endings. — It  is  an  interesting  fact  that 
when  a  nerve  trunk  is  stimulated  directly  in  a  reflex  frog — the 
sciatic  nerve,  for  instance — the  reflex  movements  are  disorderly 
and  quite  unlike  those  obtained  by  stimulating  the  skin.  It  is  said 
that  if  the  skin  be  loosened  and  the  nerve  twigs  arising  from  it  are 
stimulated,  an  operation  that  is  quite  possible  in  the  frog,  the  re- 
sponse is  again  a  disorderly  reflex,  whereas  the  same  fibers  stimu- 
lated through  the  skin  give  an  orderly,  co-ordinated  movement. 
The  difference  in  response  in  these  cases  is  probably  not  due  to  any 
peculiarity  in  the  nature  of  the  sensory  impulses  originating  in  the 
nerve  endings  of  the  skin,  but  more  likely  to  a  difference  in  their 
strength  and  arrangement.  When  one  stimulates  a  sensory  nerve 
trunk  directly, — the  ulnar  nerve  at  the  elbow  in  ourselves,  for  in- 
*  See  Collier,  "  Brain,"  1904,  p.  38. 


REFLEX   ACTIONS.  139 

stance, — the  resulting  sensations  are  markedly  different  from  those 
obtained  by  stimulating  the  skin  areas  supplied  by  the  same  nerve; 
we  have  little  or  no  sensations  of  touch  or  temperature,  only  pain 
and  a  peculiar  tingling  in  the  fingers.  In  such  an  experiment  the 
stimulus  applied  to  the  trunk  affects  more  or  less  equally  all  the 
contained  fibers,  whereas  in  stimulation  of  the  skin  itself  the  effect 
upon  the  cutaneous  fibers  of  pressure,  temperature,  or  pain  pre- 
dominates and  presumably  it  is  these  fibers  that  normally  are  con- 
nected in  an  efficient  way  with  the  reflex  machinery  in  the  nerve 
centers. 

Reflex  Time. — Since  in  a  reflex  movement  the  nerve  centers 
are  involved  a  determination  of  the  total  time  between  the  appli- 
cation of  the  stimulus  and  the  beginning  of  the  response  gives  a 
means  of  ascertaining  the  time  element  concerned  in  the  central 
processes.  Helmholtz,  who  first  made  experiments  of  this  kind, 
stated  that  the  time  required  within  the  nerve  centers  might  be  as 
much  as  twelve  times  as  great  as  that  estimated  for  the  conduction 
along  the  motor  and  sensory  nerves  involved  in  the  reflex.  Most 
observers  state  that  the  time  within  the  center  varies  with  the 
strength  of  the  stimulus,  being  less  the  stronger  the  stimulus.  It 
varies  also  with  the  condition  of  the  nerve  centers,  being  diminished 
by  fatigue  and  other  conditions  that  depress  the  irritability  of  the 
nerve  cells.  By  reflex  time  or  reduced  reflex  time  we  may  designate 
the  time  required  for  the  processes  in  the  center, — that  is,  the  total 
time  less  that  required  for  transmission  of  the  impulse  along  the 
motor  and  sensory  fibers  and  the  latent  period  of  the  muscle  con- 
traction. For  the  frog  this  is  estimated  as  varying  between 
0.008  and  0.015  sec.  In  man  the  reflex  time  usually  quoted  is  that 
given  by  Exner  for  the  winking  of  the  eye.  He  stimulated  one  lid 
electrically  and  recorded  the  reflex  movement  of  the  lid  of  the  other 
eye.  The  total  time  for  the  reflex  was,  on  an  average,  from  0.0578 
sec.  to  0.0662  sec.  He  estimated  that  the  time  for  transmission  of 
the  impulse  along  the  sensory  and  motor  paths,  together  with  the 
latent  period  of  the  muscle,  amounted  to  0.0107  sec.  So  that  the 
true  reflex  time  from  his  determinations  varied  between  0.0471  and 
0.0555  sec.  May  hew,*  using  a  more  elaborate  method,  obtained 
for  the  total  time  a  mean  figure  equal  to  0.0420  sec.  If  Exner's 
correction  is  applied  then  the  true  reflex  time  according  to  this  de- 
termination is  equal  to  0.0313  sec. 

Inhibition  of  Reflexes. — One  of  the  most  fundamental  facts 
regarding  spinal  reflexes  is  the  demonstration  that  they  can  be 
depressed  or  suppressed  entirely — that  is,  inhibited — by  other  im- 
pulses reaching  the  same  part  of  the  spinal  cord.  The  most  sig- 
*  Mayh6w,  "  Journal  of  Exp.  Medicine,"  2,  35,  1897. 


140        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

nijEicant  experiment  in  this  connection  is  that  made  by  Setschenow.* 
If  in  a  frog  the  entire  brain  or  the  cerebral  hemispheres  are  re- 
moved, then  stimulation  of  the  exposed  cut  surface — for  instance, 
by  crystals  of  sodium  chlorid — will  depress  greatly  or  perhaps 
inhibit  entirely  the  usual  spinal  reflexes  that  may  be  obtained  by 
cutaneous  stimulation.  On  removal  of  the  stimulating  substance 
from  the  cut  surface  by  washing  with  a  stream  of  physiological 
saline  (solution  of  sodium  chlorid,  0.7  per  cent.)  the  reflex  activities 
of  the  cord  are  again  exhibited  in  a  normal  way.  This  experiment 
accords  with  many  facts  which  indicate  that  the  brain  may  inhibit 
the  activities  of  the  spinal  centers.  In  the  reflex  from  tickling, 
for  instance,  we  know  that  by  a  voluntary  act  we  can  repress  the 
muscular  movements  up  to  a  certain  point;  so  also  the  limited 
control  of  the  action  of  the  respiratory  and  micturition  centers 
is  a  phenomenon  of  the  same  character.  To  explain  such  acts  we 
may  assume  the  existence  of  a  definite  set  of  inhibitory  fibers, 
arising  in  parts  of  the  brain  and  distributed  to  the  spinal  cord, 
whose  function  is  that  of  controlling  the  activities  of  the  spinal 
centers.  In  view  of  the  fact,  however,  that  there  is  no  independent 
proof  of  the  existence  of  a  separate  set  of  inhibitory  fibers  within 
the  central  nervous  system — that  is,  a  set  of  fibers  whose  specific 
energy  is  that  of  inhibition — it  is  preferable  to  speak  simply  of 
the  inhibitory  influence  of  the  brain  upon  the  cord,  leaving  unde- 
cided the  question  as  to  whether  this  influence  is  exerted  through 
a  special  set  of  fibers,  or  is  brought  about  by  some  variation  in 
the  time  relations,  intensity,  or  quality  of  the  nerve  impulses. 
Regarding  the  fact,  however,  there  can  be  no  question,  and  it 
constitutes  a  most  important  factor  in  the  interaction  of  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  nervous  system.  It  is  possible  that  this  factor 
may  explain  why  a  normal  frog  gives  reflexes  that  are  so  much 
less  constant  and  less  predictable  than  one  with  its  brain  removed. 
A  similar  inhibition  of  spinal  reflexes  may  be  obtained  by  simul- 
taneous stimulation  of  two  different  parts  of  the  skin.  The  usual 
reflex  from  pinching  the  toe  of  one  leg  may  be  inhibited  in  part 
or  completely  by  simultaneous  stimulation  of  the  other  leg  or 
direct  electrical  stimulation  of  an  exposed  nerve  trunk.  A  similar 
interference  is  illustrated  perhaps  in  the  well-known  device  of 
inhibiting  an  act  of  sneezing  by  a  strong  sensory  stimulation  from 
some  part  of  the  skin, — for  instance,  by  pressing  upon  the  upper 
lip.  Inhibition  of  spinal  reflexes  by  such  means  is  not  so  constant 
nor  so  effective  as  by  stimulation  of  the  central  paths,  but  it  forms 
an  interesting  phenomenon  which  must  be  taken  into  account  in 
any  hypothesis  of  the  nature  of  inhibition  that  may  be  proposed. 

*  Setschenow,  "  Physiologische  Studien  uber  d.  Hemmungs-Mechanismen 
f.  d.  Reflexthatigkeit  im  Gehirn  d.  Frosches,"  Berlin,  1863. 


REFLEX   ACTIONS.  141 

A  brief  statement  of  the  more  or  less  unsatisfactory  theories  of 
inhibition  is  given  in  connection  with  the  inhibitory  action  of  the 
vagus  nerve  on  the  heart  beat  (see  p.  512).  It  should  be  added, 
however,  in  this  connection  that  stimulation  of  the  cord,  and 
probably  of  other  parts  of  the  nervous  system,  from  two  different 
sources  may  result  not  only  in  an  inhibition  of  the  reflex  normally 
occurring  from  one  of  the  stimuli,  but  under  some  circumstances 
may  give  an  augmentation  or  reinforcement  of  the  reflex.  The 
most  striking  example  of  this  augmenting  effect  is  given  below  in 
the  paragraph  upon  the  knee-kick. 

Influence  of  the  Condition  of  the  Cord  on  its  Reflex  Ac- 
tivities.— The  time  and  extent  of  the  reflex  responses  may  be 
altered  greatly  by  various  influences,  particularly  by  the  action 
of  drvigs.  The  effect  in  such  cases  is  usually  upon  the  nerve  centers, 
— that  is,  upon  the  cells  themselves  or  upon  the  connections  between 
the  terminal  arborization  and  the  dendrites — the  process  of  conduc- 
tion within  the  sensory  and  motor  fibers  being  less  easily  affected. 
A  convenient  method  of  studying  such  influences  is  that  employed 
by  Tiirck.  In  this  method  the  reflex  frog  is  suspended,  and  the 
tip  of  the  longest  toe  is  immersed  to  a  definite  point  in  a  solution 
of  sulphuric  acid  of  a  strength  of  0.1  to  0.2  per  cent.  If  the  time 
between  the  immersion  and  the  reflex  withdrawal  of  the  foot  is 
noted  by  a  metronome,  or  by  a  record  upon  a  kymograph,  it  will 
be  found  to  be  quite  constant,  provided  the  conditions  are  kept 
uniform.  If  the  average  time  for  this  reflex  is  obtained  from  a 
series  of  observations  it  is  possible  to  inject  various  substances — 
such  as  strychnin,  chloroform,  potassium  bromid,  quinin,  etc. — 
under  the  skin,  and  after  absorption  has  taken  place  to  determine 
the  effect  by  a  new  series  of  observations.  So  far  as  drugs  are 
concerned  the  results  of  such  experiments  belong  rather  to  pharma- 
cology than  to  physiology.  The  method  in  some  cases  brings  out  an 
interesting  difference  in  the  effects  of  various  kinds  of  stimulation. 
Strychnin,  for  instance,  as  was  stated  above,  increases  greatly  the 
delicacy  of  the  reaction  to  pressure  stimulation.  At  one  stage  in 
its  action  before  the  convulsive  responses  are  obtained  the  threshold 
stimulus  is  greatly  lowered, — mere  contact  with  the  toes  causes  a 
rapid  retraction  of  the  leg;  whereas  in  the  normal  reflex  frog  a 
relatively  large  pressure  is  necessary  to  obtain  a  similar  response. 
At  this  stage  in  the  action  of  the  strychnin  the  effect  of  the  acid 
stimulus,  on  the  contrary,  may  be  markedly  weakened  so  far  as 
the  time  element  is  concerned.  If  the  action  of  the  strychnin  is 
not  too  rapid,  it  is  usually  possible  to  find  a  point  at  which  the 
time  for  the  reflex  is  diminished,  but  this  effect  quickly  disappears 
and  the  period  between  stimulus  and  response  becomes  markedly 
lengthened  at  a  time  when  the  slightest  mechanical  stimulation  gives 


142        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

a  rapid  reflex  movement.  This  paradoxical  result  may  depend  pos- 
sibly upon  the  variety  of  nerve  fiber  stimulated  by  the  two  kinds 
of  stimuli  or  may  be  connected  with  the  fact  that  the  acid 
stimuli  may  bring  about  inhibitory  as  well  as  excitatory  processes 
in  the  cord. 

Reflexes  from  Other  Parts  of  the  Nervous  System. — Nu- 
merous typical  reflexes  are  known  to  occur  in  the  brain.  The 
reflex  effects  upon  the  important  centers  in  the  medulla,  such 
as  the  vasomotor  center,  the  respiratory  center,  and  the  cardio- 
inhibitory  center,  the  winking  of  the  eye,  sneezing,  the  light  reflex 
upon  the  sphincter  muscle  of  the  iris,  and  many  other  similar  cases 
might  be  enumerated.  All  of  these  reactions  will  be  described 
and  discussed  in  their  proper  places.  The  conscious  reactions  of 
the  brain  are  not  included  among  the  reflexes  by  virtue  of  the  defi- 
nition which  lays  stress  upon  the  involuntary  characteristic  of  the 
reflex  response,  but  it  should  be  remembered  that,  so  far  as  the 
nervous  mechanism  is  concerned,  these  conscious  reactions  do  not 
differ  from  the  true  reflexes.  When  we  voluntarily  move  a  limb 
the  movement  is  guided  and  controlled  by  sensory  impulses  from  the 
muscles  put  into  action.  The  fibers  of  muscle  sense  from  these 
muscles  convey  sensory  impulses  through  a  chain  of  neurons  to 
the  cortex  of  the  brain  and  there  the  impulses  doubtless  affect  and 
set  into  action  the  motor  neuron  through  which  the  movement  is 
effected.  So  far  as  we  know,  the  discharges  from  the  efferent 
neuron  of  the  brain  are  not  really  automatic,  but  are  conditioned 
or  originated  by  stimuli  from  other  neurons;  so  that  the  activities 
of  the  brain  are  carried  on  by  a  mechanism  of  one  neuron  acting 
on  another,  just  as  in  the  case  of  the  reflex  arc.  The  added  feature 
of  a  psychical  factor,  a  reaction  in  consciousness,  enables  us  to  draw 
a  line  of  distinction  between  these  activities  and  those  of  so-called 
pure  reflexes;  but  the  distinction  is  perhaps  one  of  convenience 
only,  for,  although  the  extremes  may  be  far  enough  apart  to  suit 
the  definition,  many  intermediate  instances  may  be  found  which 
are  difficult  to  classify.  All  skilled  movements,  for  instance,  such 
as  walking,  singing,  dancing,  bicycle  riding,  and  the  like, — although 
in  the  beginning  obviously  effected  by  voluntary  co-ordination, 
nevertheless  in  the  end,  in  proportion  to  the  skill  obtained,  become 
more  or  less  entirely  reflex, — that  is,  involuntary.  In  learning 
such  movements  one  must,  as  the  saying  goes,  establish  his  reflexes, 
and  the  result  can  hardly  be  understood  otherwise  than  by  suppos- 
ing that  the  continual  adjustment  of  certain  sensory  impulses  to 
certain  co-ordinated  movements  results  in  the  formation  of  a  more 
or  less  complex  reflex  arc,  a  set  of  paths  of  least  resistance. 

Reflexes  through  Peripheral  Ganglia — Axon  Reflexes. — 
Many  attempts  have  been  made   by   physiologists  to  ascertain 


REFLEX   ACTIONS. 


143 


whether  or  not  reflexes  can  occur  through  the  peripheral  nerve 
ganglia,  particularly  those  belonging  to  the  sympathetic  system. 
With  regard  to  the  posterior  root  ganglia,  it  may  be  said  that  no 
reflexes  are  possible  through  them.  If  the  posterior  root  connect- 
ing such  a  ganglion  to  the  cord  is  severed  stimulation  of  the  sensory 
area  supplied  by  these  ganglia  causes  no  reflex  response.  Indeed, 
according  to  our  conception  of  the  mechanism  of  a  reflex,  the  pos- 
terior root  ganglia  could  not  serve  as  reflex  centers:  they  contain 
apparently  no  efferent  neurons.  In  the  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic 
nerve  and  its  appendages  and  in  the  similar 
ganglia  contained  in  many  of  the  organs  the 
nerve  cells  have  dendritic  processes,  and,  so 
far  as  their  histology  is  concerned,  it  would 
seem  possible  that  in  any  ganglion  of  this 
type  there  might  be  sensory  and  motor  neu- 
rons so  connected  as  to  make  the  ganglion 
an  independent  reflex  center.  Numerous 
experiments  have  been  made  to  determine 
experimentally  whether  reflexes  can  be  ob- 
tained through  such  ganglia.  Perhaps  the 
most  successful  of  these  experiments  have 
been  made  upon  the  inferior  mesenteric 
ganglion. 

This  ganglion  may  be  isolated  from  all 
connections  with  the  central  nervous  system 
and  left  attached  to  the  bladder  through  the 
two  hypogastric  nerves  (see  schema,  Fig. 
105).  If  now  one  of  these  nerves  is  cut  and 
the  central  stump  is  stimulated  a  contraction 
of  the  bladder  follows.  Obviously  in  this 
case  the  impulse  has  traveled  to  the  ganglion 
and  down  the  other  hypogastric  nerve;  the 
reaction  has  every  appearance  of  being  a  true 
reflex.  Nevertheless,  Langley  and  Ander- 
son,* who  have  studied  the  matter  with  espe- 
cial care,  are  convinced  that  in  this  and  similar  cases  we  have  to  do 
with  what  they  call  pseudoreflexes  or  axon  reflexes.  The  idea  under- 
lying this  term  may  be  explained  in  this  way:  Every  sympathetic 
ganglion  is  connected  with  the  central  nervous  system,  brain,  and 
cord,  by  efferent  spinal  fibers,  preganglionic  fibers,  which  terminate 
by  arborization  around  the  dendrites  of  the  sympathetic  cells.  The 
efferent  fibers  arising  from  the  latter  may  be  designated  as  post- 
ganglionic fibers.  These  authors  give  reasons  to  believe  that  any 
one  preganglionic  fiber,  a,  Fig.  64,  may  connect  by  collaterals  with 
*  Langley  and  Anderson,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  16,  410,  1894. 


Fig.  64. — Schema  to 
show  idea  of  an  axon  re- 
flex: The  preganglionic 
fiber,  a,  sends  branches 
to  two  postganglionic 
fibers,  6,  c.  If  stimulated 
at  X  the  impulse  passes 
backward  in  a  direction 
the  reverse  of  normal  and 
falling  into  b  and  c  gives 
a  pseudoreflex  effect. 


144  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    CENTRAL    NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 

several  sympathetic  cells.  If  such  a  fiber  were  stimulated  at  x, 
then  the  impulse  passing  back  along  the  axon  in  a  direction  the 
reverse  of  normal  would  stimulate  cells  h  and  c,  giving  effects  that 
are  apparently  reflex,  but  which  differ  from  true  reflexes  in  that 
the  stimulating  axon  belongs  to  a  motor  neuron.  Under  normal 
circumstances  it  is  not  probable  that  an  effect  of  this  kind  can  be 
produced. 

The  Tonic  Activity  of  the  Spinal  Cord. — In  addition  to  the 
definite  reflex  activities  of  the  cord,  each  traceable  to  a  distinct 
sensory  stimulus,  there  is  evidence  to  show  that  many  of  its  motor 
neurons  are  in  that  state  of  more  or  less  continuous  activity  which 
we  designate  as  tonic  activity  or  tonus.  There  is  abundant  reason 
for  this  belief  in  regard  to  many  of  the  special  centers  of  the  cord 
and  brain,  such  as  the  vasomotor  center,  the  center  for  the  sphinc- 
ter muscle  of  the  iris,  the  centers  for  the  sphincter  muscles  of  the 
bladder,  the  anus,  etc.  But  the  evidence  includes  the  motor 
neurons  to  the  voluntary  as  well  as  the  involuntary  musculature. 
In  a  decapitated  frog  the  muscles  take  a  definite  position,  and 
Brondgeest  showed  that  if  such  an  animal  is  suspended,  after  cut- 
ting the  sciatic  plexus  in  one  leg,  the  leg  on  the  uninjured  side 
takes  a  more  flexed  position.  The  explanation  offered  for  this 
result  is  that  the  muscles  on  the  sound  side  are  being  innervated 
by  the  motor  neurons  of  the  cord.  Inasmuch  as  a  result  of  this 
kind  cannot  be  obtained  from  a  frog  whose  skin  has  been  removed, 
or  in  one  in  which  the  posterior  roots  have  been  severed  it  seems 
evident  that  this  tonic  discharge  from  the  motor  neurons  is  due 
to  a  constant  inflow  of  impulses  along  the  sensory  paths.  The 
muscle  tonus,  in  other  words,  is  really  a  reflex  tonus,  which  differs 
from  ordinary  reflex  movements  only  in  the  absence  of  a  sudden, 
visible  contraction  and  in  the  more  or  less  continuous  character 
of  the  innervation.  In  the  section  on  animal  heat  the  importance 
of  this  constant  innervation  of  the  muscles  as  a  source  of  heat  is 
further  emphasized.  The  idea  of  a  more  or  less  continuous  but 
varying  activity  of  the  centers  in  the  brain  and  cord  in  consequence 
of  the  continuous  inflow  of  impulses  along  the  sensory  paths  flts 
in  very  well  with  many  facts  observed  in  the  peripheral  organs, — 
facts  that  will  be  referred  to  from  time  to  time  as  the  physiology 
of  these  organs  is  considered. 

Effects  of  Removal  of  the  Spinal  Cord.— Numerous  investi- 
gators have  sectioned  the  cord  partly  or  completely  at  various 
levels.  The  general  results  of  these  experiments  as  regards  loss 
of  sensation  or  voluntary  movement  are  described  in  the  next 
section  treating  of  the  cord  as  a  path  of  conduction  to  and  from 
the  brain.     But  attention  may  be  called  here  to  some  of  the  gen- 


REFLEX   ACTIONS.  145 

eral  results  obtained  by  Goltz*  in  some  remarkable  experiments 
in  which  the  entire  cord  was  removed  with  the  exception  of  the 
cervical  region  and  a  small  portion  of  the  upper  thoracic.  In 
making  this  experiment  it  was  necessary  to  perform  the  operation 
in  several  steps.  That  is,  the  cord  was  first  sectioned  in  the  upper 
thoracic  region  and  then  in  successive  operations  the  lower  tho- 
racic, lumbar,  and  sacral  regions  were  removed  completely.  Very 
great  care  was  necessary  in  the  treatment  of  the  animals  after 
these  operations,  but  some  survived  and  lived  for  long  periods, 
the  digestive,  circulatory,  and  excretory  organs  performing  their 
functions  in  a  normal  manner.  The  muscles  of  the  hind  limbs 
and  trunk,  however,  underwent  complete  atrophy,  owing  to  the 
destruction  of  their  motor  nerves.  The  blood-vessels  also  were 
paralyzed  after  the  first  operations,  but  gradually  their  muscu- 
lature again  recovered  tone,  showing  that,  although  under  normal 
conditions  the  tonic  contraction  of  the  vessels  is  under  the  in- 
fluence of  nerves  arising  from  the  cord,  this  tone  may  be  re-estab- 
lished in  time  after  the  severance  of  all  spinal  connections.  Some 
of  the  specific  results  of  these  experiments,  bearing  upon  the  re- 
flexes of  defecation,  micturition,  and  parturition,  will  be  described 
later.  Attention  may  be  called  here  to  the  general  results 
illustrating  the  general  functions  of  the  cord. 

In  the  first  place,  there  was,  of  course,  a  total  paralysis  of  volun- 
tary movement  in  the  muscles  innervated  normally  through  the 
parts  of  the  cord  removed,  and  a  complete  loss  of  sensation  in  the 
same  regions,  particularly  of  cutaneous  and  muscular  sensibility. 
In  the  second  place,  the  visceral  organs,  including  the  blood-vessels, 
— that  is,  the  vegetative  or  unconscious  organs, — were  shown  to  be 
much  more  independent  of  the  direct  control  of  the  central  nervous 
system.  While  these  organs  in  the  experiments  under  consideration 
were  still  in  connection  with  the  sympathetic  ganglia  and  in  part  with 
the  brain  through  the  vagi,  still  their  connections  with  the  central 
nervous  system,  particularly  as  regards  their  sensory  paths  and 
the  innervation  of  the  blood-vessels,  were  in  largest  part  destroyed. 
The  immediate  effect  of  this  destruction  would  have  been  the  death 
of  the  animal  if  the  artificial  care  of  the  observer  had  not  replaced, 
in  the  beginning,  the  normal  control  exercised  by  the  nervous  sys- 
tem through  the  spinal  nerves;  but  later  this  careful  nursing  was 
not  required.  While  these  organs,  therefore,  are  capable  of  a 
certain  amount  of  independent  activity  and  co-ordination,  they 
are  normally  controlled  through  the  various  reflex  activities  of 
the  brain  and  cord.  In  the  third  place,  it  is  noteworthy  that  the 
adaptability  of  the  cordless  portion  of  the  animal  was  distinctly 

*  Goltz  and  Ewald,  "  Pfliiger's  Archiv  fiir  die  gesammte  Physiologie," 
63,  362,  1896. 
10 


146        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

less  than  normal.  Its  power  of  preserving  a  constant  body  tem- 
perature was  more  limited  than  in  the  normal  animal,  and  the 
susceptibility  to  inflammatory  disturbances  in  the  visceral  organs 
was  greatly  increased.  It  seems  evident,  from  these  facts,  that, 
although  the  animal  was  living,  its  power  of  adaptation  to  marked 
changes  in  the  external  or  internal  environment  was  greatly  less- 
ened, and  this  fact  illustrates  well  the  great  general  importance 
of  the  spinal  cord  and  brain  as  reflex  centers  controlling  the  nutri- 
tion and  co-ordinated  activities  of  the  body  tissues  and  organs. 
This  control  is  necessary  under  normal  conditions  for  the  success- 
ful combination  of  the  activities  of  the  various  organs.  A  large 
part  of  this  control  is  doubtless  dependent  upon  the  regulation  of 
the  blood  supply  to  the  various  organs.  The  mechanism  by  which 
this  is  effected  and  the  parts  played  by  the  cord  and  the  brain 
(medulla  oblongata),  respectively,  will  be  described  in  the  section 
on  circulation. 

Knee-jerk. — Knee-jerk  or  knee-kick  is  the  name  commonly 
given  to  the  jerk  of  the  foot  when  a  light  blow  is  struck  upon  the 
patellar  ligament  just  below  the  knee.  The  jerk  of  the  foot  is 
due  to  a  contraction  of  the  quadriceps  femoris  muscle.  According 
to  Sherrington,  the  parts  of  this  muscular  mass  chiefly  concerned 
are  the  m.  vastus  medialis  and  m.  femoralis.  In  order  to  obtain 
the  muscular  response  it  is  usually  necessary  to  put  the  quadriceps 
under  some  tension  by  flexion  of  the  leg.  This  end  is  obtained 
most  readily  by  crossing  the  knees  or  by  allowing  the  leg  to  hang 
freely  when  sitting  on  the  edge  of  a  bench  or  table.  Under  such 
circumstances  the  jerk  is  obtained  in  the  great  majority  of  normal 
persons,  and  this  fact  has  made  it  an  important  diagnostic  sign 
in  many  diseases  of  the  spinal  cord.  The  importance  of  the 
reaction  for  such  purposes  was  first  brought  out  by  the  work  of 
Erb  and  of  Westphal*  in  1875. 

Reinforcement  of  the  Knee-jerk. — It  was  first  shown  by 
Jendrassik  (1883)  that  the  extent  of  the  jerk  may  be  greatly  aug- 
mented if,  at  the  time  the  blow  is  struck  upon  the  tendon,  a  strong 
voluntary  movement  is  made  by  the  individual,  such  as  squeezing 
the  hands  together  tightly  or  clenching  the  jaws.  This  phenomenon 
was  studied  carefully  in  this  country  by  Mitchell  and  Lewis,!  who 
ascertained  that  a  similar  augmentation  may  be  produced  by  giving 
the  individual  a  simultaneous  sensory  stimulation.  They  desig- 
nated the  phenomenon  as  a  reinforcement,  and  this  name  is  gen- 
erally employed  by  English  writers,  although  occasionally  the  term 
''Bahnung,"  introduced  by  Exner  to  describe  a  similar  phenom- 
enon, is  also  used.     It  is  found  that  by  a  reinforcement  the  knee- 

*  Erb  and  Westphal,  "Archiv  f.  Psychiatrie,"  1875,  vol.  v. 

t  Mitchell  and  Lewis,  "American  Journal  of  Med.  Sciences,"  92,  363,  1886. 


REFLEX   ACTIONS. 


147 


jerk  may  be  demonstrated  in  some  individuals  in  whom  the  ordi- 
nary blow  upon  the  tendon  fails  to  elicit  a  response.  Bowditch  and 
Warren*  studied  the  phenomenon  of  reinforcement  and  brought  out 
a  fact  of  very  great  interest.  They  studied  especially  the  time 
interval  between  the  blow  upon  the  tendon  and  the  reinforcing  act 
and  found  that  if  the  latter  preceded  the  blow  by  too  great  an  inter- 
val then,  instead  of  an  augmentation  of  the  jerk,  there  was  a  dimi- 
nution which  they  designated  as  negative  reinforcement  or  inhi- 
bition. This  inhibiting  effect  began  to  appear  when  the  reinforcing 
act  (hand-squeeze)  preceded  the  blow  by  an  interval  of  from  0.22 
to  0.6  sec,  and  the  maximum  inhibiting  effect  was  obtained  at  an 


mm 


Fig.  65. — Showing  in  millimeters  the  amount  by  which  the  "reinforced"  knee-kick 
varied  from  the  normal,  the  level  of  which  is  represented  by  the  horizontal  line  at  0,  "nor- 
mal." The  time  intervals  elapsing  between  the  clenching  of  the  hand  (which  constituted 
the  reinforcement)  and  the  tap  on  the  tendon  are  marked  below.  The  reinforcement  is 
greatest  when  the  two  events  are  nearly  simultaneous.  At  an  interval  of  0.4  sec.  it 
amounts  to  nothing;  during  the  next  0.6  sec.  the  height  of  the  kick  is  actually  dimin- 
ished the  longer  the  interval,  after  which  the  negative  reinforcement  tends  to  disappear; 
and  when  1.7  sec.  is  allowed  to  elapse  the  height  of  the  kick  ceases  to  be  affected  by  the 
clenching  of  the  hand. — (^Bowditch  and  Warren.) 


interval  of  from  0.6  to  0.9  sec.  Beyond  this  point  the  effect  became 
less  noticeable,  and  at  an  interval  of  1.7  to  2.5  sec.  the  reinforcing 
act  had  no  influence  at  all  upon  the  jerk.  These  relations  are 
shown  in  the  accompanying  curve  (Fig.  65).  These  authors  con- 
firmed also  the  fact  that  a  sensory  stimulus,  such  as  a  gentle  blast 
of  air  on  the  conjunctiva  or  the  knee,  may  reinforce  the  jerk.  The 
phj^sio logical  explanation  of  the  reinforcement,  negative  and  posi- 
tive, is  a  matter  of  inference  only,  but  the  view  usually  held  is  that 
it  is  due  to  "overflow."  That  is,  many  facts,  such  as  strychnin 
tetanus,  indicate  that  the  neuromuscular  machinery  of  the  entire 
central  nervous  system  is  more  or  less  directly  connected  and  that 

*  Bowditch  and  Warren,  "  Journal  of  Physiology,"  2,  25,  1890. 


148  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    CENTRAL    NERVOUS    SY''STEM. 

functional  activity  at  one  part  will  influence  the  irritability  of  the 
remainder  either  in  the  direction  of  reinforcement  (Bahnung)  or 
inhibition.  We  may  conceive,  therefore,  that  when  the  hands 
are  squeezed  the  motor  impulses  sent  down  from  the  cortex  of  the 
brain  to  the  upper  portion  of  the  cord  overflow  to  some  extent, 
sufficient  at  least  to  alter  the  irritability  of  the  other  motor  neurons 
in  the  cord.  Experimental  stimulation  of  the  cortex  has  given 
similar  results.  Exner*  found  that  when  the  motor  center  for  the 
foot  in  the  cortex  of  a  rabbit  was  stimulated,  the  stimulation,  even 
if  too  weak  to  be  effective  itself,  caused  an  increase  in  the  contraction 
brought  about  reflexly  by  a  simultaneous  stimulation  of  the  skin 
of  the  paw,  and  furthermore  if  these  stiaiuli  were  so  reduced  in 
strength  that  each  was  ineffective,  then  when  applied  together  a 
contraction  was  obtained.  In  this  case  an  ineffective  stimulus 
from  the  cortex  reaching  the  spinal  cord  increased  the  irritability 
of  the  motor  centers  there  so  that  a  simultaneous  reflex  stimulus 
from  the  foot,  ineffective  in  itself,  became  effective. 

Is  the  Knee-jerk  a  Reflex? — The  most  interesting  question 
in  this  connection  is  whether  the  jerk  -is  a  true  reflex  act  or  is  due 
to  a  direct  mechanical  stimulation  of  the  muscle.  Opinions  are 
divided  upon  this  point.  Those  who  believe  that  the  jerk  is  a 
reflex  lay  emphasis  upon  the  undoubted  fact  that  the  integrity  of 
the  reflex  arc  is  absolutely  essential  to  the  response.  The  quad- 
riceps receives  its  motor  and  sensory  fibers  through  the  anterior 
crural  nerve,  and  pathological  lesions  upon  man  as  well  as  direct 
experimental  investigation  upon  monkej^s  prove  that  if  either  the 
posterior  or  anterior  roots  of  the  third  and  fourth  lumbar  spinal 
nerves  are  destroyed  the  knee-jerk  disappears  entirely.  The  oppo- 
nents of  the  reflex  view  explain  this  fact  by  the  theory  that  in 
order  for  the  quadriceps  to  respond  it  must  be  in  a  condition 
of  tonus.  This  tonus  depends  upon  the  reflex  arc.  the  sensory 
impulses  from  the  muscle  serving  to  keep  it  in  that  condition 
of  subdued  contraction  known  as  tone.  On  this  view  destruc- 
tion of  the  reflex  arc  renders  the  muscle  less  irritable,  so  that  it 
will  not  respond  by  a  contraction  to  the  sudden  mechanical  exten- 
sion or  pull  caused  by  the  blow  on  the  tendon.  The  adherents  of 
this  view  lay  emphasis  upon  two  facts:  First,  the  knee-jerk  is  a 
simple  contraction,  and  not  a  tetanus,  and,  generally  speaking, 
the  motor  centers  of  the  cord  discharge  a  series  of  impulses  when 
stimulated.  Second,  the  time  for  the  jerk — that  is,  the  interval 
between  the  stimulus  and  the  response — is  too  short  for  a  reflex. 
The  determination  of  this  time  has  been  attempted  by  many  ob- 
servers for  the  purpose  of  deciding  the  controversy,  but  unfor- 
tunately the  results  have  been  lacking  in  uniformit}',  varying,  in 
*  Exner,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  27,  412,  1882. 


REFLEX   ACTIONS.  149 

man,  from  0.025  to  0.073  sec.  Moreover,  we  have  no  definite  basis 
upon  which  to  estimate  what  should  be  the  time  required  if  the 
act  were  a  genuine  reflex.  For  the  act  of  winking  in  man  Exner 
estimated  a  total  time  of  0.0578  sec,  but  May  hew  obtained  a 
smaller  figure — 0.0471  sec.  In  the  lower  animals  the  results  have 
also  been  uncertain.  Applegarth,  making  use  of  a  dog  with  a 
severed  spinal  cord,  obtained  for  the  time  of  the  knee-jerk  an 
interval  of  0.014  to  0.02  sec.  Assuming  a  velocity  of  100  ft.  or 
more  per  second,  this  would  allow  sufficient  time  for  the  impulse 
to  travel  to  the  cord  and  back  provided  there  was  no  delay  in 
the  nerve  centers.  Waller  and  Gotch,  using  the  rabbit,  found  the 
time  to  be  only  0.008  to  0.005  sec, — that  is,  just  about  the 
latent  period  of  a  muscle  contraction  and  too  short  a  time  for 
a  reflex.  It  is  evident  that  more  facts  are  necessary  before  a 
positive  statement  can  be  made  upon  this  point.  In  favor  of 
the  reflex  theory  attention  may  be  called  to  the  fact  that  in 
some  cases  a  crossed  reflex  is  obtained  affecting  the  muscles  of 
the  other  leg.  This  apparently  undoubted  reflex  shows  that  an 
efficient  sensory  impulse  has  reached  the  cord,  and,  according  to 
our  knowledge  of  reflexes,  the  effect  in  such  cases  should  always 
be  most  marked  on  its  own  side.  It  would  seem  to  be  unjustifiable 
in  these  cases  to  suppose  that  the  effect  on  the  same  side  is  not 
reflex  while  on  the  opposite  side  it  is  reflex. 

Conditions  Influencing  the  Extent  of  the  Knee-jerk. — The 
effect  of  varying  normal  conditions  upon  the  knee-jerk  has  been 
studied  by  a  number  of  observers,  particularly  by  Lombard.*  The 
results  are  most  interesting  in  that  they  indicate  very  clearly  that 
the  irritability  of  the  spinal  cord  varies  with  almost  every  marked 
variation  in  mental  activity.  During  sleep  the  jerk  disappears 
and  in  mental  conditions  of  a  restful  character  its  extent  is  relatively 
small.  In  conditions  of  mental  excitement  or  irritation,  on  the 
contrar}^,  the  jerk  becomes  markedly  increased.  Lombard  ob- 
served also,  in  his  own  case,  a  daily  rhythm,  which  is  represented 
in  the  chart  given  in  Fig.  66.  It  would  seem  from  his  experiments 
that  the  extent  of  the  knee-jerk  is  a  sensitive  indicator  of  the 
relative  state  of  irritabihty  of  the  nervous  system:  "The  knee- 
jerk  is  increased  and  diminished  by  whatever  increases  and  di- 
minishes the  activity  of  the  central  nervous  system  as  a  whole." 
This  general  fact  is  supported,  especially  as  regards  mental  activity, 
by  observations  on  other  similar  mechanisms, — such,  for  instance, 
as  the  condition  of  the  nervous  centers  controlling  the  bladder. 

*  Lombard,  "The  American  Journal  of  Psychology,"  1SS7,  p.  1.  See 
also  article  "Knee-jerk"  OVarren),  "Wood's  Ref.  Handbook  of  Med.  Sci- 
ences," second  edition,  1902. 


150 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    CENTRAL    NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 


Use  of  the  Knee-jerk  and  Spinal  Reflexes  as  Diagnostic 
Signs. — The  fact  that  the  knee-jerk  depends  on  the  integrity  of 
the  reflex  arc  in  the  lumbar  cord  has  made  it  useful  as  a  diagnostic 
indication  in  lesions  of  the  cord,  particularly,  of  course,  for  the. 
lumbar  region.  It  is  mainly  on  account  of  its  practical  value  and 
the  ease  with  which  it  is  ordinarily  obtained  that  the  phenom- 
enon has  been  studied  so  extensively.  In  the  disease  known  as 
progressive  locomotor  ataxia  the  posterior  root  fibers  in  the  pos- 
terior columns  in  the  lumbar  region  are  affected,  and,  as  a  con- 
sequence, the  jerk  is  diminished  or  abolished  altogether  according 
to  the  stage  of  the  disease.     So  also  lesions  affecting  the  anterior 


■  ,  %  ,^i,^-~"Lombard's  figure  to  indicate  the  daily  rhythm  in  the  extent  of  the  knee- 
jerk  and  the  effect  of  mental  stimuli.  The  ordinates  (0-110)  represent  the  extent  of  the 
kick  in  milhmeters.  Each  dot  represents  a  separate  kick,  while  the  heavy  horizontal  line 
gives  the  average  extent  for  the  period  indicated. 


horns  of  the  gray  matter  will  destroy  the  reflex  by  cutting  off  the 
motor  path,  while  in  other  cases  lesions  in  the  brain  or  the  lateral 
columns  of  the  cord  affecting  the  pyramidal  system  of  fibers  may 
be  accompanied  by  an  exaggeration  of  this  and  similar  reflexes. 
This  latter  fact  agrees  with  the  experimental  results  (see  p.  140) 
upon  ablation  of  the  brain.  After  such  operations  in  the  frog 
and  lower  mammals  at  least  the  spinal  reflexes  may  show  a  marked 
increase.  Interruption  of  the  descending  connections  between  brain 
and  cord  at  any  point,  therefore,  may  be  accompanied  by  a  strik- 
ing increase  in  sensitiveness  of  the  spinal  reflexes.  The  explana- 
tion usually  given  is  that  the  inhibitory  influences  of  the  brain 
centers  upon  the  cord  are  thereby  weakened  or  destroyed.     The 


Fig.  67. — Diagrammatic  representation  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  human  bulb  and 
spinal  cord. 

The  cord  is  divided  into  its  four  regions:  1,  MeduUa  cervicalis;  2,  medulla  dorsalis; 
3,  medulla  lumbalis;  4,  medulla  sacralis.  Within  each  region  the  spinal  segments  bear 
Roman  numbers.  On  the  left  side  of  the  diagram  the  locality  supplied  by  the  sensory 
(afferent)  neurons  is  indicated  by  one  or  more  words,  and  these  latter  are  connected 
with  the  bulb  or  the  segments  of  the  cord  at  the  levels  at  which  the  nerves  enter.  The 
afferent  character  is  indicated  by  the  arrow  tip  on  the  lines  of  reference. 

On  the  right-hand  side  the  names  of  muscles  or  groups  of  muscles  are  given,  and  to 
them  are  drawn  reference  lines  which  start  from  the  segments  of  the  cord  in  which  the 
ceU-bodies  of  origin  have  been  located. 

Within  the  cord  itself,  the  designations  for  several  reflex  centers  are  inscribed  in  the 
segment  where  the  mechanism  is  localized.  For  example,  Reflexus  scapularis.  Centrum 
cilio-spinale,  Reflexus  epigastricus,  Reflexus  abdominalis,  Reflexus  cremastericus,  Reflexus 
patellaris,  Reflexus  tendo  Achillis,  Centrum  vesioale,  Centrum  anale  (the  last  two  on  the 
left  side  of  the  diagram).  (Donaldson,  "Amer.  Text-book  of  Physiology,"  from  "Icones 
Neurologicse,"  Strumpell  and  Jakob.) 


Mm.  pharyngis,  palati 
Mm.  laryngis 
Mm.  linguae 
Oesophagus 
SternocleJdomastoideus 
Musculi  colli  et  nucliae 


Fig.  67. 


REFLEX    ACTIONS, 


151 


explanation  is  incomplete  in  that  it  leaves  undecided  the  question 
as  to  whether  this  inhibitory  influence  is  exerted  through  the  or- 
dinary motor  paths  or  through  a  special  set  of  inhibitory  fibers. 
Various  motor  reflexes  whose  motor  centers  are  situated  at  differ- 
ent levels  in  the  cord  may  be  used  to  a  limited  extent  to  diagnose 
the  condition  of  the  cord  at  its  various  parts.  Some  of  the  most 
generally  known  of  these  reflexes  are  given  in  the  following  table 
and  the  location  of  the  centers  in  the  cord  is  shown  in  Fig.  67: 


LOCALIZATION   OF   FUNCTION   IN   THE   DIFFERENT  SEGMENT8 
OF  THE  SPINAL  CORD. 

(M.  Allen  Starr,  slightly  modified  by  Edinger.)* 


Segments. 

Muscles. 

Reflexes. 

Cutaneous  Areas 
Innervated. 

Cervical  ii-iii 

M.     sterno-cleido- 

Inspiratory  reflex  on 

Neck  and  back  of 

mastoideus. 

quick    pressure    be- 

head. 

M.  trapezius. 

neath  ribs. 

Mm.     scaleni     et 

coUi. 

Diaphragma. 

C.  iv 

Diaphragma. 

Dilatation  of  the  pu- 

Neck. 

M.   supraspinatus. 

pil  on  irritation  of 

Upper  part  of 

M.  infraspinatus. 

the  neck  (C.  iv-vii.) 

shoulder. 

M.  deltoideus. 

Outer  side  of  arm. 

M.  biceps  brachii. 

M.     coracobrachi- 

alis. 

M.  supinator 

longus. 

M.  rhomboidei. 

■ 

C.v •.  . 

M.  deltoideus. 

Scapular     reflex     (C. 

Back   of    shoulder 

M.  biceps  brachii. 

v-T.  i). 

and  arm. 

M.     coracobrachi- 

Tendon     reflexes     of 

Outer      side      of 

alis. 

the      corresponding 

upper    arm    and 

M.  supinator 

muscles. 

of  the  forearm. 

longus. 

M.  supinator 

brevis. 

M.  pectoralis 

major      (pars 

clavicularis) . 

M.     serratus     an- 

terior. 

Mm.   rhomboidei. 

M.  brachialis 

anticus. 

M.  teres  minor. 

C.  vi..- 

M.  biceps  brachii. 

Tendon  reflexes  of  the 

Outer      side      of 

M.  brachialis 

Mm.   extensores  la- 

forearm. 

anticus. 

certi  et  brachii. 

Back  of  hand  and 

M.  pectoral  is 

Tendon     reflexes     of 

radial  region. 

major      (pars 

the   muscles   of  the 

clavicularis) . 

wrist. 

*  Taken  from  Barker's  "  Nervous  System." 


152 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 


Localization  of  Function  in  the  Different  Segments  of  the  Spinal 
Cord. — (Continued.) 


Segments. 

Muscles. 

Reflexes. 

Cutaneous  Areas 
Innervated. 

C.     vi     (con- 

M.      serratus 

tinued). 

anterior. 
M.  triceps  brachii. 
Mm.       extensores 

manus    et    digi- 

torum. 
Mm.  pronatores. 

C.  vii 

M.  triceps  brachii 

Blow  upon  the  palm 

Radial    region    of 

caput  longum). 

of  the  hand  causes 

hand. 

Mm.       extensores 

closure   of   the    fin- 

manus   et    digi- 

gers. 

torum. 

Palmar    reflex    (C. 

M.    flexores 

vii-T.  i). 

\ 

manus. 

\ 

Mm.       pronatores 

1 

manus. 

1 

M.  pectoral  is 

1 

major     (pars 

f 

sterno-costalis). 

[ 

M.  subscapularis. 
M.  latissimus 
dorsi. 

\  Distribution      of 

/      N.  medianus. 

M.  teres  major. 

( 

C.  viii 

Mm.  flexores 
manus    et    digi- 
torum. 

Mm.    m  i  n  o  r  e  s 
manus. 

Pupillary  reflex. 

) 

Thoracic  i .  .  . 

Mm.       extensores 
pollicis. 

/  f 

/  Ulnar  region. 

Mm.     m  i  n  o  r  e  s 

(         . 

manus. 

V 

Mm.    eminent 

\ 

thenar  et  hypo- 

thenar. 

/ 

T.  ii-xii 

Mm.  dorsi. 

Epigastric  reflex    (T. 

Skin     of     thorax, 

Mm.   abdominis. 

iv-vii). 

back,     abdomen. 

Mm.     erectores 

Abdominal  reflex 

and    upper    glu- 

spinse. 

(T.  vii-xi). 

teal  region. 

Lumbar  i  .  .  . 

M.  iliopsoas. 

Cremaster  reflex 

Skin  of    pubic    re- 

M. sartorius. 

(L.  i-iii). 

gion. 

Mm.   abdominis. 

Anterior    part     of 
scrotum. 

L.  ii 

M.  iliopsoas. 

Patellar  tendon  reflex 

Outer  side  of  hip. 

M.  sartorius. 

(L.  ii-iv). 

Mm.  flexores  genus. 

M.  quadriceps 

femoris. 

L.  iii 

M.  quadr i  ceps 
femoris. 

Anterior  arid  inner 

side  of  thigh. 

Mm,  rotatores 

femoris  (inward). 

Mm.      adductores 

femoris. 

REFLEX    ACTIONS. 


153 


Localization  of  Function  in  the  Different  Segments  of  the  Spinal 
.-  '•  Cord. — {Continued.) 


Segments. 

Muscles. 

Reflexes. 

Cutaneous  Areas 
Innervated. 

L.  iv 

Mm.      abductores 

Gluteal   reflex 

(L. 

Inner  side  of  thigh 

femoris. 

iv-v) . 

and  leg  as  far  as 

Mm.      abductores 

ankle;   inner  side 

femoris. 

of  foot 

M.       tibialis 

anterior. 

Mm.  flexores 

genus  (Ferrier  ?) 

L.  V 

Mm.          rotatores 
femoris    (  o  u  t  - 

Back  of  hip  and 
thigh   and  outer 

ward) . 

part  of  foot. 

Mm.    flexores 

genus  (Ferrier  ?) 

Mm.    flexores 

pedis. 

Mm.       extensores 

digitorum. 

Mm.   peronsei. 

Sacral  i-ii  .  .  . 

Mm.    flexores 
pedis     et     digi- 
torum. 

M.  peronsei. 
Mm.    m  i  n  o  r  e  s 
pedis. 

Plantar  reflex. 

Back  of  thigh; 
outer  side  of  leg 
and  foot. 

S.  iii-v 

M.  perineei. 

Achilles  tendon  reflex. 

Skin  over  sacrum, 

Vesical    and    rectal 

perineum,     geni- 

centers. 

talia,  and  about 
anus. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
THE  SPINAL  CORD  AS  A  PATH  OF  CONDUCTION. 

In  addition  to  the  varied  and  important  functions  performed 
by  the  cord  as  a  system  of  reflex  centers  controlling  the  activities 
of  numerous  glands  and  visceral  organs  as  well  as  the  so-called 
voluntary  muscles,  it  is  physiologically  most  important  as  a  path- 
way to  and  from  the  brain.  All  the  innumerable  fibers  that 
enter  the  cord  through  the  posterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves 
bring  in  afferent  impulses,  which  may  be  continued  upward  by 
definite  tracts  that  end  eventually  in  the  cortex  of  the  cerebrum, 
the  cerebellum,  or  some  other  portion  of  the  brain.  On  the  other 
hand,  many  of  the  efferent  impulses  originating  reflexly  or  other- 
wise in  different  parts  of  the  brain  are  conducted  downward  into 
the  cord  to  emerge  at  one  or  another  of  the  anterior  roots  of  the 
spinal  nerves.  The  location  and  extent  of  these  ascending  and 
descending  paths  form  a  part  of  the  inner  structure  of  the  cord, 
which  is  most  important  practically  in  medical  diagnosis  and  which 
has  been  the  subject  of  a  vast  amount  of  experimental  inquir}^  in 
physiology,  anatomy,  pathology,  and  clinical  medicine.  In  working 
out  this  inner  architecture  the  neuron  conception  has  been  of  the 
greatest  value,  and  the  results  are  usually  presented  in  terms  of  these 
interconnecting  units. 

The  Arrangement  and  Classification  of  the  Nerve  Cells 
in  the  Gray  Matter  of  the  Cord. — Nerve  cells  are  scattered 
throughout  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord,  but  are  arranged  more 
or  less  distinctly  in  groups  or,  considering  the  longitudinal  aspect 
of  the  cord,  in  columns  the  character  of  which  varies  somewhat  in 
the  different  regions.  From  the  standpoint  of  physiological  anatomy 
these  cells  may  be  grouped  into  four  classes:  (1)  The  anterior 
root  cells,  clustered  in  the  anterior  horn  of  gray  matter  (1,  Fig.  68). 
The  axons  of  these  cells  pass  out  of  the  cord  almost  at  once  to 
form  the  anterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves.  (2)  The  tract  cells, 
so  called  because  their  axons  instead  of  leaving  the  cord  by  the 
spinal  roots  enter  the  white  matter  and,  after  passing  upward  or 
downward,  help  to  form  the  tracts  into  which  this  white  matter  may 
be  divided  (2  and  3  of  Fig.  68) .  These  tract  cells  are  found  through- 
out the  gray  matter,  and  according  to  the  side  on  which  the  axon 
■enters  into  a  tract  they  may  be  divided  into  three  subgroups:  (a) 

154 


SPINAL    CORD    AS    A    PATH    OF    CONDUCTION. 


155 


Those  whose  axons  enter  the  white  matter  on  the  same  side  of  the 
cord,  the  "tautomeric  tract  cells  of  Van  Gehuchten.  (6)  Those  whose 
axons  pass  through  the  anterior  white  commissure  and  thus  reach 
the  tracts  in  the  anterior  or  lateral  columns  of  the  other  side. 
These  are  known  as  commissural  cells  or  the  heteromeric  tract 
cell  of  Van  Gehuchten.  They  form  one  obvious  means  for  crossed 
conduction  in  the  cord,  (c)  Those  whose  axons  divide  into  two, 
one  passing  into  the  white  matter  of  the  same  side,  the  other  pass- 
ing by  way  of  the  anterior  commissure  to  reach  the  white  matter 
of  the  opposite  side — the  hecateromeric  tract  cells  of  Van  Gehuch- 
ten.    (3)  The  Golgi  cells  of  the  second  type — that  is,  cells  whose 


uentral 


Fig.  68. — Schema  of  the  structure  of  the  cord. — (After  Lenhossek.)  On  the  right  the 
nerve  cells;  on  the  left  the  entering  nerve  fibers.  Right  side:  1,  Motor  cells,  anterior 
horn,  giving  rise  to  the  fibers  of  the  anterior  root;  2,  tract  cells  whose  axons  pass  into  the 
white  matter  of  the  anterior  and  lateral  columns;  3,  commissural  cells  whose  axons  pass 
chiefly  through  the  anterior  commissure  to  reach  the  anterior  columns  of  the  other  side; 
4,  Golgi  cells  (second  type),  who.se  axons  do  not  leave  the  gray  matter,  5,  tract  cells  whose 
axons  pass  into  the  white  matter  of  the  posterior  column.  Left  side:  1,  Entering  fibers  of 
the  posterior  root,  ending,  from  within  outward,  as  follows:  Clarke's  column,  posterior 
horn  of  opposite  side,  anterior  horn  same  side  (reflex  arc),  lateral  horn  of  same  side,  pos- 
terior horn  of  same  side ;  2,  collaterals  from  fibers  in  the  anterior  and  lateral  columns ;  3, 
collaterals  of  descending  pyramidal  fibers  ending  around  motor  cells  in  anterior  horn. 


axon  divides  into  a  number  of  small  branches  like  those  of  a 
dendrite.  The  axons  of  these  cells,  therefore,  do  not  become 
medullated  nerve  fibers;  they  take  no  part  in  the  formation  of 
the  spinal  roots  or  the  tracts  of  white  matter  in  the  cord,  but 
terminate  diffusely  within  the  gray  matter  itself.  (4)  The  pos- 
terior root  cells  lying  toward  the  base  of  the  anterior  horns.  These 
cells  have  been  demonstrated  in  some  of  the  lower  vertebrates 
(petromyzon — chick  embryo),  but  their  existence  in  the  mammal 
is  still  a  question  in  some  doubt;  their  axons  pass  out  from  the 
cord  by  the  posterior  root  and  they  form  the  anatomical  evidence 


156        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

for  the  view  that  the  posterior  roots  may  contain  some  efferent  fibers. 
Some  of  the  groups  of  tract  cells  have  been  given  special  names, — 
such,  for  instance,  as  Clarke's  column  (columna  vesicularis).  This 
group  of  cells  lies  at  the  inner  angle  of  the  posterior  horn  of  gray 
matter  (5,  Fig.  71),  and  forms  a  column  usually  described  as 
extending  from  the  middle  lumbar  to  the  upper  dorsal  region. 
The  axons  from  these  cells  pass  to  the  dorsal  margin  of  the  lateral 
columns  on  the  same  side  to  constitute  an  ascending  tract  of  fibers 
knwn  as  the  tract  of  Flechsig,  or  the  dorsal  or  direct  cerebellar  tract. 
The  Gross  Relations  of  the  Gray  and  White  Matter  in  the 
Cord. — Cross-sections  of  the  cord  at  clijfferent  levels  show  that 
the  relative  amounts  of  gray  and  white  matter  differ  considerably 
at  different  levels,  so  that  it  is  quite  possible  to  recognize  easily 
from  what  region  any  given  section  is  taken.  At  the  cervical  and 
the  lumbar  enlargements  the  amounts  of  both  gray  and  white 
matter — that  is,  the  total  cross-area  of  the  cord — show  a  sudden. 


-White  mother.  -Gray  matter.  Entire  section. 


lOO 
80 
60 
40 
20 


Xomposile  curves  based  an  4  Cases 


U  JUKYI  nuiHf] 


ioqJu  m  lY  Y  u  HiYin  I  nmisY    MYnmiix    x    xixiii 


Fig.  69. — Curves  to  show  the  relative  areas  of  the  gray  and  white  matter  of  the  spinal 
cord  at  different  levels. — (Donaldson  and  Davis.)  The  Roman  numerals  along  the  abscissa, 
represent  the  origin  of  the  different  spinal  nerves. 

increase  owing  to  the  larger  number  of  fibers  arising  at  these  levels. 
The  white  matter,  and  therefore  the  total  cross-area,  shows  also 
a  constant  increase  from  below  upward,  due  to  the  fact  that  in 
the  upper  regions  many  fibers  exist  that  have  come  into  the  cord 
at  a  lower  level  or  from  the  brain,  those  from  the  latter  region  being 
gradually  distributed  to  the  spinal  nerves  as  we  proceed  downward. 
In  the  accompanying  figure  a  curve  is  presented  showing  the  cross- 
area  of  the  cord  and  the  relative  amounts  of  gray  and  white  matter 
at  each  segment. 

Tracts  in  the  White  Matter  of  the  Cord,  Methods  of  Deter- 
mining.— -The  separation  of  the  medullated  fibers  of  the  cord 
into  distinct  tracts  of  fibers  possessing  different  functions  has 
been  accomplished  in  part  by  the  combined  results  of  investiga- 
tions in  anatomy,  physiology,  and  pathology.  The  two  methods 
that  have  been  employed  most  frequently  and  to  the  best  advan- 
tage are  the  method  of  secondary  degeneration  (Wallerian  degen- 


SPINAL    CORD    AS    A    PATH    OF    CONDUCTION.  157 

eration)  and  the  method  of  myehnization.  The  method  of  second- 
ary degeneration  depends  upon  the  fact  that,  when  a  fiber  is  cut 
off  from  its  cell  of  origin,  the  peripheral  end  degenerates  in  a  few 
days.  If,  therefore,  a  lesion,  experimental  or  pathological,  is  made 
in  the  cord  at  any  level  those  fibers  that  are  affected  undergo 
degeneration:  those  with  their  cells  below  the  lesion  degenerate  up- 
ward, and  those  with  their  cells  above  the  lesion  degenerate  down- 
ward. According  to  the  law  of  polarity  of  conduction  in  the  neuron 
a  descending  degeneration  in  the  cord  indicates  motor  or  efferent 
paths  as  regards  the  brain,  and  ascending  degeneration  indicates 
sensory  or  afferent  paths.  It  is  obvious  that  localized  lesions  can 
be  used  in  this  way  to  trace  definite  groups  of  fibers  through  the  cord. 
If,  for  instance,  one  exposes  and  cuts  the  posterior  roots  in  one  or 
more  of  the  lumbar  nerves  the  portions  of  the  fibers  entering  the 
cord  will  degenerate,  and  the  path  of  some  of  these  fibers  may  be 
traced  in  this  way  upward  to  the  medulla.  The  degenerated  fibers 
may  be  revealed  histologically  by  the  staining  methods  of  Weigert 
or  of  Marchi.  The  latter  method  (preservation  in  Miiller's  fluid, 
staining  in  osmic  acid  and  Miiller's  fluid)  has  proved  to  be  espe- 
cially useful;  the  degenerated  fibers  during  a  certain  period  give 
a  black  color  with  this  liquid,  owing  probably  to  the  splitting  up 
of  the  lecithin  in  the  myelin  and  the  liberation  of  the  fat  from  its 
combination  with  the  other  portions  of  the  molecule.*  The  mye- 
hnization method  was  introduced  by  Flechsig.  It  depends  upon 
the  fact  that  in  the  embryo  the  nerve  fibers  as  first  formed  have 
no  myelin  sheath,  and  that  this  easily  detected  structure  is  in  the 
central  nervous  system  assumed  at  about  the  same  time  by  those 
bundles  or  tracts  of  fibers  that  have  a  common  course  and  func- 
tion. By  this  means  the  origin  and  termination  of  certain  tracts 
may  be  worked  out  in  the  embryo  or  shortly  after  birth.  The 
well-known  system  of  pyramidal  fibers,  for  instance,  is  clearly 
differentiated  in  the  embryo  late  in  intra-uterine  life  or  at  birth, 
owing  to  the  fact  that  the  fibers  composing  it  have  not  at  that 
time  acquired  their  myelin  sheaths.  Flechsig  assumes  that  the 
development  of  the  myelin  marks  the  completed  structure  of  the 
nerve  fiber  and  indicates,  therefore,  the  time  of  its  entrance  into 
full  functional  activity. 

General  Classification  of  the  Tracts. — The  tracts  that  have 
been  worked  out  in  the  white  matter  of  the  cord  have  been  classified 
in  several  ways.  We  have,  in  the  first  place,  the  division  into  as- 
cending and  descending  tracts.  This  division  rests  upon  the  fact 
that  the  axon  conducts  its  impulses  away  from  the  cell  of  origin,  and 
consequently  those  neurons  whose  axons  extend  upward  toward  the 

*  See  Halliburton,  "The  Chemical  Side  of  Nervous  Activity,"  London, 
1901 ;    "  Croonian  Lectures." 


158        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

higher  parts  of  the  cord  or  brain  are  designated  as  ascending,  since 
normally  the  impulses  conducted  by  them  take  this  direction.  They 
constitute  the  afferent  or  sensory  paths,  and  in  case  of  injury  to  the 
fiber  or  cell  the  secondary  degeneration  also  extends  upward.  The 
reverse,  of  course,  holds  true  for  the  descending  or  motor  paths. 
The  tracts  may  be  divided  also  into  long  and  short  (or  segmental) 
tracts.  The  latter  group  comprises  those  tracts  or  fibers  which 
have  a  short  course  only  in  the  white  matter,  extending  over  a  dis- 
tance of  one  or  more  spinal  segments.  Histologically  the  fibers  of 
these  tracts  take  their  origin  from  the  tract  cells  in  the  gray  matter 
of  the  cord  and  after  nmning  in  the  white  matter  for  a  distance  of 
one  or  more  segments  they  again  enter  the  gray  matter  to  terminate 
around  the  dendritic  processes  of  another  neuron.  These  short 
tracts  may  be  ascending  or  descending,  and  the  impulses  that  they 
conduct  are  conveyed  up  or  down  the  cord  by  a  series  of  neurons, 
each  of  whose  axons  runs  only  a  short  distance  in  the  white  matter, 
and  then  conveys  its  impulse  to  another  neuron  whose  axon  in  turn 
extends  for  a  segment  or  two  in  the  white  matter,  and  so  on. 
These  tracts  are  sometimes  described  as  association  or  short  associa- 
tion tracts,  because  they  form  the  mechanism  by  which  the  activi- 
ties of  different  segments  of  the  cord  are  brought  into  association. 
This  method  of  conduction  by  segmental  relays  involving  the  par- 
ticipation of  a  series  of  neurons  may  be  regarded  as  the  primitive 
method.  It  indicates  the  original  structure  of  the  cord  as  a  series 
of  segments,  each  more  or  less  independent  physiologically.  The 
short  tracts  in  the  mammalian  cord  lie  close  to  the  gray  matter, 
forming  the  bulk  of  what  is  known  as  the  ground  bundles.  The 
long  tracts,  on  the  contrary,  are  composed  of  those  fibers,  as- 
cending or  descending,  which  nm  a  long  distance,  and,  in  fact, 
extend  from  the  cord  to  some  part  of  the  brain.  It  is  known, 
however,  that,  although  the  tracts  as  tracts  extend  from  brain 
to  cord,  many  of  the  constituent  fibers  of  these  tracts  may  begin 
and  end  in  the  cord  or  in  the  brain,  as  the  case  may  be.  Some 
of  the  fibers  of  the  long  tracts  are,  therefore,  so  far  as  the  cord  is 
concerned,  simply  long  association  tracts  which  connect  different 
regions — e.  g.,  cervical  and  lumbar — of  the  cord  by  a  single 
neuron,  as  the  short  association  tracts  connect  different  seg- 
ments of  the  same  region.  It  is  said  that  in  these  long  tracts 
those  fibers  that  have  the  shortest  course  lie  to  the  inside — that 
is,  nearest  to  the  gray  matter.*  From  the  results  of  comparative 
studies  of  the  different  vertebrates  we  may  conclude  that  the  long 
tracts  are  a  relatively  late  development  in  their  phylogenetic  his- 
tory, and  that  in  the  most  highly  developed  animals,  man  and  the 

*  Sherrington  and  Laslett,  "Journal  of    Physiology,"  29,  188,  1903;  and 
Sherrington,  ibid.,  14,  255. 


SPINAL    CORD    AS    A    PATH    OF    CONDUCTION. 


159 


anthropoid  apes,  these  long  tracts  are  more  conspicuous  and  form 
a  larger  percentage  of  the  total  area  of  the  cord.  A  physiological 
corollary  of  this  conclusion  should  be  that  in  man  the  independent 
activity  of  the  cord  is  less  marked  than  in  the  lower  vertebrates, 
and  this  deduction  is  borne  out  by  facts  (see  p.  138). 

Specific  Designation  of  the  Long  Spinal  Tracts. — The  tracts 
that  are  most  satisfactorily  determined  for  the  human  spinal  cord 
are  indicated  schematically  in  Fig.  70. 

They  are  named  as  follows:  In  the  posterior  column, 

1.  The  tract  or  column  of  Goll — fasciculus  gracilis. 

2.  The  tract  or  column  of  Burdach — fasciculus  cuneatus. 


Fig.  70. — Schema  of  the  tracts  in  the  spinal  cord  (Kolliker)  :  g,  Tract  of  Goll;  b,  tract 
of  Burdach;  pc,  crossed  pyramidal  tract;  pd,  direct  pyramidal  tract;  /,  tract  of  Flechsig; 
gr,  tract  of  Gowers. 


In  the  lateral  column, 

1.  The   crossed   pyramidal   tract,   also   known  as   the   lateral 
pyramidal  tract  or  the  fasciculus  cerebrospinalis  lateralis. 

2.  Flechsig's  tract,  known  also  as  the  direct  cerebellar  tract, 
the  dorsal  cerebellar  tract,  or  the  fasciculus  cerebellospinalis. 

3.  Gowers's  tract,  known  also  as  the  ventral  cerebellar  tract 
or  the  fasciculus  anterolateralis  superficialis. 

4.  The  anterolateral  ground  bundle,  made  up  chiefly  of  short 
association  fibers. 

In  the  anterior  columns, 

1.  The  direct  pyramidal  tract,  known  also  as  the  anterior  pyram- 
idal tract  or  the  fasciculus  cerebrospinalis  anterior. 


160 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 


Of  these  tracts,  those  of  Burdach  and  GoH,  Flechsig  and  Gowers, 
represent  ascending  or  sensory  paths,  while  the  direct  and  the 
crossed  pyramidal  tracts  form  a  related  descending  or  motor  path. 
It  will  be  convenient  to  describe  first  the  connections  and  physio- 
logical significance  of  these  tracts  and  then  refer  to  the  newer  work 
concerning  less  definitely  established  ascending  and  descending 
paths. 

The  Termination  in  the  Cord  of  the  Fibers  of  the  Posterior 

Root. — ^AU    sensory    fibers 
J    1-  from   the  limbs  and  trunk 

enter  the  cord  through  the 
posterior  roots.  Inasmuch 
as  these  roots  are  superfi- 
cially connected  with  the 
posterior  columns,  the  older 
observers  naturally  sup- 
posed that  these  columns 
form  the  pathway  for 
sensory  impulses  in  the 
cord.  That  this  supposi- 
tion is  not  entirel}^  cor- 
rect was  proved  by  experi- 
mental physiology.  Section 
of  the  posterior  columns 
causes  little  or  no  obvious 
loss  of  sensations  in  the 
parts  below  the  lesion. 
Histological  investigation 
has  since  shown  that  only 
a  portion  of  the  fibers  en- 
tering through  the  posterior 
root  continues  up  the  cord  in 
the  posterior  column;  some 
and  indeed  a  large  propor- 
tion of  the  whole  number 
enter  into  the  gray  matter 
and  end  around  tract  cells, 
whence  the  path  is  con- 
tinued upward  by  the  axons  of  these  latter  cells  in  the  lateral  or 
anterolateral  columns.  The  several  ways  in  which  the  posterior 
root  fibers  may  end  in  the  cord  are  indicated  in  Fig.  71. 

The  posterior  roots  contain  fibers  of  different  diameters  and 
those  of  smallest  size  (1)  are  found  collected  into  an  area  known 
as  the  zone  of  Lissauer,  lying  between  the  periphery  of  the  cord 
and  the  tip  of  the   posterior  horn.     These  fibers  enter  the   gray 


Fig.  71. — Schema  to  show  the  terminations 
of  the  entering  fibers  of  the  posterior  root:  1, 
Fibers  entering  zone  of  Lissauer  and  terminating 
in  posterior  horn ;  2,  fiber  terminating  around  a 
tract  cell  whose  axon  passes  into  white  column  of 
same  side;  3,  fiber  terminating  around  a  tract  cell 
whose  axon  passes  to  opposite  side  (commissural 
cell) ;  4,  fiber  terminating  around  motor  cell  of 
anterior  horn  (reflex  arc) ;  5,  fiber  terminating 
in  tract  cell  of  column  of  Clarke;  6,  fiber  (exog- 
enous) passing  upward  in  posterior  column  to 
terminate  in  the  medulla  oblongata. 


SPINAL    CORD    AS    A    PATH    OF    CONDUCTION.  161 

matter  chiefly  in  the  posterior  horn  of  the  same  side  and  end  around 
tract  cells.  The  larger  fibers  of  the  root  lying  to  the  median  side 
fall  into  two  groups:  Those  lying  laterally  (2,  3, 4)  enter  the  gray 
matter  of  the  posterior  horn  and  end  in  tract  cells  (2)  whose  axons 
are  distributed  to  the  same  side  of  the  cord,  or  in  tract  cells  whose 
axons  (3)  pass  to  the  other  side  through  the  anterior  white  com- 
missure, or  in  the  motor  cells  of  the  anterior  horn,  thus  making  a 
typical  reflex  arc.  Some  of  the  fibers  of  this  group  may  also  pass 
through  the  posterior  gray  commissure,  to  end  in  the  gray  matter 
of  the  opposite  side.  The  larger  fibers  lying  nearest  to  the  median 
line  enter  the  column  of  Burdach  and  run  forward  in  the  cord, 
some  of  them  (6)  continuing  upward  to  the  medulla,  and  some  of 
them  (5),  after  a  shorter  course,  turning  into  the  gray  matter  to  end 
in  the  cells  of  the  column  of  Clarke.  The  axons  of  the  cells  in  the 
column  of  Clarke  in  turn  pass  out  of  the  gray  matter  to  constitute 
the  ascending  path  in  the  lateral  column  known  as  the  dorsal  cere- 
bellar (Flechsig's)  tract. 

This  general  outline  of  the  mode-  of  ending  in  the  cord  of  the 
fibers  of  the  posterior  root  is  complicated  further  by  the  fact  that 
these  fibers  are  supposed  to  give  off  collaterals  after  entering  the  cord. 
The  course  of  the  typical  fiber  in  the  posterior  root  is  represented 
in  Fig.  62.  According  to  this  diagram,  the  root  fiber  after  entering 
the  cord  makes  a  Y  or  T  division,  one  branch  passing  downward 
or  posteriorly  for  a  short  distance,  the  other,  longer  division  passing 
upward  or  anteriorly.  Each  of  these  main  stems  may  give  off  one 
or  more  lateral  branches,  sensory  collaterals.  A  main  stem,  there- 
fore, which  runs  upward  in  the  column  of  Burdach  (6)  to  terminate 
in  the  medulla  oblongata  may  give  off  collaterals  at  various  levels 
which  terminate  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord,  either  around 
tract  cells  or  around  the  anterior  root  cells,  forming  in  the  latter 
case  a  simple  reflex  arc.  The  existence  of  collaterals  upon  the  root 
fibers  within  the  cord  has  been  demonstrated  in  the  human  em- 
bryo, but  we  have  little  exact  information  concerning  their  numeri- 
cal value  in  the  adult.  The  schema  given  in  Fig.  71  must  therefore 
be  accepted  as  an  entirely  diagrammatic  representation  of  the  chief 
possibilities  of  the  mode  of  ending  of  the  fibers  of  the  posterior  root 
by  way  of  their  collaterals  as  well  as  by  way  of  the  main  stems. 

Ascending  (Afferent  or  Sensory)  Paths  in  the  Posterior 
Columns. — The  posterior  columns  are  composed  partly  of  fibers 
derived  directly  from  the  posterior  roots  (6  in  schema)  and  arising, 
therefore,  from  the  cells  in  the  posterior  root  ganglia,  and  partly 
from  fibers  that  arise  from  tract  cells  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord 
itself.  It  is  convenient  to  speak  of  the  former  group  as  exog- 
enous fibers,  using  this  term  to  designate  nerve  fibers  which 
arise  from  cells  placed  outside  the  cord;  and  the  latter  group  as 
11 


162 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


endogenous  fibers — that 

4^-^  Cervical 


7^'^Dorsal 


Z'^J-Liunbar 


Fig.  72. — Diagrams  to 
show  course  of  upward  de- 
generation of  fibers  of  poste- 
rior columns  after  section  of 
a  number  of  posterior  roots 
of  the  nerves  forming  the 
lumbosacral  plexus. — (Mott.) 
It  will  be  noted  that  in  the 
cervical  regions  the  degener- 
ated area  is  confined  to  the 
column  of  GoU. 


is,  fibers  that  have  their  cells  of  origin  in 
the  gray  matter  of  the  cord.  If  we  omit 
a  consideration  of  their  collaterals  the 
course  of  the  exogenous  fibers  is  easily 
understood.  They  come  into  the  cord  at 
every  posterior  root,  enter  into  the  col- 
umn of  Burdach,  and  pass  upward.  The 
fibers  of  this  kind  that  enter  at  the  lower 
regions,  sacral  and  lumbar,  are,  however, 
gradually  pushed  toward  the  median  line 
by  the  exogenous  fibers  entering  at  higher 
levels,  so  that  in  the  upper  thoracic  or 
cervical  regions  the  columns  of  Goll  are 
composed  mainly  of  exogenous  fibers  that 
have  entered  the  cord  in  the  lumbar  or 
sacral  region.  These  fibers  continue  up- 
ward to  end  in  two  groups  of  cells  that 
lie  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  medulla 
oblongata  and  are  known,  respectively, 
as  the  nucleus  of  the  fasciculus  gracilis  (or 
nucleus  of  Goll)  and  the  nucleus  of  the 
fasciculus  cuneatus  (or  nucleus  of  Bur- 
dach). Their  path  forward  from  the 
medulla  is  continued  by  new  neurons 
arising  in  these  nuclei,  and  will  be  de- 
scribed later.  The  course  of  these  fibers 
in  the  cord  may  be  shown  beautifully 
by  the  method  of  secondary  degeneration. 
If  one  or  more  of  the  posterior  roots  of 
the  lumbar  spinal  nerves  are  cut,  or 
better  still  if  the  posterior  columns  are 
severed  in  this  region,  the  degeneration 
will  affect  the  exogenous  fibers  through- 
out their  course  to  the  medulla,  and  it 
will  be  seen  that  in  the  cervical  region  the 
degenerated  fibers  are  grouped  in  the 
area  of  the  column  of  Goll  (see  Fig.  72). 
The  endogenous  fibers,  so  far  as  they  are 
ascending,  represent  afferent  paths  in 
which  two  or  more  neurons  are  con- 
cerned. The  posterior  root  fibers  con- 
cerned in  these  paths  end  in  the  gray 
matter  of  the  cord  and  thence  the  con- 
duction is  continued  by  one  or  more 
tract  cells.     The  conduction  by  this  set 


SPINAL   CORD   AS   A    PATH    OF    CONDUCTION.  163 

of  fibers  may  be  on  the  same  side  of  the  cord  as  that  on  which  the 
root  fibers  entered,  or  it  may  be  crossed,  or  using  a  convenient 
terminology  it  may  be  homolateral  or  contralateral.  The  physio- 
logical value  of  the  ascending  fibers  in  the  posterior  columns  has  been 
investigated  by  a  large  number  of  observers.  The  physiologists 
have  employed  the  direct  method  of  cutting  the  columns  in  the 
thoracic  or  lumbar  region  and  observing  the  effect  upon  the  sensa- 
tions of  the  parts  below  the  lesion.  The  positive  results  of  these 
experiments  have  been  difficult  to  interpret.  Most  of  the  older 
observers  found  that  there  was  no  detectable  change  in  the  sensa- 
tions of  the  parts  below,  but  they  paid  attention  only  to  cutaneous 
sensations,  and  indeed  chiefly  to  the  sense  of  pain.  Later  observers* 
have  differed  also  in  their  description  of  the  effects  of  this  operation; 
but  most  of  them  state  that  the  animal  shows  an  awkwardness 
or  lack  of  skill  in  the  movements  of  the  hind  limbs,  especially  in 
the  finer  movements,  and  this  effect  is  interpreted  to  mean  that 
there  is  some  loss  of  muscle  sense.  This  conclusion  is  strength- 
ened by  the  results  of  pathological  anatomy.  In  the  disease  known 
as  tabes  dorsalis  the  posterior  columns  of  the  cord  in  the  lumbar 
region  are  affected  and  the  striking  symptom  of  this  condition  is 
an  interference  with  the  power  of  co-ordinating  properly  the  move- 
ments of  the  lower  limbs,  particularly  in  the  act  of  maintaining 
body  equifibrium  in  standing  and  walking, — a  condition  known 
as  locomotor  ataxia.  So  far  as  the  cutaneous  sensations  are  con- 
cerned,— that  is,  the  sensations  of  touch  (pressure),  pain,  and  tem- 
perature,— all  observers  agree  that  the  two  latter  are  not  affected, 
while  regarding  touch  opinions  haye  differed  radically.  Schiff 
contended  that  touch  sensations  are  detectable  as  long  as  these 
columns  are  intact  and  are  seriously  interfered  with  when  they  are 
sectioned;  but  most  of  the  results,  pathological  and  experimental, 
indicate  that  when  the  continuity  of  these  fibers  is  destroyed  the 
sense  of  touch  is  still  present  in  the  parts  supplied  by  the  cord  below 
the  lesion.  To  summarize,  therefore,  we  may  say  that  the  evidence 
at  hand  proves  that  the  ascending  fibers  of  the  posterior  column 
do  not  convey  impulses  of  pain  or  temperature,  that  if  they  convey 
any  touch  (pressure)  impulses  they  certainly  do  not  form  the  only 
path  of  conduction  for  this  sense,  and  that  most  probably  their 
chief  function  is  the  conduction  of  impulses  of  muscle  sense, — 
that  is,  they  consist  of  sensory  fibers  from  the  voluntary  muscles. 
The  muscle  sensations  thus  aroused  in  the  higher  parts  of  the 
brain  are  necessary  to  the  proper  co-ordination  of  the  movements 
of  the  muscles.  Injury  to  these  columns,  therefore,  while  it  does 
not  cause  paralysis,  is  followed  by  disorderly — that  is,  ataxic — 

*  Borchert,   "Archiv  f.   Physiologie,"   1902,  389.     See  also  Sherrington, 
"Journal  of  Physiology,"  14,  255,  1893. 


164 


PHYSIOLOGY    OP   CENTRAL   NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 


movements.  On  the  histological  side  it  has  been  shown,  as  stated 
above,  that  the  fibers,  particularly  the  exogenous  fibers,  end  in 
nuclei  of  the  medulla  and  thence  are  continued  forward  by  the  great 
sensory  tract  known  as  the  "  fillet,"  to  end  eventually  in  that  part 
of  the  cortex  of  the  cerebrum  designated  as  the  area  of  the  body 
senses. 

Ascending  (Afferent  or  Sensory)  Paths  in  the  Lateral 
Columns. — The  two  best  known  ascending  tracts  in  these  columns 
are  those  of  Flechsig  and  of  Gowers.  The  Flechsig  bundle  or  dor- 
sal cerebellar  tract  takes  its  origin  in  the  upper  lumbar  region, 
and  is  composed  of  axons  connected  with  the  tract  cells  of  Clarke's 
column.  The  impulses  which  its  fibers  convey  are  brought  into 
the  cord  through  those  fibers  of  the  posterior  root  that  end  around 
the  cells  of  Clarke's  column.  A  number  of  the  fibers  in  this  col- 
umn end  doubtless  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  upper  regions  of  the 

cord,  but  most  of  them  con- 
tinue upward  on  the  same  side, 
enter  the  inferior  peduncle  of 
the  cerebellum,  and  terminate 
in  the  posterior  and  median 
portions  of  the  vermiform  lobe, 
mainly  on  the  same  side,  but 
partly  also  on  the  opposite 
side.  The  tract  of  Gowers, 
situated  ventrally  to  Flechsig's 
bundle  {gr,  Fig.  70),  may  ex- 
tend forward  into  the  anterior 
columns  along  the  periphery 
of  the  cord.  The  two  bundles 
may  be  more  or  less  intermin- 
gled at  the  points  of  contact. 
This  tract  begins  also  in  the 
upper  lumbar  region,  its  fibers  arising  from  tract  cells  on  the  same 
side  situated  in  the  anterior  horn  and  the  intermediate  portions  of 
the  gray  matter.  Many  of  the  fibers  in  this  tract  doubtless  termi- 
nate in  the  cord  itself,  since  the  bundle  does  not  increase  regularly  in 
size  as  it  passes  up  the  cord.  Most  of  the  bundle  continues  forward, 
however,  along  the  ventral  side  of  the  pons,  gradually  shifts  more 
to  the  dorsal  side,  and  at  the  level  of  the  superior  peduncles  of  the 
cerebellum  turns  backward,  for  the  most  part  at  least,  and  passes 
to  the  cerebellum  by  way  of  the  superior  peduncles  and  the  valve  of 
Vieussens,  to  end  in  the  vermiform  lobe  chiefly  on  the  same  side, 
but  to  some  extent  on  the  opposite  side*  (Fig.  73).     Regarding 

*  For  the  literature  upon  these  tracts  see  Van  Gehuchten,  "Le  Nevraxe," 
3,  157,  1901. 


'Wefve 


Fig.  73. — To  show  the  course  of  the  fibers 
of  the  cerebellar  tracts  of  the  cord  (Mott) : 
v.a.c,  ventral  tract  (Gowers);  d.a.c,  dor- 
sal tract  (Flechsig);  s.v.,  superior  vermis; 
P.C.Q.,  posterior  corpora  quadrigemina. 


SPINAL    CORD   AS   A   PATH    OF   CONDUCTION.  165 

the  physiology  of  Ihese  two  tracts  there  is  Uttle  experimental 
and  less  clinical  evidence.  Some  observers  have  cut  the  tract  of 
Flechsig  in  animals,  but  with  no  very  obvious  effect  except  again 
a  slight  degree  of  ataxia  in  the  movements  below  the  lesion.  This 
result  together  with  the  fact  that  the  bundle  ends  in  the  cerebellum 
gives  reason  for  believing  that  the  fibers  mediate  muscular  sen- 
sibility. As  we  shall  see,  much  evidence  of  every  kind  connects 
the  cerebellum  with  the  co-ordination  of  the  muscles  of  the  body 
in  the  complex  movements  of  standing  and  locomotion.  This 
power  of  co-ordination  in  turn  depends  upon  the  sensory  impulses 
from  the  muscles,  and  since  the  fibers  of  the  tract  of  Flechsig  end 
in  the  cerebellum,  and  since  experimental  lesion  of  them  gives  no 
loss  of  cutaneous  sensibility  and  some  degree  of  ataxia,  it  seems 
justifiable  to  conclude  that  these  fibers  are  physiologically  muscle- 
sense  fibers.  The  tract  of  Gowers  has  not  been  the  subject  of  much 
experimental  study  from  the  physiological  side.  Clinically  the  tract 
may  be  involved  in  pathological  or  traumatic  lesions  of  the  lateral 
columns,  and  Gowers*  himself  gives  a  history  of  some  such  cases 
which  lead  him  to  believe  that  this  tract  constitutes  a  pathway  for 
pain  impulses.  Little  confidence,  however,  can  be  placed  in  this 
conclusion,  since  the  lesions  in  question  were  not  confined  to  the 
column  of  Gowers,  but  involved  neighboring  regions  and  the  gray 
matter.  The  only  positive  indication  that  we  have  concerning 
the  physiological  value  of  these  fibers  is  given  by  their  histology  in 
the  fact  that  they  end  in  the  cerebellum.  This  fact  would  connect 
them  with  the  co-ordination  of  the  muscles  in  movements  of  equili- 
bration, and  would  therefore  make  them  fibers  of  muscle  sense. 
It  would  seem,  therefore,  that  all  the  long  ascending  tracts  in  the 
posterior  and  lateral  columns  of  the  cord  are  made  up  of  fibers  of 
muscle  sense.  The  immense  importance  of  muscular  sensibility  in 
the  maintenance  of  life  and  in  defense  against  enemies  may  explain, 
upon  the  doctrine  of  the  struggle  for  existence,  why  the  long  paths 
should  have  been  developed  first  in  connection  with  this  sense. 

The  Spinal  Paths  for  the  Cutaneous  Senses  (Touch,  Pain, 
and  Temperature). — From  the  facts  stated  in  the  last  paragraph 
it  follows  that  the  spinal  paths  for  touch,  pain,  and  temperature 
must  be  along  the  short  association  tracts  of  the  ground  bundles 
of  the  lateral  and  anterior  columns.  There  is  evidence  from  the 
clinical  side  that  the  paths  of  conduction  for  these  senses  are  sep- 
arate. In  the  pathological  condition  known  as  syringomyelia  cavi- 
ties are  formed  in  the  cord  affecting  chiefly  the  central  gray  matter 
and  the  contiguous  portions  of  the  white.  In  these  cases  a  frequent 
symptom  is  what  is  known  as  the  dissociation  of  sensations;  the 
patient  loses,  in  certain  regions,  the  sensations  of  pain  and  tempera- 
*  Gowers,  "Lancet,"  1886. 


166        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

ture  (analgesia  and  thermo-anesthesia) ,  but  preserves  that  of 
pressure  (touch).  Facts  of  this  kind  indicate  that  the  paths  of 
conduction  for  touch  are  separate  from  those  for  pain  and  tempera- 
ture, but  Httle  that  is  positive  is  known  regarding  the  exact  location 
of  these  paths.  The  fibers  of  pain  and  temperature  probably  end 
in  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord  (posterior  horn)  soon  after  their 
entrance,  and  the  path  is  continued  upward  by  tract  cells  whose 
axons  enter  the  ground  bundles  in  the  lateral  or  anterolateral 
columns.  But  the  number  of  such  neurons  concerned  in  the  con- 
duction as  far  as  the  medulla  is  not  known.  Regarding  the  path 
for  the  touch  impulses  a  singular  amount  of  uncertainty  prevails. 
This  sense  is  not  lost  in  cases  of  syringomyelia  in  which  the  other 
cutaneous  senses  are  affected.  On  the  other  hand,  the  posterior 
columns,  as  we  have  seen,  may  be  completely  sectioned  in  lower 
animals  without  destroying  or,  indeed,  affecting  the  sense  of  touch, 
and  in  the  case  of  man  extensive  pathological  lesions  of  the  same  col- 
umns are  reported  in  which  the  sense  of  touch  was  not  lost.  Some 
authors,*  therefore,  have  been  led  to  believe  that  the  touch  im- 
pulses may  be  conveyed  up  the  cord  by  several  paths:  by  the 
long  association  fibers  of  the  posterior  columns  and  by  the  short 
association  fibers  of  the  lateral  columns.  Such  a  view  receives  no 
support  from  the  experimental  work  on  the  lower  mammals.  In. 
these  animals  the  evidence  tends  to  show  that  the  conduction  is  by 
way  of  the  lateral  or  anterolateral  columns,  by  means  of  tract  cells 
and  short  association  tracts.  The  fact  that  in  man  the  clinical  evi- 
dence seems  to  point  to  the  posterior  columns  as  a  possible  or  indeed 
probable  path  for  these  fibers  may  serve  to  exemplify  the  fact  that 
In  these  matters  the  various  mammalia  differ  more  or  less  according 
to  the  degree  of  their  development.  It  may  be  that  in  man  long 
paths  for  the  touch  fibers,  by  way  of  the  posterior  column,  have 
been  acquired  in  part. 

The  Homolateral  or  Contralateral  Conduction  of  the 
Cutaneous  Impulses. — Great  interest,  from  the  medical  side, 
has  been  shown  in  the  question  of  the  crossed  or  uncrossed  con- 
duction of  the  cutaneous  impulses  in  the  cord.  The  matter  is 
naturally  one  of  importance  in  diagnosis.  In  human  beings  it 
was  pointed  out  by  Brown-Sequardf  that  unilateral  lesions  of  the 
cord  are  followed  by  muscular  paralysis  below  on  the  same  side 
and  loss  of  cutaneous  sensibility  on  the  opposite  side.  This  syn- 
drome has  been  held  clinically  to  establish  the  diagnosis  of  a  uni- 
lateral lesion,  and  has  led  to  the  view  that,  while  the  conduction 
of  the  motor  impulses  is  homolateral,  that  of  the  sensory  impulses 
is  contralateral.     Experimental  work  on  lower  animals,  on  the  con- 

*  Oppenheim,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1899,  suppl.  volume,  1. 

t  Brown-Sequard,  "Journal  de  Physiologie,"  6,  124,  232,  581,  1863. 


SPINAL   CORD    AS   A    PATH    OF   CONDUCTION.  167 

trary,  has  not  supported  this  view.  While  results  in  this  direction 
have  varied,  as  would  be  expected  from  the  intrinsic  difficulties 
connected  with  the  interpretation  of  the  sensations  of  an  animal,  the 
general  outcome  has  been  to  show  that  the  sensory  conduction  is 
bilateral,  but  mainly  on  the  same  side.  That  is,  if  the  cord  is 
cut  on  one  side  only  (hemisected)  in  the  thoracic  region,  the  sensi- 
bility of  the  parts  supplied  below  the  lesion  is  impaired  upon  the 
same  side,  but  not  completely  abolished,  showing  that  some 
crossing  has  taken  place.*  It  is  possible  that  this  crossing  is  more 
complete  in  man  than  in  the  lower  animals,  although  later  studies 
in  man  of  unilateral  lesions  of  the  cord  (Brown-Sequard  paralysis) 
indicate  that  the  contralateral  loss  of  cutaneous  sensibility  affects 
chiefly  the  senses  of  pain  and  temperature;  the  loss  of  touch  is  not 
complete,  and  muscular  sensibility  is  affected  only  on  the  same 
side.  On  the  whole,  it  would  seem  that  the  crossing  of  the  sensory 
fibers  in  the  cord  is  only  partial,  and  is  more  extensive  in  man 
than  in  the  lower  animals.  This  partial  crossing  is  probably  com- 
pleted in  the  brain,  especially  in  the  great  sensory  decussation  in 
the  medulla. 

The  Descending  (Efferent  or  Motor)  Paths  in  the  Antero- 
lateral Column. — The  main  descending  path  in  the  cord  is  the 
pyramidal  system  of  fibers.  In  man,  as  shown  in  Fig.  70,  there 
are  two  fasciculi  belonging  to  this  system, — the  direct  and  the 
crossed  pyramidal  tracts.  Both  tracts  arise  from  the  anterior 
pyramids  on  the  ventral  face  of  the  medulla,  whence  the  name  of 
the  pyramidal  system.  At  the  junction  of  the  medulla  and  cord 
the  fibers  of  the  pyramids  decussate  in  part,  forming  a  conspicuous 
feature  of  the  internal  structure  at  this  point  known  as  the  pyram- 
idal decussation.  According  to  the  general  schema  of  this  decus- 
sation (see  Fig.  74),  the  larger  number  of  the  fibers  in  the  pyramid 
of  one  side  pass  over  to  form  the  crossed  pyramidal  tract  of  the 
other  side  of  the  cord  (4,  5) ,  while  a  smaller  part  (3)  continues  down 
on  the  same  side  to  form  the  direct  pyramidal  tract.  Eventually, 
however,  these  latter  fibers  also  cross  the  mid-line  in  the  anterior  white 
commissure,  not,  however,  all  at  once,  as  at  the  pyramidal  decussa- 
tion, but  some  at  the  level  of  each  spinal  nerve.  These  pyramidal 
fibers  have  their  origin  in  the  cortex  of  the  cerebral  hemispheres  in 
large  pyramidal  cells;  some  of  them  cross  themid-hne  before  reach- 
ing the  medulla  to  end  around  the  cells  of  origin  of  the  cranial 
nerves;  but  the  greater  number  continue  into  the  cord  and  after 
crossing  the  mid-line  in  the  pyramidal  decussation  or  in  the  anterior 
white  commissure  terminate  around  the  motor  cells  of  the  anterior 
horns,  which  give  rise  to  the  motor  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves. 
Both  tracts,  the  crossed  and  the  so-called  direct,  continue  through- 
*Mott,  "Brain,"  1895,  1. 


168 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


out  the  length  of  the  cord,  diminishing  in  area  by  the  way  as  some 
of  their  fibers  terminate  in  each  segment.  This  system  of  fibers 
is  supposed  to  represent  the  mechanism  for  effecting  voluntary 

movements,  and  according  to  the 
general  schema  the  voluntary  motor 
path  from  cerebrum  to  muscle  com- 
prises two  neurons, — the  pyramidal 
neuron  and  the  spinal  or  the  cranial 
neuron.  Moreover,  as  represented 
in  the  schema,  the  innervation  is 
crossed,  the  right  side  of  the  brain 
controlling  the  musculature  of  the 
left  side  of  the  body  and  vice  versa. 
As  we  shall  see,  however,  when  we 
come  to  study  the  motor  areas  of 
the  brain,  this  rule  has  important 
exceptions,  and  histologically  there 
is  proof  that  some  of  the  fibers  in 
each  pyramid  (2  in  Fig.  74)  con- 
tinue into  and  terminate  in  the  cord 
on  the  same  side.  The  pyramidal 
system  varies,  in  an  interesting  way, 
in  the  extent  of  its  development 
among  the  different  vertebrates. 
It  reaches  its  highest  development 
in  man  and  the  anthropoid  apes. 
In  the  other  mammalia  it  is  rela- 
tively less  important  and  the  direct 
tract  in  the  anterior  columns  is 
lacking  altogether.  In  the  birds 
what  represents  the  same  system 
is  found  in  the  anterior  columns 
(Sandmeyer),  while  in  the  frog  the 
system  does  not  exist  at  all. 

The  relative  importance  of  the 
system  in  the  different  mammalia 
is  indicated  in  the  accompanying  table  taken  from  Lenhossek,* 
in  which  the  area  of  the  pyramidal  system  is  given  in  percentage 
of  the  total  cross-area  of  the  cord: 


Fig. 


Schema    representing 


the  course  of  the  fibers  of  the  pyrana- 
idal  tract:  1,  Fibers  to  the  nuclei  of 
the  cranial  nerve;  2,  uncrossed  fibers 
to  the  lateral  pyramidal  tract ;  3,  fi- 
bers to  the  anterior  pyramidal  tract 
crossing  in  the  cord ;  4  and  5,  fibers 
that  cross  in  the  pyramidal  decussa- 
tion to  make  the  lateral  pyramidal 
tract  of  the  opposite  side. 


Mouse 1.14  per  cent. 

Guinea  pig 3.0 

Rabbit 5.3 

Cat 7.76 

Man 11.87 

*  Lenhossek,  "Bau  des  Nervensy stems,"  second  edition,  1895. 


SPINAL   CORD   AS   A    PATH    OF   CONDUCTION.  169 

Evidently,  therefore,  the  importance  of  the  pyramidal  system 
varies  in  different  animals,  and  it  is  necessary  to  bear  this  fact 
in  mind  in  applying  the  results  of  experiments  on  the  lower  animals 
to  man.  In  the  lowest  vertebrates  there  are  undoubtedly  motor 
paths  between  the  brain  and  cord  through  which  so-called  voluntary 
movements  are  effected,  but  these  are  probably  short  paths  in- 
volving a  number  of  neurons.  The  higher  the  position  of  the 
animal  in  the  phylogenetic  scale,  the  more  complete  is  the  develop- 
ment of  the  long  pyramidal  system;  but  even  in  the  higher  mam- 
mals it  is  probable  that  the  more  primitive  mode  of  motor  con- 
nection between  brain  and  cord  is  not  entirely  displaced  by  the 
evolution  of  the  pyramidal  system. 

Less  Weil-Known  Tracts  in  the  Cord, — In  addition  to  the 
tracts  just  described  there  are  a  number  of  others — mainly,  descend- 
ing tracts — concerning  which  our  anatomical  knowledge  is  less  com- 
plete, and  the  physiological  value  of  which  is  entirely  unknown  or 
at  best  is  a  matter  of  inference  from  the  anatomical  relations.* 

Descending  Tracts  in  the  Posterior  Column — Comma  Tract; 
Oval  Field.— In  the  posterior  columns  several  tracts  of  descending 
fibers  have  been  described.  The  comma  tract  of  Schultze,  s.,  Fig. 
75,  is  found  in  the  cervical  and  the  upper  thoracic  cord.  The 
bundle  lies  at  the  border-line  between  the  columns  of  Goll  and 
Burdach.  In  the  lower  regions  of  the  cord,  lumbar  and  sacral, 
similar  small  areas  of  descending  fibers  are  found — oval  field 
(Flechsig),  median  triangle  (Gombault  and  Philippe) — which  repre- 
sent possibly  different  systems.  It  is  probable  that  these  fibers 
belong  to  the  group  of  long  association  fibers  connecting  distant 
portions  of  the  cord.     Nothing  is  known  regarding  their  physiology. 

Descending  Tracts  in  the  Anterolateral  Column. — The  prepyram- 
idal  tract,  known  also  as  Monakow's  bundle,  the  fasciculus  inter- 
mediolateralis,  or  the  rubrospinal  tract,  is  a  conspicuous  bundle 
forming  a  wedge-shaped  or  triangular  area  in  the  lateral  columns 
(pp.,  Fig.  75)  between  the  crossed  pyramidal  tract  and  the  tract 
of  Gowers.  The  fibers  composing  this  bundle  are  descending  fibers 
that  take  their  origin  in  the  midbrain  in  the  cells  of  the  red  nucleus. 
Shortly  after  their  origin  they  cross  to  the  opposite  side,  and  passing 
through  the  pons  and  medulla  enter  the  spinal  cord  in  the  lateral 
columns,  in  which  they  may  be  detected  as  far  as  the  sacral  region. 
Its  fibers  terminate  around  cells  lying  in  the  posterior  part  of  the 
anterior  horn  of  gray  matter  whose  axons  in  turn  probably  emerge 
through  the  anterior  roots.  This  tract,  therefore,  constitutes  a 
crossed  motor  path  from  midbrain  to  the  anterior  roots,  and,  since 
the   red  nucleus  in  turn  is  connected  with  the  cerebrum,  it  may 

*  Collier  and  Buzzard,  "Brain."  1901,  177:  and  Fraser,  "Journal  of 
Physiology/'  28,  366,  1902. 


170 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    CENTRAL    NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 


represent  a  cortico-spinal  motor  path  in  addition  to  that  offered 
by  the  pyramidal  system. 

The  vestibulo-spinal  fibers,  v.s.,  he  anterior  to  the  preceding  tract 
in  the  anterolateral  ground  bundle;  they  may  extend  into  the 
anterior  column  as  far  as  the  direct  pyramidal  tract.  These  fibers 
originate  in  the  nucleus  of  Deiters  and  perhaps  in  the  vestibular 
nucleus  of  Bechterew  in  the  pons.  In  the  cord  the  fibers  end  around 
cells  in  the  anterior  horn.  Since  the  Deiters  nucleus  forms  a  termina- 
tion for  the  sensory  fibers  of  the  vestibular  branch  of  the  eighth 
cranial  nerve,  and  since  these  fibers  are  believed  to  give  us  a  sense 

of  the  position  of  the  body 
and  to  be  concerned  in  the 
reflex  adjustment  of  the 
muscles  in  the  movements 
to  maintain  equilibrium, 
their  connection  in  Deiters' s 
nucleus  with  a  spinal  motor 
path  becomes  very  signifi- 
cant as  furnishing  a  reflex 
arc  through  which  sensory 
impressions  from  the  vestib- 
ular apparatus  in  the  ear 
may  automatically  control 
the  musculature  of  the 
body.  The  ventral  longitu- 
dinal bundle  or  fasciculus 
sulcomarginalis  (s.m.,  Fig. 
75)  lies  along  the  border  of 
the  anterior  median  fissure. 
Its  fibers  are  said  to  origi- 
nate in  the  superior  colliculi 
of  the  corpora  quadrigemina 
and  to  terminate  around 
cells  in  the  anterior  horn, 
constituting,  therefore,  a 
second  motor  path  between  midbrain  and  cord.  The  anterior 
marginal  bundle,  a.m.,  lies  along  the  periphery  of  the  anterior 
columns,  and  is  supposed  to  consist  of  fibers  from  the  nucleus 
fastigii  of  the  cerebellum.  Helweg's  bundle  is  a  small,  triangular 
area  on  the  margin  of  the  cord  at  the  junction  of  the  anterior  and 
lateral  columns.  It  is  conspicuous  in  the  cervical  region,  and  is  said 
to  be  connected  with  the  olivary  body,  although  little  that  is  defi- 
nite is  known  of  its  origin  or  termination. 


a.TTi. 


Fig.  75. — Diagram  indicating  the  location 
of  the  less  well-known  tracts  of  the  cord:  s., 
Comma  tract  of  Schultze;  p.p.,  the  prepyram- 
idal  tract  (Monakow's  bundle) ;  v.s.,  region  in 
which  are  found  the  fibers  of  the  vestibulo- 
spinal tract;  h.,  Helweg's  bundle;  o.m.,  an- 
terior marginal  bundle;  s.m.,  ventral  longi- 
tudinal or  sulcomarginal  bundle;  p.  and  p.,  the 
direct  and  crossed  pyramidal  tracts;  /.  and  g., 
tracts  of  Flechsig  and  Gowers. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE  GENERAL  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  CEREBRUM 
AND  ITS  MOTOR  FUNCTIONS. 

From  the  time  of  Galen  in  the  second  century  of  the  Christian 
era  the  brain  has  been  recognized  as  the  organ  of  intelhgence  and 
conscious  sensations.  Galen  established  this  view  not  only  by 
anatomical  dissections,  confirming  the  older  work  of  the  Alexandrian 
school  (third  century  B.C.)  in  regard  to  the  origin  from  the  brain 
of  the  cranial  nerves,  but  also  by  numerous  vivisection  experiments 
upon  lower  animals.  All  modern  work  has  confirmed  this  belief 
and  has  tended  to  show  that  in  the  cerebral  hemispheres  and,  indeed, 
in  the  cortex  of  gray  matter  lies  the  seat  of  consciousness. 
It  is  perhaps  still  an  open  question  as  to  the  existence  of  a 
conscious  or  psychical  factor  in  the  activities  of  other  parts  of  the 
nervous  system,  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  highest  develop- 
ment of  psychical  activity  in  man  is  associated  with  the  cortical  mat- 
ter "of  the  cerebrum.  In  the  young  infant  the  dawn  of  its  mental 
powers  is  connected  with  and  dependent  on  the  development  of  the 
normal  cortical  structure,  while  in  extreme  age  the  failure  in  the 
mental  faculties  goes  hand  in  hand  with  an  atrophy  of  the  elements 
of  the  cortex.  If  this  cortex  were  removed  all  the  intelligence,  sen- 
sation, and  thought  that  we  recognize  as  characterizing  the  highest 
psychical  life  of  man  would  be  destroyed,  and  abnormalities  in  the 
structure  of  this  cortical  material  are  accepted  as  the  immediate 
causal  factor  of  those  perversions  in  reasoning  and  in  character 
which  are  exhibited  by  the  insane  or  the  degenerate.  The  cortical 
gray  matter,  therefore,  is  the  chief  organ  of  the  psychical  life,  the 
tissue  through  whose  activity  the  objective  changes  in  the  external 
world,  so  far  as  they  affect  our  sense  organs,  are  converted  into 
the  subjective  changes  of  consciousness.  The  nature  of  this  reac- 
tion constitutes  the  most  difficult  problem  of  physiology  and  psy- 
chology, a  problem  which  it  is  generally  believed  is  beyond  the 
possibility  of  a  satisfactory  scientific  explanation.  For  it  is  held 
that  the  methods  of  science  are  applicable  only  to  the  investiga- 
tion of  the  objective — that  is,  the  physical  and  chemical — changes 
within  the  nervous  matter,  while  the  psychical  reaction  is  of  a  nature 
that  cannot  be  approached  through  the  conceptions  or  methods 
of  physical  science.     In  other  words,  there  is  a  physicochemical 

171 


172        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

mechanism  in  the  brain  matter  which  is  capable  of  giving  us  a 
reaction  in  consciousness.  The  methods  of  physiology  are  adapted 
to  the  investigation  of  the  nature  of  this  mechanism,  but  the  reac- 
tion in  consciousness  deals  with  a  something  which  is  not  matter 
or  energy,  and  which,  therefore,  is  not  within  the  scope  of  physio- 
logical explanation.  In  what  follows,  therefore,  attention  is  called 
only  to  the  mechanical  side, — the  facts  that  have  been  discovered 
regarding  the  anatomical  structure  and  physical  and  chemical 
properties  of  the  nervous  mechanism. 

The  Histology  of  the  Cortex. — The  finer  structure  of  the 
different  regions  of  the  cortex  has  been  the  subject  of  much  investi- 
gation, but  in  this  connection  it  is  only  necessary  to  recall  the 
elementary  facts  so  far  as  they  are  useful  in  physiological  explana- 
tions. Leaving  aside  minute  differences  the  extent  of  which  has 
not  been  wholly  determined,  it  is  an  interesting  fact  that  the  cor- 
tex everywhere  has  a  similar  structure.  It  consists  of  four  or  five 
layers  more  or  less  clearly  distinguishable  (see  Fig.  76) : 

1.  The  molecular  layer,  lying  immediately  beneath  the  pia 
mater,  and  having  a  thickness  of  about  0.25  mm.  In  this  layer, 
in  addition  to  the  supporting  neuroglia,  there  are  found  a  number 
of  very  small  nerve  cells  of  several  types  lying  with  their  processes 
parallel  to  the  surface  of  the  brain.  The  axons  and  dendrites  of 
these  small  cells  terminate  within  the  layer,  so  that  they  take  no 
direct  part  in  the  formation  of  the  white  matter  of  the  brain,  but 
have,  so  to  speak,  a  distributive  or  associative  function.  In  this 
layer,  also,  end  many  of  the  dendrites  of  the  larger  nerve  cells  of 
the  deeper  layers  and  the  terminal  arborization  of  entering  nerve 
fibers  (axons)  from  other  regions.  It  must  be  conceived,  there- 
fore, as  containing  a  fine  feltwork  of  nerve  fibrils, — dendrites  and 
axons  or  their  collaterals, — and  as  a  region,  therefore,  in  which 
many  of  the  incoming  impulses  along  afferent  fibers  are,  so  to 
speak,  distributed  into  outgoing  ones.  On  histological  grounds 
Cajal  was  inchned  to  believe  that  this  layer  represents  the  location 
of  the  most  important  psychical  reactions. 

2.  The  layer  of  small  pyramidal  cells  of  about  the  same  thick- 
ness as  the  last.  This  layer  contains  a  number  of  small  nerve 
cells,  mostly  of  the  pyramidal  type,  with  the  apex  directed  toward 
the  external  surface.  The  dendrites  from  the  apical  process  termi- 
nate in  the  molecular  layer,  while  the  axon  arising  from  the  basal 
side  of  the  cell  passes  inwardly  to  constitute  one  of  the  nerve 
fibers  of  the  medullary  portion  of  the  cerebrum. 

3.  The  layer  of  large  pyramidal  cells.  This  layer,  much  thicker 
(1  mm.)  than  the  preceding,  is  not  sharply  differentiated  from  it. 
It  contains  some  relatively  large  pyramidal  cells,  particularly  in 


GENERAL  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  CEREBRUM. 


173 


the  Rolandic  area.  Their  form  and  con- 
nections are,  in  general,  the  same  as  those 
given  for  the  small  pyramidal  cells. 

4.  The  layer  of  fusiform  or  polymor- 
phic nerve  cells.  A  small  layer  of  cells 
whose  form  is  more  irregular  than  that  of 
the  pyramidal  cells,  but  whose  axons  also 
pass  into  the  medullary  portion  of  the 
cerebrum,  while  their  dendrites  stretch 
externally  into  the  layers  of  pyramidal 
cells.  In  this  layer  are  found  also  some 
cells  belonging  to  the  second  type  of 
Golgi  (Martinotti  cells).  The  axis  cyhn- 
der  processes  from  these  latter  cells,  in- 
stead of  becoming  medullated  fibers  of 
the  white  matter  of  the  cerebrum,  pass 
toward  the  external  surface,  to  end  in 
the  pyramidal  or  molecular  layer  in  a 
number  of  minute  branches. 

5.  The  medulla  of  the  cerebrum.  The 
white  matter  of  the  cerebrum  begins 
immediately  below  the  last-named  layer, 
and  consists  (1)  of  nerve  fibers  which 
originate  from  the  pyramidal  and  poly- 
morphic cells  immediately  exterior  to  it, 
and  which  carry  outgoing  impulses  from 
that  part  of  the  cortex,  and  (2)  of  fibers 
arising  elsewhere  in  the  cortex  or  in  the 
lower  portions  of  the  brain,  which  ter- 
minate in  the  cortex  and  carry  the 
incoming  impulses, — impulses  which  are 
afferent  as  regards  that  part  of  the  cor- 
tex. The  fibers  in  this  white  matter  may 
be  classified  under  three  heads:  First, 
the  projection  system  {A,  B,  C,  D,  and 
E  of  Fig.  77),  comprising  those  fibers, 
afferent  and  efferent,  which  connect  the 
cortex  with  underlying  parts  of  the  cen- 
tral nervous  system, — the  spinal  cord, 
medulla,  pons,  midbrain,  or  thalamus. 
This  great  projection  system  emerges,  for 
the  most  part,  through  the  internal  cap- 
sule and  the  crura  of  the  cerebrum. 
Certain  parts  of  the  cortex  are  seemingly 
lacking  in  a  projection  system;  the  fibers 


W- 


^niU 


..J.tU 


V 


Fig.  76.  —To  show  the 
structure  of  the  cortex  cere- 
bri {Dejerine) :  I,  The  molec- 
ular layer ;  //,  the  layer  of 
vertical  fusiform  cells;  ///, 
the  layer  of  small  pyramidal 
cells;  IV,  the  layer  of  large 
pyramidal  cells;  V,  the  layer 
of  polymorphic  cells. 


174 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 


Fig.  77. — Schema  of  the  projection  fibers  of  the  cerebrum  and  of  the  peduncles  of  the 
cerebellum  ;  lateral  view  of  the  internal  capsule :  A,  Tract  from  the  frontal  gyri  to  the  pons 
nuclei,  and  so  to  the  cerebellum  (frontal  cerebro-cortico-pontal  tract) ;  B,  the  motor 
(pyramidal)  tract;  C,  the  sensory  (body  sense)  tract;  D,  the  visual  tract;  E,  the  auditory 
tract;  F,  the  fibers  of  the  superior  peduncle  of  the  cerebellum;  G,  fibers  of  the  middle 
peduncle  uniting  with  A  in  the  pons;  H,  fibers  of  the  inferior  peduncle  of  the  cerebellum; 
J,  fibers  between  the  auditory  nucleus  and  the  inferior  quadrigeminal  body;  K,  motor 
(pyramidal)  decussation  in  the  bulb;  Vt,  fourth  ventricle.  The  numerals  refer  to  the 
cranial  nerves. — (Modified  from  Starr.) 


Fig.  78. — Lateral  view  of  a  human  hemisphere,  showing  the  bundles  of  association 
fibers  (Starr):  A,  A,  Between  adjacent  gyri;  B,  between  frontal  and  occipital  areas;  C, 
between  frontal  and  temporal  areas,  cingulum ;  D,  between  frontal  and  temporal  areas, 
fasciculus  uncinatus ;  E,  between  occipital  and  temporal  areas,  fasciculus  longitudinalis 
inferior;    C.N,  caudate  nucleus;   O.T,  optic  thalamus. 


GENERAL  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  CEREBRUM.         175 

arising  from  these  parts  do  not  enter  the  capsule  to  make  connec- 
tion with  the  motor  and  sensory  paths,  below,  but  pass  to  other 
parts  of  the  cortex,  forming  a  part  of  the  system  of  association 
fibers.  Second,  the  association  system,  which  may  be  defined  as 
comprising  those  fibers  which  connect  one  part  of  the  cortex  with 
another  (Fig.  78).  There  are  short  association  tracts  (A,  A)  con- 
necting neighboring  convolutions  and  long  tracts  passing  from  one 
lobe  to  another.  Third,  the  commissural  system,  consisting  of  as- 
sociation fibers  that  cross  the  mid-line  and  connect  portions  of  one 
cerebral  hemisphere  with  the  cortex  of  the  other.  These  fibers 
make  up  the  commissural  bands  known  in  gross  anatomy  as  the 
corpus  callosum,  anterior  white  commissure,  fornix,  etc. 

The  structure  of  the  cortex  is  probably  more  complicated  than  would 
appear  from  the  above  description.  Numerous  recent  writers  (Held,  Apathy, 
Nissl,  Bethe,  Hatai,  et  al.)  have  called  attention  to  a  very  fine  network — peri- 
cellular or  Golgi  net — which  envelops  the  cell  body  and  the  dendritic  branches 
of  the  neurons.  Most  of  these  observers  consider  that  this  deUcate  network  is 
of  a  nervous  nature.  It  fills  up  the  spaces  between  the  nerve  cells  and  makes, 
therefore,  a  connection  of  exceeding  complexity,  and  a  histological  feature 
whose  details  must  be  worked  out  by  improved  technical  methods.  Nissl  has 
called  attention  to  the  fact  that  in  the  cortex  the  nerve  cells,  axons,  dendrites, 
neuroglia  cells  and  fibers,  and  blood-vessels  found  are  not  sufficient  to  fill  up  the 
whole  space  of  this  layer,  and  that  there  must  exist  an  in-between  substance, 
which  he  speaks  of  specifically  as  "the  gray."  It  seems  probable,  as  contended 
by  Bethe,  that  this  in-between  substance  is  the  network  just  referred  to,  whose 
delicacy  is  such  that  it  escapes  detection  by  ordinary  histological  methods.  If 
this  standpoint  is  correct  it  is  evident  that  histology  has  a  new  field  opened  to 
it  in  the  study  of  the  brain,  and  the  structural  features  that  may  be  revealed 
by  future  study  will  doubtless  add  much  to  our  knowledge  of  the  mechanism 
involved  in  brain  activity. 

Physiological  Deductions  from  the  Histology  of  the  Cortex. 

— Cajal*  especially  lays  stress  upon  some  anatomical  features  which 
seem  to  justify  certain  generalizations  of  a  physiological  nature.  In 
the  first  place,  every  part  of  the  cortex  receives  incoming  impulses 
and  gives  rise  to  outgoing  impulses.  Every  part  of  the  cortex  is, 
therefore,  both  a  termination  of  some  afferent  path  and  the  begin- 
ning of  some  efferent  path;  it  is,  in  other  words,  a  reflex  arc  of 
a  greater  or  less  degree  of  complexity.  We  may  suppose  that 
every  efferent  discharge  from  any  part  of  the  cortex  is  occasioned 
by  afferent  impressions  reaching  that  point  from  some  other  part 
of  the  nervous  system.  Whether  or  not  there  is  such  a  thing  as 
absolutely  spontaneous  mental  activity  cannot  be  determined  by 
physiology,  but  on  the  anatomical  side  at  least  all  the  structures 
exhibit  connections  that  fit  them  for  reflex  stimulation,  and  many 
of  our  apparently  spontaneous  acts  must  be  of  this  character. 
Secondly,   all   parts   of  the   cortex  exhibit   an   essentially   similar 

*  Cajal,  "Les  nouvelles  idees  sur  la  structure  du  systeme  nerveux,  etc.," 
Paris,  1894. 


176 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTEAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


structure.  Modem  physiology  has  recognized  clearly  that  different 
parts  of  the  cerebrum  have  different  functions,  but  the  differentia- 
tion in  structure  which  usually  accompanies  a  specialization  in 
function  is  not  very  evident.  Differences  in  the  thickness  of  the 
layers,  in  the  size  or  shape  of  the  cells,  have  been  pointed  out, 
but  it  is  perhaps  something  of  a  disappointment  to  find  so  little 
of  an  anatomical  distinction  between  structures  whose  reaction  in 
consciousness  is  so  widely  separated.     It  would  seem  that  the 


Fig.  79. — A-D,  Showing  the  phylogenetic  development  of  np.ature  nerve  cells  in  a 
series  of  vertebrates :  a-e,  the  ontogenetic  development  of  growing  cells  in  a  typical  mam- 
mal (in  both  cases  only  pyramidal  cells  from  the  cerebrum  are  shown) ;  A,  frog;  B,  lizard; 
C,  rat ;  D,  man ;  a,  neuroblast  without  dendrites ;  b,  commencing  dendrites ;  c,  dendrites 
further  developed;  d,  first  appearance  of  collateral  branches;  e,  further  development  of 
collaterals  and  dendrites. — (From  Ramon  y  Cajal.) 


structural  peculiarities  must  lie  chiefly  in  the  ultimate  chemical 
composition  and  physical  properties  of  the  protoplasm.  In  the 
third  place,  the  central  nervous  system  throughout  the  verte- 
brates is  constructed  upon  the  same  lines,  a  mechanism  of  intercon- 
necting neurons.  There  is  a  vast  difference  in  the  mental  activity 
of  a  frog  and  a  man,  but  the  cortex  of  the  cerebrum  shows  a  funda- 
mental similarity  in  structure  in  the  two  cases.  The  chief  difference 
that  comparative  anatomy  is  able  to  show  is  that  in  the  higher 


GENERAL  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  CEREBRUM. 


177 


animals  the  greater  mental  development  is  associated  with  a  greater 
complexity  and  richness  in  the  connections  of  the  neurons.  As 
shown  in  Figs.  79  and  80,  the  number  of  processes,  particularly 
the  dendritic  processes,  is  much  greater  in  the  cortical  cells 
of  the  higher  animals;  or,  to  put  this  fact  in  another  way,  the 
number  of  cells  in  the  cortex  of  the  higher  animals  is  much  less 
for  an  area  of  the  same  size  than  in  lower  animals.  The  amount 
of  in-between  substance  or  the  richness  of  the  network  of  processes 


Vi   \ 


'.  ^ 


"1 


."1  '>  jr  ■''   ." 


ft      ' 


Fig.  80. — Sections  through  corresponding  parts  of  the  cortex  in:  a,  Man;  h,  dog; 
and  c,  mole,  to  show  the  greater  separation  of  the  nerve  cells  in  the  higher  animals. — 
{Bethe,  after  Nissl.) 


is  increased.  This  anatomical  fact  would  indicate  that  the  greater 
mental  activity  in  the  higher  animals  is  dependent,  in  part,  upon 
the  richer  interconnection  of  the  nerve  cells,  or,  expressed  physio- 
logically, our  mental  processes  are  characterized  by  their  more 
numerous  and  complex  associations.  A  visual  or  auditory  stim- 
ulus that,  in  the  frog,  for  instance,  may  call  forth  a  comparatively 
simple  motor  response,  may  in  man,  on  account  of  the  numerous 
associations  with  the  memory  records  of  past  experiences,  lead  to 
12 


178        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

psychical  and  motor  responses  of  a  much  more  intricate  and  in- 
direct character. 

Extirpation  of  the  Cerebrum. — One  of  the  methods  used  in 
physiology  to  determine  the  general  functional  value  of  the  cerebral 
hemispheres  has  been  to  remove  them  completely,  by  surgical 
operation,  and  to  study  the  effect  upon  the  psychical  responses  of 
the  animal.  Upon  the  cold-blooded  animals  and  the  birds  the 
operation  may  be  performed  with  ease,  but  in  these  animals  the 
positive  results  are  not  striking  and  the  experiments  are  valuable 
chiefly  for  their  negative  results.  If  the  cerebral  hemispheres  are 
removed  from  the  frog,  for  example,  the  animal  after  recovering 
from  the  immediate  effects  of  the  operation — that  is,  the  effects 
of  the  anesthetic  and  the  shock — shows  surprisingly  little  difference 
from  the  normal  animal.  It  maintains  a  normal  posture  and  shows 
no  loss  at  all  in  its  power  of  equilibration.  When  placed  on  its 
back  it  quickly  regains  its  usual  position.  If  thrown  into  water 
it  swims  to  a  solid  support  and  crawls  out  like  a  normal  animal. 
It  jumps  when  stimulated  and  is  careful  to  avoid  obstacles  placed 
in  its  way,  showing  that  its  visual  reflexes  are  not  impaired.  It 
is  said,  however,  that  the  more  complicated  reactions  that  depend 
upon  the  memory  of  past  experien  ces  or  the  instincts  are  absent  or 
imperfect.  This  latter  peculiarity  is  manifested  most  impressively 
in  birds  (pigeons)  after  removal  of  a  part  or  all  of  the  cerebrum.  As 
a  result  of  such  an  operation,  the  nervous,  active  animal  is  changed 
at  once  to  a  stupid,  lethargic  creature  which  reacts  only  when 
stimulated.  It  sits  in  a  drowsy  attitude,  with  its  head  drawn  in 
to  the  shoulders,  its  eyes  closed,  and  its  feathers  slightly  erected; 
occasionally  it  will  open  its  eyes,  stretch  the  neck,  gape,  preen 
its  feathers  perhaps,  and  then  sink  back  into  its  somnolent  attitude. 
The  animal  in  this  condition  maintains  its  equilibrium  perfectly, 
flies  well  if  thrown  into  the  air  and  perches  comfortably  upon  a 
narrow  support.  It  may  be  kept  alive  apparently  indefinitely  by 
appropriate  feeding  and  so  long  as  it  is  well  fed  retains  its  stupid 
and  impassive  appearance.  If  allowed  to  starve  for  a  while  it 
becomes  restless  from  the  effects  of  hunger,  may  walk  to  and  fro, 
and  peck  aimlessly  at  the  ground.  If  surrounded  by  grain  it  may 
peck  at  the  separate  grains,  but  never  actually  seizes  one  in  its 
beak  and  swallows  it.  The  striking  defect  in  these  animals  is  the 
loss  of  those  responses  that  depend  upon  memor}^  of  past  or  in- 
herited experiences.  Its  motor  reactions  are  all  of  a  simple  kind. 
If  placed  upon  a  hot  plate  it  will,  for  a  time,  lift  first  one  foot,  then 
the  other,  and  finally  squat,  but  never  flies  away.  When  dosing 
a  loud  noise  awakens  it,  but  it  exhibits  no  signs  of  fear,  and 
quickly  relapses  into  somnolence  when  the  auditory  stimulus  ceases. 
The  one  positive  conclusion  that  we  may  draw  from  the  behavior 


GENERAL   PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE   CEREBRUM.  179 

of  these  animals  is  that  in  them  the  cerebrum  is  the  place  in  which 
the  memory  records  are  stored,  and  that  when  it  is  removed  the 
actions  of  the  animal  when  stimulated  become  much  more  direct 
and  predictable,  since  the  stimulus  awakens  no  associations  with 
past  experiences.  The  complete  removal  of  the  cerebrum  in  mam- 
mals is  attended  with  more  difficulty.  When  taken  out  at  once 
by  a  single  operation  the  animal  survives-  but  a  short  time  and 
the  permanent  effects  of  the  operation  cannot  be  detected.  Goltz,* 
however,  has  succeeded,  in  dogs,  in  removing  by  a  peculiar  operation 
all  of  the  cerebral  cortex.  The  operation  was  performed  in  sev- 
eral successive  stages  with  an  interval  of  several  months  between. 
In  the  most  successful  experiment  the  animal  was  kept  alive  for 
a  year  and  a  half  and  the  postmortem  examination  showed  that 
all  of  the  cortex  had  been  removed  except  a  small  portion  of  the 
tip  of  the  temporal  lobe,  and  this  latter,  since  its  connections  with 
the  other  parts  of  the  brain  had  been  destroyed,  was,  of  course, 
functionless.  In  addition,  a  large  part  of  the  corpora  striata  and 
optic  thalami  and  a  small  portion  of  the  midbrain  had  been  re- 
moved. The  behavior  of  this  animal  was  studied  carefully.  After 
the  immediate  effects  of  the  operation — paralysis,  etc. — had  disap- 
peared the  animal  moved  easily;  in  fact,  showed  a  tendency  to  keep 
moving  continually.  There  was  no  permanent  paralysis  of  the  so- 
called  voluntary  movements.  He  answered  to  sensory  stimuU  of 
various  kinds,  but  not  in  an  intelligent  way.  If,  for  instance,  a 
painful  stimulus  was  applied  to  the  skin,  he  would  growl  or  bark, 
and  turn  his  head  toward  the  place  stimulated;  but  did  not  attempt 
to  bite.  No  caressing  could  arouse  signs  of  pleasure,  and  no 
threatening  signs  of  fear  or  anger.  Like  the  pigeon,  the  most  con- 
spicuous defect  in  the  animal  was  a  lack  of  intelligent  response, — 
that  is,  the  responses  to  sensory  stimuli  were  simple,  and  evidently 
did  not  involve  complex  associations  with  past  experiences.  His 
memory  records,  for  the  most  part,  had  been  destroyed.  Goltz 
records  that  when  starved  he  showed  signs  of  hunger,  and  that 
eventually  he  learned  to  feed  himself  when  his  nose  was  brought 
into  contact  with  the  food,  although  he  was  not  able  to  recognize 
food  placed  near  him.  He  would  reject  food  with  a  disagreeable 
taste.  When  sleeping  he  gave  no  signs  of  dreaming,  differing  in 
this  respect  from  normal  dogs. 

Localization  of  Functions  in  the  Cerebrum. — When  the 
belief  was  established  that  the  cerebrum  is  the  organ  of  the  higher 
psychical  activities  there  arose  naturally  the  question  whether  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  cortex  have  different  functions  corresponding 
to  the  various  faculties  of  the  mind,  or  whether  the  cerebrum  is 
functionally  equivalent  throughout,  in  the  same  sense,  for  instance, 
*  Goltz,  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  51,  570,  1892. 


180        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

as  the  liver.  This  question  of  the  localization  of  functions  in  the 
brain  (cerebrum)  has  been  much  debated,  but  the  most  interesting 
and  important  discussions  upon  the  subject  belong  to  the  nine- 
teenth century.  About  the  beginning  of  the  century  Franz  Joseph 
Gall,  at  that  time  a  physician  in  Vienna,  began  to  teach  publicly  his 
well-known  system  of  cranioscopy  or,  as  it  was  later  designated  by 
his  chief  disciple  (Spurzheim),  system  of  phrenology.*  Gall,  from  his 
early  youth,  was  possessed  with  the  idea  that  the  different  faculties 
of  the  mind  are  mediated  through  different  parts  of  the  brain,  that 
in  it  we  have  to  deal  not  with  a  single,  but  with  a  plurality  of 
organs.  This  belief  was  in  opposition  to  the  current  ideas  of  his 
times  and  Gall  devoted  his  entire  life  to  an  earnest  effort  to  estab- 
lish and  popularize  his  views.  He  and  his  disciples  contributed 
many  very  important  facts  to  our  knowledge  of  the  finer  anatomy 
of  the  brain;  but,  so  far  as  the  view  of  separate  organs  in  the 
cerebrum  is  concerned,  the  methods  that  he  employed,  although 
perhaps  the  only  ones  that  he  could  make  use  of  at  that  time, 
have  since  been  demonstrated  to  be  fallacious  when  used  as  he 
used  them.  He  conceived  that  the  more  developed  any  given 
mental  quality  is  the  larger  will  be  the  organ  representing  it  in 
the  cerebrum,  and  since  the  cranium  fits  closely  to  the  cerebrum 
the  relative  prominence  of  the  parts  of  the  cerebrum  may  be  judged 
by  a  study  of  the  exterior  of  the  skull.  This  method  of  study  con- 
stituted the  essential  feature  of  cranioscopy  or  phrenology,  and 
by  observation  upon  people  with  particularly  marked  mental 
qualities  Gall  and  his  disciples  supposed  that  they  had  located  the 
organs  for  thirty-five  different  faculties.  While  the  general  idea 
of  this  method  may  be  defended,  it  is  obvious  that  the  application 
of  it  scientifically,  so  that  positive  and  demonstrable  results  can 
be  obtained,  is  practically  impossible.  The  system  of  phrenology 
and  its  methods  quickly  fell  into  disrepute,  particularly  as  it  soon 
became  a  favorite  implement  for  the  use  of  frauds  and  charlatans. 
Gall's  ideas  in  the  beginning  excited  the  greatest  interest,  but  it 
seems  that  he  was  never  able  to  convince  the  majority  of  the  scien- 
tific men  of  his  day  of  the  conclusiveness  of  his  results.  At  the 
time  that  he  was  exploiting  his  doctrines  in  Paris,  where  he  spent 
the  latter  years  of  his  life,  Flourens  began  his  celebrated  experi- 
mental work  upon  the  functions  of  the  brain, — work  which  was 
mainly  instrumental  in  convincing  physiologists  that  the  cerebrum 
is  a  single  organ,  functionally  equivalent  in  all  of  its  parts. f  Flou- 
rens's  chief  experiments  were  made  upon  pigeons,  and  in  these 

*  Gall  (and  Spurzheim),  "Recherches  sur  la  systeme  nerveux  en  general 
et  sur  celui  clu  cerveau  en  particulier,"  1810-1819. 

t  Flourens,  "Recherches  experimentales  sur  les  propriety  et  les  fonctions 
du  systeme  nerveux  dans  les  animaux  vertebres,"  1824. 


GENERAL    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    CEREBRUM. 


181 


animals  he  found  that  successive  ablations  of  parts  of  the  cerebrum 
from  before  backward  or  from  side  to  side  was  not  followed  by 
a  corresponding  series  of  defects  in  the  animals'  psychical  life.  On 
the  contrary,  when  the  quantity  of  brain  substance  removed  was 
sufficiently  large  all  these  qualities  went  at  once.  The  choice  of 
animals  for  these  experiments  was  an  unfortunate  one,  but  the 
results  were  corroborated  in  part  by  a  number  of  instances  in 
which  human  beings  by  acci- 
dent or  wounds  in  battle  had 
lost  a  part  of  the  brain  with- 
out any  apparent  defect  in 
their  mental  powers.  There- 
fore toward  the  middle  of  the 
nineteenth  century  the  preva- 
lent view  in  physiology  was 
that  the  cerebrum  is  function- 
ally equivalent  in  all  of  its 
parts.  One  fact  was  known 
in  medicine  at  that  time  which 
distinctly  contradicted  this  be- 
lief,— namely,  that  an  injury 
to  the  posterior  portion  of  the 
third  frontal  convolution  in 
man,  on  the  left  side,  causes  a 
loss  of  articulate  speech  (motor 
aphasia).  But  this  fact,  so  sig- 
nificant to  us  now,  was  not 
properly  valued  at  the  time. 
The  beginning  of  our  modern 
views  of  cerebral  localization 
is  found  in  the  work  of  Fritsch 
and  Hitzig*  (1870),  in  which 
they  exposed  and  stimulated 
electrically  the  cortex  cerebri  in 
dogs.  They  found  that  stimu- 
lation of  certain  definite  areas, 
particularly    in     the     sigmoid 

gyrus,  gave  distinct  and  constant  movements  in  the  limbs,  face,  etc. 
(see  Fig.  81).  This  work  was  followed  quickly  by  experiments  of  a 
similar  kind  made  by  numerous  observers,  in  which  the  cerebrum  was 
stimulated  in  various  animals  and  finally  in  man.  In  addition,  the 
method  of  ablation  of  these  areas  was  employed  with  subsequent 
study  of  the  animal  in  regard  to  the  motor  or  sensory  defects  result- 

*  Fritsch  and  Hitzig,  "Archiv  f.  Anatomie  und  Physiologie  und  wissen- 
schaftliche  Medizin,"  1870,  300. 


Fig.  81. — To  show  the  motor  areas  in  the 
dog's  brain  as  originally  determined  by 
Fritsch  and  Hitzig:  s,  Sigmoid  gyrus;  A,  center 
for  the  neck  muscles;  -F,  center  for  the  ex- 
tensors and  adductors  of  the  foreUmb ;  +, 
center  for  the  flexors  and  rotation  of  fore- 
Umb; #,  center  for  the  hind  limb;  O — O, 
center  for  the  muscles  innervated  by  the 
facial. 


182 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


ing  therefrom,  and  the  results  obtained  were  further  extended  by 
careful  autopsies  upon  human  beings  in  whom  paralyses  of  various 
kinds  and  sensory  defects  were  associated  with  more  or  less  definite 
lesions  of  the  cerebrum.  The  first  outcome  of  this  work  was  to 
lead  to  an  extreme  view  of  localization  of  function  in  the  brain, 
in  which  the  different  motor  and  sensory  areas  were  definitely 
circumscribed  and  separated  one  from  the  other,  making  the  cere- 
brum a  plurality  of  organs,  to  use  Gall's  term.     The  more  recent 


Fig.  82. — Diagram  representing  the  probable  location  of  the  chief  motor  and  sensory 
areas  of  the  cerebral  cortex  in  man :  A,  Lateral  surface ;  B,  mesial  surface. — (From  Schiifer.) 


work  has  tended  to  modify  these  extreme  views  of  localization  and 
to  emphasize  the  fact  that  histologically  and  physiologically  the 
entire  cerebrum  is  connected  so  intimately,  part  to  part,  that, 
although  the  different  regions  mediate  different  functions,  never- 
theless an  injury  or  defect  in  one  part  may  influence  to  some  extent 
the  functional  value  of  all  other  regions  in  the  organ.  The  general 
idea  of  a  localization  of  function  has  been  established  definitely, 
but  the  modern  view  is  that  the  cerebrum  is  composed  of  a  plurality 


GENERAL    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    CEREBRUM. 


183 


of  organs,  not  completely  separated  one  from  the  other  as  taught 
by  Gall,  but  intimately  associated  and  to  a  certain  extent  dependent 
one  on  another  for  their  full  functional  importance. 

The  Motor  Area. — The  first  experiments  of  Fritsch  and  Hitzig 
disclosed  the  location  of  a  cortical  region  in  the  dog  which  upon 
stimulation  gave  definite  movements.  The  later  experiments  of 
Ferrier,  Schafer,  Horsley,  and  Beevor,  particularly  upon  the  apes, 
gave  reason  for  believing  that  this  motor  area  surrounds  the  fissure, 
of  Rolando  and  extends  inward  upon  the  mesial  surface  of  the  cere- 
brum.    Its  exact  boundaries  marked  out  by  careful  stimulation  of 


Hip-- 
Tinkers 


-  '    /  Cen  — 


Abdotnen- 

Ovsst 


Ear  ^., 
EyeLicL 


Closure 


Sulcus  Centralis 


Nose  ^J"^  Ohening  Voea,L   Mastication. 
ofiOLM     cords 

Fig.  83. — Location  of  motor  areas  in  brain  of  chimpanzee. — {Sherrington  and  Green- 
baum.)  The  extent  of  the  motor  areas  is  indicated  by  stippHng;  it  lies  entirely  in  front 
of  the  fissure  of  Rolando  (sulcus  centralis).  Much  of  the  motor  area  is  hidden  in  the  sulci. 
The  regions  marked  eyes  indicate  the  areas  whose  stimulation  gives  conjugate  movements 
of  the  eyeballs.     It  is  doubtful,  however,  whether  these  represent  motor  areas  proper. 


the  region  in  monkeys  was  more  or  less  verified  upon  man,  since  in 
operations  upon  the  brain  it  was  often  necessary  to  stimulate  the  cor- 
tex in  order  to  localize  a  given  motor  area.  By  these  means  charts 
have  been  made  showing  the  cortical  area  for  the  musculature  of  each 
part  of  the  body.  The  location  of  these  areas  as  usually  given  is 
represented,  for  the  human  brain,  by  Fig.  82.  It  will  be  seen  that  in 
general  the  distribution  of  the  areas  along  the  fissure  of  Rolando 
follows  the  order  of  the  cranial  and  spinal  nerves.  Within  each 
area  smaller  centers  may  be  located  by  careful  stimulation;  thus, 
the  hand  and  arm  area  may  be  subdivided  into  centers  for  the 
wrist,  fingers,  thumb,  etc.     More  recently  Sherrington  and   Green- 


184 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


baum,*  making  use  of  electrical  stimulation,  unipolar  method, 
have  explored  carefully  the  motor  areas  in  the  monkey.  They 
state  that  these  areas  do  not  extend  back  of  the  Rolandic 
fissure,  but  lie  chiefly  along  the  anterior  central  convolution, 
as  represented  in  Fig.  83,  extending  for  only  a  small  distance  on 
to  the  mesial  surface  of    the  cerebrum.     The   area  thus  delimited 

by  physiological  experiments  is 
the  region  from  which  arises  the 
pyramidal  system  of  fibers,  and 
clinical  experience  has  shown  that 
lesions  in  this  part  of  the  cortex  are 
accompanied  by  a  paralysis  of  the 
miLscles  on  the  other  side,  particu- 
larly in  the  limbs.  Pathological  or 
experimental  lesions  here,  moreover, 
are  followed  by  a  degeneration  of  the 
pyramidal  neurons, — a  degeneration 
which  extends  to  the  termination  of 
the  neuron  in  the  cord.  With  these 
data  we  can  construct  a  fairly  com- 
plete account  of  the  mechanism  of 
voluntary  movements.  The  initial 
impulse  arises  in  the  large  pyramidal 
cells  of  the  motor  areas  and  proceeds 
along  the  axons  of  their  neurons 
to  the  motor  nuclei  of  the  cranial 
or  spinal  nerves.  The  neurons  of 
the  pyramidal  tract  constitute  the 
motor  tract  for  voluntary  move- 
ments; a  lesion  anywhere  along  this 
tract  causes  paralysis,  more  or  less 
complete  and  on  the  other  side 
of  the  body  in  general,  if  the  le- 
sion is  anterior  to  the  decussation. 
The  path  of  the  motor  fibers  is 
represented  in  the  schema  given  in 
Fig.  84.  Arising  in  the  cortex,  they 
take  the  following  route  (see  also 
Fig.  77,5): 

1.  Corona  radiata. 

2.  Internal  capsule. 

3.  Crus  cerebri  (pes). 

4.  Pons  Varolii,  in  which  they  are  broken  into  a  number  of 

smaller  bundles  by  the  fibers  of  the  middle  peduncle  of  the 

*  "Reports  of  the  Thompson-Yates  and  Johnston  Laboratories,"  4,  351, 
1902;   5,  55,  1903. 


Fig.  84. — Schema  representing 
the  course  of  the  fibers  of  the  pyram- 
idal tract:  1,  Fibers  to  the  nuclei  of 
the  cranial  nerve;  2,  uncrossed  fibers 
to  the  lateral  pyramidal  tract;  3,  fi- 
bers to  the  anterior  pyramidal  tract 
crossing  in  the  cord;  4  and  5,  fibers 
that  cross  in  the  pyramidal  decussa- 
tion to  make  the  lateral  pyramidal 
tract  of  the  opposite  side. 


GENERAL   PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE    CEREBRUM.  185 

cerebellum.  In  this  region,  also,  some  of  the  fibers  cross  the 
mid- line,  to  end  in  the  motor  nuclei  of  the  cranial  nerves: 
Third,  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh. 

5.  Anterior  pyramids. 

6.  Pyramidal  decussation. 

7.  Direct  and  crossed  pyramidal  tracts  in  the  cord. 

After  ending  in  the  motor  nuclei  of  the  cranial  or  spinal  nerves  the 
path  is  continued  by  a  second  neuron  from  these  nuclei  to  the  mus- 
cles. The  entire  path  involves,  therefore,  two  neurons,  and  injury 
to  either  will  cause  paralysis  of  the  corresponding  muscles. 

Diiference  in  the  Paralysis  from  Injury  to  the  Spinal  and  the 
Pyramidal  Neuron. — With  regard  to  the  musculature  of  the  limbs 
especially  a  difference  has  been  observed  in  the  paralysis  caused  by 
injury  to  the  spinal  and  pyramidal  neurons,  respectively.  Lesions  of 
the  anterior  root  cells  in  the  cord  or  of  the  axons  arising  from  them 
cause  complete  paralysis  of  the  corresponding  muscles,  since  these 
muscles  are  then  removed  not  only  from  voluntary  control,  but  also 
from  reflex  effects.  The  muscles  are  entirely  relaxed  and  in  time  ex- 
hibit a  more  or  less  complete  atrophy.  When  the  pyramidal  neurons 
alone  are  affected,  as  in  the  familiar  condition  of  hemiplegia  resulting 
from  a  unilateral  lesion  of  the  motor  cortex,  there  is  paralysis  as 
regards  voluntary  control,  but,  the  spinal  neuron  being  intact,  the 
muscles  are  still  subject  to  reflex  stimulation  through  the  cord, 
especially  to  the  so-called  tonic  impulses.  Under  these  conditions  it 
is  frequently  noticed  that  the  paralyzed  muscles  are  thrown  into  a 
state  of  continuous  contraction,  contracture,  in  which  they  exhibit  a 
spastic  rigidity.  This  fact,  therefore,  may  be  used  in  diagnosing 
the  general  location  of  the  lesion. 

Is  the  Pyramidal  Tract  the  Only  Means  of  Voluntary 
(Cortical)  Control  of  the  Muscles? — Much  discussion  has  arisen 
regarding  this  question.  It  is,  in  fact,  one  of  those  questions 
of  nervous  mechanism  in  which  experiments  upon  lower  ani- 
mals must  be  applied  with  caution  to  the  conditions  in  man. 
As  we  have  seen,  the  entire  cerebral  cortex  may  be  removed 
from  the  frog,  the  pigeon,  and  the  dog  without  causing  permanent 
paralysis,  although  in  the  animal  last  named  there  is  at  flrst  a  more 
or  less  marked  loss  of  voluntary  control.  But  in  man  and  the  higher 
types  of  the  monkey  the  pyramidal  system  is  more  completely 
developed,  and  corresponding  with  this  fact  it  is  found  that  the 
paralysis  from  lesion  of  the  motor  cortex  is  more  permanent.  In 
fact,  observations  upon  men  in  whom  it  has  been  necessary  to  re- 
move parts  of  the  motor  area  by  surgical  operation  indicate  that  the 
voluntary  control  of  the  muscles  is  lost  or  impaired  permanently. 
It  would  seem,  therefore,  that  in  an  animal  as  high  in  the  scale  as 
the  dog  voluntary  control  of  the  muscles  can  be  maintained  through 


186        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

tracts  other  than  the  pyramidal  system,  tracts,  perhaps,  such  as 
Monakow's  bundle  (rubrospinal  tract),  arising  in  the  midbrain.  In 
man,  however,  along  with  the  more  complete  development  of  the 
pyramidal  system,  the  efficacy  of  the  phylogenetically  older  motor 
systems  is  correspondingly  reduced. 

The  Crossed  Control  of  the  Muscles  and  Bilateral  Repre- 
sentation in  the  Cortex. — It  has  been  known  from  very  ancient 
times  that  an  injury  to  the  brain  on  one  side  is  accompanied  by  a 
paralysis  of  voluntary  movement  on  the  other  side  of  the  body,  a 
condition  known  as  hemiplegia.  The  facts  given  above  regarding 
the  origin  and  course  of  the  pyramidal  fibers  explain  the  crossed 
character  of  the  paralysis  quite  satisfactorily.  The  schema  thus 
presented  to  us  is,  however,  not  entirely  without  exception.  In 
cases  of  hemiplegia  in  which  the  whole  motor  area  is  involved  it  is 
known  that  the  paralysis  on  the  other  side  does  not  involve  all  the 
muscles,  and,  in  the  second  place,  it  is  said  that  there  is  some  mus- 
cular weakness  on  the  same  side.  The  paralysis  in  hemiplegia 
affects  but  little,  if  at  all,  those  muscles  of  the  trunk  which  are  accus- 
tomed to  act  in  unison, — the  muscles  of  inspiration,  for  instance, 
the  diaphragm,  abdominal  and  intercostal  muscles,,  and  the  muscles 
of  the  larynx.  It  would  appear  that  these  muscles  are  bilaterally 
represented  in  the  cortex;  so  that  if  one  side  of  the  brain  is  intact 
the  muscles  of  both  sides  are  still  under  voluntary  control.  The 
mechanism  of  this  bilateral  representation  is  not  definitely  known; 
one  might  conceive  several  possibilities.  The  motor  area  on 
each  side  may  send  down  a  double  set  of  pyramidal  fibers,  one 
of  which  crosses  and  the  other  remains  on  the  same  side,  or  the 
fibers  may  bifurcate.  Or  it  is  possible  that  the  bilateral  control  is 
due  to  commissural  connections  between  the  lower  centers  in  the 
cord.  Some  evidence  in  favor  of  the  former  view  is  found  in  the 
undoubted  histological  fact  brought  out  by  Melius  and  others,  that 
small  unilateral  lesions  in  the  motor  area — the  center  of  the  great 
toe  in  the  monkey,  for  instance — are  followed  by  degeneration  in 
the  lateral  pyramidal  tract  in  the  cord  on  both  sides,  showing  that 
some  portions  of  the  motor  area  send  fibers  to  both  sides  of  the 
body.  In  cases  of  hemiplegia  it  may  be  added  that  the  muscles 
of  the  limbs  are  not  all  equally  affected. 

Are  the  Motor  Areas  Only  Motor  in  Function? — The  great 
number  of  nerve  cells  in  the  cortex  in  addition  to  the  large  pyram- 
idal cells  that  give  origin  to  the  fibers  of  the  pyramidal  tract  make 
it  possible  histologically  that  other  functions  may  be  mediated 
in  the  same  region.  This  possibility  has  been  kept  in  view  since 
the  early  experiments  of  Munk,  in  which  he  showed  that  lesions  in 
the  Rolandic  region  are  followed  by  disturbances  in  what  are 
designated  as  the  body  sensations,  muscular  and  cutaneous  sensi- 


GENERAL  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  CEREBRUM.         187 

bility,  but  especially  the  former.  It  was  suggested,  therefore, 
at  one  time  that  one  and  the  same  spot  in  the  cortex  might 
serve  as  the  origin  of  the  motor  impulses  to  a  given  muscle  and 
as  the  cortical  termination  of  the  sensory  impulses  coming  from 
the  same  muscle,  the  reaction  in  consciousness,  the  muscular  sensa- 
tions, being  mediated  perhaps  through  cells  other  than  those 
giving  rise  to  the  pyramidal  fibers.  Recent  physiological  and  clin- 
ical work  has,  however,  not  tended  to  support  this  view.  The 
motor  areas  appear  to  be  confined  to  the  region  in  front  of  the  fis- 
sure of  Rolando,  while  the  cortical  area  which  gives  rise  to  that 
kind  of  consciousness  that  we  designate  in  general  as  body  sensi- 
bility extends  back  of  the  Rolandic  fissure  in  the  posterior  central 
gyrus.  Whether,  on  the  other  hand,  the  sense  areas  for  the  body 
(cutaneous  and  muscular)  extend  forward  into  the  cortex  of 
the  frontal  lobe  is  not  clearly  shown  by  experimental  or  clinical 
evidence.  Flechsig,  from  his  studies  upon  the  time  of  myelini- 
zation  of  the  afferent  fibers  in  the  embryo  brain,  concludes  that 
this  is  the  case,  and  that  therefore  the  motor  and  sensory  areas 
overlap  for  a  part  at  least  of  their  extent  (see  p.  210  and  Fig.  93). 
In  the  motor  area  there  are  numerous  connections  by  afferent 
fibers,  association  tracts,  with  other  parts  of  the  brain.  By 
this  means  the  motor  area,  without  doubt,  is  brought  into  rela- 
tion with  many  other  parts  of  the  cortex,  and  the  sensations  or 
perceptions  aroused  elsewhere  may  react  upon  the  motor  paths. 
A  voluntary  movement,  however  simple  it  may  be,  is  a  psychological 
act  of  some  complexity.  The  mental  processes  that  lead  to  and 
originate  the  motor  discharge  cannot  be  located  in  the  cortex,  but 
the  immediate  origin  of  the  motor  impulse  lies  most  probably,  in 
the  areas  along  the  anterior  margin  of  the  fissure  of  Rolando. 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE  SENSE  AREAS  AND  THE  ASSOCIATION  AREAS  OF 
THE  CORTEX. 

The  delimitation  of  the  sensory  areas  in  the  cortex  is  a  matter 
of  very  considerable  difficulty,  owing,  mainly,  to  the  fact  that  the 
determination  of  the  presence  or  absence  of  certain  states  of  con- 
sciousness in  the  animal  or  person  under  observation  cannot  be 
made  except  by  indirect  means.  Moreover,  the  distinction  be- 
tween what  we  may  call  simple  sensations  and  the  more  complex 
psychical  representations  and  judgments  of  which  these  sensations 
form  a  necessary  constituent  can  not  be  made  clearly,  even  by  the 
individual  in  w^hom  the  reactions  occur.  We  recognize  in  ourselves 
different  stages  in  the  degree  of  consciousness  aroused  by  sensory 
reactions.  Our  visual  and  auditory  sensations  are  clearly  dif- 
ferentiated ;  but  many  of  the  lower  senses  escape  recognition  in 
the  individual  himself,  since  the  state  of  consciousness  accom- 
panying them  is  of  a  lower  order.  Our  muscular  sensations,  for  in- 
stance, are  so  indefinite  as  to  be  practically  subconscious.  They 
are  most  important  to  us  in  every  act  of  our  lives,  j-et  the  unin- 
formed person  is  unconscious  of  the  existence  of  such  a  sensation, 
and  if  deprived  of  it  would  recognize  the  defect  only  in  the  con- 
sequent loss  of  control  of  the  voluntary  muscular  movements.  In 
the  attempts  to  determine  in  what  part  of  the  brain  the  various 
sensations  are  mediated  every  possible  method  of  inquiry  has  been 
used :  the  anatomical  course  of  the  sensory  paths,  physiological  ex- 
periments of  stimulation  and  ablation,  and  observations  upon  in- 
dividuals with  pathological  or  traumatic  lesions  in  the  brain.  In 
the  long  run,  the  study  of  neuropathological  cases  in  man  must  give 
us  the  last  word,  because  in  such  cases  the  estimate  of  the  sensory 
defect  can  be  made  with  most  accuracy  and  because  in  man  the 
specialization  of  the  psychical  functions  has  reached  its  highest 
development.  The  results  that  have  been  obtained  are  perhaps 
the  most  definite  in  the  case  of  the  higher  senses,  vision  and  hearing, 
since  defects  in  these  senses  are  recognized  most  clearly,  and  the 
anatomical  mechanisms  involved  have  proved  to  be  more  accessi- 
ble to  investigation. 

The  Body-sense  Area. — In  his  early  experiments  Munk  in- 
sisted that  lesions  of   the  cortex  involving  the  Rolandic  area  are 

188 


SENSE    AREAS   AND    ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  189 

accompanied  by  a  state  of  anesthesia  on  the  other  side  of  the  body, 
hemianesthesia,  particularly  as  regards  the  tactile  and  muscular 
sensations.  It  is  not  necessary,  perhaps,  to  go  into  the  details 
of  the  long  controversy  that  arose  in  connection  with  this  point. 
Both  the  clinical  and  the  experimental  evidence  has  been  contra- 
dictory in  the  hands  of  different  observers,  but  the  tendency  of 
recent  studies  has  been  to  show,  as  stated  above,  that,  whereas 
the  motor  areas  lie  anterior  to  the  fissure  of  Rolando,  the  sensory 
areas  concerned  with  the  cutaneous  and  muscular  sensations  extend 
posterior  to  this  fissure.*  Positive  cases  are  recorded  in  which  lesions 
involving  the  anterior  central  convolutions  were  accompanied  by 
paralysis  on  the  other  side,  hemiplegia,  without  any  detectable 
disturbance  of  sensibility,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  lesions  in  the 
posterior  central,  and  neighboring  parietal  convolutions,  in  which 
there  was  a  hemianesthesia  more  or  less  distinctly  marked  without 
any  paralysis.  Such  cases  tend  to  support  the  view  that  the  motor 
and  body  sense  areas,  although  contiguous,  do  not  overlap.f  On 
the  other  hand,  the  embryological  evidence,  as  furnished  by  Flechsig, 
indicates  that  the  sense  areas  may  extend  in  front  of  the  Rolandic 
fissure  (p.  210)  and  overlap  the  motor  areas  in  part.  At  present, 
perhaps,  one  is  justified  in  saying  only  that  the  region  immediately 
posterior  to  the  Rolandic  fissure  is  entirely  sensory.  Regarding 
the  sensory  defects  associated  with  lesions  of  the  parietal  lobe 
posterior  to  ■  the  Rolandic  fissure  (posterior  central  convolution, 
supramarginal,  superior,  and  possibly  inferior  parietal  convolutions), 
it  seems  probable  that  they  involve  chiefly  the  muscular  sense, 
pressure  and  temperature  sense,  and  the  judgments  or  perceptions 
based  upon  these  sensations,  while  the  sense  of  pain  is  but  little 
affected.  Monakow  gives  the  order  in  which  sensory  defects  mani- 
fest themselves  after  such  lesions,  as  follows:  The  localizing  space 
and  muscle  sense  are  chiefly  affected,— in  fact,  almost  lost  on  the 
opposite  side;  the  temperature  and  pressure  sense  are  largely 
affected,  while  the  pain  sense  is  retained  or  but  slightly  affected. 
The  clinicians  have  observed  that  the  most  positive  and  invariable 
symptom  of  lesions  in  this  region  is  a  condition  of  astereognosis, — 
that  is,  a  diminution  in  the  stereognostic  sense  or  feeling.  By  the 
stereognostic  feeling  is  meant  the  power  to  judge  concerning  the 
form  and  consistency  of  external  objects  when  handled,  and  it 
must  be  regarded  as  a  perception  based  upon  the  sensations  of 
touch  and  temperature  in  combination  with  muscular  sensibility. 
On  the  Avhole,  therefore,  we  must  infer  that  the  cortex  in  this 
postrolandic  area  is  concerned  with  the  finer  and  more  conscious 

*  Consult  Monakow,  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"   1902,  vol.  i,  part  i, 
p.  621. 

t  Mills,  American  Neurological  Association,  1901. 


190 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 


interpretations  of  the  sensations  of  pressure,  temperature,  and 
muscular  conditions.  The  part  of  the  cortex,  if  any,  concerned 
in  the  primary  conscious  mediation  of  the  sense  of  pain  has  not 
been  definitely  locahzed. 

The  Histological  Evidence.  Course  of  the  "Fillet." — On 
the  histological  side  there  is  very  strong  corroborative  evidence  for 
the  view  that  the  cortical  centers  for  the  sensory  fibers  of  the  body 


Fissure  of  Rolando 


Internal  or  JTledian  HUef 


^^InternaliJIrcLfornu  Tibres  ■ 
ofhlnal  Cord^ 


Fig.  85.^Schema  representing  the  origin  and  course  of  the  fibers  of  the  median  fillet, — 
the  intercentral  paths  of  the  fibers  of  body  sense. 

in  general  lie  in  the  parietal  lobe  in  the  region  indicated  above. 
This  evidence  is  connected  with  the  path  taken  by  the  sensory 
fibers  in  the  cord,  especially  those  of  the  posterior  columns,  after 
ending  in  the  nucleus  gracilis  and  nucleus  cuneatus  of  the  medulla. 
This  path  is  represented  in  a  schematic  way  in  the  accompanying 
diagram  (Fig.  85).  The  second  sensory  neurons  arise  in  the  nuclei 
mentioned.     Some  of  them  pass  into  the  cerebellum  by  way  of  the 


SENSE    AREAS    AND    ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  191 

inferior  peduncle  of  the  same  side;  but  others,  passing  ventrally, 
cross  the  mid-line  as  the  internal  arciform  fibers,  which  form  a 
conspicuous  feature  in  the  tegmental  region  of  sections  of  the 
medulla  at  this  level.  This  crossing  occurs  mainly  just  in  front 
of — that  is,  cephalad  to — the  pyramidal  decussation,  forming  thus 
a  sensory  decussation,  which  explains  the  crossed  sensory  control, 
as  the  pyramidal  decussation  explains  the  crossed  motor  control 
of  the  cerebrum  in  relation  to  the  body.  After  this  decussation 
the  sensory  fibers  form  a  longitudinal  bundle  on  each  side  known 
as  the  median  fillet,  lemniscus,  or  laqueus,  which  in  the  pons  lies 
just  dorsal  to  the  pyramidal  fibers. 

The  fillet  fibers  may  be  traced  forward  as  far  as  the  anterior  collie- 


Fig.  86. — Cross-section  through  midbrain  (Kolliker)  to  show  the  position  of  the  fillet  (L,  L)  ; 
Nr,  The  red  nucleus ;  Sn,  the  substantia  nigra ;  Pp,  the  crus. 

ulus  of  the  corpora  quadrigemina  and  the  thalamus  (see  Fig.  86), 
and  some  are  said  to  continue  directly  into  the  cerebrum  by  way  of 
the  posterior  limb  of  the  internal  capsule  to  end  in  the  parietal  lobe 
posterior  to  the  fissure  of  Rolando.  Those  neurons  that  end  in  the 
midbrain  and  thalamus  are  continued  forward  by  a  third  neuron, 
which  ends  in  the  parietal  lobe  in  the  same  region  (see  Fig.  77,  C). 
On  its  way  through  the  medulla  and  pons  the  fillet  tract  is  believed 
to  receive  accessions  of  sensory  fibers  from  the  sensory  nuclei  of  the 
cranial  nerves  of  the  opposite  side.  The  course  of  the  fillet  has  been 
traced  by  various  means,  but  especially  by  the  method  of  myeliniza- 
tion  during  embryonic  life  and  by  degeneration  consequent  upon 
long-standing  disuse.     As  was  stated  in  the  section  upon  nerve  de- 


192        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

generation,  injury  to  an  axon  is  followed  quickly  by  degeneration  of 
the  peripheral  end,  and  much  more  slowly,  by  a  degeneration  of  the 
central  end  and  the  nerve  cell  itself,  when  the  path  is  not  again  estab- 
lished. Certain  long-standing  cystic  lesions  (porencephaly)  in  the 
parietal  cortex  have  resulted  in  an  atrophic  degeneration  of  the  fillet 
fibers,  thus  adding  materially  to  the  evidence  that  this  sensory  tract 
ends  eventually  in  the  region  indicated.* 

From  the  connections  of  the  fillet  with  the  tracts  of  the  pos- 
terior columns  of  the  cord  it  is  evident  that  it  forms  one  pathway 
at  least  for  the  fibers  of  muscle  sense.  Whether  or  not  the  fibers 
of  pressure,  pain,  and  temperature  take  the  same  route  is  not 
definitely  established,  but  it  seems  probable  at  least  from  the 
known  connections  of  the  fillet  with  the  sensory  nuclei  of  the  cranial 
nerves  and  with  the  sensory  tracts  of  the  lateral  as  well  as  the 
posterior  columns  of  the  cord.  Much  of  the  fillet  ends  in  the  mid- 
brain and  thalamus,  before  passing  on  to  the  cortex,  and  here,  as 
in  other  similar  cases,  we  have  the  possibility  that  the  lower  centers, 
in  addition  to  the  reflex  connections  which  they  make,  may  mediate 
also  a  conscious  reaction.  While  the  general  tendency  has  been 
to  confine  the  conscious  quality  of  the  central  reactions  to  the  cortex, 
there  is  no  proof  that  the  lower  centers  are  entirely  lacking 
in  this  property.  In  Goltz's  dog  without  cerebral  cortex,  for 
instance,  the  animal  responded  to  various  sensory  stimuli,  and 
when  hungry  gave  evidence,  so  far  as  his  actions  were  concerned, 
of  experiencing  the  sensations  of  hunger;  but  whether  or  not  these 
actions  were  associated  with  conscious  sensations  is  hidden  from 
us,  and  we  can  hope  to  arrive  at  positive  conclusions  upon  this 
point  only  by  observations  upon  man  himself. 

The  Center  for  Vision. — The  location  in  the  cortex  of  the 
general  area  for  vision  has  been  established  by  anatomical,  physio- 
logical, and  clinical  evidence.  The  physiologists  have  experimented 
chiefly  by  the  method  of  ablation.  Munk,  Ferrier,  and  later  ob- 
servers have  found  that  removal  of  both  occipital  lobes  is  followed 
by  defects  in  vision.  According  to  Munk,  removal  of  both  occip- 
ital lobes  is  followed  by  complete  loss  of  visual  sensations,  or,  as  he 
expresses  it,  by  cortical  blindness.  Goltz,  however,  contends  that  in 
the  dog  at  least  removal  of  the  entire  cerebral  cortex  leaves  the 
animal  with  some  degree  of  vision,  since  he  will  close  his  eyes  if  a 
strong  light  is  thrown  upon  them.  All  the  experiments  upon  the 
higher  mammals  (monkeys)  and  clinical  experience  upon  man 
tends,  however,  to  support  the  view  of  Munk.  Complete  removal 
of  the  occipital  lobes  is  followed  by  apparently  total  blindness. 
If  any  degree  of  vision  remains  it  is  not  sufficient  for  recogni- 
tion of  familiar  objects  or  for  directing  the  movements.  In  an 
*  Hosel,  "Archiv  f.  Psychiatrie,"  24,  452,  1892. 


SENSE    AREAS   AND    ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  193 

animal  in  this  condition  the  pupil  becomes  constricted  when  hght 
is  thrown  upon  the  eye ;  but  this  reaction  we  may  regard  as  a  reflex 
through  the  midbrain,  and  there  is  no  reason  to  beheve  that  it  is 
accompanied  by  a  visual  sensation.  When  the  injury  to  the  occip- 
ital cortex  is  unilateral  the  blindness  affects  symmetrical  halves  of 
the  two  eyes,  a  condition  known  as  hemiopia.  Destruction  of  the 
right  occipital  lobe  causes  blindness  in  the  two  right  halves  of  the 
eyes,  or  in  accordance  with  the  law  of  projection  of  retinal 
stimuli  in  the  two  left  halves  of  the  normal  visual  field  when 
the  eyes  are  fixed  upon  any  object.  Destruction  of  the  left  oc- 
cipital lobe  is  followed  by  blindness  in  the  two  left  halves  of  the 
retinas  or  the  right  halves  of  the  visual  field.  This  result  of 
physiological  experiments  is  borne  out  by  clinical  experience. 
Any  unilateral  injury  to  the  occipital  lobes  is  followed  by  a  con- 
dition of  hemiopia  more  or  less  complete  according  to  the  extent 
of  the  lesion.  Observation,  however,  has  shown  that  this  general 
symmetrical  relation  has  one  interesting  and  peculiar  exception. 
The  most  important  part  of  the  retina  in  vision  is  the  region  of  the 
foveas  centrales,  whose  projection  into  the  visual  field  constitutes 
the  field  of  direct  or  central  vision.  It  is  said  that  the  hemiopia 
from  unilateral  lesions  of  the  cortex  does  not  involve  this  part  of  the 
retina. 

The  Histological  Evidence. — The  histological  results  supple- 
ment in  a  very  satisfactory  way  the  findings  from  physiology  and 
pathology.  The  retina  itself,  considered  from  an  embryological 
standpoint,  is  an  outgrowth  from  the  brain  vesicles,  and  is  there- 
fore an  outlying  portion  of  the  central  nervous  system.  The  optic 
fibers,  in  terms  of  the  neuron  doctrine,  must  be  considered  as 
axons  of  the  nerve  cells  in  the  retina.  If,  therefore,  an  eye  is  enu- 
cleated or  an  optic  nerve  is  cut  the  fibers  connected  with  the 
brain  undergo  secondary  degeneration  and  their  course  can  be 
traced  microscopically  to  the  brain.  By  this  means  it  has  been 
shown  that  in  man  and  the  mammalia  there  is  a  partial  decus- 
sation of  the  optic  fibers  in  the  chiasma.  The  fibers  from  the 
inner  side  of  each  retina  cross  at  this  point  to  the  opposite  optic 
tract;  those  from  the  outer  side  of  the  retina  do  not  decussate, 
but  pass  into  the  optic  tract  of  the  same  side.  The  fibers  of  the 
optic  tract  end  mainly  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  external  genicu- 
late body,  but  some  pass  also  to  the  optic  thalamus  (pulvinar)  and 
some  to  the  anterior  colliculus  of  the  corpora  quaclrigemina.  These 
locations,  therefore,  particularly  the  external  geniculates,  must  be 
considered  as  the  primary  optic  centers.  From  these  points  the  path 
is  continued  toward  the  cortex  by  new  neurons  whose  axons  consti- 
tute a  special  bundle,  the  optic  radiation,  lying  in  the  posterior  limb 
of  the  internal  capsule  (see  Fig.  77,  D).  A  schema  representing 
13 


194        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

this  course  of  the  optic  fibers  is  given  in  the  accompanying  diagram 
(Fig.  87).  According  to  this  schema,  the  general  relations  of  each 
occipital  lobe  to  the  retinas  of  the  two  eyes  is  such  that  the  right 
occipital  cortex  represents  the  cortical  center  for  the  two  right 
halves  of  the  retinas,  while  the  left  occipital  lobe  is  the  center  for 
the  two  left  halves  of  each  retina, — a  relation  that  agrees  completely 
with  the  results  of  experimental  physiology  and  clinical  studies. 
In  addition  to  the  fibers  described,  which  may  be  regarded  as  the 


Occipital  lobe. 

Optic  radiation. 
Superior  coUiculus. 

Lateral  or  external  geniculate. 
Optic  thalamus. 


Optic  tract. 


Optic  chiasm. 


Optic  nerve. 


ST—    Retina. 


Fig.  87. — Diagram  to  indicate  the  general  course  of  the  fibers  of  the  optic  nerves  and  the 
bilateral  connection  between  cortex  and  retina. 


visual  fibers  proper,  there  are  other  fibers  in  the  optic  tracts  and 
optic  nerves  whose  physiological  value  is  not  entirely  clear.  The 
fibers  of  this  kind  that  have  been  described  are:  (1)  Posterior  or 
Gudden's  commissure.  Fibers  that  pass  from  one  optic  tract  to 
the  other  along  the  posterior  border  of  the  chiasma.  These  fibers 
form  a  commissural  band  connecting  the  two  internal  (or  median) 
geniculate  bodies,  and  possibly  also  the  inferior  colhculi.  It 
seems  probable  that  they  belong  to  the  central  auditory    path 


SENSE    AREAS    AND    ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  195 

rather  than  to  the  visual  system.  (2)  Fibers  passing  from  the 
chiasma  into  the  floor  of  the  third  ventricle.  The  further  course 
of  these  fibers  is  not  clearly  known,  but  it  is  possible  that  they  make 
connections  with  the  nuclei  of  the  third  nerve.  They  will  be  referred 
to  in  the  section  on  vision  in  connection  with  the  light  reflex  of 
the  iris.  (3)  An  anterior  commissure.  Several  observers  have 
claimed  that  there  is  a  commissural  band  along  the  anterior  margin 
of  the  chiasma  which  connects  one  optic  nerve  or  retina  with  the 
other.  In  accordance  with  this  claim  it  is  said  that  when  a  local 
lesion  is  made  experimentally  in  one  retina  the  degeneration  that 
extends  backward  along  the  corresponding  optic  nerve  is  contin- 
ued in  part  over  into  the  optic  nerve  of  the  other  side.  The  exist- 
ence of  this  interesting  commissural  connection  between  the  retinas 
is,  however,  still  a  matter  of  much  uncertainty. 

There  are  many  points  in  connection  with  the  course  of  the 
optic  fibers  and  the  physiology  of  the  different  parts  of  the  occip- 
ital cortex  which  are  unknown  and  require  further  investigation. 
Some  of  these  points  may  be  referred  to  briefly. 

The  Amount  of  Decussation  in  the  Chiasma. — According 
to  the  schema  given  above,  half  of  the  fibers  in  each  optic  nerve 
decussate  in  the  chiasma.  There  is,  however,  no  positive  proof 
that  the  division  of  the  fibers  is  so  symmetrically  made.  In  the 
lower  vertebrates, — fishes,  amphibia,  reptiles,  and  most  birds — • 
the  crossing  is  said  to  be  complete,  while  in  the  mammalia  a  certain 
proportion  of  the  fibers  remain  in  the  optic  tract  of  the  same  side. 
In  a  general  way,  it  would  appear  that  the  higher  the  animal  is 
in  the  scale  of  development  the  larger  is  the  number  of  fibers  that 
do  not  cross  in  the  chiasma.  At  least  it  is  true  that  a  larger  num- 
ber remain  uncrossed  in  man  than  in  any  of  the  mammalia,  and  it  is 
also  possible  or  probable  that  the  extent  of  decussation  in  man 
shows  individual  differences.  There  seems  to  be  no  acceptable 
suggestion  regarding  the  physiological  value  of  this  partial  decus- 
sation other  than  that  of  a  probable  relation  to  binocular  vision.  It 
has  been  used  to  explain  the  physiological  fact  that  simultaneous 
stimulation  of  symmetrical  points  in  the  two  retinas  gives  us  a 
single  visual  sensation. 

The  Projection  or  Localization  of  the  Retina  on  the 
Occipital  Cortex. — It  would  seem  most  probable  that  the  paths 
from  each  spot  in  the  retina  terminate  in  a  definite  region  of  the 
occipital  cortex,  and  attempts  have  been  made  by  various  methods 
to  determine  this  relation.  According  to  Henschen,*  the  visual 
paths  in  man  end  around  the  calcarine  fissure  (Fig.  82)  on  the 
mesial  surface  of  the  brain,  and  this  portion  of  the  occipital  lobe 
should  be  regarded  as  the  true  cortical  center  for  vision,  the  re- 
*  Henschen,  "Brain,"  1893,  170. 


196 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 


mainder  of  the  occipital  cortex  being  perhaps  the  seat  of  visual 
memories  or  associations.  There  seems  to  be  much  evidence 
indeed  that  the  immediate  ending  of  the  optic  paths  lies  in  this 
region.  Thus,  Donaldson*  found,  upon  examination  of  the  brain 
of  Laura  Bridgman, — the  blind  deaf-mute,  that  the  cuneus  espe- 
cially showed  marked  atrophy,  and  clinical  cases  of  lesions  of  the 
cuneus  have  been  found  to  be  associated  with  a  marked  degree  of 
hemiopia.  So  also  Flechsig,t  by  means  of  the  myelinization 
method,  finds  that  the  optic  fibers  end  chiefly  along  the  margin 
of  the  calcarine  fissure.     It   has  been   assumed   that   the  fibers 

from  the  fovea  of  the  retina 

LEFT  RETINA  RIGHT  RETINA  j    •         j.1,-  •  T 

end  m  this  region, — according 
to  some  authors  (Henschen) 
along  the  anterior  third  of  the 
fissure,  according  to  others 
(Schinid  and  LaqueurJ)  along 
the  posterior  portion  of  the 
fissure.  Moreover,  since  uni- 
lateral lesions  of  the  occipital 
lobe,  however  extensive,  do 
not  cause  complete  blindness 
of  the  foveal  region,  it  has 
been  supposed  that  this  im- 
portant part  of  the  retina  is 
bilaterally  represented  in  the 
cortex,  as  indicated  in  the  ac- 
companying diagram  (Fig.  88) ; 
so  that  complete  foveal  blind- 
ness— that  is,  blindness  of  the 
centers  of  the  visual  fields — can 
only  occur  when  both  occipital 
lobes  are  injured  in  the  region 
of  the  calcarine  fissure.  While 
the  general  opinion  seems  to 
be  that  this  last-named  region  is  the  main  cortical  ending  of  the 
retinal  fibers,  especially  of  those  arising  from  the  foveal  area,  other 
observers  contend  that  the  entire  occipital  cortex,  lateral  as  well  as 
mesial  surfaces,  must  be  regarded  as  the  cortical  termination  of  the 
visual  paths,  and  that  even  the  foveal  portion  of  the  retina  is  con- 
nected with  a  wide  area  in  this  lobe.  Monakow,  for  instance,  points 
out  that,  while  extensive  lesions  of  the  occipital  cortex  on  both 
sides,  leave,  with  a  few  exceptions,  some  degree  of  central  vision, 

*  Donaldson,  "American  Journal  of  Psychology,"  1892,  4. 

t  Flechsig,  "Localization  der  geistigen  Vorgange,"  Leipzig,  1896. 

j  Schmid  and  Laqueur,  "Virchow's  Archiv,"  158,  1900. 


Cc/pi't/^^ 


Fig.  88. — Diagram  showing  the  probable 
relations  between  the  parts  of  the  retina  and 
the  visual  area  of  the  cortex. — (From  Scha- 
fer.)  The  bilateral  representation  of  the 
fovea  is  indicated  by  the  course  of  the  dotted 
lines. 


SENSE    AREAS    AND    ASSOCIATION    AREAS.  197 

no  cases  are  reported  of  cortical  lesions  involving  only  or  mainly 
the  vision  in  the  macular  region.  He  therefore  argues  that,  while 
the  paths  from  the  retina  to  the  lower  visual  centers  (external 
geniculate)  may  be  isolated,  the  further  connections  with  the 
cortex  must  be  widespread.  The  cortical  center  for  distinct  vision 
according  to  this  view  is  not  limited  to  a  narrow  area,  but  must 
involve  a  large  region  in  the  occipital  cortex.  It  is  difficult  to 
reconcile  this  view  with  the  ideas  of  isolated  conduction  and  specific 
function  of  each  part  of  the  cortex,  and  it  is  very  evident  that  the 
projection  of  the  retinas  upon  the  cortex  is  a  question  that  must 
be  left  for  further  observation  and  experiment.  Some  light  was 
supposed  to  be  thrown  upon  the  subject  from  the  results  of  stimula- 
tion of  the  occipital  cortex.  Stimulation  of  this  kind  causes  move- 
ments of  the  eyes,  and  the  movements  vary  with  the  place  stimu- 
lated.* Stimulation  of  the  upper  border  of  the  lobe  causes  move- 
ments of  the  eyes  downward,  stimulation  of  the  lower  border  move- 
ments upward  and  of  intermediate  regions  movements  to  the  side. 
Assuming  that  the  direction  of  the  movement  is  associated  with 
movements  toward  that  part  of  the  visual  field  from  which  a 
normal  visual  stimulus  would  come,  it  is  evident  that  movements 
of  the  eyes  downward  would  imply  stimulation  of  the  upper  half 
of  the  retina,  since  objects  in  the  lower  part  of  the  visual  field 
form  their  image  on  the  upper  half  of  the  retina.  Following  this 
suggestion,  the  projection  of  the  retinas  on  the  occipital  lobes,  or 
the  cortical  representation  of  the  retinas  on  the  occipital  cortex 
might  be  represented  by  a  definite  schema.  Such  a  definite  rela- 
tionship, however,  as  stated  above,  is  not  borne  out  by  clinical  facts. 
The  fact  that  stimulation  of  the  occipital  cortex  causes  definite 
movements  of  the  eyeballs  seems,  however,  to  be  demonstrated  and 
it  implies  that  there  are  efferent  fibers  in  the  optic  radiation  running 
from  the  occipital  cortex  to  the  midbrain,  where  they  make  con- 
nections with  the  motor  nuclei  of  the  third,  fourth,  and  sixth  cranial 
nerves. 

The  Function  of  the  Lower  Visual  Centers. — The  first 
ending  of  the  optic  fibers  lies  in  the  external  geniculate  and  to  a 
lesser  extent  in  the  thalamus  and  superior  colliculus.  It  is  con- 
ceivable, of  course,  that  some  degree  of  visual  sensation  may  be 
mediated  through  these  centers.  Goltz  observed  that  in  dogs  with 
the  cerebrum  removed  the  animals  showed  a  constriction  of  the 
pupils  when  a  bright  light  was  thrown  upon  the  eyes,  or  even  closed 
the  eyes.  It  is  the  general  belief  that  reactions  of  this  kind  are  me- 
chanical reflexes  accompanied  by  no  higher  psychical  reaction  than 
in  the  case  of  spinal  reflexes.  The  existence  in  the  midbrain  of  the 
motor  nuclei  of  the  third  nerve,  and  of  the  posterior  longitudinal 
*Schafer,  "Brain,"  11,  1,  18S9,  and  13,  165,  1890. 


198        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

bundle  through  which  connections  are  established  with  the  motor 
nuclei  of  other  cranial  nerves,  furnishes  us  with  a  possible  reflex 
arc  through  which  the  visual  impulses  brought  into  the  lower  optic 
centers  may  cause  co-ordinated  movements  of  the  eyes  or  of  the 
head.  Usually  it  is  assumed  that  conscious  visual  sensations,  and 
especially  visual  associations  and  memories,  are  aroused  only  after 
the  impulses  reach  the  occipital  cortex.  In  the  fishes  the  midbrain 
forms  the  final  ending  of  the  optic  fibers  and  in  these  animals, 
therefore,  whatever  psychical  activity  accompanies  the  visual  proc- 
esses must  be  mediated  through  this  portion  of  the  brain.  In  the 
higher  animals,  hoAvever,  the  development  of  a  cerebral  cortex  is 
followed  by  the  evolution  of  the  optic  radiation,  and  as  the  con- 
nections of  the  occipital  cortex  increase  in  importance  those  of 
the  midbrain  (with  the  optic  fibers)  dwindle  correspondingly. 
Here,  as  in  other  cases,  the  psychical  activity  is  concentrated  in 
the  portions  of  the  brain  lying  most  anteriorly,  and  doubtless  the 
degree  of  consciousness  is  greatly  intensified  in  the  higher  animals 
in  correspondence  with  the  development  of  the  cerebral  cortex 
whose  striking  characteristic  is  its  capacity  to  evoke  a  psychical 
reaction. 

The  Auditory  Center. — The  location  of  the  auditory  area  has 
been  investigated  along  lines  similar  to  those  used  for  the  visual 
center.  The  experimental  physiological  work  has  yielded  varying 
results  in  the  hands  of  different  observers.  Munk  and  Ferrier 
placed  the  cortical  center  for  hearing  in  the  temporal  lobe,  and 
in  spite  of  negative  results  by  Schafer  and  others  this  localization 
has  been  shown  to  be  substantially  correct.  Entire  ablation  of 
both  temporal  lobes  is  followed  by  complete  deafness.  Ablation 
on  one  side,  however,  is  followed  only  by  impairment  of  hearing, 
and  in  the  light  of  the  results  from  histology  and  from  the  clinical 
side  it  seems  probable  that  the  connections  of  the  auditory  cortex 
with  the  ear  follow  the  general  schema  of  the  optical  system  rather 
than  that  of  the  body  senses.  That  is,  it  is  probable  that  the 
auditory  fibers  from  each  ear  end  partly  on  the  same  side  and 
partly  or  mainly  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  cerebrum.  The  exact 
portion  of  the  temporal  lobe  that  serves  as  the  immediate  organ 
of  auditory  sensations  cannot  be  determined  with  certainty,  but 
it  seems  certain  that  it  lies  mainly  in  the  superior  temporal  gyrus, 
and  the  transverse  gyri  extending  from  this  into  the  fissure  of 
Sylvius. 

The  Histological  Evidence. — On  the  histological  side  the  paths  of 
the  auditory  fibers  have  been  followed  with  a  large  measure  of  suc- 
cess, although  in  many  details  the  opinions  of  the  different  investi- 
gators vary  considerably.  The  eighth  cranial  nerve  springs  from  the 
bulb  by  two  roots:  the  external  and  the  internal.     The  former  has 


SENSE   AREAS   AND   ASSOCIATION   AREAS. 


199 


been  shown  to  supply,  mainly  at  least,  the  cochlear  portion  of  the 
internal  ear,  and  is,  therefore,  the  auditory  nerve  proper.  This 
division  is  spoken  of  as  the  cochlear  branch.  The  internal  root  sup- 
plies mainly  the  vestibular  branch  of  the  internal  ear,  and  is  there- 
fore spoken  of  as  the  vestibular  branch  (see  Fig.  89) .  It  seems  cer- 
tain that  the  latter  is  not  an  auditory  nerve,  but  is  concerned 
with  peculiar  sensations  that  have  an  important  influence  on  mus- 
cular activity,  especially  in  complex  movements.  The  central 
course  of  these  two  roots  is  quite  as  distinct  as  their  peripheral 

Posterior  nucleus. 


Deiters's  nucleus. 

Dorsal  nucleus. 
Ventral  nucleus. 

Cochlear  branch. 


—  Vestibular  branch. 


Semicircular 
canals. 

Scarpa's  ganglion. 

Cochlea. 

Spiral  ganglion. 
Fig.  89. — The  medullary  nuclei  of  the  eighth  nerve. — (From  Poirier  and  Charpy.) 


distribution, — a  fact  that  bears  out  the  supposition  that  they  medi- 
ate different  functions.  The  central  course  of  the  cochlear  branch 
is  indicated  schematically  in  Figs.  89  and  90.  The  fibers  con- 
stituting this  branch  arise  from  nerve  cells  in  the  modiolus  of  the 
cochlea, — the  spiral  ganglion.  These  cells,  like  those  in  the  posterior 
root  ganglia,  are  bipolar.  One  axon  passes  peripherally  to  end  around 
the  sense  cells  of  the  cochlea,  at  which  point  the  sound  .waves  arouse 
the  nerve  impulses.  The  other  axon  passes  toward  the  pons,  forming 
one  of  the  fibers  of  the  cochlear  branch.  On  entering  the  pons 
these  cochlear  branches  end  in  two  nuclei,  one  lying  ventral  to  the 


200 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 


restiform  body  and  known  as  the  ventral  or  accessory  nucleus 
{V.n.,  Fig.  90),  and  one  dorsally,  known  as  the  dorsal  nucleus  or 
the  tuberculum  acusticum  (D.n.).  From  these  nuclei  the  path 
is  continued  by  secondary  sensory  neurons,  and  its  further 
course  toward  the  brain  is  still  a  matter  of  much  uncertainty 
in  regard  to  many  of  the  details.*  The  general  course  of  the 
fibers,  however,  is  known.  Those  axons  that  arise  from  the 
accessory  nucleus  pass  mainly  to  the  opposite  side  by  slightly 
different  routes  (Fig.  90) .  Some  strike  directly  across  toward  the 
vental  side  of  the  pons,  forming  a  conspicuous  band  of  transverse 

fibers  that  has  long  been 
known  as  the  corpus 
trapezoideum;  others 
pass  dorsally  around 
the  restiform  body  and 
then  course  downward 
through  the  tegmental 
region  to  enter  the  cor- 
pus trapezoideum.  The 
fibers  of  this  cross  band 
end,  according  to  some 
observers,  in  certain  nu- 
clei of  gray  matter  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  pons, 
especially  in  the  superior 
olivary  body  and  the 
trapezoidal  nucleus,  and 
thence  the  path  forward 
is  continued  by  a  third 
neuron.  Certainly  from 
the  level  of  the  superior 
olivary  body  the  audi- 
tory fibers  form  a  dis- 
tinct band  long  known 
to  the  anatomist  and  des- 
ignated as  the  lateral  fillet  or  lateral  lemniscus.  Authors  differ 
as  to  whether  the  fibers  of  this  tract  arise  from  nerve  cells  in  the 
superior  olivary  and  neighboring  nuclei,  or  are  the  fibers  from  the 
accessory  nucleus  which  pass  by  the  superior  olivary  body  with- 
out ending  and  then  bend  to  run  forward  in  a  longitudinal  direc- 
tion. This  last  view  is  represented  in  the  schema  (Fig.  90).  The 
secondary  sensory  fibers  that  arise  in  the  tuberculum  acusticum 
pass  dorsally  and  then  transversely,  forming  a  band  of  fibers  that 
comes  so  near  to  the  surface  of  the  floor  of  the  fourth  ventricle  as  to 
*  For  literature  see  Van  Gehuchten,  "Le  Nevraxe,"  4,  253,  1903. 


Fig.  90. — Diagram  to  show  central  course  of 
auditory  fibers  (modified  from  Van  Gehuchten) : 
D.n.,  Dorsal  nucleus  giving  rise  to  the  fibers  that 
form  the  auditory  striae  (a.s.);  V.n.,  the  ventral  nu- 
cleus, giving  origin  to  the  fibers  of  the  corpus  trape- 
zoideum (dr.);  S.O.,  superior  olivary  nucleus;  l.f., 
lateral  fillet;  n.s.,  nucleus  of  the  lateral  fillet;  t.g.i., 
the  inferior  coUiculus. 


SENSE   AREAS    AND   ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  201 

form  a  structure  visible  to  the  eye  and  known  as  the  medullary  or 
auditory  striae.  The  fibers  of  this  system  dip  inward  at  the  raphe, 
cross  the  mid-line,  and  a  part  of  them  at  least  eventually  reach  the 
lateral  fillet  of  the  other  side  either  with  or  without  ending  first 
around  the  cells  of  the  superior  olivary  nucleus.  According  to 
the  description  of  some  authors,  the  fibers  from  the  accessory  nu- 
cleus and  tuberculum  acusticum  do  not  all  cross  the  mid-line  to  reach 
the  lateral  fillet  of  the  other  side ;  some  of  them  pass  into  the  lateral 
fillet  of  the  same  side ;  so  that  the  relations  of  the  fibers  of  the  coch- 
lear nerves  to  the  lateral  fillet  resemble,  in  the  matter  of  crossing, 
the  relations  of  the  optic  fibers  to  the  optic  tract.  After  entering 
the  lateral  fillet  the  auditory  fibers  pass  forward  toward  the  midbrain 
and  end  in  part  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  inferior  colliculus,  of  the 
median  or  internal  geniculate,  and,  according  to  Van  Gehuchten, 
in  a  small  mass  of  nerve  cells  in  the  midbrain  known  as  the  superior 
nucleus  of  the  fillet.  From  this  second  or  third  termination  an- 
other set  of  fibers,  the  auditory  radiation,  continues  forward  through 
the  posterior  extremity  of  the  interior  capsule  to  end  in  the  superior 
temporal  gyrus  (see  Fig.  77,  E).  According  to  Flechsig,*  who  has 
studied  the  course  of  these  fibers  in  the  embryo  by  the  myeliniza- 
tion  method,  the  main  group  passes  from  the  internal  geniculates  to 
the  transverse  gyri  of  the  temporal  lobe  within  the  fissure  of  Sylvius. 
The  internal  geniculates,  in  man  at  least,  have  therefore  the  func- 
tion of  a  subordinate  auditory  center,  as  the  external  geniculates 
have  the  function  of  a  subordinate  visual  center.  The  internal 
geniculates  are  connected  with  the  inferior  colliculus,  and  also,  it 
will  be  remembered,  with  each  other,  by  commissural  fibers  (Gud- 
den's  commissure)  that  pass  along  the  optic  tracts  and  the  posterior 
margin  of  the  chiasma.  The  auditory  path,  therefore,  involves  the 
following  structures:  The  spiral  ganglion,  the  cochlear  nerve, 
accessory  nucleus  and  tuberculum  acusticum,  corpus  trapezoideum, 
medullary  striae,  superior  olivary,  lateral  fillet,  inferior  colliculus, 
median  geniculate,  Gudden's  commissure,  auditory  radiation,  and 
temporal  cortex. 

The  Physiological  Significance  of  the  Lower  Auditory  Cen- 
ters.— The  auditory  path  connects  directly  with  two  or  three  sets 
of  nerve  cells  before  terminating  finally  in  the  cortex.  The  lower 
centers  in  pons,  midbrain,  or  thalamencephalon  connect  probably 
with  motor  paths  through  which  co-ordinated  reflex  movements 
may  be  effected.  But  whether  or  not  any  perceptible  degree  of  con- 
sciousness can  be  mediated  through  these  lower  centers  remains 
undetermined.  Goltz's  dog  without  its  cerebrum  could  be  awak- 
ened from  sleep  by  loud  noises,  and  Schafer  contends  that  in 
monkeys  the  removal  of  both  temporal  lobes  is  not  followed  by 
*  Flechsig,  "Localisation  der  geistigen  Vorgange,"  Leipzig,  1896. 


202        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

complete  deafness.  As  in  the  case  of  vision,  questions  of  this  kind 
will  eventually  find  their  most  satisfactory  answer  from  the  study 
of  the  results  of  pathological  lesions  in  man. 

The  Motor  Responses  from  the  Auditory  Cortex. — Accord- 
ing to  Ferrier,  stimulation  of  the  cortex  of  the  temporal  lobe  (infe- 
rior convolution)  causes  definite  movements,  such  as  pricking  of 
the  ears  and  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  opposite  side. 
As  in  the  case  of  the  visual  area,  therefore,  we  must  suppose  that 
distinct  motor  paths  originate  in  the  auditory  region,  and  it  is 
natural  to  suppose  that  these  paths  give  a  means  for  cortical  reflex 
movements  following  upon  auditory  stimulation. 

The  Olfactory  Center. — The  olfactory  sense  is  quite  un- 
equally developed  in  different  mammals.  Broca  divided  them  from 
this  standpoint  into  two  classes:  the  osmatic  and  the  anosmatic 
group,  the  latter  including  the  cetacea  (whales,  porpoise,  dolphin) . 
The  osmatic  group  in  turn  has  been  divided  into  the  microsmatic 
and  macrosmatic  animals,  the  latter  class  including  those  animals 
in  which  the  sense  of  smell  is  highly  developed,  such  as  the  dog 
and  rabbit,  while  the  former  includes  those  animals,  such  as  man, 
in  which  this  sense  is  relatively  rudimentary.*  The  peripheral  end- 
organ  of  smell  consists  of  the  olfactory  epithelium  in  the  upper 
portion  of  the  nasal  chambers.  The  physiology  of  this  organ  will 
be  considered  in  the  section  on  special  senses.  The  epithelial 
cells  of  which  it  consists  are  comparable  to  bipolar  ganglion 
cells.  The  processes  or  hairs  that  project  into  the  nasal  chamber 
are  acted  upon  by  the  olfactory  stimuli,  and  the  impulses  thus 
aroused  are  conveyed  by  the  basal  processes  of  the  cells,  the  olfac- 
tory fibers,  through  the  cribriform  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone  into 
the  olfactory  bulb. 

The  Olfactory  Bulb  and  its  Connections. — The  olfactory 
bulbs  are  outgrowths  from  and  portions  of  the  cerebral  hemi- 
spheres. Each  bulb  is  connected  with  the  cerebral  hemispheres 
by  its  olfactory  tract.  The  connections  established  by  the  fibers 
of  this  tract  are  widespread,  complicated,  and  in  part  incom- 
pletely known.  All  those  portions  of  the  brain  connected  with 
the  sense  of  smell  are  sometimes  grouped  together  as  the  rhinen- 
cephalon.  According  to  von  Kolliker,  the  parts  included  under 
this  designation  are,  in  addition  to  the  olfactory  bulb  and  tract, 
Ammon's  horn,  the  fascia  dentata,  the  hippocampal  lobe,  the  fornix, 
the  septum  lucidum,  and  the  anterior  commissure.  The  schematic 
connections  of  the  olfactory  fibers  are  as  follows  (Fig.  91) :  After 
entering  the  olfactory  lobe  the  fibers  terminate  in  certain  globular 
bodies,  the  glomeruli  olfactorii  (5), whose  diameter  varies  from  0.1  to 
0.3  mm.    Here  connections  are  made  by  contact  with  the  dendrites 

*  See  Barker,  "The  Nervous  System,"  1899,  for  references  to  literature. 


SENSE   AREAS   AND    ASSOCIATION   AREAS. 


203 


of  nerve  cells  of  the  olfactory  lobe,  the  mitral  and  brush  cells  (C). 
The  axons  of  these  cells  pass  toward  the  brain  in  the  olfactory  tract. 
Three  bundles  of  these  fibers  are  distinguished:  (1)  The  precommis- 
sural bundle,  the  fibers  of  which  terminate  in  part  in  nerve  cells  sit- 
uated in  the  tract  itself,  but,  for  the  most  part,  enter  the  anterior 
commissure  and  pass  to  the  same  or  the  opposite  side,  to  end  in  the 
hippocampal  lobes  or  other  gray  matter  belonging  to  the  rhinen- 
cephalon.  (2)  The  mesial  bundle,  the  fibers  of  which  terminate 
in  the  gray  matter  adjacent  to  the  base  of  the  olfactory  tract, 


Fig.  91. — Diagram  of  the  central  course  of  the  olfactory  fibers:  /,  Olfactory  bulb; 
//,  olfactory  tract;  ///,  cortex  of  the  hippocampal  lobe  (gyrus  uncinatus) ;  IV,  anterior 
commissure,  olfactory  portion;  A,  olfactory  epithelial  cells  of  nose  (their  fibers,  olfactory 
nerve  fibers,  terminate  in  the  glomeruli  of  the  bulb) ;  B,  glomeruli  of  olfactory  bulb  where 
the  olfactory  fibers  come  in  contact  with  the  dendrites  of  the  mitral  cells;  C,  mitral  and 
brush  cells;  1,  2,  3,  axons  from  the  mitral  cells  constituting  the  fibers  of  the  olfactory 
tract.  Fibers  3,  which  enter  the  commissure,  arise,  according  to  some  observers,  from 
cells  in  the  olfactory  lobe  near  the  base  of  the  tract. 


the  tuberculum  olfactorium,  whence  the  path  is  probably  continued 
by  other  neurons  to  the  region  of  the  hippocampal  lobe.  (3)  The 
lateral  tract,  whose  fibers  seem  to  pass  to  the  hippocampal  lobe  of 
the  same  side.  According  to  Van  Gehuchten,*  none  of  the  fibers 
of  the  anterior  commissure  arise  from  the  nerve  cells  in  the  olfactory 
bulb.  He  considers  that  the  fibers  in  the  olfactory  portion  of  this 
commissure  constitute  an  association  system  connecting  the  olfac- 
tory lobe  of  one  side  with  the  olfactory  bulb  of  the  other  side. 

*  Van  Gehuchten,  "Le  Nevraxe,"  6,  191,  1904. 


204        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

The    Cortical   Center  for  Smell. — So  far  as  the   histological 

evidence  goes,  it  tends  to  show  that  the  chief  cortical  termination 
of  the  olfactory  paths  is  found  in  the  hippocampal  lobe,  especially 
its  distal  portion,  the  gyrus  uncinatus.  The  experimental  evi- 
dence from  the  side  of  physiology  points  in  the  same  direction, 
Ferrier  states  that  electrical  stimulation  in  this  region  is  followed  by 
a  torsion  of  the  lips  and  nostrils  of  the  same  side,  muscular  move- 
ments that  accompany  usually  strong  olfactory  sensations.  On 
the  other  hand,  ablations  of  these  regions  are  followed  by  defects 
in  the  sense  of  smell.  The  experimental  evidence  is  not  very 
satisfactory,  owing  to  the  technical  difficulties  in  operating  upon 
these  portions  of  the  brain  without  at  the  same  time  involving 
neighboring  regions.  There  is  some  clinical  evidence  also  that 
lesions  in  this  region  involve  the  sense  of  smell.  Thus  Carbonieri 
records  that  a  tumor  in  this  portion  of  the  temporal  lobe  occa- 
sioned epileptic  attacks  which  were  accompanied  by  nauseating 
odors. 

The  Cortical  Center  for  Taste  Sensations. — Practically 
nothing  definite  is  known  concerning  the  central  paths  and  cortical 
termination  of  the  taste  fibers.  The  course  of  these  fibers  in  the 
peripheral  nerves  has  been  much  investigated  and  the  facts  are 
mentioned  in  the  section  upon  "special  senses."  It  is  usually 
assumed,  although  without  much  decisive  proof,  that  the  cortical 
center  lies  also  in  the  hippocampal  convolution  posterior  to  the 
area  of  olfaction.  Experimental  lesions  in  this  region,  according 
to  Ferrier,  are  accompanied  by  disturbances  of  the  sense  of  taste. 
On  embryological  grounds  Flechsig  supposes  that  the  cortical 
center  may  lie  in  the  posterior  portion  of  the  gyrus  fornicatus 
(6,  Fig.  94). 

Aphasia. — The  term  aphasia  means  literally  the  loss  of  the 
power  of  speech.  It  was  used  originally  to  indicate  the  condition  of 
those  who  from  accident  or  disease  affecting  the  brain  had  lost  in 
part  or  entirely  the  power  of  expressing  themselves  in  spoken  words, 
but  the  term  as  a  general  expression  is  now  extended  to  include 
those  who  are  unable  to  understand  spoken  or  written  language, — 
that  is,  those  who  are  word-blind  or  word-deaf.  It  is  usual,  there- 
fore, to  distinguish  sensory  aphasia  from  motor  aphasia.  By  the 
latter  term  is  meant  the  condition  of  those  who  are  unable  to  speak, 
and  by  sensory  aphasia  those  who  are  unable  to  understand  the 
written,  printed,  or  spoken  symbols  of  words. 

Motor  Aphasia. — A  condition  of  motor  aphasia  not  infrequently 
results  from  injuries  to  the  head  or  from  hemorrhage  in  the  region 
of  the  middle  cerebral  artery.  The  first  exact  knowledge  of  the 
portion  of  the  brain  involved  seems  to  have  been  obtained  by 
Bouillaud  (1825)  as  the  result  of  numerous  autopsies. 


SENSE   AREAS   AND   ASSOCIATION    AREAS.  205 

(It  is  a  curious  fact  that  Bouillaud's  observations  were  inspired  by  the  work 
of  Gall.  Gall  having  observed,  as  he  thought,  that  individuals  who  are  fluent 
speakers  or  who  have  retentive  memories  are  characterized  by  projecting  eyes, 
concluded  that  this  peculiarity  is  due  to  the  larger  size  of  the  lower  part  of  the 
frontal  lobe,  and  he  therefore  located  the  faculty  of  speech  in  this  region  of  the 
brain.  In  spite  of  the  vagaries  into  which  he  was  led  by  his  false  methods  Gall 
made  many  most  important  contributions  to  our  knowledge  of  the  anatomy  of 
the  brain  and  the  cord.  The  discovery  of  the  location  of  the  center  of  speech, 
however,  cannot  be  rightly  placed  to  his  credit,  since  his  reasons  for  its  location 
were,  so  far  as  we  know,  entirely  unjustified.  It  cannot  be  reckoned  as  more 
than  a  coincidence  that  in  this  particular  his  phrenological  localization  was 
afterward  in  a  ineasure  justified  by  facts.) 

The  essential  truth  of  Bouillaud's  observations  was  established 
by  other  observers,  and  Broca  especially  located  the  part  of  the 
brain  involved  in  these  lesions  in  the  posterior  part  of  the  third  or 
inferior  frontal  convolution.  This  region  is,  therefore,  frequently 
known  as  Broca's  convolution  or  Broca's  center.  Subsequent  ob- 
servations have  abundantly  confirmed  this  localization,  and  what 
is  designated  as  the  "speech  center"  is  placed  in  the  inferior  frontal 
convolution  in  the  gyrus  surrounding  the  anterior  or  ascending 
limb  of  the  fissure  of  Sylvius  (S,  Fig.  92.)  Moreover,  autopsies  have 
shown  that  in  right-handed  persons  this  center  is  placed  or  is  func- 
tional usually  in  the  left  cerebral  hemisphere,  while  in  the  case  of  left- 
handed  individuals  aphasia  and  paralysis  are  produced  by  lesions 
involving  the  right  side  of  the  brain.  This  region  is  not  the  direct 
cortical  motor  center  for  the  muscles  of  speech.  It  is  possible  that 
aphasia  may  exist  without  paralysis  of  these  latter  muscles.  It 
is  rather  the  memory  center  of  the  motor  innervations  necessary 
to  form  the  appropriate  sounds  or  words  with  which  we  have  learned 
to  express  certain  concepts.  The  child  is  taught  to  express  certain 
ideas  by  definite  words,  and  the  memory  apparatus  through  which 
these  associations  are  transmitted  to  the  motor  apparatus  may 
be  conceived  as  located  in  the  speech  center.  Lesions  of  any  kind 
affecting  this  area  will  therefore  destroy  more  or  less  the  ability  to 
use  appropriately  spoken  words,  and  clinical  experience  shows  that 
motor  aphasia  may  be  exhibited  in  all  degrees  of  completeness  and 
in  many  curious  varieties.  The  individual  may  retain  the  power  to 
use  a  limited  number  of  words,  with  which  he  expresses  his  whole 
range  of  ideas,  as,  for  instance,  in  the  case  described  by  Broca,* 
in  which  the  individual  retained  for  the  expression  of  numbers  only 
the  word  three,  and  was  obliged  to  make  this  word  do  duty  for  all 
numerical  concepts.  Other  cases  are  recorded  in  which  the  patient 
had  lost  only  the  power  to  use  names — that  is,  nouns  (Marie) — 
or  could  remember  only  the  initial  letters.  Others  still  in  which 
words  could  be  used  only  when  associated  with  musical  memories, 
as  in  singing.     It  does  not  seem  to  be  certain  whether  or  not,  in 

*  Exner,  "Hermann's  Handbuch  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  iii,  part  ii,  p.  342. 
Consult  for  older  literature. 


206 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 


the  case  of  complete  lesion  of  the  center  on  one  side,  that  of  the 
other  can  be  taught  to  assume  its  function.  Some  recorded  cases 
seem  to  indicate  that  this  substitution  is  possible  in  the  young, 
while  in  the  old  it  is  more  difficult  or  impossible.  We  express  our 
thoughts  not  only  in  spoken  but  also  in  written  symbols.  As  this 
latter  form  of  expression  involves  a  different  set  of  muscles,  and  a 
different  educational  experience,  it  is  natural  to  assume  that  the 
complex  associations  concerned,  or,  to  use  a  convenient  expression, 
the  memory  centers,  should  involve  a  different  part  of  the  cortex. 
It  is,  in  fact,  observed  that  some  aphasics  exhibit  the  symptom 
of  loss  of  power  to  write, — a  condition  designated  as  agraphia. 
The  area  in  which  the  motor  associations  for  the  act  of  writing 

are  located  is  placed 
in  the  middle  or  sec- 
ond frontal  convolu- 
tion contiguous  to  the 
cortical  motor  centers 
for  the  muscles  of  the 
arm  and  hand  (W, 
Fig.  92). 

Sensory  Aphasia. — 
In  sensory  aphasia  * 
(amnesia)  the  individ- 
ual suffers  from  an 
inability  to  under- 
stand spoken  or  writ- 
ten language,  and  as 
the  cortical  centers  for 
hearing  and  seeing  are 
situated  in  distinct 
parts  of  the  brain,  we 
should  expect  that  the 
mechanism 'for  the  association,  in  one  case  of  visual  memories  of 
verbal  symbols  with  certain  concepts  and  in  the  other  case  of 
auditory  memories,  should  also  be  located  in  separate  regions. 
Inabihty  to  understand  spoken  language,  or  word-deafness,  is,  in 
fact,  usually  attributed  to  a  lesion  involving  the  first  temporal 
convolution  contiguous  to  the  cortical  sense  of  hearing  {H,  Fig.  92), 
while  loss  of  power  to  understand  written  or  printed  language,  word- 
blindness,  is  traced  to  lesions  involving  the  inferior  parietal  con- 
volution, the  gyrus  angularis,  contiguous  to  the  occipital  visual 
center  (7,  Fig.  92).  These  two  conditions  may  occur  together, 
but  cases  are  recorded  in  which  they  existed  independently.     It 

*  Consult  Starr,  "Aphasia,"  "Transactions  of  the  Congress  of  American. 
Physicians  and  Surgeons,"  vol.  i,  p.  329,  1888. 


Fig.  92. — Lateral  view  of  a  human  hemisphere; 
cortical  area  V,  damage  to  which  produces  "mind- 
blindness"  (word-blindness);  cortical  area  H,  damage 
to  which  produces  "mind-deafness"  (word-deafness); 
cortical  area  S,  damage  to  which  causes  the  loss  of 
audible  speech ;  cortical  area  W,  damage  to  which  abol- 
ishes the  power  of  writing. — (Donaldson.) 


SENSE   AREAS   AND   ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  207 

may  be  imagined  that  the  individual  suffering  from  word-bUndness 
alone  is  essentially  in  the  condition  of  one  who  attempts  to  read 
a  foreign  language.  The  power  of  vision  exists,  but  the  verbal 
symbols  have  no  associations,  therefore  no  meaning.  So  one  who  is 
word-deaf  alone  may  be  compared  to  the  normal  individual  who  is 
spoken  to  in  a  foreign  tongue.  The  words  are  heard,  but  they  have 
no  associations  with  past  experience. 

The  general  facts  regarding  aphasia  illustrate  excellently  the 
modern  conception  of  cerebral  localization.  The  understanding 
and  the  use  of  spoken  or  written  language  is,  so  to  speak,  a  mental 
whole,  both  from  the  standpoint  of  education  and  of  use.  To 
understand  or  to  express  certain  conceptions  impUes  the  use  of 
definite  words,  and  our  visual,  auditory,  and  motor  experiences  are 
combined  in  these  symbols.  Each  phase  of  this  complex  may  be 
cultivated  more  or  less  separately;  in  the  case  of  the  unlettered 
man,  for  instance,  the  written  or  printed  symbols  form  no  part 
in  the  associations  connected  with  his  verbal  concepts.  Corre- 
sponding to  these  facts  we  have,  on  the  anatomical  side,  a  portion 
of  the  brain  in  which  the  auditory  memories  are  organized, — that 
is,  connected  in  some  way  with  a  definite  arrangement  of  nerve 
cells  and  their  processes,  another  part  in  which  the  visual  memories 
are  organized,  and  other  parts  in  which  the  motor  memories  as 
regards  speaking  or  writing  are  laid  down  in  some  definite  form. 
Each  part  is  a  distinct  center,  but  their  combined  use  in  intellectual 
life  would  imply  that  they  are  connected  by  association  fibers,  so 
that,  although  fundamentally  distinct,  they  are  practically  com- 
bined in  their  activity.  Corresponding  with  this  conception  it  is 
found  from  clinical  experience  that  aphasics,  although  the  lesion 
may  affect  only  one  of  these  various  centers,  suffer  a  deterioration, 
more  or  less  pronounced,  of  their  general  intellectual  capacity. 
We  may  conceive  that  the  varying  gifts  of  individuals,  in  the 
matter  of  the  use  of  language,  rest  partly  on  the  amount  of  train- 
ing received  and  partly  on  the  inborn  character  and  completeness 
of  the  nervous  machinery  in  the  different  centers. 

The  Association  Areas. — According  to  the  views  presented 
above,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  motor  and  sense  areas  occupy  only 
a  small  portion  of  the  cortex,  forming  islands,  as  has  been  said, 
surrounded  by  much  larger  areas.  Flechsig*  has  designated  these 
latter  areas  as  association  areas,  and  has  advocated  the  view  that 
they  are  the  portions  of  the  cortex  in  which  the  higher  and  more 
complex  mental  activities  are  mediated,  the  true  organs  of  thought. 
His  views  as  to  the  relations  and  physiological  significance  of  these 
areas  have  been  based  chiefly  on  the  study  of  the  embryo  brain 

*  Flechsig,  "Gehirnund  Seele,"  Leipzig,  1896;  also,  "Archives  de  neurol- 
ogie,"  vol.  ii,  1900. 


208        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

with  reference  to  the  time  of  acquisition  of  the  myelin  sheaths. 
Thus  he  finds  that  the  fibers  to  the  sense  areas  acquire  their  myelin, 
and  therefore  according  to  his  view  become  fully  functional  before 
those  distributed  to  the  association  areas.  Moreover,  in  the  em- 
bryo, at  least,  these  latter  areas  are  not  supplied  with  projection 
fibers, — that  is,  they  are  not  connected  directly  with  the  under- 
lying parts  of  the  nervous  systems.  Their  connections  are  with 
the  various  sense  centers  and  motor  centers  of  the  cortex. 

The  association  areas  may  be  regarded  therefore  as  the  regions 
in  which  the  different  sense  impressions  are  synthetized  into  complex 
perceptions  or  concepts.  The  foundations  of  all  knowledge  are 
to  be  found  in  the  sensations  aroused  through  the  various  sense 
organs;  through  these  avenues  alone  can  our  consciousness  come 
into  relation  with  the  external  or  the  internal  (somatic)  world, 
and  the  union  of  these  sense  impressions  into  organized  knowledge 
is,  according  to  Flechsig,  the  general  function  of  the  association 
areas.  This  function  of  the  association  areas  is  indicated  by  the 
anatomical  fact  that  they  are  connected  with  the  various  sense 
centers  by  tracts  of  association  fibers,  suggesting  thus  a  mechanism 
by  which  the  sense  qualities  from  these  separate  sense  centers  may 
be  combined  in  consciousness  to  form  a  mental  image  of  a  complex 
nature.  The  sequence  of  phenomena  in  the  external  world  is  or- 
derly, and,  corresponding  to  this  fact,  the  reflection  of  these  phenom- 
ena in  the  sequence  and  combinations  of  sensations  is  also  orderly. 
In  the  association  areas  our  memory  records  of  past  experiences 
and  their  connections  are  laid  down  in  some,  as  yet  unknown, 
material  change  in  the  network  of  nerve  cells  and  fibers.  Here, 
as  elsewhere  in  the  nervous  system,  it  may  be  supposed  that  the 
efficiency  of  the  nervous  machiner}-  is  conditioned  partly  by  the 
completeness  and  character  of  training,  but  largely  also  by  the 
inborn  character  of  the  machinery  itself.  The  very  marked  differ- 
ences among  intelligent  and  cultivated  persons — for  instance,  in 
the  matter  of  musical  memory  and  the  power  of  appreciating  and 
reproducing  musical  harmonies — cannot  be  attributed  to  differences 
in  training  alone.  The  gifted  person  in  this  respect  is  one  who  is 
born  with  a  certain  portion  of  his  brain  more  highly  organized  than 
that  of  most  of  his  fellow-men.  This  general  conception  that  the 
special  capacities  of  talented  individuals  rest  chiefly  upon  inborn 
differences  in  structure  or  organization  of  the  brain  may  be  re- 
garded as  one  outcome  of  the  modern  doctrine  of  localization  of 
functions  in  this  organ.  In  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  centurj^ 
it  seems  to  have  been  the  general  view  that  those  who  had  a  high 
degree  of  mental  capacity  might  direct  their  activity  with  equal 
success  in  any  direction  according  to  the  training  received.  A  man 
who  could  walk  fifty  miles  to  the  north,  it  was  said,  could  just  as 


SENSE   AREAS   AND   ASSOCIATION   AREAS.  209 

easily  walk  fifty  miles  to  the  south,  and  a  man  whose  training 
made  hiraan  eminent  mathematician  might  with  different  training 
have  made  an  equally  eminent  soldier  or  statesman.  In  our  day, 
however,  with  our  ideas  of  the  organization  of  the  brain  cortex, 
and  our  knowledge  that  different  parts  of  this  cortex  give  different 
reactions  in  consciousness,  it  seems  to  follow  that  special  talents 
are  due  to  differences  in  organization  of  special  parts  of  the 
cortex. 

Subdivision  of  the  Association  Areas. — On  anatomical  grounds 
Flechsig  distinguishes  three  (or  four)  association  areas :  The  frontal 
or  anterior  (35,  Fig.  95),  which  lies  in  front  of  the  motor  area; 
the  median  or  insular,— that  is,  the  cortex  of  the  island  of  Reil; 
and  the  posterior,  which  lies  back  of  the  body  feeling  area,  extending 
to  the  occipital  lobe  and  also  laterally  into  the  temporal  lobe. 
This  area  Flechsig  suggests  may  be  subdivided  into  a  parietal  area, 
34,  Fig.  95,  and  a  temporal  area,  36,  Fig.  95.  The  greater  relative 
development  of  these  areas  is  one  of  the  features  distinguishing 
the  human  brain  from  those  of  the  lower  mammals.  In  accordance 
with  the  general  conception  of  localization  of  functions  Flechsig 
suggests  that  these  areas  have  different  functions, — that  is,  take 
different  parts  in  the  complex  of  mental  activity.  Basing  his 
views  upon  the  nature  of  the  association  tracts  connecting 
them  with  the  sense  centers,  he  suggests  that  the  posterior  area 
is  concerned  particularly  in  the  organization  of  the  experiences 
founded  upon  visual  and  auditory  sensations,  and  shows  especial 
development  in  cases  of  talents,  such  as  those  of  the  musician, 
which- rest  upon  these  experiences.  The  anterior  area,  being  in 
closer  connection  with  the  body  sense  area,  may  possibly  be  espe- 
cially concerned  in  the  organization  of  experiences  based  upon  the 
internal  sensations  (bodily  appetites  and  desires).  In  this  part 
of  the  brain  possibly  arises  the  conception  of  individuality,  the 
idea  of  the  self  as  distinguished  from  the  external  world.  And  in 
alterations  or  defective  development  of  this  portion  of  the  brain 
may  lie  possibly  the  physical  explanation  of  mental  and  moral 
degeneracy.  This  general  idea  is  borne  out  in  a  measure  by  his- 
tological studies  of  the  brains  of  those  who  are  mentally  deficient 
(amentia)  or  mentally  deranged  (dementia).  It  is  stated*  that 
the  brain  in  such  cases  shows  a  distinct  wasting  of  the  cortex  and 
that  the  maximum  focus  of  this  change  is  found  in  the  prefrontal 
lobes  (anterior  association  area).  In  the  case  of  the  idiotic  this 
area  is  distinctly  undeveloped  and  in  the  insane  the  atrophy  is 
marked  in  proportion  to  the  degree  of  dementia.  Regarding  the 
peculiar  functions  of  the  cortex  of  the  island  of  Reil  there  are  no 
facts  sufficiently  distinct  to  warrant  even  a  provisional  statement. 

*  Bolton,  "Brain,"  1903,  p.   215. 
14 


210        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

The  area  is  much  more  developed  in  man  than  in  the  lower  mam- 
mals, and  its  connections  with  other  parts  of  the  cortex  by  means 
of  association  tracts  are  such  as  to  lead  to  the  supposition  that 
its  general  functions  are  of  the  higher  synthetic  character  attributed 
to  the  association  areas  in  general. 

The  Development  of  the  Cortical  Areas.— In  a  recent  report 
Flechsig*  gives  the  results  of  an  extensive  stud}^  of  the  time  of 
myelinization  of  the  fibers  in  the  cerebrum  of  man  from  the  fourth 
month  of  intra-uterine  to  the  fourth  month  of  extra-uterine  life. 
The  first  areas  to  develop  in  the  cortex  are  the  primary  sense 
centers  (smell,  cutaneous  and  muscle  sense,  sight,  hearing,  and 
touch),  and  later  in  connection  with  these  centers  systems  of  motor 
fibers  appear.  There  are  thus  formed  seven  primary  zones,  sensory 
and  motor,  to  which  he  gives  the  name  of  'projection  areas.  The 
location  of  these  areas  is  shown  in  part  in  Figs.  93  and  94,  2  {2^,  ^), 
5,  6,  7  (7^),  <§,  15.  Two  areas  connected  with  the  olfactory  sense 
are  not  shown  in  this  figure;  they  appear  in  the  anterior  perforate 
lamina  on  the  base  of  the  brain  and  the  uncinate  gyrus.  Later 
there  is  developed  around  these  primary  projections  areas  what 
Flechsig  calls  marginal  or  border  zones,  which  have  no  projection 
fibers,  but  which  are  connected  by  short  association  fibers  with 
one  or  more  of  the  primary  projection  zones,  u,  16  to  33^  in  Figs. 
95  and  96.  These  areas  all  develop  after  birth;  and  from  a 
physiological  standpoint  may  be  regarded  perhaps  as  the  seat  of 
the  organized  memories  connected  with  the  primary  sense  centers. 
It  is  injuries  in  these  centers  which  may  be  supposed  to  produce 
the  various  kinds  of  aphasia  described  above.  Thus,  areas  17,  20, 
and  24  form  border  areas  to  the  primary  area  of  sight  (5);  16  has 
the  same  relation  to  2,  18  to  ^,  and  u,  IJ^  with  7.  Later  still 
the  great  association  areas — 34,  35,  36,  Figs.  95  and  96 — acquire 
their  myelinated  fibers.  These  latter  centers,  as  indicated  above,  may 
be  considered  as  association  areas  with  more  complex  connections, 
and  they  serve  to  mediate  therefore  the  higher  psychical  activities. 
Flechsig,  in  his  recent  report,  designates  these  areas  from  an  anatom- 
ical point  as  terminal  or  central  zones.  As  the  result  of  his  his- 
tological work,  as  far  as  it  has  progressed,  he  distinguishes 
thirty-six  areas  in  the  cortex  in  which  the  myelinization  of  the 
fibers  occurs  separately,  and  in  which,  therefore,  by  inference, 
different  physiological  activities  are  mediated.  These  36  areas 
are  subdivided  as  follows: 

*  Flechsig,  "  Berichte  der  mathematisch-physischen  Klasse  der  konigl. 
Sachs.  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften  zu  Leipzig,"  1904.  For  a  summary  of 
the  results  of  this  work  see  Sabin,  "  The  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Bulletin," 
February,  1905. 


SENSE   AREAS   AND   ASSOCIATION   AREAS. 


211 


5^ 


i-  m 


«.;| 
^ 


ja 


Fig. 


93. — Lateral  surface  of  the  brain,  showing  the  primordial  areas,  both  sensory  and 
automatic,  in  dotted  zones. — (Flechsig.) 


^,„  _.,      ,^-?"v'X'/.''<'^'^r»J/'C..-^- 


/>;:,  li 


/  S'' 


.^<SS| 


^  ^ 


1/        r/ 


■r?'^' 


70 


..^ 


Fig.  94. — Same  zones  on  the  mesial  surface  of  the  hTa.\n.^{Flechsig). 


212 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


Fig.  95. — Lateral    surfaces    of    the    brain,  showing   the  primordial  and    marginal  zones. 

— (Flechsig.) 


\ 


\ 


J.> 


(F 


Jft" 


Fig.  96. — Same  areas  on  the  mesial  surface. — (Flechsig.) 


SENSE   AREAS    AND    ASSOCIATION   AREAS. 


213 


I.  Primary  areas. 

la.  Primary  projection  areas  {1,  2,  4,  5,  6,  7,  S  {15),  seven  or 
eight  in  number,  and  provided  with  projection  fibers — 
sensory  and  motor. 
I?)-  Primary  areas  without  projection  fibers  {3,  9,  10,  11,  12,  13) 
and  apparently  without  association  fibers.  Functions  un- 
certain. 
II.  Association  areas. 

IP"  Intermediate  or  border  areas,   14,    16-33,   provided  with 
short  association  fibers. 

11^'  Terminal  or  central  areas,  34,  35,  36,  provided  with  long 
association  fibers. 

The  Corpus  Callosum. — The  corpus  callosum  is  the  most 
conspicuous  of  the  bands  of  commissural  fibers  that  connect  one 
cerebral  hemisphere  with  the  other.     Similar  tracts  of  the  same 


Fig.  97. 


-Diagram  to  show  the  composition  of  the  corpus  callosum  as  a  system  of  com- 
missural fibers,  without  projection  fibers. — (Cajal.) 


general  nature  are  the  anterior  commissure,  the  fornix,  the 
psalterium,  etc.  The  position  and  great  development  of  the  corpus 
callosum  has  made  it  the  object  of  experimental  as  well  as  anatomical 
investigation.  When  the  corpus  is  divided  by  a  section  along  the 
longitudinal  fissure  (v.  Koranyi)  no  perceptible  effect  of  either  a 
motor  or  sensory  nature  is  observed  in  the  animal.  When  it  is 
stimulated  electrically  (Mott  and  Schafer)  from  above  symmetrical 
movements  on  the  tAvo  sides  of  the  body  may  be  obtained.  If 
the  motor  cortex  on  one  side  is  removed  stimulation  in  the  longi- 
tudinal fissures  causes  movements  only  on  the  side  controlled 
by  the  uninjured  cortex.  These  facts  are  in  harmony  with  the 
results  of  histological  studies,  which  indicate  that  the  fibers  of  the 
corpus  callosum  do  not  enter  directly  into  the  internal  capsules 
to  be  distributed  to  underlying  portions  of  the  brain,  but  are  truly 


214        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

commissural  and  connect  portions  of  the  cortex  of  one  hemisphere 
with  the  cortex  of  the  other  side.  This  relation  is  indicated  in  the 
accompanying  diagram  (Fig.  97).  So  far  as  the  motor  regions  are 
concerned,  there  is  some  evidence  that  the  connection  thus  es- 
tablished is  between  symmetrical  parts  of  the  cortex  (Muratoff) , — 
that  is,  between  parts  having  similar  functions, — and  we  may  per- 
haps regard  the  corpus  as  a  means  by  which  the  functional 
activities  of  the  two  sides  of  the  cerebrum  are  associated. 

The  Corpora  Striata  and  Optic  Thalami. — The  numerous 
masses  of  gray  matter  found  in  the  cerebrum  beneath  the  cortex, 
in  the  thalamencephalon,  and  in  the  midbrain  have  each,  of  course, 
specific  functions,  but,  in  general,  it  may  be  said  that  they  are 
intercalated  on  the  afferent  or  efferent  paths  to  or  from  the  cortex. 
Their  physiology  is  included,  therefore,  in  the  description  of  the 
functions  mediated  by  these  paths.  For  instance,  the  external 
geniculate  bodies  form  part  of  the  optic  path.  In  addition,  how- 
ever, these  masses  of  cells  contain  in  many  cases  reflex  arcs  of  a 
more  or  less  complicated  kind,  through  which  afferent  impulses 
are  converted  into  efferent  impulses  that  affect  the  musculature 
or  the  glandular  tissues  of  the  body.  The  large  nuclei  constituting 
the  corpora  striata  (nucleus  caudatus  and  n.  lenticularis)  and  the 
optic  thalami  have  been  frequently  studied  experimentally  to  as- 
certain whether  they  have  specific  functions  independently  of  their 
relations  to  the  cortex.  These  efforts  have  given  uncertain  results. 
Older  experiments  (Nothnagel),  in  which  the  attempt  was  made  to 
destroy  these  nuclei  by  the  localized  injection  of  chromic  acid,  are 
probably  unreliable,  as  the  destruction  involved  also  the  projection 
fibers  passing  to  the  cortex.  Lesions  of  the  nucleus  caudatus  are  said 
to  be  accompanied  always  by  a  rise  in  body  temperature  and  an 
increase  in  heat  production,  and  stimulation  of  the  same  nucleus 
gives  a  very  marked  rise  in  blood-pressure.  These  facts  indicate 
a  possible  connection  of  this  nucleus  with  heat  and  vasomotor 
regulation.  Other  observers  have  supposed  that  these  nuclei  are 
especially  concerned  in  the  co-ordination  of  the  muscules  concerned 
in  involuntary  or  unconscious  movements.  On  the  anatomical  side 
we  have  the  striking  fact  that  the  nuclei  of  the  corpora  striata 
have  few  connections  with  the  cortex,  but,  on  the  other  hand, 
send  an  independent  system  of  projection  fibers  into  the  brain  stem. 
Embryologically  these  structures  are  developed  from  the  wall  of 
the  forebrain  and  would  seem  to  have  a  ph3'siological  importance 
similar  to  that  of  the  cortex  itself,  but  experimental  and  clinical 
facts  are  at  present  insufficient  to  justify  any  hypothesis  as  to  their 
special  functions.  With  regard  to  the  various  nuclei  of  the  optic 
thalamus  it  is  known  that  they  form  abundant  connections  with 
the  sensory  areas  of  the  cortex  cerebri,  and  from  this  standpoint 


SENSE   AREAS   AND   ASSOCIATION   AREAS,  215 

they  may  be  regarded  as  consisting  of  subcenters  with  a  proba- 
bility, however,  that  reflexes  may  occur  through  them  (subcortical 
reflexes)  independently  of  the  cortex.  Numerous  fibers  have  been 
traced  from  the  thalamus  to  the  body  sense  area  (Flechsig). 


CHAPTER  XI. 

THE  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  CEREBELLUM,  THE  PONS, 
AND  THE  MEDULLA. 

The  functions  of  the  cerebellum  are,  in  some  respects,  less  satis- 
factorily known  than  those  of  any  other  part  of  the  central  nervous 
system.  Many  theories  have  been  held.  Most  of  these  views 
have  been  attempts  to  assign  to  the  organ  a  single  function  of  a 
definite  character,  but  latterly  the  insufficiency  of  the  theories 
proposed  has  led  observers  to  attribute  to  the  cerebellum  general 
properties  the  nature  of  which  can  not  be  expressed  satisfactorily 
in  a  single  phrase.  Before  attempting  to  give  a  summary  of  exist- 
ing views  it  will  be  helpful  to  recall  briefly  the  important  facts  re- 
garding its  structure  and  relations,  so  far  as  they  are  known  and  can 
be  used  to  explain  its  functional  value. 

Anatomical  Structure  and  Relations  of  the  Cerebellum. — 
The  finer  histology  of  the  cerebellar  cortex  is  represented  in  Fig.  98. 
Three  layers  may  be  distinguished.  The  external  molecular 
layer  (A),  the  middle  granular  layer  (S),  and  the  internal  medullary 
layer  consisting  of  the  white  matter  or  medullated  nerve  fibers, 
afferent  and  efferent  (C).  Between  the  molecular  and  granular 
layers  lie  the  large  and  characteristic  Purkinje  cells  (a).  The 
dendrites  of  these  cells  branch  profusely  in  the  molecular  layer; 
their  axons  pass  into  the  medullary  layer.  From  the  standpoint 
of  the  neuron  doctrine  these  cells,  so  far  as  the  cerebellum  is  con- 
cerned, are  efferent.  They  form,  indeed,  the  sole  efferent  system 
of  the  cerebellar  cortex.  The  afferent  fibers  of  the  cerebellum  end 
in  both  the  granular  and  the  molecular  layers.  Those  that  termi- 
nate in  the  granular  layer — designated  by  Cajal  as  moss  fibers, 
have  at  their  terminations  and  points  of  branching  curious  clumps 
of  small  processes ;  they  probably  connect  with  the  dendrites  of  the 
nerve  cells  in  this  layer.  Those  that  pass  deeper  into  the  molec- 
ular layer  come  into  connection  with  the  dendrites  of  the  Purkinje 
cells,  around  which,  indeed,  they  seem  to  twine,  so  that  Cajal  desig- 
nated them  as  climbing  fibers.  The  granular  layer  (B)  contains 
numerous  granules  (g)  or  small  nerve  cells.  These  cells  are  spherical, 
and  have  a  relatively  large  nucleus  and  a  small  amount  of  cyto- 
plasm. Their  dendrites  are  few  and  short;  their  axons  run  into 
the  molecular  layer,  divide  in  T,  and  the  two  branches  then  run 

216 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND    MEDULLA. 


217 


parallel  to  the  surface  and  doubtless  make  connections  with  the  den- 
drites of  the  Purkinje  cells  as  well  as  with  the  cells  of  the  molecular 
layer.  A  few  larger  nerve  cells  of  Golgi's  second  type  (/)  are  found 
also  in  the  granular  layer.  In  the  molecular  layer  are  found  two 
types  of  cells:  the  larger  basket  cells  (b)  whose  axons  terminate  in  a 
group  of  small  branches  that  inclose  the  body  of  the  Purkinje  cells, 
and  a  number  of  smaller  cells  (e),  situated  more  superficially^ 
whose  axons  pass  longitudinally  in  the  molecular  layer  and  termi- 
nate in  arborizations  or  baskets  that  doubtless  make  connections 
with  the  dendrites  of  the  Purkinje  cells. 


Fig.  98. — Histology  of  the  cerebellum. — (From  Obersteiner.) 


A  consideration  of  this  peculiar  and  intricate  structure  enables 
us  to  comprehend  that  the  cerebellar  cortex  presents  a  reflex  arc 
of  a  very  considerable  degree  of  complexity.  The  incoming  im- 
pulses through  the  moss  and  climbing  fibers  may  pass  at  once  to  the 
Purkinje  cells  and  lead  to  efferent  discharges,  or  they  may  end  in 
the  cells  of  the  granular  or  molecular  layer  and  thus  be  distributed 
to  the  Purkinje  cells  in  a  more  indirect  way.  In  addition  to  the 
cortex  the  cerebellum  contains  several  masses  of  gray  matter  in 
its  interior:  the  large  dentate  nucleus  in  the  center  of  each  hemi- 
sphere and  the  group  of  nuclei  lying  in  or  near  the  middle  of  the 


218        PHYSIOLOGY  OP  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

medullary  substance  of  the  vermiform  lobe  (micleus  fastigii,  n.  glo- 
bosi,  and  the  n.  emboliformis).  The  axons  of  many  of  the  Purkinje 
cells  of  the  cortex  terminate  in  these  subcortical  nuclei,  and  the 
efferent  path  from  the  cerebellum  is  then  continued  by  new  neurons. 
Thus,  the  fibers  of  the  superior  peduncles  of  the  cerebellum  arise 
chiefly  from  the  dentate  nuclei,  and  only  indirectly  from  the  cor- 
tex. The  anatomical  connections,  afferent  and  efferent,  between 
the  cerebellum  and  other  parts  of  the  nervous  system  are  very  com- 
plex and  not  yet  entirely  known.  Without  attempting  to  recall 
all  of  these  connections,  which  will  be  found  described  in  works  upon 
anatomy  or  neurology,  emphasis  may  be  laid  upon  those  which  are 
at  present  helpful  in  discussing  the  physiology  of  the  organ. 

1.  Connection  with  the  Afferent  Paths  of  the  Cord. — The  ascending 
fibers  in  the  posterior  columns  are  connected,  through  the  nuclei  of 
Goll  and  Burdach,  with  the  cerebellum,  the  fibers  passing  by  way 
of  the  inferior  peduncles  (restiform  bodies).  So  also  the  fibers  of 
the  tracts  of  Flechsig  and  Gowers  terminate  eventually  in  the  cere- 
bellum, as  explained  on  p.  164.  Whatever  else  may  be  their  func- 
tions, the  fibers  of  these  tracts  undoubtedly  convey  impulses  of 
the  muscle  sense,  and  we  have,  therefore,  the  important  fact  that 
these  fibers  (as  a  system)  terminate  in  part  in  the  cerebellum  and 
in  part,  by  way  of  the  median  fillet,  in  the  cerebrum. 

2.  Connections  with  the  Vestibular  Branch  of  the  Eighth  Cranial 
Nerve. — This  branch,  arising  in  the  semicircular  canals  and  utriculus 
and  sacculus,  ends  in  the  pons  in  several  nuclei  (lateral  or  Deiters's, 
median  and  superior)  and  these  in  turn  are  connected  by  fibers, 
running  probably  in  both  directions,  with  the  cortex  of  the  cere- 
bellum and  with  its  subcortical  nuclei.  This  connection  is  most 
important  physiologically,  as  it  would  seem  to  make  the  cerebellum 
a  center  for  impulses  arising  in  these  parts  of  the  internal  ear.  As 
we  shall  see,  ablation  of  the  cerebellum  and  destruction  of  the  semi- 
circular canals  give  very  similar  results  upon  animals. 

3.  Connections  withthe  Cortex  of  the  Cerebrum. — A  large  system  of 
fibers — cerebro-ponto-cerebellar  system  (see  Fig.  77,  A) — makes  a 
connection  between  the  cortex  cerebri  and  cortex  cerebelli.  They 
emerge  from  the  cerebellum  by  way  of  the  middle  peduncles,  cross 
the  mid- line,  and  end  in  gray  matter  (pontal  nuclei)  in  the  pons; 
thence  their  course  is  continued  by  new  neurons,  which  pass  for- 
ward in  the  cms  cerebri  and  internal  capsule  to  make  connections 
with  the  cortex  of  the  frontal  lobe.  The  connection  is,  therefore, 
a  crossed  one,  the  right  cerebrum  being  associated  with  the  left 
cerebellar  hemisphere.  This  system  of  fibers  furnishes  a  mechan- 
ism by  which  the  cerebellar  activity  may  be  associated  with  and 
influence  the  activity  of  the  motor  areas  of  the  cerebrum. 

4.  Connections  with  the  Midbrain  and  Cord. — The  fibers  of  the 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND    MEDULLA.  219 

superior  peduncles  end  in  the  red  nucleus  of  the  midbrain  on  the 
opposite  side.  Thence  there  may  be  connections  forward  with 
the  thalamus  and  cerebrum;  but,  what  is  more  significant,  con- 
nections are  thus  made  with  the  rubrospinal  tract  (Monakow's 
bundle),  see  p.  169,  which  descends  into  the  cord  and  connects 
with  the  motor  nerves.  By  this  connection  a  relation  may  be  es- 
tablished between  the  cerebellum  and  the  motor  nerves  of  the  body. 
The  path  is  doubly  crossed,  so  that  each  cerebellar  hemisphere  is 
connected  with  the  muscles  of  its  own  side.  Still  another  motor 
path  to  the  cord  is  made  possible  through  the  coiuiections  of  the 
vestibular  nucleus.  These  latter,  as  stated  on  p.  170,  are  connected 
through  the  vestibulospinal  tract  with  the  cells  in  the  anterior 
horn.  Some  authors  have  described  a  special  motor  tract  from 
cerebellum  to  cord,  either  direct  or  by  way  of  the  olivary  bodies;  but 
our  knowledge  of  tliis  path  is  too  uncertain  as  yet  to  form  a  positive 
basis  for  physiological  conclusions. 

Theories  Concerning  the  Functions  of  the  Cerebellum. — 
Modern  views  concerning  the  functions  of  the  cerebellum  may  be 
classified  under  three  general  heads:  First,  those  that  consider  it 
a  general  co-ordinating  center  or  organ  for  the  muscular  movements 
and  especially  for  those  concerned  in  equiHbrium  and  locomotion. 
This  view,  first  proposed  essentially  by  Flourens  (1824),  has  been 
adopted  by  many,  perhaps  by  most,  writers  since  his  time.  The 
manner  in  which  the  organ  serves  to  co-ordinate  these  movements 
has  been  explained  in  various  ways.  According  to  the  older  ob- 
servers, it  was  supposed  so  to  arrange  or  group  the  various  motor 
impulses  that  they  reached  the  lower  motor  centers  in  the  cord 
in  the  necessary  combination  for  co-ordinated  contractions.  Ac- 
cording to  more  recent  observers,  this  synergetic  action  is  exer- 
cised not  directly  on  the  motor  side  of  the  reflex  but  on  the  sensory 
side.  The  numerous  sensory  paths  connected  with  the  organ, 
especially  those  of  the  muscular  sense,  and  those  from  the  vestibular 
nerve,  suggest  the  view  that  in  the  complex  cortex  of  the  cerebel- 
lum these  afferent  impulses  act  upon  nervous  combinations  whose 
discharges  in  turn  are  conveyed  to  the  motor  centers  in  a  definite 
and  orderly  sequence.  Either  point  of  view  assumes  that  there 
are  in  the  cerebellum  certain  distinct  mechanisms — that  is,  combi- 
nations of  neurons  that  are  essentially  reflex  centers,  and  that  in 
all  of  our  more  complex  bodily  movements  these  mechanisms 
intervene.  The  second  general  set  of  theories  regarding  the  cere- 
bellum assumes  that  this  organ  is  essentially  the  center  or  a  center 
for  the  muscle  sense.  This  view  is  connected  usually  with  the  name 
of  Lussana,*  but  has  been  supported  since  in  one  sense  or  another 
*  Lussana.     See  "Journal  de  la  physiol.  de  riiomme,"  5,  418,  1862. 


220        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

by  many  observers.*  It  is,  in  fact,  not  essentially  different  per- 
haps from  the  second  phase  of  the  first  group  of  theories.  Those 
who  have  expressed  their  idea  of  the  physiology  of  the  cerebellum 
by  saying  that  it  is  a  center  of  the  muscle  sense  have,  in  recent 
times  at  least,  recognized  that  this  sense  has  a  cortical  center  also  in 
the  cerebrum.  The  view  can  not  assume,  therefore,  a  conscious 
muscle  sense  mediated  by  the  cerebellum,  but  only  that  the  muscle 
sense  fibers  have  a  cortical  termination  therein  and  that  the  cerebel- 
lar activity  thus  aroused  is  in  some  way  necessary  to  the  orderly 
adjustment  of  complex  voluntary  movements.  According  to  an- 
other point  of  view,  the  cerebellum  is  a  great  augmenting  organ  for 
the  neuromuscular  system.  It  is  added  on,  as  it  were,  to  the  cere- 
brospinal motor  system  and  serves  not  to  co-ordinate  the  motor 
discharges,  but  to  increase  their  strength  or  effectiveness.  This 
general  view,  first  proposed  by  Weir  Mitchell  (1869),  has  been  sup- 
ported by  Luys,  and  especially,  although  with  important  modifica- 
tions, by  Luciani-t  Some  of  the  details  of  the  work  of  the  latter 
observer  are  given  below. 

ExperimentalWorkUpon  the  Cerebellum. — Rolando,  and  par- 
ticularly riourens,  gave  the  direction  to  modern  experimentation 
in  this  subject.  The  latter  observer  made  numerous  observations, 
especially  on  pigeons,  in  regard  to  the  effect  of  removing  all  or  a 
part  of  the  cerebellum.  He  describes  in  detail  the  striking  results 
of  such  an  operation.  When  all  or  a  large  part  of  the  organ  is  re- 
moved the  animal  shows  a  most  distressing  inability  to  stand  or 
move.  There  seems  to  be  no  muscular  paralysis  at  all,  but,  at  first, 
a  total  lack  of  power  to  co-ordinate  properly  the  contractions  of  the 
various  muscles  involved  in  maintaining  equilibrium.  The  animal 
takes  a  most  abnormal  position,  with  the  head  retracted  and* 
twisted,  and  any  attempt  to  move  is  followed  by  violent  disorderly 
contractions  that  may  result  in  a  series  of  involuntary  somersaults. 
The  animal  is  totally  unable  to  fly.  When  the  injury  to  the  cere- 
bellum is  less  the  effect  upon  the  movements  is  either  too  slight 
to  be  noticed  or  is  shown  in  a  greater  or  less  uncertainty  in  its 
movements.  When  it  attempts  to  walk,  for  instance,  it  exhibits 
a  staggering,  dnmken  gait,  a  condition  designated  as  cerebellar 
ataxia.  Similar  operations  on  mammals  give  in  general  the  same 
results.  If  the  operation  is  unilateral, — that  is,  affects  only  one 
hemisphere, — the  animal  (dog)  exhibits  forced  movements,  suck 
as  a  tendency  to  roll  around  the  long  axis  of  his  body  toward  the 
injured  side  and  subsequently  movements  in  a  circle  toward  the  same 

*  See  Lewandowsky,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1903,  129. 

t  For  the  literature  of  the  cerebellum  see  Luciani,  "II  cervelleto,"  Florence, 
1891;  German  translation,  "Das  Kleinhim,"  1893.  Also  Luciani,  article,. 
"Das  Kleinhim"  in  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  iii,  part  ii,  p.  259,  1904.. 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND    MEDULLA.  221 

side.  In  man  there  are  several  cases  on  record  in  which  the  organ 
was  shown  by  autopsy  to  be  largely  or  completely  atrophied  and 
numerous  cases  of  tumors  affecting  the  cerebellum.  In  the  latter 
group  of  cases  there  may  be  certain  marked  subjective  symptoms, 
such  as  headache,  and  especially  vertigo,  and  also  a  certain  degree 
of  ataxia  or  awkwardness  and  uncertainty  of  movement.  So  also 
in  the  cases  of  atrophy,  in  which  probably  the  condition  developed 
slowly  through  a  number  of  years,  a  degree  of  ataxia  was  exhibited, 
especially  when  the  movements  were  rapid  and  forced.  In  the 
ataxic  condition  resulting  from  tabetic  lesions  of  the  posterior  col- 
umns the  effect  upon  the  movements  is  increased  by  covering  up, 
the  eyes  (Romberg's  symptom),  the  individual  being  then  deprived 
of  his  visual  stimuli  as  well  as  those  coming  bj^  way  of  the  muscular 
and  cutaneous  nerves.  In  cerebellar  ataxia,  however,  the  effect 
is  not  increased  by  closure  of  the  eyes,  a  result  which  is  probably 
explained  by  the  fact  that  the  individual  still  possesses  his  paths 
of  muscular  and  cutaneous  sensibility  to  the  cerebrum,  and  these 
senses  may  be  used  in  the  reflex  adjustments  of  voluntary  move- 
ments. 

Interpretation  of  the  Experimental  and  Clinical  Results. — 
Flourens  was  led  by  the  striking  results  of  his  operations  on  pigeons 
to  suggest  the  view  that  the  cerebellum  is  an  organ  for  the  co- 
ordination of  the  movements  of  equilibrium  and  locomotion. 
Objections  were  raised  to  this  view.  Some  observers  (Dalton, 
Weir  Mitchell)  found  that  if  the  pigeons  from  which  the  cerebellum 
had  been  removed  were  kept  long  enough  the  effects  first  observed 
gradually  disappeared,  so  that  finally  the  animals  were  able  to 
move  or  fly  with  no  marked  difference  from  the  normal  animal 
except  that  fatigue  was  sho\^Ti  much  more  quickly.  Hence  the 
view  advocated  by  Mitchell  that  the  essential  function  of  the 
cerebellum  is  that  of  an  augmenting  apparatus  for  the  voluntary 
movements.  With  regard  to  this  view  it  may  be  remarked  in 
passing  that  pigeons  with  the  cerebral  hemispheres  removed  exhibit 
apparently  as  a  permanent  symptom  the  same  tendency  to  rapid 
fatigue  after  sustained  muscular  effort.  By  the  same  logical  process 
therefore  one  might  conclude  that  one  function  of  the  cerebrum 
is  that  of  an  augmenting  organ  to  the  motor  discharges  from  the 
cerebellum  or  midbrain.  So  also  the  cases  of  complete  or  nearly 
complete  atrophy  of  the  cerebellum  in  human  beings  in  which  no 
evil  result  followed  other  than  a  slight  degree  of  cerebellar  ataxia 
have  been  used  as  an  argument  against  the  view  that  this  organ 
is  necessary  to  the  co-ordination  of  the  complex  voluntary  move- 
ments. The  view  that  the  cerebellum  has  essentially  a  direct 
co-ordinating  function  has  been  criticized  most  seriously  by  Luciani. 
This  observer  made  a  series  of  long-continued  and  most  careful 


222         PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM, 

observations  upon  dogs  and  monkeys  in  which  the  entire  cere- 
belkim  or  certain  definite  parts  had  been  removed.  He  lays  stress 
upon  the  fact  that  the  violent  disturbance  of  movement  is  tem- 
porary and  is  slowly  recovered  from  in  time.  He  was  led,  therefore, 
to  view  these  disturbances  as  due  primarily  not  to  the  loss  of  the  nor- 
mal functional  activity  of  the  organ,  but  to  irritations  resulting  from 
the  operation.  When  this  stage  of  irritation  is  passed  the  real 
defects  which  indicate  the  true  function  of  the  cerebellum  become 
apparent.  These  defects  exhibit  themselves  as  a  loss  of  power 
in  the  neuromuscular  apparatus  of  the  complex  voluntary  move- 
ments, and  he  analyzes  these  results  under  three  heads:  First, 
a  loss  of  force  in  the  muscular  contractions, — a  condition  of  asthenia; 
second,  a  loss  of  tone  in  the  muscles  of  the  limbs  and  trunk,  par- 
ticularly in  the  hind  limbs, — a  condition  of  atonia;  and,  third,  a 
loss  of  steadiness  in  the  muscular  contractions, — a  condition  of 
astasia.  The  astasia  manifests  itself  in  a  tremor  of  the  muscles 
when  voluntarily  contracted,  especially  in  movements  requiring 
much  exertion.  Luciani  supposes  that  this  tremor  is  due  to  an 
alteration — that  is,  a  slowing — of  the  rhythm  of  discharges  of  the 
impulses  from  the  motor  centers.  The  functions  of  the  cerebellum 
on  his  theory  are  expressed,  therefore,  by  saying  that  it  is  an  aug- 
menting organ  for  the  activity  of  the  neuromuscular  apparatus ;  and 
that,  so  far  as  this  augmenting  or  strengthening  activity  can  be  ana- 
lyzed, it  consists  in  an  increase  in  the  energy  of  the  motor  discharges 
(sthenic  action),  an  increase  in  the  tension  or  tone  of  the  motor 
centers  and  their  connected  muscles  (tonic  action) ,  and  an  increase 
in  the  rhythm  of  the  motor  impulses  (static  action)  so  that  nor- 
mally the  muscular  contractions  are  of  the  nature  of  complete 
tetani.  Luciani  believes  that  this  action  of  the  cerebellum  is 
continuous,  although  varying  in  intensity,  and  that  it  affects  all 
of  the  musculature  of  the  body,  and  not  simply  the  muscles  con- 
cerned in  body  equilibrium.  This  constant  motor  activity  is  in 
turn  dependent  upon  a  constant  inflow  of  sensory  impulses  into 
the  cerebellum  along  its  afferent  connections,  particularly  upon  the 
impulses  from  the  vestibular  portion  of  the  internal  ear,  and  those 
from  the  muscle  sense  fibers  and  perhaps  also  from  the  fibers  of 
the  cutaneous  senses.  The  constant  augmenting  activity  of  the 
cerebellum  is  therefore  a  species  of  reflex  effect, — a  reflex  tonus 
which  affects  all  the  musculature.  Whether  the  cerebellar  mechan- 
ism is  especially  arranged  to  co-ordinate  its  effect  upon  the  neuro- 
muscular apparatus, — that  is,  in  some  way  to  adapt  the  move- 
ments to  a  definite  end — Luciani  leaves  an  open  question.  He 
does  not  believe  that  a  lack  of  co-ordination  (cerebellar  ataxia) 
is  necessarily  present  in  cerebellar  lesions;  but  admits  that,  if  this 
symptom  is  an  invariable  one,  it  would  be  necessary  to  add  to 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND    MEDULLA,  223 

the  general  augmenting  activity  of  the  cerebeUum  also  a  general 
adaptive  pr  co-ordinating  activity.  It  is  precisely  this  latter  feature 
which  stands  out  in  the  minds  of  most  physiologists  as  the 
characteristic  function  of  the  cerebellum,  while  Luciani  considers 
that  it  is  not  demonstrated  by  clinical  or  experimental  facts,  and 
that  even  if  demonstrated  it  would  have  to  be  considered  as  a 
part — perhaps  a  subordinate  part — of  the  functional  influence  of 
this  organ. 

Conclusions  as  to  the  General  Functions  of  the  Cerebel- 
lum.— It  is  evident  that  an  authoritative  statement  of  the  function 
or  functions  of  the  cerebellum  is  impossible.  It  seems  quite  clear, 
however,  that  the  organ  exerts  a  regulating  influence  of  some  kind 
upon  the  neuromuscular  apparatus  of  our  so-called  voluntary 
movements.  The  precise  nature  of  the  regulating  influence  is  in 
dispute,  and  one  who  reads  the  literature  finds  it  difficult  at  times 
to  separate  clearly  the  different  theories  proposed,  since  some 
authors  are  content  with  general  statements  and  others  attempt 
a  more  specific  analysis.  On  the  whole,  it  seems  desirable  at 
present  to  hold  to  the  general  idea,  introduced  by  Flourens,  that 
the  cerebellum  is  a  central  organ  for  co-ordination  of  voluntary 
movements,  particularly  the  more  complex  movements  necessary 
in  equilibrium  and  locomotion.  Instead,  however,  of  assuming 
with  Flourens  that  the  cerebellum  contains  a  co-ordinating  principle, 
an  expression  that  means  nothing  at  present,  we  may  assume  that 
it  exerts  its  co-ordinating  infiuence  by  virtue  of  the  definite  nervous 
mechanisms  contained  in  it — that  is,  by  nervous  complexes  which, 
on  the  afferent  side,  are  connected  with  the  peripheral  sensory 
nerves  to  the  vestibule  of  the  ear,  the  muscles,  and  the  skin,  and  on 
the  efferent  side  are  in  direct  or  indirect  relations  with  the  motor 
areas  of  the'  brain  as  well  as  the  motor  centers  in  the  cord.  These 
mechanisms  are  inherited  structures,  but,  like  other  nervous  mechan- 
isms, they  are  developed  by  use.  The  many  muscular  contractions 
made  in  our  ordinary  movements  of  equilibrium  are  learned  by  ex- 
perience, and  the  effects  of  this  training  are  felt  mainly  upon  these 
cerebellar  paths  or  mechanisms.  We  regard  the  speech  center  in  the 
cerebrum  as  a  collection  of  nervous  mechanisms  in  which  are  stored 
or  preserved  the  connections  necessary  to  the  motor  presentation 
of  thoughts,  a  memory  center  for  the  spoken  symbols  of  our  con- 
cepts; it  is  possible  that  in  the  same  way  we  may  regard  the  cere- 
bellum as  a  memory  center  of  the  muscular  movements  concerned 
in  equilibrium.  The  relations  of  the  cerebellum  with  the  motor 
areas  of  the  cerebrum  and  the  motor  centers  in  the  cord  are  evidently 
quite  complex  and  far  from  being  fully  understood.  Moreover,  this 
relationship  must  vary  considerably  in  different  animals.  Removal 
of  the  cerebrum  from  a  pigeon  leaves  an  animal  with  almost  perfect 


224        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

power  of  controlling  its  equilibrium.  In  the  dog  a  similar  operation 
is  followed  by  a  longer  period  of  inability  to  control  perfectly  the 
movements  of  locomotion,  and  it  is  probable  that  in  man  after  such 
an.operation  the  power  of  locomotion  would  be  acquired  more  slowly, 
if  at  all.  On  the  other  hand,  the  violent  effect  upon  such  move- 
ments caused  by  the  removal  of  the  cerebellum  in  the  pigeon  is  less 
evident  in  the  dog,  and,  if  we  may  judge  from  the  incomplete  data 
of  clinical  neurology,  very  much  less  evident  in  man.  In  man  the 
motor  control  of  the  voluntary  muscular  system  through  the  cere- 
brum is  more  highly  developed  than  in  the  lower  animals. 

The  most  important  objection  to  the  view  that  the  cerebellum 
is  an  organ  of  co-ordination  for  the  movements  of  equihbrium 
and  locomotion  is  that  in  the  bird  as  well  as  in  man  the  animal 
eventually  learns  to  carry  out  these  movements  after  loss  of  the 
cerebellum.  This  fact  is  clear  proof  that  the  cerebellum  is  not 
the  only  mechanism  through  which  such  co-ordination  is  possible; 
but  it  is  no  valid  objection  to  the  view  that  normally  this  control 
is  effected  through  this  organ.  The  sensory  tracts  on  which  this 
co-ordination  depends  make  connection  with  the  thalamus  or  cere- 
brum as  well  as  the  cerebellum,  and  when  the  latter  arc  is  broken 
the  higher  centers  may  be  used  to  replace  its  functions  in  part 
at  least.  The  replacement  is  not  complete,  since  even  in  man  loss 
of  the  cerebellum  is  followed  by  a  permanent  condition  of  slight 
ataxia.  Lewandowsky's*  suggestion  that  normally  in  man  the 
finer,  more  conscious  movements  of  the  body  are  controlled  directly 
from  the  cerebrum,  while  the  subconscious  or  dimly  conscious 
movements  of  locomotion  and  equilibrium  are  regulated  through 
the  cerebellar  centers  seems  to  be  in  accord  with  the  facts  known. 

The  Psychical  Functions  of  the  Cerebellum. — In  the  cerebel- 
lum, as  in  the  other  nerve  centers  below  the  cerebrum,  we  have  to 
consider  the  possibility  of  a  psychical  or  conscious  side  to  the  activity 
of  the  organ.  It  seems  clear,  however,  that  the  degree  of  conscious- 
ness, if  any,  exhibited  by  the  cerebellum  is  of  a  much  lower  order 
than  that  shown  by  the  cerebrum.  All  observers  agree  that  there 
is  no  marked  loss  of  sensations,  but  Luciani,  Russell,  and  others 
state  their  belief  that  in  some  indefinable  way  the  mentality  of 
the  animal  is  affected  by  removal  of  the  cerebellum.  Whatever 
functions  of  this  kind  are  present  we  can  define  only  by  the  un- 
satisfactory term  of  subconscious  rather  than  unconscious.  As  far 
as  can  be  determined,  this  effect  is  felt  mainly  upon  the  muscular 
sense  and  the  sense  of  direction. 

Localization  of  Function  in  the  Cerebellum. — All  observers 
agree  that  so  far  as  the  influence  of  the  cerebellum  on  the  muscula- 

*  Lewandowsky,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1903,  129;  see  also  Kohnstamm, 
^'Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  89,  240,  1902. 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND   MEDULLA.  225 

ture  of  the  body  is  concerned,  it  is  homolateral, — that  is,  each  half 
of  the  cefebellum  is  connected  with  its  own  half  of  the  body. 
The  connection  with  the  motor  areas  of  the  brain  is  the  re- 
verse, the  right  half  of  the  cerebrum  being  in  relation  with 
the  left  half  of  the  cerebellum.  These  relations  are  in  the  main 
borne  out  by  the  anatomical  course  of  the  motor  and  sensory  paths 
described  above.  But  those  who  have  operated  upon  the  cere- 
bellum by  the  method  of  ablation  agree  entirely  in  the  statement 
that  by  this  method  at  least  no  evidence  is  obtained  of  a  localization 
of  function  in  the  cerebellar  hemispheres.  There  is  no  reason  to 
believe  that  extirpation  of  definite  areas  in  the  hemispheres  affect 
definite  groups  of  muscles  either  on  the  sensory  or  the  motor  side. 
We  are  forced  to  conclude,  therefore,  that  locahzation  is  absent 
and  that  regarding  the  cerebellum  we  must  believe,  as  was  formerly 
believed  regarding  the  cerebrum,  that  each  half  is  everywhere  func- 
tionally equivalent.  The  effect  of  ablations  is  dependent  not  upon 
the  part  removed,  but  rather  upon  the  quantity.  It  is  to  be  doubted, 
perhaps,  whether  this  view  will  stand  the  test  of  more  complete 
investigations,  for  some  data  exist  that  suggest  the  possibility  of 
a  localization.  It  is  observed,  for  instance,  that  the  effects  of 
ablation  upon  the  movements  of  the  animal  are  more  marked  the 
closer  the  injury  is  to  the  mid-line,* — that  is,  the  more  the  vermi- 
form lobe  is  involved.  The  possibility  of  a  more  or  less  definite 
localization  is  suggested  also  by  the  effects  of  stimulation  of  the 
cerebellar  cortex.  Terrier  especially  has  described  definite  move- 
ments of  the  eyes,  head,  or  limbs  following  electrical  excitation  of 
definite  regions  of  the  cortex;  but  this  indication  has  not  been 
developed  by  later  experimenters  with  sufficient  success  to  lead 
to  positive  conclusions. 

The  Medulla  Oblongata. — In  the  medulla  oblongata  we  must 
recognize  a  region  of  special  physiological  importance  in  that  it 
is  the  seat  of  certain  centers  which  control  the  activity  of  the 
circulatory  and  respiratory  organs.  If  the  medulla  is  severed 
from  the  portion  of  the  brain  lying  anterior  to  it  the  animal  con- 
tinues to  live  for  a  considerable  period.  The  respiratory  move- 
ments are  performed  rhythmically,  and  the  blood-vessels  retain 
their  tone  so  as  to  maintain  an  approximately  normal  blood-pressure. 
On  the  contrary,  destruction  of  the  medulla,  or  severance  of  its 
connections  with  the  underlying  parts,  is  followed  by  a  cessation 
of  respiration  and  a  loss  of  tone  in  the  arteries,  either  of  which 
results  in  the  rapid  death  of  the  organism  as  a  whole.  The  portions 
of  the  medulla  which  exercise  these  important  functions  are  desig- 
nated, respectively,  as  the  respiratory  and  the  vasomotor  or  vaso- 
constrictor centers.     Their  location  and  to  some  extent  their  con- 

*  Lewandowsky,  loc.  cit. 
15 


226        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

nections  have  been  determined  by  physiological  experiments,  but 
so  far  it  has  not  been  possible  to  mark  out  histologically  the  exact 
groups  of  cells  concerned.  The  position  and  physiological  properties 
of  these  centers  are  described  in  the  sections  on  respiration  and 
circulation.  These  centers  are  of  especial  importance  because  of 
their  wide  connections  with  the  body,  their  essentially  independent 
activity  in  reference  to  the  higher  parts  of  the  brain,  and  the  abso- 
lutely necessary  character  of  the  regulations  they  effect.  In  the 
development  of  the  brain  the  functions  originally  mediated  by  the 
lower  parts  have  been  transferred  more  and  more  to  the  higher 
parts,  especially  in  regard  to  conscious  sensation  and  motion,  and 
the  so-called  higher  psychical  activities.  But  the  unconscious  and 
involuntary  regulation  of  the  organs  of  circulation  and  respiration 
and  to  a  certain  extent  of  the  other  visceral  organs  has  been  cen- 
tralized, as  it  were,  in  the  medulla.  In  addition  to  the  control 
of  the  respiration  and  circulation  other  important  reflex  activities 
are  effected  through  the  medulla  by  means  of  the  vagus  nerve, 
which  has  its  nucleus  of  origin  in  this  part  of  the  brain.  Such,  for 
instance,  are  the  reflex  control  of  the  heart  through  the  cardio- 
inhibitory  center  and  of  the  motions  and  secretions  of  the  alimentary 
canal. 

The  Nuclei  of  Origin  and  the  Functions  of  the  Cranial 
Nerves. — The  origin,  course,  anatomical  and  physiological  relations 
of  the  first  or  olfactor}^,  second  or  optic,  and  eighth  or  auditory 
nerves  have  been  referred  to  in  the  preceding  pages.  For  the 
sake  of  completeness  the  origin  and  functions  of  the  other  cranial 
nerves  may  be  summarized  briefly  in  this  connection. 

The  Third  Cranial  Nerve  {N .  Oculomotorius) . — This  nerve  arises 
from  the  base  of  the  brain  on  the  median  side  of  the  corresponding 
cms  cerebri.  It  is  a  motor  nerve  supplying  fibers  to  four  of  the 
extrinsic  muscles  of  the  eyeballs, — namely,  the  internal  rectus,  the 
superior  rectus,  the  inferior  rectus,  and  the  inferior  oblique — and 
to  the  levator  palpebrae.  It  innervates  also  two  important  intrinsic 
muscles  of  the  eyeball,  the  ciliary  muscle  used  in  accommodating 
the  eye  in  near  vision,  and  the  sphincter  of  the  iris  which  controls 
in  part  the  size  of  the  pupil.  These  two  latter  muscles  belong  to 
the  type  of  plain  muscle,  and  the  fibers  of  the  third  nerve  which 
innervate  them  terminate  in  the  ciliary  ganglion,  whence  the  path 
is  continued  by  sympathetic  nerve  fibers  (postganglionic  fibers)  to  the 
muscles.  In  the  interior  of  the  brain  the  fibers  of  the  third  nerve 
arise  from  a  conspicuous  nucleus  or  collection  of  nuclei  situated  in 
the  central  gray  matter  of  the  midbrain  at  the  level  of  the  superior 
colliculus.  The  fibers  for  the  ciliary  muscle  and  sphincter  pupillse 
arise  more  anteriorly  than  those  for  the  extrinsic  muscles.  His- 
tologically three  parts  at  least  may  be  distinguished,  as  shown  in 


Fig.  99. — Nuclei  of  origin  of  motor  and  primary  terminal  sensory  nuclei  of  cerebral 
nerves  {Held)  :  Schematically  represented  in  a  supposedly  transparent  brain  stem  viewed 
from  behind.  (Nuclei  and  roots  of  motor  nerves  in  light  red,  of  sensory  nerves  in 
purple.  Cochlear  nerve  in  yellow.)  4,  nucleus  of  the  third  nerve  (n.  oculomotorii); 
5,  nucleus  of  the  fourth  nerve  (n.  trochlearis);  6,  the  fourth  nerve;  7,  the  descending 
(motor)  root  of  the  fifth  nerve;  8,  the  principal  motor  nucleus  of  the  fifth  nerve; 
9,  the  sem.ilunar  ganglion  (g.  Gasseri);  26,  the  ascending  (sensory)  root  of  the  fifth 
nerve;  14,  nucleus  of  the  sixth  cranial  nerve;  15,  nucleus  of  the  facial  (seventh) 
nerve;  16,  the  facial  nerve;  34,  33,  nucleus  of  the  vestibular  branch  of  the  eighth  cranial 
nerve;  32,  ventral  nucleus  of  the  cochlear  branch  of  the  eighth  nerve:  27,  dorsal  nucleus 
of  the  cochlear  branch  of  the  eighth  nerve;  19,  29,  the  glossopharyngeal  nerve;  18,  28,  the 
vagus  nerve;  20,  motor  nuclei  of  vagus  and  glossopharyngeal  (nucleus  ambiguus  and 
nucleus  dorsalis);  23,  24,  nucleus  of  the  ate  cinerese,  the  solitary  bundle  and  its  nucleus; 
17,  the  eleventh  or  spinal  accessory  nerve;  22,  nucleus  of  the  spinal  accessory;  21,  nucleus 
of  the  hypoglossal  nerve. — (From  Spilteholz,  "Human  Anatomy.") 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND    MEDULLA. 


227 


Fig.  100, — namely,  the  lateral  (or  principal)  nucleus,  which  gives 
origin  chiefly  to  the  fibers  innervating  the  extrinsic  muscles;  the 
median  nucleus ;  and  the  nucleus  of  Edinger-Westphal.  Some  of 
the  fibers,  particularly  those  from  the  lateral  nucleus  to  the  infe- 
rior rectus,  the  internal  rectus,  and  the  inferior  oblique,  cross 
the  mid- line  and  emerge  in  the  nerve  of  the  opposite  side. 

The  Fourth  Cranial  Nerve  {N.  Trochlearis) . — This  nerve  emerges 
from  the  brain  in  the  anterior  medullary  velum  (valve  of  Vieussens) 
just  posterior  to  the  inferior  colliculus.  It  curves  around  the  cms 
cerebri  to  reach  the  base  of  the  brain.     It  is  a  motor  nerve,  and 


Nucleus  of  com. 

Edinger-Westphal  nucleus. 
Principal  nucleus. 
Median  nucleus. 


Nucleus  of  4th  nerve. 


Fig.  100. — Nuclei  of  origin  of  the  third  and  fourth  nerves. — (From  P airier  and  Charpy.) 


supplies  fibers  to  the  superior  oblique  muscle  of  the  eyeball.  In 
the  interior  of  the  brain  the  fibers  arise  from  a  nucleus  in  the  central 
gray  matter  just  posterior  to  that  of  the  third  nerve  (Fig.  100). 
The  fibers  pass  dorsalward  toward  the  velum  and  make  a  com- 
plete decussation  before  emerging. 

The  Fifth  Cranial  Nerve  (N.  Trigeminus). — This  nerve  arises 
from  the  side  of  the  pons  by  two  roots,  a  small  motor  root,  portio 
minor,  and  a  large  sensory  root,  portio  major.  It  is,  therefore,  a 
mixed  motor  and  sensory  nerve,  supplying  motor  fibers  to  the 
muscles  of  mastication  and  sensory  fibers  of  pressure,  pain,  and 
temperature  to  the  face,  the  forepart  of  the  scalp,  the  eye,  nose, 


228 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


portions    of    the    ear,    mouth,    and    tongue,   and    to    the    dura 
mater  (Fig.  101).     In  the  interior  of  the  brain  the  motor  portion, 


Fig.  101. — Diagram  showing  the  average  area  of  distribution  of  the  sensory  fibers  of  the 
trigeminal  nerve. — (Gushing.) 


N.  opht. 


N.  max.  sup. 


N.  max.  inf. 


Fig.   102. — Nuclei  of   origin   of  the   fifth   cranial   nerve. — (From  Poirier  and  Charpy,  after 

Van  Gehuchten.) 


po];tio  minor,  arises  partly  from  a  small  nucleus  in  the  pons  and  partly 
from  a  long  column  of  cells  extending  along  the  lower  margin  of  the 
central  gray  matter  throughout  the  midbrain.  .  This  column  and 


CEREBELLUM,    PONS,    AND    MEDULLA.  229 

the  fibers  arising  from  it  constitute  the  tlescending  motor  root  of  the 
fifth  nerve  (see  Fig.  102).  The  sensory  fibers  originate  from  the  nerve 
cells  in  the  Gasserian  ganghon  (g.  semilimare).  The  branch  that 
enters  the  brain  ends  partly  in  a  collection  of  cells  in  the  pons,  the 
so-called  sensory  nucleus,  and  partly  in  a  column  of  cells  extending 
posteriorly  throughout  the  length  of  the  medulla.  These  cells 
and  the  fibers  ending  in  them  constitute  the  descending  spinal  root 
of  the  fifth  nerve  (see  Fig.  99). 

The  Sixth  Cranial  Nerve  {N.  Ahducens). — This  nerve  arises  from 
the  base  of  the  brain  at  the  posterior  edge  of  the  pons.  It  is  a  motor 
nerve,  and  supplies  fibers  to  the  external  rectus  muscle  of  the  eye- 
ball. In  the  interior  of  the  brain  its  fibers  originate  in  a  small  spheri- 
cal nucleus  lying  beneath  the  floor  of  the  fourth  ventricle.  Con- 
nections have  been  traced  between  this  nucleus  and  the  pyramidal 
tract  of  the  opposite  side  (Fig.  99). 

The  Seventh  Cranial  Nerve  {N .  Facialis). — This  nerve  appears 
on  the  base  of  the  brain  at  the  posterior  margin  of  the  pons,  lateral 
and  somewhat  posterior  to  the  emergence  of  the  sixth  nerve.  It  is 
mainly  a  motor  nerve,  but  carries  some  sensory  fibers  (fibers  of 
taste  and  general  sensibility)  received  through  the  n.  intermedins  of 
Wrisberg.  The  motor  fibers  of  the  nerve  supply  the  muscles  of  the 
face,  part  of  the  scalp,  and  the  ear,  including  its  intrinsic  muscles, 
and  in  addition  secretory  fibers  are  supplied  to  the  submaxillary 
and  sublingual  glands.  Within  the  brain  these  fibers  arise  from  a 
conspicuous  nucleus  in  the  tegmental  region  of  the  pons  lying 
ventral  to  the  nucleus  of  the  sixth,  beneath  the  middle  of  the  fourth 
ventricle  (Fig.  99).  The  sensory  fibers  of  the  nerve  of  Wrisberg 
originate  in  the  nerve  cells  of  the  geniculate  ganglion. 

The  Ninth  Cranial  Nerve  (TV.  Glossopharyngeus)  arises  from  the 
side  of  the  medulla, — the  restiform  body.  It  is  a  mixed  nerve, 
supplying  motor  fibers  to  the  muscles  of  the  pharynx  and  the  base 
of  the  tongue  and  secretory  fibers  to  the  parotid  gland.  Within 
the  brain  these  fibers  arise  from  two  motor  nuclei  common  to  this 
and  the  tenth  nerve, — namely,  a  dorsal  nucleus  below  the  floor  of 
the  fourth  ventricle  and  a  smaller  ventral  nucleus,  n.  ambiguus, 
in  the  reticular  substance  of  the  tegmentum  (Fig.  99).  The  sensory 
fibers  supply  in  part  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  tongue  and 
pharynx,  the  tympanic  cavity,  and  the  Eustachian  tube.  These 
fibers  arise  from  cells  in  the  two  ganglia  on  the  tnmk  of  the  nerve, 
the  ganglion  superius  and  g.  petrosum.  The  branches  from  these 
cells  that  pass  into  the  medulla  terminate  in  the  nucleus  of  the  ala 
cinerea. 

The  Tenth  Cranial  Nerve  {N.  Vagus  or  Pneumogastricus) . — This 
nerve  arises  from  the  side  of  the  medulla  posterior  to  the  origin  of 
the  glossopharyngeal  nerve.     It  is  also  a  mixed  nerve,  with  an 


230        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

extensive  distribution  to  the  respiratory  and  digestive  organs  and 
the  heart.  Its  efferent  or  motor  fibers  arise  within  the  brain  from 
the  same  masses  of  cells  that  give  rise  to  the  motor  fibers  of  the 
glossopharyngeal.  These  fibers  supply  the  intrinsic  muscles  of  the 
larynx,  esophagus,  stomach,  small  intestine,  and  part  of  the  large 
intestine.  Inhibitory  fibers  are  carried  to  the  heart  and  secretory 
fibers  to  the  gastric  and  pancreatic  glands.  Its  sensory  or  afferent 
fibers  are  distributed  to  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  larynx, 
trachea,  and  lungs,  and  to  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  esophagus, 
stomach,  intestines,  and  gall-bladder  and  ducts.  These  fibers 
arise  from  cells  in  the  ganglia  on  the  tn.mk  of  the  nerve,  the  gan- 
glion jugulare  and  g.  nodosum.  The  branches  from  these  cells  that 
pass  into  the  medulla  terminate  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  ala  cinerea. 

The  Eleventh  Cranial  Nerve  (N.  Accessorius) . — This  nerve  is 
usually  described  as  arising  by  upper  roots  from  the  medulla,  and 
by  a  series  of  lower  roots  from  the  spinal  cord  as  low  as  the  fifth 
to  the  seventh  cervical  segment.  It  is  a  motor  nerve,  supplying 
fibers  to  the  sternomastoid  and  trapezius  muscles.  The  medullary 
branches  arise  from  the  posterior  portion  of  the  dorsal  motor 
nucleus  which  gives  origin  to  the  vagus,  while  the  spinal  branches 
originate  from  cells  in  the  anterior  horn  of  the  gray  matter  of  the 
cord  (Fig.  99). 

The  Twelfth  Crainal  Nerve  (N.  Hypoglossus) . — This  nerve  arises 
from  the  medulla  in  the  furrow  between  the  anterior  pyramid  and 
the  olivary  body.  It  is  a  motor  nerve,  supplying  the  muscles  of 
the  tongue  and  the  extrinsic  muscles  of  the  larynx  and  hyoid  bone. 
Within  the  brain  these  fibers  originate  from  a  distinct  nucleus 
lying  in  the  floor  of  the  fourth  ventricle  near  the  mid-line  (Fig.  99). 


CHAPTER  XII, 

THE  SYMPATHETIC  OR  AUTONOMIC  NERVOUS 
SYSTEM. 

The  chain  of  nerve  gangha  extending  on  each  side  of  the  spinal 
cokimn  to  the  coccyx  is  known  as  the  sympathetic  nervous  system. 
This  name  was  given  to  the  structure  under  the  misapprehension 
that  it  constitutes  a  nerve  pathway  through  which  so-called  sym- 
pathetic— or,  as  we  now  designate  them,  reflex  actions  of  distant 
organs  are  effected.  It  was  supposed  to  arise  from  the  brain  by 
branches  connected  with  the  fifth  and  sixth  cranial  nerves.*  We 
now  know  that  this  system  consists  of  a  series  of  ganglia  or  col- 
lections of  nerve  cells  connected  with  each  other  and  connected  also 
with  the  spinal  nerves.  Strictly  speaking,  the  term  sympathetic 
system  is  applicable  only  to  the  chain  of  ganglia  which  begins  with 
the  superior  cervical  ganglion  at  the  base  of  the  skull  and  ends 
with  the  ganglion  coccygeum.  There  are,  however,  other  outlying 
nerve  ganglia  with  or  without  specific  names  which  from  a  physio- 
logical and  indeed  from  an  anatomical  standpoint  belong  to  the  same 
group.  In  the  abdomen  we  have  the  so-called  prevertebral  ganglia, 
the  semilunar  ganglion  from  which  arises  the  celiac  plexus,  the 
superior  mesenteric,  and  the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglion  giving 
rise  to  the  hypogastric  nerve.  These  ganglia  lie  ventral  to  the 
sympathetic  trunk,  but  are  in  direct  connection  with  it.  In  the 
head  region  the  ciliary,  sphenopalatine,  and  otic  gangha  are 
also  of  the  same  type.  More  peripherally  are  numerous  other 
ganglia  lying  in  or  around  the  various  visceral  organs,  such  as  the 
submaxillary  ganglion  near  the  duct  from  the  corresponding  gland, 
the  cardiac  ganglia  in  the  heart,  and  the  extensive  system  of  nerve 
cells  in  the  walls  of  the  alimentary  canal  known  as  the  plexuses 
of  Meissner  and  Auerbach.  With  the  exception,  perhaps,  of  this 
last  system,  whose  histological  structure  and  connections  are  not 
satisfactorily  known,  all  of  these  ganglia  are  frequently  designated 
as  sympathetic,  and  from  a  physiological  as  well  as  an  anatomical 
standpoint  may  be  considered  with  the  ganglia  of  the  S3^mpathetic 
trunk  or  chain.  Langley,  who  has  contributed  greatly  to  our 
knowledge  of  the  finer  anatomy  and  the  physiology  of  this  system, 
has  recently  proposed  a  different  classification. f 

*  Charles  Bell,  "The  Nervous  System  of  the  Human  Body,"  third  edi- 
tion, London,  1844,  p.  9. 

t  Schafer's  "  Text-book  of  Physiology,"  1900,  vol.  ii  ;  "  Ergebnisse  der 
Physiologie,"  1903,  vol.  ii,  part  ii,  p.  823  ;  also  "  Brain,"  1903,  vol.  xxvi. 

231 


232 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


Autonomic  Nervous  System. — According  to  Langley,  the 
efferent  fibers  from  the  nerve  cells  of  the  sympathetic  and  re- 
lated ganglia  supply  the  plain  muscle  tissues, 
the  cardiac  muscles,  and  the  glands, — that  is, 
the  organs  of  the  involuntary  or,  according  to 
an  old  nomenclature,  the  vegetative  processes 
of  the  body.  He  proposes  for  this  entire  sys- 
tem of  efferent  fibers  the  term  autonomic,  to 
indicate  that  they  possess  a  certain  independ- 
ence of  the  central  nervous  system.  The  au- 
tonomic system  is  contrasted  physiologically 
and  anatomically  with  the  efferent  spinal  and 
cranial  fibers  that  supply  the  striated  or  volun- 
tary muscles:  physiologically  in  the  fact  that 
this  latter  group  of  fibers  is  entirely  dependent 
upon  activities  of  the  central  nervous  system, 
and  anatomically  in  the  fact  that  the  auto- 
nomic fibers,  although  arising  ultimately  from 
the  central  nervous  system,  all  pass  to  their  pe- 
ripheral tissues  by  way  of  sympathetic  nerve 
cells.  The  autonomic  path  consists  of  two 
neurons:  one  in  the  central  nervous  system 
the  axon  of  which  emerges  in  one  of  the  spinal 
or  cranial  nerves  and  ends  around  the  dendrites 
of  a  sympathetic  cell ;  and  one,  the  axon  from 
the  sympathetic  cell  which  passes  to  the  periph- 
eral tissue.  The  first  axon  is  spoken  of  as  the 
preganglionic  fiber,  the  second  as  the  post- 
ganglionic fiber.  Their  connections  are  repre- 
sented in  the  accompanying  schema.   (Fig.  103.) 

Physiological  and  anatomical  investigations 
have  shown  that  autonomic  nerve  fibers  arise 
from  four  regions  in  the  central  nervous  system 
(Fig.  104) :   First,  from  the  midbrain,  emerging 


Pre^anqllome  -fibre. 


c&i 


CjymJoathetic 


■lioru 


Tost-vawhoTiie. 
fibre. 


Tnusele. 


Fig.  103. — Schema  to  show  the  general  relation  between 
the  preganglionic  and  postganglionic  fibers  of  the  autonomic 
paths. 


Fig.  104.— Illus- 
trating the  central  ori- 
gin of  the  autonomic 
fibers. — {Langley.) 


SYMPATHETIC    NERVOUS    SYSTEM,  233 

in  the  third  cranial  nerve  and  passing  \isi  the  ciliary  ganglion; 
second,  from  the  bulbar  region,  emerging  in  the  seventh,  ninth,  and 
tenth  cranial  nerves;  third,  from  the  thoracic  spinal  nerves  (first 
thoracic  to  fourth  or  fifth  lumbar)  and  passing  in  general  via  the 
ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  chain;  fourth,  from  the  sacral  region 
by  way  of  the  so-called  nervus  erigens  supplying  the  descending 
colon,  rectum,  anus,  and  genital  organs.  The  autonomic  fibers  at 
their  origin  in  the  central  nervous  system — that  is,  while  pregan- 
glionic fibers — are  all  possessed  of  a  small  medullated  sheath, 
having  a  diameter  of  1.8  /j.  to  4  /j..  The  postganglionic  fiber  is  in 
most  cases  non-medullated,  but  this  is  by  no  means  an  invariable 
rule.  In  many  cases  the  axons  from  sympathetic  cells  possess 
distinct,  although  small,  myelin  sheaths. 

The  Nicotin  Method. — The  course  of  the  autonomic  fibers 
has  been  traced  in  many  cases  to  their  corresponding  sympathetic 
nerve  cells  partly  by  the  method  of  secondary  degeneration  and 
partly  by  the  use  of  nicotin,  as  first  described  by  Langley  and 
Dickinson.*  These  authors  have  shown  that  after  the  use  of 
nicotin,  either  injected  into  the  circulation  or  painted  upon  the 
ganglion,  stimulation  of  the  preganglionic  fiber  in  any  part  of  its 
course  fails  to  give  any  response,  while  stimulation  of  the  post- 
ganglionic fiber,  on  the  contrary,  is  still  effective.  It  would  seem, 
therefore,  that  the  nicotin  paralyzes  the  connection  of  the  pre- 
ganglionic fiber  with  the  sympathetic  nerve  cell,  and  by  means 
of  the  local  application  of  the  drug  it  is  possible  in  many  cases 
to  pick  out  the  ganglion  in  which  the  preganglionic  fiber  really 
ends.  For  it  often  happens  that  in  the  sympathetic  trunk  this 
fiber  will  pass  through  several  ganglia  before  making  final  connec- 
tions with  the  sympathetic  cells.  So  far,  the  course  of  these 
fibers  has  been  traced  most  successfully  in  the  case  of  those  sup- 
pl}-ing  the  sweat  glands,  blood-vessels,  and  especially  the  erector 
muscles  of  the  hairs,  the  so-called  pilomotor  nerve  fibers.  The 
visible  result  of  stimulation  in  the  last  case  gives  a  ready  means 
of  determining  the  presence  of  the  fibers. 

General  Course  of  the  Autonomic  Fibers  Arising  from  the 
Spinal  Nerves. — It  has  long  been  known  that  the  spinal  nerves 
are  connected  with  many  of  the  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  chain 
by  fine  branches  known  as  the  rami  communicantes.  In  the  tho- 
racic and  lumbar  regions  (first  thoracic  to  second  or  fourth  lumbar) 
these  rami  consist  of  two  parts:  a  white  and  a  gray  ramus,  the 
difference  in  color  being  due  to  the  fact  that  the  white  rami  are 
composed  almost  entirely  of  medullated  fibers,  while  the  gray  rami 
are  largely  non-medullated.  In  the  cervical,  lower  lumbar,  and 
sacral  regions  the  rami  consist  only  of  the  gray  part.  Physiological 
*  "  Proceedings,  Royal  Society,"  1889,  46,  423. 


234        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

experiments  show  that  the  white  rami  consist  of  preganghonic 
fibers  that  arise  from  nerve  cells  in  the  spinal  column,  pass  out  by 
way  of  the  anterior  roots,  enter  the  white  ramus,  and  thus  reach 
the  sympathetic  chain.  On  entering  this  latter  the  fiber  may 
not  end  at  once  in  the  ganglion  at  which  it  enters,  but  may  pass  up 
or  down  in  the  chain  for  some  distance.  Eventually,  however,  it 
ends  around  a  sympathetic  nerve  cell  and  the  path  is  then  con- 
tinued by  the  axon  from  this  cell  as  the  postganglionic  fiber.  The 
gray  rami  consist  of  these  latter  fibers,  which  return  from  the  sym- 
pathetic chain  to  the  spinal  nerves  and  are  then  distributed  to  the 
areas  supplied  by  these  nerves,  particularly  the  cutaneous  areas, 
since  the  skin  branches  are  the  ones  that  supply  the  sweat  glands, 
the  blood-vessels,  and  the  erector  muscles  of  the  hairs.  It  will  be 
noted  that  the  fibers  that  pass  from  a  given  spinal  nerve — say,  the 
twelfth  thoracic — by  a  white  ramus  to  enter  the  sympathetic  chain 
do  not  return  as  postganglionic  fibers  by  the  gray  ramus  to  the 
same  spinal  nerve.  On  the  contrary,  the  gray  ramus  of  the  twelfth 
thoracic  may  consist  of  the  postganglionic  portion  of  autonomic 
fibers  that  enter  the  sympathetic  through  a  white  ramus  of 
one  of  the  higher  thoracic  nerves.  In  general,  we  may  say 
that  there  is  a  great  outflow  of  autonomic  fibers,  including 
vasomotor,  sweat,  and  pilomotor  fibers,  in  the  white  rami  commu- 
nicantes  from  the  first  or  second  thoracic  to  the  second  or  fourth 
lumbar  nerves.  Those  of  these  fibers  that  are  to  be  distributed  to 
the  skin  areas  of  the  body- — head,  limbs,  and  trunk — return  by  way 
of  the  gray  rami  to  the  various  spinal  nerves  and  are  distributed  with 
these  nerves,  the  distribution  being  somewhat  different  in  different 
animals  and  for  the  different  varieties  of  fibers.  Those  fibers  that 
are  distributed  eventually  to  the  blood-vessels,  glands,  and  walls 
of  the  viscera  have  a  different  course  from  those  supplying  the 
glands,  blood-vessels,  and  plain  muscle  of  the  head  region.  For 
the  head  region  the  fibers  after  entering  the  sympathetic  chain  pass 
upward  along  the  cervical  sympathetic  to  end  in  the  superior 
cervical  ganglion;  thence  the  path  is  continued  by  postganglionic 
fibers  which  emerge  by  the  various  plexuses  that  arise  from  this 
ganglion.  For  the  abdominal  and  pelvic  viscera  the  fibers  (particu- 
larly the  rich  supply  of  vasoconstrictor  fibers),  after  entering  the 
sympathetic  chain,  emerge,  still  as  preganglionic  fibers,  by  the 
splanchnic  nerves  that  run  to  the  celiac  ganglion  or  in  the  branches 
connecting  with  the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglia,  and  then  become 
postganglionic  fibers  (see  Fig.  105).  The  details  of  the  course  of 
the  vasomotor,  sweat,  visceromotor  fibers  to  the  different  regions, 
the  cardiac  fibers,  etc.,  will  be  given  in  the  appropriate  sections. 

General  Course  of  the  Autonomic  Fibers  Arising  from  the 
Brain. — These  fibers  leave  the  brain  in  the  third,  seventh,  ninth, 


SYMPATHETIC    NERVOUS    SYSTEM, 


235 


tenth,  and  eleventh  cranial  nerves, 
nerve  end,  as  preganglionic  fi- 
bers, in  the  ciliary  ganglion. 
Their  postganglionic  fibers 
leave  this  ganglion  in  the  short 
ciliary  nerves  and  innervate 
the  plain  muscle  of  the  sphinc- 
ter of  the  iris  and  the  ciliary 
muscle.  The  fibers  that  emerge 
in  the  seventh  and  ninth 
nerves  probably  supply  the 
glands  and  blood-vessels  (vaso- 
dilator fibers)  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  nose  and 
mouth.  Some  of  these  fibers 
reach  the  fifth  nerve  by  way 
of  anastomosing  branches  and 
are  distributed  with  it.  Their 
preganglionic  portion  termi- 
nates in  some  of  the  ganglia 
belonging  to  the  sympathetic 
type  which  are  found  in  this 
region,  such  as  the  sphenopal- 
atine and  otic  ganglia,  and  the 
submaxillary  and  sublingual 
ganglia  for  the  fibers  dis- 
tributed to  the  glands  of  the 
same  name.  The  autonomic 
fibers  that  arise  with  the  tenth 
(and  the  eleventh)  nerves  are 
distributed  through  the  vagus. 
Physiologically  these  fibers 
consist  of  motor  fibers  (vis- 
ceromotor fibers)  to  the  mus- 
culature of  the  esophagus, 
stomach,  small  intestine,  and 
large  intestine  as  far  as  the 
descending  colon,  motor  fibers 
to  the  bronchial  musculature, 
inhibitory  fibers  to  the  heart, 
and  secretory  fibers  to  the 
gastric  and  pancreatic  glands. 
The  ganglia  in  which  the  pre- 
ganglionic portion  ends  have 
not    been    definitely  isolated, 


Those  that  emerge  in  the  third 


Fig.  105. — Diagram  giving  a  schematic 
representation  of  the  course  of  the  autonomic 
(sympathetic)  fibers  arising  from  the  thoracico- 
lumbar  and  sacral  regions  of  the  cord.  The 
preganglionic  fiber  is  repre?ented  in  red,  the 
postganglionic  in  black  lines.  The  arrows  in- 
dicate the  normal  direction  of  the  nerve  im- 
pulses or  nerve  conduction.  S.c,  Superior 
cervical  ganglion ;  I.e.,  inferior  cervical  gan- 
glion; T,  the  first  thoracic  ganglion;  Sp.,  the 
.splanchnic  nerve;  C,  the  semilunar  or  celiac 
ganglion ;  m.,  the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglion ; 
h.,  the  hypogastric  nerves;  N.E.,  the  nervus 
erigens.  The  numerals  indicate  the  corre- 
sponding spinal  nerves. 


236        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

but  probably  they  comprise  the  small  and,  for  the  most  part,  un- 
named local  ganglia  found  in  or  near  the  organs  innervated. 

General  Course  of  the  Autonomic  Fibers  Arising  from  the 
Sacral  Cord. — The  autonomic  fibers  of  this  region  emerge  from 
the  cord  in  the  anterior  roots  of  the  sacral  nerves, — second  to 
fourth.  The  branches  from  these  roots  unite  to  form  the  so-called 
nervus  erigens  (pelvic  nerve) ,  which  loses  itself  in  the  pelvic  plexus 
without  making  connections  with  the  sympathetic  chain  of  ganglia. 
The  pelvic  plexus  is  formed  in  part  also  from  the  hypogastric  nerve 
arising  from  the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglion.  Through  this  latter 
path  autonomic  fibers  from  the  upper  lumbar  region  enter  the 
plexus  (Fig.  105).  The  autonomic  fibers  of  the  nervus  erigens 
supply  vasodilator  fibers  to  the  external  genital  organs,  and  in 
the  male  constitute  the  physiological  mechanism  for  erection; 
whence  the  name.  They  supply,  also,  vasodilator  fibers  to  rectum 
and  anus  and  motor  fibers  to  the  plain  muscles  of  the  colon  de- 
scendens,  rectum,  and  anus.  The  preganglionic  part  of  these  fibers 
ends  in  small  sympathetic  ganglia  in  the  pelvic  plexus  or  in  the 
neighborhood  of  the  organs  supplied. 

Normal  Mode  of  Stimulation  of  the  Autonomic  Nerve  Fibers. 
— In  distinction  from  the  nerve  fibers  innervating  the  skeletal 
muscles  practically  the  whole  set  of  autonomic  fibers  is  removed 
from  the  control  of  the  will.  An  apparent  exception  to  this  general 
statement  is  found  in  the  fact  that  the  ciliary  muscle  of  the  eye  is 
seemingly  under  voluntary  control.  We  must  suppose  that  under 
normal  conditions  they  are  always  excited  refiexly,  and  the  course 
of  the  afferent  fibers  concerned  in  these  reflexes  and  the  nature  of 
the  effective  sensory  stimulus  in  each  case  are  important  in  the  con- 
sideration of  each  of  the  physiological  mechanisms  involved.  Most 
of  these  mechanisms,  as  we  shall  find,  work  reflexly — that  is, 
without  voluntary  initiation — and,  for  the  most  part,  uncon- 
sciously,— for  instance,  the  movements  of  the  intestines,  the  secre- 
tion of  the  digestive  glands,  and  the  contraction  and  dilatation  of 
the  arteries.  The  autonomic  nerve  fibers  control,  therefore,  the 
unconscious  co-ordinated  actions,  the  so-called  vegetative  processes, 
of  the  body.  There  is  no  apparent  reason  in  the  anatomical  ar- 
rangements why  these  fibers  should  be  free  from  voluntary  control. 
Their  distinguishing  characteristic  in  comparison  with  the  nerves 
for  the  voluntary  movements  is  the  fact  that  they  all  terminate 
first  in  sympathetic  nerve  cells;  but  this  fact  gives  no  explanation 
of  the  absence  of  conscious  control  by  the  will.  We  are  justified  in 
saying  that  nerve  paths  that  pass  through  sympathetic  nerve  cells 
cannot  be  excited  voluntarily;  but  the  immediate  reason  for  this 
fact  is  probably  to  be  found  in  the  ultimate  point  of  origin  of  these 
paths  in  the  central  nervous  system.     What  we  designate  as  vol- 


SYMPATHETIC   NERVOUS   SYSTEM.  237 

untary  motor  paths  arise  in  a  definite  region  of  the  cortex, — the 
motor  area  in  the  frontal  lobe.  Our  motor  conceptions  or  ideas 
can  affect  the  efferent  paths  arising  in  this  region,  but  not  those, 
apparently,  which  originate  in  other  parts  of  the  brain. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  SLEEP. 

The  state  of  more  or  less  complete  unconsciousness  which  we 
designate  as  sleep  forms  a  part  of  the  physiology  of  the  brain  which 
naturally  has  attracted  much  attention,  and  the  theoretical  explana- 
tions that  have  been  advanced  at  one  time  or  another  are  exceed- 
ingly numerous.  The  same  condition  occurs  in  many,  if  not  all,  of 
the  other  mammalia,  and,  indeed,  in  all  hving  things  there  occur 
periods  of  rest  alternating  with  periods  of  activity.  Whether  these 
periods  of  rest  are  essentially  similar  in  nature  to  sleep  in  man 
is  a  question  in  general  physiology  that  can  be  solved  only  when 
we  know  more  of  the  chemistry  of  living  matter.  Within  the  human 
body  there  are  other  tissues  that  exhibit  periods  of  rest  alternating 
with  periods  of  activity, — the  gland  cells,  for  example.  The  secret- 
ing cells  of  the  pancreas  have  a  period  of  activity  in  which  the 
destructive  processes  exceed  the  constructive,  and  a  period  of  rest 
in  which  these  relations  are  reversed.  We  may  compare  this  con- 
dition in  the  gland  cells  with  that  in  the  brain.  Sleep,  from  this 
standpoint,  is  a  period  of  comparative  rest  or  inactivity,  during 
which  the  constructive  or  anabolic  processes  are  in  excess  of  the 
disassimilatory  changes.  The  period  of  sleep  is  a  period  of  re- 
cuperation, and  doubtless  all  tissues  have  these  alternating 
phases.  To  explain  sleep  fundamentally,  therefore,  it  would  be 
necessary  to  understand  the  chemical  changes  of  anabolism  and 
catabolism,  and  an  explanation  of  the  sleep  of  the  brain  tissues 
would  doubtless  explain  the  similar  phenomenon  in  other  tissues. 
But  what  the  physiologists  desire  first,  and  have  attempted  to 
determine,  is  an  explanation  of  why  this  condition  comes  on  with 
a  certain  periodical  regularity, — an  explanation,  in  other  words,  of 
the  mechanism  of  sleep,  the  change  or  changes  in  the  brain  or  the 
body  which  reduce  the  metabolism  of  the  brain  tissue  to  such 
an  extent  that  it  falls  below  the  level  necessary  to  cause  conscious- 
ness. 

Physiological  Relations  during  Sleep. — The  central  and  most 
important  fact  of  sleep  is  the  partial  or  complete  loss  of  conscious- 
ness, and  this  phenomenon  may  be  referred  directly  to  a  lessened 
metabolic  activity  in  the  brain  tissue,  presumably  in  the  cortex 
cerebri.    During  sleep  the  following  changes  have  been  recorded: 

238 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   SLEEP.  239 

The  respirations  become  slower  and  deeper  and  the  costal  respiration, 
(respiration  by  elevation  of  the  ribs)  predominates  over  the  ab- 
dominal or  diaphragmatic  respiration  as  compared  with  the  waking 
condition.  The  respiratory  movements  also  show  frequently  a 
tendency  to  become  periodic, — that  is,  to  increase  and  decrease 
regularly  in  groups  after  the  manner  of  the  Cheyne-Stokes  type 
of  breathing.  The  expiratio'n  is  frequently  shorter  and  more  audi- 
ble than  in  the  respirations  of  the  waking  hours.  The  eyeballs 
roll  upward  and  inward  and  the  pupil  is  constricted.  According 
to  Lombard's  observations,  the  knee-kick  decreases  or  disappears 
entirely  during  sleep.  Some  of  the  constant  secretions  are  dimin- 
ished in  amount, — as,  for  instance,  the  urine,  the  tears,  and  the 
secretion  of  the  mucous  glands  in  the  nasal  or  pharyngeal  mem- 
brane. One  of  the  familiar  signs  of  a  sleepy  condition  is  the  dryness 
of  the  surface  of  the  eyes,  a  condition  that  leads  to  the  rubbing 
of  the  eyes.  It  is  sometimes  stated  that  the  digestive  secretions 
are  diminished  during  sleep,  but  the  statement  does  not  seem  to 
rest  upon  satisfactory  observations,  and  may  be  doubted.  The 
pulse-rate  decreases  during  sleep  and  there  are  also  certain  sig- 
nificant changes  in  the  distribution  of  blood  in  the  body  owing 
to  a  diminished  vascular  tone  in  the  skin  vessels.  These  latter 
changes  will  be  referred  to  more  in  detail  below.  The  physiological 
oxidations  are  also  decreased,  as  shown  by  the  diminished  output 
of  carbon  dioxid.  On  the  whole,  however,  the  physiological  activities 
of  the  body  go  on  much  as  in  the  waking  condition.  Those  changes 
in  activity  that  do  occur  are,  in  the  main,  an  indirect  result  of 
the  partial  or  complete  cessation  of  activity  in  the  brain.  One 
might  say  that  while  the  cortex  of  the  brain  sleeps — that  is,  is 
inactive — most  of  the  other  organs  of  the  body  may  be  awake  and 
maintain  their  normal  activity.  Another  fact  of  interest  is  that 
the  entire  cortex  does  not  fall  asleep  at  the  same  instant  nor 
always  to  the  same  extent.  Ordinarily  as  sleep  sets  in  the  power 
to  make  conscious  movements  is  lost  first  and  the  auditory  sen- 
sibility last,  and  on  awakening  the  reverse  relation  holds.  The 
individual  may  be  conscious  of  sound  sensations  before  he  is 
sufficiently  awake  to  make  voluntary  movements. 

The  Intensity  of  Sleep. — The  intensity  of  sleep — that  is,  the 
depth  of  unconsciousness — has  been  studied  by  the  simple  device 
of  ascertaining  the  intensity  of  the  sensory  stimulus  necessary  to 
awaken  the  sleeper.  Kohlschiitter  *  used  for  this  purpose  a  pendu- 
lum falling  against  a  sounding  plate.  At  intervals  of  a  half-hour 
during  the  period  of  sleep  the  auditory  stimuli  thus  produced  were 
increased  in  intensity  until  waking  was  caused.  His  results  are 
expressed  in  the  curve  shown  in  Fig.  106,  in  which  the  intensity 
*  Kohlschutter,  "Zeitschrift  f.  rationelle  Medicin,"  1863. 


240 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


of  the  sleep  is  represented  by  the  height  of  the  ordinates.  According 
to  this  curve,  the  greatest  intensity  is  reached  about  an  hour  after 
the  beginning,  and  from  the  second  to  the  third  hour  onward  the 
depth  of  sleep  is  very  slight.  The  activities  of  the  brain  lie  just 
below  the  threshold  of  consciousness.  It  appears  also  from  this 
curve  that  the  recuperative  effect  of  sleep  is  not  proportional  to 
its  intensity.  The  long  period  from  the  third  to  the  eighth  hour, 
in  which  the  depth  of  sleep  is  so  slight  is  presumably  as  important 
in  restoring  the  brain  to  its  normal  waking  irritability  as  the  deeper 
period  up  to  the  third  hour.  It  is  probable  that  the  curve  of  in- 
tensity of  sleep  varies  somewhat  with  the  individual  and  also  with 
surrounding  conditions.     That  individual  variations  occur  is  indi- 


800 
700 

eoo 

500 
400 
300 
200 
100 


ENGT 

H  OF  STIMULUS 

- 

/ 

\ 

- 

/ 

-/ 

- 

■ 

- 

\ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

-^ 

HOURS  0^     IX)      1.5    Z.0     2.5    3.0    3.5     4.0    45     5.0    5.5    &0    6B    7.0    7.5   78 


Fig.  106. — Curve  illustrating  the  strength  of  an  auditory  stimulu.s  (a  ball  falling  from 
a  height)  necessary  to  awaken  a  sleeping  person.  The  hours  marked  below.  The  tests 
were  made  at  half-hour  intervals.  The  curve  indicates  that  the  distance  through  which 
it  was  necessary  to  drop  the  ball  increased  during  the  first  hour,  and  then  diminished,  at 
first  very  rapidly,  then  slowly. — (Kohlschiltter.) 


cated  by  the  results  obtained  by  two  other  observers,  Monninghoff 
and  Piesbergen,*  who  used  the  same  general  method  as  was  em- 
ployed by  Kohlschiltter.  The  sleeper  was  awakened  by  auditory 
stimuli  produced  by  dropping  a  lead  ball  from  varying  heights  upon 
a  lead  plate.  Only  two  experiments  were  made  each  night,  and 
the  curves  constructed  represent,  therefore,  composites  from  several 
periods  of  sleep.  One  of  the  curves  obtained  is  represented  in 
Fig.  107.  According  to  this  curve,  the  maximum  intensity  is 
reached  between  the  first  and  second  hours,  and  between  the  fourth 
and  the  fifth  hour  there  is  a  second  slight  increase  in  intensity, 
giving  a  second  maximum  in  the  curve.  This  latter  feature  of  a 
*  Monninghoff  and  Piesbergen,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  19,  1,  1883. 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   SLEEP. 


241 


ciw 

~ 

~ 

—y 

1 

rr 

~ 

~ 

■" 

~ 

"■ 

"■ 

~ 

~ 

' 

■♦rf 

Y 

Mr 

1 

1 

1 

^<v 

' 

,17^ 

,1V 

i'7^ 

\ 

1 

\ 

1 

300 

1 

1 

1 

I 

Z75 

\ 

1 

7W 

\ 

1 

Z3S 

1 

1 

- 

fOf) 

1 

' 

1 

ly: 

1 

1 

lat) 

«* 

n'i 

^ 

>>«. 

, 

lOP 

s. 

>«i 

n 

^ 

^ 

^ 

— 

V 

^^ 

— 

"^ 

■— 

3S 

_ 

1 

I.IS 

/3* 

/* 

f  i 

V5 

i 

30 

^ 

is 

) 

J 

/s 

J! 

a 

J 

*j- 

-* 

f-     M 

li,    « 

C  -ii 

■c. 

-  6 

i 

yy 

i 

•!i! 

J 

« 

5 

b.lS 

Fig.  107. — Curve  of  intensity  of  sleep  according  to  Monninghoff  and  Piesbergen.  The 
figures  along  the  abscissa  represent  time  in  hours  from  the  beginning  of  sleep ;  those  along 
the  ordinate  the  relative  intensity  of  sleep  measured  in  milligram-millimeters,  expressing 
the  intensity  of  sound  of  a  falling  body  necessary  to  awaken  the  sleeper. 


1300 

IZOO 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

/ 

I 

/ 

\ 

700 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

600 

\ 

/ 

V 

SOO 

, 

\ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

400 

-^ 

S 

/ 

\ 

N 

y 

300 

N 

^ 

V 

N 

/ 

\ 

ZOO 

. 

y 

\ 

\ 

100 

7 

Z 

3 

-«■ 

s 

6 

7 

i 

9 

10 

// 

IZ 

F'ig.   108. — Curve  of  intensity  of  sleep  in  a  child  of  three  years  and  eight  months,  as  deter- 
mined by  Czerny. 

16 


242        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

second  increase  in  intensity  toward  morning  is  very  apparent  also 
in  some  interesting  curves  obtained  by  Czerny  from  children  of 
different  ages.  His  method  of  awakening  the  sleeper  was  to  use 
induction  shocks  of  varying  intensities.  In  children  of  four  years 
with  a  normal  period  of  sleep  of  about  twelve  hours  the  curve  shows 
a  very  marked  increase  in  intensity  toward  morning,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  108.  Curves  made  by  similar  experimental  methods  are 
reported  by  Howell  and  by  Michelson,*  The  striking  feature  about 
all  the  curves  is  the  sharp  increase  in  intensity  shortly  after  falling 
asleep,  the  maximum  being  reached  at  the  first  or  second  hour  of 
slumber.  Subsequently  the  curve  again  falls  rapidl}^  and  the  sleep 
is  light,  but  may  show  a  greater  or  less  increase  in  intensity  toward 
the  end  of  the  period. 

Changes  in  the  Circulation  during  Sleep. — That  the  circula- 
tion undergoes  distinct  and  characteristic  changes  during  sleep 
has  been  shown  upon  man  by  phlethysmographic  observations  and 
upon  the  lower  animals  by  direct  kymographic  experiments. 
Using  very  young  dogs,  Tarchanofff  has  been  able  to  measure 
their  blood-pressure  while  sleeping.  He  finds  that  the  pressuer 
in  the  aorta  falls  by  an  amount  equal  to  twenty  to  fifty  millimeters 
of  mercury  during  sleep,  and  that  the  same  general  fact  is  true 
for  man  is  shown  by  the  sphygmomanometric  observations  reported 
by  Brush  and  Fayerweather.J  Making  use  of  patients  with  a 
trephine  hole  in  the  skull,  Mosso  ^  has  been  able  to  show  that  during 
sleep  the  volume  of  the  brain  diminishes,  while  that  of  the  arm- 
or foot  increases.  The  apparent  explanation  of  this  fact  is  that 
the  blood-vessels  in  the  body  dilate,  and  receive,  therefore,  more 
blood,  while  a  smaller  amount  flows  to  the  brain.  The  volume 
of  the  foot  or  hands  was  measured  in  these  experiments  by  incasing 
it  in  a  plethysmograph  (see  section  on  circulation).  The  author  || 
has  extended  these  observations  so  as  to  obtain  a  plethysmographic 
record  of  the  volume  of  the  hand  and  part  of  the  forearm  during 
a  period  of  normal  sleep.  One  of  the  records  thus  obtained  is  given 
in  Fig.  109.  The  amount  of  dilatation  is  given  by  the  ordinates 
below  the  base  line.  Granting  that  the  increase  in  volume  of  the 
hand  and  arm  is  caused  by  an  increase  in  the  volume  of  blood 
contained  in  their  blood-vessels,  the  curve  shows  that  during  and 
after  the  onset  of  sleep  the  blood-vessels  in  the  arm  slowly  dilate 
until  between  one  and  two  hours  after  the  beginning  of  sleep,. 

*  Howell,  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  2,  313,  1897.  Michel- 
son,  "Dissertation,"  Dorpat,  1891. 

t  Tarchanoff,  "Archives  italiennes  de  biologie,"  21,  318,  1894. 

j  Brush  and  Fayerweather,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  5,  199^ 
1901. 

§  Mosso,  "Ueber  den  Kreislauf  des  Blutes  im  menschlichen  Gehirn,"  1881.. 

11  Howell,  loc.  cit. 


THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   SLEEP. 


243 


After  this  maximum  is  reached  the  arm  remains  more  or  less  of 

the  same  volume  for  a  certain  period  or  else  diminishes  in  volume 

very  gradually.    Shortly  before  waking, 

however,  the   arm   begins  to  diminish  ^ 

more   rapidly    in    size,    owing    doubt-  ^ 

less  to   the   contraction  of   its   blood-  = 

vessels;  so  that  at  the  time  of  awak-  '| 

ing  it  has  practically  the  same  volume  g 

as  at  the  beginning  of  sleep.     If,  on  ^ 

the    basis    of     Mosso's     experiments,  | 

quoted   above,    we    assume   that    the  1 

blood-flow  in    the    brain   stands   in   a  3" 

reciprocal  relation  to  that  in  the  arm,  g 

this   curve   may  be   taken  to  indicate  < 

that  before  and  after  the  onset  of  sleep  2, 

the  blood-flow  through  the  brain   di-  g 

minishes  rapidly  to    a    certain    point  ^ 

and  that  before  awaking  the  blood-flow  §. 

begins  to  increase  again  until  it  reaches  "^ 

normal  proportions.  | 

Effect  of  Sensory  Stimulation. — 
That  sensory  stimuli  of  various  kinds  g- 
affect  a  sleeping  individual  without  g- 
entirely  awaking  him  is  shown  by  the  | 
movements  that  may  be  caused  in  this  § 
way,  and  also  by  the  nature  of  the  ^ 
dreams  which  may  be  provoked.  It  is  S" 
very  interesting  to  find  from  plethys-  ^ 
mographic  observations  that  ail  kinds  |- 
of  sensory  stimulations  from  with-  § 
out  and  from  within  are  liable  to  ^ 
affect  the  circulation  of  the  blood  Z, 
during  sleep.  As  shown  by  the  plethys-  | 
mograph,  the  volume  of  the  arm  dimin- 
ishes more  or  less  in  proportion  to  the  ^ 
intensity  of  the  stimulus,  and  the  g 
probable  interpretation  of  this  fact  is  ^ 
that  the  sensory  stimulus  acts  reflexly  P; 
upon  the  vasomotor  center  in  the  ^ 
medulla  and  causes  through  it  a  con-  g 
traction  of  the  blood-vessels.  In  the 
curve  shown  in   Fig.  109  most  of  the 

irregularities    were    traceable    to    causes    of    this    kind, — noises 

in    the    building    or    street    or    other  sensory     stimuli.       The 
same  fact  is  exhibited  in  a  striking  way  by  the  curves  given  in 


244 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


Fig.  110.  In  these  experiments  the  recorder  attached  to  the 
plethysmograph  to  register  the  changes  in  vokime  was  of  a  differ- 
ent kind  (tambour)  and  the  record  reads  in  a  reverse  way  to  that 
shown  in  Fig.  109, — that  is,  a  dilatation  is  recorded  by  a  rise  in 
the  curve  and  a  constriction  by  a  fah.  The  recorder  being  more 
sensitive,  the  vohune  changes  in  the  arm  due  to  the  heart  beat  are 
clearly  indicated.  The  legends  attached  to  the  illustration  explain 
the  results  of  the  experiments. 

Theories  of  Sleep. — Many  hypotheses  have  been  advanced 
to  explain  the  nature  and  causation  of  sleep.  Confining  ourselves 
to  the  more  recent  hypotheses  that  attempt  to  explain  the  immediate 


Fig.  110. — Sleep:  A,  effect  of  external  impression  (music  box),  insufficient  to  awaken 
sleeper, — a  marked  diminution  in  volume  of  the  arm ;  B,  effect  of  external  impression 
(music  box)  in.sufRcient  to  awaken  sleeper;  a  stronger  diminution  in  volume  followed  by 
dilatation  as  the  subject  again  fell  asleep. 


cause  of  the  production  of  the  condition,  the  following  brief  de- 
scription will  suffice  to  show  the  nature  of  the  theories  proposed : 

1.  The  Accumulation  of  Acid  Waste  Products. — Preyer*  and 
also  Obersteiner  have  suggested  that  the  accumulation  of  acid 
w^aste  products  in  the  blood  brings  on  a  gradually  increasing  loss  of 
irritability  or  fatigre  in  the  brain  cells  which  results  finally  in  a 
depression  of  their  activity  sufficient  to  cause  unconsciousness.  It 
is  known  that  functional  activity  in  the  muscle  is  accompanied  by 
the  formation  of  acid  waste  products,  especially  sarcolactic  acid, 

*  Prever,  "Centralblatt  f.  d.  med.  Wis.s.,"  13,  577,  1875;  and  Obersteiner, 
"  Allgemeine  Zeitsclirift  f.  Psychiatrie,"  29,  224,  1S72-73. 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  SLEEP.  245 

and  that  if  not  removed  as  quickly  as  formed  tliese  products  cause 
a  diminution  and  finally  a  loss  of  irritability.  The  central  nerve 
tissues  in  activity  show  also  an  acid  reaction.  Moreover,  if  lactic 
acid  or  its  sodium  salt  is  injected  into  the  blood  it  brings  on  a  con- 
dition of  fatigue  and  finally  a  state  of  unconsciousness.  The  theory, 
therefore,  supposes  that  during  the  waking  hours  the  constant 
activity  of  the  muscles  and  nervous  S3'stem  results  in  a  gradual 
accumulation  of  these  waste  products,  since  their  oxidation  and 
removal  does  not  keep  pace  with  their  production.  The  end- 
result  is  a  diminishing  irritability  of  the  central  nervous  system, 
especially  perhaps  of  the  cortex,  which  results  finally  in  invol- 
untary sleep,  although  normally  the  accumulation  is  not  carried 
to  this  extreme,  since  it  is  our  habit  to  induce  sleep,  when  the 
sensations  of  sleepiness  become  apparent,  by  withdrawing  ourselves 
from  excitations,  mental  or  sensor}'. 

2.  Consumption  of  the  Intramolecular  Oxygen. — Pfliiger*  suggests 
that  the  cause  of  sleep  lies  essentially  in  the  fact  that  the  brain  cells 
during  the  waking  hours  use  up  their  store  of  oxygen  more  rapidly 
than  it  can  be  replaced  by  the  absorption  of  oxygen  from  the  blood. 
The  result  is  a  gradual  reduction  in  irritability;  so  that  when 
external  stimuli  are  withdrawn  the  oxidations  in  the  cells  sink 
below  the  level  necessary  to  arouse  consciousness.  During  sleep 
the  store  of  intramolecular  oxygen — that  is,  the  oxygen  syntheti- 
cally combined  by  anabolic  processes  to  form  the  irritable  living 
matter — is   again   replenished. 

3.  The  Neuron  Theory. — Duval, f  Cajal,  and  others  have  applied 
the  neuron  doctrine  to  explain  the  occurrence  of  sleep.  According 
to  the  neuron  conception,  the  connection  between  the  cells  in  the 
cortex  and  the  incoming  impulses  along  the  afferent  paths  is  made  by 
the  contact  of  the  terminal  arborizations  of  the  afferent  fibers  with 
the  dendrites  of  the  cell.  Assuming  that  these  latter  processes  are 
contractile,  Duval  supposes  that  sleep  is  caused  mechanically  by 
their  retraction,  which  results  in  breaking  the  connections  and 
thus  withdrawing  the  brain  cells  from  the  possibility  of  external 
stimulation.  Conductivity  is  re-established  upon  awaking  by  the 
elongation  and  intermingling  of  the  processes  again  re-establishing 
physiological  connections.  The  numerous  efforts  made  to  demon- 
strate the  fact  of  a  retraction  of  the  dendritic  processes  by  histo- 
logical examinations  of  brains  during  sleep  or  narcosis  have,  how- 
ever, not  been  successful. 

4.  Anemia  Theories  of  Sleep. — Numerous  facts  in  physiology 
make  it  practically  certain  that  during  sleep  there  is  a  diminished 

*  Pfliiger,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  10,  46S,  1875. 
+  Duval,  "  Comptes  reiidus  de  la  soc.  de  bioL,"  February,  1S95;  and  Cajal, 
"Archiv  f.  Anat.  (u.  Physiol.),"  375,  1895. 


246  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   CENTRAL   NERVOUS   SYSTEM. 

flow  of  blood  through  the  brain,  a  condition  of  cerebral  anemia. 
In  animals  with  the  brain  exposed  or  with  a  glass  window  in  the 
skull  it  has  been  observed  directly  that  the  flow  of  blood  to  the 
cortex  is  diminished  during  sleep.  Mosso's  plethysmographic  experi- 
ments mentioned  above  have  been  given  a  similar  interpretation, 
and  Tarchanoff's  observations  upon  sleeping  dogs,  as  well  as  direct 
determinations  upon  man  by  Brush  and  Fayerweather,  show  that 
the  arterial  pressure  falls  during  sleep.  Inasmuch  as  the  lessened 
pressure  in  the  arteries  is  accompanied  by  a  dilatation  of  the  vessels 
of  the  skin,  as  shown  by  the  plethysmograph,  it  is  probable,  when 
the  facts  previously  mentioned  are  taken  into  consideration,  that 
the  diminished  pressure  in  the  arteries  forces  less  blood  through 
the  brain  and  more  through  the  dilated  vessels  of  the  skin.  In 
fact,  as  is  explained  in  the  section  on  circulation,  it  is  probable 
that  the  blood-flow  through  the  brain  is  normally  regulated  in- 
directly by  the  circulation  in  other  parts  of  the  body.  Constriction 
of  blood-vessels  elsewhere  increases  arterial  pressure  and  shunts 
more  blood  through  the  brain,  and  vice  versa.  This  general  view 
is  in  accord  with  the  fact  that  sensory  stimuli  and  increased  mental 
activity  are  accompanied  by  a  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels 
(of  the  skin)  and  a  rise  of  arterial  pressure,  while,  on  the  other 
hand,  mental  inactivity  and  especially  sleep  are  accompanied  by 
a  dilatation  of  the  blood-vessels  of  the  body  (skin  vessels)  and  a 
fall  of  arterial  pressure.  All  of  our  facts,  therefore,  point  to  an 
anemic  condition  of  the  brain  during  sleep,  and  some  physiologists 
have  believed  that  this  condition  precedes  and  causes  the  state 
of  sleep,  while  others  take  the  opposite  view  that  it  folloAvs  and 
is  merely  one  result  of  sleep.  On  the  basis  of  the  plethysmographic 
experiments  mentioned  above  the  author*  has  proposed  a  theory 
of  sleep  in  which  the  diminished  flow  of  blood  to  the  brain  is  ex- 
plained and  is  assumed  to  be  the  chief  factor  in  bringing  on  sleep. 
The  theory  assumes  that  the  periodicity  of  sleep  is  dependent 
mainly  upon  a  rhythmical  loss  of  tone  in  the  vasomotor  center  in 
the  medulla  in  consequence  of  fatigue  from  continued  activity 
during  the  waking  hours.  That  is,  the  vasomotor  center  is  in 
constant  action  during  this  period;  the  continued  flow  of  sensory 
stimuli  and  the  constant  activity  of  the  brain  act  reflexly  on  this 
center  and  through  it  cause  a  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels  of 
the  body,  particularly  of  the  skin,  by  means  of  which  the  blood- 
flow  through  the  brain  is  maintained  with  an  adequate  velocity. 
In  consequence  of  this  varying  but  constant  activity  the  center 
undergoes  fatigue;  stronger  and  stronger  stimulation  is  necessary 
to  maintain  its  normal  tone,  and  eventually  its  effect  on  the  blood- 
pressure  becomes  insufficient  (to  maintain  an  adequate  flow  through 
*  Howell,  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  2,  313,  1897. 


THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  SLEEP.  247 

the  brain  and  unconsciousness  or  sleep  results,  even  against  one's 
desires,  as  is  shown  by  the  experience  of  those  who  have  attempted 
to  keep  awake  much  beyond  the  habitual  period.  Ordinarily, 
however,  this  fatigue  of  the  vasomotor  center  and  its  resulting 
tendency  to  a  cessation  of  activity  is  favored  by  our  voluntary 
withdrawal  of  stimulation.  Our  preparations  for  sleep,  closure  of 
eyes,  darkened  and  if  possible  quiet  room,  cessation  from  disturbing 
thoughts,  result  in  a  diminution  of  the  sensory  and  mental  stimuli 
that  normally  play  upon  the  vasomotor  center.  The  cessation 
of  such  stimuli  may,  indeed,  at  any  time  be  all  that  is  necessary 
to  bring  about  a  partial  loss  of  activity  in  this  center,  a  les- 
sened flow  of  blood  through  the  brain,  and  a  period  of  sleep  which, 
however,  is  usually  short.  If,  however,  the  vasomotor  center  has 
been  previously  fatigued,  as  may  be  supposed  to  be  the  case  at  the 
end  of  the  day,  the  withdrawal  of  these  stimuli  permits  it  to  fall 
into  a  more  complete  state  of  inactivity,  and  the  diminution  of 
blood-flow  to  the  brain  and  the  state  of  unconsciousness  is  longer 
lasting, — lasts  indeed,  according  to  the  curves  of  which  an  example 
is  given  in  Fig.  109,  until  the  gradual  resumption  of  activity  in  the 
vasomotor  center  brings  about  a  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels 
of  the  body  and  thus  drives  enough  blood  through  the  brain  to 
cause  spontaneous  awakening.  A  third  factor  which  must  aid  in 
the  production  of  unconsciousness  as  a  result  of  the  lessened  flow 
of  blood,  and  in  the  return  of  consciousness  in  connection  with 
the  increased  flow  of  blood,  is  the  greater  or  less  fatigue  of  the 
cortical  cells  themselves  after  a  day's  activity,  and  their  greater 
irritability  after  a  night's  rest.  Many  factors,  therefore,  co-oper- 
ate in  the  development  of  the  normal  state  of  sleep  lasting  for 
six  to  eight  hours  out  of  twenty-four,  but  the  central  factor  which 
explains  its  rapid  onset,  involving  nearly  simultaneously  all  the 
conscious  areas  of  the  brain,  whether  previously  fatigued  or  not, 
and  the  equally  sudden  restoration  to  consciousness  of  the  entire 
cortex,  is  to  be  found  in  the  amount  of  blood-flow  to  the  brain. 
Under  normal  conditions  this  is  the  factor  that  stands  in  most 
immediate  relation  to  that  appearance  and  disappearance  of  full 
consciousness  which  mark  for  us  the  limits  of  sleep.  A  similar 
view  is  advocated  by  Hill,*  who  believes,  however,  that  the  regu- 
lation of  the  blood-flow  through  the  brain  is  effected  through  the 
vasomotor  control  of  the  splanchnic  area,  whereas  the  author's 
view  is  that  the  regulation  is  effected  mainly  through  variations 
in  the  cutaneous  circulation, — that  is,  for  the  normal  occurrence 
of  sleep.  The  drowsiness  that  follows  a  heavy  meal  is  probably  due 
mainly  to  the  mechanical  effect  of  a  dilatation  of  the  blood-vessels  of 

*  Hill,  "The  Physiology  and  Pathology  of  the  Cerebral  Circulation,"  Lon- 
don, 1896. 


248        PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CENTRAL  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

the  viscera  and  the  consequent  diminution  in  the  blood-flow  through 
the  brain;  but  the  sleep  that  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  day  is  un- 
doubtedly connected  with  a  dilatation  of  the  blood-vessels  of  the 
skin  of  the  trunk  and  extremities.  What  the  condition  in  the  vis- 
ceral organs  may  be  at  such  times  we  have  at  present  no  means 
of  knowing. 

Hypnotic  Sleep. — The  sleep  that  can  be  produced  by  so-called 
suggestion,  the  sleep  of  hypnotism,  has  been  studied  by  means 
of  the  plethysmographic  method.*  The  result,  so  far  as  the 
volume  of  the  arm  and  hand  is  concerned,  shows  that  in  this  con- 
dition, unlike  normal  sleep,  there  is  a  marked  diminution  in  volume, 
and,  therefore,  we  may  believe,  an  increased  constriction  of  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  skin.  This  observation  accords  with  the 
blanched  appearance  of  the  skin  of  the  extremities,  and  with  the 
statement  that  in  deep  hypnotic  sleep  the  skin  does  not  bleed 
readily  when  pricked  with  a  needle.  In  view  of  our  limited  knowl- 
edge, however,  it  would  be  hazardous  to  base  any  comparison 
between  normal  and  hypnotic  sleep  upon  this  single  fact. 

*  Walden,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  4,  124,  1900-1901. 


SECTION  III. 
THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  THE  SENSES  AND  GENERAL 
STATEMENTS. 

Under  the  general  term  sense  organ  we  may  include  not  only 
the  peripheral  organ  on  which  the  stimulus  acts,  but  also  the  sensory 
nerve  through  which  the  impulses  are  conveyed  to  the  center  and 
the  cortical  center  through  which  the  reaction  in  consciousness 
is  mediated. 

Classification  of  the  Senses. — In  general,  we  attempt  to 
distinguish  the  action  of  the  sense  organs  by  the  differences  in 
their  end  reaction  in  consciousness.  Each  sense  organ  gives  a 
different  kind  of  response,  the  nature  and  distinctive  features  of 
which  are  recognized  subjectively.  The  conscious  sensations  are 
said  to  differ  in  quality  or  modality.  The  qualitative  difference  in 
some  cases  is  very  distinct, — the  difference  between  sensations  of 
sound  and  of  vision,  for  instance, — and  on  this  subjective  difference 
we  base  our  efforts  to  give  specific  names  to  the  sense  organs  con- 
cerned. This  means  of  classification  is  not,  however,  applicable 
in  all  cases.  While  many  of  our  sensations  are  so  distinct  in  qualit}^ 
that  we  can  recognize  them  and  name  them  without  difficulty, 
others  are  of  a  more  obscure  character.  In  addition  to  our  sensa- 
tions of  vision,  hearing,  smell,  taste,  pressure,  temperature,  and 
pain,  there  are  doubtless  many  other  sensations  whose  conscious 
reaction  is  less  distinct  in  quality  and  for  which  our  subjective 
means  of  recognition  and  classification  are  less  satisfactory  or 
entirely  inadequate.  Such,  for  instance,  are  the  sensations  from 
the  muscles,  from  the  semicircular  canals  and  the  vestibular  sacs 
of  the  ear,  and  from  many  of  the  visceral  organs.  For  the  recogni- 
tion and  classification  of  these  senses  and  sense  organs  it  is  neces- 
sary to  fall  back  upon  the  methods  of  anatomical  and  physiological 
analysis,  methods  which  in  many  respects  are  uncertain.  So  also 
within  the  limits  of  any  sensation  of  a  given  quality  or  modality^ 

249 


250  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

we  distinguish  certain  subqualities.  In  vision  we  have  many  dif- 
ferent qualities  which  we  designate  by  special  names, — ^the  series 
of  different  colors,  for  example.  In  sound  sensations  we  distinguish 
different  tones  and  different  qualities  of  tones.  But  here,  again, 
the  subjective  mark  is  often  so  indistinct  in  consciousness 
that  it  cannot  be  used  satisfactorily  for  purposes  of  classifica- 
tion. In  the  odor  sensations  we  distinguish  many  different  quali- 
ties, each  recognizable  at  the  time  that  it  is  experienced,  but  their 
characteristics  are  so  fugitive  that  heretofore  it  has  not  been 
possible  to  name  them  or  group  them  in  any  satisfactory  way. 
In  studying  the  quahties  of  the  various  sensations  so  far  as 
they  are  recognizable  the  effort  of  physiology  has  been  to  connect 
them  with  some  definite  anatomical  or  physiological  pecuHarity  in 
the  sense  organs  concerned.  The  final  explanation  of  the  differences 
in  quality  involves  a  study  of  the  nature  and  properties  of  con- 
sciousness itself, — a  subject  which  as  yet  has  not  been  undertaken 
by  physiology.  At  present  we  accept  the  fact  of  consciousness 
and  the  fact  that  there  are  different  kinds  or  quahties  of  conscious- 
ness, and  our  investigations  are  directed  only  toward  ascertaining 
the  anatomical,  physical,  and  chemical  properties  of  the  organs  in- 
volved in  the  production  of  these  subjective  changes. 

In  former  times  it  was  customary  to  divide  the  sensations  into 
two  different  groups,^ — the  special  and  the  common  senses,— the 
former  including  the  so-called  five  senses  of  man, — namely,  sight, 
hearing,  touch,  taste,  and  smell, — while  under  the  latter  were 
grouped  all  other  sensations  of  less  distinctive  qualities.  In  physi- 
ology the  belief  that  man  has  only  five  special  senses  has,  however, 
long  been  abandoned.  The  sense  of  touch  as  ordinarily  understood 
has  been  sho^vn  to  consist  of  two  or  rather  three  distinct  senses: 
pressure,  heat  and  cold,  and  the  sense  of  pain  exhibited  by  the 
skin  is  in  all  essential  respects  as  special  and  characteristic  as  those 
just  named.  There  is,  however,  no  certain  standard  as  to  what 
shall  constitute  a  special  in  contradistinction  to  a  common  sense ; 
so  that  a  classification  based  on  this  nomenclature  is  unsatis- 
factory. In  one  respect,  however,  our.  senses  show  a  difference 
which  may  be  used  as  a  basis  for  dividing  them  into  two  general 
groups.  This  cUfference  lies  in  the  manner  of  projection.  We  may 
assume  that  all  of  our  sensations  are  aroused  directly  in  the  brain. 
In  that  organ  take  place  the  final  changes  which  react  in  con- 
sciousness. But  in  no  case  are  we  conscious  that  this  is  the  case. 
On  the  contrary,  we  project  our  sensations  either  to  the  exterior 
of  the  body  or  to  some  peripheral  organ  in  the  body,  the 
effort  being  apparently  to  project  it  to  the  place  where  experi- 
ence has  taught  us  that  the  acting  stimulus  arises.  We  may 
divide  the  senses,  therefore,  into  two  great  groups:  (1)  The  external 


CLASSIFICATION    OF   THE    SENSES.  251 

or  rather  the  exterior  senses,  or  those  in  which  the  sensations  are 
projected  to  the  exterior  of  the  body,  and  which  form,  therefore 
the  means  through  which  we  become  acquainted  with  the  outside 
world.  The  exterior  senses  include  sight,  hearing,  taste,  smell, 
pressure,  and  temperature  (heat  and  cold).  (2)  The  internal  or 
interior  senses,  or  those  in  which  the  sensations  are  projected  to 
the  interior  of  the  body.  It  is  through  these  senses  that  we  acquire 
a  knowledge  of  the  condition  of  our  body  and  perhaps  also  a  knowl- 
edge of  ourselves  as  an  existence  or  organism  distinct  from  the  ex- 
ternal world.  Among  the  interior  senses  we  must  include  pain, 
muscle  sense,  the  sensations  from  the  semicircular  canals  and  ves- 
tibule of  the  internal  ear,  hunger,  thirst,  sexual  sense,  fatigue,  and 
in  addition  perhaps  other  less  definite  sensations  from  the  visceral 
organs.  This  line  of  demarcation,  although  it  holds  so  well  in 
most  cases,  is  not  absolutely  distinctive.  The  temperature  sense, 
for  instance,  is,  so  to  speak,  on  the  border  line  between  the  two 
groups;  we  may  project  this  sensation  either  to  the  exterior  or 
to  the  interior  according  to  circumstances.  When  the  temperature 
nerves  are  excited  simultaneously  with  the  pressure  nerves,  we 
project  the  sensation  to  the  exterior,  to  the  stimulating  body.  If 
the  skin  is  touched  by  a  hot  or  cold  solid  object  we  speak  of  the 
object  as  being  hot  or  cold.  If,  however,  the  same  nerves  are 
stimulated  by  warm  gases  or  even  liquids  under  conditions  that 
do  not  involve  the  pressure  sense  we  refer  the  change  to  ourselves, — - 
we  are  hot  or  cold,  as  the  case  may  be.  So  also  when  the  skin  is 
heated  by  the  blood  the  resulting  sensation  is  projected  to  the 
skin.  It  would  seem  that  the  habit  of  projection  is  acquired  by 
experience,  and  that  those  senses  whose  organs  are  habitually 
affected  by  objects  from  Avithout  we  learn  to  project  to  the  object 
giving  rise  to  the  stimulus. 

The  Doctrine  of  Specific  Nerve  Energies. — The  term  specific 
nerve  energy  we  owe  to  Johannes  Miiller  (1801-1858).  The  term 
is  in  some  respects  unfortunate,  as  at  present  in  the  physical  sci- 
ences the  word  energy  is  used  to  designate  certain  specific  properties 
of  matter.  The  phrase  specific  nerve  energy  in  physiology,  however, 
is  intended  to  designate  the  'fact  that  each  sensory  unit  arouses  or 
mediates  its  own  specific  quality  of  sensation,  the  specific  energy  of 
the  optic  apparatus  being  visual  sensations,  of  the  auditory  apparatus 
sound  sensations,  etc.,  and  each  sensory  nerve  or  apparatus  can 
give  no  other  than  its  own  quality  of  sensation.  Whether  this 
specificity  in  the  reaction  of  each  sensory  nerve  is  due  to  some  pecu- 
liarity in  the  nerve  itself  or  to  a  peculiarity  of  the  part  of  the  brain 
in  which  it  terminates  Miiller  left  an  open  question,  although  he 
called  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  central  ending  is  capable  of 
giving  its  specific  effect  in  consciousness  independently  of  the  con- 


252  THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 

ducting  nerve  fibers.  With  regard  to  this  latter  question  the 
opinions  of  physiologists  still  differ.  Most  physiologists,  perhaps, 
adopt  the  view  that  the  specific  reaction  in  consciousness  is  due  to 
the  central  ending, — that,  in  other  words,  the  different  sensory 
parts  of  the  cortex  give  different  kinds  or  qualities  of  consciousness, 
while  the  sensory  nerve  fibers  are  simply  conductors  of  nerve  im- 
pulses, which,  however  much  they  may  differ  in  intensity,  are 
qualitatively  the  same  in  all  nerve  fibers.  According  to  this  view, 
it  would  result,  as  du  Bois-Reymond  expressed  it,  that,  if  the 
auditory  nerve  fibers  were  attached  to  the  visual  center  and  the 
optic  fibers  to  the  auditory  center,  we  would  see  the  thunder  and 
hear  the  lightning.  Each  typical  sense-organ  from  this  standpoint 
consists  of  three  essential  parts:  the  central  ending,  which  deter- 
mines the  quality  of  the  sensation;  the  peripheral  end-organ, 
retina,  cochlea,  etc.,.  which  determines  whether  or  not  any  given 
form  of  stimulus  shall  be  effective  and  which  in  most  cases  is  con- 
structed so  as  to  be  responsive  to  a  special  form  of  stimulus  desig- 
nated as  its  adequate  stimulus;  and  of  connecting  neurons  whose 
only  function  is  to  conduct  the  nerve  impulses  originating  in  the 
end-organ.  The  fact,  therefore,  that  the  light  waves  can  stimulate 
the  rods  and  cones  of  the  retina,  but  are  an  inadequate  stimulus 
probably  to  the  hair  cells  of  the  cochlea  or  the  taste  buds  of  the 
tongue,  is  due  to  a  pecuHarity  in  structure  of  the  rods  and  cones; 
but  the  fact  that  the  impulses  conducted  by  the  optic  fibers  arouse 
a  peculiar  modality  of  sensation  is  not  due  to  any  peculiarity  in 
structure  in  these  fibers  or  in  the  rods  and  cones,  but  to  a  charac- 
teristic structure  of  the  optic  centers.  The  positive  experimental 
evidence  for  the  correctness  of  this  view  is  not  conclusive,  but,  on 
the  whole,  is  impressive.     Such  facts  as  the  following  may  be  noted : 

1 .  When  sensory  nerve  fibers  are  stimulated  otherwise  than 
through  their  end-organs  each  reacts,  if  it  reacts  at  all,  according 
to  its  specific  energy,— that  is,  it  produces  its  own  quality  of  sensa- 
tion. When  the  optic  nerve  is  cut,  for  instance,  the  mechanical 
stimulus  causes  a  flash  of  light ;  when  the  chorda  tympani  is  stimu- 
lated in  the  tympanic  cavity  by  mechanical,  electrical,  or  chemical 
stimuli  sensations  of  taste  are  aroused. 

2.  Mechanical  pressure  upon  the  peripheral  nerves  distributed  to 
the  skin  may  cause  a  loss  of  some  of  the  cutaneous  senses  in  certain 
areas  of  the  skin  with  a  retention  of  others.  Thus  the  senses  of 
pressure  and  temperature  may  be  lost  and  that  of  pain  retained, 
or  pain  may  be  lost  and  pressure  retained.  Such  facts  agree  with 
the  view  that  each  sense  has  its  ovm  set  of  nerve  fibers ;  those  that 
mediate  pain  can  not  by  a  mere  modification  of  the  stimulus  give 
also  a  sense  of  pressure. 

3.  The  only  objective  manifestation  of  a  nerve  impulse  that  we 


CLASSIFICATION    OF   THE    SENSES.  253 

can  study  in  the  nerve  itself  is  the  electrical  change  that  accom- 
panies it  or. that  perhaps  constitutes  its  essence.  This  electrical 
change  is  qualitatively  the  same  in  all  kinds  of  nerve  fibers,  and  this 
fact  agrees  with  the  view  that  the  nerve  impulse  is  qualitatively  the 
same  in  all  fibers. 

So  far  as  the  sensory  nerve  fibers  are  concerned,  the  chief  ob- 
jection to  this  view  of  the  doctrine  of  specific  nerve  energies  is 
found  perhaps  in  the  difficulty  or  impossibility  of  applying  it  to 
the  explanation  of  color  vision.  According  to  the  strict  interpreta- 
tion of  the  view,  each  fundamental  color  sense,  being  distinct  in 
quality,  should  be  mediated  by  its  own  set  of  nerve  fibers.  When 
Helmholtz  first  formulated  his  theory  of  color  vision  he  spoke, 
therefore,  of  three  kinds  of  nerve  fibers, — the  red,  the  green,  and 
the  violet, — each  when  stimulated  alone  giving  its  own  specific 
sensation  and  not  capable  of  giving  any  other.  The  facts  accumu- 
lated regarding  color  vision,  however,  seem  to  show  that  this  view 
will  not  hold.  One  and  the  same  cone,  with  its  connecting  fiber, 
may  give  rise  to  any  or  all  of  the  primary  color  sensations,  and, 
unless  we  choose  to  further  subdivide  the  nerve  unit  and  assume 
that  the  separate  nerve  fibrils  of  which  the  axis  cylinder  is  composed 
constitute  the  separate  conductors  for  the  primary  sense  qualities, 
it  would  seem  to  be  impossible  to  apply  the  doctrine  of  specific 
energies  to  this  case.  Not  too  much  weight  should  be  given  per- 
haps to  this  objection.  For  it  must  be  remembered  that  all  of  our 
present  theories  of  color  vision  are  unsatisfactory,  and  possibly 
when  we  attain  to  the  right  point  of  view  the  facts  may  not  be 
so  difficult  to  interpret  in  terms  of  this  theory  of  specific  energies. 

The  alternative  view  proposed  in  place  of  the  doctrine  of 
specific  nerve  energies  assumes  that  the  nerve  impulses  may 
vary  in  quality  as  well  as  in  intensity,  and  that  therefore  one  and 
the  same  nerve  fiber  may  arouse  different  qualities  of  sensation,  and 
have  different  end  effects  according  to  the  character  of  the  impulse 
conveyed.  This  point  of  view  is  not  capable  of  much  discussion, 
since  there  are  no  positive  facts  that  support  it.  It  is  logically 
satisfactory  in  meeting  the  cases  in  which  the  former  view  seems 
to  be  unsatisfactory.  It  is  difficult,  however,  in  our  ignorance  of 
the  nature  of  the  nerve  impulse  to  imagine  in  what  respects  it  may 
possibly  differ  in  character. 

The  Weber-Fechner  (Psychophysical)  Law.— One  difficulty 
that  has  been  encountered  in  the  physiological  study  of  sensory 
nerves  is  that  the  end  reaction  cannot  be  measured  with  exactness. 
With  efferent  nerves  the  end  reaction  is  a  contraction  or  secretion 
that  can  be  estimated  quantitatively  in  terms  of  our  physical  and 
chemical  units  of  measurement.  But  the  end  reaction  of  a  sensory 
nerve  is  a  state  of  consciousness  for  which  we  have  no  standard  of 


254 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


measurement.  Weber,  in  studying  the  relation  between  the 
strength  of  the  stimulus  and  the  amount  of  the  resulting  sensation, 
availed  himself  of  the  method  of  the  least  detectible  change  in  sen- 
sation; that  is,  he  determined  the  increase  in  stimulus  at  different 
levels  necessary  to  cause  a  just  perceptible  increase  in  the  sensation. 
By  means  of  this  method  he  arrived  at  the  significant  result  that 
the  increase  in  stimulus  necessary  to  cause  this  change  is,  within 
physiological  limits,  a  definite  fractional  increment  of  the  acting 
stimulus.  If,  for  instance,  with  a  weight  of  30  gms.  upon 
the  finger  it  requires  an  increment  of  3L-— that  is,  one  additional 
gram — to  make  a  just  perceptible  difference  in  the  pressure  sensa- 


^,-- 

'" 

'17. 

d 

11 

^^ 

^--■ 

' 

F 

3 

9 

8 

y 

6 

, 

--' 

"^ 

70. 

70 

^^^ 

7- 

5-0 

y 

- 

5 

.63 

• 

■^• 

Zl 

/ 
/ 

3.1 

6 

2 
1 

0 

1 

/ 

'  Z. 

37 

1    . 

1 

■77 

i 

1  1.3 

3 

/ 
/ 

1 

6 

1 

Z          i 

i.    ^ 

f-     w 

" 

(c 

>      / 

r 

6 

s 

A 

7      / 

(     7. 

z  /. 

3  J' 

-'  /. 

5-  It 

^  /; 

''  It 

r 

EXCnATION  OS. 

Fig.  111. — Curve  to  indicate  the  Weber-Fechner  law  of  a  logarithm ical  relation  be- 
tween excitation  and  sensation. — (From  Waller^  The  excitation.?  are  indicated  along  the 
abscissas,  the  sensations  along  the  ordinates.  The  increase  in  sensation  is  represented  as  tak- 
ing place  in  equal  steps,  "the  minimal  perceptible  difference,"  while  the  corresponding 
excitations  require  an  increasing  increment  of  i  at  each  step,  namely  1,  1.33,  1.77,  2.37, 
etc.  That  is,  for  equal  increments  of  sensation  increasing  increments  of  stimulation  are 
necessary. 


tion;  then,  with  a  weight  of  60  gms.  upon  the  finger  the  addition 
of  another  gram  would  not  be  perceived ;  it  would  require  again  an 
increment  of  -gV — that  is,  2  gms. — to  make  a  just  perceptible  dif- 
ference in  sensation.  This  relationship  is  known  as  Weber's  law. 
While  its  exactness  has  often  been  disputed,  it  seems  to  be  generally 
admitted  that  for  a  median  range  of  stimulation  the  law  expresses 
the  approximate  relation  between  the  two  variables  considered. 
Fechner  attempted  to  give  this  law  a  more  quantitative  and  ex- 
tensive application  by  assuming  that  just  perceptible  differences 
in  sensation  represent  actually  equal  amounts  of  sensation.  Ac- 
cepting this  assumption,  we  can  express  the  relationship  between 
stimulus  and  sensation  as  determined  by  Weber's  experiments  by 


CLASSIFICATION    OP   THE    SENSES.  255 

saying  that  for  the  sensation  to  increase  by  equal  amounts, — that  is, 
by  arithmetical  progression, — the  stimulus  must  vary  according 
to  a  certain  factor,— that  is,  by  geometrical  progression.  The 
sensation  may  be  regarded  as  a  geometrical  function  of  the 
stimulus.  If  the  relation  between  stimulus  and  sensation  is  repre- 
sented as  a  curve  in  which  the  ordinates  express  the  sensation  in- 
creasing by  equal  amounts,  and  the  abscissas  the  corresponding 
stimuli  increasing  at  each  interval  by  i,  a  result  is  obtained  such  as 
is  represented  in  the  accompanying  figure  (Fig.  111).  A  curve  of 
this  kind  is  a  logarithmical  curve,  and  Fechner  expressed  the  rela- 
tionship between  stimulus  and  sensation  in  what  has  been  called  the 
psychophysical  law, — namely,  that  the  sensation  varies  as  the 
logarithm  of  the  stimulus.  From  the  physiological  standpoint  it  is 
important  to  bear  in  mind,  as  has  been  emphasized  by  Waller,*  that 
several  steps  intervene  between  the  action  of  the  external  stimulus 
and  the  production  of  the  conscious  sensation.  The  external  stim- 
ulus acts  first  on  the  end-organ,  this  in  turn  upon  the  sensory  nerve 
fiber,  producing  a  nerve  impulse  which  finally  in  the  brain  gives  the 
conscious  reaction.  It  is  a  question,  therefore,  whether  the  logarith- 
mical  relation  of  the  stimulus  holds  between  it  and  the  reaction  of  the 
end-organ  or  between  the  internal  stimulus — that  is,  the  sensory 
nerve  impulse — and  the  psychical  reaction.  This  author  has  given 
some  facts  obtained  by  recording  the  action  current  in  the  optic 
nerve,  the  retina  being  stimulated  by  known  intensities  of  light, 
which  indicate  that  the  relation  observed  is  between  the  external 
stimulus  and  the  internal  stimulus, — that  is,  the  sensory  nerve 
impulse. 

*  Waller,  "Brain,"  201,  1895. 


CHAPTER  XV. 
CUTANEOUS  AND  INTERNAL  SENSATIONS. 

According  to  the  older  views,  the  sensory  nerves *of  the  skin  give 
sensations  of  touch.  Modem  physiology  has  shown,  however,  that 
these  nerves  mediate  at  least  four  different  qualities  of  sensation, — 
namely,  pressure,  warmth,  cold,  and  pain.  Our  so-called  touch 
sensations  are  usually  compound,  consisting  of  a  pressure  and  a 
temperature  component  and  also  very  frequently  an  element  cf 
muscle  sense  when  muscular  efforts  are  involved,  as,  for  instance,  in 
measuring  weights  or  resistances.  The  four  sensory  qualities  enu- 
merated constitute  the  cutaneous  senses,  and  they  are  present,  or, 
to  speak  more  accurately,  the  nerves  through  which  these  senses  are 
mediated  are  present  not  only  over  the  general  cutaneous  surface, 
but  also  in  those  membranes — such  as  the  mucous  membrane  of 
the  mouth  and  the  rectum  (stomodeum  and  proctodeum) — which 
embryologically  are  formed  from  the  epiblast.  The  surfaces  in  the 
interior  of  the  body,  on  the  contrary, — such  as  the  membranes 
of  the  alimentary  canal,  muscles,  fasciae,  etc., — have  only 
nerves  of  pain,  but  no  sense  of  touch  or  temperature.  Of  these 
cutaneous  senses,  three — pressure,  warmth,  and  cold — may  be 
grouped  with  the  exterior  senses,  the  sensations  being  projected  to 
the  exterior  of  the  body,  into  the  substance  causing  the  sensation. 
Although,  as  was  mentioned  above,  the  temperature  sensations 
under  conditions — ^fever,  vascular  dilatation,  etc. — may  be  projected 
to  parts  of  the  skin  itself  and  be  felt  as  changes  in  ourselves.  The 
temperature  sensations  are,  in  fact,  projected  to  the  exterior 
whenever  they  are  combined  with  pressure  sensations,  the  latter 
serving,  as  it  were,  as  the  dominant  sense.  The  pain  sense,  on  the 
other  hand,  belongs  to  the  group  of  interior  senses,  the  sensations 
being  always  projected  into  our  ovm  body  and  being  felt  as  changes 
in  ourselves. 

The  Punctiform  Distribution  of  the  Cutaneous  Senses. — 
A  most  interesting  fact  in  regard  to  the  cutaneous  senses  is  that 
they  are  not  distributed  uniformly  over  the  whole  skin,  but  are 
present  in  discrete  points  or  spots.  This  fact  was  first  clearly 
established  by  Blix,*  although  it  was  discovered  independently 

*  Blix,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  20,  141,  1884;  Donaldson,  "Mind,"  39 
1,  1885.     See  also  Goldscheider,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1885,  suppl.  volume. 

256 


CUTANEOUS    AND    INTIORNAL    SENSATIONS. 


257 


by  Goldscheider  and  in  this  country  by  Donaldson.  These  ob- 
servers paid  attention  chiefly  to  the  warm  and  cold  spots.  The 
existence  of  these  spots  may  be  demonstrated  easily  by  anyone 
upon  himself  by  moving  a  metallic  point  gently  over  the  skin. 
If  the  point  has  a  temperature  below  that  of  the  skin  it  will  be 
noticed  that  at  certain  spots  it  arouses  simply  a  feeling  of  contact 
or  pressure,  while  at  other  spots  it  gives  a  distinct  sensation  of 
coldness.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  point  is  warmer  than  the 
skin  it  will  at  certain  spots  give  a  sensation  of  warmth.     On  mark- 


♦  ♦     *  • 


.     r  • 


Fig.  112. — Representation  of  the  distribution  of  cold  and  warm  spots  oa  the  volar 
surface  of  forearm  in  a  space  2  cms.  by  4  cms.  The  red  dots  represent  the  cold  spots  as 
tested  at  a  temperature  of  10°  C.  The  black  dots  represent-  the  warm  spots  as  tested  at  a 
temperature  of  41°  to  48°  C. 


ing  the  cold  and  warm  spots  thus  obtained  it  is  found  that  they 
occupy  different  positions  on  the  skin.  Elaborate  charts  have 
been  made  of  the  warm  and  cold  spots  on  different  regions 
of  the  skin,  the  apparatus  usually  employed  being  a  metal 
tube  through  which  water  of  any  desired  temperature  may  be 
circulated.  The  temperature  of  the  skin,  whatever  it  may  be, 
forms  the  zero  line;  any  object  of  a  higher  temperature  stimulates 
only  the  warm  spots,  while  one  of  a  lower  temperature  acts  upon 
the  cold  spots.  The  pressure  sense  and  the  pain  sense  are  also 
distributed  in  a  punctiform  manner;  they  have  been  studied  most 
17 


258  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

carefully  by  von  Frey.*  To  determine  the  location  of  the  pressure 
points  he  used  fine  hairs  of  different  diameters  fastened  to  a  wooden 
handle.  The  cross- areas  of  these  hairs  are  determined  by  measure- 
ments under  the  microscope,  and  the  pressure  exerted  by  each  is 
measured  by  pressing  it  upon  the  scale  pan  of  a  balance.  The 
quotient  of  the  pressure  exerted  divided  by  the  cross-area  of  the 

hair  in  square  millimeters,  -^^,  reduces  the  pressure  to  a  uniform 
'  mm'' 

unit  of  area.  For  the  pain  points  fine  needles  may  be  employed 
or  stiff  hairs  similar  to  those  used  for  the  pressure  points.  From 
the  experiments  made  there  seems  to  be  no  doubt  that  each  of 
the  four  cutaneous  senses  has  its  own  spots  of  distribution  in  the 
skin,  those  for  pain  being  most  numerous  and  those  for  warmth 
the  least  numerous.  There  is  some  reason  for  believing  also  that 
the  nerve  endings  mediating  the  pain  sense  lie  most  superficially 
in  the  skin  and  those  for  the  warm  sense  the  deepest. 

Specific  Nerve  Energies  of  the  Cutaneous  Nerves. — Many 
attempts  have  been  made  to  determine  whether  the  doctrine  of 
specific  nerve  energies  applies  to  these  cutaneous  senses;  that  is, 
whether  each  sense  has  its  o^\ti  nerve  fibers  capable  of  giving  only  its 
own  quality  of  sensation.  The  evidence,  on  the  whole,  is  favorable 
to  this  view.  According  to  some  observers,  electrical  or  mechanical 
stimulation  of  the  different  points  calls  forth  for  each  its  character- 
istic reaction.  Donaldson  has  found  that  cocain  applied  to  the 
eye  or  throat  destroys  the  senses  of  pain  and  pressure,  but  leaves 
those  of  heat  and  cold,  which  again  supports  the  view  of  separate 
fibers  for  each  sense.  In  addition  there  are  a  number  of  interesting 
pathological  cases  which  point  in  the  same  direction.  In  some 
lesions  of  the  cord — syringomyelia,  for  instance — the  senses  in  the 
skin  of  the  parts  below  are  dissociated, — that  is,  there  may  be  loss 
of  pain  and  temperature  in  a  certain  area  with  a  retention  of  the 
pressure  sense, — a  fact  which  indicates  that  these  senses  have 
separate  paths  and  therefore  separate  nerve  fibers.  Still  more 
interesting  cases  of  dissociation  are  reported  as  the  result  of  the 
compression  of  peripheral  nerve  trunks.  Thus,  Barker  f  describes 
his  own  case,  in  which,  as  the  result  of  the  pressure  of  a  cervical 
rib  upon  some  of  the  cords  of  the  brachial  plexus,  there  was  a  region 
in  the  arm  lacking  in  the  pressure  and  temperature  senses,  but  retain- 
ing the  sense  of  pain.  He  quotes  other  cases  in  which  the  reverse 
dissociation  occurred,  pressure  sense  alone  remaining.  The  simplest 
explanation  of  these  facts  is  the  view  that  each  pressure,  pain, 
warm,  and  cold  spot  is  supplied  by  its  own  nerve  fiber,  and  that 
each,  when  stimulated,  reacts,  if  it  reacts  at  all,  only  with  its  own 

*  Von  Frey,  "Konigl.  Sachsischen  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften.  Math.- 
phys.  Klasse,"  1894-95-96. 

t  Barker,  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  1,  348,  1896. 


CUTANEOUS   AND   INTERNAL   SENSATIONS.  259 

peculiar  quality  of  sensation.  According  to  this  view,  artificial 
stimulation,  if  properly  controlled,  of  the  trunks  of  the  nerves 
supplying  the  skin  should  be  capable  of  bringing  out  these  different 
sense  qualities.  Experiments  made  with  this  point  in  view  have 
not,  however,  been  very  successful.  Mechanical  or  electrical  stimu- 
lation of  the  ulnar  nerve,  for  instance,  gives  usually  only  pain  sensa- 
tions, although  if  the  stimulus  is  feeble  contact  sensations  are 
aroused.  The  method,  however,  is  probably  at  fault.  In  the  case 
of  amputated  fingers  or  limbs  a  more  decisive  result  is  obtained. 
As  is  well  knoAvn,  individuals  after  such  operations  may  for  many 
years  have  sensations  of  their  lost  fingers  or  limbs.  In  such  cases 
the  pressure  in  the  stump  of  the  wound  acting  upon  the  central 
ends  of  the  sensory  fibers  arouses  sensations  which  are  projected 
in  the  usual  way,  and  give  the  feeling  that  would  be  experienced 
if  the  lost  parts  were  still  there  and  were  stimulated  in  the  normal 
manner. 

The  Temperature  Senses. — The  main  facts  regarding  the 
distribution  of  heat  and  cold  spots  have  been  determined.  In  gen- 
eral, the  cold  spots  are  more  numerous  than  the  warm  spots,  and 
react  more  promptly  to  their  adequate  stimulus.  The  cold  spots 
or  the  cold  sense  may  be  present  in  places  devoid  of  the  sense  of 
warmth;  thus,  it  is  said  that  the  glans  penis  possesses  only  the 
cold  sense.  The  threshold  stimulus  varies  also  in  different  parts 
of  the  skin,  the  tip  of  the  tongue  requiring  the  smallest  stimulus 
to  arouse  a  sensation,  and  the  eyelids,  forehead,  cheeks,  lips,  limbs, 
and  trunk  folio-wing  in  the  order  named.  According  to  Goldscheider, 
the  spots  on  most  portions  of  the  skin  form  chains  that  have  a  some- 
what radiate  arrangement  with  reference  to  the  hair  follicles.  The 
temperature  points  possess  each  its  adequate  stimulus,  that  for  the 
cold  spot  being  temperatures  lower  than  the  skin  or  of  the  terminal 
organ  of  the  cold  nerves,  that  for  the  heat  spots  temperatures  higher 
than  their  own.  Apparently,  therefore,  one  end-organ  is  excited 
by  a  diminution  in  the  atomic  movements  of  its  organ,  and  the 
other  by  an  increase.  Nothing  is  known,  however,  of  the  exact 
nature  of  the  stimulating  process.  From  the  standpoint  of  specific 
nerve  energies  it  is  most  interesting  to  find  that  these  points,  particu- 
larly the  cold  spots,  may  be  stimulated  by  other  than  their  adequate 
stimuli.  Mechanical  and  electrical  stimulation  has  in  the  hands  of 
several  observers  been  efficient  in  causing  a  sensation  of  cold  upon 
a  cold  spot  and  of  heat  upon  a  warm  spot.  Some  chemical  stimuli 
are  also  effective.  Menthol  applied  to  the  skin  gives  a  cold  sensa- 
tion, while,  on  the  other  hand,  if  the  arm  be  plunged  into  a  jar  of 
carbon-dioxid  gas  a  distinct  warm  sensation  will  be  experienced. 
A  curious  effect  of  this  kind  is  what  is  known  as  the  paradoxical  cold 
reaction.     It  is  produced  by  applying  a  very  warm  object,  with  a 


260  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

temperature  of  40°  to  60°  C,  to  a  cold  spot.  In  many  cases  this 
spot  is  stimulated  and  a  cold  sensation  is  felt.  The  same  result 
may  be  felt  at  the  instant  of  entering  a  hot  bath.  Many  efforts 
have  been  made  to  determine  whether  there  is  a  specific  kind  of 
end-organ  for  each  of  these  senses.  Numerous  observers  have 
cut  out  the  skin  from  cold  or  hot  spots  and  examined  the  removed 
part  carefully  by  histological  methods.  The  general  result  has  been 
that  no  distinctive  end-organs  have  been  found.  Von  Frey,  how- 
ever, believes  that,  although  the  heat  spots  are  supplied  simply 
by  a  terminal  end  plexus,  the  cold  spots  in  some  places  at  least  have 
as  a  special  end-organ  the  end-bulbs  of  Krause.  This  conclusion  is 
based  upon  the  fact  that  these  end-bulbs  are  found  in  places,  such 
as  the  glans  penis  and  conjunctiva,  where  the  cold  sense  is  espe- 
cially prominent  or  exclusively  present. 

The  Sense  of  Pressure. — The  pressure  points  are  smaller  and 
more  numerous  than  the  cold  or  warm  spots.  Von  Frey  has  shown 
that  in  those  portions  of  the  body  that  are  supplied  with  hairs 
the  pressure  points  lie  over  the  hair  follicles.  The  pressure  nerve 
fibers,  in  fact,  terminate  in  a  ring  surrounding  the  hair  follicle, 
this  form  of  termination  serving  as  an  end-organ.  On  account  of 
their  position  they  are  stimulated  by  any  pressure  exerted  upon 
the  hair.  The  hair,  indeed,  acts  like  a  lever  and  transmits  any  pres- 
sure applied  to  it  with  increased  intensity,  acting,  therefore,  as  re- 
gards the  pressure  organ  somewhat  like  the  ear-bones  in  the  case 
of  the  endings  of  the  auditory  nerve.  In  parts  of  the  body  not 
furnished  with  hairs  the  tactile  or  Meissner  corpuscles  are  found 
and  these  structures  doubtless  function  as  pressure  end-organs. 
They  are  particularly  abundant  in  the  parts  of  the  hand  and  feet  in 
which  a  delicate  sense  of  pressure  is  present  in  spite  of  a  much  thick- 
ened epidermis.  It  has  been  estimated  that  for  the  entire  surface 
of  the  body,  excluding  the  head  region,  there  are  about  500,000 
of  these  pressure  points.  These  points  are  close  together  on  those 
parts,  such  as  the  tongue  and  fingers,  which  have  delicate  a  tactile 
sense  and  more  widely  scattered  where  the  sense  is  less  developed. 

The  Threshold  Stimulus  and  the  Localizing  Power. — The 
delicacy  of  the  sense  of  pressure  may  be  measured  by  determining 
the  minimal  pressure  necessary  to  arouse  a  sensation, — that  is, 
the  threshold  stimulus, — or  it  may  be  estimated  in  terms  of  the 
power  of  discriminating  two  contiguous  stimuli, — that  is,  the  mini- 
mal distance  that  two  points  must  be  apart  in  order  for  the  sensa- 
tions to  be  recognized  as  distinct.  The  two  methods  of  measure- 
ment do  not  coincide.  As  determined  by  the  threshold  stimulus, 
the  greatest  delicacy  is  exhibited  by  the  skin  of  the  face,  the  fore- 
head, and  temples.  According  to  the  older  methods  of  measure- 
ment, the  forehead  will  perceive  a  pressure  of  2  mgs.,  while  the  skin 


CUTANEOUS   AND    INTERNAL   SENSATIONS.  261 

of  the  tips  of  the  fingers  needs  a  pressure  of  from  5  to  15  mgs.  to 
arouse  a  perceptible  sensation.  The  back  of  the  hand  or  the  arm 
is  more  sensitive  from  this  standpoint  than  the  tips  of  the  fingers. 
When  measured  by  the  power  of  discriminating  two  points — 
that  is,  the  localizing  sense — the  tips  of  the  fingers  are  far  more 
sensitive  than  the  skin  of  the  face  or  of  the  arm.  This  latter  prop- 
erty, in  fact,  stands  in  relation  to  the  closeness  of  the  pressure 
points  to  one  another.  The  localizing  sense  may  be  determined 
by  Weber's  method  of  using  a  pair  of  compasses  with  blunt  points. 
For  any  given  area  of  the  skin  the  power  of  discrimination  or  local- 
ization is  expressed  in  terms  of  the  number  of  millimeters  between 
the  two  points  at  which  they  are  just  distinguished  as  two  separate 
sensations  when  applied  simultaneously  to  the  skin.  Instruments 
made  for  this  purpose  are  designated  as  esthesiometers.  They 
carry  two  points  the  distance  of  which  apart  can  be  readily  adjusted 
and  read  off  on  a  scale.  The  most  satisfactory  form  of  esthesiom- 
eter  is  that  devised  by  von  Frey.  The  two  points  in  this  case  are 
made  by  long,  rather  stiff  hairs  whose  pressure  can  be  made  quite 
uniform.  According  to  the  older  measurements,  the  localizing 
sense  of  different  parts  of  the  skin  varies  greatly,  as  is  shown  by  the 
accompanying  table: 

Tip  of  the  tongue 1.1  mms. 

Tip  of  finger,  palmar  surface 2.3  " 

Second  phalanx  finger,  palmar  surface .  4.5  " 

First  phalanx  finger,  palmar  surface 5.5  " 

Third  phalanx  finger,  dorsal  surface 6.8  " 

Middle  of  palm 8  to  9     " 

Second  phalanx  finger,  dorsal  surface 11.3  " 

Forehead 22.6  " 

Back  of  the  hand 31.6  " 

Forearm 40.6  " 

Sternum 45  " 

Along  the  spine 54  " 

Middle  of  neck  or  back 67.7  " 

The  tips  of  the  tongue  and  the  fingers  are,  therefore,  the  most 
delicate  surfaces,  and  that  the  tongue  surpasses  the  fingers  in  this 
respect  is  easily  within  the  experience  of  everyone  who  will  recall 
the  ease  with  which  small  objects  between  the  teeth  are  detected  by 
the  tongue  as  compared  with  the  fingers.  From  the  above  data  it 
is  evident  also  that  the  whole  skin  may  be  imagined  as  composed 
of  a  mosaic  of  areas  of  different  sizes,  the  sensory  circles  of  Weber, 
m  each  of  which  two  or  more  simultaneous  stimulations  of  the  pres- 
sure nerves  give  only  one  pressure  sensation.  The  size  of  these 
areas,  particularly  where  they  are  large,  may  be  reduced  by  practice, 
as  is  shown  by  the  increased  tactile  sensibility  of  the  blind.  The 
fact  that  we  can  recognize  two  simultaneous  pressure  stimuli  of  the 
skin  as  two  distinct  sensations  implies  that  the  tAvo  sensations  have 


262  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

some  recognizable  difference  in  consciousness.  This  difference  is 
spoken  of  as  the  local  sign.  We  may  believe  that  every  sensitive 
point  upon  the  skin  has  its  own  distinctive  local  sign  or  quality,  and 
that  by  experience  we  have  learned  to  project  each  local  sign  more 
or  less  accurately  to  its  proper  place  on  the  skin  surface.  Two  points 
on  this  surface  that  are  a  great  distance  apart  are  easity  recognized 
as  different ;  but  as  we  bring  the  points  closer  together  the  difference 
becomes  less  marked  and  finally  disappears  when  the  distance 
corresponds  to  the  area  of  the  sensory  circle  for  the  part  of  the  skin 
investigated,  for  instance,  1  mm.  for  the  tongue,  22  mms.  for  the 
forehead,  etc.  The  ultimate  limit  of  the  power  of  discrimination 
was  assumed  by  Weber  to  depend  upon  the  area  of  distribution  of 
a  single  nerve  fiber.  Assuming  that  each  nerve  fiber  at  its  termi- 
nation spreads  over  a  certain  skin  area,  it  was  suggested  that  the 
size  of  this  area  forms  a  limit  to  the  power  of  discrimination, 
since  two  stimuli  within  it  would  affect  a  single  fiber  and  therefore 
would  give  a  single  sensation. 

This  view,  however,  has  not  been  supposed  to  accord  with  the 
facts  even  when  the  additional  supposition  was  made  that  the  local 
signs  of  two  adjacent  fibers  may  not  be  distinct  enough  for  us  to 
recognize  them  as  separate  and  that  practically  there  must  be  a 
number  of  intervening  unstimulated  areas,  the  number  varying 
according  to  the  sensitiveness  of  the  area.  Von  Frey  has,  however, 
given  a  new  method  of  testing  the  localizing  sense  of  the  skin,  the 
results  of  which  seem  to  accord  with  this  anatomical  explanation. 
If  instead  of  applying  the  two  points  simultaneously  they  are 
applied  in  succession,  at  an  interval  of  one  second,  the  individual  can 
distinguish  the  difference  when  two  neighboring  pressure  points  are 
stimulated.  Each  pressure  point  in  the  skin,  therefore,  has  a  local 
sign,  which  enables  us  to  distinguish  it  from  all  others,  and  by  this 
method  the  ultimate  sensory  circles  on  the  skin  become  much 
smaller  than  when  measured  by  the  usual  method  of  Weber.  The 
center  of  each  is  a  pressure  point  and  the  area  is  determined  by  the 
distance  from  this  center  at  which  an  isolated  stimulation  of  this 
point  can  be  obtained.  It  seems  probable,  moreover,  that  each  of 
these  pressure  points  is  connected  to  the  brain  by  a  separate  nerve 
path,  possibly  a  single  fiber,  and  that  this  anatomical  arrangement 
determines  the  limitation  of  the  localizing  sense  for  different  regions 
of  the  skin. 

The  Pain  Sense. — Pain  is  probably  the  sense  that  is  most  widely 
distributed  in  the  body.  It  is  present  throughout  the  skin,  and 
under  certain  conditions  may  be  aroused  by  stimulation  of  sensory 
nerves  in  the  various  visceral  organs,  and  indeed  in  all  of  the  mem- 
branes of  the  body.  Our  knowledge  of  the  physiological  properties 
of  the  end-organs  and  nerves  mediating  this  sense  is  chiefly  limited 


CUTANEOUS   AND   INTERNAL   SENSATIONS.  263 

to  the  skin,  and  for  cutaneous  pain  at  least  the  evidence,  as  stated 
above,  is.  very  strongly  in  favor  of  the  view  that  there  exists  a  special 
set  of  fibers  which  have  a  specific  energy  for  pain.  All  recent  ob- 
servers agree  that  the  pain  sense  has  a  punctiform  distribution  in 
the  skin,  the  pain  points  being  even  more  numerous  than  the  pres- 
sure points.  The  threshold  stimulus  of  these  points  in  various 
regions  may  be  determined  by  von  Frey's  stimulating  hairs,  and 
experiments  of  this  kind  show,  as  we  should  expect,  that  it  varies 
greatly.  The  cornea,  for  instance,  gives  sensations  of  pain  with 
much  weaker  stimuli  than  in  the  case  of  the  finger  tips.  In  general, 
however,  the  threshold  stimulus  is  much  higher  for  the  pain  than 
for  the  pressure  points.  Histological  examination  of  the  pain  points 
indicates  that  there  is  no  special  end-organ,  the  stimulus  taking 
effect  upon  the  free  endings  of  the  nerve  fibers.  Any  of  the  usual 
forms  of  artificial  nerve  stimuli  may  affect  these  endings  if  of  suf- 
ficient intensity,  and,  as  is  well  known,  stimuli  applied  to  sensorv^ 
nerve  tnmks  affect  these  fibers  with  especial  ease.  A  temperature 
of  50°  to  70°  C.  applied  to  an  afferent  nerve  will  cause  violent  pain 
sensations,  but  has  no  effect  upon  the  motor  nerve  fibers  in  the  same 
trunk.  Mechanical  stimulation  gives  usually  only  pain  sensations, 
and  the  results  of  inflammatory  changes,  as  in  neuritis  or  neuralgia, 
are  equally  marked. 

Localization  or  Projection  of  Pain  Sensations. — Under  normal 
conditions  cutaneous  pains  are  projected  with  accuracy  to  the  point 
stimulated,  and  it  is  possible  that  this  result  is  due  in  part  at  least 
to  the  training  acquired  in  connection  with  concomitant  pressure 
stimuli,  the  latter  acting  as  a  guide  or  aid  in  the  projection.  Thus 
in  the  cases  referred  to  above,  in  which  a  portion  of  the  skin  had  lost 
the  sense  of  pressure  and  temperature,  but  retained  that  of  pain,  it 
was  found  that  the  localization  was  very  incomplete.  Pain  arising 
in  the  internal  organs,  on  the  contrary,  is  located  very  inaccurately. 
The  pain  from  a  severe  toothache,  for  example,  may  be  projected 
quite  diffusely  to  the  side  of  the  face.  A  very  interesting  fact  in 
this  connection  is  that  such  pains  are  often  referred  to  points  on  the 
skin  and  may  be  accompanied  by  skin  areas  of  tenderness.  Pains 
of  this  kind  that  are  misref erred  to  the  surface  of  the  body  are  desig- 
nated as  reflected  pains.  It  has  been  shown  by  Head*  and  others 
that  the  different  visceral  organs  have,  in  this  respect,  a  more  or  less 
definite  relation  to  certain  areas  of  the  skin.  Pains  arising  from 
stimuli  acting  upon  the  intestines  are  located  in  the  skin  of  the  back, 
loins,  and  abdomen  in  the  area  supplied  by  the  ninth,  tenth,  and 
eleventh  dorsal  spinal  nerves ;  pains  from  irritations  in  the  stomach 
are  located  in  the  skin  over  the  ensiform  cartilage ;  those  from  the 
heart  in  the  scapular  region,  and  so  on.  The  explanation  offered 
*  Head,  "Brain,"  16,  1,  1893,  and  24,  345,  1901. 


264  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

for  this  misreference  is  that  the  pain  is  referred  to  the  skin  region 
that  is  supplied  from  the  spinal  segment  from  which  the  organ  in 
question  receives  its  sensory  fibers,  the  misreference  being  due  to  a 
diffusion  in  the  nerve  centers.  As  Head  expresses  it,  "when  a 
painful  stimulus  is  applied  to  a  part  of  low  sensibilit}'  in  close  central 
connection  with  a  part  of  much  greater  sensibility  the  pain  produced 
is  felt  in  the  part  of  higher  sensibility  rather  than  in  the  part  of  lower 
sensibility  to  which  the  stimulus  was  actually  applied."  It  is 
interesting  that  affections  of  the  serous  cavities — e.g.,  the  peritoneum 
— do  not  cause  reflected  pains  or  cutaneous  tenderness  as  in  the 
case  of  the  viscera.  Another  notable  fact  in  this  connection  is  the 
occurrence  of  the  condition  known  as  allochiria.  When  from  an}' 
cause  one  or  other  of  the  cutaneous  senses  is  depressed  in  a  given 
area  stimulation  in  this  region  may  give  sensations  which  are  re- 
ferred to  the  symmetrical  area  on  the  other  side  of  the  body,  or,  if 
this  also  is  involved,  it  may  be  referred  to  the  area  next  above  or 
below  in  the  spinal  order.  The  above  law,  according  to  which  pro- 
jection is  made  to  the  area  of  higher  sensibility  most  closely  con- 
nected with  the  area  of  low  sensibility,  seems  to  hold  in  this  case 
also. 

The  Muscle  Sense. — The  existence  of  a  special  set  of  sensory 
nerve  fibers  distributed  to  the  muscles  was  clearly  recognized  b}' 
some  of  the  older  physiologists.  Charles  Bell,*  for  example,  says: 
''Between  the  brain  and  the  muscles  there  is  a  circle  of  nerves;  one 
nerve  conveys  the  influence  from  the  brain  to  the  muscle;  another 
gives  the  sense  of  the  condition  of  the  muscle  to  the  brain."  The 
conclusive  proof  of  the  existence  of  such  fibers,  however,  has  onty 
been  furnished  within  recent  years.  It  has  been  demonstrated 
that  there  are  special  sensory  endings  in  the  muscles,  the  so-called 
muscle  spindles,  and  in  the  attached  tendons,  the  tendon  spindles 
or  tendon  organs  of  Golgi.  The  muscle  spindles  are  found  most 
frequently  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  tendons,  at  tendinous  inter- 
sections or  under  aponeuroses.  Sherringtonf  has  shown  that  the 
nerve  fibers  in  them  do  not  degenerate  after  section  of  the  anterior 
roots  of  the  corresponding  spinal  nerves  and  are  therefore  derived 
from  the  posterior  roots.  In  the  muscles  of  the  limbs  he  estimates 
that  from  one-half  to  one-third  of  the  fibers  in  the  muscular  nerve 
branches  are  sensory,  and  that  most  of  these  sensory  fibers  end  in 
the  muscle  spindles.  On  the  physiological  and  clinical  side  facts  of 
various  kinds  have  accumulated  that  make  clear  the  existence  of 
this  group  of  sensory  fibers  and  emphasize  their  essential  importance 
in  the  co-ordination  of  our  muscular  movements.    It  has  been  shown 

*  Bell,  "The  Nervous  System  of  the  Human  Body,"  third  edition,  Lon- 
don, 1844,  p.  200. 

t  Sherrington,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  17,  237,  1894. 


CUTANEOUS    AND    INTERNAL    SENSATIONS.  265 

that  stimulation  of  the  nerves  distributed  to  the  muscles  or  mechani- 
cal stimulation  of  the  muscles  themselves  causes  a  depressor  effect 
upon  blood-pressure,  thus  demonstrating  the  presence  of  afferent 
fibers  in  the  muscles.  As  described  in  the  section  upon  the  central 
nervous  system,  the  numerous  experiments  upon  the  effect  of  section 
of  the  posterior  and  lateral  columns  of  the  cord  and  observations 
upon  the  results  of  pathological  lesions  of  the  posterior  columns 
(tabes  dorsalis)  give  results  which  are  interpreted  to  mean  that  fibers 
of  muscular  sensibility  form  the  most  important  group  in  the 
posterior  columns  and  constitute,  as  well,  perhaps,  the  long,  ascend- 
ing fibers  in  the  tracts  of  Flechsig  and  Gowers  in  the  lateral  col- 
umns. It  is  believed,  therefore,  that  our  so-called  voluntary  muscles 
are  richly  supplied  Avith  afferent  fibers  and  that  the  impulses  carried 
by  these  fibers  to  the  brain  are  necessary  for  the  proper  contraction 
of  the  muscles  and  particularly  for  the  adequate  combination  of 
the  contractions  of  groups  of  muscles  in  the  co-ordinated  movements 
of  equilibrium.  Indeed,  section  of  the  posterior  roots  of  the  spinal 
nerves  supplying  a  given  region  is  followed  by  a  loss  of  control 
of  the  muscles  in  this  region  hardly  less  complete  than  the  paralysis 
produced  by  direct  section  of  the  anterior  roots ;  the  muscles  not 
only  lose  their  tonicity  in  consequence  of  the  dropping  out  of  the 
reflex  sensory  stimuli  from  the  skin  and  muscles  of  the  region,  but 
they  are  apparently  withdra^vn  from  voluntary  control  in  spite  of 
the  maintenance  of  their  normal  motor  connections.  Within  the 
central  nervous  system  the  fibers  of  muscle  sense  are  traced  into  the 
nuclei  of  Goll  and  of  Burdach  in  the  medulla  and  thence  partly  into 
the  cerebellum  and  partly  into  the  cerebrum  by  way  of  the  median 
fillet.  Within  the  cerebrum  they  end  in  the  cortex  of  the  parietal 
lobe  in  the  region  of  the  posterior  central  convolution.  There  is 
reason  to  believe  that  this  cortical  sense  area  of  the  muscle  sense  is 
connected  by  association  fibers  mth  the  motor  areas  lying  anterior 
to  the  fissure  of  Rolando,  and  we  have  thus  a  reflex  arc, — or,  as 
Bell  expressed  it,  a  circle  of  nerves  between  the  muscles  and  the 
brain.  It  is  probable  that  a  similar  arc  or  circle  is  formed  by  the 
Connections  through  the  cerebellum,  and  still  a  third  one  of  a  lower 
order  by  the  connections  in  the  spinal  cord.  In  the  higher  animals 
the  impulses  received  in  the  cerebellum  through  the  fibers  of  muscle 
sense,  in  connection  with  those  received  from  the  semicircular  canals 
and  vestibular  sacs  of  the  ear,  furnish  the  sensory  basis  for  the 
cerebellar  control  of  muscular  movements,  particularly  of  the 
synergetic  combination  necessary  in  locomotion.  Through  the 
circle  or  arc  in  the  cortex  of  the  cerebrum  it  may  be  supposed  that 
our  characteristic  voluntary  movements  are  effected,  and  it  may 
be  doubted  whether  a  so-called  voluntary  contraction  can  be  made 
when  this  circle  is  broken  on  the  sensory  side.     Whether  or  not  this 


266  THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 

latter  suggestion  is  true  it  seems  to  be  beyond  doubt  that  adequately 
controlled  voluntary  movements  depend  for  their  adaptation  upon 
the  inflow  of  sensory  impulses  along  the  fibers  of  muscle  sense. 
We  have  a  certain  consciousness  of  the  condition  of  our  muscles  at 
all  times,  and  if  we  were  deprived  of  this  knowledge  we  should  be 
unable  to  control  them  properly,  perhaps  unable  to  use  them 
voluntarily. 

The  Quality  of  the  Muscle  Sense. — Our  conscious  realization 
of  muscular  sensibility  is  not  distinct.  Under  ordinary  conditions 
the  untrained  person  is  unaware  of  the  presence  of  such  a  sense; 
but  physiological  analysis  enables  us  to  realize  its  existence.  What 
we  designate  as  the  feeling  of  resistance  and  of  weight  depends 
usually  partly  upon  the  pressure  sense,  but  largely  upon  the  muscle 
sense.  In  estimating  the  difference  in  weight  between  two  bodies 
our  judgment  is  much  more  exact  if  the  bodies  are  lifted  by  muscular 
effort,  as  is  our  custom,  than  if  they  are  simply  allowed  to  press 
upon  the  skin;  and  in  all  calculations  of  resistance  to  effort  it  is 
the  amount  of  muscular  contraction  exerted  that  furnishes  us  with 
the  chief  sensory  basis  for  our  judgments.  So  also  in  the  judg- 
ments of  distance  based  upon  visual  impressions  it  is  believed  that 
for  close  objects,  particularly,  the  muscle  sense  connected  with  the 
extrinsic  and  intrinsic  musculature  of  the  eyeballs  plays  a  funda- 
mental part.  Doubtless  also  this  sense  takes  an  essential  part 
in  the  primitive  formation  of  our  conceptions  of  space,  since  it 
may  be  assumed  that  the  continual  movements  of  the  extremities 
in  connection  with  our  visual  and  tactile  impressions  furnish  essen- 
tial data  upon  which  we  build  our  perceptions  of  distance  and 
size,  our  judgments  of  spatial  relations.  As  is  explained  in  the 
chapter  on  the  physiology  of  the  ear,  the  sensations  from  the  semi- 
circular canals  and  vestibular  sacs  co-operate  in  giving  data  for 
these  fundamental  conceptions,  and  it  is  not  possible  for  us  to 
disentangle  the  parts  taken  by  these  senses  separately  in  building 
up  our  knowledge  of  the  external  world.  The  muscle  sense  is 
reckoned  usually  among  the  internal  (or  common)  senses, — that  is,, 
those  which  are  projected  to  the  interior  of  the  body  and  are  felt 
as  changes  in  ourselves.  A  little  reflection,  however,  demonstrates 
that,  like  the  temperature  sense,  it  may  under  conditions  be  pro- 
jected to  the  exterior  and  be  interpreted  as  a  quality  of  external 
objects.  Weight  and  resistance,  for  example,  are  attributed  to 
the  objects  giving  rise  to  the  feeling  of  muscular  effort,  and  it  may 
be  said,  perhaps,  that,  as  in  the  case  of  temperature,  the  feeling 
is  projected  more  or  less  clearly  to  the  exterior  when  it  is  combined 
with  the  pressure  sense  which  acts  as  the  predominating  or  guiding 
factor  in  the  projection.  In  excessive  muscular  effort  the  quality 
of  the  muscle  sensation  undergoes  a  change  and  becomes  strong 


CUTANEOUS   AND   INTERNAL   SENSATIONS.  267 

enough  to  make  a  distinct  and  peculiar  impression  upon  our  con- 
sciousness. We  designate  this  feeUng  as  fatigue,  but  there  is  no 
question  apparently  that  this  sensation  is  mediated  through  the 
same  nerve  fibers  that  ordinarily  give  us  our  muscular  sensibility. 

Sensations  of  Hunger  and  Thirst. — Hunger  and  thirst  are 
typical  interior  (or  common)  sensations.  We  feel  them  as  changes 
in  ourselves.  Neither  sense  has  been  the  direct  object  of  much 
experimental  investigation,  and  what  knowledge  we  possess  is  there- 
fore derived  largely  from  accidental  or  pathological  sources.  Hunger 
in  its  mild  form  is  designated  as  appetite.  It  occurs  normally  at  a 
certain  interval  after  meals,  and  is  referred  or  projected  more  or 
less  accurately  to  the  stomach.  It  is  not  known  whether  this  sense 
is  mediated  by  a  special  set  of  sensory  fibers  distributed  to  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach,  or  whether,  perhaps,  it 
may  be  a  quality  of  the  sensory  impressions  from  the  muscular 
coat.  The  former  view  seems  more  probable,  especially  when  it  is 
remembered  that  loss  of  appetite  or  anorexia  is  so  frequently  an 
accompaniment  of  pathological  changes  in  the  membrane  of  the 
stomach.  The  nervous  mechanism  through  which  this  sense  is  me- 
diated is  of  most  essential  importance  and  deserves  more  careful 
study  at  the  hands  of  physiologists  and  pathologists.  Under  ordi- 
nary conditions  of  life  all  of  the  regulation  of  the  amount  and  quality 
of  the  food  necessary  to  the  proper  nutrition  of  the  body  and  the 
maintenance  of  body  equilibrium  is  effected  through  this  sense.  Its 
striking  influence  upon  the  body  at  large  is  well  illustrated  in  the  case 
of  animals  (pigeons,  dogs)  deprived  of  their  cerebrum.  During  the 
period  of  fasting  these  animals  show  all  the  external  signs  of  hunger 
and  keep  in  continual,  restless  movement  that  seems  to  imply  a  con- 
stantly acting  sensory  stimulus.  We  may  assume  that  appetite 
has  its  sensory  origin,  its  peripheral  nerve  endings  in  the  stomach, 
and  that  these  endings  are  excited  in  some  unknown  way  when  the 
stomach  is  empty.  This  gastric  hunger,  as  it  might  be  called, 
disappears,  or  the  appetite  is  appeased  when  the  stomach  is  filled. 
This  fact  in  itself  would  indicate  that  the  stimulus  has  a  local 
origin  in  the  stomach,  and  is  not  dependent  upon  any  general 
change  in  the  nutritive  condition  of  the  body.  The  appetite  is 
satisfied  by  filling  the  stomach  with  food  long  before  this  food 
is  actually  absorbed  and  distributed  to  the  tissues.  The  inges- 
tion of  totally  indigestible  material  would  probably  have  temporarily 
a  similar  result.  The  exact  nature  of  the  conditions  that  lead 
to  or  cause  a  stimulation  of  the  sensory  nerves  of  appetite  in  the 
stomach  remains  unexplained.  The  well-known" fact  that  muscular 
exercise  and  low  temperatures  and  particularly  a  combination  of 
the  two  cause  a  marked  augmentation  of  the  appetite  would  suggest 
that  the  sensory  stimulus  is  influenced  by  the  extent  or  character 


268  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

of  the  oxidations  in  the  muscular  tissues,  and  that,  therefore,  some 
substance  may  be  formed  as  the  result  of  these  oxidations  which 
affects  the  sensory  nerves  of  the  stomach.  The  same  general  sug- 
gestion is  contained  in  the  fact  that  diabetics  exhibit  an  abnormal 
appetite  in  spite  of  abundant  feeding.  In  these  individuals  the 
carbohydrate  food  escapes  oxidation  more  or  less  completely,  and 
the  metabolism,  particularly  in  the  muscles,  involves,  therefore, 
to  a  greater  extent,  the  oxidation  of  proteid  material, — a  fact  which 
may  stand  in  some  relation  to  the  abnormal  appetite  that  is  observed. 
The  complexity  of  the  nervous  apparatus  that  controls  the  the  appe- 
tite is  shown  also  by  many  facts  from  the  experiences  of  life  and  from 
the  results  of  laboratory  investigations.  For  example,  it  is  found 
that  large  amounts  of  gelatin  in  the  diet,  although  at  first  accepted 
willingly,  soon  provoke  a  feeling  of  dislike  and  aversion  to  this 
particular  foodstuff  such  as  cannot  be  overcome.  An  animal  will 
starve  rather  than  use  the  gelatin,  although  all  of  our  direct  physio- 
logical evidence  would  indicate  that  this  substance  is  an  efficient 
food,  playing  much  the  same  part  as  the  fats  or  carbohydrates. 
A  fact  of  this  kind  indicates  that  the  sensory  apparatus  of  the  appe- 
tite is  influenced  in  some  specific  way  by  the  metabolism  of  this 
particular  material.  So  also  the  feeling  of  satiety  and  aversion  for 
food  that  follows  overfeeding  indicates  something  more  than  a  sim- 
ple removal  of  the  sensations  of  appetite ;  it  implies  an  active  state, 
due  possibly  to  the  excitation  of  sensory  fibers  of  a  different  char- 
acter. With  regard  to  the  effects  of  prolonged  starvation,  the 
pangs  of  hunger  that  are  felt  at  first  do  not  seem  to  increase  in  in- 
tensity to  such  an  extent  as  to  cause  actual  suffering.  The  testi- 
mony of  the  "professional  f asters,"  at  least,  seems  to  show  that,  if 
water  is  provided,  prolonged  deprivation  of  food  is  not  accompanied 
by  the  intense  discomfort  or  suffering  popularly  associated  with 
the  idea  of  complete  starvation. 

The  Sense  of  Thirst. — Our  sensations  of  thirst  are  projected 
more  or  less  accurately  to  the  pharynx,  and  the  facts  that  we  know 
would  seem  to  indicate  that  the  sensory  nerves  of  this  region  have 
the  important  function  of  mediating  this  sense.  The  water  con- 
tents of  the  body  are  subject  to  great  changes.  Through  the  lungs, 
the  skin,  and  the  kidneys  water  is  lost  continually  in  amounts  that 
vary  with  the  conditions  of  life.  This  loss  affects  the  blood  directly, 
but  is  doubtless  made  good,  so  far  as  this  tissue  is  concerned,  by  a 
call  upon  the  great  mass  of  water  contained  in  the  storehouse  of  the 
tissues.  To  restore  the  body  tissues  to  their  normal  equilibrium 
in  water  we  ingest  large  quantities,  and  the  control  of  this  regula- 
tion is  effected  through  the  sense  of  thirst.  We  know  little  or 
nothing  about  the  nervous  apparatus  involved;  but  it  may  be 
assumed  that  when  the  water  content  falls  below  a  certain  amount 


CUTANEOUS    AND    INTERNAL    SENSATIONS.  269 

the  nerve  fibers  in  the  pharyngeal  membrane  (fibers  of  the  glosso- 
pharyngeal nerve)  are  stimulated  and  give  us  the  sensation  of 
thirst.  That  we  have  in  this  membrane  a  special  end-organ  of 
thirst  is  indicated,  moreover,  by  the  fact  that  local  drying  in  this 
region,  from  dry  or  salty  food,  or  dry  and  dusty  air,  produces  a 
sensation  of  thirst  that  may  be  appeased  by  moistening  the  mem- 
brane with  a  small  amount  of  water  not  in  itself  sufficient  to  relieve 
a  genuine  water  need  of  the  bod}\  Our  normal  thirst  sensations 
might  be  designated,  therefore,  as  pharyngeal  thirst,  to  indicate 
the  probable  origin  of  the  sensory  stimuli.  Prolonged  deprivation 
of  water,  however,  must  affect  the  water  content  of  all  the  tissues, 
and  under  these  conditions  sensations  are  experienced  whose  quality 
is  not  that  of  simple  thirst  alone,  but  of  pain  or  suffering.  All  ac- 
counts agree  that  complete  deprivation  of  water  for  long  periods 
induces  intense  discomfort,  anguish,  and  possibly  mental  troubles, 
and  we  may  suppose  that  under  these  conditions  sensory  nerves 
are  stimulated  in  many  tissues,  and  that  the  metabolism  in  the  ner- 
vous system  in  addition  is  directly  affected  by  the  loss  of  water. 
It  is  interesting  to  note  that,  while  in  diseases  due  to  a  general  in- 
fection, loss  of  appetite,  anorexia,  is  a  frequent  symptom,  there  is 
no  corresponding  loss  of  the  sense  of  thirst.  Even  in  hydrophobia 
the  patient  experiences  the  sensations  of  thirst,  although  unable  to 
drink  water. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
SENSATIONS  OF  TASTE  AND  SMELL. 

The  sense  of  taste  is  mediated  by  nerve  fibers  distributed  to 
parts  of  the  buccal  cavity  and  particularly  to  parts  of  the  tongue. 
The  most  sensitive  regions  are  the  tip,  the  borders,  and  the  posterior 
portion  of  the  dorsum  of  the  tongue  in  the  region  of  the  circum- 
vallate  papillae.  Taste  buds  and  a  sense  of  taste  are  described  also 
for  the  soft  palate,  the  epiglottis,  and  even  for  the  larynx.  The 
sense  is  not  present  uniformly  over  the  entire  dorsum  of  the  tongue. 
On  the  contrary,  it  has  an  irregular,  punctiform  distribution  over 
most  of  this  region  with  the  exception  of  the  parts  mentioned  above. 

The  Nerves  of  Taste. — The  anterior  two-thirds  of  the  tongue 
are  supplied  with  sensory  fibers  from  the  lingual  nerve,  a  branch 
of  the  inferior  maxillary  division  of  the  fifth  nerve,  and  the  posterior 
third  from  the  glossopharyngeal.  The  taste  fibers  for  these  regions, 
therefore,  are  supplied  immediately  through  these  nerves.  It  has 
been  shown,  moreover,  that  the  taste  fibers  carried  in  the  lingual 
are  brought  to  it  through  the  chorda  tympani  nerve,  which  arises 
from  the  seventh  cranial  nerve  and  joins  the  lingual  soon  after 
emerging  from  the  tympanic  cavity  of  the  ear.  There  has  been 
much  discussion  as  to  the  origin  of  these  taste  fibers  from  the  brain. 
At  first  sight  it  would  seem  that  the  fibers  for  the  posterior  third 
of  the  tongue  must  have  their  origin  from  the  brain  in  the  glosso- 
pharyngeal and  those  for  the  anterior  two- thirds  in  the  sensory 
portion  of  the  facial.  Many  surgeons  have  reported,  however,  that 
complete  extirpation  of  the  Gasserian  ganglion  of  the  fifth  nerve 
is  followed  by  complete  loss  of  taste  in  the  corresponding  side  of 
the  tongue,  and  others  have  described  a  loss  of  taste  for  the  anterior 
two-thirds  following  a  similar  operation.  Some  authors  have 
asserted,  therefore,  that  all  the  taste  fibers  originate  or  rather  end 
in  the  sensory  nucleus  of  the  fifth,  while  others  believe  that  the 
fibers  running  in  the  chorda  tympani,  at  least,  take  their  origin  in 
the  fifth  nerve.  It  is  supposed  by  these  authors  that  the  fibers 
reach  the  Gasserian  ganglion  by  a  circuitous  route,  as  is  indicated 
in  the  diagram  given  in  Fig.  113.  Those  that  run  in  the  lingual 
and  chorda  tympani  nerves  are  assumed  to  pass  to  the  ganglion 
by  way  of  the  great  superficial  petrosal  and  Vidian  nerves  and 
Meckel's  ganglion,  while  those  that  are  contained  in  the  glosso- 

270 


SENSATIONS    OF   TASTE    AND    SMELL. 


271 


pharyngeal  reach  the  same  gangUon  through  the  nerve  of  Jacobson, 
the  small  superficial  petrosal,  and  the  otic  ganglion.  A  recent  re- 
port by  Gushing,*  of  the  results  of  removal  of  the  Gasserian  gan- 
glion in  thirteen  cases,  throws  much  doubt  upon  these  views.  This 
author  made  careful  examinations  of  the  sense  of  taste,  not  only 
immediately  after  the  operation,  but  for  a  long  period  subsequently. 
He  states  that  in  no  case  was  there  any  effect  upon  the  sense  of  taste 
in  the  posterior  third  of  the  tongue.  We  may  believe,  therefore,  that 
the  taste  fibers  in  this  nerve  arise  immediatelty  from  the  ganglion 
cells  in  the  petrosal  ganglion  and  enter  the  brain  with  the  roots  of 
the  nerve  to  terminate  in  its  sensory  nucleus  in  the  medulla.  Regard- 


'U.V.fl&TmtAuis  (^nsb crisis.') 

'l-^tfob.sufer^ic.-inayrr 


•^S^^Ciis 


Fig.  113. — Schema  to  show  the  course  of  the  taste  fibers  from  tongue  to  brain. — 
iCushing.)  The  dotted  lines  represent  the  course  as  indicated  by  Cushing's  observations. 
The  full  black  lines  indicate  the  paths  by  which  some  authors  have  supposed  that  these 
fibers  enter  the  brain  in  the  trigeminal  nerve. 


ing  the  anterior  two-thirds  of  the  tongue,  the  lingual  region,  it  was 
found  that  in  some  cases  there  was  at  first  a  loss  of  acuity  of  taste 
or  even  an  entire  disappearance  of  the  sense,  but  subsequently 
it  returned.  It  would  seem,  therefore,  that  the  loss  of  taste  de- 
scribed after  removal  of  the  Gasserian  ganglion  is  an  incidental 
result  the  cause  of  which  is  not  entirely  clear.  Gushing  attributes 
it  to  a  postoperative  degeneration  and  swelling  in  the  fibers  of  the 
lingual  nerve,  which  affect  the  conductivity  of  the  intermingled 
fibers  of  the  chorda  tympani.     Since,  however,  there  is  no  perma- 

*  Gushing,  "  Bulletin  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital,"  14,  71,  1903.     Gives 
also  the  surgical  Uterature. 


272 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


nent  loss  of  taste  in  this  region,  it  follows  that  the  taste  fibers  do 
not  pass  through  the  Gasserian  ganglion.  We  may  assume,  there- 
fore, that  they  originate  directly  in  the  nerve  cells  of  the  geniculate 
ganglion  and  enter  the  brain  with  the  fibers  of  the  portio  intermedia 
of  the  seventh  nerve. 

The  End-organ  of  the  Taste  Fibers. — In  the  circumvallate 
papillae,  in  some  of  the  fungiform  papillae,  and  in  other  portions  of 
the  fauces,  palate,  epiglottis,  or  even  the  vocal  cords  there  are 
found  the  organs  known  as  taste  buds  which  are  believed  to  act 
as  peripheral  organs  of  taste.  These  curious  structures  are  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  114.  They  are  oval  bodies  with  an  external  layer 
of  tegmental  or  cortical  cells,  and  they  contain  in  the  interior  a 

number  of   elongated    cells 

SI 


each  of  which  ends  in  a  hair- 
like process  which  projects 
through  the  central  taste 
pore  of  the  organ.  These 
latter  cells  may  be  consid- 
ered as  the  true  sense  cells; 
the  hair-like  process  con- 
stitutes probably  the  part 
that  is  stimulated  directly 
by  sapid  substances.  The 
impulse  thus  aroused  is 
communicated  through  the 
body  of  the  cell  to  the 
endings  of  the  taste  fibers 
which  terminate  around 
these  cells  by  terminal 
arborizations  of  the  same 
general  type  as  in  the  case 
"of  the  hair  cells  in  the 
cochlea. 
Sensations. — Our   taste    sensations 


Fig.  114. — Section  through  one  of  the  taste 
buds  of  the  papilla  foliata  of  the  rabbit  (from 
Quain,  after  Ranvier),  highly  magnified:  p,  Gus- 
tatory pore:  s,  gustatory  cell;  r,  sustentacular 
cell ;  m,  leucocyte  containing  granules ;  e,  super- 
ficial epithelial  cells ;    n,  nerve  fibers. 


Classification   of   Taste 

are  very  numerous,  but  it  has  been  shown  that  there  are  four 
primary  or  fundamental  sensations, — namely,  sweet,  bitter,  acid, 
and  salty,  and  that  all  other  tastes  are  combinations  of  these 
primary  sensations,  or  combinations  of  one  or  more  of  them  with 
sensations  of  odor  or  with  sensations  derived  from  stimulation  of 
the  so-called  nerves  of  common  sensibility  in  the  tongue.  Thus, 
the  taste  of  pepper  may  be  resolved  into  a  slight  odor  sensation 
and  a  sensation  due  to  stimulation  of  the  fibers  of  general  sensi- 
bility,— that  is,  it  gives  no  taste  sensation  proper.  The  taste  of 
alum  may  be  considered  as  a  combination  of  a  salty  taste  with 
common  sensibility.     Combinations  of  sweet  and  acid  tastes,  sweet 


SENSATIONS    OF   TASTE    AND    SMELL.  273 

and  bitter  tastes,  etc.,  form  a  part  of  our  daily  experience,  and 
in  the  fused  or  compound  sensation  that  results  from  such  com- 
binations "one  may  usually  recognize  without  difficulty  the  con- 
stituent parts.  The  seemingly  great  variety  of  our  taste  sensations 
is  largely  due  to  the  fact  that  we  confuse  them  or  combine  them 
with  simultaneous  odor  sensations.  Thus,  the  flavors  in  fruits  and 
the  bouquet  of  wines  are  due  to  odor  sensations  which  we  designate 
ordinarily  as  tastes,  since  they  are  experienced  at  the  time  these 
objects  are  ingested.  If  care  is  taken  to  shut  off  the  nasal  cavities 
during  the  act  of  ingestion  even  imperfectly,  as  by  holding  the 
nose,  the  so-called  taste  disappears  in  large  measure.  Very  dis- 
agreeable tastes  are  usually,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  due  to  unpleasant 
odor  sensations.  On  the  other  hand,  some  volatile  substances 
which  enter  the  mouth  through  the  nostrils  and  stimulate  the 
taste  organs  are  interpreted  by  us  as  odors.  The  odor  of  chloro- 
form, for  instance,  is  largely  due  to  stimulation  of  the  sweet  taste 
in  the  tongue. 

Distribution  and  Specific  Energy  of  the  Fundamental 
Taste  Sensations. — Regarding  the  distribution  of  the  funda- 
mental taste  sensations  over  the  tongue  and  palate  there  seem 
to  be  many  individual  differences.  In  general,  however,  it  may 
be  said  that  the  bitter  taste  is  more  developed  at  the  back  of 
the  tongue  and  the  adjacent  or  posterior  regions;  at  the  tip  of 
the  tongue  the  bitter  sense  is  less  marked  or  in  cases  may  be  absent 
altogether.  On  the  contrary,  in  this  latter  region  the  sweet  taste 
is  well  developed.  On  this  account  it  may  happen  that  substances 
which  when  first  taken  into  the  mouth  give  a  not  unpleasant  sweet 
taste  subsequently  when  swallowed  cause  disagreeably  bitter  sen- 
sations, like  the  little  book  of  the  evangelist,  which  in  the  mouth 
was  "sweet  as  honey,  and  as  soon  as  I  had  eaten  it,  my  belly  was 
bitter."  Oehrwall*  has  made  an  interesting  series  of  experiments 
in  which  he  stimulated  separately  a  number  of  fungiform  papillae 
on  the  surface  of  the  tongue.  Each  papilla  was  stimulated  sepa- 
rately for  its  fundamental  taste  senses  of  sweet,  bitter,  and  acid, 
by  using  drops  of  solutions  of  sugar,  quinin,  and  tartaric  acid.  Of 
the  125  papillae  thus  examined,  27  gave  no  reaction  at  all,  although 
sensitive  to  pressure  and  temperature.  In  the  98  papilla3  that 
reacted  to  the  sapid  stimulation  it  was  found  that  60  gave  taste 
sensations  of  all  three  qualities,  4  gave  only  sweet  and  bitter,  7  only 
bitter  and  acid,  12  only  sweet  and  acid,  12  only  acid,  and  3  only 
sweet.  None  was  found  to  give  only  a  bitter  sensation.  These 
facts  bear  directly  upon  the  question  of  the  specific  energy  of  the 
taste  fibers.  It  is  possible  that  the  four  fundamental  taste  qualities 
may  be  mediated  by  four  different  end-organs  and  four  separate 

*  Oehrwall,  " Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  2,  1,  1890. 
18 


274  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

sets  of  nerve  fibers,  each  giving,  when  stimulated,  only  its  own 
quality  of  sensation.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  possible  that  one  and 
the  same  nerve  fiber  might  give  different  qualities  of  sensation 
according  to  the  nature  and  mode  of  action  of  the  sapid  substances. 
The  fact,  as  shown  by  Oehrwall's  experiments,  that  there  are  sensory 
spots  upon  the  tongue  which  will  not  react  to  some  kinds  of  sapid 
substance,  but  do  react  to  others,  and  perhaps  only  to  one  particular 
kind,  speaks  strongly  in  favor  of  the  view  that  there  are  different 
end-organs  and  nerve  fibers  for  each  fundamental  taste.  This  view 
is  still  further  supported  by  the  fact  that  certain  chemically  pure  sub- 
stance i  give  different  tastes  according  to  the  part  of  the  tongue 
upon  which  they  are  placed.  Thus,  sodium  sulphate  (Guyot)  may 
taste  salty  upon  the  tip  of  the  tongue  and  bitter  when  placed  upon 
the  posterior  part.     A  better  instance  still  is  given  by  solutions  of 

a  bromin  substitution  product  of    saccharin,  the    chemical    name 

r  nr\ 
for    which    is    parabrom-benzoic    sulphinid:    CgHgBr -^  ^^^  ^NH, 

When  this  substance  is  placed  upon  the  tip  of  the  tongue  it  gives  a 
sweet  sensation,  while  upon  the  posterior  region  it  gives  only  a  bitter 
taste  together  with  a  sensation  of  astringency  (Howell  andKastle). 
Extracts  of  the  leaves  of  a  tropical  plant,  Gymnema  silvestre,  applied 
to  the  tongue,  destroy  the  sense  of  taste  for  sweet  and  bitter  sub- 
stances (Shore),  and  this  fact  may  be  explained  most  satisfactorily 
by  assuming  that  this  substance  exercises  a  selective  action  upon 
separate  terminals  in  the  tongue,  paralyzing  those  for  the  bitter 
and  the  sweet  substances.  Finally,  the  fact  that  electrical,  me- 
chanical, or  chemical  stimulation  of  the  chorda  tympani,  where  it 
passes  through  the  tympanic  cavity,  may  arouse  taste  sensations  is 
proof  that  the  taste  sensation  in  general  is  not  due  to  a  peculiar  kind 
of  impulse  that  can  be  aroused  only  by  the  action  of  sapid  bodies 
upon  the  terminals  in  the  tongue,  but,  on  the  contrary,  that  it  is  a 
specific  energy  of  these  fibers,  and  depends  for  its  quality,  there- 
fore, upon  the  specific  reaction  of  the  terminations  in  the  brain. 

Method  of  Sapid  Stimulation. — In  order  that  sapid  substances 
may  react  upon  the  taste  terminals  it  is  necessary,  in  the  first  place, 
that  they  shall  be  in  solution.  It  is  impossible  to  taste  with  a  dry 
tongue.  We  may  assume,  therefore,  that  the  stimulation  consists 
essentially  in  a  chemical  reaction  between  the  sapid  substance  and 
the  terminal  of  the  taste  fiber, — for  instance,  the  hair  process  of 
the  sense  cells  in  the  taste  buds, — and  the  question  naturally  arises 
whether  the  distinctive  reactions  corresponding  to  the  separate 
taste  qualities  can  be  referred  to  a  definite  chemical  structure  in  the 
sapid  bodies.  Are  there  certain  chemical  groups  which  possess  the 
property  of  reacting  specifically  with  the  end-organs?  Experience 
shows  that  substances  of  very  different  chemical  constitution  may 


SENSATIONS    OF   TASTE    AND    SMELL.  275 

excite  the  same  taste.  Thus,  sugar,  saccharin,  and  sugar  of  lead 
(lead  acetate)  all  give  a  sweet  taste,  while,  on  the  other  hand, 
starch  (solu"ble  starch),  which  stands  so  close  in  structure  to  the 
sugars,  has  no  effect  upon  the  taste  terminals.  It  is  interesting 
to  remember  that  the  taste  nerves  may  be  stimulated  by  sapid  sub- 
stances dissolved  in  the  blood  as  well  as  when  applied  to  the  ex- 
terior of  the  tongue.  A  sweet  taste  may  be  experienced  in  diabetes 
from  the  sugar  in  the  blood,  or  a  bitter  taste  in  jaundice  from  the 
bile. 

The  Threshold  Stimulus. — The  determination  of  the  threshold 
stimulus  for  different  sapid  substances  is  made  by  ascertaining  the 
minimal  concentration  of  the  solution  which  is  capable  of  arousing 
a  taste  sensation.  The  delicacy  of  the  sense  of  taste  is  influenced, 
however,  by  certain  accessory  conditions  which  must  be  taken  into 
account.  Thus,  the  temperature  of  the  solution  is  an  important 
condition.  Very  cold  or  very  hot  solutions  do  not  react, — that  is, 
the  extremes  of  temperature  seem  to  diminish  or  destroy  the  sensi- 
tiveness of  the  end-organ.  A  temperature  between  10°  and  30°  C. 
gives  the  optimum  reaction.  So  also  the  delicacy  of  the  sense  of 
taste  is  increased  by  rubbing  the  sapid  solution  against  the  tongue. 
Doubtless  this  mechanical  action  facilitates  the  penetration  of  the 
sapid  body  into  the  mucous  membrane,  but  it  seems  also  to  in- 
crease the  irritability  of  the  end-organ.  It  is  our  habit  in  tasting 
bodies  with  the  tongue  to  rub  this  organ  against  the  hard  palate. 
With  regard  to  the  threshold  stimulus  such  results  as  the  following 
are  reported: 

Salty  (sodium  chlorid).  0.25    gm.   in    100   c.c.  HgO — detectible    on    tip    of 

tongue. 
Sweet  (sugar) 0.50  "  "       "       "       detectible    on    tip    of 

tongue. 
Acid  (HCl) 0.007         "  "       "       "       detectible  on  border  of 

tongue. 
Bitter  (quinin)   0.00005     "  "       "        "       detectible   on   root   of 

tongue. 

The  very  great  sensitiveness  of  the  tongue  to  bitter  substances  is 
evident  from  this  table. 

The  Olfactory  Organ. — The  end-organ  for  the  olfactory  sense 
lies  in  the  upper  part  of  the  nose,  and  consists  of  elongated,  epithe- 
lial-like cells,  each  of  which  bears  on  its  free  end  a  tuft  of  six  to 
eight  hair-like  processes,  while  at  its  basal  end  it  is  continued  into 
a  nerve  fiber  that  passes  through  the  cribriform  plate  of  the  ethmoid 
bone  and  ends  in  the  olfactory  bulb.  These  olfactory  sense  cells 
lie  among  supporting  epithelial  cells  of  a  columnar  shape  (Fig. 
115).  At  the  free  edge  of  the  cells  there  is  a  limiting  membrane 
through  which  the  olfactory  hairs  project.     The  olfactory  sense 


276 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


cells  are  essentially  nerve  cells,  and  in  this  respect  resemble  the 
sense  cells  in  the  retina,  the  rods  and  cones,  rather  than  those  of  the 
ear  or  of  the  organs  of  taste.  The  distribution  of  the  olfactory 
cells,  according  to  v.  Brunn,  is  confined  to  the  nasal  septum  and  a 
portion  of  the  upper  turbinate  bone.  The  area  covered  in  each  nos- 
tril corresponds  to  about  250  square  milhmeters.  The  epithelium 
of  the  lower  and  middle  turbinates  and  the  floor  of  the  nostrils  is 
composed  of  the  usual  ciliated  cells  found  in  the  respiratory  passages, 
while  the  so-called  vestibular  region  of  the  nose,  the  part  roofed  in 

by  the  cartilage,  is  covered 
j^m  by    a    stratified     pavement 

epithelium  corresponding  in 
structure  with  that  of  the 
skin.  These  latter  portions 
of  the  nose  are  supplied 
with  sensory  fibers  derived 
from  the  fifth  or  trigeminal 
nerve.  We  must  consider 
the  500  sq.  mm.  of  olfac- 
tory epithelium  as  the 
olfactory  sense  organ  com- 
parable physiologically  and 
perhaps  anatomically  to  the 
rod  and  cone  layer  of  the 
retina.  The  connections  of 
these  cells  with  the  central 
nervous  system  have  al- 
ready been  described  (p. 
202).  It  wall  be  remem- 
bered that  the  fine,  non- 
medullated  fibers  springing 
from  the  basal  end  of  the 
sense  cells  enter  the  olfac- 
tory bulb  and  end  in  ter- 
minal arborizations  in  the  olfactory  glomeruli,  where  they  make  con- 
nections by  contact  with  the  dendrites  of  the  mitral  cells  of  the 
bulb.  Through  the  axons  of  these  mitral  cells  the  impulses  are  con- 
ducted along  the  olfactory  tract  to  their  various  terminations  in  the 
olfactory  lobe  itself,  either  of  the  same  or  of  the  opposite  side,  and 
eventually  also  in  the  cortical  region,  the  uncinate  gyrus,  of  the 
hippocampal  lobe.  As  regards  the  olfactory  sense  cells,  the  nerve 
cells  in  the  olfactory  bulb  might  be  compared  with  the  nerve  gan- 
glion layer  of  the  retina,  and  the  nerve  fibers  of  the  olfactory  tract 
with  the  fibers  of  the  optic  nerve. 

The    Mechanism    of    Smelling. — Odoriferous    substances    to 


Fig.  115. — Cells  of  the  olfactory  region  (after 
V.  Brunn) :  a,  a,  Olfactory  cells ;  b,  b,  epithelial 
cells;  n,  n,  central  process  prolonged  as  an  olfac- 
tory nerve  fibril;  I,  I,  nucleus;  c,  knob-like  clear 
termination  of  peripheral  process;  A, /i,  bunch  of 
olfactory  hairs. 


SENSATIONS    OF   TASTE    AND    SMELL.  277 

affect  the  olfactory  cells  must,  of  course,  penetrate  into  the  upper 
part  of  the  nasal  chamber.  This  end  is  attained  during  inspiration, 
either  by  simple  diffusion  or  by  currents  produced  by  the  act  of 
sniffing.  It  may  also  happen  by  way  of  the  posterior  nares.  In 
fact,  the  flavors  of  many  foodS;,  fruits,  wine,  etc.,  are  olfactory  rather 
than  gustatory  sensations.  When  such  food  is  swallowed  the  poste- 
rior nares  are  shut  off  from  the  pharynx  by  the  soft  palate,  but  in 
the  expiration  succeeding  the  swallow  the  odor  of  the  food  is  con- 
veyed to  the  olfactory  end-organ.  Flavors  are  perceived,  therefore, 
not  during  the  act  of  swallowing,  but  subsequently,  and  if  the  nostrils 
are  blocked,  as  in  coryza,  foods  lose  much  of  their  flavor.  Simply 
holding  the  nose  will  destroy  much  of  the  so-called  taste  of  fruits 
or  the  bouquet  of  wines.* 

Nature  of  the  Olfactory  Stimulus. — The  fact  that  smells  are 
transmitted  through  space  like  light  and  sound  has  suggested  the 
possibility  that  they  may  depend  upon  a  vibratory  movement  of 
some  medium.  This  view,  although  occasionally  defended  in 
modern  times,  is  apparentlj^  entirely  incompatible  with  the  facts. 
The  usual  view  is  that  odoriferous  bodies  emit  particles  which,  as 
a  rule,  at  least  are  in  gaseous  form.  These  particles  are  con- 
veyed to  the  olfactory  epithelium  by  currents  in  the  air  or  by 
simple  gaseous  diffusion,  and  after  solution  in  the  moisture  of 
the  membrane  act  chemically  upon  the  sensitive  hairs  of  the  sense 
cells.  All  vapors  or  gases  are,  however,  not  capable  of  acting  as 
stimuli  to  these  cells;  so  that  evidently  the  odoriferous  character 
depends  upon  some  peculiarity  of  structure.  It  is  assumed  that 
there  are  certain  groups,  "odoriphore  groups,"  which  are  character- 
istic of  all  odoriferous  substances  and  by  virtue  of  which  these 
substances  react  with  the  special  form  of  protoplasm  found  in 
the  hair  cells.  Haycraftf  has  formulated  certain  fundamental 
conceptions  bearing  upon  the  relation  between  chemical  stn.icture 
and  odoriferous  stimulation.  He  has  shown  that  the  power  to 
cause  smell,  like  other  physical  properties,  is  a  periodic  function  of 
the  atomic  weight — that  in  the  periodic  system,  according  to  Men- 
dele  jeff,  the  elements  in  certain  groups  are  characterized  by  their 
odoriferous  properties;  for  instance,  the  second,  fourth,  and  sixth 
members— sulphur,  selenium,  and  tellurium — of  the  sixth  group. 
Moreover,  in  organic  compounds  belonging  to  an  homologous  series 
the  smell  gradually  changes  and,  indeed,  increases  in  the  higher 
members  of  the  series, — that  is,  in  those  having  a  more  complex 
molecular  structure. 

The  Qualities  of  the  Olfactory  Sensations. — While  we  dis- 

*  For  many  interestinja;  facts  concerning  smelling  and  the  literature  to 
1895  see  Zwaardemaker,  "Die  Physiologic  des  Geruchs,"  Leipzig,  1895. 
fHaycraft,  "Brain,"  1888,  p.  166. 


278  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

tinguish  a  great  many  different  kinds  of  odors,  it  has  been  found 
difficult,  indeed  impossible,  to  classify  them  very  satisfactorily 
into  groups.  That  is,  it  is  not  possible  to  pick  out  what  might  be 
called  the  fundamental  odor  sensations.  This  sense  was  doubtless 
used  by  primitive  man  chiefly  in  detecting  and  testing  food,  in  protect- 
ing himself  from  noxious  surroundings,  and  perhaps  also  in  controll- 
ing his  social  relations.  The  olfactory  sensations,  in  accordance  with 
this  use  made  of  them,  give  either  pleasant  or  unpleasant  sensa- 
tions in  a  more  marked  and  universal  way  than  in  the  case  of  vision 
or  hearing,  approaching,  in  this  respect,  rather  the  purely  sensual 
characteristics  of  the  lower  senses,  the  bodily  appetites.  Mankind 
has  been  content  to  classify  odors  as  agreeable  and  disagreeable, 
and  to  designate  the  many  different  qualities  of  odors  by  the 
names  of  the  substances  which  in  his  individual  experience 
usually  give  rise  to  them.  A  number  of  observers  have  proposed 
classifications  more  or  less  complete  in  character.  One  of  the  latest 
and  perhaps  the  best  is  that  suggested  by  Zwaardemaker  on  the  basis 
of  the  nomenclatures  introduced  by  previous  observers.  Adopting 
first  the  general  grouping  into  pure  odors,  odors  mixed  with  sensa- 
tions of  common  sensibility  from  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  nose, 
and  odors  mixed  or  confused  with  tastes,  he  separates  the  pure  odors 
or  odors  proper  into  nine  classes,  as  follows : 

I.  Odores  setherei  or  ethereal  odors,  such  as  are  given  by  the  fruits,  and 
depend  upon  the  presence  of  ethereal  substances  or  esters. 
II.  Odores  aromatici  or  aromatic  odors,  which  are  typified  by  camphor 
and  citron,  bitter  ahnond  and  the  resinous  bodies.     This  class  is 
divided  into  five  subgroups. 

III.  Odores  fragrantes,  the  fragrant  or  balsamic  odors,  comprising  the  vari- 

ous flower  odors  or  perfumes.     The  class  falls  into  three  subgroups. 

IV.  Odores  ambrosiaci,  the  ambrosial  odors,  typified  by  amber  and  musk. 

This  odor  is  present  in  the  flesh,  blood,  or  excrement  of  some  ani- 
mals, being  referable  in  the  last  instance  to  the  bile. 
V.  Odores  alliacei  or  garlic  odors,  such  as  are  found  in  the  onion,  garlic, 
sulphur,  selenium  and  tellurium  compounds.     They  fall  into  three 
subgroups. 
VI.  Odores  empyreumatici  or  the  burning  odors,  the  odors  given  by  roasted 
coffee,  baked  bread,  tobacco  smoke,  etc.    The  odors  of  benzol,  phenol, 
and  the  products  of  dry  distillation  of  wood  come  into  this  class. 
VII.  Odores  hircini  or  goat  odors.     The  odor  of  this  animal  arises  from  the 
caproic  and  caprylic    acid   contained  in   the   sweat;   cheese,  sweat, 
spermatic  and  vaginal  secretions  give  odors  of  a  similar  quality. 
VIII.  Odores  tetri  or  repulsive  odors,  such  as  are  given  by  many  of  the  nar- 
cotic plants  and  acanthus. 
IX.  Odores  nauseosi  or  nauseating  or  fetid  odors,  such  as  are  given  by  feces 
and  certain  plants  and  the  products  of  putrefaction. 

While  the  classification  serves  to  emphasize  a  number  of  marked 
resemblances  or  relations  that  exist  among  the  odors,  it  does  not 
rest  wholly  upon  a  subjective  kinship, — that  is,  the  different  odors 
brought  together  in  one  class  do  not  in  all  cases  arouse  in  us  sensa- 


SENSATIONS    OF   TASTE    AND    SMELL.  279 

tions  that  seem  to  be  of  related  quality.  It  is  not  impossible,  how- 
ever, that  further  analysis  may  succeed  in  showing  that  there  are 
certain  fundamental  qualities  in  our  numerous  odor  sensations. 
Our  position  regarding  the  odors  is  similar  to  that  which  formerly 
prevailed  in  the  case  of  the  taste  sensations.  It  was  thought  to  be 
impossible  to  classify  these  latter  satisfactorily  on  the  basis  of  a  few 
fundamental  sensations,  but  it  is  now  universally  accepted  that  all 
of  our  true  gustatory  sensations  show  one  or  more  of  four  primary 
taste  qualities.  As  was  said  above,  our  odor  sensations  are  classi- 
fied in  ordinary  life  as  agreeable  or  disagreeable,  and,  indeed, 
Haller,  the  great  physiologist  of  the  eighteenth  century,  divided 
odors  along  this  line  into  three  classes:  (1)  the  agreeable  or  am- 
brosial, (2)  the  disagreeable  or  fetid,  and  (3)  the  mixed  odors.  In 
many  cases,  no  doubt,  the  agreeableness  or  disagreeableness  of  an 
odor  depends  solely  upon  the  associations  connected  with  it.  If 
the  associative  memories  aroused  are  unpleasant  the  odor  is  dis- 
agreeable. Thus,  the  odor  of  musk,  so  pleasant  to  most  persons, 
produces  most  disagreeable  sensations  in  others,  on  account  of  past 
associations.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  there  is  some  funda- 
mental difference  in  physiological  reaction  between  such  odors  as 
those  of  putrefaction  and  of  a  violet  which  may  be  considered  as  the 
cause  of  the  difference  in  psychical  effect.  It  has  been  suggested,  for 
instance,  that  they  may  affect  the  circulation  in  the  brain  in  opposite 
ways,  one  producing  an  increased,  the  other  a  decreased  flow. 
This  improbable  supposition  has  been  shown  to  be  devoid  of  foun- 
dation by  the  observations  of  Shields.*  In  his  experiments  the  vascu- 
lar supply  to  the  skin  of  the  arm  was  determined  by  plethysmo- 
graphic  methods,  and  it  was  found  that  both  pleasant  (heliotrope 
perfume)  and  unpleasant  (putrefactive)  odors  give  a  similar  vascu- 
lar reaction.  Each  class,  if  it  acts  at  all,  causes,  as  a  rule,  a  con- 
striction of  the  skin  vessels,  such  as  is  obtained  normally  from  in- 
creased mental  activity, — a  reaction  usually  interpreted  to  mean  a 
greater  flow  of  blood  to  the  brain. 

Fatigue  of  the  Olfactory  Apparatus. — It  is  a  matter  of 
common  observation  that  many  odors,  such  as  the  perfumes  of 
flowers,  quickly  cease  to  give  a  noticeable  sensation  when  the  stimu- 
lation is  continued.  This  result  is  usuafly  attributed  to  fatigue 
of  the  sense  cells  in  the  end-organ  and  it  is  noticeable  chiefly  -with 
faint  odors.  One  who  sits  in  an  ill-ventilated  room  occupied  by 
many  persons  may  be  quite  unconscious  of  the  unpleasant  odor 
from  the  vitiated  air,  while  to  a  newcomer  it  is  most  distinct. 
It  is  said  that  certain  classes  of  odors  do  not  exhibit  this  property, 
— the  aromatic  odors,  for  example,  such  as  are  caused  by  the  cam- 
phor group. 

^Shields,  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  1,  1896. 


280  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

Threshold  Stimulus — Delicacy   of  the   Olfactory  Sense. — 

The  extraordinary  delicacy  of  the  sense  of  smell  in  some  of  the  lower 
animals  is  seemingly  beyond  the  power  of  objective  measurement  or 
expression.  The  ability  of  a  dog,  for  instance,  to  follow  the  trail  of 
a  given  person  depends  undoubtedly  upon  the  recognition  of  the 
individual  odor,  and  the  actual  amount  of  olfactory  material  left 
upon  the  ground  which  serves  as  the  stimulus  must  be  infinitesi- 
mally  small.  Even  in  ourselves  the  actual  amount  of  olfactory 
material  which  suffices  to  give  a  distinct  sensation  is  often  beyond 
our  means  of  determination  except  by  the  aid  of  calculation.  It 
is  recognized  in  chemical  work,  for  instance,  that  traces  of  known 
substances  too  small  to  give  the  ordinary  chemical  reactions  may  be 
detected  easily  by  the  sense  of  smell.     By  taking  known  amounts 


Fig.   116. — Zwaardemaker's  olfactometer. 

of  odoriferous  substances  and  diluting  them  to  known  extents  it  is 
possible  to  express  in  weights  the  minimal  amount  of  each  substance 
that  can  cause  a  sensation.  By  this  method  such  figures  as  the 
following  are  obtained :  Camphor  is  perceived  in  a  dilution  of  1  part 
to  400,000 ;  musk,  1  part  to  8,000,000 ;  vanillin ,  1  part  to  10,000,000  ; 
while,  according  to  the  experiments  of  Fischer  and  Penzoldt, 
mercaptan  may  be  detected  in  a  dilution  of  2-3- Wo" Too"  ^^  ^  milli- 
gram in  1  liter  of  air  or  t6T¥0'¥¥¥o'  ^^  ^  milligram  in  50  c.c.  of  air. 
Various  methods  have  been  proposed  to  determine  the  relative 
delicacy  of  the  olfactory  sense  in  different  persons,  and  these  methods 
have  some  application  in  the  clinical  diagnosis  of  certain  cases. 
Zwaardemaker  has  devised  a  simple  apparatus,  the  olfactometer,, 
the  principle  of  which  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  116.  It  consists  of  an 
outside  cylinder — the  olfactory  cylinder,  whose  inner  surface  is  of 


SENSATIONS    OF    TASTE    AND    SMELL.  281 

porous  material  which  can  be  filled  with  a  known  strength  of  olfac- 
tory solution — and  an  inside  tube,  smelling  tube.  This  latter  is 
applied  to  the  nose  and  where  it  runs  inside  the  cylinder  it  is  gradu- 
ated in  centimeters.  It  is  evident  that  the  further  out  the  inner 
tube  is  pulled  the  greater  will  be  the  amount  of  olfactory  substance 
which  will  be  exposed  to  the  incoming  air  of  an  inspiration. 

Conflict  of  Olfactory  Sensations. — When  different  odors  are 
inhaled  simultaneously  through  the  two  nostrils  they  may  give  rise 
to  the  phenomenon  of  a  conflict  of  the  olfactory  fields  similar  to  that 
described  for  the  visual  fields.  That  is,  we  perceive  first  one  then 
the  other  without  obtaining  a  fused  or  compound  sensation.  The 
result  depends  largely  on  the  odors  selected.  In  some  cases  one 
odor  may  predominate  in  consciousness  to  the  entire  suppression 
of  the  other, — a  phenomenon  which  also  has  an  analogy  in  binocular 
sensations.  It  is  well  known,  also,  that  certain  odors  antagonize  or 
neutralize  others.  It  is  said,  for  instance,  that  the  odor  of  iodoform, 
usually  so  persistent  and  so  disagreeable,  may  be  neutralized  by  the 
addition  of  Peru  balsam,  and  that  the  odor  of  carbolic  acid  may 
destroy  that  of  putrefactive  processes.  Whether  the  neutralization 
is  of  a  chemical  nature  or  is  physiological  does  not  seem  to  have 
been  definitely  ascertained. 

Olfactory  Associations. — Personal  experience  shows  clearly 
that  olfactory  sensations  arouse  numerous  associations — our 
olfactory  memories  are  good.  On  the  anatomical  side  the  cortical 
center  in  the  hippocampal  lobe  is  known  to  be  widely  connected 
with  other  parts  of  the  cerebrum,  and  we  have  in  this  fact  a  basis  for 
the  extensive  associations  connected  with  odors.  In  animals  like 
the  dog,  with  highly  developed  olfactory  organs,  it  is  evident  that 
this  sense  must  play  a  correspondingly  large  part  in  the  psychical 
life.  In  such  animals  as  well  as  among  the  invertebrates  it  is  in- 
timately connected  with  the  sexual  reflexes,  and  some  remnant  of 
this  relationship  is  obvious  among  human  beings.  Among  the  so- 
called  special  senses  that  of  smell  is  perhaps  the  one  most  closely 
connected  with  the  bodily  appetites,  and  overgratification  or  over- 
indulgence of  this  sense,  according  to  historical  evidence,  has  at  least 
been  associated  with  periods  of  marked  decadence  of  virtue  among 
civilized  nations. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  EYE. 

The  eye  is  the  peripheral  organ  of  vision.  By  means  of  its 
peculiar  physical  structure  rays  of  light  from  external  objects  are 
focused  upon  the  retina  and  there  set  up  nerve  impulses  that  are 
transmitted  by  the  fibers  of  the  optic  nerve  and  optic  tract  to  the 
visual  center  in  the  cortex  of  the  brain,  where  they  arouse  that 
reaction  in  consciousness  which  we  designate  as  a  visual  sensation. 
In  studying  the  physiology  of  vision  we  may  consider  the  eye  first 
as  an  optical  instrument  physically  adapted  to  form  an  image  on 
the  retina  and  provided  with  certain  physiological  mechanisms  for  its 
regulation ;  and  secondly  we  may  study  the  properties  of  the  retina 
in  relation  to  its  reactions  to  light  and  the  visual  sensations  them- 
selves, or  the  physiology  of  the  visual  center  in  the  brain. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


THE  EYE  AS  AN  OPTICAL  INSTRUMENT— DIOPTRICS 
OF  THE  EYE, 

Formation  of  an  Image  by  a  Biconvex  Lens. — That  the  re- 
fractive surfaces  of  the  eye  form  an  image  of  external  objects  upon 
its  retinal  surface  is  a  necessary  conclusion  from  its  physical  struc- 
ture. The  fact  may  be  demonstrated  directly,  however,  by  ob- 
servation upon  the  excised  eye  of  an  albino  rabbit.  The  thin  coats 
of  such  an  eye  are  semitransparent,  and  if  the  eye  is  placed  in  a  tube 
of  blackened  paper  and  held  in  front  of  one's  own  eyes  it  can  be  seen 
readily  that  a  small,  inverted  image  of  external  objects  is  formed 
upon  the  retinal  surface,  just  as  an  inverted  image  of  the  exterior  is 
formed  upon  the  ground  glass  plate  of  a  photographic  camera.  This 
image  is  formed  in  the  eye  by  virtue  of  the  refractive  surfaces  of  the 
cornea  and  the  lens.  The  curved  surfaces  of  these  transparent  bodies 
act  substantially  like  a  convex  glass  lens,  and  the  physics  of  the 
formation  of  an  image  by  such  a  lens  gives  the  simplest  explanation 
of  the  refractive  processes  in  the  eye.  To  understand  the  formation 
of  an  image  by  a  biconvex  lens  the  following  physical  facts  must  be 

282 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE. 


283 


borne  in  mind.  Parallel  rays  of  light  falling  upon  one  surface  of  the 
lens  are  brought  to  a  point  or  focus  (F)  behind  the  other  surface 
(Fig.  117).  This  focus  for  parallel  rays  is  the  principal  focus  and  the 
distance  of  this  point  from  the  lens  is  the  principal  focal  distance. 
This  distance  depends  upon  the  curvature  of  the  lens  and  its 
refractive  power,  as  measured  by  the  refractive  index  of  the  material 
of  which  it  is  composed.  Parallel  rays  are  given  theoretically  by  a 
source  of  light  at  an  infinite  distance  in  front  of  the  lens.  Practi- 
cally any  luminous  object  not  nearer  than  twenty  feet  gives  parallel 
rays.     On  the  other  hand,  if  a  luminous  object  is  placed  at  F  the  rays 


Fig.  117. — Diagrams  to  illustrate  the  refraction  of  light  by  r  convex  lens:  a..  Refrac- 
tion of  parallel  rays;  6.,  refraction  of  divergent  rays;  c,  refraction  of  divergent  rays  from 
a  luminous  point  nearer  than  the  principal  focal  distance. 


from  it  that  strike  upon  the  lens  will  emerge  from  the  other  surface 
as  parallel  rays  of  light.  If  a  luminous  point  (/,  Fig.  11 7)  is  placed 
in  front  of  such  a  lens  at  a  distance  greater  than  the  principal  focal 
distance,  but  nearer  than  about  twenty  feet,  the  cone  of  diverging 
rays  from  it  that  impinges  upon  the  surface  of  the  lens  will  be  brought 
to  a  focus  (/')  further  away  than  the  principal  focus.  Conversely 
the  rays  from  a  luminous  point  at  /'  will  be  brought  to  a  focus  at  /. 
These  points,  /  and  /',  are  therefore  spoken  of  as  conjugate  foci. 
All  luminous  points  within  the  limits  specified  will  have  their  cor- 
responding conjugate  foci,  at  which  their  images  will  be  formed  by 


284 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES, 


the  lens.  Lastly,  if  a  luminous  point  is  placed  at  v,  Fig.  117,  nearer 
to  the  lens  than  the  principal  focal  distance,  the  cone  of  strongly 
divergent  rays  that  falls  upon  the  lens,  although  refracted,  is  still 
divergent  after  leaving  the  lens  on  the  other  side  and  consequently 
is  not  focused  and  forms  no  real  image  of  the  point.  For  every  lens 
there  is  a  point  known  as  the  optical  center,  and  for  biconvex  lenses 
this  point  lies  within  the  lens,  o.  The  line  joining  this  center  and 
the  principal  focus  is  the  principal  axis  of  the  lens  {o-F,  Fig.  117). 
All  other  straight  lines  passing  through  the  optical  center  are  known 
as  secondary  axes.  Rays  of  light  that  are  coincident  with  any  of  these 
secondary  axes  suffer  no  angular  deviation  in  passing  through  the 
lens;  they  emerge  parallel  to  their  line  of  entrance  and  practically 
unchanged  in  direction.     Moreover,  any  luminous  point  not  on  the 


Fig.  118. — Diagrams  to  illustrate  the  formation  of  an  image  by  a  biconvex  lens:    a.  For- 
mation of  the  image  of  a  point ;    b,  formation  of  the  images  of  a-  series  of  points. 


principal  axis  will  have  its  image  (conjugate  focus)  formed  some- 
where upon  the  secondary  axis  dra^Mi  from  this  point  through  the 
optical  center.  The  exact  position  of  the  image  of  such  a  point 
can  be  determined  by  the  following  construction  (Fig.  118)  :  Let  A 
represent  the  luminous  point  in  question.  It  Avill  throw  a  cone  of 
rays  upon  the  lens,  the  limiting  rays  of  which  may  be  represented  by 
A-b  and  A-c.  One  of  these  rays  will  be  parallel,  A-p,  and  will  therefore 
pass  through  the  principal  focus,  F.  If  this  distance  is  determined 
and  is  indicated  properly  in  the  construction,  the  line  A-p  may  be 
drawn,  as  indicated,  so  as  to  pass  through  F  after  leaving  the  lens. 
The  point  at  which  the  prolongation  of  this  line  cuts  the  secondary 
axis,  A-o,  marks  the  conjugate  focus  of  A  and  gives  the  position  at 
which  all  of  the  rays  will  be  focused  to  form  the  image,  a.     Iil 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  285 

calculating  the  position  of  the  image  of  any  object  in  front  of  the 
lens  the  same  method  may  be  followed,  the  construction  being  draAvn 
to  determine  the  images  for  two  or  more  limiting  points,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  118.  Let  A-B  be  an  arrow  in  front  of  the  lens.  The  image 
of  A  will  be  formed  at  a  on  the  secondary  axis  A-o,  and  the  image  of 
B  atb  along  the  secondary  axis  B-o.  The  images  of  the  intervening 
points  will,  of  course,  lie  between  a  and  b;  so  that  the  image  of  the 
entire  object  will  be  that  of  an  inverted  arrow.  This  image  may  be 
caught  on  a  screen  at  the  distance  indicated  by  the  construction  if 
the  latter  is  drawn  to  scale.  The  principal  focus  of  a  convex  lens 
may  be  determined  experimentally  or  it  may  be  calculated  from  the 
formula  -  +  ^  =  j,  in  which  /  represents  the  principal  focal  dis- 
tance and  p  and  p\  the  conjugate  foci  for  an  object  farther  away 
than  the  principal  focal  distance.  That  is,  if  the  distance  of  the 
object  from  the  lens,  p,  is  known,  and  the  distance  of  its  image,  p'-, 
is  determined  experimentally,  the  principal  focal  distance  of  the 
lens,  /,  may  be  determined  by  the  formula,  or  if  any  two  of  the  fac- 
tors, p,  p^,  and  /,  are  known  the  third  may  be  reckoned  from  the 
formula. 

Formation  of  an  Image  by  the  Eye. — As  stated  above,  the  re- 
fractive surfaces  of  the  eye  act  essentially  like  a  convex  lens.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  these  refractive  surfaces  are  more  complex  than 
in  the  case  of  the  biconvex  lens.  In  the  latter  the  rays  of  light 
suffer  refraction  at  two  points  only.  Where  they  enter  the  lens 
they  pass  from  a  rarer  to  a  denser  medium  and  where  they  leave  the 
lens  they  pass  from  a  denser  to  a  rarer  medium.  At  these  two 
points,  therefore,  they  are  refracted.  In  the  eye  there  is  a  larger 
series  of  refractive  surfaces.  The  light  is  refracted  at  the  anterior 
surface  of  the  cornea,  where  it  passes  from  the  air  into  the  denser 
medium  of  the  cornea ;  at  the  anterior  surface  of  the  lens,  where  it 
again  enters  a  denser  medium;  and  at  the  posterior  surface  of  the 
lens,  where  it  enters  the  less  dense  vitreous  humor.  The  relative 
refractive  powers  of  these  different  media  have  been  determined 
and  are  expressed  in  terms  of  their  refractive  indices,  that  of  air 
being  taken  as  unity.* 

The  three  points  at  which  the  light  is  refracted  are  indicated 

*  The  term  index  of  refraction  expresses  the  constant  ratio  between  the 
angles  of  incidence  and  of  refraction,  or  specifically  between  the  sine  of  the 

angle  of  incidence  and  the  sine  of  the  angle  of  refraction:   -. =  index  of 

sine  r 
refraction. 

Index  of  refraction  for  air =  1 

Index  of  refraction  for  cornea  and  aqueous  hu- 
mor   =  1.3365 

Index  of  refraction  for  crystalline  lens =  1.4371 

Index  of  refraction  for  vitreous  humor =  1.3365 


286  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

in  the  accompanying  schema  (Fig.  119).  The  refractive  surfaces 
of  the  eye  may  be  considered  as  being  composed  of  a  concavo-convex 
lens,  the  cornea  and  aqueous  humor,  and  a  biconvex  lens,  the 
crystalline  lens.  In  a  system  of  this  kind,  composed  of  several 
refractive  media,  it  has  been  shown  that  to  construct  geometrically 

the  path  of  the  rays  it  is 
necessary  to  know  six 
points ;  these  are  the  six  car- 
dinal points  or  optical  con- 
stants of  Gauss, — namely, 
the  anterior  and  the  poste- 
rior focal  distance,  the  two 
nodal  points,  and  the  two 
principal   points.        So    far 

Fig.  119.— Diagram  to  illustrate  the  surfaces        aS   the    eye    is    COnCCmed,    it 

refrtteT"*"''"^''''"'''"'''^''* "''''"''''      has  been    shown    that  the 

path  of  the  rays  of  light 
may  be  represented  with  sufficient  accuracy  by  employing  what  is 
known  as  the  reduced  diagrammatic  eye  of  Listing,  in  which  the 
refraction  is  supposed  to  take  place  at  a  single  convex  surface 
separating  two  media,  the  air  on  one  side  and  the  media  of  the  eye 
on  the  other,  the  latter  having  a  refractive  index  of  1.33  (see  Fig. 
120).  In  this  reduced  eye  the  position  of  the  ideal  refracting 
surface  lies  in  the  aqueous  humor,  at  a  distance  of  2.1  mms.  from 
the  anterior  surface  of  the 
cornea,  and  the  position  of 
the  nodal  point  or  optical 
center — that  is,  the  center 
of  curvature  of  the  ideal 
refracting  surface,  c' ,  lies  in 
the  crystalline  lens  at  n,  a 
distance  of  7.3  mms.  from 

the    anterior    surface  of    the  ^j^    120.-Diagram  to  illustrate  the  reduced 

cornea        The   principal  focal  or  schematic  eye  with  a  single  refracting  surface 

'■              ^             .  separating  two  media  of  different  densities:   c', 

distance    for    this   refracting  the    ideal    refracting    surface    situated  2.1  mms. 

-.                       ,.                       »  behind  the  anterior   surface    of   real  cornea;    n, 

SUrlaCe   lies  at  a    distance   OI  the    nodal  point,   or  center  9f  curvature  of   the 

c^c\  r,                   1     1  •      1    J.1          „j.  surface  c',  and   15.5    mms.    in    front    of    retina. 

22.8  mms.    benma  tne  ante-  The  eyeball  is  supposed  to  be  filled  with  a  uni- 

rinr  Qnrfnpp  of  thp  POrnPfl    or  form  substance  having  a  refractive  index  of  1.33, 

riOI   SUnace  OI   tne  coined,  UX  ^^^^^  to  that  of  the  vitreous  humor. 

(22.8  —  7.3)  at  a  distance  of 

15.5  mms.  behind  the  nodal  point.  In  the  eye  at  rest  this  principal 
focal  distance  coincides  with  the  retina,  since  the  refracting  surfaces 
in  the  normal  resting  eye  are  so  formed  that  parallel  rays  (rays 
from  distant  objects)  are  brought  to  a  focus  on  the  retina.  To 
show  the  formation  of  the  image  of  an  external  object  on  the  retina 
it  suffices,  therefore,  to  use  a  construction  such  as  is  represented  in 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  287 

Fig.  121.  Secondary  axes  are  drawn  from  the  limiting  points  of  the 
object — A  and  B — through  the  nodal  point.  Where  these  axes 
cut  the  retina  the  retinal  image  of  the  object  will  be  formed.  That 
is,  all  the  rays  of  light  proceeding  from  A  that  penetrate  the  eye  will 
be  focused  at  a,  and  all  proceeding  from  B  at  b.  The  image  on 
the  retina  will  therefore  be  inverted  and  will  be  smaller  than  the 
object.  The  angle  formed  at  the  nodal  point  by  the  lines  A-n  and 
B-n  is  known  as  the  visual  angle;  it  varies  inversely  with  the  dis- 
tance of  the  object  from  the  eye. 

The  Inversion  of  the  Image  on  the  Retina. — Although  the 
images  of  external  objects  on  the  retina  are  inverted,  we  see  them 
erect.  This  fact  is  easily  understood  when  we  remember  that  our 
actual  visual  sensations  take  place  in  the  brain  and  that  the  pro- 
jection of  these  sensations  to  the  exterior  is  a  secondary  act  that  has 
been  learned  from  experience.  Experience  has  taught  us  to  project 
the  visual  sensation  arising  from  the  stimulus  of  any  given  point  on 
the  retina  to  that  part  of 
the  external  world  from 
which  the  stimulus  arises, 
— that  is,  to  the  lumin- 
ous point  giving  origin  to 
the  light  rays.  Accord- 
ing to  the  physical  prin- 
ciples described  above, 
the  image  of  such  a  point 

must    be   formed    on     the  Fig.   121. — Diagram   to  illustrate  the  construc- 

,  ,  ,  tion  necessary  to  determine  the  location  and  size  of 

retma  where    the  second-        the  retinal  image. 

a,ry  axis  from  that  point 

through  the  nodal  point  touches  the  retina.  In  projecting  this 
retinal  stimulus  outward  to  its  source,  therefore,  we  have  learned 
to  project  it  back,  as  it  were,  along  the  line  of  its  secondary  axis. 
In  Fig.  121  the  retinal  stimulus  at  a  is  projected  outward  along 
the  line  a~n-A,  and  to  such  a  distance  as,  from  other  sources,  we 
estimate  the  object  A  to  be.  This  law  of  projection  is  fixed  by 
experience,  but  it  implies,  as  will  be  noted,  that  we  are  conscious 
of  the  differences  in  sensation  aroused  by  stimulation  of  different 
parts  of  the  retina.  Considering  the  retina  as  a  sensory  surface, 
— ^like  the  skin,  for  instance, — each  point,  speaking  in  general  terms, 
may  be  assumed  to  be  connected  with  a  definite  portion  of  the 
cortex,  and  the  sensation  aroused  by  the  stimulation  of  these  dif- 
ferent points  must  differ  to  some  extent  in  consciousness,  each  has 
its  local  sign.  The  sensations  arising  from  each  of  these  points  we 
have  learned  to  project  outward  into  the  external  world  along  the 
line  from  it  to  the  nodal  point  of  the  eye,  because  under  the  normal 
conditions  of  life  this  point  is  stimulated  only  by  external  objects 


288  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

situated  on  this  line.  This  law  of  projection  is  so  firmly  fixed  that 
if  a  given  point  in  the  retina  is  stimulated  in  some  unusual  way 
we  still  project  the  resulting  sensation  outward  according  to  the 
law,  and  thus  make  a  false  projection  and  interpretation.  For 
instance,  if  the  little  finger  is  inserted  into  the  inner  and  lower  angle 
of  the  eye  and  is  pressed  upon  the  eyeball  the  edge  of  the  retina  is 
stimulated  mechanically.  One  experiences,  in  consequence,  a 
visual  sensation,  known  as  a  phosphene,  consisting  of  a  dark-blue 
spot  surrounded  by  a  light  halo.  This  sensation,  however,  is 
projected  out  toward  the  upper  and  outer  angle  of  the  eye,  accord- 
ing to  the  law  of  projection,  since  normally  this  part  of  the  retina 
is  only  stimulated  by  light  coming  from  such  a  direction.  A  similar 
•error  in  projection  is  obtained  by  holding  objects  so  close  to  the  eye 
that  a  physical  inverted  image  cannot  be  formed,  but  only  an  erect 
shadow  image.  This  experiment  may  be  performed  as  follows: 
Hold  the  head  of  a  pin  close  to  the  eye,  and,  in  order  that  a  sharp 
shadow  may  be  thrown,  allow  the  light  to  fall  on  this  pin  through 
a  pinhole  in  a  card  held  somewhat  farther  from  the  eye.  By  this 
means  an  erect  shadow  of  the  pin,  lying  in  the  circle  of  light  from 
the  hole,  will  be  thrown  on  the  eye.  This  shadow  image  will  be 
projected  outward  according  to  the  usual  law,  and  consequently 
will  appear  inverted. 

The  Size  of  the  Retinal  Image. — The  size  of  the  image  of  an 
object  on  the  retina  may  be  reckoned  easily, provided  the  size  of  the 
object  and  its  distance  from  the  eye  is  known.  As  will  be  seen  from 
the  construction  given  in  Fig.  121,  the  triangles  A-n-B  and  a-n-h  are 
symmetrical ;  consequently  we  have  the  ratio : 

A-B   :  a-b     :   :    A-n    :  a-n      or 

A-B  A-n      ,,    ,  . 

— r—   =   ;   that  IS 

a-b  a-n 

Size  of  object  Distance  of  object  from  nodal  point. 

Size  of  image    ~    Distance  of  image  from  nodal  point. 

As  was  stated  above,  the  distance  of  the  image  from  the  nodal 
point — that  is,  the  distance  of  the  retina  from  the  nodal  point — 
may  be  placed  at  15.5  or  15  mms.  Consequently,  three  of  the  factors 
in  the  above  equation  beng  known,  it  is  easily  solved  for  the  un- 
known factor — namely,  the  size  of  the  image  on  the  retina.  To 
take  a  concrete  example;  suppose  it  is  desired  to  know  the  size  on 
the  retina  of  the  image  made  by  an  object  120  feet  high  at  a  distance 
of  one  mile  (5280  feet).  If  we  designate  the  size  of  the  image  as  x 
and  substitute  the  known  values  for  the  other  terms  of  the  equation, 

120         5280 
we  have  —  =  -yg-,  or  a;  =  0.341  mm.,  which  is  about  the  diame- 
ter of  the  fovea  centrahs.      The  retinal  image  of  the  object  in 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE   EYE.  289 

this  case  would  be,  in  round  numbers,  about  to'o  Wir  of  ^^^  actual 
size  of  the  object. 

Accommodation  of  the  Eye  for  Objects  at  Different  Dis- 
tances.— The  normal  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  named,  the  emmetropic 
eye,  is  arranged  to  focus  parallel  rays  more  or  less  accurately  upon 
the  retina.  That  is,  the  refractive  media  have  such  curvatures  and 
densities  that  parallel,  or  substantially  parallel  rays  are  brought  to 
a  focus  upon  the  retinal  surface.  When  objects  are  brought  closer 
to  the  eye,  however,  the  rays  proceeding  from  them  become  more 
and  more  divergent.  If  the  eye  remains  unchanged  the  refracted 
rays  cut  the  retina  before  coming  to  a  focus — so  that  each 
luminous  point  in  the  object,  instead  of  forming  a  point  upon  the 


Fig.  122. — Diagram  explaining  the  change  in  the  position  of  the  image  reflected  from  the 
anterior  surface  of  the  crystalline  lens. — (WiUiams,  after  Danders.) 

retina,  forms  a  circle,  known  as  a  diffusion  circle.  As  this 
is  true  for  each  point  of  the  object,  the  retinal  image  as  a  whole 
is  blurred.  We  know,  however,  that  up  to  a  certain  point 
at  least  this  blurring  does  not  occur  when  the  object  is  brought 
closer  to  the  eyes.  The  eye,  in  fact,  accommodates  itself  to  the 
nearer  object  so  as  to  obtain  a  clear  focus.  In  a  photographic 
camera  this  accommodation  or  focusing  is  effected  by  moving  the 
ground  glass  plate  farther  away  as  the  object  is  brought  closer  to  the 
lens.  In  the  eye  the  same  result  is  obtained  by  increasing  the  curva- 
ture and  therefore  the  refractive  power,  of  the  lens.  That  a  change 
in  the  lens  is  the  essential  factor  in  accommodation  for  near  objects 
is  demonstrated  by  a  simple  and  conclusive  experiment  devised  by 
19 


290  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

Helmholtz  with  the  aid  of  what  are  known  as  the  images  of  Pur- 
kinje.  The  principle  of  this  experiment  is  represented  by  the  dia- 
gram given  in  Fig.  122.  The  eye  to  be  observed  is  relaxed; 
that  is,  gazes  into  the  distance.  A  lighted  candle  is  held  to  one 
side  as  represented,  and  the  observer  places  his  eye  so  as  to 
catch  the  light  of  the  candle  when  reflected  from  the  observed  eye. 
With  a  little  practice  and  under  the  right  conditions  of  illumina- 
tion the  observer  will  be  able  to  see  three  images  of  the  candle  re- 
flected from  the  observed  eye:  one,  the  brightest,  is  reflected  from 
the  convex  surface  of  the  cornea  (a,  Fig.  123,  A) ;  one  much  dimmer 
and  of  larger  size  is  reflected  from  the  convex  surface  of  the  lens 
(b,  Fig.  123,  A).  This  image  is  larger  and  fainter  because  the  re- 
flecting surface  is  less  curved.  The  third  image  (c.  Fig.  123,  A) 
is  inverted  and  is  smaller  and  brighter  than  the  second.  This 
image  is  reflected  from  the  posterior  surface  of  the  lens,  which  acts, 
in  this  instance,  like  a  concave  mirror.     If  now  the  observed  eye 

A  B 


Fig.   123. — Reflected  images  of  a  candle  flame  as  seen  in  the  pupil  ,oi  an  eye  at  rest  and 
accommodated  for  near  objects. — {Williams.) 

gazes  at  a  near  object  it  will  be  noted  (Fig.  123,  B)  that  the  first 
image  does  not  change  at  all,  the  third  image  also  remains  practi- 
cally the  same,  but  the  middle  image  (6)  becomes  smaller  and  ap- 
proaches nearer  to  the  first  (a).  This  result  can  only  mean  that  in 
the  act  of  accommodation  the  anterior  surface  of  the  lens  becomes 
more  convex.  In  this  way  its  refractive  power  is  increased  and  the 
more  divergent  rays  from  the  near  object  are  focused  on  the  retina. 
Helmholtz  has  shown  that  the  curvature  of  the  posterior  surface 
of  the  lens  is  also  increased  slightly ;  but  the  change  is  so  slight  that 
the  increased  refractive  power  is  referred  chiefly  to  the  change  in 
the  anterior  surface.  The  means  by  which  the  change  is  effected 
was  first  explained  satisfactorily  by  Helmholtz.*  He  attributed 
it  to  the  contraction  of  the  ciliary  muscle.  This  small  muscle, 
composed  of  plain  muscle  fibers,  is  found  within  the  eyeball,  lying 

*  Helmholtz,   "Handbuch  der  physiologischen  Optik,"   second  edition, 
1896. 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  291 

between  the  choroid  and  the  sclerotic  coat  at  the  point  at  which  the 
sclerotic  passes  into  the  cornea  and  the  choroid  falls  into  the  ciliary 
processes.  Some  of  its  fibers  take  a  more  or  less  circular  direction 
around  the  eyeball,  resembling  thus  a  sphincter  muscle,  while  others 
take  a  radial  direction  in  the  plane  of  the  meridians  of  the  eye  and 
have  their  insertion  in  the  choroid  coat  (Fig.  124).  When  this 
muscle  contracts  the  radial  fibers  especially  will  pull  forward  the 
choroid  coat.  The  effect  of  this  change  in  the  choroid  is  to  loosen 
the  pull  of  the  suspensory  ligament  (zonula  Zinnii)  on  the  lens  and 
this  organ  then  bulges  forward  by  its  own  elasticity.  The  theory 
assumes  that  in  a  condition  of  rest  the  suspensory  ligament,  which 
runs  from  the  ciliary  processes  to  the  capsule  of  the  lens,  exerts  a 


Lens 


Pigment 
..'  epitheliiun. 


Ora  serrata. 

Fig.  124. — Meridional  section  of  eyeball  after  removal  of  sclerotic  coat,  cornea,  and  iris, 
to  show  the  position  of  the  ciliary  muscle. — {SchuUze.) 


tension  upon  the  lens  which  keeps  it  flattened,  particularly  along 
its  anterior  surface,  since  the  ligament  is  attached  more  to  this  side. 
When  this  tension  is  relieved  indirectly  by  the  contraction  of  the 
ciliary  muscle  the  elasticity  of  the  lens,  or  rather  of  the  capsule  of 
the  lens,  causes  it  to  assume  a  more  spherical  shape  along  its  anterior 
surface,  and  the  amount  of  this  change  is  proportional  to  the 
extent  of  contraction  of  the  muscle.  Other  theories  have  been 
proposed  to  explain  the  way  in  which  the  contraction  of  the  ciliary 
muscle  effects  a  change  in  the  curvature  of  the  lens,*  but  none  is 
so  simple  and,  on  the  whole,  so  satisfactory  as  the  one  suggested  by 
Helmholtz. 

*  See  Tscherning,  "Optique  physiologique,"  Paris,  1898;    and  Schoen, 
"Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  59,  427,  1895. 


292  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

Limit  of  the  Power  of  Accommodation — Near  Point  of 
Distinct  Vision. — When  an  object  is  brought  closer  and  closer  to 
the  eye  a  point  will  be  reached  at  which  it  is  impossible  by  the 
strongest  contraction  of  the  ciliary  muscle  to  obtain  a  clear  image 
of  the  object.  The  rays  from  it  are  so  divergent  that  the  refractive 
surfaces  are  unable  to  bring  them  to  a  focus  on  the  retina.  Each 
luminous  point  makes  a  diffusion  circle  on  the  retina,  and  the 
whole  image  is  indistinct.  The  distance  at  which  the  eye  is  just 
able  to  accommodate  and  within  which  distinct  vision  is  impos- 
sible is  called  the  near  point.  Observation  shows  that  this  near 
point  varies  steadily  with  age  and  becomes  rapidly  greater  in  dis- 
tance between  the  fortieth  and  the  fiftieth  year.  In  the  case  of  the 
normal  eye  the  recession  of  the  near  point  varies  so  regularly  with 
age  that  it  is  said  that  its  determination  may  be  used  to  estimate  the 
age  of  the  individual.     Figures  of  this  kind  are  given: 

Age. 

10 

20 

30 

40 

50 

60 


Near 

Point. 

7  cm. 

or     2.76  in 

10     " 

"      3.94    " 

14     " 

"      5.61    " 

22     " 

"      8.66    " 

40     " 

"    15.75    " 

100     " 

"   39.37    " 

This  gradual  lengtheniilg  of  the  near  point  is  explained  usually 
by  the  supposition  that  the  lens  loses  its  elasticity,  so  that  con- 
traction of  the  ciliary  muscle  has  less  and  less  effect  in  causing  an 
increase  in  its  curvature.  The  process  starts  verj^  early  in  life, 
and  is  one  of  the  many  facts  which  show  that  senescence  begins 
practically  with  birth.  The  change  in  near  point  in  early  life  is  so 
slight  as  to  escape  notice,  but  after  it  reaches  a  distance  of  about 
25  cm.  (about  10  inches)  the  fact  obtrudes  itself  upon  us  in  the  use 
of  our  eyes  for  near  objects, — reading,  for  example.  The  condition 
is  then  designated  as  old-sightedness  or  presbyopia.  Most  normal 
eyes  become  so  distinctly  presbyopic  between  the  fortieth  and  the 
fiftieth  year  as  to  require  the  use  of  glasses  in  reading.  If  no  other 
defect  exists  in  the  eye,  this  deficiency  of  the  lens  is  readily  over- 
come by  using  suitable  convex  glasses  to  aid  the  eye  in  focusing 
the  rays.  It  is  obvious  that  in  such  cases  the  glasses  need  not  be 
used  except  for  near  work. 

Far  Point  of 'Distinct  Vision. — The  normal  eye  is  so  adjusted 
that  parallel  rays  are  brought  to  a  focus  on  the  retina.  The  far 
point  is  therefore  theoretically  at  infinity.  Objects  at  a  great 
distance  are  seen  distinctly,  as  far  as  their  size  permits,  without 
accommodation, — that  is,  with  the  eye  at  rest.  Practically  it  is 
found  that  objects  at  a  distance  of  6  to  10  meters  (20  to  30  feet)  send 
rays  that  are  sufficiently  parallel  to  focus  on  the  retina  without 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  293 

muscular  effort  on  the  part  of  the  eyes, and  this  distance,  therefore, 
measures  the  practical  far  point,  punctum  remotum,  of  the  normal 
eye.  The  rays  at  this  distance  are,  in  reality,  somewhat  divergent, 
and  that  they  produce  a  distinct  image  without  an  act  of  accom- 
modation may  be  due  to  the  fact  that  the  rods  and  cones,  the  really 
sensitive  part  of  the  retina,  do  not  form  a  mathematical  plane,  but 
have  a  certain  thickness  or  depth.  In  the  fovea  centraHs,  for  in- 
stance, the  cones  have  a  length  estimated  (Greeff)  at  85  n  (0.085 
mm.),  and  since  the  displacement  of  the  focus  of  an  object  moved 
from  an  infinite  distance  (parallel  rays)  to  6  or  10  meters  from  the 
eye  is  less  than  this  amount,  the  focused  image  would  continue  to 
fall  on  some  part  of  the  cones  without  the  aid  of  the  mechanism  of 
accommodation. 

The  Refractive  Power  of  the  Surfaces  in  the  Eye. — ^The 
refractive  power  of  lenses  is  expressed  usually  in  terms  of  their 
principal  focal  distance,  a  lens  with  a  distance  of  one  meter  being 
taken  as  the  unit  and  designated  as  having  a  refractive  power  of  one 
diopter,  1  D.  Compared  with  this  unit,  the  refractive  power  of  lenses 
is  expressed  in  terms  of  the  reciprocal  of  their  principal  focal  dis- 
tance measured  in  meters;  thus;  a  lens  with  a  principal  focal  dis- 
tance of  Jo"  meter  is  a  lens  of  10  diopters,  10  D.,  and  one  with  a  focal 
distance  of  10  meters  is  y^  diopter  (0.1  D.).  The  posterior  prin- 
cipal focal  distance  of  the  combination  of  refractive  surfaces  in  the 
eye  is  22.7  mms.  or  ^^  meters.  The  reciprocal  of  this  length  of  focus, 
^~  or  44.05  D.,  expresses  the  refractive  power  of  the  eye  under  the 
normal  conditions  in  which  the  rays  are  refracted  into  the  dense 
vitreous  humor.  As  compared  with  a  lens  in  air,  the  refractive 
power  of  the  eye  would  be  expressed  by  multiplying  this  figure  by 
the  index  of  refraction  of  the  vitreous  humor,  44.05  X  1.3665  =  58.8 
D.,  the  figure  usually  given  to  express  the  total  refractive  power. 
The  refractive  power  of  the  crystalline  lens  alone  is  16  D.;  that  of 
the  cornea,  41  D.;  hence  the  latter  surface  has  about  two  and  one- 
half  times  the  refractive  power  of  the  lens.  Removal  of  the  lens, 
therefore,  as  in  cataract  operations,  does  not  lessen  the  refractive 
power  of  the  eye  so  much  as  when  the  action  of  the  cornea  is  de- 
stroyed, as  happens  in  part  when  the  head  is  immersed  in  water. 

Optical  Defects  of  the  Normal  Eye. — The  refractive  surfaces 
of  the  eye  exhibit  some  of  the  optical  defects  commonly  noticed 
in  lenses,  particularly  those  defects  known  as  chromatic  and  spherical 
aberration.  White  light  is  composed  of  ether  waves  of  different 
lengths  and  different  rapidities  of  vibration,  the  shortest  waves  being 
those  at  the  violet  end  of  the  spectrum  and  the  longest  those  at  the 
red  end.  In  passing  through  a  prism  or  lens  these  waves  are  re- 
fracted unequally  and  are  therefore  more  or  less  dispersed  accord- 


294  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES, 

ing  to  the  character  of  the  refracting  medium.  The  short,  rapid 
waves  at  the  violet  end  are  refracted  the  most  and  are  brought  to 
a  focus  before  the  longer,  red  waves,  so  that  the  image  shows 
fringes  of  color  instead  of  being  pure  white.  This  phenomenon 
is  known  as  chromatic  aberration.  Lenses  used  for  scientific 
purposes  are  corrected  for  this  defect  or  made  achromatic  by  a 
combination  of  lenses  of  crown  and  flint  glass  so  placed  that  the 
dispersive  power  of  one  neutraUzes  that  of  the  other.  The  eye 
exhibits  this  defect,  but  not  to  such,  an  extent  as  to  be  noticeable 
in  ordinary  vision.  If,  however,  an  object  is  in  focus  when  viewed 
by  red  light  it  can  be  shown  that  the  focus  must  be  changed  if  the 
same  object  is  illuminated' by  violet  light.  Helmholtz  estimates 
that  if  the  media  of  the  eye  possess  the  same  dispersive  power  as 
water  the  rays  of  violet  light  must  be  brought  to  a  focus  at  about 
0.434  mm.  in  front  of  that  of  the  red  rays. 

Spherical  aberration  depends  upon  the  fact  that  the  rays  near  the 
circumference  of  a  lens  are  refracted  more  and  therefore  are  brought 
to  a  focus  sooner  than  those  entering  nearest  the  center.  This 
defect  may  be  noticed  in  an  uncorrected  lens  by  the  fact  that 
when  the  center  of  the  image  is  in  exact  focus  its  margins  are 
slightly  out  of  focus  and  vice  versa.  The  defect  is  usually  cor- 
rected, as  in  photography,  by  use  of  a  diaphragm  to  cut  off 
the  rays  from  the  periphery  of  the  lens.  In  the  eye  both  spher- 
ical and  chromatic  aberrations  are  remedied  to  a  large  extent  by 
a  similar  device.  The  iris  constitutes  an  adjustable  diaphragm, 
which  is  reflexly  narrowed  as  the  light  increases  in  intensity  and 
thus  cuts  off  the  rays  that  would  go  through  the  periphery  of 
the  lens.  The  interesting  physiological  control  of  the  movements 
of  the  iris  is  described  below.  In  the  eye  the  defect  of  spherical 
aberration  is  counteracted  also  by  the  peculiar  structure  of  the 
crystalline  lens.  This  organ  is  composed  of  concentric  layers 
whose  density  increases  toward  the  center.  The  result  of  this 
arrangement  is  that  the  center  of  the  lens  is  more  refractive  than  the 
periphery,  and  the  tendency  of  the  latter  portion  to  refract  more 
strongly  is  more  or  less  neutralized.  A  third  optical  defect  of  the 
eye  consists  in  the  fact  that  its  refractive  surfaces  are  not  absolutely 
centered, — that  is,  the  centers  of  curvature  of  the  cornea  and  of  the 
anterior  and  the  posterior  surfaces  of  the  lens  do  not  lie  in  the  same 
straight  line.  Moreover,  the  optical  axis  of  the  system  does  not 
coincide  exactly  with  the  line  of  sight.  By  the  latter  term  we  mean  the 
line  from  the  point  looked  at  to  the  fovea  centralis  or  the  part  of  the 
fovea  on  which  the  image  of  the  point  falls.  This  line  of  sight  or 
visual  axis  makes  an  angle  of  about  five  degrees  with  the  optical 
axis.  The  system  would  be  more  perfect  as  an  optical  apparatus 
if  the  two  axes  coincided. 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  295 

Abnormalities  in  the  Refraction  of  the  Eye — Ametropia. — 

The  eye  that  is  normal  and  in  which  parahel  rays  focus  on  the 
retina  when  the  eye  is  at  rest  is  designated  as  emmetropic.  Any 
abnormahty  in  the  refractive  surfaces  or  the  shape  of  the  eyeball 
prevents  this  exact  focusing  of  parallel  rays  and  makes  the  eye 
ametropic.  The  most  common  troubles  of  the  eye  are  due 
to  short-sightedness  or  myopia,  far-sightedness  or  hyperme- 
tropia,  astigmatism,  old-sightedness  or  presbyopia,  and  lack  of 
balance  in  the  external  muscles  of  the  eyeballs,  muscular  inefficiency 
or  heterophoria.  Some  description  of  these  conditions  is  useful  to 
emphasize  by  contrast  the  mode  of  action  of  the  dioptric  mechanism 
in  the  normal  eye,  but  for  a  full  description  of  the  extent  and  com- 
plexity of  these  defects  reference  must  be  made  to  special  treatises 
upon  the  errors  of  refraction  in  the  eye. 

In  myopia  or  near-sightedness  parallel  rays  of  light  are  brought 
to  a  focus  before  reaching  the  retina.  Consequently  when  the  rays 
fall  upon  the  retina  each  point  forms  a  diffusion  circle  and  the  image 
is  indistinct.  This  defect  may  be  due  to  an  abnormally  great 
curvature  of  the  refractive  surfaces,  the  cornea  or  the  lens,  or  to  an 
abnormal  length  of  the  eyeball  in  its  anteroposterior  diameter. 
The  last  cause  is  the  most  common.  The  defect  may  be  congenital, 
but  usually  it  is  acquired,  and  in  the  latter  case  its  cause  is  generally 
attributed  to  a  weakness  in  the  coats  of  the  eyeball.  The  interior 
of  the  eye  is  under  some  pressure,  intra-ocular  tension,  which  is 
estimated  to  be  equal  to  the  pressure  of  a  column  of  mercur}^  25  to  30 
mms.  in  height.  This  tension  is  increased  by  strong  convergence  of 
the  eyeballs  in  looking  at  near  objects.  If  the  coats  of  the  eye  are 
weak  or  become  so  from  disease  or  malnutrition  they  may  yield 
somewhat  to  this  pressure  and  the  eyeball  become  lengthened  in  the 
anteroposterior  diameter.  The  condition  as  regards  refraction  of 
parallel  rays  is  represented  then  by  the  diagram  B,  in  Fig.  125. 
The  retina  is  farther  away  than  the  principal  focal  distance  of  the 
refractive  surfaces,  and  if  the  defect  is  excessive  even  diverging 
rays  may  not  be  focused.  The  obvious  remedy  for  such  a  condition 
is  to  use  concave  lenses  before  the  eyes  for  distant  vision.  By  this 
means,  if  the  lenses  are  properly  chosen,  the  rays  will  be  given  such 
an  amount  of  divergence  that  the  focus  will  be  thrown  back  to  the 
retina.  As  compared  with  the  normal  or  emmetropic  eye,  the 
myopic  eye  has  its  far  point  of  distinct  vision — that  is,  the  farthest 
point  that  can  be  seen  distinctly  without  an  effort  of  accommo- 
tion — less  than  twenty  feet  from  the  eye,  the  exact  distance  depend- 
ing upon  the  extent  of  the  myopia.  On  the  contrary,  the  near  point 
of  distinct  vision — that  is,  the  nearest  point  at  which  distinct  vision 
can  be  obtained  with  the  aid  of  the  muscles  of  accommodation — is 
closer  than  in  the  normal  eye.     Much  of  the  prevalent  myopia  in  the 


296 


THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 


young  is  attributed  by  oculists  to  bad  methods  in  reading,  such  as 
insufficient  lighting,  small  print,  and  a  faulty  position  of  the  book. 
Such  conditions  lead  to  an  excessive  muscular  effort  and  thus 
aggravate  any  tendency  that  exists  toward  the  development  of  a 
near-sighted  condition. 

In  hyper metro-pia  the  conditions  are  the  opposite  of  those  in 
myopia.  Parallel  rays  of  light  after  refraction  in  the  eye  cut  the 
retina  before  they  come  to  a  focus.     The  principal  focal  distance,  in 

other  words,  is  behind  the 
retina.  In  this  case,  also, 
each  point  of  a  distant 
object  will  make  upon  the 
retina,  when  the  eye  is 
not  accommodated,  a  dif- 
fusion circle,  and  the  image 
consequently  is  blurred. 
This  defect  may  be  caused 
by  a  lessened  curvature  or 
refractive  power  in  the 
cornea  or  lens,  but  in  the 
majority  of  cases  it  is  ref- 
erable to  a  diminution  in 
the  anteroposterior  diam- 
eter of  the  eyeball.  This 
condition  is  usually  con- 
genital: the  eyeball  from 
birth  is  smaller  than  the 
normal.  The  path  of  the 
parallel  rays  in  this  case 
is  represented  in  the  dia- 
gram C,  Fig.  125.  When 
such  an  eye  looks  at  a  dis- 
tant object  a  clear  image 
may  be  obtained  only  by 
using  the  ciliary  muscle, 
and  to  prevent  this  constant  strain  upon  the  muscle  of  accommo- 
dation convex  glasses  must  be  worn.  Glasses  of  this  kind  converge 
the  rays  and  if  properly  chosen  will  bring  parallel  rays  to  a  focus 
without  the  constant  aid  of  accommodation.  It  is  obvious  that  in 
the  hypermetropic  eye  there  is  no  far  point  of  distinct  vision  when 
the  eye  is  at  rest,  since  some  accommodation  must  be  used  to  bring 
even  parallel  rays  to  a  focus.  The  near  point  of  distinct  vision  will 
be  farther  away  than  in  the  normal  eye,  since  accommodation  be- 
gins when  the  rays  are  parallel  and  its  limits  are  reached  with 
a  less  degree  of  divergence;  hence  the  name  of  far-sightedness. 


Fig.  125. — Diagram  showing  the  difference  be- 
tween normal  {A),  myopic  {B),  and  hypermetropic 
(C)  eyes.  In  B  and  C  the  dotted  Unes  represent  the 
path  of  the^rays  after  correction  by  glasses. — {Bow- 
ditch.) 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  297 

Presbyopia  or  old-sightedness  has  been  referred  to  above.  It 
is  due  to  a  gradual  failure  in  the  effectiveness  of  accommodation 
with  increasing  age,  and  is  attributed  usually  to  a  progressive  loss  of 
elasticity  in  the  lens.  The  near  point  of  distinct  vision  recedes 
farther  and  farther  from  the  eye,  and  consequently  in  close  work 
convex  glasses  must  be  worn  to  aid  the  accommodation.  It  is 
obvious  that  this  effect  of  old  age  will  be  less  noticeable  in  the  myopic 
than  in  the  emmetropic  eye,  since  in  the  former  the  greater  length 
of  the  e3^eball  needs  less  accommodation  in  near  vision  and  the 
failure  of  the  lens  to  refract  is  therefore  not  felt  so  soon.  What  is 
known  as  second-sight  in  the  old  may  be  brought  about  by  the 
late  development  of  a  myopic  condition, — that  is,  by  a  change  in 
the  length  of  the  eyeball  or  by  a  swelling  of  the  crystalline  lens, — 
and  in  such  a  case  convex  glasses  for  near  work  may  be  dispensed 
with. 

Astigmatism. — In  a  perfectly  normal  or  ideal  eye  the  refractive 
surfaces,  cornea,  anterior  and  posterior  surfaces  of  the  lens,  are 
sections  of  true  spheres,  and,  all  the  meridians  being  of  equal 
curvature,  the  refraction  along  these  different  meridians  is  equal. 
Such  an  eye  wiU  bring  the  cone  of  rays  proceeding  from  a  luminous 
point  to  a  focal  point  on  the  retina,  barring  the  disturbing  influence 
of  chromatic  and  spherical  aberration.  If,  however,  one  or  all  of  the 
refractive  surfaces  have  unequal  curvatures  along  different  merid- 
ians, then  it  is  obvious  that  the  rays  from  a  luminous  point  can  not 
be  brought  to  a  focal  point,  since  the  rays  along  the  n'.eridian  of 
greater  curvature  will  be  brought  to  a  focus  first  and  begin  to  diverge 
before  the  rays  along  the  lesser  curvature  are  focused.  Such  a 
•condition  is  designated  as  astigmatism  (from  a,  not,  and  ariyixa, 
point).  The  effect  may  be  illustrated  by  the  diagram  in  Fig.  126, 
which  represents  the  refraction  of  the  rays  from  a  luminous  point  by 
a  planoconvex  lens  whose  curvature  along  the  vertical  meridian  is 
greater  than  along  the  horizontal  meridian. 

The  ra3^s  along  the  vertical  meridian  are  brought  to  a  focus 
first  at  G,  but  those  from  the  horizontal  meridian  are  still  converging; 
so  that  a  screen  placed  at  this  point  will  give  the  image  of  a  horizontal 
line  {a-a') .  The  rays  along  the  horizontal  meridian  are  brought  to  a 
focus  at  B,  but  those  from  focus  G  have  by  this  time  spread  out 
in  a  vertical  plane,  so  that  a  screen  placed  at  this  point  will  give 
the  image  of  a  vertical  line  (6-c).  In  between  the  images  will  be 
elliptical  or  circular,  as  represented  in  the  diagram.  In  the  eye 
astigmatism  may  be  due  to  an  inequality  in  curvature  of  either  the 
cornea  or  the  lens,  and  may  be  either  regular  or  irregular.  By 
regular  astigmatism  is  meant  that  condition  in  which  while  the 
curvature  along  each  individual  meridian  is  equal  throughout  its 
course,  the  curvatures  of  the  different  meridians  vary  and  in  such 


298 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


a  way  that  the  meridians  of  greatest  and  least  curvature  are  at 
right  angles  to  each  other.  Ordinary  astigmatism  is  of  the  regular 
variety,  and  is  usually  attributed  to  a  defect  in  the  curvature  of  the 
cornea.  If  the  astigmatism  is  such  that  the  vertical  meridian  has 
the  greatest  curvature  it  is  termed  "with  the  rule,"  since  normally 
this  meridian  is  slightly  more  curved  than  the  horizontal  one.  If, 
on  the  contrary,  the  curvature  along  the  horizontal  meridian  is 
greater,  the  astigmatism  is  "against  the  rule."  The  meridians 
of  greatest  and  least  curvature  may  not  lie  in  the  vertical  and 
horizontal  planes,  but  in  some  of  the  oblique  planes;  but  so  long  as 
they  are  at  right  angles  the  astigmatism  is  regular.  It  is  evident 
that  such  a  condition  may  be  corrected  by  the  use  of  cylindrical 


Fig.  126. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  paths  of  the  rays  of  light  in  a  cornea  showing 
regular  astigmatism. — (McKendrick.)  The  lower  line  of  figures  represents  the  section  of 
the  cone  of  light,  or  the  images  obtained  at  different  distances.  The  image  varies  from  a 
horizontal  to  a  vertical  line,  but  at  no  place  can  a  point  be  obtained  at  which  rays  along 
all  meridians  are  focused. 


glasses  SO  chosen  as  to  increase  the  curvature  along  the  meridian 
in  which  the  cornea  has  the  least  curvature..  An  eye  that  suffers  from 
a  marked  degree  of  astigmatism  can  not  focus  distinctly  at  the  same 
time  lines  that  are  at  right  angles  to  each  other;  hence  the  use  of 
a  series  of  lines  whose  rays  fall  along  the  different  meridians  of  the 
cornea,  as  shown  in  Fig.  127,  will  reveal  this  defect  if  it  exists.  If 
the  eye  is  directed  to  the  center  of  intersection  of  the  lines  some 
of  the  lines  appear  distinct  while  those  at  right  angles  to  them 
are  blurred.  A  normal  eye  can  be  thrown  into  an  astigmatic  con- 
dition by  approximating  the  eyelids  closely.  In  this  position  the 
tears  make  a  concave  cylindrical  lens,  which  alters  the  curvature 
along  the  vertical  meridian.  What  is  known  as  irregular  astig- 
matism is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  meridians  of  greatest  and  least 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE. 


299 


curvature  are  not  at  approximately  right  angles,  or,  as  is  more 
commonly  the  case,  it  is  due  to  an  irregularity  in  the  curvature 
along  some  one  meridian,  such  as  may  be  produced  by  a  scar  upon 
the  cornea.  This  condition  may  be  produced  from  a  variety  of 
causes  affecting  either  the  cornea  or  the  lens,  and  practically  it 
can  not  be  corrected  by  the  use  of  lenses.  As  Helmholtz  has  shown, 
a  small  degree  of  irregular 
astigmatism  is  present  nor- 
mally, owing  to  a  certain 
asymmetry  in  the  curvature 
of  the  lens.  This  defect  is 
made  apparent  in  the  visual 
sensations  caused  by  a  point 
of  light,  such  as  is  furnished, 
for  instance,  by  a  fixed  star. 
The  retinal  image  in  these 
cases,  instead  of  being  a  sym- 
metrical point,  is  a  radiate 
figure  the  exact  form  of 
which  may  vary  in  different 
eyes.  For  this  reason  the 
fixed  stars  give  us  the  well- 
known  star-shaped  image 
instead  of  a  clearly  defined 
point. 

Innervation  and  Physiological  Control  of  the  Ciliary  Muscle 
and  the  Muscles  of  the  Iris. — From  an  optical  point  of  view  the 
iris  plays  the  part  of  a  diaphragm.  It  is,  moreover,  an  adjustable 
diaphragm  the  aperture  of  which — that  is,  the  size  of  the  pupil — 
is  varied  reflexly  according  to  the  conditions  of  illumination.  Its 
adjustments  are  made  possible  by  the  fact  that  it  contains  within 
its  substance  two  bands  of  muscular  tissue,  one,  the  sphincter 
muscle,  forming  a  circular  ring  whose  contraction  diminishes  the 
aperture  of  the  pupil,  and  the  other  a  dilator  muscle  whose  contrac- 
tion widens  the  pupil.  Each  of  these  muscles  possesses  its  own 
nerve  fibers  that  arise  ultimately  from  the  brain,  and  through  these 
fibers  reflex  movements  of  great  delicacy  are  effected.  The  sphinc- 
ter pupillse  is  a  well-defined  band  of  plain  muscle  whose  width 
varies,  according  to  the  state  of  contraction,  from  0.6  to  1.2  mms. ; 
it  forms  a  ring  lying  just  on  the  margin  of  the  pupil,  and  it  is  im- 
bedded in  the  stroma  of  the  iris.  The  histological  differentiation 
of  the  dilator  pupillse  is  much  less  distinct.  For  a  long  time  its 
existence  was  the  subject  of  controversy,  but  it  is  now  conceded 
that  such  a  muscle  is  present  in  the  form  of  a  layer  of  elongated 
spindle-like  cells  which  lie  close  to  the  pigment  layer  of  the  iris  and 


Fig.    127. — Astigmatic  chart. 


300 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


form  radial  bundles  stretching  from  the  ciliary  border  of  the  iris 
toward  the  pupillary  orifice.*  Both  of  these  muscles  are  supplied 
by  autonomic  nerve  fibers — that  is,  the  motor  nerve  path  comprises 
a  preganglionic  fiber,  arising  from  the  central  nervous  system, 
and  a  postganglionic  fiber,  arising  from  a  sympathetic  ganglion. 
Anatomically  it  can  be  shown  that  the  sphincter  muscle  is  supplied 
by  the  short   ciliary  nerves    arising    from    the    ciliary  ganglion, 

which  supply  also  the 
muscle  of  accommoda- 
tion, the  ciliary  muscle; 
while  the  dilator  muscle 
is  supplied  by  the  long 
ciliary  nerves  that  arise 
from  the  ophthalmic 
branch  of  the  fifth  cra- 
nial nerve,  as  represented 
in  Fig.  128.  The  entire 
course  of  the  motor 
paths,  preganglionic  and 
postganglionic  fibers,  is 
represented  diagrammat- 
ically  in  Fig.  129.  The 
motor  fibers  to  the  ciliary 
muscle  and  sphincter 
pupillae  arise  in  the  mid- 
brain in  the  nucleus  of 
origin  of  the  third  cranial 
nerve,  and  indeed  in  a 
special  part  of  this  nu- 
cleus lying  most  ante- 
riorly.    They  leave    the 

Course  of  constrictor  nerve  fibers, third    Uerve    in    the    Orbit 

Course  of  dilator  nerve  fibers, and   end  withiu  the    Sub- 

Fig.   128. — Diagrammatic  representation  of  the  c+onrio  nf  +Vio  ni]\cir-^T  rran 

nerves  governing  the  pupil  (after  Foster) :    II,  Optic  SldUCe  OI  tne  CUiary  gan- 

nerve;    l.g,  ciliary  ganghon;    r.b,  its  short  root  from  glion,     wheUCe     the      path 

///,  motor  oculi  nerve;  ST/m.,  its  sympathetic  root ;  rl,  ,  .  '■ 

its  long  root  from  V,  ophthalmonasal  branch  of  oph-  is    COntlUUed     bv    Sympa- 

thalmic   division   of  fifth   nerve ;    s.c,    short   ciliary  ,  i      ,  •  /  ,     '        t       ■    \ 

nerves;    Z.c,  long  cUiary  nerves.  thetlC        (postganglionic) 

fibers  emerging  from  the 
ganglion  in  the  short  ciliary  nerves.  The  fibers  to  the  dilator 
muscle  have  a  very  different  path.  They  arise  also  in  the  brain, 
most  probably  in  the  midbrain,  although  their  exact  origin  has 
not  been    determined   satisfactorily,   and  pass   down   the   spinal 

*  For  a  physiological  proof  and  the  literature  of  the  controversy  see 
Langley  and  Anderson,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  554,  1892.  For  the 
histological  proof,  Grunert,  "Archives  of  Ophthalmology,"  30,  377,  1901. 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE. 


301 


cord  to  terminate  in  the  lower  cervical  region.  From  this  point 
the  path  is  continued  by  spinal  neurons  which  leave  the  cord  in  the 
eighth  cervical  and  the  first  and  second  thoracic  spinal  nerves  and 
pass  by  way  of  the  corresponding  rami  communicantes  into  the 
sympathetic  chain  at  the  level  of  the  first  thoracic  ganglion.  From 
this  point  the  fibers  pass  upward  in  the  cervical  sympathetic  with- 
out terminating  until  they  reach  the  superior  cervical  ganglion  near 
the  base  of  the  skull.  From  this  ganglion  the  path  is  continued 
by  sympathetic  (postganglionic)  fibers  which  pass  to  the  Gasserian 
ganglion  and  unite  with  its  ophthalmic  branch.  Subsequently 
.they  leave  the  ophthalmic  nerve  in  the  long  ciliary  branches.  These 
fibers  under  normal  conditions  are  in  constant  (tonic)  activity,  so 
that  if  the  path  is  interrupted  at  any  point  by  section  of  the  cervical 

Gasserian,        ^ — ^  Ohht/talmw  hratwkofSU  Zona  cilioj-u  neri/es. 

Oanglwn..  \  -^: —  /"^  1  ^  «.,  , 

•^  ^         '  —  ^-  '    Milalor 

pupillae. 


Q)uperior  Cervical.^ 
(ganglion. 


^johitteter' 
/oujoillae. 


Ciliary 0anqlwiu  (Short Ciliary  Tieroes 


Fig.  129. — Schema  showing  the  path  of  the  preganglionic  and  postganglionic  fibers 
to  the  ciliary  muscle  and  to  the  sphincter  and  dilator  muscles  of  the  iris. — (Modified  from 
Schultz.)     The  course  of  the  long  ciliary  nerves  is  represented  very  diagrammatically. 


sympathetic,  for  instance — the  pupil  is  seen  to  contract.  This 
constant  activity  may  be  referred  directly  to  the  activity  of  the 
spinal  neurons  whose  cells  lie  in  the  spinal  cord  in  the  lower  cervical 
and  upper  thoracic  region.  The  cells  in  question  constitute  what 
is  sometimes  called  the  lower  ciliospinal  center  of  Budge. 

The  Accommodation  Reflex  and  the  Light  Reflex  of  the 
Sphincter  Muscle. — When  the  eye  is  accommodated  for  a  near 
object  by  the  contraction  of  the  ciliary  muscle  there  is  always  a 
simultaneous  contraction  of  the  sphincter  pupillse  whereby  the 
pupil  is  narrowed.  The  act  is  one-  of  obvious  value  in  vision,  since 
by  diaphragming  down  the  lens  the  focus  is  improved  and  more 
exact  vision,  such  as  is  needed  in  close  work,  is  obtained.  The  act 
is  usually  spoken  of  as  the  accommodation  reflex,  but  in  reality  it 


302  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

is  rather  what  is  known  as  an  associated  movement.  The  voluntary 
effort  inaugurated  in  the  brain  affects  the  cranial  centers  for  both 
muscles,  and  under  normal  conditions  they  always  act  together, — 
a  fact  which  implies  a  close  connection  of  their  centers.  An  example 
of  a  similar  associated  action  is  seen  in  the  effect  .of  the  respirator}^ 
movements  on  the  rate  of  heart  beat,  the  inspiratory  discharge 
from  the  respiratory  center  being  accompanied  by  an  associated 
effect  upon  the  cardio-inhibitory  center  whereby  the  heart  rate 
is  quickened.  In  the  particular  case  that  we  are  dealing  with 
three  muscular  acts,  in  fact,  are  usually  associated,  for  every  act 
of  accommodation  under  normal  circumstances  is  accompanied, 
not  only  by  a  constriction  of  the  pupil,  but  also  by  a  convergence 
of  the  eyeballs,  due  to  a  contraction  of  the  internal  rectus  muscle 
in  each  eye. 

The  light  reflex  is  observed  when  light  is  thrown  into  the  eye. 
As  is  well  known,  the  pupil  dilates  in  darkness  or  dim  lights  and 
contracts  to  a  pin-point  upon  strong  illumination  of  the  retina. 
The  value  of  this  reflex  is  also  obvious.  In  the  dim  light  the  total 
illumination  and  therefore  the  visual  power  of  the  retina  is  aided 
by  an  enlarged  pupil,  but  in  strong  lights  the  illumination  may  be 
diminished  with  advantage  by  diaphragming,  since  the  optical 
image  on  the  retina  is  .thereby  improved  on  account  of  the  diminu- 
tion in  spherical  aberration.  The  reflex  arc  involved  in  this  act  is 
known  in  part.  The  afferent  path  is  along  the  optic  nerve;  the 
efferent  path  back  to  the  sphincter  is  through  the  third  nerve 
and  ciliary  ganglion ;  injury  to  either  of  these  paths  diminishes  or 
destroys  the  reflex.  The  reflex  is  also  lost  in  some  cases  in  which 
neither  of  these  paths  seems  to  be  involved.  In  tabes  dorsalis 
(locomotor  ataxia)  and  general  paresis,  for  instance,  the  pupil 
of  the  eye  is  constricted  and  does  not  give  the  light  reflex,  but 
still  shows  the  accommodation  reflex.  Such  a  condition  is  known 
as  the  Argyll  Robertson  pupil.  Some  question  exists,  there- 
fore, as  to  the  nature  of  the  connections  in  the  brain  between  the 
afferent  impulses  and  the  motor  center  in  the  nucleus  of  the  third 
nerve.  According  to  some  authors  (Gudden,  v.  Bechterew),  the 
afferent  light  reflex  fibers  are  a  set  of  fibers  distinct  from  the  visual 
fibers  proper.  They  arise  in  the  retina  and  pass  backward  in  the 
optic  nerve,  but  leave  the  optic  tracts  at  the  chiasma  to  enter  the 
walls  of  the  third  ventricle  and  thus  reach  the  nucleus  of  the  third 
nerve.  This  view,  however,  finds  no  support  in  the  histological 
structure  of  the  retina.  Under  normal  conditions  the  light  reflex 
is  bilateral ,— that  is,  light  thrown  upon  one  retina  only  will  cause 
constriction  of  the  pupil  in  both  eyes.  In  those  of  the  lower  ani- 
mals whose  optic  nerves  cross  completely  in  the  chiasma  the  light 
reflex,  on  the  contrary,  is  unilateral,  affecting  only  the  eye  that 


DIOPTRICS    OP   THE    EYE.  303 

is  stimulated.*  We  may  conclude,  therefore,  that  the  bilaterality 
of  the  reflex  in  the  higher  animals  is  dependent  upon  the  partial 
decussation'  of  the  optic  fibers  in  the  chiasma,  a  sensory  stimulus 
upon  one  retina  giving  rise  to  impulses  which  are  conveyed  to  the 
two  sides  of  the  brain.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  in  addition 
commissural  connections  may  exist  between  the  central  connections, 
— the  motor  centers  in  the  midbrain.  It  is  usually  stated  that 
the  effect  of  the  light  upon  the  sphincter  muscle  is  greatest  when 
the  retina  is  stimulated  at  or  near  the  fovea  and  that  it  varies 
directly  with  the  intensity  of  the  light  and  the  area  illuminated.f 
The  Action  of  Drugs  upon  the  Iris. — The  condition  of  con- 
striction of  the  pupil  is  frequently  designated  as  miosis  (mi-o'-sis) 
and  the  condition  of  dilatation  as  mydriasis  (myd-ri'-as-is).  Many 
drugs  are  known  which,  when  applied  directly  to  the  absorptive 
surfaces  of  the  eye  or  when  injected  into  the  circulation,  affect 
the  muscles  of  the  iris  and  therefore  vary  the  size  of  the  pupil. 
Those  drugs  that  cause  miosis  are  spoken  of  as  miotics,  and  those 
that  produce  mydriasis  as  mydriatics.  Atropin,  the  active  prin- 
ciple of  belladonna,  homatropin,  and  cocain  are  well-known  myd- 
riatics, while  physostigmin  (eserin)  and  muscarin  or  pilocarpin  are 
examples  of  the  miotics.  There  has  been  much  question  as  to  the 
precise  action  of  these  drugs.  For  an  adequate  discussion  of  this 
question  the  student  is  referred  to  works  on  pharmacology;  but 
it  may  be  said  that  the  evidence  from  the  physiological  side  J  indi- 
cates that  atropin  causes  mydriasis  by  paralyzing  the  endings  of 
the  constrictor  nerve  fibers  in  the  sphincter  muscle,  while  phy- 
sostigmin and  muscarin  cause  miosis  by  stimulation  of  the  endings 
of  these  same  fibers.  In  the  case  of  cocain  it  is  probable  that  the 
drug  first  stimulates  mainly  the  endings  of  .the  dilator  fibers  in  the 
dilator  muscles,  and  in  stronger  doses  causes  additional  mydriasis 
by  paralyzing  the  constrictor  fibers.  The  stronger  mydriatics 
paralyze  not  only  the  sphincter  pupillse,  but  also  the  similarly 
innervated  ciliary  muscle,  thus  destroying  the  power  of  accom- 
modation. When  atropin  is  applied  to  the  eye  the  individual  is 
unable  to  use  his  eyes  for  near  work — reading,  for  example — until 
the  effect  of  the  drug  has  worn  off.  In  ophthalmological  literature 
this  condition  of  paralysis  of  the  ciliary  muscle  is  spoken  of  as 
cycloplegia,  and  most  of  the  mydriatic  drugs  are  also  cycloplegics. 
On  the  contrary,  the  stronger  miotics  stimulate  the  ciliary  muscle, 
and  therefore  during  their  period  of  action  throw  the  eye  into  a 
condition  of  forced  accommodation. 

*  Steinach,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  47,  313,  1890. 
t  See  Abelsdorff  and  Feilchenfell,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Psychologie  und  Phys- 
iologie des  Sinnesorgane,"  34,  111,  1904. 

t  Schultz,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1898.  47. 


304  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

In  the  above  description  of  the  innervation  of  the  iris  and  the  causes  of 
mydriasis  and  miosis  the  simplest  explanations  offered  have  been  adopted. 
It  should  be  added,  however,  that  some  facts  are  known  which  indicate  that 
the  conditions  are  more  complex.  Thus,  Meltzer  and  Auer*  have  shown 
that  in  mammals  the  application  of  solutions  of  adrenalin  to  the  eye  has  no 
effect  on  the  iris  and  the  same  is  true  after  section  of  the  cervical  sympathetic. 
But  if  the  superior  cervical  ganglion  is  removed  the  adrenalin  causes  a  maxi- 
mal mydriasis.  This  paradoxical  dilatation  indicates  that  the  ganglion 
has  some  specific  influence  upon  the  iris  in  addition  to  serving  as  part  of  the 
pathway  for  the  pupillodilator  fibers,  since  as  long  as  it  is  present  it  prevents 
the  adrenalin  from  acting  upon  the  musculature  of  the  iris. 

The  Balanced  Action  of  the  Sphincter  and  Dilator  Muscles 
of  the  Iris. — It  would  seem  that  under  normal  conditions  both  the 
sphincter  and  the  dilator  muscle  are  kept  more  or  less  in  tonic 
activity  by  impulses  received  through  their  respective  motor  fibers. 
They  thus  balance  each  other,  to  speak  figuratively,  and  a  mechan- 
ism of  this  kind  in  which  two  opposing  actions  are  in  play  is  in  a 
condition  to  respond  promptly  and  smoothly  to  an  excess  of  stimu- 
lation from  either  side.  The  two  muscles,  in  fact,  act  as  antago- 
nists in  the  same  manner  as  the  flexor  and  extensor  muscles  around 
a  joint.  At  the  same  time  this  relation  adds  some  difficulties  tO' 
the  explanation  of  specific  reactions,  since  it  is  evident  that  a  dila- 
tation of  the  pupil  may  be  caused  either  by  a  contraction  of  the 
dilator  muscle  or  a  loss  of  tone  (inhibition)  in  the  sphincter,  while 
in  constriction  of  the  pupil  the  effect  may  result  either  from  a  con- 
traction of  the  sphincter  or  an  inhibition  of  the  dilator;  or,  last,. 
the  contraction  of  one  muscle  may  always  be  accompanied  by  an 
inhibition  of  its  antagonist,  as  is  supposed  to  be  the  case  with  the 
flexor  and  extensor  muscles  of  the  limbs.  Andersonf  has  given 
some  evidence  to  show  that  the  dilatation  of  the  pupil  in  cats  is 
due  to  a  double  action  of  this  sort,  the  pupillodilator  muscle  con- 
tracting first  and  subsequently  the  tone  of  the  constrictors  suf- 
fering an  inhibition.  Alterations  in  the  size  of  the  pupil  take  place 
not  only  under  the  conditions  described  above — namely,  the  light 
and  the  accommodation  reflex  and  the  action  of  drugs, — but  also 
under  many  other  circumstances,  normal  and  pathological.  In 
sleep,  for  instance,  the  eyes  roll  upward  and  inward  and  the  pupils 
are  constricted.  It  would  seem  probable  that  the  miosis  in  this  case 
is  due  to  a  cessation  in  tonic  activity  on  the  part  of  the  dilator 
muscle  rather  than  to  an  active  contraction  of  the  sphincter  muscle,, 
the  state  of  sleep  being  characterized  by  a  diminution  in  activity 
in  the  central  nervous  system.  Emotional  states  also  affect  the 
size  of  the  pupil  and  thus  aid  in  giving  the  facial  expressions  char- 
acteristic of  these  conditions.  Writers  speak  of  the  eyes  dilating 
with  terror  or  darkening  with  emotions  of  deep  pleasure.    This  pupil- 

*  Meltzer  and  Auer,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  11,  28,  and  40,  1904.. 
t  "  Journal  of  Physiology,"  30,  15,  1903. 


DIOPTRICS    OP   THE    EYE. 


305 


eye  is 


lary  accompaniment  of  the  emotional  states  may  occur  even  when 
it  is  a  matter  of  memory  rather  than  immediate  experience.  The 
explanation  of  this  mydriasis  can  hardly  be  obtained  by  experi- 
ment, but  reasoning  from  analogy  we  know  that  strong  emotional 
states  are  usually  accompanied  by  more  or  less  distinct  inhibitory 
effects  on  motor  centers,  and  perhaps  in  this  case  the  reaction  is 
most  satisfactorily  explained  by  attributing  it  to  an  inhibition  of 
the  constrictor  center  in  the  midbrain. 

The  Ophthalmoscope. — The  light  that  falls  into  the 
partly  absorbed  by  the  black  pig- 
ment of  the  choroid  coat  and  is 
partly  reflected  back  to  the  ex- 
terior. This  latter  portion  is  re- 
flected back  in  the  direction  in 
which  it  entered.  Merely  holding 
a  light  near  the  eye  does  not,  there- 
fore, enable  us  to  see  the  interior 
more  clearly,  since  in  order  to  catch 
the  returning  rays  in  our  own  eye  it 
would  be  necessary  to  interpose  the 
head  between  the  source  of  light 
and  the  observed  eye.  If,  however, 
we  could  arrange  the  light  to  enter 
the  observed  eye  as  though  it  pro- 
ceeded from  our  own  eye,  then  the 
returning  rays  would  be  perceived, 
and  with  sufficient  illumination  the 
bottom  or  fundus  of  the  observed 
eye  might  be  seen.  Arguing  in  this . 
way,  Helmholtz  constructed  his  first 
form  of  the  ophthalmoscope  in  1851. 
The  value  of  the  ophthalmoscope  is 
twofold:  It  enables  the  observer  to 
examine  the  interior  of  the  eye  and 
thus  recognize  diseased  conditions  of 
the  retina ;  it  is  also  useful  in  detect- 
ing abnormalities  in  the  refractive 

surfaces  of  the  eye.  The  principle  of  the  instrument  is  well  repre- 
sented in  the  original  form  devised  by  Helmholtz,  as  shown  schemat- 
ically in  Fig.  131,  A .  /  represents  the  observed  eye  and  //  the  eye  of 
the  observer.  Between  the  two  eyes  is  placed  a  piece  of  glass  inclined 
at  an  angle.  Light  from  the  candle  faUing  upon  this  glass  is  in  part 
reflected  from  the  surface  to  enter  eye  /,  and  these  rays  on  emerging 
from  the  eye  along  the  same  line  pass  through  the  glass  in  part  and 
enter  eve  //.  In  place  of  the  plane  unsilvered  glass  it  is  now  cus- 
"20 


Fig.    130. — Loring's  ophthalmoscope. 


306 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


tomary  to  use  a  concave  mirror  with  a  small  hole  through  the  center, 
the  observer's  eye  being  placed  directly  behind  this  hole.  Such  an 
instrument  is  shown  in  Fig.  130.  The  instrument  is  used  in  two 
ways,  known  as  the  direct  and  the  indirect  method.  In  the  direct 
method  the  mirror  is  held  very  close  to  the  observed  eye  and  the 
paths  of  the  rays  of  light  into  and  out  of  the  eye  are  represented 
schematically  in  Fig.  131,5.    The  light  from  a  lamp  caught  upon  the 


A 


Fig.  131. — Diagrams  to  represent  the  principle  of  the  ophthalmoscope:  ^,  The  orig- 
inal form  of  ophthalmoscope,  consisting  of  a  piece  of  glass,  M,  inclined  at  a  suitable  angle 
The  rays  from  the  source  of  light  are  reflected  into  the  observed  eye,  /,  and  thence  return 
along  the  same  lines  passing  through  M  to  reach  the  observer's  eye,  //.  B,  The  direct 
method  with  the  ophthalmoscopic  mirror.  The  rays  of  light  illuminate  the  fundus  of  the 
observed  eye,  /,  and  thence  pass  out  in  parallel  rays,  if  the  eye  is  emmetropic,  to  reach  the 
observer's  eye,  //.  C,  the  indirect  method  with  ophthalmoscopic  mirror  and  intercalated 
lens.  The  rays  of  Ught-red  lines  are  brought  to  a  focus  witMn  the  anterior  chamber  of 
the  eye  and  thence  diverge  to  give  a  general  illumination  of  the  interior  of  the  eyeball.  The 
returning  rays  of  light  are  indicated  for  a  single  point,  b.  At  a',  b',  c',  a  real  inverted  image 
of  a  portion  of  the  retina  is  formed  in  the  air,  which  in  turn  is  focused  on  the  retina  of  the 
observer's  eye. 


mirror  is  thrown  into  the  eye,  the  rays  coming  to  a  focus  and  then 
spreading  out  so  as  to  give  a  diffuse  illumination  of  the  fundus. 
This  latter  surface  may  now  be  considered  as  a  luminous  object 
sending  out  rays  of  light.  Taking  any  three  objects  on  the  retina, 
A,  B,  C,  it  is  apparent  that  if  eye  /  is  an  emmetropic  eye  these 
points  are  at  the  principal  focal  distance  and  the  rays  sent  from 
each  after  emerging  from  the  eye  are  in  parallel  bundles.  These 
rays  penetrate  the  hole  in  the  mirror  and  fall  into  the  observer's 


DIOPTRICS    OF   THE    EYE.  307 

eye  as  though  they  came  from  distant  objects.  If  the  observer's 
eye  is  also  emmetropic,  or  is  made  so  by  suitable  glasses,  these 
bundles  of  rays  will  be  focused  on  his  retina  without  an  act  of  accom- 
modation. He  must,  in  fact,  in  looking  through  the  mirror  gaze, 
not  at  the  eye  before  him,  but,  relaxing  his  accommodation,  gaze 
through  the  eye,  as  it  were,  into  the  distance.  In  this  way  he  will 
see  the  portion  of  the  retina  illuminated,  the  image  of  the  objects 
seen  being  inverted  on  his  own  retina  and  therefore  projected  or 
seen  erect.  If  the  observed  eye  is  myopic  its  retina  is  farther  back 
than  the  principal  focus  of  its  refracting  surfaces;  consequently 
the  rays  sent  out  from  the  illuminated  retina  emerge  in  converging 
bundles  and  can  not  be  focused  on  the  retina  of  the  observer's  eye. 
By  inserting  a  concave  lens  of  proper  power  between  his  eye  and 
the  mirror  the  observer  can  render  the  rays  parallel  and  thus  bring 
out  the  image.  From  the  power  of  the  lens  used  the  degree  of  my- 
opia may  be  estimated.  Just  the  reverse  happens  if  the  observed 
eye  is  hypermetropic.  In  such  an  eye  the  retina  is  nearer  than 
the  principal  focal  distance  of  the  refractive  surface ;  consequently 
the  light  emitted  from  the  retina  emerges  in  bundles  of  diverging 
rays  which  cannot  be  brought  to  a  focus  on  the  retina  of  the  ob- 
server unless  he  exerts  his  own  power  of  accommodation  or  inter- 
poses a  convex  lens  between  his  eye  and  the  mirror. 

The  indirect  method  of  using  the  ophthalmoscope  is  represented 
in  Fig.  131,  C.  The  mirror  is  held  at  some  distance,  at  arm's  length, 
from  the  observed  eye,  /,  while  just  before  this  eye  a  biconvex  lens 
of  short  focus  is  placed.  As  shown  in  the  diagram  by  the  red 
lines,  the  reflected  light  from  the  mirror  comes  to  a  focus  and  then 
diverging  falls  upon  the  biconvex  lens.  This  lens  brings  the  rays  to 
a  focus  at  or  in  the  eye,  whence  they  again  diverge  and  light  up 
the  retina  with  a  diffuse  illumination.  The  light  from  this  retina 
is  in  turn  sent  back  toward  the  mirror,  its  path  being  indicated  for 
the  point  h  by  the  black  lines.  If  the  eye  is  emmetropic  the  rays 
from  this  point  emerge  parallel,  and  falling  upon  the  biconvex  lens 
are  brought  to  a  focus  at  h' .  Similarly  the  rays  from  a  will  be 
brought  to  a  focus  at  a'  and  from  c  at  c'.  Consequently  there  will 
be  formed  in  the  air  an  inverted  image,  and  it  is  at  this  image  that 
the  eye  of  the  observer  gazes  through  the  hole  in  the  mirror.  This 
image  forms  its  image  on  the  retina  of  the  observer's  eye,  as  repre- 
sented in  the  diagram  at  a",  h",  d',  and  is  projected  outward  or  seen 
inverted  as  regards  the  original  position  of  the  points  in  the  retina 
of  eye  /.  The  indirect  method  is  the  one  usually  employed  in 
ophthalmoscopic  examinations  of  the  retina.  It  gives  a  larger 
field  than  the  direct  method,  although  the  objects  seen  are  of 
smaller  size. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  RETINA— VISUAL  STIMULI 
AND  VISUAL  SENSATIONS, 

The  Portion  of  the  Retina  Stimulated  by  Light. — The  normal 
stimulus  to  the  sensory  cells  in  the  retina  is  found  in  the  vibrations 
of  the  ether,  the  waves  of  light.  When  sunlight  is  passed  through  a 
prism  the  waves  of  different  lengths  are  dispersed,  and  those  capable 
of  stimulating  the  retina  form  the  visible  spectrum  extending  from 
red  to  violet.  The  limits  of  the  spectrum  are,  on  the  one  hand,  the 
extreme  red  rays  with  a  wave  length  of  ttwVoo"  i^i™-  ^^^  vibrating 
at  the  rate  of  about  390,000,000,000  per  second,  and,  on  the  other, 
the  extreme  violet,  having  a  wave  length  of  about  t'TfIVto"  mm- 
and  a  rate  of  vibration  of  757,000,000,000  per  second.  The  part  of 
the  retina  stimulated  by  these  vibrations  is  supposed  to  be  the  layer 
of  rods  and  cones.     To  reach  these  structures  the  light  must  pass 


Fig.  132. — To  demonstrate  the  blind  spot.  Fix  the  center  of  the  cross  with  the  right 
eye,  then  move  the  book  slowly  to  or  from  the  face.  At  a  certain  distance  the  image  of 
the  large  circle  to  the  right  will  disappear.  At  this  distance  the  image  of  the  circle  falls 
on  the  optic  disc. 

through  the  other  layers  of  the  retina.  That  the  rods  and  cones  are 
the  structures  that  react  to  the  light  stimulation  is  indicated  by 
their  structure  and  their  connections  and  by  such  facts  as  the  follow- 
ing: Under  certain  conditions,  which  are  described  below,  the 
shadows  of  the  retinal  vessels  and  the  contained  corpuscles  may  be 
seen,  a  fact  which  indicates  that  the  perceiving  structures  lie  ex- 
ternally to  these  vessels.  In  the  fovea  centralis,  in  which  vision  is 
most  perfect,  the  layers  of  the  retina  are  thinned  out  until  practically 
only  the  rods  and  cones  remain  to  be  acted  upon.  That  the  optic 
nerve  fibers  themselves  are  not  acted  upon  by  light  waves  is  proved 
by  the  existence  of  the  blind  spot.  The  termination  of  the  optic 
nerve  within  the  eyeball,  the  optic  disc,  lies  about  15  degrees  to  the 
nasal  side  of  the  fovea  and  has  a  diameter  of  about  1.5  mms.     From 

308 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA.  309 

this  point  the  nerve  fibers  spread  out  over  the  rest  of  the  optic  cup 
to  form  the  internal  layer  of  the  retina.  But  the  optic  disc  itself  has 
no  retinar  structure,  and  light  that  falls  upon  it  is  not  perceived. 
The  presence  of  this  blind  spot  in  our  visual  field  is  easily  demon- 
strated by  the  experiment  illustrated  and  described  in  Fig.  132. 
In  the  visual  field  for  each  eye,  therefore,  there  is  a  gap  representing 
the  projection  of  the  area  of  the  optic  disc  to  the  exterior,  the  size 
of  the  gap  increasing  with  the  distance  from  the  eye.  We  do  not 
notice  this  deficiency,  inasmuch  as  it  exists  in  our  indirect  field  of 
vision  (see  below),  in  which  our  perception  of  form  is  poorly  de- 
veloped ;  so  that  any  disturbance  in  outline  that  might  result  in  the 
retinal  image  of  external  objects  is  unperceived.  Morever,  the 
portion  of  the  external  world  that  falls  on  the  blind  spot  of  one  eye 
falls  on  the  retinal  field  of  the  other,  and  is  thus  perceived  in  binoc- 
ular vision.  It  is  to  be  borne  in  mind,  also,  that  the  projection  of 
the  blind  spot  does  not  appear  in  the  visual  field  as  a  dark  area;  it 
is  simply  an  absent  area,  so  that  no  gap  exists  in  our  consciousness  of 
the  spatial  relations  of  the  visual  field;  the  margins,  so  to  speak,  of 
the  hole  come  into  contact  so  far  as  our  consciousness  is  concerned. 
The  Action  Current  Caused  by  Stimulation  of  the  Retina. — 
The  effect  of  light  waves  falling  upon  the  retina  is  to  set  up  a  series 
of  nerve  impulses  in  the  optic  nerve  fibers.  It  is  interesting  to 
find  that  these  impulses  aroused  in  a  sensory  nerve  by  a  normal 
stimulus  are  attended  by  electrical  changes  similar  to  those  observed 
in  motor  fibers  when  stimulated  normally  or  artificially.  The  fact 
strengthens  the  view  that  the  electrical  change  is  an  invariable  ac- 
companiment of  the  nerve  impulse,  if  not  the  nerve  impulse  itself. 
If  the  eye  is  excised  and  connected  with  a  galvanometer  or  capillary 
electrometer  by  two  non-polarizable  electrodes,  one  placed  upon  the 
cut  end  of  the  optic  nerve  and  the  other  on  the  cornea,  the  usual 
demarcation  current  is  obtained  due  to  the  injury  to  the  optic  nerve. 
If  the  preparation  is  kept  in  the  dark  and  arrangements  are  made 
to  throw  a  light  through  the  pupil  upon  the  retina  the  galvanometer 
indicates  an  electrical  change  or  current  whenever  the  light  is 
admitted.*  The  direction  of  the  current  in  the  eyeball  is  from  the 
fundus  to  the  cornea,  and  as  regards  the  pre-existing  demarcation 
current  it  is  in  the  same  direction  and  forms,  therefore,  a  so-called 
positive  variation.  When  the  electrodes  are  placed  on  the  longi- 
tudinal and  the  cut  surface  of  the  optic  nerve,  then,  according  to 
Kiihne,  the  electrical  response  to  light  is  a  negative  variation  similar 
to  that  described  for  stimulation  of  nerves  in  general  (p.  96).  Not 
only  is  there  a  "light  response"  each  time  that  the  retina  is  stimu- 
lated by  light,  but  there  is  a  similar  electrical  change,  a  "  dark  re- 

*  Dewar  and  McKendrick,  "Transactions,  Royal  Society,  Edinburgh,"  27, 
1873;   Gotch,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  29,  388,  1903,  and  31,  1,  1904. 


310  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

sponse/'  when  the  light  is  suddenly  withdrawn.  This  last  interest- 
ing fact  would  seem  to  indicate  a  stimulation  process  of  some  kind 
in  the  retina  due  to  darkness, — that  is,  withdrawal  of  the  objective 
stimulus.  The  reaction  is  a  very  sensitive  one,  lights  so  weak  as  to 
be  near  the  threshold  for  the  human  eye  give  a  distinct  electrical 
change  in  the  frog's  retina,  and  an  eye  that  has  been  kept  in  the 
dark  for  some  time  (dark-adapted  eye)  shows  an  increased  sensitive- 
ness. It  is  very  interesting,  also,  to  find  that  the  frog's  retina 
responds  to  a  range  of  light  vibrations  that  corresponds  with  the 
limits  of  the  visible  spectrum  as  seen  by  the  human  eye.  If  the 
electrical  response  is  a  true  indication  of  functional  activity  it 
would  appear  that  the  frog's  vision  has  about  the  same  extent  as 
our  own  as  regards  the  ether  waves  of  different  periods  of  vibration. 
The  Visual  Purple — Rhodopsin.— The  change  that  takes  place 
in  the  rods  and  cones  whereby  the  vibratory  energy  of  the  ether 
waves  is  converted  into  nerve  impulses  is  unknown.  It  has  been 
assumed  by  some  observers  that  the  light  waves  act  mechanically, 
the  wave  movements  setting  into  vibration  portions  of  the  external 
segments  of  the  rods  or  cones,  and  that  this  mechanical  movement 
forms  the  direct  excitant  of  the  nerve  impulses.*  The  general 
view,  however,  is  that  the  process  is  photochemical, — that  is,  the 
impact  of  the  ether  waves  sets  up  chemical  changes  in  the  rods  or 
cones  which  in  turn  give  rise  to  nerve  impulses  that  are  transmitted 
to  the  brain.  We  have  an  analogy  for  this  action  in  the  known 
change  produced  by  light  upon  sensitized  photographic  films.  In 
the  retina  itself  some  basis  for  such  a  view  is  found  in  the  existence 
of  a  red  pigment  which  is  bleached  by  light.  This  interesting  dis- 
covery was  made  by  Boll,t  and  the  facts  were  afterward  carefully 
investigated  by  Kiihne.t  The  red  pigment,  known  usually  as 
visual  purple  or  rhodopsin,  is  found  only  in  the  external  segments 
of  the  rods;  the  cones  do  not  contain  it.  In  the  fovea,  therefore, 
which  has  only  cones,  the  pigment  is  entirely  absent.  The  existence 
of  the  visual  purple  may  be  demonstrated  very  easily.  A  frog  is 
kept  for  some  time  in  the  dark;  it  is  then  killed  and  an  eye  removed 
and  bisected  equatorially.  If  the  vitreous  is  removed  from  the  pos- 
terior half  the  retina  may  be  detached  by  means  of  a  pair  of  forceps. 
When  the  operation  is  performed  in  red  or  yellow  light,  as  in  photo- 
graphic work,  the  detached  retina  on  examination  by  daylight  is 
found  to  be  a  deep- red  color;  but  after  a  short  exposure  it  fades 
rapidly,  finally  becoming  colorless.  If  the  frogs  before  operation 
were   exposed    to    strong   daylight,   the    retina    is   found  to  be 

*  Zenker,  "Archiv  f.  mik.  Anatomie,"  3,  248,  1867. 

tBoU,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1877,  4. 

j  Kiihne,  "Untersuch.  a.  d.  physiol.  Inst.  d.  Univ.  Heidelberg,"  vol.  i, 
1878.  Also  "The  Photochemistry  of  the  Retina,  etc.,"  translated  by  Foster, 
London,   1878. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA. 


31 1 


colorless.  A  similar  pigment  is  found  in  the  eyes  of  man  and 
the  other  mammalia.  It  has  been  shown,  moreover,  that  a  photo- 
graph may  be  made  upon  the  surface  of  the  retina  by  means  of  this 
purple.  If  the  head  of  a  rabbit  or  frog  that  has  been  kept  in  the 
dark  for  some  time  is  exposed  with  proper  precautions  to  the  light 
of  a  window,  for  instance,  the  part  of  the  retina  on  which  the  image 
of  the  window-lights  falls  will  be  bleached,  while  the  parts  upon 
which  the  image  of  the  window-bars  falls  and  the  surrounding  areas 
of  the  retina  will  retain  their  red  color.  A  figure  of  such  a  retinal 
photograph  or  optogram,  as  it  is  called,  is  represented  in  the  accom- 
panying illustration  (Fig.  133).  The  visual  purple  has  been  extracted 
from  the  rods  by  solutions  of  bile  salts,  this  substance  having  the 
power  to  discharge  the  pigment  from  its  combination  in  the  rods  in 
the  same  way  as  it  discharges  hemoglobin  from  its  combination  in 
the  red  corpuscles.  The  solutions  thus  obtained  are  also  bleached 
upon  exposure  to  light.  We  have  in  the  visual  purple,  therefore, 
an  unstable  substance 
readily  decomposed  or 
altered  by  the  me- 
chanical effect  of  the 
ether  waves,  and  also, 
it  may  be  said,  by 
gross  mechanical  re- 
actions, such  as  com- 
pression; and  there 
can  be  little  doubt 
that  the  substance 
plays  an  important 
part  in  the  functional 

response  of  the  rod  elements.  It  has  been  shown  that  provision 
exists  in  the  retina  for  the  constant  regeneration  of  this  red  pigment. 
It  will  be  remembered  that  the  external  segments  of  the  rods  im- 
pinge upon  the  heavily  pigmented  epithelial  cells  that  lie  between 
the  rods  and  the  choroid  coat.  From  experiments  upon  frogs'  eyes 
it  appears  that  a  portion  of  the  retina  detached  from  the  pigment 
cells  and  bleached  by  the  action  of  light  is  not  able  to  regenerate  its 
visual  purple  until  again  laid  back  upon  the  choroid  coat.  This 
regenerating  influence  of  the  black  pigmented  cells  may  be  con- 
nected with  another  interesting  relation  that  they  exhibit.  Under 
normal  conditions  delicate  processes  extend  from  these  cells  and 
penetrate  between  the  rods  and  cones.  When  the  eye  is  exposed 
to  light  the  black  pigment  migrates  along  these  processes  as  far  even 
as  the  external  limiting  membrane,  and  it  is  possible  that  this  ar- 
rangement may  be  useful  in  obviating  diffuse  radiation  of  light 
from  one  rod  to  another.     When  the  eye  is  kept  in  the  dark,  however, 


Fig.  133. — Optogram  in  eye  of  rabbit:  1,  The  nor- 
mal appearance  of  the  retina  in  the  rabbit's  eye:  a,  The 
entrance  of  the  optic  nerve;  6,  6,  a  colorless  strip  of 
meduUated  nerve  fibers;  c,  a  strip  of  deeper  color  sepa- 
rating the  lighter  upper  from  the  more  heavily  pigmented 
lower  portion.     2  shows  the  optogram  of  a  window. 


312  THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 

the  pigment  moves  outwardly  and  collects  around  the  external 
segments,  where  the  process  of  regeneration  of  the  visual  purple  is 
taking  place.  Further  evidence  that  the  visual  purple  is  connected 
with  the  irritability  of  the  rods  toward  light  stimulation  is  shown 
by  the  fact  that  when  it  is  exposed  to  the  different  rays  of  the  spec- 
trum the  absorption  of  light  is  greatest  in  that  part  of  the  spec- 
trum (green)  which  appears  the  brightest  in  vision  when  carried  out 
under  such  conditions  as  may  be  supposed  to  involve  the  activity 
chiefly  of  the  rods  (see  below  for  these  conditions).  It  is,  however, 
perfectly  obvious  that  visual  purple  is  not  essential  to  vision.  The 
fact  that  it  is  absent  from  the  fovea  centralis  is  alone  sufficient 
proof  of  this  statement.  Moreover,  it  seems  to  be  absent  entirely 
in  the  eyes  of  some  animals;  for  instance,  the  pigeon,  hen,  some 
reptiles,  and  some  bats.  The  most  attractive  view  of  the  function 
of  the  visual  purple  is  that  it  serves  to  increase  the  delicacy  of  re- 
sponse or  irritability  of  the  rods  in  dim  hghts, — a  view  that  is  ex- 
plained in  more  detail  in  the  paragraph  below,  deaUng  with  the  sup- 
posed cUfference  in  function  between  the  rods  and  cones. 

The  Extent  of  the  Visual  Field — Perimetry. — By  the  visual  field 
of  each  eye  is  meant  the  entire  extent  of  the  external  world  which 
when  the  eye  is  fixed  forms  an  image  upon  or  is  projected  upon  the 
retina  of  that  eye.  From  what  has  been  said  previously  regarding 
the  dioptrics  of  the  eye  it  is  obvious  that  the  visual  field  is  inverted 
upon  the  retina,  and  that,  therefore,  objects  in  the  upper  visual  field 
fall  upon  the  lower  half  of  the  retina,  and  objects  in  the  right  haK 
of  the  visual  field  fall  upon  the  left  half  of  the  retina.  Since  the 
retina  is  sensitive  to  fight  up  to  the  ora  serrata,  it  is  evident  that  if 
the  eye  were  protn.ided  sufficiently  from  its  orbit  its  projected  visual 
field  when  represented  upon  a  flat  surface  would  have  the  form  of  a 
circle  the  center  of  which  would  correspond  to  the  fovea  centralis. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  configuration  of  the  face  is  such  as  to  cut 
off  a  considerable  part  of  this  field  and  to  give  to  the  field  as  it 
actually  exists  an  irregular  outline.  The  bridge  of  the  nose,  the 
projecting  eyebrows  and  cheek  bones  serv^e  to  thus  limit  the  field. 
To  obtain  the  exact  outline  and  extent  of  the  visual  field  in  any  given 
case  it  is  only  necessary  to  keep  the  eye  fixed  and  then  to  move  a 
small  object  in  the  chfferent  meridians  and  at  the  same  distance 
from  the  eye.  The  limits  of  vision  may  be  ol^tained  in  this  way 
along  each  meridian  and  the  results  combined  upon  an  appropriate 
chart.  An  instrument,  the  perimeter,  has  been  devised  to  facilitate 
the  process  of  charting  the  visual  field.  It  has  been  given  a  number 
of  different  forms,  one  of  which  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  1-34.  The  shape 
of  the  visual  fields  in  the  normal  eye  is  represented  in  Fig.  135. 
The  determination  of  the  visual  fields  is  of  especial  importance  in 
cases  of  brain  lesions  involving  the  visual  area  in  the  occipital  lobe. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA. 


313 


The  extent  and  portion  of  the  retina  affected  may  be  used  to  aid  in 
locating  the  seat  of  the  lesion.  For  physiological  and  for  cUnical 
purposes  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  between  the  central  (or  direct) 
and  the  peripheral  (or  indirect)  fields  of  vision.  The  former  term 
is  meant  to  refer  to  that  portion  of  the  field  which  falls  upon  the 
fovea  centralis;   in  other  words,  it  is  the  projection,  in  any  fixed 


Fig.  134. — Perinieter.  The  semicircular  bar  may  be  placed  in  any  meridian.  A 
given  object  is  then  moved  along  the  bar  from  without  in  until  it  is  just  perceived.  The 
angular  distance  at  which  this  occurs  is  marked  off  on  the  corresponding  meridian  on  the 
chart  seen  at  the  left  of  the  figure.  The  eye  examined  gazes  over  the  top  of  the  vertical 
rod  at  the  right  at  a  fixed  point  in  the  middle  of  the  semicircular  bar. 


position  of  the  eye,  of  the  fovea  into  the  external  world.  The 
peripheral  field  refers  to  the  rest  of  the  visual  field  involving  the 
retina  outside  the  fovea.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  all  of  our  distinct  and 
most  useful  vision  in  the  daytime  at  least  is  effected  through  the 
fovea.  When  the  eye  is  kept  fixed  the  small  portion  of  the  external 
world  that  falls  upon  the  fovea  is  seen  distinctly.  All  the  rest  is 
seen  more  or  less  indistinctly  in  proportion  to  the  distance  of  its 


314 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


retinal  image  from  the  fovea.  In  using  our  eyes,  therefore,  we  keep 
them  continually  in  motion  so  as  to  bring  each  object,  as  we  pay 
especial  attention  to  it,  in  the  field  of  central  vision.  The  line 
from  the  fovea  to  the  point  looked  at  is  designated  as  the  line  of 
sight.  The  area  of  the  fovea  is  quite  small.  The  measurements 
given  by  different  observers  vary  somewhat,  especially  as  in  some 
cases  the  measurements  are  estimated  for  the  bottom  of  the  de- 
pression, the  fundus,  and  in  others  for  the  diameter  from  edge  to 
edge.  The  average  diameter  is  usually  given  as  lying  between  0.3 
and  0.4  mm.     Lines  drawn  from  the  ends  of  this  diameter  to  the 


'^     06L      081      Ot.\ 

Fig.   135. — Perimeter  chart  to  show  the  field  of  vision  for  a  right  eye  when  kept  in  a  fixed 

position. 


nodal  point  of  the  eye  subtend  an  angle  of  1  degree  to  1 .5  degrees ; 
and  therefore  all  objects  in  the  external  world  around  the  line  of 
sight  whose  visual  angle  is  within  this  limit  are  comprised  in  the 
central  field  of  vision,  and  their  retinal  images  fall  upon  the  fovea. 
Unilateral  lesions  of  one  occipital  lobe  cause  half-blindness  (hemi- 
opia)  in  the  retinas  on  the  same  side, — that  is,  lesions  in  the  right 
occipital  lobe  cause  blindness  of  the  right  halves  of  the  retinas,  while 
injuries  to  the  left  occipital  lobes  are  accompanied  by  loss  of  vision 
on  the  left  sides  of  the  retinas  (see  p.  193);  but  such  unilateral 
lesions,  it  is  stated,  do  not  involve  the  central  field  of  vision — only 
the  peripheral  portion  of  the  field  is  affected.     In  connection  with 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA.  315 

its  special  functions  in  vision  the  fovea  centralis  possesses  a  peculiar 
structure.  It  forms  a  shallow  depression  in  the  center  of  the  retina 
described  by  some  authors  as  elliptical,  by  others  as  circular  in  out- 
line. In  the  center  of  the  fovea  lies  a  smaller,  very  shallow  depres- 
sion spoken  of  as  the  foveola.  The  diameter  of  the  fovea,  as  stated 
above^  is  estimated  differently  by  different  authors.  While  meas- 
urements on  preserved  specimens  give  the  diameter  as  0.2  to 
0.4  mm.,  ophthalmoscopic  examination  seems  to  indicate  that  in 
the  fresh  state  it  may  be  larger.  According  to  Fritsch,*  the  fundus, 
reckoned  from  the  point  at  which  the  depression  begins,  has  a  diam- 
eter of  0.5  to  0.75  mm.  Within  the  fovea  cones  only  are  present, 
and  these  cones  are  longer  and  more  slender  (diameter,  0.002  mm.) 
than  in  the  rest  of  the  retina.  Moreover,  the  thickness  of  the  retina 
is  much  reduced  in  the  fovea,  whence  arises  the  depression.  At 
this  point  the  cones  are  practically  exposed  directly  to  the  light, 
whereas  in  other  parts  the  light  must  penetrate  the  other  layers 
before  reaching  the  rods  and  cones.  Lying  around  the  fovea  is  an 
area  about  6  mm.  in  diameter,  of  a  yellowish  color,  and  hence 
known  as  the  macula  lutea.  Central  vision  is  sometimes  designated 
erroneously  as  macular  vision  instead  of  foveal  vision. 

Visual  Acuity. — The  distinctness  of  vision  varies  greatly  in 
different  parts  of  the  retina.  It  is  usually  measured  by  bringing 
two  fine  lines  closer  and  closer  together  until  the  eye  is  unable 
to  see  them  as  two  distinct  objects.  Measured  in  this  way  it  is 
usually  stated  that  when  the  distance  between  the  lines  subtends  an 
angle  of  1  minute  (60  seconds)  at  the  eye  the  limit  of  visibility  is 
reached.  This  angle  on  the  retina  comprises  an  area  of  about  0.004 
mm.  in  diameter,  sufficient  to  cover  two  cones  in  the  fovea.  A 
simpler  method  to  ascertain  the  size  of  a  just  perceptible  image 
on  the  retina  is  to  use  a  black  spot  upon  a  white  background.  At  a 
sufficient  distance  this  object  will  be  invisible,  but  if  brought  closer 
to  the  eye  it  will  be  just  seen  at  a  certain  distance.  The  diameter 
of  the  spot  being  known,  and  its  distance  from  the  eye,  the  size  of  the 
retinal  image  may  be  calculated.  Using  this  method,  Guillery 
estimated  the  size  of  the  just  perceptible  retinal  image,  or,  as  it 
has  been  appropriately  called,  the  'physiological  point,  at  0.0035  mm. 
These  estimates  apply  only  to  the  fovea,  and,  indeed,  to  the  central 
part  of  the  fovea,  the  foveola.  Numerous  authors  have  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  the  size  of  the  physiological  point  for  the 
fovea  varies  with  the  intensity  of  illumination.  The  estimates 
given  are  for  ordinary  room  light.  Out  of  doors,  and  especially  in 
the  case  of  persons  who  live  habitually  an  outdoor  life,  the  physio- 

*  Fritsch,  "Sitzungsberichte  d.  konig.  Akad.  d.  Wiss.,"  Berlin,  1900. 
t  Guillery,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Psychologie  u.  Physiol,  d.  Sinnesorgane,"  12, 
243,  1896. 


316 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


logical  point  is  smaller — less  than  half  the  size  given  above.  We 
may  believe,  therefore,  that  under  the  most  favorable  conditions 
we  can  perceive  an  object  whose  image  on  the  fovea  is  less  than  the 
diameter  (0.002  mm.)  of  a  single  cone.  The  acuity  of  vision  does 
not  vary  greatly  throughout  the  fovea;  any  object  whose  retinal 
image  falls  well  within  the  fovea  can  be  seen  quite  distinctly  in  all 
of  its  parts  when  the  eye  is  fixed  for  the  center  of  the  object.     This 


'"C 

ie 

h 

<^  _ 

1 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

1 

\ 

.... 

/ 

s 

/ 

s 

\ 

/  — 

\ 



.-' 

- 

^ 

^- 

— 

-" 

"^N. 

^'' 

— 

- 

— 

— 

-■^ 

-^ 

— 



"'" 

"^ 

\ 

y 

— 

— 

60" 

Si. 

f 

^ 

f 

c?< 

•)" 

^< 

T 

H 

fs 

'  c 

>' V 

"  / 

r 

JSi 

f 

J 

Q' 

4 

0' 

<5 

Q' 

60 

Fig.  136. — Curve  to  show  the  relative  acuity  of  vision  in  the  central  and  peripheral 
fields  and  in  the  light-adapted  and  the  dark-adapted  eye. — {Koester^  The  full  line  repre- 
sents the  relative  acuteness  of  vision  in  the  eye  exposed  to  usual  illumination.  From  the 
center  of  the  fovea,  0°,  the  acuity  of  vision  falls  rapidly  at  first  and  then  more  slowly  as  one 
passes  outward  into  the  peripheral  field.  The  dotted  line  represents  the  acuity  of  vision  in 
dim  Ughts.  The  fovea,  it  will  be  noticed,  is  less  sensitive  than  the  parts  of  the  retina  at  an 
angular  distance  of  10°  or  even  60°. 


is  the  case,  for  instance,  with  the  moon.  Nevertheless,  in  looking 
at  such  an  object  as  the  moon  the  eye  to  make  out  details  will 
fixate  one  point  after  another,  showing  that  for  most  distinct 
vision  we  use  probably  only  the  center  of  the  fovea.  As  we  pass  out 
from  the  fovea  in  the  peripheral  field  of  vision  the  acuity  of  vision 
diminishes  at  first  very  rapidly,  so  that  at  20  degrees,  for  instance, 
from  the  center  of  the  fovea  the  physiological  point  on  the  retina  is 
0.035  mm.;   that  is,  it  has  a  diameter  ten  times  as  large  as  in  the 


PROPERTIES    OF    THE    RETINA.  317 

fovea.  On  this  account  our  vision  in  the  peripheral  field  is  very 
indistinct,^-details  of  form  cannot  be  clearly  perceived.  The 
rapidity  with  which  visual  acuity  diminishes  as  we  pass  outward 
from  the  fovea  is  indicated  by  the  curve  given  in  Fig.  136.  In  all 
close  work,  therefore,  we  keep  our  eyes  moving  continually  so  as  to 
bring  one  point  after  another  into  the  ceater  of  the  fovea,  as  is  well 
illustrated  by  the  act  of  reading.  If  the  eye  is  kept  fixed  upon  the 
central  letter  of  a  long  word,  only  one  or  two  letters  on  each  side 
can  be  made  out  distinctly  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  with  such 
familiar  objects  we  can  guess  the  letter  even  when  the  image  is  not 
entirely  distinct.  In  ophthalmological  practice  the  acuity  of  vision 
(central  vision)  is  measured  usually  by  test  letters  whose  size  is 
such  that  at  the  distance  at  which  they  are  read — say,  6  meters  (20 
feet),  the  practical  far  point  at  which  no  accommodation  is  needed — 
each  subtends  at  the  eye  an  angle  of  5  minutes.  An  eye  that  can 
distinguish  the  letters  at  this  distance  is  said  to  be  normal ;  one  that 
can  distinguish  them  only  at  a  smaller  distance  or  at  the  given 
distance  requires  letters  of  larger  size  has  a  subnormal  acuity  of 
vision.  If,  for  instance,  an  individual  at  20  feet  can  read  only 
those  letters  that  the  normal  eye  can  distinguish  at  100  feet  his 
visual  acuity,  V,  is  equal  to  iVt- 

Relation  between  the  Amount  of  Sensation  and  the  Intensity 
of  the  Stimulus — Threshold  Stimulus. — With  the  sensory  as  with 
the  motor  nerves  we  may  distinguish  between  various  degrees  of  sub- 
maximal  stimulation.  The  stronger  the  stimulus,  the  stronger  the 
reaction,-  -that  is,  in  the  case  of  the  optic  nerve,  the  visual  sensation. 
The  end  reaction  of  the  activity  of  a  sensory  nerve  is  a  state  of  con- 
sciousness. The  variations  in  magnitude  of  this  state  can  not  be 
measured  with  objective  exactness,  they  must  be  judged  subjectively 
by  the  individual  concerned.  A  stimulus  too  weak  to  give  a  re- 
sponse with  a  motor  nerve  is  usually  designated  in  physiology  as 
subminimal ;  a  similar  stimulus  with  sensory  nerves  is  frequently 
expressed  by  the  equivalent  term  subliminal, — that  is,  below  the 
threshold.  So  a  stimulus  just  strong  enough  to  provoke  a  percep- 
tible reaction  is  the  minimal  stimulus  for  efferent  nerves  and  the 
threshold  stimulus  for  sensory  nerves.  Inasmuch  as  the  variations 
in  the  intensity  of  consciousness  can  not  be  adequately  measured, 
it  is  customary,  in  studying  the  relations  of  the  strength  of  stimulus 
to  the  conscious  response,  to  pay  attention  to  the  strength  of  stimu- 
lus under  any  given  condition  Avhich  is  sufficient  to  arouse  a  just 
perceptible  difference  in  the  conscious  reaction.  Proceeding  upon 
this  method,  it  is  found  in  the  case  of  the  visual  sensations  and  the 
optic  nerve,  as  with  other  sensations  and  their  corresponding  nerves, 
that  the  increase  of  stimulus  necessary  to  cause  a  just  perceptible 
change  in  consciousness  varise  with  the  amout  of  stimulus  already 


318  THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 

acting.  If,  for  instance,  the  retina  is  being  stimulated  by  a  light  of 
1  candle  power  an  increase  of  illumination  to  1.1  candle  power  may- 
make  a  perceptible  difference  in  sensation.  But  if  the  retina  is 
being  illuminated  b}^  a  light  of  10  candle  power  an  increase  to  10.1 
candle  power  would  probably  make  no  perceptible  difference.  For 
a  certain  range  of  stimulation,  in  fact,  it  has  been  stated  that  the 
increase  in  stimulus  must  be  a  constant  fractional  part  of  the  stimu- 
lus already  acting.  That  is,  in  the  hypothetical  case  given,  if,  with 
1  candle  power,  an  increase  to  1.1  candle  power  makes  a  just  per- 
ceptible difference  in  consciousness,  then  with  10  candle  power  an 
increase  of  y-g  of  the  acting  stimulus,  namely — 1  candle  power — will 
be  necessary  to  cause  a  perceptible  difference.  The  relation  as 
expressed  in  this  form  is  known  as  Weber's  law;  but  it  seems  prob- 
able that,  while  the  general  fact  is  true,  this  exact  expression  of  it 
holds  only  approximately  for  an  intermediate  range  of  stimulation. 
In  this  matter  of  a  threshold  stimulus  the  sensitiveness  of  the 
retina  shows  also  certain  interesting  differences  in  the  foveal  as 
compared  with  the  peripheral  field.  The  difference  is  especially 
marked  when  the  reaction  of  the  retina  in  strong  lights  is  compared 
with  its  reaction  in  dim  lights. 

The  Light-adapted  and  the  Dark-adapted  Eye. — The  con- 
dition of  the  retina  changes  when  after  exposure  to  light  it  is  sub- 
mitted to  darkness,  the  change  being  most  marked  in  the  peripheral 
field.  The  change  is  known  as  an  adaptation,  and  in  this  respect 
the  retina  differs  from  the  sensitive  photographic  plate.  When  the 
eye,  for  instance,  is  kept  in  the  dark,  the  sensitiveness  in  the  periph- 
eral field  increases  during  an  hour  or  so,  while  that  of  the  foveal  field 
is  apparently  unchanged.  With  such  a  dark-adapted  eye,  there- 
fore, there  will  be  a  certain  dim  light  which  will  be  seen  by  the 
peripheral  parts  of  the  retina,  but  perhaps  will  cause  no  reaction 
upon  the  fovea.  For  such  a  degree  of  light,  therefore,  the  fovea 
would  be  bUnd.  This  general  fact  has,  indeed,  long  been  known. 
Anyone  may  notice  in  late  twilight,  when  the  stars  are  beginning 
to  appear,  that  a  very  faint  star  may  disappear  when  looked  at, — that 
is,  when  its  image  is  brought  upon  the  fovea ;  to  see  it  one  must  direct 
his  eyes  a  little  to  the  side,  so  as  to  bring  its  image  into  the  periph- 
eral field.  This  greater  sensitiveness  of  the  dark-adapted  eye  in 
the  peripheral  field  where  the  rods  predominate  over  the  cones  seems 
to  be  associated  with  the  movement  of  the  pigment  in  the  pigment 
epithelium  (see  above)  and  the  resulting  regeneration  of  the  visual 
purple  in  the  external  segments  of  the  rods.  The  increase  in  the 
visual  purple  in  the  dark  may,  indeed,  account  for  the  increased 
sensitiveness  to  light  in  the  rod-region  and  explain  why  a  similar 
increase  fails  to  occur  in  the  fovea,  where  only  cones  are  present. 
The  curve  given  in  Fig.  136  shows  that  in  the  dark-adapted  eye 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA,  319 

the  acuity  of  vision  in  the  peripheral  field  is  greater  than  in  the 
fovea.  In  accordance  with  these  facts  von  Kries*  has  suggested  that 
the  rods,  the  peripheral  field  of  the  retina,  are  especially  adapted 
for  vision  in  dim  lights,  night  vision,  while  the  cones  are  especially 
adapted  for  vision  in  strong  lights,  day  vision.  This  general  fact 
will  perhaps  accord  with  the  experience  of  anyone  who  attempts 
to  estimate  the  value  of  his  peripheral  vision  in  dim  nightlight  as 
compared  with  daylight.  Other  interesting  differences  in  the  reac- 
tion of  the  light-adapted  and  the  dark-adapted  eye  are  referred  to 
below  in  connection  with  color  blindness. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  VISUAL  SENSATIONS. 

In  addition  to  the  spatial  attributes  connected  with  our  visual 
sensations — that  is,  the  perception  of  form — they  are  characterized 
by  two  properties  which  may  be  described  in  general  as  variations 
in  intensity  and  in  quality. 

Luminosity  or  Brightness. — That  characteristic  which  we 
describe  as  the  luminosity  or  brightness  of  a  visual  sensation  has 
been  defined  differently  by  various  writers.  We  may  consider  it, 
however,  as  the  expression  of  the  intensity  of  the  acting  stimulus. 
Sensations  of  the  same  quality  are  easily  compared  as  regards  their 
brightness.  We  can  tell  as  between  two  whites  or  two  greens  which 
is  the  brighter  of  the  two,  but  when  two  different  qualities — a  red 
and  a  green  sensation,  for  instance — are  compared  our  subjective 
determination  of  the  relative  brightness  is,  for  most  persons,  difficult 
or  impossible  to  make.  To  a  lesser  degree  the  difficulty  is  similar 
to  that  of  the  comparison  of  sight  and  sound.  According  to  the 
conception  adopted  here,  however,  that  the  brightness  is  an  ex- 
pression of  the  intensity  of  the  stimulus,  an  objective  standard  of 
comparison  might  be  obtained  by  measuring  the  resulting  action  cur- 
rents in  the  optic  nerve  fibers.  When  the  spectral  colors  are  ex- 
amined it  is  obvious  that  some  of  the  colors  are  brighter  than  others, 
the  extreme  red  and  extreme  violet,  for  instance,  possessing  Uttle 
luminosity  as  compared  with  the  yellow.  The  relative  brightness 
of  the  different  spectral  colors  is  found  to  vary  with  the  amount  of 
illumination,  as  is  shown  in  the  curves  given  in  Fig.  137.  With  a 
brilliant  spectrum  the  maximum  brightness  is  in  the  yellow,  but 
with  a  feeble  illumination  it  shifts  to  the  green.  This  fact  accords 
with  what  is  known  as  the  "  Purkinje  phenomenon," — namely,  the 
changing  luminosity  and  color  value  of  colors  in  dim  lights.  As  the 
light  becomes  more  feeble  the  colors  toward  the  red  end  of  the 
spectrum  lose  their  quality,  the  blue  colors  being  perceived  last  of 

*  Von  Kries,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Psychologie  u.  Physiologic  d.  Sinnesorgane," 
9,  81,  1895. 


320 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


all.  Just  as  in  late  twilight  it  may  be  noticed  that  the  sky  remains 
distinctly  blue  after  the  colors  of  the  landscape  become  indis- 
tinguishable. With  a  very  feeble  illumination  the  dark-adapted  eye 
becomes  practically  totally  color  blind. 

Qualities  of  Visual  Sensations. — The  different  qualities  of  our 
color  sensations  may  be  arranged  in  two  series:  an  achromatic 
series,  consisting  of  white  and  black  and  the  intermediate  grays, 
and  a  chromatic  series,  comprising  the  various  spectral  colors,  to- 
gether with  the  purples  made  by  combination  of  the  two  ends  of 


A8 

3,6 

3/t 

3M 

3,- 

■ZfS- 

ifi 

'i» 

« 

/,- 
OS 


/ 

^ 

I 

\ 
\  \ 

\ 

\ 

\\ 
\\ 

\ 

I 

1 

1 

!  . 

1  1 

1 

i 
1 

1 
1 

■ 

/' 
/' 

/ 

\ 

<, 

s\ 

\\ 

. 

' 

1 
i 

'■■ 

"""— 

--'A 

II 

^ 

".  :^":-'  ■ 

fe^  ■-•':- 

1 1 
1 

/ 

/ 

, 

V'^""^ 

1 

i'' 

-■■" 

/' 

t 

^'' 

.^■- 

''  . 

^^•' 

,.. 

-^ 

£:^ 

-•- 

- 

» 

em    650      (lis     60S  690   SYS        iSf  iSi         SiO         SOi  fi90  ¥10 

BCD  E  F 


tio 

e 


Fig.  137. — Diagram  showing  the  distribution  of  the  intensity  of  the  spectrum  as  de- 
pendent upon  the  degree  of  illumination.  The  spectrum  is  represented  along  the  abscissa, 
the  nurnerals  giving  the  wave  lengths  from  red,  670,  to  violet,  430.  The  ordinates  give 
the  luminosity  of  the  different  colors.  Eight  curves  are  given  to  show  the  changes  in 
distribution  of  relative  brightness  with  changes  in  degree  of  illumination.  With  the 
greatest  illumination  the  maximum  brightness  is  in  the  yellow  (605-625) ;  with  weaker 
illumination  it  shifts  to  the  green  (535)  .—{Konig. ) 


the  spectrum,  red  and  blue,  and  the  colors  obtained  by  fusion  of 
the  spectral  colors  with  white  or  with  black,  such,  for  instance,  as 
the  olives  and  browns. 

The  Achromatic  Series. — Our  standard  white  sensation  is  that 
caused  by  sunlight.  Objects  reflecting  to  our  eye  all  the  visible 
rays  of  the  sunlight  give  us  a  white  sensation.  This  sensation, 
therefore,  is  due  primarily  to  the  combined  action  of  all  the  visible 
rays  of  the  spectrum,  each  of  which,  taken  separately,  would  give 
us  a  color  sensation.     White  or  gray  may  be  produced  also  by  the 


PROPERTIES    OF    THE    RETINA.  321 

combined  action  of  certain  pairs  of  colors, — complementary  colors, — 
as  is  described  below.  Black,  on  the  contrary,  is  the  sensation 
caused  by  withdrawal  of  light.  It  must  be  emphasized  that  in 
order  to  see  black  a  retina  must  be  present.  It  is  probable  that 
a  person  with  both  eyes  enucleated  has  no  sensation  of  darkness. 
That  black  is  a  sensation  referable  to  a  condition  of  the  retina  is 
made  probable  also  by  the  interesting  observations  recorded  by 
Gotch,* — namely,  that  when  an  eye  that  has  been  exposed  to  light 
is  suddenly  cut  off  from  the  light  there  is  an  electrical  change  in  the 
retina,  a  dark  response,  similar  to  that  caused  by  throwing  light  on 
a  retina  previously  kept  in  the  dark.  Blackness,  therefore,  is  a 
sensation  produced  by  withdrawing  light  from  the  retina,  and  a 
black  object  is  one  that  reflects  no  hght  to  the  eye.  Black  may  be 
combined  with  white  to  produce  the  series  of  grays,  and  when  com- 
bined with  the  spectral  colors  it  gives  a  series  of  modified  color  tones, 
thus  the  olives  of  different  shades  may  be  considered  as  combina- 
tions of  green  and  black  in  varying  proportions. 

The  chromatic  series  consists  of  those  qualities  to  which  we  give 
the  name  of  colors,  and,  as  stated  above,  they  comprise  the  spectral 
colors,  and  the  extraspectral  color,  purple,  together  with  the  light- 
weak  and  light-strong  hues  obtained  by  combining  the  colors  with 
white  or  black.  In  the  spectrum  many  different  colors  may  be 
detected, — some  observers  record  as  many  as  one  hundred  and 
sixty, — but  in  general  we  give  specific  names  only  to  those  that 
stand  sufficiently  far  apart  to  represent  quite  distinct  sensations, — 
namely,  the  red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue,  and  violet.  When 
light  is  taken  from  a  definite  limited  portion  of  the  spectrum  we 
have  a  monochromatic  light  that  gives  us  a  distinct  color  sensation 
varying  with  the  wave  length  of  the  portion  chosen. 

Color  Saturation  and  Color  Fusion. — The  term  saturation  as 
applied  to  colors  is  meant  to  define  their  freedom  from  accompany- 
ing white  sensation.  A  perfectly  saturated  color  would  be  one 
entirely  free  from  mixture  with  white.  On  the  objective  side  it  is 
easy  to  select  a  monochromatic  bundle  of  rays  from  the  spectrum 
without  admixture  of  white  light,  but  on  the  physiological  side  it  is 
not  probable  that  the  color  sensation  thus  produced  is  entirely  free 
from  white  sensation,  since  the  monochromatic  rays  may  initiate 
in  the  retina  not  only  the  specific  processes  underlying  the  pro- 
duction of  its  special  color,  but  at  the  same  time  give  rise  in  some 
degree  to  the  processes  causing  white  sensations.  Even  the  spectral 
colors  are  therefore  not  entirely  saturated,  but  they  come  as  near 
to  giving  us  this  condition  as  we  can  get  without  changing  the  state 
of  the  retina  itself  by  previous  stimulation. 

Color  Fusion. — By  color  fusion  we  mean  the  combination  of  two 

*  Gotch,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  29,  388,  1903. 
21 


322  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

or  more  color  processes  in  the  retina,  this  end  being  obtained  by- 
superposing  upon  the  same  portion  of  the  retina  the  rays  giving 
rise  to  these  color  processes.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  color 
fusion  upon  the  retina  is  quite  a  different  thing  from  color  mixture 
as  practised  by  the  artist.  A  blue  pigment,  such  as  Prussian  blue, 
for  instance,  owes  its  blue  color  to  the  fact  that  when  sunlight  falls 
upon  it  the  red-yellow  rays  are  absorbed  and  only  the  blue,  with 
some  of  the  green,  rays  are  reflected  to  the  eye.  So  a  yellow  pig- 
ment, chrome  yellow,  absorbs  the  blue,  violet,  and  red  rays  and 
reflects  to  the  eye  only  the  yellow  with  some  of  the  green  rays.  A 
mixture  of  the  two  upon  the  palette  will  absorb  all  the  rays  except 
the  green  and  will  therefore  appear  green  to  the  eye.  If,  however, 
by  means  of  a  suitable  device,  we  throw  simultaneously  upon  the 
retina  a  blue  and  a  yellow  light,  the  result  of  the  retinal  fusion  is 
a  sensation  of  white.  Many  different  methods  have  been  employed 
to  throw  colors  simultaneously  upon  the  retina,  the  most  perfect 
being  a  system  of  lenses  or  mirrors  by  which  different  portions  of 
a  spectrum  can  be  superposed.  The  usual  device  employed  in 
laboratory  experiments  is  that  of  rotation  of  discs  of  colored  paper. 
Each  disc  has  a  sUt  in  it  from  center  to  periphery  so  that  two  discs 
can  be  fitted  together  to  expose  more  or  less  of  each  color.  If  a 
combination  of  this  kind  is  attached  to  a  small  electrical  motor  it 
can  be  rotated  so  rapidly  that  the  impressions  of  the  two  colors 
upon  the  retina  follow  at  such  a  short  interval  of  time  as  to  be  prac- 
tically simultaneous. 

The  Fundamental  and  the  Complementary  Colors. — By  the 
methods  of  color  fusion  it  can  be  shown  that  three  colors  may  be 
selected  from  the  spectrum  whose  combinations  in  different  propor- 
tions will  give  white  or  any  of  the  intermediate  color  shades,  or 
purple.  Considered  purely  objectively,  a  set  of  three  such  colors 
may  be  designated  as  the  fundamental  colors,  and  red,  yellow,  and 
blue,  or  red,  green,  and  violet  have  been  the  three  colors  selected. 
On  the  physiological  side,  however,  it  has  been  assumed  that  there 
are  certain  more  or  less  independent  color  processes — photochemical 
processes — in  the  retina  which  give  us  our  fundamental  color  sen- 
sations, and  that  all  other  color  sensations  are  combinations  of  these 
processes  in  varying  proportions  with  each  other  or  with  the  proc- 
esses causing  white  and  black.  Referring  only  to  the  colors  proper, 
the  fundamental  color  sensations  according  to  some  views  are  red, 
green,  and  blue  or  violet;  according  to  others,  they  are  red,  yellow, 
green,  and  blue.     (See  paragraph  on  Theories  of  Color  Vision.) 

Helmholtz  calls  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  names  used  for  these  funda- 
mental color  sensations  are  obviously  of  ancient  origin,  thus  indicating  that 
the  difference  in  quality  of  the  sensations  has  been  long  recognized.  Red  is 
from  the  Sanskrit  rudhira,  blood;    blue  from  the  same  root  as  blow,  and  re- 


V!..c--ErErO  ^  B 
d     .        ^  C  re  X  ° 


-^s 


Jtrco 


O  3  B  —      H 
^3-po  o  q  ^j^ 

i^  o  TJcS  S  a  „  o 
(c  o  g  a  cH-  »  IS 


■'^"£.0  o  0) 


^.d   ^    d    £    r1- 
E  CO    ' 


Jt.Ctl  ' 


re  I—its'^ 
re  „.re  ">re  ^ 
re  £:"^^  ^^ 

?"£  re'S  f^K'l 
JB  2.     '<  re  c 

O  ^  H  C  re'^ 
p  _«,o  re  o  ^, 
S-      c  ^       "^  m 

§|r.od(R? 
C'g-S  2.*2re 


?o^. 


PROPERTIES    OP   THE    RETINA.  323 

f ers  to  the  color  of  the  air ;  green  from  the  same  root  as  grow,  referring  to  the 
color  of  vegetation.  Yellow  seems  to  be  derived  from  the  same  root  as  gold, 
which  typified  the  color.  The  other  less  distinct  qualities  have  names  of 
recent  application,  such  as  orange,  violet,  indigo  blue,  etc. 

Complementary  Colors. — It  has  been  found  by  the  methods  of 
color  fusion  that  certain  pairs  of  colors  when  combined  give  a  white 
(gray)  sensation.  It  may  be  said,  in  fact,  that  for  any  given  color 
there  exists  a  complement  such  that  the  fusion  of  the  two  in  suitable 
proportions  gives  white.  If  we  confine  ourselves  to  the  spectral 
colors  we  recognize  such  complementary  pairs  as  the  following: 

Red  and  greenish  blue. 

Orange  and  cyan  blue. 

Yellow  and  indigo  blue. 

Greenish  yellow  and  violet. 
The  complementary  color  for  green  is  the  extraspectral  purple. 
Colors  that  are  closer  together  in  the  spectral  series  than  the 
complementaries  give  on  fusion  some  intermediate  color  which  is 
more  saturated — that  is,  less  mixed  with  white  sensation — the  nearer 
the  colors  are  together.  Thus,  red  and  yellow,  when  fused,  give 
orange.  Colors  farther  apart  than  the  distance  of  the  comple- 
mentaries give  some  shade  of  purple.  On  the  physical  side,  there- 
fore, we  can  produce  a  sensation  of  white  in  two  ways :  Either  by  the 
combined  action  of  all  the  visible  rays  of  the  spectrum  (sunlight) 
or  by  the  combined  action  of  pairs  of  colors  whose  wave  lengths  vary 
by  a  certain  interval.  It  is  probable  that  in  the  retina  the  processes 
induced  by  these  two  methods  are  qualitatively  the  same,  the 
wave-lengths  represented  by  the  complementary  colors  setting  up 
by  their  combined  action  the  same  photochemical  processes  that 
normally  are  induced  by  the  sunlight. 

After-images.^ — As  the  name  implies,  this  term  refers  to  images 
that  remain  in  consciousness  after  the  objective  stimulus  has  ceased 
to  act  upon  the  retina.  They  are  due  doubtless  to  the  fact  that  the 
changes  set  up  in  the  retina  by  the  visual  stimulus  continue,  with 
or  without  modification,  after  the  stimulus  is  withdrawn.  After- 
images are  of  two  kinds:  positive  and  negative.  In  the  positive 
after-images  the  visual  sensation  retains  its  normal  colors.  If  one 
looks  at  an  incandescent  electric  light  for  a  few  seconds  and  then 
closes  his  eyes  he  continues  to  see  the  luminous  object  for  a  con- 
siderable time  in  its  normal  colors.  Objects  of  much  less  intensity 
of  illumination  give  positive  after-images,  especially  when  the 
eyes  have  been  kept  closed  for  some  time,  as,  for  instance,  upon 
waking  in  the  morning.  In  negative  after-images  the  colors  are  all 
reversed, — that  is,  they  take  on  the  complementary  qualities  (see 
Fig.  138).  White  becomes  black,  red  a  bluish  green,  and  vice  versa. 
Negative  after  images  are  produced  very  easily  by  fixing  the  eyes 


324  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

steadily  upon  a  given  object  for  an  interval  of  twenty  seconds  or 
more  and  then  closing  them.  In  the  case  of  colored  objects  the 
after-image  is  shown  better,  perhaps,  by  turning  the  eyes  upon  a 
white  surface  after  the  period  of  fixation  is  over.  After-images 
produced  in  this  way  often  appear  and  disappear  a  number  of 
times  before  ceasing  entirely,  and,  although  the  color  at  first  is  the 
complementary  of  that  of  the  object  looked  at,  it  may  change  before 
its  final  disappearance.  Anyone  who  has  gazed  for  even  a  brief 
interval  at  the  setting  sun  will  remember  the  number  of  colored  and 
changing  after-images  seen  for  a  time  when  the  eye  is  turned  to 
another  portion  of  the  sky.  That  several  different  after-images 
are  seen  in  this  case  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  eyes  are  not  kept 
fixed  under  the  dazzling  light  of  the  sun,  and  a  number  of  different 
images  are  formed,  therefore,  upon  the  retina. 

After-images  may  be  used  in  a  very  instructive  way  to  show  that 
our  estimates  of  the  size  of  a  retinal  image  vary  with  the  distance  to 
which  we  project  it, — that  is,  with  the  distance  at  which  we  suppose 
we  see  it.  Once  the  image  is,  so  to  speak,  branded  on  the  retina, 
its  actual  size,  of  course,  does  not  vary,  but  our  judgment  of  its  size 
may  be  made  to  vary  rapidly  by  projecting  the  image  upon  screens  at 
different  distances.  If,  for  instance,  in  obtaining  the  after-image 
of  the  strips  shown  in  Fig.  138  one  moves  the  white  paper  used 
to  catch  the  image  toward  and  away  from  the  eye,  the  apparent  size 
varies  proportionally  to  its  distance. 

Color  Contrasts. — By  color  contrast  is  meant  the  influence 
that  one  color  field  has  upon  a  contiguous  one.  If,  for  instance,  a 
piece  of  blue  paper  is  laid  upon  a  larger  yellow  square,  the  color 
of  each  of  them  is  heightened  by  contrast.  A  piece  of  blue 
paper  on  a  blue  background  does  not  appear  so  saturated  as  when 
placed  against  a  yellow  background.  The  influences  of  contrast 
may  be  shown  in  a  great  variety  of  ways.*  For  instance,  if  a  disc 
like  that  in  the  illustration.  Fig.  140 A  ,  is  rotated  rapidly,  it  should 
give  circles  of  gray, the  darkest  at  the  middle;  but  each  circle  should 
be  uniform  as  it  is  made  by  the  fusion  of  a  definite  amount  of  white 
and  black.  On  the  contrary,  the  appearance  obtained  is  that  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  1405.  Each  circle  appears  darker  on  its  outer  edge 
where  it  borders  on  a  lighter  circle,  and  lighter  on  its  inner  edge  where 
it  borders  on  a  darker  circle.  Similar  contrasts  may  be  obtained  from 
comparing  shadows  cast  by  yellow  and  white  light.  If  a  rod  be 
arranged  in  a  dark  room  so  as  to  cast  a  shadow  from  an  opening 
admitting  daylight  and  one  also  from  a  lighted  candle,  either  shadow 
taken  separately  appears  black,  but  if  the  two  are  cast  side  by  side 
one  will  appear  blue,  the  other  yellow.  The  shadow  cast  by  the 
daylight,  being  illuminated  by  the  yellow  candle-light,  will  appear 
*  Rood,  "Modern  Chromatics,"  "International  Scientific  Series." 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA. 


325 


yellow,  and  the  other  shadow,  that  from  the  candle-light,  will  by 
contrast  seem  quite  blue.  A  striking  instance  of  the  effect  of  con- 
trast is  given,  also,  by  the  simple  experiment  of  Mayer,  illustrated 
in  Fig.  139.  The  gray  square  on  the  green  background  suffers  no 
apparent  change  from  contrast,  but  if  the  figure  is  covered  by  a 
sheet  of  white  tissue  paper  the  gray  square  at  once  takes  on  a  red- 
dish hue.  It  is  evident  that  in  all  artistic  and  ornamental  employ- 
ment of  colors  this  influence  must  be  considered,  and  empirical 
rules  are  estabUshed  which  indicate  for  the  normal  eye  the  bene- 
ficial or  the  killing  effect  of  different  colors  when  brought  into 
juxtaposition. 

Color  Blindness. — The  fact  that  some  eyes  do  not  possess 
normal  color  vision  does  not  seem  to  have  attracted  the  attention 
of  scientific  observers  until  it  was  studied  with  some  care  by  Dalton, 
the  distinguished  English  chemist,  at  the  end  of  the  eighteenth 
century.     Dalton  himself  suffered  from  color  blindness,  and  the 


Fig. 


140A.^Black  and  white  disc  for  ex- 
periment on  contrast. — {Rood.) 


Fig.    HOB. — Showing  the  result  when  the 
disc  A  is  set  into  rapid  rotation. — {Rood.) 


particular  variety  exhibited  by  him  was  for  some  time  described 
as  Daltonism,  but  is  now  usually  designated  as  red  blindness.  The 
subject  was  given  practical  importance  by  later  observers,  espe- 
cially by  the  Swedish  physiologist  Holmgren,*  who  emphasized  its 
relations  to  possible  accidents  by  rail  or  at  sea  in  connection  with 
colored  signals.  It  is  now  the  practice  in  all  civilized  countries  to 
require  tests  for  color  blindness  in  the  case  of  those  who  in  railways 
or  upon  vessels  may  be  responsible  for  the  interpretation  of  signals. 
The  numerous  statistics  that  have  been  gathered  show  that  the 
defect  is  fairly  prevalent,  especially  among  men.  It  is  said  that 
on  the  average  from  2  to  4  per  cent,  are  color  blind  among  males, 
while  among  women  the  proportion  is  much  smaller, — 0.01  to  1  per 
cent.     Among  the  poorly  educated  classes  the  defect  is  said  to  be 

*  Holmgren,  "Color  Blindness  in  its  Relations  to  Accidents  by  Rail  and 
Sea,"  "Smithsonian  Institution  Reports,"  Washington,  1878.  See  also  Jeffries, 
"  Color  Blindness,  its  Dangers  and  its  Detection,"  Boston. 


326  THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 

more  common  than  among  educated  persons.  Color  blindness 
may  exist  in  different  degrees  of  completeness,  from  a  total  loss  to 
a  simple  imperfection  or  feebleness  of  the  color  sense,  and  it  is 
usually  congenital.  Those  who  are  complete^  color  blind  as  re- 
gards some  or  all  of  the  fundamental  colors  fall  into  two  groups: 
the  dichromatic,  whose  color  vision  may  be  represented  by  two 
fundamental  colors  and  their  combinations  with  white  or  black, 
and  the  monochromatic  or  totally  color  bhnd,  who  see  only  the 
white-gray-black  series. 

Dichromatic  Vision. — The  color-blind  who  belong  to  this  class 
fall  into  two  or  three  groups,  which  have  been  designated,  under 
the  influence  of  the  Young-He Imholtz  theory  of  color  vision,  the 
red-blind,  the  green-blind,  and  the  violet-blind.  The  most  com- 
mon by  far  of  these  groups  is  that  of  so-called  red  blindness;  it 
constitutes  the  usual  form  of  color  blindness.  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
persons  so  affected  are  in  reality  red-green  blind.  In  what  may  be 
called  the  most  typical  cases  they  distinguish  in  the  spectrum  only 
yellows  and  blues.  The  red,  orange,  yellow,  and  green  appear  as 
yellow  of  different  shades,  the  green-blue  as  gray,  and  the  blue- 
violet  and  purple  as  blue.  The  red  end  of  the  spectrum  is  distinctly 
shortened,  especially  if  the  illumination  is  poor,  and  the  maximum 
luminosity,  instead  of  being  in  the  yellow  as  in  normal  eyes,  is  in  the 
green.  When  the  spectrum  is  examined  by  such  persons  a  neutral 
gray  band  is  seen  at  the  junction  of  the  blue  and  green.  In  some 
cases,  however,  this  neutral  band  is  not  seen,  the  yellow  passing  with 
but  little  change  into  the  blue.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  in  red  blindness 
the  most  characteristic  defect  is  a  failure  to  see  or  to  appreciate  the 
green.  This  color  is  confused  with  the  grays  and  with  dull  shades 
of  red.  When  such  persons  are  examined  for  their  negative  after- 
images for  different  colors,  it  will  be  noted  that  they  describe  some 
of  their  after-images  as  red,  the  after-image  of  indigo-blue,  for  ex- 
ample, but  that  they  describe  none  as  green.  The  after-image  of 
purple,  for  instance,  which  to  the  normal  eye  is  bright  green,  is  de- 
scribed by  them  as  gray  blue  or  pale  blue.  From  the  descriptions 
given  it  is  probable  that  the  color  vision  of  the  so-called  red  blind 
is  not  by  any  means  the  same  in  all  cases,  but  exhibits  many  individ- 
ual differences.  The  green-blind  are  also,  according  to  recent  des- 
criptions, red-green  blind;  they  also  confuse  reds  and  greens  and 
in  the  spectrum  are  conscious  of  only  two  color  qualities,  namely, 
yellow  and  blue.  They  differ  from  the  red  blind  in  that  the  red  end 
of  the  spectrum  is  not  shortened,  and  the  maximum  luminosity,  as 
with  the  normal  eye,  is  placed  in  the  yellow.  In  the  matching  and 
combination  of  colors  they  show  distinct  differences  from  the  red 
bUnd,  so  that  though  resembling  the  latter  in  general  features,  they 
differ  obviously  in  some  details.     Violet  blindness,  so  called,  seems 


PROPERTIES    OP   THE    RETINA.  327 

to  be  SO  rare  as  a  congenital  and  permanent  condition  that  no 
exact  study  of  it  has  been  made.  By  the  ingestion  of  santonin  it  is 
said  that  a  condition  of  this  kind  may  be  produced  temporarily.  The 
violet  end  of  the  spectrum  is  shortened  and  white  objects  take  on  a 
yellowish  hue.  The  conditions  produced  by  santonin  are  evidently 
more  complex  than  can  be  explained  by  simply  assuming  that  the 
violet  color  sense  is  lost.  Recent  observers*  state  that  the  drug 
produces  a  condition  of  yellow  vision,  outside  the  fovea,  in  the 
daylight,  and  a  condition  of  violet  vision  with  yellow  bhndness,  but 
no  red  nor  green  blindness,  in  dim  hghts. 

Tests  for  Color  Blindness. — Although  the  vision  of  the  red  and 
the  green  blind  is  deficient  as  regards  green  and  red  colors,  it  will 
be  found  in  many  cases  that  they  recognize  these  colors  and  name 
them  correctly,  having  adopted  the  usual  nomenclature  and  adapted 
it  to  their  own  standards.  In  order  to  detect  the  deficiency  they 
must  be  examined  by  some  test  which  will  compel  them  to  match 
certain  colors.  Under  these  circumstances  it  will  be  found  that 
along  with  correct  matches  they  will  make  others  which  to  the  nor- 
mal eye  are  entirely  erroneous.  A  great  number  of  methods  have 
been  proposed  and  used  to  detect  color  blindness.  The  simplest 
perhaps  is  that  of  Holmgren.f  A  number  of  skeins  of  wool  are  used 
and  three  test  colors  are  chosen, — namely,  (I)  a  pale  pure  green 
skein,  which  must  not  inchne  toward  yellow  green;  (II)  a  medium 
purple  (magenta)  skein;  and  (III)  a  vivid  red  skein.  The  person 
under  investigation  is  given  skein  I  and  is  asked  to  select  from  the 
pile  of  assorted  colored  skeins  those  that  have  a  similar  color  value. 
He  is  not  to  make  an  exact  match,  but  to  select  those  that  appear 
to  have  the  same  color.  Those  who  are  red  or  green  blind  will  see 
the  test  skein  as  a  gray  with  some  yellow  or  blue  shade  and  will 
select,  therefore,  not  only  the  green  skeins,  but  the  grays  or  grayish 
yellow  and  blue  skeins.  To  ascertain  whether  the  individual  is  red 
or  green  blind  tests  II  and  III  may  then  be  employed. 

With  test  II,  medium  purple,  the  red  blind  will  select,  in  addition 
to  other  purples,  only  blues  or  violets;  the  green  bhnd  will  select  as 
"confusion  colors"  only  greens  and  grays. 

With  test  III,  red,  the  red  bUnd  will  select  as  confusion  colors 
greens,  grays,  or  browns  less  luminous  than  the  test  color,  while  the 
green  blind  will  select  greens,  grays,  or  browns  of  a  greater  brightness 
than  the  test. 

Monochromatic  Vision. — A  number  of  cases  of  total  color 
blindness  have  been  carefully  examined. |  It  would  seem  that  in 
such  individuals  there  is  an  entire  loss  of  color  sense, — they  possess 

*Siven  and  Wendt,  "Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  14, 196, 1903. 
t  For  details  see  the  works  of  Holmgren  and  of  Jeffries,  already  quoted. 
I  Grunert,  "Archiv  fiir  Ophthahnologie,"  56,  132,  1903. 


328 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


only  achromatic  vision.  The  external  world  appears  to  them  only 
in  shades  of  gray.  In  the  majority  of  these  cases  (f)  there 
is  a  region  of  bhndness  in  the  fovea  (central  scotoma),  and  an 
unusual  sensitiveness  to  light  and  nystagmus  (rolling  movement  of 
the  eyeballs)  are  also  characteristic.  Since  the  peripheral  field  of 
vision  is  nearly  normal  as  regards  sensitiveness  to  light,  while  the 
central  field  is  frequently  bUnd  or  amblyopic,  it  has  been  assumed 
that  this  condition  represents  one  of  loss  of  function  in  the  cones. 

Distribution  of  the  Color  Sense  in  the  Retina. — What  has 
been  said  above  in  regard  to  color  blindness  refers  especially  to  the 


061      091      OLi 


Fig  141. — Perimeter  chart  indicating  the  average  fields  of  vision  for  blue,  red,  and 
green  compared  with  white  (gray).  Right  eye:  The  outlines  of  the  color  fields  are  repre- 
sented as  smooth  since  the  chart  is  an  average  from  many  determinations.  As  a  matter  of 
fact  in  each  individual  the  outline  is  highly  irregular.  Normally  green  (bright  green)  is  the 
smallest  field,  green  objects  outside  the  limit  appearing  yellow  and  farther  out  colorless 
(gray). 

central  field  of  vision.  When  we  examine  the  peripheral  field  in 
the  normal  eye  it  is  found  that  on  the  extreme  periphery  the  retina 
is  totally  color  blind,  perceiving  only  light  and  darkness, — that  is, 
the  shades  of  gray.  As  we  pass  in  toward  the  center  the  color 
sense  develops  gradually,  the  blue  colors  being  perceived  first  and 
the  greens  last, — that  is,  nearest  to  the  center, — so  that  in  a  cer- 
tain zone  the  normal  eye  is  red-green  blind.  The  distribution  of 
the  color  sense  may  be  studied  conveniently  by  means  of  the  pe- 
rimeter (see  p.  313).  It  will  be  found  to  vary  with  each  individual, 
so  much  so  that  it  is  possible  that  a  test  of  this  character  might  be 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA. 


329 


used  for  the  identification  of  individuals.  Exceptionally  it  is  found 
that  the  entire  retina  possesses  a  nearly  normal  color  sense.  Usu- 
ally, for  the  colors  red,  green,  and  blue,  the  blue  has  the  most  exten- 
sive field  and  the  green  the  least,  as  is  indicated  in  the  perimeter 
chart  given  in  Fig.  141.  If  the  green  chosen  is  blue  green  (490/^/^) — 
that  is,  the  complementary  of  the  red — it  is  stated  that  their  fields 
are  co-extensive.*  From  this  standpoint  the  retina  presents  three 
concentric  zones:  an  extreme  peripheral  zone  devoid  of  color 
vision,  an  intermediate  zone  in  which  yellow  and  blue  are  perceived, 
and  a  central  zone  sensitive  to  red  and  green.     The  outlines  of 


06i      081     0^^ 


Fig.  142. — Perimeter  chart  showing  the  highly  restricted  color  fields  in  the  left  eye 
of  a  typical  case  of  so-called  red-green  color  blindness.  The  ability  to  distinguish  red  and 
green,  by  whatever  characteristics  of  intensity  or  color  they  possessed  extended  for  a  very 
short  distance  outside  the  fovea.  It  is  interesting  that  the  ability  to  distinguish  blue  was 
in  this  case  limited  as  compared  with  a  normal  eye. 


the  different  fields  usually  show  many  irregularities,  and  in  some 
cases  it  will  be  found  that  bright  green  is  perceived  over  a  larger  area 
than  the  red.  The  fields  are  not  identical  in  the  two  eyes,  and  in 
each  eye  it  is,  as  a  rule,  more  extensive  upon  the  nasal  than 
upon  the  temporal  side  of  the  retina.  In  the  red-green  blind  the 
peripheral  fields  of  color  vision,  judged  by  the  individual's  own 
standards,  may  be  markedly  constricted  as  compared  with  the  nor- 
mal retina  (see  Fig.  142). 

*  Baird,    "The    Color   Sensitivity  of  the  Peripheral  Retina,"   Carnegie 
Pubhcation  No.  29,  1905. 


330 


THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 


Functions  of  the  Rods  and  Cones. — Many  facts  unite  in  mak- 
ing it  probable  that  the  rods  and  cones  are  different  in  function. 
They  differ  in  structure  and  especially  in  their  connections.  As  is 
shown  in  the  diagram  given  in  Fig.  143,  the  cones  terminate  in  the 
external  nuclear  layer  in  arborizations  which  connect  with  the 

B 


Fig.  143. — Schema  of  the  structure  of  the  human  retina  {Greeff) :  /,  Pigment  layer; 
II,  rod  and  cone  layer;  ///,  outer  nuclear  layer;  IV,  external  plexiform  layer;  V,  layer 
of  horizontal  cells;  VI,  layer  of  bipolar  cells  (inner  nuclear) ;  VII,  layer  of  amacrinal  cells 
(without  axons);  VIII,  inner  plexiform  layer;  IX,  ganglion  cell  layer;  X,  nerve  fiber 
layer;    6,  fiber  of  Miiller. 


bipolar  ganglion  cells,  and  in  the  fovea  at  least  this  connection  is  such 
that  each  cone  connects  with  a  single  nerve  cell  and  eventually  per- 
haps with  a  single  optic  nerve  fiber.  The  rods,  on  the  contrary, 
end  in  a  single  knob-like  swelling,  and  a  number  of  them  make  con- 
nections with  the  same  nerve  cell.     Histologically,  therefore,  the 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA.  331 

conduction  paths  for  the  cones  seem  to  be  more  direct  than  in 
the  case  of  the  rods.  These  latter  elements,  moreover,  possess  the 
visual  purple,  which  is  lacking  in  the  cones.  Lastly,  in  the  eye  of 
the  totally  color  blind,  in  the  dark-adapted  eye  in  dim  lights,  in  the 
color-blind  peripheral  area  of  the  normal  eye,  and  in  the  eyes  of 
most  distinctly  night-seeing  animals,  such  as  the  mole  and  the  owl, 
vision  seems  to  be  effected  solely  by  the  rods.  These  facts  find 
their  simplest  explanation  perhaps  in  the  view  advocated  by  Pari- 
naud,  Franklin,  von  Kries,*  and  others,  according  to  which  the 
perception  of  color  is  a  function  of  the  cones  alone,  while  the  rods 
are  sensitive  only  to  Hght  and  darkness,  and  by  virtue  of  their  power 
of  adaptation  in  the  dark  through  the  regeneration  of  their  visual 
purple  they  form  also  the  special  apparatus  for  vision  in  dim 
lights  (night  vision).  Color  blindness,  therefore,  whether  total  or 
partial,  may  be  regarded  as  an  affection  or  lack  of  normal  develop- 
ment of  the  cones.  On  the  other  hand,  those  interesting  cases  in 
which  the  vision,  while  good  in  daylight,  is  faulty  or  lacking  in  dim 
lights  (night  blindness,  hemeralopia)  may  be  referred  to  a  defective 
functional  activity  of  the  rods,  probably  from  lack  of  formation  of 
visual  purple. 

Theories  of  Color  Vision. — A  number  of  theories  have  been 
proposed  to  explain  the  facts  of  color  vision.  None  of  them  has 
been  entirely  successful  in  the  sense  that  the  explanations  it  affords 
have  been  submitted  to  satisfactory  experimental  verification.  The 
immediate  stimuli  that  give  rise  to  the  visual  impulses  are  assumed 
to  be  of  a  chemical  nature,  and  it  seems  probable  that  in  this 
case  as  in  that  of  many  other  problems  of  physiology,  we  must 
await  the  development  of  a  more  complete  knowledge  of  the 
chemical  processes  involved.  The  theories  proposed  at  present, 
while  all  tested  by  experimental  inquiries,  are  in  a  large  measure 
hypotheses  constructed  to  fit  more  or  less  completely  the  facts  that 
are  known.  Three  of  these  theories  may  be  described  briefl}'  as 
examples  of  the  modes  of  reasoning  employed: 

/.  The  Young-HelmhoUz  Theory.- — This  theory,  proposed  essen- 
tially by  Thomas  Young  (1807)  and  afterward  modified  and  ex- 
panded by  Helmholtz,t  rests  upon  the  assumption  that  there  are 
three  fundamental  color  sensations, — red,  green,  and  violet — and 
corresponding  with  these  there  are  three  photochemical  substances 
in  the  retina.  By  the  decomposition  of  each  of  these  substances  cor- 
responding nerve  fibers  are  stimulated  and  impulses  are  conducted 
to  a  special  system  of  nerve  cells  in  the  visual  center  of  the  cerebrum. 

*  Von  Kries,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Psycho logie  u.  Physiol,  d.  Sinnesorgane," 
9,  81,  1895. 

t  Helmholtz,  "Handbuch  der  physiologischen  Optik,"  second  edition, 
1896,  I,  344. 


332 


THE    SPECIAL    SENSES. 


The  theory,  therefore,  assumes  special  nerve  fibers  and  nerve  centers 
corresponding  respectively  to  the  red,  green,  and  violet  photo- 
chemical substances,  and  the  peculiar  quality  of  the  resulting  sensa- 
tions are  referred,  in  the  original  theory,  to  the  different  reactions 
in  consciousness  in  the  three  corresponding  centers  in  the  brain. 
When  these  three  substances  are  equally  excited  a  sensation  of 
white  results,  of  greater  or  less  intensity  according  to  the  extent  of 
the  excitation.  White,  therefore,  on  this  theory,  is  a  compound 
sensation  produced  by  the  combination  or  fusion  in  consciousness 
of  the  three  equal  fundamental  color  sensations.  The  sensation  of 
black,  on  the  other  hand,  results  from  the  absence  of  stimulation, 
from  the  condition  of  rest  in  the  retina  and  in  the  corresponding 
nerve  fibers  and  nerve  centers.  All  other  color  sensations — yellow, 
for  instance — are  compound  sensations  produced  by  the  combined 


Fig.  144. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  Young-Helmholtz  theory  of  color  vision. — (Helm- 
holtz.)  The  spectral  colors  are  arranged  in  their  natural  order, — red  to  violet.  The  curves 
represent  the  intensity  of  stimulation  of  the  three  color  substances:  1,  The  red  perceiving 
substance;  2,  the  green  perceiving;  3,  the  violet  perceiving.  Verticals  drawn  at  any 
point  of  the  spectrum  indicate  the  relative  amount  of  stimulation  of  the  three  substances 
for  that  wave  length  of  the  spectrum. 


stimulation  of  the  three  photochemical  substances  in  different  propor- 
tions. It  is  assumed,  furthermore,  that  each  of  the  photochemical 
substances  is  acted  upon  more  or  less  by  all  of  the  visible  rays  of  the 
spectrum,  but  that  the  rays  of  long  wave  lengths  at  the  red  end 
of  the  spectrum  affect  chiefly  the  red  substance,  those  corresponding 
to  the  green  of  the  spectrum  chiefly  the  green  substance,  and  the 
rays  of  shortest  wave  length  chiefly  the  violet  substance.  These  rela- 
tionships are  expressed  in  the  diagram  given  in  Fig.  144.  The  figure 
also  indicates  that  it  is  impossible  to  stimulate  any  one  of  these  sub- 
stances entirely  alone, — that  is,  we  cannot  obtain  a  perfectly  satu- 
rated color  sensation.  Even  the  extreme  red  or  the  extreme  violet 
rays  act  more  or  less  on  all  of  the  substances,  and  the  resulting  red 
or  violet  sensation,  is,  therefore,  mixed  to  some  extent  with  white, — 
that  is,  is  not  entirely  saturated.  The  theory,  as  stated  by  Helm- 
holtz,held  strictly  to  the  doctrine  of  specific  nerve  energy,  in  assuming 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA.  333 

that  each  photochemical  substance  serves  simply  as  a  means  for  the 
excitation  of  a  nerve  fiber,  and  that  the  quality  of  the  sensation 
aroused  depends  on  the  ending  of  this  fiber  in  the  brain.  The  phe- 
nomenon of  negative  after-images  finds  a  simple  explanation  in  terms 
of  this  theory.  If  we  look  fixedly  at  a  green  object,  for  example, 
the  corresponding  photochemical  substance  is  chiefly  acted  upon,  and 
if  subsequently  the  same  part  of  the  retina  is  exposed  to  white  light, 
the  red  and  violet  substances,  having  been  previously  less  acted 
upon,  now  respond  in  greater  proportions  to  the  white  light,  and 
the  after-image  takes  a  red- violet — that  is,  purple — color.  Many 
objections  have  been  raised  to  the  Young-Helmholtz  theory.  It 
has  been  urged,  for  instance,  that  we  are  not  conscious  that  white 
or  yellow  sensations  are  blends  or  compounded  color  sensations; 
we  perceive  in  them  none  of  the  supposed  component  elements  as 
we  do  in  such  undoubted  mixtures  as  the  blue-greens  or  the  purples. 
The  theory  explains  poorly  or  not  at  all  the  fact  that  on  the  periphery 
of  the  retina  we  are  color  blind  and  yet  can  perceive  white  or  gray, 
and  it  breaks  down  also  in  the  face  of  the  facts  of  partial  and  com- 
plete color  blindness.  The  explanation  given  for  black  is  also 
unsatisfactory  in  that  it  assumes  an  active  state  of  consciousness 
associated  with  a  condition  of  rest  in  the  visual  mechanism. 

//.  Hering's  Theory  of  Color  Vision. — This  theory  also  assumes 
the  existence  in  the  retina  of  three  photochemical  substances,  but 
of  such  a  nature  as  to  give  us  six  different  qualities  of  sensation. 
There  is  a  white-black  substance  which  when  acted  upon  by  the 
visible  rays  of  light  undergoes  disassimilation  and  sets  up  nerv^e 
impulses  that  arouse  in  the  brain  the  sensation  of  white.  On  the 
other  hand,  when  not  acted  upon  by  light  this  same  substance  under- 
goes assimilatory  processes  that  in  turn  set  up  nerve  impulses  which 
in  the  brain  give  us  a  sensation  of  black.  There  are  in  the  retina  also 
a  red-green  and  a  yellow-blue  substance.  The  former  when  acted 
upon  by  the  longer  rays  undergoes  disassimilation  and  gives  a 
sensation  of  red,  while  the  shorter  waves  cause  assimilation  and 
produce  a  sensation  of  green.  A  similar  assumption  is  made  for 
the  yellow-blue  substance.  The  essence  of  the  theory  may  be  stated, 
therefore,  in  tabular  form,  as  follows  *: 


Photochemical  Substance.  Retinal  Process.  Sensation. 

Disassimilation      =  red 

=  green 

-C7-  n       ,  1  (  Disassimilation      =      yellow 

Yellow-blue <   *„„••,„.•„  L..„ 


T}    1  f  Disassimilati( 

^«d-green 1  Assimilation 


(  Assimilation  =      blue 

■nT-u-i    ui     1  I  Disassimilation      =     white 

White-black I  Assimilation  =     black 

*  For  discussion  of  color  theories  see  Calkins,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,' 
1902,  suppl.  volume,  p.  244. 


334 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


It  will  be  observed  that  the  theory  gives  an  independent  ob- 
jective cause  for  the  sensations  of  white,  black,  and  yellow,  and  in 
this  respect  satisfies  the  objections  made  on  this  score  to  the  Young- 
Helmholtz  theory.  It  fits  better,  also,  the  facts  of  partial  and  total 
color  bhndness.  In  the  latter  condition  one  may  assume,  in  terms  of 
this  theory,  that  only  the  white-black  substance  is  present,  while 
red  and  green  bhndness — ^both  of  them,  it  will  be  recalled,  really 
forms  of  red-green  blindness — are  explained  on  the  view  that  in  such 
persons  the  red-green  substance  is  deficient  or  lacking.  On  this 
theory,  complementary  colors — red  and  blue-green,  yellow  and 
blue — are,  in  reaUty,  antagonistic  colors.  When  thrown  on  the 
retina  simultaneously  their  effects  neutralize  each  other,  and  there 


Fig.  145. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  Hering  theory  of  color  vision. — (Foster.)  The 
curves  indicate  the  relative  intensities  of  stimulation  of  the  three  color  substances  by  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  spectrum.  Ordinates  above  the  axis,  X-X,  indicate  catabolic  changes 
(disassimilation),  those  below  anabolic  changes  (assimilation).  Curve  a  represents  the 
conditions  for  the  black-white  substance.  It  is  stimulated  by  all  the  rays  of  the  visible 
spectrum  with  maximum  intensity  in  the  yellow.  Curve  c  represents  the  red-green  sub- 
stance, the  longer  wave  lengths  causing  disassimilation  (red),  the  shorter  ones  assimilation 
(green).     Curve  b  gives  the  conditions  for  the  yellow-blue  substance. 


remains  over  only  the  disassimilatory  effect  on  the  white  substance 
which  is  exerted  by  all  the  visible  rays.  The  effect  of  the  various 
visible  rays  of  the  spectrum  on  the  three  photochemical  substances 
is  illustrated  by  the  chart  given  in  Fig.  145.  Ordinates  above  the 
abscissa  representing  disassimilatory  effects;  those  below,  assimi- 
latory. 

///.  The  Franklin  Theory  of  Color  Vision  {Molecular  Dissocia- 
tion Theory). — This  theory,  proposed  by  Mrs.  C.  L.  Franklin,*  takes 
into  account  the  fact  of  a  gradual  evolution  of  the  color  sense  of  the 
retina  from  a  primitive  condition  of  colorless  vision  such  as  still 
exists  in  the  periphery  of  the  retina  and  in  the  eyes  of  the  totally 

*  Franklin,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Psychologie  und  Phys.  d.  Sinnesorgane,"  1892, 
iv;  also  "Mind,"  2,  473,  1893,  and  "Psychological  Review,"  1894,  1896,  1899. 


PROPERTIES   OF   THE    RETINA. 


335 


V. 


•w 


color  blind.  It  assumes  that  the  colorless  sensations — white, 
gray,  black — are  occasioned  by  the  reactions  of  a  photochemical 
material  which  for  convenience  may  be  designated  as  the  gray  sub- 
stance. This  substance  in  the  normal  eye  exists  in  both  rods 
and  cones ;  in  the  latter,  however,  in  a  differentiated  condition  ca- 
pable of  giving  color  sensations.  When  the  molecules  of  this  sub- 
stance are  completely  disso- 
ciated by  the  action  of  light, 
gray  sensations  result,  and 
as  this  is  the  only  reaction 
possible  in  the  rods  these 
elements  can  furnish  us  only 
sensations  of  this  quality. 

The  molecules  of  gray 
substance  in  the  cones,  on 
the  other  hand,  have  under- 
gone a  development  such 
that  certain  portions  only  of 
the  molecule  may  become 
dissociated  by  the  action  of 
light  of  certain  periods  of 
vibration.  This  development 
may  be  supposed  to  have 
taken  place  in  two  stages: 
first,  the  formation  of  two 
groupings  within  the  mole- 
cule one  of  which  is  dissoci- 
ated by  the  slower  waves 
and  gives  a  sensation  of  yel- 
low, and  one  of  which  is  dis- 
sociated by  the  more  rapid 
waves  and  gives  the  sensa- 
tion of  blue.  This  stage  re- 
mains still  on  portions  of  the 
periphery  of  the  retina,  and 
is  the  condition  present  in 
the  fovea  also  in  the  eyes 
of  the  red-green  blind.  The 
second  stage  consists  in  the 
division  of  the  yellow  component  into  two  additional  groupings 
in  one  of  which  the  atomic  movements  are  of  such  a  period  as 
to  be  affected  by  the  longest  visible  waves,  the  red  of  the  spec- 
trum, while  the  other  is  dissociated  by  rays  corresponding  to  the 
green  of  the  spectrum  and  gives  rise  to  the  sensation  of  green. 
If  the  red  and  green  groupings  are  dissociated  together  the  resulting 


v_y 


R 


Fig.  146. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  Frank- 
lin theory  of  color  vision  {Franklin) :  W,  The 
molecule  of  the  primitive  visual  (gray-perceiv- 
ing) substance;  Y  and  B,  the  first  step  in  the 
differentiation  into  a  yellow-  and  a  blue-per- 
ceiving substance,  whose  combined  dissociation 
gives  the  same  effect  as  that  of  the  original  sub- 
stance, W;  G  and  R,  the  second  step  in  the 
differentiation  of  the  yellow-perceiving  sub- 
stance, the  combined  dissociation  of  the  two 
giving  the  same  effect  as  that  of  the  yellow-per- 
ceiving substance  alone.  The  complete  devel- 
opment of  color  vision  as  it  exists  in  the  central 
part  of  the  retina  consists  in  the  existence  of 
three  substances,  which,  taken  separately,  give 
red,  green,  and  blue  color  sensations. 


336  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

effect  is  the  same  as  follows  from  the  dissociation  of  the  entire  yellow 
component,  while  the  complete  dissociation  of  the  red,  green,  and 
blue  groupings  gives  the  stimulus  obtained  originally  from  the  disso- 
ciation of  the  whole  molecule,  and  causes  gray  sensations.  The  idea 
of  this  subdivision  or  differentiation  in  structure  of  the  original  gray 
substance  is  indicated  diagrammatically  in  Fig.  146.  The  theory 
accounts  admirably  for  many  phenomena  in  vision,  and  is  perhaps 
especially  adapted  to  explain  the  facts  of  color  blindness  and  the 
variations  in  quality  of  our  visual  sensations  in  the  peripheral  areas 
of  the  retina. 

The  two  latter  theories  seem  to  imply  that  a  number  of  different  kind 
of  impulses  may  be  transmitted  along  the  optic  fibers.  Hering's  theory  re- 
quires apparently  the  possibility  of  six  qualitatively  different  impulses, — 
namely,  white,  black,  red,  green,  yellow,  and  blue, — while  the  Franklin  theory 
assumes  impulses  corresponding  to  white  (gray),  red,  green,  yellow,  and  blue. 
Black  is  not  specifically  accounted  for  except  as  a  part  of  the  gray  series.  At 
present  in  physiology  there  is  no  proof  that  nerve  impulses  can  differ  quali- 
tatively from  each  other,  although  it  may  be  urged,  perhaps  with  equal  force, 
that  there  is  no  proof  that  they  can  not  so  differ.  The  doctrine  of  specific 
nerve  energy  assumes  that  nerve  impulses  are,  as  regards  quality,  always 
the  same,  and  differ  from  one  another  only  in  intensity,  the  qualitative  differ- 
ences that  exist  among  sensations  being  referred  to  a  difference  in  reaction 
in  the  end-organ  in  the  brain. 

Entoptic  Phenomena. — Under  the  term  entoptic  phenomena 
is  included  a  number  of  visual  sensations  due  to  the  shadows  of 
various  objects  within  the  eyeball  itself.  Ordinarily  these  shadows 
are  imperceptible,  owing  to  the  diffuse  illumination  of  the  interior 
of  the  eye  through  the  relatively  wide  opening  of  the  pupil.  By 
means  of  various  devices  the  illumination  of  the  eye  may  be  so 
controlled  as  to  make  these  shadows  more  distinct  and  thus  bring 
the  retinal  images  into  consciousness.  Some  of  these  entoptic  ap- 
pearances are  described  briefly,  but  for  a  detailed  description  the 
reader  is  referred  to  the  classical  work  of  Helmholtz.* 

The  Blood-corpuscles. — The  entoptic  images  that  are  most  easily 
recognized  perhaps  are  those  of  the  moving  corpuscles  in  the  capil- 
laries of  the  retina.  If  one  looks  off  into  the  blue  sky  he  will  have 
no  difficulty  in  recognizing  a  number  of  minute  clear  and  dark  specks 
that  move  in  front  of  the  eye  in  definite  paths.  The  character  of 
the  movement  leaves  no  doubt  that  these  sensations  are  due  to  the 
shadows  of  the  blood-corpuscles.  In  fact,  the  shadows  often  show 
a  rhythmic  acceleration  in  velocity  synchronous  with  the  heart- 
beats, a  pulse  movement.  By  projecting  the  moving  images  upon 
a  screen  at  a  known  distance  from  the  eye  the  velocity  of  the  capil- 
lary circulation  has  been  estimated  in  man. 

The  Retinal  Blood-vessels. — The  blood-vessels  of  the  retina  lie 
in  front  of  the  rods  and  cones  and  must  necessarily  throw  their 
shadows  upon  these  sensitive  end-organs.     The  shadows  may  be 

*  Helmholtz,  "Handbuch  der  phvsiologischen  Optik,"  second  edition, 
I,  184. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    RETINA. 


337 


made.njore  distinct  and  a  visual  picture  of  the  vessels  obtained  by 
a  number  of  methods.  For  instance,  if  a  card  with  a  pin  hole 
through  it  is  moved  slowly  in  front  of  the  eye  the  images  of  the 
blood-vessels  stand  out  in  the  field  of  vision  with  more  or  less 
distinctness.  The  card  should  be  given  a  circular  movement.  If  it 
is  kept  in  one  position  the  images  quickly  disappear,  since  the 
retina  apparently  fatigues  very  quickly  for  such  faint  impressions. 
A  more  impressive  picture  may  be  obtained  by  the  method  of 
Purkinje.  In  a  dark  room  one  holds  a  candle  toward  the  side  of  the 
head  in  such  a  position  as  to  give  the  sensation  of  a  glare  in  the 
corresponding  eye.  If  the  eye  is  directed  toward  the  opposite  side 
of  the  room  and  the  candle  is  kept  in  continual  circular  movement 
the  blood-vessels  appear  in  the  field  of  vision  magnified  in  proportion 
to  the  distance  of  projection;  the  picture  makes  the  impression  of  a 
thicket  of  interlacing  branches.  In  this  experiment  the  light  from 
the  candle  strikes  the 
nasal  side  of  the  retina  at 
an  oblique  angle  and  is  re- 
flected toward  the  other 
side  of  the  globe.  The 
blood-vessels  are  in  this 
way  illuminated  from  an 
unusual  direction  and 
their  shadows  are  thrown 
upon  a  portion  of  the  ret- 
ina not  usually  affected 
and  for  that  reason  per- 
haps more  sensitive  to 
the  impression. 

Imperfections  in  the  Vitreous  Humor  and  the  Lens. — Small  frag- 
ments of  the  cells  from  which  the  vitreous  humor  was  constructed 
in  the  embryo  and  similar  relatively  opaque  objects  in  the  lens  may 
throw  shadows  on  the  retinal  bottom.  These  shadows  take 
different  forms,  but  usually  are  described  as  small  spheres  or  beads, 
single  or  in  groups,  that  move  with  the  eyes  and  are  designated, 
therefore,  as  the  muscae  volitantes  (flitting  flies  or  floating  flies).  To 
bring  out  these  shadows  it  is  convenient  to  make  the  source  of  illu- 
mination small  and  to  bring  it  at  or  nearer  than  the  anterior  focal 
distance  of  the  eye  (15  to  16  mms.).  The  method  emplo3^ed  for  this 
purpose  by  Helmholtz  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  147.  In  this  figure  b 
is  a  candle  flame,  and  a  a  lens  of  short  focus  which  makes  an  image 
of  the  flame  at  the  small  opening  shown  in  the  dark  screen,  c.  The 
eye  is  placed  just  behind  this  opening  and  is  illuminated  by  the  rays 
from  the  small,  bright  image  of  the  flame  at  that  spot.  The  shadows 
are  seen  projected  upon  the  illuminated  surface  of  the  glass  lens. 
22 


Fig.  147. — Helmholtz's  method  of  showing  en- 
toptic  phenomena  due  to  imperfections  in  the  lens 
and  vitreous  (Helmholtz):  c,  a  screen  with  pinhole; 
a,  lens  with  short  focus. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 
BINOCULAR  VISION. 

Vision  with  two  eyes  differs  from  monocular  vision  chiefly  in 
the  varied  combinations  of  movements  of  the  two  eyeballs  and  the 
aid  thereby  afforded  in  the  determination  of  distance  and  size, 
in  the  enlarged  field  of  vision,  and,  above  all,  in  the  more  exact  per- 
ception of  solidity  or  perspective,  especially  for  near  objects. 

The  Movements  of  the  Eyeballs. — Each  eyeball  is  moved 
by  six  extrinsic  muscles  which  are  innervated  through  three 
cranial  nerves.  The  third  or  oculomotor  nerve  controls  the  internal 
rectus,  the  superior  rectus,  the  inferior  rectus,  and  the  inferior 
oblique;  the  fourth  cranial  nerve  (n.  patheticus)  innervates  the 
superior  oblique  alone;  and  the  sixth  cranial  (n.  abducens)  the 
external  rectus  alone.  By  means  of  these  muscles  the  eyeballs  may 
be  given  various  movements,  all  of  which  may  be  considered  as 
rotations  of  the  ball  around  various  axes.  The  common  point  of 
intersection  of  these  axes  is  designated  as  the  rotation  point  or 
center  of  rotation  of  the  eyeball;  it  lies  about  13.5  mms.  back  of  the 
cornea  in  the  emmetropic  eye.  The  various  axes  of  rotation  all 
pass  through  this  point,  and  we  may  classify  them  under  four 
heads:  (1)  The  horizontal  or  sagittal  axis,  which  is  the  line  passing 
through  the  rotation  point  and  the  object  looked  at, — the  fixation 
point.  This  axis  corresponds  practically  with  the  line  of  sight, — 
that  is,  the  line  drawn  from  the  object  looked  at  to  the  middle  of  the 
fovea,  and  it  may  therefore,  without  serious  error,  be  spoken  of  as 
the  visual  axis.  Rotations  around  this  axis  give  a  wheel  movement 
or  torsion  to  the  eyeballs.  (2)  The  transverse  axis,  the  line  passing 
through  the  rotation  points  of  the  two  eyes  and  perpendicular 
to  No.  1.  Rotations  around  this  axis  move  the  eyeballs  straight 
up  or  down.  (3)  The  vertical  axis,  the  vertical  line  passing  through 
the  rotation  point  and  perpendicular  at  this  point  to  the  horizontal 
and  transverse  axes.  Rotations  around  this  axis  move  the  eyeball 
to  the  right  or  the  left.  (4)  The  oblique  axes,  under  which  are  in- 
cluded all  the  axes  of  rotation  passing  through  the  rotation  point  at 
oblique  angles  to  the  horizontal  axis.  These  axes  all  lie  in  the 
equatorial  plane  of  the  eye,  and  rotations  around  any  of  them  move 
the  eyeball  obliquely  upward  or  downward.  These  definitions  all 
have  reference    to  what  is  known  as  the  primary  position  of  the 

338 


BINOCULAR    VISION.  339 

eyes,-^that  is,  that  position  taken  by  the  eyes  when  we  look  straight 
before  us  toward  the  horizon, — a  position,  therefore,  in  which  the 
plane  of  the  horizontal  axes  is  parallel  to  the  ground;  all  other 
positions  of  the  eyes  are  spoken  of  as  secondary. 

With  regard  to  the  movements  of  the  eyes  about  its  axes  of 
rotation  the  following  general  statements  are  made :  Starting  from 
the  primary  position,  rotations  of  the  eyes  about  the  vertical  axis — 
that  is,  movements  directly  to  right  or  left — may  be  made  by  the 
contraction  of  the  internal  or  the  external  rectus  as  the  case  may  be. 
Rotations  around  the  horizontal  axis — that  is,  movements  directly 
up  or  down — require  in  each  case  the  co-operation  of  two  muscles. 
In  movements  upward  the  superior  rectus,  acting  alone,  would  in 
rotating  the  eyeball  upward  also  give  it  a  slight  torsion  so  as  to  turn 
the  upper  part  of  the  vertical  meridian  inward.  To  obtain  a  move- 
ment directly  upward  (rotation  around  the  horizontal  axis)  the  su- 
perior rectus  and  inferior  oblique  must  act  together.  For  a  similar 
reason  rotation  directly  downward  requires  the  combined  action  of 
the  inferior  rectus  and  superior  oblique.  Rotation  of  the  eyeballs 
around  oblique  axes  require  the  co-operation  of  three  of  the  muscles : 
movements  upward  and  outward — the  superior  rectus,  inferior 
oblique,  and  external  rectus;  movements  upward  and  inward — 
superior  rectus,  inferior  oblique,  and  internal  rectus;  movements 
downward  and  outward — inferior  rectus,  superior  obhque,  and  ex- 
ternal rectus;  movements  downward  and  inward — inferior  rectus, 
superior  oblique,  and  internal  rectus.  Most  of  the  movements  of 
the  eyes  are  of  the  latter  kind, — namely,  rotations  around  an  oblique 
axis, — and  the  position  of  the  axis  for  each  definite  movement  of 
this  character  may  be  determined  by  Listing's  law,  which  may  be 
stated  as  follows:  When  the  eye  passes  from  a  primary  to  a  sec- 
ondary position  it  may  be  considered  as  having  rotated  around  an 
axis  perpendicular  to  the  lines  of  sight  in  the  two  positions.  It  will 
be  noted  readily  from  observations  upon  the  movements  of  one's 
own  eyes  that  they  ordinarily  make  only  such  movements  as  will 
keep  the  lines  of  sight  of  the  two  eyes  parallel  or  will  converge  them 
upon  a  common  point.  In  movements  of  convergence  the  internal 
recti  of  the  two  eyes  are  associated,  while  in  symmetrical  lateral 
movements  the  internal  rectus  of  one  eye  acts  with  the  external 
rectus  of  the  other.  Under  normal  conditions  it  is  impossible  for 
us  to  diverge  the  visual  axes, — that  is,  to  associate  the  action  of  the 
external  recti.  A  movement  of  this  kind  would  produce  useless 
double  vision  (diplopia),  and  it  is  therefore  a  kind  of  movement 
which  all  of  our  experience  has  trained  us  to  avoid. 

The  Co-ordination  of  the  Eye  Muscles — Muscular  Insuf- 
ficiency— Strabismus. — In  order  that  the  eyeballs  may  move 
with  the  minute  accuracy  necessary  in  binocular  vision,  a  beautifully 


340  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

balanced  or  co-ordinated  action  of  the  opposing  muscles  is  neces- 
sary. The  object  of  these  movements  is  to  bring  the  point  looked 
at  in  the  fovea  of  each  eye  and  thus  prevent  double  vision,  diplopia 
(see  following  paragraphs).  This  object  is  attained  when  the  eye- 
balls are  so  moved  that  the  lines  of  sight  unite  upon  the  object  or 
point  looked  at.  In  viewing  an  object  or  in  reading  we  keep 
readjusting  the  eyes  continually  to  bring  point  after  point  at  the 
junction  of  the  lines  of  sight.  If  the  eye  is  perfectly  normal  the 
contractions  of  the  muscles  for  objects  in  a  symmetrical  position  are 
equal  in  the  two  eyes ;  if,  however,  one  or  more  of  the  muscles  in  the 
eyes  are  weaker  than  normal,  then  to  adjust  the  eyes  properly 
requires  a  greater  contraction  of  these  muscles  to  overcome  the  op- 
»  posing  action  of  their  stronger  antagonists.  If  the  disproportion 
in  strength  is  not  great,  then  by  a  stronger  innervation,  made  under 
the  desire  to  prevent  double  vision,  the  visual  axes  may  be  properly 
adjusted;  but  the  strain  that  results  from  this  continual  overcon- 
traction  may  be  injurious.  A  condition  of  lack  of  balance  of  this 
kind  in  the  muscles  is  spoken  of  as  heterophoria,  and,  according  to 
the  direction  in  which  the  visual  axis  tends  to  deviate  the  condition 
is  described  specifically  as  esophoria,  deviation  inward;  exophoria, 
deviation  outward;  hyperphoria,  deviation  up  or  down.  The 
condition  may  be  obviated  by  prismatic  glasses  so  placed  as  to 
aid  the  weaker  muscle.  When  the  lack  of  balance  between  the 
opposing  muscles  is  so  great  that  the  visual  axes  can  not  be  brought 
to  bear  upon  the  same  points  we  have  the  condition  of  squint  or 
strabismus.  Such  a  condition  may  result  from  a  deficiency  in 
strength  or  in  actual  paralysis  of  one  or  more  of  the  muscles,  or  from 
an  overaction  in  some  of  the  muscles  as  contrasted  with  their 
antagonists. 

The  Binocular  Field  of  Vision. — When  the  two  eyes  are  fixed 
upon  a  given  point,  placed,  let  us  say,  in  front  of  us  in  the  median 
plane,  each  eye  has  its  own  visual  field  that  may  be  charted 
by  means  of  the  perimeter.  But  the  two  fields  overlap  for  a 
portion  of  their  extent,  and  this  overlapping  area  constitutes 
the  field  of  binocular  vision  (see  Fig.  148).  Every  point  in  the  bin- 
ocular field  forms  an  image  upon  the  two  retinas.  The  most 
interesting  fact  about  the  binocular  field  is  that  some  of  the  objects 
contained  in  it  are  seen  single  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  there  are  two 
retinal  images,  while  others  are  seen  or  may  be  seen  double  when 
one's  attention  is  directed  to  the  fact.  Whether  any  given  object 
is  seen  single  or  double  depends  upon  whether  its  image  does  or  does 
not  fall  upon  corresponding  points  in  the  two  retinas. 

Corresponding  or  Identical  Points. — By  definition  corre- 
sponding or  identical  points  in  the  two  retinas  are  those  which  when 
simultaneously  stimulated  by  the  same  luminous  object  give  us  a 


BINOCULAR    VISION. 


341 


single  sensation,  while  non-corresponding  points  are  those  which 
when  so  stimulated  give  us  two  visual  sensations.  It  is  evident, 
from  our  experience,  that  the  fovese  form  corresponding  points  or 
areas.  When  we  look  at  any  object  we  so  move  our  eyes  that  the 
image  of  the  point  observed  shall  fall  upon  symmetrical  parts  of  the 
fovea ;  the  lines  of  sight  of  the  two  eyes  converge  upon  and  meet  in 
the  point  looked  at.  If  while  observing  an  object  we  press  gently 
upon  one  eyeball  with  the  end  of  the  finger,  two  images  are  seen 
at  once,  and  they  diverge  farther  and  farther  from  each  other 
as  the  pressure  upon  the  eyeball  is  increased.     Experiment  shows, 


°'^^    061     081      ou    °^ 

Fig.   148. — Perimeter  chart  to  show  the  extent  of  the  binocular  visual  field  (shaded  area) 
when  the  eyes  are  fixed  upon  a  median  point  in  the  horizontal  plane. 


also,  that,  in  a  general  way,  portions  of  the  retina  symmetrically 
placed  to  the  right  side  of  the  fovese  in  the  two  eyes  are  cor- 
responding, and  the  same  is  true  for  the  two  left  halves  and  the  two 
upper  and  lower  halves.  The  right  half  of  the  retina  in  one  eye  is 
non-corresponding  to  the  left  half  of  the  other  retina,  and  vice 
versa;  and  the  same  relation  is  true  of  the  upper  and  lower  halves, 
respectively.  If  we  imagine  one  retina  to  be  lifted  without  turning 
and  laid  over  the  other  so  that  the  fovese  and  vertical  and  horizontal 
meridians  coincide,  then  the  corresponding  points  will  be  superposed 
throughout  those  portions  of  the  retina  that  represent  the  binocular 
j5eld.     This  statement,  however,  is  theoretical  only ;  an  exact  point 


342 


THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 


to  point  correspondence  has  not  been  determined  experimentally. 
Within  the  limits  of  our  powers  of  observation  for  ordinary  objects 
we  may  adopt  Tscherning's  rule, — namely,  that  when  the  images 
of  an  object  on  the  two  retinas  are  projected  to  the  same  side  of  the 
point  of  fixation  they  are  seen  single,  their  retinal  images  in  this  case 
falling  on  the  retina  to  the  same  side  of  the  lines  of  sight;  when, 
however,  the  retinal  images  fall  on  opposite  sides  of  the  lines  of  sight 
and  are  projected  to  opposite  sides  of  the  point  of  fixation,  they  are 
seen  double.  The  doubling  of  objects  that  do  not  fall  on  correspond- 
ing points  (physiological  diplopia)  is  most  readily  demonstrated  for 
objects  that  lie  between  the  lines  of  sight,  either  closer  orfarther  away 
than  the  object  looked  at.  If,  for  instance,  one  holds  the  two  forefin- 
gers in  front  of  the  face,  in  the  median  plane,  one  hand  being  at  about 
the  near  point  of  distinct  vision  and  the  other  as  far  away  as  possible, 


Fig.  149. — Diagrams  to  show  homonymous  and  heteronymous  diplopia:  In  I  the  eyes 
are  focused  on  A;  the  images  of  B  fall  on  non-corresponding  points, — that  is,  to  different 
sides  of  the  foveae, — and  are  seen  double,  being  projected  to  the  plane  of  A,  giving  heter- 
onymous diplopia.  In  //  the  eyes  are  focused  on  the  nearer  point,  A,  and  the  farther  point, 
B,  forms  images  on  non-corresponding  points  and  is  seen  double, — homonymous  diplopia, 
• — the  images  being  projected  to  the  focal  plane  A. 


it  will  be  noticed  that  when  the  eyes  are  fixed  on  the  far  finger 
the  near  one  is  seen  double  and  vice  versa.  In  this,  as  in  other 
experiments  in  which  the  eyes  are  accommodated  for  one  object 
while  the  attention  is  directed  to  another,  some  difficulty  may  be 
experienced  at  first  in  dissociating  these  two  acts  which  normally 
go  together,  but  a  little  practice  will  soon  enable  one  to  distinguish 
clearly  the  doubling  of  the  point  upon  which  the  lines  of  sight  are  not 
converged.  If  a  long  stick  is  held  horizontally  in  front  of  the  eyes 
the  end  near  the  face  will  be  doubled  when  the  eyes  are  directed  to 
the  far  end  and  vice  versa.  Moreover,  by  a  simple  experiment  it 
may  be  shown  that  objects  nearer  the  eyes  than  the  point  looked  at 
are  doubled  heteronymously, — that  is,  the  right-hand  image  belongs 
to  the  left  eye,  and  the  left-hand  one  to  the  right  eye.  This  is  easily 
demonstrated  by  closing  the  eyes  alternately  and  noting  which  of 
the  images  disappears.     The  reason  for  the  cross-projection  of  the 


BINOCULAR    VISION.  343 

images  is  made  apparent  by  the  construction  in  Fig.  149,  /,  bearing 
in  mind  the  essential  fact  that  in  projecting  our  retinal  images  we 
always  project  to  the  plane  of  the  object  upon  which  the  eyes  are 
focused.  In  the  figure  the  eyes  are  converged  on  A;  the  images  of 
point  B  fall  to  opposite  sides  of  the  line  of  sight  and  are  seen 
double  and  are  projected  to  the  plane  of  A,  the  image  on  the 
right  eye  being  projected  to  6'  on  the  left  of  A  and  that  on  the  left  eye 
to  b  on  the  right  of  ^.  In  a  similar  way  it  may  be  shown  that  ob- 
jects farther  away  from  the  eye  than  the  point  looked  at  are  doubled 
homonymously, — that  is,  the  right-hand  image  belongs  to  the  right 
eye,  and  the  left-hand  one  to  the  left  eye.  The  fact  is  explained  by 
the  construction  in  Fig.  149,  //,  in  which  A  is  the  point  converged 
upon  and  B  the  more  distant  object.  In  all  binocular  vision,  there- 
fore, the  series  of  objects  between  the  eye  and  the  point  looked  at  are 
doubled  heteronymously,  and  those  extending  beyond  the  point  in 
the  same  line  are  doubled  homonymously.  Normally  we  take  no 
conscious  notice  of  this  fact,  our  attention  being  absorbed  by  the 
object  upon  which  the  lines  of  sight  are  directed.  Some  physi- 
ologists, however,  have  assumed  that  the  knowledge  plays  an  im- 
portant part  subconsciously  in  giving  us  an  idea  of  depth  or  per- 
spective,— an  immediate  perception,  as  it  were,  of  the  distinction 
between  foreground  an  background.  It  is  usually  assumed  that  the 
explanation  of  corresponding  points  is  to  be  found  in  the  anatomical 
arrangement  of  the  optic  nerve  fibers.  Those  from  the  right  halves 
of  the  two  retinas,  which  are  corresponding  halves,  unite  in  the 
right  optic  tract  and  are  distributed  to  the  right  side  of  the  brain, 
while  the  fibers  from  the  left  halves  go  to  the  left  side  of  the  brain. 
The  basis  of  the  single  sensation  from  two  visual  images  is  to  be 
found  probably  in  the  fact  that  the  cerebral  terminations  through 
which  the  final  psychical  act  is  mediated  lie  close  together  or  possibly 
unite. 

The  Horopter.— In  every  fixed  position  of  the  eyes  there  are 
a  certain  number  of  points  in  the  binocular  field  which  fall 
upon  corresponding  points  in  the  two  retinas  and  are  therefore 
seen  single.  The  sum  of  these  points  is  designated  as  the  horopter 
for  that  position  of  the  eyes.  It  may  be  a  straight  or  curved  line, 
or  a  plane  or  curved  surface.  Helmholtz  calls  attention  to  the  fact 
that,  when  standing  with  our  eyes  in  the  primary  position, — that 
is,  directed  toward  the  horizon, — the  horopter  is  a  plane  coinciding 
with  the  ground,  and  this  fact  may  possibly  be  of  service  to  us  in 
walking. 

Suppression  of  Visual  Images. — It  happens  not  infrequently 
that  when  an  image  of  an  object  falls  upon  non-corresponding 
points  in  the  two  retinas  the  mind  ignores  or  suppresses  one  of  the 
images.     This  peculiarity  is  exhibited  especially  in  the  case  of  per- 


344  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

sons  suffering  from  "squint"  (strabismus).  In  this  condition  the 
individual,  for  one  reason  or  another,  is  unable  to  adjust  the  contrac- 
tions of  his  eye  muscles  so  as  to  unite  his  lines  of  sight  upon  the 
object  looked  at.  The  image  of  the  object  falls  upon  non-corre- 
sponding points  and  should  give  double  vision,  diplopia.  This 
would  undoubtedly  be  the  case  if  the  condition  came  on  suddenly ; 
just  as  double  vision  results  when  we  dislocate  one  eyeball  by 
pressing  slightly  upon  it.  But  in  cases  of  long  standing  one  of  the 
images,  that  from  the  abnormal  eye,  is  usually  suppressed.  The 
act  of  suppression  seems  to  be  a  case  of  a  stronger  stimulus  prevail- 
ing over  a  weaker  one  in  consciousness,  just  as  a  painful  sensation 
from  stimulation  of  one  part  of  the  skin  may  be  suppressed  by  a 
stronger  pain  from  some  other  region. 

Struggle  of  the  Visual  Fields. — When  the  images  of  two  dis- 
similar objects  are  thrown,  one  on  each  retina,  the  mind  is  presented, 
so  to  speak,  simultaneously  with  two  different  sensations.  Under 
such  circumstances  what  is  known  as  the  struggle  of  the  visual 
fields  ensues.  If  the  image  on  one  eye  consists  of  vertical  lines 
and  on  the  other  of  horizontal  lines  we  see  only  one  field  at  a  time, 
first  one  then  the  other,  or  the  field  is  broken,  vertical  lines  in  part 
and  horizontal  lines  in  part;  there  is  no  genuine  fusion  into  a  con- 
tinuous, constant  picture.  The  struggle  of  the  two  fields  is  better 
illustrated  when  different  colors  are  thrown  on  the  two  retinas. 
When  red  and  yellow  are  superposed  on  one  retina  we  obtain  a  com- 
pound sensation  of  orange;  if  they  are  thrown  one  on  one  retina, 
one  on  the  other,  no  such  fusion  takes  place.  We  see  the  field 
alternately  red  or  yellow  or  a  mixture  of  part  red  and  part  yellow, 
or  at  times  one  color,  as  it  were,  through  the  other.  If,  however, 
one  field  is  white  and  the  other  black  a  peculiar  sensation  of  glitter 
is  obtained,  quite  unlike  the  uniform  gray  that  would  result  if  the 
two  fields  were  superposed  on  one  retina. 

Judgments  of  Solidity. — Our  vision  gives  us  knowledge  not 
only  of  the  surface  area  of  objects,  but  also  of  their  depth  or  solidity, 
— that  is,  from  our  visual  sensations  we  obtain  conceptions  of  the 
three  dimensions  of  space.  The  visual  sensations  upon  which  this 
•conception  is  built  are  of  several  different  kinds,  partly  monocular, — 
that  is,  such  as  are  perceived  by  one  eye  alone, — partly  binocular. 
If  we  close  one  eye  and  look  at  a  bit  of  landscape  or  a  solid  object 
we  are  conscious  of  the  perspective,  of  the  right  relations  of  fore- 
ground and  background,  and  those  individuals  who  have  the 
misfortune  to  lose  one  eye  are  still  capable,  under  most  circum- 
stances, of  correct  visual  judgments  concerning  three  dimen- 
sional space.  Nevertheless  it  is  true  that  with  binocular  vision 
our  judgments  of  perspective  are  more  perfect,  and  that  under 
certain  circumstances  data  are  obtained  from  vision  with  two  eyes 


BINOCULAR   VISION.  345 

which  give  us  an  idea  of  solidity  far  more  real  than  can  be  obtained 
with  one  eye  alone.  This  difference  is  shown  especially  in  the 
combination  of  stereoscopic  pictures,  and  in  ordinary  vision  when 
the  light  is  dim,  as  in  twihght,  or  in  exact  judgments  of  perspective 
in  the  case  of  objects  close  at  hand.  If,  for  example,  we  close  one 
eye  and  attempt  to  thread  a  needle,  light  a  pipe,  or  make  any  similar 
co-ordinated  movement  that  depends  upon  an  exact  judgment  of 
the  distance  of  the  object  away  from  us,  it  will  be  found  that  the 
resulting  movement  is  far  less  perfectly  performed  than  when  two 
eyes  are  used.  The  sensation  elements  upon  which  our  judgments 
of  depth  or  perspective  are  founded  may  be  classified  as  follows  :* 

The  Monocular  Elements. — That  is,  those  that  are  experienced 
in  vision  with  one  eye.  (a)  Aerial  perspective.  The  air  is  not  en- 
tirely transparent,  and,  therefore,  in  viewing  landscapes  the  more 
distant  objects  are  less  distinctly  seen,  as  is  illustrated,  for  instance, 
by  the  haze  covering  distant  mountains.  This  experience  leads  us 
sometimes  to  make  erroneous  judgments  when  the  conditions  are 
unusual.  An  object  seen  suddenly  in  a  fog  looms  large,  as  the 
expression  goes,  since  the  feeling  that  hazy  objects  are  at  a  great 
distance  leads  us  to  give  a  proportional  overvaluation  to  the  rela- 
tively large  visual  image  made  by  the  near  object. 

(b)  Mathematical  perspective.  The  outlines  of  objects  before 
us  are  projected  upon  the  surface  of  the  eye  in  two  dimensions  only, 
just  as  they  are  represented  in  a  drawing.  The  lines  that  indicate 
depth  are  therefore  foreshortened,  and  hues  really  parallel  tend  to 
converge  more  and  more  to  a  vanishing  point  in  proportion  to  their 
distance  away  from  us.  When  one  stands  between  the  tracks  of  a 
railway,  for  instance,  this  convergence  of  the  parallel  lines  is  dis- 
tinctly apparent.  We  have  learned  to  interpret  this  mathematical 
perspective  correctly  and  with  great  accuracy.  The  use  of  this 
perspective  in  drawings  is,  in  fact,  one  of  the  chief  means  employed 
by  the  artist  to  produce  an  impression  of  depth  or  solidity.  For 
distant  objects  at  least  this  factor  is  probably  the  most  potent  of 
those  that  can  be  appreciated  by  monocular  vision. 

The  importance  of  the  mathematical  perspective  for  our  visual  judgments 
may  be  illustrated  very  strikingly  by  a  simple  experiment.  If  one  takes  a 
biconvex  lens  of  short  focus  and  standing  at  a  window  that  looks  out  upon  a 
long  street  holds  the  lens  in  front  of  the  eyes  at  arm's  length  he  -will  be  able 
to  see,  by  focusing  on  the  inverted  image  formed  by  the  lens,  that  not  only 
are  objects  inverted  as  regards  their  surface  features,  but,  for  most  persons 
at  least,  the  perspective  is  also  inverted.  Objects  actually  in  the  foreground 
will  appear  in  the  background,  and  one  may  have  the  curious  sensations  of 
watching  persons  who,  as  they  walk,  seem  to  recede  farther  and  farther  into 
the  distance  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  they  continue  to  increase  in  size.  The 
inverted  or  pseudoscopic  vision  thus  produced  is  due  undoubtedly  to  the  in- 
version of  the  lines  of  perspective.     Parallel  lines  which,  without  the  lens, 

*  See  Le  Conte,  "Sight,"  vol.  31  of  "The  International  Scientific  Series,"  1881. 


346  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

would  have  on  the  retina  a  projection  of  this  kind  /\  are  with  the  lens  projected 
inverted  \/,  and  our  visual  judgments  are  controlled  by  this  factor  in  spite 
of  the  opposing  evidence  from  the  size  of  the  retinal  images.  In  order  for 
the  experiment  to  succeed  it  is  necessary  that  the  objects  viewed  shall  be  far 
enough  away  so  that  a  fiat  picture  may  be  given  by  the  lens, — that  is,  a  pic- 
ture m  which  the  foci  for  the  near  points  shaU  not  differ  practically  from  those 
of  more  distant  points,  otherwise  the  muscular  movements  of  accommodation 
interfere  with  the  delusion.  The  relative  importance  of  this  last  factor 
(see  succeeding  paragraph)  is  well  illustrated  by  varying  the  experiment  in 
this  way:  Place  two  objects  upon  a  well-lighted  table,  one  at  the  near  end 
and  one  at  the  far  end.  Then  standing  close  to  the  talale  view  these  objects 
through  the  lens  as  before.  They  will  be  seen  in  their  right  relations  to  each 
other.  If,  however,  one  backs  away  from  the  table  while  watching  the  images 
there  will  come  a  distance  at  which  the  near  object  will  be  seen  to  shift  around 
to  the  rear  of  the  far  object. 

(c)  The  Muscle  Sense  (Focal  Adjustment). — For  objects  near 
enough  to  require  accommodation  it  is  obvious  that  the  nearer 
object  will  need  a  stronger  contraction  of  the  ciliary  muscle,  and 
also  of  the  internal  rectus  in  order  to  bring  the  line  of  sight  to  bear 
correctly.  By  means  of  the  fibers  of  muscle  sense  we  have  a  very 
exact  conception  of  the  degree  of  contraction  of  these  muscles,  and 
this  sensation  is  perhaps  the  most  important  factor  used  in  making 
our  monocular  judgments  of  depth  for  objects  at  a  short  distance. 
In  binocular  vision  the  same  factor  is  doubtless  of  increased  effi- 
ciency by  reason  of  the  sensations  obtained  from  the  two  eyes. 

(d)  The  disposition  of  lights  and  shades  and  the  size  of  familiar 
objects.  It  may  be  assumed  that  in  distant  vision  of  complex 
fields  the  varying  lights  and  shades  exhibited  by  objects  according 
as  they  stand  in  front  of  or  behind  each  other  also  aid  our  judg- 
ment. The  actual  size  also  of  the  retinal  images  of  familiar  objects — ■ 
such  as  animals,  trees,  etc. — gives  us  an  accessory  fact  which  con- 
tributes to  the  impression  derived  from  the  sources  mentioned 
above.  These  factors  are  employed  with  effect  by  the  artist  in 
strengthening  the  general  impression  which  he  wishes  to  give  of 
the  difference  between  the  foreground  and  the  background. 

The  Binocular  Perspective. — In  binocular  vision  there  is  an 
additional  element  which  contributes  greatly  to  our  judgment  of 
depth.  This  element  consists  in  the  fact  that  the  retinal  images 
of  external  objects,  particularly  near  objects,  are  different  in  the  two 
eyes.  Inasmuch  as  the  eyes  are  separated  by  some  distance  the 
projection  of  any  solid  object  upon  one  retina  is  different  from 
the  projection  on  the  other.  If  a  truncated  pyramid  is  held  in 
front  of  the  eyes,  the  right  eye  sees  more  of  the  right  side,  the  left 
more  of  the  left  side.  The  projection  of  the  same  object  upon  the 
two  retinas  may,  in  fact,  be  represented  by  the  drawings  given  in 
Fig.  150.  Whenever  this  condition  prevails,  whenever  what  we 
may  call  a  right-eyed  image  of  an  object  is  thrown  on  the  right  eye 
and  simultaneously  a  left-eyed  image  on  the  left  eye,  whether  in 


BINOCULAR   VISION. 


347 


Fig.  150. — Right-  and  left-eyed  images  of  truncated 
pyramid.  May  be  combined  to  produce  solid  image  by 
relaxing  the  accommodation, — that  is,  gazing  to  a  dis- 
tance through  the  book. 


nature-  or  by  an  artifice,  we  at  once  perceive  depth  or  solidity  in  the 
object.  This  fact  is  made  use  of  in  all  devices  employed  to  produce 
stereoscopic  vision. 

Stereoscopic  Vision. — Stereoscopic  pictures  may  be  obtained 
by  photographing  the 
same  object  or  collec- 
tion of  objects  from 
slightly  different 
points  so  as  to  get  a 
right-eyed  and  a  left- 
eyed  picture ;  or  for 
simple  outline  pic- 
tures, such  as  geo- 
metrical figures,  they 
may  be  made  by  draw- 
ings of  the  object  as  seen  by  the  two  eyes,  respectively  (see  Figs. 
150  and  152).  Any  optical  device  that  will  enable  us  to  throw  the 
right-eyed  picture  on  the  right  eye  and  the  left-eyed  picture  on 
the  left  eye  constitutes  a  stereoscope.     Many  different  forms  of 

stereoscope  have  been  devised; 
the  one  that  is  most  frequently 
used  is  the  Brewster  stereoscope 
represented  in  principle  in  Fig. 
151.  Each  eye  views  its  corre- 
sponding picture  through  a 
curved  prism.  The  sight  of  the 
left-eyed  picture  is  cut  off  from 
the  right  eye,  and  vice  versa,  by 
a  partition  extending  for  some 
distance  in  the  median  plane. 
The  prisms  are  placed  with  their 
bases  outward  and  the  rays  of 
light  from  the  pictures  are  re- 
fracted, as  shown  in  the  diagram, 
so  as  to  aid  the  eyes  in  converg- 
ing their  lines  of  sight  upon  the 
same  object.  The  prisms  also 
magnify  the  pictures  somewhat. 
Stereoscopic  pictures  are  mounted 
usually  for  this  instrument  so  that 
the  distance  between  the  same 
object  in  the  two  pictures  is  about  80  mms. — greater,  therefore,  than 
the  interocular  distance.  A  simple  form  of  stereoscope  that  is  very 
effective  and  interesting  is  sold  under  the  name  of  the  anaglyph. 
The  two  pictures  in  this  case  are  approximately  superposed,  but  the 


Fig.  151. — Diagram  to  illustrate  the 
principle  of  the  Brewster  stereoscope 
(Landois) :  P  and  P',  the  prisms,  a,  b, 
and  a,  fi,  the  left- and  right-eyed  pictures, 
respectively,  b,  |8,  being  a  point  in  the 
foreground  and  a,  a,  a  point  in  the  back- 
ground. The  eyes  are  converged  and 
focused  separately  for  each  point  as  in 
viewing  naturally  an  object  of  three  di- 
mensions. 


348 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


outlines  of  one  are  in  blue  and  the  other  in  red.  When  looked  at, 
therefore,  the  picture  gives  an  ordinary  fiat  view  with  confused 
red-blue  outlines.  If,  however,  one  holds  a  piece  of  red  glass  in 
front  of  the  left  eye  and  a  piece  of  blue  glass  in  front  of  the  right  eye, 
or  more  conveniently  uses  the  pair  of  spectacles  provided  which 
have  blue  glass  on  one  side,  red  on  the  other,  then  the  picture  stands 
out  at  once  in  solid  relief  with  surprising  distinctness — and  as  a 
black  and  white  object  only.  The  red  and  blue  glasses  in  this  case 
simply  serve  to  throw  the  right-eyed  image  on  the  right  eye  and  the 
left-eyed  image  on  the  left  eye.  Assuming  that  the  right-eyed 
image  is  outlined  in  red,  then  the  blue  glass  should  be  in  front  of  the 
right  eye.  This  glass  will  absorb  the  red  rays  completely  so  that 
the  red  outlines  in  the  picture  will  seem  black  and  a  distinct  right- 
eyed  picture  is  thrown  on  the  right  eye,  distinct  enough  to  make  us 
overlook  the  much  fainter  image  in  blue,  which  is  also  trans- 
mitted through  the  blue   glass.      The   red   glass   before  the  left 

eye  cuts  out,  in  the  same 
way,  the  right-eyed  image 
and  presents  in  dark  outline 
the  left-eyed  image.  By 
simply  reversing  the  spec- 
tacles the  right-eyed  image 
may  be  thrown  upon  the 
left  eye  and  vice  versa. 
Under  these  conditions  the 
picture  for  most  persons 
may  be  seen  in  inverted 
relief  (pseudoscopic  vision), 
objects  in  the  foreground 
receding  into  the  background.  This  inversion  of  the  relief  when 
the  projection  upon  the  retinas  is  reversed  is  a  striking  indica- 
tion of  the  potency  of  the  normal  projection  as  a  factor  in  our 
judgments  of  solid  objects.  It  will  be  observed,  moreover,  that 
those  pictures  that  show  least  mathematical  perspective  are  the  most 
readily  inverted,  and  that  the  ability  to  invert  the  picture  varies  in 
different  individuals;  in  some,  what  we  have  called  the  binocular 
perspective,  founded  upon  the  dissimilar  images,  prevails  over  the 
mathematical  perspective  more  readily  than  in  others. 

Stereoscopic  pictures  may  also  be  combined  very  successfully 
without  the  use  of  a  stereoscope  by  virtue  of  the  phenomenon  of 
physiological  diplopia.  If,  for  instance,  two  stereoscopic  drawings, 
such  as  are  represented  in  Fig.  152,  are  held  before  the  eyes  and  one 
relaxes  his  accommodation  so  as  to  look  through  the  pictures,  as  it 
were,  to  a  point  beyond,  then,  in  accordance  with  what  was  stated 
on  p.  324,   each  picture    gives  a  double  image,  since  it  falls  on. 


Fig.  152. — Stereoscopic  picture  of  an  octahe- 
dral crystal.  May  be  combined  stereoscopically 
by  relaxing  the  accommodation  by  the  method 
of  heteronymous  diplopia.  Hold  the  object  at  a 
distance  of  a  foot  or  more  and  gaze  beyond. 


BINOCULAR   VISION.  349 

non-corresponding  parts  of  the  two  retinas.  Four  pictures,  there- 
fore will  be  seen,  all  out  of  focus.  With  a  little  practice  one  can  so 
converge  his  eyes  as  to  make  the  two  middle  images  come  together, 
and  since  one  of  these  is  an  image  of  the  right-eyed  picture  and  is 
falling  on  the  right  eye,  and  the  other  is  a  left-eyed  picture  falling 
on  the  left  eye,  the  combination  of  the  two  fulfills  the  necessary 
conditions  for  binocular  perspective.  The  figure  stands  out  in 
bold  relief. 

Explanation  of  Binocular  Perspective. — Our  perception  of 
solidity  or  relief  is  a  secondary  psychical  act,  and,  so  far  as  the  binoc- 
ular element  is  concerned,  it  is  based  upon  the  fact  that  the  images 
are  slightly  different  on  the  two  retinas ;  but  why  this  dissimilarity 
should  produce  an  inference  of  this  kind  is  not  entirely  understood. 
Certain  facts  have  been  pointed  out  as  having  a  probable  bearing 
upon  the  mental  process.  In  the  first  place,  in  stereoscopic  pictures, 
as  in  nature,  we  do  not  see  the  whole  field  at  once.  To  see  the  ob- 
jects in  the  foreground  the  eyeballs  must  be  converged  by  the  eye 
muscles  so  that  the  lines  of  sight  may  meet  in  the  object  regarded. 
When  attention  is  paid  to  objects  in  the  background  less  convergence 
is  necessary  (see  Fig.  149).  The  point  of  fixation  for  the  lines  of 
sight  is  kept  continually  moving  to  and  fro,  and  the  sensation  of 
this  muscular  movement  undoubtedly  plays  an  important  part  in 
giving  us  the  idea  of  depth  or  solidity.  For  persons  not  practised 
in  the  matter  of  observing  stereoscopic  pictures  the  full  idea  of  relief 
comes  out  only  after  this  muscular  activity  has  been  called  upon. 
But  for  the  practised  eye  this  play  of  the  muscles  is  not  absolutely 
necessary.  The  stereoscopic  picture  stands  out  in  relief  even  when 
illuminated  momentarily  by  the  light  of  an  electric  spark.  The  per- 
ception of  solidity  in  this  case  is  instantaneous,  and  it. has  been  sug- 
gested that  this  result  may  depend  upon  the  immediate  recognition 
of  physiological  diplopia, — that  is,  the  fact  that  objects  nearer  than 
the  point  of  fixation  are  doubled  heteronymously,  while  those 
farther  away  are  doubled  homonymously  (see  p.  342).  Such  an 
effect  can  only  be  produced  distinctly  by  objects  having  depth 
and  possibly  in  the  case  of  the  trained  eye  it  alone  is  sufficient  to 
give  the  immediate  inference  of  solidity  or  relief,  while  the  un- 
trained eye  requires  the  accessory  sensations  aroused  by  focal 
adjustment,  mathematical  perspective,  etc. 

Judgments  of  Distance  and  Size. — Judgments  of  distance 
and  size  are  closely  related.  Our  judgments  regarding  size  are 
based  primarily  upon  the  size  of  the  retinal  image,  the  amount  of 
the  visual  angle.  This  datum,  however,  is  sufficient  in  itself  only 
for  objects  at  the  same  distance  from  us.  If  they  are  at  different 
distances  or  we  suppose  that  such  is  the  case,  our  judgment  of  the 
distance  controls  our  judgment  of  size.     This  fact  is  beautifully 


350  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

shown  in  the  case  of  after-images  (see  p.  323).  When  an  after- 
image of  any  object  is  obtained  on  the  retina  our  judgment  of  its 
size  depends  altogether  on  the  distance  to  which  we  project  it. 
If  we  look  at  a  surface  near  at  hand,  it  seems  small ;  if  we  gaze  at  a 
wall  many  feet  away  it  is  at  once  greatly  enlarged.  The  familiar 
instance  of  the  variation  in  the  size  of  the  full  moon  according  as  it 
is  seen  at  the  horizon  or  at  the  zenith  depends  upon  the  same  fact. 
The  distance  to  the  horizon  as  viewed  along  the  surface  of  the  earth 
seems  greater  than  to  the  zenith;  we  picture  the  heavens  above  us 
as  an  arched  dome  flattened  at  the  top,  and  hence  the  same  size  of 
retinal  image  is  interpreted  as  larger  when  we  suppose  that  we  see 
it  at  a  greater  distance.  Our  judgments  of  distance,  on  the  other 
hand,  depend  primarily  upon  the  data  already  enumerated  in 
speaking  of  the  perception  of  solidity  or  depth  in  the  visual  field. 
For  objects  within  the  limit  of  accommodation  we  depend  chiefly 
on  the  muscle  sense  aroused  by  the  act  of  focusing  the  eyes, — that 
is,  the  contractions  of  the  ciliary  and  of  the  extrinsic  muscles.  For 
objects  outside  the  limit  of  accommodation  we  are  influenced  by 
binocular  perspective,  mathematical  perspective,  aerial  perspective, 


Fig.  153. — Miiller-Lyer  figures  to  show  illusion  in  space  perception.     The  lines  A  and  B 

are  of  the  same  length. 

etc.  But  here  again  our  judgment  of  distance  is  greatly  influenced 
in  the  case  of  familiar  objects  by  the  size  of  the  retinal  image.  A 
striking  instance  of  the  latter  fact  is  obtained  by  the  use  of  field 
glasses  or  opera  glasses.  When  we  look  through  them  properly 
the  size  of  the  retinal  image  is  enlarged,  and  the  objects,  therefore, 
seem  to  be  nearer  to  us.  If  we  reverse  the  glasses  and  look  through 
the  large  end  the  size  of  the  retinal  image  is  reduced  and  the  objects, 
therefore,  seem  to  be  much  farther  away,  since  under  normal  condi- 
tions such  small  images  of  familiar  objects  are  formed  only  when 
they  are  at  a  great  distance  from  us. 

Optical  Deceptions. — Wrong  judgments  as  regards  distance 
and  size  are  frequently  made  and  the  fact  may  be  illustrated  in  a 
number  of  interesting  ways.  Thus,  in  Fig.  153  the  lines  A  and  B 
are  of  the  same  size,  but  B  seems  to  be  distinctly  the  longer.  So 
in  Fig.  154  the  vertical  lines,  although  exactly  parallel,  seem,  on 
the  contrary,  to  run  obliquely  with  reference  to  one  another.  Both 
of  these  deceptions  depend  apparently  upon  our  inability  to  estimate 
angles  exactly;  we  undervalue  the  acute  angles  and  overvalue  those 
that  are  obtuse.  A  very  remarkable  delusion  is  given  by  Fig.  155. 
If  the  book  is  held  flat  at  the  level  of  the  chin  and  six  or  eight 


BINOCULAR   VISION. 


351 


inches  from  the  face  and  the  eyes  are  focused  on  the  point  of  inter- 
section of  any  two  of  the  Hnes,  a  third  hne  will  be  seen  perpen- 


'/f  z  z  ^^  z 


// 
// 

// 
/ 


\  / 


^"^  //  \K  T 

^^  Z  i  ^ 


N.^  ' y  \\ 


\ 


\ 


\ 


Fig.   154. — Zollner's  lines. 


dicular  to  the  plane  of  the  other  two,  and  projecting  vertically 
from  the  surface  of  the  page.  A  row  of  these  vertical  lines  will 
be  seen,   if  the  distance  is  properly  chosen.     As  one  bends  the 


Fig.  155. — Optical  illusion  in  projection. — {Franklin.') 


head  from  side  to  side  the  lines  sway  in  the  same  direction.  It 
forms  a  very  striking  instance  of  the  fact  that  we  may  see  most 
distinctly  a  thing  that  has  no  real  existence, — a  case,  therefore, 


352  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

in  which  we  can  not  trust  our  senses.  The  delusion  seems  to  be 
due  to  the  fact  that  the  two  hnes,  in  the  position  indicated,  form 
a  projection  on  the  retina  such  as  would  be  made  by  an  actual 
vertical  rod  placed  at  the  point  at  which  we  see  one.  Fig.  156 
gives  an  interesting  illustration  of  the  way  in  which  our  judg- 
ment of  solidity  may  vary  with  our  interpretation  of  mathe- 
matical perspective  and  shading  when  these  factors  are  arranged 


Fig.  156. — Figure  to  illustrate  binocular  deceptions  depending  upon  different  inter- 
pretations of  the  mathematical  perspective  and  the  lights  and  shades.  On  gazing  fixedly 
the  image  will  change  from  a  single  cube  with  black  top  resting  on  two  others  with  black 
tops,  to  one  of  two  cubes  with  black  bottoms  resting  upon  a  single  cube  with  black 
bottom.     Still  other  figures  may  appear  from  time  to  time. 

to  give  more  than  one  choice.  If  the  figure  is  looked  at  steadily 
it  may  assume  several  different  appearances  ;  two  are  especially 
prominent.  We  may  see  two  cubes  resting  upon  a  third  one, 
each  with  the  black  side  undermost,  or  we  may  see  one  cube  rest- 
ing on  two  under  ones  each  with  its  black  side  uppermost.  Our 
judgment  in  the  matter  changes  from  one  interpretation  to  the 
other  without  any  apparent  cause. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  EAR. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


THE  EAR  AS  AN  ORGAN  FOR  SOUND  SENSATIONS. 

In  discussing  the  physiology  of  the  ear  it  is  necessary  to  consider 
the  functional  importance  of  its  various  parts,  the  external  ear 
consisting  of  the  lobe  or  pinna,  the  external  auditory  meatus,  and 
the  tympanic  membrane;  the  middle  ear,  with  its  chain  of  ossicles, 
its  muscles  and  ligaments,  and  the  Eustachian  tube;  and  the  internal 
ear,  with  its  cochlea,  vestibule  (utriculus  and  sacculus),  and  semi- 
circular canals.     The  eighth  cranial  or  so-called  auditory  nerve  is 


Fig.  157. — Semidiagrammatic  section  through  the  right  ear  (Czermak):  G,  External 
auditory  meatus;  T,  membrana  tympani;  P,  tympanic  cavity;  o,  fenestra  ovalis;  r,  fen- 
estra rotunda;  B,  semicircular  canal;  <S,  cochlea;  Vt,  scala  vestibuli;  Pt,  scala  tympani; 
E,  Eustachian  tube. 


distributed  entirely  within  the  internal  ear;  the  fibers  of  the  coch- 
lear branch,  which  alone  perhaps  are  concerned  with  hearing,  end 
among  the  sensory  nerve  cells  of  the  cochlea,  while  the  vestibular 
branch  supplies  similar  sense  cells  situated  in  the  utriculus,  sacculus, 
and  the  ampullse  of  the  semicircular  canals.  We  may  consider 
first  the  functions  of  the  ear  in  respect  to  the  sensations  of  sound. 
23  353 


354 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


The  somewhat  comphcated  anatomy  of  the  parts  concerned  should 
be  obtained  from  the  special  works  on  anatomy  or  histology.  For 
the  purposes  of  a  physiological  presentation  the  schematic  figure 
employed  by  Czermak  and  reproduced  in  Fig.  157  will  suffice  to 
exhibit  the  general  anatomical  relations  of  the  parts  concerned  in 
the  transmission  of  the  sound  waves  from  the  exterior  to  the  cochlea. 
The  Pinna  or  Auricle. — ^The  pinna  opens  into  the  external  mea- 
tus by  means  of  a  cone-shaped  depression,  the  concha.  The  whole 
organ,  and  especially  the  concha,  may  be  considered  as  fulfilling 
more  or  less  perfectly  the  function  of  collecting  the  sound  waves 
and  reflecting  them  into  the  meatus.  In  the  lower  animals  the  con- 
cave shape  of  the  ear  and  its  motility  probably  make  it  much  more 
useful  in  this  respect  than  in  the  case  of  the  human  ear.  But  even 
in  man  the  pinna  is  valuable  to  some    extent  in  intensifying  the 

appreciation  of  sounds  and 
also  in  enabling  us  to  deter- 
mine their  direction.  The  ex- 
ternal auditory  meatus  has  a 
length  of  about  21  to  26  mms., 
and  a  capacity  of  something 
over  one  cubic  centimeter. 
Its  course  is  not  straight,  but 
passes  first  somewhat  back- 
ward and  upward,  and  then 
turns  forward  and  inward  to 
end  against  the  tympanic 
membrane.  All  sound  waves 
that  affect  the  drum  of  the  ear 
must,  of  course,  pass  through 
this  canal. 

The  Tjmipanic  Mem- 
brane.— The  tympanic  mem- 
brane closes  the  inner  end  of 
the  meatus  and  lies  obliquely  to  the  axis  of  the  canal,  its  plane 
making  an  angle,  opening  downward,  of  150  degrees.  The  mem- 
brane, although  not  more  than  0.1  mm.  thick,  consists  of  three 
coats:  a  layer  of  skin  on  the  external  surface,  a  layer  of  mucous 
membrane  on  the  side  toward  the  middle  ear,  and  in  between  a 
layer  of  fibrous  connective  tissue.  The  middle  layer  gives  to  the 
membrane  its  peculiar  structure  and  properties.  In  form  the 
membrane  has  the  shape  of  a  shallow  funnel  with  the  apex,  or 
umbo,  as  it  is  called,  somewhat  below  the  center.  The  fibers  of 
the  fibrous  layer  are  arranged  partly  circularly  and  partly  in  lines 
radiating  from  the  umbo  to  the  peripheral  margin  (Fig.  158). 
The  walls  of  the  funnel  are  slightly  convex  outwardly;   so  that 


Fig.  158. — To  show  the  structure  of  the 
tympanic  membrane,  looked  at  from  the  side 
of  the  meatus  (Hensen)  :  ax,  The  axis  of  rota- 
tion of  the  ear  bones;  d,  the  incus;  a,  the 
head  of  the  malleus. 


EAR   AS    AN   ORGAN    FOR   SOUND   SENSATIONS. 


355 


each  radiating  fiber  forms  an  arch.  On  the  inner  side  of  the  mem- 
brane the  chain  of  ear  ossicles  is  attached,  so  that  the  vibrations 
of  the  membrane  are  transmitted  directly  to  these  bones.  The 
peculiar  form  of  the  membrane,  its  funnel  shape,  its  arched  sides, 
and  its  unsymmetrical  division  by  the  umbo  are  supposed  to  con- 
tribute to  its  value  as  a  transmitter  of  the  sound  vibrations  of  the 
air.  In  the  first  place,  the  membrane  shows  little  tendency  to 
after-vibrations, — that  is,  when  set  in  motion  by  an  air  wave  it 
shows  little  or  no  tendency  to  continue  vibrating  after  the  acting 


-12 


Fig.  159. — Tympanum  of  right  side  with  ossicles  in  place,  viewed  from  within  (after 
Morris):  1,  Body  of  incus;  2,  suspensory  ligament  of  malleus;  3,  ligament  of  incus;  4, 
head  of  malleus;  5,  epitym panic  cavity;  6,  chorda  tympani  nerve;  7,  tendon  of  tensor 
tympani  muscle;  8,  foot-piece  of  stirrup;  9,  os  orbiculare;  10,  manubrium;  11,  tensor 
tympani  muscle;    12,  membrana  tympani;    1.3,  Eustachian  tube. 


force  has  ceased.  It  is  obvious  that  such  a  property  is  valuable  in 
rendering  hearing  more  distinct,  and  the  peculiarity  of  the  mem- 
brane in  this  respect  is  attributed  partly  to  its  special  form  and 
partly  to  the  damping  action  of  the  bones  attached  to  it.  In  the 
second  place,  the  arched  sides  of  the  funnel  act  as  a  lever,  so  that 
the  movements  at  these  parts  are  transmitted  to  the  umbo  with  a 
diminution  in  amplitude,  but  an  intensification  in  force.  It  is  at 
the  umbo  that  the  movement  is  communicated  to  the  ear  bones. 

The  Ear  Bones. — The  three  ear  bones — the  malleus,  the  incus, 
and  the  stapes — taken  together  form  a  chain  connecting  the  tym- 


356 


THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 


panic  membrane  with  the  membrane  of  the  fenestra  ovaHs.  By 
this  means  the  vibrations  of  the  tympanic  membrane  are  com- 
municated to  the  membrane  of  the  fenestra  ovahs  and  thus  to  the 
perilymph  filling  the  cavity  of  the  internal  ear.  The  bones  consist 
of  spongy  material  with  a  compact  surface  layer.  Their  general 
shape  and  connections  are  illustrated  in  Figs.  159  and  160.  To 
understand  the  manner  in  which  the  chain  of  bones  acts  in  con- 
veying the  vibrations  from  one  membrane  to  the  other  some  points 
in  their  structure  and  connections  may  be  recalled.  The  malleus 
is  about  18  to  19  mms.  long,  and  has  an  average  weight  of  23  milli- 
grams. Its  long  handle  is  imbedded  in  the  tympanic  membrane, 
the  tip  reaching  to  the  umbo.  The  large,  rounded  head  projects 
above  the  upper  edge  of  the  tympanic  membrane  and  forms  a  true 

joint  of  a  peculiar  nature  with  the 
incus.  It  has  two  processes  in  ad- 
dition to  the  manubrium :  a  short 
one,  processus  brevis,  that  presses 
against  the  upper  edge  of  the  tym- 
panic membrane,  and  a  longer  one, 
the  processus  gracilis  or  processus 
Folianus,  which  projects  forward 
and  is  continued  by  a  ligament,  the 
anterior  ligament,  through  which 
the  malleus  is  attached  to  the  bony 
wall  of  the  tympanic  cavity.  Three 
other  ligaments  are  attached  to  the 
malleus,  the  external  ligament,  bind- 
ing it  to  the  external  face  of  the 
cavity,  the  posterior  ligament,  and 
the  superior  ligament,  the  latter  at- 
taching the  upper  part  of  the  head 
to  the  roof  of  the  tympanic  cavity.  By  means  of  these  ligaments 
the  bone  is  held  steadily  in  position  even  after  its  connections 
with  the  incus  are  loosened.  The  incus  is  somewhat  more  mas- 
sive than  the  malleus,  weighing  about  25  milligrams.  Its  thicker 
portion  articulates  with  the  head  of  the  malleus,  and  it  has  two 
processes  nearly  at  right  angles  to  each  other.  The  shorter  process 
extends  posteriorly  and  is  attached  by  a  ligament  to  the  posterior 
wall  of  the  tympanic  cavity;  the  long  process  passes  downward 
parallel  with  the  handle  of  the  malleus,  but  turns  in  at  the  tip 
to  form  the  rounded  os  orbiculare,  which  articulates  with  the 
head  of  the  stapes.  This  latter  bone  is  extremely  light,  weighing 
about  3  milligrams,  its  oval  base  being  attached  to  the  margins 
of  the  fenestra  ovalis  by  a  short,  stiff  membrane. 

The  Mode  of  Action  of  the  Ear  Bones. — The  movements  of 


Fig.  160.— The  bones  of  the 
middle  ear  in  natural  connections 
{HelmhoUz):  M,  The  malleus;  Mcp, 
the  head;  Mc,  the  neck;  Ml,  the 
processus  gracilis;  Mm,  the  manu- 
brium; Ic,  body  of  the  incus;  lb, 
short  process;  II,  long  process;  S, 
the  stapes. 


EAR   AS    AN    ORGAN    FOR    SOUND    SENSATIONS. 


357 


the  tympanic  membrane  are  communicated  to  the  tip  of  the  handle 
of  the  manubrium.  As  the  handle  moves  in,  the  chain  of  bones 
makes  a  rotary  movement  around  an  axis  which  may  be  defined  as 
the  line  passing  through  the  attachment  of  the  short  process  of  the 
incus  and  the  anterior  ligament  of  the  malleus.  The  general  posi- 
tion of  this  axis  is  represented  by  the  line  a-b  in  Fig.  161.  This  line 
passes  through  the  neck  of  the  malleus ;  so  that  as  the  handle  moves 
in  the  head  of  the  malleus  and  the  upper  part  of  the  incus  move  in 
the  opposite  direction, — while  the  long  process  of  the  incus  together 
with  the  stapes,  being  below  the  axis,  move  in  the  same  direction  as 
the  handle,  (see  Fig.  161A).  The  chain  of  bones,  therefore,  acts 
like  a  bent  lever  whose  fulcrum  is  at  a,  the  power  arm  being  repre- 


Fig.  161. — To  illustrate  the  lever 
action  of  the  ear  bones  (McKendrick) : 
M,  The  malleus;  e,  the  incus;  a-h,  the 
axis  of  rotation;  a,  short  process  of 
incus  abutting  against  the  tympanic 
wall ;  a-p,  the  power  arm ;  a-r,  the 
load  arm  of  the  lever. 


Fig.  161.4. — Schema  to  illustrate  the 
way  in  which  the  ear  ossicles  act  to- 
gether as  a  bent  lever  in  transmitting  the 
movements  of  the  tympanic  membrane 
to  the  membrane  of  the  fenestra  ovaUs. 
1,  The  haftdle  of  the  malleus;  2,  the  long 
proce.ss  of  the  incus;  3,  the  stapes  ;  a-b, 
the  axis  of  rotation.  The  arrows  indi- 
cate a  movement  inward  of  the  tympanic 
membrane. 


sented  by  the  line  p-a  and  the  load  arm  by  the  line  r-a.  According 
to  Helmholtz,*  the  distance  'p-a  is  equal  to  9.5  mms.,  while  r-a 
is  6.3  mms.  The  movement  at  r,  therefore,  or  the  movement 
of  the  stapes,  will  have  only  two-thirds  of  the  amplitude  of  the 
movement  at  p,  but  will  have  a  correspondingly  greater  (one 
and  one-half  times)  force.  The  mechanisms  of  the  tympanic 
membrane  and  the  ear  bones  combine,  therefore,  to  convert  the 
vibratory  movements  of  the  tympanic  membrane  into  smaller 
but  more  intense  movements  of  the  membrane  of  the  fenestra 
ovalis.     It  should  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  the  amplitude 

*  Helmholtz,  "Die  Lehre  von  den  Tonempfindungen,  etc.,"  fifth  edition, 
1896.     See  also  English  translation  by  Ellis. 


358  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

of  these  movements  under  normal  conditions  is  very  minute. 
That  of  the  base  of  the  stirrup  is  estimated  at  about  0.04 
mm.,  while  the  amplitude  at  the  tip  of  the  manubrium,  though 
relatively  much  larger,  is  still  less  than  a  millimeter  (0.2  to 
0.7  mm.).  The  minute  but  relatively  intense  movements  of  the 
stapes  set  into  vibration  the  perilymph  in  the  internal  ear,  and 
through  these  movements  the  sensory  nerve  cells  in  the  cochlea 
are  stimulated,  and  nerve  impulses  are  thereby  aroused  in  the 
fibers  of  the  cochlear  nerve.  Ankylosis  of  the  ear  bones  impedes 
their  movements  and  impairs  the  delicacy  of  hearing,  and  if  the  an- 
kylosis affects  the  base  of  the  stapes  at  its  insertion  into  the  fenestra 
ovalis  practically  complete  deafness  ensues.  The  articulation  of 
the  head  of  the  malleus  with  the  body  of  the  incus  is  a  peculiar 
saddle-shaped  joint,  which,  according  to  the  description  given  by 
Helmholtz,  acts  like  a  cogged  or  ratchet  movement.  When  the 
tympanic  membrane  moves  in  and  the  head  of  the  malleus,  there- 
fore, moves  outward,  the  joint  locks,  so  that  the  incus  follows  the 
malleus.  If,  however,  from  any  unusual  cause  the  tympanic  mem- 
brane is  moved  outward  from  its  resting  position,  as  may  result,  for 
instance,  from  a  marked  fall  in  air  pressure,  then  the  malleus-incus 
joint  unlocks  and  the  incus  fails  to  follow  completely  the  movement 
of  the  malleus,  thereby  protecting  the  structures  in  the  internal  ear. 
Muscles  of  the  Middle  Ear. — ^Two  small  muscles  are  present  in 
the  middle  ear :  the  tensor  tympani  and  the  stapedius.  The  former 
arises  in  a  groove  just  above  the  Eustachian  tube  and  its  long  tendon 
is  inserted  into  the  neck  of  the  malleus  just  below  the  axis  of  rotation. 
The  muscle  is  innervated  by  a  branch  of  the  facial  nerve.  It  is 
obvious  that  when  this  muscle  contracts  it  must  pull  the  tympanic 
membrane  inward  and  put  it  under  greater  tension.  The  stapedius 
muscle  arises  from  the  inner  wall  of  the  tympanic  cavity  and  its 
tendon  is  inserted  into  the  neck  of  the  stapes.  This  muscle  is  also 
innervated  through  a  branch  of  the  facial.  When  it  contracts  it 
tends  to  pull  the  stapes  laterally,  and  thus  probably  places  the  mem- 
brane attached  to  its  base  under  greater  tension.  The  functions 
fulfilled  by  these  muscles  have  been  the  subject  of  much  controversy. 
According  to  a  view  first  proposed  by  Johannes  Miiller,  they  act  as 
a  protective  mechanism  to  the  membranes  of  the  middle  ear.  By 
increasing  the  tension  of  the  membranes  they  limit  the  amplitude  of 
their  vibrations  and  thus  protect  the  membranes  from  injury  or 
possible  rupture  in  the  case  of  the  violent  movements  resulting  from 
loud,  explosive  noises.  Or  possibly  by  their  reflex  contraction 
they  protect  us  from  intense,  disagreeable  noises,  by  limiting  the 
responsiveness  of  the  vibrating  membranes.  A  more  probable  view, 
however,  and  one  supported  to  some  extent  by  experimental  evi- 
dence, was  suggested  by  Mach.     According  to  this  observer,  the 


EAR    AS   AN   ORGAN    FOR   SOUND    SENSATIONS.  359 

contractions  of  the  muscles  adjust  the  membranes  to  the  better 
reception  of  sound  vibrations  and  are  used,  therefore,  in  attentive 
listening.  They  form,  in  fact,  a  mechanism  of  accommodation  simi- 
lar in  its  general  functions  to  the  ciliary  muscle  of  the  eye.  Hensen* 
has  shown  that  both  muscles  contract  reflexly  to  sounds,  and  that  the 
contractions  of  the  tensor  tympani  are  stronger,  the  higher  the 
pitch  of  the  sound.  This  contraction  seems  to  take  place  at  the 
beginning  of  the  sound,  but  is  not  maintained  for  a  long  period. 
The  reaction  is  apparently  a  reflex  movement  the  sensory  path  of 
which  lies  in  the  acoustic  nerve  and  the  reflex  center  in  the  medulla 
oblongata.  That  a  similar  reflex  adjustment  takes  place  in  man  is 
indicated  by  the  following  experiment  described  by  Hensen.  If 
while  listening  to  a  tuning-fork  (400  to  1000  v.  d.)  a  metronome  is  set 
going  at  a  rate  of  40  to  60  beats  per  minute,  the  tone  of  the  tuning- 
fork  becomes  obviously  strengthened.  The  stimulus  of  the  noise 
caused  by  the  metronome  may  be  supposed  to  excite  the  reflex  con- 
tractions of  the  muscles  of  the  ear  and  thus  increase  its  responsive- 
ness to  the  vibrations  of  the  tuning-fork.  According  to  this  view, 
therefore,  the  ear  muscles  are  kept  constantly  in  play  by  sounds  or 
sudden  variations  in  the  intensity  of  sounds,  and  perhaps  the  obvious 
effort  experienced  in  listening  intently  to  a  sound  is  also  due  to  a  con- 
traction of  these  muscles. 

The  Eustachian  Tube.— Through  the  Eustachian  tube  a  com- 
munication is  established  between  the  tympanic  cavity  and  the 
pharynx,  and  through  this  latter  with  the  exterior.  The  obvious 
advantage  of  this  arrangement  is  that  it  keeps  the  air  within  the 
tympanum  under  the  same  pressure  as  the  outside  air, — that  is,  the 
pressure  on  the  two  sides  of  the  tympanic  membrane  is  kept  the 
same.  The  pharyngeal  opening  of  the  tube  is  normally  closed,  but  it 
may  be  opened  by  raising  or  lowering  the  pressure  in  the  pharynx. 
This  happens,  for  instance,  in  the  act  of  swallowing,  and  we  perform 
this  act,  therefore,  whenever  our  sensations  from  the  tympanic  mem- 
brane warn  us  of  an  inequality  in  pressure  upon  the  two  sides.  When, 
for  instance,  one  enters  a  caisson  in  which  the  external  pressure  is 
increased  over  the  normal  atmospheric  pressure  the  tympanic 
membrane  would  be  driven  inward  by  the  excess  of  external  pres- 
sure were  it  not  for  the  existence  of  the  Eustachian  tube.  Under 
these  conditions  swallowing  movements  will  open  the  pharyngeal  end 
of  the  tube  and  thus  bring  the  tj^mpanic  cavity  under  a  barometric 
pressure  equal  to  that  on  the  outside.  In  nasal  catarrh  the  tube 
may  be  occluded  so  as  to  prevent  this  equalization,  and  under  such 
conditions,  as  is  well  known,  the  delicacy  of  hearing  is  much  im- 
paired, until  by  raising  the  pressure  in  the  pharynx  or  by  other 
means  the  tube  is  opened. 

*  Hensen,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologic,"  87,  355,  1901. 


360  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

The  Projection  of  the  Auditory  Sensations. — Auditory  sen- 
sations are  projected  to  the  exterior  and,  indeed,  to  the  supposed 
origin  of  the  sound.  The  projection,  however,  is  nothing  Hke  so 
perfect  as  in  the  case  of  visual  stimuh.  Our  judgments  of  the  dis- 
tance and  direction  of  sounds  are  manifestly  less  exact  than  in  the 
case  of  objects  seen  by  the  eye.  As  an  example,  one  may  refer  to 
the  difficulty  of  locating  exactly  such  sounds  as  the  note  of  a  cricket. 
In  the  ear  the  sensitive  elements  in  the  cochlea  are  not  arranged  so 
that  sounds  coming  from  different  directions  can  affect  different 
nerve  fibers.  All  sound  stimuli  come  to  this  part  of  the  ear  by  one 
path, — namely,  the  tympanic  membrane  and  its  accessory  struc- 
tures. In  judging  the  direction  and  distance  of  sounds  we  must 
rely,  therefore,  upon  the  relative  distinctness  of  the  sounds  in  the 
two  ears,  the  variations  in  distinctness  observed  by  varying  the 
position  of  the  head,  the  accessory  information  obtained  from 
vision,  etc.  The  general  sensibility  of  the  tympanic  membrane 
also  plays  a  part.  When  a  vibrating  body — a  tuning-fork,  for 
example — is  held  between  the  teeth,  the  vibrations  are  transmitted 
to  the  internal  ear  in  part  at  least  through  the  bones  of  the  head, 
and  the  sound  in  this  case  is  referred  or  projected  into  the  head 
itself  instead  of  to  the  tuning-fork.  So  that  in  hearing  by  the  usual 
method  the  sensations  of  the  vibrating  tympanic  membrane  must 
form  part  of  the  data  by  means  of  which  we  project  the  sensation 
to  the  exterior. 

The  Sensory  Epithelium  of  the  Cochlea. — The  fibers  of  the 
cochlear  branch  of  the  auditory  nerve  arise  in  the  nerve  cells  of  the 
spiral  ganglion  situated  in  the  central  pillar,  the  modiolus,  of  the 
cochlea.  This  ganglion  resembles  in  structure  the  posterior  root 
ganglion  of  the  spinal  nerves.  Each  cell  is  bipolar,  sending  one 
fiber  toward  the  brain  in  the  acoustic  nerve,  and  one  fiber  to  end  in 
terminal  arborizations  around  the  sensory  cells  or  hair  cells  of  the 
organ  of  Corti  in  the  cochlea.  We  have  every  reason  to  beheve, 
therefore,  that  these  hair  cells  form  the  apparatus  which  is  affected 
by  sound  and  by  means  of  which  nerve  impulses  are  generated 
and  transmitted  to  the  acoustic  fibers.  The  general  arrangement 
and  the  relations  of  these  cells  are  indicated  in  Fig.  162.  They 
consist  of  short  more  or  less  cylindrical  cells  (E,  6,  6',  6",  Fig.  162), 
whose  lower  portion  does  not  reach  to  the  basilar  membrane,  but 
is  supported  by  the  intervening  Deiters  cells.  The  upper  ends  of 
the  cells  project  through  the  openings  in  the  reticulate  membrane 
and  end  in  a  number — according  to  Retzius,*  about  twenty — short, 
stiff  hairs.     The  hair  cells  are  arranged  in  four  to  six  rows,  one 

*  The  most  complete  details  of  the  structure  of  the  ear  will  be  found  in 
the  great  work  of  Retzius,  "Das  Gehororgan  der  Wirbelthiere,"  vol.  ii,  1884, 
Stockholm. 


EAR    AS   AN   ORGAN   FOR    SOUND    SENSATIONS. 


361 


row  on  the  inner  side  of  the  inner  rods  of  Corti  and  three  to  five 
rows,  according  to  the  part  of  the  cochlea  examined,  on  the  outer 
side  of  the  rods  of  Corti.  Their  total  number  has  been  estimated 
dilTerently  by  different  observers;  but,  accepting  the  lower  figures 
given,  it  ma}'  be  said  that  there  are  at  least  3500  inner  hair  cells 
and  13,000  outer  ones,  giving  a  total  of  16,500  or  more.  The  theory 
usually  proposed  to  account  for  the  mechanism  by  which  the  vibra- 
tions of  the  perilymph  affect  these  cells,  and  especially  the  expla- 
nation of  the  means  by  which  different  sounds  affect  different  cells, 
is  that  there  is  contained  in  the  cochlea  a  mechanism  which  acts 
b}"  sympathetic    resonance.      To  make  this  theory  clear  a   short 


Fig.  162. — Diagrammatic  view  of  the  organ  of  Corti,  the  sense  cells,  and  the  accessory 
structures  of  the  membranous  cochlea  (Testut):  A,  Inner  rods  of  Corti ;£,  outer  rods 
of  Corti  ;  C,  tunnel  of  Corti  ;  D,  basilar  membrane;  E,  single  row  of  inner  hair  (sense) 
cells;  6,  6',  6",  rows  of  outer  hair  (sense)  cells;  7,  7',  supporting  cells  of  Deiters.  The 
ends  of  the  inner  hair  cells  are  seen  projecting  through  the  openings  of  the  reticulate 
membrane.  The  terminal  arborizations  of  the  cochlear  nerve  fibers  end  around  the 
inner  and  outer  hair  cells. 


description  must  be  given  of  the  nature  of  sound  waves  and  the 
physical  facts  in  regard  to  sympathetic  resonance. 

The  Nature  and  Action  of  Sound  Waves. — Sound  waves  in 
air  consist  of  longitudinal  vibrations  of  the  air  molecules,  alternate 
phases  of  rarefaction  and  condensation.  For  convenience'  sake, 
these  weaves  are  usually  represented  graphically  after  the  manner  of 
water  waves,  by  a  curved  line  rising  above  and  falling  below  a 
median  zero  line,  the  ordinates  above  the  zero  line  representing 
the  phase  of  condensation,  and  those  below  the  phase  of  rarefaction. 
These  waves  are  produced  by  the  vibrations  of  the  sounding  body, 
and  may  vary  greatly  in  length,  in  amplitude,  and  in  form.     For 


362  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

musical  sounds  within  the  range  of  hearing  the  length  of  the  waves 
may  vary  from  forty  to  seventy  feet,  at  the  one  extreme,  to  a  frac- 
tion of  an  inch  at  the  other.  They  travel  through  the  air  with  an 
average  velocity  of  1100  to  1200  feet  per  minute,  the  exact  rate  vary- 
ing with  the  temperature.  When  these  waves,  whatever  may  be 
their  form,  follow  each  other  with  regularity — that  is,  with  a  definite 
period  or  rhythm — a,  musical  sound  is  perceived  provided  the 
rhythm  is  maintained  for  a  number  of  vibrations.  So  that  regular- 
ity or  periodicity  of  the  sound  waves  may  be  considered  as  the  un- 
derlying physical  cause  of  musical  sounds.  Non-musical  sounds  or 
noises,  which  constitute  the  vast  majority  of  our  auditory  sensa- 
tions, are  referred,  on  the  contrary,  to  non-periodical  vibrations. 
Waves  of  this  kind  may  be  due  to  the  nature  of  the  impulse  given 
to  the  air  by  the  sounding  body, — single  pulses,  for  instance,  or  a 
series  of  such  pulses  or  shocks  following  at  a  slow  or  irregular 
rhythm,  or  as  is  more  frequently  the  case,  they  may  result  from  a 
mixture  of  very  short  and  different  rhythmical  vibrations.  As 
the  case  of  musical  sounds  is  far  the  simpler,  the  theory  of  the 
action  of  the  cochlea  has  been  based  chiefly  upon  the  results 
obtained  from  a  study  of  these  forms  of  waves. 

Classification  and  Properties  of  Musical  Sounds. — Musical 
sounds  exhibit  three  fundamental  properties,  each  of  which  may  be 
referred  to  a  difference  in  the  physical  stimulus.  They  vary,  in 
the  first  place,  in  pitch,  and  this  difference  finds  its  explanation  in 
the  rapidity  of  vibration  of  the  sounding  body  and  the  sound  waves 
produced  by  it.  The  more  rapid  the  rate,  the  shorter  will  be  the 
waves  and  the  higher  will  be  the  pitch  of  the  musical  note.  Notes 
of  the  same  pitch  may,  however,  vary  in  loudness  or  intensity,  and 
this  difference  is  referable  to  the  amplitude  of  the  vibrations.  A 
given  tuning  fork  emits  always  a  note  of  the  same  pitch,  but  the 
loudness  of  the  note  may  vary  according  to  the  amplitude  of  the 
vibrations.  The  vibrations  of  the  tympanic  membrane  and  of 
the  perilymph  in  the  internal  ear  vary  in  rate  and  intensity  with 
the  sounding  body;  so  that  we  may  say  that  the  stimulation  of 
the  hair  cells  in  the  cochlea  gives  us  auditory  sensations  that  vary 
in  pitch  with  the  rate  of  excitation  and  in  intensity  with  the  ampli- 
tude of  the  vibratory  movement.  A  third  property  of  m.usical 
sounds  is  their  variations  in  quality  or  timbre.  The  same  note  of 
the  same  amplitude  when  given  by  different  musical  instruments 
varies  in  quality,  so  that  we  have  no  difficulty  in  recognizing  the 
note  of  a  piano  from  the  same  note  when  given  by  a  violin  or  the 
human  voice.  The  underlying  physical  cause  of  variations  in  timbre 
is  found  in  the  form  of  the  sound  waves  produced,  and  immediately, 
therefore,  in  the  form  of  vibratory  movement  communicated  to 
the  perilymph.     Examination  of  the  forms  of  sound  waves  produced 


EAR  AS  AN  ORGAN  FOR  SOUND  SENSATIONS.        363 

by  different  musical  instruments  shows  that  they  may  be  divided 
into  two  great  groups:  (1)  The  simple  or  pendular  form;  (2)  the 
compound  or  non-pendular  form.  The  simple  or  pendular  form 
of  wave  is  given,  for  instance,  by  tuning  forks.  A  graphic  repre- 
sentation of  this  wave  form  may  be  obtained  by  attaching  a  bristle 
to  the  end  of  the  fork  and  allowing  it  to  write  upon  a  piece  of  black- 
ened paper  moving  with  uniform  velocity, — the  blackened  surface, 
for  instance,  of  a  kymographion.  The  form  of  the  wave  obtained 
is  represented  in  Fig.  163.  The  vibrating  body  swings  symmetrically 
to  each  side  of  the  hne  of  rest,  and,  inasmuch  as  this  is  also  the  form 
of  movement  that  would  be  traced  by  a  swinging  pendulum,  this 
form  of  wave  is  designated  frequently  as  pendular.  It  is  sometimes 
called  also  the  sinusoidal  wave,  since  the  distance  of  the  vibrating 
point  to  each  side  of  the  line  of  rest  is  equal  to  the  sine  of  an  arc 
increasing  proportionally  for  the  time  of  the  phase.  A  compound 
(or  non-pendular  or  non-sinusoidal)  wave  may  have  a  very  great 
variety  of  forms.  The  different  phases  follow  periodically,  but  the 
movement  of  the  vibrating  body  to  each  side  of  the  sine  of  rest  is  not 


Fig.  163. — Form  of  wave  made  by  tuning  fork. 

perfectly  symmetrical.  Fourier  has  shown  that  any  periodical  vibra- 
tory movement,  whatever  may  be  its  form,  may  be  considered  as 
being  composed  of  a  series  of  simple  or  pendular  movements  whose 
periods  of  vibrations  are  1,  2,  3,  4,  etc.,  times  as  great  as  the  vibra- 
tion period  of  the  given  movement.  That  is,  every  so-called  com- 
pound wave  form  may  be  considered  as  being  caused  by  the  fusion 
of  a  number  of  simple  waves.  Representing  the  wave  movement 
of  the  air  graphically  as  water  waves,  this  composition  of  simple 
waves  into  compound  ones  is  illustrated  by  the  curves  given  in  Fig. 
164,  In  this  figure  A  and  B  represent  two  simple  vibrations  such 
as  would  be  given  by  two  tuning-forks,  the  vibrations  in  B  being 
double  those  of  A.  If  these  two  waves  are  communicated  to  the  air 
at  the  same  time  the  actual  movement  of  the  molecules  will  be  a 
resultant  of  the  forces  acting  upon  them  at  any  given  instant,  and 
the  actual  movement  will  be  indicated,  therefore,  by  the  algebraical 
sum  of  the  ordinates  above  and  below  the  lines  of  rest.  If  the 
movements  are  so  timed  that  e  in  curve  B  is  synchronous  with  d'^  in 
curve  A,  then  the  resulting  compound  wave  form  is  illustrated  by  C. 
If,  however,  curve  B  is  supposed  to  be  in  a  different  phase,  so  that  e 
is  synchronous  with  d',  then  a  form  of  wave  illustrated  by  D  will  be 


364 


THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 


obtained.  In  this  way  a  great  variety  of  forms  of  compound  waves 
may  be  supposed  to  be  produced  by  the  union  of  a  series  of  simple 
waves  of  different  periods  of  vibration.  That  compound  waves  dif- 
fer from  simple  ones  in  being  composed  of  several  series  of  vibrations 
is  indicated  directly  by  our  sensations.  When  we  listen  to  the  note 
of  a  tuning-fork  we  hear  only  a  single  tone;  when  two  or  more 
tuning-forks  are  sounded  together  the  trained  ear  can  detect  the  tone 
due  to  each  fork,  and  similarly  when  a  single  note  is  sounded  by 
the  human  voice,  a  violin,  or  any  other  instrument  that  has  a  char- 
acteristic quality  the  trained  ear  can  detect  a  series  of  higher  tones, 


Fig.  164. — Schema  by  Helmholtz  to  illustrate  the  formation  of  a  compound  wave 
from  two  pendular  waves:  A  and  B,  pendular  vibrations,  B  being  the  octave  of  A.  If 
superposed  so  that  e  coincides  with  d°  and  the  ordinates  are  added  algebraically,  the  non- 
pendular  curve  C  is  produced.  If  superposed  so  that  e  coincides  with  d'  the  non-pendular 
curve  D  is  produced. 


the  upper  partial  tones  or  harmonies  or  overtones,  which  indicate 
that  the  note  is  really  compound,  and  not  simple.  The  formation 
of  these  overtones  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  sounding  body  vibrates 
not  only  as  a  whole,  but  also  in  its  aliquot  parts,  as  may  be  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  165,  illustrating  the  vibrations  of  a  string.  When 
the  string  is  plucked  it  vibrates  as  a  whole  (a),  giving  large  waves 
which  produce  what  is  called  the  fundamental  tone,  but  at  the  same 
time  each  half  (&),  third  (c),  fourth  {d),  etc.,  may  vibrate,  giving 
each  its  own  simple  tone.  The  combination  of  all  of  these  simple 
waves   forms   a   compound  wave  whose   form   or  at  least  whose 


EAR   AS    AN    ORGAN    FOR    SOUND    SENSATIONS. 


365 


composition  determines  the  quality  of  the  tone  heard.  As 
many  as  ten  or  sixteen  of  these  overtones  may  be  detected  from  the 
vibrating  strings  of  a  vioUn  or  guitar.  When  the  period  of  vibra- 
tion of  these  overtones  bears  a  simple  ratio  to  that  of  the  funda- 
mental, a  ratio  that  can  be  expressed  by  the  simple  numbers,  1,  2, 
3,  4,  5,  they  harmonize  with  it  and  form  the  harmonic  overtones. 
It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that,  so  far  as  the  tympanic  membrane 
is  concerned,  it  does  not  respond  separately  to  the  single  tones 
which  constitute  the  compound  wave,  but  swings  in  unison  with 
the  movement  of  the  compound  wave.     Nevertheless  the  internal 


Fig.  165  — To  illustrate  the  mechanism  of  the  formation  of  overtones. — (Helmholtz.) 
In  a  the  string  vibrates  as  a  whole,  giving  its  fundamental  tone;  in  b,  c,  and  d,  its  halves, 
thirds,  and  fourths  are  vibrating  independently.  When  a  string  is  struck,  plucked,  or  bowed 
these  movements  may  happen  simultaneously  and  the  fundamental  note  due  to  the  vibra- 
tions of  the  whole  string  is  combined  with  the  notes  due  to  the  -vibrations  of  aliquot  parts, 
the  overtones.  The  combination  gives  a  compound  wave  whose  form  and  musical  quality 
vary  with  the  number  and  relative  strength  of  the  overtones. 


ear,  according  to  the  law  of  Ohm,  is  capable  of  analyzing  the  com- 
pound wave  form  into  the  series  of  simple  or  pendular  wave  forms 
of  which  it  is  composed  and  of  distinguishing  the  series  of  corre- 
sponding tones.  While  this  analysis  cannot  be  made  consciously 
except  by  the  trained  musician,  it  is  made  unconsciously,  as  it 
were,  by  every  normal  ear,  and  in  consequence  of  this  analysis  we 
recognize  the  variations  in  quality  of  different  compound  tones. 
The  principle  upon  which  the  cochlea  acts  in  thus  separating  the 
compound  tones  into  their  elements  is  not  explained  with  entire 
satisfaction.     According  to  the  view  so  admirably  presented  by 


366  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

Helmholtz,*  the  analysis  depends  upon  the  existence  in  the  ear  of 
a  mechanism  for  sympathetic  vibrations  or  resonance. 

Sympathetic  Vibrations  or  Resonance. — By  sympathetic 
vibration  is  meant  the  fact  that  an  elastic  body  is  easily  set  into 
vibration  by  movements  of  the  surrounding  medium  when  these 
movements  correspond  with  its  own  period  of  vibration.  A  string 
whose  period  of  vibration  is  128  per  second  will  be  little  affected 
by  vibrations  of  the  surrounding  air  unless  they  have  the  same 
periodicity.  If,  however,  a  note  of  this  period  is  sounded  by  the 
voice,  for  instance,  the  string  will  be  set  into  vibration  with  rela- 
tive ease.  By  means  of  this  principle  the  untrained  ear  can  readily 
pick  out  the  more  prominent  of  the  upper  harmonics  of  any  given 
note  of  a  musical  instrument.  It  is  only  necessary  to  select  a  series  of 
resonators  corresponding  to  the  series  of  overtones.  Each  reso- 
nator is  set  into  vibration  by  its  corresponding  overtone  and  so 
emphasizes  this  particular  tone  that  it  may  be  easily  recognized. 
If  one  stands  in  front  of  a  piano  with  the  strings  exposed  and 
sings  a  given  note  it  may  be  shown  that  a  series  of  the  piano  strings 
is  set  into  vibration  corresponding,  in  the  first  place,  to  the  rate 
of  vibration  of  the  fundamental  tone,  and  secondly  to  the  more 
prominent  of  the  harmonic  overtones.  In  this  case  the  com- 
pound wave  strikes  upon  the  collection  of  strings  of  the  piano, 
and  is  analyzed  into  its  component  simple  tones  by  the  sympa- 
thetic vibrations  of  the  corresponding  strings.  Helmholtz  assumes 
that  the  cochlea  analyzes  compound  musical  waves  by  an  essentially 
similar  method. 

The  Functions  of  the  Cochlea. — The  vibratory  movement, 
whatever  may  be  its  form,  in  the  air  of  the  external  meatus  im- 
parts to  the  tympanic  membrane  a  similar  form  of  movement,  and 
this,  in  turn,  through  the  ear  bones  and  the  membrane  of  the  fenes- 
tra ovalis  sets  the  perilymph  into  vibrations  of  the  same  form.  That 
the  perilymph  can  swing  or  vibrate  under  the  influence  of  the  move- 
ments of  the  stapes  is  explained  by  the  existence  of  the  second 
opening,  the  fenestra  rotunda,  between  the  middle  and  the  inter- 
nal ear  (see  Fig.  157).  As  the  membrane  of  the  fenestra  ovalis  is 
pushed  in,  that  of  the  fenestra  rotunda  is  pushed  out,  and  vice 
versa.  These  vibratory  movements  of  the  perilymph  affect  the 
membranous  cochlea,  which  may  be  regarded  as  being  suspended 
in  the  perilymph,  and  according  to  the  resonance  theory  certain 
structures  within  the  membranous  cochlea  are  set  into  sympa- 
thetic vibrations  corresponding  to  the  simple  waves  of  which  the 
compound  wave  is  constituted.  Helmholtz  first  suggested  that 
the  peculiar  rods  of  Corti  form  the  resonating  apparatus  and 
by  sympathetic  vibrations  are  capable  of  analyzing  the  compound 

*  Helmholtz,  loc.  cit. 


EAR    AS    AN    ORGAN    FOR    SOUND    SENSATIONS.  367 

movement.  Later,  however,  this  suggestion  was  abandoned, 
since  the  number  of  the  rods  is  not  sufficiently  great  perhaps  to 
answer  the  requirements  of  this  theory.  According  to  Retzius, 
the  inner  rods  number  5600  and  the  outer  ones  3850.  Moreover, 
these  structures  are  absent  from  the  bird's  cochlea,  and  we  must 
assume  that  these  animals  are  capable  of  appreciating  musical 
sounds.  Helmholtz  then  adopted  a  suggestion  of  Hensen's,  that 
the  basilar  membrane  constitutes  the  resonating  apparatus.  This 
membrane  forms  the  floor  of  the  membranous  cochlea,  stretching 
from  the  limbus  to  the  opposite  side  of  the  bony  cochlea  (Fig. 
162).  Its  middle  layer  consists  of  fibers,  running  radially,  which, 
though  united  to  one  another,  are  sufficiently  independent  to  be 
regarded  as  separate  strings.  These  fibers  in  the  portion  covered 
by  the  rods  of  Corti,  the  inner  zone  or  zona  tecta,  are  finer  and 
more  difficult  to  separate  than  in  the  portion  exterior  to  the  outer 
rods,  the  outer  zone  or  zona  pectinata.  From  the  base  to  the  apex 
of  the  cochlea  the  membrane  increases  in  width,  the  length  of  the 
strings  in  the  outer  zone  varying,  according  to  Retzius,  from  135  fJ-  in 
the  basal  portion  to  220  fJ-  in  the  middle  spiral  and  to  234  fj.  at  the 
apex.  The  whole  structure  is  estimated  to  contain  about  24,000 
strings  varying  gradually  in  length,  as  stated,  and  resembling  in 
general  arrangement  the  strings  of  the  piano.  Assuming  that  each 
of  these  fibers  has  its  own  period  of  vibration,  we  may  imagine  that 
the  entire  collection  forms  an  apparatus  for  sympathetic  vibration 
which  is  capable  of  analyzing  each  compound  wave  motion  into 
its  constituent  simple  waves,  each  string  being  set  into  strong- 
est vibrations  by  the  wave  of  the  corresponding  period.  More- 
over, it  is  implied  or  assumed  in  this  theory  that  the  vibrations  of 
each  string  are  communicated  to  a  corresponding  nerve  fiber  of 
the  cochlear  nerve,  through  which  the  stimulus  is  conveyed  to 
the  brain  as  a  nerve  impulse.  We  should  be  capable  of  perceiv- 
ing, theoretically,  as  many  distinct  musical  tones  as  there  are 
fibers  in  the  basilar  membrane,  while  a  compound  wave,  by  setting 
a  number  of  these  mechanisms  into  action,  gives  a  series 
of  sensations  which  are  more  or  less  fused  in  consciousness.  The 
peculiar  quality  or  timbre  of  the  tone  of  each  instrument  is  refer- 
able, therefore,  immediately  to  the  number  and  relative  intensities 
of  the  simple  tone  sensations  that  it  arouses.  The  fusion  of  these 
elementary  tone  sensations  into  compound  ones  of  different  qual- 
ities is  comparable,  in  a  general  way,  to  the  fusion  of  simple  color 
sensations,  with  this  exception,  however,  that  in  the  compound 
tone  sensations  we  are  capable  of  distinguishing  more  clearly  the 
fact  that  they  are  composed  of  simpler  elements  ;  the  constituent 
tones  may  be  recognized  by  the  trained  ear  at  least.  The  mechan- 
ism by  which  the   vibrations   of  the  strings  of  the  basilar  mem- 


368  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

brane  are  conveyed  to  the  hair  cells  and  through  them  to  the  nerve 
fibers  is  a  matter  of  speculation  only,  as  are  also  the  functions  of  the 
remaining  parts  of  the  organ  of  Corti.  It  may  be  suggested, 
perhaps,  that  the  rods  of  Corti  and  Deiters's  cells,  together  with 
the  reticulate  membrane,  with  which  they  are  both  connected, 
form  not  only  a  supporting  apparatus  for  the  hair  cells,  but  also 
a  mechanism  by  which  the  vibrations  of  the  strings  are  commu- 
nicated to  the  hairs  of  the  hair  cells ;  but  the  suggestion  is  unsatis- 
factory, as  the  anatomical  arrangement  does  not  suffice  to  explain 
how  the  vibrations  of  individual  strings  are  transmitted  to  the 
separate  hair  cells.  The  assumption  has  also  been  made  that 
the  tectorial  membrane  acts  as  a  damper  to  the  vibrating  hair  cells 
or  the  reticulate  membrane.  Its  position  as  a  pad  lying  over  the 
rods  of  Corti  and  the  reticulate  membrane  justifies  perhaps  such  an 
assumption.  Many  physiologists,  while  accepting  the  general 
principle  that  the  cochlea  analyzes  the  sound  waves  by  a  mechan- 
ism for  sympathetic  vibrations,  have  been  unwilling  to  admit 
that  the  basilar  membrane  constitutes  such  a  mechanism.  They 
point  to  the  improbabihty  or  impossibility  of  fibers  of  only  0.36 
mm.  (or  0.5  mm.  at  the  best)  in  length  acting  as  efficient  reso- 
nators, especially  as  they  are  not  entirely  free  and  are  surrounded 
by  liquid.  Attempts  have  been  made,  therefore,  to  select  other 
structures  in  the  cochlea  as  more  likely  to  be  affected  by  sympa- 
thetic vibrations.  Attention  has  been  directed  mainly  to  the 
tectorial  membrane  or  membrane  of  Corti.  Thus,  Ayers*  believes 
that  this  structure  as  seen  in  the  usual  microscopical  prepara- 
tions, is  simply  an  artefact.  Under  normal  conditions  he  believes 
that  it  is  a  band  of  very  long  and  delicate  hairs  projecting  from  the 
hair  cells  and  lying  free  in  the  endolymph.  According  to  his 
view,  it  is  these  hairs  that  take  up  the  vibrations  and  transmit  their 
impulses  directly  to  the  hair  cells.  The  histological  statement  upon 
which  this  view  is  based  has  not,  however,  been  verified.  More 
recently  v.  Ebner,t  reviving  an  older  view  of  Hasse,  has  suggested 
that  the  tectorial  membrane,  especially  its  free  end,  serves  as  the 
mechanism  for  sympathetic  vibration.  This  membrane  increases 
in  width  from  the  base  to  the  apex  of  the  cochlea  and  varies  in 
thickness  in  its  radial  diameter,  so  that  it  might  be  conceived  to 
respond  to  different  periods  of  vibrations  in  its  different  parts, 
its  movements  being  communicated  directl}^  to  the  hair  cells  upon 
which  it  rests.  Unfortunately  we  have  no  direct  experimental 
evidence  in  favor  of  any  of  these  views.  Several  observers,  how- 
ever, have  demonstrated  apparently  that,  whatever  may  be  the 

*  Ayers,  "Journal  of  Morphology,"  6,  1,  1892. 

t  Kolliker,  "  Handbuch  d.  Gewebelehre,"  sixth  edition,  vol.  iii,  pt.  ii, 
p.  958,  1902. 


EAR   AS   AN   ORGAN   FOR   SOUND    SENSATIONS. 


369 


mechauism  for  sympathetic  vibration,  it  is  so  arranged  that  at  the 
base  of  the  cochlea  the  higher  notes  are  received  and  at  the  apex 
the  notes  of  the  lowest  pitch.  Thus,  Munk,  in  experiments  upon 
dogs,  in  which  by  an  operation  through  the  fenestra  rotunda  he  had 
destroyed  the  basal  portion  of  the  cochlea,  found  that  the  animals, 
after  a  temporary  deafness  of  some  days,  could  hear  apparently 
only  low  tones  and  noises.  Baginsky,*  in  a  later  series  of  experi- 
ments, opened  the  bulla  ossea  on  each  side,  destroyed  the  cochlea 
on  one  side  entirely  so  as  to  render  that  ear  deaf,  while  on  the  other 
he  injured  it  in  certain  areas  only.  He  found 
that  when  the  apex  of  the  cochlea  was  des- 
troyed the  animal  appeared  to  perceive  only 
the  high  tones,  c'",  o,"" ,  o!"" . 

The  fundamental  principle  of  the  theory  of  the 
function  of  the  cochlea  as  developed  by  Helmholtz 
has  been  subjected  to  some  criticism.  The  theory  of  a 
series  of  resonators  each  responding  to  a  definite  note 
does  not  explain  with  entire  satisfaction  some  of  the 
known  acoustic  phenomena.  Thus,  it  is  known  that 
when  two  notes  are  sounded  together  combinational 
tones  may  be  heard,  either  a  low  difference  tone  whose 
pitch  is  equal  to  that  of  the  difference  between  the 
rates  of  the  two  notes,  or  a  summation  tone  whose 
pitch  is  equal  to  the  siun  of  the  vibrations  of  the  two 
notes.  It  is  difficult  to  conceive  that  these  combina- 
tional tones  have  an  objective  existence,  as  vibrations, 
and  the  means  by  which  they  are  perceived  by  the 
cochlea  is  not  explained  satisfactorily  by  the  theory 
of  resonators.  Other  theories  of  the  function  of  the 
cochlea  have  been  proposed  to  avoid  such  difficulties. 
Thus,  Ewald  t  suggests  a  view  according  to  which  the 
basilar  membrane  vibrates  throughout  its  length  for 
each  note.  He  has  shown  that  a  rubber  membrane  of 
the  dimensions  of  the  basilar  membrane  will  be  set 
into  such  vibrations  throughout  its  length  and  when 
examined  under  the  microscope  presents  such  a  pic- 
ture as  is  represented  in  Fig.  166,  in  which  the  crests 
of  the  waves  are  at  a  fixed  interval  for  each  tone.  If 
at  these  intervals  the  corresponding  hair  cells  and 
nerve  fibers  are  supposed  to  be  stimulated,  then  our 
consciousness  would  recognize  each  note  by  its  appro- 
priate interval.  For  the  application  of  this  theory  to  musical  harmony — 
combinational  tones  and  beats — reference  must  be  made  to  the  original. 

Sensations  of  Harmony  and  Discord. — The  combination  of 
notes  to  produce  various  harmonies  or  intentional  discords  is  a  part 
of  the  theory  of  music,  but  attention  may  be  called  briefly  to  the 
physiological  explanation  offered  by  Helmholtz  to  account  for  the 
fact  that  certain  notes  when  combined  give  us  a  disagreeable  sen- 
sation, appear  rough,  and  unpleasant;  while  others,  on  the  contrary, 
produce  pleasant  sensations.     Discord  or  dissonance  is  due,  accord- 

*  Baginsky,  "Virchow's  Archiv  f.  pathol.  Anat.,"  94,  65,  1883. 
t  Ewald,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  76,  147,  1899. 
24 


Fig.  166.— To  il- 
lustrate the  idea  of 
a  fixed  sound  wave. — 
(Ewald.)  The  illus- 
tration shows  a  fun- 
damental note  and  its 
first   overtone. 


370  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

ing  to  Helmholtz,  to  the  beats  produced  when  two  dissonant  notes 
are  sounded  together.  On  the  physical  side  the  beat, — that  is,  a 
rhythmical  variation  in  the  intensity  of  the  sound, — is  due  to  the 
phenomenon  of  interference.  If  the  rates  of  vibration  of  two  notes 
are  such  that  at  certain  intervals  the  crests  of  the  waves  fall  to- 
gether and  again  the  crest  of  one  coincides  with  the  hollow  of  the 
other,  the  sound  sensations  will  be  periodically  increased  and 
decreased.  While  there  is  no  fundamental  explanation  for  the 
fact  that  a  regularly  varying  intensity  of  sound  is  disagreeable,  it 
is  a  well-known  phenomenon  and  it  finds  analogies  in  the  other 
sensations, — for  instance,  in  the  very  disagreeable  effect  of  a  flick- 
ering light.  When  two  notes  are  sounded  together  the  number  of 
beats  varies  with  the  difference  between  the  rates  of  vibration; 
thus,  two  notes,  one  of  128  vibrations  and  the  other  of  136  vibra- 
tions, give  8  beats  per  second.  When  the  number  of  beats 
rises  to  33  per  second  the  discord  is  most  disagreeable;  if,  however, 
the  rate  of  interference  is  more  rapid,  the  unpleasant  sensation 
becomes  less  perceptible,  and  beyond  132  per  second  is  not  notice- 
able. When  the  rates  of  vibrations  of  two  tones  are  such  that 
neither  the  fundamentals  nor  any  of  the  overtones  give  beats,  the 
effect  is  that  of  harmony,  the  vibrations  of  one  note  strengthening^ 
that  of  the  other.  The  most  perfect  harmony  is  that  of  a  note 
sounded  simultaneously  with  another  of  the  same  rate,  ratio  1:1, 
or  with  its  octave,  ratio  1 :  2.  The  various  intervals  which  in 
music  have  been  found  to  be  perfectly  consonant  or  which  vary  so 
little  from  it  as  to  be  usable  in  harmonies  are  those  whose  vibra- 
tions bear  a  simple  ratio  to  each  other.  Thus,  the  octave  of  any 
note  has  the  ratio  of  1:2,  the  double  octave  1 :  4,  the  twelfth  1 :  3. 
These  three  intervals  give  absolutely  consonant  sounds.  Other 
intervals — such  as  the  fifth,  2:3,  or  the  major  third,  4:  5 — give 
a  less  perfect  consonance.  Three  or  more  notes  bearing  such  rela- 
tions to  each  other  constitute  a  chord,  the  vibrations  in  the 
major  chord  being,  for  instance,  in  the  ratios  4:5:6, — c'  (128), 
e'  (160),  g'  (192). 

The  Limits  of  Hearing. — The  rates  of  vibration  that  can  be 
perceived  by  the  ear  as  musical  tones  lie  between  fairly  well- 
defined  limits,  although  in  this  organ,  as  in  the  case  of  the  eye, 
there  are  individual  variations, — variations,  indeed,  which  are 
more  marked  in  the  case  of  the  ear,  since  its  range  of  appreciation 
is  larger.  The  lowest  rate  of  vibration  that  can  cause  a  musical 
sensation  is  usually  placed  at  28  to  30  per  second,  although  some 
ears  can  still  respond  to  an  octave  lower,  about  16  per  second.  To 
most  ears  vibrations  below  30  per  second  are  felt,  if  perceived  at  all, 
as  single  pulses  that  stimulate  the  sensory  nerves  of  the  tympanic 
membrane  itself.     The  cochlea  does  not  respond.     It  may  happen,. 


EAR   AS   AN    ORGAN   FOR   SOUND   SENSATIONS.  371 

however,  that  a  vil^ration  too  slow  to  be  perceived  by  the  ear  will 
give  overtones  of  sufficient  strength  to  be  recognized.  An  inter- 
esting example  in  physiology  of  this  fact  is  furnished  by  the  tone 
of  the  contracting  muscle.  As  heard,  this  tone  corresponds  to  a 
vibration  of  40  per  second;  but  other  data  lead  us  to  believe  that 
the  vibrations  of  the  contracting  muscle,  due  to  the  single  con- 
tractions of  which  the  compound  contraction  is  composed,  occur 
at  the  rate  of  only  10  per  second;  so  that  what  is  heard  is,  in  reality, 
the  second  octave  of  the  fundamental.  The  high  limit  of  audibility, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  usually  placed  at  40,000  double  vibrations 
per  second,  although  the  various  estimates  published  vary  so 
widely  that  in  this  respect  there  must  be  great  individual  differences. 
The  shrill  notes  of  insects  are  said  to  be  inaudible  to  some  ears. 
Konig,  making  use  of  Kundt's  method  of  light  powders,  succeeded 
in  tuning  a  series  of  forks  to  an  estimated  rate  of  90,000  double 
vibrations  per  second.  It  was  found  that  those  between  c^  and  Cg 
(8192  to  32,768)  were  generally  audible,  while  the  Cj^  (65,536)  was 
inaudible.  The  limit,  therefore,  lay  between  Cg  and  c^g.  Notes 
near  this  high  limit  are  not,  however,  usable  in  ordinary  music; 
the  sensations  produced  have  a  disagreeable,  if  not  actually  painful 
shrillness.  The  range  of  vibrations  employed  in  music  is  illustrated 
by  the  seven  octaves  of  the  piano,  the  notes  varying  from  the  lowest 
c  of  32  vibrations  to  Cg  of  4096  vibrations.  The  intervening  series 
is  divided  into  tones  whose  serial  relations  to  each  other  are  ex- 
pressed by  the  ratios  f  or  V  and  semitones  of  the  ratio  yf  or  f  f ; 
thus,  c"=  256  vibrations  and  the  d"  of  the  same  octave  corresponds 
to  256  X  f  =  288  vibrations.* 

*See  Helmholtz,  Popular  Scientific  Lectures,  "Ueberdie  physiologischen 
Ursachen  des  musikalischen  Harmonie,"  Bonn,  1857. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


THE  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  SEMICIRCULAR  CANALS  AND 
THE  VESTIBULE. 

Position  and  Structure. — The  membranous  semicircular  canals 
lie  within  the  bony  semicircular  canals,  the  space  between  being 
filled  with  perilymph  which  communicates  freely  with  that  in  the 
rest  of  the  labyrinth.  Within  the  membranous  canals  is  the  endo- 
lymph,  which  communicates  through  the  five  openings  with  the 
endolymph  in  the  utriculus.  The  canals  lie  in  three  planes  that  are, 
approximately  at  least,  at  right  angles  to  each  other  (Fig.  167). 
The  horizontal  canals  lie  in  a  horizontal  jDlane  at  right  angles  to  the 
mesial  or  sagittal  plane  of  the  body,  the  vertical  canals  on  each 
side  make  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees  with  this  mesial  plane. 
The  plane  of  each  of  the  anterior  canals  is  parallel  to  that  of  the 

posterior  or  inferior  vertical  canal  of 
the  opposite  side,  as  represented  in 
the  figure.  At  one  end  of  each  canal 
near  its  junction  with  the  utriculus 
is  the  swelling  known  as  the  ampulla 
and  witnln  the  ampulla  lies  the 
crista  acustica  containing  the  hair 
cells  with  which  the  nerve  fibers 
communicate,  and  which,  therefore, 
are  considered  as  the  sense  cells  of 
the  organ.  The  hair  cells  are  cylin- 
drical and  each  gives  off  a  long  hair, 
consisting  perhaps  of  a  bundle  of 
finer  hairs,  which  projects  into  the 
interior  of  the  canal  for  a  distance  of  at  least  28  //.  The  nerve 
fibers  distributed  to  these  hair  cells  are  given  off  by  the  vestibular 
branch  of  the  eighth  nerve,  or  more  properly  the  vestibular  nerve, 
one  branch  of  which  (ramus  utriculo-ampullaris)  supplies  the 
utriculus  and  the  ampulla  of  the  superior  and  horizontal  canals, 
while  the  other  (ramus  sacculo-ampullaris)  furnishes  fibers  to  the 
sacculus  and  the  posterior  ampulla. 

Flourens's  Experiments  upon  the  Semicircular  Canals.— 
Modern  experiments  and  theories  concerning  the  functions  of  the 
semicircular  canals  date  from  the  classical  researches  of  Flourens* 

*  Flourens,  "Recherches  experimentales  sur  les  proprietes  et  les  fonc- 
tions  du  systeme  nerveux,"  second  edition,  1842. 

372 


Fig.    167.— D 


agrammatic      hori- 


zontal section  through  the  head  to  il 
lustrate  the  planes  occupied  by  the 
semicircular  canals  (after  Waller) :  S, 
Superior  canal;  P,  posterior  canal; 
H,  horizontal  canal. 


SEMICIRCULAR    CANALS    AND    THE    VESTIBULE,  373 

(1824)..  ..This  investigator  laid  bare  the  canals  in  birds  and  mam- 
mals and  studied  the  effects  of  sections  of  one  or  more  of  them. 
The  experiments  have  since  been  repeated  by  numerous  observers, 
and  the  results  obtained  have  been  described  in  great  detail,  for  an 
account  of  which  reference  must  be  made  to  original  sources.*  In 
general,  it  may  be  said  that  injuries  to  the  canals  are  followed  by 
certain  more  or  less  definite  movements  of  the  head,  eyes,  and  body, 
and  by  a  disturbance  in  the  power  of  the  animal  to  co-ordinate  nor- 
mally the  muscles  used  in  standing,  locomotion,  or  flying.  The 
character  and  extent  of  these  results  vary  with  the  number  of 
canals  injured,  and,  indeed,  show  a  more  or  less  definite  relationship 
to  the  several  canals.  When  the  horizontal  canal  is  cut  on  one  side 
in  pigeons  the  animal  makes  movements  of  the  head  in  the  plane  of 
that  canal,  and  if  the  similar  canal  on  the  other  side  is  also  sec- 
tioned these  movements  are  more  pronounced.  The  animal  may 
also  in  moving  show  an  inability  to  walk  normally  and  a  tendency, 
especially  when  excited,  to  make  abnormal  forced  movements  of 
rotation  of  the  whole  body.  After  such  an  operation  the  pigeon  will 
not  fly  voluntarily  and  if  thrown  into  the  air  is  not  able  to  guide 
its  flight  with  accuracy  and  soon  descends.  Similar  operations 
on  the  anterior  or  the  posterior  canals  cause  movements  of  the  head 
in  the  corresponding  planes  and  a  tendency  in  walking  or  flying 
to  make  forced  movements — somersaults — forward  or  backward. 
When  all  three  canals  are  cut  on  one  or  both  sides  the  animal  shows 
a  distressing  inability  to  maintain  a  normal  position.  The  head  is 
twisted,  it  is  not  able  to  stand  unless  supported,  and  any  attempt 
at  walking  or  flying  results  in  violent  forced  and  inco-ordinated 
movements.  The  animal  makes  continual  somersaults  at  each 
attempt  to  stand  or  walk  and  the  head  is  kept  in  spasmodic,  forceful 
movements,  which  may  produce  injury  or  death.  To  preserve  the 
animal  from  injury  after  such  an  extensive  operation  it  is  necessary 
to  keep  it  wrapped  in  bandages.  It  should  be  added  that  results 
of  this  character  are  obtained  only  when  the  membranous  canals 
are  injured.  If  the  bony  canal  alone  is  cut  and  even  if  the  peri- 
lymph is  removed  by  suction  no  such  effects  are  obtained.  At 
most  slight  and  relatively  transient  movements  of  the  head  are 
observed.  If  the  exposed  membranous  canal  is  pricked  with  a 
needle  more  violent  movements  result,  and  if  sectioned  these  move- 
ments are  maintained  for  a  longer  period  and  are  accompanied  by 
the  other  results  described.  Similar  effects  have  been  obtained 
from  operations  on  mammals  and  other  animals,  but  the  results 

*  The  literature  of  the  semicircular  canals  and  the  vestibule  is  very  ex- 
tensive. The  complete  bibliography  may  be  obtained  from  the  following 
sources:  "Die  Lehren  von  den  Funktionen  der  einzelnen  Theile  des  Ohrlaby- 
rinths,"  by  von  Stein,  1894;  Richet's  " Dictionnaire  de  Physiologie,"  article 
by  Cyon,  on  "Espace,"  1900. 


374  THE    SPECIAL   SENSES. 

are  more  pronounced  in  some  animals  than  in  others,  varying 
apparently  with  the  delicacy  of  the  co-ordination  necessary  to  the 
movements  (Ewald).  Thus,  the  movements  of  walking  or  flying 
in  the  pigeon  may  be  assumed  to  require  a  nicer  adjustment  of  the 
muscles  used  than  is  necessary  in  the  swimming  movements  of  the 
fish,  and  in  correspondence  with  this  idea  it  is  found  that  opera- 
tions on  the  canals  of  fishes  are  not  followed  by  conspicuous  effects 
upon  the  movements  of  the  animals. 

Temporary  and  Permanent  Effects  of  the  Operation. — ^The 
general  effects  of  operations  on  the  semicircular  canals,  so  far  as 
disturbances  of  equilibrium  and  occurrence  of  forced  movements 
are  concerned,  resemble  those  resulting  from  operations  upon  the 
cerebellum,  and,  as  in  the  case  of  the  last  mentioned  organ,  it  is 
found  by  most  observers  that  if  the  animal  is  properly  cared 
for  the  severity  of  the  first  effects  passes  off  to  a  greater  or  less 
extent.  Flourens  states  that  his  pigeons,  with  two  or  more  canals 
cut,  continued  to  show  the  effects  of  the  operation  almost  with  the 
same  intensity  for  nearly  a  year.  Some  unpubhshed  experiments 
made  in  the  author's  laboratory  have  given  different  results.* 
Pigeons  with  only  one  canal  cut  recover  practically  completely 
within  ten  or  more  days.  Those  with  two  canals  cut  recover  nearly 
completely  within  a  month,  so  far  as  walking  is  concerned,  although 
they  exhibit  an  unwillingness  to  fly.  Those  with  three  or  more 
canals  cut  never  recover  completely,  but  their  final  condition  is  very 
different  from  that  exhibited  shortly  after  the  operation.  Even 
when  all  six  canals  have  been  cut  the  animal,  if  well  cared  for  in  the 
beginning,  is  able  finally  to  stand  and  walk  and  feed  itself.  It 
is  not  able,  however,  to  fly,  and  in  walking  its  progress  is  uncertain ; 
there  is  a  tendency  to  walk  zigzag  or  in  circles,  first  to  one  side,  then 
to  the  other.  If  hurried  or  excited  some  return  of  the  violent 
movements  of  the  head  and  inco-ordination  of  the  movements  of 
locomotion  may  be  seen.  The  partial  recovery  from  the  operations 
upon  the  canals  may  be  due,  however,  to  a  more  or  less  complete 
restoration  of  the  canals  to  their  former  functional  activity,  owing 
to  a  regeneration,  partial  or  complete,  since  a  new  section  of  the 
canals,  after  a  year  or  more,  again  brings  on  the  violent  and  dis- 
orderly movements  of  the  head  and  the  body. 

Effect  of  Direct  Stimulation  of  the  Canals. — ^The  mem- 
branous canals  or  their  ampullary  enlargements  have  been  stimu- 
lated by  many  observers  and  by  many  different  methods — electrical, 
chemical,  and  mechanical.  The  results  of  electrical  stimulation  are 
not  constant  nor  striking,  but  chemical  and  especially  mechanical 
stimulation  in  the  hands  of  many  observers  has  called  forth  definite 
movements  of  head  or  eyes  similar  in  a  general  way  to  those  caused 
*  Experiments  lasting  over  two  years  made  by  Dr.  E.  Rosencrantz. 


SEMICIRCULAR    CANALS    AND    THE    VESTIBULE.  375 

by  section  of  the  canal,  but  lasting,  of  course,  for  a  short  time  only. 
In  the  dog-fish  Lee*  finds  that  pressure  upon  an  ampulla  causes 
movements  of  the  eyes  and  fins  such  as  would  occur  normally  if 
the  animal's  body  were  rotated  in  the  plane  of  the  canal  stimulated. 

Effect  of  Section  of  the  Ampullary  or  the  Acoustic  Nerve. — 
Many  of  the  older  and  newer  observers  have  cut  one  or  both  of  the 
acoustic  nerves  or  destroyed  the  entire  labyrinth  on  one  or  both 
sides.  The  effects  described  vary  somewhat  with  the  animals  used, 
but,  in  general,  section  of  the  nerve  on  one  side  is  followed  by 
forced  movements,  especially  of  rolling  movements  around  the 
long  axis  of  the  body.  When  the  nerves  are  cut  on  both  sides 
disturbances  in  the  power  to  maintain  equilibrium  j^erfectly  are 
more  or  less  distinctly  marked.  In  fishes  (dog-fish)  the  animal  may 
swim  or  come  to  rest  in  unusual  positions, — on  the  back  or  side,  for 
instance. 

Is  the  Effect  of  Section  of  the  Canals  Due  to  Stimulation? — 
The  movements  that  result  from  section  of  one  or  more  of  the  canals 
have  been  attributed  by  some  authors  to  stimulations  set  up  by  the 
injury  caused  by  the  operation,  and  by  others  have  been  considered 
as  a  result  of  the  falling  out  of  the  stimuli  normally  and  constantly 
proceeding  from  the  canals.  This  fundamental  question  has  not 
been  decided.  On  the  one  hand,  the  movements  observed  are  simi- 
lar to  those  caused  by  excitation,  which  would  indicate  that  a  stimu- 
lation is  set  up  by  the  operation.  On  the  other  hand,  the  effects  are 
so  long  lasting  as  to  make  it  improbable  that  they  are  entirely  due  to 
the  irritation  of  the  operation.  Moreover,  Gaglio  f  states  that  when 
the  spot  operated  upon  is  cocainized  the  same  effects  follow.  Indeed, 
cocainizing  the  membranous  canals  gives  the  same  results  as  cutting 
them.  It  is  possible,  of  course,  that  both  processes  take  place,  an 
irritative  stimulation  and  a  falling  out  of  normal  impulses,  the 
effects  of  the  latter  being  longer  lasting. 

Theories  of  the  Functions  of  the  Semicircular  Canals. — As 
indicated  briefly  above,  the  facts  regarding  injury  to  and  stimulation 
of  the  semicircular  canals  are  very  numerous  and,  on  the  whole,  fairly 
concordant.  Their  interpretation,  however,  has  offered  great  dif- 
ficulties, and  many  views  have  been  proposed;  almost  every  inves- 
tigator, in  fact,  has,  to  some  extent,  varied  in  his  interpretation  of 
the  precise  functional  significance  of  these  organs. J  These  views 
may  be  classified,  although  imperfectly,  under  the  following  heads: 

1.  The  old  view,  first  proposed  by  Autenrieth  (1802),  that  the 
canals  or  their  sense  cells  are  stimulated  by  sound  waves  and  give 

*  Lee,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  15,  328,  1903. 

t  Gaglio,  "Archives  ital.  de  biologie,"  31,  377.  1899. 

X  For  a  detailed  and  complete  account  of  these  views  to  1892  see  Stein, 
"Die  Lehren  von  den  Funktionen  der  eizelnen  Theile  des  Ohrlabyrinths." 
Jena,  1894. 


376  THE  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

US  the  means  of  determining  the  direction  of  sound  in  accordance 
with  their  position  in  three  planes  at  right  angles  to  one  another. 
This  view  has  been  revived  from  time  to  time  by  recent  writers. 

2.  Flourens  himself  believed  that  the  impulses  normally  proceed- 
ing from  these  organs  serve  to  moderate,  or,  as  we  should  say  now, 
to  inhibit  the  movements  of  the  head.  As  soon  as  the  canals  are  cut 
the  movements  that  have  been  kept  under  control  by  their  influence 
are  unrestrained.  On  this  view  the  semicircular  canals  are 
organs  which  inhibit  or  restrain  the  voluntary  movements,  and 
thus  take  an  essential  part  in  the  proper  co-ordination  of  such 
movements.  He  did  not  attempt  to  define  the  physiology  of  the 
organs  in  terms  of  the  sensations  aroused. 

3.  The  view  that  the  stimulus  to  the  hair-cells  is  to  be  found  in 
the  varying  pressure  of  the  endolymph.  As  first  proposed  by  Goltz 
(1870),  it  was  assumed  that  the  endolymph  exerts  a  hydrostatic 
pressure  upon  the  hair  cells  which  in  any  given  position  varies  in  the 
different  ampullas  and  varies  with  different  positions  of  the  head. 
The  sensory  impulses  thus  aroused  give  us  a  knowledge  of  the  posi- 
tion of  the  head  and  enable  us,  therefore,  to  control  its  movements 
and  also  those  of  the  body.  On  this  view  these  organs  act  as  sense 
organs  in  maintaining  body  equilibrium  and  may  be  designated  as 
peripheral  sense  organs  of  equilibrium.  Later  observers  (Mach, 
Breuer,  Brown,  et  at.)  modified  this  view  by  the  assumption  that  the 
hair  cells  are  stimulated  not  so  much  by  the  hydrostatic  pressure  of 
the  endolymph  as  by  the  pressure  changes  developed  during  move- 
ments of  the  head,  making  the  organs,  therefore,  a  means  of 
appreciating  especially  the  movements  of  the  head,  a  dynamic 
rather  than  a  hydrostatic  organ  of  equilibrium.  It  was  assumed 
that  rotation  movements  of  the  head  in  the  plane  of  a  canal  set  up 
a  movement  or  pressure  of  the  endolymph  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion, just  as,  to  use  a  rough  comparison,  when  one  twirls  a  pail  of 
water  in  one  direction  the  water  lags  behind  and  exerts  a  pressure 
in  the  opposite  direction.  According  to  this  hypothesis,  which 
in  some  form  or  other  is  the  view  usually  taught,  the  hair  cells  in 
each  ampulla  are  stimulated  chiefly  by  movements  in  the  plane  of 
that  canal  toward  the  ampulla,  the  pressure  of  the  endolymph  be- 
ing in  the  opposite  direction, — that  is,  from  utriculus  toward  tftie 
canal.  Moreover,  the  vertical  canals  act  in  pairs  (see  Fig.  167),  the 
superior  or  anterior  vertical  of  one  side  acting  with  the  posterior  or 
inferior  vertical  of  the  other  side,  the  two  canals  lying  in  parallel 
planes.  Movements  in  this  plane  forward  would  stimulate  the 
anterior  ampulla  on  one  side  chiefly,  movements  in  the  same  plane 
backward,  the  posterior  ampulla  of  the  opposite  side.  The  horizon- 
tal canals  also  act  together,  being  stimulated  chiefly  by  rotational 
movements  in  the  horizontal  plane,  the  hair  cells  in  one  responding 


SEMICIRCULAR   CANALS   AND    THE    VESTIBULE.  377 

chiefly  to  movements  in  one  direction,  the  other  to  movements  in 
the  same  plane,  but  in  the  opposite  direction.  Rotational 
movements  in  other  planes — sagittal,  oblicfue,  etc. — would 
affect  two  or  more  of  the  pairs  of  canals  in  proportion  to. the 
degree  that  each  is  involved  in  the  movement  on  the  principle  of 
the  parallelogram  of  forces.*  By  a  mechanism  of  this  sort  it 
may  be  supposed  that  we  are  informed  regarding  the  plane,  di- 
rection, and  extent  of  the  movements  of  the  head  and  are  thereby 
enabled  to  control  these  movements.  The  canals  function  es- 
pecially as  a  dynamic  organ  of  equilibrium,  but  may  also  give  us 
guiding  sensations  when  the  movements  are  progressive  rather  than 
rotational,  and  also  when  the  head  is  at  rest,  although,  as  is  ex- 
plained below,  this  last  function  is  by  some  relegated  to  the  hair 
cells  of  the  utriculus  and  sacculus.  According  to  this  view,  the 
loss  of  the  power  of  maintaining  exact  equilibrium  after  injuries  to 
the  canals  or  section  of  the  nerves  may  be  explained  by  supposing 
that  false  sensations  are  experienced  and  false  compensatory  move- 
ments are  made.  So,  also,  the  vertigo  experienced  after  continued 
rotation  may  be  attributed  to  abnormal  stimulation  of  these  sense 
organs, — a  view  that  finds  some  support  in  the  fact  that  many 
deaf-mutes,  whose  internal  ear  is  supposed  to  be  deficient,  do  not 
experience  vertigo  after  rotation,  and  in  animals  with  the  labyrinth 
destroyed  rotational  movements  fail  to  give  the  symptoms  of  vertigo. 

4.  Cyon  has  advocated  the  view  that  the  semicircular  canals  con- 
stitute an  organ  for  the  perception  of  space  in  its  three  dimensions. 
Each  canal  or  pair  of  canals  gives  us  the  sense  of  direction  in  its  own 
plane,  and  the  fact  that  we  have  three  pairs  in  planes  at  right  angles 
to  one  another  gives  the  physiological  foundation  of  our  conception 
of  three  dimensional  space.  On  this  fundamental  conception  of 
space  is  projected  the  additional  space  conceptions  derived  from  our 
visual,  tactile,  and  muscle  senses.  This  author  is  not  specific  in 
stating  by  what  means  the  sensory  cells  in  the  three  canals  are 
stimulated.  In  addition  to  the  sensations  of  direction  and  of  space 
furnished  by  the  canals,  the  nerve  impulses  from  them  are  supposed 
to  co-ordinate  the  action  of  the  motor  centers  concerned  in  move- 
ments of  the  head  and  body. 

5.  Ewald,  while  accepting  the  general  view  that  the  sense  cells 
are  stimulated  by  the  pressure  of  the  endolymph,  lays  stress  upon 
the  fact  that  the  nerve  impulses  thus  aroused  have,  as  their  main 
result,  a  reflex  effect  upon  the  tonicity  of  the  vohmtary  muscula- 
ture. The  constant  flow  of  impulses  from  these  organs  serves  to 
maintain  the  muscles  in  a  normal  condition  of  tone.  In  animals 
with  the  labyrinth  destroyed  on  both  sides  the  body  musculature 
is  flabby  and  lacking  in  tonicity.     On  tliis  view,  therefore,  the  semi- 

*  Consult  Lee,  loc.  cit. 


378  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

circular  canals  constitute  what  might  be  called  a  muscle-tone  organ, 
and  the  obvious  disturbances  in  motion  caused  by  their  injury  are 
due  primarily  to  a  diminution  or  loss  in  muscle  tone,  each  canal 
possibly  being  reflexly  connected  with  special  muscles. 

Summary. — With  reference  to  the  kind  of  sensation  mediated 
by  the  nerves  of  the  semicircular  canals,  it  should  be  borne  in  mind 
that  these  sensations  are  not  distinctly  recognized  by  consciousness; 
hence  the  difficulty  of  designating  them  by  a  specific  name.  Of 
the  many  qualities  of  sensation  or  consciousness  which  we  can 
distinguish  some  have  characteristics  so  clear  that  we  recognize 
them  at  once  and  give  them  distinctive  names, — such,  for  instance, 
as  the  sensations  of  sight,  hearing,  taste,  etc.  Others,  however, 
produce  a  psychical  reaction  of  such  an  indefinite  character  that 
they  escape  recognition  by  mere  introspection.  The  change  in  con- 
sciousness is  not  sufficiently  marked  to  make  itself  felt  to  the  un- 
trained mind.  This  condition  prevails  regarding  the  sensations 
aroused  through  the  semicircular  canals ;  they  are  too  indistinct  to 
be  recognized  and  named  by  an  appeal  to  consciousness,  and  it 
would  seem  to  be  wiser  to  designate  them  after  the  analogy  of  the 
muscle  sensations  simply  as  semicircular  canal  sensations.  Our 
perceptions  or  ideas  of  space  and  direction  are  doubtless  founded 
in  part  upon  these  reactions  and  in  part  upon  the  muscle  sense, 
vision,  and  tactile  sensations.  With  regard  to  the  influence  of  the 
nerve  impulses  from  the  semicircular  canals  upon  movements,  all 
the  facts  known  seem  to  indicate  that  they  play  an  important  part 
in  the  regulation  or  co-ordination  of  the  movements  of  equilibrium 
and  locomotion.  Inasmuch  as  this  general  co-ordination  or  con- 
trol seems  to  rest  normally  in  the  nervous  mechanisms  of  the  cere- 
bellum and  inasmuch  as  the  vestibular  nerves  make  end  connections 
with  the  cerebellum,  together  with  the  fibers  of  muscle  sense,  we 
may  assume  that  the  cerebellum  forms  the  brain  center  in  which 
the  semicircular  canal  impulses  exert  their  influence  upon  muscular 
contractions  and  muscle  tone, — the  cerebellum  forms  the  nerve  center 
for  the  semicircular  canals,  or  the  semicircular  canals  form  a  periph- 
eral sense  organ  to  the  cerebellum.  Whether  the  impulses  from 
the  canals  are  excitatory  or  inhibitory  or  both,  as  regards  their  effect 
upon  muscular  contractions,  is  not  clearly  apparent  from  the 
experimental  evidence  so  far  furnished,  but  Ewald's  suggestion 
that  they  serve  to  maintain  reflexly  the  tonus  of  the  body  muscu- 
lature is  perhaps  the  most  acceptable  view.  In  regard  to  the 
means  by  which  these  nerves  are  normally  stimulated  there  is  also 
much  room  for  conjecture,  but  provisionally  at  least  it  seems 
permissible  to  adopt  the  view  that  variations  in  the  pressure  of  the 
endolymph  upon  the  hairs  of  the  hair  cells  constitute  the  immediate 
cause  of  their  excitation.     Granting  that  changes  in  position  or 


SEMICIRCULAR   CANALS   AND   THE    VESTIBULE.  379 

movement  of  the  head  may  cause  such  variations  in  pressure  the 
theory  offers  a  simple  and  satisfactory  explanation  of  the  mode 
of  excitation  and  the  means  by  which  the  excitation  may  vary 
appropriately  under  different  conditions.  While  the  endolymph 
theory  may  be  criticized  easily,  no  other  equally  satisfactory  theory 
has  been  suggested  to  take  its  place. 

Functions  of  the  Utriculus  and  Sacculus. — These  small  sacs 
contain  sensory  hair  cells  similar  in  general  structure  to  those  found 
in  the  crista  of  the  ampullary  sacs.  The  collection  of  hair  cells  with 
their  supporting  cells  is  designated  as  the  macula,  the  macula  utriculi 
and  the  macula  sacculi.  Lying  among  the  hairs  of  the  hair  cell  are 
found  masses  of  small  crystals  of  calcium  carbonate,  the  otoliths  or 
otoconia.  In  this  respect  the  structure  of  the  macula  differs  strik- 
ingly from  that  of  the  crista.  The  position  and  connections  of  the 
utriculus  and  sacculus  lead  at  first  naturally  to  the  supposition  that 
they  are  stimulated  by  the  sound  waves  of  the  perilymph  and  are, 
therefore,  concerned  in  the  function  of  hearing.  The  accepted 
views  regarding  the  functions  of  the  cochlea  in  hearing  make  this 
organ  sufficient  for  all  auditory  purposes  and  there  is  no  specific 
part  of  this  process  that  need  be  attributed  to  the  vestibular  sacs. 
It  was,  indeed,  at  one  time  suggested  that  their  structure  adapts 
them  to  respond  especially  to  short  and  irregular  vibrations,  but 
no  cogent  reasons  or  facts  have  been  advanced  to  support  this 
view.  The  fact  that  the  sacs  are  so  closely  connected  with  the 
semicircular  canals  suggests  rather  that  the  functions  of  these  organs 
are  similar  and  that  like  the  canals,  therefore,  they  influence  the 
contractions  of  the  muscles  and  function  as  organs  of  equilibrium. 
In  recent  years  the  view  that  has  been  most  discussed  is  that  ad- 
vanced by  Breuer, — namely,  that  these  organs  give  us  information 
regarding  the  position  of  the  head  when  at  rest  and  when  mak- 
ing progressive — that  is,  non-rotary — movements,  supplementing, 
therefore,  the  functions  of  the  semicircular  canals  on  the  supposition 
that  these  latter  act  especially  in  movements  of  rotation.  Or,  as  it 
is  sometimes  expressed,  the  sacs  form  a  static  and  the  canals  a  dy- 
namic organ  of  equilibrium.  According  to  this  view,  the  otoliths 
act  as  a  means  of  mechanical  stimulation  of  the  hairs.  Being 
heavier  than  the  endolympli,  they  press  upon  the  hairs  with  a  force 
varying  with  the  position  of  the  head  and  thus  give  rise  to  sensations 
or  reflexes  which  are  adapted  to  the  maintenance  of  equilibrium. 
Since  the  planes  of  the  two  sacs  are  different,  they  may  be  differ- 
ently affected  by  the  same  position  or  movement.  So  also  in  pro- 
gressive movements  forward  the  weight  of  the  otoliths  may  be  im- 
agined to  exercise  a  stress  of  some  sort  upon  the  hairs.  This  theory 
has  been  the  subject  of  much  investigation,  numerous  experiments 


380  THE   SPECIAL   SENSES. 

having  been  made  chiefly  upon  fishes  and  invertebrates.*  Accord- 
ing to  some  observers  destruction  of  these  sacs  or  section  of  their 
nerves  is  accompanied  bj^  a  distinct  interference  with  the  fish's  nor- 
mal equihbrium:  the  animal  swims  at  times  upon  his  back  or  side 
and  apparently  loses  its  normal  means  of  judging  correctly  its  posi- 
tion. In  many  invertebrates  there  is  present  a  sac,  known  as  the 
otocyst,  containing  hair  cells  and  otoliths.  Its  structure  resembles 
that  of  the  vestibular  sacs  of  the  mammalian  ear,  and  it  has  been 
assumed  that  it  has  a  similar  function.  Experiments  by  numerous 
observers  have  indicated  that  when  the  otoliths  are  removed  the 
animal  shows  disturbances  in  equilibrium,  particularly  in  the  matter 
of  the  compensatory  movements  exhibited  during  rotation.  Others, 
however,  deny  these  facts  and  state  that  invertebrates  without  oto- 
cysts  make  compensatory  movements  when  rotated  and  that  in 
those  with  otocysts  compensatory  movements  and  maintenance  of 
normal  equilibrium  persist  after  destruction  of  the  sacs.  A  very 
ingenious  experiment  reported  by  Kreidl  seems  to  show  that  the  oto- 
liths may  affect  the  hairs  by  their  weight.  When  the  palsemon,  a 
crustacean,  molts  it  casts  off  the  inner  lining  of  the  otocyst,  together 
with  the  otoliths.  The  otocysts  in  these  animals  lie  at  the  base  of 
the  antennules  and  open  freely  to  the  exterior.  After  molting  the 
animal  by  means  of  its  claws  places  fine  grains  of  sand  in  the  otocyst 
to  act  as  otoliths.  Taking  advantage  of  this  peculiarity,  Kreidl 
placed  the  animal,  after  molting,  upon  finely  powdered  iron,  with 
the  result  that  some  of  the  iron  granules  were  deposited  in  the  oto- 
cyst in  place  of  the  usual  grains  of  sand.  When  now  a  magnet  was 
brought  near  to  the  animal  reactions  were  obtained  which  showed 
that  the  pressure  of  the  iron  upon  the  hairs  influenced  its  position. 
The  position  taken  by  the  animal  under  these  conditions  was  such 
as  would  be  expected  as  a  resultant  of  the  forces  of  magnetism  and 
gravity,  and  the  experiment,  therefore,  justifies  the  hypothesis  that 
under  normal  conditions  gravity  affects  the  otoliths  and  through 
them  the  muscular  co-ordination  of  the  animal. 

*  Consult  the  following  papers:  Sewall,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  4,339, 
1884;  Lee,  ibid.,  15,  311,  1893,  and  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  1, 
128,  1898;   Lyon,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  3,  86,  1900. 


SECTION  IV. 
BLOOD  AND  LYMPH. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


GENERAL  PROPERTIES:   PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE 
CORPUSCLES. 

The  blood  of  the  body  is  contained  in  a  practically  closed  system 
of  tubes,  the  blood-vessels,  within  which  it  is  kept  circulating  by  the 
force  of  the  heart  beat.  It  is  usually  spoken  of  as  the  nutritive 
liquid  of  the  body,  but  its  functions  may  be  stated  more  explicitly,  al- 
though still  in  quite  general  terms,  by  saying  that  it  carries  to  the  tis- 
sues foodstuffs  after  they  have  been  properly  prepared  by  the  diges- 
tive organs ;  that  it  transports  to  the  tissues  oxygen  absorbed  from 
the  air  in  the  lungs ;  that  it  carries  off  from  the  tissues  various  waste 
products  formed  in  the  processes  of  disassimilation ;  that  it  is  the 
medium  for  the  transmission  of  the  internal  secretion  of  certain 
glands;  and  that  it  aids  in  equalizing  the  temperature  and  water 
contents  of  the  body.  It  is  quite  obvious,  from  these  statements, 
that  a  complete  consideration  of  the  physiological  relations  of  the 
blood  would  involve  substantially  a  treatment  of  the  whole  subject 
■of  physiology.  It  is  proposed,  therefore,  in  this  section  to  treat  the 
blood  in  a  restricted  way, — to  consider  it,  in  fact,  as  a  tissue  in  itself, 
and  to  study  its  composition  and  properties  without  special  reference 
to  its  nutritive  relationship  to  other  parts  of  the  body. 

Histological  Structure. — The  blood  is  composed  of  a  liquid  part, 
the  plasma,  in  which  float  a  vast  number  of  microscopical  bodies,  the 
hlood  corpuscles.  There  are  at  least  three  different  kinds  of  cor- 
puscles, known  respectively  as  the  red  corpuscles;  the  white  corpus- 
cles or  leucocytes,  of  which  in  turn  there  are  a  number  of  different 
kinds;  and  the  hlood  plates.  Blood-plasma,  when  obtained  free 
from  corpuscles,  is  perfectly  colorless  in  thin  layers, — for  example, 
in  microscopical  preparations;  when  seen  in  large  quantities  it  shows 
a  slightly  yellowish  tint,  the  depth  of  color  varying  with  different 
animals.  The  red  color  of  blood  is  not  due,  therefore,  to  coloration 
•of  the  blood-plasma,  but  is  caused  by  the  mass  of  red  corpuscles  held 

381 


382  BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 

in  suspension  in  this  liquid.  The  proportion  by  bulk  of  plasma  to 
corpuscles  is  usually  given,  roughly,  as  two  to  one. 

Blood-serum  and  Defibrinated  Blood. — In  connection  with  the 
explanation  of  the  term  "blood-plasma  "  just  given  it  will  be  con- 
venient to  define  briefly  the  terms  "  blood-serum  "  and  "  defibrin- 
ated blood."  Blood,  after  it  escapes  from  the  vessels,  usually  clots 
or  coagulates;  the  nature  of  this  process  is  discussed  in  detail  on 
page  415.  The  clot,  as  it  forms,  gradually  shrinks  and  squeezes  out 
a  clear  liquid  to  which  the  name  blood-serum  is  given.  Serum  re- 
sembles the  plasma  of  normal  blood  in  general  appearance,  but  dif- 
fers from  it  in  composition,  as  will  be  explained  later.  At  present 
we  may  say,  by  way  of  a  preliminary  definition,  that  blood-serum  is 
the  liquid  part  of  blood  after  coagulation  has  taken  place,  as  blood- 
plasma  is  the  liquid  part  of  blood  before  coagulation  has  taken  place. 
If  shed  blood  is  whipped  vigorously  with  a  rod  or  some  similar  object 
while  it  is  clotting,  the  essential  part  of  the  clot — namely,  the  fibrin 
— ^forms  differently  from  what  it  does  when  the  blood  is  allowed  to 
coagulate  quietly;  it  is  deposited  in  shreds  on  the  whipper.  Blood 
that  has  been  treated  in  this  way  is  known  as  defibrinated  blood.  It 
consists  of  blood-serum  plus  the  red  and  white  corpuscles,  and  as  far 
as  appearances  go  it  resembles  exactly  normal  blood;  it  has  lost, 
however,  the  power  of  clotting.  A  more  complete  definition  of 
these  terms  will  be  given  after  the  subject  of  coagulation  has  been 
treated. 

Reaction  of  the  Blood. — When  tested  with  litmus  or  lakmoid 
paper  blood  gives  an  alkaline  reaction.  This  reaction  is  attributed 
to  the  sodium  carbonate  in  solution  in  the  plasma,  and  the  amount 
of  the  alkalinity  has  been  determined,  therefore,  by  titration  with 
a  weak  acid^  such  as  tartaric  acid.  The  acid  is  employed  in 
a  known  strength — one  two-hundredth  or  one  four-hundredth 
normal  solution, — ^  or  -^,  that  is  the  solution  contains  in  each 

'       200  400 ' 

liter  ^  or  ^^~  of  the  number  of  grams  represented  by  the  molecular 
weight  of  tartaric  acid  (C4Hg06=  150).  A  solution  of  this  strength 
is  added  to  a  known  quantity  of  blood  until  the  sodium  carbonate 
is  all  neutralized,  the  end  of  the  reaction  being  determined  usually 
by  one  of  the  recognized  indicators,  such  as  litmus  or  lakmoid. 
Tested  in  this  way,  it  has  been  found  that  the  alkalinity  of  the  blood 
corresponds  to  that  of  an  aqueous  solution  containing  from  0.2  to 
0.3  per  cent,  of  sodium  carbonate.  Much  attention  has  been  paid 
to  the  variations  in  the  alkalinity  of  the  blood  in  different  diseases, 
as  also  under  varying  conditions  of  normal  life,  and  in  consequence 
many  methods  for  determining  this  alkalinity  have  been  suggested 
with  reference  to  their  clinical  application,  these  methods  being 
characterized  by  the  fact  that  but  little  blood  is  employed.     The 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:   THE    CORPUSCLES.  383 

methods. .  differ  among  themselves  chiefly  in  the  means  used  to 
determine  the  point  of  neutralization  of  the  blood  by  the  acid 
added.  In  some  methods  litmus  is  employed,  in  others  lakmoid, 
and  in  one  (Dare's)  the  end-reaction  is  determined  spectroscopically 
on  the  belief  that  the  characteristic  absorption  spectrum  of  oxy- 
hemoglobin (p.  395)   disappears  at  the  point  of  neutralization.* 

In  reference  to  this  subject  of  the  reaction  of  the  blood  and  of  the 
tissues  of  the  body  generally  a  difference  in  terminology  prevails 
at  present  which  tends  to  confuse  the  beginner.  Some  writers  use 
the  term  alkalinity  in  the  sense  of  titration  alkalinity  to  indicate 
that  the  blood  will  neutralize  a  certain  amount  of  weak  acid  added 
to  it.  Others,  however,  employ  the  term  in  its  strict  sense,  as 
developed  by  modern  physical  chemistry,  to  indicate  an  excess  of 
hydroxyl  ions  (OH — ).  From  the  latter  standpoint  a  solution  is 
alkaline  when  it  contains  a  substance  or  substances  which  upon 
dissociation  yield  an  excess  of  hydroxyl  ions, — sodium  hydroxid, 
for  example,  which  on  dissociation  gives  Na-|-  and  OH — ,  or  sub- 
stances, such  as  sodium  carbonate,  which  give  rise  to  hydroxyl  ions 
by  reaction  with  water.  In  a  solution  of  this  latter  salt  we  may 
assume  that  some  of  the  molecules  dissociate  into  the  ions  Na-f-, 
Na+ ,  and  CO 3=  ,  and  that  the  anion,  CO 3= ,  reacts  with  the  disso- 
ciated molecules  of  water,  H+,  HO — ,  giving  HCO3 —  and  OH — . 

There  will  be  present  in  the  solution,  therefore,  the  following  ions,  Na+, 
OH — ,  and  Na+  ,  HCO3 — ;  and  the  presence  of  the  hydroxyl  ion  confers  upon 
the  solution  its  alkaline  reaction  and  properties.  In  such  a  solution  of  a 
strong  base  Avith  a  weak  acid  the  alkalinity,  that  is,  excess  of  OH — ,  can  not  be 
determined  by  titration  with  an  acid  stronger  than  carbonic  acid.  If  tartaric 
acid  is  added,  for  instance,  the  acid  will  not  only  give  its  H+  to  combine  with 
the  OH — ,  but  its  own  anion  wiU  combine  with  all  of  the  dissociated  Na+  ; 
consequently  more  NaaCOg  will  be  dissociated,  and  this  reaction  goes  on,  if 
sufficient  acid  is  used,  until  all  of  the  sodium  carbonate  is  destroyed.  To 
determine  the  excess  of  hydroxyl  ions  in  such  a  solution  as  blood  it  is  neces- 
sary to  make  use  of  the  methods  of  physical  chemistry.  Those  who  have 
employed  these  methodsf  report  that  blood  contains  no  greater  quantity  of 
hydroxyl  ions  than  pure  water,  and  must,  therefore,  be  reckoned  as  a  neutral 
liquid.  This  conclusion  is  corroborated  further  by  the  fact  that  with  some 
indicators — e.  g.,  phenolphthalein — the  blood  does  not  give  an  alkaline  reac- 
tion. In  fact,  the  sodium  in  the  blood  behaves  substantially  as  if  it  were 
present  as  the  bicarbonate,  NaHCOg, — a  theoretically  acid  salt  whose  dis- 
sociation would  be  represented  by  the  two  ions  Na  +  ,  HCO3 — .  The  many 
observations,  therefore,  which  have  been  made  by  titration  of  the  blood  must 
be  considered  as  not  giving  its  variations  in  alkalinity,  but  rather  the  varia- 
tions in  the  amount  of  alkali,  Na,  in  combination  with  weak  acids,  such  as  car- 
bonate or  phosphate.  The  results  represent  what  has  been  called  the  "titra- 
tion alkalinity"  of  the  blood. 

Specific  Gravity. — The  specific  gravity  of  human  blood  in  the 
adult  male  may  vary  from  1.041  to  1.067,  the  aA^erage  being  about 

*  For  an  account  of  these  methods  see  Simon,  "A  Manual  of  Clinical  Diag- 
nosis," 1904. 

t  Fraenckel,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie, "  96,  601,  1903;  and 
Hober,  iUd.,  99,  572. 


384  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

1.055.  The  most  satisfactory  method  of  determining  this  factor  is, 
of  course,  to  compare  the  weight  of  a  known  vokime  of  blood  with 
that  of  an  equal  volume  of  water,  but  for  observations  upon  human 
beings  such  small  quantities  of  blood  must  be  used  that  recourse  must 
be  had  usually  to  a  more  indirect  method.  Perhaps  the  simplest  of 
the  methods  suggested  is  that  devised  by  Hammerschlag.*  In  this 
method  a  mixture  is  made  of  chloroform  (sp.  gr.,  1.526)  and  benzol 
(sp.  gr.,  0.889).  The  mixture  is  made  in  such  proportions  as  to 
have  a  specific  gravity  of  about  1.055.  A  drop  of  blood  from  the 
finger  is  shaken  into  this  mixture;  if  the  drop  sinks  to  the  bottom 
it  is  evident  that  the  specific  gravity  of  the  blood  is  higher  than  that 
of  the  mixture,  and  the  reverse  is  true  if  the  drop  rises.  By  adding 
more  of  the  chloroform  or  of  the  benzol,  as  the  case  may  be,  the 
specific  gravity  of  the  mixture  may  be  quickly  altered  so  as  to  be 
equal  to  that  of  the  drop  of  blood,  which  will  then  float  in  the  liquid 
without  a  distinct  tendency  to  rise  or  fall.  The  specific  gravity  of 
the  mixture,  which  is  also  that  of  the  blood,  is  then  determined  by  a 
suitable  hydrometer.  By  the  use  of  such  methods  it  has  been  found  f 
that  the  specific  gravity  varies  with  age  and  with  sex ;  that  it  is 
diminished  after  eating  and  is  increased  after  exercise ;  that  it  has  a 
diurnal  variation,  falling  gradually  during  the  day  and  rising  slowly 
during  the  night;  and  that  it  varies  greatly  in  individuals,  so  that 
a  specific  gravity  which  is  normal  for  one  may  be  a  sign  of  disease 
in  another.  The  specific  gravity  of  the  corpuscles  is  slightly  greater 
than  that  of  the  plasma.  For  this  reason  the  corpuscles  in  shed 
blood,  when  its  coagulation  is  prevented  or  retarded,  tend  to  settle 
to  the  bottom  of  the  containing  utensil,  leaving  a  more  or  less  clear 
layer  of  supernatant  plasma.  Among  themselves,  also,  the  cor- 
puscles differ  slightly  in  specific  gravity,  the  red  corpuscles  being 
heaviest  and  the  blood  plates  lightest. 

Red  Corpuscles. — The  red  corpuscles  in  man  and  in  all  the 
mammalia,  with  the  exception  of  the  camel  and  other  members  of 
the  group  Camelidfe,  are  biconcave  circular  discs  without  nuclei; 
in  the  Camelidse  they  have  an  elliptical  form.  Their  average  diame- 
ter in  man  is  given  as  7.7  ^^  (1  /-<  =  0.001  mm.) ;  their  number,  which 
is  usually  reckoned  as  so  many  in  a  cubic  millimeter,  varies  greatly 
under  different  conditions  of  health  and  disease.  The  average 
number  is  given  as  5,000,000  per  c.mm.  for  males  and  4,500,000  for 
females.  The  red  color  of  the  corpuscles  is  due  to  the  presence  in 
them  of  a  pigment  known  as  "hemoglobin."  Owing  to  the  minute 
size  of  the  corpuscles,  their  color  when  seen  singly  under  the  micro- 
scope is  a  faint  yellowish  red,  but  when  seen  in  mass  they  exhibit 
the  well-known  blood-red  color,  which  varies  from  scarlet  in  arterial 

*  Hammerschlag,  "Zeitschrift  f.  klin.  Med.,"  20,  444,  1892. 
tSee  Jones,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  12,  299,  1891. 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:     THE    CORPUSCLES.  385 

blood  to  purplish  red  in  venous  blood,  this  variation  in  color  being 
dependent  upon  the  amount  of  oxygen  contained  in  the  l^lood  in 
combination  with  the  hemoglobin.  Speaking  generally,  the  func- 
tion of  the  red  corpuscles  is  to  carry  oxygen  from  the  lungs  to  the 
tissues.  This  function  is  entirely  dependent  upon  the  presence  of 
hemoglobin,  which  has  the  power  of  combining  easily  with  oxygen 
gas.  The  physiology  of  the  red  corpuscles,  therefore,  is  largely  con- 
tained in  a  description  of  the  properties  of  hemoglobin. 

Condition  of  the  Hemoglobin  in  the  Corpuscle. — The  finer  structure 
of  the  red  corpuscle  is  not  completely  known.  It  is  usually  stated 
that  the  corpuscle  is  composed  of  two  substances,  stroma  and  hem- 
oglobin, together  with  a  certain  amount  of  water  and  salts  and 
also  small  amounts  of  lecithin  and  cholesterin.  The  stroma  is  a 
delicate,  extensible,  colorless  substance  that  gives  shape  to  the 
corpuscles;  it  forms  a  meshwork  or  spongy  mass  in  which  the 
hemoglobin  is  deposited.  This  latter  substance  forms  the  chief 
constituent  of  the  corpuscle,  since  it  makes  about  32  per  cent,  of  the 
weight  of  the  normal  corpuscle,  and  when  dry  from  90  to  95  per 
cent,  of  the  total  solid  material.  The  point  that  remains  uncertain 
is  the  condition  in  which  the  hemoglobin  exists  within  the  corpuscle. 
It  is  evidently  not  in  solution,  since  the  amount  present  is  too  great 
to  be  held  in  solution  in  the  corpuscle,  and,  moreover  even  a  thin 
layer  of  corpuscles  is  far  from  being  transparent.  Nor  is  it  deposited 
in  the  form  of  crystals.  It  is  assumed,  therefore,  that  it  is  present 
in  a  peculiar,  amorphous  form,  and  Gamgee  has  shown  that  from 
its  aqueous  solutions  the  hemoglobin  can  be  obtained  in  an  amor- 
phous state  by  the  action  of  an  electrical  current.  It  is  protected 
from  the  action  of  the  water,  within  and  without  the  corpuscle.  In 
various  ways,  however,  the  relations  of  the  hemoglobin  within  the 
corpuscle  may  be  disturbed;  so  that  it  escapes  and  enters  into 
solution  in  the  plasma.  Blood  in  which  this  has  happened  suffers 
a  change  in  color,  becoming  a  dark  crimson,  and  is  therefore  known 
as  "laked  blood."  Laked  blood  in  thin  layers  is  quite  transparent 
compared  with  the  normal  blood  with  its  opaque  corpuscles. 

Hemolysis. — The  act  of  discharging  the  hemoglobin  from  the 
corpuscles  so  that  it  becomes  dissolve'd  in  the  plasma  is  designated 
as  hemolysis,  and  substances  that  cause  this  action  are  spoken  of 
as  hemolytic  agents.  A  number  of  such  agents  are  known;  but, 
although  the  results  of  their  action  are  the  same,  so  far  as  the  hemo- 
globin is  concerned,  the  way  in  which  they  bring  about  this  result 
must  vary  greatly.  Some  of  the  known  methods  of  producing 
hemolysis,  or  rendering  the  blood  ''laky,"  are  as  follows:  (1) 
By  the  addition  of  water  to  the  blood  or  by  diminishing  in  any  way 
the  concentration  or  osmotic  pressure  in  the  plasma.  (2)  By  add- 
ing ether  or  chloroform.  (3)  By  adding  bile  or  solutions  of  the  bile 
25 


386  '  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

salts.  (4)  By  adding  amyl-alcohol.  (5)  By  adding  the  serum 
from  the  blood  of  certain  animals.  (6)  By  adding  saponin  or 
sapotoxin.  (7)  By  the  addition  of  an  excess  of  alkali.  (8) 
By  various  toxins  found  in  snake  venom  or  in  the  serum  of  other 
animals  or  among  the  products  of  bacterial  activity  (natural 
hemolysins)  or  by  similar  organic  substances  produced  within  the 
body  by  the  process  of  immunizing.  Two  of  these  methods  de- 
mand especial  mention,  as  they  involve  the  consideration  of  proc- 
esses of  great  physiological  importance. 

Hemolysis  Caused  by  Lowering  the  Osmotic  Pressure  of  the  Plasma. 
— ^The  blood  corpuscles  contain  a  certain  amount  of  water  (  57  to 
64  per  cent.),  an  amount  insufficient  to  discharge  the  hemoglobin. 
We  may  imagine  that  the  osmotic  pressure  within  the  corpuscle  is 
such,  compared  with  the  osmotic  pressure  exerted  by  the  salts  in 
the  plasma,  that  a  water  equilibrium  is  established,  and  that, 
although  water  molecules  diffuse  into  and  out  of  the  corpuscle, 
the  exchange  is  equal  in  the  two  directions.  If,  however,  the 
outside  plasma  is  diluted  by  the  addition  of  water  to  any  consider- 
able extent,  then  the  osmotic  pressure  outside  the  corpuscles  is 
correspondingly  reduced,  while  that  within  the  corpuscles  is 
unchanged.  Consequently  an  increased  amount  of  water  will 
pass  into  the  corpuscles,  sufficient,  in  fact,  to  discharge  and  dissolve 
the  hemoglobin.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that,  in  injecting  liquids 
into  the  circulation,  or  in  diluting  blood  outside  the  body,  care 
must  be  taken  not  to  use  solutions  whose  osmotic  pressure  is 
markedly  less  than  that  of  blood-plasma,  otherwise  many  of  the 
red  corpuscles  may  be  destroyed.  Solutions  whose  osmotic  pressure 
is  the  same  as  that  of  the  plasma  are  said  to  be  isosmotic  or  isotonic 
with  the  blood,  those  whose  pressure  is  lower  are  designated  as 
hypotonic,  and  those  whose  pressure  is  higher  as  hypertonic* 
The  salt  that  is  contained  in  the  plasma  in  largest  amounts  is 
sodium  chlorid.  In  making  isotonic  solutions  this  salt  is  there- 
fore generally  employed.  A  solution  containing  nine-tenths  of 
1  per  cent,  of  sodium  chlorid  (NaCl,  0.9  per  cent.)  gives  the 
same  osmotic  pressure  as  plasma  as  determined  by  the  effect  of 
each  on  the  lowering  of  the  freezing  point  (see  appendix.  Diffusion, 
Osmosis,  and  Osmotic  Pressure).  Such  a  solution  mixed  with  blood 
should  not  and  does  not  alter  the  water  contents  of  the  corpuscles. 
One  may,  in  fact,  use  a  0.7  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  chlorid  with- 
out causing  any  noticeable  hemolysis,  and  this  strength  of  solution 
is  generally  employed  in  infusions  and  experimental  work;  it  con- 
stitutes what  is  known  in  the  laboratories  as  normal  saline  or  physio- 

_  *  For  a  full  consideration  of  osmotic  pressure  in  its  relations  to  physio- 
logical processes,  see  Hamburger,  "Osmotischer  Druck  und  lonenlehre."' 
"Wiesbaden,  1902. 


GENERAL   PROPERTIES:    THE    CORPUSCLES.  387 

logical  saline.  If,  however,  one  uses  a  lower  concentration  some  of 
the  corpuscles  are  hemolyzed,  and  the  number  of  corpuscles 
destroyed  and  the  rapidity  of  the  hemolysis  increase  rapidly  with 
the  lowering  of  the  osmotic  pressure.  While  a  0.7  per  cent,  solution 
of  sodium  chlorid  suffices  in  most  cases  for  infusions  and  for  diluting 
blood,  it  does  not  entirely  replace  the  normal  plasma  or  serum,  since 
these  liquids,  in  addition  to  the  sodium  salts,  contain  salts  of 
calcium,  potassium,  magnesium,  etc.,  each  of  which  has  doubtless 
a  certain  specific  importance.  In  diluting  blood  outside  the  body, 
when  the  dilution  is  large,  better  results  are  obtained  by  using  what 
is  known  as  Ringer's  mixture,  which  consists  of  the  physiological 
saline  solution  plus  small  amounts  of  potassium  and  calcium 
chlorid.     One  formula  for  Ringer's  solution  is: 

Sodium  chlorid 0.7      per  cent. 

Calcium  chlorid 0.026    "       " 

Potassium  chlorid 0.03      "       " 

Hemolysis  Caused  by  the  Action  of  Hemolysins. — It  has  long  been 
known  that  the  serum  of  one  animal  may  destroy  the  red  corpuscles 
of  another  animal.  Thus,  rabbits'  blood  corpuscles  added  to  the 
clear  serum  of  a  dog,  cat,  or  man  are  quickly  destroyed,  with  the 
liberation  of  their  hemoglobin.  This  action  was  formerly  described 
under  the  term  "  globulicidal  action  of  serum,"  and  was  compared 
to  the  similar  destruction,  bactericidal  action,  exhibited  by  serum 
toward  some  bacteria.  In  more  recent  literature  the  term  hemol- 
ysis has  replaced  that  of  "globulicidal  action,"  and  the  hemolytic 
effect  that  a  serum  may  exert  upon  foreign  corpuscles  is  attributed 
to  the  presence  in  it  of  certain  substances  which  in  general  are  classed 
as  hemolysins.  This  hemolytic  action  is  not  due  to  a  simple  differ- 
ence in  osmotic  pressure.  The  serums  of  the  different  mammalia 
have  all  approximately  the  same  osmotic  pressure;  the  differences 
are  too  slight  to  explain  the  effects  observed.  Moreover,  if  the 
serum  used  is  heated  to  55°  C.  its  hemolytic  action  is  destroyed, 
although  no  noticeable  change  occurs  in  the  osmotic  pressure.  In 
addition  to  the  hemolysins  found  normally  in  the  blood  of  different 
animals  it  was  shown  first  by  Bordet  *  that  they  may  be  produced 
artificially.  The  serum  of  guinea  pigs  has  little  or  no  effect  normally 
on  the  red  corpuscles  of  rabbits'  blood.  If,  however,  one  injects 
into  a  guinea  pig  a  little  rabbits'  blood  and  repeats  the  process  several 
times  at  intervals  of  a  day  or  so  it  will  be  found  that  the  blood  of  this 
particular  guinea  pig  has  now  a  strong  hemolytic  action  toward  the 
red  corpuscles  of  rabbits.  Moreover,  the  action  is  specific,— that  is, 
the  serum  is  hemolytic  only  toward  the  red  corpuscles  of  the  species 
whose  blood  was  injected  into  it.  The  process  of  producing  a  specific 
*  Bordet,  "Annales  de  I'lnst.  Pasteur,"  1895. 


388  BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

hemolysin  by  injections  is  designated  usually  as  immunization,  on 
account  of  its  essential  similarity  to  the  means  used  to  produce  a 
specific  antitoxin  by  injecting  a  given  toxin, — that  is,  of  rendering 
an  animal  immune.  The  specific  hemolysins  produced  by  immuniza- 
tion have  been  studied  by  Bordet,  Ehrlich,  and  others.*  It  has  been 
shown  that  they  are  in  reality  composed  of  two  substances  whose 
combined  action  is  necessary  for  the  hemolysis.  There  is,  first,  a 
new  and  specific  substance  that  is  produced  by  the  body  as  a  conse- 
quence of  the  injection  of  the  foreign  blood  corpuscles.  This  sub- 
stance has  been  given  different  names,  but  is  known  most  frequently 
as  the  immune  body  (or  amhoce'ptor) .  It  is  not  destroyed  by  mod- 
erate heating.  The  immune  body  is  enabled  to  act  upon  the  cor- 
puscles by  the  co-operation  of  certain  substances  which  are  normally 
present  in  the  serum  and  are  therefore  not  produced  by  the  process 
of  immunization.  These  substances  are  known  usually  as  comple- 
ments, and  it  is  they  that  are  destroyed  by  heating  to  55°  C.  If  the 
immune  serum  of  a  guinea  pig  is  heated  to  55°  C.  its  hemolytic  action 
upon  rabbits'  corpuscles  is  destroyed.  The  action  may  be  restored, 
however,  by  adding  a  little  of  the  rabbit's  own  serum,  since  in  terms 
of  the  above  hypothesis  the  complements  are  present  in  normal 
serum.  The  results  obtained  from  the  study  of  these  bodies  are  of 
extraordinary  interest  in  connection  with  the  subject  of  acquired 
immunity  toward  various  diseases,  and  also  in  the  evidence  they 
furnish  of  the  wonderful  complexity  of  the  reactions  exhibited  by 
living  organisms.  For  it  is  found  that  specific  substances,  lysins, 
capable  of  destroying  special  kinds  of  cells,  may  be  produced  by  the 
injection  of  spermatozoa,  epithelial  cells,  etc.  Any  foreign  cell  in- 
troduced into  the  body  seems  to  call  forth  the  production  of  an 
immune  body  capable  of  destroying  only  that  particular  kind  of  cell. 
Poisons  or  toxins  produced  in  this  way  may  be  designated  in  general 
as  cytotoxins, — that  is,  cell  poisons, — and  it  is  believed  that  specific 
toxins  are  produced  or  may  be  produced  for  each  kind  of  cell.  Im- 
munizing with  spermatozoa  gives  rise  to  a  spermotoxin  in  the  blood 
of  the  animal  immunized,  while  injection  of  red  corpuscles  causes 
the  formation  of  a  hemotoxin,  or,  as  it  is  usually  called  in  this  case, 
hemolysin.  As  the  chemical  nature  of  this  reaction  is  beyond  our 
present  knowledge,  it  is  designated  frequently  as  the  biological  reac- 
tion of  the  living  substance.  In  the  case  of  some  of  the  natural 
hemolysins  referred  to  above  it  has  also  been  shown  that  they  are 
composed  in  reality  of  two  bodies,  each  necessary  to  the  reaction, — 
one  the  complement,  destroyed  by  heating,  and  one  comparable  to 

*  For  a  brief  statement  of  the  development  of  the  subject,  see  Wasser- 
mann,  "Immune  Sera,  Hemolysins,  Cytotoxins,  and  Precipitins,"  trans- 
lated by  Bolduan,  New  York,  1904.  For  a  more  extended  review  see  Aschoff, 
"Zeitschrift  f.  allgemeine  Physiologic,"  1,  69,  1902. 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:    THE    CORPUSCLES.  389 

the  immune  body,  but  in  this  case  designated  as  the  interbody  or 
intermediary  body,  since  it  is  not  produced  by  immunization. 

Speaking  in  general  terms,  the  serum  of  any  animal  is  more  or 
less  hemolytic  in  regard  to  the  blood  corpuscles  of  an  animal  of 
another  species;  but  great  differences  are  shown  in  this  respect.  The 
blood-serum  of  the  horse  shows  but  little  hemolytic  action  upon  the 
red  corpuscles  of  the  rabbit  when  compared  with  the  effect  of  the 
serum  of  the  dog  or  cat.'  Eels'  serum  has  a  remarkably  strong 
hemolytic  action  upon  the  red  corpuscles  of  most  mammals;  a  very 
minute  quantity  of  this  serum  (0.04  c.c.)  injected  into  the  veins  of  a 
rabbit  will  cause  hemolysis  of  the  corpuscles  and,  as  a  consequence, 
the  appearance  of  bloody  urine  (hemoglobinuria).  It  should  be 
added  that  this  curious  toxic  or  lytic  effect  of 'foreign  serums  is  not 
confined  to  the  red  corpuscles.  They  contain  cytotoxins  that  affect 
also  other  tissue  elements,  especially  those  of  the  central  nervous 
system,  and  may  therefore  cause  death.  As  little  as  0.04  c.c.  of 
eels'  serum  injected  into  a  small  rabbit  will  cause  the  death  of  the 
animal,  the  fatal  effect  being  due  apparently  to  an  action  on  the 
vasomotor  and  respiratory  center  in  the  medulla.  The  hemolytic 
and  generally  toxic  effect  of  foreign  sera  has  been  known  for  a  long 
time.  It  was  discovered  practically  in  the  numerous  attempts  made 
in  former  years  to  transfuse  the  blood  of  one  animal  into  the  veins 
of  another.  It  has  been  found  that  this  process  of  transfusion  as  a 
means  of  combatting  severe  hemorrhage  is  dangerous  unless  the 
blood  is  taken  from  an  animal  of  the  same  or  a  nearly  related  species. 

Nature  and  Amount  of  Hemoglobin. — Hemoglobin  is  a  very 
complex  substance  belonging  to  the  group  of  combined  proteids. 
Under  the  influence  of  heat,  acids,  alkalies,  etc.,  it  may  be  broken 
up,  with  the  formation  of  a  simple  proteid,  globin,  belonging  to  the 
group  of  histons  (see  appendix)  and  a  pigment,  hematin.  The 
globin  forms,  according  to  different  estimates,  from  86  to  94  per  cent, 
of  the  molecule,  and  the  hematin  about  4  per  cent.  Other  sub- 
stances of  an  undetermined  character  result  from  the  decomposition.* 
When  the  decomposition  takes  place  in  the  absence  of  oxygen,  the 
products  formed  are  globin  and  hemochromogen,  instead  of  globin 
and  hematin.  Hemochromogen  in  the  presence  of  oxygen  quickly 
undergoes  oxidation  to  the  more  stable  hematin.  Hoppe-Seyler 
has  shown  that  hemochromogen  possesses  the  chemical  grouping 
which  gives  to  hemoglobin  its  power  of  combining  readily  with  oxy- 
gen and  its  distinctive  absorption  spectrum.  On  the  basis  of  facts 
such  as  these,  hemoglobin  may  be  defined  as  a  compound  of  a  proteid 
body  with  hematin.  It  seems,  then,  that,  although  the  hemochro- 
mogen or  hematin  portion  is  the  essential  thing,  giving  to  the  mole- 

*  Schulz,  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiologisclie  Chemie,"  24;  also  Lauraw,  ibid., 
26. 


390  BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

cule  of  hemoglobin  its  valuable  physiological  properties  as  a  respira- 
tory pigment,  yet  in  the  blood  corpuscles  this  substance  is  incorpo- 
rated into  the  much  larger  and  more  unstable  molecule  of  hemo- 
globin, whose  behavior  toward  oxygen  is  different  from  that  of  the 
hematin  itself,  the  difference  lying  mainlj^  in  the  fact  that  the  hemo- 
globin as  it  exists  in  the  corpuscles  forms  with  oxygen  a  compara- 
tively feeble  combination  that  may  be  broken  up  readily,  with  liber- 
ation of  the  gas. 

Hemoglobin  is  widely  distributed  throughout  the  animal  king- 
dom, being  found  in  the  blood  corpuscles  of  mammalia,  birds, 
reptiles,  amphibia,  and  fishes,  and  in  the  blood  or  blood  corpuscles 
of  many  of  the  invertebrates.  The  composition  of  its  molecule  is 
found  to  vary  somewhat  in  different  animals;  so  that,  strictly 
speaking,  there  are  probably  a  number  of  different  forms  of  hemo- 
globin— all,  however,  closely  related  in  chemical  and  physiological 
properties.  Elementary  analysis  of  dogs'  hemoglobin  shows  the 
following  percentage  composition  (Jaquet) :  C,  53.91;  H,  6.62;  N, 
15.98;  S,  0.542;  Fe,  0.333;  O,  22.62.  Its  molecular  formula  is 
given  as  C758Hj203-^i95S3^®^2i8>  which  would  make  the  molec- 
ular weight  16,669.  Other  estimates  are  given  of  the  molecular 
formula,  but  they  agree  at  least  in  showing  that  the  molecule  is  of 
enormous  size.  The  hematin  that  is  split  off  from  the  hemoglobin 
is  a  pigment  whose  constitution  is  relatively  simple,  as  is  indicated 
by  its  percentage  formula,  Cg^Hg^N^FeO-  (Kiister).  It  contains 
all  of  the  iron  of  the  original  hemoglobin  molecule.  Gamgee  has 
called  attention  to  two  facts  which  seem  to  indicate  that  the  globin 
and  hematin  do  not  exist  as  such  in  the  hemoglobin  molecule. 
Thus,  hematin  is  magnetic, — that  is,  is  attracted  by  a  magnet, — while 
hemoglobin,  on  the  contrary,  is  diamagnetic.  Globin  alone  rotates 
the  pla.ne  of  polarized  light  to  the  left,  levorotatory,  while  hemo- 
globin solutions  are  dextrorotatory.  The  exact  amount  of  hemo- 
globin in  human  blood  varies  naturally  with  the  individual  and  with 
different  conditions  of  life.  According  to  Preyer,*  the  average 
amount  for  the  adult  male  is  14  grams  of  hemoglobin  to  each  100 
grams  of  blood.  It  is  estimated  that  in  the  blood  of  a  man  weighing 
68  kilograms  there  are  contained  about  750  grams  of  hemoglobin, 
which  is  distributed  among  some  25,000,000,000,000  of  corpuscles, 
giving  a  total  superficial  area  of  about  3200  square  meters.  Practi- 
call}^  all  of  this  large  surface  of  hemoglobin  is  available  for  the 
absorption  of  oxygen  from  the  air  in  the  lungs,  for,  owing  to  the 
great  number  and  the  minute  size  of  the  capillaries,  the  blood,  in 
passing  through  a  capillary  area,  becomes  subdivided  to  such  an 
extent  that  the  red  corpuscles  stream  through  the  capillaries,  one 
may  say,  in  single  file.  In  circulating  through  the  lungs,  therefore, 
*  "Die  Blutkrystalle."     Jena,   1871., 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:    THE    CORPUSCLES.  391 

each  corpuscle  becomes  exposed  more  or  less  completely  to  the  action 
of  the  air,  and  the  utilization  of  the  entire  quantity  of  hemoglobin 
must  be  nearly  perfect.  It  may  be  worth  while  to  call  attention  to 
the  fact  that  the  biconcave  form  of  the  red  corpuscle  increases 
the  superficies  of  the  corpuscle  and  tends  to  make  the  surface 
exposure  of  the  hemoglobin  more  complete.  Instruments  known 
as  hemometers  or  hemoglobinometers  have  been  devised  for  clinical 
use  in  determining  the  amount  of  hemoglobin  in  the  blood  of 
patients.  A  number  of  different  forms  of  this  instrument  are  in 
use.  In  all  of  them,  however,  the  determination  is  made  with  a 
drop  or  two  of  blood,  such  as  can  be  obtained  without  difficulty 
by  pricking  the  skin.  The  amount  of  hemoglobin  in  the  withdrawn 
blood  is  determined  usually  by  a  colorimetric  method, — that  is,  its 
color,  which  is  due  to  the  hemoglobin,  is  compared  with  a  series  of 
standard  solutions  containing  known  amounts  of  hemoglobin,  or 
with  a  wedge  of  colored  glass  whose  color  value  in  terms  of  hemo- 
globin has  been  determined  beforehand.  For  details  of  the  structure 
of  the  several  instn.mients  employed  and  the  precautions  to  be 
observed  in  their  use  reference  must  be  made  to  the  laboratory 
guides.* 

Compounds  with  Oxygen  and  other  Gases. — Hemoglobin  has 
the  property  of  uniting  with  oxygen  gas  in  certain  definite  propor- 
tions, forming  a  true  chemical  compound.  This  compound  is  known 
as  oxyhemoglobin;  it  is  formed  whenever  blood  or  hemoglobin 
solutions  are  exposed  to  air  or  otherwise  brought  into  contact  with 
oxygen.  Each  molecule  of  hemoglobin  is  supposed  to  combine  with 
one  molecule  of  oxygen.  According  to  a  determination  by  Htifner,t 
the  0  capacity  of  the  Hb  of  ox's  blood  is  1.34  c.c.  0  to  each  gram  of 
Hb.  Oxyhemoglobin  is  not  a  very  firm  compound.  If  placed  in 
an  atmosphere  containing  no  oxygen,  it  is  dissociated,  giving  off 
free  oxygen  and  leaving  behind  hemoglobin,  or,  as  it  is  often  called 
b}^  way  of  distinction,  "reduced  hemoglobin."  This  power  of  com- 
bining with  oxygen  to  form  a  loose  chemical  compound,  which  in  turn 
can  be  dissociated  easily  when  the  oxygen  pressure  is  lowered,  makes 
possible  the  function  of  hemoglobin  in  the  blood  as  the  carrier  of 
of  oxygen  from  the  lungs  to  the  tissues.  The  details  of  this  process 
are  described  in  the  section  on  Respiration.  Hemoglobin  forms 
with  carbon  monoxid  gas  (CO)  a  compound,  similar  to  oxyhemo- 
globin, which  is  known  as  carbon  monoxid  hemoglobin.  In  this 
compound  also  the  union  takes  place  in  the  proportion  of  one 
molecule  of  hemoglobin  to  one  molecule  of  the  gas.  The  compound 
formed  differs,  however,  from  oxyhemoglobin  in  being  much  more 
stable,  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that  the  breathing  of  carbon  monoxid 

*See  Simon,  "A  Manual  of  Clinical  Diagnosis."     Philadelphia,  1904. 
t  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1894,  p.  130. 


392  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

gas  is  liable  to  prove  fatal.  The  CO  unites  with  the  hemoglobin, 
forming  a  firm  compound;  the  tissues  of  the  body  are  thereby  pre- 
vented from  obtaining  their  necessary  oxygen,  and  death  results 
from  suffocation  or  asphyxia.  Carbon  monoxid  forms  one  of  the 
constituents  of  coal-gas.  The  well-known  fatal  effect  of  breathing 
coal-gas  for  some  time,  as  in  the  case  of  individuals  sleeping  in  a 
room  in  which  gas  is  escaping,  is  traceable  directly  to  the  carbon 
monoxid.  Nitric  oxid  (NO)  forms  also  with  hemoglobin  a  definite 
compound  that  is  even  more  stable  than  the  CO  hemoglobin;  if, 
therefore,  this  gas  were  brought  into  contact  with  the  blood,  it 
would  cause  death  in  the  same  way  as  the  CO. 

Oxyhemoglobin,  carbon  monoxid  hemoglobin,  and  nitric  oxid 
hemoglobin  are  similar  compounds.  Each  is  formed,  apparently, 
by  a  definite  combination  of  the  gas  with  the  hematin  portion  of  the 
hemoglobin  molecule,  and  a  given  weight  of  hemoglobin  unites 
presumably  with  an  equal  volume  of  each  gas.  In  marked  contrast 
to  these  facts,  Bohr*  has  shown  that  hemoglobin  forms  a  compound 
with  carbon  dioxid  gas,  carhohemoglobin,  in  which  the  quantitative 
relationship  of  the  gas  to  the  hemoglobin  differs  from  that  shown 
by  oxygen.  In  a  mixture  of  O  and  CO 2  the  latter  gas  is  absorbed  by 
hemoglobin  solutions  independently  of  the  oxygen,  so  that  a  solu- 
tion of  hemoglobin  nearly  saturated  with  oxygen  will  take  up  CO  2 
as  though  it  held  no  oxygen  in  combination.  Bohr  suggests,  there- 
fore, that  the  0  and  the  CO  2  must  unite  with  different  portions  of  the 
hemoglobin — the  oxygen  with  the  pigment  portion  and  the  CO  2  possi- 
bly with  the  proteid  portion.  Although  the  amount  of  CO 2  taken  up 
by  the  hemoglobin  is  not  influenced  by  the  amount  of  0  already  in 
combination,  the  reverse  relationship  does  not  hold  in  all  cases.  It  is 
found  that  the  presence  of  the  CO 2  loosens,  as  it  were,  the  combina- 
tion between  the  hemoglobin  and  the  oxygen  so  that  the  oxyhemo- 
globin dissociates  more  readily  than  would  otherwise  be  the  case. 
This  is  observed  at  least  when  the  oxygen  is  under  a  low  pressure, 
such  as  occurs,  for  instance,  in  the  capillaries  of  the  tissues.  The 
importance  of  this  fact  in  regard  to  the  oxygen  supply  to  the  tissues 
is  referred  to  more  explicitly  in  the  section  on  Respiration. 

Presence  of  Iron  in  the  Molecule. — It  is  probable  that  iron 
is  quite  generally  present  in  the  animal  tissues  in  connection  with 
nuclein  compounds,  but  its  existence  in  hemoglobin  is  noteworthy 
because  it  has  long  been  known,  and  because  the  important  property 
of  combining  with  oxygen  seems  to  be  connected  with  the  presence 
of  this  element.  According  to  the  analyses  made,  the  proportion 
of  iron  in  hemoglobin  varies  somewhat  in  different  animals:  the 
figures  given  are  from  0.333  to  0.47  per  cent.  The  amount  of 
hemoglobin  in  blood  may  be  determined,  therefore,  by  making  a 
*  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  3,  47,  1892,  and  16,  402,  1904. 


GENERAL   PROPERTIES:   THE    CORPUSCLES, 


393 


quantitative  determination  of  the  iron.  The  amount  of  oxygen 
with  which  hemoglobin  will  combine  may  be  expressed  by  saying 
that  one  molecule  of  oxygen  will  be  fixed  for  each  atom  of  iron  in  the 
hemoglobin  molecule.  In  the  decomposition  of  hemoglobin  into 
globin  and  hematin,  which  has  been  spoken  of  above,  the  iron  is 
retained  in  the  hematin. 

Crystals. — Hemoglobin  may  be  obtained  readily  in  the  form  of 
crystals  (Fig.  168).  As  usually  prepared,  these  crystals  are  really 
oxyhemoglobin,  but  it  has 
been  shown  that  reduced 
hemoglobin  also  crystallizes, 
although  with  more  diffi- 
culty. Hemoglobin  from 
the  blood  of  different  ani- 
mals varies  to  a  marked 
degree  in  respect  to  the 
power  of  crystallization. 
From  the  blood  of  the  rat, 
dog,  cat,  guinea  pig,  and 
horse,  crystals  are  readily 
obtained,  while  hemoglobin 
from  the  blood  of  man  and 
of  most  of  the  vertebrates 
crystallizes  much  less  easily. 
Methods  for  preparing  and 
purifying  these  crystals  will 
be  found  in  works  on  phys- 
iological chemistry.  To  ob- 
tain specimens  quickly  for 
examination  under  the  mi- 
croscope, one  of  the  most 
certain  methods  is  to  take 
some  blood  from  one  of  the 
animals  whose  hemoglobin 
crystallizes  easily,  place  it 
in  a  test-tube,  add  to  it  a 

few  drops  of  ether,  shake  the  tube  thoroughly  until  the  blood  be- 
comes laky, — that  is,  until  the  hemoglobin  is  discharged  into  the 
plasma, — and  then  place  the  tube  on  ice  until  the  crystals  are 
deposited.  Small  portions  of  the  crystalline  sediment  may  then  be 
removed  to  a  glass  slide  for  examination.  According  to  Reichert, 
the  deposition  of  the  crystals  is  hastened  by  adding  ammonium 
oxalate  to  the  blood  in  quantities  sufficient  to  make  from  1  to 
5  per  cent,  of  the  mixture.  Hemoglobin  from  different  animals 
Varies  not  only  as  to  the  ease  with  which  it  crystallizes,  but  in  some 


Fig.  168. — Crystallized  hemoglobin  (after 
Frey) :  a,  b.  Crystals  from  venous  blood  of  man ; 
c,  from  the  blood  of  a  cat ;  d,  from  the  blood  of 
a  guinea  pig;  e,  from  the  blood  of  a  hamster; 
/,  from  the  blood  of  a  squirrel. 


394  BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

cases  also  as  to  the  form  that  the  crystals  take.  In  man  and  in  most 
of  the  mammalia  hemoglobin  is  deposited  in  the  form  of  rhombic 
prisms;  in  the  guinea  pig  it  crystallizes  in  tetrahedra  {d,  Fig.  168), 
and  in  the  squirrel  in  hexagonal  plates.  This  difference  in  crystal- 
line form  implies  some  difference  in  molecular  structure,  and  taken 
together  with  other  known  variations  in  property  shown  by  hemo- 
globin from  different  animals  lead  us  to  believe  that  the  huge  mole- 
cule has  a  labile  structure,  and  that  it  may  differ  somewhat  in  its 
molecular  composition  or  atomic  arrangement  without  losing  its 
physiological  property  of  an  oxygen-carrier.  In  this  connection 
it  is  interesting  to  state  that  the  hemoglobin  of  horses'  blood,  which 
crystallizes  ordinarily  in  large  rhombic  prisms,  may  be  made  to  give 
hexagonal  crystals  by  allowing  it  to  undergo  putrefaction,  and  that 
the  form  of  the  crystals  may  then  be  changed  from  hexagons  to 
rhombs  by  varying  the  temperature  of  the  solutions.*  The  crystals 
are  readily  soluble  in  water,  and  by  repeated  crystallization  the 
hemoglobin  may  be  obtained  perfectly  pure.  As  in  the  case  of 
other  soluble  proteid-like  bodies,  solutions  of  hemoglobin  are 
precipitated  by  alcohol,  by  mineral  acids,  by  salts  of  the  heavy 
metals,  by  boiling,  etc.  Notwithstanding  the  fact  that  hemoglobin 
crystallizes  so  readily,  it  is  not  easily  dialyzable,  behaving  in  this 
respect  like  proteids  and  other  colloidal  bodies.  The  compounds 
which  hemoglobin  forms  with  carbon  monoxid  (CO)  and  nitric  oxid 
(NO)  are  also  crystallizable,  the  crystals  being  isomorphous  with 
those  of  oxyhemoglobin. 

Absorption  Spectra. — Solutions  of  hemoglobin  and  its  deriv- 
ative compounds,  when  examined  with  a  spectroscope,  give 
distinctive  absorption  bands. 

Light,  when  made  to  pass  through  a  glass  prism,  is  broken  up  into  its 
constituent  rays,  giving  the  play  of  rainbow  colors  known  as  the  spectrum. 
A  spectroscope  is  an  apparatus  for  producing  and  observing  a  spectrum.  A 
simple  form,  which  illustrates  sufficiently  well  the  construction  of  the  appara- 
tus, is  shown  in  Fig.  169,  P  being  the  glass  prism  giving  the  spectrum.  Light 
falls  upon  this  prism  through  the  tube  (A)  to  the  left,  known  as  the  "colli- 
mator tube."  A  slit  at  the  end  of  this  tube  (»S)  admits  a  narrow  slice  of  light — 
lamplight  or  sunlight — which  then,  by  means  of  a  convex  lens  at  the  other 
end  of  the  tube,  is  made  to  fall  upon  the  prism  (P)  with  its  rays  parallel.  In 
passing  through  the  prism  the  rays  are  dispersed  by  unequal  refraction,  giving 
a  spectrum.  The  spectrum  thus  produced  is  examined  by  the  observer  with 
the  aid  of  the  telescope  (B) .  When  the  telescope  is  properly  focused  for  the 
rays  entering  it  from  the  prism  (P),  a  clear  picture  of  the  spectrum  is  seen. 
The  length  of  the  spectrum  will  depend  upon  the  nature  and  the  number  of 
the  prisms  through  which  the  light  is  made  to  pass.  For  ordinary  purposes  a 
short  spectrum  is  preferable  for  hemoglobin  bands,  and  a  spectroscope  with  one 
prism  is  generally  used.  If  the  source  of  light  is  a  lamp  flame  of  some  kind, 
the  spectrum  is  continuous,  the  colors  gradually  merging  one  into  another 
from  red  to  violet.  If  sunlight  is  used,  the  spectrum  will  be  crossed  by  a 
number  of  narroM'  dark  lines  known  as  the  "Fraunhofer  lines."  The  position 
of  these  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum  is  fixed,  and  the  more  distinct  ones  are 

*  Uhlik,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologic,"  104,  64,  1904. 


GENERAL   PROPERTIES:   THE    CORPUSCLES. 


395 


designated.by  letters  of  the  alphabet,  A,  B,C,  D,  E,  etc.,  as  shown  in  the  charts 
below.  If  while  using  solar  light  or  an  artificial  light  a  solution  of  any  sub- 
.  stance  which  gives  absorption  bands  is  so  placed  in  front  of  the  slit  that  the 
light  is  obliged  to  traverse  it,  the  spectrum  as  observed  through  the  telescope 
will  show  one  or  more  narrow  or  broad  black  bands  that  are  characteristic 
of  the  substance  used  and  constitute  its  absorption  spectrum.  The  positions 
of  tliese  bands  may  be  designated  by  describing  their  relations  to  the  Fraun- 
hofer  lines,  or  more  directly  by  stating  the  wave  lengths  of  the  portions  of 
the  spectrum  between  which  absorption  takes  place.  Some  spectroscopes  are 
provided  with  a  scale  of  wave  lengths  superposed  on  the  spectrum,  and  when 
properly  adjusted  this  scale  enables  one  to  read  off  directly  the  wave  lengths 
of  any  part  of  the  spectrum. 

When  very  dilute  solutions  of  oxyhemoglobin  are  examined  with 
the  spectroscope,  two  absorption  bands  appear,  both  occurring  in 


Fig.  169.— Spectroscope:  P,  The  glass  prism;  A,  the  collimator  tube,  showing  the  slit,  S, 
through  which  the  light  is  admitted;    B,   the  telescope  for  observing  the  spectrum. 


the  portion  of  the  spectrum  included  between  the  Fraunhofer  lines 
D  and  E.  The  band  nearer  the  red  end  of  the  spectrum  is  known 
as  the  "a-band";  it  is  narrower,  darker,  and  more  clearly  defined 
than  the  other,  the  ''/5-band"  (Fig.  170).  With' a  solution  con- 
taining 0.09  per  cent,  of  oxyhemoglobin,  and  examined  in  layers  one 
centimeter  thick,  the  a-band  extends  over  the  part  of  the  spectrum 
included  between  the  wave-lengths  X  583  ( Twf "DTo"  ^^  ^  millimeter) 
and  X  571,  and  the  /S'-band  between  ).  550  and  X  532  (Gamgee). 
The  width  and  distinctness  of  the  bands  vary  naturally  with  the 
concentration  of  the  solution  used  (see  Fig.  171),  or,  if  the  con- 
centration remains  the  same,  with  the  width  of  the  stratum  of  liquid 
through  which  the  light  passes.     With  a  certain  minimal  percentage 


396 


BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 


of  oxyhemoglobin  (less  than  0.01  per  cent.)  the  /S'-band  is  lost  and 
the  a-band  is  very  faint  in  layers  one  centimeter  thick.  With 
stronger  solutions  the  bands  become  darker  and  wider  and  finally 
fuse,  while  some  of  the  extreme  red  end  and  a  great  deal  of  the  violet 
end  of  the  spectrum  is  also  absorbed.  The  variations  in  the  absorp- 
tion spectrum,  with  differences  in  concentration,  are  clearly  shown 
in  the  accompanying  illustration  from  Rollett  *  (Fig.  171) ;  the  thick- 


D 


E  b 


seo 


6S0  6kO  630  620  6W  GOO  5^  580  570  5S0  550  bW  5^  J2fl 


5\a   500  ^0 

'I'i'll'"'!""!""'' 


Fig.  170. — Table  of  absorption  spectra  (^Ziemke  and  Muller):  1,  Absorption  spectrum 
of  oxyhemoglobin,  dilute  solution;  2,  absorption  spectrum  of  reduced  hemoglobin;  3,  ab- 
sorption spectrum  of  methemoglobin,  neutral  solution ;  4,  absorption  spectrum  of  met- 
hemoglobin,  alkaline  solution  ;  5,  absorption  spectrum  of  hematin,  acid  solution ;  6,  ab- 
sorption spectrum  of  hematin,  alkaline  solution. 


ness  of  the  layer  of  liquid  is  supposed  to  be  one  centimeter.  The 
numbers  on  the  right  indicate  the  percentage  strength  of  the  oxyhem- 
oglobin solutions.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  absorption  which 
takes  place  as  the  concentration  of  the  solution  increases  affects 
the  red-orange  end  of  the  spectrum  last  of  all. 

Solutions  of  reduced  hemoglobin  examined  with  the  spectroscope 
*  Hermann's  "Handbuch  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  iv,  1880. 


GENERAL   PROPERTIES:   THE    CORPUSCLES. 


397 


show  only,  one  absorption  band,  known  sometimes  as  the  "y  band." 
This  band  Ues  also  in  the  portion  of  the  spectrum  included  between 
the  lines  D  and  E;  its  relations  to  these  lines  and  the  bands  of 
oxyhemoglobin  are  shown  in  Fig.  170.  The  r-band  is  much  more 
diffuse  than  the  oxyhemoglobin  bands,  and  its  limits,  therefore, 
especially  in  weak  solutions,  are  not  well  defined;  in  solutions  of 
blood  diluted  100  times  with  water,  which  would  give  a  hemoglobin 
solution  of  about  0.14 
per  cent.,  the  absorp- 
tion band  lies  in  the 
part  of  the  spectrum 
included  between  the 
wave  lengths  X  572  and 
X  542.  The  width  and 
distinctness  of  this  band 
vary  also  with  the  con- 
centration of  the  solu- 
tion. This  variation  is 
sufficiently  well  shown 
in  the  accompanying 
illustration  (Fig.  172), 
which  is  a  companion 
figure  to  the  one  just 
given  for  oxyhemo- 
globin (Fig.  171).  It 
will  be  noticed  that  the 
last  light  to  be  absorbed 
in  this  case  is  partly  in 
the  red  end  and  partly 
in  the  blue,  thus  ex- 
plaining the  purplish 
-color  of  hemoglobin  so- 
lutions and  of  venous 
blood.  Oxyhemoglobin 
solutions  can  be  con- 
verted to  hemoglobin 
solutions,  with  a  corresponding  change  in  the  spectrum  bands,  by 
placing  the  former  in  a  vacuum  or,  more  convenientl}^,  by  adding 
reducing  solutions.  The  solutions  most  commonly  used  for  this 
purpose  are  ammonium  sulphid  and  Stokes's  reagent.*  If  a  solu- 
tion of  reduced  hemoglobin  is  shaken  with  air,  it  quickly  changes  to 

*  Stokes's  reagent  is  an  ammoniacal  solution  of  a  ferrous  salt.  It  is  made 
by  dissolving  2  parts  (by  weight)  of  ferrous  sulphate,  adding  3  parts  of  tar- 
taric acid,  and  then  ammonia  to  distinct  alkaline  reaction.  A  permanent 
jjrecipitate  should  not  be  obtained. 


aBC 


Fig.  171. — Diagram  to  show  the  variations  in  the 
absorption  spectrum  of  oxyhemoglobin  with  varying 
concentrations  of  the  solution. — (After  RoUett.)  The 
numbers  to  the  right  give  the  strength  of  the  oxy- 
hemoglobin solution  in  percentages;  the  letters  give 
the  positions  of  the  Fraunhofer  lines.  To  ascertain 
the  amount  of  absorption  for  any  given  concentration 
up  to  1  per  cent.,  draw  a  horizontal  line  across  the 
diagram  at  the  level  corresponding  to  the  concentra- 
tion. Where  this  line  passes  through  the  shaded  part 
of  the  diagram  absorption  takes  place,  and  the  width 
of  the  absorption  bands  is  seen  at  once.  The  diagram 
shows  clearly  that  the  amount  of  absorption  increases 
as  the  solutions  become  more  concentrated,  especially 
the  absorption  of  the  blue  end  of  the  spectrum.  It 
will  be  noticed  that  with  concentrations  between  0.6 
and  0.7  per  cent,  the  two  bands  between  D  and  E  fuse 
into  one. 


398 


BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 


oxyhemoglobin  and  gives  two  bands  instead  of  one  when  exam- 
ined through  the  spectroscope.  Any  given  solution  may  be  changed 
in  this  way  from  oxyhemoglobin  to  hemoglobin,  and  the  reverse,  a 
great  number  of  times,  thus  demonstrating  the  facility  with  which 
hemoglobin  takes  up  and  surrenders  oxygen. 

Solutions  of  carbon  monoxid  hemoglobin  also  give  a  spec- 
trum with  two  absorption  bands  closely  resembling  in  posi- 
tion and  appearance  those  of  oxyhemoglobin.  They  are  dis- 
tinguished from  the 
oxyhemoglobin  bands 
by  being  slightly 
nearer  the  blue  end 
of  the  spectrum,  as 
may  be  demonstrated 
by  observing  the  wave 
lengths  or,  more  con- 
veniently, by  super- 
posing the  two  spectra. 
Moreover,  solutions  of 
carbon  monoxid  hem- 
oglobin are  not  re- 
duced to  hemoglobin 
by  adding  Stokes's 
liquid,  two  bands  be- 
ing still  seen  after  such 
treatment.  A  solu- 
tion of  carbon  mon- 
oxid hemoglobin  suit- 
able for  spectroscopic 
examination  may  be 
prepared  easily  by 
passing  ordinary  coal- 
gas  through  a  dilute  oxyhemoglobin  solution  for  a  few  minutes 
and  then  filtering. 

Derivative  Compounds  of  Hemoglobin. — There  are  a  number 
of  pigmentary  bodies  which  are  formed  directly  from  hemoglobin 
by  decompositions  or  chemical  reactions  of  various  kinds.  Some 
of  these  derivative  substances  occur  normally  in  the  body.  The 
best  known  are  as  follows*: 

Methemoglobin. — When  blood  or  a  solution  of  oxyhemoglobin 
is  allowed  to  stand  for  a  long  time  exposed  to  the  air  it  undergoes 


aBC 


Fig.  172. — Diagram  to  show  the  variations  in  the  ab- 
sorption spectrum  of  reduced  hemoglobin  with  vary- 
ing concentrations  of  the  solution  (after  Rollett).  The 
numbers  to  the  right  give  the  strength  of  the  hemo- 
globin solution  in  percentages;  the  letters  give  the  posi- 
tions of  the  Fraunhofer  lines.  For  further  directions 
as  to  the  use  of  the  diagram,  see  the  description  of  Fig. 
171. 


*  For  more  detailed  information  concerning  the  chemistry  and  literature 
of  these  compounds  see  Hammarsten,  "Physiological  Chemistry,"  translated 
by  Mandel,  fourth  edition,  1904;  Cohnheim,  "  Chemie  der  Eiweisskorper," 
second  edition,  1904. 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES!    THE    CORPUSCLES.  399 

a  change  in  color,  taking  on  a  brownish  tint.  This  change  is  due  to 
the  formation  of  methemoglobin,  and  it  is  said  that  to  some  extent 
the  transition  occurs  very  soon  after  the  blood  is  exposed  to  the  air, 
and  that,  therefore,  determinations  of  the  quantity  of  hemoglobin 
by  the  ordinary  colorimetric  methods  should  be  made  promptly  to 
avoid  a  deterioration  in  color  value.  Methemoglobin  may  be 
obtained  rapidly  by  the  action  of  various  reagents  on  the  blood, 
some  of  them  oxidizing  substances,  such  as  permanganate  of  potash 
or  ferricyanid  of  potash,  some  of  them  reducing  substances.  In- 
deed, it  is  known  that  the  change  may  occur  within  the  blood-vessels 
by  the  action  of  such  bodies  as  the  nitrites,  antifebrin,  acetanilid, 
etc.  According  to  most  observers,  methemoglobin  contains  the 
same  amount  of  oxygen  as  hemoglobin ;  it  is  combined  differently, 
however,  forming  a  more  stable  compound,  which  can  not  be  dis- 
sociated by  the  action  of  a  vacuum.  On  this  account,  therefore, 
methemoglobin  is  not  capable  of  acting  as  a  respiratory  pigment, 
and  to  the  extent  that  it  is  formed  in  the  blood  this  tissue  suffers  a 
loss  of  its  functional  value  as  a  carrier  of  oxygen.  By  the  stronger 
action  of  reducing  solutions — such  as  ammonium  sulphid — the 
oxygen  may  be  removed  from  the  methemoglobin  and  reduced 
hemoglobin  be  obtained.  Methemoglobin  crystallizes  in  needles, 
and  its  solutions  give  an  absorption  spectrum  which  varies  ac- 
cording as  the  solution  is  neutral. or  has  an  alkaline  reaction.  In 
neutral  solutions  the  characteristic  band  is  one  in  the  orange,  as 
indicated  in  Fig.  170.  In  alkaline  solution  the  absorption  spectrum 
has  three  bands,  two  of  which  are  nearly  identical  with  those  of 
oxyhemoglobin . 

Hematin  (Cg^Hg^N^FeOg)  is  obtained  when  hemoglobin  is  de- 
composed by  the  action  of  acids  or  alkalies  in  the  presence  or  oxygen. 
It  may  occur  in  the  feces  if  the  diet  contains  hemoglobin  or  hematin, 
or  in  case  of  hemorrhages  in  the  stomach  or  small  intestine,  since 
both  the  pancreatic  and  the  gastric  secretion  break  up  hemoglobin, 
with  the  formation  of  hematin.  It  is  an  amorphous  substance,  of  a 
dark-brown  color,  easily  soluble  in  alkalies  or  in  acid  alcoholic  solu- 
tions. These  solutions  give  a  characteristic  absorption  spectrum 
which  is  represented  in  Fig.  170. 

Hemin  (Cj^HggO^N^FeCl)  is  regarded  as  the  hydrochloric  acid 
ester  of  hematin  and  is  obtained  by  the  action  of  HCl  upon  blood 
previously  treated  with  alcohol.  The  compound  is  obtained  in  the 
form  of  crystals,  which  under  the  microscope  appear  usually  as 
small,  rhombic  plates  of  a  dark-brown  color.  These  crystals  may 
be  obtained  from  small  quantities  of  blood  stains,  etc.,  no  matter 
how  old,  and  they  have  been  relied  upon,  therefore,  as  a  sure  and 
easy  test  for  the  existence  of  blood, — that  is,  hemoglobin.  The 
test  is  one  that  has  been  much  used  in  medicolegal  cases,  and  may 


400  BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

be  carried  out  as  follows:  A  bit  of  dried  blood  is  powdered  with  a 
few  crystals  of  NaCl.  Some  of  the  powder  is  placed  upon  a  glass 
slide  and  covered  with  a  cover-slip.  By  means  of  a  pipette  a  drop 
or  two  of  glacial  acetic  acid  is  run  under  the  slip,  and  then  by  draw- 
ing the  slide  repeatedly  through  a  flame  the  acid  is  evaporated  to 
dryness,  taking  care  not  to  heat  the  acid  so  high  as  to  cause  it  to 
boil.  After  the  evaporation  of  the  acid  water  is  nm  under  the  slip 
and  the  specimen  is  ready  for  examination  with  the  microscope. 

H emochromogen  (C ^Ji ^qN ^FeO^  ?)  is  obtained  when  hemoglobin 
is  decomposed  by  acids  or  alkalies  in  the  absence  of  free  oxygen.  By 
oxidation  it  is  converted  to  hematin.  Hemochromogen  is  crystal- 
line, and  gives  a  characteristic  absorption  spectrum. 

Hematoporphyrin  (Cg^HggN^Og)  differs  from  the  preceding  deriv- 
atives of  hemoglobin  in  that  it  contains  no  iron.  It  may  be  ob- 
tained from  hematin  by  the  action  of  strong  acids,  and  is  of  much 
physiological  interest  because  of  its  relationship  to  the  bile  pigments, 
which,  like  it,  are  iron-free  derivatives  of  the  hemoglobin.  In  old 
blood-clots  or  extravasations  it  has  long  been  known  that  a  colored 
crystalline  product  may  be  formed.  This  product  was  designated 
as  hematoidin  by  Virchow  and  later  was  stated,  on  the  one  hand,  to 
be  identical  with  the  bile  pigment,  bilirubin,  and,  on  the  other  hand, 
to  be  isomeric  with  hematoporphyrin.  Later  observers  have 
prepared  from  hematoporphyrin  by  careful  reduction  a  substance 
designated  as  mesoporphyrin.  It  contains  one  less  oxygen  atom 
than  the  hematoporphyrin,  and  is  claimed  to  be  identical  with 
hematoidin.  Another  fact  of  great  general  interest  is  that  from 
plant  chlorophyl  there  may  be  prepared  a  compound,  phylloporphy- 
rin,  very  similar  to  the  mesoporphyrin.  It  would  appear  from  this 
relationship  that  the  red  coloring  matter  of  the  blood  and  the 
green  coloring  matter  of  plants  are  compounds  that  have  some 
similarity  in  chemical  structure. 

Histohematins. — Tliis  name  is  a  general  term  that  has  been  given 
to  the  coloring  matter  found  in  the  tissues,  so  far  as  it  has  the 
property  of  taking  up  oxygen.  The  red  coloring  matter  in  some 
muscles  is  an  example  of  such  a  compound  and  has  been  designated 
specifically  as  myohematin.  According  to  most  observers,  myo- 
hematin  is  identical  with  hemoglobin, — that  is,  the  muscle  substance 
contains  some  hemoglobin, — and  we  may  suppose  that  its  presence 
in  the  tissue  furnishes  a  further  means  for  the  transportation  of 
oxygen  to  the  muscle  protoplasm. 

Bile  Pigments  and  Urinary  Pigments. — Both  of  these  pigments  are 
referred  to  in  the  description  of  the  composition  of  bile  and  urine. 
In  this  connection  the  fact  may  be  emphasized  that  each  of  them  is 
supposed  to  be  derived  from  hemoglobin,  and  each  constitutes,  so 
to  speak,  a  form  of  excretion  of  hemoglobin. 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:    THE    CORPUSCLES.  401 

Origin  and  Fate  of  the  Red  Corpuscles. — The  mammalian  red 
corpuscle  is  a  cell  that  has  lost  its  micleus.  It  is  not  probable,  there- 
fore, that  any  given  corpuscle  lives  for  a  great  while  in  the  circulation. 
This  is  made  more  certain  by  the  fact  that  hemoglobin  is  the  mother 
substance  from  which  the  bile  pigments  are  made,  and,  as  these 
pigments  are  being  excreted  continually,  it  is  fair  to  suppose  that 
red  corpuscles  are  as  steadily  undergoing  disintegration  in  the  blood- 
stream. Just  how  long  the  average  life  of  the  corpuscles  may  be 
has  not  been  determined,  nor  is  it  certain  where  and  how  they  go 
to  pieces.  It  has  been  suggested  that  their  destruction  takes  place 
in  the  spleen,  but  the  observations  advanced  in  support  of  this 
hypothesis  are  not  very  numerous  or  conclusive.  Among  the  rea- 
sons given  for  assuming  that  the  spleen  is  especially  concerned  in 
the  destruction  of  red  corpuscles,  the  most  weighty  is  the  histo- 
logical fact  that  one  can  sometimes  find  in  teased  preparations  of 
spleen-tissue  certain  large  cells  which  contain  red  corpuscles  in  their 
cell-substance  in  various  stages  of  disintegration.  It  has  been 
supposed  that  the  large  cells  actualty  ingest  the  red  corpuscles, 
selecting  those,  presumably,  that  are  in  a  state  of  phvsiological  de- 
cline. Against  this  idea  a  number  of  objections  may  be  raised. 
Large  leucocytes  with  red  corpuscles  in  their  interior  are  not  found 
so  frequently  nor  so  constantly  in  the  spleen  as  we  should  expect 
would  be  the  case  if  the  act  of  ingestion  were  constantly  going  on. 
There  is  some  reason  for  believing,  indeed,  that  the  whole  act  of 
ingestion  may  be  a  postmortem  phenomenon;  that  is,  after  the 
cessation  of  the  blood-stream  the  ameboid  movements  of  the  large 
leucocytes  continue,  while  the  red  corpuscles  lie  at  rest, — conditions 
that  are  favorable  to  the  act  of  ingestion.  It  may  be  added  also 
that  the  blood  of  the  splenic  vein  contains  no  hemoglobin  in  solu- 
tion, indicating  that  no  considerable  dissolution  of  red  corpuscles  is 
taking  place  in  the  spleen.  Moreover,  complete  extirpation  of  the 
spleen  does  not  seem  to  lessen  materially  the  normal  destruction 
of  red  corpuscles,  if  we  may  measure  the  extent  of  that  normal 
destruction  by  the  quantity  of  bile  pigment  formed  in  the  liver, 
remembering  that  hemoglobin  is  the  mother-substance  from  which 
the  bile  pigments  are  derived.  It  is  more  probable  that  there  is  no 
special  organ  or  tissue  charged  with  the  function  of  destro3'ing  red 
corpuscles,  but  that  they  undergo  disintegration  and  dissolution 
while  in  the  blood-stream  and  in  any  part  of  the  circulation,  the 
liberated  hemoglobin  being  carried  to  the  liver  and  excreted  in  part 
as  bile  pigment.  The  continual  destruction  of  red  corpuscles 
implies,  of  course;  a  continual  formation  of  new  ones.  It  has  been 
shown  satisfactorily  that  in  the  adult  the  organ  for  the  reproduction 
of  red  corpuscles  is  the  red  marrow  of  bones.  In  this  tissue  hema- 
topoiesis,  as  the  process  of  formation  of  red  corpuscles  is  termed,  goes 
26 


402  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

on  continually,  the  process  being  much  increased  after  hemorrhages 
and  in  certain  pathological  conditions.  The  details  of  the  histo- 
logical changes  will  be  found  in  the  text-books  of  histology.  It  is 
sufficient  here  to  state  simply  that  a  group  of  nucleated,  colorless 
cells,  erythroblasts,  is  found  in  the  red  marrow.  These  cells 
multiply  by  karyokinesis,  and  the  daughter-cells  eventually  produce 
hemoglobin  in  their  cytoplasm,  thus  forming  nucleated  red  cor- 
puscles or  normoblasts.  The  nuclei  are  subsequently  lost,  either  by 
disintegration  or  by  extrusion,  and  the  newly  formed  non-nucleated 
red  corpuscles  (erythrocytes)  are  forced  into  the  blood-stream, 
owing  to  a  gradual  change  in  their  position  during  development 
caused  by  the  growing  hematopoietic  tissue.  When  the  process  is 
greatly  accelerated,  as  after  severe  hemorrhages  or  in  certain 
pathological  conditions,  red  corpuscles  still  retaining  their  nuclei 
(normoblasts)  may  be  found  in  the  circulating  blood,  having  been 
forced  out  prematurely.  Such  corpuscles  may  subsequently  lose 
their  nuclei  while  in  the  blood-stream.  In  the  embryo,  hema- 
topoietic tissue  is  found  in  parts  of  the  body  other  than  the  marrow, 
notably  in  the  liver  and  spleen,  which  at  that  time  serve  as  organs 
for  the  production  of  new  red  corpuscles.  In  the  blood  of  the  young 
embryo  nucleated  red  corpuscles  are  at  first  abundant,  but  they 
become  less  numerous  as  the  fetus  grows  older.* 

Variations  in  the  Number  of  Red  Corpuscles. — The  average 
number  of  red  corpuscles  for  the  adult  male,  as  has  been  stated 
already,  is  usually  given  as  5,000,000  per  c.mm.  The  number 
is  found  to  vary  greatly,  however.  Outside  pathological  con- 
ditions, in  which  the  diminution  in  number  may  be  extreme,  dif- 
ferences have  been  observed  in  human  beings  under  such  conditions 
as  the  following :  The  number  is  less  in  females  (4,500,000) ;  it  varies 
in  individuals  with  the  constitution,  nutrition,  and  manner  of  life; 
it  varies  with  age,  being  greatest  in  the  fetus  and  in  the  new-born 
child;  it  varies  with  the  time  of  the  day,  showing  a  distinct  diminu- 
tion after  meals;  in  the  female  it  varies  somewhat  in  menstruation 
and  in  pregnancy,  being  slightly  increased  in  the  former  and  di- 
minished in  the  latter  condition. 

Variation  with  Altitude. — -Perhaps  the  most  interesting  of  the 
conditions  that  may  influence  the  number  of  the  blood  corpuscles 
is  a  change  in  altitude.  Attention  was  first  directed  to  this  point 
by  Bert,t  who  believed  that  the  diminished  supply  of  oxygen 
in  high  altitudes  may  be  compensated  by  an  increased  amount  of 
hemoglobin,  and  subsequently  ViaultJ  demonstrated  that  living  for 

*  Howell:  "Life  History  of  the  Blood  Corpuscles,"  etc.,  "Journal  of 
Morphology,"  1890,  vol.  iv. 

t  Bert,  "La  pression  barometrique,"  1878,  p.  1108. 

j  Viault,  "Comptes  rendus  de  I'academie  des  sciences,"  1890  and  1891. 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:    THE    CORPUSCLES.  403 

a  short  time  at  very  high  altitudes  (4000  meters)  causes  a  marked  in- 
crease in  the  number  of  red  corpuscles, — an  increase,  for  instance, 
from  5,000,000  per  c.mm.  to  7,000,000  or  even  8,000,000.  This  fact 
has  since  been  investigated  with  great  care  by  a  large  number  of 
observers  and  under  a  great  variety  of  conditions.  The  observation 
has  been  abundantly  confirmed,  and  indeed  it  would  seem  that  the 
reaction  takes  place  very  quickly.  Within  twenty-four  hours, 
according  to  some  observers,  and  in  less  time,  according  to  others 
who  have  experimented  during  balloon  ascensions  (Gaule,  Hallion, 
and  Tissot),  the  increase  in  the  number  of  corpuscles  may  be  de- 
tected, although  the  maximum  increase  comes  on  more  gradually. 
According  to  Kemp,*  the  number  of  blood  plates  is  also  greatly 
increased  by  high  altitudes,  while  the  leucocytes  are  not  affected. 
There  has,  however,  been  much  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether 
this  increase  in  number  of  the  red  corpuscles  is  relative  or  absolute, 
— that  is,  whether  the  total  number  of  red  corpuscles  in  the  blood, 
and  therefore  probably  the  total  amount  of  hemoglobin,  is  increased, 
or  whether  it  is  simply  an  apparent  increase  due,  for  instance,  to  a 
diminution  in  the  water  of  the  blood  and  a  consequent  concentration 
as  regards  the  number  of  corpuscles.  The  results  published  upon 
these  questions  are  so  conflicting  that  it  is  difficult  to  make  any 
positive  statements  at  present.  One  may,  however,  believe  that 
the  increased  number  or  concentration  of  red  corpuscles  is  an  adap- 
tation by  means  of  which  the  oxygen-carrying  capacity  of  the  blood 
is  raised  to  compensate  for  the  diminished  amount  of  oxygen  in  the 
air.  According  to  one  set  of  observers,  this  adaptation  is  brought 
about  by  an  actual — that  is,  an  absolute — increase  in  the  total 
number  of  red  corpuscles,  and  therefore  in  the  total  amount  of 
hemoglobin.  According  to  this  explanation,  one  must  assume  that 
the  diminished  amount  of  oxygen  in  the  air  at  high  altitudes  or 
some  other  condition  peculiar  to  these  altitudes  acts  as  a  stimulus 
to  the  blood-forming  tissues  (red  marrow)  and  augments  the  output 
of  corpuscles.  According  to  another  set  of  observers,  the  adap- 
tation is  brought  about  by  a  concentration  of  the  blood.  The  blood- 
plasma  is  reduced  in  quantity,  perhaps  by  transudation  of  water 
into  the  tissues,  and  therefore  the  number  of  red  corpuscles  and  the 
amount  of  hemoglobin  become  greater  for  each  cubic  millimeter. 
If  we  assume  that  this  smaller  bulk  of  blood,  more  concentrated 
in  corpuscles  and  hemoglobin,  circulates  more  rapidly,  then  also 
the  oxygen-carrying  capacit}^  of  the  blood  is  increased.  Recent 
evidence  seem  to  favor  this  latter  explanation,  particularly  as 
regards  the  nearly  immediate  effects  of  a  change  in  altitude. 
Abderhalden,  for  instance,  has  shown  that,  if  animals  of  the 
same  species  and  same  litter  are  bled  to  death  and  the  total 
*  Kemp,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  10,  34,  1904. 


404  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

quantity  of  hemoglobin  is  estimated,  the  average  figures  obtained 
for  the  animals  at  low  levels  are  the  same  as  for  those  at  the 
high  altitudes.* 

Physiology  of  the  Blood  Leucocytes. — The  function  of  the 
blood  leucocytes  has  been  the  subject  of  numerous  investigations, 
particularly  in  connection  with  the  pathology  of  blood  diseases. 
Although  many  hypotheses  have  been  made  as  the  result  of  this 
work,  it  can  not  be  said  that  we  possess  any  positive  information  as 
to  the  normal  function  of  these  cells  in  the  body.  It  must  be  borne 
in  mind,  in  the  first  place,  that  the  blood  leucocytes  are  not  all  the 
same  histologically,  and  it  may  be  that  their  functions  are  as  diverse 
as  their  morphology.  Various  classifications  have  been  made, 
based  upon  one  or  another  difference  in  microscopical  structure  and 
reaction,  but  at  present  the  system  used  by  most  authors  is  that 
adopted  by  Ehrlich.f  According  to  this  nomenclature,  the  white 
corpuscles  fall  into  two  main  groups, — the  lymphocytes  and  the 
leucocytes, — and  each  of  these  into  two  or  more  subgroups.     Thus: 

I.  Lymphocytes.  No  granules  in  the  cell  substance,  and,  though  capable  of 
ameboid  changes  of  form,  this  property  is  not  characteristic  and  prob- 
ably not  sufficient  to  cause  locomotion. 

(a)  Small  lymphocytes  are  about  the  size  of  the  red  corpuscles;  the  nu- 
cleus is  large,  symmetrically  placed,  stains  homogeneously,  and  the 
cytoplasm  is  reduced  to  a  very  small  amount.  They  form  from  20 
to  25  per  cent,  of  all  the  white  corpuscles. 

(&)  Large  lymphocytes.  Two  to  three  times  as  large  as  the  preceding. 
Nucleus  somewhat  eccentric;  the  cytoplasm  is  relatively  more 
abundant  than  in  a,  but  non-granular.  These  forms  exist  only  in 
small  numbers,  forming  1  per  cent,  or  less  of  the  white  corpuscles. 
II,  Leucocytes.  Granules  of  different  sorts  found  in  the  cytoplasm.  Cells, 
characteristically  ameboid. 

(a)  Transition /orws  (uninuclear  leucocytes).  Single  large  nucleus,  more 
or  less  lobulated;  cytoplasm  abundant  and  faintly  granulated.  The 
granules  stain  with  neutral  dyes  and  are  therefore  designated  as 
neutrophile  granules.  The  name,  transition  form,  implies  that  these 
leucocytes  represent  an  intermediate  stage  between  the  large  lympho- 
cytes and  the  following  variety.  This  form  exists  in  small  numbers, 
— 2  to  10  per  cent,  of  the  total  number  of  white  corpuscles. 

(6)  Polynuclear  or  polymorphonuclear  leucocytes.  The  nucleus  is  seg- 
mented into  lobes  connected  by  narrow  strands.  The  cytoplasm 
is  especially  ameboid  and  is  granular.  The  granules  in  most  cases 
are  neutrophilic  and  small  in  size.  The  typical  cells  of  this  kind 
form  the  bulk  of  the  white  corpuscles  of  the  blood, — 60  to  75  per 
cent.  Eosinophilic  leucocytes  form  a  subgroup  of  this  variety.  They 
have  a  similar  segmented  nucleus,  but  the  cytoplasm  contains  nu- 
merous coarse  granules  that  stain  in  acid  dyes,  such  as  eosin,  whence 
the  naime. 

(c)  Mast  cells.  These  peculiar  cells  exist  in  very  small  numbers  under 
normal  conditions, — less  than    1  per  cent,  of   the   total  number  of 

*  For  the  extensive  literature  see  Van  Voornveld,  "Das  Blut  im  Hoch- 
gebirge,"  "Pfliiger's  Archiv,"  92,  1,  1902;  also  Oliver,  "A  Contribution  to  the 
Study  of  Blood  and  Blood  Pressure,"  London,  1901. 

t  Ehrlich,  "Die  Anaemie,"  1898;  see  also  Seemann,  "Ergebnisse  der 
Physiologic,"  3,  part  i,  1904. 


GENERAL  PROPERTIES:  THE  CORPUSCLES.         405 

white  corpuscles.  They  have  a  polymorphic  nucleus  Uke  the  pre- 
ceding group,  but  differ  in  the  fact  that  the  granules  in  the  cyto- 
plasm are  strongly  basophilic, — that  is,  will  stain  only  with  basic 
dyes,  such  as  thionin. 

According  to  most  of  the  authors  who  have  studied  the  ap- 
pearance and  variation  in  number  of  these  cells  under  pathological 
conditions,  the  small  lymphocytes  are  cells  that  have  an  origin  and 
function  different  from  those  of  the  granular  leucocytes.  While 
the  latter  are  supposed  to  originate  from  cells  (leucoblasts,  my- 
elocytes) in  the  bone  marrow,  the  lymphocytes  are  produced  in  the 
nodules  of  the  lymph  glands  and  lymphoid  tissue,  and  enter  the 
blood  through  the  lymph  circulation.  Another  view  maintained 
by  some  authors  is  that  the  various  white  corpuscles  in  the  blood 
represent  different  stages  of  development.  According  to  this  view, 
the  small  lymphocytes  as  received  from  the  lymph  circulation  are 
the  young  or  immature  form,  and  they  develop,  while  in  the  circu- 
lation, through  the  stages  represented  by  the  large  lymphocytes 
and  the  mononuclear  leucocytes  to  the  mature  form,  the  poly- 
morphonuclear leucocytes. 

Variations  in  Number. — Under  normal  conditions  the  total 
number  of  leucocytes  may  show  considerable  variation;  the  aver- 
age number  in  health  varies  usually  between  5000  and  7000 
per  cubic  millimeter.  A  distinct  increase  in  number  is  designated 
as  a  condition  of  leucocytosis,  a  marked  diminution  as  a  condition  of 
leucopenia.  Leucocytosis  occurs  under  various  normal  conditions, 
such  as  digestion,  exercise  or  cold  baths,  pregnancy,  etc.  The 
variations,  relative  or  absolute,  under  pathological  conditions,  have 
been  studied  with  exhaustive  care  as  an  aid  to  diagnosis  and  classi- 
fication. 

Functions  of  the  Leucocytes. — Perhaps  the  most  striking 
property  of  the  leucocytes  as  a  class  is  their  power  of  making 
ameboid  movements, — a  characteristic  which  has  gained  for  them 
the  sobriquet  of  "wandering"  cells.  By  virtue  of  this  property 
some  of  them  are  able  to  migrate  through  the  walls  of  blood  capil- 
laries into  the  surrounding  tissues.  This  process  of  migration  takes 
place  normally,  but  is  vastly  accelerated  under  pathological  con- 
ditions. As  to  the  function  or  functions  fulfilled  by  the  leucocytes, 
numerous  suggestions  have  been  made,  some  of  which  may  be 
stated  in  brief  form  as  follows:  (1)  They  protect  the  body  from 
pathogenic  bacteria.  In  explanation  of  this  action  it  has  been 
suggested  that  they  may  either  ingest  the  bacteria,  and  thus  destroy 
them  directly,  or  they  may  form  certain  substances,  defensive 
proteids,  that  destroy  the  bacteria.  Leucocytes  that  act  by  ingest- 
ing the  bacteria  are  spoken  of  as  "phagocytes"  {(fdyetv,  to  eat; 
;fi'ro?,  cell).     This  theory  of  their  function  is  usually  designated  as 


406  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

the  "phagocytosis  theory  of  Metchnikoff";  it  is  founded  upon  the 
fact  that  the  ameboid  leucocytes  are  known  to  ingest  foreign  par- 
ticles with  which  they  come  in  contact.  The  theory  of  the  protec- 
tive action  of  leucocytes  has  been  used  largely  in  pathology  to 
explain  immunity  from  infectious  diseases,  and  for  details  of  experi- 
ments in  support  of  it  reference  must  be  made  to  text-books  of 
pathology.  (2)  They  aid  in  the  absorption  of  fats  from  the  intestine. 
(3)  They  aid  in  the  absorption  of  peptones  from  the  intestine.  It 
may  be  noticed  here  that  these  theories  apply  to  the  leucocytes  found 
so  abundantly  in  the  lymphoid  tissue  of  the  alimentary  canal,  rather 
than  to  those  contained  in  the  blood  itself.  (4)  They  take  part  in 
the  process  of  blood  coagulation.  A  complete  statement  with 
reference  to  this  function  must  be  reserved  until  the  phenomenon  of 
coagulation  is  described.  (5)  They  help  to  maintain  the  normal 
composition  of  the  blood-plasma  in  proteids.  It  may  be  said  for 
this  view  that  there  is  considerable  evidence  to  show  that  the 
leucocytes  normally  undergo  disintegration  and  dissolution  in  the 
circulating  blood,  to  some  extent  at  least.  The  blood  proteids  are 
peculiar,  and  they  are  not  formed  directly  from  the  digested  food. 
It  is  possible  that  the  leucocytes,  which  are  the  only  typical  cells  in 
the  blood,  aid  in  keeping  up  the  normal  supply  of  proteids.  From 
this  standpoint  they  might  be  regarded  in  fact  as  unicellular  glands, 
the  products  of  their  metabolism  serving  to  maintain  the  normal 
composition  of  the  blood-plasma.  The  formation  of  granules  within 
the  substance  of  the  eosinophiles  offers  a  suggestive  analogy  to  the 
accumulation  of  zymogen  granules  in  glandular  cells. 

Physiology  of  the  Blood  Plates. — The  blood  plates  are  small, 
circular  or  elliptical  bodies,  nearly  homogeneous  in  structure  and 
variable  in  size  (0.5  to  5.5  /j),  but  they  are  always  smaller  than  the 
red  corpuscles.  Less  is  known  of  their  origin,  fate,  and  functions 
than  in  the  case  of  the  leucocytes.  When  removed  from  the  circu- 
lating blood  they  are  known  to  disintegrate  very  rapidly.  This 
peculiarity,  in  fact,  prevented  them  from  being  discovered  for  a  long 
time  after  the  blood  had  been  studied  microscopically.  It  has  been 
shown  that  they  are  formed  elements,  and  not  simply  precipitates 
from  the  plasma,  as  was  suggested  at  one  time.  The  theory  of 
Hayem,  their  real  discoverer,  that  they  develop  into  red  corpuscles 
may  also  be  considered  as  erroneous.  There  is  considerable  evi- 
dence to  show  that  in  shed  blood  they  take  part  in  the  process  of 
coagulation.     The  nature  of  this  evidence  will  be  described  later. 

On  account  of  their  small  size  and  somewhat  indefinite  form  the 

structure  of  the  blood  plates  is  not  satisfactorily  known.     Deetjen* 

has  demonstrated  that  they  are  capable  of  ameboid  movements. 

When  removed  from  the  blood  vessels  to  a  glass  slide  they  usually 

*  "Virchow's  Archiv  f.  path.  Anat.  u.  Physiol.,"  164,  239,  1901. 


GENERAL    PROPERTIES:    THE    CORPUSCLES.  407 

agglutinate  into  larger  or  smaller  masses,  swell,  and  disintegrate, 
but  if  received  upon  a  surface  of  agar-agar  which  has  been  made  up 
with  physiological  saline,  together  with  some  sodium  metaphos- 
phate  (K2HPOJ,  they  flatten  out,  show  a  central  granular  portion 
and  a  peripheral  clear  layer,  and  may  make  quite  active  ame- 
boid movements.  Deetjen  claims  also  that  they  possess  a  distinct 
nucleus.  This  latter  statement  is  perhaps  doubtful,  as  other  ob- 
servers* report  that  the  material  which  stains  like  a  nucleus  is 
present  as  separate  granules  in  the  interior  of  the  plate.  These 
granules,  though  doubtless  of  nuclear  material,  do  not  have  the 
morphological  appearance  of  a  cell  nucleus.  It  remains,  therefore, 
uncertain  whether  the  blood  plates  are  to  be  considered  as  inde- 
pendent cells  or  as  fragments  of  disintegrated  cells.  On  account 
of  their  tendency  to  agglutinate  and  dissolve  when  the  blood  is  shed 
it  is  difficult  to  obtain  reliable  data  as  to  their  numbers  under 
normal  and  pathological  conditions.  They  are  more  numerous 
than  the  leucocytes,  and,  according  to  Kemp,  an  average  valuation 
would  be  about  ^w  the  number  of  the  red  corpuscles.  Outside  the 
part  that  they  take  in  the  formation  of  thrombi  and  in  the  initia- 
tion of  coagulation,  nothing  is  known  of  their  function  under 
normal  conditions. 

*  Kemp,  '•'American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  6,  11,  1902. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

CHEMICAL  COMPOSITION  OF  THE  BLOOD-PLASMA;    CO- 
AGULATION; QUANTITY  OF  BLOOD;  REGENERA- 
TION AFTER  HEMORRHAGE. 


Composition  of  the  Plasma  and  Corpuscles. — Blood  (plasma 
and  corpuscles)  contains  a  great  variety  of  substances,  as  might  be 
inferred  from  its  double  relations  to  the  tissues  as  a  source  of 
nutrition  and  as  a  means  of  removing  the  waste  products  of  their 
functional  activity.  The  constituents  that  may  be  present  in 
normal  blood-plasma  are  in  part  definitely  known  and  in  part 
entirely  unknown  from  a  chemical  standpoint.  Some  idea  of  the 
complexity  of  the  composition  may  be  obtained  from  the  following 
table: 

COMPOSITION    OF    THE     BLOOD-PLASMA. 

Water,  Oxygen,  Carbon  Dioxid,  Nitrogen. 


Proteids 


Extractives, — that  is,  substances  other 
than  proteids  that  may  be  ex- 
tracted from  the  dried  residue  by 
water,  alcohol,  or  ether. 


Salts 


f  Fibrinogen. 

J   Paraglobuhn  j  g"gl°b"J"i-  ,. 
i  °  I  Pseudoglobuun. 

I   Serum-albumin. 

[  Nucleo-albumin. 

f  Fats. 

Sugar. 

Urea. 

Jecorin. 

Glucuronic  acid. 

Lecithin. 

Cholesterin 
^  Lactic  acid. 


Clilorids 
Carbonates 
Sulpliates 
Phosphates 


1 
I 
)r  of 


'  Sodium. 
Potassium. 
Calcium. 
Magnesium. 
Iron. 


f  Internal  secretions. 
I   -p,  /  Lipase. 

Enzymes  and  unknowns -j        zyme    -^  Glycolase,  etc 

I   Immune  bodies  (Amboceptors). 
I.  Complements. 

A  number  of  detailed  chemical  anal3^ses  of  the  blood  of  different 
animals,  so  far  as  its  constituents  can  be  determined  by  analytical 
methods,  have  been  reported  at  different  times.     The  following 

408 


CHEMICAL   COMPOSITION    OF   BLOOD-PLASMA.  409 

table,  taken  from  Abderhalden,*  and  showing  the  composition  of 
dogs'  blood,  may  serve  as  an  example: 

1000  Parts,  by  1000  Parts,  by  1000  Parts^  by 

Weight,  of  Blood        Weight,  of  Se-      Weight,  of  Corpus- 
Contain  RUM  Contain  cles  Contain 

Water    810.05  923.98  644.26 

Solids 189.95  76.02  355.75 

Hemoglobin 133.4                           327.52 

Proteid 39.68  60.14  9.918 

Sugar 1.09  1.82 

Cholesterin 1.298  0.709  2.155 

Lecithin    2.052  1.699  2.568 

Fat 0.631  1.051 

Fatty  acids 0.759  1.221  0.088 

Phosphoric  acid: 

as  nuclein 0.054  0.016  0.110 

NajO   3.675  4.263  2.821 

KjO  0.251  0.226  0.289 

FejOg 0.641                       1.573 

CaO 0.062  0.113 

MgO 0.052  0.040  0.071 

CI 2.935  4.023  1.352 

P2O5 0.809  0.242  1.635 

Inorganic : 

PA 0.576  0.080  1.298 

The  same  constituents  in  much  the  same  proportions  are  found 
in  the  blood  of  all  the  mammalia  examined.  The  amount  of  proteid 
in  the  serum  is  greater  in  some  cases  than  in  others, — in  the  dog, 
for  instance,  according  to  Abderhalden's  analyses,  the  proteid 
amounts  to  only  6  per  cent.,  while  in  the  horse  it  may  be  7  or  8  per 
cent.  So  also  there  are  small  variations  in  the  amount  of  choles- 
terin, sugar,  and  other  constituents,  but,  on  the  whole,  the  composi- 
tion of  the  liquid  part  of  the  blood,  blood-serum  or  blood-plasma, 
is  remarkably  uniform  so  far  as  chemical  analyses  go.  We  know, 
however,  that  the  physiological  properties  of  mammalian  sera  may 
be  very  different  indeed;  that  the  serum  of  a  dog,  for  instance,  will 
kill  a  rabbit  when  injected  into  its  vessel.  Such  physiological  dif- 
ferences as  this,  however,  depend  upon  constituents  which  can  not 
be  defined  or  determined  by  chemical  means.  The  chemical  com- 
position of  the  blood-serum  differs  from  that  of  the  red  corpuscles  in 
a  number  of  respects  in  addition  to  the  presence  of  hemoglobin  in 
the  latter.  The  corpuscles  contain  no  sugar  nor  fat,  a  larger  amount 
of  cholesterin,  lecithin,  phosphoric  acid,  and  potassium,  and  less 
sodium  and  chlorin.  The  red  corpuscles  of  different  mammalia 
show  a  remarkable  variation  in  the  amount  of  potassium  salts 
contained.  Thus,  according  to  Brandenburg,  1000  parts  bj^  weight 
of  the  red  corpuscles  contain  the  following  amounts  of  KjO  in 
different  mammalia:  Cat,  0.258:  dog,  0.257;  man,  4.294;  horse, 
4.957;  rabbit,  5.229. 

*  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiologische  Chemie,"  25,  88,  1898. 


410  BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

Proteids  of  the  Blood-plasma. — The  general  properties  and 
reactions  of  proteids  and  the  related  compounds,  as  well  as  a  classi- 
fication of  those  occurring  in  the  animal  body,  are  described  briefly 
in  the  appendix.  This  description  should  be  read  before  attempt- 
ing to  study  the  proteids  of  the  plasma  and  the  part  they  take  in 
coagulation.  Three  proteids  are  usually  described  as  existing  in  the 
plasma  of  circulating  blood, — namely,  fibrinogen,  paraglobulin, 
or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  "serum-globulin,"  and  serum-albumin. 
The  first  two  of  these  proteids,  fibrinogen  and  paraglobulin,  belong  to 
the  group  of  globulins,  and  hence  have  many  properties  in  common. 
Serum-albumin  belongs  to  the  group  of  so-called  "native  albumins" 
of  which  egg-albumin  constitutes  another  member. 

Serum-albumin. — This  substance  is  a  typical  proteid.  It  can  be 
obtained  readily  in  crystalline  form  from  the  horse's  blood.  Its 
percentage  composition,  according  to  Michel,  is  as  follows:  C,  53.08; 
H,  7.10;  N,  15.93;  S,  1.90;  O,  21.96. 

Its  molecular  composition,  according  to  Schmiedeberg,*  may  be 
represented  by  07311^22^208024  or  some  multiple  of  this  formula. 
Serum-albumin  shows  the  general  reactions  of  the  native  albumins. 
One  of  its  most  useful  reactions  is  its  behavior  toward  magnesium 
sulphate  and  ammonium  sulphate.  Serum-albumin  usually  occurs  in 
liquids  together  with  the  globulins,  as  is  the  case  in  blood.  If  such 
a  liquid  is  thoroughly  saturated  with  solid  magnesium  sulphate  or 
half  saturated  with  ammonium  sulphate,  the  globulins  are  precipi- 
tated completely,  while  the  albumin  is  not  affected.  So  far  as  the 
blood  and  similar  liquids  are  concerned,  a  definition  of  serum- 
albumin  might  be  given  by  saying  that  it  comprises  all  the  proteids 
not  precipitated  by  saturation  with  magnesium  sulphate  or  by  half 
saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate.  When  its  solutions  have  a 
neutral  or  an  acid  reaction,  serum-albumin  is  precipitated  in  an 
insoluble  form  by  heating  the  solution  above  a  certain  degree. 
Precipitates  produced  in  this  way  by  heating  solutions  of  proteids 
are  spoken  of  as  coagulations — heat  coagulations — and  the  exact 
temperature  at  which  coagulation  occurs  is  to  a  certain  extent 
characteristic  for  each  proteid.  The  temperature  of  coagulation  of 
serum-albumin  is  usually  given  at  from  70°  to  75°  C,  but  it  varies 
greatly  with  the  conditions, — for  instance,  with  the  reaction  of  the 
solution  or  its  concentration  in  salts.  It  has  been  asserted,  in  fact, 
that  careful  heating  under  proper  conditions  gives  separate  coagula- 
tions at  three  different  temperatures, — namely,  73°,  77°,  and  84° 
C, — vindicating  the  possibility  that  what  is  called  "serum-albumin" 
may  be  a  mixture  of  three  proteids.  Serum-albumin  occurs  in 
blood-plasma  and  blood-serum,  in  lymph,  and  in  the  different 
normal  and  pathological  exudations  found  in  the  body,  such  as  per- 
*  "Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathol,  u.  Pharmakol.,"  39,  1,  1897. 


CHEMICAL   COMPOSITION    OF   BLOOD-PLASMA.  411 

icardiariiquid;  hydrocele  fluid,  etc.  The  amount  of  serum-albumin 
in  the  blood  varies  in  different  animals,  ranging  among  the  mam- 
malia from  2.67  per  cent,  in  the  horse  to  4.52  per  cent,  in  man.  In 
some  of  the  cold-blooded  animals  it  occurs  in  surprisingly  small 
quantities, — 0.36  to  0.69  per  cent.  As  to  the  source  or  origin  of 
serum-albumin,  it  is  frequently  stated  that  it  comes  from  the  digested 
proteids  of  the  food.  It  is  known  that  proteid  material  in  the  food 
is  not  changed  at  once  to  serum-albumin  during  the  act  of  digestion; 
indeed,  it  is  known  that  the  final  products  of  digestion  are  a  group  of 
proteids  of  an  entirely  different  character, — namely,  peptones  and 
proteoses,  or  possibly  a  series  of  much  simpler  split  products;  but 
during  the  act  of  absorption  into  the  blood  these  latter  bodies  have 
been  supposed  to  undergo  transformation  into  serum-albumin.  From 
a  physiological  standpoint  serum-albumin  is  often  considered  to  be 
the  main  source  of  proteid  nourishment  for  the  tissues  generally. 
As  will  be  explained  in  the  section  on  Nutrition,  one  of  the  most 
important  requisites  in  the  nutrition  of  the  cells  of  the  body  is  an 
adequate  supply  of  proteid  material  to  replace  that  used  up  in  the 
chemical  changes,  the  metabolism,  of  the  tissues.  Serum-albumin 
has  been  supposed  to  furnish  a  part,  at  least,  of  this  supply, 
although,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  there  is  no  substantial  proof  that  this 
view  is  correct.  As  long  as  the  serum-albumin  is  in  the  blood- 
vessels it  is,  of  course,  cut  off  from  the  tissues.  The  cells,  however, 
are  bathed  directly  in  lymph,  and  this  in  turn  is  formed  from  the 
plasma  of  the  blood  which  is  transuded,  or,  according  to  some 
physiologists,  secreted,  through  the  vessel  walls. 

Paraglohulin,  which  belongs  to  the  group  of  globulins,  exhibits 
the  general  reactions  characteristic  of  the  group.  As  stated  above, 
it  is  completely  precipitated  from  its  solutions  by  saturation  with 
magnesium  sulphate  or  by  half  saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate. 
It  is  incompletely  precipitated  by  saturation  with  common  salt 
(NaCl).  In  neutral  or  feebly  acid  solutions  it  coagulates  upon 
heating  to  75°  C.  Hammarsten  gives  its  percentage  composition 
as:  C,  52.71;  H,  7.01;  N,  15.85;  S,  1.11;  0,  23.32.  Schmiedeberg 
gives  it  a  molecular  composition  corresponding  to  the  formula 
Cjj7H^82N3oS038  +  iH20.  According  to  Faust,  the  precipitate  of 
paraglobulin  usually  obtained  with  magnesium  sulphate  contains  a 
certain  amount  of  an  albuminoid  body,  glutolin,  which  he  believes 
to  be  a  constant  constituent  of  blood-plasma.  Paraglobulin  occurs 
in  blood,  in  lymph,  and  in  the  normal  and  pathological  exudations. 
The  amount  of  paraglobulin  present  in  blood  varies  in  different 
animals.  Among  the  mammalia  the  amount  ranges  from  1.78  per 
cent,  in  rabbits  to  4.56  per  cent,  in  the  horse.  In  human  blood  it  is 
given  at  3.10  per  cent.,  being  less  in  amount,  therefore,  than  the 
serum-albumin.     It  is  usually  stated  that  more  of  this  proteid  is 


412  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

found  in  the  serum  than  in  the  plasma.  This  fact  is  explained  by 
supposing  that  during  coagulation  some  of  the  leucocytes  disinte- 
grate and  part  of  their  substance  passes  into  solution  as  a  globulin 
identical  with  or  closely  resembling  paraglobulin.  Paraglobulin  as 
obtained  from  blood-serum  by  half  saturation  with  ammonium 
sulphate  or  full  saturation  with  magnesium  sulphate  does  not  behave 
like  a  chemical  individual.  Portions  of  it,  for  instance,  are  precipi- 
tated by  CO2  or  by  dialysis,  and  portions  are  not  so  precipitated. 
Recently,  therefore,  it  has  been  assumed  that  paraglobulin  is  in 
reality  a  mixture  of  two  or  possibly  three  different,  although  re- 
lated, proteids.  The  separation  usually  given  is  into  euglobulin 
and  pseudoglobulin,  euglobulin  being  the  portion  precipitated  by 
ammonium  sulphate  when  added  to  one-third  saturation  (28  to  33 
per  cent.),  and  pseudoglobulin  the  portion  precipitated  only  by 
one-half  saturation  (34  to  50  per  cent.).  The  latter  portion  shows 
properties  more  nearly  related  to  the  albumins.*  The  whole  basis 
of  classification  is,  however,  unsatisfactory  and  provisional  (see 
appendix).  It  is  even  stated  that  under  certain  conditions  of 
temperature  and  reaction  serum-albumin  may  be  converted  to  a 
globulin  body  that  precipitates  upon  one-half  saturation  with 
ammonium  sulphate.f  The  origin  of  paraglobulin  remains  unde- 
termined. It  may  arise  from  the  digested  proteids  absorbed  from 
the  alimentary  canal,  but  there  is  no  evidence  to  support  such  a 
view.  Another  suggestion  is  that  it  comes  from  the  disintegration 
of  the  leucocytes  (and  other  formed  elements)  of  the  blood.  These 
bodies  are  known  to  contain  a  small  quantity  of  a  globulin  resem- 
bling paraglobulin,  and  it  is  possible  that  this  globulin  may  be  hber- 
ated  after  the  dissolution  of  the  leucocytes  in  the  plasma,  and  thus  go 
to  make  up  the  normal  supply  of  paraglobulin.  Several  observers^ 
have  clainied  that  during  starvation  the  proportion  of  globulins 
in  the  blood  is  increased  relatively  or  absolutely.  A  possible 
explanation  is  that  the  increase  is  due  to  cell  globulins  received  from 
the  tissues  which  must  undergo  destruction  and  dissolution  in  pro- 
longed fasting.  The  fact  remains,  however,  that  our  knowledge  is 
too  incomplete  at  present  to  venture  any  positive  statements 
regarding  the  origin  and  specific  functions  of  the  paraglobulin. 

Fibrinogen  is  a  proteid  belonging  to  the  globulin  class  and  exhibit- 
ing all  the  general  reactions  of  this  group.  It  is  distinguished  from 
paraglobulin  by  a  number  of  special  reactions;  for  example,  its 
temperature  of  heat  coagulation  is  much  lower  (56°  to  60°  C),  and 

*  Porges  and  Spiro,  "Beitriige  zur  chem.  Physiol,  u.  Pathol.,"  3,  277, 
1903;  and  Freund  and  Joachim,  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiologische  Chemie,"  36,. 
407,  1902. 

tMoll,  "Beitrage  zur  chem.  Physiol,  u.  Pathol.  "  4,  561,  1903. 

X  See  St.  Githens,  "Beitrage  zur  chem.  Physiol,  u.  Pathol.,"  5,  515,  1904;: 
also  Lewinski,  "Pfliiger's  Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiol.,"  100,  611,  1903. 


CHEMICAL    COMPOSITION    OF    BLOOD-PLASMA.  413 

it  is  completely  thrown  down  from  its  solutions  by  saturation  with 
sodium  chlorid  as  well  as  with  magnesium  sulphate.  Its  most 
important  and  distinctive  reaction  is,  however,  that  under  proper 
conditions  it  gives  rise  to  an  insoluble  proteid,  fibrin,  whose  forma- 
tion is  the  essential  phenomenon  in  the  coagulation  of  blood. 
Fibrinogen  has  a  percentage  composition,  according  to  Hammar- 
sten,  of:  C,  52.93;  H,  6.90;  N,  16.66;  S,  1.25;  O,  22.26;  while  its 
molecular  composition,  according  to  Schmiedeberg,  is  indicated  by 
the  formula  CiogH^ggNggSOg^. 

Fibrinogen  is  found  in  blood-plasma,  lymj^h,  and  in  some  cases, 
though  not  always,  in  the  normal  and  pathological  exudations.  It 
is  absent  from  blood-serum,  being  used  up  during  the  process  of 
clotting.  It  occurs  in  very  small  quantities  in  blood,  compared 
with  the  other  proteids.  There  is  no  good  method  of  determining 
quantitatively  the  amount  of  fibrinogen,  but  estimates  of  the 
amount  of  fibrin,  which  cannot  difTer  very  much  from  the  fibrinogen, 
show  that  in  human  blood  it  varies  from  0.22  to  0.4  per  cent.  In 
horse's  blood  it  may  be  more  abundant, — 0.65  per  cent.  As  to  the 
origin  and  the  special  physiological  value  of  this  proteid  we  are,  if 
possible,  more  in  the  dark  than  in  the  case  of  paraglolDulin,  with  the 
exception  that  fibrinogen  is  known  to  be  the  source  of  the  fibrin  of 
clotted  blood.  But  clotting  is  an  occasional  phenomenon  only. 
What  nutritive  function,  if  any,  is  possessed  by  fibrinogen  under 
normal  conditions  is  unknown.  No  satisfactory  account  has  been 
given  of  its  origin.  It  has  been  suggested  by  different  investigators 
that  it  may  come  from  the  nuclei  of  disintegrating  leucocytes  (and 
blood  plates)  or  from  the  dissolution  of  the  extruded  nuclei  of  newly 
made  red  corpuscles,  but  here  again  we  have  only  speculations,  that 
can  not  be  accepted  imtil  some  experimental  proof  is  advanced  to 
support  them. 

The  following  table*  gives  some  recent  results  of  analyses  of 
blood  which  indicate  the  average  amounts  of  the  different  proteids 
in  the  blood-plasma  of  several  animals.  The  figures  give  the  weight 
of  the  proteid  in  grams  for  100  c.c.  of  plasma. 

Serum- 
Total  Proteids.     Albumin.     Paraglobulin.     Fibrinogen. 

Man 7.26  4.01  2.83  0.42 

Dog...- 6.03  3.17  2.26  0.60 

Sheep 7.29  3.83  3.00  0.46 

Horse 8.04  2.80  4.79  0.45 

Pig 8.05  4.42  2.98  0.65 

Other  Proteids  of  the  Blood-serum  or  Blood-plasma. — From  time  to  time 
other  proteid  bodies  have  been  described  in  the  serum  or  plasma  of  the  blood. 
In  the  serum  after  coagulation  Hammarsten  has  obtained  a  globulin  body, 
fihrin-globulin,  which  he  supposes  may  be  spHt  off  from  the  fibrinogen  during 
the  act  of  clotting.     Faust,  as  was  mentioned  above,  describes  an  albuminoid 

*  Lewinski,  loc.  cit. 


414  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

substance,  glufoUn,  which  is  present  in  the  blood  and  is  usually  precipitated 
together  with  the  paraglobulin.  A  number  of  observers  have  fnoted  the  ex- 
istence in  blood  of  a  proteid  not  coagulated  by  heat.  By  some  authors  this 
has  been  described  as  a  peptone  or  an  albumose  (Langstein),  by  others  as  an 
ovomucoid  (Zanetti)  and  by  others  still  (Chabrie)  as  a  pecuUar  proteid  for  which 
the  name  albumon  has  been  proposed.  By  others  still  this  non-coagulable 
proteid  obtained  from  serum  or  plasma  has  been  explained  as  an  artificial 
product  arising  from  the  globulins  of  the  blood  during  the  process  of  remov- 
ing the  coagulable  proteids  by  heating.  So,  too,  nucleoproteid  substances  have 
been  described  in  the  blood-serum  by  several  observers,  most  recently  by 
Freund  and  Joachim.  It  is  quite  possible,  however,  that  the  substance  des- 
cribed as  nucleoproteid  is  in  reality  a  mixture  or  combination  of  lecithin  and 
proteid.  All  the  proteids  when  precipitated  from  the  blood  carry  down  with 
them  some  lecithin,  and  will  therefore  show  a  reaction  for  phosphorus.  It 
can  be  shown  that  the  phosphorus  present  is,  in  most  cases  at  least,  remov- 
able by  boiling  with  alcohol,  and  there  is  at  present  no  entirely  satisfactory 
proof  that  nucleo-albumins  exist  in  the  blood. 

Coagulation  of  Blood. — One  of  the  most  striking  properties  of 
blood  is  its  power  of  clotting  or  coagulating  shortly  after  it  escapes 
from  the  blood-vessels.  The  general  changes  in  the  blood  during 
this  process  are  easily  followed.  At  first  perfectly  fluid,  in  a  few 
minutes  it  becomes  viscous  and  then  sets  into  a  soft  jelly  which 
quickly  becomes  firmer,  so  that  the  vessel  containing  it  may  be 
inverted  without  spilling  the  blood.  The  clot  continues  to  grow 
more  compact  and  gradually  shrinks  in  volume,  pressing  out  a. 
smaller  or  larger  quantity  of  a  clear,  faintly  yellow  liquid  to  which 
the  name  blood-serum  is  given.  The  essential  part  of  the  clot  is  the 
fibrin.  Fibrin  is  an  insoluble  proteid  not  found  in  normal  blood. 
In  shed  blood,  and  under  certain  conditions  in  blood  while  still  in  the 
blood-vessels,  this  fibrin  is  formed  from  the  soluble  fibrinogen. 
The  deposition  of  the  fibrin  is  peculiar.  It  is  precipitated,  if  the 
word  may  be  used,  in  the  form  of  an  exceedingly  fine  network  of 
delicate  threads  that  permeate  the  whole  mass  of  the  blood  and  give 
the  clot  its  jelly-like  character.  The  shrinking  of  the  threads 
causes  the  subsequent  contraction  of  the  clot.  If  the  blood  has  not 
been  disturbed  during  the  -act  of  clotting,  the  red  corpuscles  are 
caught  in  the  fine  fibrin  meshwork,  and  as  the  clot  shrinks  these 
corpuscles  are  held  more  firmly,  only  the  clear  liquid  of  the  blood 
being  squeezed  out,  so  that  it  is  possible  to  get  specimens  of  serum 
containing  few  or  no  red  corpuscles.  The  leucocytes,  on  the  con- 
trary, although  they  are  also  caught  at  first  in  the  forming 
meshwork  of  fibrin,  may  readily  pass  out  into  the  serum  in  the  later 
stages  of  clotting,  on  account  of  their  power  of  making  ameboid 
movements.  If  the  blood  has  been  agitated  during  the  process  of 
clotting,  the  delicate  network  will  be  broken  in  places  and  the  serum 
will  be  more  or  less  bloody — that  is,  it  will  contain  numerous  red 
corpuscles.  If  during  the  time  of  clotting  the  blood  is  vigorously 
whipped  with  a  bundle  of  fine  rods,  all  the  fibrin  is  deposited 
as  a  stringy  mass  upon  the  whip,  and  the  remaining  liquid  part 


COAGULATION,  415 

consists'  of  senim  plus  the  blood  corpuscles.  Blood  that  has  been, 
whipped  in  this  way  is  known  as  "  defibrinated  blood."  It  resembles 
normal  blood  in  appearance,  but  is  different  in  its  composition;  it 
can  not  clot  again.  The  way  in  which  the  fibrin  is  normally  de- 
posited may  be  demonstrated  very  easily  under  the  microscope  by 
placing  a  good-sized  drop  of  blood  on  a  slide,  covering  it  with  a 
cover-slip,  and  allowing  it  to  stand  for  several  minutes  until  coagu- 
lation is  completed.  If  the  drop  is  now  examined,  it  is  possible  by 
careful  focusing  to  discover  in  the  spaces  between  the  masses  of 
corpuscles  many  examples  of  the  delicate  fibrin  network.  The 
physiological  value  of  clotting  is  that  it  stops  hemorrhages  by 
closing  the  openings  of  the  wounded  blood-vessels. 

Time  of  Clotting. — The  time  necessary  for  the  clot  to  form  varies 
slightly  in  different  individuals,  or  in  the  blood  of  the  same  in- 
dividual varies  with  the  conditions.  It  may  be  said  in  general  that 
under  normal  conditions  the  blood  passes  into  the  jelly  stage  in 
from  three  to  ten  minutes.  The  separation  of  clot  and  serum  takes 
place  gradually,  but  is  usually  completed  in  from  ten  to  forty-eight 
hours.  The  time  of  clotting  shows  marked  variations  in  different 
animals;  the  process  is  especially  slow  in  the  blood  of  the  horse, 
terrapin,  and  birds,  so  that  coagulation  of  shed  blood  is  more  easily 
prevented  in  these  animals.  In  the  human  being  also  the  time 
of  clotting  may  be  much  prolonged  under  certain  conditions — in 
fevers,  for  example.  This  fact  was  noticed  in  the  days  when  blood- 
letting was  a  common  practice.  The  slow  clotting  of  the  blood 
permitted  the  red  corpuscles  to  sink  somewhat,  so  that  the  upper 
part  of  the  clot  in  such  cases  was  of  a  lighter  color,  forming  what 
was  called  the  "  buffy  coat."  The  time  of  clotting  may  be  shortened 
or  be  prolonged,  or  the  clotting  may  be  prevented  altogether,  in 
various  ways,  and  much  use  has  been  made  of  this  fact  in  studying 
the  composition  and  the  coagulation  of  blood  as  well  as  in  con- 
trolling hemorrhages.  It  will  be  advantageous  to  postpone  an 
account  of  these  methods  for  hastening  or  retarding  coagulation 
until  the  theories  of  coagulation  have  been  considered. 

Theories  of  Coagulation. — The  clotting  of  blood  is  such  a 
prominent  phenomenom  that  it  has  attracted  attention  at  all 
times,  and  as  a  result  numerous  theories  to  account  for  it  have  been 
advanced.  Most  of  these  theories  have  now  simply  an  historical 
interest.  In  recent  years  much  experimental  work  has  been  done 
upon  the  subject,  the  result  of  which  has  been  to  increase  greatly 
our  knowledge  of  the  process ;  but  no  complete  explanation  has  yet 
been  reached.  It  is  generally  admitted  that  the  essential  constit- 
uent of  the  clot — namely,  the  fibrin — is  formed  from  the  fibrinogen 
normally  present  in  the  plasma,  and  that  without  this  fibrin- 
ogen clotting  is   impossible.      If,  for  instance,  blood  is  heated  to 


416  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

60°-  C,  a  temperature  sufficient  to  precipitate  the  fibrinogen  as  a 
heat  coagulum,  its  power  of  clotting  is  lost.  Clotting,  therefore,  is 
essentially  a  process  of  the  blood-plasma,  as  was  shown  indeed  by 
the  old  experimenters  (Hewson).  Moreover  it  is  also  adirdtted  that 
the  conversion  of  the  soluble  fibrinogen  to  the  insoluble  fibrin  is 
accomplished  by  the  agency  of  an  unorganized  ferment  or  enzyme, 
which  is  not  present,  in  its  active  form  at  least,  in  the  blood  while  in 
the  blood-vessels,  but  is  formed  after  the  blood  is  shed  or  under 
certain  abnormal  conditions  within  the  blood-vessels.  These  two 
important  facts — in  the  definite  form  in  which  they  are  stated — 
we  owe  mainly  to  the  investigations  of  Alexander  Schmidt,*  whose 
work  completed  the  older  observations  of  Hewson,  Buchanan, 
Denis,  and  Briicke. 

Fibrinogen  is  readily  prepared  by  the  method  of  Hammarsten 
from  the  plasma  of  horses'  blood  that  has  been  kept  from  clotting 
by  cooling.  By  several  successive  precipitations  with  sodium 
chlorid  it  can  be  obtained  free  from  the  other  proteids  of  blood,  and 
upon  the  addition  of  a  solution  of  fibrin  ferment  it  gives  a  typical 
clot.  Fibrin  ferment  solutions  are  prepared  by  the  method  first 
suggested  by  Schmidt.  Blood-serum  is  precipitated  by  the  addi- 
tion of  fifteen  to  twenty  times  its  volume  of  alcohol,  and  the  precipi- 
tate is  allowed  to  stand  under  the  alcohol  for  at  least  fourteen  days 
in  order  to  render  the  proteids  insoluble.  The  precipitate  is  then 
dried  over  sulphuric  acid  and  extracted  with  water.  The  aqueous 
solutions  thus  obtained  cause  solutions  of  fibrinogen  to  clot,  and 
induce  coagulation  in  certain  pathological  exudates,  such  as 
hydrocele  liquid,  which  contain  fibrinogen,  but  are  not  spontane- 
ously coagulable.  The  fibrin  ferment  solutions  are  destroyed  by 
moderate  heat,  50°  to  60°  C.  As  is  seen  from  the  method  of  prep- 
aration, the  ferment  is  contained  in  fresh  blood-serum.  Schmidt 
was  able  to  show,  however,  that  it  is  not  present,  in  detectible 
amounts  at  least,  in  normal  blood.  That  is,  if  blood  flowing  im- 
mediately from  an  artery  is  caught  under  alcohol  and  is  treated  as 
described  above  for  the  serum  it  yields  no  ferment.  The  conclu- 
sion, therefore,  is  justified  that  the  active  ferment  is  formed  after 
the  blood  is  shed.  Schmidt  subsequently  designated  this  ferment 
as  thrombin.  A  third  fact  of  essential  importance  in  theories  of  coag- 
ulation is  that  soluble  calcium  salts  are  necessary  to  the  process. 
This  discovery  was  made  definitively  by  Arthus  and  Pages,t  who 
showed  that  blood  received  into  an  oxalate  solution,  so  as  to 

*  "Archiv  f.  Anat.,  Physiologie,  u.  Wiss.  Medicin,"  Reichert  u.  du  Bois- 
Reymond,  1861,  pp.  545,  675,  and  1862,  pp.  428,  533;  "Pfliiger's  Archiv  f. 
d.gesammte  Physiol.,"  6,  413,  1872;  "Zur  Blutlehre,"  Leipzig,  1892  and  1895. 

t  "Archives  de  physiologie  normale  et  pathologique,"  fifth  series,  2,  739, 
1890. 


COAGULATION.  417 

precipitate  the  calcium,  does  not  clot.     Subsequent  addition  of  a 
solution  of  a  calcium  salt  induces  clotting  promptly. 

We  may  say,  therefore,  that  there  are  three  fibrin  factors  which 
are  undoubtedly  concerned  in  the  production  of  fibrin, — namely, 
fibrinogen,  calcium  salts,  and  thrombin.  Two  of  these  exist  in  the 
circulating  blood,  one  of  them,  the  ferment,  is  formed  after  the  blood 
is  shed.  Obviously,  therefore,  we  may  conclude  that  the  main 
reason  for  the  clotting  of  the  blood  when  shed  is  the  formation  of 
thrombin.  The  difficulties  in  the  way  of  an  adequate  explanation 
of  the  formation  of  the  thrombin  and  its  mode  of  action  are  very 
great. 

The  theories  that  have  been  proposed  in  recent  years  are  numer- 
ous and  conflicting.*  It  has  long  been  believed  that  the  for- 
mation of  the  thrombin  is  initiated  by  the  breaking  down  of  the 
formed  elements  in  the  blood, — the  leucocytes  and  the  blood  plates. 
Concerning  the  amount  of  destruction  of  leucocytes  in  shed  blood 
opinions  still  differ.  While  some  observers  report  that  they  dis- 
integrate in  large  numbers  when  the  blood  escapes  from  the  ves- 
sels, others  deny  that  they  show  any  marked  immediate  effect  of 
such  a  change  in  environment.  Concerning  the  blood  plates  there 
can  be  no  doubt.  Immediately  after  the  shedding  of  blood  and 
within  the  time  that  precedes  normal  coagulation  these  structures 
agglutinate  and  then  dissolve  or  disintegrate.  There  is  much 
'evidence  to  show  that  the  fibrin  is  deposited  first  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  these  agglutinated  masses  of  blood  plates,  and  moreover 
that  any  reagent  or  condition  that  prevents  or  retards  the  breaking 
down  of  the  plates  prevents  or  delays  the  clotting  of  the  blood. 
We  may  believe,  therefore,  that  the  blood  plates  (and  leucocytes) 
give  rise  to  some  substance  necessary  to  the  formation  of  the 
thrombin. 

According  to  a  theory  proposed  by  Pekelharing  and  formerly 
much  quoted,  it  was  suggested  that  the  cUssolution  of  the  formed 
elements  liberates  a  nucleoproteid  which  then  combines  with  the 
calcium  present  to  form  a  calcium  nucleoproteid  compound  which 
constitutes  the  thrombin.  This  compound  reacts  with  the  fibrin- 
ogen to  form  an  insoluble  calcium  compound,  the  fibrin.  This 
theory  may  be  expressed  in  simple  form  by  an  equation  of  this 
kind: 

Ca  nucleoproteid  +  fibrinogen  =  Ca  fibrinogen. 
(Thrombin.)  (Fibrin.) 

Hammarsten  has  shown  that  the  latter  part  of  this  theory  is  not 
correct.     Fibrin  as  ordinarily  formed  does  contain  much  calcium, 

*  For  two  recent  theories  and  literature  see  Morawitz,  "Beitrage  zur  chem. 
Physiol,  u.  Pathol.,"  4,  381,  1904,  and  "Deutsches  Archiv  f.  klin.  Med.,"  79; 
Fuld,  "Zentralblatt  f.  Physiol.,"  17,  529,  1903. 
27 


418  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

but  when  a  calcium-free  solution  of  fibrinogen  is  brought  into  reac- 
tion with  a  calcium-free  ferment  solution  (blood-serum)  a  typical 
clot  is  formed  the  fibrin  of  which  is  practically  free  from  calcium. 
This  result  also  enables  us  to  draw  the  important  conclusion  that 
the  calcium  is  not  essential  to  the  process  of  clotting  after  the 
thrombin  is  once  formed,  and  that  therefore  its  role  probably  comes 
in  in  the  production  of  the  thrombin. 

Practically  all  recent  observers  hold  to  the  view  that  the 
active  thrombin  is  formed  from  an  inactive  antecedent  substance 
which  is  designated  usually  as  prothrombin.  Schmidt  and  others 
believe  that  the  prothrombin  exists  preformed  in  blood-plasma  and 
that  it  may  be  converted  into  active  thrombin  by  certain  substances 
arising  from  the  blood  corpuscles  or  indeed  from  many  tissue  cells. 
These  substances  are  described  as  zymoplastic  substances  (also 
cytozyms  or  coagulins).  Others  have  considered  that  the  calcium 
salts  constitute  the  efficient  zymoplastic  substance  that  converts 
the  prothrombin  to  thrombin, — a  view  that  is  contained  in  the  first 
part  of  Pekelharing's  theory,  given  above.  At  present  it  would 
seem  necessary  to  adopt  a  combination  of  these  views:  to  suppose 
that  in  the  formation  of  active  thrombin  three  factors  co-operate, — • 
namely,  the  calcium  salts,  the  prothrombin,  and  zymoplastic  sub- 
stances. The  calcium  salts  exist  in  solution  in  the  plasma,  the 
prothrombin  also  according  to  some  authors  pre-exists  in  the  plasma, 
while  according  to  others  it  is  furnished  by  the  cellular  elements 
(blood  plates,  leucocytes).  The  zymoplastic  substance  is  a  ferment 
body  derived  from  cellular  elements;  it  has  been  designated  by 
several  names,  such  as  cytozym  (Fuld),  to  indicate  its  origin  from 
cells,  and  thrombokinase  (Morawitz),to  indicate  its  activating  effect 
upon  the  prothrombin.  The  latter  name  seems  preferable,  and  it 
is  important  to  bear  in  mind  that  such  bodies  may  be  furnished 
not  only  by  the  formed  elements  of  the  blood,  but  also  by  other 
tissue  elements.  Thus,  Delezenne  has  shown  that  if  the  blood  of 
birds  is  withdrawn  carefully,  by  means  of  a  cannula  inserted  into 
an  artery,  it  clots  very  slowly,  and  if  centrifugalized  at  once  the 
supernatant  plasma  when  removed  may  remain  unclotted  for  some 
days.  This  result  seems  evidently  to  be  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
elements  in  the  blood  of  these  animals  supposed  to  correspond  with 
the  blood  plates  of  mammalia  disintegrate  much  less  readily.  A 
similar  result  holds  good  for  the  blood  of  terrapins,  as  was  pointed 
out  long  ago  by  the  present  author.  If,  however,  in  withdrawing 
the  blood  it  comes  into  contact  with  the  tissues, — at  the  wound, 
for  instance, — it  will  clot  quickly,  and  it  would  appear  that  a 
zymoplastic  substance  is  furnished  by  the  tissues.  In  the  bird 
the  normal  clotting  of  the  blood  to  stop  wounded  vessels  must  de- 
pend evidently  upon  this  co-operation  from  the  outside  tissues.    In 


COAGULATION.  419 

the  mammal,  on  the  other  hand,  the  blood  itself  contains  all  the 
sources  necessary  for  prompt  coagulation. 

After  the  active  thrombin  is  formed  its  manner  of  action  upon  the 
fibrinogen  is  also  a  matter  concerning  which  we  have  little  positive 
knowledge.  Hammarsten  has  supposed  that  the  thrombin  causes 
a  splitting  of  the  fibrinogen  molecule,  with  the  formation  of  the 
insoluble  fibrin  and  a  soluble  globulin,  fibrin  globulin, 

T^-u  •  /fibrin-globulin 

Fibrinogen/ g^^^.^  ^ 

which  can  be  found  in  small  quantities  in  the  serum  after  coagula- 
tion. This  conclusion  has  not,  however,  been  demonstrated  to  be 
correct.  Some  observers  have  suggested  that  the  enzyme  causes  a 
rearrangement  in  the  structure  of  the  fibrinogen  molecule,  while 
others  have  given  some  reasons  for  believing  that  the  action  of  the 
thrombin  is  hydrolytic,  as  is  the  case  with  most  of  the  enzymes  of 
digestion.  Thus,  Fuld  *  states,  from  experiments  upon  the  blood- 
plasma  of  birds,  that  the  rapidity  of  clotting  varies,  not  directly 
with  the  amount  of  enzyme  (thrombin)  present,  but  rather  in  pro- 
portion to  the  square  root  of  the  amount,  thus  following  the  law  of 
Schiitz  for  hydrolytic  enzymes. 

Summary. — By  way  of  summary  the  following  statements  may 
be  made :  The  immediate  factors  necessary  in  coagulation  are  fibrin 
ferment  (thrombin)  and  fibrinogen.  Calcium  salts  are  also  neces- 
sary to  the  process  of  clotting,  as  it  occurs  in  the  blood,  but  it  is 
probable  that  they  play  some  part  in  preparing  the  thrombin.  It 
is  probable,  also,  that  the  formed  elements  of  the  blood,  the  blood 
plates  and  leucocytes,  furnish  some  constituent  (zymoplastic  sub- 
stance) necessary  to  the  preparation  or  activation  of  the  thrombin. 
We  may  provisionally  adopt  the  view  that  thrombin  is  produced 
from  an  antecedent  prothrombin  by  the  action  of  the  calcium 
salts  and  zymoplastic  substance,  according  to  the  schema: 

Prothrombin  +  calcium  salts  +   zymoplastic  substance  (thrombokinase)  = 

thrombin. 
Thrombin  +  fibrinogen  =  fibrin. 

In  this  last  reaction  the  fibrinogen  disappears  entirely,  so  that  none 
is  found  in  the  serum  after  clotting.  The  thrombin,  on  the  con- 
trary, like  other  enzymes,  is  not  destroyed  in  the  reaction  and  is 
found,  therefore,  in  the  serum  of  the  clot. 

Why  Blood  Does  Not  Clot  Within  the  Blood-vessels — An- 
tithrombin. — The  reason  that  blood  remains  fluid  within  the  blood- 
vessels and  coagulates  in  a  few  minutes  after  being  shed  would  seem 
to  be  contained  in  the  theories  of  coagulation  just  described.     We 

*  Fuld,  "Beitrage  zur  chem.  Physiol,  u.  Pathol.,"  2,  514. 


420  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

may  assume  that  in  the  Uving  blood-vessels  the  formed  elements — 
leucocytes  and  blood  plates — do  not  disintegrate  in  great  numbers 
at  a  time,  and  therefore  do  not  give  rise  to  any  noticeable  amount  of 
active  thrombin.  It  seems  most  probable  that  little,  if  any,  throm- 
bin is  actually  present  in  the  blood  under  normal  circumstances, 
and  this  in  itself  may  be  regarded  as  the  main  reason  for  the  fact 
that  the  blood  remains  unclotted.  It  is  quite  possible,  however, 
that  other  safeguards  may  exist  in  a  matter  of  such  prime  im- 
portance. It  has  been  shown,  for  instance,  that,  when  solutions 
of  fibrin  ferment  (thrombin)  are  injected  into  the  circulation, 
clotting  is  not  produced  with  the  certainty  that  one  might  expect. 
Delezenne  has  described  experiments  which  indicate  that  the  liver 
exercises  a  defensive  power  in  this  respect.*  He  states  that  when 
blood-serum — containing,  as  it  normally  does,  an  active  thrombin 
— is  circulated  through  a  living  liver  it  loses  its  power  of  inducing 
coagulation  in  solutions  containing  fibrinogen.  Its  thrombin  has 
been  destroyed  or  made  inactive  by  some  effect  of  the  liver,  and  it  is 
possible,  although  not  demonstrated  as  yet,  that  the  liver  may 
exercise  such  a  protective  action  under  special  circumstances  during 
life.  That  this  supposed  action  of  the  hver  is  not  always  essential 
is  shown  by  the  fact  that  in  animals  from  whom  the  liver  has  been 
removed  experimentally  the  blood  does  not  clot  within  the  vessels. 
The  older  observers  were  impressed  with  the  fact  that  blood  remains 
uncoagulated  for  long  periods  if  kept  in  contact  with  what  may  be 
called  its  normal  surface, — that  is,  the  interior  of  the  heart  or  blood- 
vessels. In  an  excised  heart  or  blood-vessel  the  blood,  although  at 
rest,  remains  fluid  for  a  long  time.  It  was  thought  possible,  there- 
fore, that  the  normal  endothelial  walls  of  the  vessels  exercise  a 
restraining  influence  of  some  kind  upon  the  coagulation  of  the  blood. 
In  recent  times  this  view  has  taken  the  form,  corresponding  to  the 
knowledge  of  the  day,  of  a  suggestion  that  an  antibody — namely, 
an  antithrombin — exists  in  the  blood  and  actively  retards  or  prevents 
coagulation.  While  some  authors  (Morawitz)  believe  that  such  an 
antithrombin  exists  normally  in  circulating  blood  and  is  essential 
in  maintaining  its  fluidity,  others  (Schmidt)  hold  to  the  view  that 
substances  retarding  coagulation  are  liberated  only  from  the  dis- 
integration of  the  cellular  elements  and  are  present  practically, 
therefore,  only  in  the  shed  blood.  Loebf  has  not  been  able  to 
detect  the  existence  of  an  antithrombin  in  extracts  of  the  inner  wall 
of  the  blood-vessels.  It  would  seem  to  be  premature  to  accept 
the  view  that  under  normal  conditions  there  exists  in  the  blood  any 
substance  that  retards  or  prevents  coagulation,  although  under 

*  "  Travaux  de  Physiologie,"  Universite  de  Montpellier,  1898. 
t  Leo  Loeb,  "Virchow's  Archiv,"  176,  10,  1904;   also   "Hofmeister's  Bei- 
trage,"  5,  534,  1904. 


COAGULATION.  421 

artificial  or  unusual  conditions,  as  stated  in  the  next  paragraph, 
such  substances  may  be  produced. 

Intravascular  Clotting. — As  is  well  known,  clots  may  form 
within  the  blood-vessels  in  consequence  of  the  introduction  of  for- 
eign material  of  any  kind.  Air,  for  instance,  that  has  gotten  into 
the  veins,  if  not  absorbed,  may  act  as  a  foreign  substance  and 
cause  the  same  chain  of  events  as  when  the  blood  is  shed, — namely, 
the  disintegration  of  formed  elements,  formation  of  thrombin,  and 
clotting.  So  also  when  the  internal  coat  of  a  blood-vessel  is  in- 
jured as,  for  instance,  by  a  ligature — the  altered  endothelial  cells 
act  as  a  foreign  substance.  If  the  circulatory  conditions  are  favor- 
able— for  instance,  if  the  ligated  artery  causes  a  stasis  of  blood  at 
that  point^ — there  may  be  an  agglutination  of  the  blood  plates, 
starting  at  the  injured  surface,  and  the  subsequent  formation  of  a 
clot.  Intravascular  clotting  may  also  be  produced  by  the  injection 
of  other  substances.  Calcium  solutions  added  in  quantity  sufficient 
to  notably  raise  the  calcium  percentage  of  the  plasma  distinctly 
favor  the  process  of  clotting  and  may  lead  to  the  formation  of 
intravascular  clots.  So,  too,  injections  of  thrombin  or  of  leucocytes 
as  obtained  from  macerated  lymph  glands  cause  clotting.  In 
this  latter  case,  however,  it  has  been  noticed  that  if  the  quantity 
injected  is  not  sufficient  the  coagulability  of  the  blood  may  be 
distinctly  retarded  instead  of  being  accelerated.  This  fact  has  been 
accounted  for  on  the  hypothesis  that  in  the  disintegration  of  the 
foreign  leucocytes  two  products  are  formed,  one  tending  to  acceler- 
ate coagulation  (positive  phase  of  the  injection)  and  one  tending  to 
retard  it  (negative  phase).  Lilienfeld*  has  made  this  hypothesis 
more  specific  by  showing  that  lymphocytes  (and  blood  plates) 
yield  a  nucleoproteid  which  in  turn  on  decomposition  furnishes  a 
second  nucleoproteid,  leuconuclein,  whose  presence  favors  coagula- 
tion, and  a  simple  proteid,  histon,  whose  action  retards  clotting. 
Delezennef  has  still  further  added  to  the  hypothesis  by  experiments 
which  indicate  that  the  element  favoring  coagulation  (leuconuclein) 
is  removed  or  destroyed  by  the  liver.  When  an  insufficient  quan- 
tity of  leucocytes  is  injected  into  the  circulation  the  histon  action 
may  predominate,  causing  retarded  coagulation,  while  with  larger 
quantities  and  a  more  extensive  decomposition  the  leuconuclein 
may  bring  about  clotting  before  it  is  completely  destroyed  by  the 
liver. 

Means  of  Hastening  or  of  Retarding  Coagulation. — Blood 
coagulates  normally  within  a  few  minutes,  but  the  process  may  be 
hastened  by  increasing  the  extent  of  foreign  surface  with  which  it 
comes  in  contact.  Thus,  agitating  the  liquid  when  in  quantity,  or 
the  application  of  a  sponge  or  a  handkerchief  to  a  wound,  hastens 
*  Lilienfeld,  " Zeitschrif t  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  18,  473.    f  Loc.  cit. 


422  BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

the  onset  of  clotting.  This  is  easily  understood  when  it  is  remem- 
bered that  the  breaking  down  of  leucocytes  and  blood  plates  is 
hastened  by  contact  with  foreign  surfaces.  It  has  been  proposed 
also  to  hasten  clotting  in  case  of  hemorrhage  by  the  use  of  ferment 
solutions.  Hot  sponges  or  cloths  applied  to  a  wound  hasten 
clotting,  probably  by  accelerating  the  formation  of  ferment  and  the 
chemical  changes  of  clotting.  Coagulation  may  be  retarded  or  be 
prevented  altogether  by  a  variety  of  means,  of  which  the  following 
are  the  most  important: 

1.  By  Cooling. — This  method  succeeds  well  only  in  blood  that 
clots  slowly — for  example,  the  blood  of  the  horse,  bird,  or  terrapin. 
Blood  from  these  animals  received  into  narrow  vessels  surrounded 
by  crushed  ice  may  be  kept  fluid  for  an  indefinite  time.  The  blood 
corpuscles  soon  sink,  so  that  by  this  means  one  may  readily  obtain 
pure  blood-plasma.  The  cooling  probably  prevents  clotting  by 
keeping  the  corpuscles  intact. 

2.  By  the  Action  of  Neutral  Salts. — Blood  received  at  once  from 
the  blood-vessels  into  a  solution  of  such  neutral  salts  as  sodium 
sulphate  or  magnesium  sulphate,  and  well  mixed,  does  not  clot.  In 
this  case  also  the  corpuscles  settle  slowly,  or  they  may  be  centri- 
fugalized,  and  specimens  of  plasma  be  obtained.  For  this  purpose 
horses'  or  cats'  blood  is  to  be  preferred.  Such  plasma  is  known 
as  "salted  plasma";  it  is  frequently  used  in  experiments  in  coag- 
ulation,— for  example,  in  testing  the  efficacy  of  a  given  ferment 
solution.  The  best  salt  to  use  is  magnesium  sulphate  in  solutions 
of  27  per  cent. :  1  part  by  volume  of  this  solution  is  usually  mixed 
with  4  parts  of  blood;  if  cats'  blood,  is  used  a  smaller  amount  may 
be  taken — 1  part  of  the  solution  to  9  of  blood.  Salted  plasma 
or  salted  blood  again  clots  when  diluted  sufficiently  with  water  or 
when  ferment  solutions  are  added  to  it.  How  the  salts  prevent 
coagulation  is  not  definitely  known — possibly  by  preventing  the 
disintegration  of  corpuscles  and  the  formation  of  ferment,  possibly 
by  altering  the  chemical  properties  of  the  proteids. 

3.  By  the  Action  of  Oxalate  Solutions. — If  blood  as  it  flows  from 
the  vessels  is  mixed  with  solutions  of  potassium  or  sodium  oxalate 
in  proportion  sufficient  to  make  a  total  strength  of  0.1  per  cent, 
or  more  of  these  salts,  coagulation  is  prevented  entirely.  Ad- 
dition of  an  excess  of  water  does  not  produce  clotting  in  this  case, 
but  solutions  of  some  soluble  calcium  salt  quickly  start  the  process. 
The  explanation  of  the  action  of  the  oxalate  solutions  is  simple: 
they  are  supposed  to  precipitate  the  calcium  as  insoluble  calcium 
oxalate. 

4.  By  the  Action  of  Sodium  Fluorid. — Blood  drawn  directly  into 
a  solution  of  sodium  fluorid  (1  part  of  a  3  per  cent,  solution  of 
sodium  fluorid  to  9  parts  of  blood)  does  not  clot.     Addition  of 


QUANTITY    OF   BLOOD.  423 

calcium  salts  alone  to  such  a  mixture  fails  to  provoke  clotting,  but 
addition  of  solutions  of  thrombin,  or  of  calcium  and  zymoplastic 
substance,  will  provoke  coagulation.  The  plasma  obtained  by 
centrifugalizing  a  mixture  of  blood  and  sodium  fluorid  forms, 
therefore,  an  excellent  means  of  testing  the  presence  of  thrombin 
(Arthus). 

5.  By  the  Injection  of  Certain  Organic  Substances. — There  are  a 
number  of  substances  which  when  injected  into  the  blood  retard 
or  prevent  its  coagulation.  For  instance,  solutions  of  ordinary 
l^reparations  of  pepsin,  trypsin,  peptone,  snake  venom,  leech 
extracts,  etc.  Snake  venom  may  be  wonderfully  potent  in  this 
particular;  it  is  stated  that  so  little  as  0.00001  gm.  to  each  kilogram 
of  animal  suffices  to  destroy  the  coagulability  of  the  blood.  Of 
these  various  bodies  solutions  of  peptone  have  received  the  most 
attention  from  investigators.  Peptone,  as  usually  obtained  by 
digestion  experiments,  is  in  reality  a  mixture  of  proteoses  and 
peptones.  When  injected  into  the  circulation  in  the  proportion  of 
0.3  gm.  to  each  kilogram  of  animal  the  coagulability  of  the  blood  is 
very  greatly  diminished.  When,  however,  such  solutions  are  added 
to  freshly  drawn  blood  they  exercise  no  influence  upon  the  coagu- 
lation. Evidently,  therefore,  when  injected  into  the  blood  they 
provoke  a  reaction  of  some  sort  the  products  of  which  prevent 
coagulation.  Delezenne's  work  given  above  offers  a  simple  ex- 
planation. Such  solutions  cause  a  rapid  destruction  of  leucocytes 
(and  blood  plates)  with  the  production  of  leuconuclein  and  histon; 
the  former  substance  is  destroyed  or  removed  by  the  liver  and  the 
histon  remaining  in  the  blood  is  the  cause  of  the  non-coagulation. 
Pick  and  Spiro  *  have  shown  that  this  action  of  peptone  solutions  is 
not  due  to  the  peptone  or  the  albumoses  contained  in  it.  When 
obtained  in  purified  form  these  substances  have  no  such  effect. 
They  attribute  the  action  to  a  substance,  derived  probably  from 
the  tissues  used  in  the  preparation  of  the  peptone,  and  for  which 
they  suggest  the  name  of  ycptozym.  Leech  extracts  differ  from 
solutions  containing  peptozym  in  that  they  prevent  the  clotting 
of  the  blood  when  added  to  it  outside  the  body.  They  evidently 
contain  already  formed  a  substance  whose  action  prevents  coagula- 
tion. This  substance  is  secreted  by  the  salivary  glands  of  the  leech. 
It  has  been  extracted  from  the  glands  in  a  more  or  less  pure  form, 
and  is  designated  as  hirudin.  Nothing  is  known  regarding  its 
chemical  structure  or  its  mode  of  action  in  preventing  clotting. 

Total  Quantity  of  Blood  in  the  Body. — The  total  quantity  of 
blood  in  the  body  has  been  determined  approximately  for  man  and 
a  number  of  the  lower  animals.  The  method  used  in  such  determi- 
nations consists  essentially  in  first  bleeding  the  animal  as  thoroughly 
*  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  31,  235,  1900. 


424  •    BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

as  possible  and  weighing  the  quantity  of  blood  thus  obtained,  and 
afterward  washing  out  the  blood-vessels  with  water  and  estimating 
the  amount  of  hemoglobin  in  the  washings.  The  results  are  as 
follows:  Man,  7.7  per  cent.  (tV)  of  the  body-weight;  that  is,  a  man 
weighing  68  kgms.  has  about  5236  gms.,  or  4965  c.c,  of  blood  in  his 
body;  dog,  7.7  per  cent.;  rabbit  and  cat,  5  per  cent.;  new-born 
human  being,  5.26  per  cent.;  and  birds,  10  per  cent.  The  dis- 
tribution of  this  blood  in  the  tissues  of  the  body  at  any  time  has 
been  estimated  by  Ranke,  *  from  experiments  on  freshly  killed 
rabbits,  as  follows: 

Spleen  .  .  .  ; 0.23  per  cent. 

Brain  and  cord 1.24  "  " 

Kidneys 1.63  "  " 

Skin.. 2.10  "  " 

Intestines 6.30  "  " 

Bones 8.24  "  " 

Heart,  lungs,  and  great  blood-vessels 22.76  "  " 

Resting  muscles 29.20  "  " 

Liver 29.30  " 

It  will  be  seen  from  inspection  of  this  table  that  in  the  rabbit  the 
blood  of  the  body  is  distributed  at  any  one  time  about  as  follows: 
One-fourth  to  the  heart,  lungs,  and  great  blood-vessels;  one-fourth 
to  the  liver;  one-fourth  to  the  resting  muscles;  and  one-fourth  to  the 
remaining  organs. 

Regeneration  of  the  Blood  after  Hemorrhage. — ^A  large 
portion  of  the  entire  quantity  of  blood  in  the  body  may  be  lost 
suddenly  by  hemorrhage  without  producing  a  fatal  result.  The 
extent  of  hemorrhage  that  may  be  recovered  from  safely  has  been 
investigated  upon  a  number  of  animals.  Although  the  results 
show  more  or  less  individual  variation,  it  may  be  said  that  in  dogs 
a  hemorrhage  of  from  2  to  3  per  cent,  of  the  body-weight  f  is  re- 
covered from  easily,  while  a  loss  of  4.5  per  cent.,  more  than  half 
the  entire  blood,  will  probably  prove  fatal.  In  cats  a  hemorrhage 
of  from  2  to  3  per  cent,  of  the  body-weight  is  not  usually  followed 
by  a  fatal  result.  Just  what  percentage  of  loss  may  be  borne  by  the 
human  being  has  not  been  determined,  but  it  is  probable  that  a 
healthy  individual  may  recover  without  serious  difficulty  from  the 
loss  of  a  quantity  of  blood  amounting  to  as  much  as  3  per  cent,  of 
the  body-weight.  It  is  known  that  if  liquids  that  are  isotonic  to 
the  blood,  such  as  physiological  saline  (Nacl,  0.7  to  0.9  per  cent.) 
or  Ringer's  solution,  are  injected  into  the  veins  immediately  after 
a   severe   hemorrhage,   recovery   is   more   certain  ;    in   fact,  it  is 

*  Taken  from  Vierordt's  "Anatomische,  physiologische,  und  physikalische 
Daten  und  Tabellen,"  Jena,  1893. 

t  Fredericq:    "Travaux  du  Laboratoire"   (Universite  de  Liege),  1,  189, 

1885. 


REGENERATION    AFTER   HEMORRHAGE. 


425 


possible  by  this  means  to  restore  persons  after  a  hemorrhage  that 
would  otherwise  have  been  fatal.  By  an  infusion  of  this  kind, 
particularly  if  at  or  somewhat  above  the  body  temperature,  the 
heart  beat  is  increased,  the  volume  of  the  circulating  liquid  is 
brought  to  an  amount  sufficient  to  maintain  approximately  normal 
conditions  of  pressure  and  velocity,  and  the  red  corpuscles  that  still 
remain  are  kept  in  more  rapid  circulation  and  are  thus  utilized  more 
completely  as  oxygen  carriers.  If  a  hemorrhage  has  not  been  fatal, 
experiments  on  lower  animals  show  that  the  plasma  of  the  blood  is 
regenerated  with  great  rapidity,  the  blood  regaining  its  normal  vol- 


12      3       4 


1 

J 

^ 

-- 

' 

/ 

'^ 

\ 

y 

\ 

y 

^ 

\ 

/ 

y 

^\ 

y 

y 

\ 

\ 

/ 

/ 

\ 

\ 

/ 

^ 

\ 

/ 

" 

— ■ 

— 

._ 

— 

•' 

\ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

^ 

s 

I 

1^  \ 

/ 

^ 

^ 

% 

/ 

y 

, 

^ 

's. 

•\ 

/ 

\ 

y 

^ 

^ 

^ 

/ 

/ 

.. 

8,000,000 

7,000,000  f765J) 

0,000,000(08%) 

5,000,000(55%) 

4,000,000^45%) 

135%; 

35,000(25%; 

26,000(15%) 


Fig.  173. — To  show  the  effect  of  hemorrhage  upon  the  number  of  red  and  white  cor- 
puscles and  the  amount  of  hemoiajlobin. — (Dawson.)  The  ordinates  express  the  numbers 
of  corpuscles  and  also  the  percentages  of  hemoglobin  as  stated  in  the  figures  to  the  left. 
The  abscissas  give  the  days  after  hemorrhage.  The  experiment  was  made  upon  a  dog  of 
8.1  kgms.  The  hemorrhage,  which  lasted  2.3  minutes,  was  equal  to  4.3  per  cent,  oi  the 
body-weight.  An  equal  amoimt  of  physiological  saline  (NaCl,  0.8  per  cent.)  was  injected 
immediately. 


ume  within  a  few  hours  in  slight  hemorrhages,  and  in  from  twenty- 
four  to  forty-eight  hours  if  the  loss  of  blood  has  been  severe;  but 
the  number  of  red  corpuscles  and  the  hemoglobin  are  regenerated 
more  slowly,  getting  back  to  normal  only  after  a  number  of  days  or 
after  several  weeks.  The  accompanying  curves  illustrate  the  results 
of  a  severe  hemorrhage  (4.3  per  cent,  of  the  body-weight)  followed 
by  transfusion  of  an  equal  volume  of  physiological  saline.  So  far 
as  the  red  corpuscles  and  the  amount  of  hemoglobin  are  concerned, 
it  will  be  noticed  that  the  large  sudden  fall  from  the  hemorrhage, 
first  day,  is  followed  by  a  slower  drop  in  both  factors  during  the 


426  BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

second  and  third  days.     This  latter  phenomenon  constitutes  what 
is  known  as  the  posthemorrhagic  fah.* 

Blood-transfusion. — Shortly  after  the  discover}^  of  the  circu- 
lation of  the  blood  (Harvey,  1628),  the  operation  was  introduced 
of  transfusing  blood  from  one  individual  to  another  or  from  some 
of  the  lower  animals  to  man.  Extravagant  hopes  were  held  as  to 
the  value  of  such  transfusion  not  only  as  a  means  of  replacing  the 
blood  lost  by  hemorrhage,  but  also  as  a  cure  for  various  infirmities 
and  diseases.  Then  and  subsequently  fatal  as  well  as  successful 
results  followed  the  operation.  It  is  now  known  to  be  a  dangerous 
undertaking,  mainly  for  two  reasons:  first,  the  strange  blood, 
whether  transfused  directly  or  after  defibrination,  is  liable  to  contain 
a  quantity  of  fibrin  ferment  sufficient,  perhaps,  to  cause  intravas- 
cular clotting ;  secondly,  the  serum  of  one  animal  may  be  toxic 
to  another  or  cause  a  destruction  of  its  blood  corpuscles.  Owing  to 
this  hemolytic  and  toxic  action,  which  has  previously  been  referred 
to  (p.  387),  the  injection  of  foreign  blood  is  likely  to  be  directly 
injurious  instead  of  beneficial.  In  cases  of  loss  of  blood  from  severe 
hemorrhage,  therefore,  it  is  far  safer  to  inject  a  neutral  liquid, 
such  as  the  so-called  "physiological  salt  solution" — a  solution  of 
sodium  chlorid  of  such  a  strength  (0.7  to  0.9)  as  will  suffice  to  pre- 
vent hemolysis  of  the  red  corpuscles. 

*  Dawson,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  4,  1,  1900. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

COMPOSITION  AND  FORMATION  OF  LYMPH. 

Lymph  is  a  colorless  liquid  found  in  the  lymph-vessels  as  well 
as  in  the  extravascular  spaces  of  the  body.  All  the  tissue  elements, 
in  fact,  may  be  regarded  as  being  bathed  in  lymph.  To  understand 
its  occurrence  in  the  body  one  has  only  to  bear  in  mind  its  method 
of  origin  from  the  blood.  Throughout  the  entire  body  there  is  a 
rich  supply  of  blood-vessels  penetrating  every  tissue  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  epidermis  and  some  epidermal  structures,  as  the  nails 
and  the  hair.  The  plasma  of  the  blood,  by  the  action  of  physical  or 
chemical  processes,  the  details  of  which  are  not  yet  entirely  under- 
stood, makes  its  way  through  the  thin  walls  of  the  capillaries,  and  is 
thus  brought  into  immediate  contact  with  the  tissues,  to  which  it 
brings  the  nourishment  and  oxygen  of  the  blood  and  from  which  it 
removes  the  waste  products  of  metabolism.  This  extravascular 
lymph  is  collected  into  small  capillary  spaces  that  in  turn  open  into 
definite  lymphatic  vessels.  It  is  still  a  question  among  the  his- 
tologists  whether  the  lymph- vessels  form  a  closed  system  or  are  in 
direct  anatomical  connection  with  the  tissue  spaces.  Recent  work* 
supports  the  view  that  the  lymph  capillaries  are  closed  vessels  simi- 
lar in  structure  to  the  blood  capillaries.  They  end  in  the  tissues 
generally,  but  are  not  in  open  communication  with  the  spaces 
between  the  cellular  elements  or  with  the  larger  serous  cavities 
between  the  folds  of  the  peritoneum,  pleura,  etc.  From  the  phys- 
iological standpoint,  however,  the  liquid  in  these  latter  cavities, 
the  cerebrospinal  liquid,  and  the  liquid  bathing  the  tissue  elements 
must  be  regarded  as  a  part  of  the  general  supply  of  l3miph  and  as 
being  in  communication  with  the  liquid  contained  in  the  lymph- 
vessels.  That  is  to  say,  the  water  and  the  dissolved  substances 
contained  in  the  tissue  spaces  interchange  more  or  less  freely  with 
the  lymph  proper  found  in  the  formed  lymph- vessels.  The  lymph- 
vessels  unite  to  form  larger  and  larger  trunks,  making  eventually 
one  main  trunk,  the  thoracic  or  left  lymphatic  duct,  and  a  second 
smaller  right  lymphatic  duct,  which  open  into  the  blood-vessels, 
each  on  its  own  side,  at  the  junction  of  the  subclavian  and  internal 
jugular  veins.     While  the  supply  of  lymph  in  the  lymph- vessels  may 

*  See  MaCallum,  "Bulletin  of  the  Johns  Hopkms  Hospital,"  14,  1,  1903; 
also  Sabin,  "American  Journal  of  Anatomy,"  1,  367, 1902,  and  3,  183,  1904. 

427 


428  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

be  considered  as  being  derived  ultimately  entirely  from  the  blood- 
plasma,  it  is  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  at  any  given  moment  this 
supply  may  be  altered  by  direct  interchange  with  the  plasma  on  one 
side  and  the  extra  vascular  lymph  permeating  the  tissue  elements  on 
the  other.  The  intravascular  lymph  may  be  augmented,  for  ex- 
ample, by  a  flow  of  water  from  the  plasma  into  the  lymph  spaces,  or 
by  a  flow  from  the  tissue  elements  into  the  lymph  spaces  that 
surround  them.  The  lymph  movement  is  from  the  tissues  to  the 
veins,  and  the  flow  is  maintained  chiefly  by  the  difference  in  pres- 
•  sure  between  the  lymph  at  its  origin  in  the  tissues  and  in  the  large 
lymphatic  vessels.  The  continual  formation  of  lymph  in  the  tissues 
leads  to  the  development  of  a  relatively  high  pressure  in  the  lymph 
capillaries,  and  as  a  result  of  this  the  lymph  is  forced  toward  the 
point  of  lowest  pressure, — namely,  the  points  of  junction  of  the 
large  lymph  ducts  with  the  venous  system.  A  fuller  discussion  of 
the  factors  concerned  in  the  movement  of  lymph  will  be  found  in 
the  section  on  circulation.  As  would  be  inferred  from  its  origin, 
the  composition  of  lymph  is  essentially  the  same  as  that  of  blood- 
plasma.  It  contains  the  three  blood  proteids,  the  extractives  (urea^ 
fat,  lecithin,  cholesterin,  sugar),  and  inorganic  salts.  The  salts 
are  found  in  the  same  proportions  as  in  the  plasma ;  the  proteids  are 
less  in  amount,  especially  the  fibrinogen.  Lymph  coagulates,  but 
does  so  more  slowly  and  less  firmly  than  the  blood.  Histologically , 
lymph  consists  of  a  colorless  liquid  containing  a  number  of  leuco- 
cytes, and  after  meals  a  number  of  minute  fat  droplets;  red  blood 
corpuscles  occur  only  accidentally,  and  blood  plates,  according  to 
most  accounts,  are  likewise  normally  absent. 

Fonnation  of  Lymph. — The  careful  researches  of  Ludwig  and 
his  pupils  were  formerly  believed  to  prove  that  the  lymph  is  derived 
directly  from  the  plasma  of  the  blood  mainly  by  filtration  through 
the  capillary  walls.  Emphasis  was  laid  on  the  undoubted  fact  that 
the  blood  within  the  capillaries  is  under  a  pressure  higher  than  that 
prevailing  in  the  tissues  outside,  and  it  was  supposed  that  this  excess 
of  pressure  is  sufficient  to  squeeze  the  plasma  of  the  blood  through 
the  very  thin  capillary  walls.  Various  conditions  that  alter  the 
pressure  of  the  blood  were  shown  to  influence  the  amount  of  lymph 
formed  in  accordance  with  the  demands  of  a  theory  of  filtration. 
Moreover,  the  composition  of  lymph  as  usually  given  seems  to  sup- 
port such  a  theory,  inasmuch  as  the  inorganic  salts  contained  in  it 
are  in  the  same  concentration,  approximately,  as  in  blood-plasma, 
while  the  proteids  are  in  less  concentration,  following  the  well- 
known  law  that  in  the  filtration  of  colloids  through  animal  mem- 
branes the  filtrate  is  more  dilute  than  the  original  solution.  This 
simple  and  apparently  satisfactory  theory  has  been  subjected  to 
critical  examination  within  recent  years,  and  it  has  been  shown  that 


COMPOSITION   AND    FORMATION   OF   LYMPH.  429 

filtration  alone  does  not  suffice  to  explain  the  composition  of  the 
lymph  under  all  circumstances.  At  present  two  divergent  views 
are  held  upon  the  subject.  According  to  some  physiologists,  all 
the  facts  known  with  regard  to  the  composition  of  lymph  may  be 
satisfactorily  explained  if  we  suppose  that  this  liquid  is  formed 
from  blood-plasma  by  the  combined  action  of  the  physical  processes 
of  filtration,  diffusion,  and  osmosis.  According  to  others,  it  is 
believed  that,  in  addition  to  filtration  and  diffusion,  it  is  necessary 
to  assume  an  active  secretory  process  on  the  part  of  the  endothe- 
lial cells  composing  the  capillary  walls.  The  actual  condition  of  our 
knowledge  of  the  subject  can  be  presented  most  easily  by  briefly 
stating  some  of  the  objections  that  have  been  raised  by  Heidenhain* 
to  a  pure  filtration-and-diffusion  theory,  and  indicating  how  these 
objections  have  been  met. 

1.  Heidenhain  shows  by  simple  calculations  that  an  impossible 
formation  of  lymph  would  be  required,  upon  the  filtration  theory, 
to  supply  the  chemical  needs  of  the  organs  in  various  organic  and  in- 
organic constituents.  Thus,  to  take  an  illustration  that  has  been 
much  discussed,  one  kilogram  of  cows'  milk  contains  1.7  gms.  CaO 
and  the  entire  milk  of  twenty-four  hours  would  contain,  in  round 
numbers,  42.5  gms.  CaO.  Since  the  lymph  contains  normally 
about  0.18  part  of  CaO  per  thousand,  it  would  require  236  hters  of 
lymph  per  day  to  supply  the  necessary  CaO  to  the  mammary  glands. 
Heidenhain  himself  suggests  that  the  difficulty  in  this  case  may  be 
met  by  assuming  active  diffusion  processes  in  connection  with 
filtration.  If,  for  instance,  in  the  case  cited,  we  suppose  that  the 
CaO  of  the  lymph  is  quickly  combined  by  the  tissues  of  the  mam- 
mary gland,  then  the  tension  of  calcium  salts  in  the  lymph  will  be 
kept  at  zero,  and  an  active  diffusion  of  calcium  into  the  lymph  will 
occur  so  long  as  the  gland  is  secreting.  In  other  words,  the  gland 
will  receive  its  calcium  by  much  the  same  process  as  it  receives  its 
oxygen,  and  will  get  its  daily  supply  from  a  comparatively  small 
bulk  of  lymph.  Strictly  speaking,  therefore,  the  difficulty  we  are 
dealing  with  here  shows  only  the  insufficiency  of  a  pure  filtration 
theory.  It  seems  possible  that  filtration  and  diffusion  together 
would  suffice  to  supply  the  organs,  so  far  at  least  as  the  diffusible 
substances  are  concerned. 

2.  Heidenhain  found  that  occlusion  of  the  inferior  vena  cava 
causes  not  only  an  increase  in  the  flow  of  lymph — as  might  be  ex- 
pected, on  the  filtration  theory,  from  the  consequent  rise  of  pressure 
in  the  capillary  regions — but  also  an  increased  concentration  in  the 
percentage  of  proteid  in  the  lymph.  This  latter  fact  has  been 
.satisfactorily  explained  by  the  experiments  of  Starling.t     Accord- 

*  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  49,  209,  1891. 
t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  16,  234,  1894. 


430  BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

ing  to  this  observer,  the  lymph  formed  in  the  hver  is  normally  more 
concentrated  than  that  of  the  rest  of  the  body.  The  occlusion  of 
the  vena  cava  causes  a  marked  rise  in  the  capillary  pressure  in  the 
liver,  and  most  of  the  increased  lymph-flow  under  these  circum- 
stances comes  from  the  liver;  hence  the  greater  concentration. 
The  results  of  this  experiment,  therefore,  do  not  antagonize  the 
filtration-and-diffusion  theory. 

3.  Heidenhain  discovered  that  extracts  of  various  substances,, 
which  he  designated  as  "  lymphagogues  of  the  first  class,"  cause  a 
marked  increase  in  the  flow  of  lymph  from  the  thoracic  duct,  the 
lymph  being  more  concentrated  than  normal,  and  the  increased  flow 
continuing  for  a  long  period.  Nevertheless,  these  substances  cause 
little,  if  any,  increase  in  general  arterial  pressure;  in  fact,  if  injected 
in  sufficient  quantity  they  produce  usually  a  fall  of  arterial  pressure. 
The  substances  belonging  to  this  class  comprise  such  things  as  pep- 
tone, egg-albumin,  extracts  of  liver  and  intestine,  and  especially 
extracts  of  the  muscles  of  crabs,  crayfish,  mussels,  and  leeches. 
Heidenhain  supposed  that  these  extracts  contain  an  organic 
substance  which  acts  as  a  specific  stimulus  to  the  endothelial  cells 
of  the  capillaries  and  increases  their  secretory  action.  The  results 
of  the  action  of  these  substances  has  been  differently  explained  by 
those  who  are  unwilling  to  believe  in  the  secretion  theory.  Starling  * 
finds  experimentally  that  the  increased  flow  of  lymph  in  this  case,  as 
after  obstruction  of  the  vena  cava,  comes  mainly  from  the  liver. 
There  is  at  the  same  time  in  the  portal  area  an  increased  pressure 
that  may  account  in  part  for  the  greater  flow  of  lymph;  but,  since 
this  effect  upon  the  portal  pressure  lasts  but  a  short  time,  while 
the  greater  flow  of  lymph  may  continue  for  one  or  two  hours,  it  is 
obvious  that  this  factor  alone  does  not  suffice  to  explain  the  result 
of  the  injections.  Starling  suggests,  therefore,  that  these  extracts 
act  pathologically  upon  the  blood  capillaries,  particularly  those  of 
the  liver,  and  render  them  more  permeable,  so  that  a  greater 
quantity  of  concentrated  lymph  flows  through  them.  Starling's 
explanation  is  supported  by  the  experiments  of  Popoff  .f  According 
to  this  observer,  if  the  lymph  is  collected  simultaneously  from  the 
lower  portion  of  the  thoracic  duct,  which  conveys  the  lymph  from 
the  abdominal  organs,  and  from  the  upper  part,  which  contains  the 
lymph  from  the  head,  neck,  etc.,  it  is  found  that  injection  of 
peptone  increases  the  flow  only  from  the  abdominal  organs.  Popoff 
finds  also  that  the  peptone  causes  a  dilatation  in  the  intestinal 
circulation  and  a  marked  rise  in  the  portal  pressure.  At  the  same 
time  there  is  some  evidence  of  injury  to  the  walls  of  the  blood- 
vessels from  the  occurrence  of  extravasations  in  the  intestine.     As 

*  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  17,  30,  1894. 

t  "Centralblatt  f.  Physiologie,"  9,  No.  2,  1895. 


COMPOSITION    AND    FORMATION    OF   LYMPH.  431 

far,  therefore,  as  the  action  of  the  lymphagogues  of  the  first  class  is 
concerned,  it  may  be  said  that  the  advocates  of  the  filtration-and- 
diffiision  theory  have  suggested  a  plausible  explanation  in  accord 
with  their  theory.  The  facts  emphasized  by  Heidenhain  with 
regard  to  this  class  of  substances  do  not  compel  us  to  assume  a 
secretory  function  for  the  endothelial  cells. 

4.  Injection  of  certain  crystalline  substances — such  as  sugar, 
sodium  chlorid,  and  other  neutral  salts — causes  a  marked  increase 
in  the  flow  of  lymph  from  the  thoracic  duct.  The  lymph  in  these 
cases  is  more  dilute  than  normal,  and  the  blood-plasma  also  becomes 
more  watery,  thus  indicating  that  the  increase  in  water  comes  from 
the  tissues  themselves.  Heidenhain  designated  these  bodies  as 
"lymphagogues  of  the  second  class."  His  explanation  of  their 
action  is  that  the  crystalloid  materials  introduced  into  the  blood  are 
eliminated  by  the  secretory  activity  of  the  endothelial  cells,  and  that 
they  then  attract  water  from  the  tissue  elements,  thus  augmenting 
the  flow  of  lymph.  These  substances  cause  but  little  change  in 
arterial  blood-pressure;  hence  Heidenhain  thought  that  the  greater 
flow  of  lymph  can  not  be  explained  by  an  increased  filtration. 
Starling  *  has  shown,  however,  that,  although  these  bodies  may  not 
seriously  alter  general  arterial  pressure,  they  may  greatly  augment 
intracapillary  pressure,  particularly  in  the  abdominal  organs.  His 
explanation  of  the  greater  flow  of  lymph  in  these  cases  is  as  follows : 
"  On  their  injection  into  the  blood  the  osmotic  pressure  of  the  circu- 
lating fluid  is  largely  increased.  In  consequence  of  this  increase 
water  is  attracted  from  lymph  and  tissues  into  the  blood  by  a  process 
of  osmosis,  until  the  osmotic  pressure  of  the  circulating  fluid  is 
restored  to  normal.  A  condition  of  hydremic  plethora  is  thereby 
produced,  attended  with  a  rise  of  pressure  in  the  capillaries  generally, 
especially  in  those  of  the  abdominal  viscera.  This  rise  of  pressure 
will  be  proportional  to  the  increase  in  the  volume  of  the  blood,  and 
therefore  to  the  osmotic  pressure  of  the  solutions  injected.  The 
rise  of  capillary  pressure  causes  great  increase  in  the  transudation 
of  fluid  from  the  capillaries,  and  therefore  in  the  lymph-flow  from 
the  thoracic  duct."  This  explanation  is  well  supported  by  experi- 
ments, and  seems  to  obviate  the  necessity  of  assuming  a  secretory 
action  on  the  part  of  the  capillary  walls. 

5.  Numerous  other  experiments  have  been  devised  by  Heidenhain 
and  his  followers  to  show  that  the  physical  laws  of  filtration,  diffu- 
sion, and  osmosis  do  not  suffice  to  explain  the  movement  of  lymph  ; 
but  in  all  cases  possible  explanations  have  been  suggested  in  terms 
of  the  physical  laws,  so  that  it  may  be  said  that  the  facts  do  not 
compel  us  to  assume  a  secretory  activity  on  the  part  of  the  endo- 
thelial cells  of  the  capillaries.     In  recent  years  Asherf  and  his 

*  Loc.  cit.     t  "Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  vols,  xxxvi-xl,  1897  to  1900. 


432  BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

co-workers  have  brought  forward  many  facts  to  show  that  the  lymph 
is  controlled  as  to  its  amount  by  the  activity  of  the  tissue  elements 
and  may  be  considered  as  a  product  of  the  activity  of  the  tissues,  as 
a  secretion,  in  fact,  of  the  working  cells.  When  the  salivary  glands, 
the  liver,  etc.,  are  in  greater  functional  activity  the  flow  of  lymph 
from  them  is  increased  beyond-  doubt,  so  that  the  activity  of  the 
organs  does  influence  most  markedly  the  production  of  lymph. 
Most  physiologists,  however,  prefer  to  explain  this  relationship  on 
the  view  suggested  by  Koranyi,  Starling,  and  others, — namely,  that 
in  the  metabolic  changes  of  functional  activity  the  large  molecules 
of  proteid,  fat,  etc.,  are  broken  down  to  a  number  of  simpler  ones, 
the  number  of  particles  in  solution  is  increased  and  therefore  the 
osmotic  pressure  is  increased.  By  this  means  it  may  be  supposed 
that  the  flow  of  lymph  toward  the  tissue  elements  is  increased  in 
proportion  to  their  activity. 

The  lymph  in  the  tissue  spaces  between  the  cells  is  subjected 
to  many  influences  which,  taken  together,  regulate  its  amount. 
It  is  continually  augmented  by  a  flow  of  water  and  dissolved 
substances  from  the  blood  in  the  capillaries  and  from  the  liquid 
in  the  interior  of  the  cells,  and  it  is  continually  depleted  by 
the  excess  passing  off  into  the  lymphatics,  on  the  one  hand, 
through  which  it  eventually  reaches  the  blood,  and  also  by  direct 
absorption  into  the  blood  capillaries.  In  regard  to  this  last  factor, 
there  is  abundant  evidence  that  solutions  injected  into  the  tissue 
spaces  so  as  to  increase  the  amount  or  concentration  of  the  tissue 
liquid  are  promptly  absorbed  into  the  blood.  The  play  of  these 
opposing  forces  maintains  the  tissue  lymph  within  normal  limits, 
and,  although  the  movement  of  the  water  and  dissolved  sub- 
stances can  not  be  shown  in  all  cases  to  be  governed  solely  by 
the  physical  processes  of  diffusion,  osmosis,  and  filtration,  there 
is  at  present  no  conclusive  evidence  that  these  factors  are  in- 
sufficient to  account  for  the  regulation. 

Summary  of  the  Factors  Controlling  the  Flow  of  Lymph. — 
We  may  adopt,  provisionally  at  least,  the  so-cafled  mechanical  theory 
of  the  origin  of  lymph.  Upon  this  theory  the  forces  in  activity  are, 
first,  the  intracapillary  pressure  tending  to  filter  the  plasma  through 
the  endothelial  cells  composing  the  walls  of  the  capillaries ;  second, 
the  force  of  diffusion  depending  upon  the  inequality  in  chemical 
composition  of  the  blood-plasma  and  the  liquid  outside  the  capil- 
laries, or,  on  the  other  side,  between  this  liquid  and  the  contents  of 
the  tissue  elements;  third,  the  force  of  osmotic  pressure.  These 
three  forces  acting  everywhere  control  primarily  the  amount  and 
composition  of  the  lymph;  but  still  another  factor  must  be  con- 
sidered ;  for  when  we  come  to  examine  the  flow  of  lymph  in  different 
parts  of  the  body  striking  differences  are  found.     It  has  been  shown, 


COMPOSITION   AND    FORMATION    OF   LYMPH.  433 

for  instance,  that  in  the  limbs,  under  normal  conditions,  the  flow  is 
extremely  scanty,  while  from  the  liver  and  the  intestinal  area  it  is 
relatively  abundant.  In  fact,  the  lymph  of  the  thoracic  duct  may 
be  considered  as  being  derived  almost  entirely  from  the  latter  two 
regions.  Moreover,  the  lymph  from  the  liver  is  characterized  by 
a  greater  percentage  of  proteids.  To  account  for  these  differences 
Starling  suggests  the  plausible  explanation  of  a  variation  in  permea- 
bility in  the  capillary  walls.  The  capillaries  seem  to  have  a  similar 
structure  all  over  the  body  so  far  as  this  is  revealed  to  us  by  the 
microscope,  but  the  fact  that  the  lymph-flow  varies  so  much  in 
quantity  and  composition  indicates  that  the  similarity  is  only 
superficial,  and  that  in  different  organs  the  capillary  walls  may 
have  different  internal  structures,  and  therefore  different  permea- 
bilities. This  factor  is  evidently  one  of  great  importance.  The 
idea  that  the  permeability  of  the  capillaries  may  vary  under  dif- 
ferent conditions  has  long  been  used  in  pathology  to  explain  the 
production  of  that  excess  of  lymph  which  gives  rise  to  the  condition 
of  dropsy  or  edema.  The  theories  and  experiments  made  in  con- 
nection with  this  pathological  condition  have,  in  fact,  a  direct  bearing 
upon  the  theories  of  lymph  formation.*  Under  normal  conditions 
the  lymph  is  drained  off  as  it  is  formed,  while  under  pathological 
conditions  it  may  accumulate  in  the  tissues  owing  either  to  an 
excessive  formation  of  lymph  or  to  some  interruption  in  its  circu- 
lation. From  the  foregoing  considerations  it  is  evident  that  changes 
in  capillary  pressure,  however  produced,  may  alter  the  flow  of 
lymph  from  the  blood-vessels  to  the  tissues,  by  increasing  or 
decreasing,  as  the  case  may  be,  the  amount  of  filtration;  changes  in 
the  composition  of  the  blood,  such  as  follow  periods  of  digestion, 
will  cause  diffusion  and  osmotic  streams  tending  to  equalize  the 
composition  of  blood  and  lymph;  and  changes  in  the  tissues  them- 
selves following  upon  physiological  or  pathological  activity  will 
also  disturb  the  equilibrium  of  composition,  and,  therefore,  set  up 
diffusion  and  osmotic  currents.  In  this  way  a  continual  interchange 
is  taking  place  by  means  of  which  the  nutrition  of  the  tissues  is 
effected,  each  according  to  its  needs.  The  details  of  this  interchange 
must  of  necessity  be  very  complex  when  we  consider  the  possibilities 
of  local  effects  in  different  parts  of  the  body.  The  total  effects  of 
general  changes,  such  as  may  be  produced  experimentally,  are 
simpler,  and,  as  we  have  seen,  are  explained  satisfactorily  by  the 
physical  and  chemical  factors  enumerated. 

*  Consult    Meltzer,    "Edema"     ("Harrington    Lectures"),     "American 
Medicine,"  8,  Nos.  1,  2,  4,  and  5,  1904. 


28 


SECTION  V. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  CIRCULA- 
TION OF  THE  BLOOD  AND  LYMPH.    • 

The  heart  and  the  blood-vessels  form  a  closed  vascular  system 
containing  a  certain  amount  of  blood.  This  blood  is  kept  in  endless 
circulation  mainly  by  the  force  of  the  muscular  contractions  of  the 
heart.  3ut  the  bed  through  which  it  flows  varies  greatly  in  width 
at  different  parts  of  the  circuit,  and  the  resistance  offered  to  the 
moving  blood  is  very  much  greater  in  the  capillaries  than  in  the 
large  vessels.  It  follows  from  the  irregularities  in  size  of  the  chan- 
nels through  which  it  flows  that  the  blood-stream  is  not  uniform  in 
character  throughout  the  entire  circuit;  indeed,  just  the  opposite  is 
true.  From  point  to  point  in  the  branching  system  of  vessels  the 
blood  varies  in  regard  to  its  velocity,  its  head  of  pressure,  etc. 
These  variations  are  connected  in  part  with  the  fixed  structure  of  the 
system  and  in  part  are  dependent  upon  the  changing  properties  of 
the  living  matter  of  which  the  system  is  composed.  It  is  con- 
venient to  consider  the  subject  under  three  general  heads:  (1) 
The  purely  physical  factors  of  the  circulation, — that  is,  the  me- 
chanics and  hydrodynamics  of  the  flow  of  a  definite  quantity  of 
blood  through  a  set  of  fixed  tubes  of  varying  caliber  under  certain 
fixed  conditions.  (2)  The  general  physiology  of  the  heart  and  the 
blood-vessels, — that  is,  mainly  the  special  properties  of  the  heart 
muscle  and  the  plain  muscles  of  the  blood-vessels.  (3)  The  innerva- 
tion of  the  heart  and  the  blood-vessels, — that  is,  the  variations  in 
them  produced  by  the  action  of  the  nervous  system. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 
THE  VELOCITY  AND  PRESSURE  OF  THE  BLOOD-FLOW. 

The   Circulation   as  Seen  Under  the  Microscope. — It  is  a 

comparatively  easy  matter  to  arrange  a  thin  membrane  in  a  living 
animal  so  that  the  flowing  blood  may  be  observed  with  the  aid  of  a 
microscope.  For  such  a  purpose  one  generally  employs  the  web 
between  the  toes  of  a  frog,  or  better  still  the  mesentery,  lungs,  or 

434 


VELOCITY    AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW.  435 

bladder  of-  the  same  animal.  With  a  good  preparation  many- 
important  peculiarities  in  the  blood-flow  may  be  observed  directly. 
If  the  field  is  properly  chosen  one  may  see  at  the  same  time  the  flow 
in  arteries,  capillaries,  and  veins.  It  will  be  noticed  that  in  the 
arteries  the  flow  is  very  rapid  and  somewhat  intermittent, — that  is, 
there  is  a  slight  acceleration  of  velocity,  a  pulse,  with  each  heart 
beat.  In  the  capillaries,  on  the  contrary,  the  flow  is  relatively  very 
slow;  the  change  from  the  rushing  arterial  stream  to  the  deliber- 
ate current  in  the  capillaries  takes  place,  indeed,  with  some 
suddenness.  The  capillary  flow,  as  a  rule,  shows  no  pulses  corre- 
sponding with  the  heart  beats,  but  it  may  be  more  or  less  irregular, 
— that  is,  the  flow  may  nearly  cease  at  times  in  some  capillaries, 
while  again  it  maintains  a  constant  flow.  In  the  veins  the  flow 
increases  markedly  in  rapidity,  and  indeed  it  may  be  observed 
that,  the  larger  the  vein,  the  more  rapid  is  the  flow.  There  is  not, 
however,  as  a  rule,  any  indication  of  an  intermittence  or  pulse  in 
this  flow, — the  velocity  is  entirely  uniform.  In  both  arteries  and 
veins  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  red  corpuscles  form  a  solid  column 
or  core  in  the  middle  of  the  vessel,  and  that  between  them  and  the 
inner  wall  there  is  a  layer  of  plasma  containing  only,  under  normal 
conditions,  an  occasional  leucocyte.  The  accumulation  of  cor- 
puscles in  the  middle  of  the  stream  makes  what  is  known  as  the 
axial  stream,  while  the  clear  layer  of  plasma  is  designated  as  the 
inert  layer.  The  phenomenon  is  readily  explained  by  physical 
causes.  As  the  blood  flows  rapidly  through  the  small  vessels  the 
layers  nearer  the  wall  are  slowed  by  adhesion,  so  that  the  greatest 
velocity  is  attained  in  the  middle  or  axis  of  the  vessel.  The  cor- 
puscles, being  heavier  than  the  plasma,  are  drawn  into  this  rapid 
part  of  the  current.  It  has  been  shown  by  physical  experiments 
that,  when  particles  of  different  specific  gravities  are  present  in  a 
liquid  flowing  rapidly  through  tubes,  the  heavier  particles  will  be 
found  in  the  axis  and  the  lighter  ones  toward  the  periphery.  In 
accordance  with  this  fact,  leucocytes,  •  which  are  lighter  than  the 
red  corpuscles,  may  be  found  in  the  inert  layer.  When  the  con- 
ditions become  slightly  abnormal  (incipient  inflammation)  the 
leucocytes  increase  in  number  in  the  inert  layer  sometimes  to  a 
very  great  extent,  owing  apparently  to  some  alteration  in  the 
endothelial  walls  whereby  the  leucocytes  are  rendered  more  ad- 
hesive. The  agglutination  of  the  leucocytes  and  their  migration 
through  the  walls  into  the  surrounding  tissues  can  not  be  considered 
in  this  connection. 

The  Velocity  of  the  Blood-flow. — The  microscopical  observa- 
tions described  above  show  that  the  velocity  of  the  blood-current 
varies  widely,  being  rapid  in  the  arteries  and  veins  and  slow  in  the 
capillaries.     To  ascertain  the  actual  velocity  in  the  larger  vessels 


436 


CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 


and  the  variations  in  vessels  of  different  sizes  experimental  de- 
terminations are  necessary.  While  the  general  principle  involved 
in  these  determinations  is  simple,  their  actual  execution  in  an 

experiment  is  attended  with 
some  difficulties,  and  various 
devices  have  been  adopted. 
The  most  direct  method  per- 
haps is  that  used  in  the  in- 
strument devised  by  Ludwig, — • 
namely,  the  stromuhr.  The  prin- 
ciple used  is  to  cut  an  artery 
or  vein  of  a  known  size  and  de- 
termine how  much  blood  flows 
out  in  a  given  time.  We  may 
define  the  velocity  of  the  blood 
at  any  point  as  the  length  of 
the  column  of  blood  flowing  by 
that  point  in  a  second.  If  we 
cut  the  artery  there  a  cylindri- 
cal column  of  blood  of  a  defi- 
nite length  and  with  a  cross-area 
equal  to  that  of  the  lumen  of 
the  artery  will  flow  out  in  a 
second.  The  volume  of  the 
outflow  can  be  determined  di- 
rectly by  catching  the  blood. 
Knowing  this  volume  and  the 
cross-area  of  the  artery,  we  can 
determine  the  length  of  the 
column — that  is,  the  velocity 
of  the  flow — since  in  a  cylinder 
the  volume,  V,  is  equal  to  the 
product  of  the  length  into  the 
cross-area. 

V  =  length  X  cross-area,  or 

V 

length  =  

"=  cross-area 


Fig.  174. — Ludwig's  stromuhr:  a  and  6, 
The  glass  bulbs;  a  is  filled  with  oil  to  the 
mark  (5  c.c),  while  b  and  the  neck  are  filled 
with  salt  solution  or  defibrinated  blood;  p, 
the  movable  plate  by  means  of  which  the 
bulbs  may  be  turned  through  180  degrees, 
c,  c,  for  the  cannulas  inserted  into  the  artery ; 
s,  the  thumb  screw  for  turning  the  bulbs; 
h,  the  holder.  When  in  place  the  clamps 
on  the  arteries  are  removed,  blood  flows 
through  c  into  a,  driving  out  the  oil  and 
forcing  the  salt  solution  in  b  into  the  head 
end  of  the  artery  through  c'.  When  the 
blood  entering  a  reaches  the  mark,  the  bulbs 
are  turned  through  180  degrees  so  that  b  lies 
over  c.  The  blood  flows  into  6  and  drives 
the  oil  back  into  a.  When  it  just  fills  this 
bulb,  they  are  again  rotated  through  180 
degrees,  and  so  on.  The  oU  is  driven  out  of 
and  into  a  a  given  number  of  times,  each 
movement  being  equal  to  an  outflow  of  5  c.c. 
of  blood.  When  the  instrument  has  been 
turned,  say,  ten  times,  50  c.c.  of  blood  have 
flowed  out.  Knowing  the  time  and  the 
caliber  of  the  artery,  the  calculation  is  made 
as  described  in  the  text.  A  modification  of 
the  form  of  this  instrument  has  been  de- 
vised by  Tigerstedt.* 


We  cannot,  of  course,  make 
the  experiment   in   this   simple 
way  upon  a  living  animal;    the 
loss  of  so  much  blood  would  at 
once  change  the  physical  and  physiological  conditions  of  the  circula- 
tion, and  would  give  us  a  set  of  conditions  at  the  end  of  the  experi- 
*"SkandinaYisches  Archiv  f.  Physiol.,"  3,  152,  1891. 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF   BLOOD-FLOW. 


437 


ment  different  from  those  at  the  beginning.  By  means  of  the  stromuhr 
however,  this  experiment  can  be  made,  with  this  alteration,  how- 
ever, that  the  blood  that  flows  from  the  central  end  of  the  cut  artery 
is  returned  to  the  peripheral  end  of  the  same  artery,  so  that  the 
circulation  is  not  blocked  nor  deprived  of  its  normal  volume  of 
liquid.  The  instrument,  as  is  explained  in  the  legend  of  Fig.  174, 
measures  the  volume  of  blood  that  flows  out  of  the  cut  end  of  an 
artery  in  a  definite  time.  The  calculation  for  velocity  is  made  as 
follows:  Suppose  that  the  capacity 
of  the  bulb  is  5  c.c,  and  that  in  the 
experiment  it  has  been  filled  10 
times  in  50  seconds, — i.  e.,  the  bulbs 
have  been  reversed  10  times;  then 
obviously  10  X  5  or  50  c.c.  have 
flowed  out  of  the  artery  in  this 
time,  or  1  c.c.  in  1  second.  The 
diameter  of  the  vessel  can  be  meas- 
ured, and  if  found  equal,  say,  to  2 
mms.,  then  its  cross-area  is  ttt^  = 
3.15  X  1  =  3.15.  Since  1  c.c.  equals 
1000  c.mm.,  the  length  of  our  cyl- 
inder of  blood  would  be  given  by 


1000 
3.15 


317   mms. 


pi 


the  quotient    of 

So  that  the  blood  in  this  case  was 
moving  with  the  velocity  of  317 
mms.  per  second.  Another  instru- 
ment that  has  been  employed  for 
the  same  purpose  is  the  dromograph 
or  hemodromograph  of  Chauveau. 
This  instrument  is  represented  in 
the  accompanying  figure  (Fig.  175). 
A  rigid  tube  (p-c)  is  placed  in  the 
course  of  the  artery  to  be  examined. 
This  tube  is  provided  with  an  offset 
(a)  the  opening  of'  which  is  closed 
with  rubber  dam  (m).  The  rubber 
dam  is  pierced  by  a  needle  the  lower 
end  of  which  terminates  in  a  small 

plate  lying  in  the  tube  (pi) .  When  the  instrument  is  in  place  and 
the  blood  is  allowed  to  stream  through  the  tube,  it  deflects  the 
needle,  which  turns  on  its  insertion  through  the  rubber  as  a  ful- 
crum. The  angle  of  deflection  of  the  free  end  of  the  needle  may 
be  measured  directly  upon  a  scale  or  it  may  be  transmitted 
through  tambours  and  recorded  upon  a  kymographion.  The  in- 
strument must,  of  course,  be  graduated  by  passing  through  it  cur- 


Fig.175. — Chauveau's  hemodromo- 
graph (after  Langendorff).  The  tube, 
p-c,  is  placed  in  the  course  of  an  ar- 
tery, the  blood  after  removal  of  clamps 
flowing  in  the  direction  shown  by  the 
arrow.  The  current  strikes  the  plate, 
pi,  and  forces  it  to  an  angle  varying 
with  the  velocity.  The  movement  of 
pi  is  transmitted  through  the  stem,  n, 
which  moves  in  a  rubber  membrane, 
m.  The  angular  movement  of  the 
projecting  end  of  n  may  be  measured 
directly  or  may  be  made  to  act  upon  a 
tambour,  as  shown  in  the  figure,  and 
thus  be  transmitted  to  a  recording 
drum. 


438  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

rents  of  known  velocity,  so  that  the  angle  of  deflection  may  be 
expressed  in  terms  of  absolute  velocities.  It  possesses  the  great 
advantage  over  the  stromuhr  that  it  gives  not  simply  the  average 
velocity  during  a  given  time,  but  also  the  variations  in  velocity 
coincident  with  the  heart  beat  or  other  changes  "that  may  occur 
during  the  period  of  observation. 

Efforts  have  been  made  to  devise  a  method  for  the  determination  of  the 
velocity  of  the  blood-flow  in  the  arteries  of  man.  The  method  used,  however, 
depends  upon  certain  assumptions  that  are  not  entirely  certain  and  the  re- 
sults obtained,  therefore,  can  not  be  used  with  confidence.  The  principle  of 
the  method  consists  *  in  determining  the  volume  of  the  arm  by  placing  it  in 
a  plethysmograph.  Assuming  that  the  outflow  from  the  veins  is  constant  in 
the  part  of  the  arm  inclosed,  then  the  variations  in  volume  of  the  arm  may 
be  referred  to  the  greater  inflow  of  blood  into  this  part  through  the  arteries. 
The  curve  showing  the  variations  in  volume  may,  therefore,  under  proper 
conditions,  be  interpreted  in  terms  of  velocity  changes. 

Mean  Velocity  of  the  Blood-flow  in  the  Arteries,  Veins,  and 
Capillaries. — Actual  determinations  of  the  average  velocity  in  the 
large  arteries  and  veins  give  such  results  as  the  following:  Carotid 
of  horse  (Volkmann),  300  mms.  per  second;  (Chauveau)  297  mms. 
Carotid  of  the  dog  (Vierordt),  260  mms. 

The  flow  in  the  carotid,  as  in  the  other  large  arteries,  is  not, 
however,  uniform;  there  is  a  marked  acceleration  or  pulse  at  each 
systole  of  the  heart  during  which  the  velocity  is  greatly  augmented. 
Thus,  in  the  carotid  of  the  horse  it  has  been  shown  by  the  hemo- 
dromograph  that  during  the  systole  the  velocity  may  reach  520 
mms.  and  may  fall  to  150  mms.  during  the  diastole.  It  is  found,  also, 
that  this  difference  between  the  systolic  velocity  and  the  diastolic 
velocity  tends  to  disappear  as  the  arteries  become  smaller,  and,  as 
was  said  above,  disappears  altogether  in  the  capillaries,  in  which 
the  pulse  caused  by  the  heart  beat  is  lacking.  The  smaller  the  artery, 
therefore,  the  more  uniform  is  the  movement  of  the  blood. 

The  flow  in  the  large  veins  is  approximately  equal  to  that  in 
arteries  of  the  same  size.  In  the  jugular  vein  of  the  dog,  for 
instance,  Vierordt  found  a  velocity  of  225  mms.,  while  in  the 
carotid  of  the  same  animal  the  average  velocity  was  260  mms. 
In  the  capillaries,  however,  the  velocity  is  relatively  very  small. 
From  direct  observations  made  by  means  of  the  microscope  and 
from  indirect  observations  in  the  case  of  man  the  capillary  velocity 
is  estimated  as  lying  between  0.5  mm.  and  0.9  mm.  per  sec. 

Vierordt  reports  some  interesting  calculations  upon  the  velocity  of  the 
blood,  in  the  capillaries  of  his  own  eye.  Under  suitable  conditions, t  the 
movements  of  the  corpuscles  in  the  retina  may  be  perceived  in  consequence 
of  the  shadows  that  they  throw  upon  the  rods  and  cones.     The  visual  images 

*  Von  Kries,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1887,  279;  also  Abeles,  ibid.,  1892, 
22. 

t  "Archiv  f.  physiologische  Heilkunde,"  15,  255,  1856. 


VELOCITY    AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW. 


439 


thus  protiuced  may  be  projected  upon  a  surface  at  a  known  distance  from  the 
eye  and  the  space  traversed  in  a  given  time  may  be  observed.  The  distance 
actually  covered  upon  the  retina  may  then  be  calculated  by  the  following  con- 
struction, in  which  A-B  :=  the  distance  traveled  by  the  projected  image; 
A-n,  the  distance  of  the  surface  from  the  eye;  and  a-n,  the  distance  of  the 
retina  from  the  nodal  point 
of  the  eye.  We  have  then 
the    proportion    ab    :   an  :  : 

AB:An,  or  ah  =  A^X^. 

An 
According  to  this  method, 
Vierordt  calculates  that  the 
velocity  of  the  blood  in  the 
human  capillaries  is  equal  to 
about  0.6  to  0.9  mm.  per 
second. 

In  the  arteries,  more- 

,  ,  ,  Fig.  176. — Diagram  of  the  eye  to  show  the  con- 

OVer,  it  may  be  observed  struction  used  to  determine  the  size  of  the  retinal 

,  1      ,    ,  1  1       • ,  image  when  the  size  of  the  external  object  is  known: 

that  the  average  velocity  „,  The  nodal  point  of  the  eye.     See  text. 

diminishes     the     farther 

one  goes  from  the  heart, — that  is,  the  smaller  the  artery, — and 
reaches  its  minimum  when  the  arteries  pass  into  the  capillaries. 
Thus,  Volkmann  reports  for  the  horse  the  following  figures:  Ca- 
rotid, 300  mms.;  maxillary,  232;  metatarsal,  56  mms.  In  the  veins 
also  the  same  fact  holds.  The  smaller  the  vein — that  is,  the  nearer 
it  is  to  the  capillary  region— the  smaller  is  its  velocity,  the  maxi- 
mum velocity  being  found  in  the  vena  cava.  The  general  relations 
of  the  velocity  of  the  blood  in  the  arteries,  capillaries,  and  veins 


Fig.  177. — Schematic  representation  of  the  relative  velocities  of  the  blood-current  in 
different  parts  of  the  vascular  system:  a,  The  arterial  side,  indicating  the  changes  with 
each  heart  beat  and  the  fall  of  mean  velocity  as  the  arterial  bed  widens ;  c,  the  capillary 
region — the  great  diminution  in  velocity  corresponds  with  the  great  widening  of  the  bed ; 
V,  the  venous  side,  showing  the  gradual  increase  toward  the  heart. 


may  be  expressed,  therefore,  by  a  curve  such  as  is  shown  in  Fig. 
177. 

Explanation  of  the  Variations  in  Velocity. — The  general  rela- 
tionship between  the  velocities  in  the  different  parts  of  the  vascular 
system  is  explained  by  the  difference  in  the  width  of  the  bed  in 
which  the  blood  flows.  In  the  systemic  circulation  the  main  stem, 
the  aorta, branches  into  arteries  which,  taken  individually,  are  smaller 


440  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH, 

and  smaller  as  we  approach  the  capillaries.  But  each  time  that 
an  artery  branches  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  two  branches  is 
greater  than  that  of  the  main  stem.  The  arterial  system  may  be 
compared,  in  fact,  to  a  tree,  the  sum  of  the  cross-areas  of  all  the 
twigs  is  greater  than  that  of  the  main  trunk.  It  follows,  there- 
fore, that  the  blood  as  it  passes  to  the  capillaries  flows  in  a  bed 
or  is  distributed  in  a  bed  which  becomes  wider  and  wider,  and  as  it 
returns  to  the  heart  in  the  veins  it  is  collected  into  a  bed  that  be- 
comes smaller  as  we  approach  the  heart.  Vierordt  estimates  that 
the  combined  calibers  of  all  the  capillaries  in  the  systemic  circula- 
tion would  make  a  tube  with  a  cross-area  about  800  times  as  large  as 
the  aorta.  If  the  circulation  is  proceeding  uniformly  it  follows 
that  for  any  given  unit  of  time  the  same  volume  of  blood  must 
pass  through  any  given  cross-section  of  the  system, — that  is,  at 
a  given  point  in  the  aorta  or  vena  cava  as  much  blood  must  flow 
by  in  a  second  as  passes  through  the  capillary  region,  and  that 
consequently  where  the  cross-section  or  bed  is  widest  the  velocity 
is  correspondingly  diminished.  If  the  capillary  bed  is  800  times 
that  of  the  aorta,  then  the  velocity  in  the  capillaries  is  -g^Q-  of  that 
in  the  aorta, — say,  -g-g-Q-  of  320  mms.  or  0.4  mm.  Just  as  a  stream 
of  water  flowing  under  a  constant  head  reaches  its  greatest  velocity 
where  its  bed  is  narrowest  and  flows  more  slowly  where  the  bed 
widens  to  the  dimensions  of  a  pool  or  lake. 

Variations  in  Velocity  with  Changes  in  the  Heart-beat  or 
the  Size  of  the  Vessels. — While  the  above  statement  holds  true  as 
an  explanation  of  the  general  relationship  between  the  velocities  in 
the  arteries,  veins,  and  capillaries  at  any  given  moment,  the  absolute 
velocities  in  the  different  parts  of  the  system  will,  of  course,  vary 
whenever  any  of  the  conditions  acting  upon  the  blood-flow  vary. 
In  the  large  arteries,  as  has  been  said,  there  are  extreme  fluctuations 
in  velocity  at  each  heart  beat ;  but  if  we  consider  only  the  average 
velocities  it  may  be  said  that  these  will  vary  throughout  the  system 
with  the  force  and  rate  of  the  heart  I^eat,  or  with  the  variations  in 
size  of  the  caliber  of  the  small  arteries  and  the  resulting  changes  in 
blood-pressure  in  the  arteries.  Marey*  gives  the  two  following 
laws:  (1)  Whatever  increases  or  diminishes  the  force  with  which 
the  blood  is  driven  from  the  heart  toward  the  periphery  will  cause 
the  velocity  of  the  blood  and  the  pressure  in  the  arteries  to  vary  in 
the  same  sense.  (2)  Whatever  increases  or  diminishes  the  resis- 
tance offered  to  the  blood  in  passing  from  the  arteries  (to  the  veins) 
will  cause  the  velocity  and  the  arterial  pressure  to  vary  in  an  inverse 
sense  as  regards  each  other.  That  is,  an  increased  resistance 
diminishes  the  velocity  in  the  arteries  while  increasing  the  pressure,, 
and  vice  versa. 

*  "La  Circulation  du  Sang,"  Paris,  1881,  p.  321. 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF   BLOOD-FLOW.  441 

The  Time  Necessary  for  a  Complete  Circulation  of  the 
Blood. — It  is  a  matter  of  interest  in  connection  with  many  physio- 
logical questions  to  have  an  approximate  idea  of  the  time  necessary 
for  the  blood  to  make  a  complete  circuit  of  the  vascular  system, — 
that  is,  starting  from  any  one  point  to  determine  how  long  it  will 
take  for  a  particle  of  blood  to  arrive  again  at  the  same  spot.  In 
considering  such  a  question  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  many 
different  paths  are  open  to  the  blood,  and  that  the  time  for  a 
complete  circulation  will  vary  somewhat  with  the  circuit  actually 
followed.  For  example,  blood  leaving  the  left  ventricle  may  pass 
through  the  coronary  system  to  the  right  heart  and  thence  through 
the  pulmonary  system  to  the  left  heart  again,  or  it  may  pass  to  the 
extremities  of  the  toes  before  getting  to  the  right  heart,  or  it  may  pass 
through  the  intestines,  in  which  case  it  will  have  to  traverse  three 
capillary  areas  before  completing  the  circuit.  It  is  obvious,  there- 
fore, that  any  figures  obtained  can  only  be  regarded  as  averages 
more  or  less  exact.  The  experiments  that  have  been  made,  however, 
are  valuable  in  indicating  how  very  rapidly  any  substance  that 
enters  the  blood  may  be  distributed  over  the  body.  The  method 
first  employed  by  Hering  (1829)  was  to  inject  into  the  jugular  vein, 
of  one  side  a  solution  of  potassium  ferrocyanid,  and  then  from  time 
to  time  specimens  of  blood  were  taken  from  the  jugular  vein  of  the 
opposite  side.  The  first  specimen  in  which  the  ferrocyanid  could  be 
detected  by  its  reaction  with  iron  salts  gave  the  least  time  necessary 
for  a  complete  circuit.  The  method  was  subsequently  improved  in. 
its  technical  details  by  Vierordt,  and  such  results  as  the  following 
were  obtained :  Dog,  16.32  seconds;  horse,  28.8  seconds;  rabbit,  7.46 
seconds  ;  man  (calculated),  23  seconds.  The  time  required  is  less  in 
the  small  than  in  the  large  animals,  and  Hering  and  Vierordt  con- 
cluded that  in  general  it  requires  from  26  to  28  beats  of  the  heart  to 
effect  a  complete  circulation.  Stewart  has  devised  a  simpler  and 
better  method,*  based  upon  the  electrical  conductivity  of  the  blood. 
If  a  solution  of  a  neutral  salt,  such  as  sodium  chlorid,  more  concen- 
trated than  the  blood,  is  injected  into  it,  the  conductivity  is  in- 
creased. If  the  injection  is  made  at  a  given  moment  and  a  portion  of 
the  vessel  to  be  examined  is  properly  connected  with  a  galvanometer 
so  as  to  measure  the  electrical  conductivity  through  it,  then  the 
instant  that  the  solution  of  salt  reaches  this  latter  vessel  the  fact 
will  be  indicated  by  a  deflection  of  the  galvanometer.  Using  this 
method,  Stewart  was  able  to  show  that  in  the  lesser  circulation 
(the  pulmonary  circuit)  the  velocity  is  very  great  compared  with 
that  of  the  systemic  circulation — only  about  -5-  of  the  time  required 
for  a  complete  circuit  is  spent  in  the  lesser  circulation.  Attention 
may  also  be  called  to  the  fact  that  the  important  part  of  the  cir- 
*  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  15,  1,  1894. 


442  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

culation,  as  regards  the  nutritive  activity  of  the  blood,  is  the  capil- 
lary path.  It  is  while  flowing  through  the  capillaries  that  the  chief 
exchange  of  gases  and  food  material  takes  place.  The  average 
length  of  a  capillary  is  estimated  at  0.5  mm. ;  so  that  with  a  velocity 
of  0.5  mm.  per  second  the  average  duration  of  the  flow  of  any  par- 
ticle of  blood  through  the  capillary  area  is  only  about  1  sec. 

The  Pressure  Relations  in  the  Vascular  System. — That  the 
blood  is  under  different  pressures  in  the  several  parts  of  the  vascu- 
lar system  has  long  been  known  and  is  easily  demonstrated.  When 
an  artery  is  cut  the  blood  flows  out  in  a  forcible  stream  and  with 
spurts  corresponding  to  the  heart  beats.  When  a  large  vein  is 
wounded,  on  the  contrary,  although  the  blood  flows  out  rapidly, 
the  stream  has  little  force.  Exact  measurements  of  the  hydrostatic 
pressure  under  which  the  blood  exists  in  the  large  arteries  and  veins 
were  first  published  by  Rev.  Dr.  Stephen  Hales,  an  English  clergy- 
man, in  his  famous  book  entitled  "Statical  Essays,  containing 
Hsemostaticks,"  1733.*  This  observer  measured  the  static  pressure 
of  the  blood  in  the  arteries  and  veins  by  the  simplest  direct  method 
possible.  After  tying  the  femoral  artery  in  a  horse  he  connected 
it  to  a  glass  tube  9  feet  in  length.  On  opening  the  vessel  the  blood 
mounted  in  the  tube  to  a  height  of  8  feet  3  inches,  showing  that 
normally  in  the  closed  artery  the  blood  is  under  a  tension  or  pressure 
sufficient  to  support  the  weight  of  a  column  of  blood  of  this  height. 
A  similar  experiment  made  upon  the  vein  showed  a  rise  of  only  12 
inches. 

Methods  of  Recording  Blood-pressure. — Since  Hales's  work 
the  chief  improvements  in  method  which  have  marked  and  caused 
the  development  of  this  part  of  the  subject  have  been  the  application 
of  the  mercury  manometer  by  Poiseuillef  (1828),  the  invention  of 
the  recording  manometer  and  kymographion  by  Ludwigf  (1847), 
and  the  later  numerous  improvements  by  many  physiologists,  and 
latterly  the  development  of  methods  for  measuring  blood-pressures 
directly  in  man.  The  Hales  method  of  measuring  arterial  pressure 
directly  in  terms  of  a  column  of  blood  is  inconvenient  on  account 
of  the  great  height,  large  fluctuations,  and  rapid  clotting.  The 
two  former  disadvantages  are  overcome  by  using  a  column  of  mer- 
cury. Since  this  metal  is  13.5  times  as  heavy  as  blood,  the  column 
which  will  be  supported  by  the  blood  will  be  correspondingly  shorter 
and  all  the  fluctuations  will  be  similarly  reduced.  Poiseuille 
placed  the  mercury  in  a  U  tube  of  the  general  form  shown  in  Fig. 
178,  M.     One  leg  was  connected  with  the  interior  of  an  artery  by 

*  For  an  account  of  the  life  and  works  of  this  physiologist  see  Dawson, 
"The  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Bulletin,"  vol.  xv,  Nos.  159  to  161,  1904. 
t  Poiseuille,  "Recherches  sur  la  force  du  coeur  aortique."    Paris,  1828. 
{  Ludwig,  "Miiller's  Archiv  f.  Anatomie,  Physiologie,  etc.,"  1847,  p.  242. 


VELOCITY    AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW. 


443 


appropriate  tubing  filled  with  liquid  and  when  the  clamp  was 
removed  from  the  vessel  its  pressure  displaced  the  mercury  in  the 
limbs  by  a  certain  amount.  The  difference  in  height  between  the 
levels  of  the  mercury  in  the  two  limbs  in  each  experiment  gives  the 
blood  pressure,  which  is  therefore  usually  expressed  as  being  equal 
to  so  many  millimeters  of  mercury.  By  this  expresion  it  is  meant 
that  the  pressure  within  the  artery  is  able  to  support  a  column 


Fig.  178. — A,  Schema  to  show  the  recording  mercury  manometer  and  its  connection 
with  the  artery:  M,  The  manometer  with  the  position  of  the  mercury  represented  in  black 
(the  pressure  is  given  by  the  distance  in  millimeters  between  the  levels  1  and  2;  one-half  of 
this  distance  is  recorded  on  the  kymographion  by  the  pen,  P) ;  F,  the  float  resting  upon  the 
surface  of  the  mercury;  G,  the  cap  through  which  the  stem  carrying  the  pen  moves;  E,  offset 
for  driving  air  out  of  the  manometer  and  for  filling  or  washing  out  the  tube  to  the  artery; 
R,  the  receptacle  containing  the  solution  of  sodium  carbonate;  c.  the  cannula  for  insertion 
into  the  artery;   w,  the  washout  arrangement  shown  in  detail  in  B. 

B,  The  washout  cannula:  c,  the  glass  cannula  inserted  into  the  artery;  r,  the  stem 
connected  with  the  reservoir  of  carbonate  solution ;  o,  the  stem  C9nnected  with  the  manom- 
eter. The  arrows  show  the  current  of  carbonate  solution  during  the  process  of  washing 
out,  the  artery  at  that  time  being  closed  by  a  clamp. 


of  mercury  that  many  millimeters  in  height,  and  by  multiplying 
this  value  by  13.5  the  pressure  can  be  obtained,  when  desirable, 
in  terms  of  a  column  of  blood  or  water.  For  continuous  obser- 
vations and  permanent  records  the  height  of  the  column  of  mercury 
and  its  variations  during  an  experiment  are  recorded  by  the  device 
represented  in  Fig.  1.78. 

The  distal  limb  of  the  U  tube  in  which  the  mercury  rises  carries  afloat 
cf  hard  rubber,  aluminum,  or  some  other  substance  lighter  than  the  mercury. 


444  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

The  float  in  turn  bears  an  upright  steel  wire  which  at  the  end  of  the  glass  tube 
plays  through  a  small  opening  in  a  metal  or  glass  cap.  At  its  free  end  it  bears 
a  pen  to  trace  the  record.  If  smoked  paper  is  used  the  pen  is  simply  a  smooth- 
pointed  glass  or  metal  arm,  while  if  white  paper  is  employed  the  wire  carries 
a  small  glass  pen  with  a  capillary  tube,  which  writes  the  record  in  ink.  The 
tube  connecting  the  proximal  end  of  the  manometer  to  the  artery  of  the  ani- 
mal must  be  filled  with  a  solution  that  retards  the  coagulation  of  blood.  For 
this  purpose  one  employs  ordinarily  a  saturated  solution  of  sodium  carbonate 
and  bicarbonate.  This  tube  is  connected  also  by  a  T  piece  to  a  reservoir  con- 
taining the  carbonate  solution,  and  by  varying  the  height  of  this  latter  the 
pressure  in  the  tube  and  the  manometer  may  be  adjusted  beforehand  to  the 
pressure  that  is  supposed  or  known  to  exist  in  the  artery  under  experiment. 
By  this  means  the  blood,  when  connections  are  made  with  the  manometer, 
does  not  penetrate  far  into  the  tube,  and  clotting  is  thereby  delayed.  In 
long  observations  it  is  most  convenient  to  use  what  is  known  as  a  washout 
cannula, — the  structure  of  which  is  represented  in  Fig.  178,  B.  When  this 
instrument  is  attached  to  the  cannula  inserted  into  the  blood-vessel  one  can, 
after  first  clamping  off  the  artery,  wash  out  the  connections  between  the  artery 
and  the  manometer  with  fresh  carbonate  solution  as  often  as  desired.  By 
such  means  continuous  records  of  arterial  pressure  may  be  obtained  during 
many  hours.  Determinations  of  the  pressure  in  the  veins  may  be  made  with 
similar  apparatus,  but  owing  to  the  low  values  that  prevail  on  this  side  of 
the  circulation  it  is  more  convenient  to  use  some  form  of  water  manometer 
and  thus  record  the  venous  pressures  in  terms  of  the  height  of  the  water  column 
supported.  It  should  be  added  also  that  when  it  is  necessary  to  know  the 
pressure  in  any  special  artery  or  vein  the  connections  of  the  manometer  are 
made  usually  ito  a  side  branch  opening  more  or  less  at  right  angles  into  the 
vessel  under  investigation,  or  if  this  is  not  possible  then  a  "f  tube  is  inserted 
and  the  manometer  is  connected  with  the  side  branch.  The  reason  for  this 
procedure  is  that  if  the  artery  itself  is  ligated  and  the  manometer  is  con- 
nected with  its  central  stump,  the  flow  in  it  and  its  dependent  system  of  capil- 
laries and  veins  is  cut  off;  the  stump  of  the  artery  constitutes  simply  a 
continuation  of  the  tube  from  the  manometer  and  serves  as  a  side  connection 
to  the  intact  artery  from  which  it  arises.  Thus,  when  a  manometer  is  inserted 
into  the  carotid  artery  the  pressure  that  is  measured  is  that  of  the  innominate 
or  aorta  from  which  it  arises,  while  a  cannula  in  the  central  stump  of  a  femoral 
artery  measures  the  pressure  in  the  iliac.  A  specimen  of  what  is  known  as 
a  blood-pressure  record  is  shown  in  Fig.  179.  The  exact  pressure  at  any 
instant,  in  millimeters  of  mercury,  is  obtained  by  measuring  the  distance 
between  the  base  line  and  the  record  and  multiplying  by  two.  The  base 
line  represents  the  position  of  the  recording  pen  when  it  is  at  its  zero 
position  for  the  conditions  of  the  experiment.  It  is  necessary  to  multiply 
the  distance  between  the  base  line  and  the  record  by  two  because,  as  is  seen 
in  Fig.  178,  the  recording  apparatus  measures  only  the  rise  of  the  mercury 
in  one  limb  of  the  manometer;  there  is,  of  course,  an  equal  fall  in  the  other- 
limb. 

The  blood-pressure  record  (Fig.  179)  shows  usually  large  rhyth- 
mical variations  corresponding  to  the  respiratory  movements  and  in 
addition  smaller  waves  caused  by  the  heart  beat.  The  causes  of  the 
respiratory  waves  in  pressure  are  discussed  in  the  section  on  respi- 
ration. Regarding  the  heart  waves  or  pulse  waves  the  usual  record 
obtained  b}''  means  of  a  mercury  manometer  gives  an  entirely  false 
picture  of  the  extent  of  the  variations  in  pressure  caused  by  the  heart 
beat.  The  mass  of  mercury  possesses  considerable  weight  and  iner- 
tia, which  unfits  it  for  following  accurately  very  rapid  changes  in 
pressure.  When  the  pressure  changes  are  slow,  as  in  the  case  of 
the  long,  respiratory  waves  seen  in  the  record,  the  manometer  un- 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW.  445 

doubtedly  indicates  their  extent  with  entire  accuracy.  But  when 
these  changes  are  very  rapid,  as  in  the  beat  of  a  dog's  or  rabbit's 
heart,  the  mercury  does  not  register  either  extreme  in  the  variation, 
but  tends  to  record  the  mean  or  average  pressure.  The  full  extent 
of  the  variations  in  arterial  pressure  caused  by  the  heart  beat  can  be 


Fig.  179. — Typical  blood  pressure  record  with  mercury  manometer:  Bp,  The  record 
showing  the  heart  beats  and  the  larger  curves  due  to  the  respirations  (respiratory  waves 
of  blood-pressure)  and  still  longer  waves  due  to  vasomotor  changes;  T,  the  time  line,  giving 
the  time  in  seconds.  The  actual  arterial  pressure  at  any  moment  is  the  distance  from  the 
base  line — that  is,  the  line  of  zero  pressure — to  the  blood-pressure  line,  multiplied  by  two. 
These  values  are  indicated  in  the  vertical  line  drawn  to  the  right,  which  shows  that  the 
average  pressure  at  the  time  of  the  experiment  was  100  mms.  Hg.  The  small  size  of  the 
variations  in  pressure  due  to  each  heart  beat  is  altogether  a  false  picture  due  to  the  inertia 
of  the  mercury,  its  inability  to  follow  completely  the  quick  change.  Each  heart  beat, 
instead  of  being  smaller,  should  be  larger  than  the  respiratory  waves. 


determined  by  other  means  (see  below),  and,  if  the  knowledge  thus 
obtained  is  applied  to  the  correction  of  the  record  of  the  mercury 
manometer,  the  tracing  given  in  Fig.  179  should  have,  so  far  as  the 
heart  beats  are  concerned,  somewhat  the  appearance  shown  in  Fig. 
180.  This  latter  figure  gives  a  more  accurate  mental  picture  of 
the  actual  conditions  of  pressure  in  the  large  arteries,  as  influenced  by 


446  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

the  heart  beat.  These  arteries  are,  in  fact,  subject  to  very  rapid  and 
very  extensive  changes  in  pressure  at  each  beat  of  the  heart,  and 
these  changes  are  naturally  more  pronounced  when  the  force  of  the 
heart  beat  is  increased, — for  instance,  by  muscular  exercise. 

Systolic,  Diastolic,  and  Mean  Arterial  Pressure. — As  stated 
in  the  last  paragraph,  the  arterial  pressure  in  the  larger  arteries 
undergoes  extensive  variations  with  each  heart  beat.  The  maxi- 
mum pressure  caused  by  the  systole  of  the  heart,  the  apex  of  the 
pulse  wave,  is  spoken  of  as  systolic  pressure;  the  minimum  pressure 
in  the  artery — that  is,  the  pressure  at  the  end  of  the  diastole  of  the 
heart,  or  the  bottom  of  the  pulse- wave,  is  known  as  the  diastolic 
pressure.  In  a  dog  under  ordinary  conditions  of  experimentation 
the  systolic  (lateral)  pressure  in  the  aorta  may  be  as  much  as  168 
mms.,  while  the  diastolic  pressure  is  only  100  mms.     In  man  the 


<Si/stolic  or  maa^^/mMfTL. 

tlOmm. 

-/                                               /\               /\              /\ 

7rL>a^                                 \              \        /    \ 

1  \J  \/  \ 

Somnt.- 

ihaj-itrUc  or  yiwrmruci-ft. 

■  iOmnu 

.  Jfomnt. 

-  zomitL. 

3 use  line 

Fig.  180. — Schematic  representation  of  the  pressure  change  caused  by  each  heart 
beat.  The  schema  represents  three  heart  beats  supposed  to  be  recorded  on  a  rapidly  moving 
surface  by  a  manometer  delicate  enough  to  follow  the  pressure  changes  accurately.  The 
top  of  the  pulse  wave  measures  the  systolic  pressure ;    the  bottom  the  diastolic  pressure. 

systolic  pressure  as  measured  in  the  brachial  artery  may  be  taken 
in  round  numbers  as  equal  to  110  mms.,  while  the  diastolic  pressure 
is  only  65  mms.  The  difference  between  the  systolic  and  the 
diastolic  pressure  has  been  designated  conveniently  as  the  pulse 
pressure.  It  measures,  of  course,  the  variation  in  pressure  in  any 
given  artery  caused  by  the  heart  beat,  and  so  far  as  that  artery  is 
concerned  it  gives  the  force  of  the  heart  beat.  From  the  figures 
given  above  it  will  be  seen  that  the  pulse  pressure  in  the  brachial 
artery  of  man  averages  45  mms.  Hg.  Each  systole  of  the  heart 
distends  this  artery,  therefore,  by  a  sudden  increase  in  pressure 
equal  to  the  weight  of  a  column  of  mercury  45  mms.  high.  As 
we  go  outward  in  the  arterial  tree  the  pulse  pressure  becomes  less 
and  less,  the  oscillations  in  pressure  with  each  heart  beat  are  less 
marked,  until  finally  in  the  smallest  arteries  and  capillaries  and  in 
the  veins  there  is  no  pulse  wave,  and  no  difference  between  systolic 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF   BLOOD-FLOW. 


447 


and  diastolic  pressure.  In  speaking  of  the  pressure  in  the  blood- 
vessels we  refer  usually  to  what  is  called  the  mean  pressure.  It  is 
obvious  that,  so  far  as  the  larger  arteries  are  concerned,  the  mean 
pressure  is  only  a  convenient  expression  for  the  average  pressure 
during  a  certain  period.  If  we  know  at  any  moment  the  systolic 
and  the  diastolic  pressure  in  an  artery  we  can  estimate  the  mean 
pressure  with  approximate  accuracy  by  taking  the  arithmetical  mean 
of  the  two  figures.  In  physiological  observations,  as  a  rule,  no 
attempt  is  made  to  estimate  the  mean  pressure  for  any  given  time 
with  mathematical  accuracy.  In  the  ordinary  tracing  as  given  by  the 
mercury  manometer  (Fig.  179)  the  mean  pressure  for  any  given  period 
during  which  the  variations  have  been  symmetrical  and  not  ex- 
treme is  estimated  from  the  arithmetical  mean  of  the  highest  and 
lowest  points  reached.    When  desirable,  the  mean  pressure  may  be 


Fig.  181. — Schema  to  indicate  the  general  relations  of  systolic,  mean,  and  diastolic 
pressures  throughout  the  arterial  system :  s.  Systolic ;  m,  mean ;  d,  diastolic ;  c,  pressure 
at  beginning  of  the  capillaries.  The  distance  from  s  to  d  represents  the  pulse  pressure  at 
different  parts  of  the  arterial  system. 


recorded  by  introducing  a  resistance  (narrowing  the  tube)  between 
the  artery  and  the  manometer.  The  latter  will  then  record  mean 
pressure  and  show  no  variations  with  the  heart  beat.  A  general 
idea  of  the  variations  in  systolic,  diastolic,  and  mean  pressure, 
as  also  pulse  pressure  throughout  the  arterial  system,  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  schema  given  in  Fig.  181. 

Method  of  Measuring  Systolic  and  Diastolic  Pressure  in 
Animals. — In  animals  in  which  the  manometer  may  be  connected 
directly  with  the  artery  the  systolic  and  diastolic  pressures  may  be 
obtained  in  one  of  two  general  ways:  (1)  By  using  some  form  of 
pressure  recorder  or  manometer  sufficiently  mobile  to  follow  very 
quick  changes  of  pressure.  (2)  By  using  a  mercury  manometer 
provided  with  maximum  and  minimum  valves.  Of  the  manometers 
that  have  been  devised  to  register  accurately  the  quick  changes  in 
pressure  due  to  the  heart  beat,  the  two  that  are  most  frequently 


448 


CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 


referred  to  in  physiological  literature  are  the  spring  manometer  of 
Fick*  and  the  membrane  manometer  of  Hiirthle.f 

The  Fick  manometer  is  shown  in  Fig.  182.  It  consists  of  a  flat,  hollow 
metallic  spring  bent  into  the  form  of  a  C.  The  interior  is  filled  with  liquid 
and  is  connected  by  rigid  tubing,  also  filled  with  liquid,  with  the  interior  of 
the  artery.  The  variations  of  pressure  in  the  artery  are  transmitted  to  the 
interior  of  the  spring  and  tend  to  straighten  it,  thus  causing  corresponding 
movements  of  the  free  end.  Before  or  after  using  this  instrument  it  must  be 
calibrated, — that  is,  the  variations  in  movement  must  be  given  absolute  values 
in  terms  of  millimeters  of  mercury  by  ascertaining  directly  the  extent  of  move- 
ment caused  by  known  pressures.  The  Hiirthle  manometer  is  more  frequently 
used  at  present.  The  principle  made  use  of  in  this  instrument  is  illustrated 
by  the  diagram  in  Fig.  183.  The  instrument  consists  essentially  of  a  small 
box  or  tambour  of  very  limited  capacity;   the  top  of  the  tambour  is  covered 


Fig.  182. — The  spring  manometer  of  Fick  (after  Langendorff) :  f,  The  flat  metal 
tube  filled  with  liquid;  r,  the  lead  tube  connecting  with  the  artery;  h,  h,  h,  the  lever 
mechanism  of  light  wood  communicating  the  movements  of  /  to  the  writing  point,  s;  p,  a 
small  disc  immersed  in  a  vessel  of  oil  to  still  further  dampen  the  inertia  swings. 


with  thin  rubber  dam  and  the  cavity  is  filled  with  liquid  and  connected  by 
rigid  tubing,  also  filled  with  liquid,  with  the  interior  of  the  artery  or  heart. 
Variations  in  pressure  in  the  artery  are  transmitted  through  the  column  of 
liquid  to  the  rubber  membrane  of  the  tambour,  and  the  movements  of  this 
latter  are  greatly  magnified  by  a  sensitive  lever  attached  to  it.  The  liquid 
conduction  and  the  small  size  of  the  tambour,  which  prevents  any  notice- 
able outflow  of  liquid,  combine  to  give  a  sensitive  and  very  prompt  record  of 
pressure  changes.  It  is  also  necessary  to  calibrate  this  instrument  whenever 
used  in  order  to  give  absolute  values  to  the  records  obtained.  A  specimen 
of  a  blood-pressure  record  obtained  with  this  instrument  is  shown  in  Fig.  185. 
It  will  be  noticed  that  the  size  of  the  heart  beat,  relative  to  the  distance  from 
the  base  line  is  much  greater  than  in  the  record  obtained  with  the  mercury 
manometer,  Fig.  179. 

*  Fick,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologic,"  1864,  p.  583. 

t  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologic,"  49,  45,  1891. 


VELOCITY    AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW. 


449 


.S 


^ 


Fig.  183. — Diagram  showing  construction  of  Hiirthle's  manometer. — (After  Curtis.) 
The  interior  of  the  heart  of  the  artery  is  connected  by  rigid  tubing  to  a  very  small  tambour, 
7\  The  tubing  and  the  tambour  are  filled  with  liquid.  The  movements  of  the  rubber  dam 
covering  the  tambour  are  greatly  magnified  by  a  compound  lever,  S.  The  tendency  of  this 
lever  to  "fling"  may  be  prevented  by  an  arrangement  not  shown  in  the  diagram.  The 
essential  principles  of  the  recorder  are,  first,  liquid  conduction  from  heart  to  tambour; 
second,  a  very  small  tambour  and  membrane  so  that  a  minimal  volume  of  liquid  escapes 
from  the  heart  into  the  tambour. 


/fcr/; 


'imur/t  ■ 


To  the  artery- 


ITlinlfnAMii' 


Fig.  184. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  use  of  valves  in  determining  maximum  (systolic) 
and  minimum  (diastolic)  blood-pressure.  When  stopcock  a  is  open  the  heart  beats  are 
transmitted  through  the  maximum  valve  and  the  mercury  in  the  manometer  is  prevented 
from  falling  between  beats.  The  manometer  wiU  record  the  highest  pressure  reached  during 
the  period  of  observation.  The  reverse  occurs  when  valve  h  alone  is  open. 
29 


450 


CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 


The  method  that  depends  upon  the  use  of  maximum  and  minimum  valves 
may  be  understood  by  reference  to  Fig.  184.  On  the  path  between  the  artery 
and  the  manometer  one  may  place  a  maximum  and  a  minimum  valve  so  ar- 
ranged that  the  blood-pressure  and  heart  beat  may  be  transmitted  through 
either  valve.  As  is  shown  by  the  figure,  if  the  connection  is  maintained 
through  the  maximum  valve  for  a  certain  time  tlie  highest  pressure  reached 
during  that  period  will  be  recorded,  while,  when  the  minimum  valve  is  used 
the  lowest  pressure  reached  will  be  indicated. 

Such  valves,  of  course,  act  slowly  and  can  not  be  used  to  determine  the 
maximum  and  minimum  pressure  in  the  artery  during  a  single  heart  beat; 
they  record  the  highest  and  lowest  point  reached  during  a  certain  given 
interval. 


Fig.  185. — Blood-pressure  record  from  a  dog  with  a  Hiirthle  manometer.  The  size 
of  the  heart  beats  is  relatively  much  greater  than  with  a  mercury  manometer.  In  this  case 
the  systolic  pressure  is  about  150  mms.  Hg;  the  diastolic,  100  mm.s. ;  and  the  heart  beat  or 
pulse  pressure,  50  mms. 


Actual  Data  as  to  the  Mean  Pressure  in  Arteries,  Veins, 
and  Capillaries. — The  mean  vahie  of  the  pressure  in  the  aorta 
has  been  determined  for  many  mammals.  It  is  found  that  the  actual 
figures  vary  with  the  conditions  under  which  the  results  have  been 
obtained.     Such  values  as  the  following  may  be  quoted:* 

Horse 321  mms.  to  150  mms.  Hg. 

Dog 172     "       "104      "       " 

Sheep 206     "       "156      " 

Cat 150     " 

Rabbit 108     "       "    90       " 

Man  (probable,  Tigerstedt) 150     " 

It  appears  from  these  figures  that  there  is  no  proportion  between 
the  size  of  an  animal  and  the  amount  of  mean  arterial  pressure.  It 
is  probable  that  there  may  be  a  general  relationship  between  the 
size  of  the  animal — that  is,  the  size  of  the  heart — and  the  amount 
of  pulse  pressure  or  the  oscillation  of  pressure  with  each  heart  beat, 
but  sufficient  data  are  not  at  hand  to  determine  this  point.  As 
we  pass  from  the  aorta  to  the  smaller  arteries  the  mean  pressure 
decreases  somewhat,  although  not  very  rapidly,  while  the  pulse 
pressure  decreases  also  and  to  a  more  noticeable  extent. 

*  See  Volkmann,  "Die  Haemodynamik,"  1850. 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW. 


451 


This  fact  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  186,  which  gives  a  graphic  represen- 
tation of  a  number  of  experimental  determinations  (Dawson)  of 
systolic  and  diastolic  pressures  in  the  large  arteries  of  the  dog. 

If  we  turn  to  the  other  end  of  the  vascular  system,  the  veins, 


Sb 

c- 

M 

R 

F 

P 

s 

ISO 

/ 

\, 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 



— . 

..^ 

/ 

\ 

"~ 

/ 

S 

160 

\ 

\ 

\ 

^, 

s 

m 

'^ 

\ 

^ 

^  / 

w 

^tnl 

r. 

J 



_ 





_ 

_ 

— 

-^ 

_ 





__ 

_ 

130 

-- 

-  — 

==1 

- 



— 

— - 

--% 

? 

?rtt7 

too 

N 





— 

- 1 

T? 

01 

IC 

"*■ 

^^ 

^^^ 

\ 

y^ 

"^ ' 

^ 

N 

/^ 

80 

n 

60 

4o 

' 

JU 

0  _ 

Fig.  186. — Curve  showing  the  results  of  actual  measurement  of  systolic,  diastolic,  and 
mean  pressure  (lateral  pressures)  along  the  aorta  and  femoral  of  the  dog.  The  branches 
through  which  the  lateral  pressures  were  obtained  are  indicated  as  follows:  Sb,  Left  sub- 
clavian; C-M,  celiac  and  superior  mesenteric;  R,  left  renal;  F,  left  femoral  (Ellenberger 
and  Baum),  external  iliac;  P,  profunda  branch  of  femoral;  S,  saphena.  The  pressure  in 
millimeters  is  given  along  the  ordinates  to  the  left.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  mean  and 
the  diastolic  pressures  remain  practically  the  same  throughout  the  descending  aorta  and 
into  the  femoral.  The  systolic  pressure  shows  a  marked  increase  at  the  lower  end  of 
the  aorta  and  then  falls  off  rapidly.  The  pulse  pressure  at  the  inferior  end  of  the  descend- 
mg  aorta  is  much  larger  than  at  the  arch.  —  (Dawson.) 


we  find  that  the  lowest  pressure  is  in  the  jugular  and  that  it  increases 

gradually  as  we  go  toward  the  capillary  area.      According  to  one 

observer,*  the  fall  in  pressure  from  periphery  toward  the  heart  is 

*  Burton-Opitz,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  9,  198,  1903. 


452 


CIRCULATION    OP    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 


at  the  rate  of  1  mm.  Hg  for  every  35  mms.  of  distance, 
such  figures  as  the  following: 


We  have 


Dog. 


Superior     vena     cava 
(near  auricle) = 

—2.96  mms.  Hg 

Superior     vena     cava 

more  distal = 

External  jugular  (left)  = 

Right  brachial = 

Left  facial = 

—1.38     " 

0.52  mm.      " 
3.90  mms.    " 
5.12     " 

Sheep. 

Jugular  vein 0.2  mm.    Hg. 

Facial  vein 3.0  mms.     " 

Branch  of  brachial 9.0     "         " 

Crura! 11.4     " 


At  the  heart,  therefore,  the  pressure  of  the  blood  upon  the  walls 
of  the  veins  is  nearly  nil,  and,  indeed,  owing  to  the  circumstance 
that  the  large  veins  lie  in  the  thoracic  cavity,  in  which  the  pressure 
is  below  that  of  the  atmosphere,  the  tension  of  the  blood  in  them 
may  be  slightly  negative.  To  complete  the  general  conception  of 
the  pressure  relations  in  the  vascular  system  it  is  necessary  to  know 
the  pressure  of  the  blood  in  the  smallest  arteries  and  veins  and  in  the 


Fig.  187. — Schematic  representation  of  the  general  relations  of  blood-pressure  (side 
pressure)  in  different  parts  of  the  vascular  system :  a,  The  arteries ;  c,  the  capillaries ;  v, 
the  veins.  The  mean  and  diastolic  pressures  remain  nearly  constant  in  the  arterial  system, 
as  far  as  they  can  be  measured  accurately. 


capillaries.  It  is  not  possible — in  the  case  of  the  capillaries,  for 
instance — to  connect  a  manometer  directly  with  the  vessels,  and 
recourse  has  been  had  to  a  less  direct  and  certain  method.  The 
capillary  pressure  in  different  regions  of  the  skin  has  been  estimated 
by  determining  the  pressure  necessary  to  obliterate  them — that 
is,  to  blanch  the  skin.  A  glass  plate  is  laid  upon  the  skin  or 
mucous  membrane  and  weights  are  added  until  a  distinct  change 
in  the  color  of  the  skin  is  noted.*  Knowing  the  necessary  weight  to 
produce  this  effect  and  the  area  submitted  to  compression,  the 
pressure  may  be  expressed  in  terms  of  millimeters  of  mercury  or 
blood. 

The  following  example  may  be  used  to  illustrate  this  method;  Suppose 
that  the  glass  plate  has  an  area  of  4  sq.mms.,  and  that  to  blanch  the  skin  under 
it  a  weight  of  1  gm.  is  necessary;    1  gm.  of  water  =  1  c.c.  or    1000  c  mms. 

*  V.  Kries,  "Berechte  d.  Sachs.  Gesellschaft  d.  Wiss.  Math.-phys.  Classe," 
1875,  p.  148. 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE   OF   BLOOD-FLOW.  453 

Therefore  to  blanch  this  area  would  require  a  column  of  water  contain- 
ing 1000  c.mms.  with  a  cross-area  of  4  sq.mms.  The  height  of  this  column 
would  therefore  be  equal  to  ^-"^-^  or  250  mms.  of  water, — that  is,  18.5  mms. 
Hg. 

The  results  obtained  by  this  method  are  not  very  constant  and 
can  only  be  considered  as  approximate.  It  would  appear,  how- 
ever, that  the  pressure  lies  somewhere  between  20  and  40  mms. 
of  mercury.  Thus,  upon  the  gums  of  a  rabbit  von  Kries  found  a 
capillary  pressure  of  33  mms.  Hg. 

The  general  relations  of  the  pressures  in  arteries,  veins,  and 
capillaries  may  be  expressed  in  a  curve  such  as  is  shown  in  Fig. 
187. 

The  Method  of  Determining  Blood-pressure  in  the  Large 
Arteries  of  Man, — It  is  a  matter  of  interest  and  practical  impor- 
tance to  ascertain  even  approximately  the.  arterial  pressure  in  man 
and  its  variations  in  health  and  disease.  The  first  practical  method 
for  determining  this  point  upon  man  was  suggested  by  von  Basch 
(1887),  who' devised  an  instrument  for  this  purpose,  the  sphygmo- 
manometer. Since  that  time  a  number  of  different  instruments 
have  been  described,  but  attention  may  be  called  to  two  only,  which 
are  among  the  most  recent  and  convenient.  In  the  first  place,  it 
must  be  clearly  recognized  that  the  arterial  pressure  in  the  large 
arteries  of  man  shows  marked  variations  with  the  heart  beat;  the 
pressure  during  the  beat  of  the  heart  rises  suddenly  to  a  much  higher 
level  than  during  the  diastole.  The  relation  of  the  systolic  (or 
maximum)  and  diastolic  (or  minimum)  pressures  is  indicated  by  the 
diagram  in  Fig.  181.  The  instruments  that  have  been  invented  for 
determining  human  blood-pressure  are  in  reality  adapted  more  or 
less  accurately  to  determine  one  or  the  other  or  both  of  these  pres- 
sures. No  instrument  has  been  devised  for  determining  the  mean 
pressure,  and,  indeed,  from  a  physiological  standpoint  such  an 
instrument  would  not  be  so  valuable  as  one  that  gives  us  the 
figures  corresponding  to  the  systolic  and  the  diastolic  pressures 
and  thus  allows  us  to  calculate  an  approximate  mean.  For  it  is 
evident  that  in  the  latter  case  we  should  be  in  possession  of  more 
data  with  which  to  analyze  the  causes  for  any  given  variation  in 
pressure.  The  principle  of  determining  the  systolic  pressure  alone 
is  very  simple:  it  consists  in  determining  the  amount  of  pressure 
necessary  to  completely  obliterate  the  artery, — that  is,  to  prevent 
a  pulse  from  passing  through  the  region  under  compression.  This 
principle  was  used  originally  by  von  Basch,  but  its  application  has 
been  made  perhaps  most  successfvilly  in  the  simple  apparatus 
suggested  by  Riva-Rocci,  which  is  adapted  especially  for  measure- 
ments of  pressure  in  the  brachial  artery.  One  form  of  this  instru- 
ment is  represented  in  Fig.  188. 


454 


CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 


The  leather  or  canvas  band,  a,  is  buckled  snugly  around  the  arm.  On 
the  inner  surface  of  this  band  there  is  a  rubber  bag  which  communicates  with 
the  mercury  manometer,  d,  and  the  pressure  bulb,  c.  When  the  band  is  in 
place  rhythmical  compressions  of  c  will  force  air  into  the  rubber  bag  surround- 
ing the  arm.  This  bag  is  blown  up  and  exerts  pressure  upon  the  arm  and 
through  the  arm  tissue  upon  the  brachial  artery.  The  amount  of  pressure 
that  is  being  exerted  upon  the  arm  is  indicated  at  any  moment  by  the  mer- 


d 


Fig.  188. — Figure  of  the  Riva-Rocci  apparatus  (Sahli):  a,  The  leather  collar  with 
inside  rubber  bag  to  go  on  the  arm ;  c,  the  bulb  for  blowing  up  the  rubber  bag  and  thus 
compressing  the  artery;  d,  the  manometer  dipping  into  the  reservoir  of  mercury,  b,  to  meas- 
sure  the  amount  of  pressure. 

cury  manometer.  The  moment  of  obliteration  of  the  artery  is  determined 
by  feeling  (or  recording)  the  pulse  in  the  radial  artery.  The  moment  that 
this  pulse  disappears,  as  the  pressure  upon  the  brachial  is  raised,  indicates  the 
maximum  or  systolic  pressure  in  the  brachial  artery.  As  the  pressure  is  low- 
ered again  the  pulse  reappears.  Among  other  sources  of  error  involved  in 
this  method  it  is  to  be  remembered  that  the  tactile  sensibility  is  not  sufficiently 
delicate  to  detect  a  minimal  pulse  in  the  artery.     Other  methods  of  determin- 


o 


-^ 


>^ 


Fig.  189. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  fact  that  when  the  pressure  upon  the  outside  of  the 
artery  is  equal  to  the  diastolic  pressure  the  pulse  wave  will  cause  a  maximal  expansion  of 
the  artery:  a  represents  the  normal  artery  distended  by  diastolic  blood-pressure;  the  dotted 
lines  indicate  the  additional  expansion  caused  by  the  pulse  wave ;  b  represents  the  artery 
when  compressed  by  an  outside  pressure  equal  to  the  diastolic  pressure  within;  the  artery 
then  takes  the  size  of  an  empty  artery  kept  patent  by  the  rigidity  of  its  walls.  The  pulse 
wave,  on  reaching  this  section,  finds  a  relaxed  wall  and  causes,  therefore,  a  maximum 
extension. 


ing  the  systolic  pressure  (see  below)  indicate,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  that  the 
pulse  continues  some  time  after  an  individual  of  average  tactile  sensibility  is 
unable  to  detect  it. 

To  determine  the  diastolic  pressure  is  more  difficult  and  requires  some- 
what more  apparatus.  The  principle  employed  was  first  suggested  by  Marey 
and  first  practically  applied  by  Mosso.*     The  method  consists  in  recording 

*  "Archives  itafiennes  de  biologie,"  23,  177,  1895. 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF   BLOOD-FLOW.  455 

by  some  means  the  pulsations  of  the  artery  under  different  pressures  and  de- 
termining under  what  pressure  the  maximal  pulsations  are  given.  This  pres- 
sure should  be  equal  to  the  diastolic  pressure  within  the  artery.  The  prin- 
ciple involved  may  be  illustrated  by  the  accompanying  figure  (Fig.  189). 

Let  a  represent  a  longitudinal  section  of  an  artery  distended  by  normal 
diastolic  arterial  pressure.  At  each  heart  beat  the  force  of  the  pulse  will  dis- 
tend the  artery  still  more,  as  represented  by  the  dotted  lines,  and  this  in- 
crease in  size  may  be  measured  by  proper  transmitting  apparatus.  If  now 
pressure  is  brought  to  bear  upon  the  outside  of  the  artery  its  lumen 
will  be  diminished  as  the  outside  pressure  is  increased,  and  when  this  pres- 
sure is  equal  to  the  diastolic  blood-pressure  within  the  artery  one  will  neu- 
tralize the  other,  and  the  diameter  of  the  artery  will  be  equal  to  that  assumed 
when  the  vessel  contains  blood  under  no  pressure  and  is  kept  patent  only  by 
the  stiffness  of  its  walls  (6).  Under  this  condition  the  pulse  wave  when  it 
traverses  this  portion  of  the  vessel  finds  its  walls  completely  relaxed,  as  it 
were,  and  the  force  of  the  heart  wave  will  consequently  cause  a  greater  dis- 
tension of  the  arterial  walls  and  a  larger  pulse  wave  in  the  recording  ap- 
paratus. If  the  outside  pressure  is  increased  beyond  the  amount  of  diastolic 
pressure  it  will  not  only  neutralize  this  latter,  but  will  tend  to  overcome  the 
stiffness  of  the  arterial  wall.  When  the  pulse  wave  passes  through  this  stretch 
it  will  be  forced  not  only  to  distend  the  walls,  but  also  to  overcome  the  excess 


u 


Fig.  190. — Record  (Erlanger)  to  show  the  maximum  size  of  the  recorded  pulse 
wave  when  the  outside  or  extravascular  pressure  is  equal  to  the  internal  diastolic  pressure. 
The  artery  is  compressed  first  with  a  pressure  above  systolic,  sufficient  to  obliterate  the 
lumen.  As  this  pressure  is  lowered  in  steps  of  5  mms.  the  recorded  pulse  wave  increases  in 
size  to  a  maximum  and  then  again  becomes  smaller.  The  outside  pressure  with  which  the 
maximum  pulse  is  obtained  measures  the  amount  of  the  internal  diastolic  pressure  (Marey's 
principle). 

of  pressure  on  the  outside.  The  movement  of  the  walls  with  the  pulse  wave 
will  be  less  extensive  in  proportion  to  the  excess  of  pressure  on  the  outside. 
If,  therefore,  one  starts  with  an  outside  pressure  sufficient  to  obliterate  the 
artery  completely  the  recorded  pulse  wave  will  be  small.  As  this  pressure 
is  diminished,  the  pulse  waves  become  larger  up  to  a  certain  point  and  then 
decrease  again  in  size  (see  Fig.  190).  The  outside  pressure  at  which  this 
maximum  pulse  is  obtained  measures,  according  to  the  principle  stated  above, 
the  diastolic  pressure  within  the  artery.  That  the  principle  is  correct  has 
been  shown  by  direct  experiments  upon  the  exposed  artery  of  a  dog,  in  which 
the  pressure  was  measured  by  the  method  outlined  above  and  also  directly 
by  a  manometer  connected  with  the  interior  of  the  artery.*  In  such  experi- 
ments upon  man,  however,  one  condition  is  present  which  detracts  from  the 
absolute  value  of  the  results  obtained,  although,  since  it  is  substantially 
a  constant  factor,  it  does  not  seriously  interfere  with  relative  results,  that 
is,  with  observations  upon  the  variations  of  pressure  under  different  condi- 
tions. This  source  of  error  lies  in  the  fact  that  in  the  living  person  the  out- 
side pressure  can  not  be  applied  directly  to  the  arteries,  but  only  indirectly 
through  the  intervening  tissues.  These  tissues  interpose  a  certain  resistance 
to  the  pressure  exerted  from  without,  and  some  of  this  pressure  must  be  spent 

*  Howell  and  Brush,  "Proceedings  of  the  Massachusetts  Medical  Society," 
1901. 


456 


CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 


in.  overcoming  this  resistance.  The  amount  of  the  resistance  offered  b)'  the 
tissues  has  been  estimated  differently  by  various  authors,  but  probably  lies 
between  6  and  10  mms.  of  mercury, — that  is,  the  pressure  as  measured  exceeds 
the  real  diastolic  pressure  by  this  amount.  Several  instruments  have  been 
devised,  according  to  this  principle,  to  measure  diastohc  pressures,  but  the 
sphygmomanometer  described  by  Erlanger*  is  probably  the  most  complete 
and  the  most  convenient  for  actual  use.  This  instrument  is  illustrated  in 
Figs.  191  and  192. 

It  may  be  used  to  determine  both  systolic  and  diastolic  pressures. 

The  way  in  which  the  apparatus  is  used  maj^  be  understood  from  the  sche- 
matic Fig.  191 .  a  is  the  rubber  bag  which  is  buckled  upon  the  arm  bv  a  leather 
strap.  This  bag  communicates  with  the  mercury  manometer,  b,  with  a  pres- 
sure bag,  c,  through  the  two-way  stopcock,  /,  and  through  the  stopcock  d  with 
a  rubber  bag,  e,  contained  in  a  glass  chamber,  /.  This  glass  chamber  com- 
municates above  with  a  sensitive  tambour,  h,  and  by  means  of  the  stopcock 


Fig.  191. — Schema  showing  the  construction  of  the  Erlanger  apparatus:  a,  Rubber 
bag  of  the  arm  piece;  c,  bulb  for  blowing  up  this  bag  and  putting  pressure  on  the  arm;  6, 
the  manometer  for  measuring  the  pressure;  i,  two-way  stopcock  (when  turned  so  as  to 
communicate  with  the  capillary  opening,  k,  it  allows  the  pressure  in  a  U  fall  slowly) ;  e, 
a  rubber  bag  in  a  glass  chamber,  /;  e  communicates  with  a  when  stopcock  d  is  open  and 
the  pulse  waves  from  a  are  transmitted  to  e;  the  pulsations  of  e  in  turn  are  transmitted 
to  the  delicate  tambour,  h,  and  are  thus  recorded. 


g  can  be  placed  in  communication  with  the  outside  air.  The  systolic  pressure 
may  be  determined  in  two  ways :  By  one  method  only  the  mercury  manom- 
eter is  necessary,  the  instrument  corresponding  with  the  Riva-Rocci  appa- 
ratus described  above.  By  means  of  the  pressure  bag,  c,  the  bag,  a,  upon  the 
ami  is  blown  up  until  the  pressure  is  above  the  systolic  pressure  and  the  radial 
pulse  below  disappears.  By  turning  stopcock  i  properly  the  system  is  allowed 
to  communicate  with,  the  air  through  a  capillary  opening,  A*.  Consequently 
the  pressure  upon  the  artery  in  the  arm  falls  slowly,  and  by  palpating  the 
radial  artery  one  can  determine  the  pressure,  as  measured  by  the  mercury 
manometer,  at  which  the  pulse  just  gets  through.  This  pressure  will  measure 
approximately  the  systolic  pressure.  The  second  method  gives  higher  and 
doubtless  more  accurate  results.  In  this  method  the  pressure  is  at  first  raised 
above  systolic  pressure  with  stopcocks  d  and  g  open,     a,  e,  and  h  are  under 

*  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  "Proceedings  of  the  American 
Physiological  Society,"  6,  xxii,  1902;  and  "Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports," 
12,  53,  1904. 


VELOCITY    AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW. 


457 


the  same  pressure.  If  stopcock  g  is  now  turned  off,  the  pulsations  in  a  are 
transmitted  to  e  and  through  it  to  the  tambour,  h,  and  the  lever  of  the  tam- 
bour writes  these  pulsations  on  a  kymographion .  It  should  be  explained  that 
pulsations  are  obtained  even  when  the  pressure  on  the  arm  is  much  more  than 
sufficient  to  completely  obliterate  the  brachial  artery.  The  reason  for  this 
is  that  the  pulsations  of  the  central  stump  of  the  closed  artery  will  be  communi- 
cated to  bag  a.  When  the  pressure  is  suprasystolic  these  pulsations  are  small. 
If  now  the  pressure  in  the  system  is  diminished  slowly  by  turning  stopcock  i 
so  as  to  communicate  with  the  capillary  opening,  k,  it  will  be  found  that  at 
a  certain  point  the  pulsations  suddenly  increase  in  height.     This  point  marks 


Fig.  192.- 


-Erlanger  apparatus.     The  collar  for  the  arm  is  not  shown.    The  parts  may  be 
understood  by  reference  to  the  schema  given  in  Fig.  191. 


the  moment  when  the  pulse  wave  is  first  able  to  break  through  the  brachial 
artery,  and  it  gives,  therefore,  the  systolic  pressure.  After  finding  the  sys- 
tolic pressure  the  diastolic  pressure  is  obtained  by  allowing  the  pressure  to 
drop  still  further.  The  pulsations  increase  in  height  to  a  maximum  size  and 
then  decrease.  The  pressure  at  which  the  maximum  pulse  wave  is  obtained 
marks  the  diastolic  pressure.  It  is  better  perhaps  in  dropping  the  pressure 
for  this  last  purpose  to  manipulate  stopcock  i  so  as  to  drop  the  pressure  5 
mms.  at  a  time,  recording  the  pulse  wave  at  each  pressure.  In  this  way  a 
record  is  obtained  such  as  is  given  in  Fig.  190.  It  should  be  added,  also,  that 
in  order  to  keep  the  lever  of  the  tambour  horizontal  while  the  pressure  in  the 


458  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

system  is  being  lowered  there  is  a  minute  pinhole  in  the  metal  bottom  of  the 
tambour.  Through  this  pinhole  the  pressure  in  the  tambour  and  chamber, 
/,  is  kept  atmospheric  throughout,  except  during  the  quick  changes  caused 
by  the  pulse  waves.  By  means  of  this  instrument  one  can  determine  within 
a  minute  or  so  the  amount  of  the  systolic  and  diastolic  pressure  in  the  brachial 
artery,  and  also,  of  course,  the  difference  between  the  two,  the  pulse  pressure, 
which  may  be  taken  as  a  measure  of  the  force  of  the  heart  beat. 

The  Normal  Pressure  in  Man  and  its  Variations. — By  means 
of  one  or  other  of  the  instruments  devised  for  the  purpose  numerous 
results  have  been  obtained  regarding  the  blood-pressure  in  man  at 
different  ages  and  under  varying  normal  and  abnormal  conditions. 
Unfortunately  the  methods  used  have  not  always  been  complete. 
Some  authors  give  only  systolic  pressures,  for  example.  In  such  ex- 
periments also  a  troublesome  factor  is  always  the  psychical  element. 
The  mental  interest  that  the  individual  experimented  upon  takes  in 
the  procedure  almost  always  causes  a  rise  of  pressure  and  perhaps 
a  changed  heart  rate.  Results,  as  a  rule,  upon  any  individual  show 
lower  values  after  the  novelty  of  the  procedure  has  worn  off  and 
the  patient  submits  to  the  process  as  an  uninteresting  routine. 
Under  normal  conditions  Potain  *  estimated  the  systolic  pressure  in 
the  radial  of  the  adult  at  about  170  mms.  of  mercury  and  the  varia- 
tions for  different  ages  he  expressed  in  the  following  figures: 

Age 6-10         15        20         25        30        40        50        60       80 

Pressure  (systoHc)    89      135      150       170      180      190      200       210      220 

Without  the  other  side  of  the  picture — that  is,  the  diastolic  pres- 
sure and  the  force  of  the  heart  beat  (pulse  pressure) — it  is  difficult 
to  interpret  these  figures.  The  rapid  increase  up  to  maturity 
probably  represents  chiefly  the  larger  output  of  blood  from  the  heart ; 
the  slower  and  more  regular  increase  from  maturity  to  old  age  is 
due  possibly  to  the  gradual  hardening  of  the  arteries,  since  the  less 
elastic  the  arteries  become,  the  greater  will  be  the  systolic  rise  with 
each  heart  beat.  With  his  more  complete  apparatus  Erlanger 
reports  that  in  the  adult  (20  to  25),  when  the  psychical  factor  is 
excluded,  the  average  pressure  in  the  brachial  is  110  mms.,  systolic, 
and  65  mms.,  diastolic, — figures  much  lower  than  those  given  by 
Potain.  The  same  observer  reports  observations  upon  the  effect 
of  meals,  of  baths,  of  posture,  the  diurnal  rhythm,  etc.f 

The  effect  of  meals  is  particularly  instructive  in  that  it  illustrates 
admirably  the  play  of  the  compensatory  mechanisms  of  the  circu- 
lation by  means  of  which  the  heart  and  the  blood-vessels  are  ad- 
justed to  each  other's  activity.  During  a  meal  there  is  a  dilatation 
of  the  blood-vessels  in  the  abdominal  area,  or,  as  it  is  frequently 

*  "La  pression  arterielle  de  I'homme."     Paris,  1902. 
t  Erlanger  and  Hooker,  "The  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports,"  vol. 
xii,  1904. 


VELOCITY   AND    PRESSURE    OF    BLOOD-FLOW.  459 

called  in  physiology,  the  splanchnic  area,  since  it  receives  its 
vasomotor  fibers  through  the  splanchnic  nerve.  The  natural 
effect  of  this  dilatation,  if  the  other  factors  of  the  circulation 
remained  constant,  would  be  a  fall  of  pressure  in  the  aorta  and  a 
diminution  in  blood-flow  to  other  organs,  such  as  the  skin  and  the 
brain.  This  tendency  seems  to  be  compensated,  however,  by  an 
increased  output  of  blood  from  the  heart.  Observations  with  the 
sphygmomanometer  show  that  after  full  meals  there  is  a  marked 
increase  in  the  pulse  pressure,  indicating  a  more  forcible  beat  of  the 
heart.  So  far  as  the  effect  on  the  heart  is  concerned,  the  result  of  a 
meal  is  similar  to  that  of  muscular  exercise,  and  this  reaction  may 
account  for  the  fact,  not  infrequently  observed,  that  in  elderly 
people  whose  arteries  are  rigid  an  apoplectic  stroke  may  follow  a 
heavy  meal. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

THE  PHYSICAL  FACTORS  CONCERNED  IN  THE  PRO- 
DUCTION OF  BLOOD-PRESSURE  AND  BLOOD- 
VELOCITY. 

In  the  preceding  pages  some  of  the  essential  facts  have  been 
stated  regarding  the  pressure  and  the  velocity  of  the  blood  in  the 
different  parts  of  the  vascular  system.  We  may  now  consider  the 
physical  factors  that  are  responsible  for  the  production  and  mainte- 
nance of  these  peculiarities.  The  problem  as  it  actually  exists  in  the 
circulation,  with  its  elastic  vessels  varying  in  size  from  the  aorta, 
with  an  internal  diameter  of  nearly  20  mms.,  to  the  capil- 
laries, with  a  diameter  of  0.009  mm.,  is  extremely  complex,  but  the 
general  static  and  dynamic  principles  involved  are  simple  and  easily 
understood. 

Side  Pressure  and  Velocity  Pressure. — When  water  flows 
through  a  tube  under,  let  us  say,  a  constant  head  of  pressure  it 
encounters  a  resistance  due  to  the  friction  between  the  walls  of  the 
vessel  and  the  particles  of  water.  This  resistance  will  be  greater, 
the  narrower  the  tube.  A  part  of  the  head  of  pressure  used  to  drive 
the  liquid  along  the  tube  will  be  used  in  overcoming  this  resistance 
to  its  movement,  and  the  volume  of  the  outflow  will  be  correspond- 
ingly diminished.  If  we  use  an  apparatus  such  as  is  represented  in 
Fig.  193,  consisting  of  a  reservoir,  H,  and  a  long  outflow  tube, 
1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  the  outflow  from  the  end  and  the  pressure  along  the 
tube  may  be  measured  directly.  We  must  suppose  that  the  head 
of  pressure — that  is,  the  height  of  the  water  in  H — is  kept  constant 
by  some  means.  The  resistance  or  tension  due  to  the  friction  in  the 
tube  may  be  measured  at  any  point  by  inserting  a  side-tube  or 
gauge  (piezometer)  at  that  point.  The  liquid  will  rise  in  this  tube 
to  a  level  corresponding  to  the  pressure  or  resistance  offered  to  the 
movement  of  the  liquid  at  that  point — that  is,  the  weight  of  the 
column  of  liquid  will  measure  the  pressure  at  that  point  upon  a 
surface  corresponding  to  the  cross-area  of  the  tube.  The  pressure 
or  tension  at  any  point  may  be  spoken  of  as  the  side  pressure  or 
lateral  pressure,  and  it  expresses  the  amount  of  resistance  offered 
to  the  flow  of  the  liquid  because  of  the  friction  exerted  upon  the 
water  by  the  walls  of  the  tube  between  that  point  and  the  exit. 
This  side  pressure  increases  in  a  straight  line  from  the  point  of  exit 

460 


BLOOD-PRESSURE    AND    BLOOD-VELOCITY. 


461 


to  the  reservoir,  and  this  in  general  is  the  picture  presented  by 
the  circulation.  The  reservoir,  the  head  of  pressure,  is  represented 
by  the  aorta,  the  exit  for  the  outflow  by  the  opening  of  the  venee 
cavge  into  the  right  auricle,  and  the  side  pressure  or  internal  tension 
of  the  blood  due  to  friction  against  the  walls  of  the  vessels  increases 
from  the  venae  cavse  back  to  the  aorta.  If  from  aorta  to  vena  cava 
the  vessels  were  of  the  same  diameter  the  increase  would  be  in  a 
straight  line,  as  in  the  case  of  the  model.  In  this  model  it  will  be 
noticed  that  the  straight  line  showing  the  side  pressure  does  not 
strike  the  top  of  the  column  of  liquid  in  the  reservoir,  but  corre- 
sponds to  a  certain  height,  h'.  This  expresses  the  fact  that,  of  the 
total  head  of  pressure  in  the  reservoir,  which  we  may  designate  as 
H,  a  certain  portion  only,  but  a  large  portion,  h' ,  is  used  in  over- 


Fig.  193. — Schema  to  illustrate  the  side  pressure  due  to  resistance,  and  the  velocity  pres- 
sure (Tigerstedt) :  H,  A  reservoir  containing  water;  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,_  the  outflow  tube  with 
gauges  set  at  right  angles  to  measure  the  side  pressure ;  h',  the  portion  of  the  total  pressure 
used  in  overcoming  the  resistance  to  the  flow ;  h,  the  portion  of  the  total  pressure  used  in 
moving  the  column  of  liquid — the  velocity  pressure. 

coming  the  resistance  along  the  tube.  What  is  left — that  is,  H-h', 
represents  the  force  that  is  employed  in  driving  the  liquid  through 
the  tube  with  a  certain  velocity ;  this  portion  of  the  pressure  we  may 
speak  of  as  the  velocity  pressure,  h.  If  in  measuring  the  side  pressure 
at  any  point  the  gauge  were  prolonged  into  the  tube  and  bent  so  as 
to  face  the  stream,  this  velocity  pressure  would  add  itself  to  the 
side  pressure  at  that  point  and  the  water  would  rise  to  a  higher 
level  in  this  particular  tube.  There  are  two  important  differences 
between  the  circulation  as  it  exists  in  the  body  and  that  repre- 
sented by  the  model.  In  the  body,  in  the  first  place,  we  have 
the  area  of  capillaries,  small  arteries,  and  veins,  intercalated  be- 
tween the  large  arteries  on  one  side  and  the  veins  on  the  other; 
and,  in  the  second  place,  the  vessels,  especially  the  arteries,  are 
extensible  and  elastic.     The  effect  caused  bv  the  first  of  these 


462 


CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 


factors — namely,  a  great  resistance  placed  in  the  middle  of  the 
course — may  be  illustrated  by  the  model  shown  in  Fig.  194,  which 
differs  from  that  in  Fig.  193  in  having  a  stopcock  in  the  outflow 
tube,  which,  when  partly  turned  off,  makes  a  narrow  opening  and  a 
relatively  great  resistance.  When  the  stopcock  is  open  the  pressure 
falls  equally  throughout  the  tube,  provided  the  bore  of  the  stopcock 
is  equal  to  that  of  the  tube.  If,  however,  it  is  partially  turned  the 
side  pressure  is  much  increased  between  it  and  the  reservoir  on  what 
we  may  term  the  arterial  side  of  the  schema,  and  it  is  correspond- 
ingly diminished  between  the  stopcock  and  the  exit,  on  the  venous 
side  of  the  schema.  Substantially  this  condition  prevails  in  the  body. 
The  capillary  region,  including  the  smallest  arterioles  and  veins, 
offers  a  great  resistance  to  the  flow  of  blood,  and  this  resistance  is 
spoken  of  in  physiology  as  the  'peripheral  resistance.     Its  effect  is  to 


Fig.  194. — Schema  like  the  preceding  except  that  a  stopcock  is  inserted  at  the  middle 
of  the  outflow  to  imitate  the  peripheral  resistance  of  the  capillary  area.  The  relations  of 
the  internal  pressure  on  the  arterial  and  venous  sides  of  this  special  resistance  is  shown  by 
the  height  of  the  water  in  the  gauges. 


raise  the  pressure  on  the  arterial  side  and  lower  it  on  the  venous  side. 
When  other  conditions  in  the  circulation  remain  constant  it  is  found 
that  an  increase  in  peripheral  resistance,  caused  usually  by  a  con- 
striction of  the  arterioles,  is  followed  by  a  rise  of  arterial  pressures 
and  a  fall  of  venous  pressures.  On  the  contrary,  a  dilatation  of  the 
arterioles  in  any  organ  is  followed  by  a  fall  of  pressure  in  its  artery  or 
arteries  and  a  rise  of  pressure  in  its  veins.  The  effect  of  the  elastic- 
ity of  the  arteries  is  of  importance  in  connection  with  the  fact  that 
in  reality  the  circulation  is  charged  with  blood  not  from  a  constant 
reservoir  as  in  the  models,  Figs.  193  and  194,  but  by  the  rhythmical 
beats  of  the  heart.  If  the  vascular  system  were  perfectly  rigid  each 
rhythmical  charge  into  the  aorta  would  be  followed  by  an  equal  dis- 
charge from  the  venae  cavse,  the  pressure  throughout  the  system 
would  rise  to  a  high  point  during  systole  and  fall  to  zero  during  the 


BLOOD-PRESSURE   AND   BLOOD-VELOCITY.  463 

diastole,  ■  The  elasticity  of  the  arteries,  in  connection  with  the 
peripheral  resistance,  makes  an  important  difference.  As  the  heart 
discharges  into  the  aorta  the  pressure  rises,  but  the  walls  of  the 
arterial  system  are  distended  by  the  increased  pressure,  and  during 
the  following  diastole  the  recoil  of  these  distended  walls  maintains 
a  flow  of  blood  through  the  capillaries  into  the  veins.  With  a 
certain  rapidity  of  heart  beat  the  distension  of  the  arterial  walls  is 
increased  to  such  a  point  that  the  outflow  through  the  capillaries 
into  the  veins  is  as  great  during  diastole  as  during  systole;  the 
rhythmical  flow  in  the  arteries  becomes  converted  by  the  elastic 
tension  of  the  overfilled  arterial  system  into  a  continuous  flow  in 
the  capillaries  and  veins.  This  effect  may  be  illustrated  by  a  simple 
schema  such  as  is  represented  in  Fig.  195.  A  syringe  bulb  (a),  rep- 
resenting the  heart,  is  connected  by  a  short  piece  of  rubber  tubing  to  a 
glass  tube  (6),  and  also  by  a  piece  of  distensible  band  tubing  (e)  with 


Fig.  195. — Simple  schema  to  illustrate  the  factors  producing  a  constant  head  of  pres- 
sure in  the  arterial  system :  a,  A  syringe  bulb  with  valves,  representing  the  heart ;  6,  glass 
tube  with  fine  point  representing  a  path  with  resistance  alone,  but  no  extensibility  (the  out- 
flow is  in  spurts  synchronous  with  the  strokes  of  the  pump) ;  c,  outflow  with  resistance  and 
also  extensible  and  elastic  walls  represented  by  the  large  rubber  bag,  e ;  the  outflow  is  a 
steady  stream  due  to  the  elastic  recoil  of  the  distended  bag,  e. 

a  similar  glass  tube  drawn  to  a  fine  point  (c).  In  the  latter  case  the 
distensible,  elastic  tubing  represents  the  arterial  system,  and  the 
fine  pointed  glass  tube  the  peripheral  resistance  of  the  capillary  area. 
If  the  syringe  bulb  is  put  into  rhythmical  play  and  the  flow  is  directed 
through  tube  b  the  discharges  are  in  rhythmical  spurts,  but  if 
directed  through  tube  c  the  discharge  is  a  continuous  stream, 
since  the  force  of  the  separate  beats  becomes  stored  as  elastic  tension 
in  the  walls  of  the  band  tubing,  and  it  is  this  constant  force  which 
drives  a  steady  stream  through  the  capillary  point.  In  a  general 
way,  this  schema  gives  us  a  true  picture  of  the  conditions  in  the  cir- 
culation. The  rhythmical  force  of  the  heart  beat  is  stored  as  elastic 
tension  in  the  walls  of  the  arteries,  and  it  is  the  squeeze  of  these 
distended  walls  which  gives  the  continuous  driving  force  that  is 
responsible  for  the  constant  flow  in  the  capillaries  and  veins. 

Enumeration  of  the  Factors  Concerned  in  Producing  Nor- 
mal Pressure  and  Velocity. — In  the  normal  circulation  we  may 


464  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 

say  that  four  chief  factors  co-operate  in  producing  the  conditions 
of  pressure  and  velocity  as  we  find  them.  These  factors  are:  (1) 
The  heart  beat.  (2)  The  resistance  to  the  flow  of  blood  through  the 
vessels,  and  especially  the  peripheral  resistance  in  the  region  of  the 
small  arteries,  capillaries,  and  small  veins.  (3)  The  elasticity  of 
the  arteries.  (4)  The  quantity  of  blood  in  the  system.  The 
way  in  which  these  factors  act  may  be  pictured  as  follows :  Suppose 
the  system  at  rest  with  the  definite  quantity  of  blood  distributed 
equally  throughout  the  vascular  S5^stem.  The  internal  or  side 
pressure  throughout  the  system  will  be  everywhere  the  same, — 
probably  zero  (atmospheric)  pressure,  since  the  capacity  of  the 
vascular  system  is  sufficient  to  hold  the  entire  quantity  of  blood 
without  distension  of  its  walls.  If,  now,  the  heart  begins  to  beat 
with  a  definite  rhythm  and  discharges  a  definite  quantity  of  blood  at 
each  beat  the  whole  mass  will  be  set  into  motion.  The  arteries 
receive  the  blood  more  rapidly  than  it  can  escape  through  the  capil- 
laries into  the  veins,  and  consequently  it  accumulates  upon  the 
arterial  side  until  an  equilibrium  is  reached, — that  is,  a  point  at 
which  the  elastic  recoil  of  the  whole  arterial  tree  suffices  to  force 
through  the  capillaries  in  a  unit  of  time  as  much  blood  as  is  received 
from  the  heart  during  the  same  time.  In  this  condition  of  equilib- 
rium the  flow  in  capillaries  and  veins  is  constant,  and  the  side 
pressure  in  the  veins  increases  from  the  right  auricle  back  to  the 
capillaries.  In  the  arteries  there  is  a  large  side  pressure  throughout, 
owing  to  the  resistance  between  them  and  the  veins  and  especially 
to  the  great  resistance  offered  by  the  narrow  capillaries.  This 
pressure  rises  and  falls  with  each  discharge  from  the  heart,  and  the 
pulse  waves,  both  as  regards  pressure  and  velocity,  are  most  marked 
in  the  aorta  and  diminish  farther  out  in  the  arterial  tree,  failing 
completely  in  the  last  small  arterioles,  since  if  taken  together  these 
arterioles  constitute  a  large  and  distensible  tube  of  much  greater 
capacity  than  the  aorta. 

General  Conditions  Influencing  Blood-pressure  and  Blood- 
velocity. — Alterations  in  any  of  the  four  chief  factors  mentioned 
above  must,  of  course,  cause  a  change  in  pressure  and  velocity. 

I.  An  increase  in  the  rate  or  force  of  the  heart  beat  will  increase 
the  velocity  of  the  flow  throughout  the  system,  although,  of  course, 
that  general  difference  in  velocity  in  the  arteries,  capillaries,  and 
veins  which  depends  upon  the  variations  in  width  of  bed  will  remain. 
Such  a  change  will  also  cause  a  rise  of  pressures  throughout  the 
system.  The  whole  energy  exhibited  in  the  vascular  system  as 
side  pressure,  velocity  pressure,  etc.,  comes,  in  the  long  run,  from 
the  force  of  contraction  of  the  heart  muscle.  This  force  is  what  is 
represented  in  the  model,  Fig.  193,  as  the  total  head  of  pressure  (H). 
An  increase  in  rate  or  force  of  heart  beat  is  equivalent,  therefore. 


BLOOD-PRESSURE   AND    BLOOD-VELOCITY.  465 

to  an  increase  in  this  head  of  pressure,  and  along  with  the  increase 
in  velocity  thus  caused  there  is  an  increased  fi-iction  or  resistance. 

II.  An  increase  or  decrease  in  the  width  of  the  vessels  will 
influence  both  the  resistance  to  the  flow  and  the  velocity.  Under 
normal  conditions  it  is  the  small  arteries  that  are  constricted  or 
dilated  (vasoconstriction  and  vasodilatation).  A  constriction  of 
these  arteries  causes  an  increase  in  arterial  pressures  and  a  decrease 
in  venous  pressure.  The  velocity  of  the  blood-flow  is  decreased. 
A  dilatation  has  the  opposite  effects.  Numerous  instances  of  this 
relation  will  be  referred  to  in  describing  the  physiology  of  the  vaso- 
motor nerves. 

III.  A  diminution  in  elasticity  of  the  arteries  will  tend  to 
interfere  with  the  constancy  of  the  flow  from  the  arteries  into  the 
capillaries,  and  in  the  arteries  themselves  the  swings  of  pressure 
from  systolic  to  diastolic  during  the  heart  beat  will  be  more 
extensive.  This  latter  fact  can  be  shown  upon  elderly  individuals 
whose  arteries  are  becoming  rigid,  but  whether  a  change  of  this 
character  is  ever  so  advanced  in  human  beings  as  to  seriously  modify 
the  capillary  circulation  does  not  appear  to  have  been  investigated. 

IV.  A  loss  of  blood,  other  conditions  remaining  the  same, 
will  also  cause  a  fall  in  blood-pressures  and  velocity.  As  a  matter 
of  fact,  however,  a  considerable  amount  of  blood  may  be  lost  with- 
out any  marked  permanent  change  in  arterial  blood-pressure.  The 
reason  for  this  result  is  found  in  the  adjustability  or  adaptability 
of  the  vascular  system.  It  is  in  such  respects  that  the  system  differs 
greatly  from  a  rigid  schema  such  as  we  use  for  our  models.  When 
blood  is  withdrawn  from  the  vessels  the  loss  may  be  offset  by  an 
increased  action  of  the  heart  and  by  a  contraction  of  the  arterioles, 
the  two  effects  combining  to  give  a  normal  or  approximately  normal 
arterial  pressure.  To  carry  out  the  analogy  with  the  model  (Fig. 
193)  if  by  chance  some  of  the  store  of  water  was  lost  we  might  sub- 
stitute a  narrower  reservoir,  so  that  with  a  diminished  supply  we 
could  still  maintain  the  same  level  of  pressure. 

The  Hydrostatic  Effect. — In  the  living  animal,  especially  in 
those,  like  ourselves,  that  walk  upright,  the  actual  pressure  in  the 
arteries  of  the  various  tissues  must  vary  much  also  with  the  position. 
For  instance,  in  standing  erect  the  small  arteries  in  the  hands  or 
feet  are,  in  addition  to  other  conditions  noted  above,  exposed  to  the 
weight  of  the  column  of  arterial  blood  standing  over  them.  In 
the  pendent  arm  the  skin  of  the  fingers  is  congested;  if,  however, 
the  arm  is  raised  above  the  head  the  skin  may  become  blanched 
because  now  the  column  of  blood  from  fingers  to  shoulder  exercises 
a  hydrostatic  pressure  in  the  opposite  direction.  In  determinations 
of  blood-pressure  in  the  brachial  artery  of  man  care  should  be  taken 
to  keep  the  arm  in  the  same  position  in  a  series  of  observations  in 
30 


466  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

order  to  equalize  the  effect  of  the  hydrostatic  factor.  The  impor- 
tance of  this  gravity  effect  is  most  evident  in  the  case  of  the  ab- 
dominal (splanchnic)  circulation.  When  an  animal  accustomed 
to  go  on  all  fours  is  held  in  a  vertical  position  the  great  vascular 
area  of  the  abdomen  is  placed  under  an  increased  pressure  due  to 
gravity,  and,  unless  there  is  a  compensatory  contraction  of  the 
arterioles  or  of  the  abdominal  wall,  so  much  blood  may  accumulate 
in  this  portion  of  the  system  that  the  arterial  pressure  in  the  aorta 
will  fall  markedly  or  the  circulation  ma}^  stop  entirely.*  In  most 
cases  the  compensation  takes  place  and  no  serious  change  in  the 
circulation  results.  In  rabbits,  however,  which  have  lax  abdominal 
walls,  it  is  said  that  the  animal  may  be  killed  by  simply  holding  it 
in  the  erect  position  for  some  time.  For  the  same  reason  an  erect 
posture  in  man  may  be  dangerous  when  the  compensatory  nervous 
reflexes  controlling  the  arteries  and  the  tone  of  the  abdominal  wall 
are  thrown  out  of  action,  as,  for  instance,  in  a  faint  or  in  a  condition 
of  anesthesia.  In  such  conditions  the  recumbent  position  favors 
the  maintenance  of  the  normal  circulation.  Indeed,  under  ordinary 
conditions  some  individuals  are  quite  sensitive  to  the  effects  of  a 
vertical  position,  especially  if  unaccompanied  by  muscular  or  mental 
activity,  and  may  suffer  from  giddiness  and  a  sense  of  faintness 
in  consequence  of  a  fall  in  general  blood-pressure.  It  seems  prob- 
able that  in  these  cases  the  gravity  effect  has  drafted  off  an  undue 
amount  of  blood  into  the  splanchnic  area.  Individuals  who  have 
been  kept  in  bed  for  long  periods  by  sickness,  accident,  or  other 
causes  suffer  from  giddiness  and  unsteadiness  when  they  first 
attempt  to  stand  or  walk.  It  seems  quite  possible  that  in  such 
cases  also  the  effect  is  due  to  a  fall  in  arterial  pressure  brought  about 
by  the  dilatation  in  the  splanchnic  area.  The  added  weight  of 
blood  thrown  on  these  vessels  is  not  compensated  by  a  vasocon- 
striction of  the  arterioles  or  an  increased  tone  in  the  abdominal 
walls. 

Accessory  Factors  Aiding  the  Circulation. — The  force  of  the 
heart  beat  is  the  main  factor  concerned  in  the  movement  of  the 
blood,  but  certain  other  muscular  movements  aid  more  or  less  in 
maintaining  the  circulation  as  it  actually  exists  in  the  living  animal. 
The  most  important  of  these  accessory  factors  are  the  respiratory 
movements  and  the  contractions  of  the  muscles  of  the  limbs  and 
viscera.  At  each  inspiratory  movement  the  pressure  relations  are 
altered  in  the  thorax  and  abdomen,  and  reverse  changes  occur  during 
expiration.  These  effects  influence  the  flow  of  blood  to  the  heart, 
and  alter  the  velocity  and  pressure  of  the  blood  in  a  way  that  is 
described  in  the  section  on  Respiration  under  the  title  of  The 
Respiratory  Waves  of  Blood-pressure.  Contractions  of  the  skeletal 
*  Hill  and  Barnard,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  21,  321,  1897. 


BLOOD-PRESSURE    AND    BLOOD-VELOCITY.  467 

muscles  must  also  influence  the  bloocl-flow.  The  thickening  of  the 
fibers  in  contraction  squeezes  upon  the  capillaries  and  small  vessels 
and  tends  to  empty  them.  On  account  of  the  valves  in  the  veins 
the  blood  is  forced  mainh^  toward  the  venous  side  of  the  heart; 
so  that  rhythmical  contractions  of  the  muscles  may  accelerate  the 
circulation.  The  contractions  of  the  smooth  muscles,  especially 
in  the  stomach  and  intestines  during  digestion,  have  a  similar  effect. 
The  musculature  of  the  spleen  also  is  supposed  to  aid  the  circulation 
through  that  organ  by  its  rhythmical  contractions. 

The  Conditions  of  Pressure  and  Velocity  in  the  Pulmonary 
Circulation. — The  general  plan  of  the  smaller  circulation  from 
right  ventricle  to  left  auricle  is  the  same  as  in  the  major  or  systemic 
circulation,  and  the  same  general  principles  hold.  The  right 
ventricle  pumps  its  blood  into  the  pulmonary  artery,  and,  on  ac- 
count of  the  peripheral  resistance  in  the  lung  capillaries,  the  side 
pressure  in  the  artery  is  higher  than  in  the  capillaries,  and  higher  in 
these  than  in  the  pulmonary  veins.  The  velocity  of  movement  is 
least,  on  the  other  hand,  in  the  extensive  capillary  area  and  greatest 
in  the  pulmonary  artery  and  veins,  on  account  of  the  variations  in 
width  of  the  bed.  So  also  in  the  pulmonary  artery  the  pressure  and 
velocity  must  fluctuate  between  a  systolic  and  diastolic  level  at  each 
heart  beat,  while  in  the  pulmonary  veins  they  are  more  or  less  uni- 
form. An  interesting  difference  between  the  two  circulations 
consists  in  the  fact  that  the  peripheral  resistance  is  evidently  much 
less  in  the  pulmonary  circuit,  and  consequently  the  pressure  in  the 
pulmonary  arteries  is  much  less  than  in  the  aortic  system.  The 
velocity  of  the  flow,  as  already  stated  (p.  441),  is  also  greater  in 
the  lung  capillaries  than  in  the  systemic  capillaries.  Exact  deter- 
minations of  the  pressure  in  the  pulmonary  artery  are  made  with 
difficulty  on  account  of  the  position  of  the  vessel.*  The  results 
obtained  by  various  observers  give  such  values  as  the  following: 

Mean  Pressure.  Extreme  Variations. 

Mms.  Hg.  Mms.  Hg. 

Dog 20  10     to  33 

Cat 18  7.5  "   24.7 

Rabbit 12  6      "35 

It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  that  the  mean  pressure  is  not  more 
than  one-seventh  to  one-eighth  of  that  prevailing  in  the  aorta. 
The  thinner  walls  and  smaller  muscular  power  of  the  right  ventricle 
as  compared  with  the  left  are  an  indication  of  the  fact  that  less  force 
is  necessary  to  keep  up  the  circulation  through  the  pulmonary 
circuit. 

*  For  a  discussion  of  the  special  physiology  of  the  pulmonary  circulation 
and  for  references  to  literature  see  Tigerstedt,  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie," 
vol.  ii,  part  ii,  p.  528,  1903. 


468  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

The  Variations  in  Pressure  in  the  Puhnonary  Circuit. — 

Experimental  results  indicate  that  the  pressures  in  the  pulmonary 
circuit  do  not  undergo  as  marked  changes  as  in  the  systemic  circu- 
lation; the  flow  is  characterized  by  a  greater  steadiness.  With  a  sys- 
temic pressure,  as  taken  in  the  carotid,  varying  from  144  to  222  mms., 
that  in  the  pulmonary  artery  changes  only  from  20  to  26  mms.,  and 
extreme  variations  of  pressure  in  the  pulmonary  artery  probably 
do  not  exceed,  as  a  rule,  15  to  20  mms.  The  regulations  of  the  pres- 
sure and  flow  of  blood  in  the  small  circulation  do  not  seem  to  be 
so  direct  or  complex  as  in  the  aortic  system.  The  part  taken  by  the 
vasomotor  nerves  is  referred  to  in  the  chapter  upon  the  innervation 
of  the  blood-vessels,  and  attention  may  be  called  here  only  to  the 
mechanical  factors,  which,  indeed,  for  this  circulation  are  probably 
the  most  important.  The  output  from  the  right  ventricle,  and  there- 
fore the  amount  of  flow  and  the  pressure  in  the  pulmonary  artery, 
depends  mainly  on  the  amount  of  blood  received  through  the 
venae  cavse  by  the  right  auricle.  If  one  of  the  venae  cavse  is  closed 
the  pulmonary  pressure  sinks;  pressure  upon  the  abdomen,  on  the 
other  hand,  by  squeezing  more  blood  toward  the  right  heart  may 
raise  the  pressure  in  the  pulmonary  artery.  By  this  means,  there- 
fore, the  variations  in  blood-flow  in  the  systemic  circulation  in- 
directly influence  and  control  the  pressure  relations  in  the  pulmonary 
circuit.  But  the  changes  in  the  systemic  circulation  may  affect 
the  blood-flow  through  the  lungs  in  still  another  way, — namely,  by 
a  back  effect  through  the  left  auricle.  When  for  any  reason  the 
blood-pressure  in  the  aorta  is  driven  much  above  the  normal  level 
the  left  ventricle  may  not  be  able  to  empty  itself  completely,  and  if 
this  happens  the  pressure  in  the  left  auricle  will  rise  and  the  flow 
through  the  lungs  from  right  ventricle  to  left  auricle  will  be  more  or 
less  impeded.  On  the  whole,  it  would  seem  that  the  pulmonary 
circulation  is  subject  to  less  changes  than  in  the  case  of  the  organs 
supplied  by  the  aorta.  The  mechanical  conditions,  especially  in  the 
capillary  region,  are  such  that  the  blood  is  sent  through  the  lungs 
with  a  relatively  high  velocity,  although  under  small  actual 
pressure.  The  special  effects  of  the  respiratory  movements  and 
variations  in  intrathoracic  pressure  upon  the  pulmonary  circulation 
are  described  in  connection  with  respiration. 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

THE  PULSE. 

General  Statement. — When  the  ventricular  systole  discharges 
a  new  quantity  of  blood  into  the  arteries  the  pressure  within  these 
vessels  is  increased  temporarily.  If  the  arteries,  capillaries,  and 
veins  were  perfectly  rigid  tubes  it  is  evident  that  this  pressure  would 
be  transmitted  practically  instantaneously  throughout  the  system, 
and  that  a  quantity  of  blood  would  be  displaced  from  the  venae 
cavse  into  the  auricles  equal  to  the  quantity  forced  into  the  aorta  by 
the  ventricle.  The  flow  of  blood  throughout  the  vascular  system 
would  take  place  in  a  series  of  spurts  or  pulses,  the  pressure  rising 
suddenly  during  systole  and  falling  rapidly  during  diastole.  Since 
the  blood  is  incompressible  and  the  walls  of  the  vessels  if  rigid 
would  be  inextensible,  the  rise  of  pressure,  the  pulse,  would  be 
simultaneous  in  all  parts  of  the  system.  The  fact,  however,  that 
the  walls  of  the  vessels  are  extensible  and  elastic  modifies  the  trans- 
mission of  the  pulse  wave  in  several  important  particulars:  It 
explains  why  it  is  that  the  pulse  dies  out  in  or  at  the  beginning  of 
the  capillaries  and  why  it  occurs  at  different  times  in  different 
arteries — that  is,  why  the  wave  of  pressure  takes  a  perceptible 
time  to  travel  over  the  arteries.  The  result  that  follows  from  the 
elasticity  of  the  arteries  may  be  pictured  as  follows:  Under  the 
normal  conditions  of  the  circulation  when  the  heart  contracts  and 
forces  a  new  ciuantity  of  blood  into  the  aorta  room  must  be  made 
for  this  blood  either  by  moving  the  whole  mass  of  the  blood  forward 
— that  is,  by  discharging  an  equal  amount  at  the  other  end  into  the 
auricle — or  by  the  enlargement  of  the  arteries.  This  latter  alter- 
native is  what  really  happens,  as  it  takes  less  pressure  to  distend 
the  aorta  than  to  move  forward  the  entire  mass  of  blood  under  the 
conditions  that  exist  in  the  body.  So  soon,  therefore,  as  the  semi- 
lunar valves  open  and  the  new  column  of  blood  begins  to  enter  the 
aorta,  the  walls  of  that  vessel  begin  to  expand  and  during  the  time 
that  the  blood  is  flowing  out  of  the  heart — that  is,  in  round  numbers, 
about  0.3  sec. — the  extension  of  the  walls  passes  from  point  to  point 
along  the  arterial  system.  At  the  end  of  the  outflow  from  the  heart 
all  the  arteries  are  beginning  to  enlarge,  the  maximum  extension 
being  in  the  aorta,  and  room  is  thus  made,  for  the  new  quantity  of 
blood.     The  new  blood  that  is  actually  discharged  from  the  heart 

469 


470  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

lies  somewhere  in  the  aorta,  but  the  pressure  that  has  been  trans- 
mitted along  the  system  and  has  caused  it  to  expand  has  made 
room  for  the  blood  forced  out  of  the  aorta  by  the  new  blood. 
With  the  cessation  of  the  heart  beat  and  the  closure  of  the  semilunar 
valves,  the  sharp  recoil  of  the  distended  aorta  drives  forward  the 
column  of  blood,  and  as  the  aorta  sinks  back  to  its  normal  diastolic 
diameter  the  more  distal  portions  of  the  arterial  system  are  at  first 
distended  to  a  certain  point  and  then  return  to  their  diastolic  size 
as  the  excess  of  blood  streams  through  the  capillaries  into  the  veins. 
At  the  time  that  the  aorta  has  reached  its  diastolic  size  the  walls 
of  the  most  distant  arterioles  have  passed  their  maximum  extension 
and  are  beginning  to  collapse.  The  distension  caused  by  the  pulse, 
therefore,  spreads  through  the  arterial  system  in  the  form  of  a  wave. 
At  any  given  point  the  distension  of  the  walls  increases  to  a  maxi- 
mum and  then  declines,  and  when  this  change  in  size  is  recorded 
in  the  large  arteries,  by  methods  described  below,  it  is  found  that 
the  expansion  of  the  artery  is  much  more  sudden  than  the  subse- 
quent collapse.  This  difference  is  understood  when  we  remember 
that  the  heart  throws  its  load  of  blood  into  the  arteries  with  sud- 
denness and  force,  causing  a  sharp  rise  of  pressure,  while  the  collapse 
of  the  arteries  is  due  to  their  own  elasticity.  The  disappearance 
of  the  pulse  before  reaching  the  capillary  area  is  readily  compre- 
hended when  one  remembers  that  the  arterial  tree  constantly  in- 
creases in  size  as  one  passes  out  from  the  aortic  trunk.  Many  facts, 
such  as  those  of  pressure  and  velocity  already  described,  indicate 
that  the  increase  in  capacity  of  the  arterial  system  is  somewhat 
gradual  until  the  region  of  the  smallest  arterioles  and  capillaries  is 
reached  and  that  at  this  point  there  is  a  sudden  widening  out  or 
increase  in  capacity  of  the  whole  system,  although  the  individual 
vessels  diminish  in  diameter.  It  is  in  this  region  that  the  pulse 
becomes  imperceptible.* 

Velocity  of  the  Pulse  Wave. — From  the  above  considerations 
it  is  evident  that  in  a  system  such  as  is  presented  by  our  blood- 
vessels the  velocity  of  the  pulse  wave  must  vary  with  the  rigidity 
of  the  tubes.  If  perfectly  rigid  the  pressure  would  be  transmitted 
practically  instantaneously;  if  the  walls  were  very  extensible  the 
prepagation  would  be  relatively  slow.  For  our  blood-vessels  as 
they  exist  at  any  given  moment  the  velocity  of  the  pulse  wave  may 
be  estimated  by  a  simple  method:  Two  arteries  may  be  selected  at 
different  distances  from  the  heart  and  the  pulse  wave  as  it  passes  by 
a  given  point  in  each  artery  may  be  recorded  by  some  convenient 

*  For  a  satisfactory  discussion  of  the  pulse  and  for  literature  consult  von 
Frey,  "Die  Untersuchung  des  Pulses."  Berlin,  1892.  For  a  description  of 
the  variations  in  disease  consult  Mackenzie,  "  The  Study  of  the  Pulse,  etc." 
New  York,  1902. 


THE    PULSE. 


471 


apparatus,  such  as  can  be  devised  in  any  laboraton-.  If  the  waves 
are  recorded  on  a  rapidly  revolving  kymographion  whose  rate  of 
movement  can  be  determined,  then  the  difference  in  time  in  the 
arrival  of  the  pulse  wave  at  the  two  points  is  easily  ascertained. 
That  there  is  a  perceptible  difference  in  time  one  can  easily  demon- 
strate to  himself  by  feeling  simultaneously  the  pulse  of  the  radial 
and  the  carotid  arteries.  If  this  difference  in  time  is  determined 
for  two  arteries — ^for  instance,  the  femoral  and  the  tibialis  anticus — 
and  the  distance  between  the  two  points  is  recorded,  we  have 
evidently  the  necessary  data  for  obtaining  the  velocity  of  the  pulse 
wave  in  the  arteries  of  that  region.  A  record  of  this  kind  is  shown 
in  Fig.  196. 


Fig.  196. — To  illustrate  the  method  of  determining  the  velocity  of  the  pulse  wave 
in  man.  Shows  record  of  the  pulse  at  two  points  on  the  leg  at  a  known  distance  apart. 
The  difference  in  time  is  given  by  the  verticals  dropped  from  the  beginning  of  these  waves 
to  the  time  curve.  This  last  is  made  by  the  vibrations  of  a  tuning  fork  giving  100  vibra- 
tions per  second.     The  difference  in  this  case  was  equal  to  0.035  sec. 


The  results  obtained  by  various  authors  indicate  that  the  velocity 
varies  somewhere  between  6  and  9  meters  per  second  for  adults. 
The  figures  published  by  recent  observers  show  also  that  the  velocity 
is  somewhat  greater  in  the  upper  extremities  (7.5  m.  for  carotid- 
radial  estimation)  than  in  the  descending  aorta  (6.5  m.  for  carotid- 
femoral  estimation).*  The  average  of  thirty  determinations  made 
in  the  author's  laboratory  upon  medical  students  shows  that  the 
velocity  in  the  leg  (femoral-anterior  tibial)  is  6.1  m.  when  the 
records  are  made  upon  the  same  leg,  and  7.4  m.  when  the  record 
for  the  femoral  is  taken  from  one  leg  and  that  for  the  anterior  tibial 

*Edgren,  "Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiol  ,"  1,  96,  1889. 


472 


CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 


from  the  other.  The  latter  condition  would  seem  to  be  more  nor- 
mal, since  the  blood-flow  and  normal  tension  of  the  walls  are 
probably  less  disturbed.  An  increase  in  rigidity  of  the  arteries 
causes  the  velocity  to  rise ;  in  elderly  people,  therefore,  the  velocity 
is  distinctly  greater.  In  arterial  sclerosis  with  hypertrophy  of  the 
heart  the  velocity  may  increase  to  as  much  as  11  or  13  m.  Any 
marked  dilatation  of  the  arteries — such  as  occurs,  for  instance, 
in  aneurysms, — retards  the  pulse  wave  markedly;  so  that  the 
existence  of  an  aneurysm  may  be  detected  in  some  cases  by  this 
fact.  If  we  know  the  velocity  of  the  wave  and  the  time  that  it  takes 
to  pass  any  given  point  the  length  of  the  wave  is  given  by  the 
formula  l=vt.  In  an  adult  the  duration  of  the  wave  {t)  at  the  radial 
may  be  taken  as  0.5  to  0.7  sec. ;  so  that  if  the  velocity  of  the  wave 
were  uniform  throughout  the  arteries  the  length  of  the  wave  would 
be  from  3.25  m.  to  4.5  m.     We.  can  imagine,  therefore,  that  before 


Kg.   197. — The  Dudgeon  sphygmograph  in  position. 


the  wave  has  disappeared  at  the  root  of  the  aorta  it  has  reached  the 
most  distant  arteries. 

The  Form  of  the  Pulse  Wave — Sphygmography. — The  pulse 
wave  may  be  felt  upon  any  superficial  artery  in  consequence  of  the 
distension  of  the  vessel.  By  the  tactile  sense  alone  the  experienced 
physician  may  distinguish  some  of  the  characters  of  the  wave,  its 
frequency,  its  force,  etc.  The  details  of  the  form  of  the  wave, 
however,  were  made  evident  only  when  the  variations  in  size  of  the 
artery  were  recorded  graphically  by  placing  a  lever  upon  it.  Any 
instrument  suitable  for  this  purpose  is  designated  as  a  sphygmo- 
graph, and  very  numerous  forms  have  been  devised.  The  move- 
ment of  the  artery  is  very  small  and  to  obtain  a  distinct  record  it  is 
necessary  to  magnify  this  movement  greatly  by  a  properly  con- 
structed lever. 

The  form  of  lever  that  is  perhaps  most  frequently  employed  is  shown  in  the 
accompanying  figures.     The  instrument  is  strapped  upon  the  arm  so  that  the 


THE    PULSE. 


473 


button  of  the  metallic  spring  rests  over  the  radial  artery.  The  movements 
of  the  artiery  are  transmitted  to  this  spring  and  this  latter  in  turn  acts  upon 
the  bent  lever,  and  the  magnified  movement  is  recorded  by  the  writing  point, 
upon  a  strip  of  blackened  paper  which  is  moved 
under  the  point  by  clockwork  contained  in  the 
case.  To  obtain  a  satisfactory  record  or  sphyg- 
mogram,  tAvo  details  are  of  special  importance: 
First,  the  button  of  the  lever  must  be  pressed 
upon  the  artery  with  the  proper  force.  Theo- 
retically this  pressure  should  be  about  equal  to 
the  diastolic  pressure  within  the  artery.  All 
sphygmographs  are  provided  with  means  to 
regulate  the  pressure,  and  practically  one  must 
learn  so  to  place  the  button  and  to  arrange  the 
pressure  as  to  obtain  the  largest  tracing.  A 
second  detail  of  importance  is  that  the  weight 
of  the  lever  when  set  suddenly  into  motion 
causes  a  movement,  due  to  the  inertia  of  the 
mass,  which  may  alter  the  true  form  of  the  wave. 
To  overcome  this  defect  the  lever  should  be  as 
light  as  possible,  or  the  spring  upon  which  the 
artery  plays  should  have  considerable  resis- 
tance. In  those  sphygmographs  in  which  the 
inertia  factor  is  practically  eliminated  the  diffi- 
culty of  obtaining  a  tracing,  especially  from  a 
weak  pulse,  is  correspondingly  increased,  and  in 
the  sphygmographs  most  commonly  employed, 
such  as  the  Dudgeon,  facility  in  application  is 
obtained  at  the  expense  of   incomplete   correction  of  the  error  of  inertia. 

The  pulse  wave  obtained  from  the  radial  artery  is  represented 
in  Fig.  199.  It  will  be  seen  from  this  figure  that  the  artery  dilates 
rapidly  and  then  falls  more  slowly.  The  ascending  portion  of  the 
wave  is  spoken  of  as  the  anacrotic  limb,  the  descending  as  the 
catacrotic  limb.  Under  usual  conditions  the  anacrotic  limb  is 
smooth, — that  is,  shows  no  secondary  waves, — while  the  catacrotic 


Fig.  198.— The  lever  of 
the  Dudgeon  sphygmograph : 
P,  The  button  of  the  spring  F, 
to  be  placed  upon  the  artery. 
The  movement  is  transmitted 
to  the  lever,  Fi,  and  thence  to 
the  bent  lever,  F2,  whose 
movement  is  effected  through 
the  weight,  g.  The  writing 
point  S,  of  this  lever  makes 
the  record  on  the  smoked  sur- 
face, A. 


Fig.  199. — Sphygmogram  from  the  radial  artery,  Dudgeon  sphygmograph:  D,  The  dicrotic 
wave ;  P,  the  predicrotic  wave. 


limb  shows  one  or  more  secondary  waves,  which  are  spoken  of  in 
general  as  the  catacrotic  waves.  The  most  constant  of  these  latter 
waves  occurs  usually  approximately  at  the  middle  of  the  descent 
(D)  and  is  designated  as  the  dicrotic  wave.  A  less  conspicuous  wave 
between  it  and  the  apex  of  the  pulse  wave  is  known  usually  as  the 
predicrotic  wave,  P,  while  the  wave  or  waves  following  the  dicrotic 


474  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

are  designated  as  postdicrotic.  These  catacrotic  waves  are  too 
small,  under  normal  conditions,  to  be  felt  by  the  finger.  Under 
certain  abnormal  conditions,  however,  which  cause  a  low  blood- 
pressure  without  marked  diminution  in  the  heart  beat,  the  dicrotic 
wave  is  emphasized  and  may  be  detected  by  the  finger.  A  pulse 
of  this  kind  is  known  as  a  dicrotic  pulse. 

Explanation  of  the  Catacrotic  Waves. — It  has  been  found 
difficult  to  give  an  entirely  satisfactory  explanation  of  the  catacrotic 
waves,  or,  to  speak  more  accurately,  it  is  difficult  to  decide  between 
the  different  explanations  that  have  been  proposed.  Concerning 
the  dicrotic  wave,  it  may  be  said  that  tracings  from  different  ar- 
teries show  that,  like  the  main  pulse  wave,  it  has  a  centrifugal 
course, — that  is,  it  starts  in  the  aorta  and  runs  peripherally  with  the 
same  velocity  as  the  main  wave  upon  which  it  is  superposed.  More- 
over, simultaneous  tracings  of  the  pressure  changes  in  the  heart  and 
in  the  aorta  show  that  the  closure  of  the  semilunar  valves  is  synchro- 
nous with  the  small  depression  or  negative  wave  which  immediately 
precedes  the  dicrotic  wave.  The  general  belief,  therefore,  is  that  the 
dicrotic  wave  results  from  the  closure  of  the  semilunar  valves.  When 
the  distended  aorta  begins  to  contract  by  virtue  of  the  elasticity  of 
its  walls  it  drives  the  column  of  blood  in  both  directions.  Owing 
to  the  position  of  the  semilunar  valves,  the  flow  to  the  ventricle  is 
prevented;  but  the  interposition  of  this  sudden  block  causes  a 
reflected  wave  which  passes  centrifugally  over  the  arterial  system. 
The  smaller  waves,  such  as  the  predicrotic,  and  the  postdicrotic, 
have  been  explained  (Landois)*  simply  as  elasticity  waves, — that 
is,  as  elastic  vibrations  of  the  arterial  walls.  According  to  other 
authors, t  an  important — perhaps  the  chief  factor — in  the  produc- 
tion of  the  secondary  waves  is  the  reflection  that  occurs  from  the 
periphery.  Where  each  arterial  stem  breaks  up  into  its  smallest 
vessels  the  main  pulse  wave  suffers  a  reflection,  a  wave  running 
backward  toward  the  heart.  It  is  probable  that  such  reflected 
waves  from  different  areas — for  instance,  from  the  coronary  system, 
the  subclavian  system,  the  mesenteric  system,  etc. — meet  in 
the  aorta  and  may  in  part  summate  to  larger  waves  which 
again  pass  peripherally.  The  catacrotic  waves,  according  to 
this  view,  probably  differ  in  character  in  the  different  arteries, 
and  tracings  indicate  that  this  is  the  case.  The  radial  pulse  differs, 
for  instance,  from  the  carotid  pulse  in  the  character  of  its  waves. 
Between  these  opposite  views  it  is  not  possible  to  decide,  but  it  is 
perhaps  permissible  to  believe  that  while  the  dicrotic  wave  is  due 
primarily  to  the  impulse  following  upon  the  closure  of  the  semilunar 
valves,  nevertheless  the  actual  form  of  this  and  the  other  secondary 

*  Landois,  "Die  Lehre  von  Arterienpuls,"  1872. 
t  See  von  Frey,  loc.  cit. 


THE    PULSE.  475 

waves  is  variously  modified  in  different  parts  of  the  system  by  the 
reflected  waves  from  different  peripheral  regions. 

Anacrotic  Waves. — As  was  said  above,  the  anacrotic  limb  under 
normal  conditions  shows  no  secondary  waves.  Under  pathological 
conditions,  however,  a  secondary  wave  more  or  less  clearly  marked 
may  appear,  as  is  shown,  for  instance,  in  the  tracing  given  in  Fig. 
200.  Such  waves  are  recorded  in  cases  of  stiff  arteries  or  stenosis 
of  the  semilunar  valves.  In  the  normal  individual  an  anacrotic 
pulse  may  be  obtained,  according  to  von  Kries,*  by  raising  the 
arm.  He  believes  that  in  this  position  the  reflection  of  the  pulse 
wave  from  the  periphery  is  favored,  and  that  the  anacrotic  wave  is 
simply  a  quickly  reflected  wave.  It  is  possible  that  the  same 
explanation  will  hold  for  its  appearance  under  pathological  con- 
ditions. 


Fig.  200. — Anacrotic  pulse  from  a  case  of  aortic  stenosis  (Mackenzie) :    b.  The  anacrotic 

wave. 

Characteristics  of  the  Pulse  in  Health  and  in  Disease. — 

By  mere  palpation  the  physician  obtains  from  the  pulse  valuable 
indications  concerning  the  heart  and  the  circulation.  The  fre- 
quency of  the  heart  beat  is  at  once  made  evident,  so  far  at  least  as 
the  ventricle  is  concerned.  One  may  determine  readily  whether 
the  frequency  is  above  or  below  the  normal,  whether  the  rhythm 
is  regular  or  irregular.  By  the  same  means  one  can  determine 
whether  the  pulse  is  large  (pulsus  magnus)  or  small  (pulsus  parvus), 
whether  the  wave  rises  and  falls  rapidly  (pulsus  celer)  as  happens 
in  the  case  of  insufficiency  of  the  aortic  valves,  or  whether  in  one 
phase  or  the  other  it  is  more  prolonged  than  normal  (pulsus  tardus). 
It  seems  obvious,  however,  that  a  more  satisfactory  conclusion  may 
be  reached  in  all  such  cases  by  obtaining  a  sphygmographic  record. 
In  the  works  devoted  to  clinical  methods  numerous  such  sphygmo- 
grams  are  described.  By  mere  pressure  upon  the  artery  one  can 
determine  also  approximately  whether  the  blood-pressure  is  high 
or  low,  and  a  similar  inference  may  be  drawn  from  the  character 
of  the  sphygmogram;  but  since  the  introduction  of  the  sphygmo- 
manometer (p.  453)  it  seems  evident  that  this  instrument  must  be 
appealed  to  whenever  the  determination  of  blood-pressure  is  a 
matter  of  importance. 

Venous  Pulse. — Under  usual  conditions  the  pulse  wave  is  lost 

*  Von  Kries,  "  Studien  zur  Pulslehre,"  1892. 


476  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

before  entering  the  capillary  regions,  but  as  a  result  of  dilatation  in 
the  arteries  of  an  organ  the  pulse  may  carry  through  and  appear  in 
the  veins,  in  which  it  may  be  shown,  for  instance,  by  the  rhythmical 
flow  of  blood  from  an  opened  vein.  The  term  venous  pulse,  how- 
ever, as  generally  used  applies  to  an  entirely  different  phenomenon, 
— namely,  to  a  pulse  seen  especially  in  the  external  jugular  vein. 
When  this  vein  is  prominent  or  is  made  prominent  by  some  com- 
pression a  pulse  may  be  seen  and  recorded  which  is  synchronous 
with  the  heart  beat.  It  is  not  a  wave  that  has  come  through  the 
capillary  circulation  in  the  head,  since  if  the  vein  be  completely 
blocked  by  the  finger  the  wave  disappears  on  the  upper  side.  It  is 
due  to  the  heart  beat;  and  is  usually  attributed  to  the  auricular 
contraction.  At  each  contraction  of  the  auricle  the  venous  flow 
is  partially  blocked;  at  each  relaxation  the  flow  is  suddenly  aug- 
mented. Under  pathological  conditions  a  marked  venous  pulse 
of  a  different  origin  maybe  seen  in  the  jugular  or  may  be  felt  over  the 
liver  (liver  pulse).  This  wave  is  usually  described  in  connection 
with  an  insufficiency  of  the  auriculo- ventricular  valves.  Under  such 
a  condition  it  is  evident  that  the  contraction  of  the  ventricles  will 
be  accompanied  by  a  regurgitation  toward  the  auricles  and  the 
production  of  a  positive  wave  in  the  venae  cavse  and  their  branches.* 

*  For  a  discussion  of  the  venous  pulse  consult  works  on  clinical  methods, — 
e.  g.,  Sahli,  "  Lehrbuch  der  klinischen  Untersuchungs-Methoden,"  1902. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

THE  HEART  BEAT. 

General  Statement. — We  divide  the  heart  into  four  chambers, 
— the  two  auricles  and  the  two  ventricles.  What  we  designate  as  a 
heart  beat  begins  with  the  simultaneous  contraction  of  the  two 
auricles,  immediately  followed  by  the  simultaneous  contraction  of 
the  two  ventricles;  then  there  is  a  pause,  during  which  the  whole 
heart  is  at  rest  and  is  filling  with  blood.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the 
heart  beat  is  initiated  not  by  the  auricles  proper,  but  by  a  con- 
traction of  the  mouths  of  the  large  veins — vense  cavse  or  pulmonary 
veins,  where  they  open  into  the  auricle.  The  tissue  in  these  veins 
-corresponds   physiologically   to   a   definite   chamber,    the   venous 


&i7BHHBBaHBBaHHBBHaHBBaaBBBHHBBBB 
naBBBBBBflBBiBaaaBaBaBBBBsaaBBaBB 

BB^SSfiBaaSSBBIiBSBBlBBBBBBBBBasaS 


BBBISigiBaaBBBBI 


BBBnBBaBBBBBBBBfeBaBBBBBBBI 

flBBnBB^BBBBiBBnBBlBBBBBBBBflBBBBB 
BBBUiBBIBaBiBBIBBBaBBaaBBBBBBMBB 

RSaiiUBBBnaBBBBBBBBB  PBBBBBBBBBBI BB 
BaSBBBB0BBBBBSBBBBh!llHlBB&SiBBBBBB 


BBBIIBI 

i2ff|PMBiL 

BBSBBBBfaBBBI 


BBBIBBBBBI 

IBBBBII1BI 

'BBBBISIBI 
IBBBBBB! 


ibbbhbbbbbb 
ibbpmbbbbub 

iBSBBBBBBBH 


Fig.  201. — To  show  the  time  relations  of  the  auricular  systole  and  diastole,  and  ven- 
"tricular  systole  and  diastole  {Marey) :  Or.  D,  Tracing  from  right  auricle ;  Vent.  D,  tracing 
from  right  ventricle;  Vent.  G,  tracing  from  left  ventricle.  Obtained  from  the  heart  of  the 
horse  by  means  of  tubes  communicating  with  the  cavities. 


sinus,  in  the  heart  of  the  lower  vertebrates.  In  the  description  of 
the  heart  beat  the  contraction  of  the  veins  is  usually  neglected, 
although  in  a  fundamental  consideration  of  the  cause  of  the  normal 
sequence  it  is  of  great  importance.  The  contraction  of  any  part  of 
the  heart  is  designated  as  its  systole,  its  relaxation  and  period  of  rest 
as  its  diastole.  In  the  heart  beat  we  have,  therefore,  the  auricular 
systole,  the  ventricular  systole,  and  the  heart  pause  during  which 
both  chambers  are  in  diastole.  The  general  relations  of  systole, 
diastole,  and  pause  are  represented  graphically  in  the  accompanying 
figure  (Fig.  201).     It  will  be  noted  that  the  auricular  svstole  is 

477 


478 


CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 


shorter  and  its  diastole 
longer  than  the  similar 
conditions  in  the  ventricles. 
The  Musculature  of  the 
Auricles  and  Ventricles. 
— Embryologically  the  four- 
chambered  heart  is  devel- 
oped from  a  simple  tube 
and  this  origin  is  indicated 
in  the  adult  by  the  fact 
that  the  musculature  of  the 
two  auricles  is  in  large  part, 
common  to  both  chambers, 
— that  is,  surrounds  them 
as  though  they  were  a  single 
chamber, — and  the  same  is 
true  of  the  ventricles.  In 
the  auricles  there  is  a  super- 
ficial layer  of  fibers  which 
runs  transversely  and  en- 
circles both  auricles.  The 
simultaneous  contraction  of 
the  two  chambers  would 
seem  to  be  insured  by  this 
arrangement  alone.  In  addition,  each  auricle  possesses  a  more  or 
less  independent  system  of  fibers,  whose  course  is  at  right  angles 
to  that  of  the  preceding  layer.  These  fibers  may  be  considered 
as  loops  arising  and  ending  in  the  auriculo-ventricular  ring.     The 


Fig.  202.— Musculature  of  the  heart. — {Mac- 
Callum.)  Heart  as  seen  from  the  posterior:  LAV , 
Left  auriculo-ventricular  opening;  RAV,  right 
auriculo-ventricular  opening ;  PA ,  opening  of  pul- 
monary artery.  /.  The  superficial  muscle  layer 
originating  in  the  right  and  left  auriculo-ventric- 
ular rings  and  jaosterior  half  of  tendon  of  conus. 
//.  The  superficial  layer  originating  in  the  anterior 
half  of  the  tendon  of  the  conus  (fills  in  the  gap  of 
Fig.  1).  ///.  The  scroll  fibers  in  several  layers 
forming  the  deeper  strata  of  the  heart's  muscu- 
lature. 


THE    HEART    BEAT.  479 

course  of  ,the  fibers  in  the  ventricles  has  been  difficult  to  make 
out  and  several  more  or  less  different  accounts  have  been  pub- 
lished. It  is  clear  from  even  a  casual  examination  that  the 
superficial  fibers  are  common  to  both  ventricles.  They  may  be 
considered  as  arising  from  the  auriculo-ventricular  ring  in  one 
ventricle  to  pass  in  a  spiral  course  to  end  in  the  papillary  muscles 
and  through  their  tendons  in  the  auriculo-ventricular  ring  of  the 
other  ventricle.  Those  that  begin  on  the  outer  surface  in  one  ven- 
tricle end  on  the  inner  surface  in  the  other.  This  arrangement  is  rep- 
resented in  Fig.  202,  /  and  //.  The  contractions  of  these  bands  of 
fibers  would  tend  not  only  to  diminish  the  cavities  of  the  ventricles 
from  side  to  side,  but  also  to  bring  the  apex  and  base  together  and  to 
rotate  the  apex  from  left  to  right.  Beneath  these  superficial  fibers 
lie  thicker  bands,  the  fibers  of  which  have  a  more  transverse  course. 
According  to  MacCallum,*  these  fibers  form  three  flat  bands  which 
pass  in  the  form  of  a  scroll  from  one  ventricle  through  the  septum 
into  the  other,  as  shown  in  Fig.  202,  ///.  The  band  that  lies  most 
superficially  in  the  left  ventricle  at  its  origin  lies  deepest  in  the  right 
ventricle.  The  effect  of  the  contractions  of  these  bands  should  be 
to  compress  the  cavities  of  the  ventricles  in  the  lateral  diameters. 
In  addition  to  these  two  main  systems  of  fibers  there  are  other  less 
prominent  bands  belonging  entirely  to  one  ventricle.  A  matter 
of  very  great  physiological  interest  in  connection  with  the  invariable 
sequence  of  the  heart  beat  has  been  the  question  of  the  existence  of 
a  direct  muscular  connection  between  the  auricles  and  ventricles. 
While  such  a  connection  exists  obviously  in  the  lower  animals, — 
frogs,  terrapins, — in  the  mammalia  there  is  a  conspicuous  tendinous 
ring  at  the  auriculo-ventricular  groove  which  has  been  believed  by 
many  to  make  a  complete  separation  between  auricles  and  ventricles. 
Several  observers,  however,  have  shown  recently  that  there  is  a 
muscular  connection  in  the  heart  of  man  and  of  a  number  of  mam- 
malia.! The  chief  connection  is  described  as  a  bundle  of  fibers, 
auriculo-ventricular  bundle,  which  springs  from  the  right  side  of  the 
interauricular  septum,  runs  obliquely  through  the  connective  tissue, 
and  ends  in  the  muscle  of  the  ventricular  septum  under  the  origin 
of  the  aorta. 

The  Contraction  Wave  in  the  Heart. — The  muscular  con- 
traction of  the  heart  beat  begins  at  the  mouths  of  the  great  veins 
opening  into  the  right  and  the  left  ventricles  and  thence  passes  into 
the  auricle.  The  continuity  of  the  muscular  tissue  enables  us  to 
understand  how  this  contraction  passes  quickly  from  cell  to  cell  in 
the  direction  of  the  muscular  fibers.     In  the  mammalian  heart 

*  MacCallum,  "Contributions  to  the  Science  of  Medicine,"  dedicated  to 
W.  H.  Welch,  p.  307,  Baltimore,  1900;   contains  also  the  literature, 

t  See  Retzer,  "Archiv  f.  Anatomie,"  1904,  p.  1;  and  Braeunig,  "Archiv 
f.  Physiologie,"  1904,  suppl.  volume,  p.  1. 


480  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH, 

when  exposed  to  view  it  is  evident  that  the  auricular  systole  is  not 
sufficient  to  empty  its  cavity  so  far  at  least  as  the  atrium  is  con- 
cerned. The  contraction  of  the  auricular  appendages  is  more 
forcible.  The  contraction  may  be  regarded  as  a  rapid  peristalsis 
which  sweeps  a  portion  of  the  blood  before  it  into  the  ventricle. 
The  force  of  the  contraction  has  been  determined  in  a  number  of 
cases.  For  the  auricle  of  the  dog's  heart  it  may  be  valued  at  20 
mms.  Hg.  The  systole  of  the  ventricle  is  to  the  eye  a  simultaneous 
contraction  of  the  whole  musculature.  Various  observers,  however, 
have  shown  that  the  wave  of  contraction  travels  over  the  heart  with 
a  certain  velocity,  which  for  the  human  heart  has  been  estimated  at 
5  m.  per  second  (Waller).*  It  is  probable  that  this  wave  starts  at 
the  base  of  the  ventricle  and  travels  along  the  course  of  the  fibers, — 
that  is,  first  toward  the  apex  and  then  into  the  interior  of  the  heart, 
ending  in  the  papillary  muscles.  In  fact,  Roy  and  Adams  have 
demonstrated  graphically  that  the  contraction  of  the  papillary 
muscles  occurs  somewhat  later  than  that  of  the  wall  of  the  ventricle. 
The  slight  pause  between  auricular  and  ventricular  systole  may  be 
referred  to  the  fact  that  the  muscular  bridge  between  the  two 
chambers  is  small.  We  have  experimental  evidence  that  the  con- 
traction wave  proceeds  more  slowly  through  a  narrow  bridge  of  this 
sort. 

The  Electrical  Variation. — The  contraction  of  the  heart 
muscle,  like  that  of  skeletal  muscle,  is  accompanied  by  an  electrical 
change.  That  is,  where  the  muscle  substance  is  in  contraction  its 
electrical  potential  is  different  from  that  of  the  resting  muscle. 
The  advancing  wave  of  contraction  causes  a  corresponding  electrical 
change.  If  two  points  of  the  heart  are  connected  with  an  electrom- 
eter an  electrical  current  will  be  shown,  since  the  electrical  change 
will  affect  the  electrodes  at  different  times.  This  electrical  varia- 
tion of  the  contracting  heart  muscle  may  be  shown  easily  by 
means  of  the  rheoscopic  muscle-nerve  preparation  (see  p.  99).  If 
the  heart  is  exposed  and  the  nerve  of  the  preparation  is  laid  over  its 
surface  each  ventricular  systole  is  accompanied  by  a  kick  of  the 
muscle,  since  the  nerve  by  connecting  separated  points  acts  as  a 
conducting  wire  for  the  current  generated,  and  is  stimulated,  there- 
fore, at  each  systole.  Since  the  muscle-nerve  preparation  gives 
only  a  simple  contraction  for  each  ventricular  systole,  we  may 
assume  that  this  latter  contraction  is  itself  simple, — that  is,  due 
to  a  single  stimulus.  The  electrical  variation  may  be  obtained  also 
by  means  of  the  capillary  electrometer  (p.  94),  and  since  the  move- 
ment of  the  mercury  in  this  instrument  may  be  photographed  the 
results  can  be  studied  in  detail.     The  variation  is  diphasic.     If  one 

*  See  Tigerstedt,  "  Die  Phj^siologie  des  Kreislaufes,"  1893,  p.  80,  for  litera- 
ture. 


THE    HEART    BEAT.  481 

electrode  is  placed  toward  the  base  of  the  heart  and  the  other  at  the 
apex,  then,  according  to  most  observers,  the  base  first  becomes  nega- 
tive as  regards  the  apex  and  later  the  apex  negative  as  regards  the 
base.  This  result  agrees  with  the  view  stated  above  of  the  di- 
rection taken  by  the  wave  of  contraction  in  the  ventricular  muscle. 
Change  in  Form  of  the  Ventricle  During  Systole. — The 
systole  of  the  ventricle  diminishes,  of  course,  the  cavity  within  and 
forces  out  the  blood.  Whether  the  cavity  is  completely  obliterated 
under  ordinary  conditions — that  is,  whether  the  ventricles  empty 
themselves  at  each  beat — is  not  certain.  Under  what  we  may 
designate  as  unusual  conditions — such,  for  instance,  as  an  unusually 
high  pressure  in  the  aorta — it  seems  certain  that  the  ventricle  can  not 
empty  itself  completely  or  at  least  can  not  continue  to  do  so,  and  the 
result  in  such  cases  is  a  backing  up  of  blood  and  a  rise  of  pressure  in 
the  left  auricle  and  pulmonary  vein.  Much  attention  has  been  paid 
to  the  external  change  of  form  of  the  ventricle  during  systole. 
Does  it  diminish  in  size  in  all  diameters  or  only  certain  diameters? 
The  question  is  one  that  can  not  be  answered  definitely  for  all 
normal  conditions,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  form  of  the  heart 
during  diastole  varies  with  the  posture  of  the  body.  During 
diastole  the  heart  muscle  is  quite  soft  and  relaxed,  and  consequently 
its  shape  is  influenced  by  gravity.  The  exact  change  of  form 
that  it  undergoes  in  passing  from  diastole  to  systole  will  vary  with 
its  shape,  whatever  that  may  happen  to  be,  in  diastole.  During 
systole  the  musculature,  on  the  contrary,  is  hard  and  resisting  and 
the  form  of  the  heart  in  this  phase  is  probably  constant.  The 
change  from  the  variable  diastolic  to  the  constant  systolic  form  will 
naturally  be  different  in  different  positions.  With  an  excised  frog's 
heart  one  can  show  that  the  ventricle  is  elongated  in  passing  from 
diastole  to  systole  or  one  can  show  the  reverse.  If  the  heart  is  laid 
upon  its  side  it  flattens  in  diastole  so  as  to  increase  in  length, 
and  systole  causes  a  shortening.  If  the  heart  is  held  or  placed 
with  its  apex  pointing  upward  it  flattens  during  systole  so  as 
to  shorten  the  diameter  from  base  to  apex  and  during  systole 
this  diameter  is  lengthened.  In  ourselves  the  exact  change  of 
shape  is  probably  different  in  the  erect  from  what  it  is  in  the 
recumbent  posture.  Speaking  generally,  the  accounts  agree  in 
stating  that  the  long  diameter  of  the  heart  is  decreased,  base  and 
apex  are  brought  closer  together,  and  the  diameter  from  right  to 
left  is  also  decreased,  while  the  anteroposterior  or  ventrodorsal 
diameter  is  increased.  That  is,  the  outline  of  the  base  of  the  heart 
during  diastole  is  an  ellipse  with  its  short  diameter  in  the  ventro- 
dorsal direction.  During  systole  this  outline  approaches  that  of  a 
circle.*    A  more  interesting  change  is  described  for  the  apex  of  the 

*  See  Haycraft  and  Edes,  "  .Journal  of  Physiology,"  12,  426. 
31 


482  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 

ventricle.  Owing  to  the  whorl  made  by  the  superficial  fibers  at 
this  point  as  they  turn  to  pass  into  the  interior  (see  Fig.  202,  /), 
the  systole  causes  a  rotation  of  the  apex,  which  is  thereby 
forced  more  firmly  against  the  chest  wall.  This  rotation  and 
erection  of  the  apex  during  systole  may  be  seen  upon  the  exposed 
heart  of  the  lower  mammals  and  has  been  described  also  for  man 
in  cases  in  which  the  heart  is  covered  only  by  the  skin,  owing  to 
malformation  in  the  chest  wall  (ectopia  cordis)  or  to  surgical 
operations. 

The  Apex  Beat. — The  apex  of  the  heart  rests  against  the  chest 
wall  at  the  fourth  or  fifth  intercostal  space,  and  here  the  systole 
may  be  seen  and  felt  in  consequence  of  a  slight  protrusion  of  the 
wall.  Much  discussion  has  ensued  as  to  why  this  protrusion 
occurs  during  systole,  since  the  apex  is  drawn  toward  the  base 
and  the  volume  of  the  heart  is  diminished  by  the  output  of 
blood.  The  fact  seems  to  be  explained  satisfactorily  by  two  con- 
siderations: The  heart  during  diastole  rests  against  the  chest  wall 
at  its  apex  and  a  portion  of  its  anterior  surface,  but  causes  no  pro- 
trusion of  the  wall  because  the  tenseness  of  this  latter  is  sufficient 
to  flatten  or  deform  the  softer  heart  muscle.  During  systole  the 
hardened  heart  muscle,  on  the  contrary,  overcomes  the  now  rela- 
tively less  resistant  integument.  The  rotation  of  the  apex  tends 
also  to  maintain  the  contact;  so  that,  although  the  heart  is  short- 
ened in  its  long  diameter,  the  extent  of  the  movement  is  not 
sufficient  to  draw  it  away  from  the  chest  wall.  In  the  second  place, 
the  discharge  of  the  heart  contents  into  the  curved  aorta  by  tending 
to  straighten  this  tube  causes  a  movement  of  the  whole  heart 
downward  which  counteracts  the  effect  of  the  shortening  in  the 
long  diameter.  The  apex  beat  is  proof  that  the  apex  remains 
against  the  chest  wall  during  systole  and  in  mammals  corroborative 
experiments  have  been  made  by  nmning  needles  through  the  chest 
wall  into  the  base  and  the  apex  of  the  heart.  Such  needles  act  as 
levers  with  a  fulcrum  in  the  skin,  and  from  the  movement  of  the 
projecting  portion  it  has  been  shown  that,  while  the  basal  portion 
of  the  heart  moves  downward  during  systole,  the  apex  remains 
more  or  less  stationary  except  for  the  lateral  movements  due  to 
the  rotation. 

The  Cardiogram. — The  apex  beat  may  be  recorded  easily  by 
means  of  appropriate  tambours.  Several  instruments  have  been 
especially  devised  for  this  purpose  and  are  designated  as  cardio- 
graphs. The  cardiograph  described  by  Marey  is  shown  in  Fig.  203. 
It  consists  essentially  of  a  tambour  inclosed  in  a  metal  box.  The 
rubber  membrane  of  the  tambour  carries  a  button  which  can  be 
brought  to  bear,  under  a  suitable  pressure,  upon  the  apex  of  the 
heart.     The  movements  of  this  button  cause  pressure  changes  in 


THE    HEART    BEAT. 


483 


the  air  of  the  tambour  which  are  transmitted  through  tubing  to  a 
recording  tambour  and  recorded  on  a  kymographion.  A  simple 
and  effective  cardiograph  may  be  made  by  pressing  a  funnel 
against  the  skin  over  the  apex  and  connecting  the  stem  of  the 


Fig.  203. — Marey's  cardiograph.  The  button  on  the  tambour  is  pressed  upon  the 
chest  over  the  apex.  The  movements  are  transmitted  through  the  tube  to  the  right  to  a 
recording  tambour. 

funnel  by  tubing  to  a  suitable  recording  tambour.  The  car- 
diograms obtained  by  such  methods  have  been  the  subject  of 
much  discussion.  The  form  of  the  curve  varies  somewhat  with 
the  instrument  used,  the  way  in  which  it  is  applied,  the  position  of 
the  heart  apex  with  reference  to  the  chest  wall,  and  with  the  con- 


Fig.  204. 


-Two  cardiograms  from  the  same  individual  to  show  characteristic  records: 
Beginning  of  systole;  h-c,  sy.stolic  plateau. — (After  Marey.) 


ditions  of  the  circulation,  and  it  is  often  difficult  to  give  it  a  correct 
interpretation.  An  uncomplicated  form  of  the  cardiogram  is 
represented  in  Fig.  204,  7,  and  a  curve  more  difficult  to  interpret  in 
Fig.  204,  8.    It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  cardiograph  curve 


484  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 

is  partly  a  pressure  curve  and  partly  a  volume  curve, — that  is,  the 
changes  in  volume  as  well  as  the  changes  in  pressure  of  the  heart 
during  systole  will  affect  the  instrument. 

The  Intraventricular  Pressure  During  Systole. — The  best 
analyses  of  the  details  of  the  systole  of  the  ventricle  have  been  made 
by  a  study  of  the  changes  in  pressure  within  the  ventricle.  For 
this  purpose  a  tube  filled  with  liquid  is  introduced  into  the  cavity  of 
the  ventricle.  A  tube  used  for  such  a  purpose  is  designated  as  a 
heart  sound.  For  the  right  ventricle  it  is  introduced  through  an 
opening  in  the  jugular  vein  and  pushed  down  until  it  lies  in  the 
ventricle.  For  the  left  ventricle  it  is  introduced  by  way  of  the 
carotid  or  subclavian  artery  and  in  this  case  is  forced  through  the 
opening  guarded  by  the  semilunar  valves.  The  sound  is  then 
connected  to  a  suitable  recording  apparatus  by  rigid  tubing  filled 
with  liquid.    The  changes  in  pressure  in  the  ventricle  are  extensive 


Fig.  205. — Synchronous  record  of  the  intraventricular  pressure  (F),  and  the  aortic 
pressure  (A) :  S,  The  time  record, — each  vibration  =  liiy  sec. ;  0-5,  corresponding  ordi- 
nates  in  the  two  curves;  1  marks  the  opening  of  the  semilunar  valves;  3  marks  the 
closure  of  these  valves  and  the  beginning  of  diastole. — {Hurthle.) 

and  very  rapid.  To  register  them  accurately  the  recording  instru- 
ment must  respond  with  great  promptness  and  at  the  same  time 
must  be  free  from  inertia  movements.  A  mercury  manometer,  for 
instance,  would  be  entirely  useless  for  such  a  purpose,  since  the 
heavy  mass  of  mercury  could  not  follow  accurately  the  quick  changes 
in  pressure.  The  recording  manometer  devised  by  Hurthle  (p. 
449)  seems  to  have  met  the  requirements  more  satisfactorily  than 
any  other  of  the  numerous  instruments  described.  A  typical  curve 
obtained  by  means  of  the  Hiirthle  manometer  is  given  in  Fig.  205,  V . 
(Consult  also  the  classical  curve  obtained  by  Chauveau  and  Marey 
from  the  heart  of  the  horse  [Fig.  201].)  It  will  be  seen  that  the 
pressure  in  the  heart  rises  suddenly  with  the  beginning  of  the  ven- 
tricular contraction  and  a  certain  time  elapses  before  this  pressure 
is  strong  enough  to  open  the  semilunar  valves.  The  moment  that 
this  occurs  (1,  on  the  ventricular  curve  in  Fig.  205)  is  determined 


THE    HEART    BEAT.  485 

by  simultaneous  measurement  of  the  pressure  in  the  aorta,  it 
being  evident  that  the  pressure  will  begin  to  rise  in  this  latter 
vessel  the  moment  that  the  valves  open.  It  is  interesting  to  find 
that  the  yielding  of  the  valves  to  the  rising  pressure  in  the  ventricle 
is  not  indicated  on  the  curve  itself  by  any  variation, — a  fact  which 
indicates  that  the  valves  open  smoothly,  and  are  not  thrown  back 
with  a  sudden  shock.  A  very  characteristic  feature  of  the  ventric- 
ular curve  is  its  flat  top,  or  plateau  as  it  is  called.  In  some  cases 
the  plateau  slopes  more  or  less  upward,  in  other  cases  downward, 
depending,  doubtless,  on  the  respective  values  of  the  force  of  the 
heart  contraction  and  the  aortic  tension,  for  during  the  whole 
time  of  the  plateau  the  semilunar  valves  are  open  and  the  ven- 
tricle is  discharging  a  column  of  blood  into  the  aorta.  The 
different  features  of  the  ventricular  systole  as  gathered  from  these 
pressure  curves  are  expressed  by  Hiirthle  *  as  follows : 

I.  Systole,  phase  of  contraction  of  the  muscle  fibers  (0  to  3  in  Fig.  205,  V). 

(a)  Period  of  tension  (0  to  1),  durmg  which  the  auriculo-ventricular  and 
semilunar  valves  are  both  closed  and  the  heart  muscle  is  squeezing 
upon  the  contamed  blood.  This  period  ends  at  the  opening  of  the 
semilunar  valves. 

(b)  Period  of  emptying  (1  to  3).     During  this  time  the  heart  is  empty- 

ing itself  into  the  aorta  and  the  intraventricular  pressure  remains 
above  aortic  pressure.     It  ends  with  the  cessation  of  the  contrac- 
tion of  the  muscle  and  the  beginning  of  the  rapid  relaxation. 
II.  Diastole,  phase  of  relaxation  and  rest  of  the  muscle  fibers. 

(a)  Period  of  relaxation  from  3  until  the  curve  reaches  a  horizontal. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  relaxation  the  semilunar  valves  are  closed, 
and  from  comparison  with  the  aortic  curve  the  instant  of  the  occur- 
rence of  this  closure  is  placed  at  4. 

(6)  Period  of  filling.  This  period  begins  as  soon  as  the  auriculo-ventric- 
ular valves  open  and  the  stream  of  blood,  which  had  been  flowing 
into  the  auricle  throughout  the  ventricular  systole,  is  permitted  to 
enter  the  ventricle.  During  this  period  of  filling  the  ventricular 
pressure  rises  slightly  as  the  heart  becomes  turgid  with  blood.  This 
increase  of  pressure  is  indicated  in  most  cardiograms  by  a  gradual 
rise  of  the  curve  during  this  period.  It  is  shown  in  the  curve  of 
Chauveau  and  Marey,  given  in  Fig.  201. 

The  Heart  Sounds. — An  interesting  and  important  feature  of 
the  heart  beat  is  the  occurrence  of  the  heart  sounds.  Two  sounds 
are  heard,  one  at  the  beginning,  the  other  at  the  end  of  the  ventricu- 
lar systole.  The  first  sound  has  a  deeper  pitch  and  is  longer  than 
the  second,  and  their  relative  pitch  and  duration  are  represented 
frequently  by  the  syllables  lubb-dup.  According  to  Haycraft,t 
both  tones  from  a  musical  standpoint  fall  in  the  bass  clef,  and  are 
separated  by  a  musical  interval  of  a  minor  third.  The  sounds  are 
readily  heard  by  applying  the  ear  to  the  thorax  over  the  heart,  but 
for  diagnostic  purposes  the  stethoscope  is  usually  employed,  and 

*  Hiirthle,  "Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  49,  84,  1891. 
t  Journal  of  Physiology,"  11,  486,  1890. 


486  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

this  method  of  investigation  by  hearing  is  designated  as  auscultation. 
The  importance  of  these  heart  sounds  in  diagnosis  was  first  em- 
phasized by  Laennec  (1819),  and  since  his  time  a  great  number  of 
theories  have  been  proposed  to  explain  their  causation.  Indeed, 
the  subject  is  not  yet  closed,  although  certain  general  views  regard- 
ing their  cause  and  the  time  of  their  occurrence  are  generally 
accepted.  The  second  sound  is  found  to  follow  immediately  upon 
the  closure  of  the  semilunar  valves.  The  usual  view,  therefore,  is 
that  the  sound  is  due  ultimately  to  the  vibrations  set  up  in  these 
valves  by  their  sudden  closure.  These  vibrations  are  transmitted 
to  the  column  of  blood  in  the  aorta  (or  pulmonary  artery)  and  then 
to  the  intervening  tissue  of  the  chest  wall.  This  view  is  made 
probable  by  a  number  of  experimental  results,  some  of  the  most 
important  of  which  were  brought  out  by  Williams  in  a  report  (1836) 
of  a  committee  appointed  by  the  British  Association  for  the 
special  purpose  of  investigating  the  subject.  It  has  been  shown: 
(1)  That  the  second  sound  disappears  before  the  first  sound  when 
the  animal  is  bled  to  death,  and  indeed  as  soon  as  the  heart  ceases 
to  throw  out  a  supply  of  blood  sufficient  to  maintain  aortic  tension. 
It  disappears  also  when  cuts  are  made  in  the  ventricles  so  that  the 
blood  may  escape  otherwise  than  through  the  arteries.  (2)  When 
the  valves  of  the  pulmonary  artery  and  aorta  are  hooked  back  in  the 
living  animal  the  second  sound  is  replaced  by  a  murmur  due  to  the 
rushing  back  of  the  blood  into  the  ventricle,  and  if  the  valves  are 
dropped  back  into  place  the  normal  second  sound  is  again  heard. 
(3)  Similar  sounds  may  be  produced  if  the  root  of  the  aorta  with  its 
valves  in  place  is  excised  and  attached  to  a  glass  tube  carrying  a 
column  of  water.  With  such  an  arrangement,  if  the  valves  are  held 
open  for  a  moment  and  then  closed  sharply  by  the  pressure  of  the 
column  of  water  a  sound  similar  to  that  of  the  second  heart  sound 
is  heard. 

The  physician  uses  this  view  of  the  cause  of  the  second  sound  in 
auscultation,  and  it  is  evident  that  the  nature  of  the  sound  or  its 
replacement  by  murmurs  will  give  useful  testimony  regarding  the 
condition  of  the  semilunar  valves.  The  first  heart  sound  has  of- 
fered more  difficulty.  It  occurs  at  or  shortly  after  the  close  of  the  au- 
ric ulo- ventricular  valves,  and  it  would  seem  natural,  therefore,  to 
attribute  it  to  the  vibration  of  these  valves  when  suddenly  put  under 
tension  by  the  ventricular  systole.  Most  authors,  indeed,  believe 
that  this  factor  is  at  least  partially  responsible  for  the  sound, — 
that  is,  that  the  sound  contains  a  valvular  element.  But  that  this 
is  not  the  sole  cause  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  the  bloodless  beating 
heart  still  gives  a  sound  at  the  time  of  the  ventricular  systole. 
Indeed,  if  the  apex  of  the  rabbit's  heart  is  cut  off,  it  continues 
to  beat  for  a  few  minutes  and  during  this  time  gives  a  first  heart 


THE    HEART    BEAT. 


487 


sound;  It  is  usually  said,  therefore,  that  the  first  heart  sound  is 
caused  by  the  combination  of  at  least  two  factors, — a  valvular 
element  due  to  the  vibration  of  the  auriculo-ventricular  valves,  and 
a  muscular  element  due  to  the  vibration  of  the  contracting  muscular 
mass.  Accepting  this  view,  there  is  a  further  difficulty  in  explain- 
ing the  origin  of  the  muscular  element.  According  to  some,  it  is 
due  to  the  fact  that  the  contraction  of  the  muscle  fibers  is  not 
simultaneous  throughout  the  ventricle  and  the  friction  of  the  inter- 
lacing fibers  sets  up  vibration  in  the  muscular  mass;  according  to 
others,  the  so-called  muscular  element  is  mainly  a  resonance  tone  of 
the  ear  membrane  of  the  auscultator, — the  shock  of  the  contracting 
heart  sets  the  tympanic  membrane  to  vibrating.  It  seems  useless 
to  attempt  a  detailed  discussion  of  these  conflicting  views,  since  no 
convincing  statements  can  be  made.  Practically,  the  time  at  which 
the  heart  sounds  occur  is  of  great  importance.  A  number  of 
observers  have  recorded  the  time  upon  a  cardiographic  tracing  of 


Fig.  206. — To  show  the  time  relation  of  the  heart  sounds  to  the  ventricular  beat 
(Marey) :  V.D.,  Tracing  of  the  ventricular  pressure  in  the  right  ventricle  of  the  horse.  Be- 
low the  two  marks  show,  respectively,  the  time  of  the  first  and  second  sounds.  The  first 
occurs  immediately  after  the  beginning  of  systole,  the  second  immediately  after  the  begin- 
ning of  diastole. 


the  heart  beat  with  results  such  as  are  shown  in  Fig.  206.  The 
figure  shows  clearly  the  general  fact  that  the  first  sound  is  heard 
very  shortly  after  the  beginning  of  systole  and  the  second  one 
immediately  after  the  end  of  systole.  The  first  sound  is  therefore 
systolic,  and  the  second  sound  diastolic.  A  more  exact  and  de- 
tailed study  of  the  time  relations  of  the  heart  sounds  has  been  made 
by  Einthoven  and  Geluk.*  These  authors  obtained  graphic  records 
of  the  heart  sounds.  The  sounds  received  first  by  a  microphone 
were  transmitted  to  a  capillary  electrometer  and  the  movements 
of  the  latter  were  photographed.  As  one  result  of  their  work  they 
give  the  schema  shown  in  Fig.  207.  It  will  be  seen  from  this  figure 
that  the  first  sound  begins  about  0.01  sec.  before  the  cardiogram 
shows  the  commencement  of  systole,  and  that  for  the  first  0.06  sec. 
the  sound  is  heard  only  over  the  apex  of  the  heart  (a-b) .     Over  the 

*  Einthoven   and  Geluk,  "  Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,  "  57,  617, 
1894. 


488 


CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH, 


base  of  the  heart  (second  intercostal  space)  the  first  sound  is  heard 
(6  to  c-d)  just  at  the  time  when  the  semilunar  valves  are  opened 
{h'), — that  is,  at  the  beginning  of  the  period  of  emptying  according 
to  the  classification  given  on  p.  485.  The  first  sound  ceases  long 
before  the  ventricular  contraction  itself  is  over, — a  fact  which 
would  seem  to  indicate  that  the  muscular  element  in  the  first  sound 
is  not  a  muscular  sound,  such  as  is  given  out  by  a  contracting 
skeletal  muscle.  The  beginning  of  the  second  sound  seems  to  mark 
exactly  the  time  of  closure  of  the  semilunar  valves.  The  character 
and  the  time  relations  of  the  murmurs  that  accompany  or  replace 
the  heart  sounds  form  the  interesting  practical  continuation  of  this 
theme;  but  the  subject  is  so  large  that  the  student  must  be  referred 
for  this  information  to  the  works  upon  clinical  methods. 

The  Events  That  Occur  during  a  Single  Cardiac  Cycle. — 
By  a  complete  cardiac  cycle  is  meant  the  time  from  any  given 


Fig.  207. — Schematic  representation  of  the  relation  of  the  heart  sounds  to  the  ventric- 
Tilar  beat:  C,  The  cardiogram;  1,  to  show  the  duration  of  the  first  heart  sound;  2,  the 
duration  of  the  second  heart  sound;  S,  the  time  record,  each  division  corresponding  to 
0.02  sec.  In  1,  a-a'  marks  the  instant  that  the  first  heart  sound  is  heard  over  the  apex, 
and  h-V  the  moment  that  it  is  heard  at  the  second  intercostal  space. — (Einthoven  and 
Geluk.) 


feature  of  the  heart  beat  until  that  feature  is  again  produced.  It 
may  be  helpful  to  summarize  the  events'  in  such  a  cycle  both  as 
regards  the  heart  and  as  regards  the  blood  contained  in  it.  We 
may  begin  with  the  closure  of  the  semilunar  valves.  At  that 
moment  the  second  heart  sound  is  heard  and  at  that  moment 
the  ventricle  is  quickly  relaxing  from  its  previous  contraction. 
Since  the  auriculo-ventricular  valves  are  still  closed,  the  ventricles 
for  a  brief  interval  are  shut  off  on  both  sides.  The  blood  is  flowing 
steadily  into  the  auricles  and  dilating  them.  As  soon  as  the 
ventricular  relaxation  is  complete  the  pressure  of  blood  in  the 
auricles  opens  the  auriculo-ventricular  valves,  and  from  that  moment 
until  the  beginning  of  the  auricular  systole  the  blood  from  the  large 
veins  is  filling  both  ventricles  and  auricles.  The  ventricles  become 
more  tense  and  the  auriculo-ventricular  valves  are  floated  into 
position  ready  for  closure.  The  auricular  systole  sends  a  sudden 
wave  of  blood  into  the  ventricles,  dilating  them  still  further  and 


THE    HEART   BEAT.  489 

momeritarily  blocking  or  retarding  the  flow  from  the  large  veins, 
whence  the  normal  venous  pulse  in  the  jugular  veins.  The  ven- 
tricular systole  follows  at  once  upon  the  auricular  systole,  the 
exact  relations  in  this  case  depending  somewhat  upon  the  pulse 
rate.  As  the  ventricle  enters  into  contraction  the  auriculo- ventric- 
ular valves  are  tightly  closed,  the  first  sound  is  heard,  and  for  a 
short  interval  the  ventricular  cavity  is  again  shut  off  on  both 
sides.  Soon  the  rising  pressure  in  the  interior  forces  open  the 
semilunar  valves,  and  then  a  column  of  blood  is  discharged 
into  aorta  and  pulmonary  artery  as  long  as  the  contraction  lasts. 
During  this  interval  the  flow  at  the  venous  end  of  the  heart 
continues,  the  blood  being  received  into  the  yielding  auricles. 
Indeed,  this  capacity  for  receiving  the  venous  inflow  dur- 
ing the  comparatively  long-lasting  ventricular  systole  may  be 
considered  as  one  valuable  mechanical  function  fulfilled  by  the 
auricles.  The  venous  flow  is  never  completely  blocked  and  at  the 
most  suffers  only  a  slight  retardation  during  the  very  brief  auricular 
systole.  At  the  end  of  the  ventricular  systole  the  excess  of  pressure 
in  the  aorta  and  the  pulmonary  artery  closes  the  semilunar  valves 
and  completes  the  cycle. 

Time  Relations  of  Systole  and  Diastole. — The  duration  of  the 
separate  phases  of  the  heart  beat  depends  naturally  on  the  rate 
of  beat.  Assuming  a  low  pulse  rate  of  70  per  minute,  the  average 
duration  of  the  different  phases  may  be  estimated  as  follows: 

Ventricular  systole =  0.379  sec. 

Ventricular  diastole  and  pause =  0.483     " 

Auricular  systole =0.]      to  0.17       " 

Auricular  diastole  and  pause =  0.762  to  0.692     " 

Einthoven  and  Geluk,  in  the  investigation  referred  to  above,, 
measured  the  time  intervals  of  systole  and  diastole  during  fifteen 
heart  periods  of  a  healthy  man,  and  found  that  the  time  for  the  systole 
varied  between  0.312  and  0.346  sec,  while  that  for  the  diastole 
varied  from  0.385  to  0.518  sec.  Experiments  by  a  number  of  ob- 
servers indicate  that  in  the  great  changes  of  rate  which  the  heart 
may  undergo  under  normal  conditions  the  diastolic  phase  is  affected 
relatively  much  more  than  the  systolic,  as  we  should  expect. 

The  Normal  Capacity  of  the  Ventricles  and  the  Work 
Done  by  the  Heart. — Various  efforts  have  been  made  to  measure 
the  normal  capacity  of  the  ventricles,  but  the  determination  has 
encountered  many  difficulties.  Experiments  and  observations  made 
upon  the  excised  heart  are  of  little  value,  since  the  distensible 
walls  of  the  ventricles  yield  readily  to  pressure,  and  it  is  difficult 
or  impossible  to  imitate  exactly  the  conditions  of  pressure  that 
prevail  during  life.  Nor  is  it  certain  whether  normally  the  ventricles 
empty  themselves  completely  during  systole.     The  older  observers- 


490  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

(Volkmann,  Vierordt)  attempted  to  arrive  at  a  determination  of  the 
normal  output  of  the  ventricles  by  calculations  based  upon  the 
velocity  of  the  blood  in  the  carotid  and  the  width  of  the  stream 
bed.  From  observations  on  many  animals  they  arrived  at  the 
generalization  that  at  each  systole  the  amount  of  blood  ejected 
from  the  ventricles  is  equal  to  about  ^^  of  the  body  weight.  For 
a  man  weighing,  say,  72  kilograms  (158  lbs.)  this  ratio  would  give 
an  output  for  each  systole  of  180  gms.  (6  ozs.).  More  recent 
observers,  however,  have  found  this  estimate  too  high.  Howell 
and  Donaldson*  measured  the  output  directly  for  the  heart  of  the 
dog,  making  use  of  a  heart  isolated  from  the  body  and  kept  beating 
by  an  artificial  circulation.  The  ratio  of  the  output  varied  with  the 
rate  of  beat;  for  a  rate  of  180  beats  per  minute  it  was  equal  to 
0.00117  (-8-5-5)  of  the  body  weight;  for  a  rate  of  120  beats  per  minute 
it  was  equal  to  0.0014  (y^-o)-  This  ratio  is  therefore  about  one-half 
of  that  proposed  by  Volkmann.  Tigerstedt,  from  observations 
upon  rabbits,  obtained  a  lower  ratio  still  (0.00042);  but  from  his 
own  results  and  those  obtained  by  other  workers  he  concludes! 
that  an  average  valuation  for  the  volume  of  blood  discharged  by 
each  ventricle  of  the  human  heart  is  from  50  to  100  c.c.  On  this 
basis  one  may  make  an  approximate  estimate  of  the  work  done 
at  each  beat.  Using  Tigerstedt's  figures,  such  results  as  the  follow- 
ing are  obtained:  On  the  left  side  the  heart  empties  its  100  c.c. 
against  a  pressure  of  150  mms.  Hg.  (0.150  meter)  and  on  the  right 
side  against  a  pressure  of,  say,  60  mms.  Hg.  (0.06  meter).  The 
work  done  is  calculated  from  the  formula  w  =  pr,  in  which  p  repre- 
sents the  weight  of  the  mass  thrown  out  and  r  the  resistance  or 
mean  aortic  pressure.  This  latter  factor  must  be  multiplied  by 
13.6,  the  density  of  mercury,  to  reduce  to  a  column  of  blood. 

Left   ventricle,  100  gms.  X  (0.150  X  13.6)  =  204.0  grammeters. 
Right        "         100     "     X  (0.06    X  13.6)  =    81.6 


285.6  grammeters. 

To  this  must  be  added  the  energy  represented  by  the  velocity 
of  the  mass  ejected  into  the  aorta.  Placing  this  velocity  at  500 
mms.  (0.5  meter)  for  both  aorta  and  pulmonary  artery,  the  energy 
represented  in  mechanical  work  is  estimated  from  the  formula  ^ 
in  which  p  represents  the  weight  of  the  mass  moved,  v  the  velocity 
of  its  movement,  and  g  the  accelerating  force  of  gravity.  Applying 
this  formula  we  have  for  each  ventricle  2X98  =1-28  grammeters, 
or  for  both  ventricles  2.56  grammeters,  making  a  total  of  over  288 

*  Howell  and  Donaldson,  "  Philosophical  Transactions,"  Royal  Soc,  Lon- 
don, 1884. 

t  Tigerstedt,  "Lehrbuch  der  Physiologic  des  Kreislaufes,"  p.  152,  1893, 


THE    HEART    BEAT.  491 

grammeters  of  work.  That  is,  the  mechanical  work  done  at  each 
contraction  of  the  heart  is  equal  to  that  necessary  to  raise  288  gms. 
a  meter  in  height.  The  calculations  made  by  different  authors  as 
to  the  amount  of  blood  discharged  from  each  ventricle  during 
systole  may  be  tabulated  as  follows: 


Thomas  Young 45  gms. 

Volkmami 188      • 

Vierordt 180 

Fick 50-73 

Howell  and  Donaldson 75-90 

Hoorweg 47 

Zxmtz 60 

Tigerstedt 50-100 

Plumier 70 

Loewy  and  v.  Schrotter  ....  55 


for  weight  of  72  kgms. 

li  u  u      u  u 

"  65      " 
60-65  kgms. 


The   Coronary   Circulation   during   the   Heart   Beat. — The 

condition  of  the  blood-flow  in  the  coronary  vessels  during  the  phases 
of  the  heart  beat  has  been  the  subject  of  much  speculation  and 
experiment,  since  it  has  entered  as  a  factor  in  the  discussion  of 
several  mechanical  and  nutritive  problems  that  are  connected  with 
the  physiology  of  the  heart.  According  to  a  view  usually  attributed 
to  Thebesius  (1708),  the  flaps  of  the  semilunar  valves  are  thrown 
back  during  systole  and  shut  off  the  coronary  circulation,  and 
therefore  the  coronary  vessels,  unlike  those  of  other  organs,  are 
filled  during  diastole.  In  modern  times  this  view  has  been  revived 
by  Briicke,  who  made  it  a  part  of  his  theory  of  the  "  self-regulation" 
of  the  heart  beat.  According  to  this  view,  the  coronaries  are  shut 
off  from  the  aorta  during  systole  by  the  flaps  of  the  semilunar  valves, 
so  that  the  contraction  of  the  ventricle  is  not  opposed  by  the 
distended  arteries,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  reinjection  of  these 
vessels  from  the  aorta  during  diastole  aids  in  the  dilatation  of  the 
ventricular  cavities.  Experimental  work  has  shown  decisively  that 
the  part  of  this  theory  relating  to  the  closure  of  the  coronary  arteries 
by  the  semilunar  valves  is  incorrect.*  Records  of  pressure  changes 
in  the  coronary  arteries  during  the  heart  beat  made  by  Martin  and 
Sedgwick  and  by  Porter  show  that  they  are  substantially  identical 
with  those  in  the  carotid  or  aorta,  and  records  of  the  velocity  of  the 
blood-flow  made  by  Rebatel  show  that  at  the  beginning  of  systole 
the  flow  in  the  coronaries  suffers  a  sudden  systolic  acceleration  as  in 
the  case  of  other  arteries.  During  systole,  therefore,  the  mouths  of 
the  coronary  arteries  are  in  free  communication  with  the  aorta. 
But  the  coronary  system — arteries,  capillaries,  and  veins — is  in 
part  imbedded  in  the  musculature  of  the  ventricles,  and  we  should 
suppose  that  the  great  pressure  exerted  by  the  contracting  muscu- 

*  See  Porter,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  1,  145,  1898,  for  dis- 
-cussion  and  literature. 


492  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 

lature  would  at  the  height  of  systole  clamp  off  this  system  and  stop 
the  coronary  circulation.  That  this  result  really  happens  is  indi- 
dicated  by  Rebatel's  curves  of  the  velocity  of  the  flow  in  the  coro- 
nary arteries.  As  shown  in  Fig.  208,  the  great  acceleration  (a)  in 
velocity  at  the  beginning  of  systole  is  quickly  followed  by  a  drop  to 
zero  (&)  or  even  a  negative  value, — that  is,  a  flow  in  the  other  direc- 
tion, toward  the  aorta.  At  the  end  of  the  first  (relaxation)  phase 
of  diastole  there  is  again  a  sudden  increase  in  velocity  (c),  corre- 
sponding with  the  injection  of  the  arteries  from  the  aorta,  and  this 
again  by  a  decrease  at  the  end  of  the  diastole  at  the  time  when  the 
ventricular  cavity  is  filled  with  venous  blood  under  some  pressure. 
Porter,  moreover,  has  shown  in  an  interesting  series  of  experiments 
that  when  a  piece  of  the  ventricle  is  kept  beating,  by  supplying  it 
with  blood  through  its  nutrient  artery  from  a  reservoir  at  con- 
stant pressure,  each   systole  causes  a  jet  of   blood  from  the  sev- 


\\\    IW 


^      K^ 


H   A!     r 


Fig.  208. — Simultaneous  record  of  the  blood-pressure  (A)  and  the  blood-velocity  (B> 
in  the  coronary  arteries  (Chauveau  and  Rebatel) :  a,  Marks  the  beginning  of  the  systole 
(there  is  a  rise  in  pressure  and  in  velocity) ;  6,  marks  a  second  rise  of  pressure  (A)  due  to 
the  closure  of  the  coronary  capillaries  by  the  contracting  ventricle  (at  this  moment  in  B 
the  velocity  falls  off  rapidly) ;  c,  curve  (B)  shows  an  increase  in  velocity  due  to  the  open- 
ing of  the  small  coronary  vessels  at  the  beginning  of  diastole. 


ered  vessels  at  the  margin  of  the  piece.  In  fact,  the  rhythmical 
squeeze  of  its  own  vessels  during  systole  accelerates  effectively  the 
coronary  circulation.  The  volume  of  blood  flowing  through  the 
heart  vessels  increases  with  the  frequency  or  the  force  of  the  beat, 
since  each  systole  empties  the  coronary  system  more  or  less  com- 
pletely toward  the  venous  side  and  at  each  diastole  the  distended 
aorta  quickly  fills  the  empty  vessel. 

The  Suction-pump  Action  of  the  Heart. — So  far  in  con- 
sidering the  mechanics  of  the  circulation  attention  has  been  directed 
only  to  the  force-pump  action  of  the  heart.  All  of  the  energy  of  the 
circulation,  the  velocity  of  the  flow  and  the  internal  pressure,  has 
been  referred  to  the  force  of  contraction  of  the  ventricles  as  the 
main  cause,  and  to  certain  accessory  factors,  such  as  the  respiratory 
movements  and  the  contractions  of  the  skeletal  muscles,  as  subsid- 
iary causes.   It  is  possible,  however,  that  the  heart  may  also  act  as. 


THE   HEART   BEAT.  493 

a  suction-pump,  sucking  in  blood  from  the  venous  side  in  conse- 
quence of  an  active  dilatation.  According  to  this  view,  the  heart 
works  after  the  manner  of  a  syringe  bulb,  which  when  squeezed 
forces  out  liquid  from  one  end  and  when  relaxed  sucks  it  in  from 
the  other  in  consequence  of  its  elastic  dilatation.  While  this  view 
has  long  been  entertained,  modern  interest  in  it  was  aroused  chiefly 
perhaps  by  the  experiments  of  Goltz  and  Gaule,  which  showed  that 
at  some  point  in  the  heart  beat  there  is  or  may  be  a  strong  negative 
pressure  in  the  interior  of  the  ventricles.*  Their  method  consisted 
in  connecting  a  manometer  with  the  interior  of  the  ventricle  and 
interposing  between  the  two  a  valve  that  opened  only  toward  the 
heart.  The  manometer  was  thus  converted  into  a  minimum 
manometer,  which  registered  the  lowest  pressure  reached  during 
the  period  of  observation.  By  this  method  they  and  others  have 
shown  that  in  an  animal  (dog)  with  an  opened  thorax  the  pressure 
in  the  interior  of  the  ventricles  may  be  negative  to  an  extent  equal 
to  20,  30,  or  even  50  mms.  of  mercury.  Moreover,  by  the  use  of 
some  form  of  elastic  manometer,  such  as  the  Hlirthle  instrument 
(p.  449),  it  has  been  shown  that  this  negative  pressure  occurs  at  the 
end  of  the  period  of  relaxation,  at  the  time,  therefore,  at  which  it 
might  be  supposed  to  exert  a  marked  influence  upon  the  inflow  of 
venous  blood.  It  should  be  added ,  however,  that  a  negative 
pressure  can  not  be  shown  for  every  heart  beat.  It  may  be  absent 
altogether  or  slight  in  amount,  varying,  no  doubt,  with  the  force  of 
contraction  and  the  condition  of  the  heart.  Physiologists  have 
attempted  to  determine  the  cause  of  this  negative  pressure  and  the 
extent  of  its  influence  on  the  blood-flow.  With  regard  to  the  first 
question,  so  many  answers  have  been  proposed  that  it  is  difficult 
to  arrive  at  a  satisfactory  opinion.  According  to  some,  the  heart 
tends  to  dilate  at  the  end  of  its  systole  by  virtue  of  its  own  elasticity, 
— that  is,  the  elasticity  of  its  own  musculature  or  of  the  connective 
tissue  contained  in  its  substance;  for  example,  beneath  the  en- 
docardium, in  the  walls  of  the  arteries,  etc.  This  view,  however, 
finds  little  or  no  support  from  direct  experiments  made  upon  the 
fresh,  living  heart.  If  such  a  heart  in  a  bloodless  condition  is 
squeezed  by  hand  there  is  no  evidence  of  an  elastic  recoil  as  in  the 
case  of  a  syringe  bulb.  Others  have  explained  the  negative  pressure 
as  due  not  to  a  simple  elastic  expansion,  but  to  what  may  be 
called  a  physiological  expansion, — that  is,  an  expansion  due  to 
physiological  processes,  such  as  anabolic  changes.  Such  a  view, 
however,  is  at  present  more  or  less  speculative  and  can  not  be  con- 
clusively demonstrated.     Still  others  have  traced  the  expansion  of 

*  For  a  complete  discussion  of  this  subject  and  the  hterature  see  the  ar- 
ticle by  Ebstein,  "Die  Diastole  des  Herzens,"  in  the  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physi- 
ologic," vol.  iii,  part  ii,  1904. 


494  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

the  ventricle  and  the  resulting  negative  pressure  to  the  sudden  in- 
jection of  the  coronary  system  from  the  aorta  at  the  beginning  of 
diastole.  The  heart  in  contracting  exerts  a  force  greater  than  that 
of  the  blood  in  the  coronary  vessels,  and  probably,  therefore,  these 
vessels  are  emptied  and  their  cavities  obliterated  in  part.  At  the 
beginning  of  diastole  they  are  reinjected  with  blood  under  a  pressure 
of  perhaps  100  mms.  of  mercury,  and  this  fact  seems  to  offer  a 
probable  explanation  for  a  partial  dilatation  of  the  ventricular  cavity 
and  a  production  of  negative  pressure  in  the  brief  interval  before  the 
opening  of  the  auriculo-ventricular  valves.  No  view,  however,  has 
met  with  general  acceptance,  and  the  cause  or  causes  that  produce  the 
negative  intraventricular  pressure  are  still  a  subject  for  investiga- 
tion. Regarding  the  second  question  proposed  above, — namely, 
the  extent  of  the  influence  of  this  negative  pressure  on  the  flow 
of  venous  blood  to  the  ventricles, — much  diversity  of  opinion  also 
exists.  Direct  experiments  made  by  Martin  and  Donaldson* 
indicate  that  this  factor  has  little  or  no  actual  influence  upon  the 
venous  flow.  These  authors  used  an  isolated  dog's  heart  kept 
beating  by  an  artificial  supply  of  blood.  At  a  given  moment  the 
stream  of  blood  into  the  vena  cava  was  shut  off  and  the  auricle  of 
the  heart  was  brought  into  communication  with  a  U  tube  filled 
with  blood.  It  was  found  that  the  auricle  took  blood  from  this 
tube  only  so  long  as  the  pressure  in  it  was  positive.  Although  the 
heart  continued  to  beat  vigorously,  whatever  negative  pressure  was 
present  in  the  ventricle  was  unable  to  suck  any  blood  into  the 
auricle  from  the  U  tube.  Porter  f  also  has  shown  that  at  the  time 
of  a  strong  negative  pressure  in  the  ventricle  the  auricle  may  give 
little  or  no  evidence  of  a  similar  fall  in  pressure.  It  would  seem 
most  probable,  therefore,  that  the  negative  pressure  observed  under 
certain  conditions  in  the  ventricles  is  a  fleeting  phenomenon,  and 
disappears  with  the  entrance  of  the  first  portion  of  the  blood  from 
the  auricles.  While  it  may  be  of  value  in  accelerating  the  opening 
of  the  auriculo-ventricular  valves,  its  influence  does  not  extend  to  an 
actual  suction  of  the  blood  from  the  veins  toward  the  heart.  Other 
authors,  however,  on  theoretical  grounds  attribute  more  actual  im- 
portance to  the  negative  pressure  as  a  factor  in  moving  the  blood. 
Occlusion  of  the  Coronary  Vessels. — The  coronary  vessels 
supply  the  tissues  of  the  heart  with  nutrition,  including  oxygen, 
so  that  if  the  circulation  is  interrupted  the  normal  contractions  soon 
cease.  The  branches  of  the  large  coronaries  form  what  are  known 
as  terminal  arteries, — that  is,  each  supplies  a  separate  region  of  the 

*  Martin  and  Donaldson,  "  Studies  from  the  Biological  Laboratory,  Johns 
Hopkins  University,"  4,  37,  1887;  also  Martin's  "Physiological  Papers," 
Baltimore,  1895. 

t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  513,  1892. 


THE    HEART    BEAT.  495 

muscula-ture,  and  although  anastomoses  may  exist  they  appear 
to  be  too  incomplete  to  allow  a  collateral  circulation  to  be  estab- 
lished when  one  of  the  main  arteries  is  occluded.  The  portion  of 
the  heart  supplied  by  it  dies,  or  to  use  the  pathological  term,  under- 
goes necrosis.  On  account  of  the  pathological  interests  involved — 
the  known  serious  results  that  may  follow  occlusion  of  any  of  the  coro- 
nary vessels  or  even  any  interference  with  the  normal  structure  of  the 
vessels — a  number  of  investigations  have  been  made  upon  animals 
to  determine  the  effect  of  occluding  one  or  more  of  the  coronary 
vessels.*  It  would  seem  from  Porter's  experiments  that  the  results 
of  such  an  operation  vary  according  to  the  size  of  the  area  deprived 
of  its  blood.  When  the  arteria  septi  alone  was  occluded  the  heart 
was  not  affected,  when  the  arteria  coronaria  dextra  was  occluded 
the  ventricular  contractions  were  arrested  in  18  per  cent,  of  the 
cases  observed.  Occlusion  of  the  ramus  descendens  of  the  left 
coronary  artery  caused  arrest  of  the  ventricles  in  50  per  cent,  of  the 
cases,  while  occlusion  of  the  circumflex  branch  of  the  same  artery 
caused  arrest  in  80  per  cent,  of  the  cases.  Ligation  of  three  of  the 
arteries  caused  stoppage  of  the  heart  in  all  cases. 

Fibrillar  Contractions. — The  arrest  of  the  ventricles  in  the 
experiments  just  described  followed  immediately  or  within  a  short 
period,  and  the  ventricle  went  into  fibrillar  contractions.  In  this 
curious  condition  the  various  fibers  of  the  ventricular  muscle,  in- 
stead of  contracting  together  in  a  co-ordinated  fashion,  contract 
separately  and  irregularly;  so  that  the  surface  of  the  ventricle  has 
the  appearance  of  a  vibrating,  twitching  mass.  Such  a  condition 
in  the  ventricle  is  usually  fatal, — that  is,  the  musculature  is  not  able 
to  recover  its  co-ordinated  movement.  This  condition  may  come 
on  with  great  suddenness  as  the  result  of  occlusion  of  the  arteries, 
of  injury  to  certain  parts  of  the  heart,  or  from  strong  electrical 
stimulation.  Fibrillation  of  the  auricles  also  occurs  frequently 
under  experimental  conditions,  but  the  musculature  in  this  part  of 
the  heart  seems  to  be  able  to  return  to  its  normal  co-ordinated 
contractions  with  much  less  difficulty.  The  cause  of  the  sudden 
change  from  co-ordinated  to  fibrillar  contractions  has  never  been 
satisfactorily  explained.  In  this  connection  it  is  interesting  to 
recall  also  that  when  any  injury  is  done  to  either  ventricle  suf- 
ficient to  stop  the  contractions  or  cause  fibrillation  both  ventricles 
stop  together.  It  is  not  possible  to  stop  one  alone.  This  result 
is  doubtless  due  to  the  fact  that  their  musculature  is,  after  all,  one 
set  of  fibers  common  to  both  chambers. 

*  For  a  description  of  results  and  the  literature  see  Porter,  "  Journal  of 
Physiology,"  15,  121,  1893;  also  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  1,  1, 
1896. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

THE  CAUSE  AND  THE  SEQUENCE  OF  THE  HEART 
BEAT— PROPERTIES  OF  THE  HEART  MUSCLE. 

General  Statement. — The  cause  of  the  heart  beat  has  naturally 
constituted  one  of  the  fundamental  objects  of  physiological  inquiry. 
The  various  views  that  have  been  proposed  in  different  centuries 
reflect  more  or  less  accurately  the  advancement  of  the  science. 
With  each  new  discovery  of  general  significance  a  new  point  of  view 
is  obtained  and  the  theories  of  the  heart  beat,  like  those  of  the  other 
great  problems  of  physiology,  shift  their  standpoint  from  generation 
to  generation.  The  general  modern  conception  of  this  problem 
is  referred  usually  to  Haller  (1757),  who  first  taught  that  the 
activity  of  the  heart  is  not  dependent  on  its  connections  with  the 
central  nervous  system.  As  we  shall  see,  the  heart  beat  is  controlled 
and  influenced  constantly  by  the  central  nervous  system,  but  never- 
theless the  important  point  has  been  established  beyond  question 
that  the  heart  continues  to  beat  when  all  these  nervous  connections 
are  severed.  The  central  nervous  system  regulates  the  activity  of 
the  heart,  but  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  cause  of  its  rhythmical 
contractions.  The  heart,  in  other  words,  is  an  automatic  organ. 
When  in  1848  Remak  discovered  that  nerve  cells  are  contained  in 
the  frog's  heart  it  was  natural  that  the  causation  of  the  beat  should 
be  attributed  to  this  tissue.  Subsequent  histological  work  has 
demonstrated  the  existence  of  numerous  nerve  cells  in  the  substance 
of  the  heart  tissue  of  all  vertebrates,  and  the  view  that  the  au- 
tomaticity  of  the  heart  is  due  in  reality  to  the  properties  of  the 
contained  nerve  cells  was  the  prevalent  view  throughout  the 
middle  and  latter  part  of  the  nineteenth  century.  In  the  latter  part 
of  the  century  an  opposite  view  arose, — namely,  that  the  muscular 
tissue  of  the  heart  itself  possesses  the  property  of  automatic 
rhythmical  contractility.  Both  these  points  of  view  persist  to  day. 
The  theory  that  refers  the  automaticity  of  the  heart  beat  to  the 
contained  nerve  cells  is  designated  as  the  neurogenic  theory  of  the 
heart  beat;  the  one  that  refers  this  property  to  the  muscle  tissue 
itself  is  known  as  the  myogenic  theory.  Beyond  this  question  lies 
the  still  deeper  problem  of  the  explanation  of  the  automaticity 
itself,  the  cause  or  causes  of  the  rhythmical  excitation,  whether 
occurring  primarily  in  the  muscle  cells  or  in  the  nerve  cells. 

496 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    HEART    MUSCLE.  497 

The  Neurogenic  Theory  of  the  Heart  Beat. — The  literature 
upon  this  topic  is  very  large.*  The  neurogenic  theory  has  suffered 
some  changes  in  its  details  since  first  proposed  by  Volkmann, 
particularly  in  the  specific  functions  assigned  to  the  different  ganglia 
that  exist  in  the  heart.  In  general,  however,  the  theory  assumes 
that  the  excitation  to  each  beat  arises  within  the  nerve  cells,  and 
since  the  cardiac  cycle  begins  with  a  contraction  at  what  may  be 
called  the  venous  end  of  the  heart, — that  is,  at  the  junction  of  the 
veins  with  the  auricles, — it  is  assumed  that  the  excitation  or  inner 
stimulus  arises  in  the  nerve  cells  situated  in  this  region.  These  cells 
constitute,  therefore,  what  may  be  called  the  automatic  motor 
center  of  the  heart.  The  stimuli  generated  within  it  are  transmitted 
through  its  axons  first  to  the  musculature  of  the  venous  end  of 
the  heart.  The  subsequent  orderly  march  of  this  contraction,  to 
auricles  and  then  to  ventricles,  is  also  upon  this  theory  usually 
attributed  to  the  intrinsic  nerve  cells  and  fibers.  Through  a  definite 
mechanism  the  impulses  generated  in  the  motor  center  are  trans- 
mitted to  subordinate  nerve  centers  through  which  the  auricles  are 
excited,  and  then  to  other  nerve  cells  lying  in  or  near  the  auriculo- 
ventricular  groove  through  which  the  ventricles  are  excited.  In 
this  form  the  theory  assumes  for  the  heart  an  intrinsic  central 
nervous  system,  as  it  were,  with  a  principal  motor  center  in  which 
the  property  of  automaticity  is  chiefly  developed  and  subordinate 
centers  whose  activity  usually  depends  upon  the  principal  center, 
but  which  may  show  automatic  properties  of  a  lower  order  if  the 
connections  between  them  and  the  main  center  are  interrupted. 
This  intrinsic  nervous  system  is  responsible  not  only  for  the  spon- 
taneous origination  and  normal  sequence  of  the  beat,  but  also  for 
its  co-ordination.  The  many  muscular  fibers  of  the  ventricle 
contract  normally  in  a  definite  manner  and  sequence;  so  that  the 
effect  is  summated.  Under  abnormal  conditions  the  fibers  may 
contract  irregularly,  giving  the  so-called  fibrillar  contractions  of  the 
heart,  which  are  inco-ordinated.  It  may  be  said  that  this  con- 
ception of  the  connections  of  the  intrinsic  nervous  system  rests 
mainly  upon  deductions  from  physiological  experiments.  The 
histological  details  regarding  the  connections  of  the  nerve  cells  in  the 
heart  are  not  yet  sufficiently  known,  but  it  can  not  be  said  at  present 
that  they  give  any  positive  support  to  such  a  view.  In  regard  to 
the  neurogenic  theory  the  following  general  statements  may  be  made : 

1.  Most  of  the  very  numerous  facts  known  regarding  the  heart 

*  For  recent  general  presentations  from  different  standpoints  see  Gaskell, 
article  on  "The  Contraction  of  Cardiac  Muscle,"  in  Schafer's  "Text-book  of 
Physiology,"  vol.  ii,  1900;  Langendorff,  "  Herzmuskel  und  intrakardiale  In- 
nervation" in  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiologic,"  vol.  i,  part  ii,  1902;  and  Cyon, 
"  L'innervation  du  coeur,"  Richet's  "  Dictionnaire  du  Physiologie,"  vol.  iv, 
1900. 

32 


498  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

beat  and  its  variations  under  experimental  conditions  may  be 
explained  in  terms  of  the  theory,  or  at  least  do  not  contradict  it. 
The  same  statement,  however,  may  be  made  regarding  the  myogenic 
theory.  Both  theories  may  be  applied  successfully  from  a  logical 
standpoint  to  the  explanation  of  known  facts. 

2.  No  single  fact  is  known  which  can  be  cited  as  positive  proof 
that  the  nerves  participate  in  the  production  of  the  normal  beat 
of  the  vertebrate  heart.  The  experiment  by  Kronecker  and  Schmey 
is  sometimes  given  this  significance.  These  observers  have  shown 
that,  when  a  needle  is  thrust  into  a  certain  spot  in  the  dog's 
ventricle,  the  regularly  contracting  heart  falls  suddenly  into  fibrillar 
contractions  so  far  as  the  ventricles  are  concerned.  The  ex- 
periment is  certainly  a  striking  and  interesting  one.  The  needle 
may  be  thrust  man}^  times  into  certain  portions  of  the  muscu- 
lar mass  without  affecting  the  powerful  co-ordinated  contractions, 
but  in  the  region  specified  by  Kronecker  a  single  puncture,  if 
it  reaches  the  right  spot,  causes  the  ventricle  to  fall  into  ir- 
regular fibrillar  twitches  from  which  it  does  not  recover.  The 
spot  as  described  by  Kronecker  is  along  the  line  of  the  septum  at  the 
lower  border  of  its  upper  third.  The  experiment  frequently  fails; 
and  it  would  seem  that  there  must  be  a  definite  and  quite  circum- 
scribed structure  whose  lesion  produces  the  effect  described.  We 
have  no  evidence  as  yet  what  this  structure  is,  and  are  therefore  in 
no  condition  to  make  positive  inferences  with  regard  to  the  bearing 
of  the  experiment  upon  the  origin  of  the  heart  beat.  Recently 
Carlson*  has  described  experiments  upon  the  heart  of  the  horseshoe 
crab  (Limulus)  which  seem  to  show  conclusively  that  in  this  animal 
the  rhythmical  contractions  are  dependent  upon  the  intrinsic  nerve 
cells.  These  latter  are  placed  superficially,  forming  a  cord  that 
runs  the  length  of  the  tubular  heart.  When  this  cord  is  removed 
the  heart  ceases  to  beat.  There  are  reasons,  however,  which  at 
present  make  it  impossible  for  us  to  apply  the  results  of  this  ex- 
periment to  the  vertebrate  heart.  The  crustacean  heart  differs 
from  the  vertebrate  heart  in  its  fundamental  properties;  unlike  the 
latter,  it  has  no  refractory  period  (see  p.  504),  can  be  tetanized,  and 
gives  submaximal  contractions.!  It  is  a  tissue,  therefore,  that 
resembles  in  its  properties  ordinary  skeletal  muscle  in  the  verte- 
brate, and,  like  this  muscle,  it  seems  to  be  lacking  in  automaticity. 
Carlson's  experiments  give,  however,  another  instance  of  automatic 
rhythmicity  in  nerve  tissue,  and  to  that  extent  supports  the 
neurogenic  theory. 

The  Myogenic  Theory  of  the  Heart  Beat. — The  myogenic 

*  Carlson,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  12,  67,  and  471,  1905. 
t  Hunt,  Bookman,  and  Tiemey,  "  Centralblatt  f.  Physiologic,"  11,  275, 
1897. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE   HEART   MUSCLE.  499 

theory  has  been  developed  chiefly  by  Gaskell  and  by  Engelmann. 
It  assumes  that  the  heart  muscle  itself  possesses  the  property  of 
automatic  rhythmicity  and  that  this  property  is  most  highly  de- 
veloped at  the  venous  end.  This  portion  of  the  heart,  therefore, 
contracts  first  and  the  wave  of  contraction  spreads  directly  to  the 
musculature  of  the  auricle  and  thence  to  that  of  the  ventricle.  The 
quickly  beating  venous  end  sets  the  pace,  as  it  were,  for  the  entire 
heart.  The  nerve  cells  and  nerve  fibers  that  are  present  in  the  heart 
are  upon  this  theory  supposed  to  be  connected  with  the  extrinsic 
nerves  through  which  the  rate  and  force  of  the  heart  beat  are  regu- 
lated, but  they  are  not  concerned  in  the  production  of  the  beat. 
Many  experimental  facts  have  been  accumulated  which  give 
probability  to  this  view,  and  it  has  been  adopted  by  many,  perhaps 
most,  of  the  recent  workers  in  this  field.  Some  of  the  facts  that 
favor  this  theory  are  as  follows: 

1.  The  anatomical  arrangement  of  the  musculature  of  the 
heart  is  not  opposed  to  such  a  theory.  It  was  formerly  stated  quite 
positively  that  there  is  no  muscular  connection  between  the  auricles 
and  ventricles  in  the  mammalian  heart,  but  a  number  of  observers 
have  now  demonstrated  the  existence  of  a  muscular  bridge,  the 
auriculo-ventricular  bundle,  between  the  two  chambers  (see  p.  479). 

2.  The  fact  that  a  contraction  started  at  one  part  of  the  heart 
may  travel  to  other  portions  through  the  intervening  musculature 
may  be  said  to  be  demonstrated.  Thus,  Engelmann  has  shown 
that  if  the  ventricle  in  the  frog's  heart  is  cut  in  a  zigzag  fashion, 
so  that  strips  are  obtained  which  are  connected  only  by  narrow 
bridges,  a  stimulation  applied  at  one  end  starts  a  wave  of  con- 
traction which  propagates  itself  over  all  of  the  pieces.  This  and 
similar  experiments  scarcely  permit  of  explanation  on  the  supposi- 
tion that  conduction  from  piece  to  piece  is  effected  by  a  definite 
nervous  mechanism.  So  too  it  has  been  shown  that  under  certain 
conditions  the  normal  auriculo-ventricular  rhythm  can  be  changed 
at  will  to  a  ventriculo-auricular  rhythm.  If,  for  instance,  a  ligature 
be  tied  around  the  frog's  heart  between  the  sinus  venosus  and  the 
auricle  (first  ligature  of  Stannius)  the  auricle  and  ventricle  cease 
to  beat.  In  this  quiescent  condition  a  slight  mechanical  stimulus 
to  the  ventricle  causes  it  to  beat  and  its  contraction  is  immediately 
followed  by  that  of  the  auricle.  Such  an  experiment  makes  it 
most  probable  that  the  contraction  is  propagated  directly  through 
the  muscular  connections.  It  is  not  possible  at  present  to  conceive 
that  a  definite  mechanism  of  neurons  should  work  thus  in  either 
direction. 

3.  There  is  much  probable  proof  that  the  heart  muscle  tissue 
possesses  the  property  of  automatic  rhythmical  contractions.  Ex- 
periments, initiated  by  Gaskell  and  since  extended  by  numerous 


500  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 

observers,  show  that  in  the  cold-blooded  animals  strips  of  heart 
muscle  taken  from  various  parts  of  the  heart  will  under  proper 
conditions  develop  rhythmical  contractions.  It  is  very  improbable 
that  each  of  these  strips,  no  matter  how. made,  contains  its  own 
resident  nerve  cells  to  act  as  a  motor  center.  Histology  does 
not  warrant  such  an  assumption,  and  we  must  believe  that  these 
results  demonstrate  an  inherent  property  of  rhythmicity  in  cardiac 
muscle,  whether  or  not  this  rhythmicity  is  directly  responsible  for 
the  normal  beat. 

4.  It  has  been  shown  that  in  the  embryo  chick  the  heart  pul- 
sates normally  before  the  nerve  cells  have  grown  into  it,  and  it 
is  stated  that  in  the  hearts  of  a  number  of  invertebrates  no  nerve 
cells  can  be  found.  Much  weight  can  not  be  given,  however,  to 
negative  evidence  of  this  kind,  since,  in  the  first  place,  better 
technical  methods  may  demonstrate  the  existence  of  such  cells, 
and  even  if  absent  from  the  heart  itself  it  is  conceivable  that  they 
may  be  present  in  the  surrounding  tissue  and  send  their  fibers 
to  the  heart.  It  is  evident  from  this  brief  and  imperfect  presenta- 
tion that  it  is  not  possible  to  claim  that  either  the  neurogenic  or 
the  myogenic  theory  is  demonstrated,  but  most  physiologists  per- 
haps at  present  believe  that  the  latter  view  is  more  in  accord 
with  the  facts. 

Automaticity  of  the  Heart. — As  was  said  above,  the  ques- 
tion of  the  cause  or  causes  of  the  automatic  rhythmical  con- 
tractions must  be  sought  for  whether  the  phenomenon  turns  out  to 
be  a  property  of  the  muscular  tissue  or  of  the  nervous  tissue  of  the 
heart.  When  we  say  that  a  given  tissue  is  automatic  we  mean 
that  the  stimuli  which  excite  it  to  activity  arise  within  the  tissue 
itself,  and  are  not  brought  to  it  through  extrinsic  nerves.  In  the 
heart,  therefore,  we  assume  that  a  stimulus  is  continually  being 
produced,  and  we  speak  of  it  as  the  inner  stimulus.  Experiment  and 
speculation  have  been  directed  toward  unraveling  the  nature  of 
this  inner  stimulus.  Most  of  the  physiologists  who  have  expressed 
an  opinion  upon  the  subject  have  sought  an  explanation  in  the 
composition  of  the  blood  or  lymph  bathing  the  heart  tissue,  or  in  the 
products  of  metabolism  of  the  tissue  itself.  According  to  this  last 
view,  each  contraction  results  in  the  formation  of  certain  products 
which  stimulate  the  muscle  to  a  new  contraction  (Langendorff). 
Regarding  this  view  there  is  nothing  of  the  nature  of  direct  ex- 
perimental evidence  in  its  favor.  No  product  of  the  metabolism  of 
the  heart  tissue  capable  of  exerting  this  stimulating  effect  has  been 
isolated.  In  regard  to  the  former  view,  that  the  inner  stimulus 
is  connected  with  a  definite  composition  of  the  blood  or  lymph, 
there  has  been  considerable  experimental  work  which  is  of  funda- 
mental significance.     While  the  older  physiologists  paid  attention 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE   HEART   MUSCLE.  501 

mainly  to  the  organic  substances  in  the  blood,  it  has  been  shown  in 
recent  years  that  the  inorganic  salts  are  the  elements  whose  influence 
upon  the  heart  beat  is  most  striking.  These  salts  are  in  solution  ' 
in  the  liquid  of  the  tissue,  and  are  therefore  probably  more  or  less 
completely  ionized.  Attention  has  been  directed  mainly  to  the 
influence  of  the  metallic  ions,  the  cations,  of  which  three  are  es- 
pecially important, — namely,  the  sodium,  the  calcium,  and  the 
potassium. 

The  Action  of  the  Calcium,  Potassium,  and  Sodium  Ions  in 
the  Blood  and  Lymph. — It  has  long  been  known  that  the  heart 
of  a  frog  or  terrapin  may  be  kept  beating  normally  for  hours  after 
removal  from  the  body,  provided  it  is  supplied  with  an  artificial 
circulation  of  blood  or  lymph,  so  arranged  that  this  liquid  enters 
the  heart  through  the  veins  from  a  reservoir  of  some  sort  and  is 
pumped  out  through  the  arteries  leading  from  the  ventricle.  It 
was  first  shown  by  Merunowicz,  working  under  Ludwig's  direction, 
that  an  aqueous  extract  of  the  ash  of  the  blood  possesses  a  similar 
action. 

Ringer  afterwards  proved  that  the  frog's  heart  can  be  kept 
beating  for  long  periods  upon  a  mixture  of  sodium  chlorid,  potassium 
chlorid,  and  calcium  phosphate  or  chlorid,  and  he  laid  especial 
stress  upon  the  importance  of  the  calcium.  This  work  was  after- 
wards confirmed  and  extended  by  Howell,  Loeb,  and  others,  who 
attempted  to  analyze  the  part  played  by  the  several  ions.*  If 
a  frog's  or  terrapin's  heart  is  fed  with  a  solution  of  physiological 
saline  (NaCl,  0.7  per  cent.)  it  beats  well  for  a  while,  but  the 
beats  soon  weaken  and  gradually  fade  out.  If  in  this  condition 
the  heart  is  fed  with  a  proper  mixture  of  sodium,  potassium, 
and  calcium  chlorids  it  beats  vigorously  and  well  for  very  many 
hours.  A  solution  containing  these  three  salts  in  proper  propor- 
tions is  known  usually  as  Ringer's  mixture.  The  exact  com- 
position has  been  varied  by  different  workers,  but  for  the  heart 
of  the  frog  or  terrapin  the  following  composition  is  most  effective : 

NaCl =   0.7      per  cent. 

KCl -  0.03     "       " 

CaCl =  0.025   "       " 

The  addition  of  a  trace  of  alkali,  HNaCOj,  0.003  per  cent., 
often  increases  the  effectiveness  of  the  solution,  but  it  can  not  be 
considered  an  essential  constituent  in  the  same  sense  as  sodium, 
potassium,  and  calcium.  It  has  been  shown,  moreover,  that  even 
the  mammalian  heart  can  be  kept  beating  for  long  periods  when 
fed  with  a  Ringer  solution  if  provision  is  made  for  a  larger  supply 

*  For  literature  and  discussion  see  Howell,  "  American  Journal  of  Phys- 
iology," 2,  47,  1898,  and  6.  181,  1901. 


502  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

of  oxygen  than  can  be  carried  in  simple  physical  solution  in  the 
liquid.  For  the  irrigation  of  the  isolated  mammalian  heart  different 
forms  of  Ringer's  solution  have  been  employed,  but  the  mixture 
most  frequently  used  is  that  recommended  by  Locke,  consisting 
of  NaCl,  0.9  per  cent.;  CaClj,  0.024  per  cent.;  KCl,  0.042  per 
cent.;  NaHCOg,  0.01  to  0.03  per  cent.;  and  glucose,  0.1  per  cent. 
The  solution  is  fed  to  the  heart  under  an  atmosphere  of  oxygen, 
and  with  this  solution  Locke  and  others  have  kept  the  mammalian 
heart  beating  for  many  hours.  The  glucose,  while  not  essential 
to  the  action  of  the  irrigating  hquid,  is  said  to  increase  its  efficiency. 
The  general  fact  that  comes  out  of  these  experiments  is  that  the 
heart  can  beat  for  very  long  periods  upon  what  has  been  called 
an  inorganic  diet.  Moreover,  the  salts  that  are  used  can  not  be 
chosen  at  random;  it  is  necessary  to  have  salts  of  the  three  metals 
named,  and  substitution  is  possible  only  to  a  very  limited  extent. 
Thus,  strontium  salts  may  replace  those  of  calcium  more  or  less 
perfectly. 

It  is  evident  that  these  salts  play  some  very  important  part 
in  the  production  of  the  rhythmical  beat  of  the  heart ;  and  analysis 
has  shown  that  the  sodium,  calcium,  and  potassium  has  each 
its  specific  role.  We  may  say  that  the  presence  of  these  salts 
in  normal  proportions  is  an  absolute  necessity  for  heart  activity. 
A  striking  experiment  showing  the  importance  of  the  calcium  ion 
is  that  of  irrigating  a  terrapin's  heart  with  blood  from  which  the 
calcium  has  been  removed  by  precipitation  with  sodium  oxalate. 
In  spite  of  the  fact  that  all  other  constituents  of  the  blood  are 
present  the  heart  ceases  to  beat,  and  normal  contractions  can  be 
started  again  promptly  by  adding  calcium  chlorid  in  right  amounts 
to  the  oxalated  blood.  Regarding  the  specific  part  taken  by  each 
of  the  cations  in  the  production  of  the  alternate  contractions  and 
relaxations,  much  diversity  of  opinion  exists,  owing  to  our  ignorance 
of  the  chemical  changes  going  on  in  the  heart  during  systole  and 
diastole  and  to  the  difficulty  of  controlling  experimental  conditions. 
Thus,  while  it  is  an  easy  matter  to  control  accurately  the  com- 
position of  the  liquids  supplied  to  the  heart,  a  variable  and  uncon- 
trollable factor  is  introduced  by  the  fact  that  within  the  tissue 
elements  themselves  there  is  a  store  of  combined  calcium,  potassium, 
and  sodium  which  may  serve  to  supply  these  elements  to  a  greater 
or  less  extent  to  the  tissue  liquids. 

The  controversial  details  upon  this  question  can  not  be  presented 
in  an  elementary  book,  but  the  following  brief  statements  may 
be  made  regarding  one  view  of  the  specific  effects  of  the  separate 
cations:  (1)  The  sodium  salts  in  the  blood  and  lymph  take  the 
chief  part  in  the  maintenance  of  normal  osmotic  pressure.  The 
sodium  chlorid  exists  in  blood-plasma  to  the  extent  of  0.5  to  0.6 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    HEART   MUSCLE.  503 

per  cent.,  and  the  normal  osmotic  pressure  of  the  blood  is  mainly 
dependent  upon  it.  A  solution  of  sodium  chlorid  of  0.7  to  0.9  per 
cent,  forms  what  is  known  as  physiological  saline,  and  although 
not  adecjuate  to  maintain  the  normal  composition  and  properties 
of  the  tissues  it  fulfills  this  purpose  more  perfectly  than  the  solution 
of  any  other  single  substance.  The  sodium  ions  have  in  addition 
a  specific  influence  upon  the  state  of  the  heart  tissue.  Contractility 
and  irritability  disappear  when  they  are  absent ;  when  present  alone 
in  physiological  concentration  in  the  medium  bathing  the  heart  mus- 
cles they  produce  relaxation  of  the  muscle  tissue.  (2)  The  calcium 
ions  are  present  in  relatively  very  small  quantities  in  the  blood,  but 
they  also  are  absolutely  necessary  to  contractility  and  irritability. 
Wlien  present  in  quantities  above  normal  or  when  in  a  propor- 
tional excess  over  the  sodium  or  potassium  ions  they  cause  a  con- 
dition of  tonic  contraction  that  has  been  designated  as  calcium 
rigor.  (3)  The  potassium  ions  are  present  also  in  very  small  quan- 
tities, and,  unlike  the  calcium  and  sodium  ions,  their  presence  in 
the  circulating  hquid  does  not  seem  to  be  absolutely  necessary  to 
rhythmical  activity.  Under  proper  conditions  a  terrapin's  heart 
beats  well  for  a  time  upon  a  solution  containing  only  sodium  and 
calcium  salts.  The  potassium  seems  to  promote  relaxation  of  the 
muscle  and  in  physiological  doses  it  exercises  through  this  effect 
a  regulating  influence  upon  the  rate  of  beat.  When  the  proportion 
of  potassium  ions  is  increased  the  heart  rate  is  proportionally 
slowed,  and  finally  the  contractions  cease  altogether,  the  heart 
coming  to  rest  in  a  state  of  extreme  relaxation,  known  sometimes 
as  potassium  inhibition.  (4)  It  appears  from  these  statements 
that  there  is  a  well-marked  antagonism  between  the  effects  of  the 
calcium,  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  potassium  and  sodium,  on  the 
other.  The  calcium  promotes  a  state  of  contraction,  the  sodium 
and  the  potassium  a  state  of  relaxation.  It  is  conceivable,  there- 
fore, that  the  alternate  states  of  contraction  and  relaxation  which 
characterize  the  rhythmical  action  of  heart  muscle  are  connected 
with  an  interaction  of  an  alternating  kind  between  these  ions  and 
the  living  contractile  substance  of  the  heart. 

Connection  of  the  Inorganic  Salts  with  the  Causation  of  the 
Beat, — It  is  impossible  to  say  positively  whether  or  not  the 
inorganic  salts  are  directly  connected  with  the  cause  of  the  beat, 
— that  is,  with  the  origination  of  the  inner  stimulus.  According 
to  one  point  of  view,  they  are  necessary  onh'  to  the  irritability 
and  contractility  of  the  heart  tissue.  The  inner  stimulus  is  pro- 
duced otherwise  by  some  unknown  reaction,  but  it  is  not  able 
to  cause  a  contraction  of  the  heart  muscle  in  the  absence  of  the 
proper  inorganic  salts.  According  to  another  view,  the  reaction 
of  these  ions  with  the  living  substance  constitutes  the  inner  stimulus, 


504  CIRCULATION   OP   BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

and  from  this  standpoint  the  heart  is  kept  beating  by  the  alternating 
influence  of  the  calcium  and  sodium  and  potassium  ions. 

Physiological  Properties  of  Cardiac  Muscle. — Cardiac  muscle 
exhibits  certain  properties  which  distinguish  it  sharply  from  skeletal 
muscular  tissue  and  which  have  a  direct  bearing  upon  the  rhyth- 
micity  of  the  contractions  and  the  sequence  shown  by  the  different 
chambers.  The  most  characteristic  of  these  properties  are  the 
following: 

1.  The  contractions  of  heart  muscle  are  always  maximal.  In 
skeletal  muscle  and  in  plain  muscle  the  extent  of  contraction  is 
related  to  the  strength  of  the  stimulus,  and  we  recognize  the  exis- 
tence of  a  series  of  submaximal  contractions  of  varying  heights. 
This  is  not  true  of  heart  muscle.  As  was  first  shown  by  Bow- 
ditch,  a  piece  of  ventricular  muscle  when  stimulated  responds,  if 
it  responds  at  all,  with  a  maximal  contraction.  The  apex  of  a 
frog's  heart  does  not  beat  spontaneously,  but  contracts  upon 
electrical  stimulation.  If  such  an  apex  is  connected  with  a  lever 
to  register  its  contractions,  and  the  electrical  stimulus  applied  to 
it  is  gradually  increased,  the  first  contraction  to  appear  is  maxi- 
mal, and  it  is  not  further  increased  by  augmenting  the  stimulus. 
This  property  is  sometimes  described  by  saying  (Ranvier)  that 
the  contraction  of  the  heart  muscle  is  all  or  none.  This  fact 
must  not,  however,  be  interpreted  to  mean  that  the  force  of 
contraction  of  heart  muscle  is  invariable  under  all  conditions. 
Such  is  not  the  case.  The  heart  muscle  under  favorable  nutritive 
conditions  may  give  a  much  larger  and  more  forcible  contraction 
than  is  possible  under  conditions  of  poor  nutrition;  but  the  point 
is,  that,  whatever  may  be  the  condition  of  the  muscle  at  any 
given  moment,  its  contraction  in  response  to  artificial  stimulation 
is  maximal  for  that  condition, — that  is,  does  not  vary  with  the 
strength  of  the  stimulus.  As  was  said  above,  this  property  is  not 
exhibited  by  the  crustacean  (lobster)  heart,  but  has  been  shown 
to  be  true  for  the  mammalian  heart  muscle.* 

2.  The  refractory  'period  of  the  heat.  It  was  shown  by  Marey  f  that 
the  heart  muscle  is  irritable  to  artificial  (electrical)  stimuli  only 
during  the  period  of  diastole.  During  the  period  of  systole  an  elec- 
trical stimulus  has  no  effect;  during  the  period  of  diastole  such  a 
stimulus  calls  forth  an  extra  contraction  and  the  latent  period 
preceding  the  extra  contraction  is  shorter  the  later  the  stimulus  is 
applied  in  the  diastolic  phase.  This  relationship  is  well  shown  by 
Marey's  curves  reproduced  in  Fig.  209.  The  period  of  inexcitability 
is  designated  as  the  refractory  period  of  the  heart  beat.     Marey 

*  For  experiments  on  mammalian  heart  and  literature,  see  Woodworth, 
"American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  8,  213,  1903. 
t  Marey,  "Travaux  du  laboratoire,"  1876,  p.  73. 


PROPERTIES    OP   THE    HEART   MUSCLE,  505 

defined,  this  refractory  period  as  falling  within  the  first  part  of  the 
systole,  and  stated  that  its  duration  varies  with  the  actual  strength 


Fig.  209. — To  show  the  effect  of  a  short  electrical  stimulus  applied  at  different  times 
in  the  heart  beat.— (Mare?/.)  The  record  is  taken  from  the  frog's  heart.  In  1,  2,  and  3  the 
stimulus  (e)  falls  into  the  heart  during  systole  (refractory  period)  and  has  no  effect.  In 
4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8  the  .stimulus  falls  into  the  heart  toward  the  end  of  systole  or  during  diastole, 
and  is  followed  by  an  extra  systole  and  corresponding  compensatory  pause.  It  will  be 
noted  that  the  latent  period  (shaded  area)  between  the  stimulus  and  the  extra  systole  is 
shorter  the  longer  the  diastole  has  proceeded  before  the  stimulus  is  applied. 


506  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH, 

of  the  stimulus.  Later  experiments  by  other  investigators  make 
it  probable  that  the  refractory  period  lasts  during  the  entire  systole.* 
According  to  this  point  of  view,  therefore,  the  heart  muscle  during 
its  whole  period  of  actual  contraction  is  entirely  unirritable,  and  in 
this  respect  it  offers  a  striking  difference  to  skeletal  and  plain  muscle. 
The  existence  of  this  refractory  period  explains  why  the  heart 
muscle  can  not  be  thrown  into  tetanic  contractions  by  rapidly 
repeated  stimuli.  Since  each  contraction  is  accompanied  by  a 
condition  of  loss  of  irritability,  it  is  obvious  that  those  stimuli  that 
fall  into  the  heart  during  this  period  must  prove  ineffective.  The 
refractory  period  and  the  gradual  increase  in  irritability  during  the 
diastole  throw  some  light  also  on  the  rhythmical  character  of  the 
beat.  Assuming  that  the  inner  stimulus  is  a  constantly  acting 
stimulus,  its  effect  must  necessarily  be  to  produce  rhythmical 
contractions  if  the  heart  muscle  at  each  contraction  falls  into  a 
condition  of  non-excitability  from  which  it  recovers  only  gradually. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  the  production  of  the  inner  stimulus  is  rhyth- 
mical, as  is  suggested  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  the  relatively  slow 
development  of  irritability  after  a  contraction  must  influence  the 
actual  rhythm  of  the  heart  beat.  The  occurrence  of  the  refractory- 
period  and  the  subsequent  gradual  return  of  irritability  are  con- 
nected no  doubt  with  the  metabolic  changes  taking  place  in  the 
heart  muscle.  It  is  in  the  character  of  this  metabolism  that  we 
must  seek  for  the  final  explanation  of  these  two  phenomena  and  the 
cause  of  the  rhythmicity  of  the  contractions.  As  was  stated  above, 
it  has  been  shown  that  the  crustacean  (lobster)  heart  does  not  obey 
the  all-or-none  law,  shows  no  refractory  period,  and  is  capable  of 
giving  tetanic  contractions  when  rapidly  stimulated.  In  all  these 
respects  it  differs  from  the  typical  heart  muscle  of  the  vertebrate, 
but  the  difference  is  perhaps  sufficiently  explained  by  the  discovery 
(p.  498)  that  the  crustacean  heart,  in  one  form  at  least,  is  not  an 
automatically  rhythmical  tissue.  Its  rhythmical  contractions,  like 
those  of  the  diaphragmatic  muscle  in  the  higher  vertebrates,  depend 
upon  rhythmical  impulses  received  from  nerve  centers. 

The  Compensatory  Pause. — -It  has  been  observed  that  when  an  extra 
systole  is  produced  by  stimulating  a  ventricle  it  is  followed  by  a  pause  longer 
than  usual;  the  pause,  in  fact,  is  of  such  a  length  as  to  compensate  exactly 
for  the  extra  beat ;  so  that  the  total  rate  of  beat  remains  the  same.  The  pro- 
longed pause  under  these  conditions  is  therefore  frequently  designated  as  the 
coinpensatory  pause.  It  has  been  shown,t  however,  that  the  exact  compen- 
sation in  this  case  is  not  referable  to  a  property  of  heart  muscle,  but  is  due  to 
the  dependence  of  the  ventricular  upon  the  auricular  beat.  When  the  auricle 
or  ventricle  is  isolated  and  stimulated  the  phenomenon  is  not  observed.  In 
an  entire  heart,  on  the  contrary,  the  beat  originates  at  the  venous  end  of  the 
auricle  and  is  propagated  to  the  ventricle.     If  the  latter  chamber  is  stimu- 

*  See  paper  by  Woodworth,  loc.  cit. 

t  Cushny  and  Matthews,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  21,  227,  1897. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    HEART   MUSCLE.  507 

lated  so  as  to  give  an  extra  beat  out  of  sequence  it  will  remain  in  diastole  until 
the  next  auricular  beat  stimulates  it,  and  will  thus  pick  up  the  regular  se- 
quence of  the  heart  beat. 

The  Normal  Sequence  of  the  Heart  Beat. — The  noiTnal 
rhythm  of  the  heart  beat  is  first  a  contraction  of  the  auricles,  then 
one  of  the  ventricles,  or  rather  first  the  mouths  of  the  great  veins, 
then  auricle  and  ventricle.  This  sequence  from  venous  to  arterial 
end  is  beautifully  shown  in  the  frog's  heart,  in  which  the  contraction 
begins  in  the  sinus  venosus,  spreads  to  the  auricles,  thence  to  the 
ventricle,  and  finally  to  the  bulbus  arteriosus.  Under  normal 
conditions  this  sequence  is  never  reversed,  and  an  explanation  of 
the  natural  order  forms  obviously  an  important  part  of  any  complete 
theory  of  the  heart  beat.  Those  who  hold  to  the  neurogenic  theory 
naturally  explain  the  sequence  of  the  beat  by  reference  to  the 
intrinsic  nervous  apparatus.  If  the  motor  ganglia  lie  toward  the 
venous  end  of  the  heart  one  can  imagine  that  their  discharges  may 
affect  the  different  chambers  in  sequence,  the  pause  between 
auricular  and  ventricular  contraction  being  due,  let  us  say,  to  the 
fact  that  the  motor  impulses  to  the  ventricle  have  to  act  through 
subordinate  nerve  cells  in  the  auriculo-ventricular  region,  and  the 
time  necessary  for  this  action  brings  the  ventricular  contraction 
a  certain  interval  later  than  that  of  the  auricle.  There  is  no 
immediate  proof  or  disproof  of  such  a  view.  The  numerous  exper- 
iments made  upon  the  rapidity  of  conduction  of  the  wave  of 
contraction  over  the  heart  are  not  conclusive  either  for  or  against 
the  view.  The  fact,  however,  that  in  the  quiescent  but  still  irritable 
heart  the  rhythm  may  be  reversed  by  artificially  stimulating  the 
ventricle  first  seems  to  the  author  to  speak  strongly  against  the 
dependence  of  the  sequence  upon  any  definite  arrangement  of 
neuron  complexes.  On  the  myogenic  theory  the  sequence  of  the 
heart  beat  is  accounted  for  readily  by  relatively  simple  assumptions. 
Gaskell  and  Engelmann  have  each  laid  emphasis  upon  the  facts  in 
this  connection,  and  the  application  of  the  myogenic  theory  to  the 
explanation  of  the  normal  sequence  of  contractions  forms  one  of  its 
most  attractive  features.  Gaskell  assumes*  that  the  rhythmical 
power  of  the  muscle  at  the  venous  end  is  greater  than  that  at  the 
ventricular  end, — that  is,  if  pieces  from  the  two  ends  are  examined 
separately  it  will  be  found  that  the  spontaneous  rhythm  of  the 
tissue  from  the  venous  end  is  more  rapid.  This  portion  of  the 
heart,  therefore,  beating  more  rapidly,  sets  the  rhythm  for  the 
whole  organ,  since  a  contraction  started  at  the  venous  end  will 
propagate  itself  from  chamber  to  chamber.  The  pause  between  the 
contractions    of    the    successive    chambers — between  auricle  and 

*  Gaskell,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  4,  61,  1883;  also  vol.  ii,  p.  180,  of 
Schafer's  "  Text-book  of  Physiology,''  1900.       . 


508  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

ventricle,  for  instance — is  due,  in  the  heart  of  the  tortoise,  to  the 
fact  that  the  muscular  tissue  at  the  junction  of  auricle  and  ventricle 
has  a  relatively  low  rate  of  conduction.  At  this  point,  indeed, 
the  muscular  fibers  form  a  ring  around  the  orifice,  preserving, 
therefore,  the  arrangement  found  in  the  embryo  at  the  time  that 
the  heart  has  the  form  of  a  tube.  Gaskell  has  given  reasons  for 
believing  that  the  conduction  of  the  wave  of  contraction  is  slower 
through  this  ring.  In  the  mammalian  heart  the  direct  conduction 
of  the  wave  of  contraction  from  auricle  to  ventricle  through  interven- 
ing muscular  tissue  is  made  quite  possible,  since  so  many  indepen- 
dent observers  have  established  the  existence  of  a  connecting 
bundle  (p.  479).  If  with  Gaskell  we  assume  that  the  conduction 
through  this  bundle  is  slower  than  it  is  over  the  surface  of  the  auricle 
or  ventricle,  then  the  pause  between  auricular  and  ventricular 
systole  is  sufficiently  explained.  That  each  chamber  of  the  heart  has 
a  rhythm  of  its  own  and  that  the  rhythm  of  the  venous  end  is  the 
more  rapid  and  constitutes  the  rhythm  of  the  intact  heart  has  been 
shown  in  various  ways  upon  the  hearts  of  different  animals.  Thus, 
Tigerstedt  has  devised  an  instrument,  the  atriotome,*  by  means  of 
which  the  connections  between  auricle  and  ventricle  may  be 
crushed  without  hemorrhage.  Under  such  conditions  the  ventricle 
continues  to  beat,  but  with  a  much  slower  rhythm  and  with  a 
rhythm  entirely  independent  of  that  of  the  auricles.  The  same 
result  has  been  obtained  recently  in  a  very  striking  way  by  Er- 
langer.  This  observer  arranged  a  clamp  by  means  of  which  he 
could  compress  the  small  bundle  of  fibers  connecting  auricle  and 
ventricle.  As  soon  as  the  compression  is  made  the  ventricle  at  once 
beats  with  a  slower  rhythm  and  one  entirely  independent  of  that  of 
the  auricles.  When  the  compression  is  removed  the  ventricle  falls 
in  again  with  the  auricular  rhythm.  By  variations  in  the  pressure 
upon  the  bundle  intermediate  conditions  may  be  obtained  in  which 
the  "block"  between  auricle  and  ventricle  is  only  partial  and  in 
which,  therefore,  the  ventricular  systole  follows  regularly  every 
second  or  third  auricular  contraction.  When  the  "block"  is  com- 
plete the  ventricular  rhythm  ceases  to  have  any  definite  relation- 
ship to  that  of  the  auricle,  it  beats  entirely  independently  and  its 
rate  is  slower  than  that  of  the  auricle.  It  is  interesting  to  remember 
that  cases  of  complete  or  partial  heart  block  occur  in  man.  In 
the  condition  known  as  the  Stokes-Adams  syndrome  the  striking 
feature  in  addition  to  attacks  of  syncope  is  a  permanently  slowed 
pulse,  the  heart  beat  falling  to  30  or  20  beats  per  minute  or  lower. 
Erlanger  has  shown  that  in  such  cases  there  may  be  complete  or 
partial  heart  block.  In  the  former  condition  the  rhythm  of  the 
ventricle  is  entirely  independent  of  that  of  the  auricle  and  of  course 
*  See  "  Lehrbuch  der  Physiologic  des  Kreislaufes,"  1893. 


PROPERTIES    OP   THE    HEART   MUSCLE.  509 

much  slower.  The  ventricles  may  be  beating  at  27  per  minute  and 
the  auricles  at  90.  In  partial  block  the  ratio  between  the  ventric- 
ular and  auricular  rate  is  definite,  every  second  or  third  auricular 
beat  being  followed  by  a  ventricular  systole  (see  Fig.  210).  The 
lesion  producing  this  condition  has  not  yet  been  determined.* 

In  the  hearts  of  the  cold-blooded  animals  the  same  general 
results  are  readily  obtained  when  the  tissue  between  the  different 
chambers  is  compressed  or  destroyed.  In  the  frog's  heart,  for 
instance,  if  one  ties  a  ligature  (first  ligature  of  Stannius)  between 
the  sinus  venosus  and  the  auricle,  the  auricle  and  ventricle  cease 
beating  while  the  sinus  continues  pulsating  with  its  normal  rhythm. 
Later  the  auricle  and  ventricle  may  commence  beating  again,  but 
if  this  happens  their  rhythm  is  slower  than  that  of  the  sinus  and 
independent  of  it.  So  in  the  terrapin's  heart,  in  which  the  sequence 
of  beat  is  so  beautifully  exhibited,  if  one  ties  a  ligature  between 
auricle  and  ventricle,  or  cuts  off  the  ventricle  entirely,  the  sinus 
venosus  and  auricle  continue  beating  at  their  normal  rhythm,  while 


Fig.  210. — Cardiogram  from  a  case  of  Stokes-Adams  disease,  showing  two  auricular  beats 
(1,  2)  to  each  ventricular  beat. — (Erlanger.)     The  time-record  marks  fifths  of  a  second. 

the  ventricle  remains  entirely  quiescent  so  long  as  normal  blood 
flows  through  it.  It  would  seem  from  these  facts  that  in  the  mam- 
malian heart  the  ventricle  when  disconnected  from  the  auricle  is 
capable  of  maintaining  a  fairly  rapid  rhythm  of  its  own.  At  the 
other  extreme,  the  terrapin's  ventricle  when  similarly  treated  shows 
no  spontaneous  beats  at  all.  These  and  many  other  facts  that 
might  be  quoted  support  well  the  general  view  proposed  by  Gaskell, 
that  the  venous  end  of  the  heart  possesses  the  greater  rhythmical 
power  and  starts  the  heart  beat,  and  that  the  wave  of  contraction 
is  propagated  from  chamber  to  chamber  through  the  muscular 
substance. 

There  remains  a  deeper  question  as  to  what  occasions  this  greater  rhyth- 
micity  at  the  venous  end, — a  question  that  is,  of  course,  bound  up  with  the 
problem  of  the  ultimate  cause  or  conditions  of  automatic  rhythmicity.  In 
connection  with  this  latter  problem  the  absolute  necessity  of  the  presence  of 
certain  inorganic  salts  in  certain  proportions  has  been  emphasized.  In  this 
same  general  line  the  author  has  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  in  the  ter- 
rapin the  amount  of  potassium  salts  present  in  the  blood  explains  in  itself 
why   the  sinus  sets  the  heart  rate.      In  blood,  or   in  Ringer's  solution  con- 

*  See  Erlanger,  "  Centralblatt  f.  Physiologie,"  19,  1,  1905. 


510  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

taining  potassium  salts  in  the  same  amounts  as  blood,  the  ventricular  muscle 
is  not  automatically  contractile;  the  sinus  end  of  the  heart,  on  the  contrary, 
beats  well  in  such  media,  while  an  increase  in  the  potassium  contents  will 
bring  it  to  rest  also.  In  this  animal,  therefore,  the  amount  of  potassium  in 
the  blood  is  so  adapted  that  it  holds  the  ventricular  end  entirely  quiescent. 
In  the  mammalian  heart  it  may  be  assumed  that  the  amomit  of  potassium  is 
sufficient  to  keep  the  spontaneous  rh3rthm  of  the  ventricle  slower  than  that 
of  the  auricles  or  veins,  and  therefore  subordinates  the  rhythm  of  the  whole 
heart  to  that  of  the  venous  end.  In  the  terrapin's  heart,  at  least,  the  re- 
moval or  reduction  of  the  potassium  or  the  increase  of  the  calcium  may  lead 
to  an  independent  ventricular  rhythm  —the  beat  of  the  heart  becomes  arhyth- 
mical.* 

The  Tonicity  of  the  Heart  Muscle. — In  describing  the  phys- 
iology of  skeletal  and  plain  muscle  attention  was  called  to  their 
property  of  tonicity, — that  property  by  means  of  which  they  remain 
in  a  more  or  less  permanent  although  variable  condition  of  con- 
traction. So  far  as  the  skeletal  muscles  are  concerned,  this  con- 
dition is  dependent  upon  their  connections  with  the  nervous  system. 
Cut  the  motor  nerve,  or  destroy  the  motor  center,  and  the  muscle 
loses  its  tone, — becomes  completely  relaxed.  Tonicity  or  tonic 
activity  is  therefore  characteristic  of  the  motor  nerve  centers,  and 
is  due,  no  doubt,  to  a  more  or  less  continuous  inflow  of  sensory 
impulses  into  those  centers.  The  tonus  of  the  nerve  centers  is  a 
reflex  tonus.  In  the  plain  muscle  the  condition  of  tonus  is  also 
marked.  The  blood-vessels,  the  bladder,  the  various  viscera  are 
rarely,  if  ever,  entirely  relaxed  for  any  length  of  time.  This  tonus 
is  also  dependent,  in  many  cases,  upon  a  constant  innervation 
through  the  motor  nerves,  but  after  these  latter  have  been  destroyed 
the  plain  muscle  still  shows  this  property  of  tonicity.  So  in  the 
heart  muscle  the  power  to  maintain  a  certain  degree  of  contraction, 
a  certain  state  of  muscle  tension  quite  independently  of  the  sharp 
systolic  contractions,  is  very  characteristic.  At  the  end  of  a  normal 
diastole,  for  example,  the  ventricle  is  not  entirely  relaxed,  it  retains 
a  certain  amount  of  tonicity  as  compared  with  its  condition  when 
inhibited  through  the  vagus  nerve  or  when  dead.  The  degree  of 
this  tonicity  determines,  of  course,  the  size  of  the  ventricular 
cavity  and  the  extent  of  the  charge  it  will  take  from  the  auricles, 
like  the  property  of  rhythmicity,  that  of  tonicity  is  most  developed 
at  the  venous  end  of  the  heart.  At  least  this  is  the  case  with  the 
heart  of  the  cold-blooded  animals  upon  which  this  property  has 
been  studied  most  carefully.  The  ventricle  of  the  terrapin,  or 
strips  excised  from  the  ventricle  and  suspended  so  that  their  move- 
ments can  be  recorded,  often  vary  greatly  in  length  with  differences 
in  condition.  These  variations  are  due  to  changes  in  tone.  Not 
infrequently  these  changes  take  on  a  rhythmical  character;  so 
that  if  the  ventricle  is  beating  one  sees  upon  the  record  regular- 

*  See  Howell,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  2,  47,  1898. 


PROPERTIES    OF   THE    HEART   MUSCLE.  511 

tone  waves,  an  alternate  slow  shortening  and  slow  relaxation  quite 
independent  of  the  rhythmical  beats.  The  tissue  of  the  auricle  and 
especially  of  the  sinus  venosus  exhibits  this  property  to  a  much 
more  marked  extent  (see  Fig.  211).  The  tone, — that  is,  the  length 
of  the  piece, — if  in  strips,  or  the  capacity  of  the  chamber,  if  used 
entire,  is  continually  changing  and  oftentimes  in  a  rhythmical 
way.  Fano*  has  made  a  special  study  of  this  property  and  has 
suggested  that  the  tone  changes  or  contractions  may  be  chie  to 
the  activity  of  a  substance  in  the  heart  different  from  that  which 
mediates  the  ordinary  contractions.  Botazzif  suggests  that,  while 
the  usual  sharp  systolic  contraction  is  due  to  the  cross-striated 
(anisotropous)   substance,  the  slower  tone  changes  may  be  due 


Fig.  211. — To  show  tone  waves  in  heart  muscle.  The  record  shows  contractions  of  a 
strip  of  the  sinus  venosus  (terrapin's  heart)  suspended  in  a  bath  of  blood-serum.  In  addi- 
tion to  the  sharp  contractions  marked  by  the  lines  there  are  longer,  wave-like  shortenings 
and  relaxations,  irregular  in  character,  which  are  due  to  variations  in  tone. 

to  the  undifferentiated  sarcoplasm.  However  this  may  be,  the 
property  of  tonicity  is  an  important  one  in  the  physiology  of  the 
heart  and  of  the  other  visceral  organs.  Through  it  a  certain  tension 
of  the  musculature  is  maintained,  and  the  size  of  the  cavities  is 
controlled.  The  property  may  be  of  special  regulative  value  in 
the  large  veins  where  they  open  into  the  auricles,  but  at  present 
we  have  little  positive  knowledge  of  the  conditions  that  control 
the  tonicity,  of  the  extent  of  its  regulating  action  normally,  or 
of  the  extent  of  its  derangement  under  pathological  conditions. 

*  Fano,  "Beitrage  zur  Physiologie."  C.  Ludwig,  zu  s.  70  Geburtstage 
gewid.     Leipzig,  1887. 

t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  21,  1,  1897. 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

THE  CARDIAC  NERVES  AND  THEIR  PHYSIOLOGICAL 

ACTION. 

The  heart  receives  two  sets  of  efferent  nerve  fibers  from  the 
central  nervous  system.  One  set  reaches  the  heart  through  the 
vagus  nerves,  and,  since  their  activity  slows  or  stops  the  heart 
beat,  they  are  spoken  of  as  the  inhibitory  nerve  fibers.  The  other 
set  passes  to  the  heart  by  way  of  the  sympathetic  chain,  and  since 
their  activity  accelerates  or  augments  the  heart  beat  they  are 
designated  usually  as  the  accelerator  nerve  fibers.  In  addition  the 
heart  is  provided  with  a  set  of  afferent  nerve  fibers.  Regarding 
the  functional  activity  of  these  latter  fibers,  our  experimental 
knowledge  is  limited  to  the  fact  that  when  excited  they  cause  a 
fall  of  blood-pressure  by  reflex  action  upon  the  vasomotor  center. 
For  this  reason  they  are  described  as  depressor  nerve  fibers.  These 
latter  fibers  may  run  as  a  separate  nerve  or  may  be  included  in  the 
trunk  of  the  vagus. 

The  Course  of  the  Cardiac  Fibers. — ^The  vagus  nerve  gives 
off  several  branches  that  supply  the  heart.  The  superior  cardiac 
branches  arise  from  the  vagus  in  the  neck  somewhere  between 
the  origins  of  the  superior  and  the  inferior  laryngeal  nerves.  The 
inferior  cardiac  branches  arise  from  the  thoracic  portion  of  the 
vagus  near  the  origin  of  the  inferior  laryngeal  and  indeed  some 
of  these  branches  may  spring  directly  from  the  inferior  laryngeal. 
The  inhibitory  fibers  probably  arise  in  these  inferior  branches 
chiefly.  Both  superior  and  inferior  cardiac  branches  pass  toward 
the  heart  and  unite  with  the  cardiac  branches  from  the  sympathetic 
chain  to  form  the  cardiac  plexus.  This  plexus  lies  on  the  arch 
and  ascending  portion  of  the  aorta,  and  from  it  the  heart  receives 
directly  both  its  inhibitory  and  accelerator  fibers.  The  inhibitory 
fibers  of  the  heart  form  a  part  of  the  outflow  of  autonomic  fibers 
(p.  234)  through  the  vagus  nerve.  The  preganglionic  fibers  doubt- 
less end  around  ganglion  cells  in  the  heart,  which  in  turn  send  their 
axons  as  postganglionic  fibers  to  the  heart  muscle. 

The  Action  of  the  Inhibitory  Fibers. — If  the  vagus  nerve 
in  the  neck  of  an  animal  is  cut  and  its  peripheral  end  is  stimulated 
the  heart  is  slowed  or  stopped  altogether  according  to  the  strength 
of  the  stimulus.     This  effect  is  illustrated  in  Figs.  212  and  213. 

512 


THE    CARDIAC    NERVES. 


513 


This  inhibitory  influence  upon  the  heart  beat  was  first  described 
in  1845  by  the  two  brothers,  Edward  Welder  and  E.  H.  Weber. 
It  was  a  physiological  discovery  of  the  first  importance,  not  only 
as  regards  the  physiology  of  the  heart,  but  from  the  standpoint 
of  general  physiology,  since  it  gave  the  first  clear  instance  of  the 
possibility  of  inhibitory  action  through  nerve  fibers. 

If  the  heart  is  examined  during  its  complete  inhibition  it  will 
be  seen  that  it  stops  in  diastole, 
and  indeed  the  diastole  is  more 
complete  than  normal, — the  heart 
dilates  to  a  ver}^  large  extent,  and 
becomes  swollen  with  blood.  This 
latter  fact  is  taken  usually  as  proof 
that  the  action  of  the  inhibitory 
fibers  not  only  prevents  the  usual 
systole,  but  also  removes  the  to- 
nicity of  the  musculature.  Some 
observers  believe  that  the  unusual 
dilatation  is  due  simply  to  the  effect 
of  the  increased  venous  pressure 
(Roy  and  Adami) .  Examination  of 
the  heart  shows  also  that  the  inhi- 
bition affects  the  whole  heart, — both 
auricles  and  ventricles  are  slowed  or 
stopped,  as  the  case  may  be.  That 
the  vagus  nerve  in  man  also  con- 
tains inhibitory  fibers  to  the  heart 
is  made  highly  probable  by  every- 
thing known  concerning  the  condi- 
tions under  which  the  heart  is 
slowed  or  stopped  temporarily,  and 
has,  moreover,  been  demonstrated 
directly  in  several  instances  upon 
living  men.*  These  inhibitory  fi- 
bers have  been  shown  to  exist  in  all 
classes  of  vertebrates  and  in  a  num- 
ber of  the  invertebrates, — a  fact 
which  in  itself  would  indicate  the 
great  importance  of  their  influence 

upon  the  effective  activity  of  the  heart.  In  the  mammals  gener- 
ally employed  in  laboratory  experiments  the  inhibitory  fibers 
occur  in  both  vagi;   in  some  of  the  lower  vertebrates,  however, 

*  See  especially  Thanhoffer,  "  Centralblatt  f.  d.  med.  Wiss.,"  1875,  who 
gives  an  account  of  an  experiment  in  which  the  vagi  were  compressed  in  the 
neck,  with  a  resulting  stoppage  of  the  heart  and  loss  of  consciousness. 
33 


Fig.  212. — To  show  the  inhibition 
of  the  terrapin's  heart  due  to  stimula- 
tion of  the  vagus  nerve.  The  upper 
tracing  (/)  records  the  contractions  of 
the  left  auricle ;  the  lower  (//)  the  con- 
tractions of  the  ventricle.  The  vagus 
was  stimulated  three  times,  each 
chamber  coming  to  a  complete  stop. 
On  removing  the  stimulus  it  will  be 
noted  that  the  auricular  contractions 
increase  gradually  to  their  normal, 
while  the  ventricular  contractions 
start  off  at  full  strength. 


514  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

especially  in  the  terrapin^  the  inhibitory  fibers  are  found  exclusively 
or  mainly  in  the  right  vagus,  and  several  observers  have  asserted 
that  in  the  mammals  also  the  right  vagus,  as  tested  by  direct 
stimulation,  shows  a  stronger  inhibitory  action  than  the  left  vagus. 
Analysis  of  the  Action  of  the  Inhibitory  Fibers. — The  prom- 
inent effect  of  the  action  of  the  inhibitory  fibers  is  the  slowing 


Fig.  213. — To  show  the  inhibition  of  the  heart  from  stimulation  of  the  vagus.  Record 
B  is  the  blood-pressure  tracing.  The  vagus  was  stimulated  twice.  The  marks  x,  x,  indi- 
cate the  beginning  and  end  of  the  stimulus.  The  first  stimulation  was  weak;  it  will  be 
noted  that  the  heart  escaped  and  began  beating  before  the  stimulus  was  withdrawn.  The 
second  stimulus  was  stronger;  the  inhibition  lasted  some  time  after  removal  of  the  stimulus. 
The  upper  curve  (K)  is  a  plethysmographic  (oncometer)  tracing  of  the  volume  of  the  kid- 
ney. It  will  be  noted  that  when  the  heart  stops  and  blood-pressure  falls  the  kidney,  like 
the  other  organs,  diminishes  in  volume. — (Dawson.) 

of  the  rate  of  the  heart  beat.  Numerous  observers  have  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  the  vagus  fibers  may  also  cause  a  weaken- 
ing in  the  force  of  the  beat  as  well  as  a  slowing  in  the  rate,  or, 
indeed,  the  two  effects  may  be  obtained  separately.  This  fact  has 
been  shown  especially  for  the  auricles.*  In  the  heart  of  the  terrapin 
*  See  Bayliss  and  Starling,  "  Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  410,  1892. 


THE    CARDIAC   NERVES. 


515 


one  may,  by  using  weak  stimuli,  obtain  only  a  weakening  of  the 
auricular  beats  without  any  interference  with  the  rate  (Fig.  214), 
while  by  increasing  the  stimulus  the  slowing  in  rate  becomes  evident 
combined  with  a  diminution  in  force  or  extent.  Although  the 
force  of  the  beat  may  be  influenced  without  altering  the  rate,  the 
reverse  does  not  hold.  Usually,  for  the  auricle,  at  least,  any  stimulus 
that  slows  the  beat  also  weakens  the  individual  beat.  Whether 
the  vagus  fibers  exercise  a  similar  double  influence  directly  upon 
the  ventricle  is  not  so  clear.  Some  observers  find  that  when  the 
ventricle  is  inhibited  the  beats,  although  slower,  are  stronger,  while 
others  obtain  an  opposite  result.  It  seems  probable,  as  stated 
by  Johansson  and  Tigerstedt,  that  the  result  obtained  depends 
largely  on  the  strength  of  stimulus 
used.  These  observers  found*  that 
with  relatively  weak  stimuli  the 
contractions  of  the  ventricle,  though 
slower,  are  stronger,  while  with 
stronger  stimuli  the  contractions  are 
diminished  in  strength  as  well  a~ 
rate.  The  question  is  complicate  I 
by  the  difficulty  of  separating  th 
direct  effect  of  the  vagus  on  th 
ventricle  from  the  indirect  effec 
brought  about  by  the  changes  in  th^ 
auricular  beat.  The  inhibitory  in- 
fluence makes  itself  felt  also  upon 
the  conductivity  of  the  heart.  This 
fact  has  been  noted  by  several  ob- 
servers. A  striking  example  is  seen 
in  the  case  of  partial  heart  block. 
When  as  the  result  of  some  injury 
or  pressure  in  the  auriculo-ventricu- 
lar  region  or  from  some  other  less 

evident  cause  there  is  a  partial  block,  so  that  the  ventricle  con- 
tracts once  to  two  or  three  beats  of  the  auricle,  vagus  stimulation 
may  be  followed  at  once  as  an  after-effect  by  a  return  to  the 
normal  beat,  a  re-establishment  of  a  one-to-one  rhythm.  Under 
other  circumstances  the  contrary  effect  of  vagus  stimulation 
has  been  described.  From  the  results  cited  it  seems  evident  that 
the  vagus  nerve  may  affect  the  rate  and  the  force  of  the  con- 
tractions, and  also  the  conductivit}^  or  the  propagation  of  the 
wave  of  contraction.  These  separate  influences  have  been  referred 
by  some  authors  to  the  existence  of  different  kinds  of  nerve  fibers, 
each  exerting  its  own  influence,  but  it  seems  preferable  to  assume, 
*  See  Tigerstedt,  "  Lehrbuch  der  Physiologie  des  Kreislaufes,"  1893,  p.  247. 


Fig.  214.— To  show  the  effect  of 
vagus  stimulation  on  the  force  only  of 
the  auricular  beat  in  the  terrapin's 
heart:  A,  Record  of  the  auricular 
beats;  V,  record  of  the  ventricular 
beats.  The  vagus  was  stimulated  be- 
tween X  and  X.  It  will  be  noted  that 
the  ventricular  beats  are  not  affected, 
and  that  the  auricular  beats  diminish 
in  extent  without  any  change  in  rate. 


516  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

on  the  contrary,  that  only  one  kind  of  fiber  is  present,  and  that 
its  influence  on  the  metabohc  changes  in  the  heart  muscle  expresses 
itself  differently  upon  the  several  different  properties  of  the  tissue 
according  to  the  extent  of  its  action. 

Engelmann  has  made  the  most  complete  attempt  to  analyze  the  influence 
exerted  by  the  cardiac  nerves  (mhibitory  and  accelerator).  He  designates 
these  influences  under  four  different  heacls  with  the  further  supposition  that 
they  are  mediated  by  different  fibers :  (1)  The  chronotropic  influence,  affecting 
the  rate  of  contraction,  positive  chronotropic  actions  causing  an  acceleration 
and  negative  chronotropic  actions  a  slowing  of  the  rate.  (2)  The  bathmo- 
tropic  influence,  affecting  the  irritability  of  the  muscular  tissue;  this  also  may 
be  positive  or  negative.  (3)  Tlie  dromotropic  influence,  positive  or  negative, 
affecting  the  conductivity  of  the  tissue.  (4)  The  inotropic  influence,  posi- 
tive or  negative,  affecting  the  force  or  energy  of  the  contractions.* 

Does  the  Vagus  Affect  Both  Auricle  and  Ventricle? — The 

inhibitory  action  of  the  vagus  is  most  marked  upon  the  venous 
end  of  the  heart,  and  the  question  has  arisen  as  to  whether  it  affects 
the  ventricle  directly  or  not.  Gaskell  gave  evidence  to  indicate 
that  in  the  terrapin  the  auricle  only  is  inhibited,  the  ventricle  stop- 
ping because  it  fails  to  receive  its  normal  impulse  from  the 
auricle.  When  this  heart  is  inhibited  the  contractions  of  the 
auricle  after  cessation  of  inhibition  gradually  increase  in  amplitude 
until  the  normal  size  is  reached;  in  the  ventricle,  on  the  contrary, 
the  first  contraction  after  inhibition  is  of  normal  size  or  greater 
than  normal  (see  Fig.  212).  When  a  block  is  produced  in  the 
mammalian  heart  between  auricle  and  ventricle — by  clamping  the 
uniting  muscular  bundle,  for  instance — ^stimulation  of  the  vagus 
stops  the  auricle  only  (Erlanger),  but  this  result  may  be  due  to 
the  fact  that  the  clamp  has  interrupted  the  inhibitory  fibers  on 
their  way  to  the  ventricle,  or  to  some  other  reason  connected  with 
the  peculiar  properties  of  the  auriculo-ventricular  muscle  bundle. 
As  far  as  the  mammalian  heart  is  concerned,  one  must  believe 
logically  that  the  vagus  affects  the  ventricle  directly,  as  Tiger- 
stedt  has  well  said,  from  the  mere  fact  that,  when  the  con- 
nection between  auricle  and  ventricle  is  severed  or  paralyzed 
the  ventricle  continues  to  beat  at  its  own  rhythm  without  any 
obvious  pause.  It  is  evident  from  this  fact  that  when  the  whole 
heart  is  inhibited  by  stimulation  of  the  vagus  the  ventricle  does 
not  stop  simply  because  the  auricle  fails  to  send  on  its  usual 
contraction  wave,  since,  if  that  were  so,  cutting  off  the  auricle  or 
clamping  the  connection  between  it  and  the  ventricle  should  also 
bring  on  a  ventricular  pause,  as  happens  in  the  case  of  the  terrapin's 
heart.  It  seems,  however,  to  be  the  general  belief  of  those  who 
have  experimented  with  the  subject  that  the  action  of  the  vagus 
is  exerted  mainly  upon  the  auricles. 

*  Engelmann,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1900,  p.  313,  and  1902,  suppl. 
volume,  p.  1. 


THE    CARDIAC    NERVES.  517 

Escape  from  Inhibition. — Strong  stimulation  of  the  vagus 
may  stop  the  entire  heart,  but  the  length  of  time  during  which 
the  heart  may  be  maintained  in  this  condition  varies  in  different 
species  and  indeed  to  some  extent  in  different  individuals.*  In 
some  animals — cats,  for  example — the  strongest  stimulation  of  the 
nerve  serves  only  to  slow  the  heart  instead  of  causing  complete 
standstill.  In  dogs  the  heart  is  stopped  by  relatively  weak  stimu- 
lation, although  if  the  stimulation  is  maintained  the  heart,  as  a 
rule,  escapes  from  the  inhibition.  In  some  dogs  the  heart  may 
be  held  inhibited  long  enough  to  cause  the  death  of  the  animal 
unless  artificial  respiration  is  maintained,  but  usually  the  heart 
beat  soon  breaks  through  the  complete  inhibition.  The  "inner 
stimulus"  in  such  cases  increases  in  strength  sufficiently  to  overcome 
the  opposing  inhibitory  influence,  and  this  circumstance  may  be 
regarded  as  an  argument  against  those  views  that  trace  the  origin  of 
the  "inner  stimulus "  to  some  of  the  products  formed  during  the  ca- 
tabohsm  of  contraction.  Moderate  stimulation  of  the  vagus,  suffi- 
cient simply  to  slow  the  rate  of  beat,  can  be  maintained  without  dimi- 
nution in  effect  for  very  long  periods;  indeed,  as  is  explained  in  the 
next  section,  the  heart  beat  is  kept  partially  inhibited  more  or  less 
continuously  through  life  by  a  constant  activity  of  the  vagus.  In 
the  cold-blooded  animals,  especially  the  terrapin,  the  heart  may 
be  kept  completely  inhibited  for  hours  by  stimulation  of  the  vagus. 
Mills  reports  that  he  has  kept  the  heart  of  the  terrapin  in  this 
condition  for  more  than  four  hours. f  Most  observers  state  that 
complete  inhibition  can  be  maintained  for  a  longer  time  when  the 
stimulus  is  applied  alternately  to  the  two  vagi,  but  it  is  possible 
that  this  result  is  due  to  the  fact  that  continuous  stimulation  applied 
to  a  nerve  usually  results  in  some  local  loss  of  irritability. 

Reflex  Inhibition  of  the  Heart  Beat — Cardio-inhibitory 
Center. — The  inhibitory  fibers  may  be  stimulated  reflexly  by  action 
upon  various  sensory  nerves  or  surfaces.  One  of  the  first  experi- 
mental proofs  of  this  fact  was  furnished  by  Goltz's  often-quoted 
"Klopfversuch."!  In  this  experiment,  made  upon  frogs,  the  ob- 
server obtained  standstill  of  the  heart  by  light,  rapid  taps  on  the 
abdomen,  and  the  effect  upon  the  heart  failed  to  appear  when  the 
vagi  were  cut.  In  the  mammals  every  laboratory  worker  has  had 
numerous  opportunities  to  observe  that  stimulation  of  the  central 
stumps  of  sensory  nerves  may  cause  a  reflex  slowing  of  the  heart 
beat.  The  effect  is  usually  very  marked  when  the  central  stump 
of  one  vagus  is  stimulated,  the  other  vagus  being  intact.  The 
vagus   carries   sensory   fibers   from   the    thoracic    and   abdominal 

*  See  Hough,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  18,  161,  1895. 

t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  6,  246. 

t  Goltz,  "Virchow's  Archiv  f.  pathol.  Anatomic,  etc.,"  26,  11,  1863. 


518  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

viscera,  and  most  observers  state  that  the  heart  may  be  reflexly 
inhibited  most  readily  by  stimulation  of  the  sensory  surfaces  of 
the  abdominal  viscera,  by  a  blow  upon  the  viscera,  for  example, 
or  by  sudden  distension  of  the  stomach  or  sudden  emptying  of 
the  bladder.  In  man  similar  results  are  noticed  very  frequently. 
Acute  dyspepsia,  inflammation  of  the  peritoneum,  painful  stimu- 
lation of  sensory  surfaces, — the  testes,  for  instance,  or  the  middle 
ear, — may  cause  a  marked  slowing  of  the  heart,— a  condition  des- 
ignated as  bradycardia.  What  takes  place  in  all  such  cases  is  that 
the  sensory  impulses  carried  into  the  central  nervous  system  reflexly 
stimulate  the  nerve  cells  in  the  medulla  which  give  origin  to  the 
inhibitory  fibers.  These  cells  form  a  part  of  the  great  motor 
nucleus  (N.  ambiguus)  from  which  arise  the  motor  fibers  of  the 
vagus  and  the  glossopharyngeus.  The  particular  group  of  cells 
from  which  the  inhibitory  fibers  to  the  heart  originate  has  not 
been  delimited  anatomically.  Efforts  have  been  made  to  locate 
them  by  vivisection  experiments,  but  this  method  has  shown  no 
more  perhaps  than  that  they  are  found  in  the  region  of  origin  of 
the  vagus  nerve.  Physiologically,  however,  this  group  of  cells 
forms  a  center  which  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in  controlling 
the  activity  of  the  heart.  It  is  designated,  therefore,  as  the 
cardio-inhihitory  center.  We  may  define  the  cardio-inhibitory  center 
as  a  bilateral  group  of  cells  lying  in  the  medulla  at  the  level  of 
the  nucleus  of  the  vagus  and  giving  rise  to  the  inhibitory  fibers 
of  the  heart.  The  two  sides  are  probably  connected  by  commis- 
sural cells  or  else  each  nucleus  sends  fibers  to  the  vagus  of  each 
side.  Through  this  center  all  reflexes  that  affect  the  heart  by  way  of 
the  inhibitory  fibers  must  take  place.  These  reflexes  may  be  occa- 
sioned by  incoming  sensory  impulses  through  the  spinal  or  cranial 
nerves,  or  by  impulses  coming  down  from  the  higher  portions  of 
the  brain.  The  center  may  also  be  stimulated  directly,  either  by 
pressure  upon  the  medulla,  which  may  give  rise  to  slow  heart  beats 
or,  as  they  are  sometimes  called,  vagal  beats,  or  by  changes  in  the 
composition  of  the  blood.  With  regard  to  the  reflex  stimulation  of 
this  center  it  is  important  to  bear  in  mind  the  general  physiological 
rule  that  afferent  impulses  may  either  excite  or  inhibit  the  activity 
of  nerve  centers.  In  the  former  case  the  heart  rate  would  be 
slowed,  in  the  latter  case  it  would  be  quickened  if  the  center  were 
previously  in  a  state  of  activity. 

The  Tonic  Activity  of  the  Cardio-inhibitory  Center. — ^The 
cells  of  the  cardio-inhibitory  center  are  in  constant  activity  to  a 
greater  or  less  extent.  As  a  consequence,  the  heart  beat  is  kept  con- 
tinually at  a  slower  rate  than  it  would  normally  assume  if  the 
inhibitory  apparatus  did  not  exist.  This  tonic  activity  of  the  vagus 
is  beautifully  exhibited  by  simple  section  of  the  two  vagi,  or  by  inter- 


THE    CARDIAC    NERVES. 


519 


rupting,  in  some  other  way — cooling,  for  example — the  connection 
between  the  center  and  the  heart.  When  the  two  vagi  are  cut  the 
heart  rate  increases  greatly  and  the  blood-pressure  rises  on  account 
of  the  greater  output  of  blood  in  a  unit  of  time.  Section  of  one  vagus 
gives  usually  a  partial  effect, — that  is,  the  heart  rate  is  increased 
somewhat, — but  it  is  still  further  increased  by  section  of  the  second 
vagus.     The  exact  result  obtained  when  the  nerves  are  severed  sepa- 


j0^.. 


/'f*#ikAi/ 


Fig.  215. — To  show  the  effect  of  section  of  the  two  vagi  upon  the  rate  of  heart  beat  and 
the  blood-pressure:  1  marks  the  section  of  the  vagus  on  the  right  side;  2,  section  of  the 
second  vagus.  The  numerals  on  the  vertical  mark  the  blood-pressures;  the  numerals  on 
the  blood-pressure  record  give  the  rate  of  heart  beats. — (Dawson.) 


rately  varies  undoubtedly  with  the  conditions, — ^for  instance,  with 
the  intensity  of  the  tonic  activity  of  the  center.  Throughout  life, 
speaking  in  general  terms,  the  cardio-inhibitory  center  keeps  the 
"brakes"  on  the  heart  rate,  and  the  extent  of  its  action  varies 
under  different  conditions.  When  its  tonic  action  is  increased 
the  rate  becomes  slower;  when  it  is  decreased  the  rate  becomes 
faster.  In  all  probability,  this  tonic  action  of  the  center,  like  that 
of  the  motor  centers  generally,  is  in  reality  a  reflex  tonus.     That 


520  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

is,  it  is  not  due  to  automatic  processes  generated  within  the  nerve 
cells  by  their  own  metabolism  or  by  changes  in  their  liquid  environ- 
ment, but  to  stimulations  received  through  sensory  nerves.  The 
continuous  though  varying  inflow  of  impulses  into  the  central  nervous 
system  through  different  nerve  paths  keeps  the  center  in  that  state 
of  permanent  gentle  activity  which  we  designate  as  "tone."  It 
is  possible,  of  course,  that  certain  sensory  paths  may  be  in  specially 
close  functional  relationship  to  the  center.  One  may  suppose, 
from  the  anatomical  relations  and  from  physiological  experiments, 
that  the  sensory  paths  from  the  abdominal  viscera  play  such  a  role. 

The  Action  of  Drugs  on  the  Inhibitory  Apparatus. — The 
existence  of  the  inhibitory  fibers  to  the  heart  furnishes  a  means 
of  explaining  the  cardiac  action  of  a  number  of  drugs, — atropin, 
muscarin  or  pilocarpin,  nicotin,  curare,  digitalis,  etc., — for  the 
details  of  which  reference  must  be  made  to  works  on  pharmacology.* 
The  action  of  the  first  three  named  illustrates  especially  well  the 
application  that  has  been  made  of  physiology  in  modern  pharma- 
cology. Atropin  administered  to  those  animals,  such  as  the  dog 
or  man,  in  which  the  inhibitory  fibers  of  the  vagus  are  in  constant 
activity,  causes  a  quickening  of  the  heart  rate.  Indeed,  the  heart 
beats  as  rapidly  as  if  both  vagi  were  cut.  After  the  use  of  atropin, 
moreover,  stimulation  of  the  vagus  nerve  fails  to  produce  inhibition. 
The  action  of  atropin  is  satisfactorily  explained  by  assuming  that 
it  paralyzes  the  endings  of  the  (postganglionic)  inhibitory  fibers 
in  the  heart  muscle,  just  as  curare  paralyzes  the  terminations  of 
the  motor  fibers  in  skeletal  muscle.  Atropin  exercises  a  similar 
effect  upon  the  nerve  terminations  in  the  intrinsic  muscles  of  the 
eyeball  and  in  many  of  the  glands.  On  the  contrary,  when  mus- 
carin or  pilocarpin  is  administered  it  causes  a  slowing  and  finally 
a  cessation  of  the  heart  beat.  Since  this  effect  may  be  removed 
by  the  subsequent  use  of  atropin  it  is  assumed  that  the  two  former 
drugs  excite  or  stimulate  the  endings  of  the  inhibitory  fibers  in 
the  heart  and  thus  bring  the  organ  to  rest  in  diastole,  as  happens 
after  electrical  stimulation  of  the  vagus  nerve.  Some  authors, 
however,  believe  that  the  pilocarpin  or  muscarin  may  have  a  deeper 
effect  in  that  it  acts  directly  on  the  heart  muscle  itself,  and  that 
the  antagonistic  atropin  affects  the  muscular  tissue  also  as  well 
as  the  endings  of  the  fibers.  A  final  statement  can  not  be  made 
upon  this  point,  but  the  current  belief  is  that  the  atropin  paralyzes 
while  the  muscarin  or  pilocarpin  stimulates  the  endings  of  the 
inhibitory  fibers  in  the  substance  of  the  heart. 

The  Nature  of  Inhibition. — Since  the  discover}^  of  the  inhibi- 
tory nerves  of  the  heart  furnished  the  first  conclusive  proof  of  the 

*  Consult  Cushny,  "  Text-book  of  Pharmacology  and  Therapeutics." 
Philadelphia,  1903. 


THE  CARDIAC  XERVES.  521 

existence  in  the  body  of  definite  nerve  fibers  with  apparently  the 
sole  function  of  inhibition,  it  seems  appropriate  in  this  connection 
to  refer  to  the  vieAvs  regarchng  the  nature  of  this  process.  Several 
general  \dews  of  the  nature  of  inhibition  have  been  proposed,  but 
the  one  that  is  most  definite  and  has  niet  with  most  favor  is  that 
suggested  by  Gaskell.*  This  author  has  shown  that  the  after-effects 
of  stimulation  of  the  inhibitor}'  fibers  are  beneficial  rather  than  in- 
jurious to  the  heart;  that  is,  under  certain  circumstances  an  improve- 
ment may  be  noticed  in  the  rate  or  force  of  the  beat  or  in  the  con- 
ducti\dty.  He  has  also  shown,  b}'  an  interesting  experiment,  that 
during  the  state  of  inliibition  the  heart  tissue  is  made  increasingly 
electropositive  in  comparison  with  a  dead  portion  of  the  tissue. 
To  show  this  fact  the  tip  of  the  auricle  was  killed  b}*  heat  and  this  spot 
(a)  and  a  point  at  the  base  of  the  auricle  (6)  were  connected  with  a 
galvanometer.  Under  such  conditions  a  strong  demarcation  cur- 
rent was  obtained  flowing  through  the  galvanometer  from  b  to  a. 
If  the  auricle  contracted  a  negative  variation  resulted,  since  during 
acti\'it3'  b  became  less  positive  as  regards  a.  If,  on  the  contrarv^, 
the  auricle  was  inhibited  by  stimulation  of  the  inhibitor}"  fibers 
a  positive  variation  was  obtained;  b  became  more  positive 
toward  a.  On  the  basis  of  such  results  Gaskell  concludes  that 
inhibition  in  the  heart  is  due  to  a  set  of  metabolic  changes  of  an 
opposite  character  to  those  occurring  during  contraction.  In  the 
latter  condition  the  metabolism  is  catabolic,  and  consists  in  the 
breaking  dovm  of  complex  substances  into  simpler  ones  with  the 
liberation  of  energy  as  heat  and  work.  During  inliibition,  on  the 
contrary,  the  processes  are  anabolic  or  synthetic  and  result  in  the 
formation  of  increased  contractile  material  whereby  the  condition 
of  the  heart  is  improved.  ■  He  would  regard  the  inhibitory  fibers, 
therefore,  as  the  anabolic  nerve  of  the  heart  and  their  constant 
action  throughout  life  as  an  aid  to  the  nutrition  of  the  heart.  The 
same  general  view  may  be  extended  to  all  cases  of  inhibition,  and 
Gaskell  believes  that  all  muscular  tissues  are  supplied  with  anabolic 
(inhibitory)  and  catabolic  (motor)  fibers. t 

The  heart  muscle  possesses  a  motor  (accelerator)  as  well  as  an 
inhibitory  nerve.  Thej"  exercise  opposite  effects  upon  the  heart 
muscle,  and  this  result  finds  a  satisfactorj'  provisional  explanation 
in  Gaskelk's  hypothesis,  just  stated.  But  the  further  Cjuestion  arises 
as  to  why  they  should  have  opposite  effects.  Is  it  due  to  a  differ- 
ence in  the  character  of  the  nerve  impulses  they  carry  or  is  it  due  to 

*  Gaskell,  ''Philosophical  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society,"  London; 
Croonian  Lecture,  part  iii,  1882:  also  '' Beitrage  zur  Physiologie,"  dedicated 
to  C.  Ludwig,  1887;   and  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  7,  46. 

t  For  a  general  discussion  of  this  idea  and  of  the  importance  of  inhibitory 
actions  see  Meltzer,  "Inhibition,"  "New  York  Medical  Journal,"  Mav  13, 
20,  27,  1899. 


522  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

some  difference  in  their  place  or  manner  of  ending  in  the  muscular 
tissue?  Views  differ  upon  this  point  and  many  physiologists  have 
suggested  that  the  impulses  vary  in  quality;  that  the  inhibitory 
nerve  impulse  differs  in  some  unknown  way  from  a  motor  impulse, 
and  therefore  causes  an  opposite  reaction  in  the  muscle.  This  latter 
view  seems,  however,  to  be  entirely  disproved  by  the  results  of 
experiments.  Langley  has  shown  upon  blood-vessels  (p.  76)  that 
an  inhibitory  nerve  made  to  grow  down  a  motor  path  causes  when 
stimulated  only  motor  effects  and  vice  versa.  And  in  the  case  in  point 
Erlanger*  has  proved  that,  when  an  ordinary  spinal  nerve  (fifth 
cervical)  is  sutured  to  the  peripheral  end  of  the  cut  vagus,  it  will, 
after  time  for  regeneration  has  been  allowed,  cause  when  stimulated 
the  usual  stoppage  of  the  heart.  So  far  as  our  facts  go,  therefore, 
we  must  assume  that  motor  and  inhibitory  fibers  have  opposite 
effects  upon  the  muscular  fibers  in  which  they  end  because  they 
terminate  differently  in  these  fibers.  Nothing  more  specific  can  be 
said. 

The  Course  of  the  Accelerator  Fibers. — The  heart  receives 
efferent  or  motor  nerve  fibers  from  the  sympathetic  system  in 
addition  to  those  reaching  it  by  way  of  the  vagus  nerve.  Atten- 
tion was  first  called  to  these  sympathetic  fibers  by  Legallois  (1812), 
but  our  recent  knowledge  dates  from  the  experiments  made  by 
von  Bezold  (1862)  which  were  afterward  completed  by  the  Cyon 
brothers, — M.  and  E.  Cyon,t  1866.  These  fibers  when  stimulated 
cause  an  increased  rate  of  beat  and  are  therefore  designated  as  the 
accelerator  nerve  of  the  heart.  Their  course  has  been  worked  out 
physiologically  in  a  number  of  animals.  Among  the  mammalia  and 
indeed  among  different  animals  of  the  same  species  there  is  some 
variation,  but  a  general  conception  of  their  origin  and  course  may 
be  obtained  from  Fig.  216,  which  represents  in  a  schematic  way  the 
anatomical  path  taken  by  these  fibers.  They  emerge  from  the  spinal 
cord  in  the  anterior  roots  of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  thoracic 
spinal  nerves.  According  to  some  authors,  they  may  be  found  also 
in  the  fifth  thoracic  and  the  first  thoracic  or  even  the  lower  cervical 
spinal  nerves.  They  pass  then  by  way  of  the  white  rami  to  the 
stellate  or  first  thoracic  ganglion  (6),  and  thence  byway  of  the  an- 
nulus  of  Vieussens  (7)  to  the  inferior  cervical  ganglion.  A  num- 
ber of  branches  leave  the  sympathetic  system  and  the  vagus  in 
this  region  to  pass  to  the  cardiac  plexus  and  thence  to  the  heart. 
The  accelerator  fibers  are  found  in  some  of  these  branches,  mixed 
in  some  cases  with  inhibitory  fibers  from  the  vagus.  The  pregan- 
glionic portion  of  some  of  the  accelerator  fibers  ends  around  the 

*  Erlanger,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  372,  1905. 

t  For  the  history  and  literature  of  the  accelerator  nerves  see  Cyon,  article 
"Coeur,"  p.  103,  in  Richet's  "  Dictionnaire  de  Physiologie,"  1900;  or  Tiger- 
stedt,  "  Lehrbuch  der  Physiologie  des  Kreislaufes,"  260,  1893. 


THE    CARDIAC   NERYES. 


523 


ganglion  cells  in  the  first  thoracic  ganglion,  while  others  apparently 
make  their  first  termination  in  the  inferior  cervical  ganglion.  The 
accelerator  fibers  may  be  stimulated  in  the  spinal  roots  in  which 
they  emerge  (II,  III,  IV),  in  the  annulus  or  in  someof  the  branches 
that  arise  from  the  annulus  or  from  the  inferior  cervical  ganglion 
(5,  3,  2).  It  will  be  borne 
in  mind  that  no  accelerator 
fibers  are  found  in  the  cer- 
vical sympathetic  above  the 
inferior  cervical  ganglion. 

At  various  times  investiga- 
tors have  asserted  that  accel- 
erator fibers  are  contained  also 
in  the  vagus  nerve.  Thus,  it 
has  been  shown  that,  after  the 
paralysis  of  the  inhibitory  fibers 
m  the  heart  by  atropin,  stimula- 
tion of  the  vagus  causes  an  accel- 
eration of  the  heart.  Little  at- 
tention has  been  paid  to  the 
physiology  of  these  fibers,  since  it 
seems  evident  that  the  great 
outflow  of  accelerators  is  made 
via  the  sympathetic  system. 

The  Action  of  the  Ac- 
celerator Fibers. — In  ex- 
perimental work  the  accel- 
erators are  usually  stimu- 
lated in  one  or  more  of  the 
branches  represented  sche- 
matically as  5,  3,  2,  in  Fig. 
216,  or  in  the  annulus.  The 
effect  is  an  increase  in  the 
rate  of  beat  of  the  heart, 
which  may  be  very  evident, 
amounting  to  as  much  as 
70  per  cent,  or  more  of  the 
original  rate,  or  may  be  very 
slight.  When  acceleration  is 
obtained  the  latent  period  is 
considerable  and  the  heart 

does  not  return  at  once  to  its  normal  rate  upon  cessation  of  the 
stimulus  (see  Fig.  217).  In  some  cases,  perhaps  in  most  cases,  the 
effect  upon  the  heart  is  an  acceleration  pure  and  simple, — that  is, 
the  rate  of  beat  is  increased  without  any  evidence  of  an  increase  in 
the  force  of  the  beats.  The  larger  number  of  beats  is  offset  by  the 
smaller  amplitude  of  each  beat;  so  that  the  blood-pressure  in  the 
arteries  is  unchanged.     In  other  cases  the  effect  upon  the  heart  may 


Fig.  216. — Schematic  representation  of  the 
course  of  the  accelerator  fibers  to  the  dog's  heart 
— right  side. — (Modified  from  Pawlow.)  The  sym- 
pathetic nerve  is  represented  in  solid  black.  The 
course  of  the  accelerator  fibers  is  indicated  by  ar- 
rows. /,  Cervical  sympathetic  combined  in  neck 
with,  10,  the  vagus;  II,  III,  IV,  rami  communi- 
cantes  from  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  thoracic 
spinal  nerves,  carrying  most  of  the  accelerator  fi- 
bers to  the  sympathetic  chain ;  7,  annulus  of  Vieus- 
sens;  8,  inferior  cervical  ganglion;  2,  3,  4,  5, 
branches  from  vagus  and  vago-sym pathetic  trunk 
going  to  cardiac  plexus  (some  of  these — 3,  5, — 
carry  accelerator  fibers;  9,  the  inferior  laryngeal 
nerve. 


524  CIRCULATIPN    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

be  an  increase  not  only  in  rate,  but  also  in  the  force  or  energy  of  the 
beats,  or  the  rate  may  remain  unaffected  and  only  the  force  of  the 
heart  beats  be  increased.  For  these  reasons  most  authors  seem  to 
incline  to  the  view  that  the  accelerator  nerves,  so  called,  contain  in 
reality  two  sets  of  fibers,  one,  the  accelerators  proper,  whose  func- 
tion is  simply  to  accelerate  the  rate,  and  one,  the  augmentors,  that 
cause  a  more  forcible  beat.  Under  normal  conditions  we  may  sup- 
pose that  these  fibers  act  either  separately  or  in  combination. 

Tonicity  of  the  Accelerators  and  Reflex  Acceleration. — 
The  results  of  the  most  careful  work  show,  without  doubt,  that  the 
accelerators  to  the  heart  are  normally  in  a  state  of  tonic  activity.* 
When  these  nerves  are  cut  upon  both  sides  the  heart  rate  is  increased. 
We  must  believe,  therefore,  that  under  normal  conditions  the  heart 
muscle  is  under  the  constant  influence  of  two  antagonistic  influ- 
ences, one  through  the  inhibitory  fibers  tending  to  slow  the  rate, 
one  through  the  accelerator  fibers  tending  to  quicken  the  rate.  The 
actual  rate  at  any  moment  is  the  resultant  of  these  two  influences. 


Fig.  217. — To  show  the  acceleration  of  the  rate  of  heart  beat  upon  stimulation  of  the 
accelerator  nerve,  and  the  long  latent  period  {Beaunis):  PF,  The  pulse  beat  registered  by 
a  mercury  manometer  connected  with  the  femoral  artery.  The  duration  of  the  stimulus 
is  indicated  by  the  broad  marking  on  line  E.  The  line  A  shows  the  beginning  of  accelera- 
tion, and  indicates  the  long  latent  period. 

While  such  an  arrangement  seems  at  first  sight  to  be  unnecessary 
from  a  mechanical  standpoint,  it  is  doubtless  true  that  it  possesses 
some  distinct  advantage.  Possibly  it  makes  the  heart  more 
promptly  responsive  to  reflex  regulation.  Balanced  mechanisms 
of  this  kind  are  found  in  other  parts  of  the  body  where  smt)oth  and 
prompt  reactions  to  stimulation  seem  to  be  especially  necessary, — 
for  example,  the  constrictor  and. dilator  fibers  of  the  iris,  the  ex- 
tensor and  flexor  muscles  of  the  joints,  etc.  Physiologists  have 
studied  experimentally  the  effect  upon  the  heart  of  stimulating 
simultaneously  the  inhibitory  and  the  accelerator  nerves.  The  work 
done  upon  this  subject  by  Hunt  seems  to  make  it  very  certain  that 
in  all  such  cases  the  result,  so  far  as  the  rate  is  concerned,  is  the 
algebraic  sum  of  the  effects  of  the  separate  stimulations  of  the  nerve. 
The   inhibitory   and   the   accelerator   fibers  must   be   considered, 

*  For  a,'  discussion  of  this  and  other  points  in  the  physiology  of  the  ac- 
celerators see  Hunt,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  2,  395,  1899,  and 
"Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  2,  151,  1897. 


THE  CARDIAC  NERVES.  525 

therefore,  as  true  antagonists,  acting  in  opposite  ways  upon  the 
same  part  of  the  heart.  The  existence  of  tlie  accelerator  nerves 
makes  possible,  of  course,  their  reflex  stimulation.  Experimentally 
it  is  found  that  stimulation  of  various  sensory  nerves — those  of  the 
limbs  or  trunk,  for  instance — ^may  cause  reflexly  either  an  increase 
or  decrease  in  the  heart  rate,  and  as  a  matter  of  experience  we  know 
that  our  heart  rate  may  be  increased  by  various  changes,  particu- 
larly by  emotional  states.  The  natural  explanation  of  such  ac- 
celerations is  that  they  are  due  to  reflex  stimulation  of -the  nerve 
•cells  in  the  central  nervous  system  which  give  rise  to  the  accelerator 
fibers.  But  another  point  of  view  is  possible.  An  increase  in  heart 
rate  may  be  brought  about  either  by  a  reflex  stimulation  of  the 
.accelerator  fibers  or  by  a  reflex  inhibition  of  the  cardio-inhibitory 
■center.  Hunt  especially  has  presented  many  experimental  facts 
which  seem  to  indicate  that  increase  in  heart  rate  from  reflex  action 
is  usually  due  to  an  inhibition  of  the  tonic  activity  of  the  cardio- 
inhibitory  center.  He  finds,  for  instance,  that  when  the  two 
vagi  are  cut  stimulation  of  various  sensory  nerves  fails  to  give  any 
increase  in  the  already  rapid  heart  rate,  while,  on  the  contrary, 
-when  the  two  accelerator  paths  are  cut  a  reflex  increase  in  heart 
Tate  may  be  obtained  readily.  It  is  perhaps  dangerous  to  draw 
positive  conclusions  from  such  experiments  in  regard  to  the  work- 
ings of  these  delicate  and  independent  mechanisms  under  normal 
conditions,  but  since  our  only  positive  knowledge  must  rest  upon 
experiments  we  may  accept  this  result  provisionally  at  least.  We 
may  assume,  therefore,  that  the  accelerator  and  the  inhibitory 
fibers  are  working  constantly  on  the  heart,  and  its  rate  is  the  re- 
sultant or  algebraic  sum  of  their  effects,  and  that  sudden  changes 
in  this  rate,  such  as  result  from  sensory  or  psychical  disturbances 
■of  any  kind,  may  be  referred  mainly  to  a  reflex  effect  upon  the  car- 
dio-inhibitory center.  When  this  center  is  stimulated  to  greater 
.activity,  a  slower  rate  results;  when  it  is  inhibited,  a  faster  rate. 
The  tonic  activity  of  the  accelerator  from  this  standpoint  acts  as  a 
more  or  less  constant  opposing  force  to  the  inhibitory  influence, 
so  that  this  latter  works  against  a  constant  resistance  which  may  be 
Ukened  flguratively  to  that  exerted  by  a  spring. 

The  Accelerator  Center. — The  accelerator  fibers  arise  primarily  in 
the  central  nervous  system.  Since  stimulation  of  the  upper  cervical  region 
of  the  cord  causes  acceleration,  it  seems  evident  that  the  path  must  begin 
somewhere  in  the  brain.  It  has  been  assumed  that,  like  the  inhibitory  fibers, 
the  path  starts  in  the  medulla,  and  that,  therefore,  the  cells  in  that  organ 
which  give  rise  to  the  accelerator  fibers  constitute  the  accelerator  center 
through  which  reflex  effects,  if  any,  take  place.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the 
location  of  these  cells  of  origin  has  not  been  made  out  satisfactorily.  The 
matter  offers  unusual  difficulty  on  the  experimental  side,  owing  to  the  existence 
of  the  cardio-inhibitory  center  in  the  medulla  and  the  absence  of  any  entirely 
satisfactory  method  of  distinguishing  certainly  between  reflex  acceleration 
through  this  center  and  through  the  accelerator  center. 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 

THE  RATE  OF  THE  HEART  BEAT  AND  ITS  VARIA- 
TIONS  UNDER  NORMAL  CONDITIONS. 

The  rate  of  heart  beat  changes  quickly  in  response  to  variations 
in  either  the  internal  or  external  conditions.  Therein  lies,  in  fact, 
the  great  value  of  the  regulatory  (inhibitory  and  accelerator)  nerves. 
Through  their  agency,  in  large  part,  the  pump  of  the  circulation  is 
reflexly  adjusted  to  suit  the  changing  needs  of  the  organism  and 
adapted  more  or  less  successfully  to  alterations  in  the  external 
environment.  The  variations  in  the  rate  of  beat  may  be  considered 
under  three  general  heads:  (I)  Fixed  adjustments  to  the  different 
mechanical  conditions  of  the  circulation.  (II)  Variations  caused 
by  reflex  effects  upon  the  inhibitory  or  accelerator  nerves.  (Ill) 
Variations  caused  by  changes  in  the  physical  or  chemical  conditions 
of  the  blood. 

The  Fixed  Adjustments  of  Rate. — When  we  speak  of  the 
normal  pulse  rate  we  mean  the  rate  in  an  adult  when  in  a  condition 
of  mental  and  bodily  repose.  Examination  shows  that  under  these 
circumstances  there  are  great  individual  variations.  The  average 
normal  rate  for  man  may  be  estimated  at  70  beats  per  minute; 
for  woman,  78  to  80  beats;  but  the  normal  rate  for  some  individuals 
may  be  much  lower  (50)  or  much  higher  (90).  Among  the  condi- 
tions for  which  the  heart  rate  shows  a  certain  constant  fixed  adapta- 
tion the  following  may  be  mentioned : 

Variations  with  Sex. — ^The  average  pulse  rate  in  women  is,  as. 
a  rule,  higher  than  that  in  men,  and  this  difference  seems  to  hold 
for  all  periods  of  life. 

Variations  with  Size. — Tall  individuals  have  a  slower  pulse 
rate  than  short  persons  of  the  same  age.  Several  observers  have 
thought  that  they  could  detect  a  constant  relationship  between 
size  and  pulse  rate.  Thus,  Volkmann  believed  that  the  pulse 
rate  varies  inversely  as  the  five-ninth  power  of  the  height.  In 
the  same  direction  it  is  found  that  small  animals,  as  a  rule,  have 
a  higher  pulse  rate  than  larger  ones.  Thus,  elephant,  25-28; 
horse  and  ox,  36-50;  sheep,  60-80;  dog,  100-120;  rabbit,  150; 
small  rodents,  175  or  more.  It  would  seem,  from  these  facts,  that 
the  fast  rate  in  the  small  animals,  with  their  shorter  circulatory 
path  and  smaller  volume  of  blood,  is  necessary  to  the  mechanical 

526 


THE    RATE    OF   THE    HEART    BEAT.  527 

fulfillment  of  the  functions  of  the  blood,  and  has  been  preserved 
by  natural  selection. 

Variations  with  Age. — In  line  with  the  last  condition  it  is  found 
in  man  that  the  pulse  rate  is  highest  in  infancy,  sinks  quite  rapidly 
at  first  and  then  more  slowly  up  to  adult  life,  and  rises  again 
slightly  in  very  old  age  at  the  time  that  the  body  undergoes  a 
perceptible  shrinkage.  The  most  extensive  data  upon  this  point 
are  found  in  the  works  of  the  older  observers.*  According  to  Guy, 
a  condensed  summary  of  the  average  results  obtained  at  different 
periods  of  life,  both  sexes  included,  may  be  given  as  follows : 

At  birth 140 

Infancy 120 

Childhood 100 

Youth 90 

Adult  age 75 

Old  age 70 

Extreme  age 75-80 

The  Variations  in  Pulse  Rate  Effected  through  the  In- 
hibitory and  Accelerator  Nerves. — Most  of  the  sudden  adaptive 
changes  of  the  heart  rate  come  under  this  head.  In  the  laboratory 
we  find  that  stimulation  of  all  sensory  nerve  trunks  may  affect 
the  heart  rate,  in  some  cases  increasing  it,  in  others  the  reverse. 
In  life  we  find  that  the  pulse  rate  is  very  responsive  to  our  changing 
sensations  and  especially  to  mental  conditions  that  indicate 
deep  interest  or  emotional  excitement.  In  a  previous  paragraph 
(p.  524)  the  physiological  cause  of  this  effect  has  been  discussed 
briefly.  It  may  arise  either  from  a  reflex  excitation  of  the  accelera- 
tor nerves  or  a  reflex  inhibition  of  the  tonic  activity  of  the  inhibitory 
nerves.  The  facts  at  present  seem  to  favor  this  latter  explanation. 
In  addition  to  these  reflexes  associated  with  conscious  states  the 
heart  is  susceptible  to  reflex  influences  of  a  totally  unconscious 
character  connected  wdth  the  states  of  activity  of  the  visceral  organs. 
For  example,  after  meals  the  heart  beat  increases  usually  in  rate 
and  especially  in  force  of  beat,  thereby  counteracting  the  effect  on 
blood  pressure  of  the  large  vascular  dilatation  in  the  intestinal  area. 

Variations  in  Heart  Rate  with  the  Condition  of  Blood-pressure. — 
It  has  long  been  known  that  when  the  blood-pressure  in  the  arteries 
falls  the  pulse  rate  increases  and  when  it  rises  the  pulse  rate  de- 
creases. Thus,  the  low  blood-pressure  that  is  characteristic  of 
the  condition  of  surgical  shock  is  associated  with  a  very  rapid 
rate  of  heart  beat.  There  is  a  certain  inverse  relationship  between 
pressure  and  rate  which  has  the  characteristics  of  a  purposeful 
adaptation.  The  quicker  pulse  rate  following  upon  the  low  pressure 
tends  to  increase  the  output  of  blood  and  raise  the  pressure.     There 

*  See  Volkmann,  "Die  Hamodynamik,"  p.  427,  1850;  also  Guy,  article 
"Pulse"  in  Todd's  "Cyclopsedia  of  Anatomy  and  Physiology,"  1847-49. 


528  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

was  formerly  much  discussion  as  to  whether  this  relationship  is 
brought  about  by  reflexes  through  the  extrinsic  nerves  of  the 
heart  or  whether  it  is  due  to  some  direct,  perhaps  mechanical, 
effect  upon  the  heart.  The  experiments  of  Newell  Martin  upon 
the  isolated  heart  seem  to  have  settled  the  matter  satisfactorily,* 
By  a  method  devised  by  him  he  kept  dogs'  hearts  beating  for 
many  hours  when  isolated  from  all  connections  with  the  body 
except  the  lungs.  Under  these  conditions  it  was  found  that  even 
extreme  variations  in  blood-pressure  did  not  affect  the  heart  rate. 
Consequently,  the  variation  that  does  take  place  under  normal 
conditions  must  be  due  to  a  reflex  stimulation  of  the  cardiac  nerves. 
The  origin  of  the  sensory  stimulus  in  this  reflex  is  not  clearly  known; 
possibly  the  sensory  nerves  of  the  heart  itself  are  stimulated  or 
sensory  fibers  distributed  to  the  root  of  the  aorta. 

Variations  with  Muscular  Exercise. — It  is  a  matter  of  everyday 
experience  that  the  heart  rate  increases  with  muscular  exercise. 
A  simple  change  in  posture,  in  fact,  suffices  to  affect  the  heart 
rate.  The  rate  is  higher  when  standing  (80)  than  when  sitting 
(70)  and  higher  in  this  latter  condition  than  when  lying  down 
(66).  Unusual  exertion,  as  in  running,  causes  a  very  marked  and 
long-lasting  increase  in  the  pulse  rate.  The  purposeful  charac- 
ter of  this  adaptation  is  very  evident.  Increase  in  muscular  activity 
calls  for  a  more  rapid  circulation  to  supply  the  oxygen  and  other 
elements  of  nutrition,  but  the  physiological  mechanism  by  which 
this  adaptation  is  obtained  is  not  explained  satisfactorily,  Johans- 
son,! who  has  studied  the  matter  carefully,  concludes  that  the 
effect  is  due  mainly  to  two  causes :  First,  to  the  effect  of  the  chem- 
ical products  of  metabolism  in  the  active  muscle,  which  are  given 
off  to  the  circulation  and  are  then  carried  to  the  nerve  centers 
where  they  affect  the  cardiac  nerves,  or  possibly  to  an  effect  of 
these  metabolic  products  on  the  heart  directly.  He  considers  this 
factor  as  of  relatively  subordinate  importance.  Second,  the  chief 
factor  is  found  in  an  associated  activity  of  the  accelerator  nerves. 
That  is,  the  discharge  of  impulses  along  the  voluntary  motor  paths 
(pyramidal)  sets  into  activity  at  the  same  time  and  proportionally 
the  center  of  the  accelerator  nerve  fibers.  This  view  would  suppose, 
therefore,  in  terms  of  our  present  anatomical  knowledge,  that  the 
pyramidal  fibers  give  off  collateral  connections  to  the  accelerator 
center.  It  is  possible  that  the  relative  influence  of  these  two 
factors  may  vary  with  the  extent  of  the  muscular  activity.  After 
prolonged  or  excessive  muscular  exertion  the  heart  rate  remains 
accelerated  for  a  considerable  period  after  cessation  of  the  work, — a 
fact  which  would  indicate  some  long-lasting  influence,  such  as  is  im- 

*  Martin,  "  Studies  from  the  Biological  Laboratory,  Johns  Hopkins  Uni- 
versity," 2,  213,  1882;   also  "Collected  Physiological  Papers,"  p.  25,  1895, 
t  Johannson,  "  Skandinavisclies  Archiv  f .  Physiologie,"  5,  20,  1895. 


THE  RATE  OF  THE  HEART  BEAT. 


529 


plied  in  the  first  factor  given  above, — the  effect  of  the  products  of 
muscular  metabolism. 

Variations  with  the  Gaseous  Conditions  of  the  Blood. — In  con- 
ditions of  asphyxia  the  altered  gaseous  contents  of  the  blood 
increase  in  CO 2  and  decrease  in  O2,  act  upon  the  medullary  centers 
of  the  cardiac  nerves,  causing,  first, 
an  increase  and  then  a  decrease  in 
heart  rate. 

The  Variations  in  Pulse  Rate 
Due  to  Changes  in  the  Composi- 
tion or  Properties  of  the  Blood.— 
The  condition  under  this  head  that 
has  the  most  marked  influence  upo: 
the  heart  rate  is  the  temperature  c  1 
the  blood.     Speaking  generally,  th 
rate  of  beat  increases  regularly  witl 
the    temperature  of    the    blood    or 
other  circulating  liquid  up  to  a  cer- 
tain optimum  temperature.     On  thf^ 
heart  of  the  cold-blooded  animal  thi 
relationship  is  easily  demonstrate 
by  supplying  the  heart  with  an  art: 
ficial   circulation   of    Ringer's    solu- 
tion, which  can  be  heated  or  cooled 
at  pleasure.     The  rate  and  force  of 
the  beat    increase  to   a  maximum, 
which  is  reached  at  about  30°  C. 
(see  Fig.  218).     Beyond  this  opti- 
mum temperature  the  beats  decrease 
in  force  and  also  in  rate,  becoming 
irregular  or  fibrillar  before  the  heart 
finally  comes  to  rest.     Newell  Mar- 
tin* has  shown  the  same  relation- 
ship in  a  very  conclusive  way  upon 
the    isolated     heart    of     the    dog. 
Within  physiological  limits  the  rate 

of  beat  rises  and  falls  substantially  parallel  to  the  variations  in 
temperature  as  is  shown  by  the  chart  reproduced  in  Fig.  219.  The 
accelerated  heart  rate  in  fevers  is  therefore  due  probably  to  the 
direct  influence  of  the  high  temperature  upon  the  heart  itself.  The 
same  observer  determined  experimentally  the  upper  and  lower 
lethal  hmits  of  temperature  for  the  mammalian  heart.  The  experi- 
ments were  made  upon  cats'  hearts  kept  alive  by  an  artificial  circu- 

*  Martin,  "Croonian  Lecture,  Philosophical  Transactions,  Royal  Society," 
London,  174,  663,  1883;  also  "Collected  Physiological  Papers,"  p.  40,  1895. 
34 


Fig.  218. — To  show  the  effect  of 
temperature  on  the  rate  and  force  of 
the  heart  beat.  Contractions  of  the 
terrapin's  ventricle  at  different  tem- 
peratures. Kymograph  moving  at 
the  same  speed.  At  30°  the  rate  is 
still  increasing,  but  the  extent  of  con- 
traction has  passed  its  optimum. 


530 


CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 


lation  through  the  coronary  arteries.*  It  was  found  that  the  high- 
est temperature  at  which  the  heart  will  beat  is  about  44°  to  45°  C, 
although  a  slightly  higher  temperature  may  be  withstood  under 
special  conditions.  At  the  other  extreme  the  mammalian  heart 
ceases  to  beat  when  the  temperature  falls  as  low  as  17°  to  18°  C. 


The  rate  of  the  heart  beat  may  be  influenced  also  by  many  sub- 
stances added  to  the  blood.  The  influence  of  atropin  and  muscarin 
have  already  been  alluded  to,  but  changes  also  in  the  normal  con- 
stituents of  the  blood  may  have  similar  effects.  Thus,  an  increase  in 
the  sodium  carbonate  of  the  blood  affects  the  heart  beat,  particu- 
larly, however,  in  regard  to  the  amplitude  or  force  of  the  contraction. 

*  Martin  and  Applegarth,  "Studies  from  the  Biological  Laboratory 
Johns  Hopkins  University,"  4,  275,  1890;  also  "Collected  Physiological 
Papers,"  p.  97,  1895. 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 

THE  VASOMOTOR  NERVES  AND  THEIR  PHYSIO- 
LOGICAL ACTIVITY. 

During  the  first  half  of  the  nineteenth  century  the  physical  or 
mechanical  conditions  of  the  circulation  were  carefully  studied  and 
great  emphasis  was  laid  upon  such  properties  as  the  elasticity  of 
the  coats  of  the  vessels.  The  physical  adaptability  thereby  con- 
ferred upon  the  vascular  tubes  was  thought  to  be  sufficient  for  the 
purposes  of  the  circulation.  We  now  know  that  many  of  the  blood- 
vessels are  supplied  with  motor  and  inhibitory  nerve  fibers  through 
whose  activity  the  size  of  the  vascular  bed  and  the  distribution  of 
blood  to  the  various  organs  are  regulated.  We  know,  also,  that 
without  this  nervous  control  the  vascular  system  fails  entirely  to 
meet  what  seems  to  be  the  most  important  condition  of  a  normal 
circulation, — namely,  the  maintenance  of  a  high  arterial  pressure. 
Although  a  number  of  physiologists  had  assumed  the  existence  of 
nerve  fibers  capable  of  acting  upon  the  muscular  coats  of  the  blood- 
vessels, the  experimental  proof  of  the  existence  of  such  nerves, 
and  the  beginning  of  the  modern  development  of  the  theory  of 
vasomotor  regulation  were  a  part  of  the  brilliant  contributions  to 
physiology  made  by  Claude  Bernard.*  In  1851  Bernard  discovered 
that  when  the  sympathetic  nerve  is  cut  in  the  neck  of  a  rabbit  the 
blood-vessels  in  the  ear  on  the  same  side  become  very  much  dilated. 
He  and  other  observers  afterward  showed  that  if  the  peripheral 
(head)  end  of  the  served  nerve  is  stimulated  electrically  the  ear 
becomes  blanched,  owing  to  a  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels. 
Thus  the  existence  of  vasoconstrictor  nerve  fibers  to  the  blood-vessels 
was  demonstrated.  A  vast  amount  of  experimental  work  has  been 
done  since  to  ascertain  the  exact  distribution  of  these  fibers  to  the 
various  organs  and  the  reflex  conditions  under  which  they  function 
normally.  Few  subjects  in  physiology  are  of  more  practical  im- 
portance to  the  physician  than  that  of  vasomotor  regulation;  it 
plays  such  a  large  and  constant  part  in  the  normal  activity  of  the 
various  organs.  Bernard  was  doubly  fortunate  in  being  the  first 
to  demonstrate  the  existence  of  a  second  class  of  nerve  fibers,  which, 
when  stimulated,  cause  a  dilatation  of  the  blood-vessels  and  which 

*  See  "Life  of  Claude  Bernard,"  by  Sir  Michael  Foster,  1899,  in  the  series, 
"Masters  of  Medicine." 

531 


532  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

are  therefore  designated  as  vasodilator  nerve  fibers.  This  discovery 
was  made  in  connection  with  the  chorda  tympani  nerve,  a  branch 
of  the  facial,  which  sends  secretory  fibers  to  the  submaxillary  gland. 
When  this  nerve  is  cut  and  the  peripheral  end  is  stimulated  a  secre- 
tion of  saliva  results  and  at  the  same  time,  as  Bernard  showed,  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  gland  dilate;  the  flow  of  blood  is  greatly  in- 
creased in  the  efferent  vein  and  may  even  show  a  pulse. 

In  the  nervous  regulation  of  the  blood-vessels  we  have  to  con- 
sider, therefore,  the  existence  and  physiological  activities  of  two 
antagonistic  sets  of  nerve  fibers:  First,  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers, 
whose  action  causes  a  contraction  of  the  muscular  coats  of  the  ar- 
teries and  therefore  a  diminution  in  the  size  of  the  vessels.  Second, 
the  vasodilator  nerve  fibers,  whose  action  causes  an  increase  in  size 
of  the  blood-vessels,  due  probably  to  a  relaxation  (inhibition)  of  the 
muscular  coats  of  the  arteries.  Before  attempting  to  describe  the 
present  state  of  our  knowledge  upon  these  points  it  will  be  help- 
ful to  refer  to  some  of  the  methods  by  means  of  which  the  existence 
of  vasomotor  fibers  has  been  demonstrated. 

Methods  Used  to  Determine  Vasomotor  Action. — ^The 
simplest  and  most  direct  proof  is  obtained  from  mere  inspection, 
when  this  is  possible.  If  stimulation  of  the  nerve  to  an  organ 
causes  it  to  blanch,  the  presence  of  vasoconstrictor  fibers  is  dem- 
onstrated unless  the  organ  is  muscular  and  the  blanching  may  be 
regarded  as  a  mechanical  result.  On  the  other  hand,  if  stimulation 
of  the  nerve  to  an  organ  causes  it  to  become  congested  or  flushed 
with  blood  the  presence  of  vasodilator  fibers  may  be  accepted.  It 
is  obvious,  however,  that  this  method  is  applicable  in  only  a  few 
instances  and  that  in  no  case  does  it  lend  itself  to  quantitative 
study.  2.  Vasomotor  effects  may  be  determined  by  measur- 
ing the  outflow  of  blood  from  the  veins.  If  stimulation  of  the 
nerve  to  an  organ  causes  a  decrease  in  the  flow  of  blood  from  the 
veins  of  that  organ,  this  fact  implies  the  existence  of  vasoconstrictor 
fibers,  while  an  opposite  result  indicates  vasodilator  fibers.  3. 
By  variations  in  arterial  and  venous  pressures.  When  vaso- 
constrictor fibers  are  stimulated  there  is  a  rise  of  pressure  in  the 
artery  supplying  the  organ  and  a  fall  of  pressure  in  the  veins 
emerging  from  the  organ.  This  result  is  what  we  should  expect  if 
the  constriction  takes  place  in  the  region  of  the  arterioles.  The 
diminution  in  size  of  these  vessels  by  increasing  peripheral  resistance 
augments  the  internal  pressure  on  the  arterial  side  of  the  resistance, 
and  causes  a  fall  of  side  pressure  on  the  venous  side  (see  p.  462). 
If  the  area  involved  is  large  enough  the  increased  resistance  will 
make  a  perceptible  difference  in  pressure,  not  only  in  the  organ 
supplied,  but  also  in  the  aorta;  there  wiU  be  a  rise  of  general  (dias- 
tolic) blood-pressure.     On  the  other  hand,  a  vasodilator  action  in 


THE   VASOMOTOR   NERVES.  533 

any  organ  is  accompanied  by  the  reverse  changes.  Peripheral 
resistance  being  diminished  there  will  be  a  fall  of  pressure  on  the 
arterial  side  and  a  rise  of  pressure  on  the  venous  side.  When, 
therefore,  the  stimulation  of  any  nerve  brings  about  a  rise  of 
arterial  pressure  that  can  not  be  referred  to  a  change  in  the  heart 
beat  the  inference  made  is  that  the  result  is  due  to  a  vasocon- 
striction. When  the  method  is  applied  to  a  definite  organ — the 
brain,  for  instance — it  becomes  conclusive  only  when  simultaneous 
observations  are  made  upon  the  pressure  in  the  artery  and  the  vein 
of  the  organ,  and  proof  is  obtained  that  the  pressures  at  these  points 
vary  in  opposite  directions.  4.  By  observations  upon  the  volume 
of  the  organ.  It  is  obvious  that,  other  conditions  remaining  un- 
changed, a  vasoconstriction  in  an  organ  will  be  accompanied  by 
a  diminution  in  volume,  and  a  vasodilatation  by  an  increase  in 
volume.  This  method  of  studying  the  blood-supply  of  an  organ  is 
designated  as  plethysmography,  and  any  instrument  designed  to 
record  the  changes  in  volume  of  an  organ  is  a  plethy sinograph. *^ 
Plethysmographs  have  been  designed  for  special  organs,  and  in  such 
cases  they  have  sometimes  been  given  special  names.  Thus,  the 
plethysmograph  used  upon  the  kidney  and  spleen  has  been  desig- 
nated as  an  oncometer.  The  precise  form  and  structure  of  a 
plethysmograph  varies,  of  course,  with  the  organ  studied,  but 
the  principle  used  is  the  same  in  all  cases.  The  organ  is  inclosed 
in  a  box  with  rigid  walls  that  have  an  opening  at  some  one 
point  only,  and  this  opening  is  placed  in  connection  with  a  recorder 
of  some  kind  by  tubing  with  rigid  walls.  The  connections  between 
recorder  and  plethysmograph  and  the  space  in  the  interior  of  the 
latter  not  occupied  by  the  organ  may  be  filled  with  air,  or  as  is 
more  usually  the  case  with  water.  The  idea  of  a  plethysmograph 
may  be  illustrated  by  the  skull.  This  structure  forms  a  natural 
plethysmograph  for  the  brain.  If  a  hole  is  bored  through  the  skull 
at  any  point  and  a  connection  is  then  made  with  a  recorder  of  some 
kind,  such  as  a  tambour,  the  volume  changes  of  the  brain  may  be 
recorded  successfully. 

The  plethysmograph  generally  employed  in  laboratories,  particularly  for  in- 
vestigations on  man,  is  some  modification  of  the  form  devised  by  Mosso  (see 
Fig.  220) .  The  hand  and  more  or  less  of  the  arm  is  placed  in  a  glass  cylinder 
which  is  swung  freely  from  a  support.  The  opening  around  the  arm  is  shut 
off  by  a  cuff  of  rubber  dam  that  must  be  chosen  of  such  a  size  as  to 
fit  the  arm  snugly  without  compression  of  the  superficial  veins.  The 
forward  end  of  the  plethysmograph  is  connected  by  tubing  with  a  re- 
corder. Through  appropriate  openings  the  cylinder  and  connecting  tubes 
are  filled  with  warm  water  and  then  all  openings  are  closed  except  the 
one  leading  to  the  recorder.  Any  increase  in  volume  of  the  arm  will  drive 
water  from    the    plethysmograph    to  the  recorder,  and  any   decrease,   on 

*  For  a  description  of  the  development  of  this  method,  see  Frangois-Franck- 
Marey's  "Travaux  du  Laboratoire, "  1876,  p.  1. 


534 


CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 


the  contrary,  will  suck  water  from  the  recorder  into  the  plethysmograph. 
In  the  author's  laboratory  a  modification  that  has  been  found  most  conve- 
nient is  represented  in  Fig.  221.  To  avoid  escape  of  water  at  the  upper  end 
of  the  tube  and  at  the  same  time  to  prevent  compression  of  the  veins  of  the 
arm  a  very  thin  rubber  glove  with  long  gauntlet  is  used.  The  gauntlet 
is  strengthened  by  cuffs  of  dam  tubing,  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  and  all 
are  reflected  over  the  end  of  the  plethysmograph.  The  outer  cufi  (3)  may 
be  omitted.  The  hand  is  inserted  into  the  cylinder  and  is  held  in  place  by 
flexing  the  fingers  through  the  rings.  The  plethysmograph  being  suspended 
freely  from  the  ceiling,  any  movement  of  the  arm  AviU  move  the  instrument  as 
a  whole  without  disturbing  the  position  of  the  arm  in  the  instrument.  By 
means  of  rings  of  hard  rubber  (£),£'),  one  fitting  around  the  rim  of  the  plethys- 
mograph and  the  other  adapted  more  or  less  closely  to  the  size  of  the  forearm, 
the  reflected  portion  of  the  gauntlet  and  cuff  is  held  in  place  and  prevented 
from  giving  way  readily  to  any  rise  of  pressure  in  the  plethysmograph.     The 


Fig.  220. — A  schematic  diagram  of  Mosso's  plethysmograph  for  the  arms:  a,  the  glass 
cylinder  for  the  arm,  with  rubber  sleeve  and  two  tubulatures  for  filling  with  warm  water; 
s,  the  spiral  spring  swinging  the  test  tube,  t.  The  spring  is  so  calibrated  that  the  level  of 
the  liquid  in  the  test  tube  above  the  arm  remains  unchanged  as  the  tube  is  filled  and 
emptied.     The  movements  of  the  tube  are  recorded  on  a  drum  by  the  writing  point,  p. 


interior  of  the  latter  is  connected,  as  sho\ATi  in  Fig.  220,  to  a  test  tube  swung 
by  a  spiral  spring  (Bowditch's  recorder) .  The  spring  is  so  adjusted  by  trial  that 
it  sinks  and  rises  exactly  in  proportion  to  the  inflow  or  outflow  of  water.  By 
this  means  the  level  of  the  water  in  the  tube  is  kept  constant,  and  since  the  posi- 
tion of  this  level  determines  the  pressure  upon  the  outside  of  the  arm  in  the 
plethysmograph  this  pressure  is  also  kept  constant  independently  of  the 
changes  in  volume  of  the  arm.  The  level  should  be  set  in  the  beginning 
so  as  to  make  a  slight  positive  pressure  on  the  arm  sufficient  to  flatten 
the  thin  glove  to  the  skin  and  thus  drive  out  the  air  between  the  two. 
When  the  apparatus  is  conveniently  arranged,  with  slings  to  support  the 
elbow,  observations  may  be  made  upon  the  changes  in  volume  of  the  arm 
during  long  periods.  The  results  so  obtained  are  referred  to  under  several 
headings.  With  the  form  of  recorder  described  the  plethysmograph  gives 
usually  only  the  slow  changes  in  volume  of  the  arm,  due  to  a  greater  or  less 
amount  of  blood.     By  using  a  more  sensitive  recorder  and  making  the  con- 


THE    VASOMOTOR    NERVES. 


535 


nections  entirely  rigid  the  smaller,  quicker  changes  in  volume  caused  by  the 
heart  beat  are  also  recorded.  A  volume  pulse  is  obtained  resembling  in  its 
general  form  the  pressure  pulse  given  by  the  sphygmograph.  When  used 
for  this  purpose  the  instrument  is  described  as  a  hydros phygtnograp It. 

Records  taken  of  the  volume  of  the  hand,  foot,  brain,  or  any 
other  organ  show  that  in  addition  to  the  changes  caused  by  the 
heart  beat  and  by  the  respiratory  movements,  there  are  other  more 
irregular  variations  that  are  continually  occurring  the  cause  of  which 
is  to  be  found  in  the  variations  in  the  amount  of  blood  in  the  organ. 
Day  and  night  these  changes  in  volume  take  place,  and  they  are 
referable  to  the  activity  of  the  vasomotor  system.  Vasoconstriction 
or  vasodilatation  in  the  organ  itself  cause  what  may  be   called 


Fig.  221. — Detailed  drawing  of  the  glass  plethysmograph  with  the  arrangement  of  rub- 
ber glove  to  prevent  leaking  without  compressing  the  veins.  2,  The  glove  with  its  gauntlet 
reflected  over  the  end  of  the  glass  cylinder;  1  and  3,  supporting  pieces  ot  stout  rubber  tub- 
ing; D  and  E,  sections  of  outer  and  inner  rings  of  hard  rubber  to  fasten  the  reflected  rubber 
tubing  and  reduce  the  opening  for  the  arm. 


an  active  change  in  volume.  But  vasoconstriction  or  vasodilata- 
tion in  other  organs  may  cause  a  perceptible  change,  of  a  passive 
kind,  in  the  volume  of  the  organ  under  observation.  For,  since 
the  amount  of  blood  remains  the  same,  a  change  in  any  one  organ 
must  affect  more  or  less  the  volume — that  is,  the  blood  contents — 
of  all  other  organs. 

General  Distribution  and  Course  of  the  Vasoconstrictor 
Nerve  Fibers. — These  fibers  belong  to  the  autonomic  s^'stem,  and 
consist,  therefore,  of  a  preganglionic  fiber  arising  in  the  central 
nervous  system  and  a  postganglionic  fiber  arising  from  the  cell  of 
some  sympathetic  ganglion.  The  general  arrangement  of  the  auto- 
nomic system  (p.  231)  should  be  reviewed  in  this  connection.  It 
has  been  shown  by  experiments  of  the  kind  described  under  the  last 
heading  that  vasoconstrictor  fibers  are  present  in  numerous  nerve 


536 


CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 


trunks,  but  especially  in  those  distributed  to  the  skin  and  to  the 
abdominal  and  pelvic  organs.  If,  for  instance,  the  sciatic  or  the 
splanchnic  nerve  be  cut,  to  avoid  reflex  effects,  and  the  peripheral 
end  be  stimulated,  there  will  be  a  strong  constriction  of  the  vessels, 
which  may  be  detected  by  ocular  inspection,  blanching;  by  the 
increase  in  arterial  pressure;  or  by  the  diminution  in  volume  of  the 
organs.  The  vasoconstrictor  fibers  supplying  these  two  great 
regions  arise  immediately  (postganglionic  fibers)  from  one  or  other 
of  the  ganglia  constituting  the  sympathetic  chain,  or  from  the  large 
prevertebral  ganglia  (celiac  ganglion,  for  instance)  directly  con- 
nected with  it.  Ultimately,  of  course,  they  arise  in  the  central 
nervous  system  (preganglionic  fiber),  and  it  has  been  shown  that, 
for  the  regions  under  consideration,  they  all,  with  a  few  compara- 
tively unimportant  exceptions,  leave  the  spinal  cord  in  the  great 


Fig.  222. — Schema  to  show  the  path  of  the  preganglionic  and  postgangUonic  portions 
of  a  vasoconstrictor  nerve  fiber :  a,  Anterior  root,  showing  the  course  of  the  preganglionic 
fiber  as  a  dotted  line ;  d,  v,  dorsal  and  ventral  branches  of  the  spiral  nerve ;  r,  the  ramus 
communicans;  g,  the  sympathetic  ganglion.  The  postganglionic  fibers  in  each  ramus  come 
from  the  sympathetic  ganglion  with  which  it  is  connected.  The  preganglionic  fibers  enter- 
ing at  any  ganglion  may  pass  up  or  down  to  end  in  the  cells  of  some  other  ganglion. 


outflow  that  takes  place  in  the  thoracic  region  from  the  second 
thoracic  to  the  second  lumbar  nerves  (p.  233).  In  this  outflow 
they  are  mixed  with  other  autonomic  fibers,  such  as  the  sweat 
fibers,  pilomotor  fibers,  accelerator  fibers  to  heart,  pupilodilator 
fibers,  visceromotor  fibers,  etc.  Emerging  in  the  anterior  roots,  they 
pass  to  the  sympathetic  chain  by  way  of  the  corresponding  ramus 
communicans.  Having  reached  the  chain,  they  end  in  one  or  other 
of  the  ganglia,  not  necessarily  in  the  ganglion  with  which  the  ramus 
connects  anatomically.  The  preganglionic  fibers  for  the  blood- 
vessels of  the  submaxillary  gland,  for  instance,  enter  the  first 
thoracic  ganglion  of  the  sympathetic  chain,  but  do  not  actually 
terminate  until  they  reach  the  superior  cervical  ganglion  high  in  the 
neck.     The  postganglionic  fibers  arise  in  the  ganglion  in  which  the 


THE    VASOMOTOR    NERVES.  537 

preganglionic  fibers  terminate.  Those  destined  to  supply  the  skin 
of  the  trunk  and  extremities  pass  from  the  ganglion  to  the  cor- 
responding spinal  nerve  by  way  of  the  ramus  communicans  (gray 
ramus)  and  after  reaching  the  spinal  nerve  they  are  distributed  with 
it  to  its  corresponding  region  (Fig.  222).     In  the  general  region 


tBK/KKKB^^^^^^f^^^^^^KK^^^M 

la^^^^^^^^^^BBBBBJWBBBBHU 

I^^HJII^^HBHll^^H 

Fig.  223. — Vasomotor  effect  of  stimulation  of  the  splanchnic  nerve — peripheral  end — 

in  the  dog  (Dawson) :  1.  The  line  of  zero  pressure;  2,  the  line  of  the  stimulating  pen;  on 
and  off  mark  the  beginning  and  end  of  the  stimulation;  3,  the  time  record  in  seconds;  4, 
the  blood-pressure  record  (stimulation  causes  a  marked  rise  of  blood-pressure  due  to  stimu- 
lation of  vasoconstrictor  fibers) ;  5,  plethysmographic  tracing  of  the  volume  of  the  kidney 
(oncometer);  stimulation  of  the  splanchnic  causes  a  diminution  in  volume  of  the  kidney 
owing  to  the  constriction  of  its  arterioles. 

under  consideration  (lower  cervical  to  upper  lumbar)  each  ramus 
communicans  between  a  spinal  nerve  and  a  sympathetic  ganglion 
consists,  therefore,  of  two  parts,  one  (white  ramus)  of  preganglionic 
fibers  passing  from  the  spinal  nerve  to  the  ganglion,  the  other 
(gray  ramus)  of  postganglionic  fibers  coming  from  the  ganglion  to 


538  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

the  spinal  nerve  for  distribution  to  the  peripheral  tissues.  It  should 
•be  borne  in  mind  that  the  fibers  in  the  white  ramus  do  not 
return  to  the  spinal  nerve  by  the  gray  portion  of  the  same  ramus, 
but  passing  upward  or  downward  in  the  sympathetic  chain 
return  to  some  other  spinal  nerve  as  postganglionic  fibers.  In  this 
way,  therefore,  it  happens  that  the  various  intercostal  nerves  and 
the  nerves  of  the  brachial  and  sciatic  plexus  contain  vasoconstrictor 
fibers  as  postganglionic  or  sympathetic  fibers.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  destined  for  the  great  vascular  region  of 
the  intestines  and  other  abdominal  viscera,  after  reaching  the  sym- 
pathetic chain  by  way  of  the  white  rami  as  preganglionic  fibers,  do 
not  return  to  the  spinal  nerves  by  the  gray  rami.  They  leave  the 
sympathetic  chain,  still  as  preganglionic  fibers,  in  the  branches  of  the 
splanchnic  nerves  and  through  them  pass  to  the  celiac  ganglion, 
where  they  mainly  end,  and  their  path  is  continued  by  the  post- 
ganglionic or  sympathetic  fibers  arising  from  this  ganglion.  More 
specific  information  concerning  the  origin  of  the  vasomotor  fibers 
to  the  different  organs  is  given  in  condensed  form  farther  on.  It  is 
quite  important  in  the  beginning,  however,  to  obtain  a  clear  general 
conception  of  the  paths  taken  by  the  constrictor  fibers  from  their 
origin  in  the  spinal  cord  to  their  termination,  on  the  one  hand, 
in  the  vessels  of  the  skin,  or,  on  the  other,  in  the  vessels  of  the 
abdominal  and  pelvic  viscera. 

The  Tonic  Activity  of  the  Vasoconstrictor  Fibers. — ^A  very 
important  fact  regarding  the  vasoconstrictor  nerve  fibers  is  that 
they  are  constantly  in  action  to  a  greater  or  less  extent.  This 
fact  is  demonstrated  by  the  simple  experiment  of  cutting  them. 
If  the  sympathetic  nerve  in  the  neck  is  cut  in  the  rabbit  the  blood- 
vessels of  the  ear  become  dilated.  If  the  splanchnic  nerves  on 
the  two  sides  are  cut  the  intestinal  region  becomes  congested, 
a,nd  the  effect  in  this  case  is  so  great  that  the  general  arterial  pressure 
falls  to  a  very  low  point.  From  these  and  numerous  similar  ex- 
periments we  may  conclude  that  normally  the  arteries — that  is, 
the  arterioles — are  kept  in  a  condition  of  tone  by  impulses  received 
through  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers.  Cut  these  nerves  and  the  arte- 
ries lose  their  tone  and  dilate,  with  the  result  that,  the  peripheral 
resistance  being  diminished,  the  lateral  pressure  falls  on  the  arterial 
side  and  rises  on  the  venous  side.  The  relatively  enormous  effect 
upon  aortic  pressure  caused  by  paralysis  of  the  tone  of  the  arteries 
in  the  splanchnic  area  shows  that  under  normal  conditions  the 
peripheral  resistance  in  this  great  area  plays  a  predominating  part 
in  the  maintenance  of  normal  arterial  pressure,  and  by  the  same 
reasoning  variations  in  tone  in  the  arteries  of  this  region  must 
play  a  very  large  part  in  the  regulation  of  arterial  pressure. 

The  Vasoconstrictor  Center. — ^As  stated  in  the  last  two  para- 


THE    VASOMOTOR   NERVES. 


539 


graphs,  tbe  vasoconstrictor  fibers  emerge  from  the  cord  over  a 
definite  region,  and  they  exhibit  constant  tonic  activity.  It  has 
been  shown,  moreover,  that  if  the  cord  be  cut  anywhere  in  the 
cervical  region  all  of  the  constrictor  fibers  lose  their  tone;  a  great 
vascular  dilatation  results  in  both  the  splanchnic  and  skin  areas. 
We  may  infer  from  this  fact  that  the  vasoconstrictor  paths  originate 
from  nerve  cells  in  the  brain  and  that  their  tonic  activity  is  to 
be  traced  to  these  cells.  Such  a  group  of  cells  exists  in  the  medulla 
oblongata,  and  forms  the  vaso- 
constrictor center.  The  axons 
given  off  from  these  cells  de- 
scend in  the  cervical  cord  and 
terminate  at  various  levels  in 
the  anterior  horn  of  gray  mat- 
ter in  the  region  from  the  upper 
thoracic  to  the  upper  lumbar 
spinal  nerves.  A  spinal  neuron 
continues  the  path  as  the  pre- 
ganglionic vasoconstrictor  fiber 
which  terminates,  as  already 
described,  in  some  sympathetic 
ganglion,  whence  the  path  is 
further  continued  by  the  post- 
ganglionic fiber.  This  arrange- 
ment of  the  constrictor  paths  is 
indicated  schematically  in  Fig. 
224.  The  exact  location  of  the 
group  of  cells  that  plays  the  im- 
portant role  of  a  vasoconstrictor 
center  has  not  been  determined 
histologicalh^  Its  region  has, 
however,  been  delimited  roughly 
by  physiological  experiments.  If 
the  brain  is  cut  through  at  the 
level  of  the  midbrain  there  is  no 
marked  loss  of  vascular  tone  in 
the  body  at  large.  If,  however, 
similar  sections  are  made  farther 
and  farther    back    a    point    is 

reached  at  which  vascular  parah'sis  begins  to  be  apparent  and  a 
point  farther  down  at  which  this  paralysis  is  as  complete  as  it 
would  be  if  the  cervical  cord  were  cut.  Between  these  two  points 
the  vasoconstrictor  center  must  lie.  The  careful  experiments  of 
this  kind  made  by  Dittmar*  are  now  somewhat  old.  According 
*  "  Berichte  d.  Sachs.  Akademie,  Math.-phys.  Klasse, "  1873,  p.  449. 


Fig.  2£4. — Scherra  to  show  the  path 
of  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  from  the  vaso- 
constrictor center  to  the  blood-vessel  and 
the  mechanism  for  the  reflex  stimulation 
of  these  fibers:  v.  c,  The  vasoconstrictor 
center;  1,  the  medullary  neuron  on  the 
vasoconstrictor  path:  2,  the  spinal  neuron 
(preganglionic  fiber) ;  3,  the  sympathetic 
neuron  (postganglionic  fiber) ;  a,  the  arte- 
riole; 4,  the  sensory  fibers  of  the  posterior 
root  making  connections  by  collaterals 
with  the  vasoconstrictor  center;  5,  an  in- 
tercentral  fiber  (efferent)  acting  upon  the 
vasoconstrictor  center. 


540  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

to  his  description,  the  center  is  bilateral, — that  is,  consists  of  a 
group  of  cells  on  each  side, — and  lies  about  the  middle  of  the  fourth 
ventricle  in  the  tegmental  region,  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  nucleus 
of  the  facial  and  of  the  superior  olivary.  In  the  rabbit  it  has  a 
length  of  3  mms.,  a  breadth  of  1  to  1.5  mms.,  and  lies  about  2 
to  2.5  mms.  lateral  to  the  mid-line.  Assuming  the  existence  of 
this  group  of  cells,  we  must  attribute  to  them  functions  of  the  first 
importance.  Like  other  motor  cells,  they  are  capable  of  being 
stimulated  reflexly  and  by  this  means  the  regulation  of  the  blood- 
flow  is  largely  controlled.  Moreover,  they  are  in  constant  activity^ 
— due  doubtless  also  to  a  constant  reflex  stimulus  from  the  inflow 
of  sensory  impulse.  The  complete  loss  of  this  tonic  influence 
would  result  in  a  complete  vascular  paralysis,  the  small  arteries 
would  be  dilated,  peripheral  resistance  would  be  greatly  diminished, 
and  the  arterial  pressure  in  the  aorta  would  fall  from  a  level  of 
100-150  mms.  Hg  to  about  20  or  30  mms.  Hg, — a  pressure  insuffi- 
cient to  maintain  the  life  of  the  organism.  There  seems  to  be  no 
question  now  that  in  those  conditions  known  as  surgical  shock  the 
loss  of  control  by  the  vasomotor  center,  and  the  consequent  vascular 
paralysis  and  fall  of  blood-pressure,  are  the  chief  conditions  of  a 
serious  character.  We  must  conceive,  also,  that  in  this  vasocon- 
strictor center  the  different  cells  are  connected  by  definite  paths 
with  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  to  the  different  regions  of  the  body;, 
that  some  of  the  cells,  for  instance,  control  the  activity  of  the 
fibers  distributed  to  the  intestinal  area,  and  others  govern  the 
vessels  of  the  skin.  Under  physiological  conditions  the  different 
parts  of  the  center  may,  of  course,  be  acted  upon  separately. 

Vasoconstrictor  Reflexes — Pressor  and  Depressor  Nerve 
Fibers. — It  is  obvious  that  such  a  mechanism  as  that  described 
above  is  susceptible  of  reflex  stimulation  through  sensory  nerves, 
and  according  to  our  general  knowledge  we  should  suppose  that 
a  tonic  center  of  this  kind  may  have  its  tonicity  increased  (excita- 
tion) or  decreased  (inhibition).  Numerous  experiments  in  phys- 
iology warrant  the  view  that  both  kinds  of  effects  take  place 
normally.  Those  afferent  nerve  fibers  which  when  stimulated 
cause  reflexly  an  excitation  of  the  vasoconstrictor  center,  and 
therefore  a  peripheral  vasoconstriction  and  rise  of  arterial  pressure, 
are  frequently  designated  as  pressor  fibers,  or  their  effect  upon  the 
circulation  is  designated  as  a  pressor  effect.  Those  afferent  fibers, 
on  the  contrary,  which  when  stimulated  cause  a  diminution  in 
the  tone  of  the  vasoconstrictor  center  and  therefore  a  periph- 
eral vasodilatation  and  fall  of  arterial  pressure,  are  designated  as 
depressor  nerve  fibers,  or  their  effect  upon  the  circulation  is  a  de- 
pressor effect.  Pressor  effects  may  be  obtained  by  stimulation  of 
almost  any  of  the  large  nerves  containing  afferent  fibers,  but  espe- 


THE    VASOMOTOR    NERVES. 


541 


cially  perhaps  of  the  cutaneous  nerves.  And  there  is  abundance 
of  evidence  to  show  that  similar  results  can  be  obtained  in  man. 
The  pressor  effect  manifests  itself  by  a  rise  in  general  arterial  pres- 
sure, if  a  sufficiently  large  region  is  involved,  and  by  a  diminution 
in  size  of  the  organ  involved.  On  the  other  hand,  depressor  effects 
may  also  be  obtained  from  stimulation  of  many  of  the  large  nerve 
trunks.  If  one  stimulates  the  central  end  of  the  sciatic  nerve, 
for  example,  one  obtains  a  pressor  effect  on  the  circulation  in  most 
cases,  but  under  certain  conditions  a  marked  depressor  effect  fol- 
lows the  stimulation.*  The  simplest  explanation  of  such  a  result 
is  that  the  nerve  trunks  contain  afferent  fibers  of  both  kinds. 
When  we  apply  our  electrodes  to  a  nerve  we  stimulate  every  fiber 
in  it  and  the  actual  result  will  depend  upon  which  group  of  fibers 
exerts  the  stronger  action,  and  this  may  vary  with  the  condition 


i^<^i 


/%VW^ 


^^^*ff*^V#^^ 


Fig.  225. — Plethysmographic  curve  of  forearm.  The  volume  of  the  arm  was  recorded 
by  means  of  a  counter-weighted  tambour  and  the  record  shows  the  pulse  waves.  A  problem 
in  mental  arithmetic — the  product  of  24  by  43 — caused  a  marked  constriction  of  the  arm. 


of  the  nerve,  the  condition  of  the  center,  the  anesthetic  used,  etc. 
Under  normal  conditions  no  such  gross  stimulation  occurs.  The 
pressor  fibers  are  stimulated  under  some  circumstances,  the  de- 
pressor fibers  under  others.  For  instance,  when  the  skin  is  exposed 
to  cold  it  is  blanched  not  by  a  direct,  but  by  a  reflex,  effect.  The 
low  temperature  stimulates  the  sensory  (cold)  fibers  in  the  skin, 
and  the  nerve  impulses  thus  aroused  reflexly  stimulate  the  vaso- 
constrictor center,  or  a  part  of  it,  and  cause  blanching  of  the  skin. 
Exposure  to  high  temperatures,  on  the  contrary,  flushes  the  skin, 
and  in  this  case  we  may  suppose  that  the  sensory  impulses  carried 
by  the  heat  nerves  inhibit  the  tone  of  the  vasoconstrictor  center 
and  cause  dilatation  or  flushing  of  the  skin.  So  far  as  man  is 
concerned,  experiments  made  with  the  plethysmograph  show  very 
*See  Hunt,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  18,381,  1895. 


542 


CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 


clearly  that  the  vasoconstrictor  center  is  easily  affected  in  a  pressor 
or  depressor  manner  by  psychical  states  or  activities.  Mental 
work,  especially  mental  interest,  however  aroused,  is  followed  by 
a  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels  of  the  skin,; — a  pressor  effect  (see 
Fig.  225) ;  and  we  may  find  an  explanation  of  the  value  of  the  reflex 
in  the  supposition  that  the  rise  of  arterial  pressure  thus  produced 


V"v  tm 


,VW^^'l, 


^^WA'VV^A^ 


,v/V^v/^ 


— /-^ 


Fig.  226. — Effect  of  stimulating  the  central  end  of  the  depressor  nerve  pf  the  heart. — 
(Dawson.)  The  time  record  marks  seconds.  On  and  off  mark  the  beginning  and  end  of 
the  stimulation.  The  blood-pressure  rises  slowly  after  the  removal  of  the  stimulus  and 
eventually  reaches  the  normal  level.  This  complete  recovery  is  not  shown  in  the  por- 
tion of  the  record  reproduced. 


forces  more  blood  through  the  brain  (p.  560).  On  the  other  hand,, 
feelings  of  embarrassment  or  shame  may  be  associated  with  a  de- 
pressor effect,  a  dilatation  in  the  vessels  of  the  skin  manifested,  for 
example,  in  the  act  of  blushing.  In  both  cases  we  must  assume 
jntracentral  nerve  paths  between  the  cortex  and  the  center  in  the 
medulla,  the  impulses  along,  one  path  exciting  the  center,  while 
those  along  the  other  inhibit  its  tone,  or,  as  explained  below,  excite 


THE   VASOMOTOR    NERVES.  543 

a  vasodilator  center.  Among  the  many  depressor  effects  that 
have  been  observed  on  stimulation  of  afferent  nerve  fibers 
one  has  aroused  especial  interest, — namely,  that  caused  by 
certain  afferent  fibers  from  the  heart.  These  fibers  in  some  ani- 
mals— the  dog,  for  instance — run  in  the  vagus  nerve,  but  in 
other  animals,  the  rabbit,  they  form  a  separate  nerve,  the  so-called 
depressor  nerve  of  the  heart, — discovered  by  Ludwig  and  Cyon 
(1866).  In  the  rabbit  this  nerve  forms  a  branch  of  the  vagus, 
arising  high  in  the  neck  by  two  roots,  one  from  the  trunk  of  the 
vagus  and  one  from  the  superior  laryngeal  branch.  It  runs  toward 
the  heart  in  the  sheath  with  the  vagus  and  the  cervical  sympa- 
thetic. The  nerve  is  entirely  afferent.  If  it  is  cut  and  the  peripheral 
end  is  stimulated  no  result  follows.  If,  however,  the  central  end 
is  stimulated  a  fall  of  blood-pressure  occurs  and  also  perhaps  a 
slowing  of  the  heart  beat  (see  Fig.  226).  The  latter  effect  is  due 
to  a  reflex  stimulation  of  the  cardio-inhibitory  center  and  may 
be  eliminated  by  previous  section  of  the  vagus.  The  fall  of 
blood-pressure  is  explained  by  supposing  that  the  nerve,  when 
stimulated,  inhibits,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  the  tonic  activ- 
ity of  the  vasoconstrictor  center.*  Anatomical  studies  show 
that  in  the  heart  the  fibers  arise  in  part  at  least  in  the  walls 
of  the  ventricle,  and  physiological  experiments  indicate  that 
the  nerve  plays  an  important  regulatory  role.f  When,  for  in- 
stance, blood-pressure  rises  above  normal  limits  it  may  be  sup- 
posed that  the  endings  of  this  nerve  in  the  heart  are  stimu- 
lated by  the  mechanical  effect,  and  the  blood-pressure  is  thereby 
lowered  by  an  inhibition  of  the  tone  of  the  constrictor  center. 
It  is  possible,  according  to  recent  work,  that  the  depressor  fibers 
end  in  the  walls  of  the  aorta  outside  the  heart. {  In  this 
position  the  effect  of  supranormal  aortic  pressures  may  more 
readily  effect  a  stimulation  of  their  endings  and  cause  a  fall  of 
pressure.  A  similar  nerve  has  been  described  anatomically  in  man, 
while  in  animals  like  the  dog,  in  which  it  is  not  present  as  a  separate 
anatomical  structure,  it  probably  exists  within  the  trunk  of  the 
vagus.  If  this  latter  nerve  is  cut  in  the  dog  and  the  central  end 
is  stimulated  a  depressor  effect  is  usually  obtained. 

Vasoconstrictor  Centers  in  the  Spinal  Cord. — From_  the  description  of  the 
vasoconstrictor  mechanism  given  above  the  probable  inference  may  be  made 
that  throughout  the  thoracic  region  the  cells  of  origin  of  the  preganglionic 
fibers  may,  under  special  conditions,  act  as  subordinate  vasoconstrictor  centers 
capable  of  giving  reflexes  and  of  exhibiting  some  tonic  activity.  Numerous 
experiments  tend  to  support  this  inference      When  the  spinal  cord  is  cut  in 

*  See  Porter  and  Beyer,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  4,  283,  1900 ; 
also  Bayliss,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  14,  303,  1893. 

t  Sewall  and  Steiner,  "Journal  of  Physiology, "  6,  162,  1885. 

i  Koster  and  Tschermak,  "  Archiv  f .  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  93,  24, 
1902. 


544  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

the  lower  thoracic  region  there  is  a  paralysis  of  vascular  tone  in  the  posterior 
extremities.  If,  however,  the  animal  is  kept  alive  the  vessels  gradually  re- 
cover their  tone,  although  not  connected  with  the  medullary  center.  The  re- 
sumption of  tone  in  this  case  may  be  attributed  to  the  nerve  cells  in  the  lower 
thoracic  and  upper  lumbar  region,  since  vascular  paralysis  is  again  produced 
when  this  portion  of  the  cord  is  destroyed.  Finally,  Goltz  has  shown  that 
when  the  entire  cord  is  destroyed,  except  the  cervical  region  (p.  145),  vascular 
tone  may  be  restored  finally  in  the  blood-vessels  affected.  In  this  case  the  re- 
sumption of  tonicity  must  be  referred  either  to  the  properties  of  the  muscular 
coats  of  the  arteries  themselves  or  to  the  activity  of  the  sympathetic  nerve 
cells  that  give  rise  to  the  postganglionic  fibers.  Under  normal  conditions  it 
seems  quite  clear  that  the  great  vasoconstrictor  center  in  the  meduUa  is  the 
important  seat  of  tonic  and  of  reflex  activity.  If  the  connections  of  this  center 
with  the  blood-vessels  are  destroyed  suddenly — for  example,  by  cutting  the 
cervical  cord — blood-pressure  falls  at  once  to  such  a  low  level,  20  to  30  mms. 
Hg,  that  death  usually  results  unless  artificial  means  are  employed  to  sustain 
the  animal. 

Rhythmical    Activity    of    the    Vasoconstrictor    Center. — 

Throughout  life  the  vasoconstrictor  center  is  in  tone  the  intensity 


Fig.  227.— Rhythmical  vasomotor  waves  of  blood-pressure  (Traube-Hering  waves). 
The  upper  tracing  (1)  is  the  blood-pressure  record  as  taken  with  the  mercury  manometer; 
the  lower  tracing  (2)  is  taken  with  a  Htirthle  manometer.  Seven  distinct  respiratory 
waves  of  blood-pressure  may  be  recognized  on  each  large  wave. — (Dawson.) 

of  which  varies  with  the  intensity  and  character  of  the  reflex  im- 
pulses playing  upon  it.  Under  certain  unusual  conditions  the 
center  may  exhibit  rhythmical  variations  in  tonicity  which  make 
themselves  visible  as  rhythmical  rises  and  falls  in  the  general 
arterial  pressure  (Fig.  227),  the  waves  being  much  longer  than 
those  due  to  the  respiratory  movements.  These  waves  of  blood- 
pressure  are  observed  often  in  experiments  upon  animals,  but 
their  ultimate  cause  is  not  understood.  They  are  usually  desig- 
nated as  Traube-Hering  waves,  although  this  term,  strictly  speak- 
ing, belongs  to  waves,  synchronous  with  the  respiratory  move- 
ments, that  were  observed  by  Traube  upon  animals  in  which 
the    diaphragm    was    paralyzed    and    the    thorax    was     opened. 


THE    VASOMOTOR    NERVES.  545 

These  latter  waves  are  also  clue  to  a  rhythmical  action  of  the 
vasomoter  center.  During  sleep  certain  much  longer,  wave-like 
variations  in  the  blood-pressure  also  occur  that  are  again  due 
doubtless  to  a  rhythmical  change  of  tone  in  the  vasoconstrictor 
center. 

General  Course  and  Distribution  of  the  Vasodilator  Fibers. 
— By  definition  a  vasodilator  fiber  is  an  efferent  fiber  which  when 
stimulated  causes  a  dilatation  of  the  arteries  in  the  region  supplied. 
In  searching  for  the  existence  of  such  fibers  in  the  various  nerve 
trunks  physiologists  have  used  all  the  methods  referred  to  above, — 
namely,  the  flushing  of  the  organ  as  seen  by  the  eye,  the  increased 
blood-flow,  the  increase  in  volume,  or  the  fall  in  blood-pressure  on 
the  arterial  side  associated  with  a  rise  on  the  venous  side.  By 
these  methods  vasodilator  fibers  have  been  demonstrated  in  the 
following  regions : 

1.  In  the  facial  nerve.     Tlie  dilator  fibers  are  found  in  the  chorda  tym- 

pani  branch  and  are  distributed  to  the  salivary  glands  (submaxil- 
lary and  sublingual)  and  to  the  anterior  two-thirds  of  the  tongue. 

2.  In  the  glossopharyngeal  nerve.     Supplies  dilator  fibers  to  the  posterior 

third  of  tongue,  tonsils,  pharjmx,  parotid  gland  (nerve  of  Jacobson). 

3.  In  the  sympathetic  chain.     In  the  cervical  portion  of  the  sympathetic 

dilator  fibers  are  carried  which  are  distributed  to  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  mouth  (lips,  gums,  and  palate),  nostrils,  and  the  skin 
of  the  cheeks.  These  fibers  pass  up  the  neck  to  the  superior  cervi- 
cal ganglion  and  thence  by  communicating  branches  reach  the  Gas- 
serian  ganglion  and  are  distributed  to  the  bucco-facial  region  in  the 
branches  of  the  fifth  cranial  nerv^e.*  From  the  thoracic  portion  of 
the  sympathetic  vasodilator  fibers  pass  to  the  abdominal  viscera  by 
way  of  the  splanchnic  nerves  and  to  the  limbs  by  way  of  the 
branches  of  the  brachial  and  lumbar  j^lexuses,  but  the  data  regarding 
the  dilator  fibers  for  these  regions  are  not  as  yet  entirely  satisfactory. 
Goltz  and  others  have  shown  that  dilator  fibers  are  found  in  the 
nerves  of  the  limbs,  but  the  origin  of  these  fibers  from  the  sympa- 
thetic chain  has  not  been  demonstrated. 

4.  In  the  nervi  erigentes.      Eckhard  first  gave  conclusive  proof  that  the 

erection  of  the  penis  is  essentially  a  vasodilator  phenomenon.  The 
fibers  arise  from  the  first,  second,  and  third  sacral  spinal  nerves,  pass 
to  the  hypogastric  plexus  as  the  ner^'i  erigentes,  and  thence  are  dis- 
tributed to  the  erectile  tissues  of  the  penis. 

The  General  Properties  of  the  Vasodilator  Nerve  Fibers. — 
Unlike  the  vasoconstrictors,  the  vasodilators  are  not  in  tonic 
activity;  at  least,  no  experimental  proof  has  been  given  that  they 
are.  In  the  case  of  the  erectile  tissue  of  the  penis  and  the  dilators 
of  the  glands  it  would  seem  that  the  fibers  are  in  activity  only 
during  the  functional  use  of  the  organ,  at  which  time  they  are 
excited  reflexly.  There  has  been  much  discussion  in  physiology  as 
to  the  nature  of  the  action  of  the  dilator  fibers.  The  muscular 
coat  of  the  small  arteries  runs  transversely  to  the  length  of  the 

*  See  "  Recherches  experimentales  sur  le  systeme  nerveux  vasomoteur, " 
Dastre  and  Morat,  1884. 
35 


546  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

vessel,  and  it  is  easy  to  see  that  when  stimulated  to  greater  con- 
traction through  the  constrictor  fibers  it  must  cause  a  narrowing 
of  the  artery.  It  is  not  so  evident  how  the  nerve  impulses  carried 
by  the  dilator  fibers  bring  about  a  widening  of  the  artery.  At 
one  time  peripheral  sympathetic  ganglia  in  the  neighborhood  of 
the  arteries  were  used  to  aid  in  the  explanation,  but,  since  histo- 
logical evidence  of  the  existence  of  such  ganglia  is  lacking,  the 
view  that  seems  to  meet  with  most  favor  at  present  is  as  follows: 
The  dilator  fibers  end  presumably  in  the  muscle  of  the  walls  of 
the  arteries,  and  when  stimulated  their  impulses  inhibit  the  tonic 
contraction  of  this  musculature  and  thus  indirectly  bring  about  a 
relaxation.  Dilatation  caused  by  a  vasodilator  nerve  fiber  always 
presupposes  therefore  a  previous  condition  of  tonic  contraction  in 
the  walls  of  the  artery,  this  tonic  condition  being  produced  either 
by  the  action  of  vasoconstrictor  fibers  or  possibly  by  the  intrinsic 
properties  of  the  muscle  itself.  In  the  nerves  of  the  limbs,  as 
stated  above,  both  vasoconstrictor  and  vasodilator  effects  may  be 
detected  by  stimulation.  It  has  been  shown  that  the  separate 
fibers  may  be  differentiated  by  certain  differences  in  properties. 
Thus,  if  the  peripheral  end  of  the  cut  sciatic  nerve  is  stimulated 
by  rapidly  repeated  induction  shocks  a  vasoconstrictor  effect  is 
obtained  as  shown  plethysmographically  by  a  diminution  in  volume 
of  the  limb.  If,  however,  the  same  nerve  is  stimulated  by  slowly 
repeated  induction  shocks  the  dilator  effect  will  predominate,* 
indicating  a  greater  degree  of  irritability  on  the  part  of  these  latter 
fibers.  After  section  of  the  sciatic  nerve  the  vasodilators  degen- 
erate more  slowly  than  the  vasoconstrictors,  and  they  retain 
their  irritability  when  heated  or  cooled  for  a  longer  time  than 
the  constrictors.! 

Vasodilator  Center  and  Vasodilator  Reflexes. — Since  the 
vasodilator  fibers  form  a  system  similar  to  that  of  the  vasocon- 
strictors, it  might  be  supposed  that,  like  the  latter,  their  activity 
is  controlled  from  a  general  center,  forming  a  vasodilator  center  in 
the  brain  similar  to  the  vasoconstrictor  center.  What  evidence 
we  have,  however,  is  against  this  view.  In  the  dog  with  his  spinal 
cord  severed  in  the  lower  thoracic  region  the  penis  may  show  normal 
erection  when  the  glans  is  stimulated, — a  fact  that  indicates  a 
reflex  center  for  these  dilator  fibers  in  the  lumbar  cord.  For  the 
other  clear  cases  of  vasodilator  fibers  we  have  no  reason  at  present 
to  believe  that  they  are  all  normally  connected  with  a  single  group 
of  nerve  cells  located  in  a  definite  part  of  the  nervous  system.  The 
dilator  fibers  in  the  facial,  glossopharyngeal,  and  cervical  sympa- 
thetic (distributed  through  the  trigeminal)  all  arise  probably  in  the 

*  Bowditch  and  Warren,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  7,  439,  1886. 

t  Howell,  Budgett,  and  Leonard,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  16,  298,  1894. 


THE   VASOMOTOR   NERVES.  547 

medulla,  but  not,  so  far  as  is  known,  from  a  common  nucleus. 
Intimately  connected  with  the  question  of  the  existence  of  a  general 
vasodilator  center  is  the  possibility  of  definite  reflex  stimulation 
of  the  vasodilator  fibers.  As  stated  above,  reflex  dilatation  of  the 
blood-vessels  may  be  produced  by  stimulating  various  sensory  nerve 
trunks.  The  depressor  nerve  fibers  of  the  heart  give  only  this 
effect,  and  the  sensory  fibers  from  certain  other  regions,  notably 
the  middle  ear  and  the  testis,  cause  mainly,  if  not  exclusively,  a  fall 
of  arterial  pressure  due  presumably  to  vascular  dilatation.  The 
sensory  nerves  of  the  trunk  and  limbs,  when  stimulated  by  the  gross 
methods  of  the  laboratory,  give  either  reflex  vasoconstriction  or 
reflex  vasodilatation,  and,  as  was  stated  above,  there  is  reason  to 
beUeve  that  these  trunks  contain  two  kinds  of  sensory  fibers, — the 
pressor  and  the  depressor.  The  action  of  the  former  predominates 
usually,  but  in  deep  anesthesia,  and  particularly  in  those  conditions 
of  exposure  and  exhaustion  that  precede  the  appearance  of  "  shock," 
the  depressor  effect  is  most  marked,  or  indeed  may  be  the  only  one 
obtained.  To  explain  such  depressor  effects  we  have  two  possible 
theories.  They  may  be  due  to  reflex  excitation  of  the  centers 
giving  origin  to  the  vasodilator  fibers,  or  to  reflex  inhibition  of  the 
tonic  activity  of  the  vasoconstrictor  centers.  The  latter  explana- 
tion is  the  one  usually  given,  especially  for  the  typical  and  perhaps 
special  effect  of  the  depressor  nerve  of  the  heart.  This  explanation 
seems  justified  by  the  general  consideration  that  in  the  two  great 
vascular  areas  through  whose  variations  in  capacity  the  blood-flow 
is  chiefly  regulated, — namely,  the  abdominal  viscera  and  the  skin, — 
the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  are  chiefly  in  evidence,  and  are,  moreover, 
in  constant  tonic  activity.  On  the  other  hand,  the  fact  that  vaso- 
dilator fibers  exist  is  presumptive  evidence  that  they  are  stimulated 
reflexly,  since  it  is  by  this  means  only  that  they  can  normally  affect 
the  blood-vessels.  So  that  some  of  the  many  depressor  effects 
occurring  in  the  body  must  be  due  to  reflex  stimulation  of  the  dila- 
tors and  others  to  reflex  inhibition  of  the  constrictors.  It  would  be 
convenient  to  retain  the  name  depressor  for  the  sensory  fibers  caus- 
ing the  latter  effect,  and  to  designate  those  of  the  former  class  by  a 
different  name,  such  as  reflex  vasodilator  fibers.*  Only  experi- 
mental work  can  determine  positively  to  which  effect  any  given 
reflex  dilatation  is  due,  but  provisionally  at  least  it  would  seem 
justifiable  to  assume  that  dilatation  by  reflex  stimulation  of  the 
vasodilator  fibers  occurs  in  those  parts  of  the  body  in  which  vaso- 
dilator fibers  are  known  to  exist.  Thus,  the  erection  of  the  penis 
from  stimulation  of  the  glans  may  be  explained  in  this  way,  also  the 
congestion  of  the  salivary  glands  during  activity,  the  blushing  of  the 
face  from  emotions,  and  possibly  the  dilatation  in  the  skeletal  muscles 
*  See  Hunt,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  18,  381,  1895. 


548  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

during  contraction.  Gaskell  and  others  have  given  reasons  for 
beheving  that  the  vessels  in  the  muscles  are  supplied  with  vaso- 
dilator nerve  fibers,  and  Kleen*  has  shown  that  mechanical  stimula- 
tion of  the  muscles — ^kneading,  massage,  etc. — causes  a  fall  of  arte- 
rial pressure. 

Vasodilatation  Due  to  Antidromic  Impulses. — The  existence  of  definite  effer- 
ent vasodilator  fibers  in  the  nerve  trmiks  to  the  hmbs  has  been  made  doubt- 
ful by  the  work  of  Bayhss.  Tliis  author  has  discovered  certam  facts  whicli  at 
present  tend  to  make  the  question  of  vasodilatation  more  obscure,  but  which, 
when  fully  understood,  mil  doubtless  give  us  a  much  deeper  insight  into  the 
subject.  Briefly  stated,  he  has  shownf  that  stimulation  of  the  posterior  roots 
of  the  nerves  supplying  the  lumbo-sacral  and  the  brachial  plexus  causes  vas- 
cular dilatation  in  the  corresponding  limbs.  He  has  shown  that  the  fibers 
involved  are  sensory  fibers  from  the  limbs  and  that  therefore  when  stimulated 
they  must  conduct  the  impulses  in  a  direction  opposite  to  the  nonnal, — anti- 
dromic. It  is  most  difficult  to  understand  how  such  impulses,  conveyed  to  the 
terminations  of  the  sensory  fibers,  can  afTect  the  muscular  tissue  of  the  blood- 
vessels. It  is  most  difficult  to  understand  also  how  such  anatomically  afferent 
fibers  can  be  stimulated  reflexly  in  the  central  nervous  system.  Bayliss  gives 
reasons  for  believing  that  the  limbs  receive  no  vasodilator  fibers  via  the  sym- 
pathetic system,  and  that  either  the  blood-vessels  in  this  region  are  lacking 
altogether  m  such  fibers  or  else  the  sensory  fibers  function  in  the  way  described. 

General  Schema. — ^The  main  facts  regarding  the  vasomotor 
apparatus  may  be  summarized  briefly  in  tabular  form  as  follows: 

I.  Vasoconstrictor  fibers — distributed  mainly  to 
the  skin  and  the  abdommal  viscera  (splanch- 
nic area) ,  all  connected  with  a  general  center 

T7,™.         ,  ,        1  in  the  medulla  oblongata,  and  in  constant 

Efferent        vasomotor  J  +^„;„  „„+;,,;+„ 

r-,  (  tome  activity, 

nerve  noers.  i     jj    Vasodilator  fibers— distributed    especially_  to 

the  erectile  tissue,  glands,  bucco-facial  region, 
and  muscles;  not  connected  with  a  general 
center  and  not  in  tonic  activity. 

I.  Pressor  fibers.    Cause  vascular  constriction  and 
rise  of  arterial  pressure  from  reflex  stimula- 
tion  of    the   vasoconstrictor    center — e.   g., 
sensory  nerves  of  skin. 
II.   Depressor  fibers.   Cause  vascular  dilatation  and 

A  £c        4.  cu  •   •        )  fall  of  arterial  pressure  from  reflex  inhibition 

Afferent  fibers    giving  /  <•    .i      ,•',-•,       r  ,i  +  ■  + 

vasomotor  reflexes     \  °^   *^^®  *°^"^  activity  of  the  vasoconstrictor 

center, — e.  g..  depressor  nerve  of  heart. 
III.  Depressor  (or  reflex  vasodilator)  fibers.  Cause 
vascular  dilatation  and  fall  of  arterial  pres- 
sure from  stimulation  of  the  vasodilator 
center, — e.g.,  erectile  tissue,  congestion  of 
glands  in  functional  activity. 

It  may  be  supposed  that  under  normal  conditions  the  activity 
of  this  mechanism  is  adjusted  so  as  to  control  the  blood-flow  through 
the  different  organs  in  proportion  to  their  needs.  When  the  blood- 
vessels of  a  given  organ  are  constricted  the  flow  through  that  organ 

*  Kleen,  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologic, "  247,  1887. 

t  Bayliss,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  26,  173,  1900,  and  28,  276,  1902. 


THE   VASOMOTOR   NERVES.  549 

is  diminished,  while  that  through  the  rest  of  the  body  is  increased 
to  a  greater  or  less  extent  corresponding  to  the  size  of  the  area  in- 
volved in  the  constriction.  When  the  blood-vessels  of  a  given 
organ  are  dilated  the  blood-flow  through  that  organ  is  increased  and 
that  through  the  rest  of  the  body  diminished  more  or  less.  The 
adaptability  of  the  vascular  system  is  wonderfully  complete,  and 
is  worked  out  through  the  reflex  activity  of  the  nervous  system 
exerted  partly  upon  the  vasomotor  fibers  and  partly  upon  the  regu- 
latory nerves  of  the  heart. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

THE  VASOMOTOR  SUPPLY  OF  THE  DIFFERENT 
ORGANS. 

There  are  three  important  organs  of  the  body — namely,  the 
heart,  the  hmgs,  and  the  brain — in  which  the  existence  of  a  vaso- 
motor supply  is  still  a  matter  of  uncertainty.  A  very  great  deal 
of  investigation  has  been  attempted  with  reference  to  these  organs, 
but  the  technical  difficulties  in  each  case  are  so  great  that  no  entirely 
satisfactory  conclusion  has  been  reached.  A  brief  review  of  some 
of  the  experimental  work  on  record  will  suffice  to  make  evident  the 
present  condition  of  our  knowledge. 

Vasomotors  of  the  Heart. — The  coronary  vessels  lie  in  or  on 
the  musculature  of  the  heart.  Any  variation  in  the  force  of  con- 
traction or  tonicity  of  the  heart  muscle  itself  will  therefore  affect 
possibly  the  caliber  of  the  arterioles  and  the  rate  of  blood-flow  in  the 
coronary  system.  At  each  contraction  of  the  ventricles  the  coro- 
nary circulation  is  probably  interrupted  by  a  compression  of  the 
smaller  arteries  and  veins,  and  the  size  of  these  vessels  during 
diastole  will  naturally  vary  with  the  extent  of  relaxation  of  the 
cardiac  muscle.  Since  stimulation  of  either  of  the  nerves  supplying 
the  heart,  vagus  and  sympathetic,  affects  the  condition  of  the  mus- 
culature, it  is  evident  at  once  how  difficult  it  is  to  distinguish  a 
simultaneous  effect  upon  the  coronary  arteries,  if  any  such  exists. 
Newell  Martin*  found  that  stimulation  of  the  vagus  causes  dilata- 
tion of  the  small  arteries  on  the  surface  of  the  heart  as  seen  through 
a  hand  lens.  Moreover,  when  the  heart  is  exposed  and  artificial 
respiration  is  stopped  the  arteries  may  be  seen  to  dilate  before 
the  asphyxia  causes  any  general  rise  of  arterial  pressure.  Martin 
interpreted  these  observations  to  mean  that  the  coronary  arteries 
receive  vasodilator  fibers  through  the  vagus.  Porterf  measured 
the  outflow  through  the  coronary  veins  in  an  isolated  cat's  heart 
kept  alive  by  feeding  it  with  blood  through  the  coronary  arteries. 
He  found  that  this  outflow  is  diminished  when  the  vagus  nerve 
is  stimulated,  and  hence  concluded  that  the  vagus  carries  vasocon- 
strictor fibers   to  the  heart.     Maas|  reports   similar  results  also 

*  Martin,  "  Transactions  Medical  and  Chirurgical  Faculty  of  Maryland," 
1891. 

t  Porter,  "Boston  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal,"  January  9,  1896. 
i  Maas,  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  74,  281,  1899. 

550. 


VASOMOTOR   SUPPLY    OF   THE    ORGANS.  551 

obtained  from  cats'  hearts  kept  alive  by  an  artificial  circulation 
through  the  coronary  arteries.  Stimulation  of  the  vagus  slowed 
the  stream,  vasoconstrictor  fibers,  while  stimulation  of  the  sympa- 
thetic path  quickened  the  flow,  vasodilator  fibers.  Neither  Maas 
nor  Porter  gives  conclusive  proof  that  the  heart  musculature 
was  not  affected  by  the  stimulation.  Schaefer,*  on  the  con- 
trary, gets  entirely  opposite  results.  When  an  artificial  circulation 
was  maintained  through  the  coronary  system  and  the  amount 
of  outflow  was  determined  he  found  that  this  quantity  was  not 
definitely  influenced  by  stimulation  of  either  the  sympathetic  or 
the  vagus  branches.  Moreover,  injection  of  adrenalin  into  the 
coronary  circulation  had  no  influence  upon  the  outflow,  and  since 
this  substance  causes  an  extreme  constriction  in  the  vessels  of  organs 
provided  with  vasoconstrictor  fibers  the  author  concludes  that  the 
coronary  arteries  have  no  vasomotor  nerve  fibers.  It  is  evident 
from  a  consideration  of  these  investigations  that  the  existence  of 
vasomotor  fibers  to  the  heart  vessels  is  still  a  matter  open  to  investi- 
gation. 

Vasomotors  of  the  Pulmonary  Arteries. — The  pulmonary 
circulation  is  complete  in  itself  and,  as  was  stated  on  p.  467,  it 
differs  from  the  systemic  circulation  chiefly  in  that  the  peripheral 
resistance  in  the  capillary  area  is  much  smaller.  Consequently 
the  arterial  pressure  in  the  pulmonary  artery  is  small,  while  the 
velocity  of  the  blood-flow  is  greater  than  in  the  systemic  circuit, — 
that  is,  a  larger  portion  of  the  energy  of  the  contraction  of  the 
right  ventricle  is  used  in  moving  the  blood.  From  the  mechanical 
conditions  present  it  is  obvious  that  the  pressure  in  the  pulmonary 
artery  might  be  increased  by  a  vasoconstriction  of  the  smaller 
lung  arteries,  or,  on  the  other  hand,  by  an  increase  in  the  blood- 
flow  to  the  right  ventricle  through  the  venae  cavse,  or,  last,  by 
back  pressure  from  the  left  auricle  when  the  left  ventricle  is  not 
emptying  itself  as  well  as  usual  on  account  of  high  aortic  pressure. 
While  it  is  comparatively  easy,  therefore,  to  measure  the  pressure 
in  the  pulmonary  artery,  it  is  difficult,  in  the  interpretation  of  the 
changes  that  occur,  to  exclude  the  possibility  of  the  effects  being 
due  indirectly  to  the  systemic  circulation.  Bradford  and  Dean,t 
by  comparing  carefully  the  simultaneous  records  of  the  pressures 
in  the  aorta  and  a  branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery,  came  to  the 
conclusion  that  the  latter  may  be  affected  independently  by  stimu- 
lation of  the  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  thoracic  spinal  nerves,  and 
hence  conclude  that  these  nerves  contain  vasoconstrictor  fibers 
to  the  pulmonary  vessels,  the  course  of  the  fibers  being,  in  general, 
that  taken  by  the  accelerator  fibers  to  the  heart, — namely,  to  the 

*  "Archives  des  sciences  biologiques,"  11,  suppl.  volume,  251,  1905. 
t  Bradford  and  Dean,  "  Journal  of  Physiology,' '  16,  34,  1894. 


552  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

first  thoracic  sympathetic  ganghon  by  the  rami  communicantes 
and  thence  to  the  pulmonary  plexus.  They  give  evidence  to  show 
that  these  fibers  are  stimulated  during  asphyxia.  The  authors 
state,  however,  that  the  effects  obtained  upon  the  pressure  in  the 
pulmonary  artery  are  relatively  and  absolutely  small  as  compared 
with  the  vasomotor  effects  in  the  aortic  system.  Similar  results 
have  been  obtained  by  other  observers  (Frangois-Franck).  Using 
another  and  more  direct  method,  Brodie  and  Dixon*  have  come 
to  an  opposite  conclusion.  These  authors  maintained  an  artificial 
circulation  through  the  lungs  and  measured  the  rate  of  outflow 
when  the  nerves  supplying  the  lungs  were  stimulated.  Under  these 
conditions  stimulation  of  the  vagus  or  the  sympathetic  caused  no 
definite  change  in  the  rate  of  flow, — a  result  which  would  indicate 
that  neither  nerve  conveys  vasomotor  fibers  to  the  lung  vessels. 
This  conclusion  was  strengthened  by  the  fact  that  in  similar  per- 
fusions made  upon  other  organs  (intestines)  vasomotor  effects  were 
easily  demonstrated.  Moreover,  adrenalin,  pilocarpin,  and  mus- 
carin  cause  marked  vasoconstriction  when  irrigated  through  the 
intestine,  but  have  no  such  effect  upon  the  vessels  in  the  lungs. 
These  authors  conclude  that  the  lung  vessels  have  no  vasomotor 
nerves  at  all,  and  their  experimental  evidence  might  be  accepted 
as  satisfactory  except  for  the  fact  that  a  similar  method  in  the 
hands  of  another  observer  has  giveii  opposite  results.  Plumierf 
finds  that  the  outflow  through  a  perfused  lung  is  diminished  in 
some  cases  by  stimulation  of  the  sympathetic  branches  to  the  lungs, 
and  also  by  the  use  of  adrenalin.  Under  such  conditions  it  is 
necessary  to  defer  a  decision  until  more  experiments  are  reported. 
Regarding  the  vasomotors  of  the  lungs,  one  can  only  say,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  heart,  that  their  existence  has  not  been  demonstrated. 

The  Circulation  in  the  Brain  and  Its  Regulation. — The 
question  of  the  existence  of  vasomotor  nerves  to  the  brain  brings 
up  necessarily  the  larger  question  of  the  special  characteristics  of 
the  cranial  circulation.  The  brain  is  contained  in  a  rigid  box  so 
that  its  free  expansion  or  contraction  with  variations  in  the  amount 
of  blood  can  not  take  place  as  in  other  organs  and  we  have  to  con- 
sider in  how  far  this  fact  modifies  its  circulation. 

The  Arterial  Supply  of  the  Brain. — The  brain  is  supplied  through 
the  two  internal  carotids  and  the  two  vertebrals,  which  together 
form  the  circle  of  Willis.  It  will  be  remembered  also  that  the 
vertebral  arteries  give  off  the  posterior  and  the  anterior  spinal 
arteries,  which  supply  the  spinal  cord,  and  that  the  last-named 
artery  makes  anastomoses  along  the  cord  with  the  intercostal  arteries 

*  Brodie  and  Dixon,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  30,  476,  1904. 
t  Plumier,  "  Journal  de  physiologie  et  de    pathologie  generale,"  6,  665, 
1904;   see  also  "Archives  Internationales  de  physiologie,"  1,  189,  1904. 


VASOMOTOR   SUPPLY    OF   THE    ORGANS. 


553 


and  other  branches  from  the  descending  aorta.  From  the  ana- 
tomical arrangement  alone  it  is  evident  that  the  circulation  in  the 
brain  is  very  well  protected  from  the  possibility  of  being  inter- 
rupted by  the  accidental  closure  of  one  or  more  of  its  arteries.  In 
some  animals,  the  dog,  one  can  ligate  both  internal  carotids  and 
both  vertebrals  without  -causing  unconsciousness  or  the  death  of  the 
animal.  In  an  animal  under  these  conditions  a  collateral  circula- 
tion must  be  brought  into  play  through  the  anastomoses  of  the 
spinal  arteries.  In  man,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  stated  that  ligation 
of  both  carotids  is  dangerous  or  fatal. 

The  Venous  Supply.— The  venous  system  of  the  brain  is  peculiar, 
especially  in  the  matter  of  the  venous  sinuses.  These  large  spaces 
are  contained  between  folds  of  the  dura  mater  or,  on  the  base  of 
the  skull,  between  the  dura  mater  and  the  bone.  The  channel 
hollowed  out  in  the  bone  is  covered  with  a  roof  of  tough,  inex- 
tensible  dura  mater,  and  indeed  in  some  animals  the  basal  sinuses 


L)um?7tatef.     p-^cj' 

Cerehrim,. 


Fig.  228. — Diagram  to  represent  the  relations  of  the  meningeal  membranes  of  the  cere- 
brum, the  position  of  the  subarachnoidal  space  and  of  the  venous  sinuses. 

may  in  part  be  entirely  incased  in  bone  The  larger  cerebral  veins 
open  into  these  sinuses;  the  openings  have  no  valves,  but,  on  the 
contrary,  are  kept  patent  and  protected  from  closure  by  the  struc- 
ture of  the  dura  mater  around  the  orifice.  The  smaller  veins  are 
very  thin  walled  and  free  from  valves.  The  venous  blood  emerges 
from  the  skull  in  man  mainly  through  the  opening  of  the  lateral 
sinuses  into  the  internal  jugular  vein,  although  there  is  also  a 
communication  in  the  orbit  between  the  cavernous  sinus  and  the 
ophthalmic  veins  through  which  the  cranial  blood  may  pass  into 
the  system  of  facial  veins,  another  communication  with  the  venous 
plexuses'  of  the  cord,  and  a  number  of  small  emissary  veins.  In 
some  of  the  lower  animals — the  dog,  for  instance — the  main  outflow 
is  into  the  external  jugular  through  what  is  known  as  the  superior 
cerebral  vein.  A  point  of  physiological  interest  is  that  the  venous 
sinuses  and  their  points  of  emergence  from  the  skull  are  by  their 
structure  well  protected  from  closure  by  compression. 


554 


CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD    AND   LYMPH. 


The  Meningeal  Spaces. — The  general  arrangement  of  the  menin- 
geal membranes,  and  particularly  of  the  meningeal  spaces,  is  im- 
portant in  connection  with  the  mechanics  of  the  brain  circulation. 
In  the  skull  the  dura  mater  adheres  to  the  bone,  the  pia  mater 
invests  closely  the  surface  of  the  brain,  while  between  lies  the 
arachnoid  (Fig.  228).  The  capillary  space  between  the  arachnoid 
and  the  dura,  the  so-called  subdural  space,  may  be  neglected. 
Between  the  arachnoid  and  the  pia  mater,  however,  lies  the  sub- 
arachnoidal space  more  or 
less  intersected  by  septa  of 
connective  tissue,  but  in  free 
communication  throughout 
the  brain  and  cord.  This 
subarachnoidal  space  is  filled 
with  a  liquid,  the  cerebro- 
spinal liquid,  which  forms  a 
pad  inclosing  the  brain  and 
cord  on  all  sides.  The  liquid 
surrounding  the  cord  is  in 
free  communication  with 
that  in  the  brain,  as  is  indi- 
cated in  the  accompanying 
schematic  figure  (Fig.  229). 
Within  the  brain  itself  there 
are  certain  points  at  the  an- 
gles and  hollows  of  the  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  brain  at  which 
the  subarachnoidal  space 
is  much  enlarged,  forming 
the  so-called  cisternse,  which 
are  in  communication  one 
with  another  by  means  of  the 
less  conspicuous  canals  (see 
Fig.  230).  The  whole  system 
is  also  in  direct  communica- 
tion with  the  ventricles  of 
the  brain  on  the  one  hand, 
through  the  foramen  of 
Magendie,  the  foramina  of  Luschka,  and  perhaps  at  other  places, 
and  on  the  other  hand,  along  the  cranial  and  spinal  nerves  it  is 
continued  outward  in  the  tissue  spaces  of  the  sheaths  of  these  nerves. 
The  Pacchionian  bodies  constitute  also  a  peculiar  feature  of  the  sub- 
arachnoidal space.  These  bodies  occur  in  numbers  that  vary  with 
the  individual  and  with  age,  and  are  found  along  the  sinuses, 
especially  the  superior  longitudinal  sinus.     Each  body  is  a  minute, 


./j'/t«//. 

■Bratn-. 
Ce/v/?ro^Jbi)tal 


)J/nnal  Column,, 
DuralTlater. 
Cerebro  spinal  lianod. 
juaijtal  Cord, 


Fig.  229. — Diagram  to  show  the  connec- 
tion of  the  subarachnoidal  space  in  the  brain 
and  the  cord. 


VASOMOTOR  SUPPLY  OF  THE  ORGANS. 


555 


pear-shaped  protrusion  of  the  arachnoidal  membrane  into  the  inte- 
rior of  a  sinus,  as  represented  schematically  in  Fig.  231.  Through 
these  bodies  the  cerebrospinal 
liquid  is  brought  into  close 
contact  with  the  venous 
blood,  the  two  being  sepa- 
rated only  by  a  thin  layer 
of  dura  and  the  very  thin 
arachnoid.  The  number  of 
the  Pacchionian  bodies  is 
hardly  sufficient  to  lead  us 
to  suppose  that  they  have  a 
special  physiological  impor- 
tance. The  cerebrospinal  liq- 
uid found  in  the  subarach- 
noidal space  and  the  ventri- 
cles of  the  brain  is  a  very 
thin,  watery  liquid  having  a 
specific  gravity  of  only  1.007 
to  1.008.  It  contains  only 
traces  of  proteids  and  other 
organic  substances,  which  may  vary  under  pathological  conditions. 
It  is  much  thinner  and  more  watery  than  the  lymph,  resembling 
rather  the  aqueous  humor  of  the  eye.     The  amount  of  this  fluid 


Fig.  230. — Diagram  to  show  the  location 
of  the  cisternee  and  canals  of  the  subarach- 
noidal space. — (Poirier  and  Charpy.) 


Fig.  231. — Schema  to  show  the  relations  of  the  Pacchionian  bodies  to  the  sinuses: 
d,  d,  Folds  of  the  dura  mater,  inclosing  a  sinus  between  them ;  v.b.,  the  blood  in  the 
sinus;  o,  the  arachnoidal  membrane;  p,  the  pia  mater;  Pa.,  the  Pacchionian  body  as 
a  projection   of  the  arachnoid  into  the  blood  sinus. 


present  normally  is  difficult  to  determine.      Various  figures  have 
been  given,  but  it  is  usually  stated  to  amount  to  60  to  80  c.c.     If 


556  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

these  figures  are  correct  it  evidently  does  not  form  a  thick  envelope 
to  the  nervous  system.  Under  abnormal  conditions  (hydroceph- 
alus, etc.)  the  quantity  may  be  greatly  increased.  It  is  physio- 
logically interesting  to  find  that  this  liquid  may  be  formed  very 
promptly  from  the  blood  and,  when  in  excess,  be  absorbed  quickly 
by  the  blood.  In  fractures  of  the  base  of  the  skull,  for  instance, 
the  liquid  has  been  observed  to  drain  off  steadily  at  the  rate  of  200 
c.c.  or  more  per  day.  On  the  other  hand,  when  one  injects  physio- 
logical saline  into  the  subarachnoidal  space  under  some  pressure  it 
is  absorbed  with  surprising  rapidity.  After  death,  also,  the  liquid 
present  in  the  subarachnoidal  space  is  soon  absorbed. 

Intracranial  Pressure. — By  intracranial  pressure  is  meant  the 
pressure  in  the  space  between  the  skull  and  the  brain, — therefore 
the  pressure  in  the  subarachnoidal  liquid  and  presumably  also  the 
pressure  in  the  ventricles  of  the  brain,  since  the  two  spaces  are  in 
communication.  This  pressure  may  be  measured  by  boring  a  hole 
through  the  skull,  dividing  the  dura,  and  connecting  the  under- 
lying space  with  a  manometer.  Observers  who  have  measured  this 
pressure  state  that  it  is  always  the  same  as  the  venous  pressure 
within  the  sinuses.  This  we  can  understand  when  we  remember 
the  close  relations  between  the  subarachnoidal  liquid  and  the  large 
veins  and  sinuses.  We  may  consider  that  the  large  veins  are  sur- 
rounded by  the  cerebrospinal  liquid,  and  consequently  an  equilib- 
rium of  pressure  must  be  established  between  them ;  any  rise  in  the 
intracranial  pressure  raises  venous  pressure  by  compression  of  the 
veins.  This  statement  holds  true  at  least  so  far  as  the  intracranial 
pressure  is  due  to  the  circulation.  Variations  of  pressure  from 
pathological  causes — tumors,  clots,  abscesses,  etc. — may  exercise 
apparently  a  local  effect.  The  intracranial  pressure  is  caused 
and  controlled  normally  by  the  pressure  within  the  arteries  and 
capillaries.  This  pressure,  by  enlarging  these  vessels,  tends  to 
expand  the  brain  against  the  skull,  and  exercises  a  pressure,  there- 
fore, upon  the  intervening  cerebrospinal  liquid.  This  pressure, 
however,  can  not  exceed  that  in  the  veins,  since,  as  said,  an  ex- 
cess will  be  equalized  by  a  corresponding  compression  of  the  veins. 
The  venous  pressure  in  the  end  determines,  therefore,  the  actual 
amount  of  intracranial  pressure.  Conditions  which  alter  the 
pressure  in  the  cerebral  veins  affect  the  intracranial  pressure 
correspondingly.  Thus,  compression  of  the  veins  of  the  neck  raises 
the  pressure  in  the  cerebral  veins  and  also  intracranial  pressure, 
and  a  higher  general  arterial  pressure  also  results  finally  in  a  higher 
pressure  in  the  cerebral  veins  and  therefore  in  the  subarachnoidal 
space. 

Reduced  to  its  simplest  form,  the  conditions  may  be  represented  by  a 
schema  such  as  is  given  in  Fig.  232.     A  sj'stem  with  an  arterj^,  capillary  area, 


VASOMOT(JR    SUPPLY    OF   THE    ORGANS. 


557 


^ 


A 


^ 


and  a  vein  is  represented  as  inclosed  in  a  rigid  box  and  surrounded  by  an 
incompressible  liquid.  According  to  the  conditions  prevailing  in  the  body, 
the  pressure  in  the  interior  of  .1  and  its  branches  is  much  higher  than  in  X . 
If,  now,  the  pressure  in  A  is  increased  the  greater  pressure  brought  to  bear 
on  the  walls  will  tend  to  expand  them;  a  greater  pressure  will  thereby  be 
communicated  to  the  outside  liquid,  which,  in  turn,  will  compress  the  veins 
correspondingly.  The  expansion  on  the  arterial  side  is  made  possible  hy  a 
corresponding  diminution  on  the 
venous  side  where  the  internal 
pressure  is  least. 

The  recorded  measure- 
ments of  the  intracranial 
pressure  show  that  it  may 
vary  from  50  to  60  mms.  of 
mercury,  obtained  during  the 
great  rise  of  pressure  following 
strychnin  poisoning,  to  zero  or 
less,  as  obtained  by  Hill  *  from 
a  man  while  in  the  erect  pos- 
ture. In  this  position  the 
negative  influence  of  gravity 
is  at  its  maximum. 

The  Effect  of  Variations 
in  Arterial  Pressure  upon 
the  Blood-fiow  through  the 
Brain. — Quite  a  number  of 
observers  t  have  proved  ex- 
perimentally that  a  rise  of 
general  arterial  pressure  is  fol- 
lowed, not  only  by  an  increase 
in  the  intracranial  tension,  but 
also  by  an  increased  blood-flow 
through  the  brain.  There  has 
been  much    discussion    as    to 

whether  a  rise  of  arterial  pressure  in  the  basilar  arteries  can  cause 
any  actual  increase  in  the  amount  of  blood  in  the  brain  or  whether 
it  expresses  itself  simply  or  mainly  as  an  increased  amount  of 
flow.  In  the  other  organs  of  the  body,  except  perhaps  the  bones, 
a  general  rise  of  pressure,  not  accompanied  by  a  constriction  of 
the  organ's  own  arteries,  causes  a  dilatation  or  congestion  of  the 
organ  together  with  an  increased  blood-flow.  Physiologically 
the  congestion — that  is,  the  increased  capacity  of  the  vessels — is 
of  no  value;    the  important  thing  is  the  increase  in  the  quantity 

*  Bayliss  and  Hill,  ".Journal  of  Physiology,"  18,  356,  189.5. 

t  See  Gartner  and  Wagner,  "Wiener  med.  Wochenschrift,"  1887;  de 
Boeck  and  Verhorgen,  ".Journal  de  Medecine,  etc.,"  Brussels;  Roy  and  Sher- 
rington, ".Journal  of  Physiologv,"  11,  85,  1890;  Reiner  and' Schnitzler, 
"Archiv  f.  exp.  Pathol,  u.  Pharmakol.,"  38,  249,  1897. 


Fig.  232. — Schema  to  represent  the 
transmission  of  arterial  pressure  through 
the  brain  substance  to  the  veins:  A,  The 
artery,  Y ,  the  vein,  represented  as  entering 
into  and  emerging  from  a  box  with  rigid 
walls  and  filled  with  incompressible  liquid; 
c,  c,  the  intervening  area  of  small  arte- 
ries, etc.  An  expansion  of  the  walls  of 
the  arterial  system  by  the  pul.se  wave  or  by 
a  rise  of  arterial  pressure  increases  the  pres- 
sure on  the  surrounding  liquid  and  this  is 
transmitted  through  the  liquid  to  the  walls 
of  the  veins  and  compresses  them,  since  at 
this  point  of  the  circuit  the  intravascular 
pressure  is  low. 


558  CIRCULATION   OF   BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

of  blood  flowing  through.  In  the  brain,  owing  to  the  peculiarities 
of  its  position,  it  has  been  suggested  that  perhaps  no  actual  increase 
in  size  is  possible.  It  is  evident,  however,  that  the  existence  of  the 
liquid  in  the  subarachnoidal  space  makes  possible  some  actual  expan- 
sion of  the  organ.  For  as  the  pressure  upon  this  liquid  increases  it 
may  be  driven  into  the  dural  sac  of  the  cord  (Fig.  229)  and  along  the 
sheaths  of  the  cranial  and  spinal  nerves.  To  what  extent  this  is 
actually  possible  in  man  we  do  not  know,  nor  do  we  know  how  much 
cerebrospinal  liquid  is  contained  in  the  skull  and  brain  of  man.  In 
the  dog  Hill*  finds  experimentally  that  the  brain  can  expand  only 
by  an  amount  equal  to  2  or  3  c.c.  without  causing  a  rise  of  intra- 
cranial tension ;  so  that  probably  these  figures  represent  the  amount 
of  expansion  possible  in  this  animal  by  simple  squeezing  out  of  the 
cerebrospinal  liquid.  If  the  rise  of  arterial  pressure  is  such  as  to 
expand  the  brain  beyond  this  point,  then  it  may  not  only  force 
out  cerebrospinal  liquid,  if  any  remains,  but,  as  explained  in  the 
last  paragraph,  it  will  compress  the  veins  and  raise  intracranial 


Fig.  233. — Simultaneous  record  of  pulse  in  the  circle  of  Willis  (c)  and  in  the  torcu- 
lar  Herophili  (t).  The  tracing  from  the  circle  of  Willis  was  obtained  by  means  of  a 
Htirthle  manometer  connected  with  the  head  end  of  the  internal  carotid.  It  will  be  noted 
that  the  pulses  are  simultaneous,  indicating  that  the  venous  pulse  is  due  to  the  transmis- 
sion of  the  arterial  pulse  through  the  brain  substance. 

pressure.  To  the  extent  that  the  veins  are  compressed  as  the  ar- 
teries expand  no  actual  increase  in  the  size  or  blood-capacity  of  the 
brain  takes  place.  That  an  expansion  of  the  brain  arteries  com- 
presses the  veins  is  indicated  very  clearly  by  the  normal  occurrence 
of  a  venous  pulse  in  this  organ.  The  blood  flows  out  of  the  veins  of 
the  brain  in  pulses  synchronous  with  the  arterial  pulses,  and  this 
venous  pulse  may  be  recorded  easily  as  shown  in  Fig.  233.  In  this 
case  the  sudden  expansion  of  the  arteries  compresses  the  cerebral 
veins,  giving  a  synchronous  rise  of  pressure  in  the  interior  of  the 
sinuses.  Some  authors  (Geigel,  Grashey),  on  purely  theoretical 
grounds,  have  held  that  this  compression  of  the  veins  may  result  in 
a  diminished  blood-flow  through  the  organ, — -a  sort  of  self-strangu- 
lation of  its  own  circulation.  Actual  experiment  shows  that 
this  is  not  the  case.  Any  ordinary  rise  of  general  arterial  pressure 
is  accompanied  by  a  greater  blood-flow  through  the  brain,  and 

*  Hill,  "The  Physiology  and  Pathology  of  the  Cerebral  Circulation." 
London,  1896. 


VASOMOTOR    SUPPLY   OF   THE    ORGANS.  559 

the  author*  has  shown  that  sudden  variations  of  arterial  pressure 
far  beyond  possible  normal  limits  cause  no  blocking  of  the  venous 
outflow.  Whether  the  brain  increases  in  volume  as  a  result  of 
a  rise  of  arterial  pressure  is,  on  the  physiological  side,  unimportant; 
the  main  point  is  that  the  amount  of  blood  flowing  through  it  is 
increased  under  such  circumstances  as  would  cause  a  like  result 
in  other  organs.  That  the  compression  of  the  veins  does  not 
produce  any  sensible  obstruction  to  the  blood-flow  may  be  under- 
stood easily.  In  the  first  place,  this  compression  does  not  take 
place  at  the  narrow  exit  from  the  skull, — since  at  that  point  the 
sinuses  are  protected  from  the  action  of  intracranial  pressure. 
The  compression  takes  place  doubtless  upon  the  cerebral  veins 
emptying  into  the  sinuses,  and  at  this  point  the  venous  bed, 
taken  as  a  whole,  is  so  large  that  the  expansion  due  to  an 
ordinary  rise  of  arterial  pressure  is  distributed  and  has  but  little 
effect  on  the  volume  of  the  flow.  Secondly,  very  great  increases  in 
arterial  pressure,  up  to  the  point  of  rupture  of  the  walls,  have  less 
and  less  effect  in  actually  expanding  the  arteries ;  a  point  is  reached 
eventually  at  which  these  tubes  become  practically  rigid,  so  that 
farther  expansion  is  impossible.  This,  of  course,  is  true  for  every 
organ. 

The  Regulation  of  the  Brain  Circulation. — It  is  still  a  matter 
of  uncertainty  whether  the  arteries  of  the  brain  possess  vasomotor 
nerves.  Most  of  the  authors  who  have  studied  the  matter  experi- 
mentally have  concluded  that  there  are  none.f  These  authors  were 
unable  to  show  that  stimulation  of  any  of  the  nerve  paths  that 
might  innervate  the  brain  vessels  causes  local  effects  upon  the  brain 
circulation.  Whenever  such  stimulations  caused  a  change  in  pres- 
sure or  amount  of  flow  in  the  brain  the  result  was  referable  to  an  alter- 
ation of  general  arterial  pressure  produced  by  a  vasomotor  change 
elsewhere  in  the  body.  When  as  a  result  of  such  stimulation  the 
pressure  rises  in  the  circle  of  Willis,  one  may  infer  that  if  this  is  due 
to  a  local  constriction  in  the  cerebral  arterioles  there  should  be  a 
fall  of  pressure  in  the  venous  sinuses  and  a  diminished  flow  of  blood ; 
if,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  due  to  a  constriction  elsewhere  in  the  body 
that  has  increased  general  arterial  pressure,  but  has  not  constricted 
the  brain  circuit,  then  there  should  be  a  rise  in  venous  pressure  and 
intracranial  pressure,  together  with  a  greater  flow  of  blood  through 
the  brain.  Most  observers  obtain  this  latter  result.  Some  inves- 
tigators,— Hiirthle,    Frangois-Franck,    Cavazanni,|    on    the    other 

*  Howell,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology,' '  1,  57,  1898. 

t  See  Roy  and  Slierrington,  Bayliss  and  Hill,  Hill,  Gaertner  and  Wagner, 
loc.  cit.,  and  Hill  and  MacLeod,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  26,  394,  1901. 

J  Hiirthle,  "  Archiv  f .  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  44,  574,  1889 ;  Fran^ois- 
Franck,  "Archives  de  physiol.  normale  et  pathologique,"  1890;  Cava- 
zanni,  "Archives  italiennes  de  biologie, "  19,  214,  1893. 


560  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD    AND    LYMPH. 

hand,  have  obtained  results,  especially  from  stimulation  of  the 
cervical  sympathetic,  which  indicated  local  vasoconstriction  or  vaso- 
dilatation in  the  brain.  It  would  seem,  however,  that  these  latter 
observers  have  not  excluded  the  possibility  that  the  variations 
in  pressure  obtained  by  them  were  due  to  reflex  effects  upon  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  body,  especially  as  Frangois-Franck  has 
shown  that  the  sympathetic  in  the  neck  contains  afferent  fibers 
which  give  such  reflexes.*  As  an  argument  in  favor  of  the  presence 
of  vasomotor  fibers  it  may  also  be  mentioned  that  a  number  of 
observers — Gulland,  Huber,  Hunterf  have  demonstrated  that  the 
vessels  of  the  brain  are  provided  with  perivascular  nerve  plexuses. 
It  must  be  admitted,  however,  that  this  histological  fact  is  not  con- 
clusive unless  it  is  supplemented  by  experimental  evidence.  Judged 
from  this  latter  standpoint,  we  have  no  satisfactory  proof  at  present 
of  the  existence  of  cerebral  vasomotors,  and,  accepting  this  negative 
evidence,  we  may  ask  by  what  means  is  the  circulation  in  the 
brain  regulated?  The  simplest  view  is  that  proposed  by  Roy  and 
Sherrington.  According  to  these  authors,  the  blood-flow  through 
the  brain  is  controlled  indirectly  by  vasomotor  effects  upon  the 
rest  of  the  body.  When,  for  example,  a  vasoconstriction  occurs 
in  the  skin  or  the  splanchnic  area  the  result  is  a  rise  of  pressure 
in  the  aorta  and  therefore  a  rise  of  pressure  in  the  circle  of  Willis, 
which  then  forces  more  blood  through  the  brain.  Adopting  this 
view,  we  can  understand  the  teleology  of  certain  well-known  vaso- 
motor reflexes.  Stimulation  of  the  skin  generally  causes  a  reflex 
constriction  and  rise  of  pressure,  and  one  can  well  understand  that 
this  result  is  valuable  if  it  means  a  greater  flow  of  blood  through 
the  brain,  since  under  the  conditions  of  nature  such  stimulation, 
especially  when  painful,  demands  alertness  and  increased  activity 
on  the  part  of  the  animal.  Attention  has  also  been  called  to  the 
fact  that  in  plethysmographic  observations  on  man  the  most 
certain  and  extensive  constrictions  of  the  skin  vessels  are  those 
caused  by  increased  mental  activity.  Mosso  has  shown  by  observa- 
tions upon  men  with  trephine  holes  in  the  skull  that  the  constriction 
of  the  limbs  is  always  accompanied  by  a  dilatation  of  the  brain. 
This  fact,  therefore,  fits  exactly  the  view  that  is  being  considered. 
The  peripheral  constriction,  by  raising  general  blood-pressure,  dilates 
the  brain  more  or  less,  and,  what  is  more  important,  drives  more 
blood  through  it.  It  is  difficult  to  understand  why  psychical 
activity  is  always  associated  in  this  way  with  a  peripheral  con- 
striction unless  the  object  of  the  reflex  is  to  increase  the  blood- 
supply  to  the  brain.  Even  if  vasomotor  fibers  are  subsequently 
shown  to  be  present  in  the  brain,  the  importance  of  this  reflex  in 

*  Frangois-Franck,  "Journal  de  phys.  et  de  path,  gen.,"  1,  724,  1889. 
t  See  Hunter,  "  Journal  of  Physiologie, "  26,  465,  1902. 


VASOMOTOR   SUPPLY    OF   THE    ORGANS.  561 

providing  a  greater  flow  to  the  central  organ  at  the  time  that  it  is 
in  activity  must  still  be  admitted.  A  general  irrigation,  so  to  speak, 
is  provided  for  by  this  means.  Local  vasomotors  may  be  used  to 
divert  this  flow  mainly  through  one  or  another  cerebral  area. 

Vasomotor  Nerves  of  the  Head  Region. — The  vasomotor 
supply  of  the  various  parts  of  the  head,  including  the  mouth  cavity, 
has  been  investigated  by  many  observers.  It  would  appear  from 
the  results  of  most  of  these  investigations  that  the  vasoconstrictor 
supply  for  the  skin,  including  the  ears,  the  eye,  the  mouth,  and 
buccal  glands,  is  derived  mainly,  if  not  entirely,  from  the  sympa- 
thetic nervous  system.  These  fibers  arise  from  the  spinal  cord  in  the 
upper  thoracic  nerves,  first  to  the  fifth  or  sixth,  emerge  by  the  rami 
conamunicantes  to  the  sympathetic  chain,  in  which  they  pass  upward 
and  end,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  superior  cervical  ganglion.  From 
this  ganglion  they  are  distributed,  by  various  routes,  as  postgan- 
glionic fibers.  In  one  interesting  instance  at  least  the  constrictor 
fibers  for  the  head  take  a  somewhat  different  course.  It  was 
shown  by  Schiff,  long  ago,  that  in  the  rabbit  the  ear  receives  vaso- 
motor fibers  from  the  auricularis  magnus  nerve,  a  branch  of  the 
third  cervical  nerve.  Later  investigations  indicate  (Meltzer)  that 
the  ear,  in  fact,  receives  most  of  its  vasoconstrictor  fibers  by  this 
route.  Fletcher,  however,  has  shown  that  these  fibers  do  not  emerge 
from  the  brain  in  the  roots  of  the  third  cervical,  but  rather  in  the 
general  outflow  from  the  thoracic  region.  After  reaching  the  sym- 
pathetic chain  these  particular  fibers  pass  to  the  third  cervical  by 
the  gray  rami  from  the  first  thoracic  ganglion,  which  conununicate 
wdth  a  number  of  the  cervical  nerves.  On  the  other  hand,  the  vaso- 
dilator fibers  for  the  head  are  supplied  in  part  by  way  of  the  cer\T.cal 
sympathetic,  following  the  same  general  path  as  the  constrictors, 
and  in  part  by  way  of  the  cranial  nerves  (seventh,  ninth)  and 
the  sympathetic  ganglia  with  which  they  connect.  According  to 
Langley,  the  outflow  of  the  seventh  nerve  passes  to  the  spheno- 
palatine ganglion,  whence  as  postganglionic  fibers  they  accompany 
the  branches  of  the  superior  maxillary  nerve  and  cause  vasodila- 
tation in  the  membrane  of  the  nose,  soft  palate,  tonsils,  uvula,  roof 
of  mouth,  upper  lips,  gums,  and  pharynx.  The  fibers  that  emerge 
in  the  ninth  pass  in  part  directly  to  the  tongue  and  in  part  terminate 
first  in  the  otic  ganglion,  whence  they  are  distributed  with,  the 
branches  of  the  inferior  maxillary  to  the  lower  lips,  cheeks,  gmns, 
parotid  and  orbital  glands.  Dastre  and  Morat  describe  the  vaso- 
dilators in  the  cervical  sympathetic  as  reaching  the  fifth  cranial 
nerve  by  communicating  branches  from  the  superior  cervical 
ganglion  and  state  that  they  cause  dilatation  of  the  bucco-facial 
region, — that  is,  the  lips,  the  gums,  cheeks,  palate,  nasal  mucous 
membrane,  and  the  corresponding  skin  areas. 
36 


562  CIRCULATION    OF   BLOOD   AND   LYMPH. 

The  Trunk  and  the  Lunbs. — The  vasoconstrictor  fibers  for 
these  regions  are  distributed,  so  far  as  is  known,  chiefly  to  the  skin. 
They  are  all  derived  immediately  from  the  sympathetic  chain  and 
ultimately  from  the  outflow  in  the  anterior  roots  of  the  thoracic 
and  lumbar  spinal  nerves.  Those  for  the  upper  limbs  arise  from 
the  midthoracic  region  chiefly  (fourth  to  ninth  thoracic  nerves), 
those  for  the  lower  limbs  arise  in  the  nerves  of  the  lower  thoracic 
and  upper  lumbar  region  (eleventh,  twelfth,  thirteenth  thoracic 
[dog]  and  first  and  second  lumbar).  The  vasodilator  fibers  in  the 
nerves  of  the  limbs  have  been  demonstrated  frequently,  as  already 
explained.  Whether  or  not  such  fibers  are  found  in  the  sympathetic 
system  following  the  same  general  course  as  the  constrictors  has 
not  been  shown  conclusively.  The  most  definite  work  at  present 
(Bayliss)  indicates  that  the  vasomotor  effect  is  directly  caused  in 
some  unknown  way  by  sensory  fibers  arising  in  the  posterior  roots 
of  the  nerves  forming  the  brachial  and  the  sciatic  plexus.  The 
unsatisfactory  explanations  offered  for  this  result  have  been  re- 
ferred to  (p.  548). 

The  Abdominal  Organs. — ^The  stomach  and  intestines  receive 
their  most  important  supply  of  vasoconstrictor  fibers  by  way  of  the 
splanchnic  nerves  and  celiac  ganglion.  These  fibers  emerge  from 
the  cord  in  the  lower  thoracic  spinal  nerves,  from  the  fifth  down, 
and  the  upper  lumbar  nerves,  and  they  supply  the  whole  mesenteric 
circulation  as  far  as  the  descending  colon.  According  to  some 
observers  (Frangois-Franck  and  Hallion),  the  mesenteric  vessels 
receive  a  supply  of  vasodilator  fibers  by  the  same  general  route,  and 
it  is  also  stated  that  similar  fibers  reach  this  region  through  the  vagus 
nerve.  Concerning  this  latter  statement  at  least  further  con- 
firmation is  necessary.  The  pancreas  has  been  shown  to  receive 
vasoconstrictor  fibers  by  way  of  the  splanchnics,  and  the  kidney, 
according  to  Bradford,  receives  vasodilator  as  well  as  vasocon- 
strictor fibers  from  the  same  nerve.  Most  of  the  vasomotor  fibers  to 
the  kidney  of  the  dog  emerge  from  the  cord  in  the  roots  of  the 
eleventh,  twelfth,  and  thirteenth  thoracic  nerves,  and  those  for  the 
liver  (Frangois-Franck  and  Hallion)  come  from  about  the  same 
region.  The  vasomotor  supplies  of  the  spleen  and  the  bladder  have 
not  as  yet  been  investigated  successfully. 

The  Genital  Organs. — Both  vasoconstrictor  and  vasodilator 
fibers  have  been  discovered  for  the  external  genital  organs  (penis, 
scrotum,  clitoris,  vulva).  The  vasoconstrictors  arise  in  the  dog 
from  the  thirteenth  thoracic  to  the  fourth  lumbar  nerves,  pass  over 
to  the  sympathetic  chain,  and  thence  reach  the  organs  either  by 
way  of  the  hypogastric  nerve  and  pelvic  plexus  or  by  way  of  the 
sacral  sympathetic  ganglia  and  their  branches  to  the  pudic  nerves. 
The  vasodilator  fibers  arise  from  the  sacral  spinal  nerve,  being  the 


VASOMOTOR   SUPPLY    OF   THE    ORGANS.  563 

best  known  of  the  sacral  autonomic  system.  They  enter  the  ner- 
vus  erigens  and  thence  reach  the  organs  by  way  of  the  pelvic 
plexus.  The  especial  importance  of  these  fibers  in  the  process  of 
erection  is  described  in  the  section  on  the  physiology  of  the  repro- 
ductive organs.  The  internal  genital  organs — uterus,  vagina, 
vas  deferens,  seminal  vesicles,  etc. — receive  no  vasomotor  fibers 
from  the  sacral  autonomic  system, — that  is,  from  the  nervi  erigentes 
— but  do  receive  a  supply  of  constrictor  fibers  from  the  sympathetic 
system.  These  latter  fibers  emerge  from  the  cord  in  the  roots  of 
the  upper  lumbar  nerves  and  reach  the  organs  by  way  of  the  in- 
ferior mesenteric  ganglion  and  hypogastric  nerve.* 

Vasomotor  Supply  of  the  Skeletal  Muscles. — Gaskellf  es- 
pecially has  given  evidence  of  the  existence  of  vasomotor  fibers  in 
the  muscles.  He  concludes,  as  the  result  of  his  work,  that  the  blood- 
vessels of  the  muscles  receive  both  vasoconstrictor  and  vasodilator 
fibers,  but  that  the  latter  greatly  predominate, — at  least,  their 
physiological  effect  is  much  more  evident  in  experimental  work. 
As  proof  of  the  presence  of  dilator  fibers  he  gives  such  results  as 
these:  The  mylohyoid  muscle  of  the  frog  is  thin  enough  to  be 
observed  directly  under  the  microscope.  When  curarized  and 
stimulated  through  its  motor  nerve  the  small  vessels  may  be  seen 
to  dilate  and  there  is  an  augmented  flow  of  blood.  In  a  dog  section 
of  the  motor  nerve  to  a  muscle  is  followed  by  a  greatly  increased 
flow  of  blood,  which,  however,  is  only  temporary  and  is  referable  to 
a  mechanical  stimulation  of  the  dilator  fibers.  Direct  stimulation 
of  the  severed  nerve  causes  an  increased  flow  of  blood  through  the 
muscles,  but  if  the  muscles  are  first  completely  curarized  stimulation 
causes,  on  the  contrary,  a  decreased  flow.  This  last  result  is  ex- 
plained on  the  supposition  that  curare  paralyzes  the  endings  of  the 
dilator  fibers  and  thus  allows  the  effects  of  the  constrictors  to  mani- 
fest themselves.  Since,  however,  Bayliss  has  shown  or  claimed  (p. 
548)  that  the  dilator  effect  in  the  limbs  is  due  to  the  antidromic 
action  of  sensory  fibers,  it  is  evident  that  this  important  question 
needs  reinvestigation.  Various  physiologists  have  shown  that 
muscular  activity  is  accompanied  by  an  increase  in  the  blood-flow 
through  the  muscle,  as  we  should  expect,  but  it  remains  uncertain 
whether  this  result  is  brought  about  solely  by  an  increased  activity 
of  the  heart  or  by  the  combined  effect  of  vasodilatation  and  in- 
crease in  heart-work.  Kaufmann  J  takes  this  latter  view  in  con- 
sequence of  some  interesting  results  obtained  upon  horses.  He 
measured  the  blood-flow  through  the  masseter  muscle  and  the 

*  For  the  bibliography  of  the  vasomotor  supply  to  the  various  organs  see 
Langley,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologic, "  vol  ii,  part  ii,  p.  820,  1903. 

t  Gaskell,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  1,  262,  1878-79. 

j  Kaufmann,  "  Archives  de  physiologic  normale  et  pathologique, "  1892, 
pp.  279  and  495. 


564  CIRCULATION    OF    BLOOD   AND    LYMPH. 

elevator  of  the  lip  in  a  horse  in  which  the  muscles  were  exercised 
normally  by  the  act  of  eating.  The  blood-flow  was  increased  as 
much  as  five  times  over  that  observed  during  rest,  and  that  this 
increase  was  due  in  part  at  least  to  a  local  dilatation  seems  to  be 
proved  by  the  fact  that  the  blood-pressure  in  the  artery  supplying 
the  muscle  fell,  while  that  in  the  vein  rose.  While,  therefore,  our 
experimental  knowledge  of  the  vasomotors  of  the  muscles  needs 
further  investigation,  we  may  provisionally  accept  the  view  ad- 
vocated by  Gaskell, — namely,  that  the  vasomotor  supply  to  the 
muscles  consists  essentially  of  dilator  fibers  and  that  these  fibers 
are  brought  into  action  reflexly  whenever  the  muscles  contract, 
thus  providing  an  increased  blood-fiow  in  proportion  to  the  func- 
tional activity. 

The  Vasomotor  Nerves  to  the  Veins. — It  is  assumed  in  physi- 
ology that  the  vasoconstrictors  and  vasodilators  end  in  the  muscula- 
ture of  the  small  arteries.  The  veins  also,  however,  have  a  muscular 
coat,  and  it  is  possible  that  if  this  musculature  were  innervated 
from  the  central  nervous  system  we  should  have  another  efficient 
factor  in  controlling  the  blood-fiow.  Mall  has  given  very  clear 
proof  that  the  portal  vein  receives  vasoconstrictor  fibers  from  the 
splanchnic  nerve,*  but  this  supply  may  be  exceptional,  as  the  portal 
system  itself  is  unique.  The  portal  vein,  indeed,  plays  the  role 
physiologically  of  an  artery  in  regard  to  the  liver.  Roy  and 
Sherrington  t  give  some  evidence  for  the  existence  of  venomotor 
nerves  to  the  large  veins  of  the  neck,  and  Thompson,  as  also  Ban- 
croft,J  reports  experiments  in  which  it  was  found  that  stimulation 
of  the  sciatic  nerve  caused  a  visible  constriction  of  the  superficial 
veins  of  the  hind  limbs.  The  whole  subject,  however,  of  venomotor 
nerves  has  been  but  little  investigated,  and  at  present  little  or  no 
use  is  made  of  this  possible  system  in  explaining  the  facts  of  the 
circulation. 

THE  CIRCULATION  OF  THE  LYHPH. 

The  direction  of  flow  of  the  lymph  is  from  the  tissues  toward  the  large 
lymphatic  trunks,  the  thoracic  and  the  right  lymphatic  duct.  The  flow  is 
maintained  in  this  direction  mainly  by  a  difference  in  pressure  at  the  two  ends. 
At  the  opening  of  the  large  trunks  into  the  veins  the  pressure  is  very  low; 
in  the  vein,  in  fact,  it  may  be  zero  or  even  negative.  The  opening  between  the 
lymph  vessel  and  the  vein  is  protected  by  a  valve  which  opens  toward  the 
vein,  and  the  lymph,  therefore,  will  flow  into  the  vein  as  long  as  the  pres- 
sure in  the  latter  is  lower  than  that  in  the  lymphatic  duct.  At  the  other  ex- 
tremity of  tlie  system,  in  the  tissue  spaces  to  which  the  lymphatic  capillaries 
are  distributed,  the  pressure,  on  the  contrary,  is  high.  Its  exact  amount  is 
not  known,  but,  since  the  pressure  in  the  blood  capillaries  is  equal  to  40-60 
mms.  Hg.,  the  pressure  in  the  liquid  of  the  surrounding  tissues  must  also  be 
considerable.     The  tissues  are,  in  fact,  in  a  condition  of  turgidity  owing  to 

*Mall,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologic,"  1892,  p.  409. 

t  Roy  and  Sherrington,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  11,  85,  1890. 

j  Bancroft,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  1,  477,  1898. 


VASOMOTOR   SUPPLY   OF   THE    ORGANS.  565 

the  pressure  of  the  lymph  in  the  tissue-spaces.  This  difference  in  pressure 
at  the  two  ends  of  the  lymphatic  system  is  the  main  constant  factor  in  mov- 
ing the  lymph.  It  is  obvious  that  in  the  long  run  it  is  dependent  upon  the 
pressure  within  the  blood-vessels  and  therefore  upon  the  force  of  the  heart 
beat.  The  contractions  of  the  heart  supply  the  energy,  not  only  for  the  move- 
ment of  the  blood,  but  also  for  the  much  slower  movement  of  the  lymph.  The 
circulation  of  the  lymph  is  aided,  however,  by  many  accessory  factors.  In 
some  animals  there  are  genuine  lymph  hearts  upon  the  course  of  the  vessels, — 
that  is,  pulsatile  expansions  of  the  lymph  vessels  whose  force  of  beat,  con- 
trolled by  valves,  is  directly  applied  to  moving  the  lymph.  No  such  structures 
are  found  in  the  mammalia,  but  according  to  some  observers  the  large  re- 
ceptacle at  the  beginning  of  the  thoracic  duct,  receptaculum  chyli  may 
undergo  contractions,  and  is,  besides,  under  the  influence  of  motor  and 
inhibitory  nerves.  Such  movements,  if  they  occur,  must  be  equivalent  to  the 
action  of  a  lymph  heart  in  their  influence  upon  the  flow  of  lymph.  The 
flow  of  lymph  or  chyle  in  the  intestinal  area  is  also,  without  doubt,  greatly 
assisted  by  the  peristaltic  and  especially  by  the  pendular  contractions  of  the 
musculature  of  the  intestines.  The  volume  of  the  lymph  in  this  region  is 
especially  large  and  the  lymph  capillaries  and  veins  are  provided  with  valves. 
Rhythmical  contractions  of  the  musculature  of  the  intestine  must  squeeze 
the  lymph  toward  the  thoracic  duct,  acting  like  a  local  pump  to  accelerate 
the  flow  of  lymph.  A  similar  influence  is  exerted  by  the  contractions  of  the 
skeletal  muscles.  The  compression  exerted  by  the  shortened  fibers  squeezes 
the  lymph  vessels  and,  on  account  of  the  valves  present,  forces  the  lymph 
onward  toward  the  larger  ducts.  The  flow  of  lymph  from  the  resting  muscles 
— the  arms  and  legs,  for  instance — is  normally  small  in  quantity,  but  during 
muscular  exercise  and  massage  it  is  obviously  increased.  This  increase  may 
be  observed  in  experimental  work  by  placing  a  cannula  in  the  thoracic  duct. 
Active  or  passive  movements  of  the  limbs  under  these  conditions  will  cause  a 
noticeable  increase  in  the  outflow  from  the  duct.  Still  another  factor  which 
exercises  an  influence  upon  the  flow  of  lymph  is  found  in  the  respiratory  move- 
ments of  the  thorax.  At  each  inspiration  the  pressure  within  the  thorax  is 
diminished  (increase  of  negative  pressure),  and  this  factor  influences  the  lymph 
flow  in  several  ways :  By  increasing  the  flow  of  blood  through  the  large  veins 
at  the  edge  of  the  thorax,  jugulars  and  subclavians,  it  doubtless  aspirates 
lymph  from  the  thoracic  and  right  lymphatic  ducts  into  these  veins.  More- 
over, by  lowering  the  pressure  upon  the  intrathoracic  portion  of  the  thoracic 
duct  it  also  aspirates  the  lymph  from  the  abdominal  portion  of  this  vessel. 

When  we  place  a  cannula  in  the  thoracic  duct  and  measure  the  outflow 
directly  it  is  found  to  be  exceedingly  slow  and  variable.  Older  measure- 
ments (Weiss)  indicate  that  it  has  a  velocity  in  the  duct  in  the  neck  of  about 
4  mms.  per  second,  but  this  velocity  changes  naturally  with  the  conditions 
influencing  the  production  of  lymph  in  the  tissues.  Heidenhain  estimates  that 
for  a  dog  weighing  10  kgms.  the  total  outflow  from  the  thoracic  duct  in  24 
hours  is  equal  to  640  c.c.  Munk  and  Rosenstein,  from  observations  upon  a 
case  with  a  lymph  fistula,  estimated  that  in  man  the  flow  may  be  equal  to 
50  to  100  or  120  c.c.  per  hour. 


SECTION  VI. 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

Historical. — The  term  respiration  as  usually  employed  in 
physiology  refers  to  the  process  of  gaseous  exchange  between  an 
organism  and  its  environment.  This  exchange  consists  essentially 
in  the  absorption  of  oxygen  by  the  living  matter  and  the  elimination 
of  carbon  dioxid.  It  is  one  of  the  generalizations  of  physiology  that 
all  living  matter,  with  the  exception  perhaps  of  the  anaerobic 
organisms,  requires  oxygen  for  its  vital  processes, — that  is,  its 
characteristic  metabolism.  On  the  other  hand,  one  of  the  universal 
end-products  of  this  metabolism  is  carbon  dioxid.  Hence,  respira- 
tion in  some  form  is  one  great  characteristic  of  living  things.  In 
the  simplest  animals  and  plants,  the  unicellular  organisms,  the 
exchange  between  the  air  (or  water)  and  the  organism  takes  place 
directly,  but  in  the  more  complex  animals  some  form  of  respiratory 
apparatus  is  developed  whose  function  consists  either  in  bringing 
the  air  or  oxygen-laden  water  to  the  constituent  cells,  as  in  the  air 
tubes  of  the  insects,  or  in  bringing  the  circulating  blood  into  contact 
with  the  air  or  water,  as  in  the  case  of  animals  provided  with  lungs 
or  gills.  In  man  and  the  air-breathing  vertebrates  the  latter  device 
is  employed  and  one  may  distinguish  in  such  animals  between 
internal  and  external  respiration.  By  the  latter  term  is  meant  the 
gaseous  exchange,  absorption  of  oxygen  and  elimination  of  carbon 
dioxid,  that  takes  place  in  the  lungs  between  the  blood  in  the  pul- 
monary capillaries  and  the  air  in  the  alveoli.  By  internal  respira- 
tion is  meant  the  similar  exchange  that  takes  place  in  the  systemic 
capillaries  between  the  blood  and  the  tissue  elements.  All  of  this 
exchange  is,  so  to  speak,  secondary,  since  the  essential  process 
consists  in  the  history  of  the  oxygen  after  it  is  absorbed  into  the 
tissues, — that  is,  the  part  taken  by  the  oxygen  in  the  metabolism  of 
living  matter.  This  process,  however,  is  a  part  of  the  subject  of 
nutrition.  The  food  absorbed  from  the  digestive  organs  and  the 
oxygen  taken  from  the  blood  have  a  common  history,  or  at  least 
their  reactions  are  indissolubly  connected  after  they  coxne  within 
the  field  of  influence  of  the  living  molecules.  This  side  of  the  func- 
tion of  the  oxygen  may  be  considered,  therefore,  more  appropriately 
in  the  section  on  nutrition.  In  the  present  section  attention  will  be 
directed  to  the  beautiful  means  that  have  been  adapted  to  the  pur- 

566 


HISTORICAL.  567 

pose  of  supphdng  the  tissues  with  oxygen  and  of  removing  the 
carbon  dioxicl. 

The  true  understanding  of  the  object  of  the  act  of  respiration  we 
owe  to  Lavoisier,  the  discoverer  of  oxygen.  In  his  paper  pubUslied 
in  1777,  entitled  "Experiments  on  the  Respiration  of  Animals  and 
on  the  Changes  which  the  Air  Undergoes  in  Passing  through  the 
Lungs,"  he  laid  the  foundations  of  our  present  knowledge,  and 
in  subsequent  work  he  developed  a  conception  of  the  nature  of 
physiological  oxidations  which  has  dominated  the  physiological 
theories  of  nutrition  up  to  the  present  time.  The  discovery  of  the 
physiological  meaning  of  respiration  and  the  function  of  the  lungs 
constitutes  the  most  interesting  part  of  the  history  of  physiology. 
All  the  great  physiologists  of  past  ages  contributed  their  part  to 
the  story,  and  as  we  look  back  we  can  count  distinctly  the  different 
steps  made  toward  the  truth  as  we  understand  it  to-day.  The 
history  of  this  subject  is  not  only  most  instructive  in  demonstrating 
the  triumphant  although  slow  progress  of  scientific  investigation, 
but  it  illustrates  well  also  the  intimate  interrelations  of  physiology 
with  the  sister  sciences  of  chemistry  and  physics  and  the  great  value 
of  the  experimental  method.  The  theory  of  respiration  held  in  each 
century  was  formulated  to  explain,  as  far  as  possible,  the  facts  that 
were  known,  and  as  we  look  back  from  our  vantage  point  it  is  most 
impressive  to  realize  how  well-knowm  phenomena,  imperfectly 
understood,  were  apparently  explained  by  theories  which  we  now 
know  to  be  incorrect.  Without  doubt,  many  of  the  explanations 
accepted  to-day  wdll  in  later  times  be  found  to  rest  upon  a  similar 
incomplete  knowledge.  Each  generation  must  do  the  best  it  can 
with  the  knowledge  of  its  times. 

The  history  of  respiration,  the  successive  steps  in  its  progress  may 
be  summarized  in  a  few  words.  Aristotle  thought  that  the  main 
function  of  respiration  is  to  regulate  the  heat  of  the  body,  which  was 
supposed  to  be  produced  in  the  heart;  hence  the  increased  respira- 
tions after  muscular  exercise  when  the  body-heat  is  increased.  At 
the  same  time  he  believed,  with  the  philosophers  of  his  times,  that 
the  body  receives  sometliing  from  the  air  that  is  necessary  to  life,  a 
subtle  something  that  he  designated  as  the  "  pneuma."  Praxagoras 
taught  that  blood  is  contained  only  in  the  veins,  and  that  the  ar- 
teries are  filled  with  a  gaseous  substance,  the  "pneuma"  derived 
from  the  air,  an  unfortunate  error  that  prevailed  in  mechcine  for 
several  centuries.  The  two  celebrated  anatomists  and  physiologists 
of  the  Alexandrian  school,  Herophilus  and  Erasistratus,  distin- 
guished two  kinds  of  pneuma,  the  vital  spirits,  which  are  made  or 
extracted  from  the  air  in  the  lungs  and  whose  production  consti- 
tutes the  chief  function  of  respiration,  and  the  animal  spirits,  elabo- 
rated in  the  brain  from  the  vital  spirits  and   responsible  for   the 


568  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

functions  of  motion  and  sensation.  Galen  (131  A.  D.)  demonstrated 
that  the  arteries  as  well  as  the  veins  contain  blood,  but  still  believed 
that  the  chief  function  of  the  respiratory  movements  is  to  furnish 
pneuma  or  vital  spirits  to  the  heart.  This  great  physiologist  noticed 
also  that  the  air  is  necessary  for  combustion  as  it  is  for  life,  and 
stated  his  belief  that  the  explanation  of  one  of  these  acts  would 
be  also  an  explanation  of  the  other.  This  thought  seems  to  have 
been  accepted  by  all  the  physiologists  of  subsequent  times,  but  it 
required  over  sixteen  hundred  years  of  investigation  before  a  satis- 
factory solution  was  reached.  Galen  recognized,  moreover,  that 
not  only  does  the  blood  take  something  of  essential  importance  from 
the  air, — namely,  vital  spirits, — but  it  also  gives  off  something  to  the 
air  that  is  injurious  to  the  body,  a  something  which  he  compared  to 
the  smoke  of  combustion  and  designated  as  the  "fuliginous  vapor. " 
If  we  substitute  oxygen  for  vital  spirits  and  carbon  dioxid  for 
fuliginous  vapor  we  realize  that  the  essential  problem  of  respiration 
was  already  clearly  formulated,  but  could  not  make  further  advance 
until  chemical  knowledge  was  more  fully  developed.  Such  is  the 
case  with  some  of  our  physiological  problems  to-day,  Galen  also 
explained  satisfactorily  the  respiratory  movements,  the  action  of  the 
muscles  of  inspiration  and  expiration,  thus  destroying  the  older 
erroneous  theories  that  the  expansion  and  contraction  of  the  lungs 
are  due  to  processes  of  heating  and  cooling. 

Galen's  physiology  held  undisputed  sway  until  the  seventeenth 
century.  At  that  time  there  arose  a  school  of  physiologists,  the 
iatromechanists,  who  proposed  to  explain  all  vital  phenomena  upon 
known  mechanical  principles, — the  laws  of  physics  and  chemistry. 
For  the  mystical  view  of  vital  spirits  they  proposed  to  substitute  a 
more  rational  and  concrete  theory.  The  blood  in  the  lungs  becomes 
red  simply  because  it  is  minutely  subdivided  and  shaken,  just  as  a 
tube  of  blood  becomes  red  when  violently  agitated.  Thus  an  effort 
to  be  more  scientific,  to  use  the  exact  knowledge  of  physics,  led  to 
the  adoption  of  views  which  we  now  know  were  far  more  erroneous 
than  the  ancient  and  intrinsically  correct  conception  that  the  blood 
receives  something  from  the  air  in  the  lungs. 

In  the  seventeenth  century,  however,  began  those  discoveries 
in  chemistry  and  physiology  which  eventually  led  to  our  present 
knowledge.  Van  Helmont  (1577-1644)  discovered  that  in  the 
burning  of  charcoal,  the  fermentation  of  wine,  and  the  action  of 
vinegar  on  chalk  a  special  gas  is  produced  which  he  called  gas 
sylvestre  and  which  we  call  carbon  dioxid.  Robert  Boyle  (1627- 
1691)  published  a  most  interesting  series  of  experiments  made  with 
the  aid  of  the  recently  discovered  air-pump  which  demonstrated  the 
correctness  of  the  view  held  by  Galen  that  the  air  contains  some- 
thing necessary  for  life  and  for  combustion.     He  showed,  moreover, 


HISTORICAL.  569 

that  air  .-that  had  been  repeatedly  inspired  was  no  longer  capable 
of  maintaining  life.  Robert  Hooke  (1635-1703)  introduced  a 
method  of  artificial  respiration  by  means  of  a  bellows,  and  demon- 
strated by  sending  a  continuous  stream  of  air  through  the  lungs 
that  the  respiratory  movements  of  these  organs  are  in  themselves, 
as  a  mechanical  process,  in  no  wise  an  essential  feature  of  respiration. 
John  Mayow  in  1688-1674  discovered  that  air  is  not  a  simple  ele- 
ment, but  contains  a  definite  substance  necessary  to  life  and  to 
combustion.  He  designated  this  substance  as  the  nitro-aerian 
vapoT  or  nitrous  particles,  because  he  believed  that  the  same 
substance  is  present  in  condensed  form,  as  it  were,  in  common  niter, 
having  found  that  combustion  is  possible  even  in  a  vacuum  in  the 
presence  of  niter. 

In  the  eighteenth  century,  as  is  shown  in  the  work  of  the  great 
physiologist,  Haller,  the  theories  of  respiration  were  in  many 
respects  in  a  most  unsatisfactory  state.  The  new  facts  that  had 
been  discovered  made  the  old  views  untenable,  but  were  not  in 
themselves  sufficient  to  explain  clearly  what  actually  takes  place. 
Such  periods  of  uncertainty  and  dissatisfaction  are  frequent  enough 
in  the  history  of  science.  In  certain  parts  of  physiology  to-day 
we  can  recognize  a  similar  state  of  affairs  and  from  the  history 
of  respiration  we  may  assume  that  periods  of  this  character  are 
necessary  transitions  to  a  fuller  and  more  satisfactory  knowledge. 
In  1757  Joseph  Black  rediscovered  carbon  dioxid,  calling  it  fixed 
air,  and  showed  that  it  is  present  in  expired  air.  A  little  later 
Priestly  discovered  and  isolated  oxygen  and  nitrogen;  but,  under 
the  influence  of  an  erroneous  view  of  combustion  that  had  been 
advanced  by  Stahl,  was  unable  to  give  his  discoveries  a  clear  and 
satisfactory  application.  The  final  step  in  this  progress  was  made 
by  the  wonderful  work  of  Lavoisier  between  the  years  1771  and 
1780.  He  made  correct  analyses  of  air  and  of  carbon  dioxid,  he 
explained  combustion  as  an  oxidation  with  the  formation  of  COj 
and  HjO,  he  showed  that  in  respiration  the  same  process  occurs 
and  that  the  blood  takes  oxygen  from  the  air  and  gives  back  to  it 
in  expiration  the  carbon  dioxid  and  water  formed  by  combustion 
within  the  body.  He  gave  us  the  essential  facts  in  the  modern 
theories  of  respiration  and  physiological  oxidations. 

After  Lavoisier  the  chief  positive  advances  that  have  been  made 
have  been  in  reference  to  the  condition  of  the  gases  in  the  blood. 
By  means  of  the  gas-pump  Magnus  (1837)  obtained  these  gases 
quantitatively  and  thus  procured  data  which,  as  Liebig  showed, 
demonstrate  that  the  oxygen  is  held  in  the  blood,  not  in  simple 
solution,  but  in  some  form  of  chemical  combination,  probably 
with  the  red  corpuscles.  Finally  it  was  shown  by  Stokes  and 
Hoppe-Seyler  that  the  oxygen  is  held  in  definite  chemical  com- 


570  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

bination  with  the  hemoglobin.  The  nature  of  the  combination  of 
the  carbon  dioxid  in  the  blood  is  not  yet  entirely  understood,  while 
the  actual  nature  of  physiological  oxidations — that  is,  the  part 
taken  by  the  oxygen  in  the  chemical  reactions  of  living  matter — 
is  one  of  the  great  problems  of  nutrition  which  may  need  many  years 
for  solution. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV. 


THE  ORGANS  OF  EXTERNAL  RESPIRATION  AND  THE 
RESPIRATORY  MOVEMENTS. 

Anatomical  Considerations. — Some  of  the  anatomical  ar- 
rangements in  the  lungs  which  have  an  immediate  physiological 
interest  may  be  recalled  briefly.  The  structure  of  the  trachea  and 
bronchi  is  admirably  adapted  to  their  functions  as  air  tubes,  in  that 
the  walls  possess  flexibility  combined  with  rigidity.  The  lining  of 
ciliated  epithelium  throughout  the  air  passages  is  of  importance, 
primarily  it  may  be  assumed,  in  removing  mucus  and  foreign 
material  from  these  passages.  The  smaller  bronchi  possess  a  dis- 
tinct muscular  layer,  and,  as  we  shall  see,  this  musculature  is  under 
the  control  of  a  special  set  of  nerve  fibers  through  whose  reflex 
activity  the  capacity  and  resistance  of  the  bronchial  system  may  be 
modified.  The  smallest  bronchioles  are  expanded  into  a  system  of 
membranous  air  cells,  and  in  the  walls  of  these  thin  sacs  the  capil- 
laries of  the  pulmonary  artery  are  distributed.  The  great  efficiency 
of  this  apparatus  is  evident  when  one  recalls  that  every  one  of  the 
infinite  'number  of  red  corpuscles  is  exposed  separately  to  the  air  in 
the  air  cells,  so  that  although  the  time  of  transit  is  brief  the  entire 
amount  of  hemoglobin  is  nearly  completely  saturated  with  oxygen. 
Each  lung  is  enveloped  in  its  own  pleural  sac.  The  space  between 
the  parietal  and  the  visceral  layer  of  each  sac  is  the  so-called 
pleural  cavity,  but  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  under  all  normal 
conditions  this  cavity  is  only  potential, — that  is,  the  parietal  and 
visceral  layers  are  everywhere  in  contact  with  each  other.  Under 
pathological  or  accidental  conditions  air  or  exudations  may  enter 
this  space  and  form  an  actual  cavity.  Along  the  mid-line  of  the 
body  and  around  the  roots  of  the  lungs  we  have  the  mediastinal 
spaces  lying  between  the  pleural  sacs  of  the  two  sides,  but  entirely 
filled  with  the  various  thoracic  viscera,  such  as  the  heart,  aorta  and 
its  branches,  pulmonary  artery  and  veins,  venae  cava,  azygos  vein, 
trachea,    esophagus,    thoracic    duct,   various   nerves,    and   lymph 


EXTERNAL   RESPIRATION    AND    RESPIRATORY   MOVEMENTS.     571 


glands.  .  All    these  organs,    therefore,   lie   outside   the   lungs.     A 
schematic  view  of  these  relations  is  represented  in  Fig.  234. 

The  Thorax  as  a  Closed  Cavity. — The  thorax  is  a  cavity  entirely 
shut  off  from  the  outside  and  from  the  abdominal  cavity.  In  this 
cavity  lie  the  lungs  and  the  various  viscera  enumerated  above. 
The  lungs  may  be  considered  as  two  large,  membranous  sacs,  as 
represented  in  Fig.  234,  the  interior  of  which  communicates  freely 
with  the  outside  air  through  the  trachea,  glottis,  etc.,  while  the 
outside  of  the  sacs  is  protected  from  atmospheric  pressure  by  the 
walls  of  the  chest.  The  atmospheric  pressure  on  the  interior 
surfaces  of  the  lungs  expands  these  structures  under  normal  con- 
ditions until  they  fill  the  en- 
tire thoracic  cavity  not  occu- 
pied by  other  organs.  How- 
ever the  size  of  the  chest 
cavity  varies,  that  of  the 
lungs  must  change  accord- 
ingly; so  that  at  all  times  the 
lungs  fully  fill  up  every  part  of 
the  cavity  not  otherwise  occu- 
pied. If  the  wall  of  the  thorax 
is  opened  at  any  point  so  as  to 
make  communication  with  the 
outside  air,  or,  if  the  wall  of 
the  lung  is  pierced  so  that  the 
air  can  communicate  with  the 
pleural  cavity,  then  at  once 
the  lungs  shrink  in  size,  since 
the  atmospheric  pressure  is 
then  equalized  on  the  outside 
and  the  inside  of  the  sacs. 
We  may  consider,  therefore, 
that    the    thoracic     cavity    is 

much  larger  than  the  lungs,  and  that  the  latter  are  blown  out  to 
fill  this  cavity  b}^  the  atmospheric  pressure  on  the  inside. 

The  Normal  Position  of  the  Thorax — Inspiration  and  Expira- 
tion.— During  life  the  size  of  the  thorax  is  continually  changing  with 
the  respiratory  movements.  But  the  size  and  position  taken  at  the 
end  of  a  normal  expiration  may  be  regarded  as  the  normal  position 
of  the  thorax ;  that  is,  its  position  when  all  of  the  muscles  of  respira- 
tion are  at  rest,  and  substantially,  therefore,  the  position  of  the 
thorax  in  the  cadaver.  Starting  from  this  position,  any  enlarge- 
ment of  the  thorax  constitutes  an  active  inspiration,  the  result  of 
which  will  be  to  draw  more  air  into  the  lungs  ;  while  starting  from 
the    normal   position    any  diminution   in   the  size   of  the  thorax 


Fig.  234. — Schema  to  indicate  the  re- 
lations of  the  parietal  and  visceral  layers  of 
the  pleural  sacs,  and  the  position  of  the  me- 
diastinal space:  P,  the  potential  pleural 
cavity  in  each  sac;  M,  the  mediastinal 
space;  R.L.  and  L.L.,  the  cavity  of  the 
right  and  the  left  lung,  respectively;  T,  the 
trachea.  The  outlines  of  the  pleura  on  each 
side  are  represented  Ln  dotted  hnes. 


572  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

constitutes  an  active  expiration,  which  will  drive  some  air  out  of  the 
lungs.  It  is  evident,  however,  that  after  an  active  inspiration  the 
thorax  may  return  passively  to  its  normal  position,  giving  what  is 
known  as  a  passive  expiration, — that  is,  an  expiration  not  caused 
by  muscular  effort.  So  after  an  active  expiration  the  thorax  may 
return  passively  to  its  normal  position,  giving  a  passive  inspiration. 
Our  normal  respiratory  movements  consist  of  an  active  inspiration 
followed  by  a  passive  expiration, 

Mechanism  of  the  Inspiration. — ^The  chest  cavity  may  be 
enlarged  and  an  inspiration,  therefore,  be  produced  by  two  methods, 
— ^namely,  by  a  contraction  of  the  diaphragm  and  by  an  elevation 
of  the  ribs. 

Contraction  of  the  Diaphragm. — From  the  anatomy  of  the 
diaphragm  it  is  evident  that  its  fixed  attachment  is  found  in  its 
muscular  connections  with  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  the  ribs,  and  the 
ensiform  cartilage.  From  these  attachments  the  muscular  sheet 
extends  anteriorly  along  the  walls  of  the  thorax  and  then  bends  over 
to  form  the  arch  which  ends  in  the  central  tendon.  This  latter 
structure  is  not  entirely  free,  since  it  is  attached  to  the  pericar- 
dium of  the  heart  ;  but,  relatively,  it  is  the  movable  portion  of 
the  diaphragm.  Speaking  generally,  a  contraction  of  the  dia- 
phragmatic muscle  draws  the  central  tendon  downward  toward  the 
abdominal  cavity  and  therefore  enlarges  the  chest  in  the  vertical 
diameter,  while  an  increase  in  the  thoracic  cavity  around  the 
periphery  of  the  diaphragm  is  caused  also  by  the  flattening  of  the 
muscular  arch.  Two  results  follow  this  movement:  The  lungs  are 
expanded  exactly  in  proportion  as  the  cavity  enlarges.  There  is, 
of  course,  at  no  time  any  space  between  the  lungs  and  the  dia- 
phragm :  as  the  latter  moves  downward  the  lungs  follow  because  of 
the  excess  of  pressure  on  their  interior.  Although  ordinarily  we 
speak  of  the  new  air  being  sucked  into  the  lungs  during  this  move- 
ment, it  is,  of  course,  strictly  speaking,  forced  in  by  the  pressure  of 
the  outside  atmosphere.  On  the  other  hand,  the  descent  of  the  dia- 
phragm raises  the  pressure  in  the  abdominal  cavity.  This  cavity  is 
entirely  full  of  viscera  and  for  mechanical  purposes  may  be  regarded 
as  being  full  of  liquid.  The  rise  of  pressure  is  transmitted  throughout 
the  abdomen  and  causqs  the  abdominal  wall  to  protrude.  Inspiration 
caused  by  a  contraction  of  the  diaphragm  is  therefore  spoken  of 
either  as  diaphragmatic  respiration  or  as  abdominal  respiration,  the 
latter  term  having  reference  to  the  visible  effect  on  the  abdominal 
walls.  In  strong  contractions  of  the  diaphragm  the  heart  also  is 
pulled  downward,  and  if  the  movement  is  forced  the  lower  ribs  may 
be  pulled  inward  to  some  extent.  This  last  effect  would  diminish 
the  size  of  the  thorax  and  therefore  tend  to  antagonize  the  inspira- 
tory action  of  the  diaphragm,  and  other  muscles  are  apparently 


EXTERNAL   RESPIRATION   AND    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.     573 


Fig.  235.- 


Sixth    dorsal    vertebra    and 
rib. — (Reichert.) 


brought  into  play  to  prevent  this  result.  As  stated  below,  the 
quadratus  lumborum  and  the  serratus  posticus  inferior  may  have 
this  function  of  fixating  the  lower 
ribs  in  violent  inspirations.  The 
diaphragmatic  muscle  is  innervated 
on  each  side  by  the  corresponding 
phrenic  nerve.  This  nerve  arises 
in  the  neck  from  the  fourth  and 
fifth  cervical  spinal  nerves,  and 
passes  downward  in  the  chest  in 
the  mediastinal  space,  lying  close 
to  the  heart  in  part  of  its  course. 
Section  of  this  nerve  paralyzes,  of 
course,  the  diaphragm  on  the  cor- 
responding side. 

Elevation  of  the  Rihs. — ^As  a 
necessary  result  of  the  structure  of 
the  bony  thorax,  every  elevation 
of  the  ribs  must  cause  an  enlarge- 
ment of  the  thoracic  cavity  in  the 
dorsoventral  and  the  lateral  diam- 
eters. We  are  justified  in  saying 
that  every  muscle  whose  contrac- 
tion causes  an  elevation  of  the  ribs  is  an  inspiratory  muscle.     This 

result  is  due,  in  the  first  place,  to  the  slant 
of  the  ribs.  Each  rib  is  attached  to  the 
spinal  column  at  two  points:  the  head  to 
the  body  of  the  vertebra  and  the  tubercle 
to  the  transverse  process.  The  up-and- 
down  movements  of  the  ril^s  may  be  re- 
garded as  rotations  around  an  axis  joining 
these  two  points, — that  is,  each  point  in 
the  rib  as  it  moves  up  or  down  describes 
a  circle  around  this  axis  (see  Fig.  235). 
If  our  ribs  were  set  upon  the  vertebral  col- 
umn so  that  the  plane  of  the  rib  formed  a 
right  angle  with  the  column,  then  every 
movement  of  the  rib  up  or  down  would 
decrease  the  size  of  the  thorax  and  there- 
fore cause  an  expiration.  As  a  matter 
of  fact,  however,  the  ribs  slant  downward, 
so  that  if  elevated  the  sternal  end  is  car- 
ried farther  away  from  the  sternum  and 
the  chest  is  enlarged  in  the  dorsoventral 
Moreover,  as  the  rib  moves  upward  there 


<^ 


Fig.  236.— Diagram  to  il- 
lustrate the  effect  of  the  slant 
of  the  ribs:  <S,  The  spinal  col- 
umn ;  a,  the  position  of  the 
rib  in  normal  expiration ;  (a') 
its  position  (exaggerated)  in 
inspiration  (the  distance  be- 
tween the  spinal  column  and 
the  sternum  (st.),  the  antero- 
posterior or  dorsoventral  di- 
ameter of  the  chest  is  in- 
creased) .  Any  movement  from 
the  position  a'  would  cause  an 
expiration. 


direction  (see  Fig.  236). 


574  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION, 

is  an  obvious  enlargement  of  the  chest  in  the  lateral  diameter. 
This  result  may  be  referred  to  two  causes:  In  the  first  place,  the 
axis  of  the  rotation  of  the  ribs, — that  is,  the  line  joining  the  head 
and  the  tubercle  of  the  rib  is  inclined  downward  so  that  the  plane 
of  rotation,  which  is,  of  course,  at  right  angles  to  this  axis,  will  be 
inclined  outward.  As  the  rib  is  moved  upward,  therefore,  it  must 
also  move  outward.  Secondly  the  cartilaginous  ends  of  the  ribs  are 
fixed  at  the  sternum  so  that  as  they  move  upward  and  outward 
they  will  be  twisted  or  everted  somewhat  in  the  middle,  with  a 
torsion  of  the  cartilaginous  ends. 

The  Muscles  of  Inspiration. — In  addition  to  the  diaphragm, 
all  muscles  attached  to  the  thorax  whose  contraction  causes  an 
elevation  of  the  ribs  must  be  classed  as  inspiratory  muscles.  In 
regard  to  this  latter  group  the  action  of  some  of  them  is  either 
evident  from  their  anatomical  attachments,  or  the  muscles  may  be 
stimulated  directly  and  the  effect  of  their  contraction  noted.  In 
other  cases,  however,  it  is  necessary  to  make  use  of  the  method 
first  suggested  by  Newell  Martin, — namely,  to  determine  whether 
the  contraction  of  the  muscle  in  respiration  occurs  simultaneously 
with  that  of  the  diaphragm  or  alternately  with  it.  In  the  former 
case  it  is  inspiratory,  in  the  latter  expiratory.  The  following  mus- 
cles may  be  classed  as  inspiratory:  Levatores  costarum.  They  arise 
from  the  transverse  process  of  the  seventh  cervical  and  first  to 
eleventh  thoracic  vertebrae  and  are  inserted  into  the  next  rib  or  the 
second  rib  below.  Intercostales  externi  muscles.  They  lie  in  the  inter- 
costal spaces  extending  from  the  lower  edge  of  one  rib  to  the  upper 
edge  of  the  rib  below ;  they  slant  downward  and  toward  the  mid-line. 
These  muscles  have  been  assigned  different  functions  by  different 
authors,  but  the  experiments  made  by  Hough,*  using  the  method 
of  Martin  described  above,  show  that  they  are  inspiratory.  It 
was  found  that  in  the  dog  they  contract  synchronously  with  the 
diaphragm.  The  same  authors  find  that  the  intercartilaginous 
portions  of  the  internal  intercostals  are  also  inspiratory.  The 
scaleni — anterior,  medius,  and  posterior — arise  from  the  transverse 
processes  of  the  cervical  vertebrae  and  are  inserted  into  the  first  and 
second  ribs.  M.  sterno-cleido-mastoideus  extends  from  the  mastoid 
process  to  the  sternum  and  sternal  extremity  of  the  clavicle.  M. 
pectoralis  minor  extends  from  the  coracoid  process  of  the  scapula 
to  the  anterior  surface  of  the  second  to  the  fifth  rib.  M.  serratus 
posticus  superior  extends  from  the  spinous  processes  of  the  lower 
cervical  and  upper  dorsal  vertebrae  to  the  second  to  fifth  rib. 

The  Muscles  of  Expiration. — Expiration — that  is,  diminution 

*  Hough,  "  Studies  from  the  Biological  Laboratory,  John  Hopkins 
University,"  5,  91,  1893,  and  Bergendal  and  Bergman,  "  Skandinavisches. 
Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  7,  178,  1896. 


EXTERNAL    RESPIRATION    AND    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.      575 

in  size  of  the  thorax — may  also  be  produced  in  two  ways :  First, 
by  forcing  the  diaphragm  farther  into  the  thoracic  cavity.  This 
result  is  obtained,  not  by  any  direct  action  of  the  diaphragm,  but 
by  contracting  the  muscular  walls  of  the  abdomen,  the  external  and 
internal  oblique,  the  rectus,  and  the  transversus.  The  contraction 
of  these  muscles,  which  form  what  has  been  called  the  abdominal 
press,  raises  the  pressure  in  the  abdomen  and  this,  acting  upon  the 
under  surface  of  the  diaphragm,  forces  it  up  into  the  thorax,  pro- 
vided the  glottis  is  open.  If  the  glottis  is  kept  closed  firmly  the 
increased  abdominal  pressure  is  felt  mainly  upon  the  pelvic  organs, 
and  this  process  is  used  in  micturition,  defecation,  and  parturition. 
Second,  by  depressing  the  ribs.  The  muscles  which  may  be  sup- 
posed to  exert  this  action  are  as  follows:  M.  intercostales  interni. 
The  expiratory  action  of  these  muscles,  so  far  as  the  interosseous 
portion  is  concerned,  was  first  definitely  shown  by  Martin,  who 
proved  that  when  they  contract  they  act  alternately  with  the  dia- 
phragm .  *  M.  triangularis  sterni  or  the  m .  transversus  thoracis  is  found 
on  the  interior  of  the  thorax  on  the  anterior  wall.  Its  fibers  pass 
from  the  sternum,  running  upward  and  outward,  to  be  inserted  into 
the  third  to  sixth  rib.  The  expiratory  action  of  this  muscle  was 
demonstrated  by  Hough  according  to  the  method  of  Martin.  M. 
iliocostalis  lumborum.  The  anatomical  attachments  of  this  muscle 
are  such  as  would  enable  it  to  depress  the  ribs;  but  its  functional 
activity  in  expiration  has  not  been  demonstrated.  The  w.  serratus 
posticus  inferior  and  m.  quadratus  lumborum  are  both  placed 
anatomically,  especially  the  former,  so  that  their  contractions 
serve  to  depress  the  ribs.  It  has  been  suggested,  however,  that 
they  may  act  in  forced  inspirations  so  as  to  antagonize  the  ten- 
dency of  the  diaphragm  to  pull  the  lower  ribs  inward.  Whether 
they  really  act  with  the  diaphragm  or  alternately  with  it  can  only  be 
determined  by  actual  experiment.  So  far  as  the  author  knows, 
such  experiments  have  not  been  made. 

Quiet  and  Forced  Respiratory  Movements;  Eupnea  and 
Dyspnea. — Our  respiratory  movements  vary  much  in  amplitude, 
and  the  muscles  actually  involved  differ  naturally  with  the  extent 
of  the  movement.  In  general,  we  distinguish  two  different  forms  of 
breathing  movements.  The  ordinary  quiet  respirations,  made 
without  obvious  effort,  form  a  condition  of  respiration  designated 
as  eupnea.  Difficult  or  labored  breathing  is  known  as  dyspnea. 
It  is  impossible  to  draw  a  sharp  line  between  the  two.  There  are 
many  degrees  of  dyspnea,  and  doubtless  in  quiet  breathing  the 
amplitude  of  the  movements  may  vary  considerably  before  they 
become  distinctly  dyspneic.  In  all  conditions  of  eupnea  the  chief 
point  to  bear  in  mind  is  that  the  expiration  is  entirely  passive. 
*  Martin  and  Hartwell,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  2,  24,  1879. 


576  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

The  inspiration  in  man  is  made  by  the  diaphragm  alone  or  by  the 
diaphragm  together  with  some  action  of  the  levatores  costarum  and 
the  external  intercostals.  At  the  end  of  the  inspiration  the  ribs  and 
diaphragm  are  brought  back  to  the  normal  position  by  purely 
physical  forces, — the  elasticity  of  the  distended  abdominal  wall, 
the  elasticity  of  the  expanded  lungs,  the  weight  and  torsion  of 
the  ribs,  etc.  As  soon  as  the  breathing  movements  become  at  all 
forced  the  action  of  the  above-named  inspiratory  muscles  is  in- 
creased in  intensity,  and  the  other  inspiratory  muscles,  all  elevators 
of  the  ribs,  come  into  play.  Quiet  breathing  in  man  at  least  is 
mainly  diaphragmatic  or  abdominal,  while  dyspneic  breathing  is 
characterized  by  a  greater  action  of  the  elevators  of  the  ribs. 
When  dyspnea  reaches  a  certain  stage  the  expiration  also  becomes 
active  or  forced.  The  expiratory  act  is  hastened  by  a  contraction 
of  the  abdominal  muscles  or  of  the  depressors  of  the  ribs,  and 
indeed  the  action  of  these  muscles  may  compress  the  chest  beyond 
its  normal  position,  so  that  the  expiration  is  followed  by  a  passive 
inspiration  which  brings  the  chest  to  its  normal  position  before  the 
next  active  inspiration  begins. 

Costal  and  Abdominal  Types  of  Respiration. — These  two 
types  of  respiration  are  based  upon  the  character  of  the  inspiratory 
movement.  An  inspiration  in  which  the  movement  of  the  abdomen, 
due  to  contraction  of  the  diaphragm,  is  the  chief  or  only  feature 
belongs  to  the  abdominal  type.  An  inspiration  in  which  the  eleva- 
tion of  the  ribs  is  a  noticeable  factor  belongs  to  the  costal  type. 
Hutchinson,  who  introduced  this  nomenclature,*  laid  emphasis 
chiefly  upon  the  order  of  the  movements.  In  the  abdominal 
type  the  abdomen  bulges  outward  first,  and  this  is  followed  by 
a  movement  of  the  thorax;  the  movement  spreads  from  the 
abdomen  to  the  thorax,  and,  "  like  a  wave,  is  lost  over  the  thoracic 
region."  In  costal  breathing  the  upper  ribs  move  first  and  the 
abdomen  second.  The  terms  are  meant  to  apply  chiefly  to  human 
respiration  and  have  aroused  interest  in  connection  with  the 
fact  that  in  quiet  breathing  in  the  erect  posture  the  respiration 
of  man  belongs  to  the  abdominal  type  and  that  of  woman  to  the 
costal  type.  It  has  been  a  question  whether  this  difference  is  a 
genuine  sexual  distinction  or  depends  simply  upon  differences 
in  dress.  Hutchinson  inclined  to  the  view  that  it  forms  what  we 
should  call  a  secondary  sexual  characteristic,  and  that  its  physio- 
logical value  for  woman  lies  in  the  fact  that  provision  is  thus  made, 
as  it  were,  against  the  period  of  pregnancy.  He  states  that  in 
twenty-four  young  girls  examined  between  the  ages  of  eleven  and 
fourteen  the  costal  type  was  present,  although  none  of  them  had 

*  See  Hutchinson,  article  on  "Thorax,"  Todd 's  " Cyclopaedia  of  Anat- 
omy and  Physiology, "  1849. 


EXTERNAL    RESPIRATION    AND    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.      577 

worn  tight  dress.  Later  observers,  however  (Mays,  Kellogg,  and 
others),  state  that  Indian  and  Chinese  women  who  have  not  worn 
tight  dress  exhibit  the  abdominal  type,  and  the  same  statement  is 
made  regarding  civilized  white  women  who  habitually  wear  loose 
clothing.  It  would  appear,  therefore,  that  the  assumption  of  the 
costal  type  by  women  in  general  is  due  to  the  hindrance  offered  by 
the  clothing  to  the  movements  of  the  abdomen.  From  an  exami- 
nation of  four  hundred  and  seven  cases  Fitz  *  concludes  that  when 
the  restricting  effect  of  dress  is  removed  there  is  little  or  no  differ- 
ence in  the  type  of  respiration  in  the  two  sexes.  The  natural  type 
is  one  in  which  "  the  movement  is  fairly  equally  balanced  between 
chest  and  abdomen,  the  abdominal  being  somewhat  in  excess." 
When  the  respiration  becomes  dyspneic  it  takes  on  a  distinctly 
costal  type,  and  Fitz  and  others  have  shown  that  for  an  equal  in- 
crease in  girth  the  thoracic  movements  cause  a  greater  enlargement 
of  the  lungs. 

Accessory  Respiratory  Movements. — In  addition  to  the  mus- 
cles whose  action  directly  enlarges  or  diminishes  the  capacity  of  the 
thorax  certain  other  muscles  connected  with  the  air  passages  con- 
tract rhythmically  with  the  inspirations,  and  may  be  designated 
properly  as  accessory  muscles  of  inspiration.  The  muscles  es- 
pecially concerned  are  those  controlling  the  size  of  the  glottis  and 
the  opening  of  the  external  nares.  At  each  inspiration  the  elevators 
of  the  wings  of  the  nose  come  into  play.  This  movement  occurs  in 
normal  breathing  in  many  animals,  such  as  the  rabbit  and  horse, 
and  in  some  men,  while  in  dyspneic  breathing  it  is  invariably 
present.  The  useful  result  of  the  movement  is  to  reduce  the  resis- 
tance to  the  inflow  of  air.  So  in  many  animals  the  glottis  is  dilated 
at  each  inspiration  by  the  contraction  of  the  posterior  crico-aryte- 
noid  muscles,  and  in  man  also  this  movement  is  evident  when 
the  breathing  is  at  all  forced.  The  useful  result  in  this  case  also  is 
a  reduction  in  the  resistance  offered  to  the  inflow  of  air. 

The  Registration  of  the  Rate  and  Amplitude  of  the  Respira- 
tory Movements. — Many  methods  are  employed  to  register  the 
rate  or  amplitude  of  the  respiratory  movements.  Upon  man  the 
ampUtude  may  be  measured  directly  by  a  tape  placed  at  different 
levels  to  ascertain  the  increase  in  girth,  or  it  may  be  recorded  by 
some  form  of  lever  or  tambour  applied  to  the  chest  or  abdomen. 
A  convenient  instrument  for  this  purpose  is  the  pneumograph 
described  by  Marey  which  is  illustrated  and  described  in  Fig.  237. 
In  animal  experimentation  the  various  methods  that  are  employed 
may  be  classified  under  four  heads:  (1)  Methods  in  which  the 
change  in  circumference  or  diameter  of  the  chest  or  abdomen  is 
recorded.     (2)  Methods  in  which  the  change  of  pressure  in  the  air 

*  Fitz,  "  Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine, "  1,  1896. 
37 


578  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

passages  is  recorded.  In  these  methods  a  tube  may  be  inserted  into 
one  of  the  nostrils  for  instance,  and  then  connected  to  a  tambour  the 
lever  of  which  makes  its  record  on  a  kymographion,  or  if  the  animal 
is  tracheotomized  a  side  tube  upon  the  tracheal  cannula  may  be 
connected  to  a  tambour.  This  method  indicates  well  the  rate  of 
movement  and  the  relative  amplitude,  but  has  the  defect  that  it 


Fig.  237. — Figure  of  Marey's  pneumograph. — (Verdin.)  The  instrument  consists  of 
a  tambour  (t),  mounted  on  a  fle.xible  metal  plate  (p).  By  means  of  the  bands  c  and  c 
the  metal  plate  is  tied  to  the  chest.  Any  increase  or  decrease  in  the  size  of  the  chest  will 
then  affect  the  tambour  by  the  lever  arrangement  shown  in  the  figure.  These  changes  in 
the  tambour  are  transmitted  through  the  tube  r  as  pressure  changes  in  the  contained  air 
to  a  second  tambour  (not  shown  in  the  figure)  which  records  them  upon  a  smoked  drum. 

does  not  record  the  pause,  if  any,  at  the  end  of  inspiration  or  ex- 
piration. A  modification  of  this  method  that  permits  an  accurate 
record  of  the  amplitude  and  duration  of  the  movements  consists  in 
connecting  the  trachea  or  nostrils  with  a  large  bottle  of  air.  The 
animal  breathes  into  and  out  of  the  bottle,  and  the  corresponding 


Fig.  238. — Curve  of  normal  respiratory  movements. — (Marey.)  Curve  A,  full  line, 
represents  the  movements  when  the  respiration  is  entirely  normal.  Downstroke,  inspira- 
tion; upstroke,  expiration.  Curve O,  dotted  line,  represents  the  increased  amplitude  of  the 
movements,  slight  dyspnea,  caused  by  breathing  through  a  narrow  tube. 

variations  in  pressure  are  recorded  by  a  tambour  also  connected 
with  the  interior  of  the  bottle.  (3)  Methods  in  which  the  change 
of  pressure  in  the  thoracic  cavity  is  recorded.  This  end  may  be 
reached  by  inserting  a  cannula  into  the  thoracic  wall  so  that  its 
opening  lies  in  the  pleural  cavity,  or,  more  simply,  a  catheter  or 
sound  connected  at  the  other  end  to  a  tambour  may  be  passed  down 


EXTERNAL   RESPIRATION    AND    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.      579 


the  esophagus  until  its  end  Hes  in  the  intrathoracic  portion. 
Variations  in  pressure  in  the  mediastinal  space  synchronous  with 
the  respiratory  movements  affect  the  esophagus  and  through  it 
the  sound.  (4)  Methods  in  which  the  movements  of  the  dia- 
phragm are  recorded  either  by  a  tambour  or  lever  thrust  between 
the  diaphragm  and  liver,  or  by  hooks  attached  directly  to  muscular 
sUps  of  the  diaphragm.  Registration  of  the  movements  in  man 
during  quiet  breathing  give  us  such  a 
record  as  is  seen  in  Fig.  238.  It  will 
be  seen  that  the  inspiration  (descend- 
ing limb)  is  followed  at  once  by  an 
expiration,  as  we  should  expect, 
since,  as  soon  as  the  inspiratory 
muscles  cease  to  act,  the  physical 
factors  mentioned  above  at  once  tend 
to  bring  the  chest  back  to  its  normal 
position.  The  expiration  (ascending 
limb)  is  at  first  rapid  and  toward  the 
end  very  gradual,  so  that  there  is  al- 
most a  condition  of  rest, — an  expira- 
tory pause. 

The  Volumes  of  Air  Respired 
and  the  Capacity  of  the  Lungs.— 
The  volume  of  air  respired  varies,  of 
course,  with  the  extent  of  the  move- 
ments and  the  size  of  the  individual. 
This  volume  may  be  determined 
readily  in  any  given  case  by  means 
of  a  spirometer, — a  form  of  gasometer 
adapted  to  this  purpose.  The  con- 
struction of  this  apparatus  is  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  239.  It  consists  of  a 
graduated  cylinder  (A)  and  a  receiver 
{B)  filled  with  water.  The  cylinder 
A  is  counterbalanced  by  a  weight  {g) 
so  as  to  move  up  and  down  in  the 
water  of  B  with  the  least  possible  re- 
sistance. The  tube  C  passes  through 
the  wall  of  B  and  ends  in  the  interior  of  A  above  the  level  of  the 
water.  The  free  end  of  this  tube  is  connected  with  the  mouth 
or  nose.  When  one  breathes  through  this  .tube  the  expired  air 
passes  into  A,  which  rises  from  the  water  to  receive  it.  If  A  is 
graduated  the  amount  of  air  breathed  out  may  be  measured 
directly.  The  following  terms  are  used:  Vital  capacity.  By 
vital  capacity  is  meant  the  quantity  of  air  that  can  be  breathed 


Eig.  239.— Wintrich 's  modifi- 
cation of  Hutchinson's  spirometer. 
— (Reichert.) 


580  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

out  by  the  deepest  possible  expiration  after  making  the  deepest 
possible  inspiration.  It  gives  a  rough  measure  of  lung  capacity, 
and  is  used  in  gymnasiums  and  physical  examinations  for  this  pur- 
pose. The  actual  amount  varies  with  the  individual;  an  average 
figure  for  the  adult  man  is  3700  c.c.  Tidal  air.  By  this  term  is 
meant  the  amount  of  air  breathed  out  in  a  normal  quiet  expiration. 
A  similar  amount  is  breathed  in,  of  course,  in  the  previous  inspira- 
tion, and  the  term  tidal  air  designates  the  amount  of  air  that  flows 
in  and  out  of  the  lungs  with  each  quiet  respiratory  movement. 
Here,  again,  there  are  individual  variations.  The  average  figure 
for  the  adult  man  is  500  c.c.  The  complemental  air.  This  term 
designates  the  amount  of  air  that  can  be  breathed  in  over  and  above 
the  tidal  air  by  the  deepest  possible  inspiration.  It  is  estimated 
at  1600  c.c.  The  supplemental  air.  By  this  term  is  meant  the 
amount  of  air  that  can  be  breathed  out,  after  a  quiet  expiration,  by 
the  most  forcible  expiration.  It  is  equal  also  to  1600  c.c.  It  is 
evident  that  the  complemental  air  plus  the  supplemental  air  plus 
the  tidal  air  constitute  the  vital  capacity.  The  residual  air.  After 
the  most  forcible  expiration  the  lungs  are  far  from  being  entirely 
collapsed.  The  volume  of  air  that  remains  behind,  after  the  sup- 
plemental air  has  been  driven  out,  is  known  as  the  residual  air. 
The  amount  of  this  air  has  been  estimated  directly  on  the  cadaver 
(Hermann).  The  thorax  was  first  pressed  into  a  position  of  forced 
expiration;  the  trachea  was  then  ligated,  the  chest  opened,  the  lungs 
removed  and  their  volume  estimated  by  the  amount  of  water  dis- 
placed when  they  were  immersed.  The  average  result  from  such 
estimations  was,  in  round  numbers,  1000  c.c.  Under  conditions  of 
normal  breathing  the  reserve  supply  of  air  in  the  lungs  is  equal  to 
the  residual  air  plus  the  supplemental  air, — that  is,  2600  c.c.  Mini- 
mal air.  When  the  thorax  is  opened  the  lungs  collapse,  driving  out 
the  supplemental  and  residual  air,  but  not  quite  completely.  Before 
the  air  cells  are  entirely  emptied  the  small  bronchi  leading  to  them 
collapse  and  their  walls  adhere  with  sufficient  force  to  entrap  a  little 
air  in  the  alveoli.  It  is  on  this  account  that  the  excised  lungs  float 
in  water  and  are  designated  as  lights  by  the  butcher.  The  small 
amount  of  air  caught  in  this  way  is  designated  as  the  minimal  air. 
In  the  fetus  before  birth  the  lungs  are  entirely  solid,  but  after 
birth,  if  respirations  are  made,  the  lungs  do  not  collapse  completely 
on  account  of  the  capture  of  the  minimal  air.  Whether  or  not  the 
lungs  will  float  has  constituted,  therefore,  one  of  the  facts  used  in 
medicolegal  cases  to  determine  if  a  child  was  stillborn.  The  lungs 
during  life  may,  under  certain  conditions,  again  become  in  parts 
entirely  solid.  If  any  of  the  alveoli  become  completely  shut  off 
from  the  trachea  by  an  accident  or  by  pathological  conditions  the 
air  caught  in  them  may  be  completely  absorbed,  after  a  certain 
interval,  by  the  circulating  blood. 


EXTERNAL   RESPIRATION   AND    RESPIRATORY   MOVEMENTS.     581 

The  Size  of  the  Bronchial  Tree  and  the  Ventilation  of  the 
Lungs. — Since  the  reserve  supply  of  air  in  the  lungs  may  amount  to 
2600  c.c,  while  the  new  air  breathed  in  at  each  inspiration  amounts 
to  only  500  c.c,  it  would  seem  at  first  that  the  alveolar  air  is  not 
very  efficiently  renewed  by  a  quiet  inspiration.  The  actual  amount 
of  ventilation  effected  depends  on  the  capacity  of  the  bronchial 
tree.  According  to  observations  founded  partly  on  measurements 
of  casts  of  the  tree  and  partly  upon  physiological  determinations 
made  by  breathing  air  poor  in  oxygen,  it  would  seem  that  its  total 
capacity  may  be  reckoned  at  140  c.c*  At  each  inspiration, 
therefore,  at  least  360  c.c.  of  air  penetrate  into  the  alveoli,  and 
if  evenly  disseminated  through  the  lungs  add  about  fV  to  the 
volume  of  each  alveolus.  Once  in  the  alveoli,  diffusion  must  tend 
to  spread  the  air  rapidly,  and  that  this  occurs  is  shown  by  an 
interesting  experiment  performed  by  Grehant.  He  breathed  in 
500  c.c.  of  hydrogen  instead  of  air  and  then  examined  the  amount 
of  hydrogen  breathed  out  in  successive  expirations.  Only  170  c.c. 
were  recovered  in  the  first  expiration,  180  c.c.  in  the  second,  41  in 
the  third,  and  40  in  the  fourth. 

Artificial  Respiration. — In  laboratory  experiments  artificial 
respiration  is  employed  frequently  after  the  use  of  curare ;  when  it  is 
necessary  to  open  the  chest;  after  cessation  of  respirations  from 
overdoses  of  chloroform  or  ether,  etc.  The  method  used  in  almost 
all  cases  is  the  reverse  of  the  normal  procedure, — that  is,  the  lungs 
are  expanded  by  positive  pressure  (pressure  in  excess  of  atmos- 
pheric). A  bellows  or  blast  worked  by  hand  or  machinery  is  con- 
nected with  the  trachea  and  the  lungs  are  dilated  by  rhythmical 
strokes.  Provision  is  made  for  the  escape  of  expired  air  by  the  use 
of  valves  or  by  a  side  hole  in  the  tracheal  cannula.  Numerous 
forms  of  respiration  pumps  have  been  devised  for  this  purpose. 

In  cases  of  suspended  respirations  in  human  beings  from  drown- 
ing, electrical  shocks,  pressure  upon  the  medulla,  etc.,  it  is  necessary 
to  use  artificial  respiration  in  order  to  restore  normal  breathing. 
Bellows  naturally  can  not  be  used  in  such  cases.  Some  method 
must  be  employed  to  expand  and  contract  the  chest  alternately,  and 
several  different  ways  have  been  devised.  The  Marshall  Hall 
method  consists  in  placing  the  subject  face  down  and  rolling  the 
body  from  this  to  a  lateral  position,  making  some  pressure  upon  the 
back  while  in  the  prone  position.  The  Sylvester  method,  which  is 
frequently  used,  consists  in  raising  the  arms  above  the  head  and 
then  bringing  them  down  against  the  sides  of  the  chest  so  as  to 
compress  the  latter.  The  Howard  method  consists  in  simply  com- 
pressing the  lower  part  of  the  chest  while  the  subject  is  in  a  supine 
position.  Schaefer,  who  has  recently  compared  these  different 
*  See  Loewy,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologic, "  58,  416. 


582  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION, 

methods,  suggests  one  of  his  own,  which  seems  to  be  effective,  saves 
labor,  and  is  less  injurious  to  the  subject.*  He  describes  it  as  fol- 
lows: "It  consists  in  laying  the  subject  in  the  prone  posture, 
preferably  on  the  ground,  with  a  thick  folded  garment  underneath 
the  chest  and  epigastrium.  The  operator  puts  himself  athwart  or 
at  the  side  of  the  subject,  facing  his  head  (see  Fig.  240)  and  places 
his  hands  on  each  side  over  the  lower  part  of  the  back  (lowest  ribs). 
He  then  slowly  throws  the  weight  of  his  body  forward  to  bear  upon 


Fig.  240. — Shows  the  position    to    be  adopted  for  effecting  artificial  respiration  in  cases 
of  drowning. — (Schaefer.) 

his  own  arms,  and  thus  presses  upon  the  thorax  of  the  subject  and 
forces  air  out  of  the  lungs.  This  being  effected,  he  gradually  re- 
laxes the  pressure  by  bringing  his  own  body  up  again  to  a  more 
erect  position,  but  without  moving  the  hands."  These  movements 
are  repeated  quite  regularly  at  a  rate  of  twelve  to  fifteen  times  a 
minute  until  normal  respiration  begins  or  the  possibility  of  its 
restoration  is  abandoned.  A  half-hour  or  more  may  be  required 
before  normal  breathing  movements  start. 

*  Schaefer,    "  Medico-chirurgical   Transactions, "    London,    vol.    Ixxxvii, 
1904. 


CHAPTER  XXXV. 


THE  PRESSURE   CONDITIONS   IN   THE  LUNGS   AND 

THORAX  AND  THEIR  INFLUENCE  UPON  THE 

CIRCULATION. 

In  considering  the  pressure  changes  in  respiration  the  distinction 
between  the  pressure  in  the  thorax  outside  the  lungs  and  the  pres- 
sure within  the  hmgs  and  air  passages  must  be  kept  clearly  in  mind. 
The  pressure  in  the  thoracic  cavity  outside  the  lungs  may  be 
designated  as  the  intrathoracic  'pressure;  it  is  the  pressure  exerted 
upon  the  heart,  great  blood- 
vessels, thoracic  duct,  esopha- 
gus, etc.  The  pressure  in  the 
interior  of  the  lungs  and  air 
passages  may  be  designated  as 
intrapulmonic  pressure.  The 
relations  of  the  two  pressures 
with  reference  to  the  outside 
atmosphere  is  indicated  sche- 
matically in  Fig.  241. 

The  Intrapulmonic  Pres- 
sure and  its  Variations. — ^The 
air  passages  and  the  alveoli  of 
the  lungs  are  in  free  communi- 
cation with  the  external  air; 
consequently  in  every  position 
of  rest,  whether  at  the  end  of 
inspiration  or  expiration,  the 
pressure  in  these  cavities  is 
equal  to  that  of  the  atmos- 
phere outside.  During  the  act 
of  inspiration,  however,  the  in- 
trapulmonic pressure  falls  tem- 
porarily below  that  of  the  atmosphere, — that  is,  during  the  inflow  of 
air.  The  extent  to  which  the  pressure  falls  depends  naturally  upon 
the  rapidity  and  amplitude  of  the  inspiratory  movement  and  upon 
the  size  of  the  opening  to  the  exterior.  The  narrowest  portion  of 
the  air  passages  is  the  glottis;  consequently  the  variations  in  pres- 
sure below  this  point  are  probably  greater  than  in  the  phar3Tix  or 

583 


Fig.  241. — Diagram  to  illustrate  how 
the  pressure  of  the  air  is  exerted  through 
the  lung  walls  upon  the  heart  (H)  and  other 
organs  in  the  mediastinal  space.  The  pres- 
sure on  these  organs  (intrathoracic  pressure) 
is  equal  to  one  atmosphere  minus  the  amount 
of  the  opposing  pressure  exerted  by  the  ex- 
panded lungs. 


584  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

nasal  cavities.  If  the  air  passages  are  abnormally  constricted  at 
any  point  the  fall  of  pressure  during  inspiration  will  be  correspond- 
ingly magnified  in  the  parts  below  the  constriction,  as  happens,  for 
instance,  in  bronchial  asthma,  edema  of  the  glottis,  cold  in  the 
head,  etc.  Under  normal  conditions  the  fall  of  pressure  during  a 
quiet  inspiration  is  not  large.  Bonders  determined  it  in  man  by 
connecting  a  water  manometer  with  one  nostril  and  found  that  it 
was  equal  to  — 9  or  — 10  mms.  water.  At  the  end  of  an  inspiration, 
if  there  is  a  pause,  the  pressure  within  the  lungs  again  rises,  of  course, 
to  atmospheric.  During  expiration,  on  the  other  hand,  the  collapse 
of  the  chest  wall  takes  place  with  sufficient  rapidity  to  compress  the 
air  somewhat  during  its  escape  and  cause  a  temporary  rise  of  pres- 
sure. In  normal  expiration  Bonders  estimated  this  rise  as  equal  to 
7  or  8  mms.  water.  The  intrapulmonic  pressure  may  vary  greatly 
from  these  figures  in  the  positive  or  negative  direction  according  to 
the  factors  mentioned  above,  especially  the  intensity  of  the  respira- 
tory movement  and  the  size  of  the  opening  to  the  exterior.  The 
extreme  variations  are  obtained  when  the  opening  to  the  outside  is 
entirely  shut  off.  When  an  inspiration  or  an  expiration  is  made 
with  the  glottis  firmly  closed  the  pressure  in  the  lungs,  of  course, 
rises  and  falls  with  the  rarefaction  or  compression  of  the  contained 
air.  A  strong  inspiration  under  such  conditions  may  lower  the 
pressure  by  30  to  80  mms.  of  mercury,  while  a  strong  expiration 
raises  the  pressure  by  an  amount  equal  to  60  to  100  mms.  Hg.  In 
the  act  of  coughing  we  get  a  similar  result:  the  strong  spasmodic 
expirations  are  made  with  a  closed  glottis  and  consequently  cause  a 
marked  rise  in  the  intrapulmonic  pressure.  Such  great  variations 
in  pressure  have  a  marked  influence  on  the  heart  and  the  circula- 
tion, as  is  explained  below. 

Intrathoracic  Pressure. — When  a  reference  is  made  to  the 
pressure  within  the  thorax,  it  is  the  intrathoracic  pressure  that  is 
meant, — that  is,  the  pressure  in  the  pleural  cavity  and  mediastinal 
spaces.  This  pressure,  under  normal  conditions,  is  always  negative, 
— that  is,  is  always  less  than  one  atmosphere.  The  reason  for  this 
is  simply  that  the  lungs  are  distended  to  fill  the  thoracic  cavity,  and 
consequently  the  organs,  like  the  heart,  which  lie  in  this  cavity 
outside  the  lungs,  are  exposed  to  a  pressure  of  one  atmosphere, 
minus  the  force  of  elastic  recoil  of  the  lungs  (see  Fig.  241) .  The  heart 
and  other  intrathoracic  organs  are  protected  from  the  direct  pres- 
sure of  the  air  by  the  thoracic  walls;  they  are  pressed  upon,  how- 
ever, through  the  lungs,  but  naturally  the  atmospheric  pressure  is 
reduced  by  an  amount  equal  to  the  elastic  force  of  the  distended 
lungs.  Intrathoracic  pressure,  in  fact,  may  be  defined  as  intra- 
pulmonic pressure  minus  the  elastic  pull  of  the  lungs,  and  since 
under  usual  conditions  the  intrapulmonic  pressure  is  equal  to  that 


PRESSURE    CONDITIONS   IN    LUNGS   AND    THORAX.  585 

of  the  atmosphere,  the  intrathoracic  pressure  is  less  than  an 
atmosphere  by  an  amount  equal  to  the  recoil  of  the  lungs.  The 
negative  pressure  in  the  thorax  is,  therefore,  equal  to  the  elastic 
force  of  the  lungs,  and  is  larger  the  more  the  lungs  are  put  upon 
a  stretch, — that  is,  the  deeper  the  inspiration.  The  amount  of  this 
negative  pressure  has  been  measured  upon  both  animals  and  men 
by  two  methods :  First  by  Donders  method  of  attaching  a  manom- 
eter to  the  trachea  and  then  opening  the  thoracic  walls  so  as  to 
allow  the  atmosphere  to  press  upon  the  exterior  face  of  the  lungs. 
In  this  way  the  elastic  force  of  the  lungs  is  determined,  and,  as 
explained  above,  this  is  equivalent  to  the  negative  pressure.  Second, 
by  thrusting  a  trocar  through  the  thoracic  wall  so  that  its  open  end 
may  lie  in  the  pleural  or  mediastinal  cavity,  the  other  end  being 
appropriately  connected  with  a  manometer.  The  older  observers 
(Hutchinson)  also  made  experiments  upon  freshly  excised  human 
lungs,  determining  their  elastic  force  when  distended  by  known 
amounts  of  air.  The  figures  obtained  by  these  different  methods 
have  shown  some  variations,  but  the  following  quotations  give 
an  idea  of  the  average  extent  of  this  negative  pressure.  Heynsius,* 
making  use  of  the  figures  obtained  by  Hutchinson,  estimates  that 
in  man  the  negative  pressure  in  the  thorax  at  the  end  of  inspiration 
is  — 4.5  mms.  Hg,  while  at  the  end  of  an  inspiration  it  is  equal  to 
— 7.5  mms.  Hg, — a  variation  during  respiration,  therefore,  of  3  mms. 
Hg.  That  is,  assuming  that  the  atmospheric  pressure  is  760  mms. 
Hg,  the  conditions  of  pressure  in  the  thorax  and  lungs  at  the  end  of 
inspiration  and  expiration  are  as  follows: 

At  the  End  of  Inspiration.       At  the  End  of  Expiration, 
Intrapulmonic  pressure .  .  .  760    mms.  Hg.  760     mms.  Hg. 

Intrathoracic  pressure ....  752.5     "       "  755.5     "        " 

Aron  gives  results  obtained  from  a  healthy  man  in  whom  a  can- 
nula was  connected  directly  with  the  pleural  cavity. f  From  36 
determinations  he  obtained  the  average  result  that  at  the  end  of 
quiet  inspiration  the  negative  pressure  is  — 4.64  mms.  Hg  (755.36) 
and  at  the  end  of  expiration  — 3.02  mms.  Hg  (756.98), — results 
considerably  lower  than  those  estimated  by  Heynsius.  It  should 
be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  these  values  depend  upon  the 
condition  of  expansion  of  the  chest, — that  is,  the  position  of  the 
body  and  the  depth  of  inspiration.  On  dogs  Heynsius  reports  as 
follows:  At  end  of  inspiration,  — 9.4  mms.  Hg;  end  of  expiration, 
— 3.9  mms.     On  rabbits,  — 4.5  mms.  and  — 2.5  mms.  Hg. 

Variations  of  Intrathoracic  Pressure  with  Forced  and  Unusual 

Respirations. — After  the  most  forcible  expiration,  when  the  air- 

*  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  29,  265,  1882. 
t  Aron,  quoted  from  Emerson,  "Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports,"  11, 
194,  1903. 


586  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

passages  are  open,  the  intrathoracic  pressure  is  still  negative  by  a 
small  amount,  since  the  lungs  are  still  expanded  beyond  what 
might  be  called  their  normal  size, — that  is,  their  size  when  the  pres- 
sure inside  and  outside  is  the  same.  If,  however,  a  forced  expira- 
tion is  made  with  the  glottis  closed,  as  in  the  straining  movements 
of  defecation,  parturition,  etc.,  then  naturally  the  intrathoracic 
pressure  rises  with  the  intrapulmonary  pressure.  The  increased 
pressure  from  the  compressed  air  in  the  lungs  is  felt  upon  the  organs 
in  the  mediastinal  spaces.  The  large  veins  especially  are  affected, 
and  the  flow  in  them  is  partially  blocked,  as  is  shown  by  the  swelling 
of  the  veins  in  the  neck  outside  the  thorax.  The  maintenance  of 
such  conditions  for  a  considerable  period  may  seriously  affect  the 
circulation.  The  same  general  effect  is  obtained  also  in  attacks  of 
coughing,  the  violent  spasmodic  expirations  with  closed  glottis 
causing  a  visible  venous  congestion  in  the  head  from  the  obstruction 
to  the  venous  flow  into  the  heart.  Forcible  inspirations,  on  the 
other  hand,  lower  the  intrathoracic  pressure — that  is,  increase  the 
negativity — whether  the  glottis  is  open  or  closed.  When  the  glottis 
is  freely  open  and  a  deep  inspiration  is  made  the  intrathoracic 
pressure  may  fall  as  much  as  30  mms.  Hg, — that  is,  become  equal 
to  730  mms.  The  lungs  being  much  more  expanded  exert  a  corre- 
spondingly greater  elastic  force.  If  the  glottis  is  closed  during  a 
deep  inspiration  then  there  is  little  actual  expansion  of  the  lungs, 
but  the  intrapulmonary  pressure  falls  from  the  rarefaction  of  the  air 
in  the  lungs,  and  the  intrathoracic  pressure,  of  course,  falls  with  it. 
The  Origin  of  the  Negative  Pressure  in  the  Thorax. — ^As  is  evi- 
dent from  the  above  explanation,  the  fact  that  the  pressure  in  the 
thorax  is  less  than  one  atmosphere  is  due  in  the  long  run  to  the 
circumstance  that  the  lungs  are  smaller  than  the  thoracic  cavity 
which  they  occupy.  In  the  fetus  the  lungs  are  solid,  and  completely 
fill  the  thoracic  cavity,  except  for  the  part  occupied  by  the  other 
organs.  It  has  been  a  question  whether  after  birth  the  size  of  the 
thoracic  cavity  is  suddenly  and  permanently  increased  by  the  first 
inspiratory  movements,  and  a  negative  intrathoracic  pressure  thus 
produced  at  once.  The  careful  experiments  of  Hermann*  seem  to 
have  settled  this  point.  He  proved  that  newly-born  children 
between  the  first  to  the  fourth  day  show  no  measurable  negative 
pressure  in  the  thorax  and  at  the  eighth  day  the  pressure  in  the 
thoracic  cavity  is  less  than  atmospheric  by  an  amount  equal  to  only 
— 0.4  mm.  Hg.  The  negative  pressure  as  we  find  it  in  the  adult  is 
evidently  developed  gradually,  and  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
thorax  increases  in  size  more  rapidly  and  to  a  greater  extent  than 
the  lungs,  so  that  to  fill  the  cavity  the  lungs  become  more  and  more 
expanded.  It  follows,  also,  from  these  facts,  that  the  new-born 
*  Hermann,  "  Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie, "  30,  276,  1883. 


PRESSURE    CONDITIONS   IN   LUNGS   AND   THORAX.  587 

child  has  practically  no  reserve  supply  of  air  in  the  lungs;  at  each 
expiration  the  lungs  are  entirely  emptied  (except  for  the  minimal 
air).  The  ventilation  of  the  lung  alveoli  is  correspondingly  more 
perfect  than  in  older  persons. 

Pneumothorax. — When  the  pleural  cavity  on  either  side  is  opened 
by  any  means  air  enters  and  causes  a  greater  or  less  shrinkage  of 
the  corresponding  lung.  This  condition  of  air  within  the  pleural 
cavity  is  designated  as  pneumothorax.  It  is  evident  that  air  may 
enter  the  pleural  cavity  in  one  of  two  general  ways:  By  a  puncture 
of  the  parietal  pleura  such  as  may  be  made  by  gunshot  or  stab 
wounds  in  the  chest,  or  by  a  puncture  of  the  visceral  pleura,  such  as 
may  occur,  for  example,  by  the  rupture  of  a  tubercle  in  pulmonary 
tuberculosis,  the  air  in  tliis  case  entering  from  the  alveoli  of  the 
lungs.  From  the  physical  conditions  involved  it  is  evident 
that  if  the  opening  into  the  pleural  cavity  is  kept  patent  then  the 
lungs  will  collapse  completely  and  eventually  will  become  entirely 
solid,  since  the  small  amount  of  entrapped  minimal  air  will  be 
absorbed  by  the  blood.  The  other  lung,  the  heart,  etc.,  will  also 
be  displaced  somewhat  from  their  normal  position  by  the  unusual 
pressure.  If,  however,  the  opening  is  closed,  then  the  air  in  the 
pleural  cavity  may  be  absorbed  completely  by  the  circulating  blood 
and  the  lung  again  expand  as  this  absorption  takes  place.  In 
human  beings  pneumothorax  occurs  most  frequently  in  conditions 
of  disease,  particularly  pulmonary  tuberculosis,  and  the  air  in  the 
thorax  is  associated  also  with  a  liquid  effusion,  tliis  combination 
being  designated  sometimes  as  hydropneumothorax.* 

The  Aspiratory  Action  of  the  Thorax. — ^The  negative  pres- 
sure prevailing  in  the  thoracic  cavity  must  affect  the  organs  in  the 
mediastinal  space.  The  intrathoracic  portion  of  the  esophagus, 
for  instance,  is  exposed,  at  times  of  swallowing  at  least,  to  a  full 
atmosphere  of  pressure  on  its  interior,  while  on  its  exterior  it  is  under 
the  diminished  intrathoracic  pressure.  This  difference  tends  to 
dilate  the  tube  and  may  aid  in  the  act  of  swallowing.  The  main 
effect  of  the  difference  in  pressure  is  felt,  however,  upon  the  flow 
of  lymph  and  blood,  especially  the  latter.  The  large  veins  in  the 
neck  and  axilla  are  under  the  pressure  of  an  atmosphere  exerted 
through  the  skin,  and  the  same  is  true  for  the  inferior  cava  in  the 
abdomen.  But  the  superior  and  inferior  cava  and  the  right  auricle 
are  under  a  pressure  less  than  one  atmosphere.  This  difference  in 
pressure  must  act  as  a  constant  favoring  condition  to  the  flow  of 
blood  to  the  heart.  The  difference  is  markedly  increased  at  each 
inspiratioD;  so  that  at  each  such  act  there  is  an  increase  in  the 
velocity  and  volume  of  the  flow  to  the  heart, — an  effect  which  is 

*  See  Emerson,  "Pneumothorax,"  Johns  Hopkms  Hospital  Reports, 
11,  1,  1903. 


588  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

usually  referred  to  as  the  aspiratory  action  of  the  thorax.  At  each 
inspiration  blood  is  "sucked"  from  the  extrathoracic  into  the  intra- 
thoracic veins.  So  far  as  the  inferior  cava  is  concerned,  this  effect 
is  augmented  by  the  simultaneous  increase  in  abdominal  pressure. 
For  as  the  diaphragm  descends  it  raises  the  pressure  in  the  ab- 
domen as  it  lowers  the  pressure  in  the  thorax.  The  two  fac- 
tors co-operate  in  forcing  more  blood  from  the  abdominal  to 
the  thoracic  portion  of  the  cava.  There  should  be,  of  course,  a 
similar  effect,  but  in  the  opposite  direction,  upon  the  flow  in  the 
arteries.  Each  inspiration  should  retard  the  arterial  outflow  from 
the  aorta  into  its  extrathoracic  branches.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  this 
effect  probably  does  not  take  place.  The  arteries  are  thick  walled 
and  are  distended  by  a  high  internal  pressure;  so  that  the  small 
change  of  pressure  of  three  or  four  millimeters  of  mercury  during 
inspiration  is  probably  incapable  of  influencing  the  caliber  of  the 
arteries,  while  it  has  a  distinct  effect  upon  the  thin-walled  veins, 
whose  internal  pressure  is  very  small.  The  changes  in  intra- 
thoracic pressure  during  respiration  must  affect  the  blood-flow  also 
in  the  pulmonary  circuit,  the  flow  from  the  right  to  the  left  side  of 
the  heart.  This  effect  is  manifested  in  the  so-called  respiratory 
waves  of  blood-pressure  which  may  be  discussed  briefly  in  this 
connection. 

Respiratory  Waves  of  Blood-pressure. — When  a  record  is 
taken  of  the  blood-pressure  the  tracing  shows  waves,  unless  the 
respiratory  movements  are  very  shallow,  which  are  synchronous  with 
the  respiratory  movements  (see  Fig.  242).  When  the  respiration 
is  dyspneic  the  waves  of  pressure  are  very  marked.  To  ascertain  the 
exact  relations  of  these  variations  to  the  phases  of  respiration  it  is 
necessary  to  make  simultaneous  tracings  of  blood-pressure  and 
respiration  movements  with  the  recording  pens  properly  superposed. 
In  the  dog  it  is  found  that  the  blood-pressure  falls  slightly  at  the 
beginning  of  inspiration,  but  rises  during  the  rest  of  the  act  (Fig. 
243).  At  the  beginning  of  expiration  the  pressure  continues  to  rise 
for  a  time  and  then  falls  during  most  of  this  phase.  On  the  whole, 
therefore,  the  effect  of  inspiration,  its  final  effect,  is  to  cause  a  rise 
of  arterial  pressure,  while  the  effect  of  expiration  is  to  cause  a  fall. 
The  relationship  of  the  two  curves  varies  in  other  animals,  depend- 
ing, among  other  things,  on  the  rapidity  of  the  respirations; 
but,  since  most  of  the  experimental  work  has  been  done  upon  the 
dog,  our  attention  may  be  confined  to  the  relationship  shown  by  this 
animal.  Two  general  explanations  may  be  given  for  these  respira- 
tory waves:  First,  that  they  are  due  to  an  activity  of  the  vaso- 
constrictor center  synchronous  with  that  of  the  respiratory  center. 
Second,  that  they  are  due  to  variations  in  the  amount  of  blood  sent 
out  from  the  heart  into  the  aorta,  this  variation,  in  turn,  being  due 


PRESSURE    CONDITIONS   IN    LUNGS    AND   THORAX. 


589 


to  the  mechanical  changes  in  pressure  during  respiration  and  their 
effect  on  the  blood-flow,  aided  also  by  the  fact  that  the  heart  beats 
more  rapidly  during  inspiration.  This  second  general  point  of  view 
has  been  adopted  in  physiology,  and  to  verify  it  numerous  experi- 
ments have  been  made  upon  lungs  placed  in  an  artificial  thorax  in 
which  the  conditions  of  pressure  could  be  varied  at  will.*  As  the  out- 
come of  this  work,  the  following  results  have  been  accepted  in  expla- 


1  M  1 1 1 1  1 1 1 1  H  1  )  1  \  1 1  M  1  \  1  i  t  n  1  n  n  )\  i  H  1  M  1 1  M  H  M  )  n  n  1  H  H  H 

T           . 

B> 

r-no 

1 

cyy\f\  /,Y  ,.i v% A AA .           ,,  ,:a.  ,,^ ,'.  :\  A  i\  A 

B^^Stt^ 

f  io 

i 
i 

.  jDIPfflMBBWE)- 

[-Vo 

.  mMwiMBSK^-^  . 

I 

\-3.0  T^-  rr- 

-       -                   ■      .         .    -                                  _.  J.j2je_l^iT)£    

1 

/^^m 

.         Ko.V.b.t        ' 

Fig.  242. — Respiratory  waves  of  blood-pressure.  Typical  blood-pressure  record  as 
taken  with  a  mercury  manometer:  Bp  the  blood-pressure  record,  shows  the  separate 
heart  beats  and  the  larger  respiratory  waves,  each  of  which  comprises  six  to  seven  heart 
beats. 


nation  of  the  occurrence  of  the  respiratory  waves  of  blood-pressure : 
(1)  During  inspiration  there  is  an  increased  flow  of  blood  into  the 
right  auricle  (aspiratory  action  of  inspiration).  (2)  During  inspira- 
tion the  capacity  of  the  blood-vessels  in  the  lungs  is  increased  and 
also  the  velocity  of  the  flow ;    consequently  there  is  an  increased 

*  For  discussion  and  literature  see  de  Jager,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte 
Physiologic,"  20,426,1879,  and  27,  152,  1882;  also  "Journal  of  Physiology," 
7,  130. 


590 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 


volume  of  blood  flowing  through  the  lungs  during  inspiration.  The 
increased  capacity  of  the  lung  capillaries  during  the  expansion  of 
the  lungs  was  shown  experimentally  by  Heger  and  Spehl.  They 
opened  the  anterior  mediastinum  without  wounding  the  pleura  and 
proved  that  if  the  lungs  are  tied  off  at  the  end  of  inspiration  they  con- 
tain more  blood  than  when  tied  off  at  the  end  of  expiration.  The  in- 
creased velocity  of  the  blood-flow  through  the  lungs  during  inspira- 
tion is  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  greater  negative  pressure  affects 
the  thin-walled  pulmonary  veins  more  than  the  pulmonary  artery; 
consequently  the  head  of  pressure  driving  the  blood  through  the 
lungs, — that  is,  the  difference  in  pressure  between  the  blood  in  the 
pulmonary  artery  and  veins — is  increased.  These  data  explain 
satisfactorily  the  general  fact  regarding  the  respiratory  waves, — 
namely,  that  during  inspiration  there  is  a  rise  of  aortic  pressure  due 
to  a  greater  output  of  blood  from  the  heart,  and  during  expiration 


Fig.  243. — Diagram  to  represent  the  time  relation  between  the  respiratory  waves  of 
blood-pressure  and  the  respiratory  movements  (dog) :  A  represents  the  blood-pressure 
record,  showing  the  heart-beats  and  the  larger  respiratory  waves.  B  represents  a  simul- 
taneous record  of  the  respiratory  movements.  At  the  beginning  of  inspiration  there  is  a 
fall  of  blood-pressure,  but  the  final  and  main  effect  is  a  rise.  At  the  beginning  of  expi- 
ration there  is  a  rise  of  pressure,  but  the  final  and  main  effect  is  a  fall. 


the  reverse.  To  account  for  the  subsidiary  fact  that  at  the  begin- 
ning of  inspiration  the  pressure  falls  and  at  the  beginning  of  expira- 
tion it  rises  for  a  time  two  explanations  are  offered.  De  Jager 
refers  these  temporary  effects  to  the  changes  in  capacity  of  the  blood- 
bed  in  the  lungs.  At  the  end  of  inspiration  there  is  a  certain  ca- 
pacity of  the  bed;  when  expiration  comes  on,  the  lungs  shrink,  the 
capacity  of  the  blood-vessels  is  thereby  diminished,  and  consequently 
some  blood  is  squeezed  out  of  the  lungs  in  the  direction  of  least 
resistance, — that  is,  toward  the  left  auricle.  This  accounts  for  the 
initial  rise  of  pressure  during  expiration.  At  the  beginning  of  inspi- 
ration, on  the  other  hand,  the  sudden  increase  in  capillary  capacity 
in  the  lungs  retards  for  a  moment  the  flow  of  blood  to  the  left  auricle, 
and  thus  accounts  for  the  temporary  fall  of  pressure.  Tigerstedt,* 
on  the  other  hand,  flnds  that  shutting  off  the  entire  circulation  of 
one  lung  may  have  little  or  no  influence  upon  the  pressure  in  the 

*  See  Tigerstedt,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  ii,  part  ii,  560,  1903. 


PRESSURE    CONDITIONS   IN    LUNGS   AND    THORAX.  591 

systemic  circulation,  and  therefore  doubts  whether  small  changes  in 
the  capacity  of  the  lung  vessels  can  have  any  distinct  effect  on  the 
inflow  into  the  left  auricle.  He  thinks  that  the  main  factor  is  the 
increased  flow  of  blood  to  the  right  auricle  during  inspiration,  and 
that  this  increased  amount  is  then  passed  on  to  the  left  auricle  and 
ventricle,  but  that  this  takes  some  little  time,  so  that  the  true  effect 
of  inspiration  is  not  felt  in  the  aorta  at  the  very  beginning  of  the 
act.  This  delay  may  vary  in  different  animals  and  may  account 
for  the  fact  that  in  some  animals  there  is  an  apparent  inversion  of 
the  relations  to  respiration,  the  aortic  pressure  falling  throughout 
inspiration  and  rising  during  expiration. 

The  increased  rate  of  heart  beat  during  inspiration  varies  as  to 
its  degree  in  different  individuals.  It  has  been  shown  by  Fredericq 
that  this  change  occurs  when  the  chest  is  widely  opened  and  the 
respiratory  movements  can  have  no  mechanical  effect  upon  the  heart. 
He  suggests,  therefore,  that  the  accelerated  pulse  during  inspiration 
is  due  to  an  associated  activity  in  the  nerve  centers  of  the  medulla. 
When  the  inspiratory  center  discharges  it  affects  the  neighboring 
cardio-inhibitory  center  in  the  direction  of  inhibition,  lessening  its 
tonic  activity  and  thereby  increasing  the  heart  rate. 

In  artificial  respiration  carried  out  by.  means  of  a  bellows — 
that  is,  by  expanding  the  lungs  with  positive  pressure — all  the 
conditions  of  pressure  in  inspiration  and  expiration  are  reversed. 
During  such  an  inspiration  the  flow  of  blood  to  the  right  heart,  and 
through  the  lungs  to  the  left  heart,  is  decreased.  Respirator}^ 
waves  of  pressure  are  present  under  such  conditions,  but  the  rela- 
tions of  rise  and  fall  to  the  phases  of  respiration  are  reversed. 


CHAPTER  XXXVI. 

THE    CHEMICAL   AND    PHYSICAL    CHANGES    IN    THE 
AIR  AND  THE  BLOOD  CAUSED  BY  RESPIRATION. 

The  Inspired  and  the  Expired  Air. — The  inspired  air,  atmos- 
pheric air,  varies  in  conaposition  in  different  places.  The  essential 
constituents  from  a  physiological  standpoint  are  the  oxygen, 
nitrogen,  and  carbon  dioxid.  The  new  elements — argon,  krypton, 
etc. — ^have  not  been  shown  to  have  any  physiological  significance, 
and  are  included  with  the  nitrogen.  The  accidental  constituents 
of  the  air  vary  with  the  locality.  In  average  figures,  the  composi- 
tion of  this  air  is,  in  volume  per  cent.:  nitrogen,  79;  oxygen,  20.96; 
carbon  dioxid,  0.04.  The  expired  air  varies  in  composition  with 
the  depth  of  the  expiration  and,  of  course,  with  the  composition  of 
the  air  inspired.  Under  normal  conditions  the  expired  air  contains, 
in  volume  per  cent. :  nitrogen,  79;  oxygen,  16.02;  carbon  dioxid, 
4.38.  In  passing  once  into  the  lungs  the  air,  therefore,  gains  4.34 
volumes  of  carbon  dioxid  to  each  hundred,  and  loses  4.94  volumes 
of  oxygen. 

N.  O.  CO2. 

Inspired 79  20.96  0.04 

Expired 79  16.02  4.38 

4.94  4.34 

This  table  expresses  the  main  fact  of  external  respiration:  the 
respired  air  loses  oxygen  and  gains  carbon  dioxid  and  consequently 
the  blood  absorbs  oxygen  and  eliminates  carbon  dioxid.  It  will  be 
noted,  also,  that  the  volume  of  oxygen  absorbed  is  greater  than  the 
volume  of  carbon  dioxid  given  off.  This  discrepancy  is  explained 
by  the  general  fact  that  the  oxygen  absorbed  is  used  in  the  long  run 
to  oxidize  the  carbon  and  also  the  hydrogen  of  the  body;  conse- 
quently, while  most  of  it  is  eliminated  in  the  expired  air  as  carbon 
dioxid,  some  of  it  is  excreted  as  water.  For  the  sake  of  complete- 
ness it  may  be  stated  that  traces  of  hydrogen  and  methane  are  also 
found  in  the  expired  ai  .  They  probably  originate  in  the  intestines 
from  fermentation  processes  and  are  carried  off  in  solution  in  the 
blood. 

Physical  Changes  in  the  Expired  Air. — ^The  expired  air  is 
warmed  nearly  or  quite  to  the  body  temperature  and  is  nearly 
saturated  with  water  vapor.     Since,  as  a  rule,  the  air  that  we 

592 


CHANGES   IN    AIR   AND    BLOOD    IN    RESPIRATION.  593 

inspire  is  much  cooler  than  the  body  and  is  far  from  being  saturated 
with  water  vapor,  it  is  evident  that  the  act  of  respiration  entails 
upon  the  body  a  loss  of  heat  and  of  water.  Breathing  is,  in  fact, 
one  of  the  means  by  which  the  body  temperature  is  regulated, 
although  in  man  it  is  a  subsidiary  means.  In  other  animals — the 
dog,  for  instance — panting  is  a  very  important  aid  in  controlling  the 
body  heat.  Heat  is  lost  in  respiration  not  simply  in  warming  the 
air  in  the  air  passages,  but  also  by  the  evaporation  of  water  in  the 
alveoli,  the  conversion  of  water  from  the  liquid  to  the  gaseous  form 
being  attended  by  an  absorption  of  heat.  Breathing  is  also  one 
of  the  means  by  which  the  water  contents  of  the  body  are  regulated. 
The  water  that  we  ingest  or  that  is  formed  within  the  body  is  kept 
within  certain  limits,  and  this  regulation  is  effected  by  the  secretions 
of  urine  and  sweat  mainly,  but  in  part  also  by  the  constant  loss  of 
water  from  the  blood  as  it  passes  through  the  lungs. 

The  Injurious  Effect  of  Breathing  Expired  Air — Ventila- 
tion.— It  is  generally  recognized  that  in  badly  ventilated  rooms  the 
air  acquires  a  disagreeable  odor,  perceptible  especially  immediately 
on  entering,  and  that  persons  remaining  under  such  conditions  for 
any  length  of  time  suffer  from  headache,  depression,  and  a  general 
feeling  of  imcomfortableness.  It  has  been .  assumed,  although 
without  sufficient  proof,  that  these  effects  are  due  to  the  vitiation  of 
the  atmosphere  by  the  expired  air.  When  the  ventilation  is  ver\' 
imperfect  and  the  room  greatly  crowded  death  may  result,  as,  for 
instance,  in  the  historical  case  of  the  Black  Hole  of  Calcutta.  In 
extreme  cases  of  this  latter  kind  it  is  most  probable  that  several 
causes  combine  to  produce  a  fatal  result.  The  conditions  are  such 
as  to  lead  to  a  very  large  increase  in  carbon  dioxid  and  diminution 
of  oxygen  in  the  respired  air, — a  result  which  in  itself  will  cause  death ; 
and  in  addition  the  air  becomes  heated  to  a  high  temperature  and 
saturated  with  water  vapor,  both  of  these  latter  conditions  prevent- 
ing loss  of  heat  from  the  body  and  producing  a  fever  temperature. 
Under  the  ordinary  conditions  of  life  poor  ventilation  produces  its 
obviously  evil  results  in  rooms  temporarily  occupied, — schools, 
churches,  lecture  rooms,  theaters,  etc., — and  it  is  important  to  know 
what  is  the  cause,  and  how  it  may  be  avoided.  On  the  basis  of  older 
work  it  has  been  assumed  that  there  is  present  in  the  expired  air  a 
volatile  organic  substance  which  when  breathed  again,  possibly  after 
having  undergone  some  further  change,  exerts  a  toxic  influence.  The 
evil  effects  of  badly  ventilated  rooms  have  been  attributed  mainly 
to  this  supposed  substance.  Unfortunately  the  investigations  that 
have  been  made  upon  this  substance  are  not  altogether  conclusive.* 

*  See  Haldane  and  Smith,   "  Journal  of  Pathology  and  Bacteriology, " 
1,  168  and  318,  1893;  Merkel,  "  Archiv  f.  Hygiene,"  15,"  1,  1892.     Formanek, 
"Archiv  f.  Hygiene,"  38,  1,  1900. 
38 


594  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

It  seems  to  be  clear  that,  when  the  expired  air  is  condensed  by  pass- 
ing it  into  a  cooled  chamber,  the  water  thus  obtained,  about  100 
c.c.  for  2500  liters  of  air,  is  clear,  odorless,  and  has  only  a  minute 
trace  of  organic  matter.  If  this  liquid  with  or  without  conden- 
sation is  injected  under  the  skin  or  into  the  blood-vessels  no 
evil  result  follows,  according  to  the  testimony  of  the  majority  of 
observers.  But  it  remains  possible,  of  course,  that  the  substance 
if  present  may  be  destroyed  by  this  method  or  may  escape  precipi- 
tation in  the  condensed  water.  The  experiment  that  gives  the 
most  positive  indication  of  the  existence  of  an  organic  (basic)  poison 
in  the  expired  air  is  the  following,  first  performed  by  Brown- 
Sequard:  A  series  of — say,  five — bottles,  each  of  a  capacity  of  a 
liter  or  more,  are  connected  together  in  train  so  that  air  can  be 
drawn  through  them  by  an  aspirator.  A  live  mouse  is  placed  in 
each  bottle,  and  between  bottles  4  and  5  an  absorption  tube  is  ar- 
ranged containing  sulphuric  acid.  Under  these  conditions  only  the 
mouse  in  bottle  1  gets  fresh  air,  those  in  the  successive  bottles  get 
more  and  more  impure  air,  while  in  bottle  5  this  air  is  purified  to  the 
extent  of  removing  the  organic  matter  by  passing  it  through  sul- 
phuric acid.  The  result  of  such  an  experiment  as  described  by 
some  observers  is  that  the  mouse  in  bottle  4  dies  after  a  certain  num- 
ber of  hours,  the  one  in  bottle  3  later,  while  those  in  the  first  and 
last  bottles  show  no  injurious  effects.  The  obvious  conclusion  is  that 
death  in  such  cases  is  due  to  some  organic  toxic  substance,  and  not 
to  a  mere  increase  of  carbon  dioxid,  chemical  analysis  showing  that 
this  latter  substance  does  not  accumulate  sufficiently  under  these 
conditions  to  cause  a  fatal  result.  Some  other  observers  have  failed 
to  get  this  effect,  but  even  assuming  it  to  be  correct  it  will  be  noted 
that  the  experiment  gives  no  proof  that  the  organic  substance  in 
question  is  excreted  in  the  expired  air.  Indeed,  the  seemingly 
very  careful  experiments  of  Formanek  make  it  probable  that  in 
these  experiments  the  toxic  substance  is  ammonia  or  an  ammonia 
compound,  which  is  not  given  off  from  the  lungs,  but  from  the  decom- 
position of  the  urine  and  feces  in  the  cage.  When  this  latter  source 
of  contamination  is  removed  the  expired  air  is  practically  free 
from  ammonia  and  without  injurious  effect.  The  expired  air 
therefore,  according  to  work  of  this  character,  contains  no  organic 
poison  which  can  be  regarded  as  a  product  of  respiration. 

Some  observers  (Hermann,  Haldane,  and  Smith)  have  made 
careful  experiments  upon  men  which  also  seem  to  throw  much 
doubt  upon  the  existence  of  such  a  substance.  Individuals  kept 
in  a  confined  space  for  a  number  of  hours  give  no  symptoms  of  evil 
effects  except  when  the  accumulation  of  the  carbon  dioxid  has 
reached  a  concentration  of  over  4  per  cent.  At  this  concentration 
rapid  breathing  is  apparent,  and  if  it  rises  to  10  per  cent,  great 


CHANGES   IN   AIR   AND    BLOOD   IN   RESPIRATION.  595 

distress  is  felt  and  the  face  becomes  congested  and  blue.  These 
authors  conclude  that  expired  air  is  injurious  in  itself  only  from  the 
carbon  dioxid  it  contains,  and  not  because  of  any  special  poison. 
We  must  admit,  therefore,  that  the  existence  of  an  organic  poison 
in  the  expired  air  has  not  been  conclusively  demonstrated — in  fact, 
has  been  made  exceedingly  improbable.  The  definitely  known  evil 
results  of  breathing  the  air  of  crowded,  poorly  ventilated  rooms  must 
be  referred  to  other  possible  causes,  such  as  the  increase  in  temper- 
ature and  moisture.  These  two  conditions  cause  depression  and 
malaise  even  when  good  ventilation  is  provided.  It  is  possible,  also, 
that  the  material  given  off  from  the  skin  in  the  perspiration,  seba- 
ceous secretions,  etc.,  may  account  sufficiently  for  the  odor  and  pos- 
sibly also  for  some  of  the  general  evil  effects.  If  the  ventilation  is  so 
poor  that  the  carbon  dioxid  accumulates  to  the  extent  of  3  to  4  per 
cent.,  then  this  factor  begins  to  exercise  a  direct  effect  upon  the  res- 
piratory movements  and  the  general  condition, — an  effect  which 
increases  as  the  percentage  of  carbon  dioxid  rises. 

Ventilation. — It  is  obvious  from  the  foregoing  statements  that 
our  knowledge  is  not  yet  sufficiently  complete  to  enable  us  to  say 
positively  at  what  point  air  in  a  room  becomes  injurious  to  breathe, 
whether  from  products  of  expiration  or  exhalation  or  changes  in 
temperature  and  moisture.  The  statement  is  frequently  made  in 
the  books  that,  when  the  air  contains  as  much  as  1  per  cent,  of 
carbon  dioxid  (Smith)  that  has  been  produced  by  breathing,  evil 
results,  as  judged  by  one's  feelings,  are  sure  to  occur,  but  the  ex- 
periments of  Haldane  and  Smith  seem  to  disprove  this  statement 
entirely.  The  practical  rule  in  ventilation  is  to  keep  the  air  in 
chambers  as  nearly  as  possible  of  the  composition  of  the  atmosphere 
outside.  Since  carbon  dioxid  is  the  constituent  of  the  air  that  is 
most  easily  determined  the  relative  purity  of  room  air  is  judged 
conveniently  by  quantitative  estimations  of  this  constituent.  Or- 
dinary atmospheric  air  contains,  on  the  average,  0.04  per  cent. 
of  carbon  dioxid — that  is,  4  parts  to  10,000.  The  hygienists  main- 
tain that  the  ventilation  should  be  sufficiently  ample  to  keep  the 
carbon  dioxid  down  to  6  parts  per  10,000,  thus  leaving  2  parts 
per  10,000,  0.02  vol.  per  cent.,  as  the  permissible  limit  of  vitia- 
tion by  breathing.  To  determine  on  this  basis  the  amount  of 
air  necessary  for  each  person  the  following  formula  is  used: 
d  =  -,  in  which  d  represents  in  cubic  meters  the  deliver}^  of  fresh 
air  per  hour;  e,  the  amount  of  COj  expired  per  hour  in  liters;  and  r 
the  ratio  of  permissible  vitiation  of  the  air  by  CO 2-  Assuming  this 
latter  factor,  in  accordance  with  the  above  statement,  to  be  equal  to 
0.2,  and  e  to  be  equal  to  20  hters  per  hour  (500  X  0.04  X  17  X  60), 
the  value  of  d  is  equal  to  100  cubic  meters  of  air  per  hour  for  each 
person.     The  rapidity  of  renewal  of  air  will  depend  naturally  upon 


596  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

the  cubic  space  allotted  to  each  individual.  The  smaller  this  space, 
the  more  ample  must  be  the  ventilation.  The  following  figures* 
give  an  idea  of  the  values  adopted  for  different  conditions : 

Amount  of  Ventilation         Cubic  Space  per 
FEB  Hour  per  Person  Person  in  Cubic 

in  Cubic  Meters.  Meters. 

Hospitals 60-100  30-50 

Prisons 50  25 

Factories 60-100  30-50 

Barracks 30-50  15-25 

Theaters 40-50  20-25 

Halls  and  assembly  rooms 30-60  15-30 

Schools 15-20  7.5-10 

Classrooms  for  adults 25-30  12-15 

The  amount  of  cubic  space  allowed  is  based,  it  will  be  noted,  upon 
the  supposition  that  the  air  is  completely  renewed  by  ventilation 
during  the  course  of  an  hour. 

The  Gases  of  the  Blood. — The  gases  that  are  contained  in  the 
blood  are  oxygen,  carbon  dioxid,  and  nitrogen.  These  gases  may 
be  extracted  completely  and  in  a  condition  for  quantitative  analysis 
by  means  of  some  form  of  gas-pump.  The  principle  of  most  of  the 
gas-pumps  used  in  the  physiological  laboratories  is  the  same.  The 
apparatus  is  arranged  so  that  the  blood  to  be  examined  is  brought 
into  a  vacuum  while  kept  at  the  temperature  of  the  body.  Under 
these  conditions  all  of  the  oxygen  and  nitrogen  and  part  of  the  car- 
bon dioxid  are  given  off  and  may  be  collected  by  suitable  means. 
A  portion  of  the  carbon  dioxid  present  in  the  blood  is  in  such 
stable  combination  that  to  remove  it  it  may  be  necessary  to  add 
some  dilute  acid,  such  as  phosphoric  acid.  This  portion  of  the 
carbon  dioxid  is  designated  in  tliis  connection  as  the  fixed  carbon 
dioxid. 

The  principle  of  the  gas  pump  may  be  explained  most  easily  by  describing 
the  simple  form  devised  by  Grehant.  The  essential  parts  of  this  pump  are 
represented  in  Fig.  244.  The  mercun,^  pump  consists  of  two  bulbs,  one  mov- 
able (M) ,  the  other  fixed  (F) .  M  may  be  raised  and  lowered  by  the  windlass 
(P).  Above  F,  there  is  a  three-way  stopcock  (m)  bj^  means  of  which  the 
chamber  F  may  be  put  into  communication  with  the  outside  air  by  way  of  C, 
or  with  the  bulb  B,  which  is  to  contain  the  blood,  or  may  be  shut  off  com- 
pletely. If  M  is  raised  so  as  to  fill  F  entirely,  and  the  stopcock  m  is  shut  off, 
then  on  lowering  M  the  mercury  will  flow  into  it,  leaving  a  perfect  A'acuum 
in  F,  since  the  distance  between  F  and  M  is  greater  than  the  barometric 
height.  If  the  stopcock  m  is  turned  so  as  to  throw  F  into  communication 
with  B,  the  chamber  of  this  latter  is  brought  under  the  influence  of  the  vac- 
uum and  any  gases  that  it  may  contain  will  be  distributed  between  B  and 
F.  If  stopcock  m  is  again  turned  off  and  M  is  raised  the  gases  in  F  will  be 
condensed  at  its  upper  end,  and  by  turning  the  stopcock  m  properly  these 
gases  may  be  forced  to  the  outside  by  way  of  C  or  may  be  collected,  if  de- 
sired, in  a  burette  filled  with  mercury  and  inverted  OA'er  the  opening  from 
F  contained  in  the  bottom  of  C.  In  performing  an  experiment  the  flask 
B,  which  is  to  contain  the  blood,  is  connected  with  F,  as  shown  in  the  figure, 

*  Taken  from  Bergey,  "  The  Principles  of  Hygiene, "  1904. 


CHANGES   IN   AIR   AND    BLOOD   IN   RESPIRATION, 


597 


all  joints  being  protected  from  leakage  by  a  seal  of  water  outside,  as  siiown 
at  /;,  which  represents  a  piece  of  wide  rubber  tubing  filled  with  water  so  as 
to  protect  a  joint  between  two  pieces  of  glass  tubing.  B  is  next  exhausted 
completely  by  raising  and  lowering  M  a  number  of  times  in  the  way  described 
above  until  on  throwing  B  into  commimication  with  a  vacuum  in  F  no  further 
gas  is  given  off.  The  last  particles  of  air  may  be  driven  out  from  B  by  boil- 
ing a  little  water  in  it.     After  a  complete  vacuum  has  been  established  in  B 


Fig.  244. — Gas  pump  for  extracting  the  gases  of  blood  (Grehanf) :  M  and  F, 
The  mercury  receivers;  P,  the  windlass  for  raising  and  lowering  M;  m,  a,  three-way 
stopcock  protected  by  a  seal  of  mercury  or  water;  C,  a  cup  with  mercury  over  which 
the  reoei\'ing  eudiometer  is  placed  to  collect  the  gases;  B,  the  bulb  in  which,  after  a 
vacuum  is  made,  the  blood  is  introduced  by  the  graduated  syringe,  S.  By  means  of  the 
stopcock  m  the  vacuum  in  F,  caused  by  the  fall  of  the  mercury,  can  be  placed  in  communi- 
cation with  B.  After  the  gases  have  diffused  over  into  F,  M  is  raised,  and  when  the  stop- 
cock m  is  properly  turned  these  gases  are  driven  out  through  C  into  the  receiving  tube. 
The  operation  is  repeated  until  no  more  gas  is  given  off  from  B. 


a  measured  amount  of  blood  is  introduced  from  a  graduated  syringe,  S,  as 
represented  in  the  figure.  This  blood  must  be  taken  directly  from  the  vessels 
of  the  animal  and  be  introduced  into  B  at  once.  B  is  kept  immersed  in  water 
at  the  temperature  of  the  body,  and  the  bulb  M  is  noAV  raised  and  lowered  a 
number  of  times  so  that  the  gases  given  off  from  the  blood  are  drawn  over 
into  F  and  then  by  proper  manipulation   of  the  stopcock  are  dri^-en  into 


598  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

a  burette  fastened  over  the  opening  of  the  tube  in  C.  To  drive  off  all  of  the 
carbon  dioxid  a  little  dilute  phosphoric  acid  must  be  added  to  the  blood  in 
B  by  means  of  the  syringe,  S.  The  gases  thus  collected  into  the  burette  are 
first  measured  and  are  then  analyzed  for  the  three  important  constituents 
by  some  of  tlie  accepted  gasometric  methods.  The  principle  involved  is  to 
absorb  first  from  the  mixture  all  of  the  COg  by  introducing  a  solution  of  sodium 
or  potassium  hydrate.  The  reading  of  the  volume  left  after  this  absorption 
is  completed  compared  with  the  first  reading  gives  the  volume  of  COg.  Next, 
a  freshly  made  alkaline  solution  of  pyrogallic  acid  is  introduced  into  the  tube. 
This  solution  absorbs  all  of  the  oxygen,  whose  volume  is  thus  easily  determined. 
The  gas  that  is  left  unabsorbed  after  the  action  of  these  two  solutions  is  nitro- 
gen. The  volumes  of  gases  are  reduced,  as  is  the  custom,  to  unit  pressure 
and  temperature, — that  is,  to  zero  degree  centigrade  and  760  mms.  barometric 
pressure.  A  correction  must  also  be  made  for  the  tension  or  pressure  exerted 
by  the  aqueous  vapor  in  the  gases.  These  corrections  are  made  by  means 
of  the  following  formula : 

yi^  V(B-T) 

760  X  (1  +  0.003665 1) 

in  which  V^  represents  the  corrected  volume,  V  the  volume  actually  observed, 
B  the  barometric  height  at  the  time  and  place  of  the  observation,  T 
the  aqueous  tension  at  the  temperature  of  the  reading,  and  t  the  temperature 
in  degrees  centigrade. 

By  means  of  such  methods  the  gases  in  the  blood  have  been  de- 
termined. The  quantities  vary  somewhat,  of  course,  with  the  con- 
ditions of  the  animal  and  with  the  species  of  animal.  In  a  quick 
analysis  of  dogs'  arterial  blood  made  by  Pfliiger  the  following 
figures  were  obtained  reckoned  in  volumes  per  cent. :  O,  22.6;  COj, 
34.3;  N,  1.8.  In  this  case  each  100  c.c.  of  arterial  blood  contained 
22.6  c.c.  of  O  and  34.3  c.c.  of  COj  measured  at  0°  C.  and  760  mms. 
Hg.  An  analysis  of  human  blood  (Setschenow)  gave  closely  similar 
figures;  0,  21.6  per  cent.;  COg,  40.3  per  cent.;  and  N,  1.6  per  cent. 
When  the  arterial  and  the  venous  bloods  are  compared  it  is  found 
that  the  venous  blood  has  more  carbon  dioxid  and  less  oxygen. 
Average  figures  showing  the  difference  in  composition  are  as  follows : 

O.  COz.  N. 

Arterial  blood 20  38  1.7 

Venous  blood 12  45  1.7 

Difference .~8  ~7  ~~0 

The  actual  amounts  of  oxygen  and  carbon  dioxid  in  the  venous 
blood  vslvj  with  the  nutritive  activity  of  the  tissues,  and  differ 
therefore  in  the  various  organs  according  to  the  state  of  activity  of 
each  organ  in  relation  to  the  volume  of  its  blood  supply.  This 
point  is  well  illustrated  by  some  analyses  made  by  Hill  and  Na- 
barro*  of  the  gases  in  the  venous  blood  from  the  brain  and  the 
muscles,  respectively.  Their  average  results  when  both  tissues 
were  at  rest  were  as  follows : 

Oxygen.  Carbon  Dioxid. 

Venous  blood  from  limbs  (femoral) ....   6.34  per  cent.         45.75  per  cent. 
"  "         "     brain  (torcular)   ...13.49     "       "  41.65     "       " 

*  Hill  and  Nabarro,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  18,  218,  1895. 


CHANGES   IN   AIR    AND    BLOOD    IN   RESPIRATION.  599 

It  will  be  seen  that  under  similar  conditions  there  is  much  less 
oxygen  used  and  carbon  dioxid  formed  in  the  brain  than  in  the 
Hmbs  (muscles).  In  the  former  organ  the  physiological  oxidations 
must  either  be  small  compared  with  those  of  the  muscles,  or  the 
brain  tissues  receive  a  relatively  ample  supply  of  blood,  so  that  the 
tissue  metabolism  has  less  effect  upon  the  blood  composition.  The 
venous  blood  as  it  comes  to  the  lungs  is  a  mixture  of  bloods  from 
different  organs,  and  its  composition  in  gases  will  be  constant  only 
when  the  conditions  of  the  body  are  kept  uniform.  Much  work 
has  been  done  in  physiology  to  determine  the  condition  in  which 
these  various  gases  are  held  in  the  blood.  The  results  obtained 
show  that  they  are  held  partly  in  solution  and  partly  in  chemical 
combination.  To  understand  the  part  played  by  each  factor  and 
the  conditions  that  control  the  exchange  of  gases  in  the  lungs  and 
tissues  it  is  necessary  to  recall  some  facts  regarding  the  physical 
and  chemical  properties  of  gases. 

The  Pressure  of  Gases  and  the  Terms  Expressing  these 
Pressures. — The  air  around  us  exists  under  a  pressure  of  one 
atmosphere  and  is  expressed  usually  in  terms  of  the  height  of  a 
column  of  mercury  that  it  will  support, — namely,  a  column  of  760 
mms.  Hg,  which  is  known  as  the  normal  barometric  pressure  at 
sea-level.  Air  is  a  mixture  of  gases,  and  according  to  the  mechani- 
cal theory  of  gases  each  constituent  exerts  a  pressure  corresponding 
to  the  proportion  of  that  gas  present.  In  atmospheric  air,  therefore, 
the  oxygen,  being  j)resent  to  the  extent  of  20  per  cent.,  exerts  a 
pressure  of  |- of  an  atmosphere  or -5^X760=  152  mms.  Hg.  When 
we  speak  of  one  atmosphere  of  gas  pressure,  therefore,  we  mean  a 
pressure  equivalent  to  760  mms.  Hg,  and  in  any  given  mixture  the 
pressure  exerted  by  any  constituent  may  be  expressed  in  percen- 
tages or  fractions  of  an  atmosphere  or  in  the  equivalent  height  of  the 
mercury  column  which  it  will  support. 

Absorption  of  Gases  in  Liquids.— When  a  gas  is  brought  into 
contact  with  a  liquid  with  which  it  does  not  react  chemically  a 
certain  number  of  the  moving  gaseous  molecules  penetrate  the 
liquid  and  become  dissolved.  Some  of  these  dissolved  molecules 
escape  from  the  water  from  time  to  time,  again  becoming 
gaseous.  It  is  evident,  however,  that  if  a  liquid,  water,  is  brought 
into  contact  with  a  gas  under  definite  pressure, — that  is,  containing 
a  definite  number  of  molecules  to  a  unit  volume, — an  equilibrium 
will  be  established.  As  many  molecules  will  penetrate  the  liquid 
in  a  given  time  as  escape  from  it,  and  the  liquid  will  hold  a  definite 
number  of  the  gas  molecules  in  solution.  It  will  be  saturated  for 
that  pressure  of  gas.  If  the  pressure  of  the  gas  is  increased,  how- 
ever, an  equilibrium  will  be  established  at  a  higher  level  and  more 
molecules  of  gas  will  be  dissolved  in  the  liquid.     Experiments  have 


600  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

shown,  in  accordance  with  this  mechanical  conception,  that  the 
amount  of  a  given  gas  dissolved  by  a  given  liquid  varies,  the  temper- 
ature remaining  the  same,  directly  with  the  pressure, — that  is, 
it  increases  and  decreases  proportionally  with  the  rise  and  fall  of 
the  gas  pressure.  This  is  the  law  of  Henry-Dalton.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  amount  of  gas  dissolved  by  a  liquid  varies  inversely  with 
the  temperature.  It  follows,  also,  from  the  same  mechanical  views 
that  in  a  mixture  of  gases  each  gas  is  dissolved  in  proportion 
to  the  pressure  that  it  exerts,  and  not  in  proportion  to  the  pressure 
of  the  mixture.  Air  consists,  in  round  numbers,  of  4  parts  of  N  and 
1  part  of  0.  Consequently,  when  a  volume  of  water  is  exposed  to 
the  air  the  oxygen  is  dissolved  according  to  its  "partial  pressure," 
— that  is,  under  a  pressure  of  ^  of  an  atmosphere  (152  mms.  Hg). 
The  water  will  contain  only  ^  as  much  oxygen  as  it  would  if  exposed 
to  a  full  atmosphere  of  oxygen — that  is,  to  pure  oxygen.  And,  on 
the  other  hand,  if  water  has  been  saturated  with  oxygen  at  one 
atmosphere  (760  mms.)  of  pressure  and  is  then  exposed  to  air, 
four-fifths  of  the  dissolved  oxygen  will  be  given  off,  since  the  pressure 
of  the  surrounding  oxygen  has  been  diminished  that  much.  Ab- 
sorption coefficient.  By  this  term  is  meant  the  number  that  ex- 
presses the  proportion  of  gas  dissolved  in  a  unit  volume  of  the  Hquid 
under  one  atmosphere  of  pressure.  The  absorption  coefficient  will 
vary,  of  course,  with  the  temperature.  The  gases  that  interest  us 
in  this  connection  are  oxygen,  nitrogen,  and  carbon  dioxid.  The 
absorption  coefficients  of  these  gases  for  the  blood  at  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  body  are  as  follows :  0,0.0262;  N,  0.0130;  CO^,  0.5283. 
That  is,  1  c.c.  of  blood  at  body  temperature  dissolves  0.0262  of 
1  c.c.  of  oxygen  if  exposed  to  an  atmosphere  of  pure  oxygen,  and 
so  on.  The  solubility  of  the  CO 2  is  therefore  twenty  times  as  great 
as  that  of  oxygen.  Accepting  these  figures,  we  may  calculate  how 
much  of  these  three  gases  can  be  held  in  the  arterial  blood  in  physical 
solution,  provided  we  know  the  pressure  of  the  gases  in  the  alveoU 
of  the  lungs.  The  composition  of  the  alveolar  air  will  be  discussed 
farther  on,  but  we  may  assume  at  present  that  it  contains  80  per 
cent,  of  nitrogen,  15  per  cent,  of  oxygen,  and  5  per  cent,  of  carbon 
dioxid.  In  100  c.c.  of  blood,  therefore,  the  following  amounts  of 
these  gases  should  be  held  in  solution: 

Nitrogen 100  X  0.013     X  0.80  =  1.04    c.c. 

Oxygen 100  X  0.0262  X  0.15  =  0.393    " 

Carbon  dioxid 100  X  0.5283  X  0.05  =  2.64      " 

As  will  be  seen  from  the  analyses  given  above  of  the  actual  amounts 
of  these  gases  obtained  from  the  blood,  the  nitrogen  alone  is  present 
in  quantities  corresponding  to  what  would  be  expected  if  it  is 
held  in  simple  physical  solution. 


CHANGES   IN   AIR   AND    BLOOD    IN   RESPIRATION.  601 

The  Tension  or  Pressure  of  Gases  in  Solution  or  Combi- 
nation.— When  a  gas  is  held  in  solution  the  equilibrium  is  de- 
stroyed if  the  pressure  of  this  gas  in  the  surrounding  medium  or 
atmosphere  is  changed.  If  this  pressure  is  increased  the  liquid 
takes  up  more  of  the  gas,  and  an  equilibrium  is  established  at  a 
higher  level.  If  the  pressure  is  decreased  the  liquid  gives  off 
some  of  the  gas.  That  pressure  of  the  gas  in  the  surrounding 
atmosphere  at  which  equilibrium  is  established  measures  the  tension 
of  the  gas  in  the  liquid  at  that  time.  Thus,  when  a  bowl  of  water  is 
exposed  to  the  air  the  tension  of  the  oxygen  in  solution  is  152  mms. 
Hg;  that  of  the  nitrogen  is  608  mms.  Hg.  If  the  same  water  is 
exposed  to  pure  oxygen  the  tension  of  the  oxygen  in  solution  is 
equal  to  760  mms.  Hg,  while  that  of  the  nitrogen  sinks  to  zero 
if  the  gas  that  is  given  off  from  the  water  is  removed.  With 
compounds  such  as  oxyhemoglobin  the  tension  under  which  the 
oxygen  is  held  is  measured  by  the  pressure  of  the  gas  in  the  sur- 
rounding atmosphere  at  which  the  compound  neither  takes  up  nor 
gives  off  oxygen.  If,  therefore,  it  is  necessary  to  determine  the 
tension  of  any  gas  held  in  solution  or  in  dissociable  combination  it  is 
sufficient  to  determine  the  percentage  of  that  gas  in  the  surrounding 
atmosphere  and  thus  ascertain  the  partial  pressure  that  it  exerts. 
If  the  atmosphere  contains  5  per  cent,  of  the  gas  the  partial  pressure 
is  equal  to  38  mms.  Hg  (760  X  0.05),  and  this  figure  expresses 
the  tension  under  which  the  gas  is  held  in  solution  or  combination. 
As  regards  the  tension  of  the  gases  in  arterial  and  venous  blood, 
this  procedure  is,  of  course,  not  possible,  since  the  blood  is  sur- 
rounded, not  by  an  atmosphere  whose  composition  can  be  analyzed, 
but  by  the  Uquids  of  the  body,  the  lymph  and  cell  juices.  To 
determine  the  tension  of  the  gases  in  the  blood  it  is  necessary  to 
remove  the  blood  from  the  vessels  and  bring  it  into  contact  with  an 
atmosphere  containing  a  known  quantity  of  0,  COj,  or  ]^,  according 
to  the  gas  to  be  measured.  By  trial  an  atmosphere  can  be  obtained 
in  which  this  gas  is  contained  in  amounts  such  that  there  is  no 
marked  increase  or  decrease  in  quantity  after  standing  in  diffusion 
relations  with  the  blood.  The  percentage  of  the  gas  in  the  atmos- 
phere chosen  will  measure  the  tension  of  that  gas  in  the  blood.  An 
instrument  which  has  been  much  used  for  such  determinations  is 
represented  diagrammatically  in  Fig.  245.  It  is  known  as  an  aero- 
tonometer  (Pfliiger).  It  consists  of  a  tube  (A)  which  can  be  con- 
nected through  b  directly  with  the  blood-vessels.  This  tube  A  is 
surrounded  by  a  jacket  (C)  containing  warm  water,  so  that  the  blood 
may  be  kept  at  the  body  temperature  during  the  experiment.  A 
is  first  completely  filled  with  mercury  from  the  bulb  M  to  drive  out 
the  air.  An  atmosphere  of  known  composition  is  then  sucked  into 
A  by  dropping  the  bulb.     Blood  is  allowed  to  flow  into  A  through 


602 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 


the  stopcock  b  and  to  trickle  down  the  sides  of  the  tube.  Diffusion 
relations  are  set  up  between  the  blood  and  the  known  atmosphere, 
and  after  equilibrium  has  been  established  the  gas  is  driven  out 
through  a  into  a  convenient  receiver  and  analyzed.  If  two  aero- 
tonometers  are  used,  one  containing  the  gas  at  somewhat  higher 
pressure  than  that  expected,  and  the  other  at  a  somewhat  lower 

pressure,  an  average  result  is  ob- 
tained which  expresses  with  suffi- 
cient accuracy  the  pressure  of  the 
given  gas  in  the  blood. 

It  is  important  not  to  confuse 
the  tension  at  which  a  gas  is  held 
in  a  liquid  with  the  volume  of  the 
gas.  Thus,  blood  exposed  to  the 
air  contains  its  oxygen  under  a 
tension  of  152  mms.  Hg,  but  the 
amount  of  oxygen  is  equal  to  20 
volumes  per  cent.  Water  exposed 
to  the  air  contains  its  oxygen  un- 
der the  same  tension,  but  the 
amount  of  gas  in  solution  is  less 
than  1  volume  per  cent.  Tensions 
of  gases  in  liquids  are  expressed 
either  in  percentages  of  an  atmos- 
phere or  in  millimeters  of  mercury. 
Thus,  the  tension  of  oxygen  in  ar- 
terial blood  is  found  to  be  equal 
to  about  10  per  cent,  of  an  atmos- 
phere or  76  mms.  Hg.  (760  X  0.10). 
The  Condition  and  Signifi- 
cance of  the  Nitrogen. — We  may 
accept  the  view  that  the  nitrogen 
of  the  blood  is  held  in  physical 
solution.  The  amount  present 
corresponds  with  this  view,  and, 
moreover,  it  is  found  that  the 
quantity  varies  directly  with  the 
pressure  in  accordance  with  the 
law  of  Henry  and  Dalton.  If  an 
animal  is  permitted  to  breathe  an  atmosphere  of  oxygen  and 
hydrogen  the  nitrogen  disappears  from  the  blood,  and  the  nitrogen 
contents  of  the  arterial  and  venous  bloods  exhibit  no  constant 
difference  in  quantity.  It  seems  certain,  therefore,  that  the  nitro- 
gen plays  no  direct  role  in  the  physiological  processes.  It  is  ab- 
sorbed by  the  blood  in  proportion  to  its  partial  pressure  in  the 


Fig.  246. — Diagram  to  show  the 
principle  of  the  aerotonometer :  .4,  The 
tube  containing  a  known  mixture  of 
gases,  O,  CO2,  N;  C,  the  outside  jacket 
for  maintaining  a  constant  body  tem- 
perature. When  stopcock  b  is  open 
the  blood  trickles  down  the  sides  of  A 
and  enters  into  diffusion  relations  with 
the  contained  gases.  After  equilibrium 
is  reached  the  stopcock  b  is  closed  and 
a  is  opened.  By  means  of  the  mer- 
cury bulb  the  gases  can  then  be  forced 
out  of  A  into  a  suitable  receiver  for 
analysis. 


CHANGES   IN    AIR   AND    BLOOD    IN   RESPIRATION. 


603 


alveoli  of  the  lungs  and  circulates  in  the  blood  in  small  amounts 
without  exerting  any  immediate  influence  upon  the  tissues. 

Condition  of  Oxygen  in  the  Blood. — That  the  oxygen  is  not 
held  in  the  blood  merely  in  solution  is  indicated,  in  the  first  place, 
by  the  large  quantity  present  and,  in  the  second  place,  by  the  fact 
that  this  quantity  does  not  vary  directly  with  the  pressure  in  the 
surrounding  medium.  It  is  definitely  known  that  by  far  the  largest 
portion  of  the  oxygen  is  held  in  chemical  combination  with  the 
hemoglobin  of  the  red  corpuscles,  while  a  much  smaller  portion, 
varying  with  the  pressure,  is  held  in  solution  in  the  plasma.  The 
compound  oxyhemoglobin  possesses  the  important  property  that 
when  the  pressure  of  oxygen  in  the  surrounding  medium  falls  suffi- 
ciently it  begins  to  dissociate  and  free  oxygen  is  given  off.     The  proc- 


s 

4 

^ 

t 

g- 

% 

?S 

oC 

5 

j^ 

nS) 

<:> 

5? 

s 

^ 

^ 

"^ 

s$ 

^ 

X. 

~- 

— 

- 

... 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 



— 

— 

— 

.- 

.- 

._ 

"~ 

--- 

"- 

"~ 

^, 

~^ 

. 

■^ 

-^ 

\ 

\ 

^^ 

\ 

\ 

26 

f' 

// 

V, 

/f 

f. 

// 

fi 

/6, 

f. 

/« 

■/. 

-*/ 

r. 

13' 

Y> 

yff 

•a 

'n 

'' 

/"/ 

^ 

7r 

sy 

7/ 

'. 

(•I 

% 

i/ 

t^ 

'/ 

^ 

Z'/ 

/; 

rcofa 

86f. 


Fig.  246. — Curve,  dotted  line,  to  show  the  dissociation  of  oxyhemoglobin  in  blood 
under  different  pressures  of  oxygen.  (After  Loewy.)  The  ordinates  give  the  percentages 
of  saturation  of  the  hemoglobin  with  oxygen,  assuming  complete  saturation  (100  per  cent.) 
when  blood  is  exposed  to  atmospheric  air.  The  corresponding  pressures  of  oxygen  are 
represented  along  the  abscissa,  at  the  top  in  mms.  of  mercury,  at  the  bottom  in  percentages 
of  an  atmosphere. 


ess  of  dissociation  is  facilitated  also  by  increase  of  temperature, 
provided,  of  course,  that  it  does  not  rise  to  the  point  of  coagulating 
the  hemoglobin.  The  amount  of  dissociation  that  takes  place  under 
different  pressures  of  oxygen  in  the  surrounding  medium  has  been 
studied  both  for  solutions  of  pure  hemoglobin  *  and  for  defibrinated 
blood. t  It  would  seem  from  recent  work  that  the  compound 
between  oxygen  and  hemoglobin  is  more  easily  dissociated  when  the 
hemoglobin  is  in  its  natural  condition  in  the  corpuscles  than  when  it 
has  been  crystallized  out  and  obtained  in  pure  solutions.  The 
results  that  have  been  obtained  from  experiments  upon  defibrinated 
blood  probably  represent,  therefore,  more  nearly  the  conditions 

*  Hiifner,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  suppl.  volume,  1901,  p.  213. 
t  Loewy,  "  Archiv  f .  Physiologie, "  1904,  p.  245. 


604  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

of  dissociation  in  the  body.  The  results  obtained  by  Loewy  are 
indicated  in  the  curve  of  dissociation  shown  in  Fig.  246,  obtained 
from  experiments  on  human  blood.  At  a  pressure  of  oxygen  of 
152  mms. — ^that  is,  when  exposed  to  ordinary  air — the  hemoglobin 
is  nearly  or  completely  saturated  with  oxygen.  If  the  oxygen 
pressure  is  increased, — if,  for  instance,  the  blood  is  exposed  to  pure 
oxygen  (pressure,  760  mms.), — no  more  oxygen  is  combined 
chemically  by  the  hemoglobin.  Additional  oxygen  will  be  taken 
up  by  the  blood,  but  only  in  so  far  as  it  can  pass  into  solution  in  the 
blood-plasma.  Oxygen  thus  dissolved  in  the  blood-plasma  obeys 
the  Henry-Dalton  law  and  will  be  at  once  given  off  when  the  oxygen 
pressure  of  the  surrounding  medium  is  lowered.  If  the  pressure 
of  oxygen  falls  below  that  of  the  air  (152  mms.)  the  chemically 
combined  oxyhemoglobin  begins  to  dissociate  slowly  at  first,  but 
as  the  pressure  falls  below  70 '  mms.  the  dissociation  becomes 
much  more  rapid,  and  the  oxygen  thus  liberated  from  chemi- 
cal combination  is  from  a  quantitative  standpoint  much  more 
important  than  that  freed  from  solution  in  the  plasma.  This,  in 
fact,  is  the  process  that  takes  place  as  the  blood  circulates  through 
the  tissues.  The  arterial  blood  enters  the  capillaries  with  its 
hemoglobin  nearly  saturated  with  oxygen, — about  19  c.c.  to  each 
100  c.c.  of  blood.  After  it  leaves  the  capillaries  the  venous  blood 
contains  only  about  12  volumes  of  oxygen  to  each  100  c.c.  of  blood. 
In  the  passage  of  the  capillaries,  which  takes  only  about  one  second, 
the  blood  loses,  therefore,  35  per  cent,  or  more  of  its  oxygen.  The 
physical  theory  of  respiration  furnishes  data  to  show  that  this  loss 
is  due  to  a  dissociation  of  the  oxyhemoglobin,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
in  passing  through  the  capillaries  the  blood  is  brought  into  exchange 
with  a  surrounding  medium — lymph,  cell  liquid — in  which  the 
oxygen  pressure  is  very  low. 

Condition  of  the  Carbon  Dioxid  in  the  Blood. — Carbon 
dioxid  is  evidently  contained  in  the  blood  in  chemical  combination 
as  well  as  in  solution.  The  amount  present,  40  to  45  volumes  per 
cent.,  is  entirely  too  great  to  be  accounted  for  by  solution  alone. 
Moreover,  the  content  of  the  blood  in  CO 2  does  not  vary  proportion- 
ally to  the  pressure  of  CO 2  in  the  surrounding  medium  in  accordance 
with  the  law  of  Henry  and  Dalton.  Examination  of  the  blood  by 
means  of  the  gas  pump  shows  that  CO  2  is  contained  in  both  the 
corpuscles  and  the  plasma  or  serum.  The  results  of  various  analyses 
would  indicate  that  about  -J  of  the  total  amount  is  held  in  the  cor- 
puscles and  about  |  in  the  liquid  of  the  blood,  and,  since  the  cor- 
puscles make  up  about  ^  of  the  bulk  of  the  blood,  this  fact  would 
indicate  that  the  CO  2  is  distributed  uniformly  throughout  the  mass 
of  the  blood.  The  condition  of  the  CO 2  in  the  blood  may  be  con- 
sidered under  three  heads:  (1)  The  part  in  solution;   (2)  the  part  in 


CHANGES   IN   AIR   AND    BLOOD    IN    RESPIRATION.  605 

chemical  combination  in  the  plasma;  (3)  the  part  in  chemical  com- 
bination in  the  corpuscles.     Regarding  the  part  in  solution,  we  may 
estimate  approximately  its  value  from  our  knowledge  of  the  absorp- 
tion coefficient  of  this  gas  at  the  temperature  of  the  body.     As  stated 
on  p.  600,  the  calculation  would  accoimt  for  2.6  c.c.  of  the  gas  in  each 
100  c.c.  of  blood, — that  is,  about  5  or  6  per  cent,  of  the  total  amount 
present  in  venous  blood.     The  part  of  the  carbon  dioxid  present 
in  the  plasma  is  held  partly  in  loose  chemical  combination,  partly  in 
a  more  fixed  form.     That  is  to  say,  if  serum  or  plasma  is  exposed 
to  a  vacuum  only  a  portion  of  the  CO 2  is  given  off;   to  obtain  the 
remainder,  the  so-called  fixed  CO  2,  it  is  necessary  to  add  some 
weak  acid.     If  the  full  blood  is  used  in  such  an  experiment  all  of  the 
CO 2  may  be  obtained, — a  fact  which  indicates  that  the  red  corpuscles 
(hemoglobin)  play  the  part,  in  this  respect,  of  a  weak  acid.     The 
form  in   which  the  CO  2  is  held  in  the  plasma  is  not  entirely 
understood.     It  is  supposed  that  it  is  combined  with  the  alkali 
of  the  blood    as    sodium    carbonate  (Na2C03)  or  sodium    bicar- 
bonate (HNaCOg).     When  the  carbon  dioxid  pressure  in  the  sur- 
rounding medium  is  lowered,  some  of  the  bicarbonate  dissociates, 
giving  off  CO  2;  and  the  reverse  takes  place  when  the  pressure  of  the 
carbon  dioxid  is  raised.     Essentially,  therefore,  the  process  of  taking 
up  and  giving  off  CO  2  from  the  plasma  may  be  represented  by  the 
reaction:  Na2C03  +  C02  +  H20^  2(HNaC03).    In  the  blood,  how- 
ever, the  conditions  are  more  complex  than  in  a  simple  aqueous  solu- 
tion of  carbonate  of  soda.    The  proteid  present  has  also  an  affinity  for 
the  alkali  and  thus  acts  like  a  weak  acid  in  aiding  the  dissociation 
of  the  bicarbonate.     One  may  say  that  the  alkali  of  the  blood  is 
distributed  between  the  CO  2  and  the  proteid  in  accordance  with 
the  law  of  mass  action,  and  that  the  proteid  thus  plays  an  important 
part  as  well  as  the  alkali  in  controlling  the  conditions  under  which 
the  CO 2  is  held.   The  phosphoric  acid  in  the  blood,  so  far  as  it  is 
present,  plays  naturally  a  similar  role  in  combining  with  the  alkali 
and  thus  influencing  the  dissociation  of  the  compound  of  the  CO  2 
with  the  alkali.     If  the  proteids  (and  phosphates)  were  not  present 
the  combination  between  the  alkali  and  CO 2  would  be  so  strong  that 
the  compound  would  fail  to  fulfill  its  respirator}^  functions, — that  is, 
it  would  not  dissociate  readily  when  the  pressure  of  the  CO,  in  the 
surrounding  medium  is  lowered. 

The  portion  of  the  CO  2  that  is  held  in  the  corpuscles  is  contained 
in  part  in  combination  with  the  alkali  present,  under  the  same  con- 
ditions as  those  described  for  the  plasma.  But,  according  to 
Bohr,*  the  hemoglobin  is  capable  of  combining  directly  with  the 
CO 2,  and,  indeed,  independently  of  the  amount  of  oxygen  that  it 
may  hold  in  combination.  He  suggests  that  the  CO 2  combines  with 
*  Bohr,  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,  "  16,  402,  1904. 


606  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

the  proteid  portion  (globin)  of  the  molecule,  whereas  the  oxygen,  as 
is  well  known,  unites  with  the  pigment  portion,  the  hematin.  The 
condition  of  the  CO  2  in  the  blood  is  therefore  not  so  simple  as  that 
of  the  oxygen;  but  so  far  as  the  mechanism  affecting  the  exchange 
of  CO 2  in  the  tissues  and  in  the  lungs  is  concerned  it  must  be 
regarded  as  dependent  upon  a  reaction  between  the  gas  and  the 
alkali  of  the  blood,  influenced,  as  above  stated,  by  the  presence  of 
the  proteid.  There  is  apparently  no  specially  developed  organic 
substance  which  acts  as  a  carrier  of  CO  3  in  the  same  way  that 
hemoglobin  behaves  toward  oxygen. 

The  Physical  Theory  of  Respiration. — The  physical  theory 
of  respiration  assumes  that  the  gaseous  exchange  in  the  lungs  and 
in  the  tissues  takes  place  in  accordance  with  the  physical  laws  of 
diffusion  of  gases.  If  a  permeable  membrane  separates  two  vol- 
umes of  any  gas,  or  two  solutions  of  any  gas  at  different  pressures, 
the  molecules  of  the  gas  will  pass  through  the  membrane  in  both 
directions  until  the  pressure  is  equal  on  both  sides.  As  the  excess 
of  movement  is  from  the  point  of  higher  pressure  to  the  point  of 
lower  pressure,  attention  is  paid  only  to  this  side  of  the  process, 
and  we  say  that  the  gas  diffuses  from  a  point  of  high  tension  to 
one  of  lower  tension.  After  equilibrium  is  established  and  the 
pressure  is  the  same  on  both  sides  we  must  imagine  that  the 
diffusion  is  equal  in  both  directions,  and  the  condition  is  the  same 
as  though  there  were  no  further  diffusion.  In  order  for  this 
theory  to  hold  for  the  exchange  in  the  body  it  must  be  shown  that 
the  physical  conditions  are  such  as  it  demands.  Numerous  experi- 
ments have  been  made,  therefore,  to  determine  the  actual  pressure 
of  the  oxygen  and  carbon  dioxid  in  the  venous  blood  as  com- 
pared with  the  pressures  of  the  same  gases  in  the  alveolar  air,  and 
the  pressures  in  the  arterial  blood  as  compared  with  those  in  the 
tissues.  Although  the  actual  figures  obtained  have  varied  some- 
what with  the  method  used,  the  species  or  condition  of  the  animal, 
yet,  on  the  whole,  the  results  tend  to  support  the  physical  theory. 

The  Gaseous  Exchange  in  the  Lungs. — It  is  impossible  to 
determine  the  exact  composition  of  the  alveolar  air.  The  expired 
air  can,  of  course,  be  collected  and  analyzed,  but  obviously  this  is  a 
mixture  of  the  air  in  the  bronchi  and  the  alveoli,  and  consequently 
has  more  oxygen  and  less  carbon  dioxid  than  the  air  in  the  alveoli. 
The  probable  composition  of  the  alveolar  air  has  been  calculated  by 
Zuntz  and  Loewy  for  normal  quiet  breathing  in  the  following  way : 
The  capacity  of  the  bronchial  tree  is  140  c.c,  and  this  air  may  be 
considered  as  similar  in  composition  to  atmospheric  air.  A  normal 
expiration  contains  500  c.c;  hence  the  alveolar  air  constitutes  only 
360  c.c.  or  -If  of  the  entire  amount.  If  the  expired  air  contains  4.38 
per  cent,  of  CO2,  then  the  alveolar  air  must  contain  4.38  -^-  -g-f  or  6 


CHANGES   IN   AIR   AND    BLOOD   IN   RESPIRATION.  607 

per  cent,  of  carbon  dioxid.  By  the  same  mode  of  calculation  the 
oxygen  in  the  alveoli,  assuming  that  the  expired  air  contains  16 
per  cent,  and  the  nitrogen  suffers  no  change,  should  be  equal  to  14 
per  cent,  of  an  atmosphere  or  106  mms.  of  Hg  (760  X  0.14).  Actual 
observations  made  by  these  authors  upon  human  beings  in  which 
the  expired  air  was  analyzed  indicate  that  the  composition  of  the 
alveolar  air  may  vary  between  the  following  limits:  Oxygen  be- 
tween 11  and  17  per  cent,  of  an  atmosphere  (83.6  to  129.2  mms. 
Hg) ;  carbon  dioxid  between  3.7  and  5.5  per  cent,  of  an  atmosphere 
(27.9  to  41.8  mms.  Hg). 

Loewy  and  von  Schrotter  have  determined  also  the  average  ten- 
sion of  these  gases  in  the  blood  of  man.  Their  method*  consisted 
in  blocking  off  one  lung  or  one  lobe  of  a  lung  by  a  metal  catheter 
inserted  through  the  trachea.  After  the  lapse  of  half  an  hour  or 
so  the  gases  in  this  occluded  portion  had  reached  an  equilibrium 
by  interchange  with  the  venous  blood  which  represented  the  tension 
actually  existing  in  the  circulating  venous  blood.  A  portion  of  this 
air  was  then  withdrawn  by  means  of  a  suitable  device  and  was 
analyzed.  Their  average  result  was  that  in  the  venous  blood  the 
oxygen  exists  under  a  tension  of  5.3  per  cent,  of  an  atmosphere 
(40.2  mms.  Hg),  and  the  COj  under  a  tension  of  6  per  cent.  (45.6 
mms.  Hg).  The  physical  relations  of  pressure  between  the  alveolar 
air  and  the  gases  in  the  venous  blood  may  be  represented  as  follows : 


Oxygen.  Cakbon  Dioxid. 

Alveolar  air 83.6  to  129.2  mms.         27.9  to  41.8  mms. 

Membrane 


4. 


t  I 

Venous  blood  .  .  .         40.2  mms.  45.6  mms. 

Diffusion  must  take  place,  therefore,  in  the  direction  indicated 
by  the  arrows.  As  the  oxygen  passes  through  into  the  blood  it  is 
combined  with  the  hemoglobin  and  it  is  estimated  that  the  arterial 
blood  as  it  flows  away  from  the  lungs  is  nearly  saturated  with 
oxygen,  lacking  perhaps  only  1  volume  per  cent,  of  being  completely 
saturated  (Pfiiiger).  That  is,  if  the  normal  arterial  blood  contains 
19  c.c.  of  oxygen  for  each  100  c.c.  of  blood,  it  is  probable  that  one 
more  cubic  centimeter  might  be  combined  by  the  hemoglobin  if 
exposed  fully  to  the  air  or  oxygen.  The  difference  in  tension 
between  the  carbon  dioxid  on  the  two  sides  of  the  membrane  is  not 
so  great  as  in  the  case  of  the  oxygen,  but  owing  to  the  more  rapid 
diffusion  of  this  gas  it  is  probable  that  this  difference  suffices  to 
explain  the  exchange.  In  this  matter  one  must  bear  in  mind  also 
the  very  large  expanse  of  surface  offered  by  the  lungs  and  the  very 
complete  subdivision  of  the  mass  of  blood  in  the  capillaries.     Thus, 

*  Loewy  and  von  Schrotter,  "  Zeitschrift  fiir  experimentelle  Pathologie 
und  Therapie,"    1,    197,    1905. 


608  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

following  a  calculation  made  by  Zuntz,  the  surface  of  the  human 
lungs  may  be  estimated  at  90  sq.ms.  or  900,000  sq.cms.  If  we 
assume  that  300  c.c.  of  carbon  dioxid  (500  X  0.04  X  15)  are  given 
off  from  the  blood  in  a  minute  this  would  indicate  a  diffusion 
through  each  square  centimeter  of  only  0.0003  c.c.  (-9 wroo)- 

Exchange  of  Gases  in  the  Tissues. — The  arterial  blood  passes 
to  the  tissues  nearly  saturated  with  oxygen  so  far  as  the  hemoglobin 
is  concerned,  and  this  oxygen  is  held  under  a  tension  equivalent 
probably  to  at  least  75  to  80  mms.  Hg.  The  carbon  dioxid  is  less  in 
quantity  than  on  entering  the  lungs  and  exists  under  a  smaller 
pressure,  which  may  be  assumed  to  be  the  same  as  that  of  the  carbon 
dioxid  in  the  alveoli  of  the  lungs, — namely,  3.7  to  5.5  per  cent,  of  an 
atmosphere  (28.1  to  41.8  mms.  Hg).  In  the  systemic  capillaries 
the  blood  comes  into  diffusion  relations  with  the  tissues,  and  direct 
examination  of  the  latter  shows  that  the  oxygen  in  them  exists 
under  a  very  small  pressure,  practically  zero  pressure,  while  the 
CO2  is  present  under  a  tension  (Strassburg)  of  7  to  9  per  cent.  (53.2 
to  68.4  mms.).  The  high  tension  of  the  CO2  is  explained  by  the  fact 
that  it  is  being  formed  in  the  tissues  constantly  as  a  result  of  their 
metabolism,  while  the  low  tension  of  the  oxygen  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  on  entering  the  tissue  this  substance  is  combined  in  some  way 
in  a  chemical  compound  too  firm  to  dissociate.  The  physical  con- 
ditions are  therefore  such  as  would  cause  a  stream  of  CO2  from 
tissue  to  blood  and  a  stream  of  oxygen  in  the  reverse  direction. 

Oxygen.  Carbon  Dioxid. 

Arterial  blood 75  mms.     28.1  to  41.8  mms. 

Wall  of  capillary ! -!- 

t  I 

Tissues 0  mm.       53.2  to  68.4  mms. 

It  is  to  be  remembered  that  in  this  exchange  the  blood  and 
the  lymph  act  as  intermediaries.  The  CO2  diffuses  from  lymph 
to  plasma  and  from  tissues  to  lymph.  The  oxygen  diffuses  from 
lymph  to  tissues,  from  plasma  to  lymph,  and  from  oxyhemo- 
globin to  plasma.  Bohr*  has  found  experimentally  that  in  blood, 
when  the  oxygen  tension  is  low,  an  increase  in  the  COj  pressure  tends 
to  dissociate  the  oxyhemoglobin.  Since  these  conditions  prevail  in 
the  capillaries  of  the  body  it  may  be  that  the  mere  presence  of  the 
CO2  in  increased  amounts  facilitates  the  liberation  of  the  oxygen. 

Suggested    Secretory    Activity  in    the    Respiratory   Exchange. — The 

view  that  the  exchange  of  gases  in  the  lungs  and  tissues  is  entirely  explained 
by  the  diffusion  of  the  gases  from  points  of  high  tension  to  points  of  low  ten- 
sion, and  that  the  membranes  interposed  are  entirely  passive  in  the  process 
has  not  passed  unchallenged.     Certain  observers  (Bohr,  Haldane  and  Smith)t 

*  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  16,  402,  1904. 

t  See  Haldane  and  Smith,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  20,  497,  1896. 


CHANGES   IN   AIR   AND    BLOOD    IN   RESPIRATION.  609 

claim  that  the  tension  of  the  oxygen  in  the  arterial  blood  is  higher  than  the 
pressure  of  oxygen  in  the  alveolar  air,  and  Bohr  has  stated  that  the  pressure 
of  CO2  in  the  air  in  the  trachea  is  higher  than  that  in  the  venous  blood.  If 
these  facts  were  fully  demonstrated  they  would  show  that  the  physical  theory 
outlined  above  is  insufficient,  and  would  indicate  that  the  membranes  con- 
cerned take  an  active  part  in  the  passage  of  the  gases,  exerting  possibly  a 
secretory  activity.  That  the  cells  of  these  membranes  might  secrete  the 
gases  is  not  at  all  impossible,  but  at  present  it  seems  to  be  unnecessary  to 
make  such  a  supposition.  The  results  obtained  by  the  observers  mentioned 
m  this  paragraph  have  not  been  corroborated  by  the  numerous  other  ob- 
servers who  have  worked  in  the  same  field,  and  it  seems  probable  that  they 
may  be  due  to  experin\ental  errors.  A  well-known  set  of  experiments  that 
strengthen  this  conclusion  has  been  reported  by  Wolff  berg  and  by  Nussbaum  * 
and  has  since  been  repeated  upon  man.  In  these  experiments  one  bron- 
chus in  a  dog  was  completely  blocked  by  a  specially  designed  lung  catheter, 
so  arranged  as  to  occlude  the  bronchus  and  yet  allow  the  observer  to  draw 
off  a  specimen  of  the  air  at  any  time.  In  such  an  occluded  lung  the  captured 
air  is  in  diffusion  relations  with  the  venous  blood  of  the  pulmonary  artery, 
and  if  these  relations  are  maintained  for  a  sufficient  time  an  equilibrium 
should  be  established  on  the  physical  theory,  the  tension  of  the  gases  in  the 
occluded  lungs  becoming  tlie  same  as  in  the  venous  blood.  Such  was  found 
to  be  the  case.  When  at  the  end  of  the  experiment  air  was  drawn  off  and 
analyzed  it  was  found  to  contain  3.6  per  cent,  of  COj,  while  the  tension  of 
the  CO2  in  specimens  of  the  venous  blood  taken  from  the  right  heart  was 
practically  identical.  If  there  is  an  active  secretion  of  COj  from  the  lungs 
one  should  have  expected  to  obtain  a  higher  tension  in  the  carbon  dioxid 
of  the  alveolar  air  than  in  the  venous  blood. 

*  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  4,  465,  1871,  and  7,  296,  1873. 


CHAPTER  XXXVII. 
INNERVATION  OF  THE  RESPIRATORY  MOVEMENTS. 

The  nervous  supply  to  the  respiratory  muscles  is  received  from 
a  number  of  nerves,  the  nervous  machinery  being  widely  dis- 
tributed in  the  brain  and  cord.  The  most  important  of  the  motor 
nerves  of  respiration  is  the  phrenic,  which  supplies  the  diaphragm 
and  originates  from  the  fourth  and  fifth  cervical  spinal  nerves. 
The  spinal  accessory  and  branches  of  the  cervical  and  brachial 
plexus  innervate  the  muscles  of  the  neck  and  shoulder  which  are 
concerned  in  inspiration;  the  intercostals  innervate  the  muscles  of 
the  thorax  and  abdomen,  while  branches  of  the  lumbar  plexus  send 
fibers  to  the  muscles  of  the  groin.  Moreover,  the  facial  sends 
motor  branches  to  the  muscles  of  the  nose  and  the  vagus  supplies 
the  muscles  of  the  larynx.  All  of  these  muscles  belong  to  the 
skeletal  group  and  are  under  voluntary  control.  Under  normal 
conditions,  however,  this  entire  respiratory  apparatus  works 
rhythmically  without  voluntary  control,  in  alternate  inspirations 
and  expirations,  all  the  inspiratory  muscles  contracting  together, 
and  all  the  expiratory  muscles  together  in  their  turn  when  the 
expirations  are  active.  The  co-ordinated  activity  of  such  an  ex- 
tensive mechanism  is  explained  by  the  existence  of  a  respiratory 
center  in  the  medulla  oblongata. 

The  Respiratory  Center. — ^The  discovery  of  the  location  of  the 
respiratory  center  was  due  mainly  to  the  experiments  of  two  French 
physiologists,  Legallois  and  Flourens.  The  latter  placed  the 
center  in  the  medulla  at  the  level  of  the  calamus  scriptorius,  and 
described  it  as  a  very  small  area  or  spot,  which  he  designated  at  first 
as  the  vital  knot  (nceud  vital)  under  the  mistaken  impression  that 
it  formed,  as  it  were,  a  central  or  focal  point  of  the  motor  system. 
It  has  since  been  shown  that  this  center,  like  the  vasomotor 
center,  is  bilateral.  If  the  medulla  is  cut  through  in  the  mid- 
line the  respirations  may  proceed  in  a  normal  manner.  The  center 
consists  of  two  parts,  each  connected  primarily  with  the  muscula- 
ture of  its  own  side.  Each  half  occupies  an  area  that  lies  some 
distance  lateral  to  the  mid-line  and  beneath  the  floor  of  the  medulla 
at  the  general  level  of  the  calamus.  According  to  Gierke,*  the  area 
extends  in  rabbits  from  a  point  3  or  4  mms.  in  front  of,  to  a  point 

*  Gierke,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  7,  583,  1873;  and  "Cen- 
tralblatt  f.  d.  med.  Wissenschaften, "  No.  34,  1885. 

610 


INNERVATION    OF   THE   RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.  611 

2  or  3  mms.  posterior  to  the  calamus.  No  especial  group  of  cells 
can  be  found  in  this  region  sufficiently  separated  anatomically  to 
make  it  probable  that  they  constitute  the  center  in  question.  The 
region  has  been  delimited  by  vivisection  experiments  only,  and, 
according  to  Gierke,  corresponds  in  location  to  the  position  of  the 
solitary  bundle  (tractus  solitarius).  According  to  Mislawsky,* 
it  lies  near  the  mid-line  in  the  formatio  reticularis,  while  Gadf  gives 
it  a  relatively  large  area  in  the  lateral  portion  of  the  formatio 
reticularis,  the  continuation  into  the  medulla  of  the  lateral  horn  of 
the  gray  matter  of  the  cord.  Destruction  of  these  areas  or  section 
of  the  cord  anywhere  between  this  region  and  the  origin  of  the 
phrenic  nerve  cuts  off  the  respiratory  movements,  except  those  of 
the  nose  and  larynx,  and  causes  death.  The  rapid  death  from 
injuries  to  the  cord  or  medulla  in  this  region — from  hanging,  for 
instance — is  explained  by  the  effect  upon  the  respiratory  center 
or  its  connections. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  respiratory  center  in  man  occupies  the  same 
general  position  as  in  the  other  mammals.  There  is  on  record  a  casej  in 
which  sections  were  made  of  the  medulla  in  a  new-born  infant.  On  delivery 
it  was  necessary  to  pimcture  the  cranium  and  remove  the  brain.  The  child 
still  lived  and  the  medulla  was  cut  across  with  scissors.  A  section  at  the 
posterior  end  of  the  calamus  stopped  the  respirations  immediately,  while 
one  somewhat  anterior  had  failed  to  have  this  effect. 

The  general  idea  of  the  connections  of  this  center  with  the  respir- 
atory muscles  may  be  described  as  follows:  The  respiratory  fibers 
arising  in  the  center  pass  down  the  cord,  probably  in  the  antero- 
lateral columns,  and  end  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord  at  the 
different  levels  at  which  the  motor  nuclei  of  the  respiratory  nerves 
are  situated.  Whether  the  connection  between  the  respiratory 
center  and  the  spinal  motor  nuclei  is  made  by  one  or  by  a  series  of 
neurons  is  not  known,  but  we  may  assert  that  the  nerve  path  from 
the  respiratory  center  to  the  respiratory  muscles  must  be  composed 
of  at  least  two  neurons.  According  to  this  conception,  the  impulses 
of  inspiration  and  expiration  for  the  entire  respiratory  mechanism 
originate  in  the  medullary  center  and  are  thence  distributed  in  a 
co-ordinated  way  to  the  lower  motor  centers  in  the  cord,  or,  in  the 
case  of  the  nose  and  larynx,  to  the  motor  centers  of  the  vagus  and 
facial. 

Spinal  Respiratory  Centers.  —  At  different  times  various  authors 
(Brown-Sequard,  Langendorff,  et  al.)  have  insisted  that  there  exist  one  or 
more  spinal  respiratory  centers,  and  that  the  medullary  center  has  not  the 
commanding  importance  indicated  in  the  above  description.  The  fact  that, 
when  the  medulla  or  cervical  cord  below  the  medulla  is  cut,  the  animal  at 
once  ceases  to  breathe  is  explained  by  these  authors  on  the  assumption  that 

*  Mislawsky,  "  Centralblatt  f.  die  med.  Wissenschaften, "    No.  27,  1885. 

t  Gad,  "  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1893,  p.  75. 

i  See  Kehrer,  "  Monatshefte  f.  prakt.  Dermatol.,"  28,  450,  1892. 


612  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

the  operation  causes  a  prolonged  inhibition  of  the  underlying  spinal  centers. 
They  state  that  young  animals,  especially  if  made  hyperirritable  by  the  in- 
jection of  strychnin,  may  continue  to  breathe  after  section  of  the  cord  below 
the  medulla.  This  point  of  view,  however,  has  not  prevailed  in  physiology. 
Other  operations  on  the  cord  or  braui  are  not  attended  by  such  profound 
inhibition,  and  indeed  Porter  and  Miihlberg  have  shown*  that,  if  half  of  the 
cord  alone  is  cut,  the  movements  of  the  diaphragm  on  that  side  are  permanently 
paralyzed.  It  is  entirely  conceivable  that  under  exceptional  conditions 
the  lower  neurons,  the  direct  motor  centers  of  the  respiratory  muscles,  might 
be  made  to  act  rhythmically,  since  during  life  they  have  been  rhythmically 
stimulated  from  the  medullary  center;  but  the  evidence  at  present  is  alto- 
gether against  any  distinct  physiological  independence  on  the  part  of  these 
neurons. 

The  Automatic  Activity  of  the  Respiratory  Center. — The 

constant  activity  of  the  respiratory  center  throughout  hfe  suggests 
the  question  as  to  its  automaticity.  Is  it  automatic  hke  the  heart? 
That  is,  are  the  stimuH  discharged  from  it  produced  within  its  own 
cells  as  a  result  of  its  own  metabolism  under  the  normal  conditions 
of  circulation?  Or,  on  the  other  hand,  is  it,  like  most  of  the  motor 
nuclei  of  the  central  nervous  system,  only  a  reflex  center,  its  motor 
discharges  being  dependent  upon  impulses  received  from  other 
neurons  by  way  of  the  sensory  paths?  Obviously  the  only  way  to 
answer  such  a  question  directly  is  to  isolate  the  center  from  all 
afferent  paths  and  leave  it  connected  with  the  respiratory  muscles 
only  by  motor  nerves.  If  under  such  conditions  the  respiratory 
rhythm  continues  the  center  maybe  regarded  as  essentially  auto- 
matic, however  susceptible  it  may  be  to  reflex  influences.  A  close 
approximation  at  least  has  been  made  to  such  an  experiment. 
Rosenthal  finds  that  rhythmical  respiratory  movements  continue 
after  the  following  operations :  first,  section  of  the  brain  at  the  cor- 
pora quadrigemina  to  cut  off  influences  from  the  cerebrum,  thala- 
mus, and  midbrain;  second,  section  of  the  vagi,  to  shut  off  afferent 
impulses  from  the  viscera,  especially  from  the  lungs;  third,  section 
of  the  cord  at  the  seventh  cervical  vertebra  to  exclude  sensory 
influences  through  all  the  underlying  posterior  roots;  and,  fourth, 
section  of  the  posterior  roots  of  the  cervical  spinal  nerves.  The 
medulla  with  its  respiratory  center  was  thus  isolated  from  all 
afferent  impulses  except  such  as  might  enter  through  the  fifth, 
seventh,  eighth,  and  ninth  cranial  nerves.  Since  under  these  con- 
ditions the  center  continued  to  act  rhythmically  we  may  draw 
the  probable  conclusion  that  it  is  essentially  automatic,  and  that 
it  probably  possesses  an  intrinsic  rhythmical  activity  resembling 
that  of  the  heart. 

Reflex  Stimulation  of  the  Center. — According  to  the  results 

of  numerous  observers,  stimulation  of  any  of  the  sensory  nerves 

of  the  body  may  affect  the  rate  or  the  amplitude  of  the  respiratory 

movements.     This   experimental   result  is  confirmed  by  our  own 

*  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  4,  334,  1900. 


INNERVATION    OP   THE    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS. 


613 


experience,  since  everyone  must  have  noticed  that  the  respiratory- 
movements  are  readily  affected  by  strong  stimulation  of  the  cutane- 
ous nerves — a  dash  of  cold  water, 
for  example — as  well  as  through 
the  nerves  of  sight  and  hearing. 
In  addition,  emotional  states  are 
apt  to  be  accompanied  by  notice- 
able changes  in  the  respirations, 
and  corresponding  to  this  fact 
experiment  shows  that  stimula- 
tion of  certain  portions  of  the  cor- 
tex and  midbrain  gives  distinct 
effects  upon  the  respiratory  cen- 
ter. We  must  assume,  therefore, 
that  this  center  is  in  connection 
with  the  sensory  fibers  of  per- 
haps all  of  the  cranial  and  spinal 
nerves,  and  is  influenced  also  by 
intracentral  paths  passing  from 
cerebrum  to  medulla,  paths  which 
are  efferent  as  regards  the  cere- 
brum, but  afferent  as  regards  the 
medulla.  As  stated  above,  the 
effect  of  these  sensory  nerves 
upon  the  activity  of  the  respiratory  center  is  varied ;  the  rate  may 


Fig.  247.— 7T0  show  the  augmenta- 
tion of  the  respiratory  movements  caused 
by  stimulation  of  the  sciatic  nerve.  Ex- 
periment upon  a  rabbit. 


Fig.  248. — To  show  the  inhibition  of  the  respiratory  movements  in  a  rabbit  due  to 
stimulation  of  the  central  end  of  the  vagus.  The  respiratory  movements  in  this  case, 
before  and  after  stimulation,  were  forced,  owing  to  the  fact  that  both  vagi  were  cut. 


be  changed  together  with  an  increased  or  decreased  amplitude,  the 
inspirations  and  expirations  may  each  be  increased,  or  one  phase 


614  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    RESPIRATION. 

may  be  affected  more  markedly  than  the  other.  In  general,  how- 
ever, experimental  stimulation  of  a  sensory  nerve  trunk  which  con- 
tains cutaneous  fibers  gives  one  of  two  effects :  either  a  stimulating 
action,  manifested  by  quicker,  stronger  inspirations  and  active  ex- 
pirations, or  an  inhibitory  effect,  in  which  the  respirations  cease 
altogether  or  become  slower  and  more  feeble  (Figs.  247  and  248). 
If  in  tliis,  as  in  other  similar  cases,  we  assume  that  the  two  oppo- 
site effects  are  produced  by  cUfferent  nerve  fibers  we  may  speak  of 
sensory  fibers  which  have  a  stimulating  or  augmenting  effect,  and 
of  those  that  have  an  inhibiting  influence  on  the  center,  or  following 
the  terminology'  used  in  the  case  of  the  vasomotor  center,  we  may 
speak  of  respiratory  pressor  and  respirator^-  depressor  fibers.  It  is 
quite  probable  that  these  fibers  have  other  functions, — that  is,  they 
are  not  distributed  exclusively  to  the  respiratorv  center.  A  cuta- 
neous fiber,  which  through  its  central  chain  of  neurons  eventually 
ends  in  the  cortex  cerebri  and  gives  us  a  sensation  of  pain,  may 
by  collateral  connections  affect  also  the  medullary  center  and  pro- 
duce effects  upon  the  heart,  blood-vessels,  and  respirations. 

The  Special  Relations  of  the  Afferent  Fibers  of  the  Vagus 
to  the  Center. — Although  the  sensor\-  nerves  in  general  exert  a 
reflex  effect  upon  the  respiratory  center,  experimental  work  has 
sho\\Ti  that  the  sensor\'  fibers  distributed  along  the  respirator}' 
passages  from  the  anterior  nares  to  the  alveoh  have  a  specially 
important  relation  to  this  center.  This  fact  is  most  clearly  shown 
in  the  case  of  the  sensory-  fibers  of  the  vagus,  which  are  distributed 
to  the  lungs  themselves.  If  the  two  vagi  are  cut  in  the  neck  the 
respiratory  movements  are  at  once  altered  in  character;  they 
show  a  much  slower  rhythm  and  greater  amplitude  (Fig.  249). 
The  inspirations  especially  are  deeper  and  longer,  with  something 
of  a  pause  at  the  end.  WTien  only  one  vagus  is  cut  an  intermediate 
effect  may  be  obtained,  the  respirator}'  movements  may  be  slowed 
somewhat  and  shghtly  deepened ;  but  the  striking  effect  is  obtained 
only  after  section  of  both  nerves.  This  result  is  not  a  temporarv' 
one  due  to  the  stimulation  of  cutting,  but  is  permanent,  and  there- 
fore leads  to  the  conclusion  that  some  influence  has  been  cut  off 
which  normally  keeps  the  respirator}-  movements  at  a  more  rapid 
rate.  Experiment  has  shown  that  this  influence  consists  in  the 
tonic  action  of  sensor}-  fibers  contained  in  the  vagus  and  distributed 
to  the  lungs.  It  is  the  constant  effect  of  these  fibers  on  the  respira- 
tor}- center  which  maintains  the  normal  rhythm;  when  they  are 
severed  the  center  drops  into  a  slower,  unregulated  rhythm.  Ex- 
periment has  shown,  also,  that  when  the  central  stump  of  the 
di"\'ided  vagus  is  stimulated  artificially  the  respirator}-  center  is 
affected,  as  indicated  by  the  respirator}'  movements,  in  a  variety 
of  ways  which  depend  upon  the  strength  of  the  stimulus  and  the 


IXXERVATIOX    OF    THE    RESPIRATORY   ^rO^^:MENTS. 


615 


condition  of  the  center.  The  two  results  which  are  most  constantly 
obtained  and  wiiich  may  therefore  be  especially  emphasized  are  as 
follows:  first,  with  weak  stimuli  the  inspiraton^  movements  are  in- 
hibited partially  or  completely,  giving  either  smaller  movements  or, 

in  a  conchtion  of  narcosis,  complete  ces.sation  of  respirations,  with 


Fig-  249. — To  show  the  effect  of  section  of  the  vagi  on  the  respirator}"  movements 
(rabbit).  The  right  vagus  was  cut  at  x  and  caused  a  slight  augmentation  and  slowing 
of  the  movements.  The  left  vagus  was  cut  at  xx  and  caused  first  a  short  inhibition  (due 
to  mechanical  stimtilation  which  was  then  followed  by  the  tj-pical  slow  and  deep  respi- 
rations seen  under  these  coaditions. — {Dawson.) 

the  thorax  in  the  stage  of  pa.ssive  expiration  (Fig.  24S'.  or.  second, 
the  rate  of  the  inspirator}-  movements  may  be  increased  and  this 
may  end  finally  in  an  inspirator}-  standstill. — that  is,  the  respiratory 
movements  cease  T\-ith  the  chest  in  an  in.spiraton-  position  (Tig.  250), 


Fig.  2.30. — To  illustrate  the  inspiratorj'  effect  from  stimulation  of  the  central  end  of 
the  vagus.  _  The  downstroke  represents  inspiration:  the  upstroke,  expiration.  During 
the  period  of  stimulation  the  respirations  are  increased  in  frequencv  and  the  chest  remains 

in  a  condition  of  inspiration. — {Lewandovsky.) 


the  inspirator}-  muscles  being  in  a  conchtion  of  tetanic  contraction. 
When  both  the  inspirator}-  and  expiraton-  muscles  are  considered, 
the  variety  of  effects  that  ma}-  be  obtained  from  stimulation  of  the 
afferent  fibers  of  the  vagus  is  perplexing,  especiall}-  with  strong 


616  PHYSIOLOGY   OP   RESPIRATION. 

stimuli,  and  has  led  to  much  difference  of  opinion  among  investi- 
gators.* The  two  main  effects  described  above  and  obtained 
with  stimuli  not  too  strong  are  usually  interpreted  to  mean  that  the 
vagus  contains  two  kinds  of  sensory  fibers  which  are  distributed  to 
the  lungs  and  act  normally  on  the  respiratory  center.  These  are: 
(I)  The  inspiratory  fibers,  whose  effect  is  to  increase  the  rate  of 
inspiratory  discharge  from  the  respiratory  center;  therefore  to 
quicken  the  rate.  (II)  The  expiratory  (or  inspiratory  inhibiting) 
fibers,  whose  effect  is  to  inhibit  the  inspiratory  discharges,  partially 
or  completely.  Some  authors  find  it  simpler  to  assume  only  one 
kind  of  sensory  fiber  and  to  explain  the  different  results  by  a  dif- 
ference in  the  nature  of  the  stimulus  or  in  the  condition  of  the  center; 
but  it  seems  advisable  at  present,  in  accordance  with  the  doctrine 
of  specific  nerve  energies,  to  hold  to  the  view  of  two  varieties. 

Influence  of  the  Inspiratory  and  the  Inhibitory  Fibers  of 
the  Vagus  on  the  Normal  Respirations. — It  is  assumed  that 
these  two  sets  of  fibers  are  in  constant  activity  and  keep  the  re- 
spiratory rate  more  rapid  than  it  would  be  otherwise.  Hence  the 
slowing  and  deepening  of  the  respirations  when  the  vagi  are  cut. 
The  way  in  which  these  sensory  fibers  are  stimulated  normally  was 
referred  by  Hering  and  Breuer  to  the  alternate  expansion  and 
collapse  of  the  lungs.  Each  inspiration  stimulates  the  inhibitory 
fibers  in  consequence  of  the  expansion  of  the  lungs,  and  thus  cuts 
short  the  inspiration,  prematurely,  as  it  were.  So  at  each  expira- 
tion the  collapse  of  the  lungs  stimulates  the  inspiratory  fibers  and 
brings  on  an  inspiration  sooner  than  would  otherwise  occur.  In 
this  way  the  respiratory  rate  is  kept  automatically  at  an  accel- 
erated rhythm.  A  stimulation  of  the  sensory  fibers  as  a  result  of 
expansion  of  the  lungs  is  easy  to  comprehend  and,  indeed,  it  has 
been  demonstrated  by  showing  that  with  each  expansion  an  action 
current  may  be  obtained  in  the  vagus  by  means  of  the  galvanometer 
or  capillary  electrometer.  But  that  the  normal  collapse  of  the 
lungs  also  acts  as  a  mechanical  stimulus  to  a  different  set  of  nerve 
endings  is  not  such  a  probable  hypothesis,  and  most  physiologists 
believe  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  adopt  it, — at  least  for  normal 
respirations.  Head  and  also  Schenck  have  shown  that  with  a 
certain  extreme  extent  of  collapse  evidence  may  be  obtained  of  a 
stimulation  of  the  inspiratory  fibers.  We  may  assume,  with  Gad, 
that  the  normal  rate  of  respirations  is  maintained  by  the  action 
of  the  inhibitory  fibers  alone.  Each  inspiration  is  cut  short  by 
the  mechanical  stimulation  of  these  fibers,  but  on  the  collapse  of 

*  For  discussion  and  literature  see  Meltzer,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie, " 
1892,  p.  340;  also  "New  York  Medical  Journal,  "  January  18,  1890.  Le- 
wandowsky,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1896,  pp.  195  and  483. 


INNERVATION   OF   THE   RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.  617 

the  lungs  the  new  inspiration  is  due  to  a  normal  discharge  from  the 
inspiratory  center. 

Loewy*  has  shown  by  an  ingenious  experiment  that  the  expansion  of 
the  lungs  is  the  factor  that  actually  stimulates  the  sensory  fibers  and  quickens 
the  respiratory  rate,  as  follows :  An  animal  was  made  to  breathe  pure  oxygen 
for  a  while  to  displace  the  nitrogen  in  the  alveoli.  The  chest  on  one  side — 
say,  the  right  side — was  then  opened  with  the  result  that  the  lung  collapsed, 
and,  owing  to  the  rapid  absorption  of  the  oxygen,  soon  became  practically 
solid.  The  respirations  (rabbit)  showed  their  normal  rate — 66.  The  vagus 
nerve  on  the  left  side  was  then  cut  and  immediately  the  respirations  took 
on  the  character  usually  shown  when  both  vagi  are  severed, — respirations 
=  34.  Next  the  collapsed  right  lung  was  expanded  by  artificial  respiration, 
with  the  result  that  the  respiratory  rate  at  once  returned  to  normal. 

Respiratory  Reflexes  from  the  Larynx,  Pharynx,  and  Nose. 

— The  mucous  membrane  of  the  larynx  receives  its  sensory  fibers 
from  the  superior  laryngeal  nerve.  When  this  nerve  is  stimulated 
artificially  the  respirations  are  always  inhibited ;  the  chest  comes  to 
rest  in  the  position  of  passive  expiration.  The  same  effect  may  be 
obtained  from  the  sensory  fibers  of  the  glossopharyngeal  supplying 
the  pharynx,  and  indeed  a  temporary  inhibition  of  respirations 
occurs  through  this  nerve  during  every  act  of  swallowing.  The 
sensory  fibers  of  the  nasal  mucous  membrane  (trigeminal)  cause  a 
similar  reflex  inhibition  when  stimulated  by  injurious  or  so  called 
irrespirable  gases,  such  as  HCl,  CI,  NH3,  SO2,  etc.  We  may  regard 
this  inhibitory  influence  exerted  by  the  sensory  fibers  distributed 
along  the  air  passages  as  a  protective  reflex  which  guards  the  lungs 
automatically  from  injurious  gases.  This  protective  action  is 
made  more  evident  by  the  fact  that,  together  with  the  cessation  of 
respirations,  the  glottis  is  reflexly  closed  by  contraction  of  the  ad- 
ductor muscles  and,  if  the  stimulation  is  strong,  even  the  bronchial 
musculature  may  be  contracted,  so  that  in  every  way  the  passage 
to  the  alveoli  is  made  more  difficult.  The  reflex  is,  of  course,  more 
or  less  temporary,  but  it  possesses  the  great  advantage  of  being 
automatic,  and  may  enable  the  animal  or  individual  to  escape 
unharmed  from  a  dangerous  locality  before  the  increasing  irritabil- 
ity of  the  respiratory  center  breaks  through  the  inhibition.  In 
special  cases  the  inhibition  may  last  for  an  unusually  long  time. 
Thus,  Fredericq  states  that  in  aquatic  birds  water  allowed  to  flow 
over  the  beak  so  as  to  penetrate  slightly  into  the  nostrils  brings 
about  an  inhibition  of  respirations  for  many  minutes.  There 
would  seem  in  this  case  to  be  a  special  adaptation  of  the  reflex  to 
the  needs  of  diving.  We  know  also  that  irritating  gases  or  foreign 
bodies  of  any  sort  that  enter  the  larynx  may  lead  to  a  coughing 
reflex, — that  is,  to  a  series  of  expiratory  blasts  which  have  a  pur- 
poseful end  in  the  expulsion  of  the  stimulating  object.     In  this  case 

*  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  42,  273. 


618  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

there  is  not  simply  an  inhibition  of  the  inspiratory  movements, 
but  a  reflex  excitation  of  a  pecuHar  type  of  expiratory  movements. 

The  Voluntary  Control  of  the  Respiratory  Movements. — 
We  can  control  the  respiratory  movements  within  wide  limits,  make 
forced  or  feeble  inspirations  or  expirations,  accelerate  the  rhythm, 
or  completely  inhibit  the  respirations  in  any  phase.  If,  however, 
the  "breath  is  held," — that  is,  if  the  respiratory  movements  are 
inhibited  and  the  glottis  is  closed,  the  increasing  irritability  of 
the  respiratory  center  eventually  breaks  through  the  voluntary 
inhibition.  How  far  this  voluntary  control  is  based  upon  direct 
connections  between  the  cerebrum  and  the  respiratory  center  and 
how  far  it  depends  upon  voluntary  paths  to  the  separate  spinal 
nuclei  of  the  muscles  involved  cannot   be   discussed  profitably. 

The  Nature  of  the  Respiratory  Center. — The  respiratory 
center  located  in  the  medulla  oblongata  might  with  more  propriety 
be  designated  as  the  inspiratory  center.  Our  normal  respirations 
throughout  life  consist  of  an  active  inspiration  and  a  passive 
expiration.  It  is  the  co-ordinated  activity  of  the  inspiratory 
muscles  that  is  characteristic  of  the  respiratory  movements.  The 
expiratory  muscles  come  into  action  only  occasionally  and  under 
special  conditions.  It  is,  in  reality,  incorrect  to  speak  of  the  normal 
respirations  as  consisting  of  alternate  inspiratory  and  expiratory 
movements;  as  a  matter  of  fact,  they  consist  of  rhythmical  in- 
spiratory movements  alone.  So  also  when  we  describe  the  respira- 
tory center  as  essentially  automatic  we  refer  only  to  the  action  on 
the  inspiratory  muscles,  since  a  series  of  active  inspiratory  move- 
ments is  the  essential  feature  of  respiration.  Under  certain  con- 
ditions, however,  we  do  have  rhythmical  expiratory  movements, 
active  expirations.  Such  movements  may  occur  independently 
of  the  respirations  proper,  as  in  coughing  and  laughing,  or  in  the 
straining  movements  of  defecation,  micturition,  and  parturition; 
or  they  may  occur  as  an  integral  part  of  the  respirations,  as  in  the 
forced  movements  of  dyspnea.  Under  the  conditions  of  partial 
suffocation,  for  instance,  as  the  blood  becomes  more  and  more 
venous  the  respirations  increase  in  force  and  active  expirations 
appear.  It  becomes  a  question,  therefore,  as  to  the  existence  of 
what  might  be  called  an  expiratory  center,  a  group  of  nerve  cells 
controlling  the  co-ordinated  activity  of  the  expiratory  muscles.  . 
The  mere  fact  that  in  dyspnea  we  have  a  rhythmical  and  co-ordi- 
nated activity  of  these  muscles  seems  to  imply  the  existence  of  such 
a  center,  but  there  is  no  definite  experimental  knowledge  as  to  its 
location.  Assuming  that  there  is  such  a  center,  it  may  be  believed 
that  it  exists  in  the  medulla,  since  after  section  below  the  medulla 
there  is  no  evidence  of  the  occurrence  of  rhythmical  expiratory 
movements  even  in  extreme  conditions  of  venosity  of  the  blood. 


INNERVATION    OF   THE    RESPIRATORY   MOVEMENTS.  619 

The  expiratory  center  may  or  may  not  be  located  in  the  same 
region  as  the  inspiratory  center,  but  the  following  general  char- 
acteristics may  be  assigned  to  it:  In  the  first  place,  it  is  not  auto- 
matic ;  at  least  not  under  normal  conditions.  In  the  second  place, 
its  activity  must  be  dependent  in  some  way  upon  that  of  the  in- 
spiratory center.  Even  our  most  violent  respiratory  movements 
show  an  orderly  sequence  of  inspiration  and  expiration, — and  we 
may  believe  that  the  action  of  the  expiratory  center  is  conditioned 
by  the  previous  discharge  of  the  inspiratory  center,  just  as  in  the 
heart  the  beat  of  the  ventricle  depends  upon  the  previous  systole 
of  the  auricle.  That  an  active  expiration  is  not  caused  reflexly  by 
the  mechanical  expansion  of  the  lungs  seems  to  be  demonstrated 
by  the  fact  that  the  most  forcible  voluntary  inspiration  is  followed 
by  a  passive,  not  an  active  expiration.  Until  our  knowledge  is 
extended  by  further  experimental  work  we  may  consider  the  ex- 
piratory center  as  a  group  of  cells  connected  by  definite  paths  with 
the  expiratory  muscles  and  capable  of  being  stimulated  in  one  of  at 
least  four  general  ways:  (1)  In  special  reflexes,  such  as  coughing. 
(2)  By  voluntary  control  from  the  cerebrum,  as  in  straining.  (3) 
By  stimulation  through  afferent  fibers  from  the  skin,  especially  the 
pain  fibers.  (4)  By  the  action  of  an  increased  venosity  of  the  blood. 
Under  the  latter  two  conditions  it  is  possible  that  the  irritability 
of  the  center  is  so  increased  that  it  becomes  responsive  to  the  in- 
fluence of  the  inspiratory  center.  The  relations  of  the  inspiratory 
and  expiratory  centers  under  the  various  conditions  of  artificial 
stimulation  are  very  complex,  and  although  it  is  possible  to  rep- 
resent these  relations  more  or  less  completely  by  a  schema  of  some 
sort  it  does  not  seem  advisable  at  present  to  seriously  consider 
such  hypotheses. 

The  Accessory  Respiratory  Centers  of  the  Midbrain. — Several  observers 
have  called  attention  to  the  existence  of  a  possible  accessory  respiratory  center 
in  the  midbrain  at  the  level  of  the  posterior  colliculus.  Martin  and  Booker 
found  that  stimulations  in  this  region  caused  a  marked  increase  in  the  rate 
of  inspiratory  movements  and  finally  a  standstill  in  inspiration, — that  is, 
a  complete  tetanic  contraction  of  the  inspiratory  muscles  lasting  during  the 
stimulation.*  Lewandowsky  f  has  shown  that  section  of  the  bram  stem 
at  or  below  the  inferior  colliculi  causes  an  alteration  in  the  respiratory  rhythm 
similar  to  that  following  section  of  both  vagi.  After  cutting  through  the 
inferior  colliculi  further  sections  more  posteriorly  do  not  add  to  the  effect. 
He  considers  that  there  is  an  automatic  inhibitory  center  in  the  midbrain 
which  influences  continually  the  automatic  activity  of  the  medullary  center. 

The  Nature  of  the  Automatic  Stimulus  to  the  Respiratory 
Center. — We  have  accepted  the  view  that  the  respiratory  (inspira- 
tory) center  is  essentially  automatic,  although  very  sensitive  to 

*  Martin  and  Booker,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  1,  370,  1878. 
t  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "   1896,  489. 


620  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

reflex  stimulation.  The  further  question  arises  as  to  the  nature  of 
the  automatic  stimulus.  Inasmuch  as  the  activity  of  the  center 
controls  the  gaseous  exchanges  of  the  blood,  it  was  natural  perhaps 
for  physiologists  to  look  to  the  gases  of  the  blood  for  the  origin  of 
the  internal  stimulus.  Experiments  show  beyond  question  that 
the  condition  of  the  gases  in  the  blood  has  a  direct  and  marked 
influence  upon  the  activity  of  the  center.  If  for  any  reason  the 
blood  supplying  the  center  becomes  more  venous,  the  respirations 
are  increased  in  force  or  rate  or  both,  and  indeed  the  activity  of  the 
center  is  in  a  general  way  increased  in  proportion  to  the  venosity 
of  the  blood.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  blood  supplying  the  center 
is  more  arterialized  than  normal,  by  active  ventilation  of  the  lungs, 
the  center  acts  more  feebly  or  may  fail  to  act  altogether,  giving  the 
condition  known  as  apnea.  These  facts  may  be  accepted  as  com- 
pletely demonstrated,  but  they  do  not  go  far  enough.  When  we 
speak  of  the  arterial  blood  being  more  venous  than  normal  we  mean 
that  it  contains  less  oxygen,  and  more  carbon  dioxid  than  normal 
arterial  blood.  Which  of  these  conditions  serves  to  stimulate  the 
center,  and  which  may  be  regarded  as  the  constant  stimulus  through- 
out life?  The  three  possible  views  have  been  defended :  (1)  That 
the  normal  stimulus  is  a  lack  of  sufficient  oxygen  (Rosenthal). 
When  sufficient  O  is  supplied  the  center  ceases  to  act,  becomes 
apneic.  (2)  That  the  normal  stimulus  is  the  presence  of  an  excess 
of  CO2  (Traube).  When  this  excretion  is  quickly  removed  the  cen- 
ter ceases  to  act, — ^becomes  apneic.  (3)  It  is  possible  that  the  two 
factors  may  co-operate.  The  blood  that  flows  through  the  center 
may  stimulate  the  cells  by  virtue  of  the  fact  that  it  does  not  remove 
the  CO2  fast  enough  and  does  not  supply  sufficient  oxygen.  It  is 
difficult,  indeed  impossible,  to  arrive  at  any  certain  conclusion  upon 
this  point.  Much  evidence  has  been  collected  to  show  that  the 
action  of  the  respiratory  center  is  increased  when  the  tension  of  the 
CO2  in  the  blood  is  raised  without  altering  that  of  the  oxygen  and 
that  a  similar  result  is  obtained  if  the  tension  of  oxygen  is  greatly 
diminished  without  any  change  in  that  of  the  carbon  dioxid,  so 
that  it  must  be  admitted  that  a  change  in  either  factor,  if  suffi- 
ciently great,  acts  as  a  stimulus.  Experiments,  however,  have 
indicated  that  the  accumulation  of  the  CO2  is  the  more  efficient 
stimulus  of  the  two.*  Zuntz  reports  the  following  interesting^ 
experiments,  in  which  the  extent  of  the  respiratory  movements  was 
measured  by  the  amount  of  air  breathed  in  a  minute.  In  one  series 
the  amount  of  oxygen  in  the  air  breathed  was  reduced.  This  change 
did  not  affect  the  quantity  of  carbon  dioxid  in  the  blood.  The 
following  results  were  obtained: 

*See  Zuntz,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1897,  379.    See  also  Friedlander 
and  Herter,  "Zeit.  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  2,  99,  and  3,  19. 


INNERVATION    OF   THE    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.  621 

Normal  air volume  breathed  per  minute  =  7,325  to    9,000  c.c. 

Air  with  10  to  11.5  per 

cent,  oxygen "  "  "         "       =  8,166  to    9,428    " 

Air  with  8  to    10    per 

cent,  oxygen "  "  "         "        =  9,093  to  12,810    " 

A  reduction  of  one-half  of  the  oxygen  in  the  air  breathed  had  httle 
effect  upon  the  respirations.  From  our  present  standpoint,  how- 
ever, the  important  thing  is  not  the  amount  of  oxygen  in  the  air, 
but  the  amount  in  the  blood.  Paul  Bert's  experiments*  upon 
living  animals  indicate  that  when  the  oxygen  of  the  air  is  reduced 
by  a  half  the  amount  of  oxygen  in  the  blood  is  diminished  by  about 
one-third.  Assuming  this  to  be  correct,  it  is  evident  that  a  very 
considerable  reduction  may  be  made  in  the  oxygen  of  the  blood 
without  noticeably  affecting  the  respirations.  A  similar  conclusion 
may  be  drawn  from  Haldane's  experiments  f  with  carbon  monoxid. 
He  found  upon  breathing  mixtures  of  this  gas  that  no  distinct  effects 
were  observable  until  the  blood  was  about  one-third  saturated  with 
the  gas  — that  is,  had  lost  one-third  of  its  oxygen.  Zuntz's  ex- 
periments, in  which  the  COg  in  the  air  breathed  was  increased,  while 
the  oxygen  remained  normal,  gave  quite  different  results,  as  follows  : 

Normal  air volume  breathed  per  minute,    7,433  c.c. 

Air  of  20.2  per  cent.  O,   0.95  per 

cent.  CO2 "  "  "         "  9.060    " 

Air  of  18.06  per  cent.   O,  2.97  per 

cent.  CO2 "  "  "         "        11,326    " 

Air  of  18.42  per   cent.  O,  11.5  per 

cent.  CO2 "  "  "         "        32,464    " 

These  and  similar  results  show  that  small  differences  in  the 
amount  of  the  carbon  dioxid  in  the  blood  have  a  distinct  effect 
upon  the  activity  of  the  respiratory  center.  Under  normal  con- 
ditions the  respiratory  center  receives  blood  containing  19  to  20 
volumes  per  cent,  of  oxygen,  while  the  venous  blood  flowing  away 
from  the  center  still  holds  10  to  12  per  cent.  Considering  the 
small  effect  of  lowering  this  oxygen  supply  by  one- third,  it  is 
difficult  to  believe  that  normally  the  amount  of  oxygen  is  so 
deficient  for  the  normal  metabolism  as  to  set  up  a  constant 
stimulus.  The  facts  seem  to  favor  rather  the  view  that  it  is  the 
constant  presence  of  the  CO2  which  directly  or  indirectly  occasions 
the  normal  discharges  from  the  respiratory  center.  It  is,  of  course, 
possible  that  other  constituents  of  the  blood  may  play  an  important 
part  in  providing  accessory  conditions  of  rhythmical  activity,  as 
in  the  case  of  the  heart  beat. 

The  Cause  of  the  First  Respiratory  Movement. — The  mam- 
malian fetus  under  normal  conditions  makes  no  respiratory  move- 

*  Bert,   "La  pression  barometrique,"    1878,  691. 
t  Haldane,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  18,  442,  1895. 


622  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

merits  while  in  utero.  After  birth  and  the  interruption  of  the  pla- 
cental circulation  the  first  breath  is  taken.  The  cause  of  this 
sudden  awakening  to  activity  on  the  part  of  the  respiratory  center 
must  be  closely  connected,  if  not  identical  with,  the  cause  of  the 
automatic  activity  of  the  center  throughout  life.  Two  or  perhaps 
three  views  have  been  held  regarding  its  immediate  cause:  (1) 
That  it  is  due  to  the  increased  venosity  of  the  blood  brought  about 
by  the  interruption  of  the  placental  circulation;  (2)  that  it  is  due  to 
stimulation  of  the  skin  by  handling,  drying,  etc.;  (3)  that  it  is  due 
to  a  combination  of  these  causes.  Preyer  has  shown  that  stimula- 
tion of  the  skin  of  the  fetus  while  in  utero  and  with  the  placental 
circulation  intact  sufficies  to  cause  respiratory  movements.  Cohn- 
stein  and  Zuntz*  have  shown  that  interruption  of  the  placental 
circulation  while  the  fetus  is  kept  bathed  in  the  amniotic  liquid  also 
brings  about  respirations.  Since  both  of  these  events  occur  normally 
at  birth,  we  may  believe  that  each  aids  in  causing  the  first  respira- 
tion, and  indeed  it  may  be  necessary  at  times  deliberately  to  in- 
crease the  stimulation  of  the  skin  in  order  to  bring  on  respiratory 
movements.  If  the  two  causes,  stimulation  through  the  nerves  and 
stimulation  through  the  blood,  normally  co-operate,  it  may,  how- 
ever, be  said  that  the  essential  cause,  according  to  the  theory 
adopted  in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  lies  in  the  greater  venosity  of 
the  blood  following  interruption  of  the  placental  circulation. 
During  the  intra-uterine  period  it  is  evident  that  the  fetal  blood  is 
aerated  by  exchange  with  the  maternal  blood  sufficiently  well  not 
to  act  as  a  stimulus  to  the  fetal  respiratory  center.  The  fetus  is, 
physiologically  speaking,  in  a  condition  of  apnea.  Since  the 
maternal  blood  acts  upon  the  respiratory  center  of  the  mother, 
while  the  fetal  blood  which  exchanges  gases  with  it  does  not  act  on 
its  own  respiratory  center,  it  follows  that  the  fetal  respiratory  center 
possesses  a  lower  degree  of  irritability  than  that  of  the  mother. 

Dyspnea,  Hyperpnea,  Apnea. — By  the  term  dyspnea  in  its 
widest  sense  we  mean  any  noticeable  increase  in  the  force  or  rate  of 
the  respiratory  movements.  As  said  above,  such  a  condition  may 
be  caused  either  by  stimulation  of  sensory  nerves,  particularly 
the  pain  nerves,  or  by  an  increased  venosity  of  the  blood, — that  is, 
by  an  increase  in  the  CO 3  or  by  a  marked  decrease  in  the  oxygen. 
Changes  of  other  kinds  in  the  composition  of  the  blood,  some  of 
which  are  considered  in  the  next  chapter,  may  also  stimulate  the 
respiratory  center  and  cause  dyspnea.  The  dyspneic  movements 
naturally  show  many  degrees  of  intensity  corresponding  with  the 
strength  of  the  stimulus,  and  sometimes  the  initial  stages  are  desig- 
nated as  hyperpnea,  while  the  term  dyspnea  is  reserved  for  the  more. 

*  Cohnstein  and  Zuntz,  "  Arch.  f.  die  gesammte  Physiol,"  42,  342,  1888. 


INNERVATION    OF   THE    RESPIRATORY    MOVEMENTS.  623 

labored  breathing  in  which  the  expirations  are  active  and  forced. 
When  dyspnea  is  produced  by  withholding  air  (suffocation)  the 
respiratory  movements  become  more  and  more  violent  until  they 
take  on  a  convulsive  character.  This  stage  is  succeeded  by  one 
of  apparent  calm,  indicative  of  exhaustion  of  the  centers.  Deep, 
long-drawn  inspirations  follow  at  intervals  and  finally  cease.  The 
animal  lies  quietly,  with  feeble  heart  beat  and  dilated  pupils,  in 
a  condition  designated   as  asphyxia  or  complete  asphyxia. 

The  term  apnea  means  literally  a  condition  of  no  breathing,  and 
since  this  condition  may  occur  from  several  causes  some  confusion  in 
nomenclature  has  resulted.  In  medical  literature  the  term  is  some- 
times employed  as  a  synonym  for  asphyxia  or  suffocation.  In 
physiological  literature  it  is  restricted  to  a  very  interesting  con- 


Fig.  251. — To  show  the  recovery  from  apnea.  The  animal  (rabbit)  had  been  venti- 
lated with  a  bellows  and  thrown  into  a  condition  of  apnea  shown  at  the  beginning 
of  the  record.  The  respirations  returned  first  as  feeble  movements  which  gradually  in- 
creased to  the  normal. — (Dawson.) 

dition  which  is  of  great  importance  with  reference  to  the  theories 
of  respiration.  This  condition  is  one  of  cessation  of  breathing 
movements  due  to  lack  of  stimulation  of  the  respiratory  center. 
It  is  brought  about  by  rapid  and  prolonged  ventilation  of  the 
lungs.  If,  for  instance,  in  a  rabbit  or  other  animal,  a  tracheal 
cannula  is  inserted  and  connected  with  a  bellows  or  respiration 
apparatus,  the  lungs  may  be  inflated  artificially  at  a  rapid  rate 
for  any  given  period  of  time.  If  such  an  experiment  is  per- 
formed it  will  be  found  that  when  the  blasts  are  stopped  the 
animal  makes  no  breathing  movements  at  all,  sometimes  for  a 
considerable  interval.  When  the  respirations  start  again  they  begin 
with  feeble  movements,  which  gradually  increase  to  the  normal 
ampHtude  (Fig.  251).     One  may  produce  a  similar  condition  upon 


624  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   RESPIRATION. 

himself,  approximately  at  least,  by  a  series  of  rapid,  forced  inspira- 
tions.   The  question  of  importance  is:   Why  does  the  respiratory 
center  cease  to  act?     Rosenthal  explained  the  phenomenon  in  terms 
of  his  theory  that  the  normal  stimulus  to  the  center  results  from  a 
lack  of  oxygen.     With  vigorous  artificial  respiration  he  imagined 
that  the  blood  takes  up  more  oxygen  and  thus  fails  to  act  upon 
the  center.     The  apnea  is  due  to  overoxygenation  of  the  blood, 
and  indeed  this  is   the  definition   he  gave  to  the  word.*    The 
numerous    researches  made    upon   this   condition   seem  to   show- 
very  clearly  that  in  the  method  used  to  produce  it  two  factors 
co-operate,  and  that  it  is  necessary,  in  reality,  to  distinguish  two 
different  kinds  of  apnea,  the  apnoea  vera  or  chemical  apnea,  and  the 
apncBa  vagi  or  inhibitory  apnea.     When  the  lungs  are  vigorously 
inflated  by  artificial  blasts  the  alveoli  are  better  ventilated,  and 
consequently  the  blood  takes  up  somewhat  more  of  oxygen  and  gives 
off  more  carbon  dioxid.     It  reaches  the  center  in  what  may  be 
called  a  more  arteriahzed  or  less  venous  condition.     At  the  same 
time  the  repeated  expansions  of  the  lungs  cause  repeated  stimula- 
tions of  the  inhibitory  fibers  in  the  vagus,  and  this  tends  to  bring  the 
center  to  rest  by  inhibition.     Either  of  these  factors  alone  may 
cause  a  condition  of  apnea  and  in  the  method  by  which  the  phenom- 
enon is  usually  produced  the  two  co-operate,  as  may  be  inferred 
from  the  following  facts :  If  the  vagi  are  cut  it  is  much  more  difficult 
to  produce  apnea  by  artificial  respirations.     If  in  an  animal  with 
vagi  intact  the  artificial  respirations  are  made  with  hydrogen  in- 
stead of  air  an  apneic  pause  may  be  obtained,  but  this  is  no  longer 
possible  if  the  vagi  are  cut.f     These  two  facts  indicate  the  impor- 
tance of  the  inhibitory  factor.     That  chemical  apnea  in   Rosen- 
thal's sense  may  exist  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  after  section  of 
both  vagi  apnea  may  still  be  produced  by  artificial  respiration, 
and  indeed  several  observers^  find  that  after  section  of  both  vagi 
and  of  the  medulla  above  the   center  the  animal  may  still  be 
made  apneic.     In  such  cases  it  is  difficult  to  see  any  other  cause  for 
the  apnea  than  a  change  in  the  gases  of  the  blood.     Rosenthal 
assumed  that  this  latter  condition  is  due  to  an  overoxygenation  of 
the  blood,  but  since  the  vigorous  respirations  lower  the  contents  of 
the  blood  in  COg  it  is  possible,  as  insisted  upon  by  Traube,  that  this 
factor  may  be  the  more  important.     At  present  there  are  no  facts 
which  will  enable  us  to  decide  definitively  between  these  views; 
but,  since,  in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  some  evidence  has  been 
given  to  show  that  the  normal  stimulus  to  the  center  is  due  to  the 

*  See  Rosenthal,  in  vol.  iv,  p.  264,  of  Hermann's  "  Handbuch  der  Physi- 
ologie. " 

t  See  Head,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  10,  1,  and  279,  1889. 

I  Loewy,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologic,"  42,  245,  1888;  and 
Langendorff,  "Archiv  f.   Physiologic,"   1888,  p.  286. 


INNERVATION   OF   THE    RESPIRATORY   MO^'EMENTS.  625 

presence,  of  COj,  it  follows  logically  that  the  more  complete  removal 
of  this  gas  by  ventilation  of  the  lungs  should  be  considered  as  the 
chief  cause  of  true  apnea.  Experimentally  this  view  is  well 
borne  out  by  an  old  observation  of  Berns,  according  to  which  a 
condition  of  apnea  in  a  rabbit  may  be  cut  short  instantly  at  any 
moment  by  a  blast  of  CO2  sent  into  the  lungs,  a  blast  of  air  having 
no  such  affect.  This  observation  is  further  supported  by  recent 
experiments  by  Mosso*  upon  men,  in  which  he  shows  that  apnea 
can  not  be  produced  by  inflation  with  carbon  dioxid.  This  author 
designates  the  condition  of  diminished  CO2  in  the  blood  as  acapnia. 
According  to  this  terminology,  true  apnea  is  due  to  a  condition  of 
acapnia. 

In  the  intact  animal,  therefore,  we  may  say  that  apnea  is 
due  to  two  causes:  first,  the  removal  of  COg  from  the  blood  by 
better  ventilation,  whereby  the  center  is  stimulated  less  strongly 
or  not  at  all;  and,  second,  the  rhythmical  inhibition  of  the  center 
through  the  vagus  fibers  ending  in  the  lungs.  The  two  causes  work 
together,  and,  as  it  were,  aid  each  other,  for,  the  less  the  irritability 
of  the  center,  the  more  easily  it  is  inhibited,  and,  the  more  it  is 
inhibited,  the  less  the  internal  stimulus  affects  it. 

Innervation  of  the  Bronchial  Musculature. — Numerous 
investigators,  using  different  methods,  have  demonstrated  that  the 
bronchial  musculature  is  supplied  through  the  vagus  with  motor 
and  inhibitory  fibers,  bronchoconstrictor  and  bronchodilator  fibers, 
as  they  are  usually  called. f  Stimulation  of  the  constrictors  causes 
a  narrowing  of  the  bronchi,  and  therefore  increases  the  resistance  to 
the  inflow  and  outflow  of  air.  Some  observers  state  that  these  fibers 
are  normally  in  a  condition  of  tonic  activity  (Roy  and  Brown), 
but  others  find  little  evidence  for  this  belief.  An  artificial  tonus — 
that  is,  a  condition  of  maintained  activity  of  the  constrictor  fibers — 
may  be  set  up  by  the  action  of  a  number  of  drugs,  such  as  muscarin, 
pilocarpin,  and  physostigmin,  which  in  this  case,  as  in  so  many 
other  instances  of  autonomic  fibers,  are  supposed  to  stimulate  the 
endings  of  the  fibers  in  the  lungs.  Their  effect  is  removed  by  the 
action  of  atropin.  These  fibers  are  stimulated  also  during  the  ex- 
citatory stages  of  asphyxia.  Reflex  stimulation  of  the  constrictors 
is  obtained  most  readily  (Dixon  and  Brodie)  by  irritation  of  the 
nasal  mucous  membrane,  and  it  seems  probable  that  in  bronchial 
or  spasmodic   asthma   these   fibers  are  also   stimulated   reflexly. 

The  normal  conditions  under  which  the  constrictors  and  dilators 
are  brought  into  play  can  scarcely  be  stated.  Irritating  vapors  or 
even  CO2  lead  to  a  bronchoconstriction  and  this  reflex,  as  stated  on 

*  Mosso,   "Archives  italiennes  de  biologie,"  40,   1,   1903. 
t  For  a  recent  paper  with  references  to  literature  see  Dixon  and  Brodie, 
"Journal  of  Physiology,"  29,  97,   1903. 
40 


626  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

p.  617,  may  be  regarded  as  protective.  When  a  constriction  of  the 
bronchial  musculature  exists  it  may  be  abolished  by  the  paralyzing 
action  of  atropin,  or  temporarily  by  injections  of  extracts  of 
lobelia  or  by  the  anesthetic  effect  of  inhalations  of  chloroform  or 
ether.     Nicotin  also  causes  a  dilatation. 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 

THE  INFLUENCE  OF  VARIOUS  CONDITIONS  UPON 
THE  RESPIRATIONS. 

The  Effect  of  Muscular  Work  upon  the  Respiratory  Move- 
ments.— It  is  a  matter  of  common  experience  that  muscular  ex- 
ercise increases  the  rate  and  amphtude  of  the  respiratory  move- 
ments. Roughly  speaking,  the  increase  is  proportional  to  the 
amount  of  muscular  work,  and  the  relationship  is  evidently  a  bene- 
ficial adaptation.  The  greater  the  amount  of  work  done,  the 
larger  will  be  the  amount  of  CO2  produced  and  the  greater  will  be 
the  need  of  oxygen.  The  adaptation  was  formerly  explained  in 
what  seemed  to  be  an  entirely  satisfactory  way  by  assuming  that 
the  increased  consumption  of  0  and  the  greater  production  of  COj 
in  the  muscles  resulted  in  rendering  the  blood  more  venous,  and 
consequently  the  respiratory  center  was  stimulated  more  strongly, 
and  indeed  proportionally  to  the  muscular  effort.  Geppert  and 
Zuntz,*  however,  have  shown  by  gas  analyses  that  whatever  may 
be  the  condition  of  the  venous  blood  during  muscular  exercise 
the  arterial  blood  sent  out  from  the  left  heart  shows  no  constant 
change  in  the  quantity  or  tension  of  the  contained  gases.  They 
proved,  also,  that  the  effect  on  the  center  is  not  simply  a  reflex 
from  the  nerves  in  the  muscles,  since  when  the  hind  limbs  were  made 
to  contract  by  stimulation  the  respiratory  center  was  affected  in 
the  usual  way  although  all  the  nerve  connections  were  destroyed. 
They  conclude,  therefore,  that  the  respiratory  effect  of  muscular 
work  must  be  due  to  certain  substances  produced  in  the  muscle  and 
given  off  to  the  blood.  Other  experiments  (Lehmann)  make  it 
probable  that  these  substances  are  the  acid  products,  lactic  acid  and 
acid  phosphates,  known  to  be  formed  in  muscle  during  contraction. 
Dilute  acids  injected  directly  into  the  veins  produce  a  similar 
result.  The  adaptation  is  a  most  interesting  one,  since  the  products 
that  decrease  the  irritability  of  the  muscle  itself  seem  to  cause  an 
increase  in  excitability  of  the  group  of  nerve  cells  constituting  the 
respiratory  center. 

The  Effect  of  Variations  in  the  Composition  of  the  Air 
Breathed. — Variations  in  the  amount  of  nitrogen  in  the  inspired 

*  Geppert  and  Zuntz,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  42,  189, 
1888. 

627 


628  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

air  have  no  distinct  physiological  effect.  The  important  elements 
to  consider  are  the  oxygen  and  the  carbon  dioxid. 

Increased  Percentages  of  Oxygen. — ^The  normal  pressure  of  oxygen 
in  the  air  is  20  per  cent,  or  152  mms.  We  may  increase  this  pres- 
sure either  by  changing  the  volume  per  cent,  of  the  gas  or  by  raising 
the  barometric  pressure  by  compression.  The  somewhat  natural 
supposition  that  breathing  pure  oxygen — that  is,  oxygen  at  a  pres- 
sure of  760  mm. — should  have  a  benefieial  effect  on  the  oxidations 
of  the  body  has  found  no  support  in  physiological  experiments. 
Atmospheric  air  supplies  us  with  an  excess  of  oxygen  over  the  needs 
of  the  body;  a  still  further  increase  of  this  excess  has  no  positive 
advantage.  Paul  Bert,  in  his  interesting  work  on  barometric  pres- 
sures,* has  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  at  a  certain  pressure 
oxygen  is  not  only  not  beneficial,  but,  on  the  contrary,  is  markedly 
toxic.  From  experiments  made  upon  a  great  variety  of  animals 
and  plants  he  concluded  that  all  living  things  are  killed  when  the 
oxygen  pressure  is  sufficiently  high, — say,  300  to  400  per  cent. 
Warm-blooded  animals  die  with  convulsions  when  submitted  to 
3  atmospheres  of  pure  oxygen  or  15  atmospheres  of  air.  At  these 
high  pressures  the  blood  contains  about  30  volumes  of  oxygen  to 
each  100  c.c.  of  blood  instead  of  the  usual  20  volumes.  The  ad- 
ditional 10  volumes  are  contained  in  solution.  Fish  also  are  killed 
when  the  oxygen  pressure  is  increased  to  such  a  point  that  the  water 
contains  10  volumes  of  dissolved  oxygen  to  each  100  c.c.  In  more 
recent  experiments  by  Smith,!  made  upon  mice,  it  was  found  that 
oxygen  at  pressures  of  100  per  cent,  to  130  per  cent,  proves  fatal 
in  a  few  days,  the  animals  showing  inflammatory  changes  in  the 
lungs.  Oxygen  at  180  per  cent,  kills  mice  and  birds  within  twenty- 
four  hours.  Pressures  of  two  atmospheres  of  air  (40  per  cent.  O) 
have  no  injurious  effect.  No  adequate  chemical  explanation  can 
be  offered  at  present  for  this  toxic  action  of  oxygen  at  high  tensions. 
The  matter  is  one  of  practical  importance  in  connection  with  caisson 
and  submarine  work  and  the  therapeutical  use  of  oxygen. 

Decreased  Percentages  of  Oxygen. — Numerous  observers  (Bert, 
Zuntz,  et  al.)  have  shown  that  a  fall  in  oxygen  pressure  has  no 
perceptibly  injurious  result  until  it  reaches  about  10  per  cent.  At 
or  somewhat  below  this  pressure  the  hemoglobin  is  unable  to  take 
up  its  full  amount  of  oxygen,  and  the  body  consequently  suffers 
from  a  real  deficiency  in  its  oxygen  supply,  a  condition  designated 
as  anoxemia.  According  to  Bert's  experimental  results,  death  with 
convulsions  quickly  follows  a  fall  of  atmospheric  pressure  to  250 
mms.  (oxygen  pressure,  50  mms.  or  6  to  7  per  cent.).  Animals 
supplied  with  an  atmosphere   containing  a   deficient   amount  of 

*  "  La  pression  barometrique, "  p.  764,  Paris,  1878. 
t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  24,  19,  1899. 


INFLUENCE    OF    VARIOUS    CONDITIONS    ON    RESPIRATION,       629 

oxygen  show  dyspneic  respirations,  which  increase  in  violence  and 
finally  become  convulsive.  The  ordinary  symptoms  described  for 
death  from  asphyxia  are  due,  therefore,  to  the  anoxemia, — that  is, 
lack  of  oxygen, — not  to  the  accumulation  of  COj. 

Increased  Percentages  of  Carbon  Dioxid. — It  was  pointed  out 
clearly  by  the  researches  of  Friedlander  and  Herter*  that  death 
from  increased  percentages  of  CO2  is  accompanied  by  symptoms 
quite  different  from  those  due  to  lack  of  oxygen.  As  the  COj  is 
increased  a  noticeable  hyperpnea  may  be  observed  (Zuntz)  at  a 
concentration  of  about  3  per  cent.  When  the  concentration  of  CO2 
reaches  8  per  cent,  to  10  or  15  per  cent,  there  is  distinct  dyspnea; 
but  beyond  this  point  further  concentration,  instead  of  augmenting 
the  respirations,  decreases  them,  and  the  animal  dies,  at  concen- 
trations of  40  to  50  per  cent.,  without  convulsions,  but  with  the 
appearance,  rather,  of  a  fatal  narcosis. 

High  and  Low  Barometric  Pressures,  Mountain  Sickness, 
Caisson  Disease,  etc. — High  barometric  pressures  are  used  in 
submarine  work,  diving,  caisson  work,  etc.  As  stated  above,  it 
follows  from  the  work  of  Bert  and  Smith  that  when  the  pressure 
reaches  5  to  6  atmospheres  long  continuance  in  it  may  be  followed 
by  injurious  or  fatal  results  due  to  the  toxic  action  of  the  oxygen. 
If  the  pressure  is  increased  to  15  atmospheres  the  toxic  influence 
of  the  oxygen  brings  on  death  with  convulsions.  Practically, 
however,  such  pressures  are  not  encountered  in  submarine  work. 
A  caisson  is  a  wooden  or  steel  chamber  arranged  so  that  it  may 
be  sunk  under  water.  The  water  is  driven  out  by  air  under  pres- 
sure. Since  the  pressure  increases  1  atmosphere  for  each  10 
meters  (33  feet),  it  will  be  seen  that  very  high  pressures  of  air 
are  not  usually  required.  Caisson  workers  are  at  times  attacked 
by  serious  or  even  fatal  symptoms,  not  while  in  the  compressed 
air,  but  during  or  after  the  "  decompression "  that  is  necessary  in 
the  return  to  normal  conditions.  The  symptoms  consist  of  pains 
in  the  muscles  and  joints,  paralysis,  dyspnea,  congestion.  Those 
who  have  investigated  the  subjectf  state  that  the  injurious  results 
are  due  to  a  too  rapid  decompression.  When  this  occurs  the  gases 
in  the  blood,  particularly  the  nitrogen,  are  suddenly  liberated  as 
bubbles,  which  block  the  capillaries  and  thus  produce  anemia  in 
different  organs.  If  the  decompression  is  effected  gradually  no  evil 
results  follow. 

The  effect  of  low  barometric  pressures  is  chiefly  of  interest  in 
connection  with   residence  in  high  altitudes,  balloon   ascensions, 

*  Friedlander  and  Herter,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  phvsiol.  Chemie, "  2,  99,  187S, 
and  3,  19,  1879. 

t  See  Bert,  loc.  cit.,  p.  939;  also  Hill  and  MacLeod,  "Journal  of  Physi- 
ology," 29,  382,  and  "Journal  of  Hygiene,"  3,  407. 


630  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    RESPIRATION. 

etc.  At  certain  altitudes,  from  3000  to  4000  meters,  disagreeable 
symptoms  are  experienced  by  many  persons,  especially  after 
muscular  effort,  which  are  designated  usually  under  the  term 
mountain  sickness.  The  individual  so  affected  suffers  from  head- 
ache, nausea,  vertigo,  great  weakness,  etc.  Much  investigation, 
especially  of  recent  years,  has  been  devoted  to  this  subject.*  Paul 
Bert  concluded,  from  his  numerous  experiments,  that  a  fall  in  baro- 
metric pressure  acts  upon  the  organism  only  in  so  far  as  there  is  a 
diminution  of  the  partial  pressure  of  the  oxygen  in  the  air  respired. 
This  view  has  been  generally  accepted  in  physiology,  and  mountain 
sickness  and  similar  disturbances  in  balloon  ascents  have  been 
explained,  therefore,  as  due  mainly  to  the  lack  of  oxygen, — that  is, 
to  the  condition  of  anoxemia.  Mosso,  on  the  contrary,  has  insisted 
upon  the  part  played  by  the  carbon  dioxid.  He  gives  experi- 
ments to  show  that  there  is  a  diminution  in  the  carbon  dioxid 
contents  of  the  blood  (a  condition  of  acapnia),  and  it  is  to  this, 
rather  than  to  the  anoxemia,  that  he  would  attribute  the  physio- 
logical results  of  low  barometric  pressures.  Other  authors  lay 
stress  upon  the  mechanical  disturbances  of  the  lung  circulation, 
while  still  others  assume  that  certain  vaguely  understood  cosmical 
influences — such  as  the  electrical  condition  of  the  air,  its  ioniza- 
tion, or  radiations  of  some  kind — ^may  affect  the  metabolisms  of 
the  body  and  thus  produce  the  symptoms  in  question.  It  would 
seem  that  the  whole  matter  is  more  complex  than  was  at  first 
supposed.  At  a  height  of  4000  meters,  at  which  mountain  sick- 
ness is  apt  to  occur,  the  barometric  pressure  is  460  mms.,  so  that 
there  is  an  oxygen  pressure  of  92  mms., — a  pressure  high  enough, 
one  would  suppose,  not  to  endanger  the  oxygen  supply.  Mosso 
states,  also,  from  experiments  upon  monkeys,  that  lowering  the 
barometric  pressure  sufficiently  (to  about  250  mms.)  causes  un- 
consciousness (sleep)  even  when  the  partial  pressure  of  the  oxygen 
is  kept  normal.  The  historical  incident  of  the  death  of  Sivel  and 
Groce-Spinelli  at  an  altitude  of  8600  meters  (barometric  pressure, 
262  mms.;  oxygen  pressure,  52.4  mms.)  seems  to  indicate  also  that 
something  more  than  mere  diminution  in  oxygen  pressure  is  respon- 
sible for  the  effects  of  extremely  high  altitudes. 

The  incidents  connected  with  the  ascent  in  the  balloon  Zenith  of  Sivel, 
Croce-Spinelli,  and  Tissandier,  April  15,  1875,  are  described  in  detail  by  the 
last  named  in  "La  Nature,"  1875,  p.  337,  also  in  Bert's  "La  pression  baro- 
metrique,"  p.  1061.  Only  Tissandier  survived.  The  balloonists  were  pro- 
vided with  bags  containing  oxygen  (72  per  cent.),  but  they  were  unable  to 
make  satisfactory  use  of  it,  since  shortly  after  passing  7500  meters  they  be- 
came so  weak  that  the  effort  to  raise  the  arm  to  seize  the  oxygen  tube  was 

*  See  Kronecker,  "  Die  Bergkrankheit,"  Berlin,  1903.  Mosso  and  Marro, 
"Archives  italiennes  de  biologie, "  39,  387,  also  vols.  40  and  41.  Cohnheim, 
article  on  "  Alpinismus, "  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  ii,  part  i,  1903. 


INFLUENCE    OF   VARIOUS    CONDITIONS    ON    RESPIRATION.       631 

impossible.  Tissaudier's  graphic  description  relates  that  at  8000  meters 
it  was  impossible  for  him  to  speak,  and  that  shortly  afterward  he  became 
entirely  unconscious.  None  of  the  three  seems  to  have  shown  any  signs  of 
the  violent  dyspnea  that  precedes  asphyxia  caused  by  lack  of  oxygen.  It 
is  noteworthy,  however,  that  the  heart  beats  were  very  rapid,  and  that  they 
experienced  at  first  great  depression  of  muscular  strength  without  loss  of 
consciousness.  The  onset  of  complete  unconsciousness  was  sudden,  but  was 
preceded  by  feelings  of  sleepiness,  which,  however,  were  not  associated 
with  any  distress.  These  latter  facts  recall  the  conditions  of  "shock,"  and 
would  suggest  that  probably  the  rapid  heart  beat  was  an  indication  of  a  great 
fall  in  blood-pressure,  which  may  ha\'e  been  directly  responsible  for  the  mus- 
cular weakness  and  final  unconsciousness  and  death. 

The  Respiratory  Quotient  and  its  Variations. — In  studying 
the  gaseous  exchanges  of  respiration  one  may  determine  the  varia- 
tions in  the  oxygen  absorbed  under  diflferent  conditions  or  in  the 
carbon  dioxid  ehminated,  or  finally  in  the  ratio  of  one  to  the  other, 
^,  which  is  known  as  the  respiratory  quotient.  In  short-lasting 
experiments  the  respiratory  quotient  is  not  a  very  reliable  indicator 
of  the  extent  or  character  of  the  physiological  oxidations  in  the  body, 
since  any  alteration  in  the  depth  or  rapidity  of  the  respiratory 
movements  may,  by  changing  the  ventilation  of  the  alveoli,  make 
a  difference  in  the  output  of  COj, — a  difference,  however,  which 
would  have  no  significance  in  regard  to  the  nutritive  changes  of  the 
body.  In  longer  experiments  and  in  those  during  which  the  respira- 
tory movements  are  not  altered  the  determination  of  this  ratio 
throws  light  upon  the  character  of  the  oxidations  that  are  taking 
place,  as  will  be  apparent  from  the  following  considerations :  Under 
ordinary  conditions  of  rest  and  upon  a  mixed  diet  the  R.  Q.  varies 
between  0.65  and  0.95  (Loewy)  or  between  0.75  and  0.89  (Magnus 
Levy).  If,  however,  the  material  oxidized  in  the  body  is  entirely 
carbohydrate  the  R.  Q.  should  be  equal  to  unity :  ^  =  1.  All  the 
oxygen  used  in  the  combustion  might  be  considered  as  uniting  with 
the  C  to  form  CO2,  since  enough  0  is  present  in  the  sugar  to  account 
for  that  used  in  oxidizing  the  H  to  HjO.  Or,  as  expressed  in  a 
reaction, 

CbHiA'^+^O^  =  6CO2  +  6H2O.    R.  Q.  =  f  =  1. 

The  number  of  molecules  of  COj  formed  in  the  oxidation  is  equal 
to  the  number  of  molecules  of  Oj  used.  If  fats  alone  are  oxidized 
in  the  body  the  R.  Q.  should  be  low  (0.7),  since  these  substances 
are  poor  in  oxygen  compared  with  the  amount  of  C  and  H  present 
in  the  molecule.  The  combustion  of  palmitin  may  be  represented 
as  follows : 

Palmitin,  C3H,(C,eH3,02)3  =  C,,B,,0,. 
2(CsiH9806)  +  I45O2  =  102CO,  +  98H2O. 

R-  Q-  =  iff  =  O.7.' 


632  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   RESPIRATION. 

In  the  same  way  it  may  be  estimated  that  the  R.  Q.  for  the  oxidation 
of  proteids  alone  is  equal  to  0.78. 

In  accordance  with  these  conclusions  it  is  found  practically 
that  the  respiratory  quotient  may  be  raised  to  1,  approximately  at 
least,  by  feeding  exclusively  upon  carbohydrate  foods,  while  an 
excess  of  proteid  or  carbohydrate  food  lowers  it  to  0.7.  In  con- 
nection with  other  data,  therefore,  the  R.  Q.  may  be  used  to 
throw  light  upon  the  character  of  the  nutrition.  Under  certain 
special  conditions  the  respiratory  quotient  may  exceed  unity  or 
fall  distinctly  below  0.7.  A  rise  to  a  value  over  unity  may  occur 
temporarily  because  of  increased  ventilation  of  the  alveoli.  Deeper 
and  more  rapid  breathing  will  drive  out  some  of  the  COj  in  the  air 
of  the  lungs  and  thus  increase  greatly  the  R.  Q.  As  previously 
stated,  this  increase  has  in  itself  no  nutritional  significance,  but  it  is 


Fig.  252. — Record  showing  typical  Cheyne-Stokes  respiration  (from   a  case  of  aortic  and 
mitral  insufficiency  with  arteriosclerosis).       The  time  record  gives  seconds. 

a  factor  that  must  be  allowed  for  in  such  experiments.  A  more 
suggestive  increase  of  the  R.  Q.  is  observed  during  convalescence. 
In  this  period,  as  is  well  known,  an  individual  may  increase  in 
weight  rapidly,  chiefly  from  the  laying  on  of  fat.  This  fat  is  made 
in  large  part  probably  from  the  carbohydrate  of  the  food.  An 
oxygen-rich  food,  therefore,  is  converted  to  an  oxygen  poor  one, 
so  that  some  of  the  oxygen  must  be  split  off  partly  as  carbon 
dioxid,  and  there  is  a  larger  output  of  this  substance  in  the  expired 
air.  Under  many  conditions  of  life — muscular  exercise,  for  example 
— ^in  which  the  oxidations  of  the  body  are  greatly  increased,  the 
larger  production  of  CO2  is  balanced  by  a  larger  absorption  of  O. 
It  is  interesting  to  find  that  usually  this  balance  is  so  well  maintained 
that  the  R.  Q.  does  not  vary  sensibly. 

Modified     Respiratory     Movements. — Laughing,     coughing, 
yawning,  sneezing,  sobbing,  and  even  vomiting  may  be  considered 


INFLUENCE    OF   VARIOUS    CONDITIONS    ON   RESPIRATION.       633 

as  modified  respiratory  movements,  since  the  same  group  of  muscles 
come  into  play.  These  are  all  movements,  with  the  exception  of 
yawning,  which  may  be  regarded  as  reflexes  that  have  nothing  to 
do  directly  with  the  processes  of  respiration.  A  most  interesting 
variation  of  the  normal  type  of  respiration  is  known  as  the  Cheyne- 
Stokes  respiration.  It  occurs  in  certain  pathological  conditions, 
such  as  arteriosclerosis,  uremic  states,  fatty  degeneration  of  the 
heart,  etc.  It  is  characterized  by  the  fact  that  the  respiratory 
movements  occur  in  groups  (10  to  30)  separated  by  apneic  pauses, 
which  may  last  for  a  number  (30  to  40)  of  seconds.  After  each  pause 
the  respirations  begin  with  a  small  movement,  gradually  increase 
to  a  maximum,  and  then  fall  off  gradually  to  the  point  of  complete 
cessation  (see  Fig.  252).  The  cause  of  this  rhythm  has  not  been 
discovered.  It  is  not  certain  whether  the  apnea  between  the 
groups  of  respiration  is  a  true  apnea  or  an  inhibitory  apnea  or  an 
apnea  of  some  other  kind  resulting  from  some  different  kind  of 
action  upon  the  respiratory  center.  A  similar  rhythm  is  often 
observed  in  the  beats  of  an  isolated  heart  of  the  cold-blooded 
animals  under  conditions  which  imply  an  insufficient  supply  of 
oxygen.  More  or  less  rhythmical  variations  in  the  strength  of  the 
breathing  movements  have  been  described  also  in  normal  sleep, 
hibernation,  chloral  narcosis,  etc.,  but  nothing  so  definite  and 
characteristic  as  in  these  very  interesting  Cheyne-Stokes  cases. 


SECTION  VII. 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF  DIGESTION  AND  SECRETION. 


CHAPTER  XXXIX. 
MOVEMENTS  OF  THE  ALIMENTARY  CANAL. 

Mastication. — Mastication  is  an  entirely  voluntary  act.  The 
articulation  of  the  mandibles  with  the  skull  permits  a  variety  of 
movements;  the  jaw  may  be  raised  and  lowered,  may  be  projected 
and  retracted,  or  may  be  moved  from  side  to  side,  or  various  com- 
binations of  these  different  directions  of  movement  may  be  effected. 
The  muscles  concerned  in  these  movements  and  their  innervation 
are  described  as  follows:  The  masseter,  temporal,  and  internal 
pterygoids  raise  the  jaw;  these  muscles  are  innervated  through  the 
inferior  maxillary  division  of  the  trigeminal.  The  jaw  is  depressed 
mainly  by  the  action  of  the  digastric  muscle,  assisted  in  some  cases 
by  the  mylohyoid  and  the  geniohyoid.  The  two  former  receive 
motor  fibers  from  the  inferior  maxillary  division  of  the  fifth  cranial, 
the  last  from  a  branch  of  the  hypoglossal.  The  lateral  movements 
of  the  jaws  are  produced  by  the  external  pterygoids,  when  acting 
separately.  Simultaneous  contraction  of  these  muscles  on  both 
sides  causes  projection  of  the  lower  jaw.  In  this  latter  case  forcible 
retraction  of  the  jaw  is  produced  by  the  contraction  of  a  part  of  the 
temporal  muscle.  The  external  pterygoids  also  receive  their  motor 
fibers  from  the  fifth  cranial  nerve,  through  its  inferior  maxillary 
division.  The  grinding  movements  commonly  used  in  masticating 
the  food  between  the  molar  teeth  are  produced  by  a  combination  of 
the  action  of  the  external  pteryogids,  the  elevators,  and  perhaps 
the  depressors.  At  the  same  time  the  movements  of  the  tongue 
and  of  the  muscles  of  the  cheeks  and  lips  serve  to  keep  the  food 
properly  placed  for  the  action  of  the  teeth,  and  to  gather  it  into 
position  for  the  act  of  swallowing. 

Deglutition. — ^The  act  of  swallowing  is  a  complicated  reflex 
movement  which  may  be  initiated  voluntarily,  but  is,  for  the  most 
part,  completed  quite  independently  of  the  will.  The  classical 
description  of  the  act  given  by  Magendie  divides  it  into  three  stages, 

634 


MOVEMENTS    OF    THE    ALIMENTARY    CANAL.  635 

corresponding  to  the  three  anatomical  regions — mouth,  phar^-nx, 
and  esophagus — through  which  the  swallowed  morsel  passes  on  its 
way  to  the  stomach.  The  first  stage  consists  in  the  passage  of  the 
bolus  of  food  through  the  isthmus  of  the  fauces, — that  is,  the 
opening  lying  between  the  ridges  formed  by  the  palatoglossi  muscles, 
the  so-called  anterior  pillars  of  the  fauces.  This  part  of  the  act  is 
usually  ascribed  to  the  movements  of  the  tongue  itself.  The  bolus 
of  food  lying  upon  its  upper  surface  is  forced  backward  by  the  ele- 
vation of  the  tongue  against  the  soft  palate  from  the  tip  toward 
the  base.  This  portion  of  the  movement  may  be  regarded  as  vol- 
untary, to  the  extent  at  least  of  manipulating  the  food  into  its  proper 
position  on  the  dorsum  of  the  tongue,  although  it  is  open  to  doubt 
whether  the  entire  movement  is  usually  effected  by  a  voluntary 
act.  Under  normal  conditions  the  presence  of  moist  food  upon  the 
tongue  seems  essential  to  the  complete  execution  of  the  act ;  and  an 
attempt  to  make  the  movement  with  very  dr}^  material  upon  the 
tongue  is  either  not  successful  or  is  performed  wdth  difficulty.  The 
second  act  comprises  the  passage  of  the  bolus  from  the  isthmus  of 
the  fauces  to  the  esophagus, — that  is,  its  transit  through  the  pharv^nx. 
The  phar}-nx  being  a  common  passage  for  the  air  and  the  food,  it  is 
important  that  this  part  of  the  act  should  be  consummated  quickly. 
According  to  the  older  description,  the  motor  power  dri\dng  the 
bolus  downward  through  the  phar\'nx  is  derived  from  the  contrac- 
tion of  the  pharv^ngeal  muscles,  particularly  the  constrictors,  which 
contract  from  above  downward  and  drive  the  food  into  the  esopha- 
gus. Kronecker  and  Meltzer,*  however,  have  shown  that  the  con- 
traction of  the  mylohyoid  muscle  in  the  floor  of  the  mouth  is  the 
most  important  factor  in  this  act  of  shooting  the  food  suddenly 
through  the  phar}mx  into  the  esophagus.  The  contraction  of  this 
muscle  marks  the  beginning  of  the  purely  involuntar}^  part  of  the 
act  of  swallo\\dng.  The  bolus  of  food  lies  upon  the  dorsum  of  the 
tongue  and  b}'  the  pressure  of  the  front  of  the  tongue  against  the 
hard  palate  it  is  shut  off  from  the  front  part  of  the  mouth  cavity. 
When  the  mylohyoids  contract  sharply  the  bolus  is  put  under  pres- 
sure and  is  shot  into  and  through  the  pharynx.  This  effect  is  aided 
by  the  contraction  of  the  hyoglossi  muscles,  which  by  moving  the 
tongue  backward  and  downward  tend  to  increase  the  pressure  put 
upon  the  food.  Simultaneously,  a  number  of  other  muscles  are 
brought  into  action,  the  general  effect  of  which  is  to  shut  off  the 
nasal  and  lar}^ngeal  openings  and  thus  prevent  the    entrance    of 

*  Kronecker  and  Meltzer,  "Archiv  f.  Ph^'siologie, "  1883,  suppl.  volume, 
p.  328;  also  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine, "  2,  453,  1897.  For  later 
-work,  consult  Cannon  and  Moser,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  1, 
435,  1898 ;  Schreiber,  "  Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathol,  u.  Pharmakologie,  "  46, 
414,  1901 ;  and  Eykman,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Phvsiologie, "  99,  513, 
1903. 


636  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

food  into  the  corresponding  cavities.     The  whole  reflex  is  there- 
fore an  excellent  example  of  a  finely  co-ordinated  movement. 

The  following  events  are  described:  The  mouth  cavity  is  shut 
off  by  the  position  of  the  tongue  against  the  palate  and  by  the  con- 
traction of  the  muscles  of  the  anterior  pillars  of  the  fauces.  The 
opening  into  the  nasal  cavity  is  closed  by  the  elevation  of  the  soft 
palate  (action  of  the  levator  palati  and  tensor  palati  muscles)  and 
the  contraction  of  the  posterior  pillars  of  the  fauces  (palatopharyn- 
geal muscles)  and  the  elevation  of  the  uvula  (azygos  uvulae  muscle). 
The  soft  palate,  uvula,  and  posterior  pillars  thus  form  a  sloping 
surface  shutting  off  the  nasal  chamber  and  facilitating  the  passage  of 
the  food  backward  through  the  pharynx.  The  respiratory  opening 
into  the  larynx  is  closed  by  the  adduction  of  the  vocal  cords  (lateral 
crico-arytenoids  and  constrictors  of  the  glottis)  and  by  the  strong 
elevation  of  the  entire  larynx  and  a  depression  of  the  epiglottis  over 
the  larynx  (action  of  the  thyrohyoids,  digastrics,  geniohyoids,  and 
mylohyoids  and  the  muscles  in  the  aryteno-epiglottidean  folds). 
If  the  elevation  of  the  larynx  be  prevented  by  fixation  of  the  thy- 
roid the  act  of  swallowing  becomes  impossible.  There  is  also  at 
this  time,  apparently  as  a  regular  part  of  the  swallowing  reflex, 
a  slight  inspiratory  movement  of  the  diaphragm,  the  so-called 
swallowing  respiration.  The  movements  of  the  epiglottis  during 
this  stage  of  swallowing  have  been  much  discussed.  The  usual 
view  is  that  it  is  pressed  down  upon  the  laryngeal  orifice  like  the  lid 
of  a  box  and  thus  effectually  protects  the  respiratory  passage.  It 
has  been  shown,  however,  that  removal  of  the  epiglottis  does  not 
prevent  normal  swallowing,  and  Stuart  and  McCormick*  have 
reported  the  case  of  a  man  in  whom  part  of  the  pharynx  had  been 
permanently  removed  by  surgical  operation  and  in  whom  the 
epiglottis  could  be  seen  during  the  act  of  swallowing.  In  this 
individual,  according  to  their  observations,  the  epiglottis  was  not 
folded  back  during  swallowing,  but  remained  erect.  Kanthack  and 
Anderson!  state  that  in  normal  individuals  the  movement  of  the 
epiglottis  backward  during  swallowing  may  be  felt  by  simply  passing 
the  finger  back  into  the  pharynx  until  it  comes  into  contact  with  the 
epiglottis.  According  to  most  observers,  it  is  not  necessary  for 
the  protection  of  the  larynx  that  the  epiglottis  shall  be  actually 
folded  down  over  it  by  the  contraction  of  its  own  muscles.  The 
forcible  lifting  of  the  larynx,  together  with  the  descent  of  the  base 
of  the  tongue,  effects  the  same  result  by  mechanically  crowding  the 
parts  together,  and  the  larynx  is  still  further  guarded  by  the  ap- 
proximation of  the  false  and  true  vocal  cords,  thus  closing  the  glottis. 
The  whole  act  is  very  rapid  as  well  as  complex,  so  that  not  more 

*  "Journal   of   Anatomy   and    Physiology,"    1892. 
t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  14,  154,  1893. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE    ALIMENTARY    CANAL.  637 

than  a  second  elapses  between  the  beginning  of  the  contraction  of 
the  mylohyoids  and  the  entrance  of  the  food  into  the  upper  end  of 
the  esophagus. 

The  passage  of  the  food  through  the  esophagus  differs  apparently 
with  its  consistency.  When  the  food  is  liquid  or  very  soft  Kronecker 
and  Meltzer  have  shown  that  it  is  shot  through  the  whole  length  of 
the  esophagus  by  the  force  of  the  initial  act  of  swallowing.  It 
arrives  at  the  lower  end  of  the  esophagus  in  about  0.1  sec,  and  may 
pass  immediately  into  the  stomach  or  may  lie  some  moments  in  the 
esophagus  according  to  the  conditions  of  the  sphincter  guarding 
the  cardiac  orifice.  When,  however,  the  food  is  solid  or  semi- 
solid, as  was  shown  by  Cannon  and  Moser,  it  is  forced  down  the 
esophagus  by  a  peristaltic  movement  of  the  musculature.  The 
circular  muscles  are  constricted  from  above  downward  by  an  ad- 
vancing muscular  wave,  while  the  longitudinal  muscles  contract 
probably  somewhat  in  advance  of  this  wave  so  as  to  dilate  the  tube 
and  facilitate  the  passage  of  the  bolus.  The  upper  portion  of  the 
esophagus  contains  cross-striated  fibers  indicating  rapid  contraction ; 
the  lower  end  consists  of  plain  muscle  only,  while  the  intermediate 
portion  is  a  mixture  of  the  two  varieties.  Kronecker  and  Meltzer 
believe  that  each  of  these  segments  contracts  as  a  whole  and  in 
orderly  succession,  but  other  observers,  on  the  evidence  furnished 
by  Roentgen-ray  photographs,  agree  that  there  is  no  perceptible 
pause  in  the  downward  movement  of  the  wave  of  contraction.  These 
same  movements  occur  in  the  swallowing  of  liquid  or  soft  food,  but 
in  such  cases  the  peristaltic  wave  follows  the  actual  descent  of  the 
food.  According  to  the  observation  of  Kronecker  and  Meltzer,  it 
takes  about  6  sec.  for  the  peristaltic  wave  to  reach  the  stomach, 
and  the  passage  of  the  food  through  the  cardia  takes  place  with 
sufficient  energy  to  give  rise  to  a  murmur  that  may  be  heard  by 
auscultating  over  this  region.  In  the  case  of  the  more  liquid  food 
that  is  shot  at  once  to  the  lower  end  of  the  stomach  within  0.1  sec, 
it  may  apparently  pass  at  once  into  the  stomach  or  it  may  he  in  the 
lower  end  of  the  esophagus  until  the  wave  of  contraction  reaches 
it  (6  sec.)  and  forces  it  through  the  opening.  At  this  opening,  the 
cardia  or  cardiac  orifice,  the  circular  layer  of  muscles  acts  as  a 
sphincter  which  is  normally  in  a  condition  of  tone,  particularly 
when  the  stomach  contains  food.  The  advancing  wave  of  con- 
traction in  the  esophagus  either  forces  the  food  through  the  resis- 
tance offered  by  this  sphincter  or  probably  the  sphincter  suffers 
an  inhibition  at  this  moment  as  a  part  of  the  general  reflex  action. 
Kronecker  and  Meltzer  have  noted  the  interesting  fact  that  if  a 
second  swallow  is  made  within  an  interval  of  six  seconds  after  the 
first,  the  peristaltic  wave  occasioned  by  the  latter  is  inhibited  at 
"whatever  portion  of  its  path  it  may  have  reached.     The  food  carried 


638  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

down  by  the  first  swallow  waits  in  this  case  for  the  arrival  of  the  suc- 
ceeding wave  before  entering  the  stomach. 

Nervous  Control  of  Deglutition. — The  entire  act  of  swallowing, 
as  has  been  said,  is  essentially  a  reflex  act.  Even  the  comparatively 
simple  wave  of  contraction  that  sweeps  over  the  esophagus  is  due 
to  a  reflex  nervous  stimulation,  and  is  not  a  simple  conduction  of 
contraction  from  one  portion  of  the  tube  to  another.  This  fact  was 
demonstrated  by  the  experiments  of  Mosso,*  who  found  that  after 
removal  of  an  entire  segment  from  the  esophagus  the  peristaltic 
wave  passed  in  due  time  to  the  portion  of  the  esophagus  left  on  the 
stomach  side,  in  spite  of  the  anatomical  break.  The  same  experi- 
ment was  performed  successfully  on  rabbits  by  Kronecker  and 
Meltzer.  Observation  of  the  stomach  end  of  the  esophagus  in  this 
animal  showed  that  it  went  into  contraction  two  seconds  after  the 
beginning  of  a  swallowing  act  whether  the  esophagus  was  intact  or 
ligated  or  completely  divided  by  a  transverse  incision.  The  afferent 
nerves  concerned  in  this  reflex  are  the  sensory  fibers  to  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  pharynx  and  esophagus,  including  branches  of  the 
glossopharyngeal,  trigeminal,  vagus,  and  superior  laryngeal  division 
of  the  vagus.  Artificial  stimulation  of  this  last  nerve  in  the  lower 
animals  is  known  to  produce  swallowing  movements.  Several 
observers  have  attempted  to  determine  the  precise  area  or  areas 
in  the  pharyngeal  membrane  from  which  the  sensory  impulses 
liberating  the  reflex  normally  start.  According  to  Kahn,t  the 
most  effective  areas  from  whose  stimulation  the  reflex  may  be 
produced  vary  in  location  in  different  animals.  In  the  rabbit  the 
reflex  is  originated  most  easily  by  stimulation  at  the  entrance  to 
the  pharynx — the  soft  palate — along  the  line  extending  from  the 
posterior  edge  of  the  hard  palate  to  the  tonsils  (superior  maxil- 
lary branch  of  trigeminal);  in  the  dog  irritation  of  the  posterior 
pharyngeal  wall  is  most  effective  (glossopharyngeal  nerve);  in 
monkeys  the  area  is  approximately  as  in  rabbits, — that  is,  in  the 
region  of  the  tonsils.  The  motor  fibers  concerned  in  the  reflex 
comprise  the  hypoglossal,  the  trigeminal,  the  glossopharyngeal, 
the  vagus,  and  the  spinal  accessory.  For  an  act  of  such  complexity 
and  such  perfect  co-ordination  it  has  been  assumed  that  there  is  a 
special  nerve  center,  the  swallowing  or  deglutition  center,  which  has 
been  located  in  the  medulla  at  the  level  of  the  origin  of  the  vagi. 
There  is  little  positive  knowledge,  however,  concerning  the  existence 
of  this  center  as  a  definite  group  of  intermediary  nerve  cells,  after 
the  type  of  the  vasoconstrictor  or  respiratory  center,  which  send 
their  axons  to  the  motor  nuclei  of  the  several  efferent  nerves  con- 
cerned.    As  in  the  case  of  other  complicated  reflex  acts,  we  can  only 

*  Moleschott's  "  Untersuchungen, "   1876,  volume  xi. 

t  Kahn,  "  Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1903,  suppl.  volume,  386. 


MOVEMENTS    OP   THE    ALIMENTARY    CANAL. 


639 


say  that  the  deglutition  reflex  is  controlled  by  a  definite  nervous 
mechanism  the  final  motor  cells  of  which  are  scattered  in  the  several 
motor  nuclei  of  the  efferent  nerves  mentioned  above. 

The  Anatomy  of  the  Stomach. — The  stomach  in  man  belongs 
to  the  simple  type  as  distinguished  from  the  compound  stomachs 
of  some  of  the  other  mammalia, — the  ruminating  animals,  for 
example.  Physiological  and  histological  investigations  have  shown, 
however,  that  the  so-called  simple  stomachs  are  divided  into  parts 
that  have  different  properties  and  functions.  The  names  and  bound- 
aries of  these  parts  can  not  be  stated  precisely,  since  they  vary  in 
different  animals,  and  moreover  there  is  at  present  an  unfortunate 
want  of  agreement  among  different  authors  regarding  the  nomen- 
clature of  the  parts  of  the  stomach.*  For  the  purposes  of  a  physio- 
logical description  we  may  use  the  names  indicated  in  the  accom- 
panying schematic  figure.     The  main  interest  lies  in  the  separation 


■Pi^ionis. 


Pyloric  jpartofstomaek 
or  antruatLliijlon. 


Position  of 
trotisuersebcmd. 


Inlennediate  or 
brebylorie  region,. 


Fig.  253. — Schematic  figure  to  show  the  different  parts  of  the  stomach. — (After  Retsius.) 


of  the  pyloric  part  of  the  stomach  or  antrum  pylorif  from  the  main 
cavity  of  the  stomach.  The  line  of  separation  is  marked  by  a 
fissure  on  the  small  curvature,  incisura  angularis  (Z.  A.)  and  on  the 
large  curvature  by  an  abrupt  change  of  direction.  The  pyloric  part 
makes  an  angle,  therefore,  with  the  body  of  the  stomach  and  differs 
from  the  latter  in  its  musculature,  the  macroscopical  and  microscopi- 
cal characteristics  of  its  mucous  membrane^  and  in  its  functional 
importance.  The  main  body  of  the  stomach  falls  into  two  sub- 
divisions, whose  line  of  demarcation  is,  however,  indefinite.  The 
fundus  proper  is  the  blind,  rounded  end  of  the  stomach  to  the  left 
of  the  cardia  and  projecting  toward  the  spleen.  The  intermediate 
or  prepyloric  region  shows  in  many  animals  a  characteristic  struc- 

*  See  His, "  Archiv   f.  Anatomie, "  1903,  p.  345. 

t  Some  recent  writers  confine  this  term  antrum  pylori  to  that  portioii 
of  the  pyloric  region  bordering  upon  the  pyloric  orifice. 


640  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

ture  in  its  secreting  glands.  It  is  in  this  region  that  the  hydro- 
chloric acid  of  the  gastric  juice  is  mainly  secreted. 

The  Musculature  of  the  Stomach. — The  musculature  of  the 
stomach  is  usually  divided  into  three  layers, — a  longitudinal,  an 
oblique,  and  a  circular  coat.  The  longitudinal  coat  is  continuous 
at  the  cardia  with  the  longitudinal  fibers  of  the  esophagus ;  it  spreads 
out  from  this  point  along  the  length  of  the  stomach,  forming  a  layer 
of  varying  thickness;  along  the  curvatures  the  layer  is  stronger 
than  on  the  front  and  posterior  surfaces,  while  at  the  pyloric  end  it 
increases  considerably  in  thickness,  and  passes  over  the  pylorus  to 
be  continued  directly  into  the  longitudinal  coat  of  the  duodenum. 
The  layer  of  oblique  fibers  is  quite  incomplete;  it  seems  to  be 
continuous  with  the  circular  fibers  of  the  esophagus,  and  spreads 
out  from  the  cardia  for  a  certain  distance  over  the  front  and  posterior 
surfaces  of  the  fundus  of  the  stomach,  but  toward  the  pyloric  end 
disappears,  seeining  to  pass  into  the  circular  fibers.  The  circular 
coat,  which  is  placed  between  the  two  preceding  layers,  is  the  thick- 
est and  most  important  part  of  the  musculature  of  the  stomach. 
At  the  fundus  the  circular  bands  are  thin  and  somewhat  loosely 
placed,  but  toward  the  pyloric  end  they  increase  much  in  thickness, 
forming  a  strong,  muscular  mass,  which,  as  we  shall  see,  plays  the 
most  important  part  in  the  movements  of  the  stomach.  At  the 
pylorus  itself  a  special  development  of  this  layer  functions  as  a 
sphincter  pylori,  which  with  the  aid  of  a  circular  fold  of  the  mucous 
membrane  makes  it  possible  to  shut  off  the  duodenum  completely 
from  the  cavity  of  the  stomach.  The  line  of  separation  between 
the  antrum  pylori  and  the  body  of  the  stomach  is  made  by  a 
special  thickening  of  the  circular  fibers  which  forms  a  structure 
known  as  the  "transverse  band"  by  the  older  writers,*  and  de- 
scribed more  recentlyf  as  the  "sphincter  antri  pylorici." 

The  Movements  of  the  Stomach. — The  solid  food  remains  in 
the  stomach  for  several  hours,  and  during  this  time  the  musculature 
contracts  in  such  a  way  that  the  thinner  portions  as  they  are  formed 
by  digestion  are  ejected  from  time  to  time  through  the  pylorus  into 
the  intestine.  Except  at  the  definite  intervals  when  the  pyloric 
sphincter  relaxes  the  food  is  entirely  shut  off  from  the  rest  of  the 
ahmentary  canal  by  the  tonic  closure  of  the  sphincters  at  the  cardia 
and  the  pylorus.  There  is  a  certain  orderliness  in  the  movements 
of  the  stomach,  and  especially  in  the  separation  and  ejection  of  the 
more  liquid  from  the  solid  parts,  which  shows  the  existence  of  a 
specially  adapted  mechanism.  These  movements  have  been  studied 
by  many  investigators,  making  use  of  various  experimental  meth- 

*  See  Beaumont,  "  Physiology  of  Digestion,"  second  edition,  1847,  p.  104. 
t  Hofmeister  und  Schiitz,  "  Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathologie  und  Pharmakol- 
ogie, "  1886,  vol.  xx. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE    ALIMENTARY   CANAL.  641 

ods.  The  first  noteworthy  contributions  to  this  subject  were 
those  made  in  this  country  by  Beaumont  in  his  famous  observations 
upon  Alexis  St.  Martin,  the  Canadian  voyageur,  who  had  a  per- 
manent fistulous  opening  in  his  stomach  as  the  result  of  a  gunshot 
wound.*  In  recent  years  the  subject  has  been  studied  with  great 
success  by  means  of  the  X-rays,t  on  the  excised  stomach, J  and  by 
means  of  tambours  or  sounds  introduced  into  the  stomach  to  meas- 
ure the  pressure  changes. §  These  researches  all  unite  in  em- 
phasizing one  fundamental  point, — namely,  that  the  fundic  end 
of  the  stomach  is  not  actively  concerned  in  these  movements,  but 
serves  rather  as  a  reservoir  for  retaining  the  bulk  of  the  food,  while 
the  muscular  pyloric  region  is  the  apparatus  which  triturates  and 
macerates  the  food  and  forces  it  out  from  time  to  time  into  the 
duodenum.  According  to  the  observations  made  with  the  X-ray 
apparatus,  movements  begin  a  few  minutes  after  the  entrance  of 
food  into  the  stomach.  Small  contractions  start  in  the  middle 
region  of  the  stomach  and  run  toward  the  pylorus.  These  moving 
waves  of  contraction  appear  at  regular  intervals.  The  pyloric 
portion  becomes  lengthened  and  it  may  be  noticed  that  in  this 
region  the  peristaltic  waves  become  more  and  more  forcible  as 
digestion  progresses.  These  running  waves  of  contraction  serve 
to  press  the  stomach  contents  against  the  pylorus.  According  to 
Cannon,  they  occur  in  the  cat  at  intervals  of  10  sec.  and  each 
wave  requires  about  20  sec.  to  reach  the  pylorus.  According  to 
Beaumont's  observations,  the  contraction  waves  follow  at  longer 
intervals  in  man  (2  to  3  min.).  The  obvious  result  of  these 
movements  is  to  mix  the  food  thoroughly  in  the  intermediate 
and  pyloric  portions  of  the  stomach  with  the  acid  gastric  juice 
and  to  reduce  it  to  a  thin,  liquid  mass, — the  chyme.  At  certain 
intervals  the  pyloric  sphincter  relaxes  and  the  contraction  wave 
squeezes  some  of  the  fluid  contents  into  the  duodenum  with 
considerable  force.  The  mechanism  controlling  the  relaxation 
of  this  sphincter  is  obscure.  It  does  not  occur  with  the  ap- 
proach of  each  contraction  wave,  but  at  irregular  intervals. 
Cannon  connects  it  with  the  consistency  of  the  food.  Solid 
objects  forced  against  the  pylorus  prevent  relaxation  and  retard 
the  passage  of  the  chyme  into  the  intestine.  When  liquid  food 
alone  is  taken  into  the  stomach  numerous  observations  made  by 
means  of  intestinal  fistulas  show  that  the  material  is  forced  into 
the  duodenum  within  a  few  minutes.     According  to  this  description, 

*  See  Osier,  "  Journal  of  the  American  Medical  Association, "  Nov.  15, 
1902,  for  life  of  Beaumont  and  account  of  his  work. 

t  See  Cannon,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"   1,  359,   1898;  and 
Roux  and  Balthazard,  "Archives  de  Physiologic,"  10,  85,  1898. 

I  Hofmeister   and   Schiitz,    loc.    cit. 

§  Moritz,   "  Zeitschrift  f.   Biologie, "   32,   359,   1895. 
41 


642  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

the  portion  of  the  food  toward  the  pyloric  end  of  the  stomach  is 
the  first  to  be  thoroughly  mixed  with  the  gastric  juice,  and  to  be 
broken  down  partly  by  digestion  and  partly  by  the  mechanical 
action  of  the  contractions.  This  portion  as  it  is  liquefied  is  expelled 
and  its  place  is  taken  by  new  material  forced  forward  from  the 
fundic  end.  It  would  seem  that  this  portion  of  the  stomach  is  in  a 
condition  of  tone,  and  the  pressure  thus  put  upon  the  contents  is 
sufficient  to  force  them  slowly  toward  the  pyloric  end  as  this  be- 
comes emptied.  The  older  view  was  that  the  contents  of  the 
stomach  are  kept  in  a  general  rotary  movement  so  as  to  become 
more  or  less  uniformly  mixed;  but  Cannon's  observations,  and 
especially  those  of  Griitzner,*  indicate  that  the  material  at  the 
fundic  end  may  remain  undisturbed  for  a  long  time  and  thus 
escape  mixture  with  the  acid  gastric  juice.  This  fact  is  of  impor- 
tance in  connection  with  the  salivary 
digestion  of  the  starchy  foods. 
Obviously  salivary  digestion  may 
proceed  for  a  long  time  without 
being  affected  by  the  acid  of  the 
stomach.  Griitzner  fed  rats  with 
food  of  different  colors  and  found 
that  the  successive  portions  were 
arranged  in  definite  strata.  The 
food   first   taken    lay   next   to   the 

Fig.      254.— Section     of     frozen       wnllc!     nf     tlip     «!tnmaph       whilp     thp 
stomach    of   rat   during   dige.stion    to        WaUS     OI      ine     StOnidCn,      WUlie      LlltJ 

itTifferenf  Times —(Gr^^Jerf  ^The      Succeeding   portious  Were  arranged 

food  was  given  in  three  portions  and  regularly    iu    the  interior     iu  a    con- 
colored  differently:  first,  black;    sec-             °      .         .      ,  .                          ,  •         ,1 
ond,    white     (indicated    by    vertical  ceutriC     lashlOn,  aS     ShOWU  in     the 
marking) ;     third,    red    (indicated   by  „                   01  j.        r 

transverse  marking).  figuro.     Such    an    arrangement    of 

the  food  is  more  readily  understood 
when  one  recalls  that  the  stomach  has  never  any  empty  space 
within;  its  cavity  is  only  as  large  as  its  contents,  so  that  the  first 
portion  of  food  eaten  entirely  fills  it  and  successive  portions  find 
the  wall  layer  occupied  and  are  therefore  received  into  the  interior. 
The  ingestion  of  much  liquid  must  interfere  somewhat  with  this 
stratification.  Whether  the  fact  of  this  stratification  has  any 
hygienic  bearing  with  regard  to  the  most  desirable  sequence  in  our 
articles  of  diet  is  not  yet  apparent.  Cannonf  has  reported  some 
interesting  experiments  upon  the  relative  duration  of  gastric 
digestion  for  carbohydrates,  proteids,  and  fats  when  fed  separately 
and  combined.  The  foods  were  mixed  with  subnitrate  of  bismuth 
and  their  position  in  the  stomach  and  passage  into  the  intestine 
were  watched  by  means  of  the  Roentgen  rays.     It  was  found  that 

*  Griitzner,  "  Archiv  f .  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "   106,  463,  1905. 
t  Cannon,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  12,  387,  1904. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE    ALIMENTARY    CANAL.  643 

carbohydrate  food  begins  to  pass  out  from  the  stomach  soon  after 
ingestion,  and  requires  only  about  one  half  as  much  time  as  the  pro- 
teids  for  complete  gastric  digestion.  Fats  remain  long  in  the  stomach 
when  taken  alone,  and  when  combined  with  the  other  foodstuffs 
markedly  delay  their  exit  through  the  pylorus.  This  distinct 
difference  in  the  main  foodstuffs  can  hardly  be  referred  to  mere 
mechanical  consistency,  since  the  fats  are  liquefied  by  the  heat  of  the 
body.  There  is  an  indication,  therefore,  that  the  relaxation  of  the 
sphincter  may  be  controlled  in  some  way  by  chemical  stimuli 
originating  in  the  digested  food. 

Regarding  the  general  mechanism  of  the  stomach,  it  may  be 
pointed  out  that  it  forms  an  admirably  adapted  apparatus  for 
receiving  at  once  or  within  a  short  period  a  large  amount  of  food 
which  it  reduces  to  a  liquid  or  semiliquid  condition,  partly  by 
digestion,  partly  mechanically,  and  that  it  charges  the  intestine 
at  intervals  with  small  amounts  of  this  chyme  in  such  a  condition 
as  to  admit  of  rapid  digestion.  It  seems  obvious  that  without  the 
stomach  our  mode  of  eating  would  have  to  be  changed,  as  it  would 
not  be  possible  to  load  the  intestine  rapidly  with  a  large  supply  of 
food  such  as  is  consumed  at  an  ordinary  meal. 

The  Relation  of  the  Nerves  to  the  Movements  of  the 
Stomach. — The  stomach  receives  nerve  fibers  from  two  sources, — 
the  vagi  and  the  splanchnics, — but  it  seems  probable  that  its  orderly 
movements  may  be  merely  regulated  through  these  extrinsic  fibers, 
and  that  it  is  essentially  an  automatic  organ.  Thus,  it  has  been 
shown  that  the  excised  stomach  (Hofmeister  and  Schiitz)  when 
kept  warm  continues  to  execute  regular  movements  which,  if  not 
identical  with  those  observed  under  normal  conditions,  have  at 
least  an  orderly  sequence.  So  also  it  would  appear  from  the  results 
of  the  older  observers  *  that  gastric  digestion  may  proceed  normally 
both  as  regards  secretion  and  movements  after  section  of  the 
extrinsic  nerves.  The  point  has  not  yet  perhaps  been  demonstrated 
conclusively,  but  provisionally  we  may  regard  the  stomach,  con- 
sidered as  a  motor  mechanism,  as  an  automatic  organ  like  the  heart. 
Its  stimuli  to  movement  arise  within  itself,  but  these  movements 
are  regulated  by  the  action  of  the  extrinsic  nerve  fibers  so  as  to 
adapt  them  to  varying  conditions.  Whether  the  automaticity  is  a 
property  of  the  plain  muscle  tissue  itself,  or  depends  upon  the  rich 
supply  of  intrinsic  nerve  ganglia  (plexuses  of  Meissner  and  Auer- 
bach),  is  "a  question  that  can  not  be  answered  at  present.  The 
extrinsic  nerves  not  only  supply  the  stomach  with  efferent  fibers, 
motor  and  secretory,  but  also  carry  afferent  fibers  from  the  stomach 
to   the  central   nervous  system.     Regarding  the  purely   efferent 

*  See  Heidenhain  in  Hermann's  "  Handbuch  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  v, 
p.  118. 


644  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION    AND    SECRETION. 

action  of  the  extrinsic  nerves,  the  results  of  numerous  experiments 
seem  to  show  quite  conclusively  that  in  general  the  fibers  received 
along  the  vagus  path  are  motor,  artificial  stimulation  of  them  caus- 
ing more  or  less  well  marked  contractions  of  part  or  all  of  the 
musculature  of  the  stomach.  It  has  been  shown  that  the  sphincter 
pylori  as  well  as  the  rest  of  the  musculature  is  supplied  by  motor 
fibers  from  these  nerves.  The  fibers  coming  through  the  splanch- 
nics,  on  the  contrary,  are  mainly  inhibitory.  When  stimulated 
they  cause  a  dilatation  of  the  contracted  stomach  and  a  relaxation, 
of  the  sphincter  pylori.  Some  observers  have  reported  experiments 
which  seem  to  show  that  this  anatomical  separation  of  the  motor 
and  inhibitory  fibers  is  not  complete;  that  some  inhibitory  fibers 
may  be  found  in  the  vagi  and  some  motor  fibers  in  the  splanchnics. 
The  anatomical  courses  of  these  fibers  are  insufficiently  known,  but 
there  seems  to  be  no  question  as  to  the  existence  of  the  two  physio- 
logical varieties.  Through  their  activity,  without  doubt,  the  move- 
ments of  the  stomach  may  be  influenced,  favorably  or  unfavorably, 
by  conditions  directly  or  indirectly  affecting  the  central  nervous 
system.  Wertheimer*  has  shown  experimentally  that  stimulation 
of  the  central  end  of  the  sciatic  or  the  vagus  nerve  may  cause  reflex 
inhibition  of  the  tonus  of  the  stomach,  and  Doyonj  has  confirmed 
this  result  in  cases  in  which  the  movements  and  tonicity  of  the  stom- 
ach were  first  increased  by  the  action  of  pilocarpin  and  strychnin. 
Cannon,  in  his  observations  upon  cats,  found  that  all  movements 
of  the  stomach  ceased  as  soon  as  the  animal  showed  signs  of  anxiety, 
rage,  or  distress. 

Movements  of  the  Intestines. — The  muscles  of  the  small  and 
the  large  intestine  are  arranged  in  two  layers, — an  outer  longitudinal 
and  an  inner  circular  coat, — while  between  these  coats  and  in  the 
submucous  coat  there  are  present  the  nerve-plexuses  of  Auerbach 
and  Meissner.  The  general  arrangement  of  muscles  and  nerves  is 
similar,  therefore,  to  that  prevailing  in  the  stomach,  and  in  accor- 
dance with  this  we  find  that  the  physiological  activities  exhibited 
are  of  much  the  same  character,  only,  perhaps,  not  quite  so  complex. 

Two  main  forms  of  intestinal  movement  have  been  distinguished, 
— the  peristaltic  and  the  pendular. 

Peristalsis. — The  peristaltic  movement  consists  in  a  constriction 
of  the  walls  of  the  intestine,  which,  beginning  at  a  certain  point, 
passes  downward  away  from  the  stomach,  from  segment  to  segment, 
while  the  parts  behind  the  advancing  zone  of  constriction  gradually 
relax.  The  evident  effect  of  such  a  movement  is  to  push  onward  the 
contents  of  the  intestines  in  the  direction  of  the  movement.  It  is 
obvious  that  the  circular  layer  of  muscles  is  chiefly  involved  in 

*  "Archives  de  physiologie  normale  et  pathologique, "  1892,  p.  379. 
■[Ibid.,   1895,  p.   374. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE    ALIMENTARY    CANAL.  645 

peristalsis,-'-since  constriction  can  only  be  produced  by  contraction 
of  this  layer.  To  what  extent  the  longitudinal  muscles  enter  into 
the  movement  is  not  definitely  determined.  The  term  "anti- 
peristalsis"  is  used  to  describe  the  same  form  of  movement  running 
in  the  opposite  direction — that  is,  toward  the  stomach.  Anti- 
peristalsis  is  said  not  to  occur  under  normal  conditions;  it  has  been 
observed  sometimes  in  isolated  pieces  of  intestine  or  in  the  exposed 
intestine  of  living  animals  when  stimulated  artificially,  and  Griitz- 
ner*  reports  a  number  of  curious  experiments  which  seem  to  show 
that  substances  such  as  hairs,  animal  charcoal,  etc.,  introduced  into 
the  rectum  may  travel  upward  to  the  stomach  under  certain  con- 
ditions. The  peristaltic  wave  normally  passes  downward,  and  that 
this  direction  of  movement  is  dependent  upon  some  definite  ar- 
rangement in  the  intestinal  walls  is  shown  by  the  experiments  of 
Mallf  upon  reversal  of  the  intestines.  In  these  experiments  a 
portion  of  the  small  intestine  was  resected,  turned  around,  and 
sutured  in  place  again;  so  that  in  this  piece  what  was  the  lower  end 
became  the  upper  end.  In  those  animals  that  made  a  good  recovery 
the  nutritive  condition  gradually  became  very  serious,  and  when  the 
animals  were  killed  and  examined  it  was  found  that  there  was 
an  accumulation  of  food  at  the  stomach  end  of  the  reversed  piece  of 
intestine,  and  that  this  region  showed  marked  dilatation. 

The  peristaltic  movements  of  the  intestines  may  be  observed 
upon  living  animals  when  the  abdomen  is  opened.  If  the  operation 
is  made  in  the  air  and  the  intestines  are  exposed  to  its  influence,  or 
if  the  conditions  of  temperature  and  circulation  are  otherwise 
disturbed,  the  movements  observed  are  often  violent  and  irregular. 
The  peristalsis  runs  rapidly  along  the  intestines  and  may  pass  over 
the  whole  length  in  about  a  minute;  at  the  same  time  the  con- 
traction of  the  longitudinal  muscles  gives  the  bowels  a  peculiar 
writhing  movement.  Movements  of  this  kind  are  evidently 
abnormal,  and  only  occur  in  the  body  under  the  strong  stimulation 
of  pathological  conditions.  Normal  peristalsis,  the  object  of  which 
is  to  move  the  food  slowly  along  the  alimentary  tract,  is  quite  a 
different  affair.  Observers  all  agree  that  the  wave  of  contraction 
is  gentle  and  progresses  slowly,  although  at  different  rates  perhaps 
in  different  parts  of  the  intestine.  According  to  Bayliss  and  Star- 
ling, J  the  peristaltic  movement  is  a  complicated  reflex  through  the 
intrinsic  ganglia.  When  the  intestine  is  stimulated  by  a  bolus 
placed  within  its  cavity,  the  musculature  above  the  point  stimulated 
is  excited,  while  that  below  is  inhibited.  In  accordance  with  this 
law  they  find  that  in  peristalsis  the  advancing  wave  of  constriction 

*  "  Deutsche  medicinische   Wochenschrift, "   No.    48,    1894. 
t  "Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports,"  1,  93,  1896. 
i  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  24,  99,  1899. 


646  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

is  preceded  by  a  wave  of  relaxation  or  inhibition.  The  force  of  the 
contraction  as  measured  by  Cash*  in  the  dog's  intestine  is  very  small. 
A  weight  of  five  to  eight  grams  was  sufficient  to  check  the  onward 
movement  of  the  substance  in  the  intestine  and  to  set  up  violent, 
colicky  contractions  which  caused  the  animal  evident  uneasiness. 
We  may  suppose  that  under  normal  conditions  each  injection  of 
chyme  from  the  stomach  into  the  duodenum  is  followed  by  a 
peristalsis  that,  beginning  at  the  duodenum,  passes  slowly  down- 
ward over  a  part  or  all  of  the  small  intestine.  According  to  most 
observers,  the  movement  is  blocked  at  the  ileocecal  valve,  and  the 
peristaltic  movements  of  the  large  intestine  form  an  independent 
group. 

Mechanism  of  the  Peristaltic  Movement. — The  means  by  which 
the  peristaltic  movement  makes  its  orderly  forward  progression 
have  not  been  determined  beyond  question.  The  simplest  explana- 
tion would  be  to  assume  that  an  impulse  is  conveyed  directly  from 
cell  to  cell  in  the  circular  muscular  coat,  so  that  a  contraction  started 
at  any  point  would  spread  by  direct  conduction  of  the  contraction 
change.  This  theory,  however,  does  not  explain  satisfactorily  the 
normal  conduction  of  the  wave  of  contraction  always  in  one  direc- 
tion, nor  the  fact  that  the  wave  of  contraction  is  preceded  by  a 
wave  of  inhibition.  Moreover,  Bayliss  and  Starling  state  that, 
although  the  peristaltic  movements  continue  after  section  of  the 
extrinsic  nerves, — ^indeed,  become  more  marked  under  these  con- 
ditions,— the  application  of  cocain  or  nicotin  prevents  their  oc- 
currence. Since  these  substances  may  be  supposed  to  act  on  the 
intrinsic  nerves,  it  is  probable  that  the  co-ordination  of  the  move- 
ment is  effected  through  the  local  nerve  ganglia,  but  our  knowledge 
of  the  mechanism  and  physiology  of  these  peripheral  nerve-plexuses 
is  as  yet  quite  incomplete. 

Pendular  Movements. — In  addition  to  the  peristaltic  wave  a 
second  kind  of  movement  may  be  observed  in  the  exposed  intestines 
of  a  living  animal.  This  movement  is  characterized  by  a  gentle 
swinging  to  and  fro  of  the  different  loops,  whence  its  name  of  pendu- 
lar movement.  Mallf  has  shown  that  the  main  feature  of  this 
movement  is  a  rhythmical  contraction  of  the  circular  muscles. 
He  prefers  to  speak  of  the  movements  as  rhythmical  instead  of 
pendular  contractions,  and  points  out  that,  owing  to  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  blood-vessels  in  the  coats  of  the  intestine,  the  rhythmical 
contractions  should  act  as  a  pump  to  expel  the  blood  from  the 
submucous  venous  plexus  into  the  radicles  of  the  superior  mesenteric 
vein,  and  thus  materially  aid  in  keeping  up  the  circulation  through 
the  intestine  and  in  maintaining  a  good  pressure  in  the  portal  vein, 

*" Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society,"  London,  41,  1887. 
t" Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports,"  1,  37,  1896. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE    ALIMENTARY    CANAL.  647 

in  much -the  same  way  as  happens  in  the  case  of  the  spleen.  Bayliss 
and  Starhng  corroborate  this  view,  except  that  they  find  that  both 
the  circular  and  longitudinal  layers  of  muscle  are  concerned  in  the 
movement.  The  rhythmical  contractions,  according  to  these 
observers,  are  entirely  muscular  in  origin,  since  they  persist  after 
the  application  of  nicotin  or  cocain. 

Cannon*  has  studied  the  movements  of  the  small  intestines  most 
successfully  by  means  of  the  Roentgen  rays.  He  finds,  in  the  cat, 
that  the  most  characteristic  phenomenon  is  that  due  to  the  rhyth- 
mical or  pendular  movements.  By  means  of  these  contractions 
masses  or  strings  of  the  food  are  suddenly  segmented  repeatedly 
and  in  a  definite  manner  into  a  number  of  small  pieces,  which  move 
to  and  fro  as  the  pieces  combine  and  are  again  separated.  These 
segmentations  may  proceed  at  the  rate  of  thirty  per  minute  for  a 
certain  time,  and  the  apparent  result  is  that  the  material  is  well 
mixed  with  the  digestive  secretions  and  is  brought  thoroughly  into 
contact  with  the  absorptive  walls.  During  these  rhythmical 
contractions  there  is  no  steady  progression  of  the  food;  it  remains 
in  the  same  region,  although  subjected  to  repeated  divisions. 
From  time  to  time  the  separated  pieces  are  caught,  as  it  were, 
by  an  advancing  peristaltic  wave,  moved  forward  a  certain  dis- 
tance, and  gathered  again  into  a  new  mass.  In  this  new  location 
the  rhythmical  contractions  again  segment  and  chum  the  mass 
before  a  new  peristaltic  wave  moves  it  on.  According  to  this 
description,  the  rhythmical  movements  are  local  contractions 
(mainly  of  the  circular  muscles)  which  seem  to  be  due  to  the  local 
distension  caused  by  the  food.  They  occur  rhythmically  for  a 
certain  period  and  then  cease  until  a  new  series  is  started.  Some- 
what similar  movements  have  been  described  by  Bunch  f  from 
observations  on  the  isolated  intestine.  The  curious  observation  is 
reported  I  that  during  the  period  of  fasting  (dog)  the  whole  gastro- 
intestinal canal,  although  empty,  shows  at  intervals  rhythmical 
contractions  of  its  musculature  which  may  last  for  twenty  to  thirty 
minutes  (see  p.  703). 

The  Nervous  Control  of  the  Intestinal  Movements. — ^As 
stated,  there  is  some  evidence  to  show  that  the  rhythmical  con- 
tractions of  the  intestines  are  muscular  in  origin  (myogenic),  while 
the  more  co-ordinated  peristaltic  movements  depend  upon  the 
intrinsic  nervous  mechanism.  The  intestine  is,  however,  not  de- 
pendent for  either  movement  upon  its  connections  with  the  central 
nervous  system.  Like  the  stomach,  it  is  an  automatic  organ  whose 
activity  is  regulated  through  its  extrinsic  nerves. 

*  Cannon,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  6,  251,  1902. 

t  Bunch,   "Journal  of  Physiology,"  22,  357,   1897. 

j  Boldireff,  "Archives  des  sciences  biologiques, "   11,   1,  1905. 


648  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

The  small  intestine  and  the  greater  part  of  the  large  intestine 
receive  visceromotor  nerve  fibers  from  the  vagi  and  the  sympathetic 
chain.  The  former,  according  to  most  observers,  when  artifically 
stimulated  cause  movements  of  the  intestine,  and  are  therefore 
regarded  as  the  motor  fibers.  It  seems  probable,  however,  that  the 
vagi  carry  or  may  carry  in  some  animals  inhibitory  fibers  as  well, 
and  that  the  motor  effects  usually  obtained  upon  stimulation  are 
due  to  the  fact  that  in  these  nerves  the  motor  fibers  predominate. 
The  fibers  received  from  the  sympathetic  chain,  on  the  other  hand, 
give  mainly  an  inhibitory  effect  when  stimulated,  although  some 
motor  fibers  apparently  may  take  this  path.  Bechterew  and 
Mislawski  *  state  that  the  sympathetic  fibers  for  the  small  intestine 
emerge  from  the  spinal  cord  as  medullated  fibers  in  the  sixth  dorsal 
to  the  first  lumbar  spinal  nerves,  (or  lower — Bunch)  and  pass  to  the 
sympathetic  chain  in  the  splanchnic  nerves  and  thence  to  the 
semilunar  plexus.  The  paths  of  these  fibers  through  the  central 
nervous  system  are  not  known,  but  there  are  e\'idently  connections 
extending  to  the  higher  brain  centers,  since  psychical  states  are 
known  to  influence  the  movements  of  the  intestine,  and  according 
to  some  observers  stimulation  of  portions  of  the  cerebral  cortex 
may  produce  movements  or  relaxation  of  the  walls  of  the  small  and 
large  intestines. 

Effect  of  Various  Conditions  upon  the  Intestinal  Move- 
ments.— Experiments  have  shown  that  the  movements  of  the  in- 
testines may  be  evoked  in  many  ways  in  addition  to  direct  stimu- 
lation of  the  extrinsic  nerves.  Chemical  stimuli  may  be  applied 
directly  to  the  intestinal  wall.  Mechanical  stimulation — pinching, 
for  example,  or  the  introduction  of  a  bolus  into  the  intestinal 
cavity — may  start  peristaltic  movements.  Violent  movements 
ma}^  be  produced  also  by  shutting  off  the  blood-supply,  and  again 
temporarily  when  the  supply  is  re-established.  A  condition  of 
dyspnea  may  also  start  movements  in  the  intestines  or  in  some 
cases  inliibit  movements  which  are  already  in  progress,  the  stimu- 
lus in  this  case  seeming  to  act  upon  the  central  nervous  system  and 
to  stimulate  both  the  motor  and  the  inhibitory  fibers.  Oxygen  gas 
within  the  bowels  tends  to  suspend  the  movements  of  the  intes- 
tine, while  CO2,  CH4,  and  HjS  act  as  stimuli,  increasing  the  move- 
ments. Organic  acids,  such  as  acetic,  propionic,  formic,  and 
caprylic,  which  may  be  formed  normally  within  the  intestine  as 
the  result  of  bacterial  action,  act  also  as  strong  stimulants. 

Movements  of  the  Large  Intestine. — The  musculature  in  the 

large  intestine  has  the  same  general  arrangement  as  in  the  small, 

and  the  usual  view  has  been  that  the  movements  are  similar, 

although  more  infrequent,  so  that  the  material  received  from  the 

*"Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1889,  suppl.  volume. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE   ALIMENTARY    CANAL.  649 

small  intestine  is  slowly  moved  along  while  becoming  more  and 
more  solid  from  the  absorption  of  water,  until  in  the  form  of  feces 
it  reaches  the  sigmoid  flexure  and  rectum.  Bayliss  and  Starling 
state  that  their  law  of  intestinal  peristalsis  holds  in  this  portion  of 
the  intestine, — that  is,  local  excitation  causes  a  constriction  above 
and  a  dilatation  below  the  point  stimulated.  Cannon,*  however, 
from  his  studies  of  the  normal  movements  in  cats,  as  seen  by  the 
Roentgen  rays,  comes  to  the  conclusion  that  the  movements  in  the 
large  intestine  show  a  marked  peculiarity  previously  overlooked. 
He  divides  the  large  intestine  into  two  parts;  in  the  second,  cor- 
responding roughly  to  the  descending  colon  the  food  is  moved 
toward  the  rectum  by  peristaltic  waves.  A  number  of  constrictions 
may  be  seen  simultaneously  within  a  length  of  some  inches.  In 
the  ascending  and  transverse  colon  and  cecum,  on  the  contrary,  the 
most  frequent  movement  is  that  of  antiperistalsis.  The  food  in  this 
portion  of  the  canal  is  more  or  less  liquid  and  its  presence  sets  up 
running  waves  of  constriction,  which,  beginning  somewhere  in  the 
colon,  pass  toward  the  ileocecal  valve.  These  waves  occur  in  groups 
separated  by  periods  of  rest.  The  presence  of  the  ileocecal  valve 
prevents  the  material  from  being  forced  back  into  the  small  in- 
testine. The  value  of  this  peculiar  reversal  of  the  normal  move- 
ment of  the  bowels  at  this  particular  point  would  seem  to  lie  in  the 
fact  that  it  delays  the  passage  of  the  material  toward  the  rectum 
and  by  thoroughly  mixing  it  gives  increased  opportunities  for  the 
completion  of  the  processes  of  digestion  and  absorption.  As  the 
colon  becomes  filled  some  of  the  material  penetrates  into  the 
descending  part  where  the  normal  peristalsis  carries  it  toward  the 
rectum. 

The  large  intestine — particularly  the  descending  colon  and 
rectum — receives  its  nerve  supply  from  two  sources:  (1)  Fibers 
which  leave  the  spinal  cord  in  the  lumbar  nerves  (second  to  fifth 
in  cat),  pass  to  the  sympathetic  chain,  and  thence  to  the  inferior 
mesenteric  ganglia,  which  probably  forms  the  termination  of  the 
preganglionic  fiber.  From  this  point  the  path  is  continued  by  fibers 
running  in  the  hypogastric  nerves  and  plexus.  Stimulation  of  these 
fibers  has  given  different  results  in  the  hands  of  various  observers, 
but  the  most  recent  workf  indicates  that  they  are  inhibitory.  (2) 
Fibers  that  leave  the  cord  in  the  sacral  nerves  (second  to  fourth) 
form  part  of  the  nervi  erigentes  and  enter  into  the  pelvic  plexus. 
When  stimulated  these  fibers  cause  contractions  of  the  muscular 
coats;  they  may  be  regarded,  therefore,  as  motor  fibers.     As  in  the 

*  Cannon,  loc.  cit. 

t  Langley  and  Anderson,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  18,  67,  1895.  Bay- 
liss and  Starling,  ibid.,  26,  107,  1900.  Also  Wischnewsky,  in  Hermann's 
"  Jahresbericht  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  xii,  1905. 


650  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

case  of  the  small  intestine  and  stomach,  we  may  assume  that  these 
motor  and  inhibitory  fibers  serve  for  the  reflex  regulation  and 
adaptation  of  the  movements. 

Defecation. — The  undigested  and  indigestible  parts  of  the  food, 
together  with  some  of  the  debris  and  secretions  from  the  alimentary 
tract  eventually  reach  the  sigmoid  flexure  and  rectum.  Here  the 
nearly  solid  material  stimulates  by  its  pressure  the  sensory  nerves  of 
the  rectum  and  produces  a  distinct  sensation  and  desire  to  defecate. 
The  fecal  material  is  retained  within  the  rectum  by  the  action  of 
the  two  sphincter  muscles  which  close  the  anal  opening.  One  of 
these  muscles,  the  internal  sphincter,  is  a  strong  band  of  the  circular 
layer  of  involuntary  muscle  which  forms  one  of  the  coats  of  the 
rectum.  When  the  rectum  contains  fecal  material  this  muscle 
seems  to  be  thrown  into  a  condition  of  tonic  contraction  until 
the  act  of  defecation  begins,  when  it  is  relaxed.  The  sphincter  is 
composed  of  involuntary  muscle  and  is  innervated  by  fibers  having 
the  general  course  given  above  for  the  nerves  of  the  large  intestine. 
The  external  sphincter  ani  is  composed  of  striated  muscle  tissue  and 
is  under  the  control  of  the  will  to  a  certain  extent.  When,  however, 
the  stimulus  from  the  rectum  is  sufficiently  intense,  voluntary 
control  is  overcome  and  this  sphincter  is  also  relaxed.  The  act  of 
defecation  is  in  part  voluntary  and  in  part  involuntary.  The 
involuntary  factor  is  found  in  the  contractions  of  the  strongly 
developed  musculature  of  the  rectum,  especially  the  circular  layer 
which  serves  to  force  the  feces  onward,  and  the  relaxation  of  the 
internal  sphincter.  It  would  seem  that  these  two  acts  are  mainly 
caused  by  reflex  stimulation  from  the  lumbar  spinal  cord,  although 
it  is  probable  that  the  rectum,  like  the  rest  of  the  alimentary  tract, 
is  capable  of  automatic  contractions.  The  rectal  muscles  receive  a 
double  nervous  supply,  containing  physiologically  both  motor  and 
inhibitory  fibers.  The  former  come  probably  from  the  nervus 
erigens  by  way  of  the  pelvic  plexus ;  the  latter  from  the  lumbar  cord 
through  the  corresponding  sympathetic  ganglia,  inferior  mesenteric 
ganglion,  and  hypogastric  nerve.  It  has  been  asserted  that  stimu- 
lation of  the  nervus  erigens  causes  contraction  of  the  longitudinal 
muscles  and  inhibition  of  the  circular  muscles,  while  stimulation  of 
the  hypogastric  nerve  causes  contraction  of  the  circular  muscles 
and  inhibition  of  the  longitudinal  layer.  This  division  of  activity 
has  not  been  confirmed  by  recent  experiments. 

The  voluntary  factor  in  defecation  consists  in  the  inhibition  of 
the  external  sphincter  and  the  contraction  of  the  abdominal  muscles. 
When  these  latter  muscles  are  contracted  and  at  the  same  time  the 
diaphragm  is  prevented  from  moving  upward  by  the  closure  of  the 
glottis,  the  increased  abdominal  pressure  is  brought  to  bear  upon  the 
abdominal  and  pelvic  viscera,  and  aids  strongly  in  pressing  the 


MOVEMENTS   OF   THE    ALIMENTARY   CANAL.  651 

contentsof  the  descending  colon  and  sigmoid  flexure  into  the  rectum. 
The  pressure  in  the  abdominal  cavity  is  still  further  increased  if 
a  deep  inspiration  is  first  made  and  then  maintained  during  the 
contraction  of  the  abdominal  muscles.  Although  the  act  of  defeca- 
tion is  normally  initiated  by  voluntary  effort,  it  may  also  be  aroused 
by  a  purely  involuntary  reflex  when  the  sensory  stimulus  is  suf- 
ficiently strong.  Goltz*  has  shown  that  in  dogs  in  which  the  spinal 
cord  had  been  severed  in  the  lower  thoracic  region  defecation  was 
performed  normally.  In  later  experiments,  in  which  the  entire 
spinal  cord  was  removed,  except  in  the  cervical  and  upper  part  of 
the  thoracic  region,  it  was  found  that  the  animal,  after  it  had  re- 
covered from  the  operation,  had  normal  movement  once  or  twice  a 
day,  indicating  that  the  rectum  and  lower  bowels  acted  by  virtue  of 
their  intrinsic  mechanism.  An  interesting  result  of  these  experi- 
ments was  the  fact  that  the  external  sphincter  suffered  no  atrophy, 
although  its  motor  nerve  was  destroyed,  and  that  it  eventually 
regained  its  tonic  activity. 

It  would  seem  that  the  whole  act  of  defecation  is,  at  bottom,  an 
involuntary  reflex.  The  physiological  center  for  the  movement 
probably  lies  in  the  lumbar  cord,  and  has  sensory  and  motor  con- 
nections with  the  rectum  and  the  muscles  of  defecation;  but  this 
center  is  probably  provided  with  connections  with  the  centers  of 
the  cerebrum,  through  which  the  act  may  be  controlled  by  volun- 
tary impulses  and  by  various  psychical  states,  the  effect  of  emo- 
tions upon  defecation  being  a  matter  of  common  knowledge.  In 
infants  the  essentially  involuntary  character  of  the  act  is  well 
known. 

Vomiting. — The  act  of  vomiting  causes  an  ejection  of  the  con- 
tents of  the  stomach  through  the  esophagus  and  mouth  to  the 
exterior.  It  was  long  debated  whether  the  force  producing  this 
ejection  comes  from  a  strong  contraction  of  the  walls  of  the  stomach 
itself  or  whether  it  is  due  mainly  to  the  action  of  the  walls  of  the 
abdomen.  A  forcible  spasmodic  contraction  of  the  abdominal 
muscles  takes  place,  as  may  easily  be  observed  by  any  one  upon 
himself,  and  it  is  now  believed  that  the  contraction  of  these  muscles 
is  the  principal  factor  in  vomiting.  Magendie  found  that  if  the 
stomach  was  extirpated  and  a  bladder  containing  water  was  sub- 
stituted in  its  place  and  connected  with  the  esophagus,  injection 
of  an  emetic  caused  a  typical  vomiting  movement  with  ejection  of 
the  contents  of  the  bladder.  Gianuzzi  showed,  on  the  other  hand, 
that  upon  a  curarized  animal  vomiting  could  not  be  produced  by  an 
emetic — because,  apparently,  the  muscles  of  the  abdomen  were 
paralyzed  by  the  curare.  There  are  on  record  a  number  of  ob- 
servations which  tend  to  show  that  the  stomach  is  not  passive 
*"Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  8,   160,  1874;    63,  362,  1896. 


652  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

during  the  act.  On  the  contrary,  it  may  exhibit  contractions,  more 
or  less  violent  in  character.  According  to  Openchowski,*  the 
pylorus  is  closed  and  the  pyloric  end  of  the  stomach  firmly  con- 
tracted so  as  to  drive  the  contents  toward  the  dilated  cardiac  por- 
tion. Cannon  states  that  in  cats  the  normal  peristaltic  waves  pass 
over  the  pyloric  portion  in  the  period  preceding  the  vomiting  and 
that  finally  a  strong  contraction  at  the  "transverse  band"  com- 
pletely shuts  off  the  pyloric  portion  from  the  body  of  the  stomach, 
which  at  this  time  is  quite  relaxed.  The  act  of  vomiting  is,  in  fact, 
a  complex  reflex  movement  into  which  many  muscles  enter.  The 
following  events  are  described :  The  vomiting  is  usually  preceded  by 
a  sensation  of  nausea  and  a  reflex  flow  of  saliva  into  the  mouth. 
These  phenomena  are  succeeded  or  accompanied  by  retching  move- 
ments, which  consist  essentially  in  deep,  spasmodic  inspirations  with 
a  closed  glottis.  The  effect  of  these  movements  is  to  compress  the 
stomach  by  the  descent  of  the  diaphragm,  and  at  the  same  time  to 
increase  decidedly  the  negative  pressure  in  the  thorax,  and  therefore 
in  the  thoracic  portion  of  the  esophagus.  During  one  of  these 
retching  movements  the  act  of  vomiting  is  effected  by  a  convulsive 
contraction  of  the  abdominal  wall  that  exerts  a  sudden  additional 
strong  pressure  upon  the  stomach.  At  the  same  time  the  cardiac 
orifice  of  the  stomach  is  dilated,  possibly  by  an  inhibition  of  the 
sphincter,  and  according  to  the  above  description  the  fundic  end 
of  the  stomach  is  also  dilated,  while  the  pyloric  end  is  in  strong 
contraction.  The  stomach  contents  are  therefore  forced  violently 
out  of  the  stomach  through  the  esophagus ,  the  negative  pressure  in 
the  latter  probably  assisting  in  the  act.  The  passage  through  the 
esophagus  is  effected  mainly  by  the  force  of  the  contraction  of  the 
abdominal  muscles;  there  is  no  evidence  of  antiperistaltic  move- 
ments on  the  part  of  the  esophagus  itself.  During  the  ejection  of 
the  contents  of  the  stomach  the  glottis  is  kept  closed  by  the  adductor 
muscles,  and  usually  the  nasal  chamber  is  likewise  shut  off  from  the 
pharynx  by  the  contraction  of  the  posterior  pillars  of  the  fauces  on 
the  palate  and  uvula.  In  violent  vomiting,  however,  the  vomited 
material  may  break  through  this  latter  barrier  and  be  ejected 
partially  through  the  nose. 

Nervous  Mechanism  of  Vomiting. — That  vomiting  is  a  reflex  act 
is  abundantly  shown  by  the  frequency  with  which  it  is  produced  in 
consequence  of  the  stimulation  of  sensory  nerves  or  as  the  result 
of  injuries  to  various  parts  of  the  central  nervous  system.  After 
lesions  or  injuries  of  the  brain  vomiting  often  results.  Disagreeable 
emotions  and  disturbances  of  the  sense  of  equilibrium  may  produce 
the  same  result.  Irritation  of  the  mucous  membrane  of  various 
parts  of  the  alimentary  canal  (as,  for  example,  tickling  the  back 
*  "  Archiv  f .    Physiologie, "    1889,   p.    552. 


MOVEMENTS    OF   THE    ALIMENTARY   CANAL.  653 

of  the  pharynx  with  the  finger);  disturbances  of  the  urogenital 
apparatus,  the  Hver,  and  other  visceral  organs;  artificial  stimula- 
tion of  the  trunk  of  the  vagus  and  of  other  sensory  nerves,  may  all 
cause  vomiting.  Under  ordinary  conditions,  however,  irritation  of 
the  sensory  nerves  of  the  gastric  mucous  membrane  is  the  most 
common  cause  of  vomiting.  This  effect  may  result  from  the  prod- 
ucts of  fermentation  in  the  stomach  in  cases  of  indigestion,  or  may 
be  produced  intentionally  by  local  emetics,  such  as  mustard,  taken 
into  the  stomach.  The  afferent  path  in  this  case  is  through  the 
sensory  fibers  of  the  vagus.  The  efferent  paths  of  the  reflex  are 
found  in  the  motor  nerves  innervating  the  muscles  concerned  in  the 
vomiting, — namely,  the  vagus,  the  phrenics,  and  the  spinal  nerves 
supplying  the  abdominal  muscles.  Whether  or  not  there  is  a  defi- 
nite vomiting  center  in  which  the  afferent  impulses  are  received 
and  through  which  a  co-ordinated  series  of  efferent  impulses  is 
sent  out  to  the  various  muscles  has  not  been  satisfactorily  deter- 
mined. It  has  been  shown  that  the  portion  of  the  nervous  system 
through  which  the  reflex  is  effected  lies  in  the  medulla,  and  it  may 
be  observed  that  the  muscles  concerned  in  the  act,  outside  those 
of  the  stomach,  are  respiratory  muscles.  Vomiting,  in  fact,  consists 
essentially  in  a  simultaneous  spasmodic  contraction  of  expiratory 
(abdominal)  muscles  and  inspiratory  muscles  (diaphragm).  It  has 
therefore  been  suggested  that  the  reflex  involves  the  stimulation  of 
the  respiratory  center  or  some  part  of  it.  Thumas  claims  to  have 
located  a  vomiting  center  in  the  medulla  in  the  immediate  neighbor- 
hood of  the  calamus  scriptorius.  Further  evidence,  however,  is 
required  upon  this  point.  The  act  of  vomiting  may  be  produced 
not  only  as  a  reflex  from  various  sensory  nerves,  but  may  also  be 
caused  by  direct  action  upon  the  medullar}^  centers.  The  action 
of  apomorphin  is  most  easily  explained  by  supposing  that  it  acts 
directly  on  the  nerve  centers. 


CHAPTER  XL. 

GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  UPON  THE  COMPOSITION 
OF  THE  FOOD  AND  THE  ACTION  OF  ENZYMES. 

Foods  and  Foodstuffs. — The  term  food  when  used  in  a  popular 
sense  includes  everything  that  we  eat  for  the  purpose  of  nourishing 
the  body.  From  this  point  of  view  the  food  of  mankind  is  of  a  most 
varied  character,  comprising  a  great  variety  of  products  of  the 
animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms.  Chemical  analysis  of  the  animal 
and  vegetable  foods  shows,  however,  that  they  all  contain  one  or 
more  of  five  or  six  different  classes  of  substances  which  are  usually 
designated  as  the  foodstuffs  (older  names,  alimentary  or  proximate 
principles)  on  the  belief  that  they  form  the  useful  constituent  of  our 
foods.     The  classification  of  foodstuffs  usually  given  is  as  follows: 

Water. 

Inorganic  salts. 
Proteids. 
Foodstuffs    (^  Albuminoids,  a  group  of  bodies  resembling  proteids,  but  hav- 
ing in  some  respects  a  different  nutritive  value. 
Carbohydrates. 
Fats. 

From  the  scientific  point  of  view,  a  foodstuff  or  food  may  be  defined 
as  a  substance  absolutely  necessary  to  the  normal  composition  of 
the  body,  as  in  the  case  of  water  and  salts,  or  as  a  substance  which 
can  be  acted  upon  by  the  tissues  of  the  body  in  such  a  way  as  to 
yield  energy  (heat,  for  example)  or  to  furnish  material  for  the  pro- 
duction of  living  tissue.  Moreover,  to  be  a  food  in  the  physiological 
sense  the  substance  must  not  directly  or  indirectly  affect  injuriously 
the  normal  nutritive  processes  of  the  tissues.  The  five  or  six 
substances  named  above  are  all  foods  in  this  sense.  The  water  and 
certain  salts  of  sodium,  potassium,  calcium,  magnesium,  iron,  and 
perhaps  other  elements  are  absolutely  necessary  to  maintain  the 
normal  composition  of  the  tissue.  Complete  withdrawal  of  any 
one  of  these  constituents  would  cause  the  death  of  the  organism. 
Proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates,  on  the  other  hand,  are  substances 
whose  molecules  have  a  more  or  less  complex  structure.  When 
eaten  and  digested  they  enter  the  body  liquids  and  are  employed 
either  in  the  synthesis  of  the  more  complex  living  matter,  or  they 
undergo  various  chemical  changes,  spoken  of  in  general  as  metab- 
olism, which  result  finally  in  the  breaking   up  of  their  complex 

654 


COMPOSITION    OF    FOOD    AND    ACTION    OF   ENZYMES. 


655 


molecules  into  simpler  compounds.  The  chemical  changes  of  metab- 
olism or  nutrition  are,  on  the  whole,  exothermic, — that  is,  they  are 
attended  by  the  production  of  heat.  Some  of  the  chemical  or  in- 
ternal energy  that  held  the  complex  molecules  together  assumes  the 
form  of  heat,  or  perhaps  muscular  work,  after  these  molecules  are 
broken  down  to  simpler,  more  stable  structures,  such  as  water,  carbon 
dioxid,  and  urea.  Proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates  form  materials 
that  the  tissue  cells  are  adjusted  to  act  upon  after  they  have  under- 
gone certain  changes  during  digestion.  Other  complex  organic 
compounds  containing  chemical  energy  are  either  injurious  to  the 
tissues  or  they  have  a  structure  such  that  the  tissues  can  not  act  upon 
them.  Such  substances  can  not  be  considered  as  foods  in  the  scien- 
tific sense.  When,  therefore,  we  desire  to  know  the  food  value  of  any 
animal  or  vegetable  product,  we  analyze  it  to  determine  its  com- 
position as  regards  water,  salts,  proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates. 
The  following  table  compiled  by  Munk  from  the  analyses  given  by 
Konig*  may  be  taken  as  an  indication  of  the  average  composition 
of  the  most  commonly  used  foods : 


COMPOSITION  OF  FOODS. 


In  100  Parts. 


Meat 

Eggs 

Cheese   

Cows'  milk 

Human  miUc 

Wheat  flour 

Wheat  bread 

Rye  flour 

Rye  bread 

Rice 

Corn 

Macaroni 

Peas,  beans,  lentils 

Potatoes 

Carrots 

Cabbages 

Mushrooms 

Fruit    


Water. 


76.7 
73.7 

36-60 
87.7 
89.7 
13.3 
35.6 
13.7 
42.3 
13.1 
13.1 
10.1 

12-15 

75.5 

87.1 

90 

73-91 
84 


Proteid. 

Fat. 

20.8 

1.5 

12.6 

12.1 

25-33 

7-30 

3.4 

3.2 

2.0 

3.1 

10.2 

0.9 

7.1 

0.2 

11.5 

2.1 

6.1 

0.4 

7.0 

0.9 

9.9 

4.6 

9.0 

0.3 

23-26 

1^2 

2.0 

0.2 

1.0 

0.2 

2-3 

0.5 

4-8 

0.5 

0.5 

Carbohydrate. 


Digestible.      Cellulose 


0.3 

3^7 

4.8 

5.0 

74.8 

55.5 

69.7 

49.2 

77.4 

68.4 

79.0 

49-54 

20.6 

9.3 

4-6 

3-12 

10 


0.3 
0.3 
1.6 
0.5 
0.6 
2.5 
0.3 
4^7 
0.7 
1.4 
1-2 
1-5 
4 


Ash. 


1.3 
1.1 
3-4 
0.7 
0.2 
0.5 
1.1 
1.4 
1.5 
1.0 
1.5 
0.5 
2-3 
1.0 
0.9 
1.3 
1.2 
0.5 


An  examination  of  this  table  shows  that  the  animal  foods,  par- 
ticularly the  meats,  are  characterized  by  their  small  percentage  in 
carbohydrate  and  by  a  relatively  large  amount  of  proteid  or  of 
proteid  and  fat.     With  regard  to  the  last  two  foodstuffs,  meats  differ 

*  See  Konig,  "  Die  menschlichen  Nahrungs  und  Genussmittel " ;  and 
Atwater  and  Bryant,  "The  Chemical  Composition  of  American  Food  Mate- 
rials, "  Bulletin  28,  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  1899. 


656 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 


very  much  among  themselves.  Some  idea  of  the  Umits  of  variation 
may  be  obtained  from  the  following  table,  taken  chiefly  from 
Konig's  analyses: 


Beef,  moderately  fat  .  . 

Veal,  fat 

Mutton,  moderately  fat 

Pork,  lean 

Ham,  salted 

Pork  (bacon),  very  fat* 
Mackerel* 


Water. 

Proteid. 

Fat. 

73.03 

20.96 

5.41 

72.31 

18.88 

7.41 

75.99 

17.11 

5.77 

72.57 

20.05 

6.81 

62.58 

22.32 

8.68 

10.00 

3.00 

80.50 

71.6 

18.8 

8.2 

Carbohydrate. 


0.46 
0.07 


Ash. 


1.14 

1.33 

1.33 

1.10 

6.42 

6.5 

1.4 


The  vegetable  foods  are  distinguished,  as  a  rule,  by  their  large 
percentage  in  carbohydrates  and  the  relatively  small  amounts  of 
proteids  and  fats,  as  seen,  for  example,  in  the  composition  of  rice, 
corn,  wheat,  and  potatoes.  Nevertheless,  it  will  be  noticed  that  the 
proportion  of  proteid  in  some  of  the  vegetables  is  not  at  all  insignifi- 
cant. They  are  characterized  by  their  excess  in  carbohydrates 
rather  than  by  a  deficiency  in  proteids.  The  composition  of  peas 
and  other  leguminous  foods  is  remarkable  for  the  large  percentage 
of  proteid,  which  exceeds  that  found  in  meats.  Analyses  such  as 
are  given  here  are  indispensable  in  determining  the  true  nutritive 
value  of  foods.  Nevertheless,  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the 
chemical  composition  of  a  food  is  not  alone  sufficient  to  determine 
its  precise  value  in  nutrition.  It  is  obviously  true  that  it  is  not  what 
we  eat,  but  what  we  digest  and  absorb,  that  is  nutritious  to  the 
body;  so  that,  in  addition  to  determining  the  proportion  of  food- 
stuffs in  any  given  food,  it  is  necessary  to  determine  to  what  extent 
the  several  constituents  are  digested.  This  factor  can  be  obtained 
only  by  actual  experiments.  It  may  be  said  here,  however,  that 
in  general  the  proteids  of  animal  foods  are  more  completely  digested 
than  are  those  of  vegetables,  and  with  them,  therefore,  chemical 
analysis  comes  nearer  to  expressing  directly  the  nutritive  value. 

Accessory  Articles  of  Diet. — In  addition  to  the  foodstuffs 
proper  our  foods  contain  numerous  other  substances  which  in  one 
way  or  another  are  useful  in  nutrition,  although  not  absolutely 
necessary.  These  substances,  differing  in  nature  and  importance, 
may  be  classified  under  the  three  heads  of : 

Flavors :  the  various  oils  or  esters  that  give  odor  and  taste  to  foods. 
Condiments:  pepper,  salt,  mustard,  etc.    • 
Stimulants :  alcohol,  tea,  coffee,  cocoa,  etc. 

The  specific  influence  of  these  substances  in  digestion  and  nutrition 
is  considered  in  the  section  on  nutrition. 

*  Atwater :    "  The  Chemistry  of  Foods  and  Nutrition, "  1887. 


COMPOSITION    OF   FOOD    AND    ACTION    OF    ENZYMES.  657 

The  Chemical  Changes  of  the  Foodstuffs  during  Digestion. 

— ^The  physiology  of  digestion  consists  chiefly  in  the  study  of  the 
chemical  changes  that  the  food  undergoes  during  its  passage  through 
the  alimentary  canal.  It  happens  that  these  chemical  changes  are 
of  a  peculiar  character.  The  peculiarity  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
changes  of  digestion  are  effected  through  the  agency  of  a  group  of 
bodies  known  as  enzymes,  or  unorganized  ferments,  whose  chemical 
action  is  more  obscure  than  that  of  the  ordinary  reagents  with  which 
we  have  to  deal.  It  will  save  repetition  to  give  here  certain  general 
facts  that  are  known  with  reference  to  these  bodies,  reserving  for 
later  treatment  the  details  of  the  action  of  the  specific  enzymes 
found  in  the  different  digestive  secretions. 


ENZYMES  AND  THEIR  ACTION. 

Historical. — The  term  fermentation  and  the  idea  that  it  is 
meant  to  convey  has  varied  greatly  during  the  course  of  years.  The 
word  at  first  was  applied  to  certain  obvious  and  apparently  spon- 
taneous changes  in  organic  materials  which  are  accompanied  by  the 
Hberation  of  bubbles  of  gas:  such,  for  instance,  as  the  alcoholic 
fermentations,  in  which  alcohol  is  formed  from  sugar;  the  acid  fer- 
mentations, as  in  the  souring  of  milk;  and  the  putrefactive  fer- 
mentations, by  means  of  which  animal  substances  are  disintegrated, 
with  the  production  of  offensive  odors.  These  mysterious  phenom- 
ena excited  naturally  the  interest  of  investigators,  and  with  the 
development  of  chemical  knowledge  numerous  other  processes  were 
discovered  which  resemble  the  typical  fermentations  in  that  they 
seem  to  be  due  to  specific  agents  whose  mode  of  action  differs  from 
the  usual  chemical  reactions,  especially  in  the  fact  that  the  causa- 
tive agent  itself,  or  the  ferment  as  it  is  called,  is  not  destroyed  or 
■used  up  in  the  reaction.  Thus  it  was  discovered  that  germinating 
barley  grains  contain  a  something  which  can  be  extracted  by  water 
and  which  can  convert  starch  into  sugar  (Kirchhoff,  1814).  Later 
this  substance  was  separated  by  precipitation  with  alcohol  and  was 
given  the  name  of  diastase  (Payen  and  Persoz,  1833).  Schwann 
in  1836  demonstrated  the  existence  of  a  ferment  (pepsin)  in  gastric 
juice  capable  of  acting  upon  albuminous  substances,  and  a  number 
of  similar  bodies  were  soon  discovered:  trypsin  in  the  pancreatic 
juice,  amygdalin,  invertin,  ptyalin,  etc.  These  substances  were  all 
designated  as  ferments,  and  their  action  was  compared  to  that  of 
the  alcoholic  fermentation  in  yeast,  the  process  of  putrefaction,  etc. 
Naturally  very  many  theories  have  been  proposed  regarding  the 
cause  of  the  processes  of  fermentation.  For  the  historical  develop- 
ment and  interrelation  of  these  theories  references  must  be  made  to 
42 


658  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

special  works.*  It  is  sufficient  here  to  say  that  the  brilUant  work 
of  Pasteur  estabhshed  the  fact  that  the  fermentations  in  the  old 
sense — alcoholic,  acid,  and  putrefactive — are  due  to  the  presence 
and  activity  of  living  organisms.  He  showed,  moreover,  that 
many  diseases  are  likewise  due  to  the  activity  of  minute  living 
organisms,  and  thus  justified  the  view  held  by  some  of  the  older 
physicians  that  there  is  a  close  similarity  in  the  processes  of  fer- 
mentation and  disease.  The  clear  demonstration  of  the  importance 
of  living  organisms  in  some  fermentations  and  the  equally  clear 
proof  of  the  existence  of  another  group  of  ferment  actions  in  which 
living  material  is  not  directly  concerned  led  to  a  classification  which 
is  used  even  at  the  present  day.  This  classification  divided  fer- 
ments into  two  great  groups :  the  living  or  organized  ferments,  such 
as  the  yeast  cell,  bacteria,  etc.;  and  the  non-living  or  unorganized 
ferments,  such  as  pepsin,  trypsin,  etc.,  which  later  were  generally 
designated  as  enzymes  (Kuhne).  The  separation  appeared  to  be 
entirely  satisfactory  until  Buchner  (1897)  showed  that  an  unor- 
ganized ferment,  an  enzyme  (zymase)  capable  of  producing  alcohol 
from  sugar,  may  be  extracted  from  yeast  cells.  Later  the  same 
observer  (1903)  succeeded  in  extracting  enzymes  from  the  lactic- 
acid-producing  bacteria  and  the  acetic-acid-producing  bacteria 
which  are  capable  of  giving  the  same  reactions  as  the  living  bacteria. 
These  discoveries  indicate  clearly  that  there  is  no  essential  difference 
between  the  activity  of  living  and  non-living  ferments.  The  so- 
called  organized  ferments  probably  produce  their  effects  not  by 
virtue  of  their  specific  life-metabolism,  but  by  the  manufacture 
within  their  substance  of  specific  enzymes.  If  we  can  accept  this 
conclusion,  then  the  general  explanation  of  fermentation  is  to  be 
sought  in  the  nature  of  the  enzymatic  processes.  Within  recent 
years  the  study  of  the  enzymes  has  attracted  especial  attention. 
A  very  large  literature  is  developing,  and  the  subject  is  therefore 
correspondingly  difficult  to  present  in  brief  compass.  The  general 
point  of  view  regarding  the  mode  of  action  of  enzymes  that  is  most 
frequently  met  with  to-day  is  that  advocated  especially  by  Ostwald. 
He  assumes,  reviving  an  older  view  (Berzelius),  that  the  ferment 
actions  are  similar  to  those  of  catalysis.  By  catalysis  chemists 
designated  a  species  of  reaction  which  is  brought  about  by  the  mere 
contact  or  presence  of  certain  substances,  the  catalyzers.  Thus, 
hydrogen  and  oxygen  at  ordinary  temperatures  do  not  combine 
to  form  water,  but  if  spongy  platinum  is  present  the  two  gases  unite 
readily.     The  platinum  does  not  enter  into  the  reaction,  at  least  it 

*  Consult  Green,  "The  Soluble  Ferments  and  Fermentations,"  1899; 
Effront,  "  Enzymes  and  their  Applications"  (translation  by  Prescott),  1902; 
Oppenheimer,  "Die  Fermentc  und  ihre  Wirkungen,"  second  edition,  1903j 
and  Henri,  "Lois  generates  de  I'action  des  diastases,"  1903. 


COMPOSITION    OF    FOOD    AND    ACTION    OF    ENZYMES.  659 

undergoes  no  change,  and  it  is  said,  therefore,  to  act  by  catalysis. 
Many  similar  catalytic  reactions  are  known,  and  the  chemists  have 
reached  the  important  generalization  that  in  such  reactions  the 
catalyzer,  platinum  in  the  above  instance,  simply  hastens  a  process 
which  would  occur  without  it,  but  much  more  slowly.  A  catalyzer 
is  a  substance,  therefore,  that  alters  the  velocity  of  a  reaction, 
but  does  not  initiate  it.  This  idea  is  illustrated  very  clearly  by 
the  catalysis  of  hydrogen  peroxid.  This  substance  decomposes 
spontaneously  into  water  and  oxygen  according  to  the  reaction 
H2O2  =  HjO  +  O,  but  the  decomposition  is  greatly  hastened  by 
the  presence  of  a  catalyzer.  Thus,  Bredig  has  shown  that  plati- 
num in  very  fine  suspension,  so-called  colloidal  solution,  exerts  a 
marked  accelerating  influence  upon  this  reaction;  one  part  of  the 
colloidal  platinum  to  350  million  parts  of  water  may  still  exercise  a 
perceptible  effect.  Now,  the  blood  and  aqueous  extracts  of  various 
tissues  also  catalyze  the  hydrogen  peroxid  readily,  and  this  effect 
has  been  attributed  to  the  action  of  an  enzyme  (catalase).  The 
view  has  been  proposed,  therefore,  that  the  enzymes  of  the  body 
act  like  the  catalyzers  of  inorganic  origin :  they  influence  the  velocity 
of  certain  special  reactions.  Such  a  general  conception  as  this 
unifies  the  whole  subject  of  fermentation  and  holds  out  the  hope 
that  the  more  precise  investigations  that  are  possible  in  the  case  of 
the  inorganic  catalyzers  will  eventually  lead  to  a  better  understanding 
of  the  underlying  physical  causes  of  fermentation.  It  should  be 
borne  in  mind,  however,  that  some  of  the  best  known  of  the  ferment 
actions  of  the  body,  such  as  the  peptic  or  tryptic  digestion  of  pro- 
teid,  fit  into  this  view  only  theoretically  and  by  analogy.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  albumins  at  ordinary  temperatures  do  not  split  up 
spontaneously  into  the  products  formed  by  the  action  of  pepsin; 
if  we  consider  that  the  pepsin  simply  accelerates  a  reaction  already 
taking  place,  it  must  be  stated  that  this  reaction  at  ordinary 
temperatures  is  infinitely  slow, — that  is,  practically  does  not  occur. 
At  higher  temperatures,  however,  similar  decompositions  of  al- 
bumin may  be  obtained  without  the  presence  of  an  enzyme. 

Reversible  Reactions. — It  has  been  shown  that  under  proper 
conditions  many  chemical  reactions  are  reversible, — that  is,  may 
take  place  in  opposite  directions.  For  instance,  acetic  acid  and 
ethyl-alcohol  brought  together  react  with  the  production  of  ethyl- 
acetate  and  water: 

CH3COOH  +  CoHjOH  =  CH3COOC2H,  +  H2O. 

Acetic  acid.  Alcohol.  Ethyl-acetate.        Water. 

On  the  other  hand,  when  ethyl-acetate  and  water  are  brought 
together  they  react  with  the  formation  of  some  acetic  acid  and 
ethyl-alcohol,  so  that  the  reaction  indicated  in  the  above  equation 


660  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

takes  place  in  opposite  directions,  figuratively  speaking, — a  fact 
which  may  be  indicated  by  a  symbol  of  this  kind: 

CH3COOH  +  C2H5OH  ^  CH3COOC2H5  +  H2O. 

It  is  evident  that  in  a  reversible  reaction  of  this  sort  the  opposite 
changes  will  eventually  strike  an  equilibrium,  the  solution  or  mix- 
ture will  contain  some  of  all  four  substances,  and  this  equilib- 
rium will  remain  constant  as  long  as  the  conditions  are  unchanged. 
If  the  conditions  are  altered,  however, — ^if,  for  example,  some  of  the 
substances  formed  are  removed  or  the  mixture  is  altered  as  to  its 
concentration, — then  the  reaction  will  proceed  unequally  in  the  two 
directions  until  a  new  equilibrium  is  established.  The  importance, 
in  the  present  connection,  of  this  conception  of  reversibility  of  reac- 
tions is  found  in  the  fact  that  a  number  of  the  catalytic  reactions 
are  also  reversible.  The  catalyzer  may  not  only  accelerate  a  reac- 
tion between  two  substances,  but  may  also  accelerate  the  recom- 
position  of  the  products  into  the  original  substances.  An  excellent 
instance  of  this  double  effect  has  been  obtained  by  Kastle  and 
Loevenhart  in  experiments  upon  one  of  the  enzymes  of  the  animal 
body,  lipase.  Lipase  is  the  enzyme  which  in  the  body  acts  upon  the 
neutral  fats,  converting  them  into  fatty  acids  and  glycerin, — a 
process  that  takes  place  as  a  usual  if  not  necessary  step  in  the  diges- 
tion and  absorption  of  fats.  The  authors  above  named*  made  use 
of  a  simple  ester  analogous  to  the  fats,  ethyl-butyrate,  and  showed 
that  lipase  causes  not  only  an  hydrolysis  of  this  substance  into  ethyl- 
alcohol  and  butyric  acid,  but  also  a  synthesis  of  the  two  last-named 
substances  into  ethyl-butyrate  and  water.  The  reaction  effected 
by  the  lipase  is  therefore  reversible  and  may  be  expressed  as : 

C^H.COOaHs  +  H2O  ^  C3H7COOH  +  C2H5OH. 

Ethyl-butyrate.       Water.  Butyric  acid.      Ethyl-alcohol. 

Lipase  is  capable  of  exerting  probably  a  similar  reversible  reaction  on 
the  fats  in  the  body.  Assuming  the  existence  of  such  an  action  in 
the  body,  it  is  possible  to  explain  not  only  the  digestion  of  fats,  but 
also  their  formation  in  the  tissues  and  their  absorption  from  the 
tissues  during  starvation.  That  is,  according  to  the  conditions  of 
concentration,  etc.,  one  and  the  same  enzyme  may  cause  a  splitting 
up  of  the  neutral  fat  into  fatty  acids  and  glycerin  or  a  storing  up  of 
neutral  fat  by  the  synthesis  of  fatty  acid  and  glycerin.  In  the 
subcutaneous  tissues,  therefore,  fat  may  be  stored,  to  a  certain  point, 
or,  if  the  conditions  are  altered,  the  fat  that  is  there  may  be  changed 
over  to  the  fatty  acids  and  glycerin  and  be  oxidized  in  the  body  as 
food. 

*  Kastle  and  Loevenhart,  "American  Chemical  Journal,"  24,  491    1900. 
See  also  Loevenhart,  "American  Physiological  Journal,"  6,  331,  1902. 


COMPOSITION   OF   FOOD   AND   ACTION   OF    ENZYMES.  661 

A  similar  reversibility  has  been  shown  for  some  of  the  other 
enzymes  of  the  body  (maltase  by  Hill,  1898),  but  whether  or  not  all 
of  them  will  be  shown  to  possess  this  power  under  the  conditions  of 
temperature,  etc.,  that  prevail  in  the  body  can  only  be  determined 
by  actual  experiments. 

The  Specificity  of  Enzymes. — A  most  interesting  feature  of 
the  activity  of  enzymes  is  that  it  is  specific.     The  enzymes  that 
act  upon  the   carbohydrates  are  not  capable  of  affecting  the  pro- 
teids  or  fats,  and  vice  versa.     So  in  the  fermentation  of  closely 
related  bodies  such  as  the  double  sugars,  the  enzyme  that  acts 
upon  the  maltose  is  not  capable  of  affecting  the  lactose;   each  re- 
quires seemingly  its  own  specific  enzyme.     In  fact,  there  is  no  clear 
proof  that  any  single  enzyme  can  produce  more  than  one  kind  of 
ferment  action.     If  in  any  extract  or  secretion  two  or  more  kinds 
of  ferment  action  can  be  demonstrated,  the  tendency  at  present 
is  to  attribute  these  different  activities  to  the  existence  of  separate 
and  specific  enzymes.     The  pancreatic  juice,  for  example,  splits 
proteids,  starches,  and  fats  and  curdles  milk,  and  there  are  assumed 
to  be  four  different  enzymes  present, — namely,  try-psin,  diastase, 
hpase,  and  rennin.     So  if  an  extract  containing  diastase  is  also 
capable  of  decomposing  hydrogen  peroxid  it  is  believed  that  this 
latter  effect  is  due  to  the  existence  of  a  special  enzyme,  catalase. 
It  seems  quite  probable  that  this  specificity  of  the  different  enzymes 
may  be  related,  as  Fischer  *  has  suggested,  to  the  geometrical  struc- 
ture of  the  substance  acted  upon.     Each  ferment  is  adapted  to  act 
upon  or  become  attached  to  a  molecule  with  a  certain  definite 
structure, — fitted  to  it,  in  fact,  as  a  key  to  its  lock.     In  this  respect 
the  action  of  the  so-called  hydrolytic  enzymes  differ  markedly  from 
the  dilute  acids  or  alkalies  which  hydrolyze  many  different  substances 
without  indication  of  any  specificity.     Attention  has  been  called  to 
the  fact  that  this  adaptibility  of  enzymes  to  certain  specific  struc- 
tures in  the  molecules  acted  upon  resembles  closely  the  specific 
activity   of    the    toxins,  and    many    useful    and    suggestive  com- 
parisons may  be  drawn  between  the  mode  of  action  of  enzymes 
and  toxins.     To  how  complete  an  extent  the  idea  of  the  specificity 
of  the  different  body  enzymes  may  be  carried  is  a  matter  for  future 
experiments.     At  present  the  tendency  is  to  attribute  each  new  kind 
of  activity  to  a  different  enzyme,  and  as  a  consequence  the  number 
of  different  enzymes  supposed  to  exist  in  the  body  is  increasing 
rapidly  with  the  spread  of  experimental  work. 

Definition  and  Classification  of  Enzymes  (Ferments).— On 

the  basis  of  the  considerations  presented  in  the  preceding  paragraphs 

Oppenheimer  suggests   the  following  definition:    A   ferment  is  a 

substance,  produced  by  living  cells,  which  acts  by  catalysis.     The 

♦Fischer,  "  Zeitschrift f .  physiolog.  Chemie,"  26,  71,  1898. 


662  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

ferment  itself  remains  unchanged  in  this  process,  and  it  acts  specifi- 
cally,— that  is,  each  ferment  exerts  its  activity  only  upon  substances 
whose  molecules  have  a  certain  definite  structural  and  stereochemical 
arrangement. 

With  regard  to  the  names  and  classification  of  the  different 
enzymes,  much  difficulty  is  experienced.  There  is  no  consensus 
among  workers  as  to  the  system  to  be  followed.  Duclaux  has  sug- 
gested that  an  enzyme  be  designated  by  the  name  of  the  body  on 
which  its  action  is  exerted,  and  that  all  of  them  be  given  the  termina- 
tion ase.  The  enzyme  acting  on  fat  on  this  system  would  be  named 
lipase;  that  on  starch,  amylase;  that  on  maltose,  maltase,  etc.  The 
suggestion  has  been  followed  in  part  only,  the  older  enzymes  which 
were  first  discovered  being  referred  to  most  frequently  under  their 
original  names.  An  entirely  satisfactory  classification  is  impossible 
at  present.  Ha\dng  in  mind  only  the  needs  of  animal  physi- 
ology, the  following  classification  will  be  used  in  the  treatment  of 
the  subjects  of  digestion  and  nutrition: 

1.  The    proteolytic    or    proteid-splitting   enzymes.     Examples:     pepsin 

of  gastric  juice,  trypsin  of  pancreatic  juice.  They  cause  a  hydro- 
lytic  cleavage  of  the  proteid  molecule. 

2.  The    amylolytic    or    starch-splitting    enzymes.     Examples:     ptyalin 

or  salivary  diastase,  amylopsin  or  pancreatic  diastase.  Their 
action  is  closely  similar  to  that  of  the  classical  enzyme  of  this  group 
— diastase — found  in  germinating  barley  grains.  They  cause  a 
hydrolytic  cleavage  of  the  starch  molecule. 

3.  The  lipolytic  or  fat -splitting  enzymes.     Example:    the  lipase  found 

in  the  pancreatic  secretion,  in  the  liver,  connective  tissues,  blood, 
etc.     They  cause  a  hydrolytic  cleavage  of  the  fat  molecule. 

4.  The   sugar-splitting  enzymes.     These  again  fall  into  two  subgroups: 

(a)  The  inverting  enzymes,  which  convert  the  double  sugars  or  di- 
saccharids  into  the  monosaccharids.  Examples:  maltase,  which 
splits  maltose  to  dextrose;  invertase,  which  splits  cane-sugar  to 
dextrose  and  levulose ;  and  lactase,  which  splits  milk-sugar  (lactose) 
to  dextrose  and  galactose.  (6)  The  enzymes  which  split  the  inono- 
saccharids.  There  is  evidence  of  the  presence  in  the  tissues  of  an 
enzyme  capable  of  splitting  the  sugar  of  the  blood  and  tissues 
(dextrose)  into  lactic  acid. 

5.  The   coagulating   enzymes,   which   convert   soluble  to  insoluble   pro- 

teids.  Examples:  fibrin  ferment  (thrombin  or  thrombase),  that 
causes  clotting  of  the  blood,  and  rennin,  that  causes  clotting  of  milk. 

6.  The  oxidizing   enzymes  or  oxidases.     A  group  of   enzymes  which  set 

up  oxidation  processes.  Some  of  the  details  of  the  activity  of 
these  enzymes  are  considered  in  the  discussion  of  physiological 
oxidations  (p.  833). 

The  enzymes  contained  in  the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth  (a) 
of  these  groups  are  the  ones  that  play  the  chief  roles  in  the  digestive 
processes,  and  it  will  be  noticed  that  they  all  act  by  hydrolysis, — 
that  is,  they  cause  the  molecules  of  the  substance  to  undergo  de- 
composition or  cleavage  by  a  reaction  with  water.  Thus,  in  the 
conversion  of  maltose  to  dextrose  by  the  action  of  maltase  the  re- 
action may  be  expressed  so : 


COMPOSITION    OF    FOOD    AND    ACTION    OF    ENZYMES.  663 

C12H22O11  +   H2O  =  CeHjjOe  +   CgHiaOg. 
Maltose.  Dextrose.        Dextrose. 

And  the  hydrolysis  of  the  neutral  fats  by  lipase  may  be  expressed 
so: 

C3H,(C,8H3,02)3  +   3H2O  =  C3H,(OH)3  +   3(C,3H3„02). 
Tristearin.  Glycerin.  Stearic  acid. 

General  Properties  of  Enzymes. — ^The  specific  reactions  of  the 
various  enzymes  of  the  body  are  referred  to  under  separate  heads. 
The  following  general  characteristics  may  be  noted  briefly : 

Solubility. — Most  of  the  enzymes  are  soluble  in  water  or  salt 
solutions,  or  in  glycerin.  By  these  means  they  may  be  extracted 
conveniently  from  the  various  tissues.  In  some  cases,  however,  such 
simple  methods  do  not  suffice ;  the  enzyme  is  destroyed  in  the  process 
of  extraction,  and  to  prove  its  presence  pieces  of  the  tissue  or  the 
juice  pressed  from  the  tissue  must  be  employed. 

Temperature. — The  body  enzymes  are  characterized  by  the  fact 
that  they  are  destroyed  by  high  temperatures  (60°  C.  to  80°  C.)  and 
that  their  effect  is  retarded  in  part  or  entirely  by  low  temperatures. 
Most  of  them  show  an  optimum  activity  at  temperatures  approxi- 
mating that  of  the  body. 

Precipitation. — The  enzymes  are  precipitated  from  their  solutions 
in  part  at  least  by  excess  of  alcohol.  Tliis  precipitation  is  frequently 
used  in  obtaining  purified  specimens  of  enzymes.  The  enzymes, 
moreover,  show  an  interesting  tendency  to  be  carried  down  mechani- 
cally by  fiocculent  precipitates  produced  in  their  solutions.  If 
proteid  present  in  the  solution  is  precipitated,  for  instance,  the 
enzymes  may  be  carried  down  with  it  in  part. 

Incompleteness  of  their  Action. — In  any  given  mixture  of  a 
substance  and  its  enzyme  the  action  of  the  latter  is  not  complete, — 
that  is,  all  of  the  substance  does  not  disappear.  An  explanation  for 
this  fact  has  been  found  in  the  reversibility  of  the  action  of  the 
enzyme.  If  the  reaction  proceeds  in  both  directions,  then  evidently 
under  fixed  conditions  a  final  equilibrium  will  be  reached  in  which 
no  further  apparent  change  takes  place,  although  in  reality  the 
condition  is  not  one  of  rest,  but  of  balance  between  opposing  proc- 
esses proceeding  at  a  definite  rate.  Within  the  body  itself,  on 
the  contrary,  the  action  of  an  enzyme  may  be  complete,  since  the 
products  are  removed  by  absorption  and  the  possibility  of  a  re- 
versed reaction  is  removed.  In  some  cases — for  instance,  the  co- 
agulating enzymes — the  action  is  apparently  always  complete. 

Active  and  Inactive  Form. — In  many  cases  it  can  be  shown  that 
the  enzyme  exists  within  the  cell  producing  it  in  an  inactive  form 
or  even  when  secreted  it  may  still  be  inactive.  This  antecedent  or 
inactive  stage  is  usually  designated  as  zymogen.  The  zymogen  may 
be  stored  in  the  cell  in  the  form  of  granules  which  are  converted  into 


664 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 


active  enzyme  at  the  moment  of  secretion,  or  it  may  be  secreted  in 
inactive  form  and  require  the  co-operation  of  some  other  substance 
before  it  is  capable  of  effecting  its  normal  reaction.  In  such  cases  the 
second  substance  is  said  to  activate  the  enzyme.  An  example  is 
found  in  the  case  of  the  trypsin  of  the  pancreatic  secretion. 

PARTIAL  LIST  OF  THE  ENZYMES  CONCERNED  IN  THE  PROC- 
ESSES OF  DIGESTION  AND  NUTRITION. 


o 

c3 


Enzyme. 

Ptyalin  (sali- 
vary diastase. 

A  m  y  lo  p  s  i  n 
(pancreatic 
diastase) . 

Liver  diastase. 

Invertase. 
Maltase. 


Lactase. 
Glycolytic? 

Lipase      (steap- 
sin) . 

Pepsin. 
Trypsin. 


Erepsin. 

Group  of  auto- 
lytic  enzymes. 


Guanase. 
Adenase. 

Oxidases. 

Catalase. 


Where  Chiefly 
Found. 

Salivary  secretion. 

Pancreatic  secre- 
tion. 

Liver. 

Small  intestine. 

Small  intestine,  sal- 
ivary and  pan- 
creatic secre- 
tion, liver. 

Small  intestine. 

Muscles? 


Pancreatic  secre- 
tion, fat  tissues, 
blood,  etc. 

Gastric  juice. 
Pancreatic  juice. 


Small  intestine. 
Tissues  generally. 

Thymus,   adrenals, 

pancreas. 
Spleen,      pancreas, 

liver. 

Lungs,  liver. 
Many  tissues. 


Action. 

Converts  starch  to  sugar 

(maltose) . 
Converts  starch  to  sugar 

(maltose) . 

Converts  glycogen  to  dex- 
trose (maltose). 

Converts  cane-sugar  to 
dextrose  and  levulose. 

Converts  maltose  to  dex- 
trose. 


Converts  lactose  to  dex- 
trose and  galactose. 

Splits  and  oxidizes  dex- 
trose. 

Splits  neutral  fats  to  fatty 
acids  and  glycerin. 

Converts  proteids  to  pep- 
tones and  proteoses. 

Splits  proteids  into  sim.- 
pler  crystalline  prod- 
ucts. 

Splits  peptones  into  sim- 
pler products. 

Split  proteids  into  nitrog- 
enous bases  and  amido- 
bodies. 

Converts  guanin  to  xan- 

thin. 
Converts  adenin  to  hypo- 

xanthin. 

Cause  oxidation  of  organic 

substances. 
Decomposes    hydrogen 

peroxid. 


Chemical  Composition  of  the  Enzymes. — It  was  formerly 
believed  that  the  enzymes  belong  to  the  group  of  proteids.  They 
are  formed  from  living  matter,  and  the  solutions  as  usually  prepared 
give  proteid  reactions.  Increased  study ,  however,  has  made  this  belief 
uncertain.  The  enzymes  cling  to  the  proteids  when  precipitated, 
and  it  seems  possible  that  the  proteid  reactions  of  their  solutions  may 


COMPOSITION   OF   FOOD   AND    ACTION    OF   ENZYMES.  665 

be  due,  therefore,  to  an  incomplete  purification.  In  fact,  it  is  stated 
that  solutions  of  some  of  the  enzymes  may  be  prepared  (pepsin, 
invertase,  thrombin)  which  show  ferment  activity,  but  give  no 
proteid  reactions.  Much  of  the  older  work  upon  the  composition  of 
supposedly  purified  preparations  of  enzymes  is  not  accepted  to-day, 
on  the  ground  that  the  evidence  for  the  purity  of  the  preparations  is 
insufficient.  In  spite,  however,  of  the  very  great  amount  of  attention 
that  has  been  paid  to  these  substances  in  recent  years,  there  is  at 
present  no  agreement  as  to  their  chemical  structure.  Some  au- 
thorities (Arthus)  have  gone  so  far  as  to  suggest  that  the  enzymes, 
or  more  properly  enzyme  actions,  are  not  due  to  definite  material 
substances,  but  are  to  be  classified  as  forms  of  energy  like  heat, 
electricity,  etc.  The  suggestion  is  not  very  helpful,  but  it  indicates 
forcibly  the  present  uncertainty  regarding  the  real  nature  of  these 
bodies. 


CHAPTER  XLI. 

THE  SALIVARY  GLANDS  AND  THEIR  DIGESTIVE 
ACTION. 

The  first  of  the  secretions  with  which  the  food  comes  into  contact 
is  the  sahva.  This  is  a  mixed  secretion  from  the  large  saUvary  glands 
and  the  small  unnamed  mucous  and  serous  glands  that  open  into  the 
mouth  cavity. 

The  Salivary  Glands. — The  salivary  glands  in  man  are  three 
in  number  on  each  side — the  parotid,  the  submaxillary,  and 
the  sublingual.  The  parotid  gland  communicates  with  the  mouth 
by  a  large  duct  (Stenson's  duct)  which  opens  upon  the  inner 
surface  of  the  cheek  opposite  the  second  molar  tooth  of  the  upper 
jaw.  The  submaxillary  gland  lies  below  the  lower  jaw,  and  its 
duct  (Wharton's  duct)  opens  into  the  mouth  cavity  at  the  side  of 
the  frenum  of  the  tongue.  The  sublingual  gland  hes  in  the  floor  of  the 
mouth  to  the  side  of  the  frenum  and  opens  into  the  mouth  cavity  by 
a  number  (eight  to  twenty)  of  small  ducts,  known  as  the  ducts  of 
Rivinus.  One  larger  duct  that  runs  parallel  with  the  duct  of  Whar- 
ton and  opens  separately  into  the  mouth  cavity  is  sometimes  present 
in  man.  It  is  known  as  the  duct  of  Bartholin  and  occurs  normally  in 
the  dog. 

The  course  of  the  nerve  fibers  supplying  the  large  salivary  glands 
is  interesting  in  view  of  the  physiological  results  of  their  stimulation. 
The  description  here  given  applies  especially  to  their  arrangement 
in  the  dog.  These  glands  receive  their  nerve  supply  from  two  general 
sources, — namely,  the  bulbar  autonomics  (or  cerebral  fibers)  and 
the  sympathetic  autonomics.  The  parotid  gland  receives  its  bulbar 
autonomic  fibers  from  the  glossopharyngeal  or  ninth  cranial  nerve; 
they  pass  into  a  branch  of  this  nerve  known  as  the  tympanic 
branch  or  nerve  of  Jacobson,  thence  to  the  small  superficial  pe- 
trosal nerve,  through  which  they  reach  the  otic  ganglion.  From  this 
ganglion  they  pass  (postganglionic  fibers)  by  way  of  the  auricu- 
lotemporal branch  of  the  inferior  maxillary  division  of  the  fifth 
cranial  nerve  to  the  parotid  gland  (Fig.  255).  The  sympathetic 
autonomics  pass  to  the  superior  cervical  ganglion  by  way  of  the 
cervical  sympathetic  (Fig.  105)  and  thence  as  postganglionic  fibers 
in  branches  which  accompany  the  arteries  distributed  to  the  gland. 
The  bulbar  autonomic  supply  for  the  submaxillary  and  sublingual 

666 


THE   SALIVARY   GLANDS. 


667 


glands  arises  from  the  lorain  in  the  facial  nerve  and  passes  out  in  the 
chorda  tympani  branch  (Fig.  256).  This  latter  nerve,  after  emerging 
from  the  tympanic  cavity  through  the  Glaserian  fissure,  joins  the 


\lnfmoT7flaxillan 
BrajtcAofSl^ 


Tetrous  , 
Fig.  255. — Schematic  representation  of  the  course  of  the  cerebral  fibers  to  the  parotid  gland. 

lingual  nerve.  After  running  with  this  nerve  for  a  short  distance, 
the  secretory  (and  vasodilator)  nerve  fibers  destined  for  the  sub- 
maxillary and  sublingual  glands  branch  off  and  pass  to  the  glands, 


TnferiofTfiaxillari/ 


Sub-  THCOcUCo-rf-  a?za 

3u6  lin-^ual 


JBraiiches 
to 

Tongiue 


Fig.  256. — Schematic  representation  of  the  course  of   the  chorda  tympani  nerve  to  the 

submaxillary  gland. 


following  the  course  of  the  ducts.  Where  the  chorda  tympani  fibers 
leave  the  lingual  there  is  a  small  ganglion  which  has  received  the 
name  of  submaxillary  ganglion.     The   nerve  fibers  to  the  glands 


668  PHYSIOLOGY    OP    DIGESTION    AND    SECRETION. 

pass  close  to  this  ganglion,  but  Langley  has  shown  that  only  those 
destined  for  the  sublingual  gland  really  connect  with  the  nerve 
cells  of  the  ganglion,  and  he  suggests,  therefore,  that  it  should 
be  called  the  sublingual  instead  of  the  submaxillary  ganglion.  The 
nerve  fibers  for  the  submaxillary  gland  make  connections  with  nerve 
cells  lying  mainly  within  the  hilus  of  the  gland  itself.  The  supply 
of  sympathetic  autonomics  has  the  same  general  course  as  those 
for  the  parotid, — namely,  through  the  cervical  sympathetic  to  the 
superior  cervical  ganglion  and  thence  to  the  glands. 

Histological  Structure. — The  saHvary  glands  belong  to  the  type 
of  compound  tubular  glands.  That  is,  the  secreting  portions  are 
tubular  in  shape,  although  in  cross-sections  these  tubes  may  pre- 
sent various  outlines  according  as  the  plane  of  the  section  passes 
through  them.  The  parotid  is  described  usually  as  a  typical  serous 
or  albuminous  gland.  Its  secreting  epithelium  is  composed  of  cells 
which  in  the  fresh  condition  as  well  as  in  preserved  specimens  contain 
numerous  fine  granules  and  its  secretion  contains  some  albumin. 
The  submaxillary  gland  differs  in  histology  in  different  animals. 
In  some,  as  the  dog  or  cat,  the  secretory  tubes  are  composed  chiefly 
or  exclusively  of  epithelial  cells  of  the  mucous  type.  In  man  the 
gland  is  of  a  mixed  type,  the  secretory  tubes  containing  both  mucous 
and  albuminous  cells.  The  sublingual  gland  in  man  also  contains 
both  varieties  of  cells,  although  the  mucous  cells  predominate.  In 
accordance  with  these  histological  characteristics  it  is  found  that  the 
secretion  from  the  submaxillary  and  sublingual  glands  is  thick  and 
mucilaginous  as  compared  with  that  from  the  parotid. 

In  the  mucous  glands  another  variety  of  cell,  the  so-called  demilunes  or 
crescent  cells,  is  frequently  met  with,  and  the  physiological  significance  of 
these  cells  has  been  the  subject  of  much  discussion.  The  demilunes  are 
crescent-shaped,  granular  cells  lying  between  the  mucous  cells  and  the  base- 
ment membrane,  and  not  in  contact,  therefore,  with  the  central  lumen  of 
the  tube.  According  to  Heidenhain,  these  demilunes  are  for  the  purpose 
of  replacing  the  mucous  cells.  In  consequence  of  long-continued  activity 
the  mucous  cells  may  disintegrate  and  disappear,  and  the  demilunes  then 
develop  into  new  mucous  cells.  Another  view  is  that  the  demilunes  represent 
distinct  secretory  cells  of  the  albuminous  type,  while  others  assert  that  they 
are  a  specific  type  of  cell  with  probably  specific  functions.* 

The  salivary  glands  possess  definite  secretory  nerves  which  when 
stimulated  cause  the  formation  of  a  secretion.  This  fact  indicates 
that  there  must  be  a  direct  contact  of  some  kind  between  the  gland 
cells  and  the  terminations  of  the  secretory  fibers.  The  ending  of  the 
nerve  fibers  in  the  submaxillary  and  sublingual  glands  has  been  de- 
scribed by  a  number  of  observers.!  The  accounts  differ  somewhat  as 
to  details  of  the  finer  anatomy,  but  it  seems  to  be  clearly  estabUshed 
that  the  secretory  fibers  from  the  chorda  tympani  end  first  around  the 

*  See  Noll,  "  Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1902,  suppl.  volume,  166. 
t  See  Huber,  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  1,  281,  1896. 


THE   SALIVARY   GLANDS.  669 

intrinsic  nerve  ganglion  cells  of  the  glands  (preganglionic  fibers),  and 
from  these  latter  cells  axons  (postganglionic  fibers)  are  distributed 
to  the  secreting  cells,  passing  to  these  cells  along  the  ducts.  The 
nerve  fibers  terminate  in  a  plexus  upon  the  membrana  propria  of  the 
alveoli,  and  from  this  plexus  fine  fibrils  pass  inward  to  end  on  and 
between  the  secreting  cells.  It  would  seem  from  these  observations 
that  the  nerve  fibrils  do  not  penetrate  or  fuse  with  the  gland  cells, 
as  was  formerly  supposed,  but  form  a  terminal  network  in  contact 
with  the  cells,  following  thus  the  general  schema  for  the  connection 
between  nerve  fibers  and  peripheral  tissues. 

Composition  of  the  Secretion. — ^The  saliva  as  it  is  found  in  the 
mouth  is  a  colorless  or  opalescent,  turbid,  and  mucilaginous  liquid  of 
weakly  alkahne  reaction  and  a  specific  gravity  of  about  1.003.  It 
may  contain  numerous  flat  cells  derived  from  the  epithelium  of  the 
mouth,  and  the  peculiar  spherical  cells  known  as  salivary  corpuscles, 
which  seem  to  be  altered  leucocytes.  The  important  constituents 
of  the  secretion  are  mucin,  a  diastatic  enzyme  known  as  ptyalin, 
maltase,  traces  of  proteid  and  of  potassium  sulphocyanid,  and 
inorganic  salts  such  as  potassium  and  sodium  chlorid,  potassium 
sulphate,  sodium  carbonate,  and  calcium  carbonate  and  phosphate. 
The  carbonates  are  particularly  abundant  in  the  saliva,  and  the 
secretion  in  addition  contains  much  carbon  dioxid  in  solution.  Thus, 
Pfliiger  found  that  65  volumes  per  cent,  of  COj  might  be  obtained 
from  the  saliva,  of  which  42.5  per  cent,  was  in  the  form  of  carbon- 
ates. The  amount  of  COg  in  solution  and  combined  is  an  indication 
of  the  active  chemical  changes  in  the  gland. 

Of  the  organic  constituents  of  the  saliva  the  proteid  exists  in 
small  and  variable  quantities,  and  its  exact  nature  is  not  determined. 
The  mucin  gives  to  the  saliva  its  ropy,  mucilaginous  character. 
This  substance  belongs  to  the  group  of  combined  proteids,  glyco- 
proteids  (see  appendix),  consisting  of  a  proteid  combined  with  a 
carbohydrate  group.  The  most  interesting  constituent  of  the  mixed 
saliva  is  the  ptyalin  or  sahvary  diastase.  This  body  belongs  to  the 
group  of  enzymes  or  unorganized  ferments,  whose  general  and  specific 
properties  have  been  described.  In  some  animals  (dog)  ptyalin 
seems  to  be  normally  absent  from  the  fresh  saliva. 

The  secretions  of  the  parotid  and  the  submaxillary  glands  can  be 
obtained  separately  by  inserting  a  cannula  into  the  openings  of  the 
ducts  in  the  mouth,  or,  according  to  the  method  of  Pawlow,  by  trans- 
ferring the  end  of  the  duct  so  that  it  opens  upon  the  skin  instead  of 
in  the  mouth,  making  thus  a  salivary  fistula.  The  secretion  of  the 
sublingual  can  only  be  obtained  in  sufficient  quantities  for  analysis 
from  the  lower  animals.  Examination  of  the  separate  secretions 
shows  that  the  main  difference  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  parotid  saliva 
contains  no  mucin,  while  that  of  the  submaxillary  and  especially  of 


670  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

the  sublingual  gland  is  rich  in  mucin.  The  parotid  saliva  of  man 
seems  to  be  particularly  rich  in  ptyalin  as  compared  with  that  of  the 
submaxillary,  while  the  secretion  of  the  latter  and  that  of  the  sub- 
lingual gland  give  a  stronger  alkaline  reaction  than  the  parotid  sahva. 

The  Secretory  Nerves. — ^The  existence  of  secretory  nerves  to  the 
salivary  glands  was  discovered  by  Ludwig  in  1851.  The  discovery  is 
particularly  interesting  in  that  it  marks  the  beginning  of  our  knowl- 
edge of  this  kind  of  nerve  fiber.  Ludwig  found  that  stimulation  of 
the  chorda  tympani  nerve  causes  a  flow  of  saliva  from  the  submaxil- 
lary gland.  He  established  also  several  important  facts  with  regard 
to  the  pressure  and  composition  of  the  secretion  which  will  be  referred 
to  presently.  It  was  afterward  shown  that  the  salivary  glands  receive 
a  double  nerve  supply, — ^in  part  by  way  of  the  cervical  sympathetic 
and  in  part  through  cerebral  nerves.  It  was  discovered  also  that 
not  only  are  secretory  fibers  carried  to  the  glands  by  these  paths, 
but  that  vasomotor  fibers  are  contained  in  the  same  nerves, 
and  the  arrangement  of  these  latter  fibers  is  such  that  the  cerebral 
nerves  contain  vasodilator  fibers  that  cause  a  dilatation  of  the  small 
arteries  in  the  glands  and  an  accelerated  blood-flow,  while  the  sym- 
pathetic carries  vasoconstrictor  fibers  whose  stimulation  causes  a 
constriction  of  the  small  arteries  and  a  diminished  blood-flow.  The 
effect  of  stimulating  these  two  sets  of  fibers  is  found  to  vary  somewhat 
in  different  animals.  For  purposes  of  description  we  may  confine 
ourselves  to  the  effects  observed  on  dogs,  since  much  of  our  funda- 
mental knowledge  upon  the  subject  is  derived  from  Heidenhain's* 
experiments  upon  this  animal.  If  the  chorda  tympani  nerve  is 
stimulated  by  weak  induction  shocks,  the  gland  begins  to  secrete 
promptly,  and  the  secretion,  by  proper  regulation  of  the  stimulation, 
may  be  kept  up  for  hours.  The  secretion  thus  obtained  is  thin  and 
watery,  flows  freely,  is  abundant  in  amount,  and  contains  not  more 
than  1  or  2  per  cent,  of  total  solids.  At  the  same  time  there  is  an 
increased  flow  of  blood  through  the  gland.  The  whole  gland  takes 
on  a  redder  hue,  the  veins  are  distended,  and  if  cut  the  blood  that 
flows  from  them  is  of  a  redder  color  than  in  the  resting  gland,  and 
may  show  a  distinct  pulse — all  of  which  points  to  a  dilatation  of  the 
small  arteries.  If  now  the  sympathetic  fibers  are  stimulated,  quite 
different  results  are  obtained.  The  secretion  is  relatively  small  in 
amount,  flows  slowly,  is  thick  and  turbid,  and  may  contain  as  much 
as  6  per  cent,  of  total  solids.  At  the  same  time  the  gland  becomes 
pale,  and  if  the  veins  be  cut  the  flow  from  them  is  slower  than  in 
the  resting  gland,  thus  indicating  that  a  vasoconstriction  has 
occurred. 

The  increased  vascular  supply  to  the  gland  accompanying  the 

*"Pfluger's  Archiv  fiir  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  17,  1,  1878;    also 
in  Hermann's  "  Handbuch  der  Physiologie, "  1883,  vol.  v,  part  i. 


THE    SALIVARY    GLANDS.  671 

abundant  flow  of  "chorda  saliva"  and  the  diminished  flow  of  blood 
during  the  scanty  secretion  of  "  sympathetic  saliva  "  suggest  naturally 
the  idea  that  the  whole  process  of  secretion  may  be,  at  bottom,  a 
vasomotor  phenomenon,  the  amount  of  secretion  depending  only  on 
the  quantity  and  pressure  of  the  blood  flowing  through  the  gland. 
It  has  been  shown  conclusively  that  this  idea  is  erroneous  and  that 
definite  secretory'  fibers  exist.  The  following  facts  may  be  quoted 
in  support  of  this  statement:  (1)  Ludwig  showed  that  if  a  mercmy 
manometer  is  connected  with  the  duct  of  the  submaxillary  gland  and 
the  chorda  is  then  stimulated  for  a  certain  time,  the  pressure  in  the 
duct  may  become  greater  than  the  blood-pressure  in  the  gland. 
This  fact  shows  that  the  secretion  is  not  derived  entirely  by  processes 
of  filtration  from  the  blood.  (2)  If  the  blood-flow  be  shut  off 
completely  from  the  gland,  stimulation  of  the  chorda  still  gives  a 
secretion  for  a  short  time.  (3)  If  atropin  is  injected  into  the  gland, 
stimulation  of  the  chorda  causes  vascular  dilatation,  but  no 
secretion.  This  may  be  explained  by  supposing  that  the  atropin 
paralyzes  the  secretorj-,  but  not  the  dilator,  fibers.  (4)  Hyclro- 
chlorate  of  quinin  injected  into  the  gland  causes  vascular  dilatation^ 
but  no  secretion.  In  this  case  the  secretor}-  fibers  are  still  irritable, 
since  stimulation  of  the  chorda  gives  the  usual  secretion. 

A  still  more  marked  diff'erence  between  the  effect  of  stimulation 
of  the  cerebral  and  the  sympathetic  fibers  may  be  observed  in  the  case 
of  the  parotid  gland  in  the  dog.  Stimulation  of  the  cerebral  fibers 
alone  in  any  part  of  their  course  gives  an  abundant,  thin,  and  watery 
saliva,  poor  in  solid  constituents.  Stimulation  of  the  sympathetic 
fibers  alone  (provided  the  cerebral  fibers  have  not  been  stim- 
ulated shorth'  before  and  the  t^aiipanic  nerve  has  been  cut  to 
prevent  a  reflex  effect)  gives  usually  no  perceptible  secretion  at  all. 
But  in  this  last  stimulation  a  marked  effect  is  produced  upon  the 
gland,  in  spite  of  the  absence  of  a  visible  secretion.  This  is  shown  by 
the  fact  that  subsequent  or  simultaneous  stimulation  of  the  cerebral 
fibers  causes  a  secretion  verv^  unlike  that  given  by  the  cerebral  fibers 
alone,  in  that  it  is  ver\'  rich  indeed  in  organic  constituents.  The 
amount  of  organic  matter  in  the  seci'etion  may  be  tenfold  that  of  the 
saliva  obtained  by  stimulation  of  the  cerebral  fibers  alone. 

Relation  of  the  Composition  of  the  Secretian  to  the  Strength  of  Stimu- 
lation.— If  the  stimulus  to  the  chorda  is  gradual^  increased  in 
strength,  care  being  taken  not  to  fatigue  the  gland,  the  chemical 
composition  of  the  secretion  is  found  to  change  with  regard  to  the 
relative  amounts  of  the  water,  the  salts,  and  the  organic  material. 
The  water  and  the  salts  increase  in  amount  with  the  increased 
strength  of  stimulus  up  to  a  certain  maximal  limit,  which  for  the 
salts  is  about  0.77  per  cent.  It  is  important  to  observe  that  this 
effect  may  be  obtained  from  a  perfectly  fresh  gland  as  well  as  from  a 


672  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

gland  which  had  previously  been  secreting  actively.  With  regard 
to  the  organic  constituents  the  precise  result  obtained  depends  on 
the  condition  of  the  gland.  If  previous  to  the  stimulation  the  gland 
was  in  a  resting  condition  and  unfatigued,  then  increased  strength 
of  stimulation  is  followed  at  first  by  a  rise  in  the  percentage  of  organic 
constituents,  and  this  rise  in  the  beginning  is  more  marked  than  in 
the  case  of  the  salts.  But  with  continued  stimulation  the  increase 
in  organic  material  soon  ceases,  and  finally  the  amount  begins  actually 
to  diminish,  and  may  fall  to  a  low  point  in  spite  of  the  stronger 
stimulation.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  gland  at  the  beginning  of  the 
experiment  had  been  previously  worked  to  a  considerable  extent, 
then  an  increase  in  the  stimulating  current,  while  it  augments  the 
amount  of  water  and  salts,  either  may  have  no  effect  at  all  upon  the 
organic  constituents  or  may  cause  only  a  temporary  increase,  quickly 
followed  by  a  fall.  Similar  results  may  be  obtained  from  stimulation 
of  the  cerebral  nerves  of  the  parotid  gland.  The  above  facts  led 
Heidenhain  to  believe  that  the  conditions  determining  the  secretion 
of  the  organic  material  are  different  from  those  controlling  the  water 
and  salts,  and  he  gave  a  rational  explanation  of  the  differences 
observed,  in  his  theory  of  trophic  and  secretory  fibers. 

Theory  of  Trophic  and  Secretory  Nerve  Fibers. — ^This  theory^ 
supposes  that  two  physiological  varieties  of  nerve  fibers  are  distrib- 
uted to  the  salivary  glands.  One  of  these  varieties  controls  the 
secretion  of  the  water  and  inorganic  salts  and  its  fibers  may  be  called 
secretory  fibers  proper,  while  the  other,  to  which  the  name  trophic 
is  given,  causes  the  formation  of  the  organic  constituents  of  the  secre- 
tion, probably  by  a  direct  influence  on  the  metabolism  of  the  cells. 
Were  the  trophic  fibers  to  act  alone,  the  organic  products  would  be 
formed  within  the  cell,  but  there  would  be  no  visible  secretion,  and 
this  is  the  hypothesis  which  Heidenhain  uses  to  explain  the  results  of 
the  experiment  described  above  upon  stimulation  of  the  sympathetic 
fibers  to  the  parotid  of  the  dog.  In  this  animal,  apparently,  the 
sympathetic  branches  to  the  parotid  contain  exclusively  or  almost 
exclusively  trophic  fibers,  while  in  the  cerebral  branches  both  trophic 
and  secretory  fibers  proper  are  present.  The  results  of  stimulation 
of  the  cerebral  and  sympathetic  branches  to  the  submaxillary  gland 
of  the  same  animal  may  be  explained  in  terms  of  this  theory  by 
supposing  that  in  the  latter  nerve  trophic  fibers  preponderate,  and 
in  the  former  the  secretory  fibers  proper. 

It  is  obvious  that  this  anatomical  separation  of  the  two  sets  of 
fibers  along  the  cerebral  and  sympathetic  paths  may  be  open  to 
individual  variations,  and  that  dogs  may  be  found  in  which  the  sym- 
pathetic branches  to  the  parotid  glands  contain  secretory  fibers 
proper,  and  therefore  give  some  flow  of  secretion  on  stimulation. 
These  variations  might  also  be  expected  to  be  more  marked  when 


THE    SALIVARY   GLANDS.  673 

animals  of  different  groups  are  compared.  Thus,  Langley*  finds  that 
in  cats  the  sympathetic  saliva  from  the  submaxillary  gland  is  less 
viscid  than  the  chorda  saliva, — just  the  reverse  of  what  occurs  in  the 
dog.  To  apply  Heidenhain's  theory  to  this  case  it  is  necessary  to 
assume  that  in  the  cat  the  trophic  fibers  run  chiefly  in  the  chorda. 

An  interesting  fact  with  reference  to  the  secretion  of  the  parotid  in  dogs 
has  been  noted  by  Langley,  and  is  of  special  interest,  since,  although  it  may 
be  reconciled  with  the  theory  of  trophic  and  secretory  fibers,  it  is  at  the  same 
time  suggestive  of  an  incompleteness  in  this  theory.  As  has  been  said,  stimu- 
lation of  the  sympathetic  m  the  dog  causes  usually  no  secretion  from  the  pa- 
rotid. Langleyt  finds,  however,  that,  if  the  tympanic  nerve  is  stimulated  just 
previously,  stimulation  of  the  sympathetic  causes  an  abundant,  but  brief, 
flow  from  the  parotid.  One  may  explain  this  in  terms  of  the  theory  by  as- 
suming that  the  sympathetic  does  contain  a  few  secretory  fibers  proper,  but 
that  ordinarily  their  action  is  too  feeble  to  start  the  flow  of  water.  Pre- 
vious stimulation  of  the  tympanic  nerve,  however,  leaves  the  gland  cells 
in  a  more  irritable  condition,  so  that  the  few  secretory  fibers  proper  in  the 
sympathetic  branches  are  now  effective  in  producing  a  flow  of  water. 

The  way  in  which  the  trophic  fibers  act  has  been  briefly  indicated. 
They  may  be  supposed  to  set  up  metaboHc  changes  in  the  protoplasm 
of  the  cells,  leading  to  the  formation  of  certain  definite  products,  such 
as  mucin  or  ptyahn.  That  such  changes  do  occur  is  abundantly 
shown  by  microscopical  examination  of  the  resting  and  the  active 
gland,  the  details  of  which  will  be  given  presently.  In  general,  these 
changes  may  be  supposed  to  be  catabolic  in  nature ;  that  is,  to  consist 
in  a  disassociation  or  breaking  down  of  the  complex  living  material, 
with  the  formation  of  the  simpler  and  more  stable  organic  con- 
stituents of  the  secretion.  There  is  evidence  to  show  that  these 
gland  cells  during  activity  form  fresh  material  from  the  nourishment 
suppUed  by  the  blood ;  that  is,  that  anaboUc  or  building-up  processes 
occur  along  with  the  catabolic  changes.  The  latter  are  the  more 
obvious,  and  are  the  changes  which  are  usually  associated  with  the 
action  of  the  trophic  nerve  fibers.  It  is  possible,  also,  that  the  ana- 
bolic or  growth  changes  may  be  under  the  control  of  separate  fibers, 
for  which  the  name  anabolic  fibers  would  be  appropriate.  Satis- 
factory proof  of  the  existence  of  a  separate  set  of  anabolic  fibers  has 
not  yet  been  furnished. 

The  method  of  action  of  the  secretory  fibers  proper  is  difficult  to 
understand.  At  present  the  theories  suggested  are  entirely  specula- 
tive. Heidenhain's  own  view  rests  upon  the  fact  that  no  more  water 
leaves  the  blood  capillaries  than  afterwards  appears  in  the  secretion; 
that  is,  no  matter  how  long  the  secretion  continues,  the  gland  does 
not  become  edematous  nor  does  the  velocity  of  the  lymph-stream  in 
the  lymphatics  of  the  gland  increase.  This  being  the  case,  we  must 
suppose  that  the  stream  of  water  is  regulated  by  the  secretion,  that 
is,  by  the  activity  of  the  gland-cells.     If  we  suppose  that  some  con- 

*  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  1,  96,  1878.  t  Ibid.,  10,  291,  1889. 

43 


674  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

stituent  of  these  cells  has  an  attraction  for  water,  or,  to  use  the 
modern  expression,  exerts  a  high  osmotic  pressure,  then,  while  the 
gland  is  in  the  resting  state,  water  will  diffuse  first  from  the  base- 
ment membrane,  this  in  turn  supplies  its  loss  from  the  surrounding 
lymph,  and  the  lymph  obtains  the  same  amount  of  water  from  the 
blood.  As  the  amount  of  water  in  the  cell  increases  a  point  is  reached 
at  which  an  equilibrium  is  established,  and  the  osmotic  stream  from 
blood  to  cells  comes  to  a  standstill.  The  water  in  the  cells  does  not 
escape  into  the  lumen  of  the  tubule  or  of  the  secretion  capillaries, 
because  the  periphery  of  the  cell  is  modified  to  form  a  layer  offering 
considerable  resistance  to  filtration.  The  action  of  the  secretory- 
fibers  proper  consists  in  so  altering  the  structure  of  this  limiting  layer 
of  the  cells  that  it  offers  less  resistance  to  filtration;  consequently 
the  water  under  tension  in  the  cells  escapes  into  the  lumen,  and  the 
osmotic  pressure  of  its  substance  again  starts  a  stream  of  water 
from  capillaries  to  cells,  which  continues  as  long  as  the  nerve-stimu- 
lation is  effective. 

Histological  Changes  during  Activity. — The  cells  of  both  the 
albuminous  and  mucous  glands  undergo  distinct  histological  changes 
in  consequence  of  prolonged  activity,  and  these  changes  may  be 
recognized  l^oth  in  preparations  from  the  fresh  gland  and  in  preserved 
specimens.  In  the  parotid  gland  Heidenhain  studied  the  changes  in 
stained  sections  after  hardening  in  alcohol.  In  the  resting  gland 
the  cells  are  compactly  filled  with  granules  that  stain  readily  and  are 
imbedded  in  a  clear  ground  substance  that  does  not  stain.  The 
nucleus  is  small  and  more  or  less  irregular  in  outline.  After  stimula- 
tion of  the  tympanic  nerve  the  cells  show  but  little  alteration,  but 
stimulation  of  the  sympathetic  produces  a  marked  change.  The 
cells  become  smaller,  the  nuclei  more  rounded,  and  the  granules 
more  closely  packed.  This  last  appearance  seems,  however,  to  be 
due  to  the  hardening  reagents  used.  A  truer  picture  of  what  occurs 
may  be  obtained  from  a  study  of  sections  of  the  fresh  gland.  Lang- 
ley,*  who  first  used  this  method,  describes  his  results  as  follows t 
When  the  animal  is  in  a  fasting  condition  the  cells  have  a  granular 
appearance  throughout  their  substance,  the  outlines  of  the  different 
cells  being  faintly  marked  by  light  lines  (Fig.  257,  A).  When  the 
gland  is  made  to  secrete  by  giving  the  animal  food,  by  injecting 
pilocarpin,  or  by  stimulating  the  sympathetic  nerves,  the  granules 
begin  to  disappear  from  the  outer  borders  of  the  cells  (Fig.  257,  B), 
so  that  each  cell  now  shows  an  outer,  clear  border  and  an  inner, 
granular  one.  If  the  stimulation  is  continued  the  granules  become 
fewer  in  number  and  are  collected  near  the  lumen  and  the  margins  of 
the  cells,  the  clear  zone  increases  in  extent,  and  the  cells  become 
smaller  (Fig.  257,  C,  D).  Evidently  the  granular  material  is  used 
*  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  2,  260,  1879. 


THE   SALIVARY    GLANDS. 


675 


in  some  way  to  make  the  organic  material  of  the  secretion.  Since  the 
ptyalin  is  a  conspicuous  organic  constituent  of  the  secretion,  it  is 
assumed  that  the  granules  in  the  resting  gland  contain  the  ptyalin, 
or  rather  the  preliminary  material  from  which  the  ptyalin  is  con- 
structed during  the  act  of  secretion.  On  this  latter  assumption  the 
granules  are  frequently  spoken  of  as  zymogen  granules.  During  the 
act  of  secretion  two  distinct  processes  seem  to  be  going  on  in  the  cell, 
leaving  out  of  consideration,  for  the  moment,  the  secretion  of  the 
water  and  the  salts.  In  the  first  place,  the  zymogen  granules  undergo 
a  change  such  that  they  are  forced  or  dissolved  out  of  the  cell,  and, 
second,  a  constructive  metabolism  or  anabolism  is  set  up,  leading  to 


D 

Fig.  257. — Parotid  gland  of  the  rabbit  in  a  fresh  state,  showing  portions  of  the  secret- 
ing tubules:  A,  In  a  resting  condition;  B,  after  secretion  caused  by  pUocarpin;  C,  after 
stronger  secretion,  pUocarpin  and  stimulation  of  sympathetic;  D,  after  long-continued 
stimulation  of  sympathetic. — (After  Langley.) 


the  formation  of  new  protoplasmic  material  from  the  substances 
contained  in  the  blood  and  lymph.  The  new  material  thus  formed 
is  the  clear,  non-granular  substance,  which  appears  first  toward  the 
basal  sides  of  the  cells.  We  may  suppose  that  the  clear  substance 
during  the  resting  periods  undergoes  metabolic  changes,  whether 
of  a  catabolic  or  anabolic  character  can  not  be  safety  asserted,  leading 
to  the  formation  of  new  granules,  and  the  cells  are  again  ready  to 
form  a  secretion  of  normal  composition.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind 
that  in  these  experiments  the  glands  were  stimulated  beyond  normal 
limits.  Under  ordinary  conditions  the  cells  are  probably  never 
depleted  of  their  granular  material  to  the  extent  represented  in  the 
figures. 


676 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 


Fig.  258.- 


-Mucous  gland:  submaxillary  of  dog;  rest- 
ing  stage. 


In  the  cells  of  the  mucous  glands  changes  equally  marked  may  be 
observed  after  prolonged  activity.  In  stained  sections  of  the  resting 
gland  the  cells  are  large  and  clear  (Fig.  258),  with  flattened  nuclei 
placed  well  toward  the  base  of  the  cell.  When  the  gland  is  made  to 
secrete  the  nuclei  become  more  spherical  and  lie  more  toward  the 

middle  of  the  cell,  and 
the  cells  themselves  be- 
come distinctly  smaller. 
After  prolonged  secretion 
the  changes  become  more 
marked  (Fig.  259)  and, 
according  to  Heidenhain, 
some  of  the  mucous  cells 
may  break  down  com- 
pletely. According  to 
most  of  the  later  observ- 
ers, however,  the  mucous 
cells  do  not  actually  dis- 
integrate, but  form  again 
new  material  during  the 
period  of  rest,  as  in  the 
case  of  the  goblet  cells  of  the  intestine.  In  the  mucous  as  in  the 
albuminous  cells  observations  upon  pieces  of  the  fresh  gland  seem 
to  give  more  reliable  results  than  those  upon  preserved  specimens. 
Langley*  has  shown  that  in  the  fresh  mucous  cells  of  the  submax- 
illary gland  numerous  large  granules  may  be  discovered,  about  125 
to  250  to  a  cell.  These 
granules  are  comparable  to 
those  found  in  the  goblet 
cells,  and  may  be  inter- 
preted as  consisting  of  mu- 
cin or  some  preparatory 
material  from  which  mucin 
is  formed.  The  granules 
are  sensitive  to  reagents; 
addition  of  water  causes 
them  to  swell  up  and  dis- 
appear. It  may  be  as- 
sumed that  this  happens 
during  secretion,  the  gran- 
ules becoming  converted  to  a  mucin  mass  which  is  extruded  from 
the  cell. 

Action  of  Atropin,  Pilocarpin,  and  Nicotin  upon  the  Secre- 
tory Nerves. — ^The  action  of  drugs  upon  the  salivary  glands  and 
*  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  10,  433,  1889. 


Fig.  259. — Mucous  gland:  submaxillary  of 
dog  after  eight  hours'  stimulation  of  the  chorda 
tympani. 


THE    SALIVARY    GLANDS.  677 

their  secretions  belongs  properly  to  pharmacology,  but  the  effects 
of  the  three  drugs  mentioned  are  so  decided  that  they  have  a 
peculiar  physiological  interest.  A  tropin  in  small  doses  injected 
either  into  the  blood  or  into  the  gland  duct  prevents  the  action  of 
the  cerebral  autonomic  fibers  (tympanic  nerve  or  chorda  tympani) 
upon  the  glands.  This  effect  may  be  explained  by  assuming  that 
the  atropin  paralyzes  the  endings  of  the  cerebral  fibers  in  the  glands. 
That  it  does  not  act  directly  upon  the  gland  cells  themselves  seems 
to  be  assured  by  the  interesting  fact  that,  with  doses  sufficient  to 
throw  out  entirely  the  secreting  action  of  the  cerebral  fibers,  the 
sympathetic  fibers  are  still  effective  when  stimulated.  Pilocarpin 
has  directly  the  opposite  effect  to  atropin.  In  minimal  doses  it 
sets  up  a  continuous  secretion  of  saliva,  which  may  be  explained  upon 
the  supposition  that  it  stimulates  the  endings  of  the  secretory  fibers 
in  the  gland.  Within  certain  limits  these  drugs  antagonize  each 
other, — that  is,  the  effect  of  pilocarpin  may  be  removed  by  the  sub- 
sequent apphcation  of  atropin,  and  vice  versa.  Nicotin,  according 
to  the  experiments  of  Langley,*  prevents  the  action  of  the  secretory 
nerves,  not  by  affecting  the  gland  cells  or  the  endings  of  the  nerve 
fibers  around  them,  but  by  paralyzing  the  connections  between  the 
nerve  fibers  and  the  gang  lion  cells  through  which  the  fibers  pass  on 
their  way  to  the  gland, — that  is,  the  connection  between  the  pre- 
ganglionic and  postganglionic  fibers.  If,  for  example,  the  superior 
cervical  ganglion  is  painted  with  a  solution  of  nicotin,  stimulation 
of  the  cervical  sympathetic  below  the  gland  gives  no  secretion;  stim- 
ulation, however,  of  the  fibers  in  the  ganghon  or  between  the  ganglion 
and  gland  gives  the  usual  effect.  By  the  use  of  this  drug  Langley  is 
led  to  believe  that  the  cells  of  the  so-called  submaxillar}-  ganglion 
are  really  intercalated  in  the  course  of  the  fibers  to  the  sublingual 
gland,  while  the  nerve  cells  with  which  the  submaxillar}^  fibers  make 
connection  are  found  chiefly  in  the  hilus  of  the  gland  itself. 

Paralytic  Secretion. — A  remarkable  phenomenon  in  connection 
with  the  salivary  glands  is  the  so-called  paralytic  secretion.  It  has 
been  known  for  a  long  time  that  if  the  chorda  tympani  is  cut  the 
submaxillary  gland  after  a  certain  time,  one  to  three  days,  begins  to 
secrete  slowly,  and  the  secretion  continues  uninterruptedly  for  a  long 
period — as  long,  perhaps,  as  several  weeks — and  eventually  the  gland 
itself  undergoes  atrophy.  Langley  states  that  section  of  the  chorda 
on  one  side  is  followed  by  a  continuous  secretion  from  the  glands 
on  both  sides;  the  secretion  from  the  gland  of  the  opposite  side  he 
designates  as  the  antiparalytic  or  antilytic  secretion.  After  section 
of  the  chorda  the  nerve  fibers  peripheral  to  the  section  degenerate, 
the  process  being  completed  within  a  few  days.  These  fibers,  how- 
ever, do  not  run  directly  to  the  gland  cell;  they  terminate  in  end 
*  "  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society, "  London,  46,  423,  1889. 


678  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

arborizations  around  sympathetic  nerve  cells  placed  somewhere  along 
their  course, — in  the  sublingual  ganglion,  for  instance,  or  within  the 
gland  substance  itself.  It  is  the  axons  from  these  second  nerve  units 
that  end  around  the  secreting  cells.  Langley  has  accumulated  some 
facts  to  show  that  within  the  period  of  continuance  of  the  paralytic 
secretion  (five  to  six  weeks)  the  fibers  of  the  sympathetic  cells  are 
still  irritable  to  stimulation.  He  is  inclined  to  believe,  therefore,  that 
the  continuous  secretion  is  due  to  a  continuous  excitation,  from  some 
cause,  of  the  local  nervous  mechanism  in  the  gland.  On  the  histo- 
logical side  it  is  stated*  that  after  section  of  the  chorda  the  resulting 
degenerative  changes  affect  only  the  cytoplasm,  while  after  the 
section  of  the  sympathetic  the  nuclei  of  the  cells  are  affected,  and 
indeed  to  some  extent  on  the  sound  as  well  as  on  the  injured  side. 

Normal  Mechanism  of  Salivary  Secretion. — Under  normal 
conditions  the  flow  of  saliva  from  the  salivary  glands  is  the  result 
of  a  reflex  stimulation  of  the  secretory  nerves.  The  sensory  fibers 
concerned  in  this  reflex  must  be  chiefly  fibers  of  the  glossopharyngeal 
and  lingual  nerves  supplying  the  mouth  and  tongue.  Sapid  bodies 
and  various  other  chemical  or  mechanical  stimuli  applied  to  the 
tongue  or  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth  produce  a  flow  of  saliva. 
The  normal  flow  during  mastication  must  be  effected  by  a  reflex  of 
this  kind,  the  sensory  impulse  being  carried  to  a  center  and  thence 
transmitted  through  the  efferent  nerves  to  the  glands.  It  is  found 
that  section  of  the  chorda  prevents  the  reflex,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that 
the  sympathetic  fibers  are  still  intact.  No  satisfactory  explanation 
of  the  normal  functions  of  the  secretory  fibers  in  the  sympathetic 
has  yet  been  given.  Various  authors  have  suggested  that  possibly 
the  three  large  salivary  glands  respond  normally  to  different  stimuli. 
This  view  has  lately  been  supported  by  Pawlow,  who  reports  that  in 
the  dog  at  least  the  parotid  and  the  submaxillary  may  react  quite 
differently.  When  fistulas  were  made  of  the  ducts  of  these  glands  it 
was  found  that  the  submaxillary  responded  readily  to  a  great  number 
of  stimuli,  such  as  the  sight  of  food,  chewing  of  meats,  acids,  etc. 
The  parotid,  on  the  contrary,  seemed  to  react  only  when  dry  food, 
dry  powdered  meat,  or  bread  was  placed  in  the  mouth.  Dryness  in 
this  case  appeared  to  be  the  efficient  stimulus. 

Pawlow  lays  great  stress  upon  the  adaptability  of  the  secretion  of  saliva 
to  the  character  of  the  material  chewed.  Dry,  solid  food  stimulates  a  large 
floAV  of  saliva,  such  as  is  necessary  in  order  to  chew  it  properly  and  to  form  it 
into  a  bolus  for  swallowing.  Foods  containing  much  water,  on  the  contrary, 
excite  but  little  flow  of  saliva.  If  one  places  a  handful  of  clean  stones  in 
the  mouth  of  a  dog  he  will  move  them  around  with  his  tongue  for  a  while 
and  then  drop  them  from  his  mouth;  but  little  or  no  saliva  is  secreted. 
If  the  same  material  is  given  in  the  form  of  fine  sand  a  rich  flow  of  saliva 
is  produced,  and  the  necessity  for  the  reflex  is  evident  in  this  case,  since 
otherwise  the  material  could  not  be  conveniently  removed  from  the  mouth. 

*  Gerhardt,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  97,  317,  1903. 


THE    SALIVARY    GLANDS.  679 

Such  adaptations  must  be  regarded  from  the  physiological  point  of  view 
as  special  reflexes  depending  upon  some  difference  in  the  nervous  mechanism 
set  into  play.* 

Since  the  flow  of  saliva  is  normally  a  definite  reflex,  we  should 
expect  a  distinct  salivary  secretion  center.  This  center  has  been 
located  by  physiological  means  in  the  medulla  oblongata;  its  exact 
position  is  not  clearly  defined,  but  possibly  it  is  represented  by  the 
nuclei  of  origin  of  the  secretory  fibers  which  leave  the  medulla  by 
way  of  the  facial  and  glossopharyngeal  nerves.  Owing  to  the  wide 
connections  of  nerve  cells  in  the  central  nervous  system,  we  should 
expect  this  center  to  be  affected  by  stimuli  from  various  sources. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  known  that  the  center  and  through  it  the 
glands  may  be  called  into  activity  by  stimulation  of  the  sensory 
fibers  of  the  sciatic,  splanchnic,  and  particularly  the  vagus  nerves. 
So,  too,  various  psychical  acts,  such  as  the  thought  of  savory  food  and 
the  feeling  of  nausea  preceding  vomiting,  may  be  accompanied  by  a 
flow  of  saliva,  the  effect  in  this  case  being  due  probably  to  stimula- 
tion of  the  secretion  center  by  nervous  impulses  descending  from  the 
higher  nerve  centers.  Lastly,  the  medullarv'  center  ma}^  be  inhibited 
as  well  as  stimulated.  The  well-known  effect  of  fear,  embarrassment, 
or  anxiety  in  producing  a  parched  throat  may  be  explained  in  this 
way  as  due  to  the  inhibitory  action  of  nerve  impulses  arising  in  the 
cerebral  centers. 

Electrical  Changes  in  the  Gland  during  Activity. — It  has  been 
shown  that  the  salivary  as  well  as  other  glands  suffer  certain  changes 
in  electrical  potential  during  activity  which  are  comparable  in  a  gen- 
eral way  to  the  ''action  currents"  observed  in  muscles  and  nerves. f 

The  Digestive  Action  of  Saliva — Ptyalin. — ^The  digestive  action 
proper  of  the  saliva  is  limited  to  the  starchy  food.  In  human 
beings  and'  most  mammals  the  saliva  contains  an  active  enzyme 
belonging  to  the  group  of  diastases  and  designated  usually  as  ptyalin 
or  salivary  diastase.  It  may  be  prepared  in  purified  form  from  saliva 
by  precipitation  with  alcohol,  but  its  chemical  nature,  like  that  of  the 
other  enzymes,  is  still  an  unsolved  problem.  Saliva  or  preparations 
of  ptyalin  act  readily  upon  boiled  starch,  converting  it  into  sugar 
and  dextrin.  This  action  may  be  demonstrated  very  readily  by 
holding  a  little  starch  paste  or  starchy  food,  such  as  boiled  potatoes, 
in  the  mouth  for  a  few  moments.  If  the  solution  is  then  examined  the 
presence  of  sugar  is  readily  shown  by  its  reducing  action  on  solutions 
of  copper  sulphate  (FehHng's  solution).  There  is  no  doubt  that  the 
action  of  ptyalin  upon  the  starch  is  hydrolytic.     Under  the  influence 

*  See  Pawlow,  "  The  Work  of  the  Digestive  Glands, "  translation  by 
Thompson,  London,  1902;  also  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie, "  vol  iii,  part  i, 
1904,  and  "Archives  Internationales  de  physiologie,"  1,  119,  1904. 

t  See  Biedermann,  "  Electro-physiology, "  translation  by  Welby,  London, 
1896. 


680  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

of  the  enzyme  the  starch  molecules  take  up  water  and  undergo 
cleavage  into  simpler  molecules.  The  steps  in  the  process  and  the 
final  products  have  been  investigated  by  a  very  large  number  of 
workers,  but  much  yet  remains  in  doubt.  The  following  points 
seem  to  be  determined:  The  end-result  of  the  reaction  is  the 
formation  of  maltose,  a  disaccharid,  having  the  general  formula 
C12H22O11,  and  some  form  of  dextrin,  a  non-crystallizable  poly- 
saccharid.  When  the  digestion  is  effected  in  a  vessel  some  dextrose 
(CgHiaOg)  may  be  found  among  the  products,  but  this  is  explained  on 
the  assumption  that  there  is  present  in  the  saliva  some  maltase,  an 
enzyme  capable  of  splitting  maltose  into  dextrose.  So  far  as  the 
ptyalin  itself  is  concerned,  its  specific  action  is  to  convert  starch  to 
maltose  and  dextrin.  It  seems  very  certain,  however,  that  a  number 
of  intermediate  products  are  formed  consisting  of  a  variety  of  dex- 
trins,  so  that  the  hydrolysis  probably  takes  place  in  successive 
stages.  There  is  little  agreement  as  to  the  exact  nature  of  the  in- 
termediate dextrins.  The  following  facts,  however,  may  be  easily 
demonstrated  in  a  salivary  digestion  carried  on  in  a  vessel  and  ex- 
amined from  time  to  time.  The  starch  at  first  gives  its  deep-blue 
reaction  with  iodin;  later,  instead  of  a  blue,  a  red  reaction  is  obtained 
with  iodin,  and  this  has  been  attributed  to  a  special  form  of  dextrin, 
erythrodextrin,  so  named  on  account  of  its  red  reaction.  Still  later 
this  reaction  fails  and  chemical  examination  shows  the  presence  of 
maltose  and  a  form  of  dextrin  which  gives  no  color  reaction  with 
iodin  and  is  therefore  named  achroodextrin.  While  the  number 
of  intermediate  products  may  be  large,  the  main  result  of  the  action 
of  the  ptyalin  is  expressed  by  the  following  simple  schema : 

Starch^-c.     .-,' i     .  •    ^Maltose. 

"Erythrodextrin<..    ,      ..  ,      ,  . 
•^  ^Achroodextrin. 

The  products  formed  in  this  reaction  are  probably  not  absorbed  as 
such.  The  absorption  takes  place  mainly  no  doubt  after  the  food 
reaches  the  small  intestine,  and  we  have  evidence,  as  will  be  stated, 
that  before  absorption  the  maltose  and  the  dextrin  are  acted  upon  by 
the  inverting  enzymes  (maltase)  and  converted  into  the  simple 
sugar,  dextrose.  The  ptyalin  digestion  seems  therefore  to  be  pre- 
paratory, and  the  combined  action  of  ptyalin  and  maltase  is  necessary 
to  get  the  starch  into  a  condition  ready  for  nutrition.  By  way  of 
comparison  it  is  interesting  to  remember  that  when  starch  is  boiled 
with  dilute  acids  it  is  hydrolyzed  at  once  to  dextrose.  A  question  of 
practical  importance  is  as  to  how  far  salivary  digestion  affects  the 
starchy  foods  under  usual  circumstances.  The  chewing  process  in 
the  mouth  thoroughly  mixes  the  food  and  saliva,  or  should  do  so, 
but  the  bolus  is  swallowed  much  too  quickly  to  enable  the  enzyme  to 
complete  its  action.     In  the  stomach  the  gastric  juice  is  sufficiently 


THE    SALIVARY   GLANDS.  681 

acid  to  destroy  the  ptyalin,  and  it  was  therefore  supposed  formerly 
that  salivary  digestion  is  promptly  arrested  on  the  entrance  of  the 
food  into  the  stomach,  and  is  therefore  normally  of  but  little  value 
as  a  digestive  j^rocess.  Our  recent  increase  in  knowledge  regarding 
the  conditions  in  the  stomach  (p.  642)  shows,  on  the  contrary,  that 
some  of  the  food  in  an  ordinary  meal  may  remain  in  the  fundic 
end  of  the  stomach  for  an  hour  or  more  untouched  by  the  acid 
secretion.  There  is  every  reason  to  believe,  therefore,  that  sahvary 
digestion  may  be  carried  on  in  the  stomach  to  an  important  extent. 

Conditions  Influencing  the  Action  of  Ptyalin. — Temperature. 
— ^As  in  the  case  of  the  other  enzymes,  ptyalin  is  very  susceptible  to 
changes  of  temperature.  At  0°  C.  its  activity  is  said  to  be  suspended 
entirely.  The  intensity  of  its  action  increases  with  increase  of 
temperature  from  this  point,  and  reaches  its  maximum  at  about 
40°  C.  If  the  temperature  is  raised  much  beyond  this  point,  the 
action  decreases,  and  at  from  65°  to  70°  C.  the  enzyme  is  destroyed. 
In  these  latter  points  ptyalin  differs  from  diastase,  the  enzyme  of 
malt.  Diastase  shows  a  maximum  action  at  50°  C.  and  is  destroyed 
at  80°  C. 

Effect  of  Reaction. — The  normal  reaction  of  saliva  is  slightly 
alkaline.  Chittenden  has  shown,  however,  that  ptyalin  acts  as  well, 
or  even  better,  in  a  perfectly  neutral  medium.  A  strong  alkaline 
reaction  retards  or  prevents  its  action.  The  most  marked  influence 
is  exerted  by  acids.  Free  hydrochloric  acid  to  the  extent  of  only 
0.003  per  cent.  (Chittenden)  is  sufficient  to  practically  stop  the  amy- 
lolytic  action  of  the  enzyme,  and  a  slight  further  increase  in  acidity 
not  only  stops  the  action,  but  also  destroys  the  enzyme. 

Condition  of  the  Starch. — It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  the  conver- 
sion of  starch  to  sugar  by  enzymes  takes  place  much  more  rapidly 
with  cooked  starch — for  example,  starch  paste.  In  the  latter  ma- 
terial sugar  begins  to  appear  in  a  few  minutes,  provided  a  good 
enzyme  solution  is  used.  With  starch  in  a  raw  condition,  on  the 
contrary,  it  may  be  many  minutes,  or  even  several  hours,  before 
sugar  can  be  detected.  The  longer  time  required  for  raw  starch  is 
partly  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  starch  grains  are  surrounded 
by  a  layer  of  cellulose  or  cellulose-like  material  that  resists  the  action- 
of  ptyalin.  When  boiled,  this  layer  breaks  and  the  starch  in  the 
interior  becomes  exposed.  In  addition,  the  starch  itself  is  changed 
during  the  boihng ;  it  takes  up  water,  and  in  this  hydrated  condition 
is  acted  upon  more  rapidly  by  the  ptyalin.  The  practical  value  of 
cooking  vegetable  foods  is  evident  from  these  statements. 

Functions  of  the  Saliva. — In  addition  to  the  digestive  action  of 
the  saliva  on  starchy  foods  it  fulfills  other  important  functions.  By 
moistening  the  food  it  enables  us  to  reduce  the  material  to  a  consis- 
tency suitable  for  swallowing  and  for  manipulation  by  the  tongue  and 


682  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

other  muscles.  Moreover,  the  presence  of  mucin  serves  doubtless 
as  a  kind  of  lubricator  that  insures  a  smooth  passage  along  the 
esophageal  canal.  Finally  by  dissolving  dry  and  solid  food  it  pro- 
vides a  necessary  step  in  the  process  of  stimulating  the  taste  nerves, 
and,  as  is  described  below,  the  activity  of  the  taste  sensations  may 
play  an  important  part  in  the  secretion  of  the  gastric  juice. 


CHAPTER  XLII. 

DIGESTION  AND  ABSORPTION  IN  THE  STOMACH. 

The  muscular  mechanisms  by  means  of  which  the  stomach  is 
charged  with  food  and  in  turn  discharged,  small  portions  at  a  time, 
into  the  duodenum  have  been  described.  The  present  chapter  deals 
only  with  the  chemical  and  mechanical  changes  in  the  food  during 
its  stay  in  the  stomach  and  the  extent  to  which  the  products  of 
digestion  are  absorbed. 

The  Gastric  Glands. — ^The  tubular  glands  that  permeate  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach  throughout  its  entire  extent  differ 
in  their  histological  structure,  and  therefore  doubtless  in  their  secre- 
tion, in  different  parts  of  the  stomach.  Two,  sometimes  three,  kinds 
of  glands  are  distinguished, — the  pyloric,  fundic  (and  cardiac). 
Those  in  the  pyloric  part  of  the  stomach  (antrum  pylori)  are  char- 
acterized chiefly  by  the  fact  that  in  the  secreting  part  of  the  tubule 
only  one  type  of  gland  cell  is  found,  the  chief  or  peptic  cell,  while  in 
the  remainder  of  the  stomach,  but  particularly  in  the  noiddle  or 
prepyloric  region  the  glands  (fundic  glands)  are  distinguished  by  the 
presence  of  two  types  of  cells, — the  chief  cells  and  the  so-called  cover 
or  border  cells  (Fig.  260).  The  third  type,  the  cardiac  glands,  is  found 
around  the  cardia,  but  its  area  of  distribution  varies  in  different 
animals,  and  its  histological  characteristics  are  not  verj^  definite.* 
There  seems  to  be  a  general  agreement  that  the  cliief  cells  furnish 
the  digestive  enzymes  of  the  stomach — pepsin  and  rennin — and  the 
cover  cells  the  hydrochloric  acid.  From  a  physiological  standpoint 
it  is  important  to  remember  that  the  cover  cells  are  massed,  as  it 
were,  in  the  glands  of  the  middle  or  prepyloric  region  of  the  stomach, 
that  they  are  scanty  in  the  fundus,  and  absent  in  the  pyloric  region. 
This  fact  is  indicated  to  the  eye  by  the  deeper  red  or  brownish  color 
of  the  mucous  membrane  in  the  prepyloric  portion.  Griitznerf 
called  especial  attention  to  this  relation,  and  in  connection  with  the 
differences  in  movements  of  these  two  parts  of  the  stomach  he 
suggests  that  normalh^  the  bulk  of  the  food  toward  the  fundus 
becomes  impregnated  first  with  pepsin;  then,  as  it  is  slowly  moved 
into  the  prepyloric  region,  the  acid  constituent  is  added.  The 
pyloric  glands  are  said  (Heidenhain)  to  secrete  an  alkaline  liquid 
containing  pepsin. 

*  See  Haane,  "Archiv  f.  Anatomic, "   1905,  1. 

t  Griitzner,  "  Archiv  f .  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  106,  463,  1905. 

683 


684 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION, 


Histological  Changes  in  the  Gastric  Glands  during  Secretion. 

— ^The  cells  of  the  gastric  glands,  especially  the  so-called  chief  cells, 
show  distinct  changes  as  the  result  of  prolonged  activity.  Upon 
preserved  specimens,  taken  from  dogs  fed  at  intervals  of  twenty-four 
hours,  Heidenhain  found  that  in  the  fasting  condition  the  chief  cells 
were  large  and  clear,  that  during  the  first  six  hours  of  digestion  the 
chief  cells  as  well  as  the  border  cells  increased  in  size,  but  that  in  a 
second  period,  extending  from  the  sixth  to  the  fifteenth  hour,  the 
chief  cells  became  gradually  smaller,  while  the  border  cells  remained 


Fig.  260- — Glands  of  the  fundus  (dog) :  A  and  A^,  during  hunger,  resting  conditipn ; 
B,  during  the  first  stage  of  digestion;  C  and  D,  the  second  stage  of  digestion,  showing 
the  diminution  in  the  size  of  the  "chief"  or  central  cells. — (After  Heidenhain.) 


large  or  even  increased  in  size.  After  the  fifteenth  hour  the  chief 
cells  increased  in  size,  gradually  passing  back  to  the  fasting  condition 
(see  Fig.  260). 

Langley  *  has  succeeded  in  following  the  changes  in  a  more  satis- 
factory way  by  observations  made  directly  upon  the  living  gland. 
He  finds  that  the  chief  cells  in  the  fasting  stage  are  charged  with 
granules,  and  that  during  digestion  the  granules  are  dissolved,  dis- 
*  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  3,  269,  1880. 


DIGESTION    AND    ABSORPTION    IN   THE    STOMACH.  685 

appearing  first  from  the  base  of  the  cell,  which  then  becomes  filled 
with  a  non-granular  material.  Observations  similar  to  those  made 
upon  other  glands  demonstrate  that  these  granules  represent  in  all 
probabiUty  a  preliminary  material  from  which  the  gastric  enzymes 
are  made  during  the  act  of  secretion.  The  granules,  therefore,  are 
sometimes  described  as  zymogen  granules. 

Means  of  Obtaining  the  Gastric  Secretion  and  its  Normal 
Composition. — The  secretion  of  the  gastric  membrane  is  formed  in 
the  minute  glands  scattered  over  its  surface.  As  there  is  no  com- 
mon duct,  the  difficulty  of  obtaining  the  secretion  for  analysis  or 
experiment  is  considerable.  This  difficulty  has  been  overcome  at 
different  times  by  the  invention  of  special  methods. 

The  older  methods  used  for  obtaining  normal  gastric  juice  were 
very  unsatisfactory.  An  animal  was  made  to  swallow  a  clean 
sponge  to  which  a  string  was  attached  so  that  the  sponge  could 
afterward  be  removed  and  its  contents  be  squeezed  out;  or  it  was 
made  to  eat  some  indigestible  material,  to  start  the  secretion  of 
juice  by  mechanical  stimulation;  the  animal  was  then  killed  at  the 
proper  time  and  the  contents  of  its  stomach  were  collected. 

The  experiments  of  the  older  observers  on  gastric  digestion,  especially 
those  of  the  Abbe  Spallanzani  (1729-1799),  furnish  most  interesting  reading. 
Spallanzani,  not  content  with  making  experiments  on  numerous  animals 
(frogs,  birds,  mammals,  etc.)  had  the  courage  to  carry  out  a  great  many 
upon  himself.  He  swallowed  foods  of  various  kinds  and  in  various  conditions 
.sewed  in  linen  bags  or  mclosed  in  perforated  wooden  tubes  which  in  turn 
were  covered  with  Imen.  The  bags  and  tubes  were  subsequently  passed 
in  the  stools  and  were  examined  as  to  the  amount  and  nature  of  their  contents. 
He  seems  to  have  experienced  no  injury  from  his  experiments,  although 
normally  his  powers  of  digestion  were  quite  feeble.  As  proof  that  the  trit- 
urating power  of  the  stomach  is  not  very  great  he  calls  attention  to  the  fact 
that  some  of  the  wooden  tubes  were  made  very  thin,  so  that  the  slightest 
pressure  would  crush  them,  and  yet  they  were  voided  uninjured.  So  also 
he  found  that  cherries  and  grapes  when  swallowed  whole,  even  if  entirely 
ripe,  were  usually  passed   unbroken. 

A  better  method  of  obtaining  normal  juice  was  suggested  by  the 
famous  observations  of  Beaumont*  upon  Alexis  St.  Martin.  St. 
Martin,  by  the  premature  discharge  of  his  gun,  was  wounded  in  the 
abdomen  and  stomach.  On  heahng,  a  fistulous  opening  remained  in 
the  abdominal  wall,  leading  into  the  stomach,  so  that  the  contents 
of  the  latter  could  be  inspected.  Beaumont  made  numerous  inter- 
esting and  most  valuable  observations  upon  his  patient.  Since  that 
time  it  has  become  customary  to  make  fistulous  openings  into  the 
stomachs  of  dogs  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  have  the  normal  juice 
for  examination.  A  silver  cannula  is  placed  in  the  fistula,  and 
at  any  time   the  plug  closing  the  cannula  may  be  removed-  and 

*  Beaumont,  "The  Physiology  of  Digestion,"  1833;  second  edition,  1847. 
For  a  biographical  account  of  Beaumont,  see  Osier,  "  Journal  of  the  American 
Medical  Association,"  November  15,  1902. 


686 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF    DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 


gastric  juice  be  obtained.  In  some  cases  the  esophagus  has  been 
occluded  or  excised  so  as  to  prevent  the  mixture  of  saliva  with  the 
gastric  juice.  Gastric  juice  may  be  obtained  from  human  beings 
also  in  cases  of  vomiting  or  by  means  of  the  stomach  pump,  but  in 
such  cases  it  is  necessarily  more  or  less  diluted  or  mixed  with  food 
and  can  not  be  used  for  exact  analyses,  although  specimens  of  gastric 
juice  obtained  by  these  methods  are  employed  in  the  diagnosis  and 
treatment  of  gastric  troubles. 

From  the  standpoint  of  experimental  investigation  a  very  im- 
portant addition  to  our  methods  was  made  by  Heidenhain.  This 
observer  showed  that  a  portion  of  the  stomach — the  fundic  end,  for 
instance,  or  the  pyloric  end — ^might  be  cut  away  from  the  rest  of  the 

organ  and  be  given  an 
artificial  opening  to  the 
exterior.  By  this  means 
the  secretion  of  an  isolated 
fundic  or  pyloric  sac  may 
be  obtained  and  examined 
as  to  its  quantity  and  prop- 
erties. The  method  was 
subsequently  improved  by 
Pawlow,  whose  important 
contributions  are  referred 
to  below.  Fig.  261  gives 
an  idea  of  the  operation  as 
made  by  Pawlow  to  isolate 
a  fundic  sac  with  its  blood 
and  nerve  supply  unin- 
jured. 

The  normal  gastric  se- 
cretion is  a  thin,  colorless 
or  nearly  colorless  liquid 
with  a  strong  acid  reaction  and  a  characteristic  odor.  Its  spe- . 
cific  gravity  varies,  but  it  is  never  great,  the  average  being  about 
1.002  to  1.003.  Upon  analysis  the  gastric  juice  is  found  to  contain 
a  trace  of  proteid,  probably  a  peptone,  some  mucin,  and  inorganic 
salts,  but  the  essential  constituents  are  an  acid  (HCl)  and  two 
enzymes,  pepsin  and  rennin.  Satisfactory'-  complete  analyses  of  the 
human  juice  have  not  been  reported,  most  of  the  recent  observers 
confining  their  attention  mainly  to  the  degree  of  acidity  and  digestive 
power.  Gastric  juice  does  not  give  a  coagulum  upon  boiling,  but  the 
digestive  enzymes  are  thereby  destroyed.  One  of  the  interesting 
facts  about  this  secretion  is  the  way  in  which  it  withstands  putrefac- 
tion. It  may  be  kept  for  a  long  time,  for  months  even,  without 
becoming  putrid  and  with  very  little  change,  if  any,  in  its  digestive 


Fig.  261. — To  show  Pawlow's  operation  for 
making  an  isolated  fundic  sac  from  the  stomach: 
V,  Cavity  of  the  stomach;  s,  the  fundic  sac,  shut  off 
from  the  stomach  and  opening  at  the  abdominal 
wall,  a,  a;  b  indicates  the  line  of  sutures. — (Paw- 
low.) 


DIGESTION   AND    ABSORPTION   IN   THE    STOMACH,  687 

action  or  in  its  total  acidity.  This  fact  shows  that  the  juice  possesses 
antiseptic  properties,  and  it  is  usually  supposed  that  the  presence  of 
the  free  acid  accounts  for  this  quality. 

The  Acid  of  Gastric  Juice. — ^I'he  nature  of  the  free  acid  in  gastric 
juice  was  formerly  the  subject  of  dispute,  some  claiming  that  the 
acidity  is  due  to  HCl,  since  this  acid  can  be  distilled  off  from  the  gas- 
tric juice,  others  contending  that  an  organic  acid,  lactic  acid,  is 
present  in  the  secretion.  All  recent  experiments  tend  to  prove  that 
the  acidity  is  due  to  HCl.  This  fact  was  first  demonstrated  satis- 
factorily by  the  analyses  of  Schmidt,  who  showed  that  if,  in  a  given 
specimen  of  gastric  juice,  the  chlorids  were  all  precipitated  by  silver 
nitrate  and  the  total  amount  of  chlorin  was  determined,  more  was 
found  than  could  be  held  in  combination  by  the  bases  present  in  the 
secretion.  Evidently,  some  of  the  chlorin  must  have  been  present 
in  combination  with  hydrogen  as  hydrochloric  acid.  Confirmatory 
evidence  of  one  kind  or  another  has  since  been  obtained.  Thus  it  has 
been  shov/n  that  a  number  of  color  tests  for  free  mineral  acids  react 
with  the  gastric  juice:  methyl-violet  solutions  are  turned  blue, 
congo-red  solutions  and  test  paper  are  changed  from  red  to  blue, 
00  tropeolin  from  a  yellowish  to  a  pink  red,  and  so  on.  A  number  of 
additional  tests  of  the  same  general  character  will  be  found  described 
in  the  laboratory  handbooks.*  It  must  be  added,  however,  that 
lactic  acid  undoubtedly  occurs,  or  may  occur,  in  the  stomach  during 
digestion.  Its  presence  is  usually  explained  as  being  due  to  the  fer- 
mentation of  the  carbohydrates,  and  it  is  therefore  more  constantly 
present  in  the  stomachs  of  the  herbivora.  The  amount  of  free  acid 
varies  according  to  the  duration  of  digestion;  that  is,  the  secretion 
does  not  possess  its  full  acidity  in  the  beginning,  owing  to  the  fact 
(Heidenhain)  that  in  the  first  periods  of  digestion,  while  the  secretion 
is  still  scanty  in  amount,  a  portion  of  its  acid  is  neutralized  by  the 
swallowed  saliva,  the  alkaline  mucus,  and  the  alkaline  secretion  of 
the  pyloric  end  of  the  stomach;  the  secreted  juice  has,  however,  a 
constant  acidity.  The  acidity  of  the  human  gastric  juice  is  usually 
estimated  at  0.3  per  cent.,  but  during  digestion  it  may  reach  (Horn- 
borg)  0.4  to  0.5  per  cent.,  and  these  figures  express  probably  its 
strength  as  secreted.  The  acidity  of  the  dog's  gastric  juice,  according 
to  Pawlow,  lies  between  0.46  and  0.56  per  cent. 

The  Origin  of  the  HCl. — The  gastric  juice  is  the  only  secretion 
of  the  body  that  contains  a  free  acid.  The  fact  that  the  acid  is  a 
mineral  acid  and  is  present  in  considerable  strength  makes  the  cir- 
cumstance more  remarkable.  Attempts  have  been  made  to  ascer- 
tain the  histological  elements  concerned  in  its  secretion  and  the 
nature  of  the  chemical  reaction  or  reactions  by  which  it  is  produced. 
With  regard  to  the  first  point  it  is  generally  believed  that  the  border 
*  Simon,  "A  Manual  of  Clinical  Diagnosis,"  1904. 


688  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

cells  of  the  gastric  tubules  constitute  the  acid-secreting  cells.  This 
belief  is  founded  upon  the  general  fact  that  in  the  regions  in  which 
these  cells  are  chiefly  present — that  is,  the  middle  region  of  the 
stomach — the  secretion  is  distinctly  acid,  and  where  they  are  absent 
or  scanty  in  number  the  secretion  is  alkaline  or  less  acid.  In  the 
pyloric  region,  for  instance,  these  cells  are  lacking  entirely  and  the 
secretion  is  alkaline.  So  also  in  the  fundus  the  secretion  does  not 
seem  to  be  acid,  and  this  fact  corresponds  with  a  marked  diminution 
or  absence  of  the  border  cells.  With  regard  to  the  origin  of  the  acid 
it  is  evident  that  it  is  formed  in  the  secreting  cells,  since  none  exists  in 
the  blood  or  lymph.  It  seems  also  perfectly  evident  that  the  HCl 
must  be  formed  from  the  chlorids  of  the  blood.  The  chief  chlorid 
is  NaCl  and  by  some  means  this  compound  is  broken  up ;  the  chlorin 
is  combined  with  hydrogen,  and  is  then  secreted  upon  the  free  surface 
of  the  stomach  as  HCl.  In  support  of  this  general  statement  it  has 
been  shown  that  if  the  chlorids  in  the  blood  are  reduced  by  removing 
them  from  the  food  for  a  sufficient  time  the  secretion  of  gastric  juice 
no  longer  contains  acid.  On  the  other  hand,  addition  of  NaBr  or 
KI  to  the  food  may  cause  the  formation  of  some  HBr  and  HI, 
toge'her  with  HCl  in  the  gastric  juice.  Maly  has  suggested  that 
acid  phosphates  may  be  produced  in  the  first  instance,  and  then  by 
reacting  with  the  sodium  chlorid  may  give  hydrochloric  acid,  accord- 
ing to  the  formula  NaH^PO^  +  NaCl  =  Na2HP04  +  HCl.  Other 
theories  have  been  proposed,  but,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  no  explanation 
of  the  details  of  this  reaction  is  satisfactory.  We  must  be  content 
to  say  that  in  the  acid-forming  cells  the  neutral  chlorids  (NaCl)  are 
broken  up  with  the  formation  of  free  HCl. 

The  Secretory  Nerves  of  the  Gastric  Glands. — Although  several 
facts  indicated  to  the  older  observers  that  the  secretion  of  gastric 
juice  is  under  the  control  of  nerve  fibers,  we  owe  the  actual  experi- 
mental demonstration  of  this  fact  to  Pawlow.*  He  demonstrated 
that  the  secretion  is  under  the  control  of  the  nervous  system  and  that 
the  secretory  fibers  are  contained  in  the  vagus.  Direct  stimulation 
of  the  peripheral  end  of  the  cut  vagus  causes  a  secretion  of  gastric 
juice  after  a  long  latent  period  of  several  minutes.  This  long  latency 
may  be  due  possibly  to  the  presence  in  the  vagus  of  inhibitory 
fibers  to  the  gland,  which,  being  stimulated  simultaneously  with  the 
secretory  fibers,  delay  the  action  of  the  latter.  Very  striking  proof 
of  the  general  fact  that  the  secretion  is  due  to  the  action  of  vagus 
fibers  is  furnished  by  such  experiments  as  these :  Pawlow  divided  the 
esophagus  in  the  neck  and  brought  the  two  ends  to  the  skin  so  as  to 
make  separate  fistulous  openings  to  the  exterior.  Under  these  con- 
ditions, when  the  animal  ate  and  swallowed  food  it  was  discharged 

*  See  Pawlow,  "  The  Work  of  the  Digestive  Glands, "  translated  by- 
Thompson,  1902. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE    STOMACH.  689 

to  the  exterior  instead  of  entering  the  stomach.  The  animal  thus  had 
the  enjoyment  of  eating  without  actually  filling  the  stomach.  Eating 
in  this  style  forms  what  the  author  called  a  fictitious  meal  (Schein- 
filtterung).  It  was  found  that  it  causes  an  abundant  flow  of  gastric 
juice  as  long  as  the  vagi  are  intact,  but  has  no  effect  on  the  secretion 
when  these  nerves  are  cut.  Evidently,  therefore,  the  sensations  of 
taste,  odor,  etc.,  developed  during  the  mastication  and  swallowing 
of  food  set  up  refiexly  a  stimulation  of  secretory  fibers  in  the  vagus. 
Pawlow  designates  a  secretion  produced  in  this  way  as  a  psychical 
secretion, — a  term  which  implies  that  the  reflex  must  be  attended  by 
conscious  sensations.  In  favorable  cases  the  fictitious  feeding  has 
been  continued  for  five  or  six  hours  and  a  large  amount  of  gastric 
juice  (700  c.c.)  has  been  collected  from  a  fistula,  although  no  food 
actually  entered  the  stomach.  It  is  important  to  note,  also,  that  a 
psychical  secretion,  once  started,  may  continue  for  a  long  time  after 
the  stimulus  (the  eating)  has  ceased.  Experiments  have  been  made 
upon  human  beings  under  similar  conditions.  Thus,  Hornborg* 
reports  the  case  of  a  boy  with  a  stricture  of  the  esophagus  and  a 
fistula  in  the  stomach.  Food  when  chewed  and  swallowed  did  not 
reach  the  stomach,  but  was  regurgitated;  it  caused,  nevertheless, 
an  active  psychical  secretion  in  the  empty  stomach. 

Normal  Mechanism  of  the  Secretion  of  the  Gastric  Juice. — 
During  a  meal  the  gastric  juice  is  secreted,  under  normal  conditions, 
as  long  as  the  food  remains  in  the  stomach.  The  modern  explana- 
tion of  the  origin,  maintenance,  and  regulation  of  this  flow  of  secre- 
tion is  that  given  by  Pawlow.  Contrary  to  a  former  general  belief, 
he  showed  that  mechanical  stimulation  of  the  gastric  mucous  mem- 
brane has  no  effect  on  the  secretion  of  the  tubules.  This  factor  may 
therefore  be  eliminated.  In  an  ordinary  meal  the  secretion  first 
started  is  due  to  the  sensations  of  eating — that  is,  it  is  a  psychical 
secretion.  The  afferent  stimuli  originate  in  the  mouth  and  nostrils; 
the  efferent  path,  the  secretory  fibers,  is  through  the  vagus  nerve. 
This  reflex  insures  the  beginning  at  least  of  gastric  digestion,  but  its 
effect  is  supplemented  by  reflex  stimulations  arising  in  the  stomach 
itself.  The  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach  contains  sensory 
fibers  which,  when  stimulated,  act  refiexly  upon  the  secretory  fibers 
and  set  up  a  secretion.  It  seems  that  some  foods  contain  substances 
capable  of  giving  this  effect,  while  others  do  not.  Thus,  meat 
extracts,  meat  juices,  soups,  etc.,  are  particularly  effective  in  this 
respect;  milk  and  water  cause  less  secretion.  Certain  common 
articles  of  food,  such  as  bread  and  white  of  eggs,  have  no  effect  of  this 
kind  at  all.  If  introduced  into  the  stomach  of  a  dog  through  a  fistula 
so  as  not  to  arouse  a  psychical  secretion, — for  instance,  while  the  dog's 
attention  is  diverted  or  while  he  is  sleeping, — they  cause  no  flow  of 

*  Hornborg,  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  15,  209,  1904. 
44 


690 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 


gastric  juice  and  are  not  digested.  If  such  articles  of  food  are  eaten, 
however,  they  cause  a  psychical  secretion,  and  when  this  has  acted 
upon  the  foods  some  product  of  their  digestion  in  turn  becomes  ca- 
pable of  stimulating  the  secretory  paths  by  a  reflex  from  the  stomach. 
The  steps  in  the  mechanism  of  secretion  are,  therefore,  three:  (1)  the 
psychical  secretion;  (2)  the  secretion  from  secretogogues  contained 
in  the  food;    (3)  the  secretion  from  secretogogues  contained  in  the 

products  of  digestion. 
The  chemical  nature 
of  these  last-named 
stimuli  is  undeter- 
mined. 

The  researches  of 
Pawlow  and  his  co- 
workers seem  also  to 
indicate  that  the 
quantity  and  prop- 
erties of  the  secre- 
tion vary  with  the 
character  of  the  food. 
The  quantity  of  the 
secretion  varies,  also, 
other  conditions  be- 
ing the  same,  with 
the  amount  of  food 
to  be  digested.  The 
apparatus  is  adjusted 
in  this  respect  to 
work  economically. 
Different  kinds  of 
food  produce  secre- 
tions varying  not 
only  as  regards  quan- 
tity, but  also  in  their 
acidity  and  digestive 
action.  The  secre- 
tion produced  by 
bread,  though  less  in 
quantity  than  that  caused  by  meat,  possesses  a  greater  digestive 
action.  On  a  given  diet  the  secretion  assumes  certain  characteris- 
tics, and  Pawlow  is  convinced  that  further  work  will  disclose  the  fact 
that  the  secretion  of  the  stomach  is  not  caused  normally  by  general 
stimuli  all  affecting  it  alike,  but  by  specific  stimuli  contained  in  the 
food  or  produced  during  digestion,  whose  action  is  of  such  a  kind 
as  to  arouse  reflexly  the  secretion  best  adapted  to  the  food  ingested. 


111 

ii 

.S-" 

Milk,       Meat,       Bread, 
600  C.C.    100  gms.   100  gms. 

Oa| 

0.576 
0.528 
0.480 
0.432 
0.384 
0.336 
0.288 
0.240 
0.192 
0  144 

^f 

s. 

\ 

18 

1 

\ 

16 

1 

\ 

1 

\ 

1 

\ 

1 

^ 

\ 

\ 

in 

/ 

10 

10 

^^ 

8 

\ 

\ 

6 

6 

\ 

\ 

4 

0.096 

0.048 

0 

4 

V 

_^ 

_^ 

X 

s. 

2 

2         J 

-— , 

/ 

s 

^ 

— < 

I 

^ 

\ 

0 

0 

Hours 

f  z  s  4  s  6  Y  8  ^  wir  a 

Quantity  of  secretion. 
,  Acidity. 
'.  Digestive  power. 


Fig.  262. — Diagram  showing  the  variation  in  quantity 
of  gastric  secretion  in  the  dog  after  a  mixed  meal;  also 
the  variations  in  acidity  and  in  digestive  power. — (After 
KMgine^ 


DIGESTION    AND    ABSORPTION    IN   THE    STOMACH,  691   ' 

One  of  the  curves,  showing  the  effect  of  a  mixed  diet  (milk,  600 
C.C.;  meat,  100  gms.;  bread,  100  gms.)  upon  the  gastric  secretion, 
as  determined  by  Pawlow's  method,  is  reproduced  in  Fig.  262.  It  will 
be  noticed  that  the  secretion  began  shortly  after  the  ingestion  of  the 
food  (seven  minutes),  and  increased  rapidly  to  a  maximum  that  was 
reached  in  two  hours.  After  the  second  hour  the  flow  decreased 
rapidly  and  nearly  uniformly  to  about  the  tenth  hour.  The  acidity 
rose  slightly  between  the  first  and  second  hours,  and  then  fell  gradu- 
ally. The  digestive  power  showed  an  increase  between  the  second 
and  third  hours. 

Nature  and  Properties  of  Pepsin.— Pepsin  is  a  typical  proteo- 
lytic enzyme  that  exhibits  the  striking  peculiarity  of  acting  only  in 
acid  media;  hence  peptic  digestion  in  the  stomach  is  the  result  of 
the  combined  action  of  pepsin  and  hydrochloric  acid.  Pepsin  is 
influenced  in  its  action  by  temperature,  as  is  the  case  with  the  other 
enzymes;  low  temperatures  retard,  and  may  even  suspend  its 
activity,  while  high  temperatures  increase  it.  The  optimum  tem- 
perature is  stated  to  be  from  37°  to  40°  C,  while  exposure  for  some 
time  to  80°  C.  results,  when  the  pepsin  is  in  a  moist  condition,  in  the 
total  destruction  of  the  enzyme.  Pepsin  may  be  extracted  from  the 
gastric  mucous  membrane  by  a  variety  of  methods  and  in  different 
degrees  of  purity  and  strength.  The  commercial  preparations  of 
pepsin  consist  usually  of  some  form  of  extract  of  the  gastric  mucous 
membrane  to  which  starch  or  sugar  of  milk  has  been  added.  Labora- 
tory preparations  are  made  conveniently  by  mincing  thoroughly 
the  mucous  membrane  and  then  extracting  for  a  long  time  with 
glycerin.  Glycerin  extracts,  if  not  too  much  diluted  with  water  or 
blood,  keep  for  an  indefinite  time.  Purer  preparations  of  pepsin 
have  been  made  by  what  is  known  as  "  Briicke's  method,"  in  which 
the  mucous  membrane  is  minced  and  is  then  self-digested  with  a  5 
per  cent,  solution  of  phosphoric  acid.  The  phosphoric  acid  is  pre- 
cipitated by  the  addition  of  lime-M-ater,  and  the  pepsin  is  carried 
down  in  the  fiocculent  precipitate.  This  precipitate,  after  being 
washed,  is  carried  into  solution  by  dilute  hydrochloric  acid,  and  a 
solution  of  cholesterin  in  alcohol  and  ether  is  added.  The  cholesterin 
is  precipitated,  and,  as  before,  carries  down  with  it  the  pepsin.  This 
precipitate  is  collected,  carefully  washed,  and  then  treated  repeatedly 
with  ether,  which  dissolves  and  removes  the  cholesterin,  leaving  the 
pepsin  in  aqueous  solution.  This  method  is  interesting  not  only 
because  it  gives  a  pure  form  of  pepsin,  but  also  in  that  it  illustrates 
one  of  the  properties  of  enzymes — namely,  the  readiness  with  which 
they  adhere  to  precipitates  occurring  in  their  solutions. 

In  spite  of  much  work  the  chemical  nature  of  pepsin  is  undeter- 
mined.    Most  authors  agree  that  it  is  a  proteid  or  proteid-containing 


692  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

body.  Pekelharing*  has  prepared  pepsin  from  gastric  juice  by 
dialysis,  the  substance  precipitating  as  the  acid  is  dialyzed  off.  The 
precipitate  may  be  purified  by  repeated  resolutions  in  acid  followed 
by  dialysis.  As  prepared  by  this  method  pepsin  is  a  substance  of  a 
proteid  nature  which  contains  sulphur  and  also  some  chlorin,  but  no 
phosphorus.  It  does  not  belong,  therefore,  to  the  group  of  nucleo- 
proteids. 

Pepsin  is  supposed  to  be  formed  in  the  chief  cells  of  the  gastric 
tubules,  but  as  in  other  cases  it  is  present  in  the  cells  as  a  zymogen 
or  propepsin  which  is  not  changed  to  the  active  pepsin  until  after 
secretion.  The  propepsin  may  be  extracted  readily  from  the  mucous 
membrane,  and,  since  it  is  known  that  the  zymogen  is  converted 
quickly  to  active  pepsin  by  the  action  of  acids,  it  is  evident  that  in 
the  normal  gastric  juice  the  existence  of  the  hydrochloric  acid 
insures  that  all  of  the  pepsin  shall  be  present  in  active  form.  There 
has  been  much  discussion  as  to  the  nature  of  the  secretion  of  the 
pyloric  glands.  Heidenhain  isolated  this  portion  of  the  stomach  and 
collected  its  secretion.  He  found  that  it  was  alkaline  and  contained 
pepsin.  Later  observers,  however,  still  continue  to  doubt  the  secre- 
tion of  a  true  pepsin  in  this  portion  of  the  stomach.  Glaessnerf 
states  that  propepsin  can  not  be  obtained  from  extracts  of  the  pyloric 
glands,  and  that  the  proteolytic  enzyme  that  can  be  shown  in  this 
portion  of  the  stomach  by  self-digestion  in  acid  or  alkaline  media  is 
not  a  true  gastric  pepsin.  Whether  the  pyloric  glands  take  any 
chemical  part  in  gastric  digestion  must  remain  undecided.  From 
the  description  of  the  events  in  the  stomach  (p.  641)  it  would  seem 
that  the  food  material  which  is  churned  and  stirred  by  the  contrac- 
tions of  the  pyloric  musculature  has  already  been  charged  with  pepsin 
and  hydrochloric  acid  by  the  glands  of  the  middle  and  fundic  regions. 

Artificial  Gastric  Juice. — In  studying  peptic  digestion  it  is  not 
necessary  for  all  purposes  to  establish  a  gastric  fistula.  The  active 
agents  of  the  normal  juice  are  pepsin  and  acid  of  a  proper  strength; 
and,  as  the  pepsin  can  be  extracted  and  preserved  in  various  ways, 
and  the  hydrochloric  acid  can  easily  be  made  of  the  proper  strength, 
an  artificial  juice  can  be  obtained  at  any  time  which  may  be  used  in 
place  of  the  normal  secretion  for  many  purposes.  In  laboratory 
experiments  it  is  customary  to  employ  a  glycerin  extract  of  the 
gastric  mucous  membrane,  and  to  add  a  small  portion  of  this  extract 
to  a  large  bulk  of  0.2  per  cent,  hydrochloric  acid.  The  artificial 
juice  thus  made,  when  kept  at  a  temperature  of  from  37°  to 
40°  C,  will  digest  proteids  rapidly  if  the  preparation  of  pepsin  is  a 
good  one.  While  the  strength  of  the  acid  employed  is  generally  from 
0.2  to  0.3  per  cent.,  digestion  will  take  place  in  solutions  of  greater 

*  Pekelharing,  "  Zeitschrift  f.   physiol.   Chemie,"  35,  8,   1902. 

t  Glaessner,  "  Beitrage  zur  chem.  Physiol,  u,  Pathol.,"  1,  24,  1901. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE    STOMACH.  693 

or  less  acidity.  Too  great  or  too  small  an  acidity,  however,  will 
retard  the  process ;  that  is,  there  is  for  the  action  of  the  pepsin  an 
optimum  acidity  which  lies  somewhere  between  0.2  and  0.5 
per  cent.  Other  acids  may  be  used  in  place  of  the  hydrochloric  acid 
— for  example,  nitric,  phosphoric,  or  lactic — ^but  they  are  not  so 
effective,  and  the  optimum  acidity  is  different  for  each;  for  phos- 
phoric acid  it  is  given  as  2  per  cent. 

The  Pepsin-Hydrochloric  Acid  Digestion  of  Proteids. — It  has 
long  been  known  that  solid  proteids,  when  exposed  to  the  action  of  a 
normal  or  an  artificial  gastric  juice,  swell  up  and  eventually  pass  into 
solution.  The  soluble  proteid  thus  formed  was  known  not  to  be 
coagulated  by  heat  and  was  remarkable  also  for  being  more  diffusible 
than  other  forms  of  soluble  proteids.  This  end-product  of  digestion 
was  formerly  conceived  as  a  soluble  proteid  with  properties  fitting 
it  for  rapid  absorption,  and  the  name  of  peptone  was  given  to  it.  It 
was  quickly  found,  however,  that  the  process  is  complicated — that  in 
the  conversion  to  so-called  ''peptone"  the  proteid  under  digestion 
passes  through  a  number  of  intermediate  stages.  The  intermediate 
products  were  partially  isolated  and  were  given  specific  names,  such 
as  acid-albumin,  parapeptone,  and  propeptone.  The  present  concep- 
tion of  the  process  we  owe  chiefly  to  Kiihne.  This  author  beheved 
that  the  proteid  passes  through  three  general  stages  before  reaching 
the  final  condition  of  peptone.  This  view  is  indicated  briefly  by  the 
following  schema : 

Native    proteid. 

Acid  albumin  (syntonin) . 

Primary  proteoses  (protalbumoses) . 

Secondary  proteoses  (deutero-albumoses). 

Peptone. 

The  first  step  is  the  conversion  of  the  proteid  to  an  acid  albumin. 
This  change  may  be  considered  as  being  chiefly  an  effect  of  the  hy- 
drochloric acid,  although  in  some  way  the  combined  action  of  the 
pepsin-hydrochloric  acid  compound  is  more  effective  than  a  solution 
of  the  acid  alone  of  the  same  strength.  Like  the  acid  albumins  in 
general  (see  appendix),  the  syntonin  is  readily  precipitated  on 
neutrahzation.  In  the  beginning  of  peptic  digestion,  therefore, 
if  the  solution  is  neutralized  with  dilute  alkali,  an  abundant  precipi- 
tate of  syntonin  occurs.  Later  on  in  the  digestion  neutralization 
gives  no  such  effect — the  syntonin  has  all  passed  into  a  further  stage 
of  digestion.  Under  the  influence  of  the  pepsin  the  syntonin  under- 
goes hydrolysis,  with  the  production  of  a  number  of  bodies  which 
as  a  group  are  designated  as  primary  proteoses  or  protalbumoses.* 
*  The  products  intermediate  between  the  original  proteid  and  the  pep- 
tone are  described  in  general  as  albumoses  or  as  proteoses,  according  as  one 
takes  the  term  proteid  or  albumin  as  the  generic  name  for  the  original  sub- 
stance. The  term  proteid  is  generally  used  in  English;  hence,  the  intermedi- 
ate products  are  more  appropriately  designated  as  proteoses. 


694  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

Although  several  members  of  this  group  have  been  isolated  and  given 
separate  names,  so  much  doubt  prevails  as  to  the  chemical  individ- 
uality of  these  substances  that  it  is  best  perhaps  to  regard  them  as  a 
group  of  compounds  which  under  the  continued  influence  of  the 
pepsin  undergo  still  further  hydrolysis  with  the  formation  of  secon- 
dary proteoses  or  deutero-albumoses.  As  compared  with  the  primary 
proteoses,  the  secondary  ones  are  distinguished  by  a  greater  solu- 
bility ;  they  require  a  stronger  saturation  with  neutral  salts  to  precipi- 
tate them.  (See  appendix.)  The  secondary  proteids  undergo  still 
further  hydrolysis,  with  the  production  of  peptone,  or  perhaps  it 
would  be  better  to  say  peptones.  The  peptones  show  still  greater 
solubility,  and,  in  fact,  peptone,  in  Kiihne's  sense,  is  that  compound 
or  group  of  compounds  formed  in  peptic  digestion  which,  while  still 
showing  proteid  reactions  (biuret  reaction),  is  not  coagulated  by 
heat  nor  precipitated  when  its  solutions  are  completely  saturated 
with  ammonium  sulphate.  According  to  the  schema  and  descrip- 
tion given  above,  the  several  stages  in  peptic  digestion  are  repre- 
sented as  following  in  sequence.  It  should  be  stated,  however, 
that  many  authors  consider  that  even  in  the  beginning  of  the 
digestion  the  proteid  molecule  may  be  split  into  several  complexes, 
and  that  some  of  the  end-products  may  be  formed  in  the  very 
beginning  of  the  action.  All  that  we  can  state  very  positively 
is  that  the  proteid  molecules  undergo  a  series  of  hydrolytic  cleav- 
ages, the  end-result  of  which  is  that  in  place  of  the  originally  very 
large  molecule  with  a  weight  of  5000  to  7000  there  is  obtained  a 
number  of  much  smaller  and  much  more  soluble  molecules  whose 
molecular  weights  are  perhaps  only  250  to  400  or  less. 

It  was  formerly  believed  that  pepsin  was  not  able  to  split  the  complex 
proteid  molecule  into  compounds  of  a  simpler  structure  than  the  peptone. 
But  a  number  of  recent  authors  have  stated  that  if  time  enough  is  given 
the  breaking  up  of  the  proteid  molecule  may  be  as  complete  as  after  the  action 
of  trypsin,  or  after  hydrolysis  by  acids  (see  Proteids  in  appendix).  That 
is,  along  with  the  peptone  or  in  place  of  it  are  found  certain  simpler  bodies 
which  no  longer  give  the  biuret  reaction,  but  are  precipitable  by  phospho- 
tungstic  acid  and  for  which  Hofmeister  proposes  the  general  name  of  pep- 
toids.  They  would  correspond,  also,  apparently,  to  the  group  of  compounds 
designated  by  Fischer  as  peptids  or  polypeptids.  In  addition,  many  of  the 
amido-acids  and  nitrogenous  bases  which  constitute  the  final  end-products 
of  the  breaking  up  of  the  proteid  molecule  may  be  found.* 

In  judging  the  digestive  action  of  any  given  specimen  of  natural 
or  artificial  gastric  juice  it  is  customary  to  measure  the  rapidity 
with  which  an  insoluble  proteid  is  converted  into  a  soluble  form. 
The  method  most  commonly  employed  is  that  devised  in  Pawlow's 
laboratory  by  Mett.  The  Mett  test  is  made  by  sucking  white  of  egg 
into  a  thin-walled  glass  tube  having  an  internal  diameter  of  1  to  2 
mms.  The  egg-albumin  is  coagulated  in  the  tube  by  immersing  it  for 
*  See  Hofmeister,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  i,  part  i,  796,  1902. 


DIGESTION   AND    ABSORPTION   IX   THE    STOMACH.  695 

five  minutes  in  water  at  95°  C.  After  some  time  the  tube  is  cut  into 
lengths  of  10  to  15  mms.  and  these  are  used  to  test  the  digestive  action 
or  amount  of  pepsin.  (Jne  or  more  of  the  tubes  are  placed  in  the 
solution  to  be  measm'ed  and  kept  for  ten  hours  at  body  temperatmre. 
The  digestive  power  is  measured  ia  terms  of  the  length  in  millimeters 
of  the  column  of  egg-albumin  that  is  dissoh'ed.  The  relative  amounts 
of  pepsin  in  solutions  compared  in  this  way  are  determined  by  the 
law  of  Schiitz,  according  to  wliich  the  chgestive  power  is  proportional 
to  the  square  root  of  the  amount  of  pepsin.  If  in  two  specimens  of 
gastric  juice  the  number  of  millimeters  of  egg  albumin  digested 
was  in  one  case  two  and  in  the  other  three,  the  digestive  powers  of  the 
two  solutions  would  be  as  the  squares  of  the  nimibers.  as  4  to  9. 

The  Rennin  Enzyme  (Rennet,  Chymosin). — The  property 
possessed  by  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  calf's  stomach  of  curdhng 
milk  has  been  kno^\Ti  from  remote  times,  and  has  been  utihzed  in  the 
manufactm-e  of  cheeze  and  curds.  This  action  takes  place  "^-ith 
remarkable  rapidity  under  favorable  conditions,  a  large  mass  of  milk 
setting  to  a  firm  coagulum  -^itliin  a  ver\'  brief  time.  It  has  been 
shown  that  tliis  action  is  due  to  an  enzAmae, — ^rennin  or  rennet.  The 
rennin.  hke  the  pepsin,  is  supposed  to  be  formed  in  the  chief  cells  of 
the  gastric  tubules  and  to  be  present  in  the  glands  in  a  z^miogen 
form,  the  prorennin  or  proch^inosin.  which  after  secretion  is  con- 
verted to  the  active  enzATne.  This  conversion  takes  place  ver\' 
readily  under  the  influence  of  acid.  Rennin  (or  its  zATnogen)  may  be 
obtained  easily  from  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach  (T\-ith 
the  exception  of  the  pyloric  end  j  by  extracting  with  glycerin  or  water 
or  by  chgesting  it  with  dilute  acid.  Good  extracts  of  rennin  cause 
the  milk  to  clot  with  great  rapidity  at  a  temperature  of  40°  C.  the 
milk  (cows'  milk),  if  uncUsturbed  setting  first  into  a  soHd  clot,  which 
aftervv-ard  sluinks  and  presses  out  a  clear.  yelloT\-ish  liquid — the 
whey.  With  hmnan  milk  the  curd  is  much  less  firm,  and  takes  the 
form  of  loose  flocculi.  The  whole  process  resembles  much  the  clotting 
of  blood.  The  rapidity  of  clotting  is  said  to  xsltv  inversely  as  the 
amoimt  of  rennin,  or.  in  other  words,  the  product  of  the  amount  of 
rennin  and  the  time  necessary-  for  clotting  is  a  constant.  The 
curdling  of  the  milk  involves  two  apparently  independent  proc- 
esses :  First,  the  rennin  acts  upon  the  casein  of  the  milk  and  converts 
it  into  a  substance  known  as  paracasein.  The  paracasein  then 
reacts  -^ith  the  lime  salts  of  the  milk,  forming  an  insoluble  calciimi 
salt,  which  constitutes  the  curd  or  Qoagulum.  According  to  this 
\-iew,  the  enz^mie  does  not  cause  clotting  directly.  T\Tiat  takes  place 
when  the  casein  is  changed  to  paracasein  is  not  understood.  Ham- 
marsten  originally  regarded  the  change  as  a  cleavage  process,  but 
this  A-iew  has  not  been  supported.  Others  have  supposed  that  a 
transformation    or  rearrangement    of  molecular   structure    occurs. 


696  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

Indeed,  the  differences  in  properties  between  casein  and  paracasein 
are  not  great,  the  most  marked  difference  being  that  the  calcium 
salts  of  the  latter  are  insoluble.  If  soluble  calcium  salts  are  removed 
from  milk  by  the  addition  of  oxalate  solutions  it  does  not  curdle  upon 
the  addition  of  rennin.  Addition  of  lime  salts  restores  this  property. 
It  should  be  added  that  casein  is  also  precipitated  from  milk  by  the 
addition  of  an  excess  of  acid.  The  curdling  of  sour  milk  in  the 
formation  of  bonnyclabber  is  a  well-known  illustration  of  this  fact. 
When  milk  stands  for  some  time  the  action  of  bacteria  upon  the  milk- 
sugar  leads  to  the  formation  of  lactic  acid,  and  when  this  acid 
reaches  a  certain  concentration  it  causes  the  precipitation  of  the 
casein. 

So  far  as  our  positive  knowledge  goes,  the  action  of  rennin  is 
confined  to  milk.  Casein  is  the  chief  proteid  constituent  of  milk, 
and  has  therefore  an  important  nutritive  value.  It  is  interesting 
to  find  that  before  its  peptic  digestion  begins  the  casein  is  acted 
upon  by  an  altogether  different  enzyme.  The  value  of  the  curdling 
action  is  not  at  once  apparent,  but  we  may  suppose  that  casein  is 
more  easily  digested  under  the  conditions  that  exist  in  the  body  after 
it  has  been  brought  into  a  solid  form.  This  has,  however,  been 
doubted,  and  it  has  even  been  suggested  that  the  process  is  a  hin- 
drance rather  than  an  aid  to  the  digestion  of  the  casein.  Until  the 
contrary  is  definitely  demonstrated  it  is  preferable  to  assume  that 
the  process  is  of  importance  in  the  digestion  of  milk.  The  action  of 
rennin  goes  no  further  than  the  curdling;  the  digestion  of  the  curd 
is  carried  on  by  the  pepsin,  and  later,  in  the  intestines,  by  the 
trypsin,  with  the  formation  of  proteoses  and  peptones  as  in  the 
case  of  other  proteids.* 

Rennin  is  found  elsewhere  than  in  the  gastric  mucosa.  It  has  been 
described  in  the  pancreatic  juice,  in  the  testis,  and  in  many  other  organs 
as  well  as  in  the  tissues  of  many  plants.  In  fact,  wherever  proteolytic  enzymes 
are  found  there  also  some  evidence  of  a  curdling  action  on  milk  may  be  ob- 
tained .  For  this  reason  some  observers  f  have  taken  the  view  that  the  milk  coag- 
ulation is  not  due  to  a  specific  ferment,  but  is  an  action  of  the  pepsin  itself. 
That  is,  the  proteolytic  enzyme  is  capable  of  causing  the  change  from  casein 
to  paracasein  as  well  as  the  hydrolysis  of  the  proteid.  This  view  is  opposed  to 
the  prevalent  opinion  regarding  the  specificity  of  enzyme  actions. 

Another  interesting  fact  concerning  rennin  is  that  an  animal  may  be  im- 
munized against  it  (see  p.  387).  If  rennin  be  injected  subcutaneously  in 
an  animal  an  antirennin  will  be  formed  in  its  blood.  This  antirennin  added 
to  milk  prevents  its  curdling  by  rennin,  giving  a  result,  therefore,  similar 
to  the  reaction  between  toxins  and  antitoxins. 

The  Digestive  Changes  Undergone  by  the  Food  in  the 
Stomach. — In  addition  to  the  pepsin  and  rennin  various  observers 

*  For  references  to  the  very  abundant  literature  consult  Oppenheimer, 
loc.  cit. 

t  See  Pawlowand  Parastschuk,  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  42,415. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE    STOMACH.  697 

have  described  other  enzymes  in  the  gastric  juice  or  gastric  mem- 
brane,— a  Hpase  or  fat-sphttiug  enzyme  (Volhard),  an  amylolytic 
or  starch-sphtting  enzyme  (Friedenthal),  and  an  inverting  enzyme 
(Lusk),  but  the  normal  existence  or  at  least  the  normal  action  of  these 
latter  enzymes  in  digestion  is  a  matter  about  which  little  is  known. 
As  was  said  above,  it  is  probable  that  the  ptyalin  swallowed  with  the 
food  continues  to  exert  its  action  upon  the  starchy  materials  in  the 
fundus  for  a  long  time,  so  that  in,  this  way  the  starch  digestion  in 
the  stomach  may  be  important.  Regarding  the  fats,  it  is  usually 
beUeved  that  they  undergo  no  truly  digestive  change  in  the  stomach. 
They  are  set  free  from  their  intimate  mixture  with  other  food- 
stuffs by  the  dissolving  action  of  the  gastric  juice  upon  proteids, 
they  are  Hquefied  by  the  heat  of  the  body,  and  they  are  disseminated 
through  the  chyme  in  a  coarse  emulsion  by  the  movements  of  the 
stomach.  In  this  way  they  are  mechanically  prepared  so  that  the 
subsequent  action  of  the  pancreatic  juice  is  much  favored.  When, 
however,  fats  are  ingested  in  emulsified  form,  as  in  milk,  for 
instance,  the  lipase  of  the  stomach,  according  to  Volhard,  may  cause 
a  marked  hydrolysis.  It  is  supposed  that  this  action  may  be  impor- 
tant in  the  digestion  of  the  milk-fat  by  infants.  Regarding  the 
proteids,  the  practical  point  of  interest  is  how  far  they  are  digested 
during  their  stay  in  the  stomach.  It  seems  probable  that  this 
question  does  not  admit  of  a  categorical  answer, — that  is,  the  extent 
of  the  digestion  varies  under  different  circumstances,  with  the 
consistency  of  the  food,  the  duration  of  its  stay  in  the  stomach, 
etc.  In  the  liquid  material  (chyxne)  forced  through  the  pylorus 
into  the  duodenum  one  may  find  unchanged  proteids,  primary 
or  secondary  proteoses,  peptones,  or  even  the  final  split  products 
of  proteolytic  action.  The  true  value  of  peptic  digestion  is  not 
so  much  in  its  own  action  as  in  its  combined  action  with  the 
trypsin  of  the  pancreatic  juice.  The  digestion  of  the  proteids  of 
the  food  is  effected  by  both  enzymes,  and  normally  we  are  justified 
in  considering  them  together  as  forming  a  peptic-tryptic  digestion. 
The  preliminary  digestion  in  the  stomach  is  important  as  regards  the 
proteid  foods  from  several  standpoints:  First,  in  the  matter  of 
mechanical  preparation  of  the  food  and  its  discharge  in  convenient 
quantities  easily  handled  by  the  duodenum.  Second,  in  the  more 
or  less  complete  hydrolysis  to  peptones  and  proteoses  whereby  the 
action  of  the  pancreatic  juice  must  be  greatly  accelerated.  Indeed, 
in  some  cases  this  preliminary  action  of  the  pepsin-hydrochloric  acid 
may  be  absolutely  necessary.  Native  proteids,  such  as  serum- 
albumin,  are  not  acted  upon  by  trypsin,  but  if  submitted  first  to 
pepsin-hydrochloric  acid  they  are  quickly  digested  by  this  enzyme. 
Third,  for  some  as  yet  unknown  reason  proteids  submitted  to  peptic 
digestion  are  split  by  the  trypsin  in  a  way  different  from  its  action 


698  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

on  proteids  without  this  preUminary  treatment.  These  and  other 
facts  seem  to  indicate  that  the  peptic  .digestion  is  not  so  much  an  end 
in  itself  as  a  preparation  for  subsequent  intestinal  digestion.  The 
stomach,  therefore,  may  be  removed  without  a  fatal  result.  Several 
cases  are  on  record  in  which  the  stomach  was  practically  removed  by 
surgical  operation,  the  esophagus  being  stitched  to  the  duodenum.* 
The  animals  did  well  and  seemed  perfectly  normal,  although  special 
precautions  were  necessary  in  the  matter  of  feeding. 

Absorption  in  the  Stomach.— In  the  stomach  it  is  possible  that 
there  may  be  absorption  of  the  following  substances:  Water;  salts; 
sugars  and  dextrins  that  may  have  been  formed  in  salivary  digestion 
from  starch,  or  that  may  have  been  eaten  as  such;  the  proteoses  and 
peptones  formed  in  the  peptic  digestion  of  proteids  or  albuminoids. 
In  addition,  absorption  of  soluble  or  liquid  substances — drugs, 
alcohol,  etc.,  that  have  been  swallowed — may  occur.  It  was  formerly 
assumed,  without  definite  proof,  that  the  stomach  absorbs  easily 
such  things  as  water,  salts,  sugars,  and  peptones.  Actual  experi- 
ments, however,  made,  under  conditions  as  nearly  normal  as  possible, 
show,  upon  the  whole,  that  absorption  does  not  take  place  readily 
in  the  stomach — certainly  nothing  like  so  easily  as  in  the  intestine. 
The  methods  made  use  of  in  these  experiments  have  varied,  but  the 
most  interesting  results  have  been  obtained  by  establishing  a  fistula 
of  the  duodenum  just  beyond  the  pylorus.f  After  establishing  this 
fistula  food  may  be  given  to  the  animal  and  the  contents  of  the 
stomach  as  they  pass  out  through  the  pyloric  opening  may  be 
caught  and  examined. 

Water. — Experiments  of  the  character  just  described  show  that 
water  when  taken  alone  is  practically  not  absorbed  at  all  in  the 
stomach.  Von  Mering's  experiments  especially  show  that  as  soon 
as  water  is  introduced  into  the  stomach  it  begins  to  pass  into  the 
intestine,  being  forced  out  in  a  series  of  spurts  by  the  contractions  of 
the  stomach.  Within  a  comparatively  short  time  practically  all 
the  water  can  be  recovered  in  this  way,  none  or  very  little  having 
been  absorbed  in  the  stomach.  For  example,  in  a  large  dog  with  a 
fistula  in  the  duodenum,  500  c.c.  of  water  were  given  through  the 
mouth.  Within  twenty-five  minutes  495  c.c.  had  been  forced  out  of 
the  stomach  through  the  duodenal  fistula.  This  result  is  not 
true  for  all  liquids;  alcohol,  for  example,  is  absorbed  readily. 

Salts. — ^The  absorption  of  salts  from  the  stomach  has  not  been 
investigated  thoroughly.  According  to  Brandl,  sodium  iodid  is 
absorbed  very  slowly  or  not  at  all  in  dilute  solutions.     Not  until  its 

*  Ludwig  and  Ogata,  "Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1883,  p.  89;  Carvallo 
and  Pachon,  "Archives  de  physiologie  norm,  et  path.,"   1894,  p.   106. 

t  Compare  von  Mering,  "  Verhandl.  des  Congresses  f.  innere  Med.," 
12,  471,  1893;  Edkins,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  445,  1892;  Brandl, 
"Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  29,  277,  1892. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE    STOMACH.  699 

solutions  reach  a  concentration  of  3  per  cent,  or  more  does  its  absorp- 
tion become  important.  This  result,  if  applicable  to  all  the  soluble 
inorganic  salts,  would  indicate  that  under  ordinary  conditions  they 
are  practically  not  absorbed-  in  the  stomach,  since  it  can  not  be  sup- 
posed that  they  are  normally  swallowed  in  solutions  so  concentrated 
as  3  per  cent.  In  the  same  direction  Meltzer  reports  that  solutions 
of  strychnin  are  absorbed  with  difficulty  from  the  stomach  as  com- 
pared with  the  intestines,  rectum,  or  even  the  pharynx.  It  is  said 
that  the  absorption  of  sodium  iodid  is  very  much  facilitated  by 
the  use  of  condiments,  such  as  mustard  and  pepper,  or  alcohol, 
which  act  either  by  causing  a  greater  congestion  of  the  mucous 
membrane  or  perhaps  by  directly  stimulating  the  epithelial  cells. 

Sugars  and  Peptones. — Experiments  by  the  newer  methods  leave 
no  doubt  that  sugars  and  peptones  can  be  absorbed  from  the  stomach. 
In  von  Mering's  work  different  forms  of  sugar — dextrose,  lactose, 
saccharose  (cane-sugar),  maltose,  and  also  dextrin — ^were  tested. 
They  were  all  absorbed,  but  it  was  found  that  absorption  was  more 
marked  the  more  concentrated  were  the  solutions.  Brandl  reports 
that  sugar  (dextrose)  and  peptone  are  not  sensibly  absorbed  until 
the  concentration  has  reached  5  per  cent.  With  these  substances 
also  the  ingestion  of  condiments  or  of  alcohol  increases  distinctly  the 
absorptive  processes  in  the  stomach.  Examination  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  a  stomach  in  full  digestion  shows  that  it  contains 
albumoses  (Glaessner), — a  fact  that  indicates  some  absorption. 
Direct  examination  of  the  stomach  contents*  indicates  that  the 
products  of  peptic  action  beyond  the  albumose  stage — namely, 
the  peptones,  peptids,  and  amido-bodies — are  absorbed.  On  the 
whole,  however,  it  would  seem  that  sugars  and  peptones  are  ab- 
sorbed with  some  difficulty  from  the  stomach. 

Fats. — ^As  we  have  seen,  fats  probably  undergo  no  digestive 
changes  in  the  stomach.  The  processes  of  saponification  and 
emulsification  are  supposed  to  be  preliminary  steps  to  absorption, 
and,  as  these  processes  take  place  after  the  fats  have  reached  the 
small  intestine,  there  seems  to  be  no  doubt  that  in  the  stomach  fats 
as  usually  ingested  escape  absorption. 

*  Zunz,  "Beitrage  zur  chem.  Physiol,  u.  Pathol,"  3.  339,  1903. 


CHAPTER  XLIII. 
DIGESTION  AND  ABSORPTION  IN  THE  INTESTINES. 

The  food  undergoes  its  most  profound  digestive  changes  in  the 
intestines,  and  here  also  the  products  of  digestion  are  mainly  ab- 
sorbed. The  intestinal  digestion  begins  in  the  duodenum,  and  is  largely 
completed  by  the  time  that  the  food  arrives  at  the  ileocecal  valve. 
It  is  effected  through  the  combined  action  of  three  secretions, — the 
pancreatic  juice,  the  secretion  from  the  intestinal  glands  (succus 
entericus),  and  the  bile.  These  secretions  are  mixed  with  the  food 
from  the  duodenum  on,  so  that  their  action  proceeds  simultaneously. 
For  purposes  of  description  it  is  necessary  to  speak  of  each  more  or 
less  separately. 

The  Pancreas. — The  pancreas  forms  a  long,  narrow  gland  reach- 
ing from  the  spleen  to  the  curvature  of  the  duodenum.  Its  main 
duct  in  man  (duct  of  Wirsung)  opens  into  the  duodenum,  together 
with  the  common  bile-duct,  about  8  to  10  cms.  beyond  the  pylorus. 
The  points  at  which  the  duct  or  ducts  of  the  pancreas  enter  the 
intestine  vary  somewhat  in  different  mammals.  In  the  dog  there  are 
two  ducts,  one  opening,  together  with  the  bile-duct,  about  3  to  5 
cms.  below  the  pylorus,  while  a  second  enters  the  duodenum  some 
3  to  5  cms.  farther  down.  In  rabbits  the  principal  pancreatic  duct 
opens  separately  into  the  duodenum  about  35  cms.  below  the  opening 
of  the  bile-duct.  The  pancreas  is  a  compound  tubular  gland  like 
the  salivary  glands.  The  cells  lining  the  secreting  portion  of  the 
tubules,  the  alveoli,  belong  to  the  serous  or  albuminous  type.  They 
are  characterized  by  the  fact  that  the  outer  portion  of  each  cell  is 
composed  of  a  clear,  non-granular  material  which  stains  readily, 
while  the  inner  portion,  the  portion  facing  the  lumen,  contains 
numerous  granules.  Histological  study  of  the  gland  after  active 
secretion,  as  compared  with  the  resting  state,  has  shown  very  con- 
clusively that  these  granules  represent  a  preparatory  material  for 
secretion.  As  the  secretion  proceeds  the  granules  are  dissolved 
and  discharged  into  the  hunen,  while  during  the  periods  of  rest  new 
granules  are  formed  by  metabolic  processes  at  the  expense,  appar- 
ently, of  the  non-granular  material  in  the  basal  portion  of  the  cell. 
(Heidenhain,  Kiihne,  Lea).  The  histological  picture  of  secretion 
is  in  general  the  same  in  this  as  in  the  salivary  and  gastric  glands, 
only  somewhat  more  distinctly  shown.  On  the  supposition  that  the 
granules  constitute  an  antecedent  material  from  which  the  enzymes. 

700 


DIGESTION    AND    ABSORPTION    IN    THE    INTESTINES.  701 

of  the  secretion  are  formed  they  are  frequently  designated  as  zymogen 
granules.  The  pancreas  contains  also  certain  peculiar  groups  of 
cells,  the  islands  (or  bodies)  of  Langerhans.  These  cells  have  noth- 
ing to  do  with  the  digestive  activity  of  the  pancreas.  Their  function 
is  referred  to  in  the  sections  on  internal  secretions  and  nutrition. 

Composition  of  the  Secretion. — The  pancreatic  secretion  is  an 
alkaline  liquid  which  in  some  animals  is  thin  and  limpid,  in  others 
thick  and  glairy.  The  secretion  in  man  belongs  to  the  former 
type;  it  is  described  as  water-clear  and  as  having  a  specific  gravity  of 
1.0075.  The  secretion  may  be  collected  by  opening  the  abdomen 
and  inserting  a  cannula  directly  into  the  duct,  or  a  permanent 
fistula  may  be  made  by  the  method  of  Pawlow.  This  method, 
applicable  to  the  dog,  consists  in  cutting  out  a  small  portion  of 
the  duodenum  where  the  pancreatic  duct  opens  and  then  suturing 
this  piece,  with  mucous  membrane  outward,  into  the  abdominal 
wall.  The  secretion  in  this  case  pours  out  upon  the  exterior  and  may 
be  collected.  The  animal,  however,  suffers  nutritive  disturbances 
from  the  loss  of  the  secretion,  and  requires  careful  dieting  and  atten- 
tion. The  secretion  of  the  human  pancreas  has  been  collected  in  a 
single  case*  in  which  for  a  few  days  it  was  necessary  to  drain  off  the 
pancreatic  juice  to  the  exterior.  From  the  observations  made  in  this 
case  it  appears  that  the  secretion  in  man  is  quite  abundant,  amount- 
ing to  500  to  800  c.c.  per  day.  In  the  cow  (Delezenne)  from  1^  to  2 
liters  may  be  collected  in  the  course  of  a  day.  The  secretion  possesses 
a  strong  alkaline  reaction,  due  to  the  presence  of  sodium  carbonate; 
it  contains  also  a  small  amount  of  coagulable  proteid  and  a  number 
of  organic  substances  in  traces.  The  important  constituents,  how- 
ever, are  three  enzymes  or  their  zymogens, — ^namely,  trypsin,  a 
proteolytic  enzyme;  pancreatic  diastase  (amylopsin),  an  amylolytic 
enzyme;  and  lipase  (steapsin),  a  lipolytic  enzyme.  Some  authors 
iState,  also,  that  the  secretion  contains  a  rennin  enzyme.  Glaessner 
reports  that  he  got  no  evidence  of  this  last  enzyme  in  human  pan- 
creatic juice. 

Secretory  Nerve  Fibers  to  the  Pancreas. — The  pancreas 
receives  its  nerve  supply  immediately  from  the  celiac  plexus,  but 
stimulation  of  the  nerves  going  to  this  plexus — namely,  the  splanch- 
nics  and  the  vagi — gave  negative  results  in  the  hands  of  most 
observers  so  far  as  the  pancreatic  secretion  was  concerned.  Pawlowf 
and  his  coworkers,  however,  have  been  more  successful.  Mechanical 
stimulation  or  electrical  stimulation  of  the  vagus  or  splanchnic  gave 
them  a  marked  flow  of  pancreatic  juice,  but  when  the  latter  form  of 

*  See  Glaessner,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie, "  40,  465,   1903. 

t  For  recent  work  upon-  the  pancreas  and  the  literature  see  Pawlow, 
"The  Work  of  the  Digestive  Glands,"  translation  by  Thompson,  1902;  Bay- 
liss  and  Starling,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  30,  61,  1904;  Walter.  "Archives 
des  sciences  biologiques, "  7,  1,  1899. 


702 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 


stimulus  was  used  it  was  necessary  to  cut  the  splanchnic  some  days 
previously  in  order  that  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  might  degenerate. 
It  seems  that  the  secretory  activity  of  the  gland  is  prevented  when 
there  is  an  interference  with  its  blood  supply.  In  this  respect  the 
pancreas  differs  from  the  salivary  glands.  The  secretion  obtained 
upon  stimulation  of  the  nerves  is  characterized,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
gastric  glands,  by  a  long  latent  period  of  some  minutes, — a  fact  that 
is  explained,  although  not  satisfactorily,  on  the  assumption  that  the 
nerve  trunks  stimulated  contain  both  secretory  and  inhibitory  fibers 
and  that  the  antagonistic  action  of  the  latter  delays  the  appearance 
of  the  secretion.     These  observations  are  usually  taken  as  proof  of  the 


1. 

Z. 

3. 

A. 

S. 

6, 

7. 

1 

Jii 

/ 

\ 

MO 

/ 

/ 
/ 

"--^ 

,._ 

I 

/ 
/ 

\ 

\ 

\,  . 

^\ 

^ 

33 

j 

'/ 

\ 
\ 
•1 

- '  \ 

"-- 

-..^ 

/' 

\ 

1 

\ 

~-~ 

K^ 

U 

/// 

\ 
\ 

\ 

\ 

IG 

/ 

/ 

\ 

\ 

/ 

f 

/ 

'\ 

^_^ 

S 

"it 

/ 

/ 

\\ 

v^ 

11 

/ 

\\ 

"- 

'-' 

" 

, 

0 

/ 

/ 

^ 

\ 

^^ 

■~~^ 

■^ 

.311  Ilk. 


.(Sjcead. 


yitoX. 


Fig.  263. — Four  curves  of  the  secretion  of  the  pancreatic  juice,  the  three  in  black, 
from  Walter,  showing  the  secretion  in  dogs  on  different  diets:  (1)  on  600  c.c.  of  milk;  (2) 
on  250  grns.  bread;  (3)  on  100  gms.  of  meat.  The  curve  in  red,  from  Glaessner,  shows 
the  secretion  in  man  on  a  mixed  diet,  soup,  meat,  and  bread.  The  figures,  1,  2,  3  etc., 
along  the  abscissa  indicate  hours  after  the  beginning  of  the  tneal.  The  figures  along  the 
ordinates  indicate  the  quantity  of  the  secretion  in  cubic  centimeters. 


existence  of  secretory  nerve  fibers  to  the  pancreas;  but,  as  will  be 
explained  below,  it  is  not  yet  clear  how  far  these  fibers  are  con- 
cerned in  arousing  the  flow  of  secretion  during  digestion. 

The  Curve  of  Secretion. — The  rate  of  flow  of  the  pancreatic 
juice  with  reference  to  the  period  of  digestion  has  been  determined 
by  a  number  of  observers.  In  the  careful  experiments  reported  by 
Walter  it  is  shown  that  the  quantity  of  secretion  is  dependent  to  a 
considerable  extent  upon  the  character  of  the  food.  Thus,  the 
flow  is  more  abundant  and  reaches  its  maximum  sooner  after  a 
meal  of  bread  alone  than  after  a  meal  of  meat  alone.  It  seems 
possible  that  the  latter  point,  the  time  at  which  the  maximum  flow 


DIGESTION    AND    ABSORPTION   IN   THE    INTESTINES.  703 

is  readied,  may  depend  upon  the  difference  in  rate  at  which  these 
foods  are  ejected  from  the  stomach.  Cannon  (p.  642)  has  shown  that 
the  carbohydrate  foods  leave  the  stomach  sooner  than  the  proteids  or 
fats.  It  is  stated,  however,  that  the  composition  of  the  secretion 
varies  also  with  the  character  of  the  food,  and  indeed  shows  an 
adaptation  to  the  character  of  the  food.  The  secretion  caused  by 
proteid  food  is  especially  rich  in  trypsin,  that  caused  by  fatty  food 
in  lipase,  etc.  The  mechanism  by  which  this  adaptation  is  secured 
is  not  understood.  Glaessner*  has  measured  the  rate  of  flow  in 
man,  and  his  curve  for  a  mixed  diet  is  represented  also  (in 
red)  in  Fig.  263.  These  curves  indicate  in  general  that  the  secretion 
of  pancreatic  juice  begins  very  soon  after  food  enters  the  stomach, 
and  increases  rapidly  to  a  maximum,  which  is  reached  somewhere 
between  the  second  and  fourth  hour.  According  to  Glaessner's 
case,  there  is  a  continuous  small  secretion  of  the  juice  during  fast- 
ing. The  observations  on  dogs,  on  the  contrary,  indicate  an 
entire  cessation  of  the  flow  when  the  stomach  is  empty. 

Boldirefff  has  reported  a  very  curious  activity  of  the  digestive  organs 
during  fasting.  It  seems  that  (in  dogs)  when  the  stomach  or  even  the  small 
intestine  is  empty  tlie  entire  gastro-intestinal  canal  exhibits  periodical  out- 
breaks of  activity,  which  occur  at  intervals  of  two  hours  and  last  for  twenty 
to  thirty  minutes.  During  this  stage  the  stomach  and  intestines  exhibit 
movements,  and  there  is  an  abundant  secretion  of  pancreatic  juice,  bile,  and 
intestinal  juice,  which  is  subsequently  absorbed.  Acids  introduced  into 
the  .stomach  or  intestines  prevent  the  occurrence  of  these  periods,  and  they 
are  absent,  therefore,  as  long  as  the  stomach  contains  gastric  juice.  The 
author's  suggestion  that  the  secretions  thus  formed  furnish  active  enzymes 
which  are  absorbed  into  the  blood  and  utihzed  by  the  tissues  in  destroying 
the  newly  absorbed  food  does  not  commend  itself  as  probable. 

Normal  Mechanism  of  the  Pancreatic  Secretion — Secretin. 

— Much  light  was  thrown  upon  the  mechanism  of  pancreatic  secretion 
by  the  discovery  (Dolinsky,  1895)  that  acids  brought  into  contact 
with  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  duodenum  set  up  promptly  a 
secretion  of  pancreatic  juice.  Since  this  discovery  it  has  been  be- 
lieved that  the  acid  gastric  juice  is  the  means  that  serves  to  inaugurate 
the  flow  from  the  pancreas.  As  soon  as  any  of  the  acid  contents  of 
the  stomach  pass  through  the  pylorus  this  action  begins.  Just  as  the 
chewing  and  swallowing  of  the  food  initiate  the  gastric  secretion,  so 
the  acid  of  the  latter  starts  the  pancreatic  secretion.  Inasmuch  as 
the  pancreatic  gland  possesses  secretory  fibers  it  was  assumed  at 
first  that  the  acid  acts  reflexly  through  these  fibers, — that  is,  the  acid 
in  the  duodenum  acting  upon  sensory  endings  causes  a  reflex  stimu- 
lation of  the  efferent  secretory'  fibers.  It  has  been  stated,  however, 
that  the  same  effect  takes  place  after  section  of  the  vagus  and 
splanchnic  nerves  (Popielski),and  Bayliss  and  StarlingJ  have  called 

*  Glaessner,   loc.cit. 

t  Boldireff,   "Archives  des  sciences  biologiques, "    11,   1,    1905. 

t  Bayliss  and  Starling,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  28,  325,  1902. 


704  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

attention  to  another  more  probable  explanation.  These  authors  find 
that  if  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  duodenum  (or  jejunum)  is 
scraped  off  and  treated  with  acid  (0.4  per  cent.  HCl)  the  extract 
thus  made  when  injected  into  the  blood  sets  up  an  active  secretion  of 
pancreatic  juice.  They  have  shown  that  this  effect  is  due  to  a  special 
substance,  secretin,  which  is  formed  by  the  action  of  the  acid  upon 
some  substance  (prosecretin)  present  in  the  mucous  membrane. 
Secretin  is  not  an  enzyme,  since  its  activity  is  not  destroyed  by  boil- 
ing or  by  the  action  of  alcohol.  The  experimental  evidence  at 
present  favors  the  view  that  the  normal  sequence  of  events  is  as 
follows :  The  acid  of  the  gastric  juice  upon  reaching  the  duodenum 
produces  secretin;  this  in  turn  is  absorbed  by  the  blood,  carried  to 
the  pancreas,  and  stimulates  this  organ  to  activity.  Whether  the 
acid  in  addition  causes  reflex  stimulation  of  the  secretory  nerves  is 
not  certain,  although  this  statement  is  made.  It  is  not  clear,  also,  by 
what  means  the  secretion  of  pancreatic  juice  is  maintained  through 
the  six  or  seven  hours  or  more  of  gastro-intestinal  digestion.  The 
increased  flow  during  the  first  hours  is  connected  with  the  increas- 
ing discharge  of  food  from  stomach  to  intestine,  but  whether  the 
effect  upon  the  pancreas  is  traceable  entirely  to  a  continual  forma- 
tion of  secretin,  or  partly  to  secretin  and  partly  to  nerve  stimulation, 
are  matters  not  yet  settled. 

Enterokinase. — It  was  discovered  in  Pawlow's  laboratory 
(Chepowalnikow)  that  the  pancreatic  juice  obtained  from  a  fistula 
may  have  little  or  no  digestive  action  on  proteids,  but  if  brought  into 
contact  with  the  duodenal  membrane  or  an  extract  of  this  membrane 
it  shows  at  once  powerful  proteolytic  properties.  This  discovery  has 
been  confirmed  repeatedly.  Evidently  the  proteolytic  enzyme  of  the 
juice  is  secreted  in  a  zymogen  or  pro-enzyme  form  (typsinogen),  which 
is  activated  or  converted  to  trypsin  by  something  contained  in  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  small  intestine  (duodenum,  jejunum). 
This  something  Pawlow  supposes  is  an  enzyme,  and  since  its  action  is 
on  another  enzyme,  "a  ferment  of  ferments,"  he  designated  it  as  a 
kinase  or  enterokinase.  The  action  of  the  enterokinase  seems  to  be 
quite  specific.  According  to  Bayliss  and  Starling,  tripsinogen  is  a 
stable  body  which  cannot  be  changed  to  trypsin  otherwise  than  by 
the  action  of  the  kinase;  but  a  very  small  amount  of  the  latter 
suffices  to  convert  a  large  quantity  of  trypsinogen.  The  active 
trypsin  itself,  on  the  other  hand,  is  very  easily  destroyed,  especially 
in  alkaline  solutions.  The  physiological  value  of  this  very  interesting 
relation  is  not  clear,  but  it  seems  possible  that  it  may  serve  to  protect 
the  living  tissues  from  the  powerful  digestive  action  of  the  trypsin. 
The  other  enzymes  of  the  pancreatic  juice,  the  diastase  and  the  lipase^ 
are  secreted  apparently  in  active  form. 


DIGESTION  AND  ABSORPTION  IN  THE  INTESTINES.  705 

The  Digestive  Action  of  Pancreatic  Juice. — The  digestive 
action  of  the  secretion  depends  upon  the  three  enzymes  trypsin, 
diastase  (amylopsin),  and  hpase.  The  specific  effects  of  each 
may  be  considered  separately. 

Action  of  Trypsin. — The  activated  trypsinogen  causes  hydrolytic 
cleavage  of  the  proteid  molecule  in  a  manner  analogous  to  that 
described  for  pepsin.     Its  action  differs  from  that  of  pepsin,  however, 
in  several  respects.     It  attacks  the  proteid  in  neutral  as  well  as  in 
slightly  acid  or  markedly  alkaline  solutions.     Its  effect  upon  the 
proteid  is  more  rapid  and  powerful  than  that  of  pepsin  and  the 
proteid  molecule  is  broken  up  more   completely.     As  was  said  in 
describing   the    action  of   pepsin,  it  and   the  trypsin    really    act 
together, — the  change  begim  by  the  pepsin  is  completed  by  the  tryp- 
sin.    The  preUminary  action  of  the  pepsin  not  only  hastens  that  of 
the  trypsin,  but  to  some  extent  alters  it;  a  proteid  submitted  first 
to  pepsin  and  then  to  trypsin  is  more  completely  broken  up  than  if 
the  trypsin  acted  alone.     The  steps  in  the  hydrolysis  of  the  proteid 
molecule  by  trypsin  have  been  the  subject  of  a  very  great  amount  of 
study,  and  views  as  to  the  details  have  changed  somewhat  rapidly 
of  recent  years.     Kiihne  supposed  that  the  proteid  molecule  contains 
two  groups,  the  hemi  and  the  anti.    Under  the  influence  of  the  trypsin 
these  are,  on  his  theory,  converted  into  corresponding  proteoses, 
piimary  and  secondary,  and  then  into  peptones, — hemipeptone  and 
antipeptone.     As  distinguished  from  the    pepsin,  the  trypsin  hy- 
drolyzes  the  hemipeptone  still  further,  splitting  it  up  into  a  number 
of  much  simpler  crystalline  bodies,  such  as  leucin,  tyrosin,  etc. 
Antipeptone,  on  the  contrary,  resists  further  hydrolysis,  and  among 
the  end-products  of  a  prolonged  pancreatic  digestion  some  peptone 
is  always  found.     This  view  has  not  been  supported  by  recent  work. 
After  a  prolonged  pancreatic  digestion  no  peptone  or  peptone-like 
body  can  be  found;  in  fact,  no  substance  which  gives  a  biuret  reac- 
tion.    Under  such  conditions  the  proteid  molecule  is  broken  up  very 
completely  into  a  surprising  number  of   smaller  molecules,  many 
of  which  have  been  identified,  while  some  have  as  yet  escaped  de- 
tection so  far  as  their  chemical  structure  is  concerned.     The  actual 
products  formed  depend  on  the  length  of  time  the  trj-psin  is  allowed 
to  act  and  the  conditions,  favorable  or  unfavorable,  under  which  it 
acts.     The  end-products  usually  obtained  most  easily  are  tyrosin, 
leucin,  aspartic  acid,  glutaminic  acid,  tryptophan,  lysin,  arginin, 
histidin.     The  first  two  of  these  substances  have  been  knowTi  for  a 
long  time,  and  may  be  obtained  easily  in  crj^stalline  form  from 
pancreatic  digestions.     If  the  trypsin  is  allowed  to  exert  its  complete 
action  upon  the  proteid  the  end-products  are  closely  similar  to  those 
obtained  by  boihng  proteid  with  acids.      The  hj-drolysis   caused 
bv  the  acids  and  by  the  trypsin  seems  to  be  nearly  identical.     The 
45 


706  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

numerous  products  obtained  by  this  complete  hydrolysis  consist 
chiefly  of  amino-acids, — that  is,  organic  acids  containing  one  or  more 
amido-groups  (NHj)  in  direct  union  with  carbon.  Some  of  these 
bodies  are  monamino-acids, — that  is,  contain  one  NHj  group, — such 
as  leucin,  tyrosin,  glycocoll, — and  include  substances  belonging  to 
the  fatty  acid  series  (aliphatic  series),  the  benzene  or  carbocyclic 
series,  and  the  heterocyclic  series,  such  as  the  pyrrol  and  the  indol 
group.  Others  are  diamino-acids,  containing  two  NH2  groups. 
These  latter  include  lysin,  histidin,  and  arginin,  which,  on  account 
of  their  basic  properties,  are  frequently  described  as  nitrogenous 
bases,  and  sometimes  as  the  hexon  bases,  since  they  contain  six 
carbon  atoms. 

The  chemical  formulas  for  the  best  known  of  these  bodies  are  as  follows, 
for  their  properties  and  chemical  relationships  reference  must  be  made  to 
the  text-books   on   organic    chemistry: 

I.    MONAMINO-BODIES. 
FATTY  ACID  SERIES. 

Glycocoll  or  amido-acetic  acid:  CH2NH2COOH.  This  product  is  ob- 
tained in  especially  large  quantities  by  hydrolysis  of  gelatin.  Accord- 
ing to  Abderhalden,*  it  is  split  off  with  difficulty  by  trypsin. 

Alanin  or  ct-amidopropionic  acid:    CH3CHNH2COOH. 

Amidovalerianic  acid:    ^g^XcHCHNHaCOOH. 

Leucin  or  amidocaproic  acid:    ^g^^CHCHaCHNHjCOOH.     As  stated 

above,  this  compound  was  one  of  the  first  end-products  of  proteid 
hydrolysis  that  was  recognized.  It  may  be  obtained  readily  in 
crystalline  form. 

CHNH2COOH 
Aspartic  or  amidosuccinic  acid :      | 

CH3COOH. 

r.1  +       •   •         J      nw  /CHNH,COOH 
Glutammic  acid:    CHj^pjjT  qoOH 

BENZENE    OR   AROMATIC    SERIES. 

Tyrosin  (para-oxyphenylamidopropionic  acid) :  C8H4OH  .  CHj  .  CHNHj- 
COOH.  This  substance  was  also  among  the  first  recognized  prod- 
ucts of  proteid  hydrolysis  It  occurs  early  in  the  process  of  pan- 
creatic digestion,  and  is  easily  obtained  in  crystalline  form  from 
the  digested  mixture.  It  is  especially  interesting  because  of  the 
presence  of  a  benzene  nucleus,  thus  giving  proof  that  the  benzene 
grouping  occurs  normally  in  the  proteid  molecule. 

Phenylalanin  (phenylamidopropionic  acid) :  CgHsCHzCHNHjCOOH.  This 
benzene  derivative  is,  according  to  Abderhalden,  split  off  from  the 
proteid  with  difficulty  by  the  action  of  trypsin,  although  readily 
produced  by  acid  hydrolysis. 

PYRROL    AND    INDOL    SERIES. 
CH2 CH2 

a-Pyrrolidin  carbonic  acid:    CHj    CHCOOH.     This  substance,  discovered 

NH 

*  Abderhalden,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  44,  17,  1905.  Consult 
for  general  description  of  the  digestion  of  proteids. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE   INTESTINES.  707 

first  by  Fischer  among  the  products  of  acid  hydrolysis  of  proteids, 
has  since  been  shown  to  occur  in  tryptic  digestion.  Like  the  gly- 
cocoll  and  phenylalanin,  it  is  produced  with  difficulty  by  trypsin 
acting  alone,  but  more  readily  if  the  tryptic  action  follows  upon 
previous  peptic  digestion    as  is  the  case  in  the  body. 

C.CH3 

/\ 
Tryptophan  (skatolamido-acetic  acid) :    CgH^    C  .  CH(NH2)C00H.    This 

\/ 
NH 
substance  has  long  been  recognized  among  the  products  of  tryptic 
digestion  by  the  reddish-violet  color  (Tieclemann  and  Gmelin,  1826) 
observed  upon  the  addition  of  chlorin  or  bromin.  Its  chemical 
structure  was  determined  by  Hopkins  and  Cole  (1901).  According 
to  EUinger,*  tryptophan  is  an  indol  compound  of  the  formula 
C  .  CHCOOHCH2NH2.     When  fed  to  dogs  it  causes  the  appear- 

CeH/)CH 

NH 
ance  of  kynurenic  acid  (C10H7NO3)  in  the  urine. 

It  is  interesting  as  showing  the  existence  of  an  indol  grouping 
in  the  proteid  molecule. 

II.  The  Diamino-bodies   (Hexon  Bases). 

Lysin    (a-^-diamidocaproic   acid) :    CeHi^NjOj  or  CH2NH2(CH2)3CHNH2- 

COOH. 
Arginin  (guanidin  a-amidovalerianic  acid)  :  C6H14N4O2  or  NHCNH2NH- 

CH2(CH2)2CHNH2COOH. 
Histidin:    CeHgNaOj. 
These  three  substances  occur  among  the  products  of  pancreatic  digestion. 

They  may  be  separated  from  the  monamino-bodies  by  the  fact  that 

they  are    precipitated   in   acid   solutions    by  phosphotungstic   acid 

while  the  monamino-acids  are  not. 

The  Significance  of  Tryptic  Digestion. — It  was  formerly 
supposed  that  the  object  of  peptic  and  tryptic  digestion  is  to 
convert  the  insoluble  and  non-dialyzable  proteids  into  the  simpler, 
more  soluble,  and  more  diffusible  peptones  and  proteoses.  In  this 
way  absorption  of  proteid  material  was  explained.  This  view, 
however,  is  not  sufficient.  On  the  one  hand,  it  has  not  been  possible 
to  prove  conclusively  that  peptones  or  proteoses  are  found  in  the 
blood;  on  the  other  hand,  a  better  knowledge  of  the  processes  of 
tryptic  or  of  peptic-tryptic  digestion  has  shown  that  the  hydrolysis 
does  not  stop  at  the  peptone  stage ;  the  proteid  molecule  is  split  into 
a  number  of  simpler,  crystalline  substances,  the  various  amino- 
bodies.  At  present  different  views  exist  as  to  the  extent  of  this  latter 
process.  Some  believe  that  the  proteid  molecule  is  entirely  broken 
down  into  its  so-called  end-products,  and  that  in  order  to  serve  its 
nutritive  function  these  products  or  some  of  them  must  be  synthet- 
ically combined  again  during  or  after  absorption.  This  view  is 
supported,  moreover,  by  the  discovery  of  the  existence  of  the  enzyme 
erepsin  (see  below)  in  the  intestinal  mucosa.  The  action  of  this  lat- 
ter enzyme  is  exerted  especially  upon  the  albumoses  and  peptones, 
*  EUinger,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  43,  325,  1904. 


708  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

breaking  them  down  into  the  amido-acids,  so  that  apparently  what- 
ever peptone  or  albumose  may  escape  the  final  action  of  the  trypsin 
before  absorption  is  likely  to  be  acted  upon  by  the  erepsin  before 
reaching  the  blood.*  Another  interesting  view  is  that  suggested 
by  Abderhalden.f  According  to  this  author,  the  hydrolysis  of  the 
proteid  by  pepsin  and  trypsin  (and  perhaps  by  erepsin)  is  not 
complete.  Many  amido-bodies,  such  as  tyrosin,  leucin,  arginin,  etc., 
are  split  off  from  the  proteid  molecule,  but  there  remains  behind  what 
one  may  call  a  nucleus  of  the  original  molecule,  which  serves  as  the 
starting  point  for  a  synthesis.  This  nucleus  is  a  substance  or  a 
number  of  substances  intermediate  between  the  peptone  and  the 
simpler  end-products,  and  is  spoken  of  as  a  peptid  or  peptoid  (see 
appendix).  Since  its  structure  is  unknown  and  it  is  probably  not 
a  simple  body,  it  is  designated  as  a  poly  peptid.  Abderhalden  has 
shown  that  in  tryptic  digestion  such  substances  are  formed.  That 
is,  substances  which  are  not  peptones,  since  they  no  longer  give  the 
biuret  reaction,  but  which  have  a  certain  complexity  of  structure, 
since  upon  hydrolysis  with  acids  they  split  into  a  number  of  mona- 
mido-  and  diamido-bodies.  A  schema  of  peptic-try ptic  digestion 
from  this  standpoint  may  be  given  as  follows : 

Native  proteid. 

Peptone. 


Polypeptid.      Tyrosin,  leucin,  glutaminic  acid,  aspartic  acid, 
a-pyrrolidin  carbonic  acid,  tryptophan,  etc. 
Arginin,  lysin,  histidin. 

From  either  of  the  points  of  view  presented  it  may  be  suggested  that 
the  value  of  this  more  or  less  complete  splitting  of  the  proteid  of  the 
food  lies  in  the  possibility  that  thereby  the  body  is  able  to  construct 
its  own  peculiar  type  of  proteid.  Many  different  kinds  of  proteids 
are  taken  as  food  and  many  of  them  if  introduced  directly  into  the 
blood  act  as  foreign  material  incapable  of  nourishing  the  tissues. 
If  these  proteids  are  broken  down  more  or  less  completely  during 
digestion  the  tissue  cells  may  reconstruct  from  the  pieces  a  form  of 
proteid  adaptable  to  their  needs.  At  present  our  knowledge  of  what 
takes  place  during  the  absorption  of  proteid  is  very  incomplete,  and 
a  satisfactory  theory  of  proteid  nutrition  is  scarcely  possible  until 
this  portion  of  the  subject  is  cleared  up. 

Action  of  the  Diastatic  Enzyme  (Amylopsin)  of  the  Pan- 
creatic Secretion. — This  enzyme  is  found  in  the  secretion  of  the 

*  Vernon  ("Journal  of  Physiology, "  30,  330,  1904)  believes  that  the 
pancreatic  secretion  contains  two  proteolytic  enzymes, — ^trypsin  proper, 
which  converts  the  proteids  to  peptones,  and  pancreatic  erepsin,  which  breaks 
up  the  peptones  into  the  simpler  end-products,  the  amido-bodies. 

t  Abderhalden,  loc.  cit. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE   INTESTINES.  709 

pancreas  or  it  may  be  extracted  from  the  gland.  Its  action  upon 
starchy  foods  is  closely  similar  to  or  identical  with  that  of  ptyalin. 
It  causes  an  hydrolysis  of  the  starch  with  the  production  finally  of 
maltose  and  achroodextrin.  Before  absorption  these  substances  are 
further  acted  upon  by  the  maltase  of  the  intestinal  secretion  and 
converted  to  dextrose.  The  starchy  food  that  escapes  digestion  in 
the  mouth  and  stomach  becomes  mixed  with  this  enzyme  in  the 
duodenum,  and  from  that  time  until  it  reaches  the  end  of  the  large 
intestine  conditions  are  favorable  for  its  conversion  to  maltose  and 
dextrin.  Most  of  this  digestion  is  probably  completed,  under  normal 
conditions,  before  the  contents  of  the  intestinal  canal  reach  the  ileo- 
cecal valve. 

Action  of  the  Lipolytic  Enzyme  (Lipase,  Steapsin). — ^The 
importance  of  the  pancreatic  secretion  in  the  digestion  of  fats  was 
first  clearly  stated  by  Bernard  (1849).  We  know  now  that  this  secre- 
tion contains  an  active  enzyme  capable  of  hydrolyzing  or  saponifying 
the  neutral  fats.  These  latter  bodies  are  chemically  esters  of  the 
trihydric  alcohol  glycerin.  When  hydrolyzed  they  break  up  into 
glycerin  and  the  constituent  fatty  acid.  The  action  of  lipase  may 
be  represented,  therefore,  by  the  following  reaction,  in  the  case  of 
palmitin : 

C3H,(C,5H3,COO)3  +  3H,0  =  C3H,(OH)3  +  SCC^Hg^COOH) 

Palmitin.  Glycerin.  Palmitic  acid. 

When  lipase  from  any  source  is  added  to  neutral  oils  its  splitting 
action  is  readily  recognized  by  the  development  of  an  acid  reaction 
due  to  the  formation  of  the  fatty  acid.  If  a  bit  of  fresh  pancreas 
is  added  to  butter,  for  example,  and  the  mixture  is  kept  at  the  body 
temperature  the  hydrolysis  of  the  fats  is  soon  made  evident  by  the 
rancid  odor  due  to  the  butyric  acid  produced.  When  pancreatic 
juice  is  mixed  with  oils  or  liquid  fats  two  phenomena  may  be 
noticed:  first,  the  splitting  of  the  fat  already  referred  to,  and,  second, 
the  emulsification  of  the  fat.  The  latter  process  is  very  striking. 
An  oil  is  emulsified  when  it  is  broken  up  into  minute  globules  that  do 
not  coalesce.  Artificial  emulsions  may  be  made  by  vigorous  and 
prolonged  shaking  of  the  oil  in  a  viscous  solution  of  soap,  mucilage, 
etc.  Milk  may  be  regarded  as  a  natural  emulsion  that  separates 
slowly  on  standing,  as  the  fat  rises  to  the  top  to  form  the  cream. 
¥/hen  a  little  pancreatic  juice  is  added  to  oil  at  the  body  temperature 
the  mixture,  after  standing  for  some  time,  will  emulsify  readily  with 
very  little  shaking  or  even  spontaneously.  It  is  now  known*  that 
the  emulsification  is  due  to  the  formation  of  soaps.  The  lipase  splits 
some  of  the  fats,  and  the  fatty  acid  liberated  combines  with  the 
alkaline  salts  present  to  form  soaps.     The  emulsification  produced 

*  See  Ratchford,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  12,  27,  1891. 


710  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

under  these  conditions  is  very  fine  and  quite  permanent,  and  it  was 
formerly  believed  that  the  formation  of  this  emulsion  is  the  main 
function  of  the  pancreatic  juice  so  far  as  fats  are  concerned.  It  was 
thought  that  in  the  form  of  fine  droplets  the  fat  may  be  taken  up 
directly  by  the  epithelial  cells  of  the  villi,  and  this  view  was  supported 
by  the  histological  fact  that  during  the  digestion  of  fats  the  epithelial 
cells  may  be  shown  to  contain  fine  oil  drops  in  their  interior.  The 
tendency  of  recent  work,  however,  has  been  to  indicate  that  the  fats 
are  completely  split  into  fatty  acids  and  glycerin  before  absorption, 
and  that  the  emulsification  may  be  regarded,  from  a  physiological 
standpoint,  as  a  mechanical  preparation  for  the  action  of  the  lipase 
rather  than  as  a  direct  preparation  for  the  act  of  absorption.  The 
two  products  of  the  action  of  the  lipase,  the  glycerin  and  the  fatty 
acid,  are  absorbed  by  the  epithelium  and  again  combined  to  form 
neutral  fat.  In  connection  with  this  fact  of  a  synthesis  of  the  split 
products  to  form  neutral  fat,  the  discovery  by  Kastle  and  Loeven- 
hart  (see  p.  660)  that  the  action  of  lipase  is  reversible  assumes  much 
significance.  It  seems  quite  possible  that  the  same  enzyme  may 
cause  both  the  splitting  of  the  fat  and  the  synthesis  of  the  split 
products,  not  only  in  the  intestine  during  absorption,  but  in  the 
various  tissues  during  the  metabolism  or  the  storage  of  fat.  Lipase 
is  found  in  the  blood  and  in  many  tissues, — ^muscle,  hver,  mammary 
gland,*  etc., — and  during  its  nutritive  history  in  the  body  the  fat  may 
be  split  and  synthesized  a  number  of  times.  In  this  connection  it  is 
interesting  to  note  that  the  process  of  splitting  does  not  involve  much 
work.  Very  little  heat  is  liberated  in  the  process,  and  a  corre- 
spondingly small  amount  of  energy  is  needed  for  the  synthesis. f 

The  lipase  as  formed  in  the  pancreas  is  easily  destroyed,  especially 
by  acids.  For  this  reason  probably  it  is  not  found  usually  in  simple 
extracts  of  the  gland  made  by  laboratory  methods.  It  should  be 
added,  also,  that  the  action  of  this  enzyme  is  aided  very  materially 
by  the  presence  of  bile.  This  latter  secretion  contains  no  lipase 
itself,  but  mixtures  of  bile  and  pancreatic  juice  split  the  neutral 
fats  much  more  rapidly  than  the  pancreatic  juice  alone. 

The  Intestinal  Secretion  (Succus  Entericus). — ^The  small 
intestine  is  Uned  with  tubular  glands,  the  crypts  of  Lieberkiihn, 
which  in  parts  of  the  intestine  at  least  give  rise  to  a  liquid  secretion, 
the  so-called  intestinal  juice.  To  obtain  this  secretion  recourse  has 
been  had  to  the  operation  known  as  the  Thiry-Vella  fistula.  In  this 
operation  a  given  portion  of  the  intestine  is  separated  from  the 
remainder  without  injuring  its  blood-vessels  or  nerves  and  the  two 
ends  are  sutured  into  the  abdominal  wall.  In  the  loop  thus  isolated 
the  secretions  may  be  collected  and  experiments  may  be  made  upon 

*  See  Loevenhart,  "  Amer.  Journal  of  Physiology,"  6,  331,  1902. 

t  Consult  Herzog,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  37,  383,  1903. 


DIGESTION    AND    ABSORPTION    IN    THE    INTESTINES.  711 

the  digestion  and  absorption  of  various  substances.  The  secretion 
from  these  loops  is  usually  said  to  be  small  in  quantity,  especially  in 
the  jejunum.  Pregl  estimates  that  as  much  as  three  liters  may  be 
formed  in  the  whole  of  the  small  intestine  in  the  course  of  a  day,  but 
this  estimate  does  not  rest  upon  very  satisfactory  data.  The  liquid 
is  distinctly  alkaline,  owing  to  the  presence  of  sodium  carbonate. 
Experiments  have  shown  that  this  liquid  has  little  or  no  digestive 
action  except  upon  the  starches,  and  it  may  perhaps  be  doubted 
whether  it  is  a  true  secretion.  Extracts  of  the  walls  of  the  small 
intestine  or  the  juice  squeezed  from  these  walls  have  been  found  to 
contain  four  or  five  different  enzymes  and  to  exert  a  most  important 
influence  upon  intestinal  digestion.  Whether  these  enzymes  are 
actually  secreted  into  the  lumen  of  the  intestine  is  not  satisfactorily- 
shown,  but  since  they  are  contained  in  the  intestinal  wall  we  must 
regard  them  as  secretory  products  and  consider  them  as  the  impor- 
tant and  characteristic  feature  of  the  intestinal  secretion.  These 
enzymes  and  their  actions  are  as  follows : 

1.  Enterokinase  (see  p.  704),  an  enzyme  which  in  some  way  activates  the 

proteolytic  enzyme  of  the  pancreatic  juice,  by  converting  the  tryp- 
sinogen  to  trypsin. 

2.  Erepsin.     This  enzyme,  discovered  by  Cohnheim,*  acts  especially  upon 

the  deutero-albumoses  and  peptones,  causing  further  hydrolysis. 
Whether  its  splitting  action  upon  the  peptones  is  complete  is  not 
as  yet  known,  but,  as  was  said  above  (p.  705),  tlie  natural  suggestion 
regarding  this  enzyme  is  that  it  supplements  the  work  begun  by 
the  trypsin. 

3.  Inverting  enzymes    capable  of    converting  the  disaccharids  into   the 

monosaccharids.  These  enzymes  are  three  in  number:  maltase, 
which  acts  upon  maltose  (and  dextrin);  invertase  or  invertin, 
which  acts  upon  cane-sugar;  and  lactase,  which  acts  upon  lactose. 
The  maltase  acts  upon  the  products  formed  in  the  digestion  of 
starches,  the  maltose  and  dextrin,  converting  them  to  dextrose 
according  to  the  general   formula: 

Maltose.  Dextrose.  Dextrose. 

In  the  same  way  invertase  converts  cane-sugar  to  dextrose  and  levu- 
lose,  and  lactase  changes  milk-sugar  to  dextrose  and  galactose.  This 
inverting  action  is  necessary  to  prepare  the  carbohydrate  food  for 
nutritive  purposes.  Double  svigars  can  not  be  used  by  the  tissues 
and  would  escape  in  the  urine,  but  in  the  form  of  dextrose  or 
dextrose  and  levulose  they  are  readily  u.sed  by  the  tissues  in  their 
normal  nietabolic  processes. 

4.  Lastly,  the  substance   secretin,   which,  as  explained  above,  may  play 

such  an  important  role  in  the  control  of  the  secretion  of  the  pan- 
creas, is  formed  in  the  walls  of  the  small  inte.stine.  It  is  not  an 
enzyme,  but  a  more  stable  and  definite  chemical  substance  which 
is  secreted  or  formed  in  the  intestinal  mucosa  in  a  preliminary  form, 
prosecretin,  and  under  the  influence  of  acids  is  changed  to  secretin. 
In  this  latter  form  it  is  absorbed,  carried  to  the  pancreas,  and 
cau.ses  a  flow  of  pancreatic  secretion. 

*  Cohnheim,  "  Zeitschrift  f .  physiol.  Chemie,"  33,  451, 1901 ;  also  35,  134 
et  seq. 


712  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

Absorption  in  the  Small  Intestine. — ^Absorption  takes  place 
very  readily  in  the  small  intestine.  The  general  correctness  of  this 
statement  may  be  shown  by  the  use  of  isolated  loops  of  the  intestine. 
Salt  solutions  of  varying  strengths  or  even  blood-serum  nearly 
identical  in  composition  with  the  animals'  own  blood  may  be  ab- 
sorbed completely  from  these  loops.  Examination  of  the  contents 
of  the  intestine  in  the  duodenum  and  at  the  ileocecal  valve  shows 
that  the  products  formed  in  digestion  have  largely  disappeared  in 
traversing  tliis  distance.  All  the  information  that  we  possess  in- 
dicates, in  fact,  that  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  small  intestine 
absorbs  readily,  and  it  is  one  of  the  problems  of  this  part  of  physiology 
to  explain  the  means  by  which  this  absorption  is  effected.  Anatomi- 
cally two  paths  are  open  to  the  products  absorbed.  They  may  enter 
the  blood  directly  by  passing  into  the  capillaries  of  the  villi,  or  they 
may  enter  the  lacteals  of  the  villi,  pass  into  the  lymph  circulation, 
and  through  the  thoracic  duct  of  the  lymphatic  system  eventually 
reach  the  blood  vascular  system.  The  older  physiologists  assumed 
that  absorption  takes  place  exclusively  through  the  central  lacteals 
of  the  villi,  and  hence  these  vessels  were  described  as  the  absorbents. 
We  now  know  that  the  digested  and  resynthesized  fats  are  absorbed 
by  way  of  the  lacteals,  but  that  the  other  products  of  digestion  are 
absorbed  mainly  through  the  blood-vessels  and  therefore  enter  the 
portal  system  and  pass  through  the  liver  before  reaching  the  general 
circulation.  According  to  observations  made  upon  a  patient  with  a 
fistula  at  the  end  of  the  small  intestine,*  food  begins  to  pass  into  the 
large  intestine  in  from  two  to  five  and  a  quarter  hours  after  eating, 
and  it  requires  from  nine  to  twenty-three  hours  before  the  last  of  a 
meal  has  passed  the  ileocecal  valve;  this  estimate  includes,  of  course, 
the  time  in  the  stomach.  During  this  passage  absorption  of  the 
digested  products  takes  place  nearly  completely.  In  the  fistula  case 
referred  to  above  it  was  found  that  85  per  cent,  of  the  proteid  had 
disappeared,  and  similar  facts  are  known  regarding  the  other  food- 
stuffs. The  problems  that  have  excited  the  greatest  interest  have 
been,  first,  the  exact  form  in  which  the  digested  products  are  ab- 
sorbed, and,  second,  the  means  by  which  this  absorption  is  effected. 
With  regard  to  the  last  question,  much  work  has  been  done  to 
ascertain  whether  the  known  physical  laws  of  diffusion,  osmosis, 
and  imbibition  are  sufficient  to  account  for  the  movements  of  the 
absorbed  substances  or  whether  it  is  necessary  to  refer  them  in 
part  to  some  unknown  activities  of  the  living  epithelial  cells.  It 
would  seem  that  diffusion  and  osmosis  occur  in  the  intestines. 
Concentrated  solutions  of  neutral  salts, — sodium  chlorid,  for  instance, 
— if  introduced  into  a  Thiry-Vella   loop,  cause  a  flow  of  water  into 

*  Macfadyen,  Nencki,  and  Sieber,  "  Archiv  f .  experiment.  Pathol,  u. 
Pharmakol.,"  28,  311,  1891. 


DIGESTION   AND    ABSORPTION   IN    THE    INTESTINES.  713 

the  lumen  in  accordance  with  their  high  osmotic  pressure,  and,  on 
the  other  hand,  some  of  the  sodium  chlorid  diffuses  into  the  blood 
in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  diffusion.  It  seems  equally  clear, 
however,  that  absorption  as  it  actually  takes  place  is  not  governed 
simply  by  known  physical  laws.  Thus,  the  animal's  own  serum,* 
possessing  presumably  the  same  concentration  and  osmotic  pres- 
sure as  the  animal's  blood,  is  absorbed  completely  from  a  Thiry- 
Vella  loop.  So  also  it  has  been  shown  that  in  the  absorption  of 
salts  from  the  intestine  f  the  rapidity  of  absorption  stands  in  no 
direct  relation  to  the  diffusion  velocity.  The  energy  that  controls 
absorption  resides,  therefore,  in  the  wall  of  the  intestine,  presumably 
in  the  epithelial  cells,  and  constitutes  a  special  form  of  imbibition 
which  is  not  yet  understood.  That  this  particular  form  of  energy 
is  connected  with  the  living  structure  is  shown  by  the  fact  that 
when  the  walls  are  injured  by  the  action  of  sodium  fluorid,  potas- 
sium arsenate,  etc.,  their  absorptive  power  is  diminished  and 
absorption  then  follows  the  laws  of  diffusion  and  osmosis. | 

Absorption  of  the  Carbohydrates. — Our  carbohydrate  food  is 
absorbed,  for  the  most  part,  as  simple  sugars, — ^monosaccharids. 
As  has  been  said,  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  but  little  sugar  is 
absorbed  in  the  stomach.  Cane-sugar  and  milk-sugar  are  inverted 
in  the  small  intestine  by  invertase  and  lactase,  the  first  being  con- 
verted to  dextrose  and  levulose,  the  second  to  dextrose  and  galactose. 
If,  however,  these  substances  are  fed  in  excess  they  are  absorbed  in 
part  without  conversion  to  simple  sugar,  and  in  that  case  may  be 
eliminated  in  the  urine.  The  bulk  of  our  carbohydrate  food  is  taken, 
however,  in  the  form  of  starch,  and  the  conditions  for  absorption  in 
this  case  are  more  favorable.  The  time  required  for  the  digestion  of 
the  starch  to  maltose  and  dextrin,  and  the  subsequent  inversion  of 
these  substances  to  dextrose,  insures  a  slower  and  more  complete 
absorption.  Five  hundred  grams  or  more  of  starch  may  be  digested 
and  absorbed  in  the  course  of  the  day  and  it  all  reaches  the  blood  in 
the  form  of  dextrose.  This  dextrose  enters  the  portal  vein  and  is 
distributed  first  to  the  liver.  In  this  organ  the  excess  of  sugar  is 
withdrawn  from  the  blood  and  stored  as  glycogen,  so  that  the  amount 
of  sugar  in  the  general  circulation  is  thereby  kept  quite  constant, — 
about  0.15  per  cent.  When  a  large  amount  of  carbohydrate  food  is 
eaten,  however,  it  is  possible  that  the  liver  may  not  be  able  to  remove 
the  excess  completely.  In  that  case  the  amount  of  sugar  in  the  gen- 
eral circulation  may  be  increased  above  normal,  giving  a  condition 
of  hyperglycemia.     In  such  cases  the  excess  is  likely  to  be  excreted 

*  Heidenhain,  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  56,  579,  1894. 
t  Wallace  and  Cushny,  "  Archiv  f .   die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  77,  202, 
1899. 

JCohnheim,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  37,  443,  1899. 


714  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

in  the  urine,  giving  the  phenomenon  known  as  "aUmentary  glyco- 
suria." The  amount  of  any  carbohydrate  that  can  be  eaten  without 
producing  a  condition  of  ahmentary  glycosuria  is  designated  by 
Hofmeister*  as  the  assimilation  hmit  of  that  carbohydrate.  If  taken 
beyond  this  limit  it  forms  a  physiological  excess,  and  some  is  lost 
in  the  urine.  The  assimilation  limit  varies  with  a  great  many 
conditions;  but,  so  far  as  the  different  forms  of  carbohydrates  are 
concerned,  it  is  lowest  for  the  milk-sugar  and  highest  for  starch.  The 
simple  sugars  dialyze  easily,  and  it  would  be  natural  to  suppose  that 
they  are  absorbed  into  the  blood  by  a  simple  process  of  diffusion. 
Experimental  facts,  however,  do  not  support  this  view  entirely.  It 
is  stated  that  the  absorption  of  sugars  does  not  vary  directly  as  their 
velocity  of  diffusion,  and  in  this  case,  as  with  the  other  products  of 
digestion,  it  is  necessary  to  assume  that  work  is  done  by  the  wall  of 
the  intestine  itself,  probably  the  epithelial  cells. 

So  far  as  the  carbohydrates  escape  absorption  as  sugar  they  are 
liable  to  undergo  acid  fermentation  from  the  bacteria  alwaj^s  present 
in  the  intestine.  As  the  result  of  this  fermentation  there  may  be 
produced  acetic  acid,  lactic  acid,  butyric  acid,  succinic  acid,  carbon 
dioxid,  alcohol,  hydrogen,  etc.  This  fermentation  probably  occurs 
to  some  extent  in  the  small  intestines  under  normal  conditions. 
Macfadyen,t  in  the  case  already  referred  to,  found  that  the  contents 
of  the  intestine  at  the  ileocecal  valve  contained  acid  equivalent  to 
that  of  a  0.1  per  cent,  solution  of  acetic  acid.  Under  less  normal 
conditions,  such  as  excess  of  sugars  in  the  diet  or  deficient  absorp- 
tion, the  large  production  of  acids  may  lead  to  irritation  of  the  intes- 
tines,— diarrhea,  etc. 

Absorption  of  Fats. — Numerous  theories  have  been  held  in 
regard  to  the  mode  of  absorption  of  fats.  It  has  been  supposed  that 
the  emulsified  (neutral)  fat  is  ingested  directly  by  the  epithelial  cells, 
that  the  fat  droplets  enter  between  the  epithelial  cells  in  the  so-called 
cement  substance,  that  the  fat  droplets  are  ingested  by  leucocytes 
that  lie  l^etween  the  epithelial  cells,  or  lastly  that  the  fat  is  first  split 
into  fatty  acid  and  glycerin  and  is  absorbed  by  the  epithelial  cells  in 
these  forms.  The  tendency  of  recent  work  is  to  favor  this  last  view. 
During  digestion  the  epithelial  cells  contain  fat  droplets  without 
doubt,  but  it  seems  probable  that  these  droplets  are  formed  in  situ 
by  a  synthesis  of  the  absorbed  glycerin  and  fatty  acids.  The  border 
of  the  cell  is  said  to  be  free  from  fat  globules, — a  fact  which  would 
indicate  that  the  neutral  fat  is  not  mechanically  ingested  as  oil  drops. 
But,  granting  that  the  fat  is  absorbed  in  solution,  as  fatty  acids  and 
glycerin,  the  mechanism  of  absorption  remains  unexplained.     It  is 

*  Hofmeister,  "Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathol,  u.  Pharmakol.,"  25,  240,  1889, 
and  26,  355,  1890. 

t  Macfadyen,  Nencki,  and  Sieber,  loc.  cit. 


DIGESTION   AND    ABSORPTION   IN   THE    INTESTINES.  715 

known  that  the  bile  as  well  as  the  pancreatic  juice  plays  an  important 
part  in  the  process.  The  pancreatic  juice  furnishes  the  lipase,  the  bile 
furnishes  the  bile  salts  (glycocholate  and  taurocholate  of  sodium) 
which  aid  the  lipase  in  splitting  the  neutral  fat,  and  moreover  aid 
greatly  the  absorption  of  the  split  fats.  This  latter  function  is  due 
probably  to  the  fact  that  the  bile  (bile  salts)  dissolves  the  fatty  acids 
readily*  and  thus  brings  them  into  contact,  in  soluble  form,  with  the 
epithelial  cells.  When  the  bile  is  drained  off  from  the  intestine 
by  a  fistula  of  the  gall-bladder  or  duct,  a  large  proportion  of 
the  fatty  foods  escapes  absorption  and  appears  in  the  feces.  Direct 
observation  shows  that  the  fat  after  passing  the  epithelial  lin- 
ing and  entering  the  stroma  of  the  villus  is  taken  up  by  the 
lymphatic  vessels,  the  so-called  lacteals.  This  fact  is  beautifully 
demonstrated  by  the  mere  appearance  of  the  lymphatics  of 
the  mesentery  after  a  meal  containing  fats.  These  vessels  are 
injected  with  milky  chyle  during  the  period  of  absorption  so  that 
their  entire  course  is  revealed.  The  chyle  on  microscopical  exami- 
nation is  found  to  contain  fat  in  the  form  of  an  extremely  fine 
emulsion.  In  this  form  it  is  carried  to  the  thoracic  duct  and  thence 
to  the  venous  circulation.  For  hours  after  a  meal  the  blood  contains 
this  chyle  fat.  If  a  specimen  of  blood  is  taken  during  this  time  and 
centrifugalized  in  the  usual  way,  the  chyle  fat  may  be  collected  at 
the  top  in  the  form  of  a  cream.  It  is  an  easy  matter  to  insert  a 
cannula  into  the  thoracic  duct  at  the  point  at  which  it  opens  into  the 
subclavian  and  jugular  veins  and  thus  collect  the  entire  amount  of  fat 
absorbed  from  the  intestines  by  way  of  the  lacteals.  Experiments 
of  this  kind  show  that,  after  deducting  the  amount  of  fat  that  escapes 
absorption  and  is  lost  in  the  feces,  the  amount  that  may  be  recovered 
from  the  thoracic  duct  is  less  than  that  taken  in  the  food.  It  seems 
probable,  therefore,  that  some  of  the  fat  is  absorbed  directly  by  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  villi,  probably  in  the  form  of  fatty  acids  or  soaps. 
The  portion  thus  absorbed  enters  the  portal  vein  and  passes  through 
the  liver  before  reaching  the  general  circulation.  The  liver  holds 
back  more  or  less  of  the  fat  taking  this  route,  as  it  is  found  that 
during  absorption  the  liver  cells  show  an  accumulation  of  fat  droplets 
in  their  interior.f  The  amount  of  fat  that  may  be  absorbed  from 
the  intestines  varies  with  the  nature  of  the  fat.  Experiments  show 
that  the  more  fluid  fats,  such  as  olive  oil,  are  absorbed  more  com- 
pletely,— that  is,  less  is  lost  in  the  feces  than  in  the  case  of  the  more 
solid  fats.  Comparative  experiments  have  given  such  results  as  the 
following:  Olive  oil,- — absorption,  97.7  per  cent.;  goose  and  pork  fat, 
97.5  per  cent.;  mutton  fat,  90  to  92.5  percent.;  spermaceti,  15  per 

*  See  Moore  and  Rockwood,   "Journal  of  Physiology,"   21,   58,   1897; 
also  Moore  and  Parker,  "  Proceedings,  Royal  Society, "  London,  58,  64,  1901. 
t  See  Frank,  "  Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1892,  497,  and  1894,  297. 


716  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION, 

cent.  The  amount  of  fat  that  may  be  lost  in  the  feces  varies  also 
with  other  conditions.  If,  for  instance,  an  excess  is  taken  with  the 
food  or  if  the  bile  flow  is  diminished  or  suppressed  the  percentage 
in  the  feces  is  increased.  The  usual  amount  of  fat  allowed  as  a 
maximum  in  dietaries  is  from  100  to  120  gms.  daily. 

Absorption  of  Proteids. — Most  of  the  experimental  work  on 
record  shows  that  the  digested  proteids  are  absorbed  by  the  blood- 
vessels of  the  villi,  although  after  excessive  feeding  of  proteid  a 
portion  may  be  taken  up  also  in  the  lymphatics.*  This  accepted 
belief  rests  upon  two  facts:  First  (Schmidt-Miilheim),  if  the  thoracic 
duct  (and  right  lymphatic  duct)  is  ligated,  so  as  to  shut  off  the  lym- 
phatic circulation,  an  animal  will  absorb  and  metabolize  the  usual 
amount  of  proteid,  as  is  indicated  by  the  urea  excreted  during  the 
period.  Second  (Munk),  if  a  fistula  of  the  thoracic  duct  is  established 
and  the  total  lymph  flow  from  the  intestines  is  collected  during  the 
period  of  absorption  after  a  diet  of  proteid,  it  is  found  that  there  is  no 
increase  in  the  quantity  of  the  lymph  or  in  its  proteid  contents. 
The  form  in  which  proteid  is  absorbed  remains,  however,  a  mystery. 
Under  normal  conditions  the  proteid  food  is  digested  by  the  success- 
ive actions  of  pepsin,  trypsin,  and  probably  erepsin.  During  this 
digestion  peptones  and  proteoses  are  formed  and  may  be  absorbed  as 
such,  or  they  may  be  further  broken  down  by  trypsin  and  erepsin  to 
the  amido-bodies,  leucin,  tyrosin,  arginin,  etc.,  and  the  intermediate 
compounds,  the  polypeptids  or  peptoids  (see  p.  708),  and  be  absorbed 
in  the  form  of  these  split  products.  Examination  of  the  blood  does 
not^  show,  however,  the  presence  of  any  of  these  bodies,  and  in  spite 
of  !.he  fact  that  the  process  of  absorption  is  long  continued  and  the 
total  amount  of  absorbed  products  in  any  given  specimen  of  blood 
may  therefore  be  very  small,  it  is  perplexing  not  to  be  able  to  ob- 
tain indubitable  proof  of  the  existence  in  the  blood  of  some  of  the 
products  of  digestion.  Several  possibilities  have  been  suggested. 
It  is  conceivable  that  the  peptones  or  the  more  simple  split  products 
may  be  synthesized  in  the  wall  of  the  intestine  or  in  the  liver  to 
the  proteids  of  the  blood,  .the  serum-albumin  or  globulin;  it  is  possi- 
ble that  many  of  the  end-products  of  the  digestive  splitting  may  be 
further  oxidized  and  converted  to  urea  in  the  liver  and  only  a 
fractional  part  be  really  synthesized  into  the  proteids  of  the  body, 
or  it  is  possible  that  the  absorbed  proteid  exists  in  the  blood  in 
some  special  form  not  as  yet  recognized.  The  whole  question  is 
evidently  one  that  can  not  be  discussed  very  profitably  at  present; 
it  awaits  the  results  of  further  investigation.  In  this  connection 
attention  should  be  directed  to  the  fact  that  many  forms  of  proteid 
may  be  absorbed  apparently  without  previous  digestion.  This  fact 
has  been  demonstrated  for  isolated  loops  of  the  small  intestine  and 

*See  Mendel,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  2,  137,  1899. 


.  DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE   INTESTINES.  717 

also  for  parts  of  the  large  intestine.  It  is,  moreover,  borne  out  by 
the  medical  practice  of  giving  enemata  into  the  rectimi  when  the 
conditions  are  such  that  the  patient  can  not  be  fed  in  the  normal 
way.  That  absorption  and  utilization  of  the  proteid  take  place 
under  such  conditions  is  shown  not  only  by  the  improved  nutritive 
condition  of  the  individual,  but  also  by  the  increased  output  of 
nitrogen  in  the  urine.  This  phenomenon  occurs  in  parts  of  the 
intestinal  canal  in  which  nonnally  no  proteolytic  enzymes  occur,  so 
that  the  whole  process  must  be  referred  to  an  activity  of  the  cells 
composing  the  walls  of  the  intestine.  There  seems  at  present  little 
grounds  for  a  satisfactory  explanation  of  the  absorption  of  proteids, 
with  or  without  digestion,  by  a  direct  application  of  the  known 
laws  of  osmosis,  diffusion,  and  imbibition.  Examination  of  the 
contents  of  the  small  intestine  at  its  junction  with  the  large  shows 
that  under  normal  conditions  most  of  the  proteid  has  been  ab- 
sorbed before  reaching  this  point.  The  process  is  continued  in  the 
large  intestine,  modified  somewhat  by  bacterial  action,  and  the 
amount  that  finally  escapes  absorption  and  appears  in  the  feces 
varies,  in  perfectly  normal  individuals,  with  the  character  of  the 
proteid  eaten.  According  to  Munk,*  the  easily  digestible  animal 
foods — such  as  milk,  eggs,  and  meat — are  absorbed  to  the  extent  of 
97  to  99  per  cent.,  while  with  vegetable  foods  the  utilization  is  less 
complete;  from  17  to  30  per  cent,  of  the  proteid  may  be  lost  in  the 
feces  if  the  vegetable  food  is  in  such  form  as  not  to  be  attacked  readily 
by  the  digestive  secretions. 

Digestion  and  Absorption  in  the  Large  Intestine. — Observa- 
tions upon  the  secretions  of  the  large  intestine  have  been  made  upon 
human  beings  in  cases  of  anus  praeternaturalis,  in  which  the  lower 
portion  of  the  intestine  was  practically  isolated,  and  also  upon 
lower  animals,  in  which  an  artificial  anus  was  established  at  the 
end  of  the  small  intestine.  These  observations  all  incUcate  that 
the  secretion  of  the  large  intestine,  while  it  contains  much  mucus 
and  shows  an  alkaline  reaction,  is  not  characterized  by  the  presence 
of  distinctive  enzymes.  When  the  contents  of  the  small  intestine 
pass  the  valve  they  still  contain  a  certain  amount  of  unabsorbed 
food  material.  As  was  stated  in  the  chapter  on  the  movements  of  the 
intestine,  this  material  remains  a  long  time  in  the  large  intestine,  and 
since  it  contains  the  digestive  enzymes  received  in  the  duodenum  the 
digestive  and  absorptive  processes  no  doubt  continue  as  in  the  small 
intestine.  Tliis  general  fact  is  ^vell  illustrated  in  experiments  made 
upon  dogs  most  of  whose  small  intestine  (70  to  83  per  cent.)  had  been 
removed.f    These  animals  could  digest  and  absorb  well,  and  formed 

*  See  Munk,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologic, "  vol.  i,  part  i,  1902,  article, 
"  Resorption,"  for  literature  and  discussion. 

t  Erlanger  and  Hewlett,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  6,  1,  1902. 


718  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

normal  feces,  provided  care  was  taken  with  the  diet.  An  excess  of 
fat  or  indigestible  material  caused  diarrhea  and  serious  loss  of  food 
material  in  the  feces.  An  interesting  feature  in  the  large  intestine 
is  the  marked  absorption  of  water.  In  the  small  intestine  no  doubt 
water  is  absorbed  in  large  quantities,  but  its  loss  is  evidently  made 
good  by  osmosis  or  secretion  of  water  into  the  intestine,  since  the 
contents  at  the  ileocecal  valve  are  quite  as  fluid  as  at  the  pylorus. 
In  the  large  intestine  the  absorption  of  water  is  not  compensated  by 
a  secretion;  the  material  becomes  more  and  more  solid  as  it  ap- 
proaches the  rectum,  and  is  thus  formed  into  the  feces.  The  alkaline 
reaction  of  the  contents  of  the  large  intestine  makes  a  favorable 
environment  for  the  growth  of  bacteria,  particularly  the  putrefactive 
bacteria  that  attack  proteid  material.  Putrefaction  is  a  normal 
occurrence  in  the  large  intestine,  and  much  interest  has  been  shown 
in  its  extent  and  its  possible  physiological  significance. 

Bacterial  Action  in  the  Small  Intestine. — Bacteria  are  con- 
stantly present  in  both  the  large  and  the  small  intestine.  Under 
normal  conditions,  however,  it  would  seem  that  in  the  small  intestine 
only  those  bacteria  capable  of  fermenting  carbohydrate  food  show  any 
distinct  activity.  Putrefactive  fermentation  of  proteid  material 
is  limited  or  absent  in  this  part  of  the  intestine  as  long  as  the  products 
of  proteid  digestion  are  promptly  absorbed.  Conditions  that  prevent 
or  retard  this  absorption  favor  the  occurrence  of  proteid  putrefaction. 
Opinions  among  investigators  differ  as  to  the  means  by  which  the 
proteid  contents  are  protected  from  the  action  of  the  bacteria.  It 
has  been  shown  that  the  presence  of  carbohydrate  material  has  a 
restraining  effect  upon  proteid  putrefaction.  The  simplest  explana- 
tion of  this  relation  is  that  the  fermentation  of  the  carbohydrates 
gives  rise  to  a  number  of  organic  acids, — lactic,  acetic,  etc., — and 
these  acids  inhibit  the  action  of  the  proteid  bacteria.  To  make  this 
explanation  satisfactory,  however,  it  is  necessary  to  show  that  the 
contents  of  the  small  intestine  possess  an  acid  reaction.  Concerning 
this  point,  however,  opinions  also  differ.  The  secretions  of  the  small 
intestine  are  all  alkaline  and  we  should  expect  their  contents  to  have 
this  reaction.  Examination  shows  that  the  contents  of  the  small 
intestine  are  acid  or  not  according  to  the  indicator  used.  With 
phenolphthalein  they  may  give  an  acid  reaction,  while  with  litmus, 
lakmoid,  etc.,  no  such  reaction  is  obtained.*  Such  a  result  as  this 
indicates  that  no  strong  organic  acids,  such  as  acetic  and  lactic, 
are  present,  the  phenolphthalein  being  affected  possibly  by  the  COj. 
As  Munk  has  stated,  however,  it  seems  that  the  contents  of  the  small 
intestine  throughout  the  duodenum  and  jejunum  are  at  least  never 

*  Consult  Macfadyen,  Nencki,  and  Sieber,  loc.  cit.;  Moore  and  Bergin, 
"American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  3,  316,  1900;  Miink,  " Centralblatt  f. 
Physiologic,"  16,  33  and  146,  1902. 


DIGESTION   AND   ABSORPTION   IN   THE   INTESTINES.  719 

alkaline,  and  when  carbohydrates  are  used  the  reaction  may  not  only 
be  acid  to  phenolphthalein,  but  also  to  the  stronger  indicators.  On 
the  whole,  therefore,  it  would  seem  probable  that  the  small  amount 
or  total  lack  of  proteid  putrefaction  in  the  small  intestine  is  due  in 
part  to  the  rapid  absorption  of  the  digested  proteid  and  in  part  to  an 
unfavorable  reaction.  Some  observers  contend  that  there  is  a 
struggle  for  existence  or  antagonism  between  the  bacteria  acting  upon 
carbohydrates  and  those  living  upon  proteids.  When  the  former 
have  conditions  favorable  for  growth,  their  increase  in  some  way 
affects  injuriously  the  proteid  bacteria.* 

Bacterial  Action  in  the  Large  Intestine. — ^In  the  large  intestine 
proteid  putrefaction  is  a  constant  and  normal  occurrence.  The 
reaction  here  is  stated  to  be  alkaline,  and  whatever  proteid  may  have 
escaped  digestion  and  absorption  is  in  turn  acted  upon  by  the  bacteria 
and  undergoes  so-called  putrefactive  fermentation.  The  splitting 
up  of  the  proteid  molecule  by  this  process  is  very  complete,  and  differs 
in  some  of  its  products  from  the  results  of  hydrolytic  cleavage  as 
caused  by  acids  or  by  trypsin.  The  list  of  end-products  of  putre- 
faction is  a  long  one.  Besides  peptones,  proteoses,  ammonia,  and 
the  various  amido-acids,  there  may  be  produced  such  substances  as 
indol,  skatol,  phenol,  phenylpropionic  and  phenylacetic  acids,  fatty 
acids,  carbon  dioxid,  hydrogen,  marsh  gas,  hydrogen  sulphid,  etc. 
Many  of  these  products  are  given  off  in  the  feces,  while  others  are 
absorbed  in  part  and  excreted  subsequentl}^  in  the  urine.  In  this 
latter  connection  especial  interest  attaches  to  the  phenol,  indol,  and 
skatol.  Phenol  or  carbolic  acid,  CgH^OH,  after  absorption  is  com- 
bined with  sulphuric  acid,  to  form  an  ethereal  sulphate  (conjugated 
sulphate)  or  phenolsulphonic  acid,  CgHgOSOsOH,  and  in  this  form 
is  found  in  the  urine.  So  also  with  cresol.  The  indol,  CgH^N,  and 
skatol  (methyl-indol),  CgHgN,  are  also  absorbed,  undergo  oxidation  to 
indoxyl  and  skatoxyl,  and  are  then  combined  or  conjugated  with 
sulphuric  acid,  like  the  phenol,  and  in  this  form  are  found  in  the  urine 
— CgHgNOSOaOH,  or  indoxyl-sulphuric  acid,  and  CgHgNOSOjOH, 
skatoxyl-sulphuric  acid.  These  bodies  have  long  been  known  to 
occur  in  the  urine,  and  the  proof  that  they  arise  primarily  from  putre- 
faction of  proteid  material  in  the  large  intestine  is  so  conclusive  as 
not  to  admit  of  any  doubt.  The  amount  to  which  they  occur  in 
the  urine  is,  therefore,  an  indication  of  the  extent  of  putrefaction  in 
the  large  intestine. 

Is  the  Putrefactive  Process  of  Physiological  Importance? — 
Recognizing  that  fermentation  by  means  of  bacteria  is  a  normal 
occurrence  in  the  gastro-intestinal  canal,  the  question  has  arisen 
whether  this  process  is  in  any  way  necessary  to  normal  digestion  and 
nutrition.  It  is  well  known  that  excessive  bacterial  action  may  lead 
*See  Bienstock,  "Archiv  f.  Hygiene,"  39,  390,  1901. 


720  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

to  intestinal  troubles,  such  as  diarrhea,  or  to  more  serious  interference 
with  general  nutrition  owing  to  the  formation  of  toxins.  It  is, 
however,  possible  that  some  amount  of  bacterial  action  may  be 
necessary  for  completely  normal  digestion.  As  a  special  case  it  has 
been  pointed  out  that  the  gastro-intestinal  tract  is  not  provided  with 
enzymes  capable  of  acting  upon  cellulose,  a  material  that  forms  such 
an  important  constituent  of  vegetable  foods.  Bacteria,  on  the  other 
hand,  may  hydrolyze  the  cellulose  and  render  it  useful  in  nutrition. 
Leaving  aside  this  special  case,  the  question  as  to  the  necessity  of 
bacterial  action  has  been  investigated  directly  by  attempting  to 
rear  young  animals  under  perfectly  sterile  conditions.  Nuttall  and 
Thierf elder*  report  some  very  interesting  experiments  upon  guinea 
pigs  in  which  the  young  animals  from  birth  were  kept  sterile  and  fed 
with  perfectly  sterile  food.  They  found  that  the  animals  lived  and 
increased  in  weight,  and  concluded  therefore  that  the  intestinal 
bacteria  are  not  necessary  to  normal  nutrition.  This  conclusion  is 
supported  by  the  observations  of  Levin,t  who  finds  that  animals  in 
the  Arctic  regions  in  many  cases  have  no  bacteria  in  their  intestines. 
SchotteliusJ  reports  contrary  results  upon  chickens.  When  kept 
sterile  they  lost  steadily  in  weight  and  showed  normal  growth  only 
when  supplied  with  food  containing  bacteria.  We  may  conclude, 
however,  that  the  evidence  at  present  indicates  that  the  bacterial 
fermentation  is  not  essential,  although  under  the  actual  conditions 
of  life  it  plays  a  part  in  the  digestive  history  of  the  food. 

Composition  of  the  Feces. — ^The  feces  differ  widely  in  amount 
and  in  composition  with  the  character  of  the  food.  Upon  a  diet 
composed  exclusively  of  meats  they  are  small  in  amount  and  dark 
in  color;  with  an  ordinary  mixed  diet  the  amount  is  increased;  and 
it  is  largest  with  an  exclusively  vegetable  diet,  especially  with  vege- 
tables containing  a  large  amount  of  indigestible  material.  The 
average  weight  of  the  feces  in  twenty-four  hours  upon  a  mixed  diet 
is  given  as  170  gms.,  while  with  a  vegetable  diet  it  may  amount  to  as 
much  as  400  or  500  gms.  The  quantitative  composition,  therefore, 
varies  greatly  with  the  diet.  Qualitatively,  we  find  in  the  feces 
the  following  things:  (1)  Indigestible  material,  such  as  ligaments  of 
meat  or  cellulose  from  vegetables.  (2)  Undigested  material,  such  as 
fragments  of  meat,  starch,  or  fats  which  have  in  some  way  escaped 
digestion.  Naturally,  the  quantity  of  this  material  present  is  slight 
under  normal  conditions.  Some  fats,  however,  are  almost  always 
found  in  feces,  either  as  neutral  fats  or  as  fatty  acids,  and  to  a  small 
extent  as  calcium  or  magnesium  soaps.     The  quantity  of  fat  found  is 

*  Nuttall  and  Thierfelder,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  21,  109, 
1895;    22,  62,   1896;    23,  231,   1897. 

t  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"   16,  249,  1904. 
i"Archiv  f.  Hygiene,"  42,  48,  1902, 


DIGESTION   AND    ABSORPTION   IN   THE    INTESTINES.  721 

increased  fey  an  increase  of  the  fats  in  the  food  or  by  a  deficient 
secretion  of  bile.  (3)  Products  of  the  intestinal  secretions.  Evi- 
dence has  accumulated  in  recent  years*  to  show  that  the  feces  in 
man  on  an  average  diet  are  composed  in  part  of  the  material  of  the 
intestinal  secretion.  The  nitrogen  of  the  feces,  formerly  supposed  to 
represent  only  undigested  food,  seems  rather  to  have  its  origin  largely 
in  these  secretions,  and,  therefore,  like  the  nitrogen  of  the  urine, 
represents  so  much  metabolism  in  the  body.  (4)  Products  of  bac- 
terial decomposition.  The  most  characteristic  of  these  products  are 
indol  and  skatol.  They  are  crystalline  bodies  possessing  a  disagree- 
able, fecal  odor;  this  is  especially  true  of  skatol,  to  which  the  odor 
of  the  feces  is  mainly  due.  (5)  Cholesterin,  which  is  found  always 
in  small  amounts,  and  is  probably  derived  from  the  bile.  (6)  Ex- 
cretin,  a  crystallizable,  non-nitrogenous  substance  to  which  the 
formula  C^gHi^gSOshas  been  assigned,  is  found  in  minute  quantities. 

(7)  Mucus  and  epithelial  cells  thrown  off  from  the  intestinal  wall. 

(8)  Pigment.  In  addition  to  the  color  due  to  the  undigested  food 
or  to  the  metallic  compounds  contained  in  it,  there  is  normally 
present  in  the  feces  a  pigment,  urobilin  or  stercobilin,  derived  from 
the  pigments  (bilirubin)  of  the  bile.  Urobilin  is  formed  from  the 
bilirubin  by  reduction  in  the  large  intestine.  (9)  Inorganic  salts — 
salts  of  sodium,  potassium,  calcium,  magnesium,  and  iron.  The 
significance  of  the  calcium  and  iron  salts  will  be  referred  to  in  a  subse- 
quent chapter,  when  speaking  of  their  nutritive  importance.  (10) 
micro-organisms.  Great  quantities  of  bacteria  of  different  kinds  are 
found  in  the  feces. 

In  addition  to  the  feces,  there  is  found  often  in  the  large  intestine 
a  quantity  of  gas  that  may  also  be  eliminated  through  the  rectum. 
This  gas  varies  in  composition.  The  following  substances  have  been 
found  at  one  time  or  another:  CH4,  COj,  H,  N,  HjS.  They  arise 
mainly  from  the  bacterial  fermentation  of  the  proteids,  although 
some  of  the  N  may  be  derived  from  air  swallowed  with  the  food. 

*  Prausnitz,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  35,  335,  1897;  and  Tsuboi,  ibid., 
p.  68. 


46 


CHAPTER  XLIV. 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  LIVER  AND  THE  SPLEEN. 

The  liver  plays  an  important  part  in  the  general  nutrition  of  the 
body.  Its  functions  are  manifold,  but  in  the  long  run  they  depend 
upon  the  properties  of  the  liver  cell,  which  constitutes  the  anatomical 
and  physiological  unit  of  the  organ.  These  cells  are  seemingly 
uniform  in  structure  throughout  the  whole  substance  of  the  hver,  but 
to  understand  clearly  the  different  functions  they  fulfill  one  must 
have  a  clear  idea  of  their  anatomical  relations  to  one  another  and 
to  the  blood-vessels,  the  lymphatics,  and  the  bile-ducts.  The  histol- 
ogy of  the  liver  lobule,  and  the  relationship  of  the  portal  vein,  the 
hepatic  artery,  and  the  bile-duct  to  the  lobule,  must  be  obtained  from 
the  text-books  upon  histology  and  anatomy.  Jt  is  sufficient  here  to 
recall  the  fact  that  each  lobule  is  supplied  with  blood  coming  in  part 
from  the  portal  vein  and  in  part  from  the  hepatic  artery.  The  blood 
from  the  former  source  contains  the  soluble  products  absorbed  from 
the  alimentary  canal,  such  as  sugar  and  proteid,  and  these  absorbed 
products  are  submitted  to  the  metabolic  acti\dty  of  the  liver  cells 
before  reaching  the  general  circulation.  The  hepatic  artery  brings  to 
the  liver  cells  the  arteriahzed  blood  sent  out  to  the  systemic  circu- 
lation from  the  left  ventricle.  In  addition,  each  lobule  gives  origin 
to  the  bile  capillaries  which  arise  between  the  separate  cells  and  which 
carry  off  the  bile  formed  within  the  cells.  In  accordance  with  these 
facts,  the  physiology  of  the  liver  cell  falls  naturally  into  two  parts, — 
one  treating  of  the  formation,  composition,  and  physiological  signifi- 
cance of  bile,  and  the  other  dealing  with  the  metabolic  changes  pro- 
duced in  the  ixdxed  blood  of  the  portal  vein  and  the  hepatic  artery 
as  it  flows  through  the  lobules.  In  this  latter  division  the  main 
phenomena  to  be  studied  are  the  formation  of  urea  and  the  formation 
and  significance  of  glycogen. 

Bile. — From  a  physiological  standpoint,  bile  is  partly  an  excre- 
tion carrying  off  certain  waste  products,  and  partly  a  digestive  secre- 
tion playing  an  important  role  in  the  absorption  of  fats,  and  possibly 
in  other  ways.  Bile  is  a  continuous  secretion,  but  in  animals  possess- 
ing a  gall-bladder  its  ejection  into  the  duodenum  is  intermittent. 
Bile  is  easily  obtained  from  living  animals  by  establishing  a  fistula 
of  the  bile-duct  or,  as  seems  preferable,  of  the  gall-bladder.  The 
latter  operation  has  been  performed  a  number  of  times  on  human 
beings.     In  some  cases  the  entire  supply  of  bile  has  been  diverted  in 

722 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE    LIVER   AND    SPLEEN.  723 

this  way  to  the  exterior,  and  it  is  an  interesting  physiological  fact 
that  such  patients  may  continue  to  enjoy  fair  health,  showing  that, 
whatever  part  the  bile  takes  normally  in  digestion  and  absorption, 
its  passage  into  the  intestine  is  not  absolutely  necessary  to  the  nu- 
trition of  the  body.  The  quantity  of  bile  secreted  during  the  day 
has  been  estimated  for  human  beings  of  average  weight  (43  to  73 
kgms.)  as  varying  between  500  and  800  c.c.  This  estimate  is  based 
upon  observations  on  cases  of  biliary  fistula.*  Chemical  analyses 
of  the  bile  show  that,  in  addition  to  the  water  and  salts,  it  contains 
bile  pigments,  bile  acids,  cholesterin,  lecithin,  neutral  fats  and  soaps, 
sometimes  a  trace  of  urea,  and  a  mucilaginous  nucleo-albumin  for- 
merly designated  improperly  as  mucin.  The  last-mentioned  sub- 
stance is  not  formed  in  the  hver  cells,  but  is  added  to  the  bile  by  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  bile-ducts  and  gall-bladder.  The  ciuantity 
of  these  substances  present  in  the  bile  varies  in  different  animals 
and  under  different  conditions.  As  an  illustration  of  their  relative 
importance  in  human  bile  and  of  the  limits  of  variation,  the  two 
following  analyses  by  Hammarstent  may  be  quoted: 

I.  II. 

Solids 2.520  2.840 

Water .' 97.480  97.160 

Mucin  and  pigment 0.529  0.910 

Bile  salts 0.931  0.814 

Taurocholate 0.3034  0.053 

Glycocholate 0.6276  0.761 

Fatty  acids  from  soap 0.1230  0.024 

Cholesterin 0.0630  0.096 

Fa"*^^^"  } 0.0220  0.1286 

Soluble  salts 0.8070  0.8051 

Insoluble  salts 0.0250  0.0411 

The  color  of  bile  varies  in  different  animals  according  to  the  pre- 
ponderance of  one  or  the  other  of  the  main  bile  pigments,  bilirubin 
and  biliverdin.  The  bile  of  carnivorous  animals  has  usually  a 
golden  color,  owing  to  the  presence  of  bilirubin,  while  that  of  the  her- 
bivora  is  a  bright  green  from  the  biliverdin.  The  color  of  human  bile 
seems  to  vary :  according  to  some  authorities,  it  is  yellow  or  golden 
yellow,  and  this  seems  especially  true  of  the  bile  as  found  in  the  gall- 
bladder of  the  cadaver;  according  to  others,  it  is  of  a  dark-olive  color 
with  the  greenish  tint  predominating.  Its  reaction  is  feebly  alkaline, 
and  its  specific  gravity  varies  in  human  bile  from  1.050  or  1.040  to 
1.010.  Human  bile  does  not  give  a  distinctive  absorption  spectrum, 
but  the  bile  of  some  herbivora,  after  exposure  to  the  air  at  least,  gives 
a  characteristic  spectrum. 

*  Copeman  and  Winston,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  10,  213,  1889;  Rob- 
son,  "Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society,"  London,  47,  499,  1890;  Pfaff  and 
Balch,  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  2,  49,  1897. 

t  Reported  in  "  Centralblatt  f.  Physiologic,"  1894,  No.  8. 


724  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

Bile  Pigments. — Bile,  according  to  the  animal  from  which  it  is 
obtained,  contains  one  or  the  other,  or  a  mixture,  of  the  two  pigments 
bilirubin  and  bili  verdin.  Biliverdin  is  supposed  to  stand  to  bilirubin 
in  the  relation  of  an  oxidation  product.  Bilirubin  is  given  the  formula 
CigHigNoOg,  and  biliverdin  CigHigNjO^,  the  latter  being  prepared 
readih^  from  pure  specimens  of  the  former  by  oxidation.  These 
pigments  give  a  characteristic  reaction,  known  as  "  Gmelin's  reaction," 
with  nitric  acid  containing  some  nitrous  acid  (nitric  acid  with  a 
yellow  color).  If  a  drop  of  bile  and  a  drop  of  nitric  acid  are  brought 
into  contact,  the  former  undergoes  a  succession  of  color  changes,  the 
order  being  green,  blue,  violet,  red,  and  reddish  yellow.  The  play 
of  colors  is  due  to  successive  oxidations  of  the  bile  pigments ;  starting 
with  bilirubin,  the  first  stage  (green)  is  due  to  the  formation  of  bili- 
verdin. The  pigments  formed  in  some  of  the  other  stages  have  been 
isolated  and  named.  The  reaction  is  very  delicate,  and  it  is  often 
used  to  detect  the  presence  of  bile  pigments  in  other  liquids — urine, 
for  example.  The  bile  pigments  originate  from  hemoglobin.  This 
origin  was  first  indicated  by  the  fact  that  in  old  blood  clots  or  in 
extravasations  there  was  found  a  crystalline  product,  the  so-called 
"  hematoidin,"  which  was  undoubtedly  derived  from  hemoglobin, 
and  which  upon  more  careful  examination  was  proved  to  be  identical 
with  bilirubin.  This  origin,  which  has  since  been  made  probable  by 
other  reactions,  is  now  universally  accepted.  It  is  supposed  that 
when  the  blood-corpuscles  disintegrate  the  hemoglobin  is  brought  to 
the  liver,  and  there,  under  the  influence  of  the  liver  cells,  is  converted 
to  an  iron-free  compound,  bilirubin  or  biliverdin.  It  is  very  signifi- 
cant that  the  iron  separated  by  this  means  from  the  hemoglobin  is, 
for  the  most  part,  retained  in  the  liver,  a  small  portion  only  being 
secreted  in  the  bile.  It  seems  probable  that  the  iron  held  back  in  the 
liver  is  again  used  in  some  way  to  make  new  hemoglobin  in  the 
hematopoietic  organs.  The  bile  pigments  are  carried  in  the  bile  to 
the  duodenum  and  are  mixed  with  the  food  in  its  long  passage  through 
the  intestine.  Under  normal  conditions  neither  bilirubin  nor  bili- 
verdin occurs  in  the  feces,  but  in  their  place  is  found  a  reduction  prod- 
uct, urobilin  or  stercobilin,  formed  in  the  large  intestine.  More- 
over, it  is  believed  that  some  of  the  bile  pigment  is.  reabsorbed  as  it 
passes  along  the  intestine,  is  carried  to  the  liver  in  the  portal  blood, 
and  is  again  eliminated.  That  this  action  occurs,  or  may  occur,  has 
been  made  probable  by  experiments  of  Wertheimer*  on  dogs.  It 
happens  that  sheep's  bile  contains  a  pigment  (cholohematin)  that 
gives  a  characteristic  spectrum.  If  some  of  this  pigment  is  injected 
into  the  mesenteric  veins  of  a  dog  it  is  eliminated  while  passing 
through  the  hver,  and  can  be  recognized  unchanged  in  the  bile. 

*  "Archives  de  physiologie  normale  et  pathologique,"  1892,  p.  577. 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE   LIVER   AND    SPLEEN.  725 

The  value  of  this  "  circulation  of  the  bile/'  so  far  as  the  pigments  are 
concerned,  is  not  apparent. 

Bile  Acids. — "  Bile  acids"  is  the  name  given  to  two  organic  acids, 
glycocholic  and  taurocholic,  which  are  always  present  in  bile,  and, 
indeed,  form  very  important  constituents  of  that  secretion;  they 
occur  in  the  form  of  their  respective  sodium  salts.  In  human  bile 
both  acids  are  usually  found,  but  the  proportion  of  taurocholate 
is  variable,  and  in  some  cases  it  may  be  absent  altogether. 
Among  herbivora  the  glycocholate  predominates,  as  a  rule,  although 
there  are  some  exceptions;  among  the  carnivora,  on  the  other  hand, 
taurocholate  occurs  usually  in  greater  quantities,  and  in  the  dog's 
bile  it  is  present  alone.  Glycocholic  acid  has  the  formula  CggH^gNOg, 
and  taurocholic  acid  the  formula  CjeH^gNSO^.  Each  of  them  can 
be  obtained  in  the  form  of  crystals.  When  boiled  with  acids  or  alka- 
lies these  acids  take  up  water  and  undergo  hydrolytic  cleavage,  the 
reaction  being  represented  by  the  following  equations: 

CseH^gNO,    +     HP  =  C^^H^oOs     +     CH^CNHpCOOH. 

Glycocholic  acid.  Cholic  acid.     Glycocoll  (amido-acetic-acid). 

C^eH^^NSO,   +   H^O  =  C^^H^oOs  +  C^H.NHjSO^OH 

Taurocholic  acid.  Cholic  acid.  '     Taurin  (amido-ethyl- 

sul phonic  acid). 

These  reactions  are  interesting  not  only  in  that  they  throw  light  on 
the  structure  of  the  acids,  but  also  because  similar  reactions  doubtless 
take  place  in  the  intestine,  cholic  acid  having  been  detected  in  the 
intestinal  contents.  As  the  formulas  show,  cholic  acid  is  formed  in 
the  decomposition  of  each  acid,  and  we  may  regard  the  bile  acids  as 
compounds  produced  by  the  synthetic  union  of  cholic  acid  with 
glycocoll  in  the  one  case  and  with  taurin  in  the  other.  Cholic  acid 
or  its  compounds,  the  bile  acids,  are  usually  detected  in  suspected 
liquids  by  the  well-known  Pettenkofer  reaction.  As  usually  per- 
formed, the  test  is  made  by  adding  to  the  hquid  a  few  drops  of  a  10 
per  cent,  solution  of  cane-sugar  and  then  strong  sulphuric  acid.  The 
latter  must  be  added  carefully  and  the  temperature  be  kept  below 
70°  C.  If  bile  acids  are  present,  the  liquid  assumes  a  red-violet 
color.  It  is  now  known  that  the  reaction  consists  in  the  formation 
of  a  substance  (furfurol)  by  the  action  of  the  acid  on  sugar,  which 
then  reacts  with  the  bile  acids.  The  bile  acids  are  formed  directly 
in  the  liver  cells.  This  fact,  which  was  for  a  long  time  the  subject  of 
discussion,  has  been  demonstrated  in  recent  years  by  an  important 
series  of  researches  made  upon  birds.  It  has  been  shown  that  if  the 
bile-duct  is  hgated  in  these  animals,  the  bile  formed  is  reabsorbed  and 
bile  acids  and  pigments  may  be  detected  in  the  urine  and  the  blood. 
If,  however,  the  liver  is  completely  extirpated,  then  no  trace  of  either 
bile  acids  or  bile  pigments  can  be  found  in  the  blood  or  the  urine, 
showing  that  these  substances  are  not  formed  elsewhere  in  the  body 


726  PHYSIOLOGY   OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

than  in  the  hver.  It  is  more  difficult  to  ascertain  from  what  sub- 
stances they  are  formed.  The  fact  that  glycocoll  and  taurin  contain 
nitrogen,  and  that  the  latter  contains  sulphur,  indicates  that  some 
proteid  or  albuminoid  constituent  is  broken  down  during  their  pro- 
duction. 

From  the  standpoint  of  nutrition  the  taurocholate  is  interesting  as  giving 
one  of  the  forms  in  which  the  sulphur  of  proteid  material  is  eliminated.  Some 
light  has  been  thrown  upon  the  origin  of  taurin  by  the  discovery  (Friedmann*) 
that  it  may  be  formed  from  cystin.  This  latter  body,  C6H12N2S2O4,  is  known 
to  occur  as  one  of  the  end-products  in  the  acid  hydrolysis  of  proteids,  and  it 
is  possible  that  it  occurs  also  in  the  tryptic-erepsin  hydrolysis  in  the  small 
intestine,  representing  the  end-product  in  which  the  sulphur  of  the  proteid 
molecule  is  found.  Cystin  may  be  oxidized  to  cysteinic  acid  (COOHCjHjNHj- 
SOjOH)  and  from  this  taurin  (C2H4NH2SO2OH)  may  be  obtained.  It  is  prob- 
able, therefore,  that  the  taurin  is  formed  normally  from  cystin  in  the  body 
and  that  the  latter  represents  one  of  the  split  products  of  proteid. t  Some 
of  the  sulphur  of  the  cystin  appears  also  in  the  urine  in  oxidized  form  as  sul- 
phate. Under  certain  pathological  conditions  the  cystin  itself  appears  in  the 
urine,  giving  the  phenomenon  of  cystinuria. 

A  circumstance  of  considerable  physiological  significance  is  that 
these  acids  or  their  decomposition  products  are  absorbed  in  part  from 
the  intestine  and  are  again  secreted  by  the  liver;  as  in  the  case  of  the 
pigments,  there  is  an  intestinal-hepatic  circulation.  The  value  of  this 
reabsorption  may  lie  in  the  fact  that  the  bile  acids  constitute  a  very 
efficient  stimulus  to  the  bile-secreting  activity  of  the  cells,  being  one 
of  the  best  of  cholagogues,  or  it  may  be  that  it  economizes  material. 
From  what  we  know  of  the  history  of  the  bile  acids  it  is  evident  that 
they  are  not  to  be  considered  solely  as  excreta:  they  have  some 
important  function  to  fulfill.  The  following  suggestions  as  to  their 
value  have  been  made :  In  the  first  place,  they  serve  as  a  menstruum 
for  dissolving  the  cholesterin  which  is  constantly  present  in  the  bile 
and  which  is  an  excretion  to  be  removed;  secondly,  they  facilitate 
the  splitting  and  the  absorption  of  fats  in  the  intestine.  It  is  an 
undoubted  fact  that  when  bile  is  shut  off  from  the  intestine  the 
absorption  of  fats  is  very  much  diminished,  and  it  has  been  shown 
that  this  action  of  the  bile  in  fat  absorption  is  due  to  the  presence 
of  the  bile  acids. 

Cholesterin. — Cholesterin  is  a  non-nitrogenous  substance  of  the 
formula  C27H4gO.  It  is  a  constant  constituent  of  the  bile,  although 
it  occurs  in  variable  quantities.  Cholesterin  is  very  widely  distrib- 
uted in  the  body,  being  found  especially  in  the  white  matter  (medul- 
lary substance)  of  nerve  fibers.  It  seems,  moreover,  to  be  a  constant 
constituent  of  all  animal  and  plant  cells.  It  is  assumed  that  choles- 
terin is  not  formed  in  the  liver,  but  that  it  is  eliminated  by  the  liver 
cells  from  the  blood,  which  collects  it  from  the  various  tissues  of  the 
body.     According  to  Naunyn,  however,  the  cholesterin  is  not  secreted 

*  Friedmann,  "  Hofmeister's  Beitrage,"  3,  1,  1902. 

t  See  Simon,  "Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Bulletin,"  15,  365,  1904. 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE    LIVER   AND    SPLEEN.  727 

by  the  liver  cells  proper,  but  is  added  to  the  secretion  while  in  the  bile 
passages — the  gall-ducts  and  gall-bladder.  That  it  is  an  excretion 
is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  it  is  eliminated  unchanged  in  the  feces. 
Cholesterin  is  insoluble  in  water  or  in  dilute  saline  liquids,  and  is  held 
in  solution  in  the  bile  by  means  of  the  bile  acids.  We  must  regard 
it  as  a  waste  product  of  cell  life,  formed  probably  in  minute  quantities, 
and  excreted  mainly  through  the  liver.  It  is  partly  eliminated 
through  the  skin,  in  the  sebaceous  and  sweat  secretions,  and  in  the 
milk. 

Lecithin,  Fats,  and  Nucleo-albumin. — Lecithin,  C44H9„NP09 
is  a  compound  of  glycerophosphoric  acid  with  fatty  acid  radicals 
(stearic,  oleic,  or  palmitic)  and  a  nitrogenous  base,  cholin.  When 
hydrolyzed  by  boiling  with  alkali  it  splits  up  into  these  three  sub- 
stances. It  is  found  generally  as  such,  or  in  combination,  in  all  cells, 
and  evidently  plays  some  as  yet  unknown  part  in  cell  metabolism. 
It  occurs  in  largest  quantity  in  the  white  matter  of  the  nervous 
system.  In  the  liver  it  occurs  to  a  considerable  extent  both  as  lecithin 
and  in  a  more  complex  combination  with  a  carbohydrate  residue,  a 
compound  designated  as  jecorin.  So  far  as  it  is  found  in  the  bile  it 
represents  possibly  a  waste  product  derived  from  the  liver  or  from 
the  body  at  large.  Little  is  known  of  its  precise  physiological  sig- 
nificance. 

The  special  importance,  if  any,  of  the  small  proportion  of  fats 
and  fatty  acids  in  the  bile  is  unknown.  The  ropy,  mucilaginous 
character  of  bile  is  due  to  the  presence  of  a  body  formed  in  the  bile- 
ducts  and  gall-bladder.  This  substance  was  formerly  designated 
as  mucin,  but  it  is  now  known  that  in  ox  bile  at  least  it  is  not  a  true 
mucin,  bvit  a  nucleo-albumin  (see  appendix).  Hammarsten  reports 
that  in  human  bile  some  true  mucin  is  found.  Outside  the  fact  that 
it  makes  the  bile  viscous,  this  constituent  is  not  known  to  possess  any 
especial  physiological  significance. 

The  Secretion  of  the  Bile. — Numerous  experiments  have  been 
made  to  ascertain  whether  or  not  the  secretion  of  bile  is  controlled 
by  a  special  set  of  secretory  fibers.  The  secretion  itself  is  continuous, 
but  varies  in  amount  under  different  conditions.  These  conditions 
may  be  controlled  experimentally  in  part.  It  has  been  shown,  for 
example,  that  stimulation  of  the  spinal  cord  or  splanchnic  nerve 
diminishes  the  flow  of  bile,  while  section  of  the  splanchnic  branches 
may  cause  an  increased  flow.  These  and  similar  actions  are  ex- 
plained, however,  by  their  effect  on  the  blood-flow  through  the  liver. 
The  splanchnics  carry  vasomotor  nerves  to  the  liver,  and  section  or 
stimulation  of  these  nerves  will  therefore  alter  the  circulation  in  the 
organ.  Since  the  secretion  increases  when  the  blood-flow  is  increased 
and  vice  versa,  it  is  believed  that  in  this  case  no  special  secretorj^ 
nerve  fibers  exist.     The  metabolic  processes  in  the  liver  cells  which 


728  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

produce  the  secretion  probably  go  on  at  all  times,  but  they  are 
increased  when  the  blood-flow  is  increased.  We  may  believe,  there- 
fore, that  the  quantity  of  the  bile  secretion  varies  with  the  quantity 
and  composition  of  the  blood  flowing  through  the  liver.  On  the 
physiological  and  pharmacological  side  efforts  have  been  made  to 
discover  what  substances  stimulate  especially  the  formation  of  bile. 
Such  substances  are  designated  as  cholagogues.  The  therapeutical 
agents  capable  of  giving  this  action  are  still  a  subject  of  controversy. 
On  the  physiological  side  the  following  facts  are  accepted :  Any  agent 
that  causes  an  hemolysis  of  red  corpuscles  increases  the  flow  of  bile, 
or  the  same  effect  is  produced  if  a  solution  of  hemoglobin  is  injected 
directly  into  the  blood.  This  result  is  in  harmony  with  the  views 
already  stated  regarding  the  significance  of  the  bile  pigments  as  an 
excretory  product  of  hemoglobin.  The  cholagogue  whose  action  is 
most  distinct  and  prolonged  is  bile  itself.  When  fed  or  injected 
directly  into  the  circulation  bile  causes  an  undoubted  increase  in  the 
secretion.  This  effect  is  due  both  to  the  bile  acids  and  bile  pigments. 
Since  the  bile  acids  have  a  hemolytic  effect  on  red  corpuscles,  it 
might  at  first  be  assumed  that  their  action  as  cholagogues  is  due 
indirectly  to  this  circumstance.  The  action  of  the  bile  acids  is, 
however,  much  more  pronounced  than  that  of  other  hemolytic  agents, 
and  it  seems  certain,  therefore,  that  they  exert  a  specific  effect  on  the 
liver  cells.  Lastly,  there  is  evidence  that  the  secretin,  whose  action 
upon  the  pancreatic  secretion  has  been  described,  exerts  a  similar 
effect  upon  the  secretion  of  bile.  Statements  differ  somewhat  in 
regard  to  the  extent  of  this  action,  but  it  seems  to  be  certain  that, 
when  acids  (0.5  per  cent.  HCl)  are  injected  into  the  duodenum  or  upper 
part  of  the  jejunum,  the  secretion  of  bile  is  increased;  and,  since 
this  effect  takes  place  when  the  nervous  connections  are  severed,  the 
effect,  as  in  the  case  of  the  pancreatic  secretion,  is  explained  by  as- 
suming that  the  acid  converts  prosecretin  to  secretin,  and  this 
latter  after  absorption  into  the  blood  acts  upon  the  liver  cells.* 
A  similar  effect  may  be  obtained  by  injecting  secretin  directly  into 
the  blood.  Since  during  a  meal  the  stomach  normally  ejects  acid 
chyme  into  the  duodenum,  the  importance  of  this  secretin  reaction 
in  adapting  the  secretion  of  bile  to  the  period  of  digestion  is  evident. 
The  Ejection  of  Bile  into  the  Duodenum — Function  of  the 
Gall-bladder. — ^Although  the  bile  is  formed  more  or  less  continu- 
ously, it  enters  the  duodenum  periodically  during  the  time  of  digestion. 
The  secretion  during  the  intervening  periods  is  prevented  from  enter- 
ing the  duodenum  apparently  by  the  fact  that  the  opening  of  the 
common  bile-duct  is  closed  by  a  sphincter.  The  secretion,  therefore, 
backs  up  into  the  gall-bladder.     According  to  Bruns,t  no  bile  appears 

*  See  Falloise,  quoted  in  Maly's  "  Jahres-bericht  der  Thier-chemie, "  33, 
611,  1904.  t"  Archives  des  sciences  biologiques, "  7,87,  1899. 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    LIVER    AND    SPLEEN. 


729 


in  the  duodenum  as  long  as  the  stomach  is  empt\'.  When,  however, 
a  meal  is  taken  the  ejection  of  the  chyme  into  the  duodenum  is  fol- 
lowed by  an  ejection  of  bile.*  It  would  seem,  therefore,  that  each 
gush  of  chyme  into  the  duodenum  excites,  probably  by  reflex  action,  a 
contraction  of  the  gall-bladder.  The  substances  in  the  chyme  that 
are  responsible  for  the  stimulation  have  been  investigated  by  Bruns. 
He  finds  that  acids,  alkalies,  and  starches  are  ineffective,  and  con- 
cludes that  the  reflex  is  due  to  the  proteids  and  fats  or  some  of  the 
products  of  their  digestion.     The  gall-bladder  has  a  muscular  coat 


10 

8 
i> 
4- 
Z 

30' 

JO- 

JO' 

JO- 

30- 

30-- 

30' 

3D- 

30' 

30- 

30- 

30' 

30' 

30' 

JO' 

_, 

.^ 

, 

'-' 

L^ 

I 

\ 

/ 

" 

1 

\ 

8 
i, 

2 

; 

\ 

""- 

^-., 

.^■' 

--,._ 

\^ 

/ 

\ 

8 

6 

4 
z 

/ 

\ 

/'' 

^-, 

/ 

/' 

•' 

\ 

/ 

^\ 

. 

/ 

\ 

'' 

\^ 

/ 

' 

' 

) 

---. 

Fig.  264. — Curves  showing  the  velocity  of  secretion  of  bile  into  the  duodenum  on 
(1)  a  diet  of  milk,  uppermost  curve;  (2)  a  diet  of  meat,  middle  curve;  (3)  a  diet  of  bread, 
lowest  curve.  The  divisions  on  the  abscissa  represent  intervals  of  thirty  minutes;  the 
figures  on  the  ordinates  represent  the  volume  of  secretion  in  cubic  centimeters. — (Bruns.) 


of  plain  muscle,  and  records  made  of  its  contractions  show  that  the 
force  exerted  is  quite  small.  According  to  Freese.f  the  maximal  con- 
traction does  not  exceed  that  necessary  to  overcome  the  hydrostatic 
pressure  of  a  column  of  water  220  mms.  in  height, — a  force,  therefore, 
which  is  about  equivalent  to  the  secretion  pressure  of  bile  as  deter- 
mined by  Heidenhain.  The  innervation  of  the  gall-bladder  and  gall- 
ducts  has  been  studied  especially  by  Doyon.|     It  would  seem,  from 

*  See  also  Klodnizki,  quoted  from  Maly's  "  Jahres-bericht  der  Thier- 
chemie,"  33,  617,  1904. 

t  "Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Bulletin,"  June,  1905. 
t  Doyon,  "  Archives  de  physiologic, "  1894,  p.  19. 


730  PHYSIOLOGY   OF    DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

the  experiments  made  by  this  author  together  with  later  experiments 
reported  by  Freese,  that  the  bladder  receives  both  motor  and  in- 
hibitory fibers  by  way  of  the  splanchnic  nerves.  These  fibers  emerge 
from  the  spinal  cord  in  the  roots  of  the  sixth  thoracic  to  the  first 
lumbar  spinal  nerve,  and  pass  to  the  celiac  plexus  by  way  of  the 
splanchnic  nerves.  Sensory  fibers  capable  of  causing  a  reflex  con- 
striction or  dilatation  of  the  bladder  are  found  in  both  the  vagus  and 
splanchnic  nerves.  Stimulation  of  the  central  end  of  the  cut  splanch- 
nic causes  a  dilatation  of  the  bladder  (reflex  stimulation  of  the 
inhibitory  flbers),  while  stimulation  of  the  central  end  of  the  vagus 
causes  a  contraction  of  the  bladder  and  a  dilatation  (inhibition)  of 
the  sphincter  muscle  at  the  opening  of  the  common  duct  into  the  in- 
testine. Since  these  last  movements  are  the  ones  that  occur  during 
normal  digestion,  it  is  probable  that  the  afferent  fibers  from  the 
duodenum,  which  are  concerned  in  this  reflex,  run  in  the  vagus. 

Effect  of  Complete  Occlusion  of  the  Bile-duct. — It  is  an  in- 
teresting fact  that,  when  the  flow  of  bile  is  completely  prevented  by 
ligation  of  the  bile-duct,  the  stagnant  liquid  is  not  reabsorbed  by  the 
blood  directly,  but  by  the  lymphatics  of  the  liver.  The  bile  pig- 
ments and  bile  acids  in  such  cases  may  be  detected  in  the  lymph  as  it 
flows  from  the  thoracic  duct.  In  this  way  they  get  into  the  blood, 
producing  a  jaundiced  condition.  The  way  in  which  the  bile  gets 
from  the  bile-ducts  into  the  hepatic  lymphatics  is  not  deflnitely 
known,  but  possibly  it  is  due  to  a  rupture,  caused  by  the  increased 
pressure,  at  some  point  in  the  course  of  the  delicate  bile  capillaries. 

General  Physiological  Importance  of  Bile. — ^The  physiological 
value  of  bile  has  been  referred  to  in  speaking  of  its  several  constitu- 
ents. Bile  is  of  importance  as  an  excretion  in  that  it  removes  from 
the  body  waste  products  of  metabolism,  such  as  cholesterin,  lecithin, 
and  bile  pigments.  With  reference  to  the  pigments,  there  is  evidence 
to  show  that  a  part  at  least  may  be  reabsorbed  while  passing  through 
the  intestine,  and  be  used  again  in  some  way  in  the  body.  The  bile 
acids  represent  end-products  of  metabolism  involving  the  proteids 
of  the  liver  cells,  but  they  are  undoubtedly  reabsorbed  in  part,  and 
can  not  be  regarded  merely  as  excreta.  As  a  digestive  secretion,  the 
most  important  function  attributed  to  the  bile  is  the  part  it  takes  in 
the  digestion  and  absorption  of  fats.  It  accelerates  greatly  the  action 
of  the  lipase  of  pancreatic  juice  in  splitting  the  fats  to  fatty  acids  and 
glycerin,  and  it  aids  materially  in  the  absorption  of  the  products 
of  this  hydrolysis.  A  number  of  observers  have  shown  that  when  a 
permanent  biliary  fistula  is  made,  and  the  bile  is  thus  prevented  from 
reaching  the  intestinal  canal,  a  large  proportion  of  the  fat  of  the  food 
escapes  absorption  and  is  found  in  the  feces.  This  action  of  the 
bile  may  be  referred  directly  to  the  fact  that  the  bile  acids  serve  as  a 
solvent  for  the  fats  and  fatty  acids.     It  was  formerly  believed  that 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE    LIVER   AND    SPLEEN.  731 

bile  is  also  of  great  importance  in  restraining  the  processes  of  putre- 
faction in  the  intestine.  It  was  asserted  that  bile  is  an  efficient 
antiseptic,  and  that  this  property  comes  into  use  norznally  in  prevent- 
ing excessive  putrefaction.  Bacteriological  experiments  made  by  a 
number  of  observers  have  shown,  however,  that  bile  itself  has  ver}' 
feeble  antiseptic  properties,  as  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  it  putrefies 
readily.  The  free  bile  acids  and  cholalic  acid  do  have  a  direct  retard- 
ing effect  upon  putrefactions  outside  the  body ;  but  this  action  is  not 
very  pronounced,  and  has  not  been  demonstrated  satisfactorily  for 
bile  itself.  It  seems  to  be  generally  true  that  in  cases  of  biliary  fistula 
the  feces  have  a  very  fetid  odor  when  meat  and  fat  are  taken  in  the 
food.  But  the  increased  putrefaction  in  these  cases  may  possibly  be 
an  indirect  result  of  the  withdrawal  of  bile.  It  has  been  suggested, 
for  instance,  that  the  deficient  absorption  of  fat  that  follows  upon  the 
removal  of  the  bile  results  in  the  proteid  and  carbohydrate  material 
becoming  coated  with  an  insoluble  layer  of  fat,  so  that  the  penetration 
of  the  digestive  enzymes  is  retarded  and  greater  opportunity  is  given 
for  the  action  of  bacteria.  We  may  conclude,  therefore,  that,  while 
there  does  not  seem  to  be  sufficient  warrant  at  present  for  believing 
that  the  bile  exerts  a  direct  antiseptic  action  upon  the  intestinal 
contents,  nevertheless  its  presence  limits  in  some  way  the  extent  of 
putrefaction. 

Glycogen. — One  of  the  most  important  functions  of  the  liver  is 
the  formation  of  glycogen.  This  substance  was  found  in  the  liver  in 
1857  by  Claude  Bernard,  and  is  one  of  several  brilliant  discoveries 
made  by  him.  Glycogen  has  the  fonuula  (CgHj^Og)!,,  which  is  also 
the  general  formula  given  to  vegetable  starch;  glycogen  is  therefore 
frequently  spoken  of  as  "  animal  starch."  It  gives,  however,  a  port- 
wine-red  color  with  iodin  solutions,  instead  of  the  familiar  deep  blue 
of  vegetable  starch,  and  this  reaction  serves  to  detect  glycogen  not 
only  in  its  solutions,  but  also  in  the  liver  cells.  Glycogen  is  readily 
soluble  in  water,  and  the  solutions  have  a  characteristic  opalescent 
appearance.  Like  starch,  glycogen  is  acted  upon  by  ptyalin  and 
other  diastatic  enzymes,  and  the  end-products  are  apparenth'  the 
same — ^namely,  maltose,  or  maltose  and  some  dextrin,  or  else  dex- 
trose, depending  upon  the  enzyme  used.  Under  the  influence  of 
acids  it  may  be  hydrolyzed  at  once  to  dextrose.* 

Occurrence  of  Glycogen  in  the  Liver. — Glycogen  can  be 
detected  in  the  liver  cells  microscopically.  If  the  liver  of  a  dog  is 
removed  twelve  or  fourteen  hours  after  a  hearty  meal,  hardened  in 
alcohol,  and  sectioned,  the  liver  cells  are  found  to  contain  clumps 
of  clear  material  which  give  the  iodin  reaction  for  glycogen.     Even 

*  The  extensive  literature  of  glj'cogen  is  collected  and  reviewed  by  Cre- 
merinthe  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  i,  part  i,  1902;  and  by  Pfliiger, 
"  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  96,  1,  1903. 


732  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

when  distinct  aggregations  of  the  glycogen  can  not  be  made  out,  its 
presence  in  the  cells  is  shown  by  the  red  reaction  with  iodin.  By 
this  simple  method  one  can  demonstrate  the  important  fact  that  the 
amount  of  glycogen  in  the  liver  increases  after  meals  and  decreases 
again  during  the  fasting  hours,  and  if  the  fast  is  sufficiently  prolonged 
it  may  disappear  altogether.  This  fact  is,  however,  shown  more 
satisfactorily  by  quantitative  determinations,  by  chemical  means, 
of  the  total  glycogen  present.  The  amount  of  glycogen  in  the 
liver  is  quite  variable,  being  influenced  by  such  conditions  as  the 
character  and  amount  of  the  food,  muscular  exercise,  body  tem- 
perature, drugs,  etc.  From  determinations  made  upon  various 
animals  it  may  be  said  that  the  average  amount  lies  between  1.5  and 
4  per  cent,  of  the  weight  of  the  liver.  But  this  amount  may  be  in- 
creased greatly  by  feeding  upon  a  diet  largely  made  up  of  carbohy- 
drates. It  is  said  that  in  the  dog  the  total  amount  of  liver  glycogen 
may  be  raised  to  17  per  cent.,  and  in  the  rabbit  to  27  per  cent.,  by 
this  means,  while  it  is  estimated  for  man  (Neumeister)  that  the  quan- 
tity may  be  increased  to  at  least  10  per  cent.  It  is  usually  believed 
that  glycogen  exists  as  such  in  the  liver  cells,  being  deposited  in  the 
substance  of  the  cytoplasm.  Reasons  have  been  brought  forward 
to  show  that  this  is  not  strictly  true,  and  that  the  glycogen  is  prob- 
ably held  in  some  sort  of  weak  chemical  combination.  It  has  been 
shown,  for  instance,  that  although  glycogen  is  easily  soluble  in  cold 
water,  it  can  not  be  extracted  readily  from  the  liver  cells  by  this  agent. 
One  must  use  hot  water,  salts  of  the  heavy  metals,  and  other  similar 
agents  that  may  be  supposed  to  break  up  the  combination  in  which 
the  glycogen  exists.  For  practical  purposes,  however,  we  may  speak 
of  the  glycogen  as  lying  free  in  the  liver-cells,  just  as  we  speak  of 
hemoglobin  existing  as  such  in  the  red  corpuscles,  although  it  is 
probably  held  in  some  sort  of  combination. 

Origin  of  Glycogen. — ^To  understand  clearly  the  views  held  as 
to  the  origin  of  liver  glycogen,  it  is  necessary  to  describe  briefly  the 
effect  of  the  different  foodstuffs  upon  its  formation. 

Effect  of  Carbohydrates  on  the  Amount  of  Glycogen. — ^The  amount 
of  glycogen  in  the  hver  is  affected  very  quickly  by  the  quantity  of  car- 
bohydrates in  the  food.  If  the  carbohydrates  are  given  in  excess,  the 
supply  of  glycogen  may  be  increased  largely  beyond  the  average 
amount  present,  as  has  been  stated  above.  Investigation  of  the  differ- 
ent sugars  has  shown  that  dextrose,  levulose,  saccharose  (cane-sugar), 
and  maltose  are  unquestionably  direct  glycogen-formers, — that  is, 
that  glycogen  is  formed  directly  from  them  or  from  the  products  into 
which  they  are  converted  during  digestion.  The  bulk  of  our  car- 
bohydrate food  reaches  the  liver  as  dextrose,  or  as  dextrose  and  levu- 
lose, and  these  forms  of  sugar  may  be  converted  into  glycogen  in  the 
liver  cells  by  a  simple  process  of  dehydration,  such  as  may  be  repre- 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    LIVER   AND    SPLEEN.  733 

sented  in  substance  by  the  formula  CgHjgOg  —  H2O  =  CgH^^Og. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  both  dextrose  and  levulose  increase  markedly 
the  amount  of  glycogen  in  the  liver;  and,  since  cane-sugar  is  inverted 
in  the  intestine  before  absorption,  it  also  must  be  a  true  glycogen- 
former, — a  fact  that  has  been  abundantly  demonstrated  by  direct 
experiment.  Lusk*  has  shown,  however,  that,  if  cane-sugar  is  in- 
jected under  the  skin,  it  has  a  very  feeble  effect  in  the  way  of  increas- 
ing the  amount  of  glycogen  in  the  liver,  since  under  these  conditions 
it  is  probably  absorbed  into  the  blood  without  undergoing  inversion. 
Experiments  with  subcutaneous  injection  of  lactose  gave  similar 
results,  and  it  is  generally  believed  that  the  liver  cells  can  not  convert 
the  double  sugars  to  glycogen,  at  least  not  readily;  hence  the  value 
of  the  hydrolysis  of  these  sugars  in  the  alimentary  canal  before 
absorption.  We  may  assume,  therefore,  that  dextrose,  levulose,  and 
galactose  are  the  true  glycogen-formers  that  occur  normally  in  the 
blood,  and  that  the  disaccharids  (cane-sugar,  milk-sugar,  etc.)  and 
the  polysaccharids  (starches)  are  true  glycogen-formers  to  the  ex- 
tent that  they  are  converted  into  dextrose,  levulose,  or  galactose. 

Effect  of  Proteid  on  Glycogen  Formation. — In  his  first  studies 
upon  glycogen  Bernard  asserted  that  it  may  be  formed  from  proteid 
material.  Since  that  time  there  have  been  much  discussion  and 
experimentation  upon  this  point.  The  usual  view  is  that  proteid 
must  be  counted  among  the  true  glycogen-formers  in  the  sense  that 
some  of  the  material  of  the  proteid  molecule  is  directly  converted  to 
glycogen.  The  proteid  in  digestion  undergoes,  it  will  be  remembered, 
a  splitting  process  the  limits  of  which  are  not  definitely  settled.  It 
is  assumed,  however,  that  the  nitrogenous  split  products  are  acted 
upon  in  the  liver,  the  nitrogen  with  some  of  the  carbon  being  changed 
to  urea,  while  the  non-nitrogenous  residue  is  converted  to  sugar. 
Among  the  split  products  of  proteid  that  have  been  especially 
investigated  in  this  relation  the  results  with  leucin  and  glucosamin 
have  been  chiefly  negative.f  Experimentally  observers  find  for 
the  warm-blooded  animals  at  least  that  feeding  with  proteids. 
even  in  the  case  of  those  proteids,  such  as  casein,  that  con- 
tain no  carbohydrate  grouping,  causes  an  increased  production  of 
glycogen. J  The  conclusion  to  be  drawn  from  these  experiments 
is  strengthened  by  clinical  experience  upon  human  beings  suf- 
fering from  diabetes.  In  severe  forms  of  this  disease  all  the  car- 
bohydrate material  of  the  food  appears  in  the  urine.  If  under 
these  conditions  the  individual  is  given  an  exclusively  proteid  diet 
sugar  still  continues  to  appear  in  the  urine,  and  it  would  seem  that 
this  sugar  can  only  arise  from  the  proteid  food.     In  the  similar 

*Voit,  "Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie,"  28,  285,  1891. 

t  Halsey,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  10,  229,  1904. 

%  See  Stookey,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  9,  138,  1903. 


734  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

condition  of  severe  glycosuria  that  may  be  produced  by  the  use  of 
phloridzin  it  has  been  shown  that  the  animal  continues  to  excrete 
sugar  even  when  fed  on  proteid  alone,  or  when  starved.  Under  such 
conditions  the  amount  of  dextrose  in  the  urine  bears  a  definite  ratio 
to  the  amount  of  nitrogen  excreted.  D  :  N  ::  3.65  : 1  (Lusk),  which 
would  indicate  that  both  arise  from  the  breaking  down  of  the  proteid 
molecule.  On  this  supposition  58.4  per  cent,  of  the  proteid  may  be 
converted  to  sugar.  So  also  the  fact  that  during  prolonged  starva- 
tion, lasting  for  forty  or  even  ninety  days,  the  blood  retains  a  practi- 
cally constant  composition  in  sugar  indicates  that  this  material  is 
being  formed  from  either  the  proteid  or  fat  supply  of  the  body. 
Other  considerations  exclude  the  fat,  and  we  are,  therefore,  led  to 
the  belief  that  the  proteid  can  give  rise  to  sugar  in  the  body.  If 
this  change  is  part  of  the  normal  metabolism  of  the  body  it  would 
make  proteid  a  glycogen-former,  since  the  sugar  formed  from  the 
proteid  may,  of  course,  be  converted  to  glycogen.  Whether  or  not 
all  proteids  yield  glycogen  or  sugar  in  the  body  is  not  entirely  de- 
termined. Some  authors  have  thought  that  only  those  proteids 
that  contain  a  carbohydrate  residue  have  this  property;  but,  as 
stated  above,  casein  and  other  proteids  that  do  not*  possess  this 
grouping  seem  also  to  increase  the  glycogen  supply  when  fed  alone. 

Effect  of  Fats  upon  Glycogen  Formation. — ^A  large  number  of 
substances  have  been  foimd  by  some  observers  to  increase  the  store 
of  glycogen  in  the  liver.  In  some  of  these  cases  at  least  it  is  evident 
that  the  substance  is  not  a  direct  glycogen-former  in  the  sense  that 
the  material  is  itself  converted  to  glycogen.  It  may  increase  the 
supply  of  liver  glycogen  in  some  indirect  way, — for  example,  by 
diminishing  the  consumption  of  glycogen  in  the  body.  The  most 
important  substance  in  this  connection  from  a  practical  standpoint 
is  fat.  Whether  or  not  the  body  can  convert  fats  into  sugar  or 
glycogen  is  a  question  about  which  at  present  there  is  much 
difference  of  opinion,  and  much  evidence  might  be  cited  on  each  side. 
Cremer,  however,  has  furnished  apparent  proof  that  glycerin  acts 
as  a  direct  glycogen  or  sugar-former.  When  fed,  especially  in  the 
diabetic  condition,  it  causes  an  increase  in  the  sugar  which  can  not 
be  explained  as  a  result  of  proteid  metabolism.  Since  in  the  body 
neutral  fats  are  normally  split  into  glycerin  and  fatty  acid,  the  fact 
that  glycerin  can  be  converted  to  sugar  seems  to  carry  with  it  the 
admission  that  fats  may  contribute  directly  to  sugar  production. 
Whether  the  synthesis  of  sugar  (or  glycogen)  from  glycerin  is, 
so  to  speak,  a  normal  process  or  occurs  only  under  especial  condi- 
tions, can  not  be  decided  at  present. 

The  Function  of  Glycogen — Glycogenic  Theory. — ^The  mean- 
ing of  the  formation  of  glycogen  in  the  liver  has  been,  and  still  is, 
the  subject  of  discussion.     The  view  advanced  first  by  Bernard  is 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE    LIVER   AND    SPLEEN.  735 

perhaps  most  generally  accepted.  According  to  Bernard,  glycogen 
forms  a  temporary  reserve  supply  of  carbohydrate  material  that  is 
laid  up  in  the  liver  during  digestion  and  is  gradually  made  use  of  in 
the  intervals  between  meals.  During  digestion  the  carbohydrate 
food  is  absorbed  into  the  blood  of  the  portal  system  as  dextrose  or  as 
dextrose,  levulose,  and  galactose.  If  these  sugars  passed  through 
the  liver  unchanged,  the  contents  of  the  systemic  blood  in  sugar 
would  be  increased  perceptibly.  It  is  now  known  that  when  the 
percentage  of  sugar  in  the  blood  rises  above  a  certain  normal  limit 
(condition  of  hyperglycemia),  the  excess  is  excreted  through  the 
kidney  and  is  lost.  But  as  the  blood  from  the  digestive  organs 
passes  through  the  liver  the  excess  of  sugar  is  abstracted  by  the 
hver  cells,  is  dehydrated  to  make  glycogen,  and  is  retained  in 
the  cells  in  this  form  for  a  short  period.  From  time  to  time 
the  glycogen  is  reconverted  into  sugar  (dextrose)  and  is  given  off  to 
the  blood.  By  this  means  the  percentage  of  sugar  in  the  systemic 
blood  is  kept  nearly  constant  (0.1  to  0.2  per  cent.)  and  within  limits 
best  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  tissues.  The  great  importance  of  the 
formation  of  glycogen  and  the  consequent  conservation  of  the  sugar 
supply  of  the  tissues  is  evident  when  we  consider  the  nutritive  value 
of  carbohydrate  food.  Carbohydrates  form  the  bulk  of  our  usual 
diet,  and  the  proper  regulation  of  the  supply  to  the  tissues  is,  there- 
fore, of  vital  importance  in  the  maintenance  of  a  normal,  healthy 
condition.  The  second  part  of  this  theory,  which  holds  that  the 
glycogen  is  reconverted  to  dextrose,  is  supported  by  observations 
upon  livers  removed  from  the  body.  It  has  been  found  that  shortly 
after  the  removal  of  the  liver  the  supply  of  glycogen  begins  to  dis- 
appear and  a  corresponding  increase  in  dextrose  occurs.  Within  a 
comparatively  short  time  all  the  glycogen  is  gone  and  only  dextrose 
is  found.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  in  the  estimation  of  glycogen  in  the 
liver  it  is  necessary  to  mince  the  organ  and  to  throw  it  into  boiling 
water  as  quickly  as  possible,  since  by  this  means  the  liver  cells  are 
killed  and  the  conversion  of  the  glycogen  is  stopped.  How  the  gly- 
cogen is  changed  to  dextrose  by  the  liver  is  a  matter  not  fully  ex- 
plained. According  to  most  authors,  the  conversion  is  due  to  an 
enzyme  produced  in  the  liver.  Extracts  of  liver,  as  of  some  other 
tissues,  yield  a  diastatic  enzyme  that  changes  glycogen  to  dextrose.* 
It  is  probable,  therefore,  that  the  normal  conversion  of  glycogen  to 
dextrose  is  effected  by  a  special  enzyme  produced  in  the  liver  cells. 
In  this  description  of  the  origin  and  meaning  of  the  liver  glycogen 
reference  has  been  made  only  to  the  glycogen  derived  directly  from 
digested  carbohydrates.  The  glycogen  derived  from  proteid  foods, 
once  it  is  formed  in  the  liver,  has,  of  course,  the  same  functions  to 
fulfill.  It  is  converted  into  sugar,  and  eventually  is  oxidized  in 
*Tebb,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  22,  423,  1897-98. 


736  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

the  tissues.  For  the  sake  of  completeness  it  may  be  well  to  add 
that  some  of  the  sugar  of  the  blood  formed  from  the  glycogen  may 
under  certain  conditions  be  converted  into  fat  in  the  adipose  tissues, 
instead  of  l^eing  burnt,  and  in  this  way  it  may  be  retained  in  the 
body  as  a  reserve  supply  of  food  of  a  more  stable  character. 

Glycogen  in  the  Muscles  and  other  Tissues. — The  history  of 
glycogen  is  not  complete  without  some  reference  to  its  occurrence  in 
the  muscles.  Glycogen  is,  in  fact,  found  in  various  places  in  the  body, 
and  is  widely  distributed  throughout  the  animal  kingdom.  It  occurs, 
for  example,  in  leucocj^tes,  in  the  placenta,  in  the  rapidly  growing 
tissues  of  the  embryo,  and  in  considerable  abundance  in  the  oyster 
and  other  molluscs.  But  in  our  bodies  and  in  those  of  the  mammals 
generally  the  most  significant  occurrence  of  glycogen,  outside  the 
liver,  is  in  the  voluntar}^  muscles,  of  which  glycogen  forms  a  normal 
constituent.  It  has  been  estimated  that  the  percentage  of  glycogen 
in  resting  muscle  varies  from  0.5  to  0.9  per  cent.,  and  that  in  the 
musculature  of  the  whole  body  there  may  be  contained  an  amount 
of  glycogen  ecjual  to  that  in  the  liver  itself.  Apparently  muscular 
tissue,  as  well  as  liver  tissue,  has  a  glycogenetic  function — that  is, 
it  is  capable  of  laying  up  a  supply  of  glycogen  from  the  sugar  brought 
to  it  by  the  blood.  The  glycogenetic  function  of  muscle  has  been 
demonstrated  directly  by  Kulz,*  who  has  shown  that  an  isolated 
muscle  irrigated  with  an  artificial  suppl}^  of  blood  to  which  dextrose 
is  added  is  capable  of  changing  the  dextrose  to  glycogen,  as  shown 
by  the  increase  in  the  latter  substance  in  the  muscle  after  irriga- 
tion. Muscle  glycogen  is  to  be  looked  upon  as  a  temporary  and 
local  reserve  supply  of  material;  so  that,  while  we  have  in  the 
liver  a  large  general  depot  for  the  temporary  storage  of  glycogen  for 
the  use  of  the  bod.v  at  large,  the  nmscular  tissue,  which,  considering 
its  bulk,  is  the  most  active  tissue  of  the  body  from  the  standpoint 
of  energy  production,  is  also  capable  of  laying  up  in  the  form  of 
glycogen  any  excess  of  sugar  brought  to  it.  The  fact  that  glycogen 
occurs  so  widely  in  the  rapidly  growing  cells  of  embryos  indicates 
that  this  glycogenetic  function  may  at  times  be  exercised  by  any 
tissue. 

Conditions  Affecting  the  Supply  of  Glycogen  in  Muscle  and 
Liver. — In  accordance  wath  the  view  given  above  of  the  general  value 
of  glycogen — ^namely,  that  it  is  a  temporar}^  reserve  supply  of 
carbohydrate  material  that  may  be  rapidly  converted  to  sugar  and 
oxidized  with  the  liberation  of  energy — it  is  found  that  the  supply 
of  glycogen  is  greatly  affected  by  conditions  calling  for  increased 
metabolism  in  the  body.  Muscular  exercise  quickly  exhausts  the 
supply  of  muscle  and  liver  glycogen,  provided  it  is  not  renewed 
by  new  food.  In  a  starving  animal  glycogen  finally  disappears, 
*  "Zeitschrift  f.  Biologie, "  27,  237,   1890. 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    LIVER    AND    SPLEEN.  737 

except  perhaps  in  traces,  but  this  disappearance  occurs  much 
sooner  if  the  animal  is  made  to  use  its  muscles  at  the  same  time.  It 
has  been  shown  also  by  Morat  and  Dufourt  that,  if  a  muscle  has  been 
made  to  contract  vigorously,  it  takes  up  much  more  sugar  from 
an  artificial  supply  of  blood  sent  through  it  than  a  similar  muscle 
which  has  been  resting;  on  the  other  hand,  it  has  been  found  that  if 
the  nerve  of  one  leg  is  cut  so  as  to  paralyze  the  muscles  of  that  side  of 
the  body,  the  amount  of  glycogen  is  greater  in  these  muscles  than  in 
those  of  the  other  leg  that  have  been  contracting  meantime  and  using 
up  their  glycogen.  The  further  history  of  glycogen  is  considered  in 
the  section  on  nutrition. 

Formation  of  Urea  in  the  Liver. — ^The  nitrogen  contained  in 
the  proteid  material  of  our  food  is  finally  eliminated,  after  the  metab- 
olism of  the  proteid  is  completed,  mainly  in  the  form  of  urea.  It 
has  been  definitively  proved  that  the  urea  is  not  formed  in  the  kidneys, 
the  organs  that  eliminate  it.  It  has  long  been  considered  a  matter 
of  the  greatest  importance  to  ascertain  in  what  organ  or  tissues  urea 
is  formed.  Investigations  have  gone  so  far  as  to  demonstrate  that 
it  arises  in  part  at  least  in  the  liver;  hence  the  property  of  forming 
urea  must  be  added  to  the  other  important  functions  of  the  liver  cell. 
Schr5der  *  performed  a  number  of  experiments  in  which  the  liver  was 
taken  from  a  freshly  killed  dog  and  irrigated  through  its  blood- 
vessels with  a  supply  of  blood  obtained  from  another  dog.  If  the 
supply  of  blood  was  taken  from  a  fasting  animal,  then  circulating 
it  through  the  isolated  liver  was  not  followed  by  any  increase  in 
the  amount  of  urea  contained  in  it.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  blood  was 
obtained  from  a  well-fed  dog,  the  amount  of  urea  contained  in  it  was 
distinctly  increased  by  passing  it  through  the  liver,  thus  indicating 
that  the  blood  of  an  animal  after  digestion  contains  something  that 
the  liver  can  convert  to  urea.  It  is  to  be  noted,  moreover,  that  this 
power  is  not  possessed  by  all  the  organs,  since  blood  from  well-fed 
animals  showed  no  increase  in  urea  after  being  circulated  through  an 
isolated  kidney  or  muscle.  As  further  proof  of  the  urea-forming 
power  of  the  liver  Schroder  found  that  if  ammonium  carbonate  was 
added  to  the  blood  circulating  through  the  liver — to  that  from  the 
fasting  as  well  as  from  the  well-nourished  animal — a  very  decided 
increase  in  the  urea  was  always  obtained.  It  follows  from  the  last 
experiment  that  the  liver  cells  are  able  to  convert  carbonate  of 
ammonium  into  urea.  The  reaction  may  be  expressed  by  the  equa- 
tion (NHJ2CO3  —  2H2O  =  CON2H4.  Schondorfft  in  some  later  work 
showed  that  if  the  blood  of  a  fasting  dog  is  irrigated  through  the  hind 
legs  of  a  well-nourished  animal,  no  increase  in  urea  in  the  blood  can 

*"Archiv  f.  experimentelle  Pathologie  und  Pharmakologie, "  15,  364, 
1882,  and  19,  373,  1885. 

t  "  Pfliiger's  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologic, "  54,  420,  1893. 
47 


738  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

be  detected ;  but  if  the  blood,  after  irrigation  through  the  hind  legs, 
is  subsequently  passed  through  the  liver,  a  marked  increase  in  urea 
results.  Obviously,  the  blood  in  this  experiment  derives  something 
from  the  tissues  of  the  leg  which  the  tissues  themselves  can  not 
convert  to  urea,  but  which  the  liver  cells  can.  Finally,  in  some 
remarkable  experiments  upon  dogs  made  by  four  investigators 
(Hahn,  Massen,  Nencki,  and  Pawlow),  which  are  described  more  fully 
in  the  next  chapter,  it  was  shown  that  when  the  liver  is  practically 
destroyed  there  is  a  distinct  diminution  in  the  urea  of  the  urine.  In 
birds  uric  acid  takes  the  place  of  urea  as  the  main  nitrogenous  ex- 
cretion of  the  body,  and  Minkowski  has  shown  that  in  them  removal 
of  the  liver  is  followed  by  an  important  diminution  in  the  amount  of 
uric  acid  excreted.  From  experiments  such  as  these  it  is  safe  to 
conclude  that  urea  is  formed  in  the  liver  and  is  then  given  to  the  blood 
and  excreted  by  the  kidney.  In  treating  of  the  physiological  history 
of  urea  an  account  will  be  given  of  the  views  proposed  with  regard  to 
the  antecedent  substance  or  substances  from  which  the  liver  produces 
urea. 

Physiology  of  the  Spleen. — Much  has  been  said  and  written 
about  the  spleen,  but  we  are  yet  in  the  dark  as  to  the  distinctive 
function  or  functions  of  this  organ.  The  few  facts  that  are  known 
may  be  stated  briefly  without  going  into  the  details  of  theories  that 
have  been  offered  at  one  time  or  another.  The  older  experimenters 
demonstrated  that  this  organ  may  be  removed  from  the  body  without 
serious  injury  to  the  animal.  An  increase  in  the  size  of  the  lymph- 
glands  and  of  the  bone-marrow  has  been  stated  to  occur  after  ex- 
tirpation; but  this  is  denied  by  others,  and,  whether  true  or  not,  it 
gives  but  little  clue  to  the  normal  functions  of  the  spleen.  Some 
observers*  find  that  the  removal  of  the  spleen  causes  a  marked 
diminution  in  the  number  of  red  corpuscles  and  the  quantity  of 
hemoglobin.  They  infer,  therefore,  that  the  spleen  is  normally 
concerned  in  some  way  in  the  formation  of  red  corpuscles.  Others, 
however,  report  with  equal  positiveness  that  removal  of  the  spleen 
has  no  effect  upon  the  number  of  red  corpuscles  or  upon  the  power  of 
the  animal  to  regenerate  its  corpuscles  after  hemorrhage.!  The 
most  definite  facts  known  about  the  spleen  are  in  connection  with  its 
movements.  It  has  been  shown  that  there  is  a  slow  expansion  and 
contraction  of  the  organ  synchronous  with  the  digestion  periods. 
After  a  meal  the  spleen  begins  to  increase  in  size,  reaching  a  maximum 
at  about  the  fifth  hour,  and  then  slowly  returns  to  its  previous  size. 
This  movement,  the  meaning  of  which  is  not  known,  is  probably  due 
to  a  slow  vasodilatation,  together,  perhaps,  with  a  relaxation  of  the 
tonic  contraction  of  the  musculature  of  the  trabeculae.     In  addition 

*  Laudenbach,  "  Centralblatt  fiir  Physiologie, "  9,  1,  1895. 

t  Paton,  GuUand,  and  Fowler,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  28,  83,  1902. 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    LIVER    AND    SPLEEN.  739 

to  this  slow  movement,  Roy*  has  shown  that  there  is  a  rhythmical 
contraction  and  relaxation  of  the  organ,  occurring  in  cats  and  dogs 
at  intervals  of  about  one  minute.  Roy  supposes  that  these  con- 
tractions are  effected  through  the  intrinsic  musculature  of  the  organ, 
— that  is,  the  plain  muscle  tissue  present  in  the  capsule  and  trabeculse, 
— and  he  believes  that  the  contractions  serve  to  keep  up  a  circulation 
through  the  spleen  and  to  make  its  vascular  supply  more  or  less 
independent  of  variations  in  general  arterial  pressure.  The  fact 
that  there  is  a  special  local  arrangement  for  maintaining  its  cir- 
culation makes  the  spleen  unique  among  the  organs  of  the  body,  but 
no  light  is  thrown  upon  the  nature  of  the  function  fulfilled.  The 
spleen  is  supplied  richly  with  motor  nerve  fibers  which  when  stimu- 
lated either  directly  or  reflexly  cause  the  organ  to  diminish  in 
volmne.  According  to  Schaefer,*  these  fibers  are  contained  in  the 
splanchnic  nerves,  which  carry  also  inhibitory  fibers  whose  stimu- 
lation produces  a  dilatation  of  the  spleen. 

The  chemical  composition  of  the  spleen  is  complicated,  but  sug- 
gestive. Its  mineral  constituents  are  characterized  by  a  large 
percentage  of  iron,  which  seems  to  be  present  as  an  organic  compound 
of  some  kind.  Analysis  shows  also  the  presence  of  a  number  of  fatty 
acids,  fats,  cholesterin,  and,  what  is  perhaps  more  noteworthy,  a 
number  of  nitrogenous  extractives  belonging  to  the  group  of  purin 
bases,  such  as  xanthin,  hypoxanthin,  adenin,  guanin,  and  uric  acid. 
The  presence  of  these  bodies  seems  to  indicate  that  active  metabolic 
changes  of  some  kind  occur  in  the  spleen.  As  to  the  theories  of  the 
splenic  functions,  the  following  may  be  mentioned:  (1)  The  spleen 
has  been  supposed  to  give  rise  to  new  red  corpuscles.  This  it  un- 
doubtedly does  during  fetal  life  and  shortly  after  birth,  and  in  some 
animals  throughout  life,  but  there  is  no  reliable  evidence  that  the 
function  is  retained  in  adult  life  in  man  or  in  most  of  the  mammals. 
(2)  It  has  been  supposed  to  be  an  organ  for  the  destruction  of  red 
corpuscles.  This  view  is  founded  chiefly  on  microscopical  evidence 
according  to  which  certain  large  ameboid  cells  in  the  spleen  ingest 
and  destroy  the  old  red  corpuscles,  and  partly  upon  the  fact  that  the 
spleen  tissue  seems  to  be  rich  in  an  iron-containing  compound.  This 
theory  can  not  be  considered  at  present  as  satisfactorily  demon- 
strated. (3)  It  has  been  suggested  that  the  spleen  is  concerned  in 
the  production  of  uric  acid.  This  substance  is  found  in  the  spleen, 
as  stated  above,  and  it  has  been  shown  by  Horbaczewsky  that  the 
spleen  contains  a  substance  from  which  uric  acid  or  xanthin  may 
readily  be  formed ;  but  further  investigation  has  shown  that  the  same 
substance  is  found  in  lymphoid  tissue  generally.  If,  therefore,  uric 
acid  is  produced  in  the  spleen,  it  probabl}'  originates  in  the  large 

*  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  3,  203,  1881. 
t  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  20,  1,  1896. 


740  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION    AND    SECRETION. 

amount  of  lymphoid  tissue  contained  in  it,  and  is  not  a  product  char- 
acteristic of  the  splenic  tissue  proper.  In  this  connection  it  may  be 
stated  that  Jones*  has  demonstrated  the  existence  in  the  spleen  of  an 
enzyme,  adenase,  which  converts  adenin,  C5H3N4NH2,  into  hypoxan- 
thin,  C5H3N4OH.  The  Ij^mphoid  tissue  of  the  spleen  must  also 
possess  the  property  of  producing  lymphocytes,  since,  according  to 
the  general  view,  these  corpuscles  are  formed  in  lymphoid  tissue 
generally  wherever  the  so-called  "  germ-centers "  occur.  (4)  Lastly, 
a  theory  has  been  supported  by  Schiff  and  Herzen,  according  to 
which  the  spleen  produces  something  (an  enzyme)  which,  when 
carried  in  the  blood  to  the  pancreas,  acts  upon  the  trypsinogen  con- 
tained in  this  gland,  converting  it  into  trypsin.  This  view  has  been 
corroborated  by  a  number  of  observers,  but  it  is  difficult  at  present 
to  decide  whether  such  an  action  occurs  normally  during  digestion. 
As  alread}^  stated,  the  general  testimonv  at  present  indicates  that 
the  pancreatic  juice  when  secreted  contains  its  trypsin  in  inactive 
form.  It  is  activated  only  after  reaching  the  duodenum  under  the 
influence  of  the  enterokinase. 
*  Jones  and  Winternitz,  "  Zeitschrift,  f.  physiol.  Chemie, "  44,  1,  1905. 


CHAPTER  XLV. 


THE  KIDNEY  AND  SKIN  AS  EXCRETORY  ORGANS. 

Structure  of  the  Kidney. — ^The  kidney  is  a  compound  tubular 
gland.  The  uriniferous  tubules  composing  it  may  be  roughly 
separated  into  a  secreting  part  comprising  the  capsule,  convoluted 
tubes,  and  loop  of  Henle,  and  a  collecting  part,  the  so-called  straight 
or  collecting  tube,  the  epithelium  of  wKich  is  assumed  not  to 
have  any  secretory  function.  Within  the  secreting  part  the  epithe- 
lium differs  greatly  in  character  in  different  regions ;  its  peculiarities 
may  be  referred  to  briefly  here  so  far  as  they  seem  to  have  a  physio- 


Fig.  265. — Portions  of  the  various  divisions  of  the  uriniferous  tubules  drawn  from 
sections  of  human  kidney:  A,  Malpighian  body;  x,  squamous  epitheUum  lining  the  cap- 
sule and  reflected  over  the  glomerulus ;  y,  z,  afferent  and  efferent  vessels  of  the  tuft ;  e, 
nuclei  of  capillaries;  ?i,  constricted  neck  marking  passage  of  capsule  into  convoluted  tu- 
bule; B,  proximal  convoluted  tubule;  C,  irregular  tubule:  D  and  F,  spiral  tubules;  E, 
ascending  limb  of  Henle's  loop;    G,  straight  collecting  tubule. —  (Piersol.) 

logical  bearing,  although  for  a  complete  description  reference  must 
be  made  to  works  on  histology. 

The  arrangement  of  the  glandular  epithelium  in  the  capsule  with 
reference  to  the  blood-vessels  of  the  glomerulus  is  worthy  of  special 
attention.  It  will  be  remembered  that  each  Malpighian  corpuscle  con- 
sists of  two  principal  parts,  a  tuft  of  blood-vessels,  the  glomerulus,  and 
an  enveloping  expansion  of  the  uriniferous  tubule,  the  capsule.  The 
glomerulus  is  an  interesting  structure  (see  Fig.  265,  A).    It  consists 

741 


742  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION    AND    SECRETION. 

of  a  small  afferent  artery  which  after  entering  the  glomerulus,  breaks 
up  into  a  number  of  capillaries.  These  capillaries,  although  twisted 
together,  do  not  anastomose,  and  they  unite  to  form  a  single  efferent 
vein  of  a  smaller  diameter  than  the  afferent  artery.  The  whole 
structure,  therefore,  is  not  an  ordinary  capillary  area,  but  a  rete 
mirabile,  and  the  physical  factors  are  such  that  within  the  capil- 
laries of  the  rete  there  must  be  a  greatly  diminished  velocity  of  the 
blood-stream,  owing  to  the  great  increase  in  the  width  of  the  stream 
bed,  and  a  high  blood-pressure  as  compared  with  ordinary  capil- 
laries. Surrounding  this  glomerulus  is  the  double-walled  capsule. 
One  wall  of  the  capsule  is  closely  adherent  to  the  capillaries  of  the 
glomerulus;  it  not  only  covers  the  structure  closely,  but  dips  into 
the  interior  between  the  small  lobules  into  which  the  glomerulus  is 
divided.  This  layer  of  the  capsule  is  composed  of  flattened,  endo- 
thelial-like  cells,  the  glomerular  epithelium,  to  which  great  impor- 
tance is  attached  in  the  formation  of  the  secretion.  It  will  be  no- 
ticed that  between  the  interior  of  the  blood-vessels  of  the  glomerulus 
and  the  cavity  of  the  capsule,  which  is  the  beginning  of  the  urin- 
iferous  tubule,  there  are  interposed  only  two  very  thin  layers, — 
namely,  the  epithelium  of  the  capillary  wall  and  the  glomerular 
epithelium.  The  apparatus  would  seem  to  afford  most  favorable 
conditions  for  filtration  of  the  liquid  parts  of  the  blood.  The  epi- 
thelium clothing  the  convoluted  portions  of  the  tubule,  including 
under  this  designation  the  so-called  irregular  and  spiral  portions 
and  the  loop  of  Henle,  is  of  a  character  quite  different  from  that  of 
the  glomerular  epitheUum  (Fig.  265,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  G).  The  cells, 
speaking  generally,  are  cuboidal  or  C3'lindrical,  protoplasmic,  and 
granular  in  appearance;  on  the  side  toward  the  basement  mem- 
brane they  often  show  a  peculiar  striation,  while  on  the  lumen  side 
the  extreme  periphery  presents  a  compact  border  which  in  some 
cases  shows  a  cilia-like  striation.  These  cells  have  the  general 
appearance  of  an  active  secretory  epithelium,  and  one  theory  of 
urinary  secretion  attributes  this  function  to  them. 

The  Secretion  of  Urine. — ^The  kidneys  receive  a  rich  supply 
of  nerve  fibers,  but  most  histologists  have  been  unable  to  trace  any 
connection  between  these  fibers  and  the  epithelial  cells  of  the  kidney 
tubules. 

The  majority  of  purely  physiological  experiments  upon  direct 
stimulation  of  the  nerves  going  to  the  kidney  are  adverse  to  the 
theory  of  secretory  fibers,  the  marked  effects  obtained  in  these  ex- 
periments being  all  explicable  by  the  changes  produced  in  the  blood- 
flow  through  the  organ.  Two  general  theories  of  urinar}-'  secretion 
have  been  proposed.  Ludwig  held  that  the  urine  is  formed  by  the 
simple  physical  processes  of  filtration  and  diffusion.  In  the  glom- 
eruli the  conditions  are  most  favorable  to  filtration,  and  he  sup- 


KIDNEY    AND    SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY    ORGANS.  743 

posed  that  in  these  structures  water  filtered  through  from  the  l^lood, 
carrying  with  it  not  only  the  inorganic  salts,  but  also  the  specific 
elements  (urea,  etc.)  of  the  secretion.  There  was  thus  formed  at 
the  beginning  of  the  uriniferous  tubules  a  complete  but  diluted 
urine,  and  in  the  subsecjuent  passage  of  this  liquid  along  the  con- 
voluted tubes  it  became  concentrated  by  diffusion  with  the  more 
concentrated  lymph  surrounding  the  outside  of  the  tubules. 

Bowman's  theory  of  urinary  secretion,  which  has  since  been 
vigorously  supported  and  extended  by  Heidenhain,  was  based  orig- 
inally mainly  on  histological  grounds.  It  assumes  that  in  the 
glomeruli  water  and  inorganic  salts  are  produced,  while  the  urea 
and  related  bodies  are  eliminated  through  the  activity  of  the  epi- 
thelial cells  in  the  convoluted  tubes. 

The  first  of  these  theories  (Ludwig)  is  sometimes  spoken  of  as 
the  mechanical  theory,  since  as  originally  proposed  it  attempted 
to  explain  the  formation  and  composition  of  the  urine  by  reference 
only  to  the  physical  forces  of  filtration  and  diffusion.  Adherents 
of  tliis  view  in  recent  years  have  modified  it,  however,  to  the  extent 
that  the  absorption  supposed  to  take  place  in  the  convoluted  tubules 
is  designated  as  a  selective  absorption,  or  selective  diffusion,  the 
characteristics  of  which  depend  upon  unknown  peculiarities  of  struc- 
ture in  the  epithelial  cell,  so  that  it  is  no  longer  a  purely  mechanical 
theory.  The  difference  between  the  Ludwig  and  the  Bowman 
theories  may  be  stated  briefly  in  this  way.  The  former  assimies  that 
in  the  glomerulus  all  of  the  constituents  of  the  urine  are  produced 
from  the  blood,  probably  by  filtration,  and  that  the  function  of  the 
epithelium  lining  the  convoluted  tubules  is  absorptive,  like  the 
epithelium  of  the  intestines,  and  not  secretory.  The  Bowman  view 
as  formulated  by  Heidenhain  teaches  that  the  glomerular  epithe- 
lium forms  the  water  and  salts  of  the  urine  by  an  act  of  secretion, 
the  ultimate  chemistry  or  physics  of  which  is  not  known,  but  which 
implies  that  the  epithehal  cells  participate  in  the  process  and  do 
not  act  simply  as  a  passive  membrane.  The  cells  of  the  convoluted 
tubules  are  also  secretor}^,  their  special  activity  being  limited  mainly 
to  the  organic  constituents,  urea,  etc.,  although,  in  this  respect, — 
namely,  in  the  precise  cUstinction  between  the  secretory  products  of 
the  glomerular  epithelium  and  those  of  the  convoluted  tubules, — 
the  theory  is  not  very  explicit.  Much  interest  and  a  large  literature 
have  been  stimulated  by  the  controversies  between  these  theories, 
and  to-day  the  facts  accumulated  are  not  such  as  to  demonstrate 
conclusively  one  view  or  the  other,  although,  on  the  whole,  perhaps, 
it  may  be  said  that  the  majority  of  physiologists  adhere  to  the 
more  conservative  view  of  Bowman-Heidenhain  to  the  extent  at 
least  of  recognizing  that  the  physical  laws  of  filtration,  diffusion, 
and  inhibition,  so  far  as  they  are  known,  do  not  suffice  for  a  satis- 


744  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

factory  explanation  of  the  facts.  As  in  similar  cases,  our  knowl- 
edge of  the  physical  structure  and  chemical  properties  of  the  wall 
of  living  cells  is  still  very  deficient,  and  it  seems  necessary  to  desig- 
nate the  activities  of  this  wall  by  the  indefinite  term  secretion. 

Function  of  the  Glomerulus. — ^As  stated  above,  the  structure 
of  the  glomerulus  is  peculiar  and  suggestive  of  a  special  adaptation. 
Ludwig's  theory  looks  upon  it  as  a  filter,  the  pressure  of  the  blood 
in  the  glomerular  capillaries  driving  the  water  and  salts  through 
the  endothelium  of  the  capillaries  and  the  glomerular  epithe- 
lium into  the  cavity  of  the  urinary  tubule.  If  we  consider 
only  the  water  and  assume  that  the  membranes  traversed  are  freely 
permeable  to  its  molecules,  then  it  is  evident  that,  upon  this  theory, 
the  quantity  of  urine  formed  will  depend  upon  the  filtration  pres- 
sure, and  that  this  filtration  pressure  can  be  expressed  by  the  formula 
F=P — f,  in  which  P  represents  the  blood-pressure  in  the  glom- 
erular capillaries  and  p  the  pressure  of  the  urine  in  the  capsular 
end  of  the  uriniferous  tubules.  Some  of  the  interesting  facts  de- 
veloped by  experiment  may  be  presented  in  connection  with  this 
formula.  According  to  the  mechanical  theory,  the  amount  of  urine 
formed  should  vary  directly  with  P  and  inversely  with  y>.  The 
factor  P  may  be  increased  in  two  general  waj^s:  First,  by  those 
changes  which  raise  general  arterial  pressure  and  therefore  the 
pressure  in  the  renal  arteries, — such  changes,  for  instance^  as  are 
brought  about  by  an  increased  force  of  heart  beat  or  a  large  vaso- 
constriction. Second,  by  obstructing  or  occluding  the  renal  veins. 
Experiments  have  been  made  along  these  lines.  With  regard  to 
the  first  possibility  it  has  been  found  in  general  that  raising  arterial 
pressure  increases  the  quantity  of  urine  if  the  means  used  are  such 
as  may  be  assumed  to  raise  the  pressure  in  the  glomerular  capillaries. 

The  reverse  experiment,  however,  of  raising  P  by  blocking  the 
venous  outflow  fails  entirely  to  support  the  theory.  When  the  renal 
veins  are  compressed  the  capillary  pressure  in  the  glomeruli  must 
be  increased,  and,  if  the  veins  are  blocked  entirely,  we  may  suppose 
that  the  capillary  pressure  is  raised  to  the  level  of  that  of  the  renal 
arteries.  In  such  experiments,  however,  the  flow  of  urine  is  di- 
minished instead  of  being  increased,  and  indeed  may  be  stopped 
altogether  when  the  veins  are  completely  blocked.  The  adherents  of 
the  Ludwig  theory  have  attempted  to  explain  this  unfavorable 
result  by  assuming  that  the  swollen  interlobular  veins  press  upon 
and  block  the  uriniferous  tubules.  According  to  the  antagonistic 
theory  of  Heiclenhain,  blocking  the  veins  suppresses  the  secretory 
activity  of  the  glomerular  epithelium  by  depriving  it  of  oxygen  and 
the  chance  for  removal  of  CO 2, — that  is,  by  producing  local  as- 
phyxia. The  latter  explanation  seems  the  simpler  of  the  two,  and  it 
is  very  strongly  supported  by  the  opposite  experiment  of  clamping 


KIDNEY   AND    SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY    ORGANS.  745 

the  renal  artery.  When  this  is  done  the  blood-flow  through  the 
kidney  ceases  and  the  secretion  of  urine  also  stops,  as  would  be 
expected.  But  when  after  a  few  minutes'  closure  the  artery  is  un- 
damped, the  secretion  is  not  restored  with  the  return  of  the  cir- 
culation. On  the  contrary,  a  long  time  (as  much  as  an  hour  or  more) 
may  elapse  before  the  secretion  begins.  This  fact  is  quite  in  harmom' 
with  the  Heidenhain  theory,  since  complete  removal  of  their  blood 
supply  might  well  result  in  a  long-continued  injury  to  the  delicate 
epithelial  cells.  On  the  mechanical  theory,  however,  we  should 
expect  the  contrary.  Injury  to  the  cells  should  be  followed  by 
greater  permeability  and  an  increased  filtration,  as  is  found  to  be 
the  case  with  the  production  of  lymph.  These  two  experiments, 
blocking  the  renal  artery  and  the  renal  vein,  seem  at  present  to  dis- 
credit the  filtration  theory  and  to  support  the  secretion  theory. 
If  we  accept  this  latter  theory  it  may  be  asked  how  it  agrees  with 
the  experiments  mentioned  above  upon  the  variations  in  capillary 
pressure  brought  about  otherwise  than  by  obstructing  the  venous 
outflow.  Heidenhain  has  emphasized  the  fact  that  all  of  these  ex- 
periments involve  not  only  a  variation  in  capillary  pressure,  but  also 
in  the  blood-flow,  and  that  it  is  open  to  us  to  suppose  that  the 
effect  upon  the  secretion  of  urine  is  dependent  upon  the  rate  of  flow 
rather  than  upon  the  capillary  pressure.  If  we  adopt  this  expla- 
nation we  are  led  again  to  the  secretion  hypothesis.  Mere  rate  of 
flow  should  not  influence  filtration,  but  might  affect  secretion,  since 
it  would  alter  the  composition  of  the  blood  flowing  through  the 
glomeruli  and  also  the  amount  of  oxygen  and  carbon  dioxid.  An 
important  fact,  which  seems  at  first  sight  to  show  a  direct  influence 
of  pressure,  is  that  when  general  arterial  pressure  falls  below  a  cer- 
tain point,  about  40  mms.  of  mercury,  the  secretion  of  urine  ceases 
altogether.  Such  a  condition  may  be  brought  about  by  surgical 
shock,  by  hemorrhage,  or  by  section  of  the  spinal  cord  in  the  cer- 
vical or  thoracic  region.  But  here  again  the  great  vascular  dila- 
tation causing  this  fall  of  pressure  is  associated  with  a  feeble  cir- 
culation, and  the  effect  upon  the  kidney  secretion  may  well  be  due 
to  this  latter  factor. 

In  addition  to  varydng  the  factor  P  in  the  formula  given  abo^'e, 
it  is  possible  also  to  increase  the  factor  p.  Normally  the  pressure 
of  the  urine  in  the  capsule  must  be  very  low,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
the  secretion  drains  away  as  rapidly  as  it  is  formed.  If  the  ureter 
is  occluded,  however,  the  pressure  of  the  urine  will  increase,  and  the 
filtration  pressure  P  —  p  will  diminish.  When  this  experiment  is 
performed  and  the  pressure  in  the  ureter  is  measured  by  a  manom- 
eter, it  is  found  to  rise  to  50  or  60  mms.  of  mercurj^  and  then  to 
remain  stationary.  This  fact  might  be  explained  by  supposing 
that  when  p  =  P  the  secretion  stops  on  account  of  the  failure  of 


746  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION    AND    SECRETION. 

the  filtration  pressure.  Little  weight,  however,  can  be  given  to 
this  argument,  since  it  is  quite  possible  that  under  these  condi- 
tions the  urine  may  still  continue  to  form,  but  be  reabsorbed  under 
the  high  tension  reached.  The  experiment  simply  serves  to  show 
the  secretion  pressure  of  the  urine,  and  the  fact  that  this  pressure 
rises  as  high  as  50  to  60  mms.  mercury,  while  the  capillary  pressure 
is  probably  somewhat  lower,  would  rather  serve  as  an  argument 
against  the  filtration  theory.  Exact  figures,  however,  regard- 
ing the  capillary  pressure  in  the  kidney  can  not  be  obtained;  so 
that  the  experiment,  on  the  whole,  gives  us  no  satisfactory  in- 
formation regarding  the  theory  of  secretion.  Dreser  has  used  a 
different  argument  to  prove  that  the  production  of  the  water  in- 
volves the  performance  of  work  on  the  part  of  the  epithelial  cells. 
He  points  out  that  in  some  conditions — e.  g.,  after  drinking  beer — 
the  urine  may  be  very  dilute,  as  shown  by  the  fact  that  its  freezing 
point  may  be  only  0.18°  C.  or  0.16°  C.  below  that  of  pure  water, — 
that  is,  A  =  —0.18°  C.  or  —0.16°  C.  (see  appendix).  Since  blood- 
serum  has  A  =  — 0.56°  C,  the  difference  in  concentration  between 
the  blood  and  the  urine  in  such  a  case  of  extreme  dilution  shows  an 
osmotic  pressure  in  favor  of  the  blood  equivalent  to  A  =  — 0.4°  C. 
Measured  in  mechanical  units,  this  would  indicate  an  initial  osmotic 
pressure  of  49.08  meters  of  water  tending  to  drive  the  water  from 
the  uriniferous  tubules  into  the  blood,  whereas  the  filtration  pres- 
sure driving  the  water  in  the  other  direction  could  not  at  a  max- 
imum exceed  2.72  meters  of  water.  If  this  argument  is  vahd,  the 
elimination  of  the  water  takes  place  against  a  strong  opposing  os- 
motic pressure,  and  the  energy  necessary  for  its  secretion  can  be 
referred  only  to  the  activity  of  the  epithelial  cells. 

Function  of  the  Convoluted  Tubule. — By  the  term  convoluted 
tubule  is  meant  here  the  entire  stretch  from  the  glomerulus  to  the 
straight  tubules.  Its  epithelium  varies  in  character;  its  cells  are 
distinguished  in  general,  as  contrasted  with  the  glomerular  epithe- 
lium, by  a  relatively  large  amount  of  granular  protoplasm.  The 
question  of  interest  at  present  in  regard  to  this  epitheliiun  is  whether 
it  is  secretory  or  absorptive.  The  original  view  of  Ludwig  that 
diffusion  takes  place  in  these  tubules  between  the  urine  and  the 
blood  (lymph)  in  accordance  with  simple  physical  laws  and  that 
by  this  action  alone  the  dilute  urine  is  brought  to  its  normal  concen- 
tration must  be  abandoned.  The  mere  fact  that  the  urine  may  be 
more  concentrated  in  certain  constituents  than  the  blood  is  suffi- 
cient evidence  that  other  factors  must  co-operate.  Those  who  be- 
lieve that  the  main  function  of  the  tubules  is  absorptive  are  obliged 
to  regard  this  process  as  physiological,  as  a  selective  absorption 
depending  upon  the  living  structure  and  properties  of  the  epithelial 
cells.     The  kind  of  evidence  upon  which  this  view  is  based  is  some- 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  747 

what  indirect;  a  single  example  may  suffice.  Cushny  states*  that 
if  certain  diuretics — for  example,  sodiimi  chlorid  and  sodium  sul- 
phate— are  injected  simultaneously  into  the  blood  and  in  such 
amounts  that  an  equal  number  of  the  anions  (CI  and  SO 4)  are  pres- 
ent, the  quantities  that  are  excreted  in  the  urine  during  the  next 
hour  or  two  follow  different  curves  and  vary  independently  of  their 
concentration  in  the  plasma.  While  this  independence  might  be 
referred  to  a  specific  secretory  action,  the  author  finds  a  simpler 
explanation  in  variations  in  absorption,  the  epithelium  of  the  con- 
voluted tubule,  like  that  of  the  intestine,  absorbing  the  sulphate 
with  more  difficulty.  On  the  other  side,  the  facts  that  have  been 
urged  in  favor  of  the  secretory  hypothesis  are  more  numerous  and 
varied,  but  none  is  entirely  convincing.  Some  of  these  facts  are 
as  follows:  (1)  It  is  stated  that  if  the  ureters  are  ligated  in  birds 
the  urates  will  be  found  deposited  in  the  uriniferous  tubules,  but 
never  at  the  capsular  end.  (2)  Heidenhain  has  given  proof  that 
the  convoluted  tubules  are  capable  of  excreting  indigo-carmin  after 
this  substance  is  injected  into  the  blood.  His  experiment  consisted 
essentially  in  injecting  the  material  into  the  blood,  after  dividing 
the  cord  so  as  to  reduce  the  rapidity  of  secretion.  After  a  certain 
interval  the  kidney  was  removed  and  irrigated  with  alcohol  to  pre- 
cipitate the  indigo-carmin  in  situ  in  the  organ.  Microscopical  ex- 
axTiination  showed  that  after  this  treatment  the  granules  of  the 
indigo-carmin  are  found  in  the  convoluted  tubules,  but  not  in  the 
capsules  around  the  glomeruli.  (3)  Several  observers  (Van  der 
Stricht,  Disse,  Trambasti,  Gurwitschf)  have  described  microscopical 
appearances  in  the  cells  lining  the  tubules  indicative  of  an  active 
secretion.  They  picture  the  formation  of  vesicles  in  the  cells  and 
appearances  which  indicate  the  discharge  of  these  vesicles  into  the 
cavity  of  the  tubules.  (4)  Nussbaum  made  use  of  the  fact  that  in 
the  frog  the  glomeruli  are  supplied  b}^  branches  of  the  renal  artery, 
while  the  rest  of  the  tubes  are  supplied  by  the  renal  portal  vein. 
He  stated  that  if  the  renal  artery  is  ligated  the  glomeruli  are  de- 
prived completely  of  blood,  and  that  as  a  result  the  flow  of  urine 
ceases.  If  under  these  conditions  urea  is  injected  into  the  circulation 
it  is  excreted  together  with  some  water,  thus  proving  the  secretory 
activity  of  the  tubules  with  regard  to  urea.  Later  experiments  by 
Adami  and  by  Beddard|  have  thrown  doubt  upon  this  otherwise 
crucial  experiment.  Adami  claims  that  ligature  of  the  renal  arte- 
ries does  not  shut  off  completely  the  glomerular  circulation,  while 
Beddard,  although  he  corroborates  Nussbaum  in  the  point  that 
complete  occlusion  of  the  renal  arteries  suspends  entirely  the  secre- 

*  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  27,  429,  1902. 

t  See  Gurwitsch,  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  91,  71,  1902. 

%  Beddard,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  28,  20,  1902. 


748  P'HYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

tion  of  urine,  finds  that  under  these  conditions  injection  of  urea  into 
the  circulation  is  not  followed  by  a  secretion.  (5)  Dreser  has  shown 
that  the  acidity  of  the  urine  is  due  to  an  action  of  the  epithelium 
of  the  tubules.  If  an  acid  indicator,  such  as  acid  fuchsin,  is  in- 
jected into  the  dorsal  lymph  sac  of  a  frog,  and  an  hour  or  so  later 
the  kidneys  are  examined,  it  will  be  found  that  the  convoluted  tu- 
bules are  colored  red,  while  the  capsular  end  is  colorless,  indicating 
that  the  secretion  at  the  latter  point  has  an  alkaline  reaction.  The 
experiment  shows  that  the  acid  substances  in  the  urine  are  produced 
in  the  convoluted  tubules.  The  simplest  explanation  is  that  they  are 
formed  by  a  secretory  activity  of  the  epithelial  cells,  although  one 
may  adopt  the  less  probable  view  that  the  cells  produce  the  acid 
phosphates  by  a  selective  absorption  of  alkaline  salts.  On  the 
whole,  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  weight  of  evidence  is  in  favor 
of  the  Bowman-Heidenhain  theory  of  secretion,  and  it  remains  for 
future  investigations  to  explain  more  definitely  what  is  meant  by 
the  obscure  term  secretory  activity. 

Under  pathological  conditions  it  has  been  shown  satisfactorily 
that  the  albumin  and  sugar  which  may  be  present  in  the  urine  are 
secreted  or  eliminated  at  the  glomerular  end  of  the  tubule. 

Action  of  Diuretics. — ^An  important  side  of  the  theories  of 
secretion  of  urine  is  their  application  to  the  action  of  diuretics. 
Water;  various  soluble  substances,  such  as  salts,  urea,  and  dextrose; 
and  certain  special  drugs,  such  as  caffein  or  digitalis,  exert  a  diuretic 
action  on  the  kidneys.  Much  experimental  work  has  been  done 
to  ascertain  whether  the  action  of  these  substances  can  be  explained 
mechanically  by  their  influence  on  the  blood-flow  or  the  blood- 
pressure  in  the  kidney  capillaries,  or  whether  it  is  necessary  to  fall 
back  upon  a  specific  stimulating  effect  exerted  by  them  upon  the 
epithelial  cells  of  the  tubules.  Adherents  of  the  original  Ludwig 
theory  are  forced  to  explain  their  action  by  the  effect  they  pro- 
duce upon  the  pressure  in  the  kidney  capillaries,  and,  indeed,  it 
has  been  shown  with  reference  to  the  saline  diuretics-  that  their 
effect  upon  the  secretion  is  in  proportion  to  the  osmotic  pressure 
they  exert.  It  has  been  suggested,  therefore,  that  the  action  of 
these  diuretics  lies  in  the  fact  that  they  attract  water  from  the  tis- 
tues  into  the  blood  and  thus  cause  a  condition  of  hydremic  plethora. 
But  whether  the  elimination  of  this  excess  of  water  is  due  to  filtra- 
tion or  to  an  active  secretion  by  the  glomerular  epithelium  is  a 
question  that  revives  the  discussion  that  has  been  presented  briefly 
above.  Most  observers  find  that  the  vascular  changes  in  the  kid- 
ney, particularly  after  the  administration  of  caffein  and  digitalis, 
do  not  explain  satisfactorily  the  phenomenon  of  diuresis,  and  al- 
though it  is  necessary  to  admit  that  the  diuretics,  or  some  of  them, 
act  in  part  by  the  changes  which  they  cause  in  the  circulation  in 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY  ORGANS.  749 

the  kidney,  those  who  adopt  the  Bowman-Heidenhain  theory  as- 
sume usually  that  these  substances  exert  also  a  direct  stimulating 
action  on  the  secretory  cells. 

The  Blood-flow  through  the  Kidneys. — It  will  be  inferred 
from  the  discussion  above  that,  other  conditions  remaining  the  same, 
the  secretion  of  the  kidney  varies  with  the  quantity  of  blood  flowing 
through  it.  It  is,  therefore,  important  to  refer  briefly  to  the  nature 
and  especially  the  regulation  of  the  blood-flow  through  this  organ, 
although  the  same  subject  is  referred  to  in  connection  with  the 
general  description  of  vasomotor  regulation  (see  Circulation).  It 
has  been  shown  by  Landergren*  and  Tigerstedt  that  the  kidney 
is  a  very  vascular  organ,  at  least  when  it  is  in  strong  functional  activ- 
ity such  as  may  be  produced  by  the  action  of  diuretics.  They  esti- 
mate that  in  a  minute's  time,  under  the  action  of  diuretics,  an  amount 
of  blood  flows  through  the  kidney  equal  to  the  weight  of  the  organ; 
this  is  an  amount  from  four  to  nineteen  times  as  great  as  occurs  in 
the  average  supply  of  the  other  organs  in  the  systemic  circulation. 
Taking  both  kidneys  into  account,  their  figures  show  that  (in  strong 
diuresis)  5.6  per  cent,  of  the  total  quantity  of  blood  sent  out  of  the 
left  heart  in  a  minute  may  pass  through  the  kidneys,  although  the 
combined  weight  of  these  organs  makes  only  0.56  per  cent,  of  that 
of  the  body. 

The  nature  of  the  supply  of  vasomotor  nerves  to  the  kidney  and 
the  conditions  which  bring  them  into  activity  are  fairly  well  known, 
owing  to  the  useful  invention  of  the  oncometer  by  Roy.  This  in- 
strument is,  in  principle,  a  plethysmOgraph  especially  modified 
for  use  upon  the  kidney  of  the  living  animal.  It  is  a  kidney-shaped 
box  of  thin  brass  made  in  two  parts,  hinged  at  the  back,  and  with 
a  clasp  in  front  to  hold  them  together.  In  the  interior  of  the  box 
thin  peritoneal  membrane  is  so  fastened  to  each  half  that  a  layer 
of  olive  oil  may  be  placed  between  it  and  the  brass  walls.  There 
is  thus  formed  in  each  half  a  soft  pad  of  oil  upon  which  the  kidney 
rests.  When  the  kidney,  freed  as  far  as  possible  from  fat  and  sur- 
rounding connective  tissue,  but  with  the  blood-vessels  and  nerves 
entering  at  the  hilus  entirely  uninjured,  is  laid  in  one-half  of  the  on- 
cometer, and  the  other  half  is  shut  down  upon  it  and  tighth^  fas- 
tened, the  organ  is  surrounded  by  oil  in  a  box  which  is  hquid-tight 
at  every  point  except  one,  from  which  a  tube  is  led  off  to  some  suitable 
recorder  such  as  a  tambour.  Under  these  conditions  every  increase 
in  the  volume  of  the  kidney  causes  a  proportional  outflow  of  oil 
from  the  oncometer,  which  is  measured  by  the  recorder,  and 
every  diminution  in  volume  is  accompanied  by  a  reverse  change. 
At  the  same  time  the  flow  of  urine  during  these  changes  can  be 
determined  by  inserting  a  cannula  into  the  ureter  and  measuring 
*  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  4,  241,   1892. 


750  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

directly  the  outflow  of  urine.  By  this  and  other  means  it  has 
been  shown  that  the  kidney  receives  a  rich  supply  of  vasoconstrictor 
nerve  fibers  that  reach  it  between  and  around  the  entering  blood- 
vessels. These  fibers  emerge  from  the  spinal  cord  chiefly  in  the 
lower  thoracic  spinal  nerves  (tenth  to  thirteenth  in  the  dog),  pass 
through  the  sympathetic  system,  and  reach  the  organ  as  postgan- 
glionic fibers.  Stimulation  of  these  nerves  causes  a  contraction  of 
the  small  arteries  of  the  kidney,  a  shrinkage  in  volume  of  the  whole 
organ  as  measured  by  the  oncometer  (see  Fig.  223),  and  a  dimin- 
ished secretion  of  urine.  When,  on  the  other  hand,  these  con- 
strictor fibers  are  cut  as  they  enter  the  hilus  of  the  kidney,  the  ar- 
teries are  dilated  on  account  of  the  removal  of  the  tonic  action  of 
the  constrictor  fibers,  the  organ  enlarges,  and  a  greater  quantity 
of  blood  passes  through  it,  since  the  resistance  to  the  blood-flow  is 
diminished  while  the  general  arterial  pressure  in  the  aorta  remains 
practically  the  same.  Along  with  this  greater  flow  of  blood  there 
is  a  marked  increase  in  the  secretion  of  urine. 

Under  normal  conditions  we  must  suppose  that  these  fibers  are 
brought  into  play  to  a  greater  or  less  extent  by  reflex  stimulation, 
and  thus  serve  to  control  the  blood-flow  through  the  kidney  and 
thereby  influence  its  functional  activity.  It  has  been  shown,  too, 
that  the  kidney  receives  vasodilator  nerve-fibers, — that  is,  fibers 
which  when  stimulated  directly  or  reflexly  cause  a  dilatation  of 
the  arteries,  and  therefore  a  greater  flow  of  blood  through  the  or- 
gan. According  to  Bradford,  these  fibers  emerge  from  the  spinal 
cord  mainly  in  the  anterior  roots  of  the  eleventh,  twelfth,  and  thir- 
teenth spinal  nerves.  Under  normal  conditions  these  fibers  are 
probably  thrown  into  action  by  reflex  stimulation  and  lead  to  an 
increased  functional  activity.  It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  that  the 
kidneys  possess  a  local  nervous  mechanism  through  which  their 
secretory  activity  may  be  increased  or  diminished  by  correspond- 
ing alterations  in  the  blood-supply.  So  far  is  as  known,  this  is  the 
only  way  in  which  the  secretion  in  the  kidneys  can  be  directly  af- 
fected by  the  central  nervous  system.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind, 
also,  that  the  blood-flow  through  the  kidneys,  and  therefore  their 
secretory  activity,  may  be  affected  by  conditions  influencing  general 
arterial  pressure.  Conditions  such  as  asphyxia,  strychnin  poison- 
ing, or  painful  stimulation  of  sensory  nerves,  which  cause  a  general 
vasoconstriction,  influence  the  kidney  in  the  same  way,  and  tend, 
therefore,  to  diminish  the  flow  of  blood  through  it;  while  conditions 
which  lower  general  arterial  pressure,  such  as  general  vascular  dila- 
tation of  the  skin  vessels,  may  also  depress  the  secretory  action  of 
the  kidney  by  diminishing  the  amount  of  blood  flowing  through  it. 

In  what  way  any  given  change  in  the  vascular  conditions  of  the 
body  will  influence  the  secretion  of  the  kidney  depends  upon  a  num- 


KIDNEY    AND   SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY    ORGANS.  751 

ber  of  factors  and  their  relations  to  one  another,  but  any  change 
which  will  increase  the  difference  in  pressure  between  the  blood  in 
the  renal  artery  and  the  renal  vein  will  tend  to  augment  the  flow 
of  blood  unless  it  is  antagonized  by  a  simultaneous  constriction  m 
the  small  arteries  of  the  kidnej^  itself.  On  the  contrary,  any  vas- 
cular dilatation  of  the  vessels  in  the  kidney  will  tend  to  increase 
the  blood-flow  through  it  unless  there  is  at  the  same  time  such  a 
general  fall  of  blood-pressure  as  is  sufficient  to  lower  the  pressure 
in  the  renal  artery  and  reduce  the  driving  force  of  the  blood  to  an 
extent  that  more  than  counteracts  the  favorable  influence  of  dimin- 
ished resistance  in  its  small  arteries. 

The  Composition  of  Urine. — The  urine  of  man  is  a  yellowish 
liquid  that  varies  greatly  in  depth  of  color.  It  has  an  average 
specific  gravity  of  1.020  and  usually  an  acid  reaction.  This  acid 
reaction  is  attributed  generally  to  the  presence  of  acid  phosphates, 
particularly  acid  sodium  phosphate  (NaHjPO^);  but,  according  to 
Folin,*  the  acidity  is  due  partially  and  indeed  in  larger  part  to  or- 
ganic acids.  When  tested  by  the  usual  indicators  (litmus)  human 
urine  may  show  an  alkaline  reaction,  and,  in  fact,  observations 
indicate  that  the  reaction  may  vary  in  accordance  with  the 
character  of  the  food.  Among  carnivora  the  urine  is  uniformly 
acid,  and  among  herbivora  it  is  alkaline  so  long  as  they  use  a  veg- 
etable diet.  During  starvation,  however,  or  when  living  upon  the 
mothers'  milk, — that  is,  whenever  they  are  existing  upon  a  purely 
animal  diet — the  urine  becomes  acid.  The  general  explanation  of 
this  effect  of  food  that  has  been  suggested  (Drechsel)  is  that  upon 
an  animal  diet  more  acids  are  formed  (from  the  oxidation  of  the 
sulphur  and  phosphorus  of  the  proteids)  than  in  the  case  of  the 
vegetable  foods  in  which  the  alkaline  salts  of  the  vegetable  acids 
give  rise  on  oxidation  in  the  body  to  alkaline  carbonates.  The 
kidney  separates  from  the  alkaline  (neutral)  blood  and  lymph  the 
excess  of  salts  and  thus  maintains  a  normal  balance  between  the 
acid  and  basic  equivalents  in  the  blood. 

The  composition  of  the  urine  is  very  complex.  In  addition  to 
the  water  and  inorganic  salts  the  following  elements  are  important, 
namely,  urea,  the  purin  bodies  (uric  acid,  xanthin,  hypoxanthin), 
creatinin,  hippuric  acid,  oxalic  acid  (calcium  oxalate),  several 
conjugated  sulphates  and  conjugated  glycuronates,  several  aromatic 
oxyacids  and  nitrogenous  acids,  fatty  acids,  dissolved  gases  (N  and 
CO2),  and  the  urinary  pigments  urochrome  and  urobilin.  This  list 
is  not  complete;  a  number  of  additional  substances  have  been  de- 
scribed as  occurring  constantly  or  occasionally  in  traces  within  the 
limits  of  health.  Under  pathological  conditions  the  composition 
may  be  still  further  modified.  The  complexity  of  the  composition 
*  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  9,  265,  1903. 


752  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

may  be  understood  when  it  is  recalled  that  through  this  organ  are 
eliminated  some  of  all  the  end-products  formed  in  the  various  tis- 
sues, together  with  products  arising  from  bacterial  fermentation 
in  the  gastro-intestinal  canal  and  various  more  or  less  foreign  sub- 
stances taken  with  the  food.  It  is  not  possible  to  describe  all  the 
numerous  constituents  that  have  been  observed.  Attention  may 
be  directed  to  those  that  quantitatively  or  otherwise  are  of  chief 
physiological  interest. 

The  Nitrogen  Elimination  in  the  Urine. — Nearly  all  of  the  ex- 
cretion of  nitrogen  occurs  in  the  urine.  In  the  metabolism  of  the 
usual  foodstuffs — carbohydrates,  fats,  and  proteids — the  end-prod- 
ucts of  their  destruction  or  physiological  oxidation  in  the  body  are 
water,  carbon  dioxid,  and  nitrogenous  waste  products  (and  sulphates 
and  phosphates  from  the  sulphur  and  phosphorus  in  the  proteids). 
The  water  is  eliminated  in  the  urine,  the  sweat,  saliva,  etc.,  and  the 
expired  air.  The  CO 2  is  eliminated  in  the  expired  air,  and  in  smaller 
part  in  dissolved  form  in  the  secretions  (sweat,  urine).  The  nitrog- 
enous excretion,  representing  the  breaking  down  of  proteid  material, 
is  found  in  minute  part  in  the  sweat,  to  a  larger  extent  in  the  feces, 
but  in  by  far  the  main  amount  in  the  urine.  In  all  problems  con- 
cerning proteid  metabolism  in  the  body,  both  as  regards  its  char- 
acter and  extent,  the  quantitative  study  of  this  excretion  is  of  par- 
amount importance.  In  order  to  determine  the  total  amount  of 
proteid  metabolism  it  is  customary  to  determine  the  total  nitrogen 
eliminated  in  the  urine,  without  regard  to  its  specific  form.  This 
determination  is  made  usually  by  the  method  of  Kjeldahl.  The 
total  weight  of  nitrogen  multiplied  by  6.25  gives  the  amount  of  pro- 
teid broken  down,  since  nitrogen  forms,  on  the  average,  16  per 
cent,  of  the  weight  of  the  proteid  molecule.  In  an  average  sized 
man  the  total  nitrogen  eliminated  in  a  day  varies,  let  us  say,  between 
14  and  18  gms.,  which  would  correspond  to  88  and  117  gms.  of  pro- 
teid. It  being  often  necessary  to  distinguish  between  the  forms  in 
which  this  nitrogen  is  eliminated,  the  following  distinctions  are  made: 
(1)  The  urea  nitrogen, — that  is,  the  nitrogen  eliminated  as  urea. 
According  to  some  recent  analyses  by  Folin,*  the  urea  nitrogen  in 
man  averages  87.5  per  cent,  of  the  total  nitrogen.  (2)  The  am- 
monia nitrogen, — ^that  is,  the  nitrogen  found  in  the  form  of  am- 
monia salts  which  liberate  free  ammonia  on  the  addition  of  a  fixed 
alkali.  The  proportion  of  this  ammonia  nitrogen  often  varies, 
especially  under  pathological  conditions  affecting  the  liver.  Its 
quantitative  determination  is  a  matter  of  importance.  The  aver- 
age amount  in  health  may  be  stated  (Folin)  as  4.3  per  cent,  of  the 
total  nitrogen.  (3)  The  creatinin  nitrogen, — that  is,  the  amount 
excreted  as  creatinin  and  indicative  of  a  special  (muscular)  metab- 
*" American  Physiological  Journal,"   13,  45,   1905. 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN    AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  753 

olism  (3.6  per  cent,  of  total  nitrogen).  (4)  The  purin  body  nitrogen 
(uric  acid,  xanthin,  hypoxanthin),  also  indicative  of  a  special  metab- 
olism. 

Origin  and  Significance  of  Urea. — Urea  has  the  formula,  CO- 
NjH^.     It    may  be  considered  as   an  amid  of  carbonic  acid,  and 

has,  therefore,  the  structural  formula  of  CO<^j^jj^  It  occurs  in  the 
urine  in  relatively  large  quantities  (2  per  cent.).  As  the  total  quan- 
tity of  urine  secreted  in  twenty-four  hours  by  an  adult  male  may 
be  placed  at  from  1500  to  1700  c.c,  it  follows  that  from  30  to  34 
gms.  of  urea  are  eliminated  from  the  body  during  this  period.  It 
is  the  most  important  of  the  nitrogenous  excreta  of  the  body,  the 
chief  end-product  of  the  physiological  oxidation  of  the  proteids  of 
the  body,  and  also  of  the  albuminoids"  when  they  appear  in  the  food. 
If  we  know  how  much  urea  is  secreted  in  a  given  period,  we  know 
approximately  how  much  proteid  has  been  broken  down  in  the 
body  in  the  same  time.  In  round  numbers,  1  gm.  of  proteid  will 
yield  ^  gm.  of  urea,  as  may  be  calculated  easily  from  the  amount  of 
nitrogen  contained  in  each.  Since,  however,  some  of  the  nitrogen 
of  proteid  is  eliminated  in  other  forms — uric  acid,  creatinin,  etc. — 
even  an  exact  determination  of  all  the  urea  is  not  sufficient  to  de- 
termine with  accuracy  the  total  amount  of  proteid  broken  down. 
This  fact  is  arrived  at  more  perfectly,  as  stated  above,  by  a  deter- 
mination of  the  total  nitrogen  of  the  urine  and  other  excretions. 
In  addition  to  the  urine,  urea  is  found  in  slight  quantities  in  other 
secretions, — in  milk  (in  traces)  and  in  sweat.  In  the  latter  liquid 
the  quantity  of  urea  in  twenty-four  hours  may  be  quite  appreciable, 
— ^as  much,  for  instance,  as  0.8  gm., — although  such  a  large  amount 
is  found  only  after  active  exercise.  It  has  been  ascertained  definitely 
that  urea  is  not  formed  by  the  kidneys;  it  is  brought  to  the  kid- 
neys by  the  blood  for  elimination.  That  urea  is  not  made  in  the 
kidneys  is  demonstrated  by  such  facts  as  these:  If  blood,  on  the  one 
hand,  is  irrigated  through  an  isolated  kidney,  no  urea  is  formed, 
even  though  substances  (such  as  ammonium  carbonate)  from  which 
urea  is  readily  produced  are  added  to  the  blood;  on  the  other  hand, 
urea  is  constantly  present  in  the  blood  (0.0348  to  0.1529  per  cent.), 
and  if  the  two  kidneys  are  removed,  it  continues  to  accumulate 
steadily  in  the  blood  as  long  as  the  animal  survives.  It  has  been 
ascertained  that  the  urea  is  produced  in  part  in  the  liver.  The  most 
important  questions  to  be  decided  are:  Through  what  steps  is  the 
proteid  molecule  metabolized  to  the  form  of  urea?  and,  What  is  the 
antecedent  substance  brought  to  the  liver,  from  which  it  makes 
urea?  It  is  impossible  to  answer  these  questions  perfectly,  but 
recent  investigations  have  thrown  a  great  deal  of  light  on  the  whole 
process,  and  they  give  hope  that  before  long  the  entire  history  of 
48 


754  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

the  derivation  of  urea  from  proteids  and  albuminoids  will  be  known. 
The  results  of  this  work  may  be  stated  briefly  as  follows: 

1 .  Urea  arises  from  proteids  by  a  process  of  hydrolysis  and  oxida- 
tion, with  the  formation  eventually  of  ammonia  compounds,  which 
are  then  conveyed  to  the  liver  and  there  changed  to  urea.  Drechsel 
has  suggested  that  ammonium  carbamate  forms  one  at  least  of  the 
ammonia  compounds  that  are  converted  to  urea,  and  gives  the  fol- 
lowing evidence  for  this  view.  In  the  first  place,  Drechsel  found 
carbamic  acid  in  the  blood  of  dogs,  and  Drechsel  and  Abel  have 
shown  that  it  occurs  normally  in  the  urine  of  horses  as  calcium  car- 
bamate. Abel  has  shown,  also,  that  it  may  be  found  in  the  urine 
of  dogs  or  infants  after  the  use  of  lime-water.  Drechsel  has  shown, 
further,  that  ammonium  carbamate  may  be  converted  into  urea. 
If  one  compares  the  formulas  of  ammonium  carbamate  and  urea, 
it  is  seen  that  the  former  may  pass  over  into  the  latter  by  the  loss 
of  a  molecule  of  water,  as — 

Ammonium  Urea, 

carbamate. 

Drechsel  supposes,  however,  that  this  dehydration  is  effected  in  an 
indirect  manner;  that  there  is  first  an  oxidation  removing  two 
atoms  of  hydrogen,  and  then  a  reduction  removing  an  atom  of  oxy- 
gen. He  succeeded  in  showing  that  when  an  aqueous  solution  of 
ammonium  carbamate  is  submitted  to  electrolysis,  and  the  direc- 
tion of  the  current  is  changed  repeatedly  so  as  to  get  alternately 
reduction  and  oxidation  processes  at  each  pole,  some  urea  is  pro- 
duced. These  facts  show  the  existence  of  ammonium  carbamate 
in  the  body,  and  the  possibility  of  its  conversion  to  urea.  It  remains 
possible,  however,  that  other  salts  or  compounds  of  ammonia  ma}' 
likewise  be  converted  normally  to  urea  by  the  liver,  since  it  has  been 
shown  experimentally  in  artificial  circulation  through  this  organ 
that  salts  such  as  ammonium  carbonate,  or  even  such  complex 
ammonia  compounds  as  leucin  and  glycocoll,  may  give  rise  to  urea. 
Experiments  made  by  Hahn,  Pawlow,  Massen,  and  Nencki*  show 
that  in  dogs  removal  of  the  liver  is  followed  by  a  decrease  in  the 
amount  of  urea  in  the  urine  and  an  increase  in  the  ammonia  con- 
tents. In  these  remarkable  experiments  a  fistula  (Eck  fistula)  was 
made  between  the  portal  vein  and  the  inferior  vena  cava,  the  result 
of  which  was  that  the  whole  portal  circulation  of  the  liver  was 
abolished,  and  the  only  blood  that  the  organ  received  was  through 
the  hepatic  artery.  If,  now,  this  artery  was  ligated  or  the  liver 
was  cut  away,  as  was  done  in  some  of  the  experiments,  then  the 
result  was   practically  an  extirpation  of  the  entire  organ.     The 

*  "  Archiv  f.  experimentelle  Pathologie  u.  Pharmakologie, "  32,  161, 1893. 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  755 

animals  in  these  investigations  survived  this  operation  for  some  time, 
but  they  died  finally,  showing  a  series  of  symptoms  which  indicated 
a  deep  disturbance  of  the  nervous  system.  It  was  found  that  the 
symptoms  of  poisoning  in  these  animals  could  be  brought  on  before 
they  developed  spontaneously  by  feeding  the  dogs  upon  a  rich  meat 
diet,  or  with  salts  of  ammonia  or  carbamic  acid.  Later  investiga- 
tions *  showed  that  in  normal  animals  the  ammonia  contents  of  the 
blood  in  the  portal  vein  are  from  three  to  four  times  what  is  found 
in  the  arterial  blood,  but  that  after  the  operation  described  the 
anunonia  in  the  arterial  blood  increases  and  at  the  time  of  the  de- 
velopment of  the  fatal  symptoms  reaches  about  the  percentage 
which  is  normal  to  the  blood  of  the  portal  vein.  It  would  seem 
from  these  investigations  that  the  liver  stands  between  the  portal 
circulation  and  the  general  systemic  circulation  and  protects  the 
latter  from  the  comparatively  large  amount  of  ammonia  compounds 
contained  in  the  portal  blood  by  converting  these  compounds  to 
urea.  If  the  liver  is  thrown  out  of  function,  ammonia  compounds 
accumulate  in  the  blood  and  cause  death.  Similar  ammonia  salts 
are  probably  formed  in  other  active  proteid  tissues,  since  the  per- 
centage of  ammonia  in  the  tissues  is  considerably  greater  than  in 
the  blood,  and  these  compounds  also  are  doubtless  converted  to 
urea  in  the  liver,  in  part  at  least.  As  to  the  origin  of  the  ammonia 
compounds,  there  is  little  direct  evidence.  They  come,  in  the  long 
run,  of  course,  from  the  nitrogenous  foodstuffs, — proteids  and  al- 
buminoids. Drechsel  supposes  that  the  proteids  first  undergo  hydro- 
lytic  cleavage,  with  the  formation  of  amido-bodies,  such  as  leucin, 
tyrosin,  aspartic  acid,  glycocoU,  etc.;  that  these  bodies  undergo 
oxidation  in  the  tissues,  with  the  formation  of  NH3,  CO2,  and  HjO; 
and  that  the  NHj  and  CO  3  then  unite  synthetically  to  form  am- 
monium carbamate,  which  is  carried  to  the  liver  and  changed  to 
urea.  It  is  a  very  significant  fact  that  the  relative  and  absolute 
amount  of  urea  nitrogen  in  the  urine  varies  directly  with  the  amount 
of  proteid  taken  as  food,  while  other  nitrogenous  constituents  of 
the  urine  (creatinin,  purin  bases)  are  practically  not  affected  by  the 
food,  if  care  is  taken  to  have  the  food  free  of  these  substances  to 
begin  with.  Folin  has  laid  emphasis  upon  this  fact,t  and  suggests, 
therefore,  that  most  of  the  urea  may  come  directly  from  proteid  of 
the  food  which  is  hydrolyzed  during  digestion  and  absorption  (action 
of  trypsin  and  erepsin)  into  simpler  amido-acids.  These  amido- 
bodies  by  further  hydrolysis  and  oxidation  may  be  converted,  so 
far  as  their  nitrogen  is  concerned,  into  ammonia  compounds  and 
eliminated  at  once  as  urea  by  the  liver  without  entering  into  tissue 

*  Nencki,  Pawlow,  and  Zaleski,   ibid.,   37,  26,   1895;    also  Nencki  and 
Pawlow,  "Archives  des  sciences  biologiques, "  5,  213. 

t  Folin,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"   13,   117,   1905. 


756  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

formation  at  all.  In  this  way  the  large  proportion  of  ammonia 
compounds  in  the  portal  blood  after  digestion  may  be  explained. 
Granting  that  a  portion,  perhaps  a  large  portion,  of  the  urea  arises 
from  this  early  hydrolysis  of  the  proteid  of  the  food,  we  must  admit 
also  at  present  that  ammonia  compounds  may  be  formed  in  the  tis- 
sues of  the  body  generally,  probably  by  a  similar  process  of  hydrol- 
ysis followed  by  oxidation. 

2.  It  is  stated  (Kossel  and  Dakin*)  that  a  ferment  (arginase) 
may  be  extracted  from  the  liver  which  is  capable  of  splitting  arginin 
into  urea  and  ornithin  (diamido valerianic  acid).  Since  arginin  is 
one  of  the  diamido-bodies  formed  by  the  hydrolysis  of  the  proteids 
during  digestion,  it  is  possible  that  some  of  the  urea  has  this  origin. 
The  fact  lends  some  probability  to  the  view  suggested  above  that 
much  of  the  nitrogen  of  proteid  food  may  be  converted  to  urea  before 
entering  the  general  circulation. 

3.  Even  after  the  removal  of  the  liver  some  urea  is  still  found  in 
the  urine.  This  fact  proves  that  other  organs  have  the  power  of 
forming  urea,  but  what  these  other  organs  are  and  by  what  process 
they  make  urea  are  points  as  yet  undecided.  It  seems  as  though 
the  urea-forming  power  of  the  liver  is  shared  by  some  of  the  other 
tissues,  just  as  its  glycogenic  functions  are. 

Origin  and  Significance  of  the  Purin  Bodies  (Uric  Acid, 
Xanthin,  Hypoxanthin) . — ^These  bodies  are  related  chemically, 
and  appear  also  to  have  a  common  physiological  significance.  Their 
chemical  relations  have  been  described  by  Emil  Fischer,  to  whom 
we  owe  the  term  purin  bodies.  Fischer  pointed  out  that  these  and 
other  substances  belonging  to  this  group  have  a  common  nucleus: 
N  — C 

C       C  —  N.  which     he     named     the     purin     nucleus.     The 

N  — C— N^ 

hydrogen  compound  of  this  nucleus  would  be  designated  as  purin, 

N  =  CH 

and  would  have  the  formula:    HC      C  —  NH      ,  CgH.N^.     Addi- 

N  —  C  —  N^^H 
tion    of    an    atom     of    oxygen    gives    hypoxanthin,    CgH^N^O: 
HN  — CO 

HC       C  —  NH 

II         II       ...NCH.     Addition  of  two  atoms  of  oxygen  gives  xan- 
N  —  C  —  r\^ 

HN  — CO 

thin,  C^H^N^Oj:    CO       C  —  NH 

h'n  —  C  —  N/^^'     ^"^^  addition  of  three  atoms 
*  Kossel  and  Dakin,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie,"  42,  181,  1904. 


KIDNEY    AND    SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY    ORGANS.  757 

HN  —  CO 

of   oxygen   gives  uric  acid,  CjH^N^Og:   CO        C  —  NH         ,  which 

I         II         >co 
HN  —  C  —  NH 

from  this  standpoint  might  be  named  trioxypurin.  If  one  of  the  H 
atoms  in  the  purin  is  substituted  by  an  amido-group,  NHj,  the  com- 
pound, adenin  (C5H5N5),  is  obtained,  and  the  further  addition  of  oxy- 
gen gives  guanin  (C5H5N5O).  Moreover,  caffein,  the  active  principle 
of  coffee  and  tea,  and  theobromin,  the  active  principle  of  cocoa,  are  re- 
spectively trimethyl  and  dimethyl  compounds  of  purin.  Uric  acid, 
xanthin,  hypoxanthin,  and  in  smaller  amounts  other  members  of  this 
group  are  found  constantly  in  the  urine.  It  has  been  pointed  out* 
that  these  substances  come  partly  from  purin  bodies  taken  as  food. 
If  materials  containing  the  purin  bodies,  such  as  meat,  are  fed  these 
bodies  are  excreted  in  part  in  the  urine.  It  is  proposed  to  designate 
the  uric  acid,  etc.,  that  has  this  origin  as  the  exogenous  purin  ma- 
terial. A  jjortion  of  the  amount  daily  secreted  comes,  however, 
from  a  metabolism  of  the  proteid  material  of  the  body,  and  this 
portion  may  be  distinguished  as  the  endogenous  purin  bodies.  This 
latter  amount  is  found  to  be  practically  constant,  0.15  to  0.20  gm. 
per  day  for  any  one  individual,  and  the  amount  is  not  affected  by 
changes  in  the  quantity  or  character  of  the  food,  but  varies  within 
certain  limits  with  the  manner  of  life.  Evidently  the  endogenous 
purin  nitrogen  represents  a  special  metabolism,  probably  of  the  liv- 
ing tissues,  that  goes  on  independently,  in  great  measure,  of  the 
mere  oxidation  of  food.  The  view  generally  adopted  at  present  is 
that  first  proposed  by  Horbaczewsky,! — namely,  that  the  purin 
bodies  are  the  end-product,  so  far  as  the  nitrogen  is  concerned,  of 
the  physiological  oxidation  of  the  nuclein  (see  appendix)  found  in 
the  nuclei  of  the  cells,  and  especially  perhaps  of  the  nuclein  of  the 
leucocytes.  On  this  view  the  purin  bodies  give  a  measure  of  the 
extent  of  metabolism  in  the  cell-nuclei.  The  actual  amount  of  these 
substances  found  in  the  urine  does  not  in  all  probability  represent 
the  entire  amount  formed  in  the  body.  It  is  found  that  when 
xanthin,  hypoxanthin,  uric  acid,  or  materials  such  as  liver  or  thvmus 
rich  in  purin  bodies  are  fed,  only  about  half  of  the  material  is  ex- 
creted as  such  in  the  urine,  and  it  seems  probable  that  the  same 
fate  occurs  to  a  part  of  the  endogenous  purin  material  normally 
formed  in  the  body.  Among  birds  and  reptiles  uric  acid  represents 
the  chief  nitrogenous  excretion  of  the  urine,  taking  physiologically 
the  place  held  by  urea  in  the  mammalia.  In  the  birds  it  has  been 
shown  that  the  uric  acid  is  formed  in  the  liver.  Extirpation  of  the 
kidneys  in  these  animals  leads  to  an  accumulation  of  uric  acid  in 

*  See  Burian  and  Schur,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Phj'siologie, "  94   273, 
1903. 

t  See  Minkowski,  "Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathol,  u.  Pharmakol.,"  41,  375. 


758  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

the  blood  and  tissues,  while  removal  of  the  liver,  on  the  contrary, 
causes  a  decrease  in  the  excretion  of  uric  acid  and  an  increase  in 
the  ammonia  contents  of  the  urine.  It  may  be  concluded,  there- 
fore, that  in  birds  uric  acid  is  formed  in  part  at  least  in  the  liver 
from  ammonia  compounds.  Whether  the  liver  takes  a  part  in  the 
formation  of  the  endogenous  uric  acid  in  mammals  has  not  been 
positively  shown. 

Origin  and  Significance  of  the  Creatinin. — Creatinin  (C^Hy- 

N3O)  is  derived  from  the  creatin  (C4H9N3O2)  found  in  muscle.     Its 

.NH  — CO 
structural  formula  is  given  as  NHC^  |       and  its  chemical  re- 

\N(CH3)CH2 

lations  are  indicated  by  the  fact  that  it  may  be  prepared  synthetically 
from  methyl-glycocoll  and  cyanamid, — that  is,  the  union  of  these 
two  substances  gives  creatin,  from  which  in  turn  creatinin  may  be 
obtained. 

N=C-NH,     +     NH(CH3)CH,C00H   =    NHC/NH.^^^cH.COOH. 

Cyanamid.  Methyl-glycocoll.  Creatin. 

Creatinin  occurs  in  the  urine  constantly  and  in  amounts  equal  to 
1  to  2  gms.  per  day.  Next  to  the  urea  and  the  ammonia  com- 
pounds it  forms  the  most  important  nitrogenous  constituent  of  the 
urine.  Its  physiological  history  is  imperfectly  known.  The  fol- 
lowing facts,  however,  are  significant  and  throw  some  light  on  its 
origin.  Like  the  purin  bodies,  the  amount  present  in  the  urine  is 
probably  partly  of  an  exogenous  and  partly  of  an  endogenous  origin, 
— that  is,  part  is  formed  in  the  body  and  part  arises  from  the  creatin 
contained  in  the  meats  and  soups  used  as  food.  The  endogenous 
portion,  which,  of  course,  is  the  part  that  is  interesting  physio- 
logically, shows  a  tendency  to  remain  constant  under  constant  con- 
tions  of  life,  and  this  fact  indicates  (Folin)  that  the  creatinin  repre- 
sents an  end-product  of  the  metabolism  of  living  or  organized  pro- 
teid  tissue  rather  than  one  of  the  results  of  the  metabolism  of  the 
food  proteid.  Everything  would  indicate  also  that  this  substance 
originates  in  the  muscular  tissue.  Creatin  is  a  constant  and  consider- 
able constituent  of  muscle,  and  a  fair  inference,  therefore,  is  that 
it  originates  in  this  tissue  from  the  catabolism  of  the  muscle  sub- 
stance, and  is  subsequently  given  to  the  blood  and  excreted  as  creat- 
inin. A  difficulty  in  regard  to  this  last  hypothesis  is  found  in  the 
fact  that  the  mass  of  muscular  tissue  in  the  body  contains  a  relatively 
large  amount  of  creatin  (90  gms.)  and  yet  only  1  to  2  gms. 
are  excreted  in  the  urine  during  the  day.  On  account  of  this  dis- 
proportion it  has  been  suggested  that  some  of  the  creatin  may 
be  converted  to  urea,  but  no  proof  has  been  furnished  as  yet  that 
the  body  can  accomplish  this  transformation.     Creatin  given  in 


KIDNEY    AND    SKIN    AS    EXCRETORY    ORGANS.  759 

the  food  is  eliminated  as  creatinin.  As  is  described  in  the  section 
on  Nutrition,  it  is  known  that  increased  muscular  work  may  or  may 
not  increase  the  nitrogen  output  in  the  urine  according  to  the  diet 
used.  Several  observers  have  claimed  that  muscular  activity  in- 
creases the  amount  of  creatinin  in  the  urine,*  but  the  increase  is 
not  so  distinct  nor  so  invariable  that  one  may  conclude  satisfactorily 
that  it  is  due  to  actual  increase  in  production  in  the  muscle.  Others 
state  that  the  increase  is  observable  only  after  excessive  muscular 
activity.  Kochf  has  suggested,  on  account  of  the  methyl  groups 
present,  that  a  part  of  the  creatinin  may  arise  from  a  metabolism 
of  the  lecithin. 

Hippuric  Acid. — This  substance  has  the  formula  CgHgNOg.  Its 
molecular  structure  is  known,  since  upon  decomposition  it  yields 
benzoic  acid  and  glycocoll,  and,  moreover,  it  may  be  produced  syn- 
thetically by  the  union  of  these  two  substances.  Hippuric  acid 
may  be  described,  therefore,  as  a  benzoyl-amido-acetic  acid  (CHj- 
NH[C6H5CO]COOH).  It  is  found  in  considerable  quantities  in  the 
urine  of  herbivorous  animals  (1.5  to  2.5  per  cent.),  and  in  much 
smaller  amounts  in  the  urine  of  man  and  of  the  camivora.  In 
human  urine,  on  an  average  diet,  about  0.7  gm.  is  excreted  in  twenty- 
four  hours.  If  the  diet  is  largely  vegetable,  this  amount  may  be 
much  increased.  Tliis  last  fact  is  reacUly  explained,  for  it  has  been 
found  that  if  benzoic  acid  or  substances  containing  this  grouping 
are  fed  to  animals  they  aj^pear  in  the  urine  as  hippuric  acid.  Evi- 
dently a  synthesis  occurs  in  the  body,  and  Bunge  and  Schmie- 
deberg  proved  conclusiveh'  that  in  dogs  the  union  of  benzoic  acid 
and  glycocoll  to  form  hippuric  acid  takes  place  in  the  kidney 
itself.  Later  it  was  discovered!  that  the  same  synthesis  may  be 
effected  by  ground-up  kidney  tissue,  mixed  with  blood  and  kept 
under  oxygen  pressure.  It  seems  possible,  therefore,  that  the 
synthesis  is  due  to  some  specific  constituent  of  the  kidney  cells, 
possibly  an  enzyme.  Vegetable  foods  contain  benzoic  acid  com- 
pounds, and  we  can  understand,  therefore,  why  when  fed  they  in- 
crease the  hippuric  acid  output  of  the  urine.  Since,  however,  in 
starving  animals  or  animals  fed  upon  meat  hippuric  acid  is  still 
present  in  the  urine,  although  reduced  in  amount,  it  is  evident  that 
it  arises  in  part  as  a  result  of  the  body  metabolism.  It  should  be 
added  finally  that  some  of  the  hippuric  acid  may  be  derived  from 
the  process  of  proteid  putrefaction  that  occurs  in  the  large  intestine. 

The  Conjugated  Sulphates  and  the  Sulphur  Excretion. — 
The  sulphur  excretion  of  the  urine  possesses  an  importance  similar 

*  Gregor,  "  Zeitschrift  f.  physiol.  Chemie, "  31,  98,  1900. 
t"  American  Journal  of  Phj^siology, "  13,  xix,  1905. 
t  Bashford  and  Cramer,    "Zeitschrift  f.  physiolog.   Chemie,"   35,   324, 
1902. 


760  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

to  that  of  nitrogen.  Sulphur  constitutes  an  element  in  most  of  the 
proteids,  and  in  some  form,  therefore,  it  will  be  represented  in  the 
end-products  of  proteid  metabolism.  The  sulphur  elimination  in 
the  urine,  like  the  nitrogen  elimination,  has  been  taken  as  a  measure 
of  the  amount  of  proteid  destruction.  In  the  urine  the  sulphur 
occurs  in  three  forms :  (1)  In  an  oxidized  form  as  inorganic  sulphates. 
Some  of  the  sulphates  are  undoubtedly  derived  or  may  be  derived 
from  the  mineral  sulphates  ingested  with  the  food,  but  the  larger 
part  arises  from  the  oxidation  of  the  sulphur  of  the  proteids.  (2) 
The  so-called  conjugated  or  ethereal  sulphates  are  combinations  be- 
tween sulphuric  acid  and  indoxyl,  skatoxyl,  phenol,  and  cresol,  giving 
us  phenolsulphuric  acid  (CgH50S020H),  cresolsulphuric  acid  (C^H^- 
OSDjOH),  indoxylsulphuric  acid  or  indican  (CgHgNOSOjOH),  and 
skatoxylsulphuric  acid  (C9HgNOS020H).  The  indol,  skatol,  phe- 
nol, and  cresol  are  formed  in  the  large  intestine  as  a  result  of  bac- 
terial putrefaction.  They  are  eliminated  in  part  in  the  feces,  but 
in  part  are  absorbed  into  the  blood,  and  after  oxidation  are 
conjugated  with  sulphuric  acid  and  eliminated  in  the  urine.  The 
process  of  conjugation  is  valuable  from  a  physiological  standpoint, 
as  it  converts  substances  having  an  injurious  action  into  harmless 
compounds.  It  should  be  added,  also,  that  to  a  small  extent  the 
phenol,  indoxyl,  and  skatoxyl  may  be  secreted  in  the  urine  as  con- 
jugated glucuronates, — that  is,  in  combination  with  glucuronic  acid 
(CgHjoOy),  a  reducing  substance  closely  connected  with  dextrose. 
From  a  nutritional  standpoint  the  amount  of  these  substances  pres- 
ent furnishes  a  measure  of  the  extent  of  proteid  putrefaction  in  the 
intestine,  by  virtue  of  the  indol  and  phenol  constituents.  All  con- 
ditions that  increase  the  putrefactive  processes  in  the  intestine 
are  accompanied  by  a  parallel  increase  in  the  ethereal  sulphates. 
By  virtue  of  the  sulphuric  acid  component  these  bodies  represent 
also  one  of  the  forms  in  which  sulphur  is  excreted  from  the 
body.  (3)  Some  of  the  sulphur  in  the  urine  may  occur  in  unoxid- 
ized  form  as  sulphocyanid  or  as  ethyl-sulphide  (Abel)  ([C2H5]2S). 
Under  certain  pathological  conditions  (cystinuria)  some  sulphur  may 
be  excreted  in  the  form  of  cystin,  but  this  is  not  a  normal  con- 
stituent of  the  urine.  For  other  most  interesting  and  significant 
changes  in  the  composition  of  the  urine  under  pathological  condi- 
tions reference  must  be  made  to  special  works  upon  the  urine  or 
upon  pathological  chemistry. 

Water  and  Inorganic  Salts. — Water  is  lost  from  the  body 
through  three  main  channels, — namely,  the  lungs,  the  skin,  and 
the  kidney,  the  last  of  these  being  the  most  important.  The  quan- 
tity of  water  lost  through  the  lungs  probably  varies  within  small 
limits  only.  The  quantity  lost  through  the  sweat  varies,  of  course, 
with  the  temperature,  with  exercise,  etc.,  and  it  may  be  said  that 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  761 

the  amounts  of  water  secreted  through  kidney  and  skin  stand  in . 
something  of  an  inverse  proportion  to  each  other;  that  is,  the  greater 
the  quantity  lost  through  the  skin,  the  less  will  be  secreted  by  the 
kidneys.  Through  these  three  organs,  but  mainh'  through  the 
kidneys,  the  blood  is  being  continually  depleted  of  water,  and  the 
loss  must  be  made  up  by  the  ingestion  of  new  water.  When  water 
is  swallowed  in  excess  the  superfluous  amount  is  rapidly  eliminated 
through  the  kidneys.  The  amount  of  water  secreted  may  be  in- 
creased by  the  action  of  diuretics,  such  as  potassium  nitrate  and 
caffein. 

The  inorganic  salts  of  urine  consist  chiefly  of  the  chlorids,  phos- 
phates, and  sulphates  of  the  alkalies  and  the  alkaline  earths.  It 
may  be  said,  in  general,  that  they  arise  partly  from  the  salts  ingested 
with  the  food,  which  salts  are  eliminated  from  the  blood  by  the  kid- 
ney in  the  water  secretion,  and  in  part  they  are  formed  in  the  de- 
structive metabolism  that  takes  place  in  the  body,  particularly 
that  involving  the  proteids  and  related  bodies.  Sodium  chlorid 
occurs  in  the  largest  quantities,  averaging  about  15  gms.  per  day, 
of  which  the  larger  part,  doubtless,  is  derived  directly  from  the  salt 
taken  in  the  food.  The  phosphates  occur  in  combination  with  cal- 
cium and  magnesium,  but  chiefly  as  the  acid  phosphates  of  sodium 
or  potassium.  The  acid  reaction  of  the  urine  is  usually  attributed 
to  these  latter  substances.  The  phosphates  result  in  part  from  the 
destruction  of  phosphorus-containing  tissues  in  the  body,  but 
chiefly  from  the  phosphates  of  the  food.  The  sulphates  of  urine 
are  found  partly  in  an  oxidized  form  as  simple  sulphates  or  con- 
jugated with  organic  compounds,  as  described  above. 

Micturition. — ^The  mine  is  secreted  continuously  by  the  kid- 
neys, is  carried  to  the  bladder  through  the  ureters,  and  is  then  at 
intervals  finally  ejected  from  the  bladder  through  the  urethra  b}- 
the  act  of  micturition. 

Movements  of  the  Ureters. — ^The  ureters  possess  a  muscular  coat 
consisting  of  an  internal  longitudinal  and  external  circular  layer. 
The  contractions  of  this  muscular  coat  are  the  means  by  which 
the  urine  is  driven  from  the  pelvis  of  the  kidney  into  the  bladder. 
The  movements  of  the  ureter  have  been  carefully  studied  by  Engel- 
marm.*  According  to  his  description,  the  musculature  of  the  ureter 
contracts  spontaneously  at  intervals  of  ten  to  twenty  seconds  (rab- 
bit), the  contraction  beginning  at  the  kidney  and  progressing 
toward  the  bladder  in  the  form  of  a  peristaltic  wave  and  with  a 
velocity  of  about  20  to  30  mms.  per  second.  The  result  of  this 
movement  should  be  the  forcing  of  the  urine  into  the  bladder  in  a 
series  of  gentle,  rhythmical  spurts,  and  this  method  of  filling  the 

*  "  Pfliiger's  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  2,  243,  1869,  and  4,  33. 


762  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

bladder  has  been  observed  in  the  human  being.  Suter  and  Mayer* 
report  some  observations  upon  a  boy  in  whom  there  was  ectopia 
of  the  bladder,  with  exposure  of  the  orifices  of  the  ureters.  The 
flow  into  the  bladder  was  intermittent  and  was  about  equal  upon  the 
two  sides  for  the  time  the  child  was  under  observation  (three  and 
a  half  days). 

The  causation  of  the  contractions  of  the  ureter  musculature  is 
not  easily  explained.  Engelmann  finds  that  artificial  stimulation 
of  the  ureter  or  of  a  piece  of  the  ureter  may  start  peristaltic  con- 
tractions which  move  in  both  directions  from  the  point  stimulated. 
He  was  not  able  to  find  ganglion  cells  in  the  upper  two-thirds  of  the 
ureter  and  was  led  to  believe,  therefore,  that  the  contraction  orig- 
inates in  the  muscular  tissue  independent^  of  extrinsic  or  intrinsic 
nerves,  and  that  the  contraction  wave  propagates  itself  directl}^ 
from  muscle  cell  to  muscle  cell,  the  entire  musculature  behaving 
as  though  it  were  a  single,  colossal,  hollow  muscle  fiber.  The  liber- 
ation of  the  stimulus  which  inaugurates  the  normal  peristalsis 
of  the  ureter  seems  to  be  connected  with  the  accumulation  of  urine 
in  its  upper  or  kidney  portion.  It  may  be  supposed  that  the  urine 
that  collects  at  this  point  as  it  flows  from  the  kidney  stimulates 
the  muscular  tissue  to  contraction,  either  by  its  pressure  or  in  some 
other  way,  and  thus  leads  to  an  orderly  sequence  of  contraction 
waves.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  the  muscle  of  the  ureter,  like  that 
of'  the  heart,  is  spontaneously  contractile  under  normal  conditions, 
and  does  not  depend  upon  the  stimulation  of  the  urine.  Thus, 
according  to  Engelmann,  section  of  the  ureter  near  the  kidney  does 
not  materially  affect  the  nature  of  the  contractions  of  the  stump 
attached  to  the  kidney,  although  in  this  case  the  pressure  of  the 
urine  could  scarcety  act  as  a  stimulus.  Moreover,  in  the  case  of 
the  rat,  in  which  the  ureter  is  highly  contractile,  the  tube  may  be 
cut  into  several  pieces  and  each  piece  will  continue  to  exhibit  period- 
ical peristaltic  contractions.  It  does  not  seem  possible  at  present 
to  decide  between  these  two  views  as  to  the  cause  of  the  contrac- 
tions. The  nature  of  the  contractions,  their  mode  of  progression, 
and  the  way  in  which  they  force  the  urine  through  the  ureter  seem, 
however,  to  be  clearly  established.  Efforts  to  show  a  regulatory 
action  upon  these  movements  through  the  central  nervous  system 
have  so  far  given  negative  results. 

Movements  of  the  Bladder. — ^The  bladder  contains  a  muscular  coat 
of  plain  muscle  tissue,  which,  according  to  the  usual  description, 
is  arranged  so  as  to  make  an  external  longitudinal  coat  and  an 
internal  circular  or  oblique  coat.  A  thin,  longitudinal  layer  of 
muscle  tissue  lying  to  the  interior  of  the  circular  coat  is  also  de- 
scribed. The  separation  between  the  longitudinal  and  circular 
*  "Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathologie  und  Pharmakologie,"  32,  241,  1893. 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN    AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  763 

layers  is  not  so  definite  as  in  the  case  of  the  intestine;  they  seem, 
in  fact,  to  fomi  a  continuous  layer,  one  passing  gradually  into  the 
other  by  a  change  in  the  direction  of  the  fibers.  At  the  cervix  the 
circular  layer  is  strengthened,  and  has  been  supposed  to  act  as  a 
sphincter  with  regard  to  the  urethral  orifice — the  so-called  sphinc- 
ter vesica?  internus.  Around  the  urethra  just  outside  the  blad- 
der is  a  circular  layer  of  striated  muscle  that  is  frequently  desig- 
nated as  the  external  sphincter  or  sphincter  urethrse.  The  urine 
brought  into  the  bladder  accumulates  within  its  cavity  to  a  certain 
limit.  It  is  prevented  from  escaping  through  the  urethra  at  first 
by  the  mere  elasticity  of  the  parts  at  the  urethral  orifice,  aided  per- 
haps by  tonic  contraction  of  the  internal  sphincter,  although  this 
function  of  the  circular  layer  is  disputed  by  some  observers.  When 
the  accumulation  becomes  greater  the  external  sphincter  is  brought 
into  action.  If  the  desire  to  urinate  is  strong  the  external  sphincter 
seems  undoubtedly  to  be  controlled  by  voluntary  effort,  but  whether 
or  not,  in  moderate  filling  of  the  bladder,  it  is  brought  into  play 
by  an  involuntary  reflex  is  not  definitely  determined.  Backflow 
of  urine  from  the  bladder  into  the  ureters  is  effectually  prevented 
by  the  oblique  course  of  the  ureters  through  the  wall  of  the  blad- 
der. Owing  to  this  circumstance,  pressure  within  the  bladder 
serves  to  close  the  mouths  of  the  ureters,  and,  indeed,  the  more 
completely,  the  higher  the  pressure.  At  some  point  in  the  filling 
of  the  bladder  the  pressure  is  sufficient  to  arouse  a  conscious  sen- 
sation of  fullness  and  a  desire  to  micturate.  Under  normal  condi- 
tions the  act  of  micturition  follows.  It  consists  essentially  in  a 
strong  contraction  of  the  bladder,  with  a  simultaneous  relaxation 
of  the  external  sphincter,  if  this  muscle  is  in  action,  the  effect  of 
which  is  to  obliterate  more  or  less  completely  the  cavity  of  the  blad- 
der and  drive  the  urine  out  through  the  urethra. 

The  force  of  this  contraction  is  considerable,  as  is  evidenced  by 
the  height  to  which  the  urine  may  spurt  from  the  end  of  the  urethra. 
According  to  Mosso,  the  contraction  may  support,  in  the  dog,  a 
column  of  liquid  two  meters  high.  The  contractions  of  the  blad- 
der may  be  and  usually  are  assisted  by  contractions  of  the  walls 
of  the  abdomen,  especially  toward  the  end  of  the  act.  As  in  defeca- 
tion and  vomiting,  the  contraction  of  the  abdominal  muscles,  when 
the  glottis  is  closed  so  as  to  keep  the  diaphragm  fixed,  serves  to  in- 
crease the  pressure  in  the  abdominal  and  pelvic  cavities,  and  thus 
assists  in  or  completes  the  emptying  of  the  bladder.  It  is, 
however,  not  an  essential  part  of  the  act  of  micturition.  The  last 
portions  of  the  urine  escaping  into  the  urethra  are  ejected,  in  the 
male,  in  spurts  produced  by  the  rhythmical  contractions  of  the 
bulbocavernosus  muscle. 

Considerable  uncertainty  and  difference  of  opinion  exists  as  to 


764  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

the  physiological  mechanism  by  which  this  series  of  muscular  con- 
tractions, and  especially  the  contractions  of  the  bladder  itself,  are 
produced.  According  to  the  frequently  quoted  description  given 
by  Goltz,*  the  series  of  events  is  as  follows:  The  distention  of  the 
bladder  by  the  urine  causes  finally  a  stimulation  of  the  sensory 
fibers  of  the  organ  and  produces  a  reflex  contraction  of  the  blad- 
der musculature  which  squeezes  some  urine  into  the  urethra.  The 
first  drops,  however,  that  enter  the  urethra  stimulate  the  sensory 
nerves  there  and  give  rise  to  a  conscious  desire  to  urinate.  If  no 
obstacle  is  presented  the  bladder  then  empties  itself,  assisted  per- 
haps by  the  contractions  of  the  abdominal  muscles.  The  emptying 
of  the  bladder  may,  however,  be  prevented,  if  desirable,  by  a  volun- 
tary contraction  of  the  sphincter  urethrse,  which  opposes  the  effect 
of  the  contraction  of  the  bladder.  If  the  bladder  is  not  too  full 
and 'the  sphincter  is  kept  in  action  for  some  time,  the  contractions 
of  the  bladder  may  cease  and  the  desire  to  micturate  pass  off.  Ac- 
cording to  this  view,  the  voluntary  control  of  the  process  is  limited 
to  the  action  of  the  external  sphincter  and  the  abdominal  muscles; 
the  contraction  of  the  bladder  itself  is  purely  an  unconscious  reflex 
taking  place  through  a  lumbar  center. 

The  experiments  of  Goltz  and  others,  upon  dogs  in  which  the 
spinal  cord  was  severed  at  the  junction  of  the  lumbar  and  the  tho- 
racic regions,  indicate  that  micturition  is  essentially  a  reflex  act, 
with  its  center  in  the  lumbar  cord,  although  the  same  observer  has 
shown  that  in  dogs  whose  spinal  cord  has  been  entirely  destroyed, 
except  in  the  cervical  and  upper  thoracic  region,  the  bladder  emp- 
ties itself  normally  without  the  aid  of  external  stimulation.  Mosso 
and  Pellacanif  have  made  experiments  upon  women  in  which  a 
catheter  was  introduced  into  the  bladder  and  connected  with  a  record- 
ing apparatus  to  measure  the  volume  of  the  bladder.  Their  ex- 
periments indicate  that  the  sensation  of  fullness  and  desire  to 
micturate  come  from  sensory  stimulation  in  the  bladder  itself 
caused  by  the  pressure  of  the  urine.  They  point  out  that  the 
bladder  is  very  sensitive  to  reflex  stimulation;  that  every  psychical 
act  and  every  sensory  stimulus  is  apt  to  cause  a  contraction  or  in- 
creased tone  of  the  bladder.  The  bladder  is  therefore  subject  to 
continual  changes  in  size  from  reflex  stimulation,  and  the  pressure 
within  it  will  depend  not  simply  on  the  quantity  of  urine,  but  on 
the  condition  of  tone  of  its  muscles.  At  a  certain  pressure  the 
sensory  nerves  are  stimulated  and  under  normal  conditions  mictu- 
rition ensues.  We  may  understand,  from  this  point  of  view,  how  it 
happens  that  we  have  sometimes  a  strong  desire  to  micturate  when 
the  bladder  contains  but  little  urine, — for  example,  under  emotional 

*  "  Archiv  f .  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  8,  478,   1874. 
t"  Archives   italiennes  de  biologic, "  1,  1882. 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN    AS    EXCRETORY    ORGANS.  765 

excitement.  In  such  cases  if  the  micturition  is  prevented,  probably 
by  the  action  of  the  external  sphincter,  the  bladder  may  sub- 
sequently relax  and  the  sensation  of  fullness  and  desire  to  micturate 
pass  away  until  the  urine  accumulates  in  sufficient  quantity,  or  the 
pressure  is  again  raised  by  some  circumstance  which  causes  a  reflex 
contraction  of  the  bladder. 

Nervous  Mechanism. — According  to  Langley  and  Anderson,*  the 
bladder  in  cats,  dogs,  and  rabbits  receives  motor  fibers  from  two 
sources:  (1)  From  the  lumbar  nerves,  the  fibers  passing  out  in  the 
second  to  the  fifth  lumbar  nerves  and  reaching  the  bladder  through 
the  sympathetic  chain  and  the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglion  and 
hypogastric  nerves.  Stimulation  of  these  nerves  causes  compara- 
tively feeble  contraction  of  the  bladder.  (2)  From  the  sacral 
spinal  nerves,  the  fibers  originating  in  the  second  and  third  sacral 
spinal  nerves,  or  in  the  rabbit  in  the  third  and  fourth,  and  taking  their 
course  through  the  so-called  nervus  erigens.  Stimulation  of  these 
nerves,  or  some  of  them,  causes  strong  contractions  of  the  blad- 
der, sufficient  to  empty  its  contents.  Little  evidence  was  obtained 
of  the  presence  of  vasomotor  fibers.  According  to  Nawrocki  and 
Skabitschewsky,t  the  spinal  sensory  fibers  to  the  bladder  are  found 
in  part  in  the  posterior  roots  of  the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth 
sacral  spinal  nerves,  particularly  the  second  and  third.  When  these 
fibers  are  stimulated  they  excite  reflexly  the  motor  fibers  to  the 
bladder  found  in  the  anterior  roots  of  the  second  and  third  sacral 
spinal  nerves.  Some  sensory  fibers  to  the  bladder  may  pass  by 
way  of  the  hypogastric  nerves.  When  the  central  stump  of  one 
hypogastric  nerve  is  stimulated  it  produces,  according  to  these 
authors,  a  reflex  effect  upon  the  motor  fibers  in  the  other  hypo- 
gastric nerve,  causing  a  contraction  of  the  bladder,  the  reflex  oc- 
curring through  the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglion.  This  observa- 
tion has  been  confirmed  by  several  authorities,  but  has  been  ex- 
plained by  Fangley  and  Anderson  as  a  pseudoreflex  or  axon  reflex 
(see  p.  142). 

The  immediate  spinal  center  through  which  the  contractions 
of  the  bladder  may  be  reflexly  stimulated  or  inhibited  lies,  accord- 
ing to  the  experiments  of  Goltz,  in  the  lumbar  portion  of  the  cord, 
probably  between  the  second  and  fifth  lumbar  spinal  nerves.  In 
dogs  in  which  this  portion  of  the  cord  was  isolated  by  a  cross-section 
at  the  junction  of  the  thoracic  and  lumbar  regions,  micturition  still 
ensued  when  the  bladder  was  sufficiently  full,  and  it  could  be  called 
forth  reflexly  by  sensory  stimuli,  especially  by  slight  irritation  of 
the  anal  region.     This  localization  has  been  confirmed  by  others. J 

*" Journal  of  Physiology,"   19,  71,   1895. 

t"Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  49,  141,  1891. 

i  See  Stewart,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  2,  182,  1899. 


766  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

Excretory  Functions  of  the  Skin. — The  physiological  activi- 
ties of  the  skin  are  varied.  It  forms,  in  the  first  place,  a  sensory 
surface  covering  the  body,  and  interposed,  as  it  were,  between  the 
external  world  and  the  inner  mechanism.  Nerve  fibers  of  pressure, 
temperature,  and  pain  are  distributed  over  its  surface,  and  by  means 
of  these  fibers  reflexes  of  various  kinds  are  effected  which  keep  the 
body  adapted  to  changes  in  its  environment.  The  physiology  of 
the  skin  from  this  standpoint  is  discussed  in  the  section  on  special 
senses.  Again,  the  skin  plays  a  part  of  immense  value  to  the  body 
in  regulating  the  body  temperature.  This  regulation,  which  is 
effected  by  variations  in  the  blood  supply  or  the  sweat  secretion, 
is  described  at  appropriate  places  in  the  sections  on  Nutrition  and 
Circulation.  In  the  female,  during  the  period  of  lactation,  the  mam- 
mary glands,  which  must  be  reckoned  among  the  organs  of  the 
skin,  form  an  important  secretion,  the  milk;  the  physiology  of  this 
gland  is  referred  to  in  the  section  on  Reproduction.  In  this  section 
we  are  concerned  with  the  physiology  of  the  skin  from  a  different 
standpoint, — ^namely,  as  an  excretory  organ.  The  excretions  of 
the  skin  are  formed  in  the  sweat-glands  and  the  sebaceous  glands. 

Sweat. — The  sweat  or  perspiration  is  a  secretion  of  the  sweat 
glands.  These  latter  structures  are  found  over  the  entire  cutaneous 
surface  except  in  the  deeper  portions  of  the  external  auditory  meatus, 
the  prepuce,  and  the  glans  penis.  They  are  particularly  abundant 
upon  the  palms  of  the  hands  and  the  soles  of  the  feet.  Krause 
estimates  that  their  total  number  for  the  whole  cutaneous  surface 
is  about  two  millions.  In  man  they  are  formed  on  the  type  of 
simple  tubular  glands;  the  terminal  portion  contains  the  secretory 
cells,  and  at  this  part  the  tube  is  usually  coiled  to  make  a  more  or 
less  compact  knot,  thus  increasing  the  extent  of  the  secreting  sur- 
face. The  larger  ducts  have  a  thin,  muscular  coat  of  involuntary 
tissue  that  may  possibly  be  concerned  in  the  ejection  of  the  secre- 
tion. The  secretory  cells  in  the  terminal  portion  are  columnar  in 
shape,  possess  a  granular  cytoplasm,  and  are  arranged  in  a  single 
layer.  The  amount  of  secretion  formed  by  these  glands  varies 
greatly,  being  influenced  by  the  condition  of  the  atmosphere  as  re- 
gards temperature  and  moisture,  as  well  as  by  various  physical  and 
psychical  states,  such  as  exercise  and  emotions.  The  average  quan- 
tit}^  for  twenty-four  hours  is  said  to  vary  between  700  and  900  gms., 
although  this  amount  may  be  doubled  under  certain  conditions. 

According  to  an  interesting  paper  by  Schierbeck,*  the  average 
quantity  of  sweat  in  twenty-four  hours  may  amount  to  2  to  3  liters 
in  a  person  clothed,  and  therefore  with  an  average  temperature 
of  32°  C.  surrounding  the  skin.     This  author  states  that  the  amount 

*"Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  1893,  116;  see  also  Willebrand,  "Skandi- 
navisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  13,  337,   1902. 


KIDNEY   AND   SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  767 

of  sweat  given  off  from  the  skin  in  the  form  of  insensible  perspira- 
tion increases  proportionately  with  the  temperature  until  a  certain 
critical  point  is  reached  (about  33°  C.  in  the  person  investigated), 
when  there  is  a  marked  increase  in  the  water  eliminated,  the  in- 
crease being  simultaneous  with  the  formation  of  visible  sweat.  At 
the  same  time  there  is  a  sudden  increase  in  the  CO  2  eliminated  from 
the  skin.  It  is  possible  that  the  sudden  increase  in  CO 2  is  an  in- 
dication of  greater  metabolism  in  the  sweat  glands  in  connection 
with  the  formation  of  visible  sweat. 

Composition  of  the  Secretion. — ^The  precise  chemical  composition 
of  sweat  is  difficult  to  determine,  owing  to  the  fact  that  as  usually 
obtained  it  is  liable  to  be  mixed  with  the  sebaceous  secretion.  Nor- 
mally it  is  a  very  thin  secretion  of  low  specific  gravity  (1.004)  and 
an  alkaline  reaction,  although  when  first  secreted  the  reaction  may 
be  acid  owing  to  admixture  with  the  sebaceous  material.  The 
larger  part  of  the  inorganic  salts  consists  of  sodium  chlorid.  Small 
quantities  of  the  alkaline  sulphates  and  phosphates  are  also  pres- 
ent. The  organic  constituents,  though  present  in  mere  traces,  are 
quite  varied  in  number.  Urea,  uric  acid,  creatinin,  aromatic  oxy- 
acids,  ethereal  sulphates  of  phenol  and  skatol,  and  albumin,  are 
said  to  occur  when  the  sweating  is  profuse.  Argutinsky  has  shown 
that  after  the  action  of  vapor  baths,  and  as  the  result  of  muscular 
work,  the  amount  of  urea  eliminated  in  this  secretion  may  be  con- 
siderable. Under  pathological  conditions  involving  a  diminished 
elimination  of  urea  through  the  kidneys  it  has  been  observed  that 
the  amount  found  in  the  sweat  is  markedly  increased,  so  that  crj^s- 
tals  of  it  may  be  deposited  upon  the  skin.  Under  perfectly  nor- 
mal conditions,  however,  it  is  obvious  that  the  organic  constituents 
are  of  minor  importance.  The  main  fact  to  be  considered  in  the 
secretion  of  sweat  is  the  formation  of  water. 

Secretory  Fibers  to  the  Sweat  Glands. — Definite  experimental 
proof  of  the  existence  of  sweat  nerves  was  first  obtained  by  Goltz  * 
in  some  experiments  upon  stimulation  of  the  sciatic  nerve  in  cats. 
In  the  cat  and  dog,  in  which  sweat  glands  occur  on  the  balls  of  the 
feet,  the  presence  of  sweat  nerves  may  be  demonstrated  with  great 
ease.  Electrical  stimulation  of  the  peripheral  end  of  the  divided 
sciatic  nerve,  if  sufficiently  strong,  will  cause  visible  drops  of  sweat 
to  form  on  the  hairless  skin  of  the  balls  of  the  feet.  When  the 
electrodes  are  kept  at  the  same  spot  on  the  nerve  and  the  stimula- 
tion is  maintained  the  secretion  soon  ceases;  but  this  effect  seems 
to  be  due  to  a  temporar}"  injury  of  some  kind  to  the  nerve  fibers 
at  the  point  of  stimulation,  and  not  to  a  genuine  fatigue  of  the 
sweat  glands  or  the  sweat  fibers,  since  moving  the  electrodes  to  a 
new  point  on  the  nerve  farther  toward  the  periphery  calls  forth  a 
*  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  11,  71,  1875. 


768  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

new  secretion.  The  secretion  so  formed  is  thin  and  limpid,  and  has 
a  marked  alkahne  reaction.  The  anatomical  course  of  these  fibers 
has  been  worked  out  in  the  cat  with  great  care  by  Langley.*  He 
finds  that  for  the  hind  feet  they  leave  the  spinal  cord  chiefly  in  the 
first  and  second  lumbar  nerves,  enter  the  sympathetic  chain,  and 
emerge  from  this  as  postganglionic  fibers  in  the  gray  rami,  proceed- 
ing from  the  sixth  lumbar  to  the  second  sacral  ganglion,  but  chiefly 
in  the  seventh  lumbar  and  first  sacral,  and  then  join  the  nerves  of 
the  sciatic  plexus.  For  the  forefeet  the  fibers  leave  the  spinal  cord 
in  the  fourth  to  the  tenth  thoracic  nerves,  enter  the  sympathetic 
chain,  pass  upward  to  the  first  thoracic  ganglion,  whence  they  are 
continued  as  postganglionic  fibers  that  pass  out  of  this  ganglion  by 
the  gray  rami  communicating  with  the  nerves  forming  the  brachial 
plexus.  The  action  of  the  nerve  fibers  upon  the  sweat  glands  can 
not  be  explained  as  an  indirect  effect, — ^for  instance,  as  a  result  of 
a  variation  in  the  blood-flow.  Experiments  have  repeatedly  shown 
that,  in  the  cat,  stimulation  of  the  sciatic  still  calls  forth  a  secre- 
tion after  the  blood  has  been  shut  off  from  the  leg  by  ligation  of 
the  aorta,  or  indeed  after  the  leg  has  been  amputated  for  as  long 
as  twenty  minutes.  So  in  human  beings  it  is  known  that  profuse 
sweating  may  often  accompany  a  pallid  skin,  as  in  terror  or 
nausea,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  flushed  skin  of  fever  is  char- 
acterized by  the  absence  of  perspiration.  There  seems  to  be  no 
doubt  that  the  sweat  nerves  are  genuine  secretory  fibers,  causing 
a  secretion  in  consequence  of  a  direct  action  on  the  cells  of  the  sweat 
glands.  In  accordance  with  this  physiological  fact  histological 
work  has  demonstrated  that  special  nerve  fibers  are  supplied  to 
the  glandular  epithelium.  According  to  Arnstein,  the  terminal 
fibers  form  a  small,  branching,  varicose  ending  in  contact  with  the 
epithelial  cells.  The  sweat  gland  may  be  made  to  secrete  in  many 
ways  other  than  by  direct  artificial  excitation  of  the  sweat  fibers, — 
for  example,  by  external  heat,  dyspnea,  muscular  exercise,  strong 
emotions,  and  by  the  action  of  various  drugs,  such  as  pilocarpin, 
muscarin,  strychnin,  nicotin,  picrotoxin,  and  physostigmin.  In  all 
such  cases  the  effect  is  supposed  to  result  from  an  action  on  the 
sweat  fibers,  either  directly  on  their  terminations  or  indirectly  upon 
their  cells  of  origin  in  the  central  nervous  system.  In  ordinary 
life  the  usual  cause  of  profuse  sweating  is  a  high  external  temper- 
ature or  muscular  exercise.  With  regard  to  the  former  it  is  known 
that  the  high  temperature  does  not  excite  the  sweat  glands  im- 
mediately, but  through  the  intervention  of  the  central  nervous 
system.  If  the  nerves  going  to  a  limb  be  cut,  exposure  of  that 
limb  to  a  high  temperature  does  not  cause  a  secretion,  showing 
that  the  temperature  change  alone  is  not  sufficient  to  excite  the 
*"  Journal  of  Physiology,"   12,  347,   1891. 


KIDNEY   AND    SKIN   AS    EXCRETORY   ORGANS.  •   769 

gland  or  its  terminal  nerve  fibers.  We  must  suppose,  therefore, 
that  the  high  temperature  acts  upon  the  sensory  cutaneous  nerves, 
possibly  the  heat  fibers,  and  reflexly  stimulates  the  sweat  fibers. 
Although  external  temperature  does  not  directly  excite  the  glands, 
it  should  be  stated  that  it  affects  their  irritability  either  by  direct 
action  on  the  gland  cells  or  upon  the  terminal  nerve  fibers.  At  a 
sufficiently  low  temperature  the  cat's  paw  does  not  secrete  at  all, 
and  the  irritability  of  the  glands  is  increased  by  a  rise  of  temper- 
ature up  to  about  45°  C. 

Dyspnea,  muscular  exercise,  emotions,  and  many  drugs  affect 
the  secretion,  probably  by  action  on  the  nerve  centers.  Pilocarpin, 
on  the  contrary,  is  known  to  stimulate  the  endings  of  the  nerve 
fibers  in  the  glands,  while  atropin  has  the  opposite  effect,  com- 
pletely paralyzing  the  secretory  fibers. 

Sweat  Centers  in  the  Central  Nervous  System. — The  fact  that 
secretion  of  sweat  may  be  occasioned  by  stimulation  of  afferent 
nerves  or  by  direct  action  upon  the  central  nervous  system,  as  in 
the  case  of  dyspnea,  implies  the  existence  of  physiological  centers 
controlling  the  secretory  fibers.  The  precise  location  of  the  sweat 
center  or  centers  has  not,  however,  been  satisfactorily  determined. 
Histologically  and  anatomically  the  arrangement  of  the  sweat 
fibers  resembles  that  of  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers,  and,  reasoning 
from  analogy,  one  might  suppose  the  existence  of  a  general  sweat 
center  in  the  medulla  comparable  to  the  vasoconstrictor  center, 
but  positive  evidence  of  the  existence  of  such  an  arrangement  is 
lacking.  It  has  been  shown  that  when  the  medulla  is  separated 
from  the  cord  by  a  section  in  the  cervical  or  thoracic  region  the 
action  of  dyspnea,  or  of  various  sudorific  drugs  supposed  to  act  on 
the  central  nervous  system,  may  still  cause  a  secretion.  On  the 
evidence  of  results  of  this  character  it  is  assumed  that  there  are  spinal 
sweat  centers;  but  whether  these  are  few  in  number  or  represent 
simply  the  various  nuclei  of  origin  of  the  fibers  to  different  regions 
is  not  definitely  known.  It  is  possible  that  in  addition  to  these 
spinal  centers  there  is  a  general  regulating  center  in  the  medulla. 

Sebaceous  Secretion. — ^The  sebaceous  glands  are  simple  or 
compound  alveolar  glands  found  over  the  cutaneous  surface,  usually 
in  association  with  the  hairs,  although  in  some  cases  they  occur 
separately,  as,  for  instance,  on  the  prepuce  and  glans  penis,  and 
on  the  Ups.  When  they  occur  with  the  hairs  the  short  duct  opens 
into  the  hair  follicle,  so  that  the  secretion  is  passed  out  upon  the 
hair  near  the  point  at  which  it  projects  from  the  skin.  The  alveoli  are 
filled  with  cuboidal  or  polygonal  epithehal  cells,  which  are  arranged 
in  several  layers.  Those  nearest  the  lumen  of  the  gland  are  filled 
with  fatty  material.  These  cells  are  supposed  to  be  cast  off  bodily, 
their  detritus  going  to  form  the  secretion.  New  cells  are  formed 
49 


770  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

from  the  layer  nearest  the  basement  membrane,  and  thus  the  glands 
continue  to  produce  a  slow  but  continuous  secretion.  The  sebaceous 
secretion,  or  sebum,  is  an  oily,  semiliquid  material  that  sets,  upon 
exposure  to  the  air,  to  a  cheesy  mass,  as  is  seen  in  the  comedones 
or  pimples  which  so  frequently  occur  upon  the  skin  from  occlusion 
of  the  opening  of  the  ducts.  The  exact  composition  of  the  secretion 
is  not  known.  It  contains  fats  and  soaps,  some  cholesterin,  albu- 
minous material  (part  of  which  is  a  nucleo-albumin  often  described 
as  a  casein),  remnants  of  epithelial  cells,  and  inorganic  salts.  The 
cholesterin  occurs  in  combination  with  a  fatty  acid,  and  is  found  in 
especially  large  quantities  in  sheep's  wool,  from  which  it  is  extracted 
and  used  commercially  under  the  name  of  lanolin.  The  sebaceous 
secretion  from  different  places,  or  in  different  animals,  is  probably 
somewhat  variable  in  composition  as  well  as  in  quantity.  The 
secretion  of  the  prepuce  is  known  as  the  smegma  prceputii;  that  of 
the  external  auditory  meatus,  mixed  with  the  secretion  of  the  neigh- 
boring sweat  glands  or  ceruminous  glands,  forms  the  well-known 
earwax  or  cerumen.  The  secretion  in  this  place  contains  a  reddish 
pigment  of  a  bitterish-sweet  taste,  the  composition  of  which  has 
not  been  investigated.  Upon  the  skin  of  the  newly  born  the  se- 
baceous material  is  accumulated  to  form  the  vernix  caseosa.  The 
well-known  uropygal  gland  of  birds  is  homologous  with  the  mam- 
malian sebaceous  glands,  and  its  secretion  has  been  obtained  in 
sufficient  quantities  for  chemical  analysis.  Physiologically  it  is 
believed  that  the  sebaceous  secretion  affords  a  protection  to  the 
skin  and  hairs.  Its  oily  character  doubtless  serves  to  protect  the 
hairs  from  becoming  too  brittle,  or,  on  the  other  hand,  from  being 
too  easily  saturated  with  external  moisture.  In  this  way  it  prob- 
ably aids  in  making  the  hairy  coat  a  more  perfect  protection  against 
the  effect  of  external  changes  of  temperature.  Upon  the  surface  of 
the  skin,  also,  it  forms  a  thin,  protective  layer  that  tends  to  prevent 
undue  loss  of  heat  from  evaporation,  and  possibly  is  important  in 
other  ways  in  maintaining  the  physiological  integrity  of  the  external 
surface. 

Excretion  of  CO 2. — In  some  of  the  lower  animals — the  frog, 
for  example — the  skin  takes  an  important  part  in  the  respiratory 
exchanges,  eliminating  CO  2  and  absorbing  O.  In  man,  and  pre- 
sumably in  the  mammalia  generally,  it  has  been  ascertained  that 
changes  of  this  kind  are  very  slight.  Estimates  of  the  amount  of 
CO  2  given  off  from  the  skin  of  man  during  twenty-four  hours  vary 
greatly,  but  the  amount  is  small,  about  7  to  8  gms.  in  twenty-four 
hours,  unless  there  is  marked  sweating,  in  which  case  the  amount  is 
noticeably  increased. 


CHAPTER  XLVI. 

SECRETION    OF   THE    DUCTLESS    GLANDS-INTERNAL 

SECRETION. 

The  term  "internal  secretion"  is  used  to  designate  those  secre- 
tions of  glandular  tissues  which,  instead  of  being  carried  off  to  the 
exterior  by  a  duct,  are  eliminated  in  the  blood  or  lymph.  The  idea 
that  secretory  products  may  be  given  off  in  this  way  has  long  been 
held  in  reference  to  the  ductless  glands,  such  as  the  thyroid,  pitui- 
tary body,  etc.,  the  absence  of  a  duct  suggesting  naturally  such  a 
possibihty.  The  term,  however,  seems  to  have  been  employed 
first  by  Claude  Bernard,  who  emphasized  the  distinction  between 
the  ordinary  secretions,  or  external  secretions,  and  this  group  of 
internal  secretions.  Modern  interest  in  the  latter  is  due  largely  to 
work  done  by  Brown-Sequard  (1889)  upon  testicular  extracts,  work 
which  itself  was  of  doubtful  value.  This  author  was  led  to  amplify 
the  conception  of  an  internal  secretion  by  the  assumption  that  all 
tissues  give  off  a  something  to  the  blood  which  is  characteristic, 
and  is  of  importance  in  general  nutrition.  This  idea  led  in  turn  to 
a  revival  of  some  old  notions  regarding  the  treatment  of  diseases 
of  the  different  organs  by  extracts  of  the  corresponding  tissue, 
a  therapeutical  method  usually  designated  as  opotherapy.  Brown- 
Sequard's  extension  of  the  idea  of  internal  secretion  has  not  been 
justified  by  subsequent  work,  and  to-day  we  must  limit  the  term 
to  definitely  glandular  tissues.  Experience  has  shown,  however, 
that  not  only  the  ductless  glands,  but  some  at  least  of  the  typical 
glands  provided  with  ducts  may  give  rise  to  internal  secretions, 
the  pancreas,  for  example,  or  the  liver.  In  some  of  the  ductless 
glands,  on  the  contrary,  the  existence  or  non-existence  of  an  internal 
secretion  is  still  an  open  question.  The  work  done  since  1889  has, 
however,  demonstrated  fully  that  some  of  the  ductless  glands  play 
a  role  of  the  very  greatest  importance  in  general  nutrition,  and  this 
knowledge  has  proved  useful  in  widening  our  conception  of  the 
nutritional  relations  in  the  organism  and  besides  has  found  a  valuable 
application  in  practical  medicine. 

Liver. — ^We  do  not  usually  regard  the  liver  as  furnishing  an 
internal  secretion.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  does  form  two  products 
within  its  cells, — glycogen  (sugar)  and  urea,  which  are  subsequently 
given  off  to  the  blood  for  purposes  of  general  nutrition  or  for  elim- 

771 


772  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

ination.  The  processes  in  this  case  fall  under  the  general  defini- 
tion of  internal  secretion,  and,  in  fact,  may  be  used  to  illustrate 
specifically  the  meaning  of  this  term.  The  history  of  glycogen  and 
urea  has  been  considered. 

Internal  Secretion  of  the  Thyroid  Tissues. — ^The  most  im- 
portant and  definite  outcome  of  the  work  on  internal  secretions  has 
been  obtained  with  the  thyroids.  Recent  experimental  work  on 
this  organ  makes  it  necessary  for  us  now  to  distinguish  between  the 
thyroid  and  the  parathyroid  tissues.  The  thyroids  proper  form 
two  oval  bodies  lying  on  the  sides  of  the  trachea  at  its  junction  with 
the  larynx.  They  have  no  ducts,  and  are  composed  of  vesicles  of 
different  sizes,  which  are  lined  by  a  single  layer  of  cuboidal  epithe- 
lium and  contain  in  their  interior  a  material  known  as  colloid.  A 
number  of  histologists  have  traced  the  formation  of  this  colloid  to 
the  lining  epithelial  cells,  and  have  stated,  moreover,  that  the  vesicles 
finally  rupture  and  discharge  the  colloid  into  the  surrounding  lym- 
phatic spaces.  Accessory  thyroids  varying  in  size  and  number  ma}' 
be  found  along  the  trachea  as  far  down  as  the  heart.  They  possess 
a  vesicular  structure  and  no  doubt  have  a  function  similar  to  that 
of  the  thyroid  body. 

The  parathyroids  are  quite  different  structures.  Four  of  these 
bodies  are  usually  described,  two  on  each  side,  and  their  positions 
vary  somewhat  in  different  animals.  In  man  the  superior  (or 
internal)  parathyroids  are  found  upon  the  posterior  surface  of  the 
thyroid  at  the  level  of  the  junction  of  its  upper  with  its  middle  third. 
This  portion  of  the  organ  may  be  imbedded  in  the  thyroid.  The 
inferior  (or  external)  parathyroids  lie  near  the  lower  margin  of  the 
thyroid  on  its  posterior  surface,  and  in  some  cases  lower  down  on 
the  sides  of  the  trachea.  The  tissue  has  a  structure  quite  different 
from  that  of  the  thyroids,  being  composed  of  solid  masses  or  columns 
of  epithelial  cells  which  are  not  arranged  in  vesicles  and  contain  no 
colloid. 

Extirpation  of  the  Thyroids  and  Parathyroids. — In  1856 
Schiff  showed  that  extirpation  of  the  thyroids  (complete  thyroi- 
dectomy) in  dogs  is  followed  usually  by  the  death  of  the  animal  in 
one  to  four  weeks.  The  animal  exhibits  certain  characteristic  symp- 
toms, such  as  muscular  tremors,  which  may  pass  into  convulsions, 
cachexia,  emaciation,  and  a  condition  of  apathy.  This  result  was 
confirmed  by  subsequent  observers,  but  many  exceptions  were  noted. 
Great  interest  was  shown  in  these  results,  because  on  the  surgical 
side  reports  were  made  showing  that  after  complete  removal  of  the 
thyroids  in  cases  of  goiter  evil  consequences  might  ensue,  either 
acute  convulsive  attacks  or  chonic  malnutrition.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  became  known  that  atrophy  of  the  thyroids  in  the  young 
is  responsible  for  the  condition  of  arrested  growth  and  deficient 


SECRETION    OF   THE    DUCTLESS    GLANDS.  773 

mental  development  designated  as  cretinism,  and  in  the  adult  the 
same  cause  gives  rise  to  the  peculiar  disease  of  myxedema,  character- 
ized by  distressing  mental  deterioration,  an  edematous  condition 
of  the  skin,  loss  of  hair,  etc.  Schiff  and  others  found  that  the  evil 
results  of  complete  thyroidectomy  in  dogs  might  be  obviated  by 
grafting  pieces  of  the  thyroid  in  the  body,  and  this  knowledge  was 
quickly  applied  to  human  beings  in  cases  of  myxedema  and  cretinism 
with  astonishingly  successful  results.  Instead  of  grafting  thyroid 
tissue  it  was  found,  in  fact,  that  injection  of  extracts  under  the 
skin  or  better  still  simple  feeding  of  thyroid  material  gave  similar 
favorable  results:  the  individuals  recovered  their  normal  appear- 
ance and  mental  powers.*  Later  Baumannf  succeeded  in  isolating 
from  the  glands  a  substance  designated  as  iodothyrin,  which  shows 
in  large  measure  the  beneficial  influence  exerted  by  thyroid  extracts 
in  cases  of  myxedema  and  parenchymatous  goiter.  This  substance 
is  characterized  by  containing  a  large  amount  of  iodin  (9.3  per 
cent,  of  the  dry  weight).  It  is  contained  in  the  gland  in  combina- 
tion with  proteid  bodies,  from  which  it  may  be  separated  by  diges- 
tion with  gastric  juice  or  by  boihng  with  acids. 

The  Function  of  the  Parathyroids. — Most  of  the  results  des- 
cribed above  were  obtained  before  the  existence  of  the  parathy- 
roids was  recognized.  Early  in  the  history  of  the  subject  it  was 
recognized  that  complete  removal  of  the  thyroids  proper  in  herbiv- 
orous animals  (rats,  rabbits)  is  not  attended  by  a  fatal  result. 
Gley  and  others,  however,  proved  that  if  the  parathyroids  also  are 
removed  these  animals  die  with  the  symptoms  described  in  the 
case  of  dogs,  cats,  and  other  carnivorous  animals.  This  result  at- 
tracted attention  to  the  parathyroids.  Numerous  experiments, 
especially  by  Moussu,J  Gley,§  and  Vassale  and  Generale,  ||  have 
seemed  to  show  a  marked  difference  between  the  results  of  thyroi- 
dectomy and  parathyroidectomy.  When  the  parathyroids  alone  are 
removed  the  animal  dies  quickly  with  acute  symptoms,  muscular 
convulsions  (tetany),  etc.;  when  the  thyroids  alone  are  removed 
the  animal  may  survive  for  a  long  period,  but  develops  a  condition 
of  chronic  malnutrition, — a  slowly  increasing  cachexia  which  may 
exhibit  itself  in  a  condition  resembling  myxedema  in  man.  This 
distinction  has  been  generally  accepted,  and  it  throws  much  light 
upon  the  discrepancy  in  the  results  obtained  by  some  of  the  earlier 
observers.     Complete  thyroidectomy  with  the  acutely  fatal  results 

*  For  a  general  account  of  the  development  of  the  subject  and  the  liter- 
ature see  "  Transactions  of  the  Congress  of  American  Physicians  and  Surgeons" 
(Howell,  Chittenden,  Adami,  Putnam,  Kinnicutt,  Osier),  1897,  and  Jean- 
delize,  "  Insuffisance  thyroidienne  et  parathyroidienne, "  Nancy,  1902. 

t  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiolog.  Chemie,"  21,  319,  and  481,  1896. 

%  Moussu,   "  Proc.   Fourth   International   Physiolog.   Congress, "    1898. 

§  Gley,    "  Pfliiger's   Archiv, "   66,    308,    1897. 

II  Vassale  and  Generale,  "Archives  italiennes  de  biologie, "  33,  1900. 


774  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

usually  described  includes  those  cases  in  which  both  thyroids  and 
parathyroids  were  removed,  while  probably  many  of  the  apparently 
negative  results  obtained  after  excision  of  the  thyroids  are  expli- 
cable on  the  supposition  that  one  or  more  of  the  parathyroids  were 
left  in  the  animal.  It  should  be  stated,  however,  that  two  recent 
observers,  Vincent  and  Jolly,*  as  the  result  of  numerous  experi- 
ments made  upon  different  varieties  of  animals,  throw  some  doubt 
upon  these  conclusions.  They  contend  that  in  herbivorous  animals 
fully  half  of  those  operated  upon  survive  complete  removal  of  all 
thyroid  tissue,  showing  no  evil  symptoms  except  perhaps  a  di- 
minished resistance  to  infection.  Carnivorous  animals,  on  the  con- 
trary, usually  die  after  such  an  operation.  Assuming,  however, 
that  the  distinction  made  by  Moussu  and  others  is  well  founded, 
the  interesting  question  arises  as  to  the  functional  relationship  be- 
tween the  thyroids  and  the  parathyroids.  Myxedema,  cretinism, 
and  similar  conditions  in  man  may  be  referred  to  an  atrophy  or  loss 
of  functions  of  the  thyroids,  but  there  is  no  knowledge  of  effects 
attributable  to  pathological  changes  in  the  parathyroids.  The  old 
view  that  the  parathyroids  represent  embryonic  thyroid  tissue  which 
after  removal  of  the  thyroids  replaces  the  functions  of  the  latter 
is  not  supported  by  experimental  or  histological  evidence.  The 
two  bodies  represent  different  structures,  histologically,  embryo- 
logically,  and  physiologically,  and  yet  there  seems  to  be  some  cor- 
relation in  function  between  them.  The  parathyroids,  like  the  thy- 
roids, contain  a  large  percentage  of  iodin;  when  the  parathyroids 
are  removed  the  thyroids  exhibit  a  change  in  structure  in  that  the 
colloid  material  disappears  from  the  vesicles,  and  finally  the  tetany 
following  removal  of  the  parathyroids  may  be  ameliorated  by  sub- 
sequent excision  of  the  thyroids.  The  exact  nature  of  the  functional 
connection  between  these  two  organs  is,  however,  as  yet  quite  un- 
explained;  there  is  need  for  further  investigation. 

The  General  Nature  of  the  Functions  of  the  Thyroids  and 
Parathyroids. — Disregarding  the  difference  in  function  between 
these  two  bodies,  it  is  quite  evident  from  the  facts  given  that  they 
exercise  an  important  control  over  the  processes  of  nutrition  of  the 
body,  and  especially  perhaps  over  those  of  the  central  nervous 
system.  How  is  this  control  exerted?  Two  general  points  of  view 
have  been  advocated.  According  to  one  theory,  the  thyroid  tis- 
sues elaborate  a  special  internal  secretion,  characterized  by  its 
contents  in  iodin.  This  secretion  is  given  off  to  the  lymph  or  blood, 
is  carried  to  the  tissues,  and  there  exercises  a  regulating  action  of 
an  important  or  indeed  essential  character.  Excision  or  atrophy 
of  these  bodies  results  in  a  loss  of  this  secretion  and  a  consequent 
malnutrition  or  perverted  metabolism  in  other  tissues  of  the  organ- 
*  Vincent  and  Jolly,  "  .Journal  of  Physiology, "  32,  65,  1904. 


SECRETION    OF   THE    DUCTLESS   GLANDS.  775 

ism.  According  to  the  other  point  of  view,  less  generally  held,  the 
function  of  these  bodies  is  to  neutralize  or  destroy  toxic  substances 
formed  in  the  metabolism  of  the  rest  of  the  body,  as  the  liver,  for 
instance,  destroys  the  toxic  character  of  the  ammonia  compounds 
by  converting  them  to  urea.  On  this  theory  the  removal  of  the 
thyroid  tissues  results  in  the  accumulation  of  toxic  substances  in 
the  blood  and  the  animal  dies  by  a  process  of  auto-intoxication. 

Cyon's  View  of  the  Function  of  the  Thyroid. — Cyon  in  numerous 
publications  has  advocated  a  different  view  of  the  function  of  the  thyroids. 
These  bodies  have  a  very  large  vascular  supply,  and  this  author  assumes  that 
this  area  serves  as  a  vascular  shunt  or  flood-gate  to  protect  mechanically 
the  circulation  in  the  brain.  The  dilatation  of  the  thyroid  area  under  con- 
ditions that  threaten  congestion  of  the  brain  is  effected  reflexly  by  means 
of  the  hypophysis  cerebri  and  the  vagi.  For  details  of  this  mechanism  and 
also  of  the  supposed  effect  of  the  thyroid  secretion  on  the  irritability  of  the 
centers  innervating  the  heart  and  blood-vessels  see  "  Archives  de  physiologie, " 
1898,  p.  618. 

Adrenal  Bodies. — The  adrenal  bodies — or,  as  they  are  frequently 
called  in  human  anatomy,  the  suprarenal  capsules — belong  to  the 
group  of  ductless  glands.  It  was  shown  first  by  Brown-Sequard 
(1856)  that  removal  of  these  bodies  is  followed  rapidly  by  death. 
This  result  has  been  confirmed  by  many  experimenters,  and  so  far 
as  the  observations  go  the  effect  of  complete  removal  is  the  same 
in  all  animals.  The  fatal  effect  is  more  rapid  than  in  the  case  of 
removal  of  the  thyroids,  death  following  the  operation  usually  in 
two  to  three  days,  or,  according  to  some  accounts,  within  a  few 
hours.  The  symptoms  preceding  death  are  great  prostration,  mus- 
cular weakness,  and  marked  diminution  in  vascular  tone.  These 
symptoms  resemble  those  occurring  in  Addison's  disease  in  man, — - 
a  disease  which  clinical  evidence  has  shown  to  be  associated  with 
pathological  lesions  in  the  suprarenal  capsules.  It  has  been  ex- 
pected, therefore,  that  the  results  obtained  from  thyroid  treatment 
of  myxedema  might  be  paralleled  in  cases  of  Addison's  disease  by 
the  use  of  adrenal  extracts,  but  so  far  these  expectations  have  not 
been  completely  realized.  Oliver*  and  Schaefer,  and,  about  the 
same  time,  Cybulski  and  Szymonowicz,t  discovered  that  this  organ 
forms  a  peculiar  substance  that  has  a  very  definite  physiological 
action,  especially  upon  the  circulatory  system.  They  found  that 
aqueous  extracts  of  the  medulla  of  the  gland  when  injected  into  the 
blood  of  a  living  animal  have  a  remarkable  influence  upon  the  heart 
and  blood-vessels.  If  the  vagi  are  intact,  the  adrenal  extracts  cause 
a  very  marked  slowing  of  the  heart  beat  together  with  a  rise  of  blood- 
pressure.  When  the  inhibitory  fibers  of  the  vagus  are  thrown  out 
of  action  by  section  or  by  the  use  of  atropin  the  heart  rate  is  ac- 

*  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  18,  230,  1895. 

t  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  64,  97,  1896. 


776  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

celerated,  while  the  blood-pressure  is  increased  sometimes  to  an 
extraordinary  extent.  These  results  are  obtained  with  very  small 
doses  of  the  extracts.  Schaefer  states  that  as  little  as  5^  mgms. 
of  the  dried  gland  may  produce  a  maximal  effect  upon  a  dog  weigh- 
ing 10  kgms.  The  effects  produced  by  such  extracts  are  quite  tem- 
porary in  character.  In  the  course  of  a  few  minutes  the  blood- 
pressure  returns  to  normal,  as  also  the  heart  beat,  showing  that  the 
substance  has  been  destroyed  in  some  way  in  the  body,  although 
where  or  how  this  destruction  occurs  is  not  known.  According  to 
Schaefer,  the  kidneys  and  the  adrenals  themselves  are  not  respon- 
sible for  this  prompt  elimination  or  destruction  of  the  active  sub- 
stance. Several  observers*  have  shown  satisfactorily  that  the  ma- 
terial producing  this  effect  is  present  in  perceptible  quantities  in 
the  blood  of  the  adrenal  vein,  so  that  there  can  be  but  little  doubt 
that  it  is  a  distinct  internal  secretion  of  the  adrenal.  Dreyer  has 
shown,  moreover,  that  the  amount  of  this  substance  in  the  adrenal 
blood  is  increased,  judging  from  the  physiological  effects  of  its  in- 
jection, by  stimulation  of  the  splanchnic  nerve.  Since  this  result 
was  obtained  independently  of  the  amount  of  blood-fiow  through 
the  gland,  Dreyer  makes  the  justifiable  assumption  that  the  adrenals 
possess  secretory  nerve  fibers.  Abelf  has  succeeded  in  isolating  a 
substance  from  the  gland  that  produces  the  effect  on  blood-pressure 
and  heart  rate,  and  proposes  for  it  the  name  epinephrin.  He  assigns 
to  it  the  formula  CjoH^gNOg  .  iHgO  and  describes  it  as  a  peculiar, 
unstable,  basic  body.  Salts  of  epinephrin  may  be  obtained  which 
when  injected  into  the  circulation  cause  the  typical  effects  pro- 
duced by  injection  of  extracts  of  the  gland. 

Other  crystalline  products,  adrenalin  (CgH^gNOg),  suprarenalin, 
etc.,  have  been  prepared  from  the  gland  and  show  a  most  marked 
influence  in  constricting  the  blood-vessels.  These  substances  are 
much  used  practically  in  minor  surgical  operations  as  a  hemostatic 
to  check  the  flow  of  blood.  The  constriction  of  the  blood-vessels 
seems  to  be  due  to  a  direct  effect  upon  the  walls  of  the  vessels,  either 
upon  the  musculature  itself  or  upon  the  peripheral  nerve  fibers  dis- 
tributed to  these  muscles.  That  the  effect  is  not  entirely  central 
is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  after  destruction  of  the  vasoconstrictor 
center  and  removal  of  the  spinal  cord  injection  of  the  extracts  causes 
a  rise  of  blood-pressure  of  100  per  cent,  or  more.  Langley  has 
called  attention  to  the  peculiar  fact  that  adrenal  extracts  or  so- 
lutions of  adrenalin  do  not  act  upon  all  varieties  of  plain  muscle, 
but  only  on  those  innervated  by  nerve  fibers  originating  in  the  sym- 
pathetic chain  of  ganglia.  It  has  been  proposed,  therefore,  to  use 
these  solutions  to  determine  whether  or  not  given  vascular  areas, 

*  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  2,  203,  1899. 

t  Abel,  "  Berichte  d.  deut.  chem.  Gesellschaft, "  37,  368,  1904. 


SECRETION   OF   THE    DUCTLESS   GLANDS.  777 

such  as  those  of  the  brain  or  lungg,  are  provided  with  vasocon- 
strictor nerve  fibers.  When  adrenaUn  is  injected  into  a  normal 
animal  it  may  have  an  influence  upon  the  nerve  centers  of  the  vaso- 
motor nerves  as  well  as  upon  the  peripheral  endings.  Meltzer*  has 
shown  that  moderate  doses  under  such  conditions  may  cause  a  dila- 
tation, while  in  parts  whose  connection  with  the  nerve  center  is 
destroyed  only  a  constriction  is  obtained.  Under  normal  condi- 
tions at  least  these  extracts  when  injected  into  the  circulation  soon 
lose  their  effect.  This  fact  may  explain  why  injection  of  the  ex- 
tracts has  failed  to  give  permanent  relief  in  animals  from  whom 
the  adrenals  had  been  removed  or  in  human  beings  suffering  from 
Addison's  disease.  Bearing  in  mind  the  results  obtained  in  the 
case  of  thyroidectomy,  it  has  been  suggested  that  grafts  of  the  adre- 
nals under  the  skin  or  into  the  peritoneal  cavity  may  prove  more 
effective.  Results  by  this  method,  however,  have  also  been  chiefly 
negative,  owing  apparently  to  the  fact  that  in  such  grafts  the  medul- 
lary substance,  which  contains  the  material  that  causes  constric- 
tion of  the  blood-vessels,  readily  undergoes  atrophy  and  absorp- 
tion. It  seems  probable  that,  if  the  method  of  grafting  is  perfected 
so  as  to  preserve  the  medulla  intact,  this  procedure  may  prove 
effective  as  a  therapeutical  means  in  the  treatment  of  Addison's 
disease. 

The  Physiological  Role  of  the  Adrenals. — There  seems  to  be 
no  question  that  the  medullary  substance  forms  epinephrin  or  adre- 
nalin or  some  related  compound  which  has  a  marked  stimulating 
effect  upon  the  tone  of  the  blood-vessels  and  upon  the  heart,  and 
that  this  material  passes  into  the  blood.  The  general  view,  there- 
fore, has  been  that  one  at  least  of  the  functions  of  the  adrenals  is 
the  internal  secretion  of  this  material.  It  is  assumed  that  its  con- 
tinued formation  is  necessary  to  the  maintenance  of  the  normal 
metabolism  of  the  muscular  tissues  either  by  a  direct  effect  or 
indirectly  by  influencing  the  activity  of  the  nerve  centers.  Removal 
of  this  secretion  results  in  a  marked  loss  of  muscular  tone  and  vigor, 
exhibited  by  the  blood-vessels,  the  heart,  and  the  skeletal  muscles,  and 
death  follows  rapidly.  This  general  view  is  in  accord  with  the 
facts  so  far  as  they  are  known,  but  it  must  be  confessed  that  it  goes 
somewhat  beyond  the  facts.  Another  permissible,  although  less 
probable  view  is  that  the  adrenals  produce  an  antitoxic  substance 
whose  function  is  to  neutralize  or  destroy  certain  (unknown)  poi- 
sonous products  of  body  metabolism.  Removal  or  disease  of  the 
adrenals,  on  this  theory,  causes  death  because  it  allows  these 
toxic  products  to  accumulate. 

Pituitary  Body. — ^This  body  is  usually  described  as  consisting 

*S.  J.  and  Clara  Meltzer,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  9,  252, 
1903. 


778  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

of  two  parts, — a  large  anterior  lobe  of  distinct  glandular  structure 
and  a  much  smaller  posterior  lobe  whose  structure  is  not  clearly 
known.  The  cells  are  said  to  form  follicles  which  contain  some 
colloid  material.*  Embryologically  the  two  lobes  are  entirely  dis- 
tinct. The  anterior  lobe,  which  may  be  designated  as  the  hypoph- 
ysis cerebri,  arises  from  the  epithelium  of  the  mouth,  while  the 
posterior  lobe,  or  the  infundibular  body,  develops  as  an  outgrowth 
from  the  infundibulum  of  the  brain,  and  in  the  adult  remains  con- 
nected with  this  portion  of  the  brain  by  a  long  stalk.  Howell  t  and 
others  have  shown  that  extracts  of  the  hypophysis  when  injected 
intravenously  have  little  or  no  physiological  effect,  while  extracts 
of  the  infundibular  body,  on  the  contrary,  cause  a  marked  rise  of 
blood-pressure  and  slowing  of  the  heart  beat.  These  effects  resemble 
in  general  those  obtained  from  adrenal  extracts,  but  differ  in  some 
details.  They  seem  to  warrant  the  conclusion  that  the  infundib- 
ular body  is  not  a  mere  rudimentary  organ,  as  has  been  generally 
assumed,  but  produces  a  peculiar  substance,  an  internal  secretion, 
that  may  have  a  distinct  physiological  value.  A  number  of  ob- 
servers, especially  Vassale  and  Sacchi,  have  succeeded  in  remov- 
ing the  entire  pituitary  body.  They  report  that  the  operation 
results  eventually  in  the  death  of  the  animal  with  a  certain  group 
of  symptoms,  such  as  muscular  tremors  and  spasms,  apathy  and 
dyspnea,  that  resemble  the  results  of  thyroidectomy.  It  has  been 
suggested,  therefore,  that  the  pituitary  body  may  be  related  in 
function  to  the  thyroids  and  may  be  able  to  assume  vicariously 
the  functions  of  the  latter  after  thyroidectomy.  There  is  no  satis- 
factory evidence,  however,  in  support  of  this  view.  On  the  patho- 
logical side  it  has  been  shown  that  usually  lesions  of  the  pituitary 
body,  particularly  of  the  hypophysis,  are  associated  with  a  peculiar 
disease  known  as  acromegaly,  the  most  prominent  symptom  of 
which  is  a  marked  hypertrophy  of  the  bones  of  the  extremities  and 
of  the  face.  The  conclusion  sometimes  drawn  from  this  fact  that 
acromegaly  is  caused  by  a  disturbance  of  the  functions  of  the  pitu- 
itary body  is,  however,  very  uncertain,  and  is  not  supported  by  any 
definite  clinical  or  experimental  facts. 

Testis  and  Ovary. — Some  of  the  earliest  work  upon  the  effect 
of  the  internal  secretions  of  the  glands  was  done  upon  the  repro- 
ductive glands,  especially  the  testis,  by  Brown-Sequard.|  Ac- 
cording to  this  observer,  extracts  of  the  fresh  testis  when  injected 
under  the  skin  or  into  the  blood  may  have  a  remarkable  influence 
upon  the  nervous  system.     Mental  and  physical  vigor,  and  the 

*  Thorn,  "Archiv  f.  mik.  Anat.,"  57,  632,  1901. 

t  "Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,"  3,  245,  1898;  also  Schaefer  and 
Vincent,  "  Journal  of  Physiology, "  25,  87,  1899. 

J  "  Archives  de  physiologic  normals  et  pathologique, "   1889-92. 


SECRETION    OF   THE    DUCTLESS   GLANDS.  779 

activity  of  the  spinal  centers,  are  greatly  improved,  not  only 
in  cases  of  general  prostration  and  neurasthenia,  but  also  in  the 
case  of  the  aged.  Brown-Sequard  maintained  that  this  general 
dynamogenic  effect  is  due  to  some  unknown  substance  formed 
in  the  testis  and  subsequently  passed  into  the  blood,  although  he 
admitted  that  some  of  the  same  substance  may  be  found  in  the  ex- 
ternal secretion  of  the  testis — i.  e.,  the  spermatic  liquid.  Poehl* 
asserts  that  he  has  prepared  a  substance,  spermin,  to  which  he  gives 
the  formula  CjHj^Nj,  which  has  a  very  beneficial  effect  upon  the 
metaboUsm  of  the  body.  He  believes  that  this  spermin  is  the  sub- 
stance that  gives  to  the  testicular  extracts  prepared  by  Brown-Se- 
quard their  stimulating  effect.  He  claims  for  this  substance  an 
extraordinary  action  as  a  physiological  tonic.  Zothf  and  also 
PregelJ  seem  to  have  obtained  exact  objective  proof,  by  means 
of  ergographic  records,  of  the  stimulating  action  of  the  testicular 
extracts  upon  the  neuromuscular  apparatus  in  man.  They  find 
that  injections  of  the  testicular  extracts  cause  not  only  a  diminu- 
tion in  the  muscular  and  nervous  fatigue  resulting  from  muscular 
work,  but  also  lessen  the  subjective  fatigue  sensations.  The  fact 
that  the  internal  secretion  of  the  testis,  if  it  exists  at  all,  is  not  ab- 
solutely essential  to  the  life  of  the  body  as  a  whole,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  thyroids,  adrenals,  and  pancreas,  naturally  makes  the  satis- 
factory determination  of  its  existence  and  action  a  more  difficult 
task. 

Similar  ideas  in  general  prevail  as  to  the  possibility  of  the  ovaries 
furnishing  an  internal  secretion  that  plays  an  important  part  in 
general  nutrition.  In  gynecological  practice  it  has  been  observed 
that  complete  ovariotomy  with  its  resulting  premature  menopause 
is  often  followed  by  distressing  symptoms,  mental  and  physical. 
In  such  cases  many  observers  have  reported  that  these  symptoms 
may  be  alleviated  by  the  use  of  ovarian  extracts.  Morris  §  reports 
a  number  of  cases  in  which,  after  complete  removal  of  the  ovaries, 
a  piece  of  ovary  from  the  same  or  a  different  person  was  grafted 
into  the  fundus  of  the  uterus  or  into  the  broad  ligament.  In  all 
cases  menstruation  persisted,  showing,  therefore,  that  the  presence 
of  the  ovaries  is  necessary  for  this  function.  A  similar  operation 
in  cases  of  amenorrhea  or  dysmenorrhea  brought  on  free  and  easy 
menstruation  and  an  improvement  in  general  nutrition  and  well- 
being.  Glass  II  also  reports  a  case  in  which  the  entire  ovary  from 
one  woman  was  transplanted  into  another  patient  upon  whom  com- 
plete ovariotomy  had  been  performed  two  years  before.     The  result 

*  "Zeitschrift  f.  klinische  Medicin,"  26,  133,  1894. 

t"Pfluger's  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  62,  335,  1896:  also 
69,  386,  1897. 

t  Ibid.,  p.  379.  §  Morris,  "  Medical  Record,"  1901,  p.  83. 

II  Glass,  "  Medical  News,"  1899,  p.  523. 


780  PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION   AND    SECRETION. 

of  the  operation  was  a  return  of  menstruation  and  sexual  desire, 
and  a  marked  alleviation  of  the  disagreeable  symptoms  following  the 
artificial  menopause.  In  the  natural  menopause,  as  well  as  in  the 
premature  menopause  following  operations,  it  is  a  frequent,  though 
not  invariable  result  for  the  individual  to  gain  noticeably  in  weight. 
The  probability  of  an  effect  of  the  ovaries  on  general  nutrition  is 
indicated  also  by  the  interesting  fact  that  in  cases  of  osteomalacia, 
a  disease  characterized  by  softening  of  the  bones,  removal  of  the 
ovaries  may  exert  a  favorable  influence  upon  the  course  of  the 
disease.  These  indications  have  found  some  experimental  verifi- 
cation in  a  research  by  Loewy  and  Richter*  made  upon  dogs. 
These  observers  found  that  complete  removal  of  the  ovaries,  al- 
though at  first  apparently  without  effect,  resulted  in  the  course  of 
two  to  three  months  in  a  marked  diminution  in  the  consumption 
of  oxygen  by  the  animal,  measured  per  kilogram  of  body- weight. 
If  now  the  animal  in  this  condition  was  given  ovarian  extracts 
(oophorin  tablets),  the  amount  of  oxygen  consumed  was  not  only 
brought  to  its  former  amount,  but  considerably  increased  beyond  it. 
A  similar  result  was  obtained  when  the  extracts  were  used  upon 
castrated  males.  The  authors  believe  that  their  experiments  show 
that  the  ovaries  form  a  specific  substance  which  is  capable  of  increas- 
ing the  oxidations  of  the  body. 

Pancreas. — ^The  importance  of  the  external  secretion,  the  pan- 
creatic juice,  of  the  pancreas  has  long  been  recognized,  but  it  was 
not  until  1889  that  von  Mering  and  Minkowski  f  proved  that  it  fur- 
nishes also  an  equally  important  internal  secretion.  These  observers 
succeeded  in  extirpating  the  entire  pancreas  without  causing  the 
immediate  death  of  the  animal,  and  found  that  in  all  cases  this 
operation  was  followed  by  the  appearance  of  sugar  in  the  urine  in 
considerable  quantities.  Further  observations  of  their  own  and 
other  experimenters  have  corroborated  this  result  and  added  a  num- 
ber of  interesting  facts  to  our  knowledge  of  this  side  of  the  activity 
of  the  pancreas.  It  has  been  shown  that  when  the  pancreas  is  com- 
pletely removed  a  condition  of  glycosuria  inevitably  follows,  even 
if  carbohydrate  food  is  excluded  from  the  diet.  Moreover,  as  in 
the  similar  pathological  condition  of  glycosuria  or  diabetes  mel- 
litus  in  man,  there  is  an  increase  in  the  quantity  of  urine  (polyuria) 
and  of  urea,  and  an  abnormal  thirst  and  hunger.  Acetone  also  is 
present  in  the  urine.  These  symptoms  in  cases  of  complete  extir- 
pation of  the  pancreas  are  followed  by  emaciation  and  muscular 
weakness,  which  finally  end  in  death  in  two  to  four  weeks.  If  the 
pancreas  is  incompletely  removed,  the  glycosuria  may  be  serious, 

*  Loewy  and  Richter,  "  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  1899,  suppl.  volume,  p.  174. 
t  Minkowski,  "Archiv  f.  exper.  Pathologie  u.  Pharmakologie, "  31,  85, 
1893. 


SECRETION    OF   THE    DUCTLESS    GLANDS.  781 

or  slight  and  transient,  or  absent  altogether,  depending  upon  the 
amount  of  pancreatic  tissue  left.  According  to  the  experiments 
of  von  Mering  and  Minkowski  on  dogs,  a  residue  of  one-fourth  to 
one-fifth  of  the  gland  is  sufficient  to  prevent  the  appearance  of  sugar 
in  the  urine,  although  a  smaller  fragment  may  suffice  apparently 
if  its  physiological  condition  is  favorable.  The  portion  of  pancreas 
left  in  the  body  may  suffice  to  prevent  glycosuria,  partly  or  com- 
pletely, even  though  its  connection  with  the  duodenum  is  entirely 
interrupted,  thus  indicating  that  the  suppression  of  the  pancreatic 
juice  is  not  responsible  for  the  glycosuria.  The  same  fact  is  shown 
more  conclusively  by  the  following  experiments:  Glycosuria  after 
complete  removal  of  the  pancreas  from  its  normal  connections  may 
be  prevented  partially  or  completely  by  grafting  a  portion  of  the 
pancreas  elsewhere  in  the  abdominal  cavity  or  even  under  the  skin. 
So  also  the  ducts  of  the  gland  may  be  completely  occluded  by  liga- 
ture or  by  injection  of  paraffin  without  causing  a  condition  of  per- 
manent glycosuria. 

On  the  basis  of  these  and  similar  results  it  is  believed  that  the 
pancreas  forms  an  internal  secretion  which  passes  into  the  blood 
and  plays  an  important,  indeed,  an  essential  part  in  the  metabolism 
of  sugar  in  the  body.  Moreover,  considerable  evidence  has  been 
accumulated  to  show  that  the  tissue  concerned  in  this  important 
function  is  not  the  pancreatic  tissue  proper,  but  that  composing  the 
so-called  islands  of  Langerhans.  In  man  these  islands  are  scattered 
through  the  pancreas,  forming  spherical  or  oval  bodies  that  maj^ 
reach  a  diameter  of  as  much  as  one  millimeter.  The  cells  in  these 
bodies  are  polygonal;  their  cytoplasm  is  pale,  finely  granular,  and 
small  in  amount.  The  nuclei  possess  a  thick  chromatin  network 
which  stains  deeply.  Each  island  possesses  a  rich  capillary  network 
that  resembles  somewhat  the  glomerulus  of  the  kidney. 

According  to  Ssbolew,*  ligation  of  the  pancreatic  duct  is  followed 
by  a  complete  atrophy  of  the  pancreatic  cells  proper,  while  those 
of  the  islands  of  Langerhans  are  not  affected.  Since  under  these 
conditions  no  glycosuria  occurs,  while  removal  of  the  whole  organ 
including  the  islands  is  followed  by  pancreatic  diabetes,  the  obvious 
conclusion  is  that  the  diabetes  is  due  to  the  loss  of  the  islands. 
This  conclusion  is  strengthened  by  reports  from  the  pathological 
side.  A  number  of  recent  observers  (Opie,  Ssbolew^,  Herzog,  et  at.) 
find  that  in  diabetes  mellitus  in  man  the  islands  are  markedly  af- 
fected. They  show  signs  of  hyaline  degeneration  or  atrophy  or  in 
severe  cases  may  be  absent  altogether. 

Several  theories  have  been  advanced  to  explain  the  action  of 
the  internal  secretion  of  the  pancreas.  It  has  been  suggested  that 
the  secretion  contains  an  enzyme  which  is  necessary  for  the  hydrol- 
*"Virchow's  Archiv,"   168,  91,   1902. 


782  PHYSIOLOGY   OF   DIGESTION   AND   SECRETION. 

ysis  or  oxidation  of  the  sugar  of  the  body  and  in  the  absence  of 
this  enzyme  the  sugar  accumulates  in  the  blood  and  is  drained  off 
through  the  kidney.  Cohnheim*  states  that,  while  the  juices  ex- 
pressed from  muscle  and  from  pancreas  have  little  effect  upon  sugar 
when  taken  separately,  yet  when  combined  they  cause  a  marked 
disappearance  (glycolysis)  of  sugar  added  to  the  mixture.  The 
inference  from  this  result  is  that  the  pancreas  furnishes  a  substance 
which  activates  the  glycolytic  enzyme  or  enzymes  of  the  muscle 
and  thus  makes  possible  the  physiological  consumption  of  sugars 
in  the  body.  Since  the  pancreas  extracts  do  not  lose  this  property 
upon  boiling  it  is  evident  that  the  activating  substance  is  not  an 
enzyme,  but  a  body  of  a  more  stable  character.  Other  investigators 
adopt  an  entirely  different  view  of  the  relation  of  the  pancreas  to 
carbohydrate  metabolism.  They  believe  that  the  internal  secre- 
tion of  the  pancreas  regulates  in  some  way  the  output  of  sugar 
from  the  liver  (and  other  sugar-producing  organs).  In  the  absence 
of  this  secretion  the  hver  gives  off  its  glycogen  as  sugar  too  rapidly, 
the  sugar  contents  of  the  blood  are  thereby  increased  (hypergly- 
cemia) above  normal,  and  the  excess  passes  out  in  the  urine. 

Kidney. — Tigerstedt  and  Bergman f  state  that  a  substance 
may  be  extracted  from  the  kidneys  of  rabbits  which  when  injected 
into  the  body  of  a  living  animal  causes  a  rise  of  blood-pressure. 
They  get  the  same  effect  from  the  blood  of  the  renal  vein.  They 
conclude,  therefore,  that  a  substance,  for  which  they  suggest  the 
name  "rennin,"  is  normally  secreted  by  the  kidney  into  the  renal 
blood,  and  that  this  substance  causes  a  vasoconstriction. 

*  Cohnheim,  "Zeitschrift  f.  physiolog.  Chemie,"  39,  336,  1903;  also  1904.  • 
t  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie, "  8,  223,  1898;  see  also  Brad- 
ford, "Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society,"  1892. 


SECTION  VIII. 

NUTRITION  AND  HEAT  PRODUCTION  AND 
REGULATION. 


CHAPTER  XLVir. 
GENERAL  METHODS-HISTORY  OF  THE  PROTEID  FOOD. 

Under  the  head  of  nutrition  or  general  metaboHsm  we  inchide 
usually  all  those  changes  that  occur  in  our  foodstuffs  from  the  time 
that  they  are  absorbed  from  the  alimentary  canal  until  they  are 
eliminated  in  the  excretions.  In  many  of  these  processes  the  oxygen 
absorbed  from  the  lungs  takes  a  most  important  part,  and  the 
changes  directly  due  to  this  element,  the  physiological  oxidations 
of  the  body,  can  not  be  separated  from  the  general  metabolic  phe- 
nomena of  the  tissues.  As  was  said  in  another  place,  the  respiratory 
history  of  oxygen  ceases  after  this  element  has  reached  the  tissues; 
its  subsequent  participation  in  the  chemical  changes  of  the  organ- 
ism forms  an  integral  part  of  the  nutritional  processes.  These  latter 
processes  are  varied  and  complex  and  only  partially  understood. 
For  the  sake  of  simplicity  in  presentation  it  is  convenient  to  con- 
sider separately  each  of  the  so-called  foodstuffs, — the  proteids, 
albuminoids,  carbohydrates,  fats,  water,  and  inorganic  salts, — and 
attempt  to  trace  its  nutritive  history  from  the  time  it  is  absorbed 
into  the  blood  until  it  is  eliminated  from  the  body  in  the  form  of 
excretory  products.  Before  undertaking  this  description  it  is  desir- 
able to  call  attention  to  certain  general  methods  and  conceptions 
that  have  been  developed  in  connection  with  this  part  of  physiology. 

Nitrogen  Equilibrium. — Among  our  main  foodstuffs  the  pro- 
teids (and  albuminoids)  are  characterized  by  containing  nitrogen. 
After  this  material  is  metabolized  in  the  body  the  nitrogen  is  elim- 
inated in  various  forms,  chiefly  in  the  urine,  but  to  a  smaller  ex- 
tent in  the  feces  and  sweat.  In  the  feces,  moreover,  there  may  be 
present  some  undigested  proteid  which,  although  taken  with  the 
food,  has  never  really  entered  the  body.  It  is  evident  that  the 
urine,  feces  (and  sweat)  may  be  collected  during  a  given  period  and 
analyzed  to  determine  their  contents  in  nitrogen.     The  sweat  is 

783 


784  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

usually  neglected  except  in  observations  upon  conditions  in  which 
muscular  activity  has  been  a  prominent  feature.  As  a  rule,  the 
amount  of  nitrogen  is  determined  by  some  modification  of  the  Kjel- 
dahl  method.  In  principle  this  method  consists  in  heating  the 
material  to  be  analyzed  with  strong  sulphuric  acid.  The  nitrogen 
is  thereby  converted  to  ammonia,  which  is  distilled  off  and  caught 
in  a  standardized  solution  of  sulphuric  acid.  By  titration  the  amount 
of  ammonia  can  be  determined,  and  from  this  the  amount  of  nitrogen 
is  estimated.  Nitrogen  forms  a  definite  percentage  of  the  proteid 
molecule  (about  16  per  cent.);  so  that  if  the  weight  of  nitrogen  is 
multiplied  by  6.25  the  weight  of  proteid  from  which  it  is  derived 
is  obtained.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  nitrogen  is  determined  in 
the  food  eaten  during  the  period  of  the  experiment  it  is  evident  that 
a  balance  may  be  struck  which  will  determine  whether  the  body 
is  receiving  or  losing  nitrogen.  If  the  balance  is  even  the  body  is 
in  nitrogen  equiUbrium, — that  is,  it  is  receiving  in  the  food  as  much 
nitrogen  (or  proteid)  as  it  is  metabolizing  and  eliminating  in  the 
excreta.  If  there  is  a  plus  balance  in  favor  of  the  food  it  is  evident 
that  the  body  is  laying  on  or  storing  proteid  tissue,  while  if  the 
balance  is  minus  the  body  must  be  losing  proteid.  During  the. period 
of  growth,  in  convalescence,  etc.,  the  body  does  store  proteid,  and 
under  these  conditions  the  balance  is  in  favor  of  the  food  nitrogen. 
But  throughout  adult  life  under  normal  conditions  our  diet  is  so 
regulated  by  the  appetite  that  a  nitrogen  equilibrium  is  maintained 
through  long  periods.  Under  experimental  conditions,  involving, 
for  instance,  a  special  diet,  it  often  becomes  necessary  to  make 
the  analyses  for  nitrogen  in  order  to  determine  whether  or  not  the 
individual  is  losing  or  gaining  proteid  or  is  in  equilibrium. 

It  is  important  also  to  bear  in  mind  that  nitrogen  or  proteid 
equilibrium  may  be  established  at  different  levels.  If,  for  instance, 
a  man  is  in  nitrogen  equilibrium  on  a  diet  containing  10  gms.  of 
nitrogen,  what  will  happen  if  the  proteid  in  this  diet  is  doubled? 
Our  experience  teaches  us  that  the  extra  10  gms.  of  nitrogen  or 
62.5  gms.  of  proteid  is  not  stored  in  the  body  indefinitely.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  the  extra  proteid  is  metabolized  in  the  body  and 
nitrogen  equilibrium  becomes  established  at  a  higher  level.  Whereas 
under  the  first  condition  62.5  gms.  of  proteid  were  eaten  and  62.5 
gms.  of  proteid  were  lost  from  the  body  either  in  the  form  of  nitrog- 
enous excreta  or  in  the  feces  as  undigested  proteid,  under  the 
second  condition  125  gms.  of  proteid  are  eaten  and  125  gms.  of  pro- 
teid are  lost.  The  total  mass  of  proteid  tissue  in  the  body  may 
remain  the  same,  or  if  any  increase  takes  place  at  the  beginning  of 
the  change  in  diet  it  soon  ceases.  Experimentally  it  is  found  that 
there  is  a  certain  low  limit  of  proteid  which  just  suffices  to  maintain 
nitrogen  equilibrium,  and  between  this  level  and  the  capacity  of 


GENERAL    METHODS — HISTORY    OF    PROTEID    FOOD.  785 

the  body  to  digest  and  absorb  proteid  food  nitrogen  equilibrium 
rnay  be  maintained  upon  any  given  amount  of  proteid. 

Carbon  Equilibrium  and  Body  Equilibrium. — ^The  term  car- 
bon equilibrium  is  sometimes  used  to  describe  the  condition  in  which 
the  total  carbon  of  the  excreta  (in  the  carbon  dioxid,  urea,  etc.)  is 
balanced  by  the  carbon  of  the  food.  It  is  possible  that  an  individual 
may  be  in  nitrogen  equilibrium  and  yet  be  losing  or  gaining  in  weight, 
since,  although  the  consumption  of  proteids  may  just  be  covered 
by  the  proteids  of  the  food,  the  consumption  of  non-proteid  material, 
particularly  the  fats  of  the  body,  may  be  greater  than  the  supply 
furnished  by  or  manufactured  from  the  food.  An  animal  may 
lose  or  gain  in  carbon  when  his  nitrogen  supply  is  in  equilibrium. 
In  the  same  way  under  special  circumstances  we  may  speak  of  a 
water  equilibrium  or  a  salts  equilibrium,  although  these  terms  are 
not  generally  used.  An  adult  under  normal  conditions  lives  so  as 
to  maintain  a  general  body  equilibrium;  his  ingesta  of  all  kinds 
are  balanced  by  the  corresponding  excretions,  and  the  individual 
maintains  a  practically  constant  body-weight. 

Complete  Balance  Experiments — Respiration  Chamber. — Ac- 
cording to  the  statements  made  in  the  last  paragraph,  it  is  obvious 
that  if  the  analytical  work  is  properly  done,  an  exact  balance  may 
be  drawn  between  the  proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates  eaten  as 
food  and  the  proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates  destroyed  in  the 
body  as  represented  by  the  nitrogen  and  carbon  contained  in  the 
excreta.  Complete  experiments  of  this  kind  were  attempted  first 
by  Voit  *  and  Pettenkofer,  to  whose  work  much  of  our  fundamental 
knowledge  is  due.  In  the  experiments  of  these  authors  made  upon 
men  as  well  as  animals  the  total  nitrogen  of  the  urine  and  feces  was 
determined  and  the  total  quantity  of  CO  2  given  off  from  the  lungs 
was  estimated.  This  last  determination  was  made  possible  by 
placing  the  individual  in  a  specially  constructed  chamber  or  respi- 
ration apparatus.  Air  was  drawn  through  this  room  by  means  of 
a  pump.  The  total  quantity  of  air  passing  through  the  room  was 
measured  by  a  gasometer  and  definite  fractions  were  drawn  off 
from  time  to  time  for  analysis  of  its  CO  3.  From  the  figures  thus 
obtained  it  was  possible  to  estimate  the  entire  CO  2  given  off  during 
the  period  of  observation.  Knowing  the  total  nitrogen  and  CO, 
eliminated,  it  is  possible  to  estimate  the  amount  of  proteid  and 
fat  or  carbohydrate  destroyed  in  the  body.  If  the  carbon  belong- 
ing to  the  amount  of  proteid  metabolized  is  deducted  from  the  total 
carbon  excreta  what  is  left  represents  either  fat  or  carbohydrate 
burnt  in  the  body,  and,  knowing  the  amount  of  these  materials 
taken  in  the  diet,  it  is  possible  to  ascertain  whether  the  correspond- 
ing amount  of  carbon  has  all  been  excreted.     By  experiments  of 

*  See  Hermann's  "Handbuch  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  vi,  1881. 
50 


786  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION. 

this  kind  a  nearly  perfect  balance  may  be  struck  between  the  in- 
come and  the  outgo  of  the  body.  Absolute  accuracy  is  not  sought 
for,  since  the  materials  eaten  vary  somewhat  in  composition  and 
some  little  of  the  carbon  or  nitrogen  excreted  is  found  in  the  secre- 
tions from  the  skin,  the  saliva,  etc.,  which  are  not  usually  examined. 

More  recent  experiments  made  in  this  country  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Atwater*  have  attempted  to  balance  not  only  the  material 
income  and  outgo  of  the  body  during  a  given  period,  but  also  the 
income  and  outgo  of  energy.  For  this  purpose  the  individuals  ex- 
perimented upon  were  placed  in  a  very  carefully  constructed  respi- 
ration chamber  so  that  their  expired  air  could  be  analyzed  as  well 
as  the  urine  and  feces.  The  chamber,  however,  was  also  arranged 
to  act  as  a  calorimeter  (see  p.  823)  by  means  of  which  the  heat  given 
off  by  the  person  could  be  measured.  The  heat  value  of  the  diet 
being  known,  it  is  possible  in  this  way  to  ascertain  whether  or  not 
this  theoretical  amount  of  heat  is  actually  given  off  from  the  body. 
Atwater's  respiration  chamber  is  described  as  a  respiration  calorim- 
eter; some  of  the  results  obtained  from  its  use  are  referred  to  later  on. 

The  Effect  of  Non-proteid  Food  on  Nitrogen  Equilibrium. — 
By  use  of  the  methods  referred  to  above  the  general  influence  of 
the  non-proteid  foods  (fats,  carbohydrates,  albuminoids)  upon  the 
proteid  consumption  of  the  body  has  been  made  evident.  An  ani- 
mal may  be  brought  into  nitrogen  equilibrium  on  proteid  food  alone, 
the  amount  of  proteid  required  being  relatively  large.  If  now  the 
proteid  food  is  mixed  with  any  of  the  non-proteid  foodstuffs  it  is 
found  that  the  amount  of  proteid  necessary  to  maintain  nitrogen 
equilibrium  may  be  reduced  correspondingly.  With  reference  to 
the  consumption  of  proteid  in  the  body  the  non-proteid  foods  are 
all  proteid-sparers,  and  herein  lies  one  great  peculiarity  of  their  nu- 
tritional value.  On  a  mixed  diet  of  proteid  and  non-proteid  food 
the  proportion  of  the  latter  may  be  increased  and  that  of  the  former 
decreased  to  a  marked  extent  without  breaking  down  nitrogen 
equilibrium, — that  is,  without  causing  a  loss  of  proteid  tissue  from 
the  body.  This  fact  is  explained  by  the  consideration  that  the  pro- 
teid of  our  food  fulfills  two  general  functions:  Its  metabolism  or 
its  oxidation  furnishes  energy,  especially  heat  energy  to  the  body, 
and,  moreover,  a  portion  of  it  is  used  to  reconstruct  the  living  proto- 
plasm that  breaks  down  in  the  functional  activity  of  the  tissues. 
The  non-proteid  food  also  furnishes  heat  energy  and  work  energy, 
and  to  a  large  extent  at  least  can  replace  this  part  of  the  function 
fulfilled  by  the  proteid. 

The  Nutritive  History  of  the  Proteid  Food. — The  digestive 
changes  undergone  by  proteid  and  its  subsequent  absorption  have 
been  described  in  the  section  on  digestion.     It  will  be  remembered 
*  Atwater,  Bulletins  45,  63,  69,  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture. 


GENERAL    METHODS — HISTORY    OF    PROTEID    FOOD.  787 

that  the  products  of  proteid  digestion  are  absorbed  mainly  into  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  intestine,  and  therefore  must  pass  through  the 
liver  before  reaching  the  general  circulation.  It  will  also  be  remem- 
bered that  we  are  as  yet  ignorant  of  the  precise  form  in  which  these 
products  enter  the  portal  blood.  This  deficiency  in  our  knowledge 
constitutes  a  serious  obstacle  to  a  satisfactory  explanation  of  the 
nutritional  history  of  the  proteid.  Three  general  views  have  been 
advanced  concerning  the  ultimate  fate  of  the  absorbed  material. 
In  two  of  these  theories  it  is  assumed  that  the  digested  material  is 
synthesized  into  a  new  proteid,  before  or  after  absorption,  being 
converted  into  what  we  might  call  a  body  proteid  characteristic  of 
the  animal.  Although  it  is  not  specifically  stated,  the  assumption 
seems  to  be  that  this  body  proteid  is  the  serum-albumin  of  the 
animal's  blood. 

Accepting  this  general  assumption,  one  theory,  advocated  by 
Pfliiger,  supposes  that  before  undergoing  physiological  oxidation 
all  of  this  absorbed  material  is  built  up  into  the  living  protoplasm 
of  the  various  tissues  and  then  undergoes  the  characteristic  metab- 
ohsm  (catabolism  or  cUsassimilation)  of  that  tissue. 

The  second  theory,  advanced  by  Voit,  assumes  that  some  of  the 
absorbed  material  is  assimilated  to  form  living  protoplasm,  so  far 
as  this  is  necessary  to  replace  the  wastes  of  the  tissue  or  to  provide 
new  material  for  growth.  The  portion  of  the  absorbed  proteid 
that  subserves  this  function  is  designated  as  tissue  proteid.  It  is 
obvious  that  this  function  can  not  be  replaced  by  the  non-proteid — 
that  is,  the  non-nitrogenous — foodstuffs.  The  larger  portion  of  the 
absorbed  material,  however,  after  distribution  to  the  tissues  is 
destroyed,  with  liberation  of  heat,  under  the  influence  of  the  activity 
of  the  living  cells,  but  without  actually  becoming  transformed  into 
living  matter.  The  cells  act  toward  this  material  as  the  yeast 
cells  do  toward  the  sugar  that  they  decompose  into  alcohol  and 
carbon  dioxid.  The  portion  of  the  proteid  that  undergoes  this  fate 
is  designated  as  the  circulating  proteid  on  the  hypothesis  that  it 
enters  the  circulating  liquids  of  the  body,  the  blood  and  lymph,  and 
is  carried  around  in  them  until  destroyed  by  the  tissues. 

The  third  general  point  of  view  has  not  been  formulated  very 
definitely,  but  represents  perhaps  the  trend  of  modern  investigation. 
According  to  this  theory^  the  split  products  of  proteid  digestion, 
the  monamido-  and  diamido-bodies — leucin,  tyrosin,  arginin,  etc. — 
are  not  wholly  built  up  into  a  new  body  proteid.  Some  of  the  ma- 
terial must  be  so  synthesized,  either  in  the  intestine  or  in  the  tis- 
sues, to  provide  material  for  the  regeneration  of  the  wastes  of  the 
body,  and  it  will  be  remembered  that,  as  stated  by  Abderhalden 
p.  708),  there  is  some  evidence  that  a  portion  of  the  proteid  mole- 
cule during  digestion  is  not  broken  up  into  the  ultimate  split  prod- 


788  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

ucts,  but  remains  in  the  more  or  less  complex  form  indicated  by  the 
term  polypeptid.  This  portion  may  serve  as  a  nucleus  for  the 
reconstruction  of  a  body  proteid  suitable  for  assimilation  into  the 
living  structure  of  the  cells.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  known  that 
some  of  the  split  products  of  the  digestion  of  proteid, — the  am- 
monia, the  leucin,  etc., — ^when  circulated  through  the  liver,  give 
rise  to  urea.  Since  the  split  products  of  proteid  digestion  are  car- 
ried at  once  to  the  liver,  it  is  possible  that  this  fate  overtakes  them, 
and  that  the  nitrogen  contained  in  them  is  at  once  converted  to  urea 
and  prepared  for  elimination,  while  a  portion  of  the  rest  of  the  mole- 
cules from  which  the  nitrogen  is  thus  removed  is  retained  in  the 
body  to  be  subsequently  oxidized  and  furnish  heat  energy.  This 
non-nitrogenous  residue  may  first  be  converted  to  sugar  or  fat  before 
its  final  oxidation.  The  characteristic  feature  of  this  view  is  the 
belief  that  a  large  part  of  the  nitrogen  of  the  proteid  food  is  promptly 
converted  to  urea  and  is  eliminated  before  becoming  a  part  either 
of  the  living  proteid  or  the  circulating  proteid  of  the  body.  This 
view  seems  to  be  opposed  to  our  conceptions  of  the  importance  of 
proteid  foods,  but  it  is  in  harmony  with  the  surprising  fact  that  the 
digestive  enzymes  are  adapted  to  split  the  proteid  molecule  into 
what  we  may  call  its  ultimate  products,  the  relatively  simple  amido- 
bodies,  and  moreover  that  most  of  the  proteid  food  taken  into  our 
bodies  reappears,  so  far  as  its  nitrogen  is  concerned,  in  a  few  hours 
as  urea  in  the  urine. 

FoHn*  has  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  proportions 
of  the  different  nitrogen  compounds  in  the  urine  vary  with  the 
amount  of  proteid  food.  Upon  an  average  diet  containing  16  to 
17  gms.  of  nitrogen  (100  to  106  gms.  of  usable  proteid)  the  urea 
forms  87  to  88  per  cent,  of  the  total  nitrogen  of  the  urine,  while  when 
the  proteid  intake  is  reduced  to  3  or  4  gms.  of  nitrogen  the  urea  forms 
only  61  to  62  per  cent,  of  the  total  nitrogen  of  the  urine.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  creatinin  and  the  purin  bodies  (uric  acid,  xanthin, 
etc.)  are  not  diminished  in  amount  with  a  decrease  in  the  proteid 
food.  He  suggests,  therefore,  that  the  latter  bodies,  creatinin  and 
purin  bases  and  perhaps  a  part  of  the  other  nitrogenous  waste  prod- 
ucts, represent  the  waste  of  the  breaking  down  of  the  living  tissues, 
the  catabolism  or  wear  and  tear  of  the  living  machinery.  The  urea, 
on  the  other  hand,  represents  in  large  part  the  nitrogen  of  that  por- 
tion of  the  proteid  food  which,  from  the  present  point  of  view,  is 
hydrolyzed  during  digestion  into  the  split  products  and  is  changed 
to  urea  in  the  liver. 

The  Amount  of  Proteid  Necessary  for  Normal  Nutrition — 
Luxus  Consumption. — ^As  was  stated  above,  nitrogen  equilibrium 
may  be  maintained  on  different  amounts  of  proteid  food.     It  is 

*  Folin,  "American  Journal  of  Physiology,"  13,  45,  66,  and  117,  1905. 


GENERAL   METHODS — HISTORY   OF    PROTEID    FOOD.  789 

important,  from  a  scientific  and  from  an  economic  standpoint,  to 
determine  the  low  limit  for  this  equilibriimi  and  to  ascertain  whether, 
for  the  purposes  of  the  best  as  well  as  the  most  economical  nutrition, 
this  low  limit  is  as  good  as  or  preferable  to  a  higher  amount  of  pro- 
teid  in  the  diet.  Examination  of  the  dietaries  of  civilized  races 
shows  that,  on  the  average,  100  to  120  gms.  of  proteid  are  used 
dail}^  by  an  ackilt  man.  Voit  gives  1 18  gms.  of  proteid  as  the  average 
daily  consumption.  A  variable  portion  of  this  amount  passes  into 
the  feces  in  undigested  form,  but  we  may  assume  that  about  105 
gms.  are  absorbed  and  actually  metabolized  in  the  body.  Experi- 
ments show,  however,  that  a  man  may  exist  in  good  health  upon 
a  much  smaller  amount  per  day,  as  little  as  20  to  40  gms.,*  provided 
the  non-proteid  portion  of  the  diet  is  increased.  The  question  is 
whether  the  large  excess  of  proteid  above  what  is  actually  necessary 
for  nitrogen  equilibrium  is  beneficial  to  the  body  or  is  harmful,  or 
lastly  is  merely  a  waste,  or  as  the  older  physiologists  called  it,  a 
luxus  consum-ption.  The  facts  at  our  command  at  present  are  in- 
sufficient to  give  a  final  answer  to  this  question.  On  the  one  side, 
we  have  the  following  facts:  Some  observers  (Munk,  Rosenheim), 
from  experiments  made  upon  dogs,  state  that  when  a  low  proteid 
diet  is  maintained  for  some  time  the  animals  show  a  marked  dis- 
turbance in  digestion  and  absorption,  which  may  terminate  in 
death.  The  fact  that  mankind  universally  under  the  guidance  of 
the  self-regulating  appetite  has  adopted  a  high  level  of  proteid  food 
must  also  be  allowed  to  have  considerable  weight.  With  our  im- 
perfect knowledge  of  all  the  conditions  it  is  dangerous  to  assert 
that  this  outcome  of  the  processes  of  natural  selection  is  without 
important  significance.  There  is  also  the  fact  that  in  the  modern 
treatment  of  tuberculosis  high  feeding  with  proteids  constitutes  a 
factor  to  which  much  importance  is  attributed.  The  inference  seems 
to  be  that  such  a  diet  increases  the  power  of  resistance  of  the  tissues 
toward  invading  micro-organisms.  On  the  other  side,  we  have  the 
evidence  of  numerous  investigators  who  have  experimented  upon 
themselves  that  a  proteid  diet  much  smaller  than  that  ordinarily 
used  suffices  to  maintain  normal  nutrition.  Chittenden,  especially, 
in  the  careful  work  already  referred  to,  has  shown  that  men  in  various 
walks  in  life,  students,  athletes,  soldiers,  may  be  well  nourished, 
without  loss  of  strength  or  impairment  of  the  feeling  of  well-being, 
on  a  diet  containing  30  to  50  gms.  of  proteid  instead  of  118  gms. 
These  observers  believe  that  the  excess  of  proteid  usually  employed 
is  undesirable  in  that  it  increases  the  amount  of  injurious  nitrog- 
enous waste  products,  that  it  throws  an  unnecessary  amount  of 
labor  upon  the  excretory  organs,   and   that   it  increases  the  pos- 

*  Consult  Chittenden,  "Physiological  Economy  in  Nutrition,"  New  York, 
1905,  for  discussion  and  literature. 


790  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

sibility  of  the  formation  of  toxic  products  in  the  intestines  from 
putrefactive  processes,  etc.  It  may  be  said,  however,  that  although 
these  experimenters  have  shown  that  normal  conditions  may  be 
maintained  for  six  months  to  a  year  upon  a  low  proteid  diet,  they 
do  not  demonstrate  satisfactorily  that  a  larger  proteid  diet  is 
actually  attended  by  evil  consequences. 

The  Specific  Character  of  the  Proteid  Metabolism. — From 
the  fact  that  the  nitrogen  is  eliminated  from  the  body  in  various 
forms — ammonia  compounds,  urea,  creatinin,  purin  bodies,  etc. — 
we  may  infer  that  the  specific  metabolism  varies  in  the  different 
tissues  and  under  different  conditions.  The  steps  or  stages  of  this 
metabolism  are  not  completely  known  in  any  case,  but  the  follow- 
ing suggestions  have  been  developed  by  experimental  work.  Urea 
arises  in  part  in  the  liver  by  a  conversion  of  armnonia  salts, — for  ex- 
ample, ammonium  carbamate  or  carbonate  (p.  754).  The  ammonia 
salts  in  turn  may  arise  in  the  tissues  by  a  process  of  hydrolytic 
cleavage  giving  origin  to  amido-bodies, — ^leucin,  glycocoll,  etc.,— 
which  are  subsequently  oxidized  to  ammonia,  carbon  dioxid,  and 
water.     The  ammonia  and  carbon  dioxid  unite  to  form  ammonium 

carbamate,  CO\^q-»t|t  ,  which  is  then  dehydrated,  directly  or  in- 

4 

directly,  by  the  liver  to  form  urea.  Or,  as  previously  described, 
some  of  the  amido-bodies  formed  from  the  proteid  during  digestion 
may  be  carried  to  the  liver,  and  the  amido-group  be  split  off  to  form 
urea.  The  general  idea,  therefore,  is  that  the  nitrogen  of  the  pro- 
teid is  by  processes  of  hydrolysis  or  by  hydrolysis  and  oxidation 
converted  to  ammonia  salts  and  then  to  urea.  Ammonia  com- 
pounds are  found  in  the  blood,  particularly  in  that  of  the  portal 
vein,  and  these  compounds  increase  in  quantity  when  the  liver  is 
removed.* 

Uric  acid  and  the  other  purin  bodies  arise  probably  from  a 
metabolism  of  the  nuclein  material  contained  in  the  nucleoproteids  of 
the  body,  but  the  processes  involved  are  not  known.  Presumably 
they  are  formed  from  nuclein  by  processes  of  hydrolysis  caused  by 
specific  enzymes  or  by  the  more  direct  influence  of  the  living  tissue. 
In  the  laboratory  the  nucleins  may  be  split  by  the  hydrolytic  action 
of  acids  with  the  formation  of  purin  bases. 

The  creatinin  of  the  urine  is  formed  from  the  creatin  found  in 
muscular  tissue.  Presumably  this  creatin  is  derived  from  a  metab- 
olism of  the  living  muscular  tissue.  There  is  evidence  to  show 
that  increased  muscular  activity  may  be  associated  with  an  in- 
creased formation  of  creatin  (p.  759). 

*See  Nencki,  Pawlovv,  and  Zaleski,  "  Archiv  f.  exp.  Pathologie  u.  Phar- 
makologie,"  37,  26,  1895;  and  Nencki  and  Pawlow,  "  Archives  des  sciences 
biologiques,"  5,  213. 


GENERAL   METHODS — HISTORY   OF    PROTEID    FOOD.  791 

With  regard  to  the  non-nitrogenous  portion  of  the  proteid  mole- 
cule the  evidence  to  show  that  it  may  be  converted  to  glycogen 
(sugar)  has  already  been  given  (p.  733),  while  the  views  regarding 
its  conversion  to  fat  will  be  referred  to  in  the  following  chapter  under 
the  head  of  Origin  of  the  Body  Fat. 

Nutritive  Value  of  Albuminoids. — The  albuminoid  most  fre- 
quently occurring  in  food  is  gelatin.  It  is  derived  from  collagen 
of  the  connective  tissues.  Collagen  of  bones  or  of  connective  tissue 
takes  up  water  when  boiled  and  becomes  converted  into  gelatin. 
We  eat  gelatin,  therefore,  in  boiled  meats,  soups,  etc,,  and,  besides, 
it  is  frequently  employed  directly  as  a  food  in  the  form  of  table 
gelatin.  Collagen  has  the  following  percentage  composition:  C, 
50.75  per  cent.;  H,  6.47;  N,  17.86;  0,  24.32;  S,  0.6.  It  resembles 
the  proteid  molecule  closely  in  percentage  composition,  and  it  would 
seem  that  the  tissues  might  use  it  as  they  do  proteid  for  the  for- 
mation of  new  protoplasm.  Experiments,  however,  have  demon- 
strated clearly  that  this  is  not  the  case.  Animals  fed  upon  albu- 
minoids together  with  fats  and  carbohydrates  do  not  maintain 
nitrogen  equilibrium.  The  final  result  of  such  a  diet  would  be 
continued  loss  of  weight  and  malnutrition  and  death.  Gelatin, 
however,  is  readily  digested,  gelatoses  and  gelatin  peptones  and  event- 
ually some  split  products  being  formed;  these  are  absorbed  and 
oxidized  in  the  body,  with  the  formation  of  COg,  HgO,  and  urea  or 
some  related  nitrogenous  product.  Gelatin  serves,  then,  as  a  source 
of  energy  to  the  body  in  the  same  sense  as  do  carbohydrates  and 
fats.  When  any  one  of  these  three  substances  is  used  in  a  diet, 
the  proportion  of  proteid  necessary  for  the  maintenance  of  nitrogen 
equilibrium  may  be  reduced  greatly.  Actual  experiments  have 
shown  that  gelatin  is  more  efficacious  than  either  fats  or  carbohy- 
drates in  protecting  the  proteid  in  the  body.  The  relative  value 
of  fats,  carbohydrates,  and  gelatin  in  protecting  proteid  from  de- 
struction in  the  body  is  illustrated  by  an  experiment  reported  by 
Voit:  A  dog  weighing  32  kgms.  was  fed  alternately  upon  proteid 
and  sugar,  proteid  and  fat,  and  proteid  and  gelatin,  with  the  follow- 
ing result: 

Nourishment  (Gms.)  Calculated  Destruction  of 

Meat.        Gelatin.  Fat.  Sugar.  Flesh  in  Body  (Gms.). 

400  —  200  —  450 

400  —  —  250  439 

400  200  —  —  356 

Practically,  however,  the  use  of  gelatin  in  diets  is  restricted  by  its 
unpalatableness  when  employed  in  large  quantities.  Whatever  may 
be  the  physiological  cause  of  this  peculiarity,  there  seems  to  be  no 
doubt  that  when  used  largely  in  the  diet  both  animals  and 
men  soon  develop  such  an  aversion  to  it  that  it  is  necessary  to  dis- 
continue its  use.     Munk  has  attempted  to  determine  how  far  the 


792  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

proteids  of  food  may  be  replaced  by  gelatin.  In  his  experiments 
a  dog  was  brought  into  a  condition  of  nitrogenous  equilibrium  upon 
a  diet  of  meat,  rice,  and  lard,  containing  9.73  gms.  of  nitrogen. 
During  the  period  this  diet  was  continued  the  animal,  whose  weight 
was  16.5  kgms.,  was  oxidizing  in  its  body  3.7  gms.  of  proteid  daily 
for  each  kilogram  of  weight.  In  a  second  period  lasting  four  days 
the  quantities  of  rice  and  lard  were  the  same  as  before,  but  the  pro- 
teid in  the  diet  was  reduced  to  8.2  gms.,  or  1.3  gms.  of  nitrogen;  the 
balance  of  the  necessary  nitrogen  was  supplied  in  the  form  of  gela- 
tin, so  that  in  round  numbers  only  one-seventh  of  the  required  daily 
amount  of  nitrogen  was  given  as  proteid.  The  result  was  that  the 
animal  maintained  its  nitrogen  equilibrium  for  the  short  period 
stated.  It  was  found  that  the  experiments  could  not  be  continued 
longer  than  four  days,  owing  to  the  growing  dislike  of  the  animal 
for  the  gelatin  food.  During  the  second  period  the  animal  was 
receiving  in  its  food  and  burning  in  its  body  only  0.5  gm.  of  pro- 
teid daily  for  each  kilogram  of  weight,  as  against  3.7  gms.  upon 
a  normal  diet. 


CHAPTER  XLVIII. 
NUTRITIVE  HISTORY  OF  CARBOHYDRATES  AND  FATS. 

The  Carbohydrate  Supply  of  the  Body. — The  available  carbo- 
hydrate material  of  the  body  consists  of  the  glycogen  found  in  the 
tissues,  especially  in  the  liver  (1  to  4  per  cent,  or  more)  and  mus- 
cles (0.5  per  cent.),  and  the  sugar  formed  from  this  glycogen  and 
present  constantly  in  the  blood  to  the  amount  of  0.1  to  0.15  per 
cent.  In  addition  it  is  believed  that  during  starvation  glycogen 
or  sugar  may  be  made  from  the  proteid  tissues  of  the  body,  and 
possibly  also  from  the  body  fat,  although  this  latter  source  is 
doubtful.  The  supply  of  glycogen  under  normal  conditions  is  main- 
tained chiefly  by  the  carbohydrate  food.  As  was  explained  in  the 
section  on  digestion,  the  starches,  sugars,  gums,  etc.,  which  con- 
stitute the  carbohydrate  foodstuffs,  are  eventually  absorbed  into  the 
blood  as  simple  sugars,  chiefly  dextrose,  but  probably  also  some 
levulose  and  galactose.  These  simple  sugars  constitute  the  important 
glycogen  formers.  There  is  still  some  difference  of  opinion  as  to 
whether  all  proteids  are  capable  of  yielding  glycogen  to  the  body. 
Some  physiologists  believe  that  after  the  nitrogen  is  split  off  to  form 
urea,  the  non-nitrogenous  portion  of  the  molecule  may  be  con- 
verted to  glycogen  in  the  liver.  Others  hold  that  only  those  pro- 
teids, such  as  egg-albumin,  which  contain  a  carbohydrate  grouping 
in  the  molecule  are  capable  of  yielding  glycogen  in  the  body.* 
Whether  the  fats  of  the  food  may  serve  as  a  source  of  glycogen  is 
also  an  open  question,  but  the  balance  of  evidence  is  probably 
against  such  a  view.  The  store  of  glycogen  in  the  body  is  about 
equally  divided  between  the  liver  and  the  muscular  tissues,  but  the 
regulation  of  the  supply  of  sugar  to  the  blood  is  usually  attributed 
to  the  liver.  This  regulation  is  adjusted  so  that  the  percentage  of 
sugar  in  the  blood  is  kept  astonishingly  constant,  not  only  during 
the  conditions  of  ordinary  living,  but  under  such  an  abnomal  con- 
dition as  prolonged  starvation.  It  is  assumed  that  this  regulation 
is  effected  mainly  by  an  enzyme  formed  in  the  liver  cells  which 
converts  the  glycogen  to  dextrose  in  proportion  as  the  sugar  of  the 
blood  is  used  up  by  the  tissues. 

The  Final  Fate  of  the  Carbohydrate  of  the  Body. — ^Eventually 

*  See  Pfliiger,  in  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  96,  1,  1903,  for 
literature  and  discussion. 

793 


794  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION. 

the  carbohydrate  of  the  body  is  oxidized  in  the  tissues  with  the 
formation  of  carbon  dioxid  and  water.  Much  uncertainty  prevails, 
however,  as  to  the  steps  and  means  by  which  this  oxidation  is 
effected.  Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  important  fact 
that  the  internal  secretion  of  the  pancreas  (islands  of  Langerhans) 
is  necessary  to  this  process.  According  to  Cohnheim's  experiments, 
this  secretion  furnishes  an  activating  substance  which  enables  the  • 
enzymes  of  the  muscles  and  other  tissues  to  attack  the  sugar.  While 
the  matter  is  still  one  for  investigation,  the  trend  of  recent  work 
indicates  that  the  sugar  is  broken  down  and  oxidized  by  the  suc- 
cessive action  of  a  number  of  enzymes,  with  the  formation,  there- 
fore, of  a  number  of  intermediate  products.*  The  first  step  seems 
to  be  a  "conversion  to  lactic  acid 

CgHizOj  =  2C3H8O3 

Sugar.  Lactic  acid. 

under  the  influence  of  an  enzyme  (lactolase  or  zymase).  The  lactic 
acid  is  then  split  into  alcohol  and  carbon  dioxid 

Lactic  acid.  Ethyl-alcohol. 

by  the  action  of  another  enzyme  (alcoholase  or  lactacidase),  and 
finally  by  the  action  of  one  or  more  oxidizing  enzymes  the  alcohol 
is  oxidized  to  carbon  dioxid  and  water.  Whether  or  not  this  specific 
process  takes  place  in  normal  metabolism  must  be  determined  by 
future  work.  We  are  certain  at  present  only  of  the  fact  that  the 
final  products  are  carbon  dioxid  and  water, — that  is,  complete 
oxidation  products, — and  that  in  some  way  the  internal  secretion 
of  the  pancreas  is  essential  to  the  process,  either  in  the  way  indi- 
cated above  or  in  controlling  the  activity  of  the  enzyme  in  the 
liver  which  converts  the  glycogen  to  sugar. 

The  Temporary  Fate  of  the  Carbohydrate  in  the  Tissues. — 
The  sugar  absorbed  from  the  alimentary  canal  may  be  stored  in 
the  body  in  two  forms :  First,  as  explained  above,  it  may  be  changed 
to  glycogen;  or,  second,  it  may  be  converted  into  fat  and  thus  be 
stored  in  more  permanent  form.  Nutritive  experiments,  described 
below,  leave  no  doubt  that  the  fat  of  the  body  may  be  formed  from 
carbohydrate  food.  It  is  stated  that  the  fat  that  has  this  origin, 
carbohydrate  fat,  is  of  a  more  solid  consistency — that  is,  has  a  larger 
percentage  of  palmitin  and  stearin — ^than  the  fat  coming  from  other 
sources. 

Functions  of  the  Carbohydrate  Food. — The  general  value  of 
the  carbohydrate  food  to  the  organism  may  be  considered  under 
three   heads:     (1)   It  furnishes  a  source  of  energy  for   muscular 

*  See  Biichner  and  Meisenheimer,  "  Berichte  d.  deutsch.  chem.  Gesell- 
schaft,"  38,  620,  1905;    and  Stoklase,  ihicl,  p.  664. 


CARBOHYDRATES    AND    FATS.  795 

work.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the  glycogen  of  a  muscle  dis- 
appears in  proportion  to  the  work  done  by  the  muscle,  and  indeed 
prolonged  muscular  work,  especially  during  starvation,  may  wipe 
out  quickly  the  entire  store  of  glycogen  in  the  body,  in  the  liver  as 
well  as  in  the  muscles.  It  is  usually  beheved,  therefore,  that  the 
oxidation  of  the  sugar  furnishes  energy  which  by  the  machinery 
of  the  muscles  is  utilized  to  do  work, — that  is,  to  cause  muscular 
contractions.  It  seems  probable  that  under  normal  conditions  this 
material  furnishes  the  main,  if  not  the  sole  source  of  energy  for 
muscular  work.  (2)  The  oxidation  of  the  sugar  furnishes  an  im- 
portant part  of  the  constant  supply  of  heat  needed  by  the  body. 
Each  gram  of  sugar  on  oxidation  yields  4  Calories  of  heat,  and, 
since  the  carbohydrates  form  the  largest  part  of  our  diet  and  are 
easih^  oxidized  in  the  body,  they  must  be  regarded  as  an  especially 
available  material  for  keeping  up  the  supply  of  animal  heat.  The 
largest  part  of  the  energy  liberated  by  the  oxidation  of  sugar  in  the 
muscles  during  contraction  takes  the  form  of  heat,  and  even  dur- 
ing muscular  rest  the  condition  of  tone  is  probably  attended  by  a 
constant  oxidation  of  this  material.  (3)  The  oxidation  of  the  sugar 
protects  the  proteid  of  the  body.  Attention  has  already  been 
called  to  the  fact  that  an  animal  may  be  kept  in  nitrogen  equilibriimi 
on  a  much  smaller  proteid  diet  provided  carbohydrates  (or  fats) 
are  also  eaten.  One  may  say,  in  fact,  that  as  the  carbohydrate  food 
is  increased  the  proteid  food  may  be  diminished,  down  to  a  certain 
irreducible  minimum.  From  the  chemical  composition  of  carbo- 
hydrates it  is  evident  that  they  alone  can  not  serve  to  build  up  pro- 
toplasm. Some  proteid  food  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  repair 
of  tissue  or  the  production  of  new  tissue  during  growth.  An  ani- 
mal fed  on  carbohydrate  food  alone,  no  matter  how  abundant  the 
supply,  would  eventually  starve  to  death.  Within  the  limits  speci- 
fied, however,  the  carbohydrates  are  proteid-sparers ;  the  energy 
provided  by  their  oxidation  keeps  up  the  supply  of  heat  and  enables 
the  muscles  and  probably  the  other  tissues  to  function  normally, 
and  to  this  extent  protects  the  living  proteid  from  consumption  and 
enables  us  to  reduce  the  proteid  material  in  our  diet.  The  im- 
portance of  the  carbohydrates  in  nutrition  is  illustrated  in  a  strik- 
ing way  by  the  facts  in  diabetes.  Diabetes  occurs  in  man  (diabetes 
mellitus)  as  a  pathological  condition  which  in  some  cases  at  least 
is  referable  to  a  lesion  of  the  pancreas.  As  already  described,  it 
may  also  be  produced  in  dogs  and  other  animals  by  removal  of  the 
pancreas  (pancreatic  diabetes).  Under  both  conditions  when  com- 
plete the  carbohydrates  eaten  are  not  oxidized  in  the  body,  but  are 
eliminated  as  sugar  in  the  urine.  Corresponding  to  the  loss  of  this 
source  of  energy  an  increased  amount  of  proteid  is  necessary  in  the 
diet,  and  adding  carbohydrate  to  the  food  in  such  cases  does  not 


796  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION. 

alter  the  nitrogen  elimination  in  the  urine.  The  diabetic  condition 
may  be  produced  in  other  ways  the  most  interesting  of  which  is  by 
the  administration  of  phloridzin, — a  vegetable  glucosid  obtained 
from  the  roots  of  certain  trees  (apple,  pear).  The  cause  of  phlo- 
ridzin diabetes  is  not  entirely  known,  but  the  general  view  is  that 
the  glucosid  acts  upon  the  kidney  and  renders  it  more  permeable, 
so  that  the  sugar  of  the  blood  escapes  into  the  urine,  or,  on  the 
other  hand,  it  may  affect  the  condition  of  the  sugar  in  the  blood  so 
as  to  make  it  pass  through  the  kidney  more  easily.  The  diabetes 
in  this  case  has  obviously  a  different  cause  from  that  of  pancreatic 
diabetes,  but  by  repeated  use  of  the  drug  the  loss  of  carbohydrate 
to  the  body  may  be  made  complete.  If  the  animal  is  fed  only  on 
proteid,  proteid  and  fat,  or  is  starved  so  that  he  is  living  on  the 
proteid  and  fat  of  his  own  body  the  drug  still  causes  the  appear- 
ance of  large  quantities  of  sugar  in  the  urine,  Lusk*  finds  under 
such  conditions  that  the  amount  of  dextrose  in  the  urine  bears  a 
definite  ratio  to  the  amount  of  nitrogen, — D  :  N  ::  3.65  :  1.  He 
believes  that  the  establishment  of  this  ratio  is  an  indication  of  a 
complete  inabihty  of  the  tissues  to  use  sugar.  A  similar  ratio  has 
been  obtained  in  the  urine  of  individuals  suffering  from  a  severe 
and  eventually  fatal  form  of  diabetes  mellitus.  Assuming  that 
the  sugar  is  these  cases  comes  entirely  from  the  proteid  of  the  food 
or  of  the  tissues,  this  ratio  would  indicate  that  58.4  per  cent,  of  the 
proteid  molecule  may  be  converted  to  sugar  in  the  body. 

Nutritive  Value  of  Fats. — The  fats  of  food  are  absorbed  into 
the  lacteals  chiefly  as  neutral  fats, — the  so-called  chyle  fat.  They 
eventually  reach  the  blood  in  this  condition,  and  are  afterward  in 
some  way  oxidized  by  the  tissues.  The  final  products  of  their 
oxidation  are  the  same  as  when  burnt  outside  the  body — 
namely,  CO 2  and  HgO — and  a  corresponding  amount  of  energy  must 
be  liberated.  Speaking  generally,  then,  the  essential  nutritive 
value  of  the  fats  is  that  they  furnish  energy  to  the  body,  and,  from 
a  chemical  standpoint,  they  must  contain  more  available  energy, 
weight  for  weight,  than  the  proteids  or  the  carbohydrates.  In  a 
well-nourished  animal  a  large  amount  of  fat  is  found  normally  in 
adipose  tissues,  particularly  in  the  so-called  "  panniculus  adiposus  " 
beneath  the  skin,  and  in  the  folds  of  the  peritoneum,  etc.  Physi- 
ologically, this  body  fat  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  reserve  supply  of 
nourishment.  When  food  is  eaten  and  absorbed  in  excess  of  the 
actual  metabolic  processes  of  the  body,  the  excess  is  stored  in  the 
adipose  tissue  as  fat,  to  be  drawn  upon  in  case  of  need — as,  for 
instance,  during  partial  or  complete  starvation.  A  starving  animal, 
after  its  small  supply  of  glycogen  is  exhausted,  lives  entirely  upon 

*  See  Lusk  and  coworkers,  "  American  Journal  of  Physiology, "  vols,  i, 
iii,  and  x;  also  "  Deutsches  Archiv  f.  klin.  Med.,"  81,  472,  1904. 


CARBOHYDRATES   AND    FATS.  797 

body  proteids  and  fats;  the  larger  the  supply  of  fat,  the  more 
effectively  will  the  proteid  tissues  be  protected  from  destruction. 
In  accordance  with  this  fact,  it  has  been  shown  that  when  subjected 
to  complete  starvation  a  fat  animal  survives  longer  than  a  lean 
one.  Our  supply  of  fat  is  called  upon  not  only  during  complete 
abstention  from  food,  but  also  whenever  the  diet  is  insufficient  to 
cover  the  oxidations  of  the  body,  as  in  deficient  food,  sickness,  etc. 

The  Fate  of  the  Fat  in  the  Tissues. — The  fat  absorbed  as 
food  may  temporarily  subserve  several  different  purposes:  (1)  It 
may  be  oxidized  with  the  formation  of  heat  energy.  (2)  It  may 
be  stored  in  the  tissues  as  part  of  the  body  fat.  (3)  It  may  be 
synthesized  with  other  substances  to  form  some  more  complex 
constituent  of  the  body,  such  as  lecithin.  (4)  According  to  some 
authors,  it  may  serve  under<;ertain  conditions  as  a  source  of  sugar. 
This  latter  suggestion  is  not  supported  by  convincing  experiments. 
The  final  fate  of  the  fat  in  the  body  is,  however,  to  be  oxidized  to 
water  and  carbon  dioxid.  The  nature  of  the  processes  involved 
is  not  understood.  It  is  generally  believed,  however,  that  the 
first  step  is  the  splitting  of  the  fat  into  fatty  acid  and  glycerin 
under  the  influence  of  the  lipase  found  in  so  many  of  the  tissues 
of  the  body.  The  fat  that  Hes  in  the  storage  tissues — skin,  peri- 
toneum, etc. — probably  does  not  undergo  oxidation  in  these  places. 
In  times  of  need  it  is  absorbed  and  distributed  to  the  more  active 
tissues,  and  in  this  initial  process  of  solution  it  is  probable  that  a 
regulative  influence  is  exerted  by  the  lipase  as  suggested  by  Loeven- 
hart  (see  p.  660).  That  is,  by  its  reversible  action  this  enzyme 
may  control  the  output  of  fat  to  the  blood,  as  the  supply  of  sugar 
in  the  blood  is  kept  constant  by  the  diastatic  enzyme  of  the  liver. 
After  the  action  of  the  lipase  we  can  only  say  that  oxidation 
takes  place,  but  through  how  many  stages  is  not  known. 

Origin  of  the  Body  Fat. — ^The  views  upon  the  origin  of  body 
fat  have  undergone  a  number  of  changes  in  the  last  fifty  or  sixty 
years,  illustrating  in  an  interesting  way  how  development  of  our 
experimental  methods  leads  often  at  first  to  half-trulhs  which  are 
corrected  later  by  more  extensive  work.  Dumas  and  others  (1840) 
held  to  the  natural  view  that  the  fat  of  the  body  originates  directly 
from  the  fat  of  the  food.  Liebig,  applying  his  more  exact  methods, 
demonstrated  that  in  some  cases  at  least  this  source  is  insufficient 
to  account  for  all  the  fat.  The  fat  yielded  by  the  milk  of  a  cow 
for  instance,  may  be  greater  in  quantity  than  the  fat  contained 
in  the  food.  He  also  pointed  out  that  the  fat  of  each  species  of 
animal  is  more  or  less  peculiar,  the  fat  of  the  sheep  having  a  higher 
melting  point  than  pork  fat,  and  both  differing  in  composition  from 
the  fat  taken  as  food.  "In  hay  or  the  other  fodder  of  oxen  no 
beef  suet  exists,  and  no  hog's  lard  can  be  found  in  the  potato  refuse 


798  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

given  to  swine."  He  was  led  to  attribute  the  source  of  body  fat 
chiefly  to  the  carbohydrate  food,  and  this  behef  agreed  well  with 
the  experience  of  agriculturists  as  to  the  use  of  such  foods  in  fatten- 
ing animals  for  market.  This  view,  in  turn,  was  displaced  by  the 
theory  of  Voit,  supported  by  elaborate  feeding  experiments.  Voit 
believed  that  the  fat  of  the  body  is  formed  mainly  or  entirely  from 
the  proteid  of  the  food,  the  carbohydrate  and  the  fat  of  the  diet 
being  useful  only  to  protect  a  part  of  this  proteid  from  oxidation. 
Voit's  experiments  have  been  shown  by  Pfliiger  to  have  been  based 
upon  erroneous  analyses  of  the  meat  used  in  his  experiments.  Voit 
assumed  that  in  this  meat  the  ratio  -q-  is  equal  to  1.34  to  1.37,  while 
Pfliiger  showed  that  it  is  lower,*  1.33.  The  modern  point  of  view 
is  that  the  fat  of  the  body  originates  partly  from  the  fat  of  the  food, 
particularly  in  carnivora,  and  partly  from  the  carbohydrate  of  the 
food,  especially  in  herbivora,  in  whose  diet  this  foodstuff  forms 
such  a  large  part.  Whether  under  any  circumstances  the  pro- 
teid food  may  also  serve  as  a  source  of  body  fat  is  still  an  open 
question,  decisive  experiments  being  lacking. 

Origin  of  Body  Fat  from  Food  Fat. — The  first  proofs  that 
the  food  fats  may  be  deposited  as  such  in  the  fat  tissues  of  the 
body  were  obtained  by  feeding  foreign  fats  to  dogs  and  demon- 
strating that  these  fats  can  afterward  be  recognized  in  the 
tissues  of  the  animals,  t  Linseed  oil,  rape-seed  oil,  and  mutton-fat 
were  used  in  these  experiments.  Secondly,  it  has  been  made 
probable  by  feeding  experiments  that  the  normal  fat  of  the  food 
undergoes  a  similar  fate.  Thus,  Hofmann  used  a  dog  weighing 
26  kgms.  and  allowed  it  to  starve  until  its  weight  was  reduced  to 
16  kgms.  It  was  then  fed  for  five  days  on  a  Httle  meat  and  large 
quantities  of  fat.  At  the  end  of  that  time  it  was  killed  and  analyzed. 
The  body  contained  1353  gms.  of  fat,  of  which  only  131  gms.  could 
have  come  from  the  proteid  used,  assuming  that  this  material 
can  serve  as  a  fat  former.  Much  of  the  fat  found,  therefore,  was 
probably  derived  from  the  fat  of  the  food. 

Origin  of  Body  Fat  from  Carbohydrates. — That  the  body 
fat  may  have  this  origin  has  been  made  probable  or  certain  by 
feeding  experiments.  Thus,  Rubner  fed  a  dog  (5.89  kgms.)  for 
two  days  on  a  diet  of  sugar,  starch,  and  fat  whose  total  carbon 
content  was  equal  to  176.6  gms.  During  this  period  the  animal 
excreted  87.1  gms.  of  carbon.  There  were  retained  in  the  body, 
therefore,  89.5  gms.  carbon.  The  fat  fed,  4.7  gms.,  contained 
(4.7  X  0.77)  3.6  gms.  C.     The  total  nitrogen  excreted  during  this 

*  Pfliiger,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  51,  229,  1892,  and  77, 
521,  1899. 

t  Lebedeff,  "  Centralblatt  f.  die  med.  Wiss.,"  8,  1881,  and  Munk,  "  Vir- 
chow's  Archiv, "  95,  407,  1884. 


CARBOHYDRATES    AND    FATS.  799 

period  was  2.55  gms.,  which  indicated  a  metabohsm,  therefore,  of 
16  gms.  (2.55  X  6.25)  of  bod}-  proteid.  Making  the  improbable 
assumption  that  all  of  the  carbon  of  this  proteid  was  retained  in 
the  body,  this  would  account  for  8.32  gms.  C  (16  X  0.52);  so  that 
3.6  +  8.32  or  12  gms.  C  might  have  originated  from  sources  other 
than  the  carboh3'drate  of  the  food,  leaving,  therefore,  89.5  —  12 
or  77.5  gms.  of  C  which  could  have  arisen  only  from  the  carbohy- 
drate. This  quantity  of  carbon  could  have  been  retained  only  as 
gh^cogen  or  fat.  Allowdng  for  the  greatest  possible  storage  of 
glycogen,  78  gms.  or  34.6  gms.  C,  there  would  still  remain  42.9  gms. 
of  C  which  could  have  been  retained  only  as  fat.  Numerous  other 
fattening  experiments  of  different  kinds  have  been  made  in  which 
it  has  been  shown  that  the  fat  laid  on  by  the  animal  could  not  l)e 
accounted  for  by  the  fat  of  the  food  or  by  assuming  with  Voit  that  it 
originated  from  the  proteid.  The  combined  testimony  of  these 
experiments  have  satisfied  physiologists  that  the  fat  tissues  can 
produce  fat  from  sugar.  The  chemistry  of  the  change  is  not  under- 
stood and  can  not  be  imitated  in  the  laboratory. 

The  Source  of  Body  Fat  in  Ordinary  Diets. — For  the  pur- 
poses of  demonstration  the  experiments  made  to  prove  the  origin 
of  body  fat  from  carbohydrate  or  the  fat  of  food  have  made  use 
of  abnormal  diets  and  conditions.  It  would  be  a  matter  of  practical 
interest  to  ascertain  whether  upon  normal  diets  the  fat  of  the 
body  originates  most  easily  from  the  fat  or  from  the  carbohydrate 
of  the  food.  While  the  question  is  one  to  w^hich  a  positive  answer 
can  not  be  given,  it  seems  to  be  probable  that  the  result  varies  with 
conditions  and  the  nature  of  the  animal.  Experience  seems  to 
show  that  carnivorous  animals  can  be  fattened  more  easily  on  a 
fat  diet,  herbivora  on  a  carbohydrate  diet.  In  animals  like  our- 
selves there  is  reason  to  believe  that  the  carbohydrates  are  more 
easily  and  more  quickly  destroyed  in  the  body  than  the  fats,  and 
that  therefore  the  latter  may  be  more  readily  deposited  in  the  tis- 
sues, although  an  excess  of  carbohydrate  beyond  the  actual  needs 
of  the  body  may  also  be  preserved  in  the  form  of  fat  or  glycogen.* 

The  Cause  of  the  Deposit  of  Body  Fat — Obesity. — Our 
experience  shows  that  individuals  differ  greatly  in  the  ease  with 
which  they  form  fat.  Some  upon  relatively  small  diets  form  much 
fat,  while  others  remain  thin  in  spite  of  the  ingestion  of  large 
amounts  of  food.  Voit  has  indicated  the  general  reason  for  this 
difference, — namely,  that  it  depends  upon  the  capacity  of  the  body 
to  destroy  food  material.  When  food  is  supplied  and  absorbed 
in  excess  of  this  capacity  the  excess  is  stored  mainly  as  fat, 
and  to  a  small  extent  as  glycogen  or  as  new  proteid.  A  diet,  there- 
fore, which  will  give  such  an  excess  to  one  individual  may  in  the 

*  Consult  Rosenfeld,  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  i,  part  i,  1902. 
Complete   literature. 


800  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

body  of  another  of  the  same  weight  be  all  consumed.  The  oxidizing 
capacity  of  the  body  differs  in  different  individuals  and  some  will 
lay  on  fat  more  readily  than  others,  because  for  them  an  excess 
of  material  is  provided  by  a  relative!}^  small  diet.  Fundamental 
differences  of  this  character  in  the  properties  of  the  protoplasm  are 
frequently  transmitted  by  heredity  through  many  generations. 
Those  individuals  who  show  little  tendency  to  lay  on  fat  may 
be  made  to  do  so  by  largely  increasing  the  amount  of  food,  or  more 
certainly  by  altering  the  mode  of  life.  A  sedentary  life,  absence 
of  worry,  etc.,  may  lead  to  a  tendency  of  this  kind,  while  a  very 
active  muscular  life  has  the  opposite  effect.  Men  who  lead  a  very 
muscular  life — farmers,  fishermen,  etc. — are  rarely  disposed  to  ac- 
cumulate fat  to  a  noticeable  degree.  So  also  the  use  of  alcoholic 
beverages  may  indirectly  favor  accumulation  of  fat,  presumably  by 
depressing  the  oxidizing  capacity  of  the  tissues.  The  tendency  to 
form  fat  may  exhibit  itself  in  some  cases  to  such  an  extent  as  to  con-  , 
stitute  an  almost  pathological  condition.  Extreme  obesity  may  be 
counteracted  by  altering  the  mode  of  life,  especially  by  taking 
much  muscular  exercise,  or  more  directly  by  dieting.  The  diet  for 
such  purposes  should  be  reduced  in  amount,  and  should  be  as  free  as 
possible  from  fats  and  carbohydrates,  consisting  of  such  material 
as  eggs,  fish,  lean  meat,  salads,  fruits,  etc.  The  well-known 
Banting  diet,  devised  by  a  London  physician  (1864)  for  the  cure 
of  obesity,  makes  use  of  this  latter  principle.* 

Summary  of  the  General  Functions  of  Fat. — The  general 
functions  fulfilled  by  the  fats  may  be  summarized  briefly  under 
the  following  heads:  (1)  It  provides  a  store  of  reserve  food  which 
is  used  by  the  body  in  case  of  deficiency  of  food  or  complete  starva- 
tion. The  fattening  of  hibernating  animals  before  their  winter 
sleep  and  the  humps  of  the  camel  give  conspicuous  examples  of  this 
peculiarity.  (2)  By  its  oxidation  in  the  body  it  furnishes  a  part 
of  the  heat  energy  necessary  to  maintain  the  body  temperature. 
On  account  of  its  high  combustion  equivalent  (1  gm.  of  fat  yields 
9.3  Calories)  fat  is  very  effective  in  this  respect.  Inhabitants 
of  cold  regions  choose  a  diet  rich  in  fat.  (3)  It  is  a  proteid-saver. 
Like  the  carbohydrate  food,  its  oxidation  protects  the  proteid  from 
consumption.  In  starvation,  therefore,  the  amount  of  proteid 
destroyed  daily  is  smaller  as  long  as  any  fat  remains,  and,  under 
ordinary  conditions  of  life  the  larger  the  amount  of  fat  in  the  diet, 
the  less  the  amount  of  proteid  necessary  for  maintaining  the  body 
in  nitrogen  equilibrium.  Experiments  show  that  in  this  respect 
the  fat  is  not  so  effective  as  an  equivalent  amount  of  carbohydrate 
food.  The  difference  is  referable  probably  to  the  greater  difficulty 
of  oxidation  of  the  fatty  material. 

*  For  practical  directions  concerning  the  treatment  of  obesity  by  dieting 
see  Gautier.  "  L'alimentation  et  les  regimes."     Paris,  1904. 


CHAPTER   XLIX. 

NUTRITIVE   VALUE   OF  THE   INORGANIC   SALTS  AND 
THE  ACCESSORY  ARTICLES  OF  DIET. 

The  Inorganic  Salts. — The  body  contains  in  its  tissues  and 
hquids  a  considerable  amount  of  inorganic  material.  When  any 
organ  is  incinerated  this  material  remains  as  the  ash.  If  we  omit 
the  bones,  which  are  rich  in  mineral  material,  the  average  amount 
of  ash  in  the  body  amounts  to  about  0.1  per  cent,  of  its  weight. 
It  consists  of  chlorids,  phosphates,  sulphates,  carbonates,  fluorids, 
or  silicates  of  potassium,  sodium,  calcium,  magnesium,  and  iron; 
iodin  occurs  also,  especially  in  the  thyroid  tissues.  In  the  Hquids 
of  the  body  the  main  salts  are  sodium  chlorid,  sodium  carbonate, 
sodium  phosphate,  potassium  and  calcium  chlorid  or  phosphate. 
In  considering  the  organic  foodstuffs  weight  was  laid  upon  their 
value  as  sources  of  energy,  as  well  as  upon  their  function  in  con- 
structing tissue.  The  salts,  on  the  contrary,  have  no  importance 
from  the  former  standpoint.  Whatever  chemical  changes  they 
undergo  are  not  attended  by  any  liberation  of  heat  energy, — none 
at  least,  of  sufficient  importance  to  be  considered.  They  have, 
however,  most  important  functions.  They  maintain  a  normal 
composition  and  osmotic  pressure  in  the  liquids  and  tissues  of  the 
body,  and  by  virtue  of  their  osmotic  pressure  they  play  an  im- 
portant part  in  controlling  the  flow  of  water  to  and  from  the  tissues. 
Moreover,  these  salts  constitute  an  essential  part  of  the  composition 
of  living  matter.  In  some  way  they  are  bound  up  in  the  structure 
of  the  living  molecule  and  are  necessary  to  its  normal  reactions 
or  irritability.  Even  the  proteids  of  the  body  liquids  contain 
definite  amounts  of  ash,  and  if  this  ash  is  removed  their  properties 
are  seriously  altered,  as  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  ash-free  native 
proteids  lose  their  property  of  coagulation  by  heat.  The  globulins 
are  precipitated  from  their  solutions  when  the  salts  are  removed. 
The  special  importance  of  the  calcium  salts  in  the  coagulation  of 
blood,  and  the  curdling  of  milk  has  been  referred  to,  as  also  the 
peculiar  part  played  by  the  calcium,  potassium,  and  sodium  salts 
in  the  rhythmical  contractions  of  heart  muscle  and  the  irritability 
of  muscular  and  nervous  tissues.  The  special  importance  of  the 
iron  salts  for  the  production  of  hemoglobin  is  also  evident  without 
comment.  The  nutritive  importance  of  the  salts  in  the  diet  has 
been  demonstrated  by  direct  experiment. 
51  801 


802  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

Fatal  Effects  of  Ash -free  or  Ash-poor  Diets. — Dogs  have 
been  fed  (Forster)  upon  a  diet  composed  of  ash-free  fats  and  carbo- 
hydrates, and  meats  which  had  been  extracted  with  water  until 
the  salts  had  been  much  reduced.  The  animals  were  in  a  moribund 
condition  at  the  end  of  26  to  36  days.  It  is  probable  that  they 
would  have  lived  longer  if  deprived  of  food  entirely,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  water,  since  the  metabolism  of  the  abundant  diet  provided 
aided  in  increasing  the  loss  of  salts  from  the  body.  Lunin  has 
described  experiments  which  indicate  that  some  at  least  of  our 
salts  must  be  provided  for  us  in  organic  combinations  such  as  are 
found  in  plant  and  animal  foods.  In  his  experiments  he  found 
that  mice  Hved  well  on  a  diet  of  dried  cows'  milk.  If  fed,  however ;. 
on  a  diet  containing  the  organic  but  ash-free  constituents  of  milk, 
— namely,  sugar,  fat,  and  casein, — together  with  the  extracted 
salts  of  cows'  milk,  they  died  in  20  to  30  days. 

The  Special  Importance  of  Sodium  Chlorid,  Calcium,  and 
Iron  Salts. — Sodium  chlorid  occupies  a  peculiar  position  among 
the  inorganic  constituents  of  our  diet,  in  that  it  is  the  only  one 
which  we  deliberately  add  to  our  food.  The  other  inorganic 
material  is  taken  unconsciously  in  our  diet,  but  although  sodium 
chlorid  exists  also  in  our  food  in  relatively  large  quantities  we 
purposely  add  more.  It  is  estimated  that  the  average  man  in- 
gests from  20  to  30  gms.  a  day.  This  peculiarity  is  exhibited 
also  by  many  animals.  The  farmer  provides  salt  for  his  stock  and 
wild  animals  visit  the  salt-licks  constantly.  Bunge  has  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  among  men  and  animals  this  desire  for 
salt  is  limited,  for  the  most  part  at  least,  to  those  that  use  vege- 
table food.  From  the  accounts  of  travelers  he  shows  that  when 
a  purely  animal  diet  is  used  there  is  no  desire  for  salt ;  but  on  a  vege- 
table diet  there  is  a  craving  for  it  which  may  become  very  intense 
and  unpleasant  when  circumstances  prevent  its  being  obtained. 
He  offers  an  ingenious  explanation  for  this  relation.  Most  vege- 
tables contain  a  large  amount  of  potassium  salts,  and  in  the  blood 
these  salts  react  with  the  sodium  chlorid.  Thus,  if  potassium 
sulphate  were  added  to  the  blood  it  would  react  with  sodium 
chlorid,  giving  some  potassium  chlorid  and  some  sodium  sulphate. 
Both  of  these  salts  will  be  removed  by  the  kidneys,  since,  except 
in  minute  amounts,  they  are,  so  to  speak,  foreign  to  the  blood. 
This  latter  liquid  will  thereby  lose  some  of  its  supply  of  sodium 
salt,  whence  the  craving  for  more  in  the  food.*  Whether  or  not 
this  explanation  is  correct,  the  fact  which  it  seeks  to  account  for 
seems  to  be  well  established.  It  can  not  be  doubted,  however,  that 
under  ordinary  conditions  we  use  salt  in  quantities  much  larger  than 

*  For  an  interesting  discussion,  see  Bunge,  "  Physiologie  des  Menschen,'^ 
vol.  ii,  p.  103,  1901. 


INORGANIC    SALTS,    STIMULANTS,    AND    C'0NDIMP:NTS.  803 

is  necessary  to  maintain  the  sodium  chloric!  content  of  the  l^loocl. 
It  is  employed  as  a  condiment  foi*  its  pleasant  flavor,  and  it  is 
possible  that  its  use  is  often  carried  to  excess.  This  is  a  matter  of 
practical  dietetics  concerning  which  at  present  we  have  no  satisfac- 
tory experimental  data  to  i:)ase  a  judgment  upon. 

The  calcium  salts  of  the  body  play  a  most  important  role  in 
connection  with  the  irritability  of  muscle  and  nerve  (p.  501). 
They  are  also  of  obvious  importance  in  furnishing  material  for 
the  growth  of  the  skeleton.  Their  importance  in  this  regard  has 
been  demonstrated  by  feeding  experiments.  Young  dogs  when 
given  a  diet  poor  in  calcium  salts  fall  into  a  condition  resembling 
rickets  in  children,  owing  to  a  deficient  growth  of  the  bones.  Pig- 
eons also,  when  fed  upon  a  similar  diet,  exhibit  an  atrophy  and 
fragility  of  the  bones  due  doubtless  to  the  lack  of  calcium  salts. 
As  in  the  case  of  the  other  food  materials,  there  must  be  a  definite 
calcium  metabolism  in  the  body.  It  is  probable,  indeed  certain, 
that  most  of  the  calcium  salts  ingested  simply  pass  through  the 
body  without  entering  into  its  structure.  They  are  eliminated 
unchanged  or  unused  in  the  feces  or  urine.  A  small  portion,  how- 
ever, must  be  absorbed  and  used  and  a  corresponding  amount  must 
be  eliminated  as  a  true  waste  product  of  tissue  metabolism.  Voit, 
by  experiments  upon  isolated  loops  of  the  intestine,  has  shown 
that  some  calcium  is  constantly  eliminated  from  the  inner  surface 
of  the  intestine.  The  amount  is  small.  He  estimates  it  at  less 
than  0.002  gm.  CaO  daily.  There  is  some  evidence  that  the 
amount  of  calcium  in  the  tissues  increases  with  age.  This  is 
certainly  true  of  the  bones,  which  become  exceedingly  brittle  in 
advanced  life. 

The  iron  salts  that  are  constantly  necessary  for  the  production 
of  new  hemoglobin  are  provided  in  our  food,  in  which  they  exist 
in  organic  combination.  The  value  of  the  food  in  this  respect 
varies  greatly,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  following  table  selected 
from  Bunge's  analysis: 

100  gins,  of  dry  substance  contains  iron  in  milligrams,  as  follows  : 

White  of  egg trace       Apples 13 

Rice Ito  2  Cabbage  (green  leaves) ...        17 

Wheat  flour  (bolted) .  .      1.6       Beef 17 

Cows'  milk 2.3       Asparagus 20 

Potatoes 6.4       Yolk  of  egg 10  to  24 

Peas 6.2  to  6.6       Spinach 33  to  39 

Carrots 8.6 

In  conditions  of  malnutrition,  particular!}'  in  the  simple  anemias, 
it  becomes  necessary  to  select  a  diet  with  reference  to  its  contents 
in  iron  or  to  add  iron  deliberately  to  the  diet.  Therapeutically 
iron  may  be  given  in  the  form  of  simple  salts  with  organic  or  mineral 
acids  or  in  more  complex  organic  combination.  There  has  been 
much  controversy  as  to  whether  the  body  is  capable  of  taking 


804  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

the  iron  in  inorganic  form  and  synthesizing  it  into  a  molecule  so 
complex  as  that  of  hemoglobin.  Experience,  however,  seem  to 
show  that  this  is  possible,  although  under  normal  conditions  at 
least  our  iron  is  used  in  organic  form.  Bunge  first  isolated  such  a 
compound,  a  nucleo-albumin  containing  iron,  which  he  prepared 
from  the  egg  yolk  and  called  hematogen.  This  compound  must 
serve  as  the  source  of  the  hemoglobin  in  the  developing  chick. 
When  the  diet  is  directed  especially  toward  increasing  the  iron 
food  it  would  seem  to  be  wiser  to  choose  these  compounds,  or,  better 
still,  the  iron-rich  foods,  rather  than  medicinal  preparations  of 
the  inorganic  salts.  The  daily  excretion  of  iron  from  the  body 
takes  place  in  the  feces  rather  than  in  the  urine.  The  experiments 
of  Voit  upon  isolated  loops  of  the  intestine,  referred  to  above,  show 
that  iron  is  eliminated  from  the  walls  of  the  intestine.  The  whole 
history  of  the  metabolism  of  iron  in  the  body  is  surrounded  by 
much  uncertainty.  After  absorption  its  synthesis  to  hemoglobin 
takes  place,  as  to  its  final  stages,  in  the  red  marrow,  but  it  is  possible 
that  other  organs  may  take  part  in  the  formation  of  intermediate 
products.  As  regards  its  elimination,  we  know  that  the  breaking 
down  of  the  hemoglobin,  formation  of  bile  pigments,  takes  place 
probably  in  the  liver,  but  the  final  excretion  of  the  iron  is  made 
in  some  form  through  the  walls  of  the  intestine. 

Accessory  Articles  of  Diet. — Under  this  general  term  we  may 
include  all  those  bodies  classed  as  condiments,  flavors,  and  stimu- 
lants which  we  habitually  take  in  our  diet  in  order  to  enhance  the 
attractiveness  of  the  food.  These  substances  may  or  may  not 
have  some  heat  value  to  the  body, — that  is,  they  may  undergo 
oxidation  with  the  Hberation  of  heat  energy;  but,  in  general,  their 
value  in  nutrition  lies  in  other  properties. 

The  Flavors  and  Condiments. — Perhaps  the  most  important 
influence  exerted  by  these  bodies  is  that  by  making  the  food  appe- 
tizing they  increase  the  secretion  of  gastric  juice.  The  origin  of 
the  so-called  psychical  secretion  has  been  described  (p.  689),  and 
there  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  palatableness  of  food  influences 
greatly  the  facility  with  which  its  gastric  digestion  is  accomplished. 
It  is  said,  in  fact,  that  dogs  will  refuse  to  eat  food  that  has  been 
deprived  entirely  of  its  sapidity  and  flavor,  preferring  rather  to 
starve.  Some  of  these  substances  (pepper),  as  also  the  stimulants 
(alcohol),  may  have  an  additional  value  in  that  they  increase  the 
rapidity  of  absorption  from  the  stomach.  Gautier  divides  the 
condiments  into  the  following  classes:  (1)  Aroma  tics,  comprising 
vanilla,  anise,  cinnamon,  nutmeg,  and  other  similar  essential  oils. 
(2)  Peppers.  (3)  The  alliaceous  condiments, — garlic,  mustard, 
etc.  (4)  The  acid  condiments, — vinegar,  citron,  pickles,  etc.  (5) 
The  salty  condiments,  such  as  table  salt.     (6)  The  sugar  condiments. 


HN- 

1 

-CO 

ci) 

c- 

-NH 

HN— C- 

Xanthi 

>0H 

-N 

in. 

INORGANIC   SALTS,    STIMULANTS,    AND    CONDIMENTS.  805 

The  Stimulants. — Under  this  head  we  include  alcohol,  tea,  coffee, 
chocolate,  or  cocoa,  and  meat  extracts  (beef  tea,  etc.).  Regarding 
the  last  mentioned  substance,  its  physiological  value  has  been  made 
clear  by  the  work  of  Pawlow  (p.  689.)  Meat  extracts  of  various 
kinds  contain  secretogogues  which  stimulate  the  gastric  glands  to 
secretion.  In  themselves  they  may  contain  very  little  actual 
foodstuff.  Liebig's  extract  contains  some  proteid,  gelatin,  and  gly- 
cogen, which  form  an  actual  nourishment,  but  its  specific  value 
as  a  gastric  stimulant  depends  upon  other  constituents,  possibly  the 
nitrogenous  extractives, — creatin,  xanthin,  carnin,  etc.  Coffee 
and  tea  owe  their  well-known  stimulating  action  to  the  presence 
of  an  alkaloid,  caffein  or  trimethyl-xanthin.  It  may  be  considered 
as  xanthin  in  which  three  of  the  hydrogen  atoms  have  been  re- 
placed by  methyl  (CH3)  groups,  as  is  indicated  in  the  following 
structural  formulas: 

CH3N— CO 

CO    C— N<^^3 

I       II        ^H 
CH3N— C— N 

Caffein. 

This  alkaloid  has  a  diuretic  action  on  the  kidneys  and  a  stimulating 
effect  on  the  nerve  centers,  as  is  illustrated  by  its  effect  in  raising 
blood-pressure  by  an  action  on  the  vasoconstrictor  center.  The 
influence  of  tea  and  coffee  in  preventing  sleepiness  may  be  referred 
to  this  action  on  blood-pressure.  The  use  of  these  substances, 
according  to  general  experience,  augments  muscular  energy  and 
diminishes  the  sense  of  fatigue.  Cocoa,  or  the  chocolate  made 
from  it  by  the  addition  of  sugar,  contains  considerable  nourish- 
ment in  the  form  of  fats,  carbohydrates,  and  proteids,  but  its  stimu- 
lating effect  is  referred  to  the  alkaloid  theobromin  or  dimethyl- 
xanthin,  and  to  some  extent  possibly  to  the  essential  oils  developed 
in  roasting.  The  theobromin  exerts  stimulating  effects  similar  to 
those  of  the  caffein. 

Alcohol. — The  physiological  effects  of  alcohol  are  of  peculiar 
interest  to  mankind,  owing  to  its  widespread  use,  and  especially 
to  the  disastrous  results  following  its  intemperate  consumption. 
Those  who  employ  it  in  excess  are  in  danger  of  acquiring  an  alco- 
holic thirst  or  habit  toward  which  the  body  possesses  no  counter- 
acting regulation.  When  food  is  eaten  in  excess  we  experience  a 
feeling  of  satiety  which  destroys  the  desire  for  more  food,  and  the 
same  regulation  prevails  in  the  case  of  water.  With  alcoholic 
drinks,  however,  the  desire  may  continue  long  after  the  alcohol 
taken  has  begun  to  exert  an  injurious  action  upon  the  tissues. 
The  evil  effects  of  excessive  use  of  alcohol  are  so  continually  demon- 


806  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION. 

strated  upon  man  that  there  is  no  need  for  experimental  investi- 
gations to  establish  this  fact.  Pathological  examination  of  the 
tissues  in  the  case  of  confirmed  drunkards  has  demonstrated  the 
existence  of  definite  lesions  in  many  of  the  organs, — ^stomach, 
liver,  heart,  nervous  system, — and  have  shown  that  under  these 
conditions  it  acts  as  a  tissue  poison.*  This  result  is  exhibited 
not  only  in  cases  of  chronic  alcoholism  in  which  these  lesions 
have  developed  gradually,  but  also  in  cases  of  acute  alcoholism 
resulting  from  excessive  doses.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  known 
that  many  individuals  use  alcohol  in  moderate  doses  throughout 
life  with  no  noticeable  evil  result,  but,  on  the  contrary,  with  possible 
benefit,  particularly  in  advanced  life.  The  matter  of  practical 
importance  and  interest  is  to  determine  the  physiological  role  of 
moderate  doses  of  alcohol.  Does  it  serve  a  useful  purpose,  acting 
as  a  food  or  stimulant,  or  is  it  a  poison  in  all  doses  to  a  greater  or 
less  extent  ?  The  literature  upon  the  subject  is  very  large  and 
in  many  respects  conflicting.  Only  a  brief  summary  can  be 
attempted  here.  Regarding  its  stimulating  action  the  general 
experience  of  mankind  attributes  a  result  of  this  kind  to  its  use 
in  small  quantities.  It  confers  a  sense  of  well-being  and  an  in- 
crease in  mental  and  muscular  activity,  although  these  good  effects 
may  be  quickly  overstepped  b}^  too  great  a  dose.  Specific  researches 
have  been  made  to  show  that  the  alcohol  may  decrease  the  reaction 
time  and  increase  the  rapidity  and  amount  of  the  muscular 
contractions.  On  the  heart  and  blood-vessels  alcohol  in  small 
quantities  appears  to  have  no  positive  effect  of  a  stimulating 
character.  It  is  known  that  even  in  small  doses  it  causes  a  dilata- 
tion of  the  skin  vessels,  giving  a  feeling  of  warmth  and  leading  to 
increased  loss  of  heat;  but  whether  this  effect  is  due  to  a  stimula- 
tion of  the  vasodilator  centers  or,  as  seems  more  probable,  to  a 
narcotic  or  depressing  action  upon  the  vasoconstrictor  centers  has 
not  been  definitely  demonstrated.  Some  observers  obtain  results 
which  indicate  that  alcohol  decreases  the  efficiency  of  the  neuro- 
muscular apparatus  and  acts  in  all  doses  as  a  sedative  or  paralyzant 
rather  thanf  as  a  stimulant.  It  has  been  suggested  that  as  regards 
the  higher  nerve  centers  its  apparent  stimulating  effect  may  be  due 
in  reality  to  a  paralysis  of  inhibitory  centers,  thus  removing  control 
and  restraint  and  leading  to  freer  mental  action.  The  experience 
of  explorers  bears  out  the  general  view  that  under  conditions  of 
stress  and  excitement  alcohol  is  of  little  value  as  a  stimulant.  What- 
ever action  it  has  in  this  direction  is  temporary.     After  the  day's 

*  See  Welch,  "The  Pathological  Effects  of  Alcohol,"  in  "Physiological 
Aspects  of  the  Liquor  Problem,"  vol.  ii,  1903. 

t  For  literature  and  discussion  see  Abel,  "  The  Pharmacological  Action  of 
Alcohol,"  in  "Physiological  Aspects  of  the  Liquor  Problem,"  vol.  ii,  1903. 


INORGANIC    SALTS,    STIMULANTS,    AND    CONDIMENTS.  807 

work  is  done,  however,  or  in  conditions  of  mental  depression  the 
use  of  alcohol  may  remove  the  sense  of  fatigue  and  exhaustion 
and  lead  to  a  sense  of  well-being.  The  most  important  work  of 
recent  years  has  been  directed  toward  determining  the  nutritive 
value  of  alcohol.  Does  it  function  under  any  circumstances  as  a 
food?  Much  depends  in  such  a  discussion  upon  the  meaning  of 
the  terms  used.  In  the  present  brief  statement  it  is  to  be  under- 
stood that  by  food  is  meant  material  which  can  be  oxidized  in 
the  body  with  the  production  of  usable  energy,  but  without  in- 
jurious effect  upon  the  tissues,  and  moreover  a  material  whose 
consumption  protects  some  of  the  other  foodstuffs — fats,  carbo- 
hydrates, and  proteid — from  destruction.  In  the  first  place,  there 
is  no  doubt  that  alcohol  is  oxidized  in  the  body.  Various  observers 
estimate  that  as  much  as  90  to  98  per  cent,  of  the  alcohol  absorbed 
is  destroyed.*  Since  1  gm.  of  alcohol  when  burnt  yields  7  Calories 
of  heat,  it  is  evident  that  its  oxidation  in  the  body  must  yield  a 
large  supply  of  heat  energy.  The  question  arises  whether  this 
oxidation  of  the  alcohol  occurs  in  addition  to  the  normal  metab- 
olism of  the  proteid  and  non-proteid  foodstuffs,  or  whether  it 
protects  and  takes  the  place  of  the  latter.  With  regard  to  the 
non-proteids  a  number  of  observers  have  attempted  to  determine 
the  point  by  ascertaining  the  total  carbon  excretion  during  an 
alcohol  period.  If  the  usual  amount  of  material  is  burnt  and  the 
alcohol  in  addition  it  is  evident  that  the  carbon  excretion  should  be 
markedly  increased.  Most  observers,  however,  find  that  it  re- 
mains practically  the  same.  Such  results  as  the  following  have 
been  obtained: 

Atwater  and  Beiiedirt  /  -"^'cohol-free  days.  .    251.9  gms.  carbon. 
Atwater  and  iieneclict  |  ^i^jo^ol  days 238.5     " 

—  13.4     " 

o-or-ro  /  Alcohol-free  davs.  .  212.58  gms.  carbon. 

^J®^^® t  Alcohol  days..:...  220^     " 

+  8.26     " 
p.,        , .                             /  Alcohol-free  days.  .214.83  gms.  carbon. 
'"^^P^^^ \  Alcohol  days 220.87     " 

+  6.04     " 

These  results  indicate  that  the  alcohol  is  used  by  the  body  in  place 
of  the  other  carbon-containing  foodstuffs.  Geppert  and  Zuntz  have 
also  found  that  on  alcohol  days  there  is  no  material  increase  in 
the  carbon  dioxid  eliminated  or  the  oxygen  absorbed. 

Theoretically  if  the  alcohol  takes  the  place  of  the  other  material  the 
amount  of  carbon  dioxid  excreted  should  be  diminished.  One  gram  of 
alcohol  when  oxidized  furnishes  as  much  heat  as  1.7  gms.  of  sugar  or  0.75  gm. 
of  fat.  But  1  gm.  of  alcohol  when  burnt  yields  only  1.91  gms.  of  CO2,  while 
1.7  gms.  of  sugar  yield  2.77  gms.  COj,  and  0.75  gm.  of  fat,  2.13  gms.  of  COj. 

*  See  Atwater  and  Benedict,  Bulletin  69,  United  States  Department  of 
Agriculture,   1899. 


808  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

If  fat  were  replaced  by  the  alcohol  the  amount  of  CO2  should  be  reduced 
about  10  per  cent.,  while  if  the  sugar  were  replaced  the  reduction  should 
amount  to  31  per  cent.  That  such  a  reduction  is  not  actually  observed  is 
explained  by  the  fact  that  the  alcohol  leads  to  more  muscular  activity  and 
a  greater  loss  of  heat  from  the  congested  skin,  thus  indirectly  augmenting 
the  oxidations  of  the  body. 

To  determine  whether  the  combustion  of  the  alcohol  protects  the 
proteid  material  from  metabolism  to  the  same  extent  as  is  done  by 
carbohydrates  and  fats  experiments  have  been  made  in  which  the 
individual  was  brought  into  nitrogen  equilibrium  on  a  mixed  diet. 
Then  for  a  given  period  a  portion  of  the  carbohydrate  was  omitted 
and  alcohol  in  isodynamic  amounts  was  substituted.  The  result 
was  an  increase  in  the  nitrogen  excretion,  showing  that  the  alcohol 
did  not  protect  fully  the  proteid  tissue.  In  a  third  period  the 
first  diet  was  resumed,  and  after  nitrogen  equilibrium  had  again 
been  established  the  same  proportion  of  carbohydrate  was  omitted 
from  the  diet,  but  this  time  alcohol  was  not  substituted.  If  the 
diet  was  poor  in  proteid  it  was  found  that  less  proteid  was  lost  from 
the  body  when  the  alcohol  was  omitted  than  when  it  was  used. 
Hence  alcohol  not  only  did  not  take  the  place  of  the  carbohydrate 
in  protecting  the  proteid  but  actually  caused  an  increased  proteid 
consumption.*  Other  observers  (Neumann,  Rosemannt)  have 
found  that,  although  the  effect  described  may  occur  in  the  first 
few  days,  yet  if  the  alcohol  diet  is  maintained  the  injurious  effect 
exercised  by  it  disappears,  the  body  ceases  to  lose  its  proteid 
tissue,  and  may  even  lay  on  proteid.  These  results,  taken  with 
those  given  above,  indicate,  therefore,  that  the  alcohol  may  actually 
take  the  place  physiologically  of  fat  or  carbohydrates  as  a  source 
of  energy  and  as  a  protector  of  proteid  metabolism.  J  Under  these 
circumstances,  therefore,  it  acts  as  a  true  foodstuff.  •  It  is  perhaps 
scarcely  necessary  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  this  scientific  con- 
clusion does  not  mean  that  alcohol  can  be  regarded  as  a  prac- 
tical food.  Its  expensiveness,  its  dangers  when  the  dose  is  too 
large,  etc.,  prevent  us  from  regarding  it  in  this  light.  As  Rosemann 
says,  however,  it  is  possible  that  on  account  of  its  ready  absorption 
and  palatableness  it  may  form  a  useful  substitute  for  the  solid, 
non-nitrogenous  foodstuffs  in  sickness.  This  suggestion  seems 
to  be  supported  b}^  many  reports  of  cases  in  which  alcohol  has  served 
as  the  sole  or  main  nutriment  during  the  critical  periods  of  fevers 
and  in  other  conditions,  but  it  heeds  to  be  tested  more  carefully  by 
direct  experiments  before  it  can  be  accepted  generally  for  prac- 
tical purposes. 

*  See  Miura,  "  Zeitschrift  fiir  klin.  Medicin, "  20,  1892. 

t  See  Rosemann,  "Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  86,  307,  1901, 
and  100,  348,  1903,  for  discussion  and  literature. 

I  See  also  At  water  and  Benedict,  "  Memoirs  of  National  Academy  of 
Sciences,"  1902;  and  Atwater,  "The  Nutritive  Value  of  Alcohol,"  in  "Physi- 
ological Aspects  of  the  Liquor  Problem,"  vol.  ii,  1903. 


CHAPTER  L. 

EFFECT  OF  MUSCULAR  WORK  AND  TEMPERATURE  ON 

BODY  METABOLISM— HEAT  ENERGY  OF 

FOODS— DIETETICS. 

The  Effect  of  Muscular  "Work. — It  is  a  matter  of  common 
knowledge  that  muscular  exercise  increases  the  food  consumed, 
and  scientific  experiments  have  shown  that  it  greatly  augments 
the  consumption  of  material  in  the  body.  Physiologists  have 
attempted  to  determine  which  of  our  energy-yielding  foodstuffs 
is  directly  affected  by  muscular  activity.  A  brief  statement  of 
the  development  of  our  knowledge  upon  this  point  will  make  clear 
our  present  theories.  According  to  Liebig,  our  foods  fulfill  two 
general  purposes  in  the  body :  they  are  burnt  to  supply  heat,  respira- 
tory foods — fats,  and  carbohydrates,  or  they  are  used  to  construct 
tissue,  plastic  foods — proteids.  It  seemed  to  follow,  from  this 
generalization,  that  muscular  tissue  in  activity  should  use  proteid 
material,  and  it  was  believed  at  that  time  that  the  metabolism  of 
proteid  furnishes  the  source  of  muscular  energy.  That  it  is  not 
the  sole  source  was  demonstrated  by  the  interesting  experiments 
of  "Pick  and  Wislicenus.  These  physiologists  ascended  the  Paul- 
horn  to  a  height  of  1956  meters.  Knowing  the  weight  of  his  body, 
each  could  estimate  how  much  work  was  done  in  ascending  such 
a  height.  Pick's  weight,  for  example,  was  66  kilograms;  therefore 
in  climbing  the  mountain  he  performed  66X1956=129,096  kilo- 
grammeters  of  work.  In  addition,  the  work  of  the  heart  and  the 
respiratory  muscles,  which  could  not  be  determined  accurately, 
was  estimated  at  30,000  kilogrammeters.  There  was,  moreover, 
a  certain  amount  of  muscular  work  performed  in  the  move- 
ments of  the  arms  and  in  walking  upon  level  ground  that  was 
omitted  entirely  from  their  calculations.  Por  seventeen  hours 
before  the  ascent,  during  the  climb  of  eight  hours,  and  for  six 
hours  afterward  their  food  was  entirely  non-nitrogenous,  so  that 
the  urea  eliminated  came  entirely  from  the  proteid  of  the  body. 
Nevertheless,  when  the  urine  was  collected  and  the  urea  estimated 
it  was  found  that  the  energy  contained  in  the  proteid  destroyed, 
reckoned  as  heat  energy,  was  entirely  insufficient  to  account  for 
the  work  done.  Although  later  estimates  would  modify  somewhat 
the  actual  figures  of  their  calculation,  the  margin  was  so  great  that 

809 


810  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION. 

the  experiment  has  been  accepted  as  showing  conclusively  that  the 
total  energy  of  muscular  work  does  not  come  necessarily  from  the 
oxidation  of  proteid.  Later  experiments  made  by  Voit  upon  a 
dog  working  in  a  tread-wheel  and  upon  a  man  performing  work 
while  in  the  respiratory  chamber  gave  the  surprising  result  that 
not  only  may  the  energy  of  muscular  work  be  far  greater  than  the 
potential  energy  of  the  proteid  simultaneously  oxidized,  but  that 
the  performance  of  muscular  work  within  certain  hmits  does  not 
affect  at  all  the  amount  of  proteid  metabolized  in  the  body,  since 
the  output  of  urea  is  the  same  on  working  days  as  during  days  of 
rest.  Careful  experiments  by  an  English  physiologist,  Parkes,  made 
upon  soldiers  while  resting  and  after  performing  long  marches  showed 
also  that  there  is  no  distinct  increase  in  the  secretion  of  urea  after 
muscular  exercise.  It  followed  from  these  latter  experiments 
that  Liebig's  theory  as  to  the  source  of  the  energy  of  muscular 
work  is  incorrect,  and  that  the  increase  in  the  oxidations  in  the 
body  that  undoubtedly  occurs  during  muscular  activity  must  affect 
only  the  non-proteid  material, — that  is,  the  fats  and  carbohydrates. 
Subsequently  the  question  was  reopened  by  experiments  made 
under  Pfliiger  by  Argutinsky.*  In  these  experiments  the  total 
nitrogen  excreted  was  determined  with  especial  care  in  the  sweat 
as  well  as  in  the  urine  and  the  feces.  The  muscular  work  done 
consisted  in  long  walks  and  mountain  climbs.  Argutinsky  found 
that  work  caused  a  marked  increase  in  the  elimination  of  nitrogen, 
the  increase  extending  over  a  period  of  three  days,  and  he  estimated 
that  the  additional  proteid  metabolized  in  consequence  of  the  work 
was  sufficient  to  account  for  most  of  the  energy  expended  in  per- 
forming the  walks  and  cHmbs.  A  number  of  objections  have  been 
made  to  Argutinsky 's  work.  It  has  been  asserted  that  during  his 
experiment  he  kept  himself  upon  a  diet  deficient  in  non-proteid 
material,  and  that  if  the  supply  of  this  material  had  been  sufficient 
there  would  not  have  been  any  increase  in  proteid  metabolism. 
These  experiments  were  repeated  in  various  forms  by  many  ob- 
servers (Zuntz,  Speck,  et  al.),  and  the  general  result  has  been 
the  abandonment  of  both  the  former  views, — the  Liebig  theory 
that  the  energy  comes  only  from  the  consumption  of  proteid,  and 
the  Voit  theory,  that  it  comes  only  from  the  oxidation  of  non-pro- 
teid material.  It  has  been  found  that  in  muscular  work  carried  to 
the  ordinary  extent  proteid  material,  in  excess  of  that  destroyed  in 
conditions  of  rest,  may  or  may  not  be  used  according  to  the  amount 
of  fats  and  carbohydrates  in  the  diet.  If  these  latter  elements  are 
in  sufficient  quantity  they  furnish  the  energy  required,  and  proteid 
metabolism  is  not  increased  by  work.     If,  however,  the  non-pro- 

*  Argutinsky,  "  Pfliiger's  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  46,  552, 
1890. 


EFFECT   OF    MUSCULAR    WORK    AND   TEMPERATURE.  811 

teids  are  not  sufficient  in  quantity  some  of  the  energy  is  obtained 
at  the  expense  of  the  proteid  of  the  body,  and  there  is  an  in- 
crease in  the  nitrogen  excretion.  We  may  believe,  in  fact,  that  the 
energy  necessary  for  muscular  work  may  be  obtained  from  any  of 
the  heat-yielding  foodstuff, — carbohydrates,  fat,  or  proteids.  It 
seems  probable  that  the  sugar  (glycogen)  of  the  muscle  is,  so  to 
speak,  the  easiest  source ;  but,  when  the  carbohydrates  are  deficient 
or  absent  altogether  in  the  diet,  muscular  exercise  is  accompanied 
by  an  increase  in  the  consumption  of  proteids  or  fats  or  both.  The 
Voit  theory  is  correct  to  the  extent  that  on  an  abundant  non-proteid 
diet  much  muscular  work  may  be  done  without  any  increase  in  the 
consumption  of  proteid  tissue.  The  muscle  is  a  proteid  machine 
for  the  accomplishment  of  work,  and  the  fuel  supplied  may  be  pro- 
teid or  non-proteid,  but  in  the  accomplishment  of  moderate  work 
there  is  apparently  no  greater  wear  and  tear  of  the  machinery,  no 
greater  tissue  waste,  than  under  resting  conditions.  If,  however, 
the  muscular  work  is  excessive,  the  tissue  waste  may  be  increased. 
Argutinsky  found  an  increased  nitrogen  elimination  lasting  two  or 
three  days  after  the  cessation  of  the  work.  It  is  probable  that  this 
result  indicates  a  greater  waste  of  the  proteid  apparatus  itself,  and 
this  idea  is  borne  out  by  the  fact  that  under  similar  conditions 
other  observers  have  detected  an  increase  in  the  creatinin  excre- 
tion, the  nitrogenous  waste  that  is  peculiar  to  the  muscle.  The 
effect  of  muscular  work  on  the  carbon  excretion,  carbon  dioxid,  is, 
of  course,  marked  and  invariable.  Some  extra  material  must  be 
oxidized  to  furnish  the  energy,  and  since  this  material  is  usually  or 
exclusively  sugar,  or  sugar  and  fat,  or  the  non-nitrogenous  portion 
of  the  proteid  of  the  diet,  the  effect,  so  far  as  the  excretions  are  con- 
cerned, will  be  most  manifest  in  the  amount  of  carbon  dioxid 
given  off.  Pettenkofer  and  Voit  found  that  the  carbon  dioxid 
eliminated  by  a  man  during  a  day  of  work  was  nearly  double  that 
excreted  during  a  day  of  rest.  Along  with  this  rise  in  the  carbon 
dioxid  excretion  there  is  a  corresponding  increase  in  the  absorption 
of  oxygen. 

Metabolism  during  Sleep. — It  has  been  shown  that  during 
sleep  there  is  no  marked  diminution  of  the  nitrogen  excreted,  and 
therefore  no  distinct  decrease  in  the  proteid  metabolism;  on  the 
contrary,  the  CO  2  eliminated  and  the  oxygen  absorbed  are  unques- 
tionably diminished.  This  latter  fact  finds  its  simplest  explana- 
tion in  the  supposition  that  the  muscles  are  less  active  during  sleep. 
The  muscles  do  less  work  in  the  way  of  contractions,  and,  in  addition, 
probably  suffer  a  diminution  in  tonicity  which  also  affects  their 
total  metabolism. 

Effect  of  Variations  in  Temperature. — In  warm-blooded 
animals  variations  of  outside  temperature  within  ordinary  limits 


812  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

do  not  affect  the  body  temperature.  An  account  of  the  means  by 
which  this  regulation  is  effected  will  be  found  in  the  chapter  upon 
animal  heat.  So  long  as  the  temperature  of  the  body  remains  con- 
stant, it  has  been  found  that  a  fall  of  outside  temperature  may 
increase  the  oxidation  of  non-proteid  material  in  the  body,  the  in- 
crease being  in  a  general  way  proportional  to  the  fall  in  tempera- 
ture. That  the  increased  oxidation  affects  the  non-proteid  con- 
stituents is  shown  by  the  fact  that  the  urea  remains  unchanged  in 
quantity,  other  conditions  being  the  same,  while  the  oxygen  con- 
sumption and  the  CO,  elimination  are  increased.  This  effect  of 
temperature  upon  the  body  metabolism  is  due  mainly  to  a  reflex 
stimulation  of  the  motor  nerves  to  the  muscles.  The  temperature 
nerves  of  the  skin  are  affected  by  a  fall  in  outside  temperature, 
and  bring  about  reflexly  an  increased  innervation  of  the 
muscles  of  the  body.  Indeed,  it  is  stated*  that  unless  the 
lowering  of  the  temperature  is  sufficient  to  cause  shivering  or  mus- 
cular tension  no  increase  in  the  CO 2  excretion  results.  This  fact 
suffices  to  explain,  therefore,  the  physiological  value  of  shivering 
and  muscular  restlessness  when  the  outside  temperature  is  low. 
The  fact  that  variations  in  outside  temperature  affect  only  the 
consumption  of  non-proteid  material  falls  in,  therefore,  with  the 
conception  of  the  nature  of  the  metabolism  of  muscle  in  activity, 
given  above.  When  the  means  of  regulating  the  bod}^  temperature 
break  down  from  too  long  an  exposure  to  excessively  low  or  ex- 
cessively high  temperatures,  the  total  body  metabolism,  proteid 
as  well  as  non-proteid,  increases  with  a  rise  in  body  temperature 
and  decreases  with  a  fall  in  temperature.  In  fevers  arising  from 
pathological  causes  it  has  been  shown  that  there  is  an  in- 
creased production  of  urea  as  well  as  of  CO  3. 

Effect  of  Starvation. — A  starving  animal  must  live  upon  the 
material  present  in  its  body.  This  material  consists  of  the  fat 
stored  up,  the  circulating  and  tissue  proteid,  and  the  glycogen. 
The  latter,  which  is  present  in  comparatively  small  quantities,  is 
quickly  used,  disappearing  more  or  less  rapidly  according  to  the 
extent  of  muscular  movements  made.  Thereafter  the  animal  lives 
on  its  own  proteid  and  fat,  and  if  the  starvation  is  continued  to  a 
fatal  termination  the  body  becomes  correspondingly  emaciated. 
Examination  of  the  several  tissues  in  animals  starved  to  death  has 
brought  out  some  interesting  facts.  Voit  took  two  cats  of  nearly 
equal  weight,  fed  them  equally  for  ten  days,  and  then  killed  one  to 
serve  as  a  standard  for  comparison  and  starved  the  other  for  thirteen 
days;  the  latter  animal  lost  1017  gms.  in  weight,  and  the  loss  was 
divided  as  follows  among  the  different  organs: 

*  Johannson,  "  Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologie,"  7,  123,  1897. 


EFFECT   OF    MUSCULAR    WORK    AND   TEMPERATURE.  813 

Loss  TO 

Supposed  Weight       Actual  Loss        Each  100  Gms. 
OF  Organs  Before         of  Organs        of  Fresh  Organ 
Starvation.  in  Gms.        (Percentage  Loss). 

Bone 393.4  54.7  13.9 

Muscle 1408.4  429.4  30.5 

Liver   91.9  49.4  53.7 

Kidney 25.1  6.5  25.9 

Spleen   8.7  5.8  66.7 

Pancreas 6.5  1.1  17.0 

Testes 2.5  1.0  40.0 

Lungs 15.8  2.8  17.7 

Heart 11.5  0.3  2.6 

Intestines   118.0  20.9  18.0 

Brain  and  cord  ....  40.7  1.3  3.2 

Skin  and  hair 432.8  89.3  20.6 

Fat ^.  275.4  267.2  97.0 

Blood 138.5  37.3  27.0 

Remainder 136.0  50.0  36.8 

According  to  these  results,  the  greatest  absohite  loss  was  in  the 
muscles  (429  gms.),  while  the  greatest  percentage  loss  was  in  the  fat 
(97  per  cent.),  which  had  practically  disappeared  from  the  body. 
It  is  very  significant  that  the  central  nervous  system  and  the  heart, 
organs  which  we  may  suppose  were  in  continual  activity,  suffered 
practically  no  loss  of  weight:  they  had  lived  at  the  expense  of  the 
other  tissues.  We  must  suppose  that  in  a  starving  animal  the  fat 
and  the  proteid  materials,  particularly  in  the  voluntary  muscles, 
pass  into  solution  in  the  blood,  and  are  then  used  to  nourish  the 
tissues  generally  and  to  supply  the  heat  necessary  to  maintain  the 
body  temperature.  .  Examination  of  the  excreta  in  starving  ani- 
mals has  shown  that  a  greater  quantity  of  proteid  is  destroyed  dur- 
ing the  first  day  or  two  than  in  the  subsequent  days.  This  fact 
is  explained  on  the  supposition  that  the  body  is  at  first  richly  sup- 
plied with  "circulating  proteid"  derived  from  its  previous  food,  and 
that  after  this  is  metabolized  the  animal  lives  entirely,  so  far  as 
proteid  consumption  is  concerned,  upon  its  "tissue  proteid."  If 
the  animal  remains  quiet  during  starvation,  the  amount  of  nitrogen 
excreted  daily  soon  reaches  a  nearly  constant  minimum,  showing 
that  a  practically  constant  amount  of  proteid  (together  with  fat) 
is  consumed  daily  to  furnish  body  heat,  and  probably  to  repair 
tissue  waste  in  the  active  organs,  such  as  the  heart.  Shortly  before 
death  from  starvation  the  daily  amount  of  proteid  consumed  may 
increase,  as  shown  by  the  larger  amount  of  nitrogen  eliminated. 
This  fact  is  explained  by  assuming  that  the  bodj^fat  is  then  exhausted 
and  the  animal's  metabolism  is  confined  to  the  tissue  proteids  alone. 
The  general  fact  that  the  loss  of  proteid  is  greatest  during  the  first 
one  or  two  days  of  starvation  has  been  confirmed  recently  upon  men, 
in  a  number  of  interesting  experiments  made  upon  professional 
f asters.  For  the  numerous  details  as  to  loss  of  weight,  variations 
of  temperature,  etc.,  carefully  recorded  in  these  latter  experiments, 


814  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION. 

reference  must  be  made  to  original  sources.*  It  may  be  added,  in 
conclusion,  that  the  fatter  the  body  is  to  begin  with,  the  longer  will 
starvation  be  endured,  and  if  water  is  consumed  freely  the  evil 
effects  of  starvation,  as  well  as  the  disagreeable  sensations  of  hun- 
ger, are  very  much  reduced. 

The  Potential  Energy  of  Food. — The  food  material  during 
digestion  and  after  absorption  undergoes  numerous  chemical  changes 
in  the  body.  Some  of  these  changes  are  not  attended  by  the  libera- 
tion of  heat  to  any  marked  extent.  Such  is  the  case,  for  instance, 
with  the  hydrolytic  cleavages  of  the  molecule  which  have  been 
described  especially  in  connection  with  the  digestive  processes. 
Similar  hydrolytic  cleavages  occur  doubtless  within  the  tissues, 
and  other  changes  connected  with  muscular,  nervous,  and  glandular 
activity,  and  the  building  up  and  breaking  down  of  the  living  sub- 
stance, take  place  constantly  as  a  part  of  general  nutritional  metab- 
olism. On  the  other  hand,  many  of  the  chemical  processes  occur- 
ring in  the  body  are  especially  valuable  on  account  of  the  heat 
liberated.  These  reactions,  for  the  most  part,  at  least,  are  oxida- 
tions; they  are  effected  under  the  influence  of  oxidizing  enzymes  or 
by  some  other  means  of  activating  the  oxj^gen.  The  various  stages 
in  the  process  are  not  explained,  but  we  know  that  oxygen  is  neces- 
sary and  that  the  carbon  and  the  hydrogen  contained  in  the  sub- 
stances acted  upon  appear  eventually  in  the  form  of  oxidation  prod- 
ucts— namely,  carbon  dioxid  and  water — Liebig  designated  the 
fats  and  carbohydrates  as  respiratory  foods  on  the  hypothesis 
that  their  fate  in  the  body  is  to  be  oxidized  and  furnish  heat.  While 
this  view  is,  in  the  main,  correct,  it  is  evident  now  that  a  portion  at 
least  of  the  proteid  molecule,  after  the  splitting  off  of  the  nitrogen, 
may  also  undergo  oxidation  and  furnish  heat.  In  Liebig's  sense, 
therefore,  the  proteids  play  the  part  of  respiratory  or  heat-producing 
foods  as  well  as  acting  as  tissue  formers.  On  the  other  hand,  fats 
and  carbohydrate  material  may  enter  to  some  extent,  together  with 
the  proteid,  into  the  synthesis  of  living  material,  and  thus  play  the 
role  of  a  plastic  or  tissue-forming  as  well  as  of  a  respiratory  food. 
We  can  not  divide  the  foodstuffs,  therefore,  strictly  into  two  such 
classes,  but  we  may  perhaps  consider  the  chemical  processes  in 
the  body  under  the  two  heads  mentioned  above, — namely,  the  oxi- 
dation or  heat-producing  changes  and  those  of  general  nutrition. 
The  latter  may  give  rise  to  heat  or  possibly  absorb  heat,  but  the 
great  supply  of  heat  energy  needed  by  the  body  to  maintain  its 
temperature  comes  from  the  oxidation  processes.  This  classifica- 
tion is  employed  by  some  physiologists,  and  is  helpful  in  empha- 
sizing the  fact  that  many  chemical  changes  occur  in  the  body  that 

*  "Virchow's  Archiv, "  vol.  131,  supplement,  1893;  and  Luciani,  "Das 
Hungern,"  1890.  See  also  Weber,  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie, "  vol.  i, 
part  I,  1902. 


HEAT  ENERGY  OF  FOODS.  815 

are  of  no  importance  from  the  standpoint  of  heat  production,  and 
that  the  changes  that  do  give  rise  mainly  to  heat  form,  as  it  were, 
a  special  group,  which  is  not  connected  with  the  building  up  or 
breaking  down  of  the  living  matter,  but  furnishes  the  energy  by 
means  of  which  these  latter  changes  and  perhaps  other  functions, 
such  as  muscular  work,  are  made  possible.  Roughly  speaking,  an 
adult  man  forms  in  his  body  and  gives  off  to  the  surrounding  air 
about  2,400,000  calories  of  heat  per  day.  By  calorie  or  small 
calorie  (c)  is  meant  the  quantity  of  heat  necessary  to  raise  1 
gm.  of  water  1°  in  temperature.  This  great  supply  of  heat  is  derived 
from  the  physiological  oxidation  of  the  carbohydrate,  fat,  and 
proteid  material  of  the  food.  These  same  materials  may  be  oxi- 
dized outside  the  body  by  burning  them  at  a  high  temperature  or 
under  a  high  pressure  of  oxygen,  and  the  heat  that  they  give  off  in 
the  process  can  be  measured  directly.  So  far  as  the  fats  and  carbo- 
hydrates are  concerned,  the  end-products  of  the  oxidation  in  the 
body  are  the  same  as  in  their  combustion  out  of  the  body,  and  we 
may  believe,  therefore,  that  the  amount  of  heat  produced  is  the 
same  in  both  cases.  Consequently  the  heat  value  of  a  gram  of  fat 
or  carbohydrate  burnt  outside  the  body  is  spoken  of  as  its  combus- 
tion equivalent,  and  it  measures  the  amount  of  potential  energy 
of  these  foodstuffs  with  regard  to  their  capacity  for  the  production 
of  heat  or  of  muscular  work  in  the  body.  With  regard  to  the  pro- 
teid, the  case  is  somewhat  different.  Its  end-products  in  the  body 
are  carbon  dioxid,  water,  and  urea  or  some  other  of  the  nitrogenous 
waste  products.  These  nitrogenous  wastes  are  capable  of  further 
oxidation  with  liberation  of  heat,  so  that,  as  far  as  they  are  elimi- 
nated, the  body  loses  a  possible  supply  of  heat  energy,  which  must 
be  subtracted  from  the  total  heat  energy  that  the  proteid  gives  upon 
oxidation  outside  the  body,  in  order  to  determine  the  available  heat 
energy  yielded  within  the  body.  The  figures  obtained  for  the  heat 
equivalents  of  the  foodstuffs  by  burning  them  outside  the  body  in 
some  form  of  calorimeter  are  as  follows :  1  gm.  of  fat  yields  an  aver- 
age of  9300  calories,  or  9.3  large  calories  (C),  1  gm.  of  carbohydrate 
yields  an  average  of  4100  calories  (4.1  C).  These  figures  may  be 
taken,  therefore,  to  express  the  quantity  of  heat  given  to  the  body 
by  the  oxidation  within  its  tissues  of  these  elements  of  our  food. 
A  gram  of  proteid  when  burnt  outside  the  body  yields  on  the  aver- 
age 5778  calories.  The  heat  value  of  the  urea  is  estimated  as  1 
gm.  =  2523  calories.  If  we  assume  that  all  the  nitrogen  of  the  pro- 
teid appears  as  urea  and  that  1  gm.  of  proteid  yields  ^  gm.  of  urea, 
then  the  available  heat  energy  of  a  gram  of  proteid  should  be  equal 
to  5778  — 841  (or  ^  of  2523)  =  4937 calories.  Later  workers,  however, 
have  given  reasons  for  believing  that  this  last  figure  is  too  high. 
All  of  the  nitrogen  is  not  eliminated  as  urea,  and,  moreover,  all  of 
the  nitrogenous  waste  is  not  excreted  in  the  urine;   a  distinct  pro- 


816 


NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 


portion  is  given  off  in  the  feces.  Rubner  has  calculated  the  avail- 
able heat  energy  of  proteids  by  direct  experiments  upon  animals. 
In  these  experiments  the  heat  value  of  the  proteid  fed  was  directly 
determined  by  burning  a  sample  in  a  calorimeter.  Then  after  feed- 
ing a  known  amount  of  the  proteid  the  urine  and  feces  were  col- 
lected and  their  heat  value  was  determined  in  the  same  way. 
The  difference  between  the  total  heat  value  of  the  proteid  fed  and 
the  heat  value  lost  in  its  excreted  products  in  the  feces  and  urine 
gave  the  actual  heat  energy  obtained  from  the  proteid  by  the  ani- 
mal body.  Results  obtained  by  this  method  give  an  average  value 
for  1  gm.  proteid  of  4100  calories  (4.1  C.),or,  since  proteid  contains 
an  average  of  16  per  cent,  of  nitrogen,  we  may  say  that  1  gm.  of  ni- 
trogen ingested  as  proteid  has  a  heat  value  of  4.1  X  6.25  =  25.6  C. 
The  figures  that  are  used,  therefore,  in  estimating  the  heat  value 
of  our  foodstuffs  are: 

1  gm.  proteid  =  4100  calories  (4.1  C). 

1  gm.  carbohydrate  =  4100  calories  (4.1  C). 
1  gm.  fat  =  9305  calories  (9.3  C). 

Making  use  of  these  values,  it  is  obvious  that  we  can  calculate  the 
total  heat  value  of  any  given  diet.  If  we  analyze  the  food  for  its 
composition  in  the  three  principal  foodstuffs  we  may  determine  how 
many  calories  will  be  furnished  to  the  body.  In  many  of  the  tables 
published  to  show  the  composition  of  the  different  foods  figures  are 
given  also  to  express  their  heat  value  or  potential  energy,  on  the 
belief  that,  for  the  most  part,  our  food  is  used  as  fuel  to  supply 
energy  to  the  body.  These  values  for  some  of  our  ordinary  foods 
are  as  follows :  * 


Proteid.  Fat. 

Beefsteak,  porterhouse 19.1  17.9 

Beefsteak,  round  (lean) 20.2  2.4 

Corned  beef  (canned) 26.3  18.7 

Veal,  leg  (lean) 19.4  3.7 

Veal  liver 19.0  5.3 

Mutton,  leg  (lean) 16.5  10.3 

Pork,  ham  (fresh,  lean) 24.8  14.2 

Pork  chops,  medium  fat 13.4  24.2 

Chicken  (fowl) 13.7  12.3 

Shad 9.4  4.8 

Shad  roe 20.9  3.8 

Eggs 11.7  10.7 

Milk 3.3  4.0 

Oatmeal 16.1  7.2 

Rice 8.0  0.3 

Wheat  flour  (entire  wheat) 13.8  1.9 

Green  peas 7.0  0.5 

Potatoes  (raw) 2.2  0.1 

Spinach 2.1  0.3 

Tomatoes 0.9  0.4 

Apples 0.4  0.5 

Bananas 1.3  0.6 


C.4.RBOHY- 
DRATE. 


2.6 

5.0 
67.5 
79.0 
71.9 
16.9 
18.4 
3.2 
3.9 
14.2 


Ash. 

0.8 
1.2 
4.0 
1.1 
1.3 
0.9 
1.3 
0.8 
0.7 
0.7 
1.5 
0.7 
0.7 
1.9 
0.4 
1.0 
1.0 
1.0 
2.1 
0.5 
0.3 
0.8 


Heat  Value 
IN  Calories 
Per  Pound. 

1110 

475 
1280 

520 

575 

740 
1060 
1270 

775 

380 

600 

680 

325 
1860 
1630 
1675 

465 

385 

110 

105 

290 

460 


22.0 

*  Selected  from    Atwater    and    Bryant,    Bulletin  28    (revised  edition), 
United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  1899. 


DIETETICS.  817 

It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  the  entire  nutritional  value 
of  a  food  is  not  expressed  in  its  heat  value — some  of  our  food  mate- 
rial— the  green  foods  and  fruits,  for  example — are  useful  and  in  a 
measure  essential  because  of  their  salts  and  organic  acids.  In  a 
general  way,  however,  the  heat  energy  of  a  food  expresses  its  value 
as  a  means  for  maintaining  the  body  in  a  normal  condition. 

Dietetics. — The  subject  of  the  proper  nourishment  of  individ- 
uals or  collection  of  individuals  in  health  and  in  sickness  is  treated 
usually  in  works  upon  hygiene  or  dietetics.  The  practical  details 
of  the  preparation  and  composition  of  diets  must  be  obtained  from 
such  sources.*  The  general  principles  upon  which  practical  diet- 
ing depends  have  been  obtained,  however,  from  experimental  work 
upon  the  nutrition  of  man  and  the  lower  animals,  some  account  of 
which  has  been  given  in  the  foregoing  pages.  In  a  healthy  adult  the 
main  objects  of  a  diet  are  to  furnish  sufficient  nitrogenous  and  non- 
nitrogenous  foodstuffs,  salts,  and  water  to  maintain  the  body  in  equi- 
librium of  material  and  of  energy — that  is,  the  diet  must  furnish  the 
material  for  the  regeneration  of  tissue,  and  the  material  for  the  heat 
produced  and  the  muscular  work  done.  Nutritional  experiments 
prove  that  this  object  may  be  accomplished  by  proteid  food  alone 
together  with  salts  and  water.  It  is  doubtful,  however,  whether, 
in  the  case  of  man,  such  a  diet  could  be  continued  for  long  periods 
without  causing  some  nutritional  disturbance,  directly  or  indi- 
rectly. It  will  be  remembered  that  a  pure  meat  diet  is  not  entirely 
proteid,  since  all  flesh  contains  some  fats  and  carbohydrates  (glyco- 
gen). The  functions  of  a  diet  are  accomplished  more  easily  and 
more  economically  when  it  is  composed  of  proteids  and  fats,  or  pro- 
teids  and  carbohydrates,  or,  as  is  almost  universally  the  case,  of 
proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates.  The  experience  of  mankind 
shows  that  such  a  mixed  diet  is  most  beneficial  to  the  body  and 
most  satisfying  to  that  valuable  regulating  mechanism  of  nutrition, 
the  appetite.  The  proportions  in  which  the  proteids,  fats,  and 
carbohydrates  are  mixed  in  a  diet  vary  greatly  among  different 
nations  and  individuals.  So  far  as  the  fats  and  carbohydrates  are 
concerned,  their  use  is  mainly  that  of  fuel  to  supply  energy,  and 
from  this  standpoint  we  ought  to  be  able  to  exchange  them  in  the 
diet  in  the  ratio  of  their  heat  values. 

This  ratio,  or  as  it  is  frequently  called,  the  isodynamic  equiva- 
lent, is  as  9.3  to  4.1  or  2.3  to  1,  and  within  the  limits  permitted  by 
the  appetite  we  should  be  able  to  substitute  1  part  of  fat  for  2.3 
parts  of  sugar  or  starch.  Experiments  upon  animals  as  well  as 
the  experience  of  mankind  show  that  this  substitution  can  be  made. 

*  For  practical  directions  see  Gautier,  "  L'alimentatioii  et  les  regimes," 
1904;  Blyth,  "Foods  :  their  Composition  and  Analysis." 
52 


818  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

This  fact  is  illustrated  in  a  general  way  by  the  different  diets  recom- 
mended by  various  physiologists,  as  follows: 

AVERAGE  DIETS  AND  THEIR  HEAT  VALUES. 

MOLESCHOTT.  RaNKB.  VoIT. 


Calories. 

Calories. 

Calories. 

Proteid 130  gms  . 

Fats 40     •'     . 

Carbohydrates .  550     " 

.  .    5-'?3,000 
.  .     372,000 
..2,275,000 

100  gms,    . 
100      " 
240     "       . 

.  .     410,000         118  gms.    . 
.  .    930,000          56     "       . 
.  .    984,000        500    ,"       . 

. .    483,000 
. .    520,800 
..2,050,000 

2,980,000 

2,324,000 

3,053,800 

FORSTER. 

Atwater. 

Calories. 

Calories. 

Proteid 131  gms.  . 

Fats 68     "      . 

Carbohydrates .  494     " 

. .    567,100 
.  .     632,400 
..1,825,400 

125  gms.    .  . .    512,500 
125     "       ...1,172,500 
400     "       ...1,640,000 

2,024,900 

3,325,000 

The  average  heat  value  of  these  diets  is  equal  to  2,741,540  calo- 
ries. In  round  numbers  it  is  usually  estimated  that  the  diet  should 
furnish  daily  2,400,000  calories  for  an  individual  weighing  60  kgms., 
or  about  40,000  calories  per  kgm.  of  body -weight.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  in  all  cases  the  greatest  portion  of  this  energy  is  obtained  from 
the  carbohydrate  food,  which,  on  account  of  its  economy,  its  abun- 
dance, and  its  ease  of  digestion  and  oxidation  in  the  body,  consti- 
tutes the  bulk  of  our  diet.  In  cases  of  excessive  muscular  work 
the  food  eaten  may  supply  more  than  twice  the  average  heat  value 
given  above.  Thus,  Atwater  and  Sherman  *  estimate  that  in  a  six- 
day  bicycle  race  by  professionals  the  heat  value  of  the  food  for  the 
different  participants  varied  from  4,770,000  to  6,095,000  calories. 
Chittenden,  in  the  work  previously  referred  to,t  has  raised  the 
question  whether  the  heat  value  of  the  diet  ordinarily  employed 
is  unnecessarily  high.  In  his  own  case  he  found  that  the  body 
could  be  well  nourished  on  a  diet  containing  a  total  heat  value  of 
only  1,600,000  calories  or  28,000  calories  per  kgm.  of  body -weight 
instead  of  40,000  calories.  The  diet  in  this  case,  it  will  be  remem- 
bered, contained  only  36  to  40  gms.  of  proteid  in  place  of  the  100  to 
130  gms.  recommended  in  the  diets  mentioned  above.  The  ques- 
tion thus  raised  is  one  that  must  be  decided  by  actual  experience. 
Mankind  is  guided  and  has  been  guided  in  all  times  by  the  control 
of  the  appetite,  and  if  scientific  experiments  indicate  that  this 
regulatory  apparatus  leads  us  to  ingest  more  food  than  is  actually 
required  for  the  machinery  of  the  body  it  remains  for  observation 
and  experiment  to  determine  whether  this  excess  is  beneficial  or 
useless  or  perhaps  even  harmful. 

Munk  gives  an  interesting  table  showing  how  much  of  certain 

*  Bulletin  98,  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  1901. 
t  Chittenden,  "  Physiological  Economy  in  Nutrition, "  1905. 


DIETETICS.  819 

familiar  articles  of  food  would  be  necessary,  if  taken  alone,  to  supply 
the  requisite  daily  amount  of  proteid  or  non-proteid  food;  his  esti- 
mates are  based  upon  the  percentage  composition  of  the  foods  and 
upon  experimental  data  showing  the  extent  of  absorption  of  the 
foodstuffs  in  each  food.  In  this  table  he  supposes  that  the  daily 
diet  should  contain  110  gms.  of  proteid  =  17.5  gms.  of  N,  and  non- 
proteids  sufficient  to  contain  270  gms.  of  C: 

For  110  Gms.  Proteid        „^^  __„  ^„^  ^ 
(17.5  Gms.  N).  ^^^  270  Gms.  C. 

Milk 2900  gms.  3800  gms. 

Meat  (lean) 540     "  2000     " 

Hen's  eggs 18  eggs.                       37  eggs. 

"Wheat  flour 800  gms.  670  gms. 

Wheat  bread 1650     "  1000     " 

Rye  bread 1900     "  1100     " 

Rice 1870     "  750     " 

Corn 990     "  660     " 

Peas 520     "  750     " 

Potatoes 4500     "  2550     " 

As  Munk  points  out,  this  table  shows  that  any  single  food,  if  taken 
in  quantities  sufficient  to  supply  the  nitrogen,  would  give  too  much 
or  too  little  carbon  and  the  reverse;  those  animal  foods  which,  in 
certain  amounts,  supply  the  nitrogen  needed  furnish  only  from  one- 
fourth  to  two-thirds  of  the  necessary  amount  of  carbon.  To  live 
for  a  stated  period  upon  a  single  article  of  food — a  diet  sometimes 
recommended  to  reduce  obesity — means,  then,  an  insufficient  quan- 
tity of  either  nitrogen  or  carbon  and  a  consequent  loss  of  body 
weight.  Such  a  method  of  dieting  amounts  practically  to  a  partial 
starvation.  In  practical  dieting  we  are  accustomed  to  get  our 
supply  of  proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates  from  both  vegetable 
and  animal  foods.  To  illustrate  this  fact  by  an  actual  case,  in 
which  the  food  was  carefully  analyzed,  an  experimenter  weighing 
67  kgms.  records  that  he  kept  himself  in  nitrogen  equilibrium  upon 
a  diet  in  which  the  proteid  was  distributed  as  follows: 


300     gms.  meat 

= 

63.08 

gms. 

proteid 

= 

9.78    gms.  N 

666.3  c.c.  milk 

= 

18.74 

(( 

" 

= 

2.905     "      " 

100     gms.  rice 

z= 

7.74 

n 

" 

= 

1.2         "      " 

100        "     bread 

= 

11.32 

" 

u 

= 

1.755     "      " 

500     c.c.  wine 

1.17 
102.05 

11 

u 
u 

0.182  gm.     " 

15.868  gms.   " 

For  a  person  in  health  and  leading  an  active,  normal  life,  appetite 
and  experience  seem  to  be  safe  and  sufficient  guides  by  which  to 
control  the  diet;  but  in  conditions  of  disease,  in  regulating  the  diet 
of  children  and  of  collections  of  individuals,  scientific  dieting,  if  one 
may  use  the  phrase,  has  accomplished  much,  and  will  be  of  greater 
service  as  our  knowledge  of  the  physiology  of  nutrition  increases. 


CHAPTER  LI. 

THE  PRODUCTION  OF  HEAT  IN  THE  BODY— ITS  MEAS- 
UREMENT AND  REGULATION— BODY  TEMPERA- 
TURE—CALORIMETRY— PHYSIOLOGICAL 
OXIDATIONS. 

It  is  customary  to  date  our  modern  ideas  of  the  origin  of 
animal  heat  from  the  time  of  Lavoisier  (1774-77).  To  the  older 
physiologists  it  was  a  most  difficult  problem.  The  animal's  body 
produces  heat  continually  and  maintains  a  temperature  higher,  as 
a  rule,  than  that  of  the  surrounding  air.  Since  oxygen  and  the 
nature  of  ordinary  combustions  were  unknown,  they  naturally 
explained  this  heat  formation  by  reference  to  causes  which  the 
science  of  the  day  had  shown  to  be  capable  of  producing  warmth, 
such  as  friction  and  fermentation.  Haller  (1757),  for  instance, 
taught  that  the  body  heat  arises  mainly  from  the  friction  of  the 
circulating  blood  and  the  movements  of  the  heart  and  blood-vessels, 
and  this  view  found  currency  in  text-books  well  into  the  nine- 
teenth century.  Lavoisier  first  gave  to  the  physiologist  the  con- 
ception that  the  heat  produced  in  the  body  is  due  to  a  combustion  or 
oxidation,  and  that  therein  lies  the  significance  of  our  respiration 
of  oxygen.  He  believed  himself  that  this  oxidation  takes  place  in 
the  lungs, — that  is,  the  blood  brings  to  the  lungs  a  hydrocarbon- 
ous  material  which  is  attacked  by  the  oxygen  and  burnt  with 
the  formation  of  water  and  carbon  dioxid  and  the  liberation  of 
heat.  Later  experimenters  demonstrated  that  the  heat  production 
does  not  occur  in  the  lungs,  at  least  not  exclusively,  but  over  the 
whole  of  the  body.  After  a  long  and  interesting  controversy  it  was 
also  shown  satisfactorily  that  the  oxidations  of  the  body  do  not 
occur  in  the  blood,  but  in  the  tissues  themselves.  The  oxygen  is 
transported  to  the  cells  and  there  does  its  work  of  effecting  oxi- 
dations and  giving  rise  to  heat.  This  heat  is  equalized  more  or 
less  over  the  whole  body,  chiefly  by  the  circulation  of  the  blood, 
which  absorbs  heat  from  the  warmer  organs  and  distributes  it  to 
the  cooler  ones.  The  body  temperature  is  maintained  at  a  nearly 
constant  level  by  an  intricate  adjustment  of  physiological  reflexes 
which  together  constitute  the  heat-regulating  mechanism.  Such 
in  brief  is  the  general  theory  of  our  time  regarding  heat  production 
in  the  body.     Many  of  the  problems  that  interested  the  older  phys- 

820 


BODY   TEMPERATURE.  821 

iologists  have  been  solved  satisfactorily,  but  there  remain,  of  course, 
man}^  more  to  interest  this 'and  succeeding  generations.  Investi- 
gations in  this  field  at  present  are  directed  mainly  to  an  effort  to 
understand  the  details  of  the  heat-regulating  apparatus,  on  the  one 
hand,  and,  on  the  other,  to  comprehend  more  satisfactorily  the 
nature  of  the  process  of  oxidation.  This  latter  problem  is  one  of 
common  interest  at  present  in  chemistry  and  in  physiology. 

The  Body  Temperature. — We  divide  animals  into  the  two 
great  classes  of  warm  blooded  and  cold  blooded,  according  as  their 
temperature  is  or  is  not  above  that  of  the  surrounding  air.  In 
this  sense,  birds  and  mammals  are  warm  blooded  and  reptiles, 
amphibia,  and  fishes  are  cold  blooded.  The  names,  however,  are 
badly  chosen.  The  difference  of  deepest  significance  between  the 
mammals  and  birds,  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  fishes,  amphibia,  and 
reptiles,  on  the  other,  is  that  in  the  former  the  body  temperature 
is,  within  wide  limits,  independent  of  the  outside  temperature;  it 
remains  practically  constant  during  winter  and  summer,  whether 
the  surrounding  air  is  hotter  or  cooler  than  the  body.  They  are, 
therefore,  constant-temperature  animals  (homoiothermous).  The 
reptiles,  amphibia,  and  fishes,  on  the  contrary,  have  a  body  tem- 
perature that  changes  with  the  environment.  On  winter  days 
their  temperature  is  low,  approximately  that  of  the  surrounding 
air  or  water,  and  in  summer  their  body  temperature  rises  to  cor- 
respond with  that  of  the  outside.  Strictly  speaking,  they  are  cold 
blooded  only  in  cold  surroundings.  This  group  may  be  designated 
as  the  changeable-temperature  animals  (poikilothermous).  The 
warm-blooded  animals  maintain  a  constant  high  body  temperature 
because  their  oxidations  are  more  rapid  and  they  possess  a  heat- 
regulating  mechanism.  In  the  cold-blooded  animals  the  oxidations 
are  not  so  intense,  and  a  heat-regulating  mechanism  is  absent  or 
poorly  developed.  The  hibernating  animals  form  a  group  inter- 
mediate in  many  ways  between  these  two  classes.  They  possess  a 
heat-regulating  apparatus  that  maintains  a  constant  body  tem- 
perature under  most  conditions,  but  breaks  down  in  very  cold 
weather;  so  that  during  the  period  of  winter  sleep  their  tem- 
perature is  but  little  above  that  of  the.  surrounding  air.  In 
some  of  the  cold-blooded  animals  the  production  of  heat  is  more 
rapid  during  warm  weather  than  its  loss;  so  that  they  exhibit 
a  body  temperature  slightly  higher  than  the  surrounding  me- 
dium. A  hive  of  bees  in  activity  may  raise  the  temperature 
within  the  hive  through  a  number  of  degrees  and  snakes  and 
many  reptiles  show  a  temperature  of  2°  to  8°  C.  above  that  of 
the  air.  So  also  some  reptiles  possess  a  rudimentary  means  of 
protecting  their  bodies  from  too  great  a  rise  of  temperature, — 
for  instance,  by  accelerated  breathing  whereby  more  water  is  evap- 


822  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

orated  from  the  lungs  and  thus  more  heat  is  lost.*  The  distinc- 
tion between  the  two  great  groups  of  animals  is  not  entirely  abso- 
lute, but  it  is  sufficiently  marked  to  constitute  a  striking  physio- 
logical characteristic. 

The  temperature  of  the  human  body  is  measured  usually  by 
thermometers  placed  in  the  mouth,  in  the  axilla,  or  in  the  rectum. 
Measurements  made  in  this  way  show  that  in  general  the  tempera- 
ture in  the  interior  of  the  body  (rectal)  is  slightly  higher  than  on  the 
surface  of  the  skin.  The  average  temperature  in  the  rectum  is  37.2° 
C.  (98.96°  F.);  in  the  axilla,  36.9°  C.  (98.45°  F.);  in  the  mouth, 
36.87°  C.  (98.36°  F.).  We  may  speak  of  the  body  temperature, 
therefore,  in  the  places  in  which  it  can  be  conveniently  measured,  as 
varying  between  36.87°  C.  and  37.2°  C.  Some  of  the  internal  or- 
gans have  a  higher  temperature,  particularly  during  their  period  of 
greatest  activity.  The  temperature  of  man,  measured  in  the  places 
mentioned,  shows  also  a  distinct  variation  during  the  day,  a  diurnal 
rhythm.  This  daily  variation  has  been  measured  by  many  ob- 
servers, and  shows  individual  peculiarities  that  depend  largely  upon 
the  manner  of  living,  time  of  meals,  etc.  In  general  it  may  be  said 
that  the  lowest  temperature  is  shown  early  in  the  morning, — 6  to 
7  A.M.;  that  it  rises  slowly  during  the  day  to  reach  its  maximum 
in  the  evening,  5  to  7  p.m.  ;  and  falls  again  during  the  night.  The 
difference  between  early  morning  and  late  afternoon  or  evening 
may  amount  to  a  degree  or  more  centigrade,  and  this  fact  must  be 
borne  in  mind  by  physicians  when  observing  the  temperature  of 
patients.  Muscular  activity  and  food  appear  to  be  the  factors  that 
are  mainly  responsible  for  the  rise  in  temperature  during  the  day. 
Most  observers  state  that  when  the  habits  of  life  are  reversed  for 
some  time — that  is,  when  work  is  performed  and  meals  are  eaten 
during  the  night,  and  the  day  is  given  up  to  sleep  and  rest — the  daily 
variation  of  temperature  is  inverted  to  correspond, — that  is,  the 
highest  temperature  is  observed  in  the  early  morning  and  the  lowest 
in  the  late  afternoon.  Age  also  has  a  slight  influence.  Newly  born 
infants  and  young  children  have  a  somewhat  higher  temperature 
than  adults.  The  difference  may  amount  to  half  a  degree  or 
a  degree  centigrade, — 37.6°  C.  in  infants  as  compared  "VYith 
36.6°  C.  or  37. 1°  C.  in  the  adult.  It  is  known,  also,  that  the  heat- 
regulating  mechanism  in  infants  and  young  children  is  not  so 
efficient  as  in  adults,  and  that  therefore  febrile  disturbances  are  more 
easily  excited  in  the  former  than  in  the  latter.  In  the  matter  of  body 
temperature,  as  in  so  many  other  characteristics,  aged  people  show 
a  tendency  to  revert  to  infantile  conditions.  Their  temperature, 
according  to  most  observers,  is  slightly  higher  than  in  middle  life. 

*  See  Langlois,  "Journal  de  physiologie  et  de  pathol.  generale,"  1902, 
249. 


CALORIMETRY.  823 

Among  physiological  conditions  that  influence  the  body  tempera- 
ture, muscular  work  and  meals,  as  stated  above,  have  the  most  posi- 
tive effect.  Marked  muscular  activity  implies  a  great  increase  in 
the  production  of  heat  in  the  body  and  most  observers  find  that 
the  initial  result  at  least  is  a  small  rise  in  body  temperature, — a  fact 
which  indicates  that  the  heat  regulation  is  not  perfect;  the  excess 
of  heat  produced  is  not  dissipated  promptly.  In  the  period  of  rest 
following  upon  work,  on  the  contrary,  the  body  temperature  may 
fall,  owing  probably  to  the  fact  that  more  heat  is  lost  through  the 
flushed  skin  than  is  produced  within  the  body.  In  this  matter  of 
the  effect  of  muscular  work  individual  variations  are  to  be  expected, 
since  the  perfection  of  the  heat-regulating  mechanisms  may  vary 
somewhat  in  different  persons.  Meals  also  cause  a  slight  rise  in 
body  temperature,  which  reaches  its  maximum  about  an  hour  and 
a  half  after  the  ingestion  of  the  food.  The  explanation  in  this  case 
also  is  to  be  found  doubtless  in  a  greater  production  of  heat,  due  to 
the  increased  metabolism  in  the  secreting  glands,  the  liver,  and  the 
musculature  of  the  gastro-intestinal  canal.  The  excessive  production 
of  heat  is  not  compensated  completely  by  a  corresponding  increase  in 
the  heat  dissipated.*  It  is  sufficiently  obvious,  perhaps,  from  these 
facts  that  the  temperature  as  measured  by  the  thermometer  is  a 
balance  between  the  amount  of  heat  produced  and  the  amount  of 
heat  lost  or  dissipated.  The  thermometer  alone  gives  us  no  cer- 
tain indication  of  the  quanity  of  heat  produced  in  the  body.  A 
temperature  higher  than  normal,  fever  temperature,  may  be  due 
either  to  an  excessive  production  of  heat  or  to  a  deficient  dissipa- 
tion. To  understand  and  control  the  processes  by  which  the  body 
temperature  is  kept  normal  it  is  necessary  to  discover  a  means  for 
ascertaining  at  any  time  the  actual  quantities  of  heat  produced 
and  dissipated,  and  the  effect  upon  each  factor  of  different  normal 
and  pathological  conditions.  The  means  used  for  this  purpose  is 
the  method  of  calorimetry.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  describe 
the  principle  and  construction  of  calorimeters  and  the  methods  of 
calorimetry  before  attempting  to  explain  the  mechanism  of  heat 
regulation. 

Calorimetry. — A  calorimeter  is  an  instrument  for  measuring 
the  quantity  of  heat  given  off  from  a  body.  The  unit  employed  in 
these  determinations  is  the  calorie, — that  is,  the  amount  of  heat 
necessary  to  raise  1  gm.  of  water  1°  C.,or  more  accurately  the  amount 
of  heat  required  to  raise  1  gm.  of  water  from  15°  to  16°  C.  This 
unit  is  sometimes  designated  as  a  small  calorie  to  distinguish  it 
from  the  large  calorie  (C), — that  is,  the  quantity  of  heat  necessary 
to  raise  1  kgm.  of  water  1°  C.     The  large  calorie  is  equal  to  1000 

*  For  further  details  see  Richet,  "La  chaleur  animale, "  1889;  and  Pem- 
brey,  "Animal  Heat,"  Schaefer's  "Text-book  of  Physiology,"  vol.  i,  1898. 


824 


NUTRITION   AND   HEAT  REGULATION. 


small  calories.  In  physiology  calorimeters  have  been  used  for  two 
main  purposes:  to  determine  the  heat  equivalent  of  foods, — that  is, 
the  amount  of  heat  given  off  when  the  various  foodstuffs  are  burned, 
— and,  secondly,  to  determine  the  heat  produced  and  the  heat  dissi- 
pated by  living  animals  during  a  given  period.  For  the  first  pur- 
pose the  apparatus  that  is  most  frequently  employed  at  present  is 
the  bomb  calorimeter  devised  by  Berthelot.  The  bomb  consists 
of  a  strong  steel  cylinder  in  which  the  food  to  be  burned  is  placed 
and  which  is  filled  with  oxygen  under  high  pressure.  The  combus- 
tion of  the  foodstuff  is  initiated  by  means  of  a  spiral  of  platinum 


Fig.  266. — Reichert's  water  calorimeter. 


wire  heated  by  an  electrical  current.  The  bomb  is  immersed  in 
water  and  the  heat  given  off  raises  the  water  to  a  measured  extent 
of  temperature.  The  weight  of  water  being  known,  the  amount  of 
heat  is  easily  expressed  in  calories.  For  the  purpose  of  measuring 
the  heat  given  off  by  living  animals  two  principal  forms  of  calorim- 
eter are  used,  each  form  having  a  number  of  modifications.  These 
two  forms  are  the  water  calorimeter  and  the  air  calorimeter.  The 
water  calorimeter  was  the  form  used  in  the  first  experiments  on  rec- 
ord (Crawford,  1779).  In  principle  it  consists  of  a  double- walled 
box  with  a  known  weight  of  water  between  the  walls.     The  animal 


CALORIMETRY.  825 

is  placed  in  the  inner  box  and  the  heat  given  off  is  absorbed  by  the 
water.  Knowing  the  weight  of  the  water  and  how  much  its  tem- 
perature is  raised,  the  data  are  at  hand  for  determining  the  number  of 
calories  given  off  during  the  experiment.  A  recent  form  of  this 
variety  of  calorimeter  used  in  this  country  by  Reichert  is  shown  in 
Fig.  266.  It  consists  of  two  concentric  boxes  of  metal  with  a  space 
between  them  of  about  one  and  a  half  inches.  The  animal  is  placed 
in  the  inner  box  (A).  The  two  boxes  are  inclosed  in  a  large  wooden 
box,  the  space  between  the  metal  and  wooden  boxes  being  filled 
with  shavings  (SH).  The  object  of  this  outer  box  is  to  prevent 
radiation  of  heat  from  the  metal  boxes.  The  tubes  EN  and  EX, 
which  lead  into  the  interior  chamber  containing  the  animal,  are  for 
the  entrance  and  exit  of  the  ventilating  air.  A  thermometer  is 
placed  in  each  to  determine  the  heat  carried  off  by  the  air.  The 
thermometer,  CT,  measures  the  temperature  of  the  water,  and  S  is 
a  stirrer  to  keep  the  water  well  mixed  and  thus  insure  a  uniform 
temperature.  When  the  animal  is  placed  in  the  apparatus  the 
heat  given  off  warms  not  only  the  water,  but  also  the  metal;  so 
that  to  determine  the  total  heat  the  weight  of  metal  must  be  re- 
duced to  an  equivalent  amount  of  water  by  multiplying  its  weight 
by  its  specific  heat,  or,  a  more  simple  method,  the  calorimetric  equiv- 
alent of  the  apparatus  is  determined, — that  is,  the  actual  amount  of 
heat  necessary  to  raise  the  temperature  of  the  apparatus,  water  and 
metal,  one  degree.  This  value  is  obtained  by  burning  in  the  appa- 
ratus a  known  weight  of  some  substance  (alcohol,  hydrogen)  whose 
heat  of  combustion  is  known.  Knowing  how  much  heat  is  given 
off  by  this  combustion  and  how  much  the  temperature  of  the 
apparatus  is  raised,  the  calorimetric  ecpivalent  is  easily  calcu- 
lated and  may  be  used  subsequently  in  estimating  the  results  ob- 
tained from  animals.  In  the  use  of  the  apparatus  man}^  precau- 
tions must  be  observed.  These  practical  details  need  not  be  des- 
cribed here  except  to  say  that  account  must  be  taken  of  the  warm- 
ing of  the  air  used  to  ventilate  the  apparatus  and  of  any  changes 
in  the  amount  of  its  moisture.  The  calorimeter  used  in  this  way 
measures  directly  the  amount  of  heat  given  off  from  the  animal 
during  the  period  of  observation.  The  amount  of  heat  produced  in 
the  animal's  body  during  this  time  may  be  the  same,  or  may  be 
more  or  less.  To  arrive  at  a  knowledge  of  this  factor  observations 
must  be  made  upon  the  animal's  body  temperature  by  means  of  a 
thermometer  in  the  rectum.  If  this  bod}"  temperature  is  the  same 
at  the  end  as  at  the  beginning  of  the  experiment  then  it  is  obvious 
that  the  heat  produced  must  have  been  equal  to  the  heat  lost.  If 
the  animal's  body  temperature  has  fallen,  then  it  is  evident  that 
less  heat  has  been  produced  than  was  lost.  To  ascertain  how  much 
less,  the  weight  of  the  animal  is  multiplied  by  its  specific  heat  (0.8) 


826 


NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 


to  reduce  it  to  so  much  water,  and  this  product  is  multipHed  by  the 
difference  in  body  temperature  at  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  the 
experiment.  The  product  is  obtained  in  calories  and  is  subtracted 
from  the  amount  of  heat  lost,  as  determined  by  the  calorimeter,  to 
obtain  the  amount  of  heat  produced.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  ani- 
mal's temperature  has  risen  during  the  experiment  the  body  has 
produced  more  heat  than  it  has  dissipated.  The  increase  may  be 
determined  as  above  by  multiplying  the  weight  of  the  animal,  the 
specific  heat  of  the  body,  and  the  difference  in  temperature.  This 
amount  added  to  the  heat  lost  gives  the  heat  produced. 

Most  recent  investigators  have  used  some  form  of  air  calorimeter. 
An  air  calorimeter  consists  essentially  of  a  double-walled  chamber 
or  box  with  air  between  the  walls.  The  animal  is  placed  in  the 
inner  box  and  the  heat  given  off  is  measured  by  the  expansion  of 
the  air  between  the  walls.     Many  different  forms  are  used,  prefer- 


Fig.  267. — D' Arson val's  differential  calorimeter. 


ence  being  given  to  some  modification  of  the  differential  air  calo- 
rimeter. In  this  last-named  instrument  two  exactly  similar  chambers 
are  constructed  ;  one  contains  the  animal  while  the  other  serves  as  a 
dummy.  These  two  chambers  are  balanced  against  each  other, 
the  air  space  in  the  dummy  being  heated  by  immersion  in  a  bath  or 
by  burning  hydrogen  in  the  interior.  As  these  sources  of  heat  are 
known  and  can  be  controlled,  it  is  evident  that  if  the  dummy  is 
made  to  balance  exactly  the  chamber  containing  the  animal  the 
amount  of  heat  given  off  in  each  is  the  same.  The  principle  of  the 
differential  calorimeter  is  represented  in  Fig.  267,  which  gives  a 
schema  of  the  form  originally  employed  by  d' Arson val;  8  and  8' 
represent  the  two  calorimeters,  in  one  of  which  the  animal  is  placed 
while  the  other  acts  as  dummy.  Each  is  double  walled  and  the 
air  spaces  are  connected  by  tubes,  10  and  10',  to  small  gasometers, 
4,  4',  suspended  in  water  and  hung  on  opposite  sides  of  a  balance. 
The  movements  of  these  gasometers  antagonize  each  other,  and  the 


CALORIMETRY.  827 

resultant  may  be  recorded  upon  smoked  paper,  as  indicated  in  the 
figure.* 

The  Respiration  Calorimeter. — When  a  calorimeter  is  so  arranged 
that  the  composition  of  the  air  drawn  through  the  apparatus  for 
ventilation  can  be  determined  as  well  as  the  amount  of  heat  pro- 
duced, the  apparatus  becomes  a  respiration  calorimeter.  In  such 
an  apparatus,  if  proper  provision  is  made  for  analyzing  the  urine, 
the  feces,  and  the  food,  the  total  carbon  and  nitrogen  excretion  may 
be  obtained  simultaneously  with  the  heat  loss.  Since  we  may 
calculate  from  the  carbon  and  nitrogen  excretion  how  much  pro- 
teid,  fat,  and  carbohydrate  have  been  burnt  in  the  body,  and  since 
the  heat  values  of  these  constituents  are  known,  it  is  evident  that 
we  may  reckon  indirectly  how  much  heat  ought  to  be  produced 
from  the  combustion  of  so  much  material.  This  method  of  arriv- 
ing at  the  heat  production  is  designated  indirect  calorimetry.  With 
an  adequate  respiration  calorimeter  it  is  possible  to  ascertain 
whether  the  results  calculated  by  the  method  of  indirect  calorim- 
etry really  correspond  with  the  heat  obtained  by  direct  measure- 
ment. In  the  hands  of  good  observers  the  correspondence  is 
very  close,  and  gives  substantial  proof  of  the  scientific  belief 
that  in  the  living  body  the  energy  liberated  as  heat  or  as  heat 
and  work  is  all  contained  in  potential  form  in  the  foodstuffs 
eaten.  By  means  of  the  respiration  calorimeter  we  can  obtain  a 
balance  between  the  energy  income  and  outgo  of  the  body  as  well 
as  between  the  material  income  and  outgo, — that  is,  the  carbon  and 
nitrogen  equilibrium.  The  most  complete  and  elaborate  form  of 
respiration  calorimeter  used  is  that  devised  by  Atwater  and  Rosa  for 
experiments  upon  man.f  By  means  of  this  apparatus  many  inter- 
esting and  important  experiments  have  been  made  upon  the  nu- 
trition of  man  under  special  conditions.  Such  results  as  the  follow- 
ing have  been  obtained  (Atwater  and  Benedict)  in  the  case  of  a  man 
who,  while  in  the  apparatus,  did  much  muscular  work  on  a  bicycle 
ergo  meter: 

Income :  Potential   energy  of   material   metabolized   in   body    =    5459  Cal. 
Outeo    I  ^^^^Sy  given  off  from  the  body  as  heat ....  4833  Cal. 
^      \  Heat  equivalent  of  muscular  work 602  Cal. 

5435  Cal.  5435  Cal. 


Experimental  error 24  Cal. 

*  For  detailed  accounts  of  special  forms  of  air  calorimeters  see  Rubner, 
"  Calorimetrische  Methodik,"  1891;  and  Rosenthal,  "  Archiv  f.  Phj^siol- 
ogie,"  1897,  p.  170. 

t  See  Atwater  and  Rosa,  Bulletin  63,  United  States  Department  of  Agri- 
culture,  1899;    and  for  recent  improvements,  Atwater  and  Benedict,  1905. 


828  NUTRITION   AND   HEAT   REGULATION, 

Results  of  Calorimetric  Measurements. — The  actual  results 
obtained  from  direct  calorimetric  measurements  corroborate  those 
deduced  from  the  study  of  the  energy  given  off  in  the  oxidation  of 
the  foodstuffs  of  the  daily  diet.  They  show  that  man  gives  off  heat 
from  his  body  to  the  amount  of  40,000  to  50,000  calories  per  kgm. 
of  weight  during  24  hours  under  conditions  of  ordinary  life, — a 
total,  therefore,  of  2,400,000  to  3,000,000  calories  per  day  for  an 
individual  weighing  60  kgms.  This  amount  is  increased  greatly 
under  conditions  demanding  much  muscular  work.  This  loss  of 
heat  is,  of  course,  made  good  by  the  production  of  an  equal  amount 
within  the  body  by  the  oxidation  of  the  food  material.  Actual 
experiments  upon  different  animals*  show  that  small  animals 
produce  more  heat  in  proportion  to  their  weight  than  larger  animals 
of  the  same  species,  owing  to  their  relatively  larger  surface  and 
therefore  greater  loss  of  heat.  Birds  produce  and  lose  more  heat 
for  a  unit  of  surface  than  mammals, — a  fact  which  indicates  that 
their  physiological  oxidations  are  more  intense.  According  to 
Richet,  a  sparrow  gives  off  per  unit  of  surface  five  times  as  much 
heat  as  a  rabbit.  According  to  Rubner,  the  sparrow  produces 
thirteen  times  as  much  heat  as  man  for  the  same  amount  of  tissue. 
In  infants,  owing  to  their  larger  surface  relative  to  the  mass  of  the 
body,  the  loss  of  heat  is  greater  than  in  the  adult. 

HEAT  REGULATION. 

From  a  general  standpoint  the  most  important  problem  that  the 
physiologist  has  to  study  is  the  means  by  which  the  heat  production 
and  heat  loss  are  so  regulated  as  to  maintain  a  practically  constant 
body  temperature.  Experiments  show  that  the  mechanism  of 
heat  regulation  is  very  complex  and  is  two-sided,- — that  is,  the  body 
possesses  means  of  controlling  the  loss  of  heat  as  well  as  the  produc- 
tion of  heat,  and  under  the  conditions  of  normal  life  both  means 
are  used. 

Regulation  of  the  Heat  Loss. — Heat  is  regularly  lost  from  our 
bodies  in  a  number  of  different  ways,  which  may  be  classified  as 
follows : 

1.  Through  the  excreta,  urine,  feces,  saliva,  which  are  at  the  temperature 

of  the  body  when  voided. 

2.  Through  the  expired  air.     This  air  is  warmer  than  the  inspired  air, 

and  moreover  is  nearly  saturated  with  water-vapor.  The  vaporiza- 
tion of  water  requires  heat,  which  is,  of  course,  taken  from  the  body 
supply.  Each  gram  of  water  requires  for  its  vaporization  about  582 
calories. 

3.  By  evaporation  of  the  sweat  from  the  skin.     The  amount  lost  in  this 

way  increases  naturally  with  the  amount  of  sweat  secreted. 

4.  By  conduction  and  especially  by  radiation  of  heat  from  the  skin. 

*See  Rubner,  "  Zeitschrift.  f.  Biologie,"  19,  535,  1883;  and  Richet,  "La, 
chaleur  animale,"  1889,  p.  224. 


REGULATION    OF   THE    HEAT    LOSS.  829 

The  relative  values  of  these  different  means  of  heat  loss  are 
estimated  as  follows  by  Vierordt: 

1.  By  urine  and  feces 1.8  per  cent,  or       47,500  calories. 

2.  By  expired  air:  Warming  of  air 3.5       "  "        84,500 

Vaporization  of  water  from  lungs 7.2      "  "       182,120 

3.  By  evaporation  from  skin 14.5      "  "      364,120 

4.  By  radiation  and  conduction  from  skin  .73.0      "  "    1,791,820 

Total  daily  loss  =  2,500,000 

In  man  this  loss  of  heat  is  regulated  chiefly  by  controlling  the  im- 
portant factors  3  and  4.  We  accomplish  this  end  in  part  deliber- 
ately or  voluntarily  by  the  use  of  appropriate  clothing.  Clothing  of 
any  kind  captures  a  layer  of  warm  and  moist  air  between  it  and 
the  skin  and  thus  diminishes  greatly  the  loss  by  evaporation  and 
by  radiation.  In  cold  weather  the  amount  and  character  of  the 
clothing  is  changed  in  order  to  diminish  the  heat  loss.  The  ideal 
clothing  for  this  purpose  is  made  of  material,  such  as  wool,  which, 
while  porous  enough  to  permit  adequate  ventilation  of  the  air  next 
to  the  skin,  is  at  the  same  time  a  poor  conductor  of  heat  and  thus 
diminishes  the  main  factor  of  loss  by  radiation.  The  most  impor- 
tant means  of  controlling  the  heat  loss,  however,  is  by  automatic 
reflex  control  through  the  sweat  nerves  and  the  vasomotor  nerves. 
In  warm  weather  the  secretion  of  sweat  is  greatly  increased  by  re- 
flex stimulation  of  the  sweat  nerves.  The  greater  amount  of  water 
requires  a  greater  amount  of  heat  to  vaporize  it,  and  thus  the  heat 
loss  is  increased.  The  value  of  this  control  is  illustrated  by  a  case* 
recorded  by  Zuntz  *  of  a  man  who  possessed  no  sweat  glands.  In 
summer  this  individual  was  incapacitated  for  work,  since  even  a 
small  degree  of  muscular  activity  would  cause  an  increase  in  his 
body  temperature  to  40°  or  41°  C. 

The  control  through  the  vasomotor  nerves  is  doubtless  even 
more  important.  The  blood-vessels  bring  the  warm  blood  to  the 
skin,  where  it  loses  its  heat  by  conduction  and  especially  by  radia- 
tion to  the  cooler  air.  When  the  surrounding  air  is  much  below  the 
temperature  of  the  body  the  vasoconstrictor  center  is  stimulated, 
the  blood-vessels  in  the  skin  are  constricted,  the  supply  of  warm 
blood  to  the  skin  is  diminished,  and  therefore  the  amount  of  heat  lost 
is  less.  The  reflex  in  this  case  may  be  attributed  primarily  to  the 
action  of  the  cool  air  on  the  cold  nerves  of  the  skin.  The  impulses 
carried  by  these  fibers  to  the  nerve  centers  stimulate  the  vasocon- 
strictor center  or  that  part  of  it  controlling  the  vasomotor  fibers 
to  the  skin.  On  warm  days,  on  the  contrary,  the  blood-vessels 
in  the  skin  are  dilated  sometimes  to  an  extreme  extent,  the 
supply  of  warm  blood  is  therefore  increased,  and  more  heat 
is  lost  if  the  air  is  lower  in  temperature  than  the  blood.     The 

*  Zuntz,  "  Deutsche  medizinal-Zeitung, "  1903,  No.  25. 


830  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

reflex  in  this  case  may  be  regarded  possibly  as  an  inhibition  of  the 
vasoconstrictor  center  through  the  warm  nerves  of  the  skin.  Sub- 
stances, such  as  alcohol;  which  cause  a  dilatation  of  the  skin  ves- 
sels also  increase  the  loss  of  body  heat,  in  some  cases  to  a  sufficient 
extent  to  lower  the  body  temperature.  To  a  smaller  extent  our 
heat  loss  is  controlled  through  an  acceleration  of  the  breathing 
movements.  The  greatly  increased  respirations  in  muscular  ac- 
tivity must  aid  somewhat  in  eliminating  the  excess  of  heat  produced, 
although  this  factor  must  be  much  less  important  than  the  sweating 
and  the  flushing  of  the  skin  which  are  produced  reflexly  during 
muscular  work.  In  some  of  the  lower  animals — the  dog,  for  in- 
stance— in  which  the  sweat  nerves  are  absent  over  most  of  the  body 
and  in  which  the  coat  of  hair  interferes  with  the  free  loss  by 
radiation,  it  is  found  that  the  loss  through  the  respiratory  channel  is 
relatively  more  important.  The  panting  of  the  dog  is  a  familiar 
phenomenon.  Richet  has  studied  this  reflex  upon  dogs  and  has 
designated  the  greatly  accelerated  breathing  in  warm  weather  or 
after  muscular  exercise  as  thermic  polypnea  (according  to  Gad, 
tachypnea).  He  assumes  a  special  center  for  the  reflex  situated  in 
the  medulla  and  acting  through  the  respiratory  center.  It  is  a 
curious  fact,  as  shown  by  Langlois,  that  some  reptiles  exhibit  a 
similar  reflex;  when  their  body  temperature  is  raised  to  39°  C.  they 
show  a  condition  of  marked  polypnea  (rapid  breathing)  the  ap- 
parent object  of  which  is  to  augment  the  loss  of  heat  from  the 
body. 

Regulation  of  Heat  Production. — Heat  production  is  varied 
in  the  body  by  increasing  or  decreasing  the  physiological  oxida- 
tions. This  end  is  effected  in  part  voluntarily  by  muscular  exercise 
or  by  taking  more  food.  Muscular  contractions  are  attended  by 
a  marked  liberation  of  heat  and  it  is  a  part  of  everyone's  experience 
that  by  work  or  muscular  activity  the  effect  of  outside  cold  may  be 
counteracted.  In  the  case  of  food  the  body  burns  promptly  most 
of  the  material  of  a  daily  diet.  By  increasing  the  diet  in  cold 
weather  provision  is  made  for  the  greater  supply  of  heat  required. 
In  normal  individuals  this  regulation  is  not,  strictly  speaking, 
voluntary.  Outside  cold  is  most  effective  in  stimulating  the  appe- 
tite and  thus  leading  us  to  increase  the  diet.  In  this,  as  in  other 
respects,  the  appetite  serves  to  control  the  amount  of  food  in  pro- 
portion to  the  needs  of  the  body.  The  purely  involuntary  control 
of  heat  production  consists  of  an  involuntary  reflex  upon  muscu- 
lar metabolism  and  possibly  in  the  existence  of  a  special  set  of  heat 
centers  and  heat  nerves.  With  regard  to  the  first  effect  we  have 
the  striking  experiments  quoted  by  Pfliiger,*  according  to  which  a 
rabbit  paralyzed  by  large  doses  of  curare  is  no  longer  able  to  main- 
*  Pfliiger,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie, "  18,  255,  1878. 


REGULATION  OF  HEAT  PRODUCTION.  831 

tain  its  body  temperature  when  the  outside  temperature  is  changed. 
The  rabbit  behaves,  in  fact,  Uke  a  cold-blooded  animal.  In  the 
calorimeter  it  shows  a  marked  loss  of  heat  production,  and  its 
temperature  may  be  made  to  go  up  and  down  with  the  outside 
temperature.  The  same  result  may  be  obtained  by  section  of  all 
the  motor  nerves, — that  is,  section  of  the  spinal  cord  in  the  upper 
cervical  region.  Rubner  has  shown  by  calorimetric  experiments 
upon  normal  animals  (dogs)  that  the  body  temperature,  as  we 
know,  remains  constant  when  the  outside  temperature  is  changed, 
but  that  the  heat  production  is  increased  as  the  outside  tempera- 
ture is  lowered.  Finally,  Johannson*  has  shown  that  the  increased 
oxidations  that  occur  under  the  influence  of  outside  cold,  as  meas- 
ured by  the  CO  2  output,  occur  only  when  muscular  tension  is 
increased  or  shivering  is  noticed.  We  may  beheve,  therefore,  that 
the  increased  oxidations  caused  by  cold  are  due  to  motor  reflexes 
upon  the  skeletal  muscles.  These  reflexes  take  place  doubtless 
through  the  motor  fibers,  and  lead  to  an  augmented  muscular 
tone  or  to  small  contractions  (shivering)  according  to  their  inten- 
sity. This  fact  accords  with  one's  personal  sensations  regarding 
the  condition  of  his  muscles  in  cold  weather. 

The  Existence  of  Heat  Centers  and  Heat  Nerves. — Physi- 
ologists have  long  supposed  that  there  may  be  in  the  body  a  special 
set  of  heat  nerves  and  heat  centers,  separate  in  their  action  from  the 
motor,  secretory,  and  other  efferent  nerves  that  influence  the  me- 
tabolism of  the  peripheral  organs.  It  is  supposed  that  these  fibers, 
if  they  exist,  when  in  activity  augment  or  inhibit  the  physiological 
oxidations  in  the  tissues,  and  that  this  effect  has  for  its  specific 
object  an  increase  or  decrease  in  heat  production,  outside  of  any 
functional  activity  of  the  tissues.  Bernard  thought  at  first  that 
he  had  demonstrated  the  existence  of  calorific  fibers  in  the  cervical 
sympathetic,  but  it  was  afterward  recognized  that  the  fibers  in 
question  are  vasoconstrictors.  Since  that  time  very  numerous 
experiments  have  been  made  with  this  object  in  view,  but  it  must 
be  admitted  that  no  conclusive  proof  has  yet  been  obtained  of  the 
existence  of  such  a  system.  The  evidence  that  has  been  most  re- 
lied upon  is  the  effect  of  lesions,  experimental  or  pathological,  of 
definite  portions  of  the  brain  or  cord.  The  following  facts  are 
significant:  A  number  of  observers f  have  found  that  section  or 
puncture  of  the  brain  at  the  junction  of  medulla  and  pons  causes 
an  increase  in  heat  production  and  a  rise  of  temperature.  Section 
of  the  cord  in  the  cervical  region  is,  on  the  other  hand,  attended 
usually  by  a  fall  in  body  temperature.     These  experiments  might  be 

*  Johannson,  " Skandinavisches  Archiv  f.  Physiologic,"  7,  123,  1897. 
t  See   Wood,    "Fever,"   "Smithsonian    Contributions   to    Knowledge." 
Washington,  1880. 


832  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT   REGULATION. 

interpreted  to  mean  that  there  exists  in  the  brain  anterior  to  the 
medulla  a  general  heat  center  of  an  inhibitory  character.  Under 
normal  conditions  this  center  may  hold  the  lower  heat-producing 
centers  in  check.  When  cut  off  by  section  this  inhibitory  influence 
is  removed  and  increase  in  heat  production  and  body  temperature 
results.  A  second  important  fact,  brought  out  by  Ott^*  is  that  in- 
jury to  the  corpus  striatum  causes  a  rise  in  heat  production  and 
body  temperature.  This  result. has  been  confirmed  by  many  other 
investigators,  making  use  especially  of  what  is  known  as  the  "  heat 
puncture."  In  this  experiment,  made  upon  rabbits,  a  probe  or 
style  is  inserted  into  the  brain  so  as  to  puncture  the  corpus  stria- 
tum. The  result  in  the  majority  of  cases  is  a  rise  of  temperature 
which  may  last  for  a  long  time,  although  the  animal  shows  no  par- 
alysis and  apparently  no  other  effect  from  the  operation.  Accord- 
ing to  some  observers, t  the  increased  production  of  heat  takes  place 
mainly  in  the  liver,  and  is  due  to  the  oxidation  of  the  glycogen. 
According  to  others  (Aronsohn),  the  increased  production  of  heat 
occurs  mainly  in  the  muscles.  The  fever  produced  by  the  "  heat 
puncture"  seems  to  be  due  essentially  to  an  irritation  of  the  nerv- 
ous system,  and  is  an  experimental  demonstration  of  the  possi- 
bility of  fever  arising  from  lesions  of  the  nerve  centers. .  White  and 
others  have  described  similar  disturbances  of  heat  production  from 
lesions  of  the  optic  thalamus.  Heat  centers  have  been  located 
also  in  the  septum  lucidum,  in  the  cortex,  the  midbrain,  pons,  and 
medulla,  while  Reichert  places  the  primary  heat-producing  centers 
(thermogenic  centers),  from  which  the  hypothetical  heat  nerves 
originate  directly,  in  the  spinal  cord  in  the  anterior  horn  of  the  gray 
matter. J  The  great  amount  of  experimental  work  done  along 
these  lines  has  been  inspired  doubtless  by  the  hope  of  discovering 
a  special  heat-regulating  nervous  apparatus  which  if  demonstrated 
would  enable  us  to  explain  the  causation  of  fevers.  In  its  most 
elaborate  form  this  hypothesis  assumes  the  existence  of  primary 
heat-producing  (thermogenic)  centers  in  the  cord  and  brain  from 
which  the  calorific  or  heat  nerves  arise.  These  centers  in  turn  are 
controlled  by  regulating  (thermotaxic)  centers  of  an  augmenting 
and  inhibitory  character  in  the  higher  portions  of  the  brain.  By 
reflex  influences  upon  these  latter  centers  the  activity  of  the  thermo- 
genic centers  may  be  increased  or  diminished  and  the  production 
of  heat  in  the  body  controlled.  While  such  an  apparatus  may 
exist,  it  is  nevertheless  true  that  the  evidence  in  favor  of  it  so  far 

*Ott,  "Journal  of  Nervous  and  Mental  Diseases,"  1884,  1887,  1888; 
also  "Brain,"   1889. 

t  Roily,  "  Deutsches  Archiv  f .  klinische  Medicin, "  78,  250,  1903. 

t  See  Reichert,  "University  Medical  Magazine,"  5,  406,  1894;  also  Kemp, 
"Therapeutical  Gazette,"  1889,  pp.  86  and  155. 


PHYSIOLOGICAL    OXIDATIONS.  833 

produced  has  failed  to  convince  the  majority  of  physiologists.  The 
existence  of  a  special  set  of  heat  nerves,  in  fact,  is  still  unproved. 
Most  physiologists,  perhaps,  believe  that  variations  in  heat  pro- 
duction occur,  as  stated  above,  by  alterations  in  the  intensity  of  the 
oxidations  in  the  muscles  brought  about  by  reflex  excitation  through 
the  motor  nerve  fibers,  and  that  a  special  set  of  heat  fibers  does  not 
exist.  We  may  at  present  adopt  the  conservative  view  that  heat 
production  and  heat  dissipation  in  the  body  are  controlled  not 
by  a  special  heat-regulating  apparatus  composed  of  heat  centers 
and  heat  nerves,  but  by  the  co-ordinated  activity  of  a  number  of 
different  centers  in  addition  to  the  voluntary  means  already 
specified.  The  unconscious  regulation  of  the  body  temperature  is 
effected  chiefly  through  the  following  centers : 

il.  The  sweat  centers  and  sweat  nerves. 

2.  The  vasoconstrictor  center   and   the   vasoconstrictor 
nerve  fibers  to  the  skin. 

3.  The  respiratory  center. 

C  1.  The  motor  nerve  centers  and  the  motor  nerve  fibers 

TT     ,         J     +•       )  to  the  skeletal  muscles. 

Heat  production  S  ^  r^^^   quantity   and   character  of  the   food   as  deter- 

V-  mined  by  the  appetite. 

Theories  of  Physiological  Oxidations. — Lavoisier  compared 
the  oxidations  in  the  body  to  the  oxidation  of  organic  substances 
in  combustions  at  high  temperatures.  He  supposed  that  the  mo- 
lecular oxygen  unites  directly  with  the  substances  oxidized  in  one 
case  as  in  the  other.  It  soon  became  evident,  however,  that  this 
direct  analogy  is  not  applicable.  The  material  that  is  oxidized 
in  the  body — fats,  carbohydrates,  proteids — is  consumed  with  a 
certain  rapidity, — in  the  case  of  muscular  contractions  with  great 
rapidity, — and  we  know  that  these  same  materials  out  of  the  body 
at  a  temperature  of  39°  C.  are  oxidized  with  extreme  slowness.  It 
became  customary,  therefore,  to  speak  of  the  oxidations  in  the  body 
as  indirect,  meaning  thereby  that  the  material  is  not  acted  upon 
directly  by  the  molecular  oxygen.  Within  recent  j^ears  it  has  been 
shown  that  the  oxidation  in  ordinary  combustions — the  burning 
of  gaseous  hydrogen,  for  instance — is  not  explained  by  assuming 
that  the  oxygen  unites  directly  with  the  hydrogen.  It  is  stated, 
for  instance,  that  this  combustion  does  not  take  place  if  both  gases 
are  entirely  free  from  water  vapor;  the  presence  of  water  is  necessary 
for  the  oxidation.  Chemists  are  not  agreed  as  to  the  exact  nature 
of  simple  combustion,  and  it  is  therefore  increasingly  difficult  to 
compare  these  processes  with  the  oxidations  in  the  body.  Leaving 
aside  the  details  of  the  process,  it  may  still  be  believed  that  the 
metabolism  of  material  in  the  body  by  means  of  which  its  heat 
energy  is  produced  is  at  bottom  comparable  to  ordinary  combus- 
tions. Oxygen  is  absolutely  necessary  to  the  process  in  each  case; 
53 


834  NUTRITION   AND    HEAT    REGULATION. 

the  same  end-products  are  formed  and  the  same  amount  of  heat  is 
Hberated  in  the  one  case  as  in  the  other.  The  fundamental  point 
that  the  physiologist  is  attempting  to  solve  is  the  means  by  which 
the  body  accomplishes  these  oxidations  at  such  a  low  temperature. 
The  theories  suggested  to  explain  this  fact  have  changed  naturally 
with  the  advance  of  chemical  knowledge.  After  the  discovery  of 
ozone  (Schonbein,  1840)  and  its  great  power  of  oxidation  as  com- 
pared with  oxygen  it  was  suggested  that  in  some  way  the  oxygen 
in  the  body  is  ozonized  and  is  thus  able  to  burn  the  food  material. 
Gorup-Besanez  showed  that  some  of  the  oxidations  that  take  place 
in  the  body  can  be  successfully  accomplished  outside  the  body 
with  the  aid  of  ozone,  especially  in  the  presence  of  alkalies  or  alka- 
line carbonates.  Others  suggested  that  the  oxygen  in  the  body  be- 
comes converted  to  atomic  oxygen  and  is  thus  enabled  to  attack  the 
tissue  materials.  Hoppe-Seyler  formulated  a  theory  according  to 
which  the  living  molecule  is  first  split  into  smaller  molecules  by  the 
hydrolytic  action  of  ferments.  In  this  process,  as  in  fermentation,  to 
which  he  compared  it,  hydrogen  is  liberated  in  the  nascent  or  atomic 
state,  and  this  hydrogen  acting  upon  the  oxygen  forms  water  with 
the  liberation  of  some  atomic  oxygen,  which  in  turn  oxidizes  the 
split  products  of  the  fermentation.  Others  still  (Traube)  laid  stress 
upon  the  possibility  of  the  formation  of  hydrogen  peroxid  or 
similar  peroxids  which  are  then  capable  of  effecting  the  oxidation 
of  the  body  material.  This  latter  theory,  in  modified  form,  still 
prevails.* 

The  great  amount  of  experimental  and  theoretical  work  upon 
the  nature  and  cause  of  phj^siological  oxidations  has  established 
pretty  clearly  two  general  beliefs  which  it  is  important  to  keep 
in  mind.  It  has  been  shown,  in  the  first  place,  that  the  amount  of 
the  oxidation  is  governed  by  the  tissue  itself  and  not  by  the  quantity 
of  oxygen  present.  The  view  that  by  increasing  the  amount  of 
oxygen  offered  to  the  tissue  the  intensity  of  the  oxidations  can 
likewise  be  increased  was  formerly  held  and  is  still  met  with.  It 
is  often  supposed,  for  example,  that  by  breathing  pure  oxygen  the 
oxidations  of  the  body  may  be  augmented.  On  the  contrary,  the 
facts  indicate  that  when  a  sufficient  supply  of  oxygen  is  provided 
any  further  increase  has  no  immediate  effect  in  aiding  or  hastening 
the  oxidations.  The  intensity  of  the  process  is  conditioned  by  the 
tissue  itself.  The  initial  stimulus  or  substance  that  sets  going  the 
whole  reaction  arises  within  the  tissues.  The  second  generalization 
that  seems  to  be  accepted  more  and  more  of  recent  years  is  that  the 
oxidations  of  the  body,  those  reactions  that  give  rise  to  much  heat, 
do  not  affect  the  living  tissue  itself.     They  take  place  under  the 

*  See  Engler  and  Weissberg,  "  Kritische  Studien  liber  die  Vorgange  der 
Autoxydation, "   1904. 


PHYSIOLOGICAL    OXIDATIONS.  835 

influence  of  the  living  matter,  or  by  the  aid  of  substances  (enzymes) 
formed  by  the  living  matter,  but  the  material  actually  burnt  is  not 
organized  living  substance.  As  the  living  yeast  cells  break  down 
sugar  in  the  liquid  surrounding  them,  so  the  living  tissue  cells  metab- 
olize and  oxidize  the  dead  food  material  contained  in  the  lymph 
and  tissue  liquid  in  which  they  are  bathed.  The  opposite  point  of 
view  was  ably  advocated  by  Pfliiger.  This  observer,  in  fact,  ex- 
plained the  mystery  of  physiological  oxidations  by  assuming  that 
the  oxygen  together  with  the  food  material  is  synthesized  into  the 
highly  complex  and  unstable  living  molecules.  The  active  intra- 
molecular movement  within  these  molecules  leads  constantly  to  a 
breaking  down,  a  splitting  off  of  simpler  molecules  which  consti- 
tute the  products  of  physiological  oxidation.  The  instability  of 
the  molecule  is  due  to  its  size  and  the  activity  of  the  intramolecular 
movements,  or,  as  Pfliiger  expressed  it,  "The  intramolecular  heat 
of  the  cell  is  its  life."  This  point  of  view,  however,  has  not  found 
acceptance  of  late  years.  It  is  implied  or  stated  by  most  recent 
authors  that  the  food  material  is  attacked  and  oxidized  outside  the 
living  molecule,  in  the  form  of  fat,  sugar,  proteid,  etc.  The  ten- 
dency for  many  years  has  been  to  show  that  these  processes  in  the 
body  are  chemical  changes  that  do  not  differ  fundamentally  from 
similar  processes  outside  the  body.  The  point  of  view  actually 
adopted  by  most  workers  is  that  the  living  matter  effects  its  won- 
derful changes  in  the  food  material  with  the  aid  of  intracellular 
ferments  or  enzymes.  That  such  enzymes  are  formed,  one  may  say 
generally  in  the  tissues  of  the  body,  has  been  brought  out  in  the  pre- 
ceding chapters  upon  Digestion  and  Nutrition.  It  is  necessary  only 
to  recall  the  facts  that  lipase,  the  fat-splitting  enzyme,  has  been  iso- 
lated from  many  tissues,  and  that  in  the  liver  and  muscles  and  prob- 
ably other  tissues  there  exist  enzymes  capable  of  converting  glycogen 
to  sugar  or  the  reverse,  and  of  destroying  the  sugar  completely  by  the 
serial  action  of  several  intracellular  enzymes.  Finally,  with  regard  to 
the  proteid  material  it  is  now  recognized  that  proteolytic  enzymes 
are  formed  within  many,  if  not  all,  of  the  living  tissues.  This  point 
is  demonstrated  by  the  fact  of  autolysis, — that  is,  if  living  tissue  is 
taken  from  the  body,  with  precautions  against  contamination  by 
bacteria,  and  while  under  perfect  aseptic  conditions  is  kept  warm 
and  moist,  it  will  digest  itself.  The  proteid  is  split  up  into  the 
same  simple  hydrolytic  products  as  are  obtained  by  boiling  it  with 
acids.  It  has  been  shown  that  this  digestion  is  due  to  enzymes — 
autolytic  enzymes — formed  within  the  living  tissue.  There  is  no 
doubt,  therefore,  of  the  existence  of  intracellular  enzymes,  and  that 
these  substances  play  a  conspicuous  part  in  the  metabolism  of  food 
material.  The  lipase,  the  diastase,  and  the  autolytic  enzymes  just 
referred  to  all  belong  to  the  group  that  cause  hydrolytic  cleavages, — 


836  NUTRITION    AND    HEAT    REGULATION. 

that  is,  they  induce  spHtting  or  decomposition  of  the  material  by 
the  introduction  of  water.  The  supposition  has  naturally  been 
made  that  probably  the  oxidations  of  the  body  are  effected  also  by 
enzymes  which  in  some  way  activate  the  oxygen.  Enzymes  of  this 
character  have  been  found;  they  are  designated  in  general  as  oxi- 
dases or  as  oxidases  and  peroxidases,  the  former  term  referring  to 
those  enzymes  that  effect  oxidations  in  the  presence  of  oxygen, 
while  the  latter  is  applied  to  certain  enzymes  supposed  to  act 
only  in  the  presence  of  hydrogen  peroxid.  The  most  conspicuous  of 
the  oxidases  found  in  the  animal  body  is  the  one  capable  of  oxidiz- 
ing aldehydes  (salicylic  or  benzoic  aldehyde)  into  the  corresponding 
acids,  and  hence  designated  specifically  as  aldehydase.  This  enzyme 
has  been  extracted  especially  from  the  liver,  lung,  and  spleen. 
An  oxidase  known  as  tyrosinase,  first  found  in  plant  juice,  has  also 
been  isolated  from  animal  tissues.  It  oxidizes  tyrosin  with  the 
formation  of  homogentisinic  acid.  So  also  oxidases  are  described 
capable  of  oxidizing  xanthin  to  hypoxanthin  or  to  uric  acid.*  The 
process  of  destructive  metabolism  of  sugar  in  the  body,  glycolysis, 
may  be  effected,  it  will  be  remembered,  by  the  tissue  juices  squeezed 
from  the  organs,  or  even  by  extracts  of  the  tissues  of  muscle, 
liver,  etc.  It  may  well  be  believed,  therefore,  that  the  oxidation 
of  this  most  important  food  material  is  accomplished  by  the  action 
of  one  or  more  enzymes.  Such  facts  as  these  lend  great  probability 
to  the  belief  that  eventually  it  will  be  shown  that  the  oxidations  in 
the  body  are  effected  by  the  influence  of  oxidases  or  peroxidases  act- 
ing singly  or  in  combination  or  in  sequence  with  the  hydrolytic 
enzymes.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  however,  such  an  hypothesis  is 
not  by  any  means  demonstrated.  Oxidases  capable  of  destroying 
proteid,  fat,  and  carbohydrate  material  have  not  been  actually  iso- 
lated, but  the  idea  seems  to  be  a  fruitful  one. 

While  it  is  perfectly  obvious  that  more  facts  are  needed  before 
positive  statements  are  warranted  regarding  the  chemistry  of  the 
oxidations  in  the  body,  the  view  entertained  regarding  the  general 
process  in  the  body  is  that  the  material — proteid,  fat,  or  carbohy- 
drate— is  first  split  into  simpler  products  by  the  action  of  a  hy- 
drolytic enzyme,  or  a  series  of  hydrolytic  enzymes,  formed  in  the 
cells.  These  reactions  are  not  attended  by  any  marked  formation 
of  heat.  The  split  products  thus  produced  are  then  acted  upon  by 
oxidases  with  the  formation  of  carbon  dioxid,  water,  etc.,  and  the 
liberation  of  heat.  A  specific  instance  of  this  serial  action  has  been 
given  in  reference  to  the  oxidation  of  sugar  (p.  794) :  According  to 
Stoklasa,  the  sugar  is  first  split  into  lactic  acid,  and  this  into  carbon 
dioxid  and  alcohol;    the  alcohol  then  by  the  action  of  a  series  of 

*  For  further  details  see  Oppenheimer,  "  Die  Fermente  und  ihre  Wir- 
kungen, "  second  edition,  1903. 


PHYSIOLOGICAL    OXIDATIONS.  837 

oxidases  is  oxidized  to  acetic  acid,  formic  acid,  carbon  dioxid,  and 
water.  From  our  present  standpoint,  the  production  of  heat  in  the 
body,  it  is  important  also  to  bear  in  mind  the  general  view  advo- 
'  cated  by  Speck  and  others, — namely,  that  the  chemical  changes 
or  metabolism  of  the  body  may  be  divided  into  two  general  classes : 
first,  the  heat-producing  metabolism  which  results  finally  in  the 
oxidation  of  the  great  mass  of  the  food  material  and  which  is 
essential  for  the  production  of  body  heat,  and,  second,  the  tissue 
metabolism  proper, — that  is,  the  synthesis  and  disassimilation  of 
the  living  substance  itself.  This  latter  metabolism  varies  prob- 
ably in  the  different  tissues;  it  is  concerned  with  the  building  up 
and  breaking  down  of  the  living  machinery  and  may  be  attended 
by  the  absorption  as  well  as  the  liberation  of  heat,  and  the  energy 
necessary  for  effecting  these  reactions  is  obtained  from  the  heat 
energy  liberated  by  the  oxidation  processes.  In  this  last  thought 
there  is  contained  a  suggestion  which  may  serve  as  an  explanation 
of  the  fundamental  value  of  the  physiological  oxidations  to  the  body. 
It  may  be  supposed  that  these  oxidations  furnish  the  energy  neces- 
sary for  the  nutritive  metabolism  of  living  matter.  In  those  or- 
ganisms or  cells  that  lead  an  anaerobic  existence — that  is,  an  exis- 
tence in  the  absence  of  free  oxygen — the  energy  necessary  for  the 
process  is  obtained  perhaps  by  hydrolytic  changes  alone. 


SECTION  IX. 
THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  REPRODUCTION. 

With  the  exception  of  the  phenomenon  of  consciousness,  no 
fact  of  hfe  excites  more  interest  and  seems  to  offer  greater  diffi- 
culties to  an  adequate  explanation  than  the  function  of  reproduc- 
tion. The  male  cell,  spermatozoon,  and  the  female  cell,  ovum, 
unite  to  form  a  new  cell  which  thereupon  begins  to  grow  rapidly 
and  produces  an  organism  that  in  all  of  its  manifold  peculiarities 
of  structure  and  function  is  essentially  a  replica  of  its  parents. 
The  fundamental  problems  presented  in  this  act  of  reproduction 
are  those  of  fertilization  and  heredity.  In  the  former  we  must 
ascertain  why  the  union  of  the  two  cells  is  necessary  or  advanta- 
geous, and  the  secret  of  the  stimulating  influence  upon  growth  that 
arises  from  this  union.  Under  the  term  heredity  we  express  the  obvi- 
ous, yet  mysterious,  fact  that  the  fertilized  ovum  of  each  species  de- 
velops into  a  structure  like  that  of  its  parents.  Both  of  these  im- 
portant problems  are  essentially  of  a  physiological  character, — that 
is,  they  deal  with  properties  of  the  living  material  composing  the 
reproductive  cells;  but,  at  present,  biological  investigation  along 
these  lines  is  largely  in  the  morphological  stage.  The  part  of  the  sub- 
ject that  can  be  studied  with  most  success  is  the  structural  changes 
that  are  associated  with  fertilization  and  reproduction.  Great, 
indeed  wonderful,  progress  has  been  made  during  the  last  century, 
but  it  is  needless  perhaps  to  say  that  much  remains  unexplained, 
and  that  in  this,  as  in  so  many  other  problems  of  nature,  the  greater 
our  knowledge  the  clearer  becomes  our  vision  of  the  difficulties  and 
complexities  of  a  final  scientific  explanation.  Outside  these  funda- 
mental problems  there  are  other  accessoiy  functions  connected,  for 
instance,  with  the  external  genital  organs  which  in  a  measure  are  of 
more  immediate  practical  interest.  In  one  way  or  another  these 
functions  are  necessary  or  helpful  to  the  final  union  of  the  repro- 
ductive cells.  They  form  a  part  of  the  reproductive  life  which  comes 
more  immediately  under  our  observation  and  control,  and  consti- 
tute, therefore,  a  subject  which  has  been  more  accessible  to  in- 
vestigation. In  the  brief  treatment  given  in  the  following  chap- 
ters more  emphasis  is  laid  upon  this  side,  the  accessory  phenomena 
of  reproduction,  than  upon  the  deeper,  more  fundamental   prob- 

838 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  839 

lems,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  accessory  phenomena  are  the  ones 
which  have  at  present  the  greater  practical  interest. 

The  function  of  reproduction  is  often  omitted  from  physiolog- 
ical courses,  and  the  reason  perhaps  is  partly  that  the  structural 
features  and  the  development  of  the  embryo  have  been  assigned  to 
the  department  of  anatomy,  and  partly  because  it  is  a  function 
not  essential  to  the  maintenance  of  the  existence  and  reactions  of 
the  organism.  The  reproductive  organs  might  be  eliminated  en- 
tirely and  the  power  of  the  body  as  an  organism  to  maintain  its 
individual  existence  not  be  seriously  interfered  with.  The  physio- 
logical importance  of  the  reproductive  organs  lies  not  in  their 
co-operation  in  the  communal  life  of  the  various  parts  of  the  body, 
but  in  their  adaptation  to  produce  another  similar  being.  We 
may  explain,  therefore,  the  co-ordinating  mechanisms  of  the 
body  without  reference  to  the  reproductive  tissues,  except  so  far 
as  their  supposed  internal  secretions  affect  general  or  specific 
metabolism. 


CHAPTER  LII. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE 
ORGANS. 

The  Graafian  Follicle  and  the  Corpus  Luteum. — The  functional 
value  of  the  ovary  is  connected  with  the  formation  and  rupture 
of  the  Graafian  follicles,  whereby  an  ovum  is  liberated.  The  pri- 
mordial follicles  consist  of  an  ovum  surrounded  by  a  layer  of  fol- 
licular epithelium.  Beginning  at  a  certain  time  after  birth  and 
continuing  throughout  the  period  of  active  sexual  life,  some  of  these 
primordial  follicles  develop  into  mature  Graafian  follicles  and  mi- 
grate to  the  surface  of  the  ovary.  The  change  consists  in  a  pro- 
liferation of  the  follicular  epithelium  and  the  formation  of  a  serous 
liquid,  the  liquor  foUiculi,  between  the  layers  of  this  epithelium. 
In  the  matured  follicle  there  is  a  connective  tissue  covering,  the 
theca  folUcuU,  formed  from  the  stroma  of  the  ovary  and  consisting 
of  two  coats  or  tunics — the  external  and  the  internal.  The  cells 
in  the  internal  tunic  develop  a  yellowish  pigment  as  the  follicle 
grows,  and  are  sometimes  designated  as  lutein  cells.  Within  the 
capsule  formed  by  the  internal  tunic  there  is  a  layer  of  follicular 
cells  known  as  the  membrana  granulosa  and  attached  to  one  side 
is  a  mass  of  the  same  cells,  the  discus  proligerus — within  which 
the  ovum  is  imbedded.  The  follicular  liquid  lies  between.  This 
liquid  increases  in  amount,  and  when  the  follicle  has  reached  the 


840  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

surface  it  forms  a  vesicle  projecting  to  the  exterior.  This  projecting 
portion  is  nearly  bloodless  and  thinner  than  the  rest  of  the  wall  of 
the  follicle.  It  is  designated  as  the  stigma.  When  fully  mature  the 
follicle  ruptures  at  the  stigma  and  the  egg,  together  with  the  sur- 
rounding follicular  cells  of  the  discus  proligerus  and  a  portion  of  the 
membrana  granulosa,  is  extruded,  the  egg  being  received  into  the 
open  end  of  the  Fallopian  tube.  According  to  Clark,*  the  rupture  of 
the  follicle  is  brought  about  by  an  increasing  vascular  congestion 
of  the  ovary.  The  tension  within  the  ovary  is  thereby  increased, 
the  follicle  is  forced  to  the  surface,  and  the  circulation  at  the  most 
projecting  portion  is  interfered  with  to  such  an  extent  as  to  cause 
necrotic  changes  at  the  stigma,  atwhich  rupture  finally  occurs.  After 
the  bursting  of  the  follicle  its  walls  collapse,  and  the  central  cavity 
receives  also  some  blood  from  the  ruptured  vessels  of  the  theca. 
Later  on  the  vesicle  becomes  filled  with  cells  containing  a  yellow 
pigment.  These  cells  increase  rapidly  and  form  a  festooned  border 
of  increasing  thickness  around  the  central  blood  clot.  The  vesicle 
at  this  stage,  on  account  of  the  yellow  color  of  the  new  cells,  is 
known  as  a  corpus  luteum.  The  structure  thus  formed  increases 
in  size  for  a  period  and  then  undergoes  retrogressive  changes  and 
is  finally  completely  absorbed.  The  duration  of  the  period  of  growth 
and  retrogression  varies  according  as  the  egg  liberated  becomes 
fertilized  or  not.  If  fertilization  does  not  occur,  as  is  the  case  in 
the  usual  monthly  periods,  the  corpus  luteum  reaches  its  maximum 
size  within  two  to  three  weeks  and  then  begins  to  be  absorbed. 
It  is  frequently  designated  under  these  circumstances  as  the  false 
corpus  luteum  (corpus  luteum  spurium)  or  corpus  luteum  of  men- 
struation. In  case  the  egg  is  fertihzed  and  the  woman  becomes 
pregnant  the  life  history  of  the  corpus  luteum  is  much  prolonged. 
Instead  of  undergoing  absorption  after  the  third  week  it  continues 
to  increase  in  size  by  multiplication  of  the  lutein  cells  during  the 
first  few  months  of  pregnancy,  and  does  not  show  retrogressive 
changes  until  the  sixth  month  or  later.  The  total  size  of  the  corpus 
in  such  cases  is  much  larger  than  in  menstruation,  and  it  was  des- 
ignated, therefore,  by  the  older  writers  as  the  true  corpus  luteum 
(corpus  luteum  verum)  or  corpus  luteum  of  pregnancy.  Later 
observers  agree  that  there  is  no  essential  difference  in  structure 
between  the  true  and  the  false  corpus  luteum,  although  the  former 
has  a  longer  history  and  attains  a  greater  size.  The  point  of 
greatest  structural  interest  in  the  corpus  luteum  is  the  origin  of  the 
yellow  (lutein)  cells.  Histologists  have  been  and  still  are  divided 
upon  this  point ;  some  believe  that  they  arise  from  the  cells  of  the 
membrana  granulosa,  others  that  they  come  from  the  connective 
tissue  cells  in  the  internal  capsule  (theca  interna)  of  the  follicle. 
*  Clark,  "Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports,"  7,  181,  1898. 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  841 

The  majority  of  writers  seem  to  favor  the  latter  view.  Regarding 
the  physiological  importance  of  the  corpus  opinions  also  differ. 
Some  regard  it  as  simply  a  protective  mechanism  by  means  of 
which  the  empty  space  in  the  follicle  is  filled  up  by  a  tissue  which  is 
afterward  easily  absorbed,  instead  of  by  scar  tissue.  Others,  how- 
ever, attribute  to  the  lutein  cells  secretory  functions  of  the  most 
important  character  in  connection  with  the  subsequent  develop- 
ment of  the  egg  and  the  activities  of  the  uterus.  Some  reference 
will  be  made  to  these  views  farther  on. 

Menstruation. — ^The  attainment  of  sexual  maturity  or  puberty 
is  marked  by  a  number  of  visible  changes  in  the  body,  but  in  the 
female  the  characteristic  change  is  the  appearance  of  the  men- 
strual flow  from  the  uterus.  The  age  at  which  this  phenomenon 
occurs  shows  many  individual  variations,  but  the  average  for 
temperate  chmates  is  given  usually  at  14  to  15  years.  In  the 
warmer  countries  the  age  is  earlier, — 8  to  10  years, — and  in  the  cold 
regions  somewhat  later, — 16  years.  The  racial  characteristic  in 
this  respect  is  said  to  be  maintained,  however,  after  generations  of 
residence  in  countries  of  a  different  climate,  as  is  illustrated  by  the 
relatively  early  appearance  of  menstruation  among  Jews  even  in 
the  colder  countries.  After  the  phenomenon  appears  it  occurs  at 
regular  intervals  of  28  days,  more  or  less,  and  hence  is  known  as 
the  monthly  period,  menses,  menstruation,  or  catamenia.  The 
interval  is  not  absolutely  regular,  and  shows  many  individual 
variations  within  limits  which  may  be  placed  at  20  to  35  days. 
Absence  of  the  menstrual  flow  is  designated  as  a  condition  of  amen- 
orrhea. Certain  premonitory  symptoms  usually  precede  the 
appearance  of  the  menses,  such  as  pains  in  the  back  or  head  or 
a  general  feeling  of  discomfort,  although  in  some  cases  these  symp- 
toms are  absent.  When  these  premonitory  symptoms  are  unusually 
painful  or  serious  and  the  flow  is  difficult  or  irregular  the  condition 
is  designated  as  dysmenorrhea.  The  flow  begins  with  a  discharge  of 
mucus,  which  later  becomes  mixed  with  blood.  The  quantity  of 
blood  lost  is  subject  to  individual  variations,  but  it  may  amount  to 
as  much  as  100  to  200  gms.  The  flow  continues  for  3  or  4  days 
and  then  subsides.  Under  normal  conditions  this  phenomenon 
occurs  regularly  throughout  sexual  life, — that  is,  during  the  period 
in  which  conception  is  possible.  If  fertilization  occurs  the  flow 
ceases  normally  during  pregnancy  and  the  period  of  lactation.  At 
the  forty-fifth  to  the  fiftieth  year  the  flow  disappears  peraianently, 
and  this  change  marks  what  is  known  as  the  natural  menopause, 
climacteric,  or  change  of  life.  The  change  is  sometimes  abrupt, 
sometimes  very  gradual,  being  preceded  by  irregularities  in 
menstruation,  and  it  is  not  infrequently  associated  with  psychical 
and  physical  disturbances  of  a  serious  character.     If  at  any  time 


842  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

during  sexual  life  the  ovaries  are  completely  removed  by  surgical 
operation  menstruation  is  brought  to  a  close,  this  condition  being 
designated  as  the  artificial  menopause. 

Structural  Changes  in  the  Uterus  During  Menstruation. — Men- 
struation is  a  phenomenon  of  the  uterus.  The  lining  mucous  mem- 
brane, the  endometrium,  in  the  period  of  four  or  five  days  preceding 
the  flow,  becomes  rapidly  thicker  and  its  superficial  layers  are  con- 
gested with  blood,  and  indeed  in  places  small  collections  of  blood 
may  be  noticed.  Opinions  differ  very  much  as  to  the  change  under- 
gone by  this  thickened  membrane  during  the  flow.  According  to 
some  authors,  most  of  the  membrane  is  thrown  off  and  the  blood 
escapes  from  the  denuded  surface  mixed  with  pieces  of  the  mem- 
brane. According  to  others,  no  material  destruction  of  the  mem- 
brane occurs,  the  blood  that  escapes  being  due  to  small  capillary 
extravasations  or  perhaps  mainly  to  a  process  of  diapedesis.  It 
would  seem  that  the  amount  of  destruction  of  the  endometrium 
must  be  subject  to  individual  variations.  After  the  cessation  of 
the  flow  the  mucous  membrane  is  rapidly  repaired  by  regenerative 
changes  in  the  tissues;  the  surface  epithelium,  if  denuded,  is  re- 
placed b}^  proliferation  of  the  cells  lining  the  uterine  glands  and 
the  thickened,  edematous  condition  of  the  membrane  rapidly  sub- 
sides during  a  period  of  six  or  seven  days.  While  the  escape  of 
blood  takes  place  only  from  the  surface  of  the  uterus,  the  other 
reproductive  organs — the  ovary,  the  Fallopian  tubes,  and  even  the 
external  genital  organs — share  to  some  extent  in  the  vascular  con- 
gestion exhibited  by  the  uterus  during  the  period  preceding  the 
menstrual  flow.  The  mucous  membrane  of  the  uterus  may  be  said 
to  exhibit  a  constantly  recurring  menstrual  cycle  which  falls  into 
four  periods:  (1)  Period  of  growth  in  the  few  (5)  days  preceding 
menstruation,  characterized  by  a  rapid  increase  in  the  stroma, 
blood-vessels,  epithelium,  etc.,  of  the  membrane.  (2)  The  men- 
struation or  period  of  degeneration  (4  days),  during  which  the 
capillary  hemorrhage  takes  place  and  the  epithelium  suffers  de- 
generative changes  and  is  cast  off  more  or  less.  (3)  The  period  of 
regeneration  (7  days),  during  which  the  mucous  membrane  returns 
to  its  normal  size.  (4)  The  period  of  rest  (12  days),  during  which 
the  endometrimn  remains  in  a  quiescent  condition. 

The  Phenomenon  of  Heat  in  Lower  Mammals. — The  phenom- 
enon known  as  heat  in  lower  mammals  resembles,  in  many  essential 
respects,  menstruation  in  human  beings,  and  they  may  be  regarded 
as  homologous  functions.  Heat  is  a  period  of  sexual  excitement 
which  occurs  one  or  more  times  during  the  year  and  during  which 
the  female  will  take  the  male.  This  condition  lasts,  as  a  rule,  for 
several  days,  and  in  the  female  is  accompanied  by  changes  which 
recall  those  of  menstruation.     The  external  genital  organs  become 


THE    FEMALE    REPRODUCTIVE    ORGANS.  843 

swollen  and  in  many  animals  there  is  a  discharge  of  mucus  or 
mucus  and  blood  from  the  uterus.  Histologically  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  uterus  undergoes  changes  similar  to  those  of  menstrua- 
tion,— that  is,  the  membrane  increases  in  size  and  becomes  con- 
gested with  blood, — and  it  exhibits  a  phase  of  degeneration 
during  which  some  of  the  epithelial  lining  may  be  cast  off  and  some 
hemorrhage  occur.  If  sexual  union  is  prevented  during  this  period 
heat  passes  away  in  a  few  days,  but  recurs  again  at  intervals 
which  vary  in  the  different  mammals:  4  weeks  in  the  monkey, 
mare,  etc.;  3  to  4  weeks  in  the  cow;  2^  to  4  weeks  in  the  sheep; 
9  to  18  days  in  the  sow;  12  to  16  weeks  in  the  bitch,  etc.  The  re- 
currence of  the  period  under  these  circumstances  suggests  at  once 
the  essential  resemblance  to  the  monthly  periods  of  women.  Ac- 
cording to  Heape's  most  interesting  observations  upon  monkej'-s 
(Senmopithecus),*  some  of  these  animals  show  a  regular  monthly 
flow  lasting  for  4  days  except  when  conception  takes  place.  The 
changes  during  heat  must  be  considered  as  physiologically  ho- 
mologous to  those  of  menstruation.  The  sexual  excitement  that 
attends  the  condition  in  the  lower  animals  is  not  distinctly  repre- 
sented in  man,  although  it  is  commonly  said  that  in  the  period  pre- 
ceding or  following  menstruation  the  sexual  desire  is  stronger  than 
at  other  times,  but  in  the  changes  undergone  by  the  uterus  and  the 
fact  that  these  changes  are  connected,  as  a  rule,  with  the  liberation 
of  an  egg  from  the  ovary  (ovulation)  the  two  phenomena  are 
physiologically  similar. 

Relation  of  the  Ovaries  to  Menstruation. — It  appears  to  be 
clearl}^  demonstrated  that  the  phenomenon  of  menstruation  is  de- 
pendent upon  a  periodical  activity  in  the  ovaries.  When  the 
ovaries  are  completely  removed  menstruation  ceases  (artificial 
menopause)  and  the  uterus  undergoes  atrophy.  When  the  ovaries 
are  congenitally  lacking  or  rudimentary,  a  condition  of  amenorrhea 
also  exists.  These  facts  and  the  connection  of  the  ovaries  with 
menstruation  are  further  corroborated  in  a  striking  way  by  experi- 
ments upon  transplantation  or  grafting  of  the  ovary.  This  experi- 
ment has  been  performed  upon  lower  animals  (apes)  as  well  as  upon 
human  beings.  Removal  of  both  ovaries  in  apes  is  followed  by  a  ces- 
sation of  menstruation.  Transplantation  of  an  ovary  under  the  skin 
serves  to  maintain  menstruation,  but  if  subsequently  removed  this 
function  disappears. f  In  the  human  being  Morris  and  Glass  ob- 
tained similar  results. |  An  ovary  or  a  piece  of  an  ovary  trans- 
planted into  the  uterus  itself  or  the  broad  ligament  caused  a  re- 

*  Heape,  "Philosophical  Transactions,  Royal  Society,"  185  (B),  1894, 
and  188  (B),  1897. 

t  Halban,  "Deutsche  Gesellschaft  f.  Gynakol.,"  9,  1901. 

j  Glass,  "Medical  News,"  523,  1899;  Morris,  "Medical  Record,"  83, 
1901. 


844  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

turn  of  the  menstrual  periods  which  had  ceased  after  surgical  re- 
moval of  the  glands,  or  brought  on  free  menstruation  in  conditions 
of  amenorrhea  or  dysmenorrhea. 

Many  views  have  been  proposed  to  explain  this  relationship 
between  ovary  and  uterus.  In  most  cases  it  has  been  assumed 
that  the  menstruation  in  the  uterus  is  connected  with  the  act  of 
ovulation, — that  is,  the  ripening  and  discharge  of  a  Graafian  follicle. 
Gynecologists,  it  is  true,  have  accumulated  facts  to  show  that  ovu- 
lation may  occur  independently  of  menstruation,  but  no  one  doubts 
that,  as  a  rule,  the  two  acts  occur  together,  not  simultaneously  but 
in  a  definite  sequence,  and  that  the  significance  of  menstruation  is  to 
be  found  in  its  physiological  dependence  upon  the  fate  of  the  ovum. 
It  was  believed  at  first  that  the  processes  in  the  ovary  influence  the 
uterus  by  a  nervous  reflex.  This  view  finds  its  most  complete 
expression  in  the  theory  formulated  by  Pfliiger.  According  to  this 
physiologist,  the  congestion  of  the  uterus  which  leads  to  menstrua- 
tion and  the  congestion  of  the  ovary  which  leads  to  ovulation  are 
both  reflex  vasodilator  effects  due  to  the  mechanical  stimulation 
of  the  sensory  nerves  of  the  ovary  by  the  growth  in  size  of  the  fol- 
licle. As  this  structure  develops  the  mechanical  stimulus  increases 
in  intensity,  the  congestion  in  both  organs  becomes  more  pro- 
nounced and  leads  finally  to  the  bursting  of  the  follicle  and  the 
hemorrhage  in  the  uterus.  This  very  attractive  theory  does  not, 
however,  accord  with  the  facts.  Goltz  and  Rein*  have  shown  by 
experiments  upon  dogs  that  when  the  nerves  going  to  the  uterus 
are  completely  severed  from  their  central  connections  the  animals 
can  be  fertilized,  become  pregnant,  and  give  birth  to  a  fitter  of 
young.  Moreover,  the  experiments  upon  transplantation  referred 
to  above  seem  to  show  quite  conclusively  that  a  nervous  connection 
is  not  essential  to  the  influence  that  the  ovary  exerts  upon  the 
uterus.  The  present  view,  therefore,  is  that  this  influence  is  exerted 
through  the  blood, — the  other  great  system  connecting  the  organs 
with  one  another.  The  usual  assumption  is  that  the  ovaries  form  an 
internal  secretion  which  is  given  to  the  blood  or  lymph  and  upon 
reaching  the  uterine  tissues  serves  to  stimulate  the  mucous  mem- 
brane to  a  more  active  growth.  This  theory  has  been  elaborated 
most  fully  perhaps  by  Fraenkel,t  who  believes  that  this  internal 
secretion  is  furnished  by  the  yellow  cells  of  the  corpus  luteum. 
This  observer,  from  the  results  of  operations  upon  women,  believes 
that  the  ovum  is  normally  discharged  two  weeks  before  menstrua- 
tion, and  the  resulting  increased  activity  of  the  cells  of  the  corpus 

*  Rein,  "  Archiv  f.  die  gesammte  Physiologie,"  vol.  xxiii. 

t  Fraenkel,  "Archiv  f.  Gynakologie,"  68,  2,  1903.  See  also  Ihm,  "  Monats- 
sehrift  f.  Geburtshiilfe  u.  Gynakol.,"  21,  515,  1905,  for  discussion  and  exten- 
sive literature. 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  845 

liiteum  furnishes  the  secretion  which  stimulates  the  uterus  to  the 
augmented  growth  that  takes  place  in  the  premenstrual  period. 
This  view,  as  well  as  other  most  important  functions  which  this 
author  attributes  to  the  specific  tissue  of  the  corpus  luteum,  have 
not  been  conclusively  demonstrated.  At  present  perhaps  it  is 
wiser  to  adopt  the  more  cautious  theory  that  some  element  in  the 
ovary  furnishes  an  internal  secretion  which  is  normally  necessary 
to  the  nutrition  of  the  uterus,  and  whose  augmentation  during  the 
growth  of  a  Graafian  follicle  leads  to  the  greater  metabolism  charac- 
teristic of  the  premenstrual  period. 

The  Physiological  Significance  of  Menstruation. — Naturally 
many  views  have  been  proposed  to  explain  the  significance  of  men- 
struation. According  to  the  Mosaic  law,  it  is  a  process  of  purifica- 
tion; others  have  seen  in  it  a  mechanism  to  remove  an  excess  of 
nutriment  in  the  body;  but  since  the  period  in  which  our  knowl- 
edge of  the  structure  of  the  organs  concerned  and  of  the  histo- 
logical changes  during  the  act  became  more  definite,  theories  of  the 
meaning  of  menstruation  have  usually  assumed  that  it  is  a  prepara- 
tion for  the  reception  of  the  fertiUzed  ovum.  These  views  have 
taken  two  divergent  forms  according  as  the  act  of  ovulation  was 
believed  to  precede  or  to  happen  simultaneously  with  or  subse- 
quently to  the  act  of  menstruation.  According  to  one  view,  the 
swelling  and  congestion  of  the  membrane  constitute  a  prepara- 
tion for  the  reception  of  the  fertilized  ovum.  If  the  ovum  fails  of 
fertilization,  then  degenerative  changes  ensue,  and  the  membrane 
or  a  portion  of  it  is  cast  off  in  the  menstrual  flow,  while  the  re- 
mainder is  absorbed.  According  to  this  view,  menstruation  is  an 
indication  that  fertilization  has  not  taken  place.*  This  view  is 
probably  the  one  most  generally  accepted  to-day,  and  falls  in  with 
the  belief  that  ovulation  normally  precedes  menstruation  by  a 
considerable  interval.  The  other  point  of  view  was  advocated 
especially  by  Pfliiger  in  connection  with  his  theory  of  the  common 
cause  of  ovulation  and  menstruation.  He  assumed  that  menstrua- 
tion occurs  before  the  ovum  reaches  the  uterus  and  that  its  physio- 
logical value  lies  in  the  fact  that  a  raw  surface  is  thus  made  upon 
which  the  ovum  is  grafted.  Menstruation,  according  to  him,  is 
an  operation  of  nature  for  the  grafting  of  the  fertilized  ovum  upon 
the  maternal  organism.  This  view  finds  some  support  in  the  fact 
that  in  some  of  the  lower  animals  (dogs)  the  flow  of  blood  precedes 
fertilization. 

The  Effect  of  the  Menstrual  Cycle  on  Other  Functions.— It 
is  natural  to  suppose  that  such  marked  changes  as  occur  in  the 

*  This   view  finds  expression   in  the  aphorisms :    "  Women   menstruate 
because  they  do  not  conceive,"  Powers,  and  "  The  menstrual  crisis  is  the  physi- . 
■ological  homologue  of  parturition,"  Jacobi. 


846  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

ovary  and  uterus  during  the  menstrual  cycle  should  have  an  in- 
fluence upon  other  parts  of  the  body.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is 
known  that  in  general  the  sense  of  well-being  varies  with  the  phases 
of  the  cycle.  At  the  time  of  or  in  the  period  just  preceding  the 
menstrual  flow  there  is  usually  a  more  or  less  marked  sense  of  ill- 
being  or  despondency,  and  a  diminution  in  general  efficiency. 
Among  the  various  observations  made  by  objective  methods  upon 
the  functions  of  the  different  organs  during  these  periods  the  most 
significant,  probably,  are  those  upon  blood-pressure.  According 
to  Mosher,*  the  blood-pressure  falls  at  the  time  of  the  menstrual 
periods.  The  curves  obtained  in  these  experiments  are  not  entirely 
regular,  but  at  or  near  the  menstruation  the  blood-pressure  falls 
slowly,  the  maximum  fall  being  coincident  with  the  appearance  of 
the  flow.  It  would  seem  probable  that  the  fall  of  general  blood- 
pressure  is  due  directly  to  the  vascular  dilatation  in  the  genital  or- 
gans and  in  turn  is  responsible  for  some  of  the  secondary  phenomena 
observed  in  the  organism  as  a  whole.  It  is  very  suggestive  to  find 
that  the  author  quoted  above  obtained  similar  periodical  falls  in 
blood-pressure  in  men,  suggesting  the  idea  that  has  frequently  been 
expressed,  that  in  man  as  well  as  woman  there  is  a  rhythmical 
activity  of  the  genital  organs,  a  reproductive  cycle  that  in  man 
may  be  referred  to  the  development  and  extrusion  of  the  sperma- 
tozoa in  the  testis,  as  in  woman  it  is  connected  with  the  growth  and 
expulsion  of  the  ova  in  the  follicles  of  the  ovary. 

The  Passage  of  the  Ovum  into  the  Uterus. — The  means  by 
which  the  ovum  gains  entrance  to  the  Fallopian  tubes  has  given 
rise  to  much  speculation  and  some  interesting  experiments.  It 
was  formerly  believed  (Haller)  that  at  the  time  of  ovulation  the 
fimbriated  end  of  the  Fallopian  tube  is  brought  against  the  ovary, 
the  movement  being  due  to  a  congestion  or  sort  of  erection  of  the 
fimbriae.  This  movement  has  not  been  observed,  and,  as  experi- 
ments show  that  small  objects  introduced  into  the  pelvic  cavity  are 
taken  up  by  the  tubes,  it  is  believed  that  the  cilia  upon  the  fimbriae 
and  in  the  tubes  may  suffice  to  set  up  a  current  that  is  sufficient 
to  direct  the  movement  of  the  ovum.  Attention  has  been  called 
to  the  fact  that  in  animals  with  a  bicornuate  uterus  the  ova  may 
be  liberated  from  the  ovary  on  one  side,  as  shown  by  the  presence 
of  the  corpora  lutea,  while  the  embryos  are  developed  in  the  horn 
of  the  other  side.  As  further  evidence  for  the  same  possibility  of 
migration  it  has  been  shown  that  the  ovary  may  be  excised  on  one 
side  and  the  horn  of  the  uterus  on  the  other  and  yet  the  animal  may 
become  pregnant  after  sexual  union.  It  would  seem  probable, 
therefore,  that  the  ovum  is  discharged  into  the  pelvic  cavity  and 
may  be  caught  up  by  the  ciliary  movements  at  the  end  of  the  tube 
*  Mosher,  "The  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Bulletin,"  1901. 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  847 

on  the  same  side,  or  may  traverse  the  pelvic  cavity  in  the  narrow 
spaces  between  the  viscera  and  be  received  by  the  tube  on  the 
other  side.  Such  a  view  explains  the  possible  occurrence  of  true 
abdominal  pregnancies,  and  suggests  also  the  possibility  that  ova 
may  at  times  fail  to  reach  the  uterus  at  all  and  may  undergo  de- 
struction and  absorption  in  the  abdominal  cavity.  In  some  of 
the  lower  animals — the  dog,  for  example — provision  is  made  for 
the  more  certain  entrance  of  the  ova  into  the  tubes  by  the  fact 
that  the  latter  end  in  connection  with  a  membranous  sac  of  peri- 
toneum which  envelopes  the  ovary.  The  sexual  fertilization  of  the 
ovum  is  supposed  to  take  place  shortly  after  its  entrance  into 
the  Fallopian  tube,  since  spermatozoa  have  been  found  in  this 
region,  and  the  fertilized  ovum,  before  reaching  the  seat  of  its  im- 
plantation in  the  body  of  the  uterus,  has  begun  its  development. 
By   the   act   of    coitus   the 

spermatozoa    are  deposited  ^ 

at  the  mouth  of  the  uterus,  ^^^-==~==*- 

whence  they  make  their  way  /^ p 

toward     the     tubes,    being  / 

guided  in  their  movements  f  -  — —d 

very  probably  by  the  oppos-  \ 

ing  force  of  the  ciliarv  con-  )  ' 

tractions  in  the  uterus.     It  ' 

is   known  that  the  cilia   of  \  ^ 

the  tubes  and  uterus  con-  "  ^  y' ^ 

tract   so   as   to  drive  inert  -"  ^^=^==-=^^*"'''^ 

objects  toward   the   vagina 
and  they  carry  the  egg  in 

this     direction,      but       the  ,,      Fig.  268 —Human  ovum  (Lee,  modified  from 

'      .  Nagel) :    n,  Nucleus  (germinal  vesicle)  containing 

spermatozoa,     being    moved  the  ameboid  nucleolus  (germinal  spot);    rf,  deu- 

,  .  r  J.1      •  toplasmic  zone;    p,  protoplasmic  zone;    z,  zona 

by  the  contractions  or    tneir  radiata;    s,  perivitelUn  space. 

own     cilia     or     tails,     are 

stimulated  to  advance  against  this  ciliary  current.  The  act  of  ferti- 
lization of  the  ovum  is  preceded  by  certain  preparatory  changes 
in  the  ovum  itself  which  are  described  under  the  term  maturation. 
Maturation  of  the  Ovum. — The  process  of  maturation  occurs 
before  or  just  after  the  spermatozoon  enters  the  ovum.  At  the 
time  the  latter  is  extruded  from  the  follicle  it  is  a  single  cell  sur- 
rounded by  a  layer  of  follicular  epithelium  forming  the  corona  ra- 
diata, which  is  subsequently  lost.  The  egg  proper  consists  of 
cytoplasm  and  a  nucleus  or  germinal  vesicle  containing  a  nucleolus 
or  germinal  spot.  Within  the  cytoplasm  is  a  definite  collection  of 
food  material  or  yolk  which  is  sometimes  designated  as  deutoplasm. 
The  whole  structure  is  surrounded  by  a  membrane  known  as  the 
zona  radiata  (Fig.  268) .  Before  or  after  the  egg  reaches  the  Fallopian 


848  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

tube  its  nucleus  undergoes  the  changes  preparatory  to  a  mitotic 
division.  These  changes  are  essentially  similar  to  those  of  ordi- 
nary cell  division  as  represented  schematically  in  Fig.  269.  The 
nucleus  at  first  presents  the  ordinary  chromatin  network,  and  in 
the  cytoplasm  lies  the  minute  structure  known  as  the  centrosome. 
This  latter  divides  into  two  daughter-centrosomes  (6)  which  move 
to  opposite  sides  of  the  nucleus  and  become  surrounded  by  rays, 
each  centrosome  with  its  radiating  system  forming  an  astro- 
sphere.  The  chromatin  material  in  the  nucleus  meanwhile  has 
collected  into  larger  threads  known  as  chromosomes  (c),  and 
the  nuclear  membrane  disappears  (d).  The  number  of  chromo- 
somes is  definite  for  each  species  of  animal.  The  chromosomes 
arrange  themselves  equatorially  between  the  astrospheres  and  then 
each  divides  longitudinally  into  two  parts  (/) .  These  parts  migrate 
or  are  drawn  toward  their  respective  centrosomes  (g,  h,  i),  and  this 
division  is  followed  by  a  separation  of  the  cytoplasm  into  two  parts. 
Thus,  two  daughter-cells  are  formed,  each  containing  the  same 
number  of  chromosomes  as  the  parent-cell,  but  only  half  the  amount 
of  chromatin  material.  The  cell  division  results  in  a  quantitative 
reduction  of  the  chromatin  material.  In  ordinary  cell  division  the 
chromosomes  again  form  a  resting  reticulum  and  a  nuclear  mem- 
brane and  the  chromatin  substance  increases  in  quantity.  In  the 
ovum  a  similar  cell  division  takes  place  except  that  the  daughter- 
cells  are  very  unequal  in  size ;  one  is  very  minute  and  is  known  as 
the  first  polar  body,  the  other  as  the  ovum.  After  the  formation  and 
extrusion  of  the  first  polar  body,  the  ovum  again  undergoes  division 
into  two  unequal  halves,  giving  rise  to  a  second  polar  body.  In 
this  division,  however,  the  chromosomes  are  divided  transversely, 
and  the  ovum  after  the  division  is  left  with  only  half  the  number  of 
chromosomes  characteristic  of  the  species.  In  the  formation  and 
extrusion  of  the  two  polar  bodies  the  matured  ovum  has  suffered 
both  a  quantitative  and  quahtative  reduction  in  chromatin  ma- 
terial, and  is  left  with  only  half  its  number  of  chromosomes.  Since 
the  first  polar  body  after  its  separation  may  again  divide  into  two 
cells,  the  process  of  maturation  results  in  the  formation  of  four  cells, 
three  of  which  are  polar  bodies  and  may  be  regarded  as  abortive 
ova.  The  fourth,  the  matured  ovum,  retains  practically  all  of  the 
original  cytoplasm,  but  has  lost  a  part  of  its  chromatin  material 
and,  according  to  Boveri,  also  its  centrosome.  The  production 
of  these  four  cells  may  be  represented,  therefore,  by  a  schema  of 
the  kind  shown  in  Fig.  270.  The  details  of  this  process  of  forma- 
tion of  the  polar  bodies  and  of  reduction  in  chromatin  material 
differ  somewhat  in  different  animals.*    The  process  has  not  been 

*  For  details  see  Wilson,  "The  Cell  in  Development  and  Inheritance." 
Second  edition,  1900,  New  York. 


Fig.  269. — Schematic  representation    of    the    processes    occurring   during    cell    division. 

(Boveri.) 


THE  FEMALK  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  849 

followed  in  the  human  ovum,  but  shice  it  occurs  in  the  eggs  of  all 
animals  with  sexual  reproduction,  so  far  as  they  have  been  studied, 
it  is  justifiable  to  assume  that  a  similar  change  takes  place  in  man. 
From  a  biological  standpoint  the  reduction  of  chromosomes  and 
the  loss  of  the  centrosome  throw  much  light  upon  the  necessity  of 
fertilization  by  the  male  cell.  The  spermatozoon  before  it  is  ripe 
undergoes  a  process  of  maturation  essentially  similar  to  that  des- 
cribed for  the  ovum.  Two  cell  divisions  take  place  with  the  for- 
mation of  four  spermatozoa,  each  of  which,  however,  is  a  functional 
spermatozoon.  In  the  process  of  division  the  number  of  chromo- 
somes in  each  cell  is  reduced  by  half.  When  the  matured  ovum 
and  the  matured  spermatozoon  fuse,  therefore,  each  brings  half 
the  normal  number  of  chromosomes,  and  the  resulting  fertilized 
ovum  is  a  cell  with  its  chromosomes  restored  to  their  usual  number. 
The  chromatin  material  is  the  essential  part  of  the  reproductive 
element.     We  have  reasons  to  believe,  in  fact,  that  it  is  the  sub- 


• First  polar  body. 


Mature  egg ^S       •  •        • Abortive  pya  resulting 

*' ^^        !  from  division  of  first 

1  polar  body. 

Second  polar  body  (abortive  ovum). 
Fig.  270. — Schema  to  indicate  the  process  of  maturation  of  the  ovum. — (Boveri.) 

stance  which  has  the  power  of  development  and  which  conveys 
the  hereditary  structure  specific  to  the  animal.  The  process 
which  causes  each  element  to  lose  a  part  of  this  material  before 
its  union  with  the  cell  of  the  opposite  sex  is  a  provision  by  means 
of  which  the  fertilized  egg  from  which  the  offspring  develops  shall 
inherit  the  characteristics  of  each  parent  without  increase  in 
the  typical  amount  of  the  chromosomes.  The  loss  of  the  centro- 
some by  the  matured  egg  is  interpreted  by  Boveri  as  follows :  *  This 
minute  structure  is  the  instrument  by  which  the  mechanical 
process  of  cell  division  is  initiated  and  completed.  Its  loss  by  the 
matured  ovum  prevents  this  cell  from  further  development,  but 
in  the  act  of  fertilization  the  spermatozoon  brings  into  the  egg  a 
new  centrosome,  or  causes  the  formation  of  a  new  centrosome  after 
its  entrance,  and  thus  immediately  starts  the  process  of  cell  mul- 
tiplication.    From   this   standpoint   the   loss   of   the   centrosome 

*  For  a  popular  presentation  see  Boveri,  "  Das  Problem  der  Befruchtung. " 
Jena,   1902. 
54 


850  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    REPRODUCTION. 

by  the  egg  is  a  provision  to  necessitate  sexual  union,  and  thus 
insure  the  benefits  that  presumably  are  associated  with  the  fusion 
of  two  cells  originating  from  different  individuals. 

Fertilization  of  the  Ovum. — The  spermatozoon  comes  into 
contact  with  the  ovum  probably  at  the  beginning  of  the  Fallopian 
tubes.  The  meeting  of  the  two  cells  is  possibly  not  simply  a  matter 
of  accidental  contact,  although  the  number  of  spermatozoa  dis- 
charged by  the  male  at  coitus  is  so  great  that  there  would  seem 
to  be  little  chance  for  the  ovum  to  fail  to  meet  some  of  them.  Ex- 
periments upon  the  reproductive  elements  of  plants  indicate,  how- 
ever, that  the  egg  may  contain  substances  which  serve  to  attract 
the  spermatozoon,  within  a  certain  radius,  by  that  force  which 
is  described  under  the  name  of  chemotaxis.  However  this  may  be, 
the  egg  unites  with  a  spermatozoon  and  under  normal  conditions 
with  only  one.  A  number  of  the  spermatozoa  may  penetrate 
the  zona  radiata,  but  so  soon  as  one  has  come  into  contact  with 
the  cytoplasm  of  the  egg  a  reaction  ensues  in  the  surface  layer 
which  makes  it  impervious  to  other  spermatozoa.  The  spermato- 
zoon consists  of  three  essential  parts, — the  head,  the  middle  piece, 
and  the  tail.  The  last  named, is  the  organ  of  locomotion,  and 
after  the  spermatozoon  enters  the  egg  this  portion  atrophies  and 
disappears,  probably  by  absorption.  The  head  of  the  spermato- 
zoon represents  the  nucleus,  and  contains  the  valuable  chromatin 
material.  On  entering  the  egg  it  moves  toward  the  nucleus  of  the 
latter,  meanwhile  enlarging  and  taking  on  the  character  of  a  nu- 
cleus. The  egg  now  contains  two  nuclei, — one  belonging  to  it  origi- 
nally, the  female  pronucleus;  one  brought  into  it  by  the  sperma- 
tozoon, the  male  pronucleus.  The  two  come  together  and  fuse, 
— superficially  at  least, — forming  the  nucleus  of  the  fertilized  egg,  or 
the  segmentation  nucleus.  The  middle  piece  of  the  spermatozoon 
also  enters  the  egg,  but  its  exact  function  and  fate  is  still  a  matter 
of  some  uncertainty.  Boveri  believes  that  it  brings  into  the  egg  a 
centrosome  or  material  which  induces  the  formation  of  a  centro- 
some  in  the  ovum  and  is  therefore  of  the  greatest  importance  in 
initiating  the  actual  process  of  cell  division  which  begins  promptly 
after  the  fusion  of  the  nuclei.  In  the  segmentation  nucleus  the  nor- 
mal number  of  chromosomes  is  restored,  and  it  is  believed  that  in 
the  subsequent  divisions  of  the  cell  to  form  the  embryo  the  chromo- 
somes are  so  divided  that  each  cell  gets  some  maternal  and  some 
paternal  chromosomes,  and  thus  shares  the  hereditary  characteris- 
tics of  each  parent.  This  view  is  represented  in  a  schematic  way 
by  Fig.  271,  taken  from  Boveri,  the  maternal  and  paternal  chromo- 
somes being  indicated  by  different  colors.  According  to  this  descrip- 
tion, both  egg  and  spermatozoon  are  incomplete  cells  before  fusion. 
The  egg  contains  chromatin  for  a  nucleus,  and  a  large  cell  body, 


,/ 


Fig.  271. — -Schematic  representation  of  the  processes  occurring  during  the  fertiliza- 
tion and  subsequent  segmentation  of  the  ovum. — (Boveri.)  The  chromatin  (chromo- 
somes) of  the  ovum  is  represented  in  blue,  that  of  the  spermatozoon  in  red. 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  851 

cytoplasm,  rich  in  nutritive  material,  but  it  lacks  a  centrosome, 
so  that  it  can  not  multiply.  The  spermatozoon  has  also  chromatin 
for  a  nucleus,  and  a  centrosome  or  the  material  which  may  give 
rise  to  a  centrosome,  but  it  lacks  cytoplasm, — that  is,  food  material 
for  growth.  It  would  seem  that  if  the  spermatozoon  could  be 
given  a  quantity  of  cytoplasm  it  would  proceed  to  develop  an  em- 
bryo without  the  aid  of  an  ovum.  This  experiment  has,  in  fact, 
been  made  by  Boveri.  Eggs  of  the  sea-urchin  were  shaken  violently 
so  as  to  break  them  into  fragments.  If  now  a  spermatozoon  entered 
one  of  these  fragments,  which  consisted  only  of  cytoplasm,  cell 
multiplication  began  and  proceeded  to  the  formation  of  a  larva. 
On  the  other  hand,  it  would  seem  to  be  equally  evident  that  if  a 
centrosome  was  present  in  the  egg  or  some  influence  could  be 
brought  to  bear  upon  it  to  make  it  form  a  centrosome  it  would 
develop  without  a  spermatozoon.  In  some  animals  eggs  do  nor- 
mally develop  at  times  without  fertilization  by  a  spermatozoon 
(parthenogenesis),  the  eggs  that  have  this  property  probably  pre- 
serving their  centrosomes.  Loeb*  has  shown,  however,  in  some 
most  interesting  experiments  that  certain  eggs,  especially  those  of 
the  sea-urchin  (Strongylocentrotus  purpura tus),  which  normally 
develop  by  fertiUzation  with  spermatozoa,  may  be  made  to  de- 
velop by  physicochemical  means.  His  latest  method  is  to  treat 
the  egg  for  a  minute  or  two  with  an  acid  (acetic,  formic,  etc.), 
which  causes  the  formation  of  a  membrane.  They  are  then  placed 
for  a  certain  interval  in  a  hypertonic  sea  water,  made  by  adding 
sodium  chlorid  to  ordinary  sea  water.  They  are  then  transferred 
to  normal  sea  water  and  after  an  hour  or  so  they  begin  to  multiply 
and  eventually  develop  into  normal  larvae.  Similar  although  less 
complete  results  were  obtained  previously  by  Morgan. 

Implantation  of  the  Ovum. — After  fertilization  in  the  tube  the 
ovum  begins  to  segment  and  multiply,  and  meanwhile  is  carried 
toward  the  uterus,  probably  by  the  action  of  the  cilia  lining  the  tube. 
Upon  reaching  the  cavity  of  the  uterus  it  becomes  attached  to  the 
mucous  membrane,  usually  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  fundus. 
The  membrane  of  the  uterus  has  become  much  thickened  mean- 
while, and  in  this  condition  is  known  usually  as  the  decidua.  The 
portion  to  which  the  egg  becomes  attached  is  the  decidua  serotina, 
and  it  eventually  develops  into  the  placenta,  the  organ  through 
which  the  maternal  nutriment  is  supplied  to  the  fetus.  The  ovum 
has  made  considerable  progress  in  its  development  before  reaching 
the  uterus,  having  formed  amnion  and  chorion,  with  chorionic  villi. 
Some  of  the  ectodermal  cells  in  the  chorion  become  specialized  to 
form  a  group  of  trophoblastic  cells  which  have  a  digestive  action, 

*  Loeb,  "University  of  California  Publications,"  2,  pp.  83,  89,  and  113, 
1905.     See  also  Wilson,  "Archiv  f.  entwick.  Mechanik,"  12,  1901. 


852  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    REPRODUCTION. 

and  it  is  suggested  that  the  activity  of  these  cells  enables  the  ovum 
to  become  attached  to  the  decidual  membrane  and  to  hollow  out 
spaces  in  which  the  chorionic  papilla  become  inserted.*  The  further 
development  of  the  egg  into  a  fetus,  the  formation  of  the  decidua 
graviditatis,  and  the  placenta  are  anatomical  features  that  need 
not  be  described  here.  Details  of  these  structures  will  be  found 
in  works  on  anatomy,  embryology,  or  obstetrics. 

The  Nutrition  of  the  Embryo — Physiology  of  the  Placenta. 
— ^At  the  time  of  fertilization  the  ovum  contains  a  small  amount 
of  nutriment  in  its  cytoplasm.  The  amount,  however,  in  the  mam- 
mahan  ovum  is  small  and  suffices  probably  only  for  the  initial  stages 
of  growth.  When  the  ovum  becomes  implanted  in  the  decidual 
membrane  of  the  uterus  the  new  material  for  growth  must  be  ab- 
sorbed directly  from  the  maternal  blood  of  the  uterus.  Within 
a  short  time,  however,  the  chorionic  villi  begin  to  burrow  into  the 
uterine  membrane  at  the  point  of  attachment,  the  decidua  serotina, 
and  the  placenta  gradually  forms  as  a  definite  organ  for  the  control 
of  fetal  nutrition.  The  details  of  histological  structure  of  this 
organ  must  be  obtained  from  anatomical  sources.  For  the  purposes 
of  understanding  its  general  functions  it  is  sufficient  to  recall  that 
the  placenta  consists  essentially  of  vascular  chorionic  papillae  from 
the  fetus  bathed  in  large  blood-spaces  in  the  decidual  membrane  of 
the  mother.  The  fetal  and  the  maternal  blood  do  not  come  into 
actual  contact;  they  are  separated  from  each  other  by  the  walls  of 
the  fetal  blood-vessels  and  the  epithelial  layers  of  the  chorionic  vilH, 
but  an  active  diffusion  relation  is  set  up  between  them.  Nutritive 
material,  proteid,  fat,  and  carbohydrate,  and  oxygen  pass  from 
the  maternal  to  the  fetal  blood,  and  the  waste  products  of  fetal 
metabolism — carbon  dioxid,  nitrogenous  wastes,  etc.,  pass  from  the 
fetal  to  the  maternal  blood.  The  nutrition  of  the  fetal  tissues  is 
maintained,  in  fact,  in  much  the  same  way  as  though  it  were  an 
actual  part  of  the  maternal  organism.  That  material  passes  from 
the  maternal  to  the  fetal  blood  is  a  necessary  inference  from  the 
growth  of  the  fetus.  The  fact  has  also  been  demonstrated  repeat- 
edly by  direct  experiment.  Madder  added  to  the  food  of  the  mother 
colors  the  bones  of  the  embryo.  Salts  of  various  kinds,  sugar,  drugs, 
etc.,  injected  into  the  maternal  circulation  may  afterward  be  de- 
tected in  the  fetal  blood.  But  we  are  far  from  having  data  that 
would  justify  us  in  supposing  that  the  exchange  between  the 
two  bloods  is  effected  by  the  known  physical  processes  of  os- 
mosis, diffusion,  and  filtration.  The  difficulties  in  understanding 
the  exchange  in  this  case  are  the  same  as  in  the  absorption  of  nour- 
ishment by  the  tissues  generally.  It  is  perhaps  generally  assumed 
that  the  chorionic  villi  play  an  active  part  in  the  process,  func- 
*  See  Minot,  "  Transactions  of  the  American  Gynecological  Society, "  1904. 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  853 

tioning,  in  fact,  in  much  the  same  way  as  the  intestinal  villi.  This 
assumption  implies  that  the  epithelial  cells  of  the  villi  take  an  active 
part  in  the  absorption  of  material  b}^  virtue  of  activities  which  can 
not  be  wholly  explained,  but  which  without  doubt  are  due  to  the 
chemical  and  physical  properties  of  the  substance  of  which  they  are 
composed.  This  assumption  does  not  mean  that  the  simpler 
and  better  understood  physical  properties  of  diffusion  and  osmosis 
are  not  also  important.  The  respiratory  exchange  of  gases,  the 
diffusion  of  water,  salts,  and  sugar,  may  be  largely  controlled  in  this 
way.  There  are  no  facts  at  least  which  contradict  such  an  assump- 
tion. The  passage  of  fats  and  proteids,  however,  would  seem  to 
require  some  special  activity  in^the  chorionic  tissue,  which  may  be 
connected  with  the  presence  of  special  enzymes.  Glycogen  occurs 
in  the  placenta  itself  and  in  all  the  tissues  of  the  embryo  during  the 
period  of  most  active  growth.  In  the  later  period  of  embryonic 
life,  as  the  liver  assumes  its  functions,  the  glycogen  becomes 
more  localized  to  this  organ  and  disappears,  except  for  traces, 
in  the  skin,  lungs,  and  other  tissues  in  which  it  was  present  at 
first  in  considerable  quantities.  It  would  appear,  therefore,  that 
glycogen  (sugar)  represents  one  of  the  important  materials  for  the 
growth  of  the  embryo,  and  that  in  the  beginning  at  least  the  tissues 
generally  have  a  glycogenetic  power.  The  sugar  brought  to  the 
placenta  in  the  maternal  blood  passes  over  into  the  fetal  blood  and 
the  excess  beyond  that  immediately  consumed  is  deposited  in  the 
tissues  as  glycogen.  The  body  fat  of  the  fetus  is  at  first  slight  in 
amount,  but  after  the  sixth  month  begins  to  increase  with  some 
rapidity.  The  fat-forming  tissues  are  in  full  activity,  therefore, 
before  birth,  and  function  doubtless  in  the  same  way  as  in 
the  adult.  Before  birth  also  the  various  organs  begin  to  take  on 
their  normal  activity.  The  kidney  may  form  urine  long  before 
birth,  as  is  shown  by  the  presence  of  this  secretion  in  the  bladder, 
and,  shortly  before  birth  at  least,  it  has  the  power  of  producing 
hippuric  acid,  as  may  be  shown  by  injecting  benzoates  into  the 
blood  of  the  mother.  The  kidney  functions  of  the  embryo,  how- 
ever, are  doubtless  performed  chiefly  by  the  placenta  and  the 
kidney  of  the  mother  up  to  the  time  of  birth.  That  the  liver  also 
begins  to  assume  its  functions  early  is  showm  by  the  fact  that  from 
the  fifth  to  the  sixth  month  one  may  find  bile  in  the  gall-bladder. 
In  the  intestine,  colon,  there  is  found  also  a  collection  of  excrement, 
the  meconium,  which  shows  that  the  motor  and  secretory  functions 
of  the  intestinal  canal  may  be  present  in  the  last  months  of  fetal 
life.  From  the  pancreas  a  proteolytic  enz3'me  may  be  extracted  at 
the  time  of  birth  or  before,  but  the  amylolytic  enzyme  is  not  formed 
apparently  until  some  time  later.  It  is  stated,  at  least,  that  it  is 
not  present  at  birth.     In  general,  it  is  evident  that  for  a  long  period 


854  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    REPRODUCTION. 

the  maternal  organism  digests  and  prepares  the  food  for  the  embryo, 
excretes  the  wastes,  regulates  the  conditions  of  temperature,  etc., 
as  it  does  for  a  portion  of  its  own  substance,  but  as  the  fetus  ap- 
proaches term  its  tissues  and  organs  begin  to  assume  more  of  an 
independent  activity,  as  indeed  must  be  the  case  in  preparation 
for  the  sudden  change  at  birth.  In  this  respect,  as  in  all  parts  of 
the  reproductive  process,  we  meet  with  regulations  whose  mechanism 
is  but  diml}^  understood. 

Changes  in  the  Maternal  Organism  during  Pregnancy. — 
The  two  most  distinct  effects  upon  the  mother  that  result  from 
pregnancy  are  the  growth  of  the  uterus  and  of  the  mammary  gland. 
The  virgin  uterus  is  small  and  firm,  weighing  from  30  to  40  gms., 
while  at  the  end  of  pregnancy  it  may  weigh  as  much  as  1000  gms. 
This  great  increase  in  material  is  due  partly  to  the  growth  of  new 
muscular  tissue  and  partly  to  an  hypertrophy  of  the  muscle  already 
present.  In  the  uterus  at  term  the  muscle  cells  are  much  longer 
and  larger  than  in  the  organ  before  fertilization.  The  stimulus 
that  initiates  and  controls  this  new  growth  is  seemingly  the  fertil- 
ized ovum  itself,  but  the  physiological  means  employed  are  not 
comprehended.  We  know  from  experiments  upon  lower  animals 
(Rein)  that  when  all  connections  with  the  central  nervous  system 
are  severed  the  fetus  develops  normally  and  the  uterus  increases 
correspondingly  in  size  and  weight.  The  influence  of  the  ovum  on 
the  uterus  must  be  exerted,  therefore,  either  through  some  local 
nerve  centers  in  the  uterus,  or,  as  seems  much  more  probable, 
through  some  chemical  stimulus  which  it  gives  to  the  organ.  The 
effect  of  the  presence  and  growth  of  the  ovum  on  the  mammary 
gland  is  treated  in  a  separate  paragraph  below.  In  addition  to 
these  two  visible  effects  it  is  evident  that  the  growth  of  the  fetus 
has  an  important  influence  on  general  metabolism  and  therefore 
upon  the  whole  maternal  organism.  This  fact  is  indicated  by  the 
marked  changes  often  exhibited  in  the  physical  and  mental  con- 
dition of  the  mother.  It  is  shown  more  precisely  by  a  study  of  the 
nutritional  changes.  Numerous  investigations  have  been  made 
upon  this  side  especially  as  regards  the  nitrogen  equilibrium.  Dur- 
ing the  latter  part  of  pregnancy  especially  the  nitrogen  balance  is 
positive, — that  is,  nitrogen  is  stored  as  proteid, — due  doubtless 
both  to  the  growth  of  the  embryo  and  the  increase  in  material  in 
the  uterus  and  mammary  gland.  The  proportion  of  ammonia  in 
the  urine  increases  during  pregnancy  and  especially  during  labor 
(Slemmons*), — a  result  which  may  be  due  to  some  interference 
with  the  normal  functions  of  the  liver. 

Parturition. — The  fetus  "comes  to  term"  usually  in  the  tenth 
menstrual  period  after  conception, — that  is,  about  280  days  after 

*  Slemmons,  "The  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Reports,"  12,  111,  1904. 


THK  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  855 

the  last  menstruation.  The  actual  time  of  delivery,  however, 
shows  considerable  variation.  Deliver}^  occurs  in  consequence  of 
contractions,  more  or  less  periodical,  of  the  musculature  of  the 
uterus,  and  reflex  as  well  as  voluntary  contractions  of  the  abdom- 
inal muscles.  It  has  been  shown  that  delivery  may  occur  when  the 
nerves  connecting  the  uterus  with  the  central  nervous  system  are 
severed,  so  that  the  act  is  essentially  an  independent  function  of 
the  uteiiis,  although  under  normal  conditions  the  contractions  of 
this  organ  are  doubtless  influenced  by  reflex  effects  through  its 
extrinsic  nerves.  It  has  been  shown  that  contractions  of  the  gravid 
uterus  may  be  caused  by  stimulation  of  various  sensory  nerves,  and 
in  women  it  is  known  that  delivery  may  be  precipitated  prematurety 
by  various  mental  or  physical  disturbances.  The  interesting  prob- 
lem physiologically  is  to  determine  the  normal  factor  or  factors  that 
bring  on  uterine  contractions  at  term.  Various  more  or  less  unsatis- 
factory theories  have  been  proposed.  vSome  authors  attribute 
the  act  to  a  change  in  the  maternal  organism,  such  as  mechani- 
cal distension  of  the  uterus,  a  venous  condition  of  the  blood,  a 
degenerative  change  in  the  placenta,  etc.,  while  others  suppose  that 
the  initial  stimulus  comes  from  the  fetus.  In  the  latter  case  it 
is  suggested  that  the  increasing  metabolism  of  the  fetus  is  insuffi- 
ciently provided  for  b}'^  the  placental  exchange,  and  that  therefore 
certain  products  are  formed  which  serve  to  stimulate  the  uterus 
to  contraction. 

The  duration  of  the  labor  pains  is  variable,  but  usually  they  are 
longer  in  primiparip,  ten  to  twenty  hours  or  more,  than  in  multip- 
arse.  After  the  fetus  is  delivered  the  contractions  of  the  uterus 
continue  until  the  placenta  also  is  expelled  as  the  "after-birth." 
During  these  latter  contractions  the  fetal  blood  in  the  placenta  is, 
for  the  most  part,  squeezed  into  the  circulation  of  the  new-bom 
child.  The  hemorrhage  from  the  walls  of  the  uterus  due  to  the  rup- 
ture of  the  placenta  may  be  profuse  at  first,  but  under  normal  con- 
ditions is  soon  controlled  by  the  firm  contraction  of  the  uterine  walls. 

The  Mammary  Glands. — At  the  time  of  puberty  the  mam- 
mary glands  increase  in  size,  but  this  growth  is  confined  mainty 
to  the  connective  tissue;  the  true  glandular  tissue  remains  rudi- 
mentary and  functionless.  At  the  time  of  conception  the  gland- 
ular tissue  is  in  some  way  stimulated  to  growth.  Secreting  alveoli 
are  formed,  and  during  the  latter  part  of  pregnancy  they  produce 
an  incomplete  secretion,  scanty  in  amount,  known  as  colostrum. 
After  delivery  the  gland  evidently  is  again  brought  under  the 
influence  of  special  stimuli.  It  becomes  rapidly  enlarged  and  a 
more  abundant  secretion  is  formed.  For  the  first  day  or  two 
this  secretion  still  has  the  characteristics  of  colostrum,  but  on 
the  third  or  fourth  day  the  true  milk  is  formed  and  thereafter  is 


856  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   REPRODUCTION. 

produced  abundantly  during  the  period  of  lactation  under  the  in- 
fluence of  the  act  of  milking.  If  during  this  period  a  new  con- 
ception occurs  the  milk  secretion  is  altered  in  composition  and 
finally  ceases.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  act  of  nursing  is  aban- 
doned permanently  the  glands  after  a  preliminary  stage  of  turgid- 
ity  undergo  retrogressive  changes  that  result  in  the  cessation  of 
secretory  activity.  The  colostrum  secretion  that  occurs  during 
pregnancy  and  for  a  day  or  two  after  birth  differs  from  milk  in 
its  composition  and  histological  structure.  It  is  a  thin,  yellowish 
liquid  containing  a  larger  percentage  of  albumin  and  globulin 
and  a  smaller  percentage  of  milk-sugar  and  fat  than  normal  milk. 
Under  the  microscope  it  shows,  in  addition  to  some  fat  droplets, 
certain  large  elements, — the  colostrum  corpuscles.  These  con- 
sist of  spherical  cells  filled  with  fat  droplets,  and  are  most  probably 
leucocytes  filled  with  fat  which  they  have  ingested.  Colostrum 
corpuscles  may  occur  in  milk  whenever  the  secretion  of  the  gland 
is  interfered  with,  and  their  presence  may  be  taken  as  an  indi- 
cation of  an  incomplete  secretion. 

The  Connection  Between  the  Uterus  and  the  Mammary- 
Gland. — ^The  physiological  connection  between  the  uterus  and 
the  mammary  gland  is  shown  by  the  facts  mentioned  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph.  That  the  ovary  also  shares  in  this  influence 
either  directly  or  through  its  effect  on  the  uterus  is  shown  by 
the  fact  that  after  complete  ovariotomy  the  mammary  gland  under- 
goes atrophy.  This  undoubted  influence  of  one  organ  upon  the 
other  might  be  exerted  either  through  the  central  nervous  system 
or  by  way  of  the  circulation.  There  are  indications  that  the 
secretion  of  the  mammary  glands  is  under  the  control,  to  some 
extent  at  least,  of  the  central  nervous  system.  For  instance,  in 
women  during  the  period  of  lactation  cases  have  been  recorded 
in  which  the  secretion  was  altered  or  perhaps  entirely  suppressed 
by  strong  emotions,  by  an  epileptic  attack,  etc.  This  indication 
has  not  received  satisfactory  confirmation  from  the  side  of  exr 
perimental  physiology.  Eckhard  found  that  section  of  the  main 
nerve-trunk  supplying  the  gland  in  goats,  the  external  spermatic, 
caused  no  difference  in  the  quantity  or  quality  of  the  secretion. 
Rohrig  obtained  more  positive  results,  inasmuch  as  he  found  that 
some  of  the  branches  of  the  external  spermatic  supply  vasomotor 
fibers  to  the  blood-vessels  of  the  gland  and  influence  the  secretion 
of  milk  by  controlling  the  local  blood-flow  in  the  gland.  Section 
of  the  inferior  branch  of  this  nerve,  for  example,  gave  increased 
secretion,  while  stimulation  caused  diminished  secretion,  as  in  the 
case  of  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  to  the  kidney.  These  results 
have  not  been  confirmed  by  others — in  fact,  they  have  been  sub- 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS.  857 

jected  to  adverse  criticism — and  they  can  not,  therefore,  be  ac- 
cepted unhesitatingly. 

MironoAV*  reports  a  number  of  interesting  experiments  made 
upon  goats.  He  found  that  artificial  stimulation  of  sensory  nerves 
causes  a  diminution  in  the  amount  of  secretion,  thus  confirming 
the  opinion,  based  upon  observations  upon  the  human  being, 
that  in  some  way  the  central  nervous  system  exerts  an  influence 
on  the  mammary  gland.  When  the  mammary  glands  are  com- 
pletely isolated  from  their  connections  with  the  central  nervous 
system,  stimulation  of  an  afferent  nerve  no  longer  influences  the 
secretion.  Mironow  states  also  that,  although  section  of  the  ex- 
ternal spermatic  on  one  side  does  not  influence  the  secretion,  sec- 
tion of  this  nerve  on  both  sides  is  followed  by  a  marked  diminu- 
tion, and  the  same  result  is  obtained  when  the  gland  on  one  side 
is  completely  isolated  from  all  nervous  connections.  The  dimi- 
nution of  the  secretion  in  these  cases  comes  on  very  slowly, — 
after  a  number  of  days, — so  that  the  effect  can  not  be  attributed 
to  the  removal  of  definite  secretory  fibers.  Moreover,  after  ap- 
parently complete  separation  of  the  gland  from  all  its  extrinsic 
nerves,  not  only  does  the  secretion,  if  it  was  previously  present, 
continue  to  form,  although  less  in  quantity,  but  in  operations 
of  this  kind  upon  pregnant  animals  the  glands  increase  in  size 
during  pregnancy  and  become  functional  after  the  act  of  par- 
turition. This  latter  result  confirms  the  older  experiments  of 
Goltz,  Rein,  and  others,  according  to  which  section  of  all  the  nerves 
going  to  the  uterus  does  not  prevent  the  normal  effect  on  lactation 
after  delivery.  Regarding  the  question  of  the  existence  of  a  se- 
cretory nerve,  Bascht  reports  that  extirpation  of  the  celiac  gan- 
glion or  section  of  the  spermatic  nerve  does  not  prevent  the 
secretion,  but  causes  the  appearance  of  colostrum  corpuscles. 

Experiments,  therefore,  as  far  as  they  have  been  carried,  in- 
dicate that  the  gland  is  under  the  regulating  control  of  the  cen- 
tral nervous  system,  either  through  secretory  or  vasomotor  fibers, 
but  that  it  is  essentially  an  automatic  organ.  The  bond  of  con- 
nection between  it  and  the  uterus  seems  to  be,  in  part  if  not  entirely, 
through  the  blood  rather  than  through  the  nervous  system.  It 
should  be  added  that  a  definite  connection  between  the  nerve 
fibers  and  the  epithelial  cells  of  the  gland  has  been  described.  {_ 
If  this  fact  is  corroborated  it  would  amount  to  an  histological 
proof  of  the  existence  of  special  secretory  fibers,  but  the  physio- 
logical evidence  for  the  same  fact  is  unsatisfactory. 

As  was  said  in  speaking  of  the  histology  of  the  gland,  the  se- 

*"  Archives  des  sciences  biologiques,"  St.  Petersburg,  3,  353,  1894. 
t  Basch,  "Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  ii,  part  i,  1903. 
X  Am.stein,  "  Anatomischer  Anzeiger,"  10,  410,  1895. 


858  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

creting  alveoli  are  not  fully  formed  until  the  first  pregnancy.  Dur- 
ing the  period  of  gestation  the  epithelial  cells  multiply,  the  alveoli 
are  formed,  and  after  parturition  secretion  begins.  As  the  liquid 
is  formed  it  accumulates  in  the  enlarged  galactophorous  ducts,  and 
after  the  tension  has  reached  a  certain  point  further  secretion 
is  apparently  inhibited.  If  the  ducts  are  emptied,  by  the  infant 
or  otherwise,  a  new  secretion  begins.  The  emptying  of  the  ducts, 
in  fact,  seems  to  constitute  the  normal  physiological  stimulus  to 
the  gland-cells,  but  how  this  act  affects  the  secreting  cells,  whether 
reflexly  or  directly,  is  not  known. 

Composition  of  the  Milk. — The  composition  of  milk  is  com- 
plex and  variable.  The  important  constituents  are  the  fats,  held 
in  emulsion  as  minute  oil  droplets  and  consisting  chiefly  of  olein 
and  palmitin;  casein,  a  nucleo-albumin  which  clots  under  the  in- 
fluence of  rennin;  milk-albumin  or  lactalbumin,  a  proteid  resem- 
bling serum-albumin ;  lactose  or  milk-sugar ;  lecithin,  cholesterin, 
phosphocarnic  acid,  urea,  creatin,  citric  acid,  enzymes,  and  min- 
eral salts.  It  is  well  known  also  that  many  foreign  substances — 
drugs,  flavors,  etc. — introduced  with  the  food  are  secreted  in  the 
milk.  An  average  composition  is:  proteids,  1  to  2  per  cent.; 
fats,  3  to  4  per  cent.;  sugar,  6  to  7  per  cent.;  salts,  0.1  to  0.2  per 
cent.  The  fact  that  casein  and  milk-sugar  do  not  exist  preformed 
in  the  blood  is  an  argument  in  favor  of  the  view  that  they  are  formed 
by  the  secretory  metabolism  of  the  gland  cells.  The  special  com- 
position of  the  milk-fat  and  the  histological  appearance  of  the 
gland  cells  during  secretion  lead  to  the  view  that  the  fat  is  also 
constructed  within  the  gland  itself.  Bunge  has  called  attention 
to  the  fact  that  the  inorganic  salts  of  milk  differ  quantitatively 
from  those  in  the  blood-plasma  and  resemble  closely  the  propor- 
tions found  in  the  body  of  the  young  animal,  thus  indicating  an 
adaptive  secretion.  This  fact  is  illustrated  in  the  following  table 
giving  the  mineral  constituents  in  100  parts  of  ash: 

Young  Pup.     Dogs'  Milk.     Dogs'  Serum. 

KjO 8.5  10.7  2.4 

NaoC) 8.2  6.1  52.1 

CaO 35.8  34.4  2.1 

MgO 1.6  1.5  0.5 

FeA 0.34  0.14  0.12 

P.,0- 39.8  37.5  5.9 

CI.  .' 7.3  12.4  47.6 

On  account  of  the  use  of  cows'  milk  in  place  of  human  milk  in 
the  nourishment  of  infants  much  attention  has  been  given  to 
the  relative  composition  and  properties  of  the  two  secretions. 
The  chief  difference  between  the  two  lies  apparently  in  the  casein. 
The  casein  of  human  milk  is  smaller  in  amount,  curdles  in  looser 


THE  FEMALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS,  859 

flocks  than  that  of  cows'  milk,  and  seems  to  dissolve  more  easily 
and  completely  in  gastric  juice.  The  former  also  contains  rela- 
tively more  lecithin  and  less  ash,  particularly  the  lime  salts.  On 
the  other  hand,  cows'  milk  contains  less  sugar  and  fat.  In  using 
it,  therefore,  for  the  nutrition  of  infants  it  is  customary  to  add 
water  and  sugar.  The  composition  of  cows'  milk  is  so  well  known 
that  it  is  easy  to  modify  it  for  special  cases  according  to  the  in- 
dications. The  rules  for  this  procedure  will  be  found  in  works 
upon  pediatrics. 


CHAPTER  LIII. 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  MALE  REPRODUCTIVE  ORGANS* 

The  sexual  life  of  the  male  is  longer  than  that  of  the  female. 
Pubert}'  or  sexual  maturity  begins  somewhat  later, — ^in  tem- 
perate chmates  at  about  the  fifteenth  year;  but  there  is  no  dis- 
tinct limitation  of  the  reproductive  powers  in  old  age  correspond- 
ing to  the  menopause  of  the  female.  At  the  time  of  puberty  and 
for  a  short  preceding  period  the  boy  grows  more  rapidly  in  stature 
and  weight,  and  the  assumption  of  its  complete  functions  by  the 
testis  exerts  a  general  influence  upon  the  organism  as  a  whole. 
One  of  the  superficial  changes  at  this  period  which  is  Yeiy  e^'ident 
is  the  alteration  in  pitch  of  the  voice.  0\ving  to  the  rapid  growth 
of  the  larynx  and  the  vocal  cords  the  voice  becomes  markedly 
deeper,  and  the  change  is  in  some  cases  sufficiently  sudden  to  cause 
the  well-known  phenomenon  of  the  breaking  of  the  voice.  The 
neuromuscular  control  of  the  vocal  cords  becomes  for  a  time  un- 
certain. The  completion  of  puberty  can  not  be  determmed  in  the 
boy  ^^-ith  the  same  exactness  as  in  the  girl,  in  whom  menstruation 
furnishes  a  \-isible  sign  of  sexual  maturity.  ]iluch  of  the  sexual 
mechanism  may  be  fimctional  long  before  the  time  of  puberty, 
as  is  shovvn  by  the  presence  of  sexual  desire  and  the  possibihty 
of  erection;  but  fully  developed  spermatozoa  are  not  produced 
until  this  period,  and  indeed  the  presence  of  ripe  and  functional 
spermatozoa  in  the  testis  is  the  only  certain  sign  that  sexual  ma- 
turity has  been  attained.  Puberty  consists  in  the  maturation  of 
the  testis  in  the  male,  and  of  the  ovary  in  the  female. 

The  Properties  of  the  Spermatozoa. — The  development  and 
maturation  of  the  spermatozoa  in  the  testis  has  been  followed 
successfully  by  histological  means.  The  mother-cells  of  the  sper- 
matozoa, the  spermatocytes,  give  rise  to  four  daughter-cells,  sper- 
matids, each  of  which  deA'elops  into  a  functional  spermatozoon. 
The  process  in  this  case  is  something  more  than  mere  cell  division, 
since  in  the  spermatozoa  eventually  produced  the  number  of 
chromosomes  present  in  the  nucleus — that  is,  the  head  of  the  sper- 
matozoon—are reduced  by  one-half.  The  process  of  production 
of  the  spermatozoa  is  therefore  quite  analogous  to  the  maturation 
of  the  0%-um  during  the  formation  of  the  polar  bodies.  The  forma- 
tion and  maturation  of  the  spermatozoa  may  be  represented  by 

860 


THE    MALE    REPRODUCTIVE    ORGANS.  861 

a  schema  similar  to  that  used  in  the  case  of  the  ova,  as  follows 
(Fig.  272).  In  the  case  of  the  ovum  four  ova  are  produced,  but 
only  one  is  functional,  and  this  one,  the  ripe  egg,  is  characterized 
by  its  large  amount  of  cytoplasm,  its  inability  to  undergo  further 
cell  division  until  fertilized,  owing  probably  to  its  loss  of  the  cen- 
trosome, — and  the  reduction  of  its  chromosomes  to  half  the  num- 
ber characteristic  of  the  body  cells  of  the  species.  In  the  case 
of  the  spermatozoa,  the  four  cells  produced  are  all  functional* 
and  are  characterized  by  the  practical  loss  of  cj^toplasm,  reduc- 
tion of  chromosomes  by  one-half,  and  inability  to  multiply  until 
cell  material  is  furnished.  The  two  cells  supplement  each  other, 
therefore.  Their  union  restores  the  normal  number  of  chromo- 
somes, part  of  which  are  now  maternal  and  part  paternal;  the  egg 
supphes  the  cytoplasm  and  the  spermatozoon  the  centrosome, — 
the  two  necessary  factors  in  cell  multiplication. 

The  spermatozoa  are  produced  in  enormous  numbers.  It  is 
calculated  that  at  ejaculation  each  cubic  centimeter  of  the  .liquid 
contains  from  sixty  to  seventy 

millions   of  these   cells.      The  <» Primary 

adult    ripe     spermatozoon    is  /  \  spermatoo  e. 

characterized  as  an  independ-  J        V Secondary 

ent  cell  by  its  great  motiUty,  A  T^  spermatocytes 

due  to  the   cilia-like  contrac-       J    \,    J    \, 

tions  of  its  tail.     Its  power  of       T       ^  permati 

movement    or    its  ^'itality    is       I 

retained  under  favorable  con-       •      •   •      • Spermatozoa. 

ditionS   for   Verv^    long    periods.  ^ig.    272.— Schema  to  indicate  the  proc- 

.  '.  .  ess    of    maturation    of    the   spermatozoa. — 

The  most  striking  instance  of      {Boven). 
this  fact  is  found  in  the  case 

of  bats.  In  these  animals  copulation  takes  place  in  the  fall  and 
the  uterus  of  the  female  retains  the  spermatozoa  in  activity  until 
the  period  of  ovulation  in  the  following  spring.  Even  in  the  human 
being  it  is  believed  that  the  spermatozoa  may  exist  for  many  da^'S 
in  the  uterus  and  Fallopian  tubes  of  the  female.  In  the  semen  that 
is  ejaculated  during  coitus  the  spermatozoa  are  mixed  "udth  the 
secretions  of  the  accessory  reproductive  glands,  such  as  the  seminal 
vesicles,  the  prostate  gland,  and  Cowper's  gland.  The  specific  in- 
fluence of  each  of  these  secretions  is  not  entirely  understood,  but 
experiments  show  that  in  some  way  they  are  essential  to  or  aid 
greatly  in  maintaining  the  motility  of  the  spermatozoa.  Steinachf 
has  found,  for  example,  that  removal  of  the  prostate  gland  and 

*It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  in  some  cases  (bees)  two  kinds  of  spennatids 
are  formed  by  an  unequal  division  of  the  spennatoc}i:e,  and  the  smaller 
of  the  two  is  aborti"\'e,  as  in  the  case  of  the  polar  bodies  of  the  egg. 

t  See  Steinach,  "  Archiv  f.  d.  gesammte  Physiologie,"  56, 1894,  and  Walker, 
"Archiv  f.  Anatomie  u.  Physiologie,"  1899,  p.  313. 


862  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    REPRODUCTION. 

seminal  vesicles  in  white  rats  prevents  successful  fertilization  of  the 
female,  although  the  ability  and  desire  to  copulate  is  not  interfered 
with.  Direct  experiments  show  that  the  secretion  of  the  prostate 
gland  maintains  motility  much  more  efficiently  than  a  solution  of 
physiological  saline.  It  seems  certain  that  the  secretions  of  the  mu- 
cous membrane  of  the  uterus  and  Fallopian  tubes  exercise  a  similar 
favorable  influence.  Kolliker  and  others  have  investigated  the 
action  of  many  substances  upon  the  motility  of  the  spermatozoa, 
such  as  acids,  alkalies,  salts  of  various  kinds  and  in  different  con- 
centrations, sugar,  ethereal  oils,  etc.  The  union  of  spermatozoon 
and  ovum  is  believed  to  take  place  usually  in  the  Fallopian  tube, 
and  under  normal  conditions  only  one  spermatozoon  penetrates 
into  the  egg.  The  remainder  of  the  infinite  number  that  may  be 
present  eventually  perish.  The  changes  that  take  place  during 
the  process  of  fertilization  have  already  been  described  (p.  850). 
Chemistry  of  the  Spermatozoa. — Much  chemical  work  has 
been  done  upon  the  composition  of  spermatozoa,  particularly  in 
the  fishes.  The  results  have  been  most  interesting  from  a  chem- 
ical standpoint,  and  biologically  they  are  suggestive  in  that  the 
analytical  work  has  been  done  upon  the  heads  of  the  spermatozoa. 
These  heads  consist  entirely  of  nuclear  material,  and  constitute 
the  substance  which  conveys  the  hereditary  characteristics  of  the 
father.  Whatever  progress  may  be  made  in  the  understanding 
of  the  chemistry  of  this  material  is  a  step  toward  the  solution  of 
the  most  difficult  and  mysterious  side  of  reproduction,  the  power 
of  hereditary  transmission.  Miescher  in  investigations  upon  the 
spermatozoa  of  salmon  discovered  that  the  heads  are  composed 
essentially  of  an  organic  combination  of  phosphoric  acid,  since 
designated  as  nucleic  acid,  united  with  a  basic  albuminous  body, 
protamin.  This  view  has  been  confirmed  and  extended  by  later 
observers,  especially  Kossel  and  his  pupils.*  The  head  of  the 
spermatozoon,  the  male  pronucleus  in  fertilization,  might  be  de- 
fined, in  the  case  of  the  fishes  at  least,  as  "a  salt  of  an  organic 
base  and  an  organic  acid,  a  protamin-nucleic  acid  compound." 
The  term  protamin  is  used  now  to  designate  a  group  of  closely 
related  substances  obtained  from  the  spermatozoa  of  different 
animals.  The  special  protamin  of  each  species  is  designated  ac- 
cording to  the  zoological  name  of  that  species;  thus  the  protamin 
of  salmon  is  salmin,  of  hering  (Clupea  harengus)  clupein,  and  so  on. 
The  protamins  are  all  strong  bases;  their  aqueous  solutions  give 
an  intense  alkaline  reaction,  and  they  unite  readily  with  various 
acids  to  form  well-defined  salts.  They  are  albuminous  bodies, 
giving  the  biuret  reaction  readily  even  without  the  addition  of 

*  For  literature  and  details  of  the  chemistry  of  spermatozoa  see  Burian, 
in  "  Ergebnisse  der  Physiologie,"  vol.  iii,  part  i,  1904. 


THE    MALE    REPRODUCTIVE    ORGANS.  863 

alkali,  and  they  are  precipitated  by  most  of  the  general  precipitants 
of  proteids,  such  as  the  neutral  salts,  the  alkaloidal  reagents,  etc. 
Their  solutions,  however,  are  not  coagulated  by  heat.  The  molec- 
ular formula  for  salmin  is  given  as  CgoHg^N^^Og.  When  decom- 
posed by  the  action  of  acids  they  yield  simpler  basic  products, 
the  so-called  hexon  bases  or  diamido-acids,  and  particularly  the 
base  arginin  (CgHj^N^Og),  which  is  contained  in  the  protamin  of 
the  spermatozoa  in  greater  abundance  than  in  any  other  proteid. 
The  protamins  differ  from  most  other  proteid  compounds  by  their 
relative  simplicity;  they  contain  no  cystin  grouping,  therefore  no 
sulphur;  no  carbohydrate  grouping  in  most  of  the  compounds 
examined;  and  no  tyrosin  complex.  In  the  spermatozoa  of  some 
fishes  the  protamins  are  replaced  by  more  complex  compounds 
belonging  to  the  group  of  histons  which  show  properties  somewhat 
intermediate  between  those  of  protamins  and  ordinary  proteids. 
It  should  be  added  that  these  albuminous  bases,  protamins,  have 
been  obtained  so  far  only  from  the  spermatozoa  of  the  fishes  and 
some  of  the  invertebrates.  Efforts  to  obtain  similar  compounds 
from  the  sperm  of  mammals  have  been  so  far  unsuccessful.  The 
nucleic  acid  component  of  the  spermatozoon  resembles  the  same 
substance  as  obtained  from  the  nuclei  of  other  cells.  In  the 
spermatozoa  of  the  salmon  this  nucleic  acid  has  the  formula  C^oHgg- 
Nj^P^Ojg-  On  decomposition  by  hydrolysis  it  yields  at  first  some 
of  the  purin  bases  (adenin,  guanin),  and  on  deeper  cleavage  a 
number  of  compounds  including  the  pyrimidin  derivatives,  thymin, 
uracil,  and  cytosin. 

The  Act  of  Erection. — In  the  sexual  life  of  the  male  the  act  of 
erection  of  the  penis  during  coitus  offers  a  most  striking  physical 
phenomenon.  During  this  act  the  penis  becomes  hard  and  erect, 
owing  to  an  engorgement  with  blood.  The  structure  of  the  corpora 
cavernosa  and  corpus  spongiosum  is  adapted  to  this  function,  being 
composed  of  relatively  large  spaces  inclosed  in  trabeculse  of  connec- 
tive and  plain  muscle  tissue, — the  so-called  erectile  tissue.  Many 
theories  have  been  proposed  to  explain  the  mechanism  of  erection, 
but  it  is  generally  agreed  that  the  work  of  Eckhard  *  demonstrated 
the  essential  facts  in  the  process.  This  investigator  discovered  that 
in  the  dog  stimulation  of  the  nervi  erigentes  causes  erection.  These 
nerves  are  composed  of  autonomic  fibers  arising  from  the  sacral  por- 
tion of  the  spinal  cord  (see  Figs.  104  and  105).  They  arise  from  the 
sacral  spinal  nerves,  first  to  third  (dog),  on  each  side  and  help  to 
form  the  pelvic  plexus.  They  contain  vasodilator  fibers  to  the  penis, 
as  well  as  to  the  rectum  and  anus,  and  also  visceromotor  fibers  to  the 
descending  colon,  rectum,  and  anus.     Eckhard,  Loven,  and  others 

*  Eckhard,  "  Beitrage  zur  Anatomie  und  Physiologie,"  3,  123,  1863,  and 
4,  69,  1869. 


864  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

have  shown  that  when  these  fibers  are  stimulated  there  is  a  large 
dilatation  of  the  arterioles  in  the  erectile  tissue  of  the  penis  and  a 
greatly  augmented  blood-flow  to  the  organs.  If  the  erectile  tissue 
is  cut  or  the  dorsal  vein  is  opened  the  blood-flow  under  usual  con- 
ditions is  a  slow  stream ;  but  when  the  nervus  erigens  is  stimulated 
the  outflow  is  very  greatly  increased;  according  to  Eckhard's 
measurements,  eight  to  fifteen  times  more  blood  flows  out  of  the 
organ.  The  act  of  erection  is  therefore  due  essentially  to  a  vas- 
cular dilatation  of  the  small  arteries  whereby  the  cavernous  spaces 
become  filled  with  blood  under  considerable  pressure.  The  caver- 
nous tissues  are  distended  to  the  limits  permitted  by  their  tough, 
fibrous  wall.  It  seems  probable  that  the  turgidity  of  the  organ  is 
aided  also  by  a  partial  occlusion  of  the  venous  outflow,  which  is 
effected  by  a  compression  of  the  dorsal  vein  by  means  of  the 
muscle  of  Houston.  This  explanation  of  the  act  of  erection,  while 
no  doubt  correct  so  far  as  it  goes,  leaves  undetermined  the  means 
by  which  the  dilatation  of  the  small  arteries  is  produced.  Vaso- 
dilator nerve  fibers  in  general  are  assumed  to  produce  a  dilatation 
by  inhibiting  the  peripheral  tonicity  of  the  arterial  walls.  If  this 
explanation  is  apphed  to  the  case  under  consideration  it  forces  us  to 
believe  that  throughout  life,  except  for  the  very  occasional  acts  of 
erection,  the  arteries  in  the  penis  are  kept  in  a  constant  condition 
of  active  tone.  Moreover,  on  this  view  we  should  expect  that 
section  of  the  vasoconstrictor  fibers  to  the  penis  by  abolishing  the 
tone  of  the  arteries  would  also  cause  erection.  These  constrictor 
fibers  arise  from  the  second  to  fifth  lumbar  spinal  nerves,  and  reach 
the  organ  by  way  of  the  pudic  nerve  or  the  hypogastric  (pelvic) 
plexus.  No  such  result  of  their  section  is  reported  and  it  seems  that 
in  the  matter  of  erection  the  actual  mechanism  of  the  great  dilata- 
tion caused  by  the  nervi  erigentes  still  remains  to  be  investigated. 
The  Reflex  Apparatus  of  Erection  and  Ejaculation. — The 
dilatation  of  the  arteries  of  the  penis  during  erection  is  normally  a 
reflex  act,  effected  through  a  center  in  the  lumbar  cord.  This  center 
may  be  acted  upon  by  impulses  descending  from  the  brain,  as 
in  the  case  of  erotic  sensations,  or  by  afferent  impulses  arising  in 
some  part  of  the  genital  tract, — from  the  testes  themselves,  from 
the  urethra  or  prostate  gland,  and  especially  from  the  glans  penis. 
Mechanical  stimulation  of  the  glans  leads  to  erection,  and  Eckhard 
showed  in  dogs  that  section  of  the  pudic  nerve  prevents  this  reflex 
from  occurring,  proving,  therefore,  that  the  sensory  fibers  concerned 
run  in  the  pudic  nerve.  Stimulation  of  these  latter  fibers  leads  also 
to  erotic  sensations  and  eventually  to  the  completion  of  the  sexual 
orgasm.  This  latter  act  brings  about  the  forcible  ejection  of  the 
sperm  through  the  urethra.  It  is  initiated  by  contractions  of  the 
musculature  of  the  vasa  deferentia,  ejaculatory  duct,  the  seminal 


THE    MALE   REPRODUCTIVE   ORGANS.  865 

vesicles,  and  the  prostate  gland,  which  force  the  spermatozoa,  to- 
gether with  the  secretions  of  the  vesicles  and  prostate  gland,  into 
the  urethra,  whence  they  are  expelled  in  the  culminating  stage  of 
the  orgasm  by  the  rhythmical  contractions  of  the  ischiocavernosus 
and  bulbocavernosus  muscles,  together  with  the  constrictor  urethrje. 
The  immediate  center  for  this  complex  reflex  is  assumed  to  lie  in 
the  lumbar  cord,  since,  according  to  the  experiments  of  Goltz, 
mechanical  stimulation  of  the  glans  in  dogs  causes  erection  and 
seminal  emission  after  the  lumbar  cord  is  severed  from  the  rest  of 
the  central  nervous  system.  Under  ordinary  conditions  the  act  is 
accompanied  by  strong  psychical  reactions  which  indicate  that 
the  cortical  region  of  the  cerebrum  is  involved.  It  is  interesting  in 
this  connection  to  find  that  electrical  stimulation  of  a  definite  re- 
gion in  the  cortex*  of  dogs  may  cause  erection  and  ejaculation. 

*  Pussep,    quoted   from    Hermann's    "  Jahresbericht    der    Phvsiologie," 
vol.  xi,  1903. 


55 


CHAPTER  LIV. 

HEREDITY— DETERMINATION  OF  SEX— GROWTH  AND 

SENESCENCE. 

Heredity. — The  development  of  the  fertiUzed  ovum  offers  two 
general  phenomena  for  consideration:  First,  the  mere  fact  of  mul- 
tiplication by  which  an  infinite  number  of  cells  are  produced  by 
successive  cell-divisions;  second,  the  fact  that  these  cells  become 
differentiated  in  structure  in  an  orderly  and  determinate  way  so  as 
to  form  an  organism  of  definite  structure  like  those  which  gave 
origin  to  the  ovum  and  the  spermatozoon.  In  other  words,  the 
fertilized  ovum  possesses  a  property  which,  for  want  of  a  better 
term,  we  may  designate  as  a  form-building  power.  It  is  this  last 
peculiarity  which  is  included  under  the  term  heredity.  The  ovum 
develops  true  to  its  species,  or,  indeed,  more  or  less  strictly  in  accord- 
ance with  the  peculiarities  of  structure  characteristic  of  its  parents. 
The  object  of  a  complete  theory  of  heredity  is  to  ascertain  the  me- 
chanical causes — that  is,  the  physicochemical  properties — resi- 
dent in  the  fertihzed  ovum  which  impel  it  to  follow  in  each  case  a 
definite  line  of  development.  The  discussions  upon  this  point  have 
centered  around  two  fundamentally  different  conceptions  designated 
as  evolution  and  epigenesis. 

Evolution  and  Epigenesis. — The  earlier  embryologists  found  a 
superficial  explanation  of  this  problem  in  the  view  that  in  the  germ 
cells  there  exists  a  miniature  animal  already  preformed,  and  that 
its  development  under  the  influence  of  fertihzation  consists  in  a 
process  of  growth  by  means  of  which  the  minute  organism  is 
unfolded,  as  it  were.  The  process  of  development  is  a  process  of 
evolution  of  a  pre-existing  structure.  Inasmuch  as  countless  in- 
dividuals develop  in  successive  generations,  it  was  assumed  also 
that  in  the  germ  cell  there  are  included  countless  miniature  organ- 
isms,— one  incased,  as  it  were,  in  the  other.  Some  of  the  embry- 
ologists of  that  period  conceived  that  the  undeveloped  embryos  are 
contained  in  the  ovum, — the  ovists, — ^while  others  believed  that 
they  are  present  in  the  spermatozoon,  the  animalculists.  Other 
embryologists  pointed  out  that  the  fertilized  egg  shows  no  indication 
of  a  preformed  structure,  and  therefore  concluded  that  development 
starts  from  an  essentially  structureless  cell  and  consists  in  the 
successive  formation  and  addition  of  new  parts  which  do  not  pre- 

866 


HEREDITY.  867 

exist  as  such  in  the  fertilized  egg.  This  view  in  contradistinction 
to  the  evokition  theory  was  designated  as  epigenesis.  Microscopi- 
cal investigation  has  demonstrated  beyond  all  doubt  that  the  fer- 
tilized ovum  is  a  simple  cell  devoid  of  any  parts  or  organs  resem- 
bling those  of  the  adult,  and  the  evolution  theory  in  its  crude  form 
has  been  entirely  disproved.  Nevertheless  the  controversy  be- 
tween the  evolutionists  and  epigenesists  still  exists  in  modified 
form.  For  it  is  evident  that  in  the  fertilized  ovum  there  may  exist 
preformed  mechanisms  or  complexes  of  molecules  which,  while  in  no 
way  resembling  anatomically  the  subsequently  developed  parts  of 
the  organism,  nevertheless  are  the  foundation  stones,  to  use  a  figure 
of  speech,  upon  which  the  character  of  the  adult  structure  depends. 
Such  a  view  in  one  form  or  another  is  probably  held  by  most  bi- 
ologists, since  it  avoids  the  well-nigh  inconceivable  difficulties  of- 
fered by  a  completely  epigenetic  theory.  If  the  fertilized  ovum 
of  one  animal  is  in  the  beginning  substantially  similar  to  that  of 
any  other  animal  the  epigenesist  must  ascertain  what  combination 
of  conditions  during  the  process  of  development  causes  the  egg, 
in  a  dog,  for  instance,  to  develop  always  into  a  dog,  and  moreover 
into  a  certain  species  of  dog  resembling  more  or  less  exactly  the 
parent  organisms.  The  infinite  difficulties  offered  to  such  a  point 
of  view  are  apparent  at  once.  In  this,  as  in  other  similar  problems, 
experimental  work  is  gradually  accumulating  facts  which  throw 
some  light  upon  the  matter  and  may  eventually  lead  us  to  the  right 
point  of  view.  It  has  been  made  highly  probable  that  the  chro- 
matin material  in  the  nuclei  of  the  germ  cells,  the  chromosomes, 
constitute  the  physical  basis  of  hereditary  transmission.  In  the 
fertilized  egg,  it  will  be  remembered,  half  of  the  chromosomes  come 
from  the  mother  and  half  from  the  father,  and  there  is  good  reason 
for  believing  that  the  maternal  chromosomes  are  the  bearers  of  the 
maternal  characteristics,  and  the  chromosomes  derived  from  the 
spermatozoon  convey  the  hereditary  peculiarities  of  the  father. 
Such  a  view,  it  will  be  noticed,  implies  at  once  preformed  structures 
in  the  chromosomes  and  constitutes  one  form  of  an  evolutionary 
hypothesis.  This  view  is  further  supported  by  the  interesting  ex- 
periments of  Wilson.* 

This  author  has  shown  that  in  certain  molluscs  (Dentalium  or 
Patella)  if  a  portion  of  the  egg  is  cut  off,  the  remaining  portion  upon 
fertilization  develops  into  a  defective  animal  that  is  not  a  whole 
embryo,  but  rather  a  piece  or  fragment  of  an  embryo.  Or  if  the 
fertilized  egg  after  its  first  segmentation  is  separated  artificially 
into  two  independent  cells  each  develops  an  embryo,  but  neither  one 
is  completely  formed, — each  is  lacking  in  certain  structures  and 

*  Wilson,  "Science,"  February  24,  1905,  for  a  popular  discussion;  also 
"Journal  of  Experimental  Zoology,"  1,  1  and  197,  1904,  and  2,  371,  1905. 


868  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

the  two  must  be  taken  together  to  constitute  an  entirely  normal 
animal.  By  experiments  of  this  kind  it  has  been  shown  that  cer- 
tain definite  portions  of  the  egg  are  responsible  for  the  formation 
of  particular  organs  in  the  adult.  If  these  portions  of  the  egg  are 
removed  the  organs  in  question  are  not  developed.  Facts  of  this 
kind  lead  to  the  evolutionary  view  that  in  the  fertilized  ovum  there 
is  a  collection  of  different  materials  designated  as  formative  stuffs 
each  of  which  is  specific, — that  is,  develops  into  a  special  structure. 
Many  facts  connected  with  the  regeneration  of  parts, — regeneration 
of  a  lost  leg  in  a  crab,  for  example — may  be  used  to  support  a  similar 
view  of  the  existence  of  specific  formative  stuffs  in  the  cells  of  the 
body.*  Wilson  has  suggested  an  attractive  theory  which  seems  to 
account  for  the  facts  known  at  present  and  forms  an  acceptable  com- 
promise between  the  extremes  of  epigenesis  and  evolution.  Accord- 
ing to  him,  the  germ  (fertilized  ovum)  contains  two  elements,  one  of 
which  undergoes  a  development  that  is  essentially  epigenetic,  while 
the  other  contains  a  preformed  structure  which  controls  and  deter- 
mines the  course  of  development.  The  first  is  represented  by  the 
cytoplasm  of  the  egg,  the  second  by  the  chromatin  (chromosomes) 
of  the  nucleus.  The  latter  have  specific  structures,  and  under  their 
influence  the  nutritive  undifferentiated  material  of  the  cytoplasm 
is  modified  to  form  specific  formative  stuffs  differing  in  character 
in  the  developing  ova  of  different  animals.  Maii}^  interesting  gen- 
eral theories  of  heredity  have  been  proposed  by  Darwin,  Nageli, 
Weissmann,  Mendel,  Galton,  Brooks,  and  others.  It  is  impossible 
to  give  here  an  outline  of  these  theories ;  the  reader  is  referred  for 
such  information  to  special  treatises  on  the  subject,  f 

Determination  of  Sex. — The  conditions  which  lead  to  the 
determination  of  the  sex  of  the  developing  ovum  have  attracted 
much  investigation  and  speculation.  In  the  absence  of  precise 
data  very  numerous  and  oftentimes  very  peculiar  theories  have 
been  advanced,  f  Such  views  as  the  following  have  been  main- 
tained: that  the  sex  is  determined  by  the  ova  alone;  that  it  is 
determined  by  the  spermatozoa  alone;  that  one  side  (right  ovary 
or  testis)  contains  male  elements,  the  other  female ;  that  the  sex 
is  a  result  of  the  interaction  of  the  ovum  and  spermatozoon,  the 
most  virile  element  producing  its  own  sex,  or  according  to  another 
possibility  "the  superior  parent  produces  the  opposite  sex";  that 
the  sex  depends  on  the  time  relation  of  coitus  to  menstruation, 

*  For  a  discussion  of  these  facts  and  for  various  hypotheses  see  Morgan, 
"Regeneration."     New  York,  1901. 

t  Hertwig,  "  The  Biological  Problems  of  To-day,"  and  Delage,  "  L'heredite 
et  les  grands  problemes  de  la  biologie  generale,"  1903. 

t  For  recent  accounts  of  the  various  theories  and  discussion  see  Mor- 
gan, "Popular  Science  Monthly,"  December,  1903;  Lenhossek,  "Das  Problem 
der  geschlechtsbestimmenden  Ursachen,"  1903. 


DETERMINATION    OF    SEX.  869 

fertilization  before  menstruation  favoring  male  births,  after  men- 
struation female  births;  that  it  depends  upon  the  nutritive  con- 
ditions of  the  ovum  during  development  or  of  the  maternal  parent ; 
that  it  depends  upon  the  relative  ages  of  the  parents;  that  there 
are  preformed  male  and  female  ova  and  male  and  female  sper- 
matozoa, etc.  What  we  may  call  the  scientific  study  of  the  problem 
began  with  the  collection  of  statistics  of  births.  Statistics  in  Europe 
of  5,935,000  births  indicate  that  106  male  children  are  born  to 
100  female,  and  the  data  from  other  countries  show  the  same 
fact  of  an  excess  of  male  children.  Examination  of  these  statistics 
with  reference  to  determining  conditions  led  to  the  formulation 
of  the  so-called  Hof acker-Sadler  law  or  laws,  which  may  be  stated 
as  follows:  (1)  When  the  man  is  older  than  the  woman  the  ratio 
of  male  births  is  increased  (113  to  100).  (2)  When  the  parents  are 
of  equal  age  the  ratio  of  female  births  is  increased  (93.5  males  to 
100  females).  (3)  When  the  woman  is  older  the  ratio  of  female 
births  is  still  further  increased  (88.2  to  100).  These  laws' have 
been  corroborated  by  some  statisticians  and  contradicted  or  modi- 
fied by  others.  Ploss  attempted  to  show  that  poor  nutritive  con- 
ditions affecting  the  parents,  especially  the  mother,  favor  the 
birth  of  boys.  Busing  combined  these  results  in  a  sort  of  general 
compensatory  law  of  nature,  according  to  which  a  deficiency  in 
either  sex  leads,  by  a  process  of  natural  selection,  to  an  increase 
in  the  births  of  the  opposite  sex.  Thus,  when  males  are  few  in 
number, — as  the  result,  for  instance,  of  wars, — females  marry 
later,  and  according  to  the  Hofacker-Sadler  law  more  males  are 
produced.  When  males  are  in  excess  early  marriages  are  the  rule 
and  this  condition  favors  an  excess  of  female  births.  However 
interesting  these  statistics  may  be,  it  is  very  evident  that  they 
do  not  touch  the  real  problem  of  the  cause  of  the  determination 
of  sex. 

Modern  work  has  turned  largely  to  observations  and  direct 
experiments  upon  the  lower  animals,  particularly  the  inverte- 
brates, with  the  result  that  a  very  large  number  of  facts  have 
been  collected  of  a  most  interesting  kind^  but  difficult  as  yet  to 
interpret  so  as  to  formulate  a  general  law.  The  trend  of  modern 
work,  however,  tends  to  oppose  an  older  view  founded  largely 
upon  experiments  on  frogs,  ^^ees,  and  wasps,  according  to  which 
the  sex  is  not  determined  at  or  before  fertilization,  but  is  con- 
trolled or  may  be  controlled  by  the  conditions  of  nourishment 
during  development,  favorable  conditions  of  nutriment  leading 
to  the  development  of  female  cells  from  the  germinal  epithelium 
of  the  embryo.  The  general  opinion  at  present  seems  to  be  that 
the  sex  of  the  embryo  is  determined  in  the  egg  before  fertilization 
or  at  the  time  of  fertilization.     This  view  assumes  substantially 


870  THE    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   REPRODUCTION. 

that  there  are  male  and  female  eggs  to  begin  with,  and  that 
the  determination  of  sex  resides  in  the  maternal  organism  alone. 
Some  of  the  facts  that  support  this  view  with  more  or  less  con- 
clusiveness are  as  follows:  (1)  In  certain  worms  (Dinophilus)  eggs 
of  two  sizes  are  produced;  the  large  eggs  on  fertilization  develop 
always  into  females,  the  small  ones  into  males.  Similar  facts  are 
recorded  for  other  animals  (Hydatina).  (2)  Many  species  of  in- 
vertebrates exhibit  the  phenomenon  of  parthenogenesis, — that  is, 
the  eggs  of  the  mother  develop  without  fertilization.  In  some 
cases  this  method  forms  the  only  means  of  reproduction,  and  the 
individuals  of  the  race  are  all  females.  But  in  other  animals  re- 
production is  effected  either  by  parthenogenesis  or  by  fertilization 
according  to  the  conditions, — change  of  seasons,  etc.  Among 
these  latter  animals  it  may  be  shown,  in  some  cases  at  least,  that 
the  parthenogenetic  eggs  may  give  rise  either  to  males  or  females, — 
a  fact  which  accords  with  the  hypothesis  of  the  existence  of  male 
and  female  eggs  in  the  mother.  (3)  In  man  twins  may  be  born. 
These  twins  may  be  of  two  kinds.  First,  those  that  are  developed 
from  two  different  eggs,  each  of  which  has  its  own  chorion  and 
develops  its  own  placenta.  This  kind  may  be  designated  as  false 
twins,  and  in  the  matter  of  sex  they  may  be  male  and  female, 
or  both  male,  or  both  female.  The  matter  varies  as  in  the  statis- 
tics of  births  in  general.  In  the  other  group,  however,  of  true 
twins  or  identical  twins,  the  two  embryos  are  developed  from  a 
single  ovum  and  are  included  in  a  single  chorion.  In  such  cases 
the  sexes  of  the  twins  are  always  the  same,  they  are  both  boys 
or  both  girls.  This  fact  speaks  strongly  in  favor  of  the  view  that 
the  sex  may  be  predetermined  in  the  ovum,  which  may  be  either 
male  or  female.  However,  if  we  grant  the  fundamental  fact,  so 
for  as  the  ova  are  concerned,  that  they  are  either  male  or  female 
at  the  time  of  formation  or  are  made  so  during  the  process  of  growth 
and  maturation,  it  is  still  logically  possible  that  there  may  also  be 
male  and  female  spermatozoa,  and  that  in  the  union  of  the  two  cells 
the  sex  of  the  fertilized  ovum  may  be  referable  either  to  the  ovum 
or  spermatozoon.  It  is  not  justifiable  to  assert  that  the  paternal 
organism  is  entirely  without  influence  upon  the  sex  of  the  offspring. 
In  fact,  in  the  case  of  honey  bees  it  is  observed  that  if  the  egg  of 
the  queen  bee  is  unfertilized  it  develops  into  a  male,  but,  if  fer- 
tilized, into  a  female,  thus  indicating  a  determining  influence  upon 
the  part  of  the  male  element.  If,  on  the  basis  of  this  fact,  we 
assume  the  existence  of  male  and  female  eggs  and  male  and  female 
spermatozoa  the  question  of  the  sex  of  the  offspring  would  seem 
to  depend  upon  which  of  the  sex-determining  structures  in  the 
two  cells  predominates  after  union.  Our  problem  still  remains 
unsolved,  although  reduced  to  a  narrower  field  for  observation 


GROWTH   AND    SENESCENCE.  871 

and  experiment.  It  may  be  stated,  in  conclusion,  that  Morgan 
advocates  a  conservative  view  according  to  which  the  egg,  as 
far  as  sex  is  concerned,  is  in  a  sort  of  balanced  condition  and  may 
be  thrown  to  the  side  of  male  development  or  female  development 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  stimulus  received.  Fertilization 
by  the  spermatozoon  presumably,  on  this  view,  is  only  one  of 
a  number  of  stimuli  which  may  determine  the  direction  of  sex 
development. 

Growth  and  Senescence. — The  body  increases  rapidly  after 
birth  in  size  and  weight.  It  is  the  popular  idea  that  the  rate  of 
growth  increases  up  to  maturity  and  then  declines  as  old  age  ad- 
vances. As  a  matter  of  fact,  careful  examination  of  the  facts  shows 
that  the  rate  of  growth  decreases  from  birth  to  old  age,  although  not 
uniformly.  At  the  pubertal  period  and  at  other  times  its  downward 
tendency  may  be  arrested  for  a  time.  But,  speaking  generally,  the 
maximum  rate  of  growth  is  reached  some  time  during  the  intra- 
uterine period,  and  after  birth  the  curve  falls  steadily.  Senescence 
has  begun  to  appear  at  the  time  we  are  born.*  Thus,  according  to 
the  statistics  of  Quetelet,  the  average  male  child  weighs  at  birth  6^ 
pounds.  At  the  end  of  the  first  year  it  weighs  18^  pounds,  a  gain  of 
12  pounds.  At  the  end  of  the  second  year  it  weighs  23  pounds,  a 
gain  of  only  4^  pounds,  and  so  on,  the  rate  of  increase  falling  rap- 
idly with  advancing  years.  The  actual  statistics  of  growth  have 
been  collected  and  tabulated  with  great  care  by  a  number  of  ob- 
servers ;  for  this  country  especially  by  Bowditch,  Porter,  and  Beyer.f 
An  interesting  feature  of  the  records  collected  by  Bowditch  is  the 
proof  that  the  prepubertal  acceleration  of  growth  comes  earlier 
in  girls  than  in  boys,  so  that  between  the  ages  of  twelve  and  fifteen 
the  average  girl  is  heavier  and  taller  than  the  boy.  Later,  the  boy's 
growth  is  accelerated  and  his  stature  and  weight  increase  beyond 
that  of  the  girl.  It  appears  from  the  examinations  made  upon 
school  children  by  Porter  and  by  Beyer  that  a  high  degree  of 
physical  development  is  usually  associated  with  a  corresponding 
pre-eminence  in  mental  ability.  The  signs  of  old  age  may  be  de- 
tected in  other  ways  than  by  observations  upon  the  rate  of  growth. 
Changes  take  place  in  the  composition  of  the  tissues;  these  changes, 
at  first  scarcely  noticeable,  become  gradually  more  obvious  as  old 
age  advances.  The  bones  become  more  brittle  from  an  increase  in 
their  inorganic  salts,  the  cartilages  become  more  rigid  and  calca- 
reous, the  cr}^stalline  lens  gradually  loses  its  elasticity,  the  muscles 
lose  their  vigor,  the  hairs  their  pigment,  the  nuclei  of  the  nerve 

*  See  Minot,  "  Journal  of  Physiology,"  12,  97. 

t  See  Bowditch,  "  Report  of  State  Board  of  Health  of  Massachusetts," 
1877,  1879,  and  1891;  Porter,  "Transactions,  Academy  of  Science,"  St. 
Louis,  1893-94;  Beyer,  "Proceedings,  United  States  Naval  Institute,"  21, 
297,  1895. 


872  THE    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   REPRODUCTION. 

cells  become  smaller,  and  so  on.  In  every  way  there  is  increasing 
evidence,  as  the  years  grow,  that  the  metabolism  of  the  living  mat- 
ter of  the  body  becomes  less  and  less  perfect ;  the  power  of  the 
protoplasm  itself  becomes  more  and  more  limited,  and  we  may 
suppose  would  eventually  fail,  bringing  about  what  might  be  called 
a  natural  death.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  death  of  the  organism  usually 
results  from  the  failure  of  some  one  of  its  many  complex  mechanisms, 
while  the  majority  of  the  tissues  are  still  able  to  rliaintain  their  exis- 
tence if  supplied  with  proper  conditions  of  nourishment.  The  phys- 
iological evidences  of  an  increasing  senescence  warrant  the  view, 
however,  that  death  is  a  necessary  result  of  the  properties  of  living 
matter  in  all  the  tissues  except  possibly  the  reproductive  elements. 
The  course  of  metabolism  is  such  that  it  is  self -limited,  and  even  if 
perfect  conditions  were  supplied  natural  death  would  eventually 
result.  We  do  not  understand  the  nature  of  these  limitations, — that 
is,  the  ultimate  causes  of  senescence.  Many  examples  of  unusual 
longevity  are  on  record,  the  most  authentic  being  probably  that  of 
Thomas  Parr.  An  account  of  his  life  and  the  results  of  a  postmor- 
tem examination  by  Harvey  are  given  in  volume  iii  of  the  ''Philo- 
sophical Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London."  "He  died 
after  he  had  outlived  nine  princes,  in  the  tenth  year  of  the  tenth  of 
them,  at  the  age  of  one  hundred  and  fifty- two  years  and  nine 
months."  The  immediate  cause  of  his  death  was  attributed  to  a 
change  of  food  and  air  and  habits  of  life,  as  he  was  brought  from  Shrop- 
shire to  London,  "where  he  fed  high  and  drunk  plentifully  of  the  best 
wines."  With  reference  to  the  phenomenon  of  senescense  as  a  neces- 
sary attribute  of  living  matter,  Weissmann  has  called  attention  to  the 
fact  that  inasmuch  as  the  species  continues  to  exist  after  the  in- 
dividual dies,  we  must  believe  that  the  protoplasm  of  the  repro- 
ductive elements  is  not  subject  to  natural  death,  but  has  a  self- 
perpetuating  metabolism  which  under  proper  conditions  makes  it 
immortal.  Weissmann*  designates  the  protoplasm  of  the  germ  cells 
as  germ-plasm,  that  of  the  rest  of  the  body  as  somatoplasm,  and 
inasmuch  as  the  former  continues  to  propagate  itself  indefinitely 
imder  proper  conditions,  while  the  latter  has  a  limited  existence,  he 
concludes  that  originally  protoplasm  possessed  the  property  of 
potential  immortality.  That  is,  barring  accidents,  disease,  etc.,  it 
was  capable  of  reproducing  itself  indefinitely.  He  assumes,  more- 
over, that  this  property  is  exhibited  at  present  in  many  of  the  sim- 
pler forms  of  life,  such  as  the  ameba.  This  latter  phase  of  his  theory 
has  been  the  subject  of  much  interesting  investigation,!  but  con- 

*  Weissmann,  "  Essays  upon  Heredity  and  Kindred  Biological  Prob- 
lems"; also  "Germ-plasm"  in  the  "Contemporary  Science  Series." 

t  See  Maupas,  "  Archives  de  zoologie  experimentale  et  generale,"  6, 
165,  1888;  .Joukowsky,  "Inaugural  Dissertation,"  Heidelberg,  1898;  Gotte, 
"  Ueber  den  Ursprung  des  Todes,"  1883. 


GROWTH   AND    SENESCENCE.  873 

elusive  results  have  not  been  reached.  Assuming  that  the  poten- 
tial immortality  exhibited  by  the  reproductive  cells  was  originally  a 
general  property  of  protoplasm,  Weissman  conceives  that  the  phe- 
nomenon of  senescence  and  death  exhibited  by  other  cells,  somato- 
plasm, is  a  secondary  property,  which  was  acquired  as  a  result  of 
variation  and  was  preserved  by  natural  selection  because  it  is  an 
advantage  in  the  propagation  of  the  species.  An  actual  immor- 
tality of  the  entire  organism, — that  is,  the  property  of  indefinite 
existence  except  as  death  might  be  caused  by  accidental  occur- 
rences of  various  kinds — would  be  a  disadvantage  in  many  ways. 
The  vast  increase  in  the  number  of  individuals  might  exceed  the 
capacity  of  nature  to  provide  for,  the  retention  of  the  maimed  and 
imperfect  would  make  many  useless  mouths  to  feed,  and  perhaps 
the  evolution  of  higher  and  more  perfect  forms  by  the  slow  action 
of  variation  and  natural  selection  would  be  retarded.  From  this 
point  of  view  senility  and  natural  death  constitute  a  beneficial 
adaptation,  acquired  because  of  its  utility  to  the  race,  on  the  one 
hand,  and,  on  the  other,  because,  after  the  beginning  of  a  differen- 
tiation in  function  among  the  cells,  the  possession  of  immortality 
by  all  the  cells  was  no  longer  of  any  value  to  the  race,  and  therefore 
was  not  brought  under  the  preserving  influence  of  natural  selection. 


APPENDIX. 


PROTEIDS  AND  THEIR  CLASSIFICATION. 

Definition  and  General  Structure. — Proteids. or  albumins  are  complex 
organic  compounds  containing  nitrogen  which,  although  differing  much  in 
their  composition,  are  related  in  their  properties.  They  are  formed  by 
living  matter,  and  occur  in  the  tissues  and  liquids  of  plants  'and  animals, 
of  which  they  form  the  most  characteristic  constituent.  On  ultimate  analy- 
sis they  are  all  found  to  contain  carbon,  hydrogen,  oxygen,  and  nitrogen; 
most  of  them  contain  also  some  sulphur,  and  some,  in  addition,  phosphorus 
or  iron.  As  usually  obtained,  they  leave  also  some  ash  when  incinerated, 
showing  that  they  hold  in  combination  some  inorganic  salts.  Percentage 
analyses  of  the  most  common  proteids  of  the  body  show  that  the  above 
named  constituents  occur  in  the  following  proportions : 

Carbon 50     to  55     per  cent. 

Hydrogen 6.5  to    7.3    "        " 

Nitrogen 15     to  17.6    "       " 

Oxygen 19     to  24      " 

Sulphur 0.3  to    2.4   "       " 

The  clearest  insight  into  the  structure  of  the  proteid  molecule  has  been 
obtained  by  a  study  of  its  decomposition  products.  When  submitted  to  the 
action  of  proteolytic  enzymes,  or  putrefaction,  or  acids  at  high  temperatures, 
the  large  molecules  split  into  a  number  of  simpler  bodies  in  consequence  of 
hydrolytic  cleavage.  These  end-products  are  very  numerous,  and,  while 
they  differ  somewhat  for  the  different  proteids,  yet  a  number  of  them  are 
the  same  for  all  proteids.  The  great  variety  in  the  end-products  is  an  in- 
dication of  the  complexity  of  the  molecule,  while  their  similarity  is  proof 
that  the  various  proteids  are  all  built,  so  to  speak,  upon  a  similar  plan  by  the 
union  of  certain  groupings  which  may  be  more  numerous  in  one  proteid  than 
another.  This  fact  becomes  evident  from  a  brief  consideration  of  the  prod- 
ucts obtained  by  hydrolytic  cleavage  with  acids.  The  groupings  represented 
by  the  following  compounds  may  be  supposed  to  exist  preformed  in  proteid 
molecules,  some  possibly  containing  them  all,  some  only  a  portion  of  the 
list,  while  the  different  groups  vary  in  their  proportional  amounts  in  the 
various  proteids: 

1.  Amido-acetic  acid  (glycocoU). 

2.  Amidopropionic  acid  (alanin). 

3.  Amidovalerianic  acid. 

4.  Amidocaproic  acid  (leucin). 

5.  Amidosuccinic  acid  (aspartic  acid). 

6.  Amidoglutaric  acid  (glutaminic  acid). 

7.  Phenylamidopropionic  acid  (phenylalanin). 

8.  Oxyphenylamidopropionic  acid  (tyrosin). 

9.  Skatolamido-acetic  acid  (tryptophan). 
10.  Guanidinamidovalerianic  acid  (arginin). 
11    Diamidocaproic  acid  (lysin). 

12.  Histidin  (amidomethyl-dihydropyrimidin-carbonic  acid). 

13.  Amido-oxypropionic  acid  (serin). 

14.  Amidothiolactic  acid  (cystein  or  cystin). 

15.  a-pyrroUidin-carbonic  acid. 

16.  Oxy-a-pyrrollidin-carbonic  acid. 

874 


PROTEIDS   AND   THEIR   CLASSIFICATION,  875 

These  split  products  are  all  amido-acids,  some  of  them  belonging  to  the 
fatty  acid  (aliphatic)  series  of  carbon  compounds,  some  to  the  aromatic 
(carbocyclic)  series,  and  some  to  the  heterocyclic  (pyrrol,  indol)  series.  In 
what  may  be  considered  the  simplest  proteids  occurring  in  nature, — namely, 
the  protamins  found  in  the  spermatozoa,  only  from  four  to  six  of  these  groups 
occur,  while  in  some  of  the  more  familiar  proteids,  such  as  serum-albumin 
or  casein,  a  much  larger  number  is  found.     The  a-amido-acids  of  which  these 

H 

end-products  consist  all  contain  the  grouping  — C  —  NHj,  and   Fischer  has 

COOH 
shown  that  such  bodies  possess  the  property  of  combining  with  one  another 
to  make  complex  molecules  containing  two,  three,  or  more  groups  of  amido- 
acids.  The  combination  takes  place  with  the  elimination  of  water  formed 
by  the  union  of  the  OH  of  the  carboxyl  (COOH)  group  in  one  acid  and  the 
H  of  the  amido  (NHj)  group  in  another.  Thus,  two  molecules  of  amido-acetic 
acid  (glycocoU)  may  be  made  to  unite  to  form  a  compound,  glycylglycin,  as 
follows : 

NH2CH2COOH  +  NH2CH2COOH  —  H2O  =  NH2CH2CONHCH2COOH. 

GlycocoU.  GlycocoU.  _  Glycylglycin. 

Compounds  of  this  kind  are  designated  by  Fischer  as  peptids.  When  formed 
from  the  union  of  two  amido-acids  they  are  known  as  dipeptids,  from  three 
as  tripeptids,  etc.  The  more  complicated  compounds  of  this  sort,  the  poly- 
peptids,  begin  to  show  reactions  similar  to  those  of  the  proteids.  Some  of 
them  give  the  biuret  reaction,  some  are  acted  upon  and  split  by  proteolytic 
enzymes.  It  seems  justifiable,  therefore,  to  consider  proteids  as  essentially 
polypeptid  compounds  of  greater  or  less  complexity, — that  is,  they  are  acid- 
amids  formed  by  the  union  of  a  number  of  a-amido-acid  compounds.  This 
conception  of  the  structure  of  the  proteid  molecule  explains  a  number  of 
their  general  characteristics, — for  instance:  (1)  The  fact  that  they  are  all 
decomposed  and  yield  similar  products  under  the  influence  of  proteolytic 
enzymes  or  boiling  dilute  acid.  (2)  The  fact  that  the  proteids  are  all  so 
alike  in  their  general  properties  in  spite  of  the  great  differences  in  the  com- 
plexity of  their  molecular  structure.  (3)  The  fact  that  they  show  both 
basic  and  acid  characters.  (4)  The  fact  that  they  all  give  the  biuret  reac- 
tion* (see  below). 

In  addition  to  the  amido-acids  some  proteids — egg-albumin,  for  example 
— yield  a  carbohydrate  body  upon  decomposition.  The  carbohydrate  ob- 
tained is  an  amido-sugar  compound,  usually  glucosamin,  CgHigNOj.  It  is 
detected  by  its  reducing  action  and  by  the  formation  of  an  osazone.  It  seems 
probable,  therefore,  that  some  of  the  proteids  at  least  contain  such  a  group- 
ing as  part  of  the  molecular  complex,  but  at  present  it  is  undetermined  how 
many  possess  this  peculiarity  of  structure. 

General  Reactions  of  the  Proteids. — It  is  evident  from  what  has  been 
said  in  the  preceding  paragraph  that  proteids  may  give  different  reactions 
according  to  the  kinds  of  groupings  contained  in  the  molecule.  The  reac- 
tions common  to  all  proteids  are  few  in  number,  the  most  certain  perhaps 
being  the  biuret  reaction,  the  hydrolysis  by  proteolytic  enzymes  or  putre- 
factive organisms,  and  the  nature  of  the  split  products  formed  by  these  latter 
hydrolyses  or  by  the  action  of  boiling  dilute  acids.  A  very  large  number 
of  reactions,  however,  have  been  described  which  hold  for  some  or  all  of 
the  proteids  usually  found  in  the  tissues  and  liquids  of  the  body.  These 
reactions  may  be  described  under  two  heads:  (1)  precipitation  of  the  proteid 
when  in  solution;  (2)  color  reactions. 

*  For  further  details  see  Cohnheim,  "Chemie  der  Eiweisskorper,"  second 
edition,  1904;  or  Hammarsten,  "Physiological  Chemistry,"  translated  by 
Mandel,  fourth  edition,  New  York,  1904. 


876  APPENDIX. 

I.  Precipitants.- — For  one  or  another  proteid  the  following  reagents  cause 
precipitation : 

1.  The  addition  of  an  excess  of  alcohol. 

2.  Boiling  (heat  coagulation). 

3.  The  addition  of  mineral  acids, — e.  g.,  nitric  acid. 

4.  The  salts  of  the  heavy  metals, — e.  g.,  acetate  of  lead,  copper  sul- 

phate, etc. 

5.  Addition  of  neutral  salts  of  the  alkalies  to  a  greater  or  less  degree 

of  concentration, — e.  g.,  sodium  chlorid,  ammonium  sulphate. 

6.  Ferrocyanid  of  potassium  after  previous  acidification  by  acetic  acid. 

7.  Tannic  acid  after  previous  acidification  by  acetic  acid. 

8.  Phosphotungstic  or  phosphomolybdic  acid  in  the  presence  of  free 

mineral  acids. 

9.  lodin  in   solution  in  potassium  iodid,  after  previous  acidification 

with  a  mineral  acid. 

10.  Picric  acid  in  solutions  acidified  by  organic  acids. 

11.  Trichloracetic  acid. 

This  list  might  be  extended  still  further,  but  it  comprises  the  precipi- 
tating reagents  that  are  ordinarily  used.  Some  of  them,  particularly  Nos. 
7,  8,  and  9,  give  reactions  in  solutions  containing  excessively  minute  traces 
of  proteid. 

12.  Precipitins.  In  this  connection  a  brief  reference  may  be  made  to 
the  interesting  group  of  bodies  known  as  precipitins.  As  stated 
on  p.  387,  the  animal  organism  has  the  power,  when  foreign  cells 
are  injected  into  it,  of  forming  anti-bodies  by  a  specific  biological 
reaction.  It  has  been  discovered  that  anti-bodies,  or  as  they 
are  called  in  this  case,  precipitins,  may  be  produced  in  the 
same  way  if  proteid  solutions  or  solutions  of  animal  tissue  are  in- 
jected into  the  circulation.  Thus,  if  cows'  milk  be  injected  under 
the  skin  of  a  rabbit  there  will  be  produced  within  the  rabbit's 
blood  a  precipitin  which  is  capable  of  precipitating  the  casein  of 
cows'  milk,  although  it  may  have  no  action  on  the  milk  of  other 
animals.  In  the  same  way  any  given  foreign  proteid,  when  injected 
under  the  skin  of  an  animal,  may  cause  the  production  of  a  pre- 
cipitin capable  of  precipitating  that  particular  proteid  from  its 
solutions.  The  precipitin  4s  not  absolutely  specific  for  the  proteid 
used  to  produce  it,  but  nearly  so.  If  a  rabbit  is  immunized  with 
human  blood  a  precipitin  is  produced  in  the  animal's,  blood 
M'hich  causes  a  precipitate  when  mixed  with  human  blood  or 
with  that  of  some  of  the  higher  monkeys,  but  gives  no  reaction 
with  the  blood  of  other  mammals.  The  reaction  may  be  used, 
therefore,  in  a  measure  to  test  the  blood-relationship  of  different 
animals.*  It  has  been  suggested  that  the  reaction  may  also  be 
of  practical  importance  in  medicolegal  cases,  in  determining  whether 
a  given  blood-stain  is  or  is  not  human  blood.  For  such  a  pur- 
pose a  human  antiserum  is  first  produced  by  injecting  human 
serum  into  a  rabbit.  The  serum  of  the  rabbit  is  then  mixed  with 
an  extract  of  the  suspected  blood-stain  made  with  salt  solution; 
if  a  precipitate  forms  it  proves  that  the  blood  stain  is  human  blood 
provided  the  possibility  of  its  being  monkey's  blood  is  excluded. 
Concerning  the  nature  of  the  precipitins,  little  is  known.  They 
combine  quantitatively  with  the  proteid  precipitated  and  they 
are  inactivated  (hematosera)  by  a  temperature  of  70°  C.  Their 
reactions  are  not  sufficiently  specific  to  be  used  as  a  means  of  de- 
tecting or  distinguishing  closely  related  proteids. 

//.   The  Color  Reactions  of  Proteids. 

1.  The  biuret  reaction.  The  proteid  solution  is  made  strongly  alkaline 
with  caustic  soda  or  potash  and  a  few  drops  of  a  dilute  solution  of 

*  For  many  interesting  experiments,  and  the  literature  see  Nuttall,  "  Blood 
Immunity  and  Relationship."     Cambridge,  1904. 


PROTEIDS   AND   THEIR   CLASSIFICATION.  877 

copper  sulphate  are  added  carefully  so  as  to  avoid  an  excess.  A 
purple  color  is  obtained.  Some  proteids  (peptones)  give  a  red 
purple,  others  a  blue  purple.  If  only  a  blue  color,  without  any 
mixture  of  red,  is  obtained,  no  proteid  is  present.  At  present 
this  reaction  gives  the  best  single  test   for  proteid.      It  obtains 

its  name  from  the  fact  that  it  is  given  by  biuret  HN  <(2;oNH^'  ^ 
compound  that  may  be  formed  by  heating  urea.  Two  molecules 
of  urea  give  off  a  molecule  of  ammonia  and  form  biuret. 

2.  The  Millon  reaction.     The  proteid  solution  is  boiled  with  Millon's 

reagent.  The  solution  or  the  precipitate,  if  one  is  formed,  takes 
on  a  reddish  color,  which  varies  in  intensity  with  different  proteids. 
Millon's  reagent  consists  of  a  solution  of  mercuric  nitrate  in  nitric 
acid  containing  some  mercurous  nitrate.  This  reaction  is  supposed 
to  be  given  by  the  tyrosin  grouping  in  the  proteid  molecule,  and 
fails,  therefore,  with  those  proteids  in  which  tyrosin  is  not 
present. 

3.  The  xanthoproteic   reaction.     Nitric  acid  is  added  to  strong  acid 

reaction  and  the  solution  is  then  boiled.  After  cooling  ammonia 
is  added.  The  ammonia  causes  the  development  of  a  deep-yellow 
color  if  proteid  is  present.  This  reaction  is  supposed  to  be  due 
to  the  presence  in  the  molecule  of  the  groupings  belonging  to  the 
aromatic  series. 

4.  Adamkiewicz's  reaction.     A  mixture  is  made  of  one  volunie  of  con- 

centrated sulphuric  and  two  volumes  of  glacial  acetic  acid ;  if  the 
proteid  solution  is  added  to  this  mixture  and  warmed  a  reddish- 
violet  color  is  obtained.  According  to  Hopkins  and  Cole,  the  re- 
action depends  upon  the  presence  of  glyoxylic  acid  in  the  acetic 
acid.  This  reaction  seems  to  be  due  to  the  tryptophan  grouping 
in  the  proteid  molecule. 

5.  Liebermann's  reaction.     Dry  proteid  purified  with  alcohol  and  ether 

gives  a  blue  color  upon  boiling  with  strong  hydrochloric  acid. 

6.  The  lead  sulphid  reaction.     The  proteid  solution  is  boiled  with  a 

solution  of  a  lead  salt  made  strongly  alkaline  with  soda  or  potash. 
A  black  precipitate  or  black  or  brown  coloration  results  according 
to  the  amount  of  proteid.  The  color  is  due  to  the  splitting  off  of 
sulphur  and  formation  of  lead  sulphid.  It  is  given,  therefore,  by 
the  sulphur-containing  groups  in  the  proteid  molecule. 

7.  The  Molisch  reaction.     A  few  drops  of  an  alcoholic   solution  of   a- 

naphthol  are  added  to  the  proteid  solution  and  then  strong  sul- 
phuric acid.  A  violet  color  is  obtained.  This  reaction  is  given 
by  the  carbohydrate  grouping  in  the  proteid  molecule.  The  strong 
acid  forms  furfurol  from  this  group,  which  then  reacts  with  the  naph- 
thol.  The  reaction  is  not  given  by  those  proteids  that  do  not  con- 
tain a  carbohydrate  group. 

Classification  of  the  Proteids. — No  classification  of  the  proteids  has 
been  proposed  which  is  entirely  satisfactory.  Eventually  a  classification 
will  be  obtained  based  upon  the  chemical  structure  of  the  various  proteids, 
but  our  knowledge  at  present  is  much  too  incomplete  for  this  purpose.  We 
must  be  content  with  a  less  satisfactory  system  based  upon  empirical  reac- 
tions which  have  gradually  been  recognized  in  the  course  of  physiological 
investigations. 

Albumins. 

Globulins. 

Albuminates  or  derived  albumins. 
T    ^imnlP  nrntPid«      <^  Nucleo-albumins  (phosphoproteids) . 
i.  bimple  proteids      \  Proteoses  and  peptones. 

Histons. 

Protamins. 

Coagulated  proteids. 


878  APPENDIX. 

(Chromoproteids  (hemoglobin,  hemocyanin,  etc.). 
Glucoproteids. 
Nucleoproteids. 
r  Keratin. 
III.  Albuminoids  (pro-    i  Elastin. 

teid-like  bodies)      1  Collagen  (gelatin). 
V.  Reticulin. 

The  Albumins. — In  addition  to  the  albumins  found  in  the  cellular  tis- 
sues, the  cell  albumins,  the  conspicuous  examples  of  this  group  are  serum- 
albumin,  milk -albumin  (lactalbumin) ,  and  egg-albumin  (ovalbumin).  They 
are  characterized  as  a  class  by  the  fact  that  they  are  coagulable  by  heat  in 
solutions  with  a  neutral  or  acid  reaction,  and  are  soluble  in  water  free  from 
salts.  In  accordance  with  the  latter  part  of  this  definition  they  are  not 
precipitated  by  dialysis.  They  are  precipitated  from  their  solutions  with 
more  difficulty  by  saturation  with  neutral  salts,  ammonium  sulphate,  than 
the  globulins  with  which  they  are  usually  associated.  Empirically  as  re- 
gards the  liquids  of  the  body  it  is  stated  that  they  require  more  than  half 
saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  for  precipitation  (see  section  on  Blood). 
All  three  albumins  referred  to  here  may  be  obtained  in  crystallized  form. 
They  are  not  precipitated  by  saturation  with  sodium  chlorid  or  magnesium 
sulphate  unless  the  solution  is  made  acid.  They  are  rich  in  sulphur,  con- 
taining from  1.6  to  2.2  per  cent. 

The  Globulins. — Proteids  belonging  to  this  group  are  found  in  the  cell 
tissues  together  with  albumins.  The  forms  that  have  been  most  studied 
are  serum-globulin  (paraglobulin)  and  fibrinogen  (blood,  lymph,  and  transu- 
data),  milk-globulin  (lactoglobulin) ,  and  egg-globulin.  As  contrasted  with 
the  albumins,  they  are  coagulable  by  heat,  but  are  not  soluble  in  water  free 
from  salts.  In  consequence  of  this  last  property  they  are  precipitated  by 
dialysis.  This  reaction  is  not  distinctive,  however,  as  the  precipitation  is 
not  complete.  Some  of  the  so-called  globulin  remains  in  solution  after  the 
salts  have  been  removed  as  completely  as  possible  by  dialysis.  They  are 
also  precipitated  partially  from  their  dilute  solutions  by  the  addition  of 
weak  acids  or  by  a  stream  of  carboo  dioxid  Practically  they  are  isolated 
from  accompanying  albumins  by  precipitation  \\'ith  neutral  salts.  In  neu- 
tral solutions  the  globulins  are  completely  precipitated  by  saturation  with 
magnesium  sulphate  or  half  saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate.  In  the 
blood  several  different  forms  of  globulin  are  distinguished  by  the  degree  of 
saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  necessary  for  their  precipitation  (see 
Blood).  The  separations  made  by  this  method  are  not,  however,  satisfac- 
tory. Nor,  indeed,  is  the  separation  between  globulins  and  albumins  alto- 
gether satisfactory.  It  would  seem  that  these  proteids  are  so  closely  related 
that  distinctive  reactions  are  difficult  to  obtain  on  account  of  the  existence 
of  forms  intermediate  between  the  extremes  that  are  used  as  types. 

Albuminates  or  Derived  Albumins. — Since  the  albumins  and  globulins 
occur  normally  in  the  tissues  and  liquids  of  the  body,  they  are  frequently 
designated  as  the  native  proteids.  The  albuminates,  on  the  contrary,  are 
derived  from  these  native  proteids  by  the  action  of  strong  acids  or  alkalies. 
We  distinguish,  therefore,  acid  and  alkali  albuminates.  They  are  nearly 
insoluble  in  water  or  in  water  containing  small  amounts  of  neutral  salts. 
They  are  readily  soluble  in  dilute  acid  or  alkaline  solutions;  are  not  pre- 
cipitated by  heat,  but  are  precipitated  readily  upon  neutralization. 

Nucleo-albumins  (Phosphoproteids). — This  name  may  be  applied 
to  a  group  of  native  proteids  which  are  characterized  by  containing  phos- 
phorus, such  as  casein  of  milk,  vitellin  from  the  yolk  of  the  egg,  and  va- 
rious similar  proteids  found  in  the  cytoplasm  of  the  cellular  elements.  They 
are  often  classed  with  or  confounded  with  the  nucleoproteids  (or  nucleo- 
albumins)  found  in  the  nuclei  of  the  cells.  These  latter  belong  to  the  com- 
pound proteids  and  on  decomposition  yield  nucleic  acid  or  its  split  products, 
the  purin  bases,  etc.,  whereas  the  group  now  under  consideration  gives  no 
such  result,  yielding  on  decomposition  so-called  pseudonuclein  or  paranuclein, 
which  is  not  a  nuclein  at  all,  but  a  phosphorus-containing  proteid  body. 


PROTEIDS   AND   THEIR    CLASSIFICATION.  879 

It  is  very  desirable  to  select  for  them  another  name  than  nucleo-albumin, 
since  they  contain  no  nuclein.  Cohnheim  suggests  the  name  of  phospho- 
globulins  or  phosphoproteids.  In  addition  to  phosphorus  these  proteids 
usually  contain  some  iron,  but  the  amount  is  so  small  that  it  can  scarcely 
be  present  as  a  constituent  part  of  the  molecule.  It  seems  more  probable 
that  it  is  an  impurity.  Casein  contains  from  0.8  to  0.9  per  cent,  of  phos- 
phorus; vitellin,  1.31  per  cent,  of  phosphorus  and  only  12  per  cent,  of  nitro- 
gen. These  proteids  haA^e  acid  properties.  They  are  not  soluble  in  water, 
but  are  very  readily  soluble  in  dilute  alkalies.  Their  solutions  are  not  coagu- 
lated by  heat.  They  show  the  usual  proteid  reactions  and  give  the  ordi- 
nary end-products  of  hydrolytic  cleavage  upon  digestion  with  proteolytic 
enzymes  or  boiling  with  dilute  acid.  In  the  casein  it  has  been  shown 
satisfactorily  that  no  carbohydrate  grouping  is  present  in  the  molecule. 

Proteoses  and  Peptones. — These  names  are  given  to  the  intermediate 
proteids  formed  in  the  process  of  digestion  by  the  proteolytic  enzymes.  They 
may  also  be  obtained  by  the  hydrolytic  action  of  acids  or  alkalies  or  by  the 
action  of  putrefactive  organisms.  If  further  hydrolyzed  they  split  into  some 
of  the  amido-acids  already  referred  to  as  constitutmg  the  end-products  of 
proteid  hydrolysis.  Since  they  are  obtained  most  readily  in  peptic  and 
tryptic  digestion,  they  have  been  supposed  to  be  especially  important  in 
the  absorption  of  the  proteid  foods.  They  consist  of  smaller  and  more  sol- 
uble molecules  than  those  of  the  proteids  from  which  they  are  derived. 
Many  different  kinds  of  proteoses  have  been  described,  but  it  is  difficult  to 
assign  absolutely  distinctive  characteristics  to  these  compounds,  since  they 
form  a  series  of  products  intermediate  between  the  original  proteid  and  the 
stage  of  peptones.  The  so-called  peptones  are  characterized  by  their  solu- 
bility and  the  facts  that  they  are  not  coagulated  by  heat  and  are  not  pre- 
cipitated by  complete  saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate.  They  give  the 
biuret  (red)  reaction  as  well  as  the  xanthoproteic  and  Millon's  reaction,  but 
are  not  precipitated  by  the  mineral  acids,  trichloracetic  acid,  picric  acid, 
acetic  acid  and  potassium  ferrocyanid,  etc.  They  are  precipitated  by  phos- 
photungstic  or  phosphomolybdic  acid.  The  proteoses  in  general  are  dis- 
tinguished by  the  following  reactions:  They  are  not  coagulated  by  heat; 
they  are  precipitated  from  their  solutions  by  the  addition  of  acetic  acid  and 
potassium  ferrocyanid ;  they  are  precipitated  by  nitric  acid  and  this  precip- 
itate dissolves  on  warming  and  reappears  on  cooling;  they  are  precipitated 
by  saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  and  by  all  the  so-called  alkaloidal 
reagents, — namely,  phosphotungstic  acid,  trichloracetic  acid,  picric  acid, 
tannic  acid,  etc.  The  proteoses  form  a  group  the  members  of  which  are 
variously  named.  It  is  customary  to  speak  of  the  primary  proteoses  (pro- 
toproteose  and  heteroproteose)  as  distinguished  from  the  secondary  pro- 
teoses (deuteroproteoses  A,  B,  C).  The  former  resemble  more  the  native 
proteids,  while  the  latter  approach  the  peptones.  The  distinction  between 
the  primary  and  secondary  proteoses  is  made  chiefly  upon  the  ease  of  pre- 
cipitation. For  example,  the  primary  proteoses  are  precipitated  by  a  lower 
degree  of  saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  and  by  nitric  acid  alone, 
whereas  the  secondary  proteoses  require  previous  saturation  with  a  salt 
(sodium  chlorid)  before  nitric  acid  will  precipitate  them,  and  they  are  precip- 
itated by  saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  with  much  more  difficulty, 
some  of  them  only  after  making  the  reaction  acid. 

Protamins  and  Histons. — The  protamins  have  been  obtained  (Miescher- 
Kossel)  from  the  heads  of  the  spermatozoa  in  fishes,  in  which  they  exist  in 
combination  with  nucleic  acid.  They  differ  considerably  in  the  spermatozoa 
of  different  animals,  and  are  therefore  designated  according  to  the  zoological 
name  of  the  fish  from  which  they  arise,  as  salniin,  sturin,  clupein,  scom- 
brin,  etc.  They  show  a  biuret  reaction,  but  in  most  cases  fail  to  give  MiUon's 
reaction.  On  hydrolysis  they  give  some,  but  relatively  few,  of  the  usual 
split  products  of  proteids,  and  these  largely  the  so-called  diamido-bodies 
(arginin,  histidin,  lysin)  rather  than  the  monamido-acids.  Some  of  the  latter 
may  occur,  however,  such  as  alanin,  serin,  amidovalerianic  or  a-pyrrollidin-car- 
bonic  acid.  The  protamins  all  give  an  alkaline  reaction,  form  salts  with  acids, 
and  are  precipitated  easily.     Their  molecular  structure  is  relati^'ely  simple. 


880  APPENDIX. 

Salminis  given  the  formula  CgoHgyNuOg.  The  molecule  contams  no  sulphur 
and  is  characterized  also  by  its  large  percentage  of  nitrogen.  Protamins 
must  be  regarded  as  the  simplest  form  of  proteid  occurring  normally  in  the 
animal  body,  a  proteid  in  which  many  of  the  groupings,  such  as  cystin,  tyro- 
sin,  carbohydrates,  found  in  the  usual  proteid  molecule  are  entirely  lack- 
ing and  in  which  the  basic  groupings  (arginin)  predominate.  The  histons 
form  a  series  of  compounds  intenuediate  in  many  ways  between  the  pro- 
tamins and  the  usual  proteid.  The  reaction  usually  considered  as  char- 
acteristic of  the  class  is  that  they  are  precipitated  by  ammonia.  They  are 
precipitated  also  by  the  allvaloidal  reagents — e.  g.,  phosphotungstic  acid — 
in  neutral  solutions.  Ordinary  proteids  give  a  precipitate  with  these  reagents 
only  in  acid  solutions,  while  the  protanains  give  one  even  in  alkaline  solutions. 
Protamins,  histons,  and  the  usual  proteids  form  a  series,  therefore,  in  which 
the  basic  reaction  is  less  and  less  marked.  The  best  known  of  the  histons 
is  the  globin  obtained  from  hemoglobin;  another  form  has  been  obtained 
from  the  nucleohiston  in  the  white  corpuscles,  from  the  spermatozoa  of 
mackerel  (scombron),  codfish  (gadushiston) ,  sea-urchin  (arbacin),  and  frog 
(lotahiston) .  They  do  not  occur  free  in  the  liquids  or  tissUfes  of  the  body, 
but  in  combination,  as  in  the  case  of  hemoglobin.  They  give  the  biuret 
reaction,  a  faint  Millon  reaction,  and  also  respond  to  the  tests  for  sulphur. 
The  products  obtained  by  their  hydrolytic  clea^'age  are  much  more  numer- 
ous than  in  the  case  of  the  protamins, — a  fact  which  would  indicate  that 
their  molecular  structure  is  correspondingly  more  complex. 

The  Compound  Proteids. — The  chromoproteids  may  be  defined  as 
consisting  of  a  simple  proteid  in  combination  mth  a  pigment  grouping 
such  as  occurs  in  the  case  of  hemoglobin.  A  number  of  such  compounds 
are  kno-WTi,  hemoglobin,  hemocyanin,  hemerythrin,  chlorocruorin, — all  char- 
acterized physiologically  by  the  fact  that  they  serve  to  transport  oxygen 
from  the  air  or  water  to  the  tissues.  On  boiling,  heating  with  alkalies  or 
acids,  etc.,  they  readily  decompose  into  their  constituent  parts  (see  Blood). 
Glucoproteids  are  compomids  of  a  carbohydrate  group  with  a  simple  proteid. 
Numerous  bodies  have  been  put  in  this  class;  some  of  them  contain  phos- 
phorus (phosphoglucoproteids) .  Those  free  from  phosphorus  fall  into  two 
divisions:  one,  the  mucins,  which  on  decomposition  yield  the  carbohydrate 
group  in  the  form  of  an  amido-sugar  (glucosamin) ,  and  one,  the  chondropro- 
teicls,  found  in  the  connective  tissues  and  in  the  pathological  substance  known 
as  amyloid,  which  yield  their  carbohydrate  group  in  the  form  of  chondroitin- 
sulphuric  acid  (CigH^yNSOij).  True  mucin  is  obtained  from  the  secretion 
of  the  salivary  glands  and  the  mucous  glands  of  the  various  mucous  mem- 
branes. The  nucleo'proteids  constitute  the  most  interesting  of  the  group 
of  compound  proteids.  They  are  recognized  as  fonning  an  important  con- 
stituent of  the  cell  nuclei.  They  may  be  defined  as  consisting  of  a  compound 
of  simple  proteid  with  a  nucleic  acid.  In  the  nuclei  (head)  of  spermatozoa 
the  compound,  in  some  cases  at  least  (fishes),  contains  a  nucleic  acid  and  a 
protamin.  In  other  cases  the  proteid  con.stituent  is  more  complex.  On 
digestion  with  pepsin-hydrochloric  acid  the  more  complex  nucleoproteids 
split,  with  the  formation,  first,  of  a  proteid  substance  and  a  simpler  nucleo- 
proteid,  richer  in  phosphorus  and  designated  as  a  nuclein.  On  further  de- 
composition this  latter  yields  a  nucleic  acid.  Nucleic  acid  is  therefore  the 
characteristic  constituent,  and  a  number  of  different  forms  have  been  des- 
cribed, all  rich  in  phosphorus,  such  as  thymonucleic  acid,  salmonnucleic  acid, 
guanylic  acid,  etc.  On  hydrolytic  decomposition  they  yield  some  of  the 
purin  bases, — xanthin,  guanin,  adenin,  etc. ;  some  pyrimidin  derivatives, — 
uracil,  thymin,  cytosin;  a  carbohydrate  group,  pentose,  levulinic  acid;  and 
phosphoric  acid.  These  final  decomposition  products  are  characteristic  of 
the  true  nucleoproteids  as  distinguished  from  the  phosphorus-containing 
simple  proteids,  the  nucleo-albumins  or  phosphoproteids,  such  as  casein. 
The  percentage  of  phosphorus  in  the  nucleoproteids  varies,  ^.ccording  to  the 
complexity  of  the  molecule,  between  0.5  and  1.6  per  cent. 

The  Albuminoids. — This  general  name  is  reserved  for  a  group  of  nitrog- 
enous bodies  found  chiefly  in  the  supporting  connective  tissues  of  the  body, 
such  as  the  keratin  of  the  epidermis,  hairs,  etc.;    the  elastin  of  the  elastic 


DIFFUSION   AND    OSMOSIS.  881 

connective  tissues;  the  collagen  (ossein)  of  the  white,  fibrous  connective 
tissues  and  bones,  from  which  gelatin  is  made;  and  the  reticulin  of  the  retic- 
iilar  connective  tissues  of  the  lymphatic  tissues.  They  resemble  the  pro- 
teids  closely  in  general  composition,  reactions,  and  end-products  of  hydro- 
lytic  cleavage,  but  differ  from  them  evidentlj^  in  some  structural  feature, 
since  it  has  been  found  by  nutritive  experiments  that  they  can  not  be  used 
by  the  body  to  replace  its  proteid  tissues  (see  p.  791).  Collagen  (gelatin) 
has  the  following  percentage  composition  (Chittenden):  C,  49.38;  H,  6.8; 
N,  17.97;   S,  0.7;   O,  25.13. 

DIFFUSION  AND  OSMOSIS. 

In  recent  years  the  physical  conceptions  of  the  nature  of  the  processes 
of  diffusion  and  osmosis  have  changed  considerably.  As  these  newer  concep- 
tions have  entered  largely  into  current  medical  literature,  it  seems  ad\is- 
able  to  give  a  brief  description  of  them  for  the  use  of  those  students  of  phys- 
iology who  may  be  unacquainted  with  the  modern  nomenclature.  The 
very  limited  space  that  can  be  devoted  to  the  subject  forbids  anything  more 
than  a  condensed  elementary  presentation.  For  fuller  information  refer- 
ence must  be  made  to  special  treatises.* 

Diffusion,  Dialysis,  and  Osmosis. — When  two  gases  are  brought  into 
contact  a  homogeneous  mixture  of  the  two  is  soon  obtained.  This  inter- 
jjenetration  of  the  gases  is  spoken  of  as  diffusion,  and  it  is  due  to  the  con- 
tinual movements  of  the  gaseous  molecules  to  and  fro  within  the  limits  of 
the  confining  space.  So  also  when  two  miscible  liquids  or  solutions  are 
brought  into  contact  a  diffusion  occurs  for  the  same  reason,  the  movements 
of  the  molecules  finally  effecting  a  homogeneous  mixture.  If  the  two  liquids 
happen  to  be  separated  by  a  membrane  diffusion  will  still  occur,  provided 
the  membrane  is  permeable  to  the  liquid  molecules,  and  in  time  the  liquids 
on  the  two  sides  wdll  be  mixtures  having  a  vmiform  composition.  Not  only 
water  molecules,  but  the  molecules  of  many  substances  in  solution,  such 
as  sugar,  may  pass  to  and  fro  through  membranes,  so  that  two  liquids  sepa- 
rated from  each  other  by  an  intervening  membrane  and  originally  unHke 
in  composition  may  finally,  by  the  act  of  diffusion,  come  to  have  the  same 
composition.  Diffusion  of  this  kind  through  a  membrane  is  frequently 
spoken  of  as  dialysis  or  osmosis.  In  the  body  we  deal  with  aqueous  solu- 
tions of  various  substances  that  are  separated  from  each  other  by  living 
membranes,  such  as  the  walls  of  the  blood  capillaries  or  of  the  alimentary 
canal,  and  the  laws  of  diffusion  through  membranes  are  of  immediate  im- 
portance in  explaining  the  passage  of  water  and  dissolved  substances  through 
these  living  septa.  In  aqueous  solutions  such  as  we  have  in  the  body  we  must 
take  into  account  the  movements  of  the  molecules  of  the  solvent,  water, 
a^  well  as  of  the  substances  dissolved.  These  latter  may  have  different  de- 
grees of  diffusibility  as  compared  with  one  another  or  with  the  water  mole- 
cules, and  it  frequently  happens  that  a  membrane  that  is  permeable  to 
water  molecules  is  less  permeable  or  even  impermeable  to  the  molecules  of 
the  substances  in  solution.  For  this  reason  the  diffusion  stream  of  water 
and  of  the  dissolved  substances  may  be  differentiated,  as  it  were,  to  a  greater 
or  less  extent.  In  recent  years  it  has  become  customary  to  limit  the  term 
osmosis  to  the  stream  of  water  molecules  passing  through  a  membrane, 
while  the  term  dialysis,  or  diffusion,  is  applied  to  the  passage  of  the  mole- 
cules of  the  substances  in  solution.  The  osmotic  stream  of  water  under  vary- 
ing conditions  is  especially  important,  and  in  connection  with  this  process 
it  is  necessary  to  define  the  term  osmotic  pressure  as  applied  to  solutions. 

Osmotic  Pressure. — If  we  imagine  two  masses  of  water  separated  by 
a  permeable  membrane,  we  can  readily  understand  that  as  many  water  mole- 

*  Consult  Cohen,   "Physical  Chemistry  for  Physicians  and  Biologists," 
translated  by  Fischer,  1903.     H.  C.  Jones,  "  The  Theory  of  Electrolytic  Dis- 
sociation,"  1900;    "Diffusion,  Osmosis,  and  Filtration,"    by  E.  W.   Raid, 
in  Schafer's  "Text-book  of  Physiology,"   1898. 
56 


882  APPENDIX 

cules  will  pass  through  from  one  side  as  from  the  other;  the  two  streams, 
in  fact,  will  neutralize  each  other,  and  the  volumes  of  the  two  masses  of 
water  will  remain  unchanged.  The  movement  of  the  water  molecules  in 
this  case  is  not  actually  observed,  but  it  is  assumed  to  take  place  on  the 
theory  that  the  liquid  molecules  are  continually  in  motion  and  that  the 
membrane,  being  permeable,  offers  no  obstacle  to  their  movements.  If, 
now,  on  one  side  of  the  membrane  we  place  a  solution  of  some  crystalloid 
substance,  such  as  common  salt,  and  on  the  other  side  pure  water,  then  it 
will  be  found  that  an  excess  of  water  will  pass  from  the  water  side  to  the 
side  containing  the  solution.  In  the  older  terminology  it  was  said  that  the 
salt  attracted  this  water,  but  in  the  newer  theories  the  same  fact  is  expressed 
by  saying  that  the  salt  in  solution  exerts  a  certain  osmotic  pressure,  in  conse- 
quence of  which  more  water  flows  from  the  water  side  to  the  side  of  the 
solution  than  in  the  reverse  direction.  As  a  matter  of  experiment  it  is  found 
that  the  osmotic  pressure  varies  with  the  amount  of  the  substance  in  solu- 
tion. If  in  experiments  of  this  kind  a  semipermeable  membrane  is  chosen 
— that  is,  a  membrane  that  is  permeable  to  the  water  molecules,  but  not  to 
the  molecules  of  the  substance  in  solution— the  stream  of  water  to  the  side 
of  the  crystalloid  will  continue  until  the  hydrostatic  pressure  on  this  side 
reaches  a  certain  point,  and  the  hydrostatic  pressure  thus  caused  may  be 
taken  as  a  measure  of  the  osmotic  pressure  exerted  by  the  substance  in  solu- 
tion. Under  these  conditions  it  can  be  shown  that  the  osmotic  pressure 
is  proportional  to  the  concentration  of  the  solution,  or,  in  other  words,  to 
the  number  of  molecules  (and  ions)  of  the  crystalloid  in  solution.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  most  of  the  membranes  that  we  have  to  deal  with  in  the 
body  are  only  approximately  semipermeable — that  is,  while  they  are  readily 
permeable  to  water  molecules,  they  are  also  permeable,  although  with  more 
or  less  difficulty,  to  the  substances  in  solution.  In  such  cases  we  get  an 
osmotic  stream  of  water  to  the  side  of  the  dissolved  crystalloid,  but  at  the 
same  time  the  molecules  of  the  latter  pass  to  some  extent  through  the  mem- 
brane, by  diffusion,  to  the  other  side.  In  course  of  time,  therefore,  the 
dissolved  crystalloid  wiU  be  equally  distributed  on  the  two  sides  of  the  mem- 
brane, the  osmotic  pressure  on  both  sides  will  become  equal,  and  osmosis 
of  the  water  will  cease  to  be  apparent,  since  it  is  equal  in  the  two  directions. 
All  substances  in  true  solution  are  capable  of  exerting  osmotic  pressure, 
and  the  important  discovery  has  been  made  that  the  osmotic  pressure,  meas- 
ured in  terms  of  atmospheres  or  the  pressure  of  a  column  of  water  or  mer- 
cury, is  equal  to  the  gas  pressure  that  would  be  exerted  by  a  number  of 
molecules  of  gas  equal  to  that  of  the  crystalloid  in  solution,  if  confined  within 
the  same  space  and  kept  at  the  same  temperature.*  A  perfectly  satisfactory 
explanation  of  the  nature  of  osmotic  pressure  has  not  been  furnished.  We 
must  be  content  to  use  the  term  to  express  the  fact  described.  It  is  a  matter 
of  great  importance  to  measure  the  osmotic  pressures  of  various  solutions. 
As  was  stated  above,  this  measurement  can  be  made  for  any  solution  pror 
vided  a  really  semipermeable  membrane  is  constructed.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  however,  the  use  of  such  membranes  has  not  been  general.  In  actual 
experiments  other  methods  have  been  employed,  and  a  brief  statement 
of  a  theoretical  and  a  practical  method  of  arriving  at  the  value  of  osmotic 
pressures  may  be  of  service  in  further  illustrating  the  meaning  of  the  term. 
Before  stating  these  methods  it  becomes  necessary  to  define  two  terms — 
namely,  electrolytes  and  gram-molecular  solutions — that  are  much  used 
in  this  connection. 

Electrolytes. — The  molecules  of  many  substances  when  brought  into 

*  The  interesting  researches  of  Morse  and  Frazer  ("  The  American  Chemi- 
cal Journal,"  34,  1,  1905),  who  have  succeeded  in  making  semipermeable 
membranes  in  such  a  form  as  may  be  used  for  determining  directly  the  os- 
inotic  pressures  of  concentrated  (normal)  solutions,  have  sho^^^l  that  this 
law  is  not  accurately  stated.  The  actual  pressure  is  that  which  would  be 
exerted  if  the  particles  in  solution  were  gasified  at  the  same  temperature  and 
kept  to  the  volume  of  the  pure  solvent  used  (water),  instead  of  the  volume 
of  the  entire  solution. 


DIFFUSION    AND    OSMOSIS.  883 

a  state  of  solution  are  believed  to  be  dissociated  into  two  or  more  parts, 
known  as  ions.  The  completeness  of  the  dissociation  varies  Avith  the  sub- 
stance used,  and  for  any  one  substance  with  the  degree  of  dilution.  Rougidy 
speaking,  the  greater  the  tlilution,  the  more  nearly  complete  is  the  dissocia- 
tion. Tlie  ions  liberated  by  this  act  of  dissociation  are  charged  with  elec- 
tricit}^,  and  when  an  electrical  current  is  led  into  the  solution  it  is  conducted 
by  the  movements  of  the  ions.  The  molecules  of  perfectly  pure  water  undergo 
almost  no  dissociation,  and  water  therefore  does  not  appreciably  conduct 
the  electrical  current.  If  some  NaCl  is  dissolved  in  water,  a  certain  num- 
ber of  its  molecules  become  dissociated  into  a  Na  ion  charged  positively 
with  electricity  and  a  CI  ion  charged  negatively,  and  the  solution  becomes 
a  conductor  of  the  electrical  current.  Substances  that  exhibit  this  property 
of  dissociation  are  known  as  electrolytes,  to  distmguish  them  from  other 
soluble  substances,  such  as  sugar,  that  do  not  dissociate  in  solution  and 
therefore  do  not  conduct  the  electrical  current.  Speaking  generaU}^,  it  may 
be  said  that  all  salts,  bases,  and  acids  belong  to  the  group  of  electrolytes. 
The  conception  of  electrolytes  is  very  important  for  the  reason  that  the  act 
of  dissociation  obviously  increases  the  number  of  particles  moving  in  the 
solution  and  thereby  mcreases  the  osmotic  pressure,  since  it  has  been  found 
experimentally  that,  so  far  as  osmotic  pressures  are  concerned,  an  ion  plays 
the  same  part  as  a  molecule.  It  follows,  therefore,  that  the  osmotic  pressure 
of  anjr  given  electrolyte  in  solution  is  increased  in  proportion  to  the  degree 
to  which  it  is  dissociated.  As  the  liquids  of  the  body  contain  electrolytes 
in  solution  it  becomes  necessary,  in  estimating  their  osmotic  pressure,  to 
take  this  fact  into  consideration. 

Gram-molecular  Solutions. — The  concentration  of  a  given  substance 
in  solution  may  be  stated  by  the  usual  method  of  percentages,  but  from  the 
standpoint  of  osmotic  pressure  a  more  convenient  method  is  the  use  of  the 
unit  known  as  a  gram-iuolecular  solution.  A  gram-molecule  of  any  sub- 
stance is  a  quantity  in  grams  of  the  substance  equal  to  its  molecular  weight, 
while  a  gram-molecular  solution  is  one  containing  a  gram-molecule  of  the 
.substance  to  a  liter  of  the  solution.  Thus,  a  gram-molecular  solution  of 
sodium  chlorid  is  one  containing  58.5  gms.  (Na,  23;  CI,  35.5)  of  the  salt  to 
a  liter,  while  a  gram-molecular  solution  of  cane-sugar  contains  342  gms. 
(CijHgjOii)  to  a  liter.  Similarly  a  gram-molecule  of  H  is  2  gms.  by  weight 
of  this  gas,  and  if  this  weight  of  H  were  compressed  to  the  volume  of  a  liter 
it  would  be  comparable  to  a  gram-molecular  solution.  Since  the  weight 
of  a  molecule  of  H  is  to  the  weight  of  a  molecule  of  cane-sugar  as  2  is  to 
342,  it  follows  that  a  liter  containing  2  gms.  of  H  contains  the  same  number 
of  molecules  of  H  in  it  as  a  liter  of  solution  containing  342  gms.  of  sugar 
has  of  sugar  molecules.  On  the  assumption  that  a  molecule  in  solution  exerts 
an  osmotic  pressure  that  is  exactly  equal  to  the  gas-pressure  exerted  by  a 
gas  molecule  moving  in  the  same  space  and  at  the  same  temperature,  we 
are  justified  in  saying  that  the  osmotic  pressure  of  a  gram-molecular  solu- 
tion of  cane-sugar,  or  of  any  other  substance  that  is  not  an  electrolyte,  is 
equal  to  the  gas-pressure  of  2  gms.  of  H  when  compressed  to  the  volume 
of  1  liter.  This  fact  gives  a  means  of  calculating  the  osmotic  pressure  of 
solutions  in  certain  cases  according  to  the  following  method: 

Calculation  of  the  Osmotic  Pressure  of  Solufions. — To  illustrate  this 
method  we  may  take  a  simple  problem  such  as  the  detenuination  of  the 
osmotic  pressure  of  a  1  per  cent,  solution  of  cane-sugar.  One  gm.  of  H  at 
atmospheric  pressure  occupies  a  volume  of  11.16  liters;  2  gms.  of  H,  there- 
fore, under  the  same  conditions  will  occupy  a  volume  of  22.32  liters.  A 
gram-molecule  of  H — that  is,  2  gms.  of  H — when  brought  to  the  volume 
of  1  liter  will  exert  a  gas-pressure  equal  to  that  of  22.32  liters  compressed 
to  1  liter — that  is,  a  pressure  of  22.32  atmospheres.  A  gram-molecular  solu- 
tion of  cane-sugar,  since  it  contains  the  same  number  of  molecules  in  a  liter, 
must  therefore  exert  an  osmotic  pressure  equal  to  22.32  atmospheres.  .  A 
1  per  cent,  solution  of  cane-sugar  contains,  however,  only  10  gms.  of  sugar 
to  a  liter;  hence  the  osmotic  pressure  of  the  sugar  in  such  a  solution  will 
be  g^  of  22.32  atmospheres,  or  0.65  of  an  atmosphere,  which  in  terms  of 


884  APPENDIX. 

a  column  of  mercury  gives  760  X  0.65  =  494  mms.  This  figure  expresses 
the  osmotic  pressure  of  a  1  per  cent,  solution  of  cane-sugar  when  dialyzed 
against  pure  water  through  a  membrane  impermeable  to  the  sugar  molecules. 
In  such  an  experiment  water  would  pass  to  the  sugar  side  until  the  hydro- 
static pressure  on  this  side  was  increased  by  an  amount  equal  to  the  pres- 
sure of  a  column  of  mercury  494  mms.  high.  Certain  additional  calculations 
that  it  is  necessary  to  make  for  the  temperature  of  the  solution  need  not  be 
specified  in  this  connection.  If,  however,  we  wish  to  apply  this  method 
to  the  calculation  of  the  osmotic  pressure  of  a  given  solution  of  an  electro- 
lyte, it  is  necessary  first  to  ascertain  the  degree  of  dissociation  of  the  electro- 
lyte into  its  ions,  since,  as  was  said  above,  dissociation  increases  the  num- 
ber of  parts  in  solution  and  to  the  same  extent  increases  osmotic  pressure. 
In  the  body  the  liquids  that  concern  us  contain  a  variety  of  substances  in 
solution,  electrolytes  as  weU  as  non-electrolytes.  In  order,  therefore,  to 
calculate  the  osmotic  pressure  of  such  complex  solutions  it  is  necessary  to 
ascertain  the  amount  of  each  substance  present,  and,  in  the  case  of  electro- 
lytes, the  degree  of  dissociation.  Under  experimental  conditions  such  a 
calculation  is  practically  impossible,  and  recourse  must  be  had  to  other 
methods.  One  of  the  simplest  and  most  easily  applied  of  these  methods 
is  the  determination  of  the  freezing  point  of  the  solution. 

Determination  of  Osmotic  Pressure  by  Means  of  the  Freezing  Point. 
— This  method  depends  upon  the  fact  that  the  freezing  point  of  water  is  low- 
ered by  substances  in  solution,  and  it  has  been  discovered  that  the  amount 
of  lowering  is  proportional  to  the  number  of  parts  (molecules  and  ions) 
present  in  the  solution.  Since  the  osmotic  pressure  is  also  proportional  to 
the  number  of  parts  in  solution,  it  is  convenient  to  take  the  lowering  of  the 
freezing  point  of  a  solution  as  an  index  or  measure  of  its  osmotic  pressure. 
In  practice  a  simple  apparatus  (Beckmann's  apparatus)  is  used,  consisting 
essentially  of  a  very  delicate  and  adjustable  differential  thermometer.  By 
means  of  this  instrmnent  the  freezing  point  of  pure  water  is  first  ascertained 
upon  the  empirical  scale  of  the  thermometer.  The  freezing  point  of  the 
solution  under  examination  is  then  determined,  and  the  number  of  degrees 
or  fractions  of  a  degree  by  which  its  freezing  point  is  lower  than  that  of  pure 
water  is  noted.  The  lowering  of  the  freezing  point  in  degrees  centigrade 
is  expressed  usually  by  the  symbol  A-  For  example,  mammalian  blood- 
serum  gives  A  =  0.56°  C.  A  0.95  per  cent,  solution  of  NaCl  gives  the  same 
A  ;  hence  the  two  solutions  exert  the  same  osmotic  pressure,  or,  to  put  it  in 
another  way,  a  0.95  per  cent,  solution  of  NaCl  is  isotonic  or  isosmotic  with 
mammalian  serum.  The  A  of  any  given  solution  may  be  expressed  in  terms 
of  a  gram-molecular  solution  by  dividing  it  by  the  constant  1.87,  since  a 
gram-molecular  solution  of  a  non-electrolyte  is  known  to  lower  the  freezing 
point  1.87°  C.     Thus,  if  blood-serum  gives  A  =  0.56°  C.,its  concentration  in 

terms  of  a  gram-molecular  solution  will  be    -j^,  or  0.3.     In  other  words, 

blood-serum  has  0.3  of  the  osmotic  pressure  exerted  by  a  gram-molecular 
solution  of  a  non-electrolyte, — that  is,  22.32  X  0.3,  or  6.696  atmospheres. 

Remarks  upon  the  Application  of  the  Foregoing  Facts  in  Physiol- 
ogy.— In  the  body  water  and  substances  in  solution  are  continually  pass- 
ing through  membranes, — for  example,  in  the  production  of  lymph,  in  the 
absorption  of  water  and  digested  foodstuffs  from  the  alimentary  canal,  in 
the  nutritive  exchanges  between  the  tissue  elements  and  the  blood  or  lymph, 
in  the  production  of  the  various  secretions,  and  so  on.  In  these  cases  it  is  a 
matter  of  the  greatest  difficulty  to  give  a  satisfactory  explanation  of  the 
forces  controlling  the  flow  to  and  fro  of  the  water  and  dissolved  substances, 
but  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  in  all  of  them  the  physical  forces  of  fil- 
tration, diffusion,  and  osmosis  take  an  important  part.  Whatever  can  be 
learned,  therefore,  concerning  these  processes  must  in  the  end  have  an  im- 
portant bearing  upon  the  explanation  of  the  nutritive  exchanges  between 
the  blood  and  tissues.  Some  additional  facts  may  be  mentioned  to  indicate 
the  applications  that  are  made  of  these  processes  in  explaining  physiological 
phenomena. 

Osmotic  Pressure  of  Proteids. — The  osmotic  pressure  exerted  by  crys- 


DIFFUSION    AND    OSMOSIS.  885 

talloids,  such  as  the  ordinary  sohible  salts,  is,  as  we  have  seen,  very  con- 
siderable, but  the  ready  diffusibility  of  most  of  these  salts  through  animal 
membranes  limits  very  materially  their  influence  upon  the  flow  of  water  in 
the  body.  Thus,  if  we  should  inject  a  strong  solution  of  common  salt  directly 
into  the  blood-vessels,  the  first  effect  would  be  the  setting  up  of  an  osmotic 
stream  from  the  tissues  to  the  blood  and  the  production  of  a  condition  of 
hydremic  plethora  wathin  the  blood-vessels.  The  salt,  however,  would  soon 
diffuse  out  into  the  tissues,  and  to  the  degree  that  this  occurred  its  effect  in 
diluting  the  blood  would  tend  to  diminish  because  the  part  of  the  salt  that 
got  into  the  extravascular  lymph  spaces  would  now  exert  an  osmotic  press- 
ure in  the  opposite  direction,  drawing  water  from  the  blood.  This  fact, 
together  with  the  further  fact  that  an  excess  of  salts  in  the  body  is  soon  re- 
moved by  the  excretory  organs,  gives  to  such  substances  a  smaller  influence 
in  directing  the  water  stream  than  would  at  first  be  supposed  when  the  inten- 
sity of  their  osmotic  action  is  considered.  In  addition  to  the  crystalloids  the 
liquids  of  our  bodies  contain  also  a  certain  amount  of  proteid,  the  blood, 
especially,  containing  over  6  per  cent,  of  this  substance.  It  has  been  gen- 
erally assumed  that  proteids  in  solution  exert  little  or  no  osmotic  pressure, 
but  Starling*  and  others  have  claimed,  on  the  contrary,  that  they  exert  a 
distinct,  although  small,  osmotic  pressure,  and  it  is  possible  that  this  fact 
is  of  special  importance  in  absorption,  because  the  proteids  do  not  diffuse 
or  diffuse  with  great  difficulty,  and  their  effect  remains,  therefore,  so  to 
speak,  as  a  permanent  factor  According  to  Starling,  the  osmotic  pressure 
exerted  by  the  proteids  of  serum  is  equal  to  about  30  mms.  of  mercury. 
That  the  osm.otic  pressure  of  the  serum  proteids  is  so  small  is  not  sur- 
prising if  we  remember  the  very  high  molecular  weight  of  this  substance. 
In  serum  the  proteids  are  present  in  a  concentration  of  about  7  per  cent., 
but  owing  to  their  large  molecular  weight  comparatively  few  proteid  mole- 
cules are  present  in  a  solution  of  this  concentration;  and,  assuming  that 
the  dissolved  proteid  follows  the  laws  discovered  for  crystalloids,  its  osmotic 
pressure  would  depend  upon  the  number  of  molecules  in  solution.  By 
means  of  this  weak,  but  constant,  osmotic  pressure  of  the  indiffusible  pro- 
teid it  is  possible  to  explain  theoretically  the  fact  that  an  isotonic  or  even 
a  hypertonic  solution  of  diffusible  crystalloid  may  be  completely  absorbed 
by  the  blood  from  the  peritoneal  cavity.  Reidf'has  given  evidence  which 
indicates  that  pure  proteids  exert  no  osmotic  pressure;  that  as  they  occur 
in  the  body  liquids  they  are  combined  or  mixed  with  certain  substances  to 
which  the  feeble  osmotic  pressure  formerly  attributed  to  the  proteids  really 
belongs.  Since  these  unknown  substances  are  themselves  indiffusible,  the 
arguments  just  used  still  hold  for  the  conditions  in  the  body. 

Isotonic,  Hypertonic,  and  Hypotonic  Solutions. — In  physiology  the 
osmotic  pressures  exerted  by  various  solutions  are  compared  usually  with 
that  of  the  blood-serum.  In  this  sense  an  isotonic  or  isosmotic  solution  is 
one  having  an  osmotic  pressure  equal  to  that  of  serum,  a  hypertonic  or  hy- 
perosmotic solution  is  one  whose  osmotic  pressure  exceeds  that  of  serum, 
and  a  hypotonic  or  hyposmotic  solution  is  one  whose  osmotic  pressure  is 
less  than  that  of  serum. 

Diffusion,  or  Dialysis,  of  Soluble  Constituents. — If  two  hquids  of 
unequal  concentration  in  a  given  constituent  are  separated  by  a  membrane 
entirely  permeable  to  the  dissolved  molecules  of  the  substance,  a  greater 
number  of  these  molecules  will  pass  over  from  the  more  concentrated  to  the 
less  concentrated  side,  and  in  time  the  composition  will  be  the  same  on  the 
two  sides  of  the  membrane.  Diffusion  of  soluble  constituents  continually 
takes  place,  therefore,  from  the  points  of  greater  concentration  to  those  of 
less,  and  this  may  happen  quite  independently  of  the  direction  of  the  osmotic 
stream  of  water.  If,  for  instance,  a  0.9  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  chlorid 
is  injected  into  the  peritoneal  cavity,  it  will  enter  into  diffusion  relations 
with  the  blood  in  the  blood-vessels;  its  concentration  in  sodium  chlorid 
being  greater  than  that  of  the  blood,  the  excess  will  tend  to  pass  into  the 

*  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  24,  317,  1899. 
t  Reid,  "Journal  of  Physiology,"  1905. 


886  APPENDIX. 

blood,  while  sodium  carbonate,  urea,  sugar,  and  other  soluble  crystalloidal 
substances  Avill  pass  from  the  blood  into  the  salt  solution  in  the  peritoneal 
cavity.  Through  the  action  of  this  process  of  diffusion  we  can  understand 
how  certain  constituents  of  the  blood  may  pass  to  the  tissues  of  various  glands 
in  amounts  greater  than  can  be  explained  if  we  supposed  that  the  lymph 
of  these  tissues  is  derived  solely  by  filtration  from  the  blood-plasma.  An- 
other important  conception  in  this  connection  is  the  possibility  that  the 
capillary  walls  may  be  permeable  in  different  degrees  to  the  various  soluble 
constituents  of  the  blood,  and  furthermore  the  possibility  that  the  permea- 
bility of  the  capillary  walls  may  vary  in  different  organs.  With  regard  to 
the  first  possibility  it  has  been  shown  that  the  blood  capillaries  are  more 
permeable  to  the  urea  molecules  than  to  sugar  or  NaCl.  With  the  aid  of 
these  facts  it  is  possible  to  explain  in  large  measure  the  transportation  of 
material  from  the  blood  to  the  tissues,  and  vice  versa.  For  example,  to  follow 
a  line  of  reasoning  used  by  Roth,  we  may  suppose  that  the  functional  activity 
of  the  tissue  elements  is  attended  by  a  consumption  of  material  which  in 
turn  is  made  good  by  the  dissolved  molecules  in  the  tissue  lymph.  The 
concentration  of  the  latter  is  thereby  lowered,  and  in  consequence  a  diffu- 
sion stream  of  these  substances  is  set  up  with  the  more  concentrated  blood. 
In  this  way,  by  diffusion,  a  constant  supply  of  dissolved  material  is  kept 
in  motion  from  the  blood  to  the  tissue  elements.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
functional  activity  of  the  tissue  elements  is  accompanied  by  a  breaking  down 
of  tlie  complex  proteid  molecule,  with  the  formation  of  simpler,  more  stable 
molecules  of  crystalloid  character,  such  as  the  sulphates,  phosphates,  and 
urea  or  some  precursor  of  urea.  As  these  bodies  pass  into  the  tissue  lymph 
they  tend  to  increase  its  concentration,  and  thus  by  the  greater  osmotic 
pressure  which  they  exert  serve  to  attract  water  from  the  blood  to  the 
lymph,  forming  one  efficient  factor  in  the  production  of  lymph.  On  the 
other  hand,  as  these  substances  accumulate  in  the  lymph  to  a  concentration 
greater  than  that  possessed  by  the  same  substances  in  the  blood,  they  will 
diffuse  toward  the  blood.  By  this  means  the  waste  products  of  activity 
are  drawn  off  to  the  blood,  from  which,  in  turn,  they  are  removed  by  the 
action  of  the  excretory  organs. 

Diffusion  of  Proteids. — This  simple  explanation  on  purely  physical 
grounds  of  the  flow  of  material  between  the  blood  and  the  tissues  can  only 
be  applied,  however,  at  present  to  the  diffusible  crystalloids,  such  as  the 
salts,  urea,  and  sugar.  The  proteids  of  the  blood,  which  are  supposed  to 
be  so  important  for  the  nutrition  of  the  tissues,  are  practically  indiffusible, 
so  far  as  we  know.  It  is  difficult  to  explain  their  passage  from  the  blood 
through  the  capillary  walls  into  the  lymph.  Provisionally  it  may  be  assumed 
that  this  passage  is  due  to  filtration.  The  blood-plasma  in  the  capillaries  is 
under  a  slightly  higher  pressure  than  the  lymph  of  the  tissues,  and  this 
higher  pressure  tends  to  squeeze  the  blood  constituents,  including  the 
proteid,  through  the  capillary  walls.  This  explanation,  however,  can  not  be 
said  to  be  satisfactory;  and  in  this  respect  the  purely  physical  theory  of 
lymph  formation  waits  upon  a  clearer  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  the  nutri- 
tive proteids  and  their  relations  to  the  capillary  wall  (see  Lymph,  p.  427) . 


INDEX. 


Abdominal  respiration,  572 

type  of  respiration,  576 
Absolute  power  of  muscle,  36 
Absorption  coefficient,  600 

in  large  intestine,  717 

in  small  intestine,  712 

in  stomach,  698 

of  carbohydrates,  713 

of  fats,  714 

of  proteids,  716 

spectra  of  hemoglobin,  394 
Acapnia,  625,  630 
Accelerator  center  for  heart,  525 

nerves,  effect  of,  on  heart  rate,  527 
of  heart,  522 
reflex  stimulation  of,  524 
Accessory  thyroids,  772 
Accommodation  in  eye,  limits  of,  292 
mechanism  of,  289 

reflex,  301 
Achromatic    series   of   visual   sensa- 
tions, 320 
Achroodextrin,  680 
Acid   albumin   in   gastric    digestion, 
693 

amido-acetic,  706,  874 

amidocaproic,  706,  874 

amidoglutaric,  874 

amido-oxypropionic,  874 

amidopropionic,  874 

amidosuccinic,  706,  874, 

amidothiolactic,  874 

amidovalerianic,  706,  874 

cholic,  725 

conjugated  sulphuric,  760 

diamidocaproic,  874 

glutaminic,  706,  874 

glycocholic,  725 

guanidinamido valerianic,  874 

hippuric,  759 

lactic,  60 

oxyphenylamidopropionic,  874 

phenylamidopropionic,  874 

phosphocarnic,  60 

pyrrolidin-carbonic,  874 

taurocholic,  725 
Acromegaly,  778 
Action  current,  diphasic,  98 
in  heart,  480 
in  muscle,  96 
in  nerve,  96 


Action   current  in  retina,  309 
monophasic,  98 

relation  of,  to  contraction  wave, 
100 
to  nerve  impulse,  100 

Adamkiewicz's  reaction  for  proteids, 
877 

Addison's  disease,  775 

Adenase,  664 

Aden  in,  61,  757 

Adrenal  bodies,  functions  of,  775 

Adrenalin,  776 

Aerial  perspective,  345 

Aerotonometer,  601 

Afferent    fibers    in    cranial    nerves, 
79 
position   of,   in   posterior   roots, 
77 
nerve  fibers,  75 

After-images  in  eye,  323 

Air,  effect  of  variations  in,  on  res- 
pirations, 627 

Alanin,  706,  874 

Albumin,    properties     of,    878     (see 
also  Proteid) 

Albuminates,  properties  of,  878 

Albuminoids,  nutritive  value  of,  791 
properties  of,  880 

Albumon,  414 

Alcohol  as  food,  808 

effect  of,  on  gastric  absorption,  699 
physiological  action  of,  805 

Alimentary  canal,  movements  of,  634 
glycosuria,  714 
principles  of  food,  654 

Altitude,    effect   of,   on   red   corpus- 
cles, 403 

Amboceptors,  388 

Ametropia,  295 

Amido-acetic  acid,  706,  874 

Amido-acids  as  part  of  proteid  mole- 
cule, 706 

Amidocaproic  acid,  706,  874 

Amidoglutaric  acid,  874 

Amido-oxypropionic  acid,  874 

Amidopropionic  acid,  706,  874 

Amidosuccinic  acid,  706,  874 

Amidothiolactic  acid,  874 

Amidovalerianic  acid,  706,  874 

Ammonia  compounds  in  urine,   752 
salts,  relation  of,  to  urea,  755 


887 


INDEX. 


Ammonium  carbamate  as  precursor 
of  urea,  754 

carbonate   as    precursor    of    urea, 
737 
Amylolytic  enzyme,  662 
Amylopsin,  708 
Anacrotic  pulse,  474,  475 
Anaglyph,  347 
Anelectrotonic  currents,   101 
Anelectrotonus,  83 
Anisotropous  substance  in  muscle,  19 
Anode  as  stimulus  to  muscle,  82 
to  nerve,  82 

physical,  89 

physiological,  89 
Anoxemia,  628 
Anterior  commissure,  213 

marginal  bundle,  spinal  cord,  170 

roots  of  spinal  nerves,  77 
Antidromic   impulses   in   vasodilator 

nerve  fibers,  78,  548 
Antilytic  secretion,  677 
Antiparalytic  secretion,  677 
Antipeptone,  705 
Antithrombin,  419 
Antrum  pylori  of  stomach,  639 
Anus  prseternaturalis,  717 
Apex  beat  of  heart,  482 
Aphasia,  motor,  204 

sensory,  206 
Apnea,  623 
Arginase,  756 
Arginin,  707,  863,  874 
Argyll  Robertson  pupil,  302 
Arterial  pressure  (see  Circulation) 
Artificial  muscle  of  Engelmann,  69 

respiration,  581 

stimuli  of  nerve  fibers,  80 
Ascending  paths  in  spinal  cord,  161 
Aspartic  acid,  706,  874 
Asphyxia,  effect    of,    on    heart-rate, 

529 
Aspiratory   action  of  thorax,   587 
Association  areas  in  brain,  207,  209 

system  of  fibers  in  cerebrum,  175 
Astereognosis,  189 
Astigmatism,  297 
Atropin,   action  of,  on  heart,  520 
on  iris,  303 

on  salivary  secretion,  676 
on  sweat  secretion,  768 
Auditory  center  in  cortex,  198 

nerve,   course  of,  in  brain,   199 
effect  of  section  of,  375 

sensations  (see  Ear) 

strice,  201 
Auricle  (see  Heart) 
Auriculoventricular    muscle   bundle, 
479 
effect   of  compressing,    508 
Auscultation,  486 
Autolysis,  835 


Autolytic  enzymes,  664 
Automaticity  of  heart  beat,  500 
Autonomic  fibers  from  brain,  234 

from  sacral  cord,  236 

from  spinal  cord,  233 
nerve  fibers,  normal  stimulation  of, 

236 
nervous  system,  general  relations 

of,  232 
Axial  stream  in  arteries,  435 

in  veins,  435 
Axon  reflexes,   142        . 


Bacterial  action  in  intestines,  718 
Balance    experiments    in    nutrition, 

785 
Balloon  ascensions,  effect  of,  630 
Banting  diet,  800 

Barometric  pressures,  effect  of,  629 
Bartholin,  duct  of,  666 
Basilar  membrane,  function  of,  367 
Bathmotropic  nerve  fibers  to  heart, 

516 
Bell-Magendie  law,  77 
Bilateral    representation     in    motor 

areas,  186 
Bile,  composition  of,  722 

curve  of  secretion  of,  729 

effect  of  occluding  bile  ducts,  730 

ejection   of,    into    duodenum,    728 

functions  of,  summary,  730 

quantity  of,  722 

secretion  of,  727 
Bile-acids,  composition  of,  725 
Bile-pigments,  400,  724 
Bile-salts,     importance     of,     in     fat 

digestion,  715 
Bilirubin,  724 
Biliverdin,  724 
Binocular  perspective,  346,  349 

vision,  338 

horopter  in,  343 
struggle  of  visual  fields  in.  344 
value  of,   in  judgments  of  dis- 
tance, 344 
in  judgments  of  size,  344 
Births,  ratio  of  male  and  female,  869 
Biuret  reaction  for  proteids,  877 
Bladder,  urinary,  movements  of,  762 
Blind  spot  in  eye,  308 
Blood,    blood-plates    of,    physiology 
of,  407 

circulation  of  (see  Circulation) 

coagulation  of,  414 

condition  of  carbon  dioxid  in,  604 
of  nitrogen  in,  602 

curve  of  dissociation  of  oxyhemo- 
globin, 603 

defibrinated,  382 

gases  of,  596 

general  properties  of,  381 


INDEX. 


889 


Blood,  hemoglobin  in,  385 
amount,  389 
nature,  389 
hemolysis   of   red   corpuscles,   385 
histological  structure  of,  381 
leucocytes  of,  404 
nucleoproteid  in.  414 
osmotic  pressure  of,  386 
proteids  of,  410,  413 
reaction  of,  382 
reasons  for  not  clotting  in  vessels, 

419 
red  corpuscles  of,  384 
fate  of,  401 
origin  of,  401 
regeneration  of,  after  hemorrhage, 
424 
Blood-plasma,  composition  of,  408 
Blood-plates,    effect    of    hemorrhage 
upon,  425 
part  taken  b}^  in  coagulation,  417 
properties  of,  406 
Blood-pressure,    effect   of   menstrua- 
tion upon,  846 
in  brain,  556 

relation  of,  to  heart  rate,  527 
respiratory  waves  of,  588 
Traube-Hering  waves  of,  544 
Blood-serum,  382,  409 
specific  gravity  of,  383 
total  quantity  of,  423 
transfusion  of,  426 
Body  equilibrium    in   nutrition,  785 
sense  area,  188 
temperature  in  man,  821 
Bowman's  theory  of  urinary  secre- 
tion, 743 
Brain,  association  areas  of,  207 
auditory  center  in,  198 
center  for  taste,  204 
for  olfaction,  202 
centers    affected    in    aphasia,    204 
development  of  cortical  areas,  210 
effect     of    variations     in     arterial 

pressure  upon,  557 
intracranial  pressure  in,  556 
localization  of  function  in,   181 
motor  areas  of,   183 
regulation  of  circulation  in,  559 
sensory  areas  of,   188 
vascular  supply  of,  552 
Brightness  in  visual  sensations,  319 
Bronchi,  capacity  of,  581 

constrictor   and   dilator   fibers   of, 
625 
Buffy  coat  of  blood,  415 
Burdach,  column  of,  162 


Caffein,  757,  805 
Caisson  disease,  629 


Calcarine  fissure,  relation  of, to  vision, 

195 
Calcium    salts,    effect    of,    on    heart, 
501 
importance    of,    in    clotting    of 
blood,  416 
in  curdling  of  milk.  696 
nutritive  value  of,  803 
of  milk,  429 
Calorie,  definition  of,  35,  823 
Calorimeters,  varieties  of,  824 
Calorimetric  equiA-alent,  825 

measurements,  828 
Calorimetry,  indirect,  827 

principles  of,  823 
Cannula,  washout,  443 
Capillary  blood-pressure,  452 

electrometer,  construction  of,  94 
Carbohydrates,  absorption  of,  713 
as  glycogen  formers,  732 
as  source  of  body  fat,  798 
fate  of,  in  body,  793 
fermentation  of,  in   intestine,   714 
general  functions  of,  794 
of  muscle,  59 
supply  of,  in  body,  793 
Carbon    dioxid,    action    on    respira- 
tory center,  621 
condition  of,  in  blood,  604 
effect    of,   in    inspired    air,   594, 

629 
excretion  of,  through  skin,   770 
in  balance  experiments,   785 
in  saliva,  669 

production  of,  in  muscle,  62 
tension  of,  in  alveolar  air,  607 
in  arterial  blood,  608 
in  tissues,  60S 
in  venous  blood,  607 
equilibrium,  785 
monoxid  hemoglobin,  391 
Cardiac  cycle,  488 

glands  of  stomach,  683 
muscle,  properties  of,  54,  504 
nerves  (see  Heart) 
Cardiogram,  482 

Cardio-inhibitory  center,  517,  518 
Camin,  61 
Casein,  695,  879 
Catalase,  664 
Catalysis,  658 

Catelectrotonic  currents,  101 
Catelectrotonus,  83 
Cathode  as  stimulus,  82 

physical   and   physiological,   89 
Centers  in  cerebrum  (see  Cerebrum) 
Central  field  of  vision,  313 
Centrosome,  848 

Cerebellum,   ending  of  spinal  tracts 
in,  164 
experimental  work  upon,  220 
general  functions  of,  219,  223 


890 


INDEX. 


Cerebellum,  localization  of   function 
in,  224 
paths  connecting  with  other  parts 

of  brain,  218 
psychical  functions  of,  224 
structure  of,  216 
Cerebrospinal  liquid,  555 
Cerebrum,  association  areas  of,  207 
system  of  fibers  in,  175 
auditory  center  in,   198 
center  for  hearing,   198 
for  olfaction,  202 
for  vision,  192 
centers  affected  in  aphasia,  206 
commissural  system  of  fibers  in, 

175 
development  of  cortical  areas  in, 

210 
general  physiology  of,  171 
histology  of  cortex,  172 
localization  of  function  in,   179 
motor  areas  of,  183 
projection  system  of  fibers  in,  173 
results  of  ablation  of,  178 
sensory  areas  of,  188 
vasomotor  supply  of,  552 
Cerumen,  770 
Chemotaxis,  119 
Cheyne-Stokes  respiration,  632 
Cholesterin,  721,  726,  770 
Cholic  acid,  725 
Cholin,  727 

Chorda  tympani  nerve,  270,  667,  670 
Chromatic   aberration   in  eye,  293 

visual  sensations,  321 
Chromatolysis,  121 
Chromophile  substance  in  nerve  cells, 

127 
Chromoproteids,  880 
Chromosomes,  848,  867 
Chronotropic  ner^'e   fibers  to   heart, 

516 
Chyle  fat,  715 
Chymosin,  695 

Ciliary  muscle,  action  of,  in  accom- 
modation, 291 
nerves  to,  299 
Ciliated  epithelium,  54 
Circulating  proteids,  787 
Circulation,  accessory  factors  in,  466 
as   seen   under   microscope,   434 
curve  showing  pressures  in,  452 
data  concerning  pressures  in  (man), 
458 
mean  pressures  in,  450 
diastole  and  systole  of  heart,  477 
effect    of    adrenal    extracts    upon, 
776 
of  heart  beat  and  size  of  arteries 
upon,  440 
explanation  of  side-pressure  in,  460 
of  velocity  changes  in,  439 


Circulation,  explanation  of  velocity- 
pressure  in,  460 
factors    of    normal    pressure    and 

velocity  in,  463 
form  of  pulse  wave,  472 
general  curve  of  velocities  in,  439 
general  statement  of  pressure  rela- 
tions, 442 
hydrostatic  effects  upon,  465 
importance  of  elasticity  of  arteries, 

463 
in  brain,  552,  559 
in  kidneys,  749 

means  of  determining  blood-pres- 
sure in,  442,  453 
velocities  in,  435 
of  lymph,  564 

pressures  in  coronary  system,  491 
in  pulmonary  system,  467,  468 
pulse  pressures  in,  446 
respiratory   waves  of  pressure  in, 

588 
systole  and  diastole  of  heart,  477 
systolic,  diastolic,  and  mean  pres- 
sures in, 446 
and  mean  velocities  in,  438 
time  required  for  complete,  441 
Traube-Hering  waves  of  pressure 

in,  544 
velocity   in   capillaries,  438 
in  coronary  system,  491 
in  man,  438 

in  pulmonary  system,  467,   468 
of  pulse  wave,  470 
Clarke's  column,  156 
Clotting  (see  Coagulation) 
Coagulation,  blood,  414 
intravascular,  421 
means  of  hastening  and  retarding, 

421 
theories  of,  415 
Cocain,  action  of,  on  iris,  303 
Cochlea,  functions  of,  366 

sensory  epithelium  of,  360 
Cold  spots  on  skin,  257 
Color  blindness,  325,  327 
contrasts,  324 
fusion,  321 
saturation,  321 
sense  of  retina,  328 
vision,  theories  of,  331 
Combustion  equivalents  of  foods,  815 
Comma  tract  of  Schultze,  169 
Commissural  system  of  fibers  (cere- 
brum), 175 
Common  sensations,  256 
Compensatory   pause   in   heart-beat, 

506 
Complemental  air,  580 
Complementary  colors,  322 
Compound  muscular  contractions,  39 
Condiments,  656,  804 


INDEX. 


891 


Conduction  as  physiological  property, 

72 
direction  of,  in  nerve  fibers,   107 
Conjugate  foci,  283 
Conjugated  sulphates,  759 
Contraction,    17,    32,    33    (see     also 

Muscle) 
Contralateral  conduction  in  cord,  166 
Convoluted  tubules  of  kidney,  746 
Core-model  of  nerve,  102 
Coronary  arteries,  effect  of  occlusion 
of,  494 
vasomotor  supply  of,  491 
Corpora  quadrigemina,  relation  of,  to 
visual  apparatus,  193,  197 
striata,  functions  of,  214 
Corpus- callosum,  structure  and  func- 
tion, 213 
luteum,  840 
trapezoideum,  200 
Corresponding  points  of  retina,  340 
Cortex  of   cerebrum,   general  physi- 
ology of,   175 
histology  of,  172 
Corti,  rods  of,  367 
Costal  respiration,  573,  576 
Cowper's  glands,  861 
Cranial  nerves,  afferent  fibers  in,  79 
efferent  fibers  of,  79 
nuclei  of  origin  of,  226 
Cranioscopy,  180 
Creatin,  61,  66,  J58 
Creatinin,  61,  758 
Cresol-sulphuric  acid,  719,  760 
Cretinism,  773 

Curve,      contraction,      of      artificial 
muscle,  70 
of  plain  muscle,  53 
of  skeletal  muscle,  25 
dissociation  of  oxyhemoglobin,  603 
extensibility     and      elasticity     of 

muscle,  19 
gastric  secretion,  690 

intensity  of  sleep,  240 
pancreatic  secretion,  702 
pressures  in  vascular  system,  452 
relations  of  heart  sounds,  487,  488 
respiratory  movements,  578 
secretion  of  bile,  729 
systolic,  diastolic,  and  mean  blood- 
pressures,  447 
velocity  of  blood-fiow,  439 
visual  acuity  of  retina,  316 
work  of  muscle,  36 
Cycloplegia,  303 
Cystin,  726,  874 
Cystinuria,  726 

Death  rigor,  chemical  changes  dur- 
ing,   66 
in  muscle,  49 
theories  of,  872 


Defecation,  650 

Degeneration  in  nerve  fibers,  118,  120 

Deglutition,  634 

nervous  control  of,  638 
Deiters's  cells  in  cochlea,  368 
Demarcation    current,    muscle    and 

nerve,  91 
Demilunes  of  salivary  glands,  668 
Depressor  nerve  fibers,  540 

of  heart,  543 
Derived  albumins,  properties  of,  878 
Descending  paths,  spinal  cord,   167, 

169 
Deutero-albumoses,  693 
Diabetes,  733 

mellitus,  780 

pancreatic,  780 

phloridzin,  795 
Dialysis,  definition  of,  881 
Diaphragm,  action  of,  572 
Diaphragmatic  respiration,  572 
Diastase,  662 

discovery  of,  657 
Diastole,  duration  of,  in  heart,  489 
Diastolic  arterial  pressure,  446 

method     of     determining     in 

animals,  447 
method    of    determining,     in 
man,  454 
Dicrotic  pulse  wave,  474 
Diet,  accessory  articles  of,  656,  804 

average  daily,  818 

Banting's,  800 

effect    of    reduction    of    salts    in, 
802 
Dietetics,  general  principles  of,  817 
Diffusion  circles  on  retina,  289 

definition  of,  881 
Digestion  in  large  intestine,  717 

in  small  intestine,   700 

in  stomach,  696 
Diopter,  definition  of,  293 
Dioptrics  of  eye,  282 
Diplopia,  342 

Direct  field  of  vision,  eye,  313 
Discord,     physiological     explanation 

of,  369 
Dissociation  of  oxyhemoglobin,    603 
Diuretics,  action  of,  748 
Dromograph,  437 
Dromotropic   nerve  fibers  to   heart, 

516 
Duct  of  Bartholin,  666 

of  Rivinus,  666 

of  Stenson,  666 

of  Wharton,  666 

of  Wirsung,  700 
Dyspnea,  575,  622 


Ear     effect   of   section   of   auditory 
nerves,  375 


892 


INDEX. 


Ear,  effect  of    stimulation  of    semi- 
circular canals,  374 
Eustachian  tube  of,  359 
Flourens's    experiments   on   semi- 
circular canals,  372 
functions      in      analyzing      sound 
waves,   365 
of  cochlea,  366 
of  ear-bones,  356 
of  sacculus,  379 
of  utriculus,  379 
intrinsic  muscles  of,  358 
limits  of  hearing,  370 
position  of  bones  in,  355 
•    projection  of  auditory  sensations, 
360 
semicircular  canals  of,  372 
sensations  of  discord,  369 

of  harmony,  369 
sensory  epithelium  in  cochlea.  360 
structure  of,  353 

bones  of,  355 
theories  of  functions  of  semicircu- 
lar canals  of,  375 
tympanic   membrane   of,   354 
Eck  fistula,  754 
Efferent  nerve  fibers,  75 

occurrence  in  anterior  roots,  77 
in  cranial  nerves,  79 
Ejaculation  of  spermatic  liquid,  864 
Elasticity  and  extensibility  of  muscle, 

19 
Electrical  currents  during  heart  beat, 

480 
Electrodes,  non-polarizable.  95 

stimulating,  81 
Electrolytes,    effect    of,    on    osmotic 

pressure,  882 
Electrotonic  currents,   101 
Electrotonus,  83 
Eleventh   cranial   nerve,   nucleus  of, 

230 
Embryo,   nutrition   of,   852 
Endogenous    fibers    of    spinal    cord, 

162 
Energy  of  muscular  contraction,  34 
Enterokinase,  704,  711 
Entoptic  phenomena,  336 
Enzymes,  adenase,  664 
amylopsin,  708 
arginase,  756 
chemistry  of,  664 
classification  of,  661 
definition  of,  661 
enterokinase,  704,  711 
erepsin,  711 

general  properties  of,  663 
glycolytic,  782 
guanase,  664 

historical  account  of,  657 
intracellular,  835 
inverting,  711 


Enzymes,  lipase,  709 

of  muscle,  61 

oxidases,  836 

pepsin,  691 

peroxidases,  836 

ptyalin,  679 

rennin,  695 

reversible  reactions  of,  659 

specificity  of,  661 

thrombin,  416 

trypsin,  705 
Epigenesis,  866 
Epinephrin,  776 
Erection,  physiology  of,  863 
Erepsin,  664,  711 
Ergograph,  45 
Erythroblasts,  402 
Erythrocytes  (see  Red  corpuscles) 
Erythrodextrin,  680 
Eserin,  action  of,  on  iris,  303 
Esophoria,  340 
Ethereal  sulphates,  759 
Eupnea,  575 
Eustachian  tube,  359 
Evolution,  hypothesis  of,  in  heredity, 

866 
Excretion,  721 

Exogenous  fibers  in  spinal  cord,  162 
Exophoria,  340 
Expiration  (see  also  Respiration) 

definition  of,  571 

expiratory  center,  619 

muscles  of,  574 
Expired   air,   composition  of,   592 

injurious    effects   of,    593 
Extensibility  of  muscle,  19 
External  geniculates,  193,  197 
Eye,  abnormalities  in  refraction  of, 
295 

accommodation  in,  301 
mechanism  of,  289 

action  of  drugs  upon,  303 

acuity  of  vision  in,  315 

after-images  in,  323 

as  optical  instrument,  282 

binocular  field  of  vision,  340 
perspective,  346 

chromatic  aberration  in,  293 

color  blindness  of,  325 
contrasts  in,  324 
Adsion  in,  321 

complementary  colors,  322 

corresponding  points  in,  340 

dark  adapted,  310,  318 

diffusion  circles  in,  289 

diplopia  in,  342 

direct  field  of  vision  in,  313 

entoptic  phenomena  in,  336 

far   point   of   distinct   vision,    292 

function  of  cones,  330 
of  rods,  330 

fundamental  color  sensations,  322 


INDEX. 


893 


Eye,  horopter,  343 

indirect   field   of   vision   in,   313 
(.inversion  of  image  in,  287 
light  adapted,  310,  318 

reflex  in,  301 
movements  of,  338 
muscular  insufficiency,  339 
nature  of  visual  stimuli,  308 
near  point  of  distinct  vision,  292 
nodal  point  of,  286 
ophthalmoscopic    examination    of, 

305 
optical  defects  of,  293 

delusions,  350 
physics  of  formation  of  image  in, 

282 
qualities  of  visual  sensations,  320 
reduced   schematic    (Listing),    286 
refractive   power  of,   293 
size  of  retinal  images,  288 
spherical    aberration    in,  294 
stereoscopic  vision,  347 
struggle  of   visual  fields,   344 
suppression  of  visual  images,  343 
theories  of  color  vision,  331 
threshold  stimulus  of,  317 
visual  field  of,  312 

judgments,  349 

purple  of,  310 
Eye-muscles,  action  of,  338 


Facial  nerve,  dilator  fibers  in,  545 

nucleus  of,  229 
Far  point  of  distinct  vision,  292 
Fat,  absorption  of,  714 

as  glycogen  former,  734 

digestion  of,  709 
in  stomach,  699 

excessive  formation  of,  in  obesity, 
799 

in  bile,  727 

metabolism  of,  in   body,   797 

nutritive  value  of,  796 

of  chyle,  715 

origin  of,  from  carbohydrates,  798 
in  body,  797 
Fatigue,  in  nerve  fibers,   110 

muscular,  47 

of  olfactory  organs,  279 
theories  of,  66 
Feces,  composition  of,  720 
Fermentation  in  intestine,  718 

of   carbohydrates   in    small   intes- 
tine, 714 
Ferments,  historical  account  of,  657 
Fertilization  of  ovum,  850 
Fibrillary  contractions  of  heart,  495 
Fibrin   factors,  417 

ferment,  preparation  of,  416 

globulin,  413,  419 

relations  to  blood-clot,  414 


Fibrinogen,  412 

preparation  of,  416 
Fictitious  meal  (Pawlow),  689 
■Fifth  cranial  nerve,  227 
Fillet,  lateral,  200 

median,  190 
Fistula,  Eck's,  754 

gall-bladder,  715 

stomach,  686 

Thiry-Vella,  710 
Flavors,  656 

dietary  importance  of,  804 
Flechsig's  myelinization  method,  157 

tracts,  164 
Fluorid  solution,   effect  on  clotting, 

422 
Food,  composition  of,  655 

definition  of,  654 

potential  energy  of,  814 
Foodstuffs,  definition  of,  654 
Fourth  cranial  nerve,  nucleus  of,  227 
Fovea,   center  for,   in  occipital  cor- 
tex, 196 

of  retina,  size  of,  314,  315 
Franklin  theory  of  color  vision,  334 
Freezing  point,  method  of  determin- 
ing, 884 
Fundic   glands  of  stomach,  683 
Fundus  of  stomach,  639 


Gall-bladder,    functions  of,    728 

nerves  of,  730 
Galvanometer,  construction  of,  92 

d'Arsonval,  93 
Gases,    laws    governing     absorption 
of,  599 
of  blood,  596 
pressure  of,  599 
tension  of,  in  solution,  601 
Gas-pump,  597 
Gastric  glands,  683 

histological   changes   in,   during 

secretion,  684 
secretory  nerves  of,  688 
secretion,  acid  of,  687 
composition  of,  685 
curve  of,  689 
means  of  obtaining,  685 
normal  mechanism  of,  689 
Gelatin,  nutritive  value  of,  791 
Genital  organs,  vasomotor  supply  of, 

562 
Germ  plasm,  definition  of,  872 
Globin,  389 
Globulicidal  action   of   blood-serum, 

387 
Globulins,  general  properties  of,  878 
Glomerulus  of  kidney,  functions  of, 

744 
Glossopharyngeal  nerve,  dilator  fibers 
in,  545 


894 


INDEX. 


Glossopharyngeal  nerve,   nucleus  of, 

229 
Glucoproteids,  880 
Glucosamin,  875 
Glutaminic  acid,  706,  874 
Glutolin,  411 
Glycocholic  acid,  725 
Glycocoll,  706,  725,  874 
Glycogen,  amount   of,   in   liver,    732 

discovery  of,  731 

glycogenic  theory,  734 

importance  of,   in   embryo,   853 

in  musclp,  59,  736 

loss  of,   during  muscular  contrac- 
tions, 64 

metabolism  of,  in  bod3^  794 

origin  of,  732 

supply  of,  in  body,  793 
Glycolysis  of  sugars  in  body,  782 
Glycosuria,  733 

alimentary,  714 
Glycylglycin,  875 
Gmelin's  reaction  for  bile  pigments, 

724 
Golgi's  nerve  cells,  second  type,  126 

pericellular  nerve  net,  127 
Goll,  column  of,  162 
Gowers's  tract,   164 
Graafian  follicle,  structure    of,     839 
Gram-molecular  solution,  883 
Growth,  871 
Guanase,  664 
Guanin,  61,  757_ 
Gudden's  commissure,  201 

Harmony,    physiological    cause    of, 

369 
Hearing,  cortical  center  of,  198 

limits  of,  370 
Heart,    accelerator    center    for,    525 
nerves  of,  522 

action  current  of,  480 
of  inhibitory  nerves,  512 

analysis   of   inhibition,    514 

apex  beat  of,  482 

automaticity  of,  500 

capacity  of  ventricles  of,  489 

cardiac  nerves  of,  course,  512 

cardiogram,  482 

cardio-inhibitory  center  of,  517 

causation  of  beat,  503 

change    in    form    of    ventricle   in 
systole,  481 

compensatory  pause  of,  506 

contraction  wave  in,  479 

coronary  circulation  in,  491 

course  of  cardiac  nerves,  512 

depressor  nerve  of,  543 

diastole  and  systole  of,  477 
time  relations  of,  489 

effect  of  calcium  upon,  501 


Heart,  effect  of    occlusion  of   coro- 
naries  upon,  494 
of  potassium  upon.  501 
of  sodium  upon,  501 
escape  from  inhibition,  517 
events  of  a  cardiac  cycle,  488 
fibrillary  contractions,  495 
inhibition  of  auricle,  516 

of  ventricle,  516 
intraventricular  systole,  484 
intrinsic  nerves  of,  496 
maximal  contractions  of,  504 
musculature  of,  478 
myogenic  theory  of  beat  of,  498 
negative  pressure  in,  493 
neurogenic  theory  of  beat  of,  497 
rate  of  beat  as  affected  by  age,  526 
by  blood-pressure,  527 
by  extrinsic  nerves,  527 
by   muscular    exercise,    528 
by  sex,  526 
by  size,  526 
by  temperature,  529 
reflex  acceleration  of  beat,  524 
refractory  period  of,  504 
sequence  of  beat  of,  496,  507 
sounds  of,  485 
suction-pump  action  of,  492 
systole  and  diastole  of,  477 

time  relations  of,  489 
systolic  plateau  of  beat,  485 
theories  of  inhibition  of,  520 
tonic  inhibition  of,  518 
tonicity  of  muscle  of,  510 
vasomotors  of,  550 
ventricle  of,  in  systole,  481 
work  done  by,  489 
Heart-block,  508 
Heart-muscle,  general  properties  of, 

54 
Heat  centers,  830 

equivalent  of  foodstuffs,  815 

loss  of,  physiological  regulation  of, 

828 
nerves,  830 

production,    physiological    regula- 
tion of,  829 
puncture,  832 
regulation,    general   statement   of, 

828 
rigor  of  muscle,  51 
sexual,  in  lower  animals,  842 
Helmholtz  theory  of  color  vision,  331 
Helweg's  bundle,  spinal  cord,  170 
Hematin,  389,  399 
Hematoidin,  724 
Hematopoietic  tissue,  402 
Hematoporphyrin,  400 
Hemeralopia  (night-blindness),  331 
Hemin,  399 
Hemipeptone,  705 
Hemiplegia,   186 


INDEX. 


895 


Hemochromogen,  389,  400 
Hemodromograph,  437 
Hemoglobin,   absorption  spectra  of, 
394 

compounds  of,  with  carbon  dioxid, 
392 
with  carbon  monoxid,  391 
with  nitric  oxid,  392 
with  oxygen,  391 

condition  of,   in  corpuscles,   385 

crystals  of,  393 

curve  of  dissociation  of  oxyhemo- 
globin, 603 

derivative  compounds  of,  398 

iron  in,  392 

nature  and  amount  of,  389 
Hemolysins,    natural    and    acquired, 

387 
Hemolysis,  385 
Hemorrhage,  effect  of,  425 
Heredity,  definition  and  history,  866 
Hering  theory  of  color  vision,  333 
Heterophoria,  340 
Hexon  bases,  863 
Hippuric  acid,  759 
Histidin,  707,  874 
Histohematins,  400 
Histons,  863,  879 

effect  of,   on  coagulation  of  blood, 
421 
Hofacker-Sadler  law,  869 
Homoiothermous  animals,  821 
Homolateral  conduction  in  cord,  166 
Horopter,  343 
Hunger,  sense  of,  267 
Hydrocele  liquid,  411 
Hydrochloric  acid,  function  of,  in  pep- 
tic digestion,  693 
in  gastric  juice,  687 
Hydrolysis,  662 

Hydrostatic  factor  in  circulation,  465 
Hypermetropia,  296 
Hyperpnea,  622 
Hypertonic  solutions,  885 
Hypnotic  sleep,  248 
Hypoglossal  nerve,  nucleus  of,  230 
Hypophysis  cerebri,  778 
Hypotonic  solutions,  885 
Hypoxanthin,  61,  756 


Identical  points  of  retina,  340 
Identity  theory    of    nerve    impulse, 

115 
Immune  body,  388 
Indican,  760 
Indirect  calorimetry,  827 

field  of  vision,  eye,  313 
Indol  group  in  proteid  molecule,  706 
Indoxyl  sulphuric  acid,  719,  760 
Induction  coil,  23 
Inert  layer  in  circulation,  435 


Infundibular  body,  778 
Inhibition,    escape    from,    in    heart, 
517 
of  heart,  513,  527 
of  knee-jerk,  147 
of  reflexes,   139 

of  respiratory  movements,  616 
reflex  of  heart,  517 
theories  of,  520 
Inotropic  nerves  to  heart,  516 
Inspiration  (see  also  Respiration) 
definition  of,  571 
increased  heart-rate  during,  591 
means  of  producing,  572 
muscles  of,  574 
Inspired  air,  composition  of,  592 
Internal  secretion,  adrenals,  775 

definition  and  historical  account, 

771 
kidney,  782 
liver,  771 
ovary,  779 
pancreas,  780 
testis,  778 
thyroid  tissues,  772 
sensations,  256 
Intestinal      movements,      effect      of 
various  conditions  upon,  648 
secretion,  710 
Intestines,  bacterial  action  in,  718 
large,  movements  of,  648 
nervous  control  of  movements  of, 

647 
reaction  of  contents  of,  718 
small,  movements  of,  644 
Intracellular  enzymes,  835 
Intracranial  pressure  556 
Intrapulmonic  pressure,  583 
Intrathoracic  pressure,  584 
origin  of,  586 

variations  of,  with  forced  breath- 
ing, 585 
Intraventricular  pressure,  484 
Introductory  contractions  of  muscle, 

33 
Invertase,  664,  711 
in  stomach,  697 
Involuntary  muscle,  52 
lodothyrin,  773 
Iris,  action  of  drugs  upon,  303 

antagonistic  actionof  muscles  upon, 

304 
muscles  and  nerves  of,  299 
Iron  in  hemoglobin,  392 

salts,  source  and  nutritive  impor- 
tance of,  803 
Irritability,  definition  of,  22 
of  muscle,  22 
of  nerve  fibers,  80 
Isodynamic  equivalent  of  foodstuffs, 

817 
Isometric  muscular  contractions,  27- 


896 


INDEX. 


Isotonic    muscular    contractions,    27 

solutions,  definition  of,  885 
Isotropous  substance  in  muscle,  19 


Jacobson,  nerve  of,  666 
Judgments,   visual,  of  distance  and 
size,  349 
of  perspective  or  solidity,  345 


Kidney,  action  of  diuretics  on,  748 

blood-flow  through,  749 

composition  of  secretion  of  (urine), 
751 

function  of  convoluted  tubules,  746 
of  glomerulus,  744 

internal  secretion  of,  782 

secretion  of  urine  in,  742 

structure  of,  741 
Kjeldahl's  method  for  determination 

of  nitrogen,  752,  784 
Knee-jerk,     conditions     influencing, 
149 

definition  of,  146 

explanation  of,   148 

reinforcement  of,  146 

use  of,  as  diagnostic  sign,  150 


Labor,  physiology  of,  854 

Lactic  acid  in  muscle,  60 

increase  of,  during  contraction, 
64 

Laked  blood,  385 

Langerhans,  islands  of,  781 

Large  intestine,  digestion  and  absorp- 
tion of  food  in,  717 

Larynx,  reflex  effects  from,  on  respi- 
rations, 617 

Latent   period  of  muscular  contrac- 
tion, 26 

Lecithin,  727 

Lemniscus,  lateral,  200 
median,  190 

Leucin,  706,  874 

Leucocytes,     effect    of    hemorrhage 
upon,  425 
functions  of,  405 
in  formation  of  thrombin,  417 
structure  and  classification,  404 
variations  in  number  of,  405 

Leuconuclein,      effect     upon     blood 
coagulation,  421 

Liebermann's   reaction   for  proteids, 
877 

Liebig's   classification   of   foodstuffs, 
809 

Light-reflex  in  eye,  301 

Lipase,  662 

in  pancreatic  secretion,  709 
in  stomach,  697 


Lipase,  reversible  reaction  of,  660 
Listing's  law,  339 

schematic  eye,  286 
Liver,  bile-pigments  of,  724 
acids  of,  725 

defensive  action  of,  in  coagulation, 
420 

formation  of  urea  in,  737 

glycogen  of,  731 

glycogenic  action  of,  734 

internal  secretion  of,  771 

pulse,  476 

quantity  of  bile,  722 

secretion  of  bile,  727 
Local]  zation  of  function  in  cerebellum, 
224 
in  cerebrum,   179 
Localizing  power  of  skin,  260 
Locke's  solution,  502 
Locomotor  ataxia,   163 
Ludwig's  theory  of  urinary  secretion, 

743 
Luminosity  of  visual  sensations,  319 
Lungs,  gaseous  exchanges  in,  606 

vasomotors  of,  551 
Luxus  consumption,  788 
Lymph,  action  of  lymphagogues,  430 

circulation  of,  564 

formation  of,  427 

summary  of  factors  concerned  in 
formation  of,  432 
Lymphocytes,  404 
Lysin,  707,  874 


Maltase,  662,  664 

Mammary    glands,    effect    of    uterus 
upon,  856 
structure   and   functions,   855 

Manometer,  Fick's  spring,  448 
Hiirthle's,  448 

maximum  and  minimum,  449 
use  of,  for  determining  blood-pres- 
sure, 443 

Mast  cells,  404 

Mastication,  634 

Mathematical  perspective,  345 

Mean  blood-pressure,  446 

Medulla  oblongata,  225 

respiratory  center  in,  610 

Medullary   strise,  201 

Meningeal  spaces,  554 

Menstruation,  841 

effect  of,  on  other  functions,  845 
physiological  significance  of,  845 

Mercury  manometer,  use  of,  for  blood- 
pressures,  443 

Metabolism,  definition  of,  783 

Methemoglobin,  398 

Micturition,  physiology  of,  761 

Milk,  composition  of,  858 

Millon's  reaction  for  proteids,  877 


INDEX. 


897 


Minimal  air,  580 
Miosis,  definition  of,  303 
Molisch  reaction  for  proteids,  877 
Monakow's  bundle,   169 
Motor  aphasia,  205 
areas  of  brain,  183 
paths  in  spinal  cord,  167,  169 
points  in  man,  88 
Mountain  sickness,  629 
Movements  of  alimentary  canal,  defe- 
cation, 650 
deglutition,  634 
large  intestine,  648 
mastication,  634 
small  intestine,  644 
stomach,  640 
vomiting,  651 
Mucin  in  saliva,  669 
Muscarin,  action  of,  on  heart,  520 
on  iris,  303 
on  sweat  glands,  768 
Muscle,  absolute  power  of,  36 
action  current  of,  96 
artificial  stimulation  of,  23 
carbohydrates  of,  59 
cardiac,  properties  of,  54 
chemical   changes   of,    in   contrac- 
tion, 62 
composition  of,  57 
compound  contractions  of,  39 
contraction  of,  26 
contraction  wave  of,  33 
contracture  of,  33 
curve  of  work  of,  36 
death  rigor,  49 
demarcation  current  of,  91 
direct  irritability  of,  22 
disappearance  of  glycogen  in,  63 
effect  of  temperature  upon,  28 

of  veratrin  upon,  30 
energy  liberated  in,  34 
Engelmann's  artificial,  69 
enzymes  of,  61 
ergographic  records  from,  45 
extensibility  and  elasticity  of,   19 
fatigue  of,  33,  47,  66 
glycogen  of,  736 
heat  rigor  of,  49 
inorganic  salts  of,  62 
introductory  contractions  of,  33 
isotonic     and    isometric     contrac- 
tions of,  27 
lactic  acid  of,  64 
latent  period  of  contraction  of,  26 
maximal  and  submaximal  contrac- 
tions of,  27 
nitrogenous  extractives  of,  61 
number   of   stimuli    necessary    for 

tetanus,  42 
pigments  of,  61 
plain,  52 
plasma,  18,  57 
57 


Muscle,  proteids  of,  57 
sarcoplasm,  18 
simple  contraction  of,  24 
structure  of  fiber,  18 

by  polarized  light,   19 
summation  of  contractions  of,  39 
theories  of  nature  of  contraction, 

68 
tone  of,  during  contraction,  41 
tonicity  of,  48 
vasomotor  supply  of,  563 
voluntary  contractions  of,  43 
white  and  red  fibers  of,  30 
Muscle-sense,  cortical  area  for,  189 
distribution  and  characteristics  of, 

265 
importance    of,     in    visual    judg- 
ments, 346 
paths  for,  in  spinal  cord,  163,  164, 

165 
quality  of,  266 
Muscular  insufficiencv  in  movements 
of  eyeballs,  339' 
work,  effect  of,  on  heart  rate,  528 
on     physiological     oxidations, 

809 
on  proteid  metabolism,  810 
on     respiratorv     movements, 
627 
source  of  energy  in,  811 
Musical    sounds,    classification    and 

properties  of,  362 
Mydriasis,  definition  of,  303 
Myelin  sheath  of  nerve  fibers,  func- 
tion of,  73 
Myelinization  method  of  Flechsig,  210 
Myogen,  58 
fibrin,  58 
Myogenic  theory  of  heart  beat.  498 
Myohematin,  400 
Myopia,  295 
Myosin,  58 
fibrin,  58 
Myxedema,  773 


Narcosis,  effect  of,  upon  nerve  im- 
pulse, 109 

Near  point  of  distinct  vision,  292 

Negative  pressure  in  thorax,  584,  586 
in  ventricle,  493 
variation  in  muscle  and  nerve,  96, 
98 

Nerve,  abducens,  nucleus  of,  229 
auditory,   199 
chorda  tympani,  270,  667 
facial,  nucleus  of,  229 
fourth   cranial,   nucleus   of,    227 
glossopharyngeal,   nucleus  of,   229 
hypoglossal,  nucleus  of.  230 
motor  and  sensory  roots  of,  77 
olfactory,  203 


INDEX. 


Nerve,  optic,  194 

recurrent    sensibility   of     anterior 

roots,  77 
spinal  accessory,  nucleus  of,  230 
third  cranial,  nucleus  of,  226 
trigeminal,  nucleus  of,  227 
twelfth  cranial,  nucleus  of,  230 
vagus,  nucleus  of,  229 
Nerve-cell,  chromatolysis  of,  121 

classification  of,  in  spinal  cord, 

154 
degenerative  changes  in,  120 
general  physiology  of,  128 
internal  structure  of,  126 
metabolism  in,  129 
neuron  doctrine,   122 
reaction  of,  129 
refractory  period  of,   132 
summation  of  stimuli  in,  130 
varieties  of,  124 
Nerve-fibers,  action  current  of,  96 
aflferent  and  efferent,  75 
anodal    and    cathodal    stimula- 
tion of,  82 
antidromic  impulses  in,  78 
artificial  stimuli  of,  80 
classification  of,  75 
core  model  of,  10 
degeneration    and    regeneration 

of,   lis 
demarcation  current  of,  91 
direction  of  conduction,  107 
du  Bois-Reymond's  law  of  stim- 
ulation, 82 
electrical  stimulation  of,  in  man, 

89 
electrotonic  currents  of,   101 
electrotonus  of,  83 
impulse  in,  historical,  104 
independent  irritability  of,  80 
metabolism  in,  during  activitv, 

112 
myelin  sheath  of,  73 
nutritive     relations     to     ner^-e 

cells,  116 
opening     and     closing     tetanus 

of,  86 
Pfliiger's  law  of  stimulation  of, 

84 
stimulation  of,  in  man,  86 
structure  of,  73 

unipolar  method  of  stimulating, 
87 
Nerve -impulse,  historical,  104 
metabolism  during.  111 
modification   of,  by  A-arious   in- 
fluences, 109 
qualitative  changes  in,  76,    115 
relation    of,   to    action    current, 

100,  107 
theories  of,  113 
velocity  of,  105 


Nervi  erigentes,  236,  545 
Neurogenic  theory  of  heart  beat,  497 
Neuron  doctrine,  122 
Neurons,  varieties  of,  124 
Nicotin,  action  of,  on  salivary  secre- 
tion, 676 
on  sweat  secretion,  768 
use  of,  in  tracing  autonomic  fibers, 
233 
Night-blindness,  hemeralopia,  331 
Ninth  cranial  nerve,  nucleus  of,  229 
Nissl's  granules,  127 
Nitric   oxid   hemoglobin,   392 
Nitrogen,  condition  of,  in  blood,  602 
determination  of,  784 
equilibrium,  783 

effect   of   non-proteid   food   on, 
786 
excretion  in  urine,  752 
Nitrogenous  extractives  of  muscle,  61 
Nodal  point  of  eye,  286 
Non-polarizable  electrodes,  95 
Normoblasts,  402 

Nucleo-albumin.    general    properties 
of,  878 
in  bile,  727 
Nucleon,  60 
Nucleoproteids,  880 
in  blood,  414 


.Obesity,  physiological  cause  of,  799 
Ohm's  law  of  composition  of  sound 

waves,  365 
Olfaction,  end-organ  for,  275 

mechanism  of,  276 
Olfactometer,  280 
Olfactory  associations,  281 

bulb,  histological  structure  of,  202 

center  in  cortex,  202 

nerve,  course  of  fibers  of,  in  brain, 

203 
organs,  fatigue  of,  279 
sensations,  classification  of,  278 
conflict  of,  281 
qualities  of,  277 
threshold  stimulus,  280 
sense  cells,  276 
stimuli,  nature  of,  277 
Oncometer,  749 
Ophthalmoscope,  305 
Opotherapy,  771 

Optic  chiasma,  decussation  in,  195 
structure  of,  194 
nerve,  course  of  fibers  of,  in  brain, 

193 
radiation,  193 
thalamus,  functions  of,  214 

in  vision,   197 
tracts,  structure  of,  195 
Optical  deceptions,  350 
Optograms  on  retina,  311 


INDEX. 


899 


Osmosis,  definition  of,  881 
Osmotic  pressure,  definition  of,  882 
determination  of,  883 
of  blood,  386 
Oval  field  of  Fleclisig,  169 
Ovaries,  internal  secretion  of,  779 
relation  of,  to  menstruation,  843 
Overtones,  production  of,  364 
Ovulation,  840,  844 
Ovum,  fertilization  of,  850 

implantation  of,  in  uterus,  851 
maturation  of,  847 
passage  of,  into  uterus,  846 
Oxalate  solutions,  effect  of,  on  coagu- 
lation, 422 
Oxidases,  662,  836 
Oxidations,  theories  of,  833 
Oxygen,    action    of,    on    respiratory 
center,  620 
compound    of,    with    hemoglobin, 

391 
condition  of,  in  blood,  603 
effects  of,  on  muscular  irritabilit}", 
63 
varying  pressures  of,  on  respira- 
tion, 628 
tension  of,  in  alveolar  air,  607 
in  tissues,  608 
in  venous  blood,  607 
Oxyhemoglobin,  391 


Pacchionian  bodies  of  brain,  554 
Pain    sense,    distribution    and    char- 
acteristics of,  262 
localization  of,  263 
path  for,  in  cord,  163,  165 
Pancreas,  action  of  lipase  in,  709 

anatomy  of,  700 

curve  of  secretion  of,  702 

digestive  action  of  secretion,  705 
on  carbohydrates,  705 

internal  secretion  of,  780 

normal  mechanism  of  secretion,  703 

secretory  nerves  of,  701 
Paraglobulin,  411 
Paralysis  (motor),  185 
Paralytic  secretion  (saliva),  677 
Parapeptone,  693 
Parathyroid,  structure  and  function 

of,  772 
Parthenogenesis,  851,  870 
Parturition,  physiology  of,  854 
Pendular  movements  (intestine),  646 

sound  waves,  363 
Pepsin,  664 

discovery  of,  657 

properties  of,  691 
Pepsin-hvdrochloric    acid    digestion, 

693 
Peptids,  708,  875 
Peptone,  693,  879 


Peptone,  absorption  of,  in  stomach, 
699 

effect  on  clotting  of  blood,  423 

hemi-  and  anti-,  705 
Peptozym,  423 
Pericardial  liquid,  410 
Perimeter,  312 
Peripheral  field  of  vision,  313 

resistance  in  circulation,  462 
Peristalsis,   644 
Peroxidases,  836 
Perspiration   (see  Sxveat) 
Pettenkofer's  reaction,  725 
Pfliiger  law  of  stimulation,  84 

tetanus,  86 
Phagocytes,  405 
Phenolsulphuric  acid,  719,  760 
Phenylalanin,  706,  874 
Phloridzin  diabetes,  734,  796 
Phosphocarnic  acid,  60 
Phrenology,  180 
Physiological  diplopia,  342 

oxidations,  theories  of,  820,  833 
Lavoisier's  work,  569 

point  (vision),  315 

saline.  386,  426 
Physostigmin,  action  of,  on  iris,  303 
Pilocarpin,  action  of,  on  heart,  520 
on  iris,  303 

on  salivary  glands,  676 
on  sweat  glands,  768 
Pituitary  body,  structure  and  func- 
tions of,  777 
Placenta,  functions  of,  852 
Plain  muscle,  52 

Plasma  of  blood,  composition  of,  408 
Plethysmography,  533 
Pneumogastric  nerve  (see  Vagus) 
Pneumograph,  577 
Pneumothorax,  587 
Poikilothermous  animals,  821 
Polar  bodies  of  ovum,  848 
Polypeptid,  708 
Positive  electrical  variation  in  heart, 

521 
Posterior  columns,  descending  tracts 
of,   169 
tracts  of,   161 

root,  termination  in  cord,  160 
cells  of,  origin  of,  78 
Postganglionic  nerve  fibers,  232 
Potassium  phosphate  in  muscle,  65 

salts,  action  of,  on  heart,  501 
Potential  energy  of  food,  814 
Precipitins,  876 
Predicrotic  pulse  wave,  474 
Preganglionic  nerve  fibers,  232 
Pregnancy,  changes  in,  854 
Prepvramidal  tracts,  169 
Presbyopia,  292,  297 
Pressor  nerve  fibers,  540 
Pressure  of  gases  in  solution,  601 


900 


INDEX. 


Pressure  sense,  distribution  of,   256 

localizing  power,  etc.,  260 
Primary  proteoses,  693 
Principal  axis  of  lens,  284 
focal  distance,  283,  286 
Projection  system  of  fibers   (brain), 

173 
Propeptone,  693 
Prostate  gland,  861 
Protalbumoses,  693 
Protamins,  862,  879 
Proteids,  absorption  of,  in  intestine, 
716 
as  glycogen-formers,  733 
classification  of,  877 
definition  and  structure  of,  874 
diffusion  of,  886 
excretion  of  nitrogen  of,  752 
general  reactions  of,  875 
in  blood-plasma,  410,  413 
necessary  amount  of,  in  diet,  788 
normal  metabolism  in  body,  790 
nutritive  history  of,  787 
of  muscle,  57 
osmotic  pressure  of,  885 
putrefaction  of,  in  large  intestine, 
719 
Proteolytic  enzymes,  662 
Proteoses,  general  properties  of,  879 
Prothrombin,  418 
Proximate  principles  of  food,  654 
Psychophysical  law,  253 
Ptyalin,  669 

action  of,  in  stomach,  697 
digestive  action  of,  679 
effect  of  various  conditions  upon, 
681 
Puberty,  841,  860 

Pulmonary   arteries,   vasomotors  of, 
551 
circulation,  peculiarities  of,  467 
variations  of  pressure  in,  468 
Pulse,  anacrotic  waves  of,  475 
catacrotic  waves  of,  474 
form  of  wave,  472 
general  statement,  469 
varieties  of,  in  health  and  disease, 

475 
velocity  of,  propagation  of,  470 
venous,  475 
Pulse-pressure,  446 
Purin  bases,  61,  739,  756,  863 
Purkinje,  images  of,  290 

phenomenon,  319 
Putrefaction  in  intestines,  719 
Pyloric  glands  of  stomach,  683 

secretion  of,  692 
Pyramidal  tract  in  brain,  184 

in  spinal  cord,  167 
Pyrrol  compounds  in  proteid  mole- 
cule, 706 
Pyrrolidin-carbonic  acid,  706,  874 


Reactions  for  proteids,  875 
Gmelin's,  724 
of  blood,  382 

of  contents  of  small  intestine,  718 
of  urine,  751 
Pettenkofer's,  725 
Recurrent  sensibility  of  anterior  roots, 

77 
Red  blood-corpuscles,  chemical  com- 
position of,  409 
condition  of  hemoglobin  in,  385 
effect  of  hemorrhage  upon,  425 
hemolysis  of,  385 
influence  of  spleen  upon,  738 
number  and  size  of,  384 
origin  and  fate  of,  401 
variations  in  number  of,  402 
Reduced  hemoglobin ,  39 1 

schematic  eye,  286 
Reflex  actions,  axon  reflexes,  142 
classification  of,   136 
definition  and  historical,  133 
from  parts  of  brain,  142 
influence  of  condition  of  cord  on, 
141 
of  sensory  endings  upon,  138 
inhibition  of,  139 

of  heart  through,  517 
knee-jerk,  146 

of  erection  and  ejaculation,  864 
of  respiratory  center,  612 
of  vasomotor  nerves,  540 
preparation  of  reflex  frog,  135 
reflex  arc,  133 
respiratory,   from  nose,   larynx, 

and  pharynx,  617 
special  and  deep  reflexes  of  cord, 

151 
spinal  reflexes,  135,  138 
theory  of,  137 

through  peripheral  ganglia,  142 
through  vasodilator  nerves,  546 
time  of,   139 

Tiirck's    method    of    studying, 
141 
Refractive  power  of  eye,  293 
Refractory  period  of  heart  beat,  504 

of  nerve  cell,   132 
Regeneration  in  nerve  fibers,  118 

of  parts  of  body,  868 
Reinforcement  of  knee-kick,  146 
Rennin,  695 

of  kidney,  782 
Reproduction,  changes  during  preg- 
nancy, 854 
in  uterus  in  menstruation,  842 
chemistry  of  spermatozoa,  862 
determination  of  sex,  868 
erection,  863 

fertilization  of  ovum,  850 
functions  of  placenta,  852 
general  statements,  838 


INDEX. 


901 


Reproduction,  growth  and  senescence, 
871 

heredity,  866 

implantation  of  ovum,  851 

mammary  glands,  855 

menstruation,  841 

nutrition  of  embryo,  852 

ovulation,  840,  844 

parturition,  854 

properties  of  spermatozoa,  860 

relation   of   ovaries   to    menstrua- 
tion, 843 

structure  and  functions  of  corpus 
luteum,  840 
of  Graafian  follicles,  839 
Residual  air,  580 

Resonance,  importance   of,  in   func- 
tions of  ear,  366 
Respiration,  abdominal  type,  576 

acapnia,  625 

accessory  centers  of,  in  brain,  619 
respiratory  movements,  577 

anatomy  of  thorax,  571 

apnea,  623 

artificial,  581 

aspiratory  action  of,  on  blood-flow, 
587 

automatic    action    of    respiratory 
center,  612 

bronchoconstrictor    and    broncho- 
dilator  fibers,  625 

calorimeter,  827 

capacity  of  the  bronchi,  581 

chamber,  785 

chemical   composition  of  inspired 
and  expired  air,  592 

Cheyne-Stokes  type  of,  632 

complemental  air,  580 

condition  of  carbon  dioxid  in  blood, 
604 

costal,  573,  576 

definition   of   inspiration   and   ex- 
piration, 571 

dissociation  of  oxyhemoglobin,  603 

dyspnea,  622 

effect    of    changes    in    barometric 
pressure  upon,  629 
in  composition  of  air,  627 
of  muscular  work  upon,  627 

exchange  of  gases  in,  608 

forced,  575 

functional  value  of  nitrogen,   602 

gaseous  exchange  in  lungs,  606 

gases  of  blood    596 

history  of,  566 

hyperpnea,  622 

increased  heart-rate  during  inspira- 
tion, 591 

injurious  effect  of  expired  air,  593 

intrapulmonic  pressure,  583 

intrathoracic  pressure,  584 

mechanism  of  inspiration,  572 


Respiration,  methods   of   recording, 

577 
minimal  air,  580 
modified    respiratory    movements, 

633 
mountain  sickness,  629 
muscles  of  expiration,  574 

of  inspiration,  574 
negative  pressure  in  thorax,  584 
normal  stimulus  of,  619 

ventilation  of  alveoli,  581 
of  swallowing,  636 
origin    of    negative     pressure     in 

thorax,  586 
physical  theory  of,  606 
physiological    anatomy    of   organs 

of,  570 
pneumothorax,  587 
reflex    stimulation    of    respiratory 

center,  612 
relation  of  vagus  nerve  to,  614 
residual  air,  580 
respiratory  center,  610,  618 

quotient,  631 

waves  of  blood-pressure,  588 
secretion  of  gases  in  lungs,  608 
spinal  respiratory  centers,  611 
supplemental  air,  580 
tension   of  gases   in   alveolar   air, 
606 
in  arterial  blood,  608 
in  tissues,  608 
in  venous  blood,  607 
tidal  air,  580 

ventilation,  principles  of,  595 
vital  capacity,  579 
volumes  of  air  respired,  579 
voluntary  control  of,  618 
Respiratory  center,  610,  611,  618,  619 

automatic  activity  of,  612 

normal  stimulus  of,  619 

reflex  stimulation  of,  612 
quotient,  631 

waves  of  blood-pressure,  588 
Retina,  action  current  of,  309 
acuity  of  vision  in,  315 
after-images  from,  323 
color  blindness  of,  325 

contrasts  in,  324 

vision  in,  321 
corresponding  points  of,  340 
distribution  of  color  sense  in,  328 
entoptic  phenomena,  336 
function  of  rods  and  cones  of,  330 
fundamental   and    complementary 

colors,  322 
light  adapted  and  dark  adapted, 

318 
portion   of,    stimulated  bv    light, 

308 
projection  of,   on   occipital  lobes, 

195 


902 


INDEX. 


Retina,  qualities  of  visual  sensations 
from,  320 
size  of  fovea  in,  314,  315 
theories  of  color  vision  in,  331 
threshold  stimulus  of,  317 
visual  purple  of,  310 

Reversible  chemical  reactions,  659 

Rheoscopic  frog  preparation,  99 

Rhodopsin,  310 

Ribs,  action  of,  in  inspiration,  573 

Rigor  of  muscle,  49,  51,  62,  66 

Ringer's  solution,  387 

Ritter's  tetanus,  86 

Rivinus,  ducts  of,  666 

Rods  and  cones  of  eye,  functions  of, 
330 


Sacculus,  functions  of,  379 
Saliva,  chorda,  673 
composition  of,  669 
digestive  action  of,  679 
general  functions  of,  681 
secretory  nerves  for,  670 
sympathetic,  673 
Salivary  glands,  action  of  drugs  upon, 
676 
anatomical  relations,  666 
histological  changes  during    ac- 
tivity, 674 
structure  of,  668 
normal  stimulation  of,  678 
secretory  center  for,  679 

nerve  fibers  of,  672 
theory  of  secretory  nerves,  673 
Salts,  absorption  of,  in  stomach,  698 
..    excretion  of,  760 

general    nutritive    importance    of, 
801 
Sarco lactic  acid,  60 
Sebaceous  glands,  secretion  of,  769 
Secondary  axes  of  a  lens,  284 

degeneration,  nerve  fibers,  117,  157 
proteoses,  693 
Secretion,  703,  711 
internal,  771 
of  bile,  727 

of  sebaceous  glands,  769 
of  sweat,  767 
of  urine,  742 
Secretogogues  of  gastric  glands,  690 
Secretory  nerves  of  salivary  glands, 

671 
Semicircular  canals,   direct  stimula- 
tion of,  374 
Flourens's  experiments  upon,  372 
structure  of,  372 
temporary  and  permanent  effects 

of  operations  on,  374 
theories  of  functions  of,  375 
Seminal  vesicles,  function  of,  861 
Senescence,  871 


Senses,  classification  of,  249 

cutaneous,  256 
Sensory  aphasia,  206 
areas  of  cortex,  188 
paths  in  spinal  cord,  161 
Sequence  of  heart  beat,  507 
Serin,  874 

Serum,  action  of  foreign,  389 
-albumin,  410 
-globulin,  411 
Seventh    cranial   nerve,    nucleus   of, 

229 
Sex,  determination  of,  868 
Side-pressure    in    blood-vessels,    460 
Sixth  cranial  nerve,  nucleus  of,  229 
Skatoxylsulphuric  acid,  719,  760 
Skeletal  muscular  tissue,  physiology 

of,  18 
Skin,  excretory  functions  of,  766 

sweat  glands  of,  766 
Sleep,  changes  in  circulation  during, 
242 
curves  of  intensity  of,  239 
effect  of  sensory  stimulation  dur- 
ing, 243 
hypnotic,  248 
metabolism  during,  811 
physiological  phenomena  of,  238 
theories  of,  244 
Small   intestine,    absorption   in,    712 
Smegma  prseputii,  770 
Smell,  center  for,  in  brain,  204 

end-organ  of,  275 
Smelling,  mechanism  of,  276 
Sodium  chlorid,   nutritive   value   of, 
802 
salts,  effect  of,  on  heart-beat,  501 
Somatoplasm,  definition  of,  872 
Sound,  sensations  of  (see  Ear) 
waves,  nature  and  action  of,  361 
overtones  of,  364 
simple  and  compound,  363 
Specific   energy   of  taste   sensations, 
273 
gravity  of  blood,  383 
nerve   energies,    doctrine   of,    115, 
251 
of  cutaneous  nerves,  258 
Spectra,  absorption,  blood,  394 
Spectroscope,  395 
Spermatozoa,  chemistry  of,  862 
maturation  of,  861 
properties  of,  860 
Spermin,  779 

Spherical  aberration  in  eye,  294 
Sphygmography,  472 
Sphygmomanometers    for    determin- 
ing blood-pressure  in  man,  456 
Spinal  cord,  anterior  marginal  bundle 
of,  170 
as  path  of  conduction,  154 
classification    of   tracts    in,    157 


INDEX. 


903 


Spinal  cord,  effect  of  removing,  144, 
651 
gross  relations  of  gray  and  white 

matter  in,   156 
groups  of  cells  in,  154 
Helweg's  bundle  in,   170 
homolateral     and     contralateral 

conduction  in,  166 
less  well-known  tracts  of,  169 
Monakow's  bundle  in,  169 
paths     in,     for     cutaneous    im- 
pulses,  165 
pyramidal  tracts  of,   167 
reflex   activities   of,    133,    144 
tonic  activity  of,   144 
tracts  of,  in  lateral  column,  164 
in  posterior  column,   164 
in  white  matter,   156 
ventral  longitudinal  bundle,  170 
vestibulo-spinal  tract,   170 
reflex  movements,  135 
reflexes  in  mammals,   138 
respiratory  center,  611 
Spirometer,  579 
Spleen,  physiology  of,  738 
Stahnius,  first  ligature  of,  499 
Stapedius   muscle,    function   of,   358 
Starvation,  effect  of,  on  body-metab- 
olism, 812 
Steapsin  (see  Lipase) 
Stenson's  duct,  666 
Stereognostic  sense,  189 
Stereoscopic  vision,  347 
Stethoscope,  485 
Stimulants,  656 

nutritive  importance  of,  805 
Stimuli,  artificial,  of  muscle,  23 
Stokes-Adams  syndrome,  508 
Stokes's  reducing  agent,  397 
Stomach,  absorption  in,  698 
anatomy  of,  639 
automaticity  of,  643 
digestion  in,  696 
glands  of,  683 
histological     changes     in,     during 

activity,  684 
means  of  obtaining  secretion  of,  685 
mechanism    of    gastric    secretion, 

689 
movements  of,  640 
musculature  of,  640 
properties  of  pepsin  of,  691 
secretory  nerves  of,  688 
Strabismus,  340 
Stromuhr,  436 
Submaxillary  ganglion,  668 
Succus  entericus,  710 
Sugars,    absorption   of,    in    stomach, 
699 
metabolism  of,  in  body,  794 
Sulphur,    forms    in    which    excreted, 
759 


Summation  of  muscular  contractions, 
39 
of  stimuli  in  nerve  centers,  130 
Superior  olivary  body,  relation  of,  to 

auditory  paths,  200 
Supplemental  air,  580 
Suprarenalin ,  776 
Swallowing,  634 

respiration,  636 
Sweat,  amount  and  composition  of, 
766 
nerve  centers  for,  769 
secretory  fibers  of,  767 
Sweat-nerves,  action  of,  in  heat  regu- 
lation, 829 
Sympathetic  nervous  system,  general 
relations,  231 
resonance,  366 
Syntonin,  693 

Systole,  duration  of,  in  heart.  489 
Systolic  arterial  pressure,  446 

determination  of,  in  animals, 
447 
in  man,  453 
plateau  of  ventricular  contraction, 
485 


Tabes  dorsalis,  163 
Taste  buds,  275 

center  for,  in  brain ,  204 
nerves  of,  270 

sensations,  classification  of,  272 
specific  energy  of,  273 
threshold  stimulus,  275 
sense  of,  270 

stimuli,  mode  of  action,  274 
Taurin,  725 
Taurocholic  acid,  725 
Tectorial  membrane,  368 
Temperature  (see  Heat) 

effect  of,  on  body  metabolism,  811 
on  gases  in  solution,  600 
on  heart  rate,  529 
on  muscular  contraction,  28 
of  human  body,  822 
sense,  distribution  and  character- 
istics, 259 
path  for,  in  spinal  cord,  163,  165 
punctiform  distribution   of,   257 
Tension  of  gases  in  solution,  601 
Tensor  tympani  muscle,  function  of, 

358 
Tenth  cranial  nerve,  nucleus  of,  229 
Testis,  internal  secretion  of,  778 
Tetanus,  number  of  stimuli  necessary 
for,  42 
of  artificial  muscle,  71 
of  muscle,  39 
opening  and  closing,  86 
Theobromin,  757,  805 
Third  cranial  nerve,  nucleus  of,  226 


904 


INDEX. 


Thirst,  sense  of,  267 
Thorax,  as  closed  cavity,  571 

aspiratory  action  of,  587 

normal  position  of,  571 

origin  of  negative  pressure  in,  586 
Thrombin,  416 
Thrombokinase,  418 
Thyroid,  extirpation  of,  772 

function  of,  774 

internal  secretion  of,  772 

theory  of  (Cyon),  775 
Tidal  air,  580 

Tigroid  substance  in  nerve  cells,  127 
Tissue  proteid,  787 
Tissues,  exchange  of  gases  in,  608 
Tone    (musical)    of    muscular     con- 
traction, 41 
Tonicity  of  heart  muscle,  510 

of  muscle,  48 

of  nerve  centers,  144 
Touch  sense,  path  of,  in  cord,  169 
Tracts  in  spinal  cord,   157,   169 

of  Burdach  159 

of  Flechsig,   159,   164 

of  GoU,  159 

of  Gowers,  159,  164 
Traube-Hering  waves,  544 
Treppe  of  muscular  contractions,  33 
Trigeminal  nerve,   area  of   distribu- 
tion of,  228 
nucleus  of,  227 
Trophic  nerve  fibers,  salivary  glands, 

672 
Trypsin,  664,  707 
Tryptophan,  707,  874 
Tiirck's  method  for  reflex  time,  141 
Twelfth    cranial    nerve,    nucleus    of, 

230 
Tympanic  membrane,  354 
Tyrosin,  706,  874 


Unipolar  method  of  stimulation,  87 
Urea,  formation  of,  in  liver,  737 

origin  and  significance  of,  753 
Ureters,  contractions  of,  761 
Urethra,  sphincter  of,  763 
Uric  acid,  61 

in  spleen,  739 
significance  of,  757 
Urinary  bladder,  movements  of,  762 
nerves  of,  765 

pigments,  400 
Urination,   physiological  mechanism 

of,  761 
Urine,  composition  of,  751 

nitrogenous  excreta  of,  753 

origin  of  acidity  of,  748 

osmotic  pressure  of,  746 

reaction  of.  751 

secretion  of,  742 

secretion  pressure  of,  745 


Uterus,  changes  of,  during  menstrua- 
tion, 842 
effect  of,  on  mammary  glands,  856 
Utriculus,  function  of,  379 


Vagus  nerve,  action  of,  on  gastric 
secretion,  688 
on  heart,    516    (see   also    In- 
hibition) 
on  pancreas,  701 
as  motor  nerve  to  stomach,  643 
nucleus  of,  229 

relations  of,  to  respiratory  cen- 
ter, 614 
Vasomotor  fibers,  centers  for,  in  cord, 
543 
in  brain,  552 

to  pulmonary  arteries,  551 
nerves,  action  of,  in  heat  regula- 
tion, 829 
antidromic  impulses  in,  548 
course  and  distribution,  535,  545 
general    properties    of    dilators, 

545 
history  of  discovery  of,  531 
methods   used   to    demonstrate, 

532 
of  heart,  550 
position    of    constrictor    center, 

538 
reflex  actions  of,  540 
rhythmical    action    of    constric- 
tor center,  544 
to  abdominal  organs,  562 
to   dilator   center   and   reflexes, 

546 
to  genital  organs,  562 
to  head,  561 
to  kidneys,  749 
to  skeletal  muscles,  563 
to  trunk  and  limbs,  562 
to  veins,  564 
tonic  activity  of,  538 
Veins,  vasomotor  supply  of,  564 
Velocity    of   blood-flow   (see    Circu- 
lation)  • 
pressure  in  blood-vessels,  460 
Venous  pulse,  475 

in  brain  sinuses,  558 
Ventilation,  principles  of,  595 
Ventral  longitudinal  bundle  in  spinal 

cord,  170 
Ventricle   (see  Heart) 
Veratrin,  effect  of,  on  heart,  30 
Vernix  caseosa,  770 
Vestibulo-spinal  tract  of  spinal  cord, 

170 
Vision  (see  Eye  and  Retina) 
Visual  acuity,  315 
center  in  cortex,  192 


INDEX. 


905 


Visual  field,  binocular,  340 
monocular,  312 
fields,     conflict    of,     in     binocular 

vision,  344 
purple,  310 
Vital  capacity,  579 
Voluntary  muscular  contractions,  43 
Vomiting,  651 


Wallerian   degeneration,    117,    157 

Warm  spots  of  skin,  257 

Water,  absorption  of,  in  stomach,  698 

excretion  of,  760 
Weber-Fechner  law,  253 


Wharton's  duct,  666 

Wirsung,  duct  of,  700 

Work  done  by  contracting  muscle,  37 


Xanthin,  61,  756 

Xanthoproteic  reaction  for  proteids, 

877 


Zymogen,  663 
granules,  675 

Zymoplastic  substances  in  coagula- 
tion of  blood,  418 


SAUNDERS*    BOOKS 

on 

SURGERY 

and 

ANATOMY 


W«  B.  SAVNDEHS   ®    COMPANY 

925  WALNUT  STREET  PHILADELPHIA 

9,  HENRIETTA  STREET      COVENT  GARDEN,  LONDON 


SAUNDERS'    REMARKABLE    SUCCESS 

^ATE  are  often  asked  to  account  for  our  extraordinary  success. 
^  ^  We  can  but  point  to  modern  business  methods,  carefully  per- 
fected business  mxachinery,  and  unrivalled  facilities  for  distribution  of 
books.  Every  department  is  so  organized  that  the  greatest  possible 
amount  of  work  is  produced  with  the  least  waste  of  energy.  The 
representatives  of  the  firm  are  men  with  life-long  experience  in  the 
sale  of  medical  books.  Then,  too,  we  must  not  overlook  that  major 
force  in  the  modern  business  world — advertising.  We  have  a  special 
department  devoted  entirely  to  the  planning,  writing,  and  placing  of 
advertising  matter ;  and  we  might  mention  that  the  money  annually 
spent  in  advertising  now  far  exceeds  the  entire  annual  receipts  of  the 
House  during  its  earlier  years.  These  extraordinary  facilities  for  dis- 
posing of  large  editions  enable  us  to  devote  a  large  amount  of  money 
to  the  perfecting  of  every  detail  in  the  manufacture  of  books. 

A  Complete  Catalo|>ue  of  our  Publications  will  be  Sent  upon  Request 


SAUNDERS'  BOOKS    ON 


Howard  A.  Kelly 

and  £.  HURDON  on  the 

Vermiform  Appendix 

JUST   ISSUED— AN   AUTHORITATIVE   WORK 


The  Vermiform   Appendix   and   Its   Diseases.      By   Howard    A. 

Kelly,  M.  D.,  Professor  of  Gynecology  in  the  Johns  Hopkins  Univer- 
sity, Baltimore;  and  E.  Hurdon,  M.  D.,  Assistant  in  Gynecology  in  the 
Johns  Hopkins  University,  Baltimore.  Handsome  octavo  volume  of 
827  pages,  containing  399  superb  original  illustrations  and  3  litho- 
graphic plates.  Cloth,  ^10.00  net;  Half  Morocco,  ^11.00  net. 

WITH   399  SUPERB  ORIGINAL   ILLUSTRATIONS 


This  work  is  one  of  the  most  magnificent  medical  books  ever  published,  con- 
taining some  four  hundred  beautiful  illustrations,  in  the  preparation  of  which  the 
artists  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  have  spent  many  years.  Each  beautifully  and 
accurately  portrays  the  condition  represented,  and  together  they  form  a  magnifi- 
cent collection  unequaled  by  those  in  any  other  work  on  the  subject  ever  placed 
upon  the  market.  A  large  amount  of  original  work  has  been  done  for  the  ana- 
tomic chapter,  for  which  over  one  hundred  original  illustrations  have  been  made. 
Appendicitis  naturally  receives  the  fullest  consideration.  The  pathology  is  not 
only  amply  and  clearly  described,  but  it  is  beautifully  illuminated  with  an  abun- 
dance of  illustrations  depicting  the  pathologic  conditions  with  rare  fidelity.  Diag- 
nosis and  treatment,  by  far  the  most  irriportant  sections  to  the  practitioner  and 
surgeon,  are  elaborately  discussed  and  profusely  illustrated.  Special  chapters  are 
devoted  to  the  peculiarities  of  appendicitis  in  children,  and  to  the  characteristics 
of  the  vermiform  appendix  in  typhoid  fever.  A  valuable  chapter  is  that  on  the 
medicolegal  status  of  appendicitis. 

British  Medical  Journal 

"  It  reaches  the  high-water  mark  of  medical  monographs,  both  in  regard  to  the  learning, 
research,  and  clinical  reasoning  of  the  text,  and  in  the  quality  of  its  illustrations.  These  are 
really  magnificent." 


SURGERY  AND   ANATOMY. 


Fowler's 
Treatise  on  Surgery 

IN  TWO  VOLUMES 


A  Treatise  on  Surgery.  By  George  R.  Fowler,  M.  D.,  Professor 
of  Surgery  (Emeritus),  New  York  Polyclinic  ;  Surgeon  to  the  Metho- 
dist Episcopal  (Seney)  Hospital,  Brooklyn  ;  Surgeon-in-Chief  to  the 
Brooklyn  Hospital.  Two  octavo  volumes  of  about  750  pages  each, 
containing  about  800  entirely  original  illustrations, 

VOLUME   I.     READY  SOON 
WITH   400  ORIGINAL   ILLUSTRATIONS 

This  entirely  new  work  presents  the  science  and  art  of  surgery  as  it  is  prac- 
tised to-day.  The  first  part  of  the  work  deals  with  general  surgery,  and  embraces 
what  is  usually  included  under  the  head  of  principles  of  surgery.  Special  atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  subject  of  inflammation  from  the  surgeon's  point  of  view, 
due  consideration  being  accorded  the  influences  of  traumatism  and  bacterial  in- 
fection as  the  predisposing  and  exciting  causes  of  this  condition.  Then  follow 
sections  on  the  injuries  and  diseases  of  separate  tissues,  gunshot  injuries,  acute 
wound  diseases,  chronic  surgical  infections  (including  syphilis),  tumors,  surgical 
operations  in  general,  foreign  bodies,  and  bandaging.  The  second  part  of  the 
work  is  really  the  clinical  portion,  devoted  to  regional  surgery.  Herein  the 
author  especially  endeavors  to  emphasize  those  injuries  and  surgical  diseases  that 
are  of  the  greatest  importance,  not  only  because  of  their  frequency,  but  also 
because  of  the  difficulty  of  diagnosis  and  the  special  care  demanded  in  their  treat- 
ment. The  text  is  elaborately  illustrated  with  entirely  new  and  original  illustra- 
tions, neither  labor  nor  expense  having  been  spared  to  bring  this  feature  of  the 
work  up  to  the  highest  standard  of  artistic  and  practical  excellence. 


SAUNDERS'    BOOKS    ON 


Sc\jidder*s 
Treatment  of  Fractures 

WITH   NOTES   ON  DISLOCATIONS 

The  Treatment  of  Fractures ;  with  Notes  on  a  few  Common 
Dislocations.  By  Charles  L.  Scudder,  M.D.,  Surgeon  to  the  Massa- 
chusetts General  Hospital,  Boston.  Octavo  volume  of  562  pages, 
with  736  original  illustrations.  Polished  Buckram,  ^5.00  net;  Half 
Morocco,  $6.00  net. 

JUST    READY  — NEW    (5th)     EDITION,     ENLARGED 
FIVE  LARGE  EDITIONS  IN  LESS  THAN  FIVE  YEARS 

Each  year  a  new  edition  of  this  remarkable  work  is  called  for,  the  new  fifth 
edition  having  just  been  issued.  Dr.  Scudder  has  made  numerous  additions 
throughout  the  text,  and  has  added  some  fifty  new  illustrations,  greatly  enhancing 
the  value  of  the  work.  The  articles  on  Dislocations,  illustrated  in  that  practical 
manner  which  has  made  Dr.  Scudder' s  work  so  useful,  will  be  found  extremely 
valuable.  The  text  has  been  brought  precisely  down  to  date,  containing  the  sur- 
geons' reports  on  the  late  wars  and  the  important  facts  regarding  fractures  pro- 
duced by  the  sniall-caliber  bullet.  In  the  treatment  the  reader  is  not  only  told 
but  is  s/iozun  how  to  apply  the  apparatus,  for  as  far  as  possible,  all  the  details  are 
illustrated. 


PERSONAL  AND  PRESS  OPINIONS 

William  T.  Bull.  M.D., 

Professor  of  Surgery,  College  of  Physicimis  and  Sitrgeons,  New  York  City. 
"  The  work  is  a  good  one,  and  I  shall  certainly  recommend  it  to  students." 

Joseph  D.  Brya.nt,  M.D., 

Professor  of  the  Principles  and  Practice  of  Stirgery,  Univejsity  and  Bellevue  Hospital 
Medical  College,  New  York  City.  , 
"  As  a  practical  demonstration  of  the  topic  it  is  excellent,  and  as  an  example  of  bookmaking  it 
is  nighly  commendable." 

American  Journa-l  of  the  Medica.!  Sciences 

"  The  work  produces  a  favorable  impression  by  the  general  manner  in  which  the  subject  is 
treated.  Its  descriptions  are  concise  and  clear,  and  the  treatment  sound.  The  physical  examination  of 
the  injured  part  is  well  described,  and  .  .  .  the  method  of  making  these  examinations  is  illus- 
trated by  a  liberal  use  of  cuts." 


SURGERY'  AND   ANATOMY. 


BickKa^m's 
Oper».tive   S\jrgery 

RECENTLY  ISSUED,  2d  EDITION— TWO   EDITIONS  IN   SIX   MONTHS 

A  Text=Book  of  Operative  Surgery.  Covering  the  Surgical  Anat- 
omy and  Operative  Technic  involved  in  the  Operations  of  General 
Surgery.  For  Students  and  Practitioners.  By  Warren  Stone 
BiCKHAM,  M.D.,  Assistant  Instructor  in  Operative  Surgery,  Columbia 
University  (College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons),  New  York.  Hand- 
some octavo  of  about  looo  pages,  with  559  beautiful  illustrations, 
nearly  all  original. 

Cloth,  $6.00  net^;   Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  ^7.00  net. 

WITH  559  BEAUTIFUL  ILLUSTRATIONS.  NEARLY  ALL  ORIGINAL 

This  absolutely  new  work  completely  covers  the  surgical  anatomy  and 
operative  technic  involved  in  the  operations  of  general  surgery.  Constructed 
on  thoroughly  new  lines,  the  discussion  of  the  subject  is  remarkably  systema- 
tized and  arranged  in  a  manner  entirely  original.  Being  the  work  of  a  teacher 
of  extensive  experience  who,  as  such,  is  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  wants  of 
students  and  general  practitioners,  the  book  is  eminently  practical  and  the  sub- 
ject treated  in  such  a  manner  as  to  render  its  comprehension  most  easy.  This 
practicability  of  the  work  is  particularly  emphasized  in  the  numerous  magnifi- 
cent illustrations  which  form  a  useful  and  striking  feature.  There  are  some  559 
of  them.  All  have  been  drawn  especially  for  this  hook,  and  they  depict  the 
pathologic  conditions  and  the  progressive  steps  in. the  various  operations 
detailed  with  unusual  fidelity,  their  artistic  and  mechanical  excellence  being  of 
the  highest  standard.  The  text  has  been  brought  precisely  down  to  the  present 
day,  all  the  recent  advances  along  the  line  of  technic  having  been  fully  discussed, 
and  elucidated  with  many  illustrations.  A  distinguishmg  and  extremely  useful 
feature  is  the  treatment  of  the  anatomic  side  of  the  subject  in  connection  with 
the  operative  technic.  Anatomy  of  the  human  body  is  of  the  utmost  impor- 
tance in  the  practical  application  of  operative  surgery,  for  unless  the  surgeon 
know  the  exact  location  of  the  various  muscles,  bones,  etc.,  he  will  cause 
unnecessary  destruction  of  tissue,  and  perhaps  irreparable  injury.  The  illustra- 
tions will  be  found  of  particular  assistance  in  acquiring  this  essentia'  knowledge. 

NICHOLAS   SENN,  M.  D. 

Frufessor  of  Surgery,  Rush  Medical  College,  in  Affiliation  with  the  Univ.  of  Chicago. 

"  A  SOMEWHAT  CAREFUL  EXAMINATION  OF  THK  TEXT  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  Dr. 
BICKHAM'S  BOOK  ON  OPERATIVE  SURGERY  HAS  SATISFIED  ME  OF  ITS  MERITS.  ThE  BOOK 
WILL  MEET  WITH  FAVOR  ON  THE  PART  OF  TEACHERS,  STUDENTS,   AND  PRACTITIONERS." 


SAUNDERS'  BOOKS   ON 


Moynihan*s 
Abdominal   Operations 


Abdominal  Operations.  By  B.  G.  A.  Moynihan,  M.  S.  (Lond.), 
F.R.C.S.,  Senior  Assistant  Surgeon,  Leeds  General  Infirmary,  England 
Octavo,  well  illustrated.     Cloth,  ^7.00  net ;  Half  Morocco,  ;^8.oo  net. 

JUST   ISSUED 

It  has  been  said  of  Mr.  Moynihan  that  in  describing  details  of  operations  he 
is  at  his  best.  The  appearance  of  this,  his  latest  work,  therefore,  will  be  widely 
welcomed  by  the  medical  profession,  giving,  as  it  does,  in  most  clear  and  exact 
language,  not  only  the  actual  modus  opei'mtdi  of  the  various  abdominal  operations, 
but  also  the  preliminary  technic  of  preparation  and  sterilization.  Complications 
and  sequelse  and  after-treatment  are  presented  in  the  same  clear,  clean-cut  manner 
as  the  operations  themselves.  Peritonitis  and  appendicitis,  because  of  their  ex- 
treme importance,  have  been  accorded  unusual  consideration  in  a  work  of  this 
kind.  The  beautiful  illustrations  have  been  drawn  especially  for  Mr.  Moynihan' s 
book,  and  serve  extremely  well  to  illustrate  the  text. 


Moynihan  on  Gall-stones 


Gall-stones  and  Their  Surgical  Treatment.  By  B.  G.  A.  Moyni- 
han, M.S.  (Lond.),  F.R.C.S.,  Senior  Assistant  Surgeon,  Leeds  General 
Infirmary,  England.     Octavo  of  400  pages,  fully  illustrated. 

JUST  ISSUED— NEW  (2d)  EDITION 

Mr.  Moynihan,  in  revising  his  book,  has  made  many  additions  to  the  text,  so 
as  to  include  the  most  recent  advances.  Especial  attention  has  been  given  to  a 
detailed  description  of  the  early  symptoms  in  cholelithiasis,  enabling  a  diagnosis 
to  be  made  in  the  stage  in  which  surgical  treatment  can  be  most  safely  adopted. 
Every  phrase  of  gall-stone  disease  is  dealt  with,  and  is  illustrated  by  a  large 
number  of  clinical  records.  The  account  of  the  operative  treatment  of  all  the 
forms  and  complications  of  gall-stone  disease  is  full  and  accurate.  A  number  of 
the  illustrations  are  in  color. 

British  Medical  Journal 

"  He  expresses  his  views  with  admirable  clearness,  and  he  supports  them  by  a  large  num- 
ber of  clinical  examples,  which  will  be  much  prized  by  those  who  know  the  difficult  problems 
and  tasks  which  gall-stone  surgery  not  infrequently  presents." 


SURGER  Y  AND  ANA  TOMY 


Irvterrvatior^al 
Text-Book  of  Surgery 

SECOND  EDITION,  THOR.OUGHLY  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 

The  International  Text=Book  of  Surgery.  In  two  volumes.  By 
American  and  British  authors.  Edited  by  J.  Collins  Warren,  M.D., 
LL.D.,  F.R.C.S.  (Hon.),  Professor  of  Surgery,  Harvard  Medical 
School;  and  A.  Pearce  Gould,  M.S.,  F.R.C.S.,  of  London,  England. — 
Vol.  I.  General  and  Operative  Surgery.  Royal  octavo,  975  pages, 
461  illustrations,  9  full-page  colored  plates. — Vol.  II.  Special  or 
Regional  Surgery.  Royal  octavo,  1122  pages,  499  illustrations,  and 
8  full-page  colored  plates. 

Per  volume  :  Cloth,  ;^5.oo  net;  Half  Morocco,  ;^6.oo  net. 

ADOPTED  BY  THE  U.  S.  ARMY 

In  this  new  edition  the  entire  book  has  been  carefully  revised,  and  special  effort 
has  been  made  to  bring  the  work  down  to  the  present  day.  The  chapters  on 
Military  and  Naval  Surgery  have  been  very  carefully  revised  and  extensively 
rewritten  in  the  light  of  the  knowledge  gained  during  the  recent  wars.  The 
articles  on  the  effect  upon  the  human  body  of  the  various  kinds  of  bullets,  and 
the  results  of  surgery  in  the  field  are  based  on  the  latest  reports  of  the  sur- 
geons in  the  field.  The  chapter  on  Diseases  of  the  Lymphatic  System  has  been 
completely  rewritten  and  brought  up  to  date  ;  and  of  special  interest  is  the 
chapter  on  the  Spleen.  The  already  numerous  and  beautiful  illustrations  have 
been  greatly  increased,  constituting  a  valuable  feature,  especially  so  the  seven- 
teen colored  lithographic  plates. 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  MEDICAL  PRESS 

AnnSk-ls  of  Surgery 

"  It  is  the  most  valuable  work  on  the  subject  that  has  appeared  in  some  years.  The  clinician  and 
the  pathologist  have  joined  hands  in  its  production,  and  the  result  must  be  a  satisfaction  to  the  editors 
as  it  is  a  gratification  to  the  conscientious  reader." 

Boston  MedicaLl  a.nd  Sur^lcsk-l  Journ&.l 

"  The  articles  as  a  rule  present  the  essentials  of  the  subject  treated  in  a  clear,  concise  manner. 
They  are  systematically  written.  The  illustrations  are  abundant,  well  chosen,  and  enhance  greatly 
the  value  of  the  work.    The  book  is  a  thoroughly  modern  one." 

The  Medica.1  Kecord,  New  York 

"The  arrangement  of  subjects  is  excellent,  and  their  treatment  by  the  different  authors  is 
equally  so.  .  .  .  The  work  is  up  to  date  in  a  very  remarkable  degree,  many  of  the  latest  operations  in 
the  different  regional  parts  of  the  body  being  given  in  full  details.  There  is  not  a  chapter  in  the  woric 
from  which  the  reader  may  not  learn  something  new." 


SAUNDERS'   BOOKS    ON 


American 
Text-Book  of  Surgery 

American  Text=Book  of  Surgery.  Edited  by  William  W.  Keen, 
M.  D.,  LL.  D.,  F.  R.  C.  S.  (Hon.),  and  J.  William  White,  M.  D.,  Ph.  D. 
Octavo,  1363  pages,  with  551  text-cuts  and  39  colored  and  half-tone 
plates.     Cloth,  ^7.00  net ;  Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  ^8.00  net. 

FOURTH  EDITION.  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED— RECENTLY  ISSUED 

Of  the  three  former  editions  of  this  book  there  have  been  sold  over  40,000 
copies.  In  this  present  edition  every  chapter  has  been  extensively  modified,  and 
many  of  them  have  been  partially,  and  some  entirely,  rewritten.  Six  entirely 
new  chapters  appear:  Military  Surgery,  by  Brigadier-General  R.  W.  O'Reilly, 
Surgeon-General,  U.  S.  Army,  and  Major  W.  C.  Borden,  Surgeon,  U.  S.  Army  ; 
Naval  Surgery,  by  Admiral  P.  M.  Rixey,  Surgeon-General,  U.  S.  Navy  ;  Tropical 
Surgery,  by  Captain  Charles  F.  Kieffer,  Assistant  Surgeon,  U.  S.  Army  ;  Exaitiina- 
tion  of  the  Blood,  by  Dr.  Richard  C.  Cabot  ;  Immunity,  by  Dr.  Arthur  K.  Stone  ; 
and  Surgery  of  the  Pancreas,  by  Dr.  Francis  J.  Shepherd. 

Edmund  Owen.  F.R.C.S. 

Member  of  the  Board  of  Examiners  of  the  Royal  College  of  Surgeons,  England. 
"  Personally,  I  should  not  mind  it  being  called  The  Text-Book  (instead  of  A  Text-Book), 
for  I  know  of  no  single  volume  which  contains  so  readable  and  complete  an  account  of  the 
science  and  art  of  surgery  as  this  does." 

E^isendrath's  Clinical  Anatomy 

A  Text=Book  of  Clinical  Anatomy.  By  Daniel  N.  Eisendrath, 
A.  B.,  M.  D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Surgery  and  Clinical  Surgery,  College 
of  Physicians  and  Surgeons,  Chicago.  Octavo  of  5  15  pages,  illustrated. 
Cloth,  ^5.00  net;  Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  ^6.00  net, 

RECENTLY   ISSUED 

This  new  anatomy  discusses  the  subject  from  the  clinical  standpoint.  A  por- 
tion of  each  chapter  is  devoted  to  the  examination  of  the  living  through  palpation 
and  marking  of  surface  outlines  of  landmarks,  vessels,  nerves,  thoracic  and 
abdominal  viscera.  The  illustrations  are  from  new  and  original  drawings  and 
photographs. 

Medical  Record,  New  York 

"A  special  recommendation  for  the  figures  is  that  they  are  mostly  original  and  were 
made  for  the  purpose  in  view.  The  sections  of  joints  and  trunks  are  those  of  formalinized 
cadavers  and  are  unimpeachable  in  accuracy." 


SURGER  V  AND  ANA  TOMl 


Schultze  and  Stewart's 
Topographic  Anatomy 

Atlas  and  Text=Book  of  Topographic  and  Applied  Anatomy.     By 

Prof.  Dr.  O.  Schultze,  of  Wiirzburg.  Edited,  with  additions,  by 
George  D.  Stewart,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Anatomy  and  Clinical  Sur- 
gery, University  and  Bellevue  Hospital  Medical  College,  N.  Y.  Large 
quarto  of  189  pages,  with  25  colored  figures  on  22  colored  lithographic 
plates,  and  89  text-cuts,  60  in  colors.     Cloth,  ;^5.50  net. 

JUST   READY 

It  was  Professor  Schultze's  special  aim,  in  preparing  this  work,  to  produce  a 
Text-Book  and  Atlas,  not  for  the  anatomist  alone,  but  more  particularly  for  the 
general  practitioner.  The  value  of  the  knowledge  of  topographic  anatomy  in  bed- 
side diagnosis  is  emphasized  throughout  the  book.  The  many  colored  lithographic 
plates  are  exceptionally  excellent. 

Arthur  D'ean  Bevan,  M.  D.,  Professor  of  Surgery  in  Rtish  Medical  College,  Chicago. 

"  I  regard  Schultze  and  Stewart's  Topographic  and  Applied  Anatomy  as  a  very  admirable 
work,  for  students  especially,  and  I  find  the  plates  and  the  text  excellent." 


Senn*s  Surgery 

Practical  Surgery.  A  Work  for  the  General  Practitioner.  By 
Nicholas  Senn,  M.  D.,  Ph.  D.,  LL.  D.,  Professor  of  Surgery  in  Rush 
Medical  College,  Chicago.  Octavo  of  11 33  pages,  with  650  illustra- 
tions, many  in  colors.  Cloth,  ^6.00  net ;  Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  ;S7.oo 
net.     Sold  by  Subscription. 

Based  on  His  Operative  Experience  of  25  Yeeirs 

This  book  deals  with  practical  subjects,  and  its  contents  are  devoted  to  those 
branches  of  surgery  that  are  of  special  interest  to  the  general  practitioner.  Special 
attention  is  paid  to  emergency  surgery,  shock,  hemorrhage,  and  wound  treatment 
being  fully  considered. 

Annals  of  Surgery 

"  It  is  of  value  not  only  as  presenting  tomprehensively  the  most  advanced  teachings  of 
modern  surgery  in  the  subjects  which  it  takes  up,  but  also  as  a  record  of  the  matured  opinions 
and  practice  of  an  accomplished  and  experienced  surgeon." 


SAUNDERS'  BOOKS  ON 


S 

ModernL    Svirgery 

Modern  Surgery — General  and  Operative.  By  John  Chalmers 
DaCosta,  M.D.,  Professor  of  the  Principles  of  Surgery  and  of  Clini- 
cal Surgery  in  the  Jefferson  Medical  College,  Philadelphia  ;  Surgeon 
to  Philadelphia  Hospital  and  to  St.  Joseph's  Hospital,  Philadelphia. 
Handsome  octavo  volume  of  1099  P^g^^,  with  707  illustrations. 

Cloth,  ;^5.oo  net;  Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  ;^6.oo  net. 

FOURTH    EDITION— RECENTLY   ISSUED 
Thoroughly  Revised,  Entirely  Reset,  and  Greatly  Enlarged 


The  progress  of  surgery  in  every  department  is  one  of  the  most  notable 
phenomena  of  the  present  day.  So  many  improvements,  discoveries,  and 
observations  have  been  made  since  the  appearance  of  the  last  edition  of  this 
work  that  the  author  found  it  necessary  to  rewrite  it  entirely.  In  this  new  fourth 
edition  the  book  has  undergone  a  thorough  and  careful  revision,  and  there 
has  been  added  much  new  matter.  There  have  also  been  added  over  two 
hundred  excellent  and  practical  illustrations,  greatly  increasing  the  value  of  the 
work.  Because  of  the  great  amount  of  new  matter  it  has  been  deemed 
advisable  in  this  present  edition  to  adopt  a  larger  type  page.  This  is  a  great 
improvement,  rendering  as  it  does  the  work  less  cumbersome.  The  book  will 
be  found  to  express  the  latest  advances  in  the  art  and  science  of  surgery. 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  MEDICAL  PRESS 

The  Lancet,  London 

"  Wemay  congratulate  Dr.  DaCosta  in  the  success  of  his  attempt.  .  ,  .  We  can  recommend 
tfae  work  as  a  text-book  well  suited  to  students." 

The  Medical  Record,  New  York 

"  The  work  throughout  is  notable  for  its  conciseness.  Redundance  of  language  and  padding 
have  been  scrupulously  avoided,  while  at  the  same  time  it  contains  a  sufficient  amount  of  information 
to  fulfil  the  object  aimed  at  by  its  author — namely,  a  text-book  for  the  use  of  the  student  and  the 
busy  practitioner." 

American  Journal  of  the  Medical  Sciences 

"  The  author  has  presented  concisely  and  accurately  the  principles  of  modern  surgery.  The 
book  is  a  valuable  one,  which  can  be  recommended  to  students,  and  is  of  great  value  to  the  general 
practitioner." 


SURGER  V  AND  ANA  TOMY  1 1 

GET  fL  •  THE  NEW 

THE  BEST         >\  IXV  G  r  1  C  QC  rV       STANDARD 

lUiastracted  DictioiYScry 

NEW  THIRD  REVISED  EDITION  — 1500  NEW  WORDS 

The  American    Illustrated    Medical    Dictionary.     A    New    and 

Complete  Dictionary  of  the  terms  used  in  Medicine,  Surgery,  Den- 
tistry, Pharmacy,  Chemistry,  and  kindred  branches.  With  tables  of 
Arteries,  Muscles,  Nerves,  Veins,  etc.;  of  Bacilli,  Bacteria,  etc.; 
Eponymic  Tables  of  Diseases,  Operations,  Stains,  Tests,  etc.  By 
W.  A.  Newman  Dorland,  M.D.      Large  octavo,  798  pages. 

Flexible  leather,  $^.^0  net ;  with  thumb  index,  ;^5.oo  net. 

Howard  A.  Kelly,  M.D.. 

Professor  of  Gynecology,  fohtis  Hopkins  University,  Baltimo7'e. 

"  Dr.  norland's  Dictionary  is  admirable.     It  is  so  well  gotten  up  and  of  such  convenient  size. 
No  errors  have  been  found  in  my  use  of  it." 

Golebiewski  and  Bailey*s 
Accident  Diseases 

Atlas  and  Epitome  of  Diseases  Caused  by  Accidents.      By  Dr. 

Ed.  Golebiewski,  of  Berlin.  Edited,  with  additions,  by  Pearce 
Bailey,  M.D.  Consulting  Neurologist  to  St.  Luke's  Hospital,  New 
York  City.  With  71  colored  figures  on  40  plates,  143  text-cuts,  and 
549  pages  of  text.     Cloth,  $^.qo  net.     In  Saunders'  Hand-Atlas  Series. 

The  Medical  Record,  New  York 

"  This   volume  is  upon  an  important   and    only  recently  systematized  subject,  which  is 
growing  in  extent  all  the  time.     The  pictorial  part  of  the  book  is  very  satisfactory." 


HelfericK  aivd  Bloodgood's 
Fract\ires  and  Dislocations 

Atlas  and   Epitome  of  Traumatic  Fractures  and   Dislocations. 

By  Prof.  Dr.  H.  Helferich,  of  Greifswald,  Prussia.  Edited,  with 
additions,  by  Joseph  C.  Bloodgood,  M.D.,  Associate  in  Surgery, 
Johns  Hopkins  University,  Baltimore.  From  the  Fifth  Revised  and 
Enlarged  Gei^man  Edition.  216  colored  figures  on  64  lithographic 
plates,  190  text-cuts,  and  353  pages  of  text. 

Cloth,  ^3.00  net.     In  Saunders' Atlas  Series. 

Medical  News,  New  York 

"  The  author  and  editor  have  made  a  most  successful  effort  to  arrange  the  illustrations  that  the 
interpretation  of  what  they  are  intended  to  present  is  exceedingly  easy." 


12  SAUNDERS'  BOOKS  ON 

S\x\t&jc\  e>.rvd  Coley's 
Abdomirval  Heri:\.iacS 

Atlas  and  Epitome  of  Abdominal  Hernias.  By  Pr.  Dr.  G.  Sul- 
tan, of  Gottingen.  Edited,  with  additions,  by  Wm.  B,  Coley,  M.D., 
Clinical  Lecturer  and  Instructor  in  Surgery,  Columbia  University,  New 
York.     1 19  illustrations,  36  in  colors,  and  277  pages  of  text. 

Cloth,  ^3.00  net.     In  Saunders'  Hand-Atlas  Series. 

Robert  H.  M.  Dawbarn.  M.D.. 

Professor  of  Stirgery  and  of  Sui'gical  Anatomy,  New  York  Polyclinic. 

"  I  have  spent  several  interesting  hours  over  it  to-day,  and  shall  willingly  recommend  it  to  my 
classes  at  the  Polyclinic  College  and  elsewhere." 

Warren's  Pathology  and  Therapeutics 

Surgical  Pathology  and  Therapeutics.     By  J.  Collins  Warren, 
M.D.,  LL.D.,  F.R.C.S.  (Hon.),  Professor  of  Surgery,  Harvard  Medi- 
cal   School.      Octavo,    873    pages;     136   illustrations,    33   in    colors. 
With  an  Appendix  on  Surgical  Diagnosis  and  Regional  Bacteriology. 
Cloth,  ^5.00  net;  Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  ;^6.oo  net. 
SECOND   EDITION.  WITH   AN  APPENDIX 

Roswell  Park.  N.D.. 

In  the  Harvard  Graduate  Magazine. 

"  I  think  it  is  the  most  creditable  book  on  surgical  pathology,  and  the  most  beautiful  medical 
illustration  of  the  bookmakers'  art  that  has  ever  been  issued  from  the  American  press." 

ZuckerkdLndl  and  DaLCostdL's 
Operactive   S\jrgery 

ADOPTED   BY  THE  U.  S.  AR.MY 

Atlas  and  Epitome  of  Operative  Surgery.  By  Dr.  O.  Zucker- 
KANDL,  of  Vienna.  Edited,  with  additions,  by  J.  Chalmers  DaCosta, 
M.D.,  Professor  of  the  Principles  of  Surgery  and  Clinical  Surgery, 
Jefferson  Medical  College,  Phila.  40  colored  plates,  278  text-cuts, 
and  410  pages  of  text.     Cloth,  ^3.50  net.     In  Saunders'  Atlas  Series. 

SECOND  EDITION.  THOROUGHLY  REVISED  AND  GREATLY  ENLARGED 

New  York  Medical  JournaL 

"  We  know  of  no  other  work  upon  the  subject  in  which  the  illustrations  are  as  numerous  or  as 
generally  satisfactory," 


SURGERY  AND  ANATOMY  13 

Lewis*  Anatomy  and  Physiology  for  Nurses      Just  issued 

Anatomy  and  Physiology  for  Nurses.  By  LeRoy  Lewis,  M.  D.,  Surgeon 
to  and  Lecturer  on  Anatomy  and  Physiology  for  Nurses  at  the  Lewis  Hospital, 
Bay  City,  Michigan.    i2mo,  317  pages,  with  146 illustrations.   Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

A  demand  for  such  a  work  as  this,  treating  tlie  subjects  from  the  nurse's  point  of  view, 
has  long  existed.  Dr.  Lewis  has  based  the  plan  and  scope  of  this  work  on  the  methods  em- 
ployed by  him  in  teaching  these  branches,  making  the  text  unusually  simple  and  clear. 
The  object  was  so  to  deal  with  anatomy  and  physiology  that  the  student  might  easily 
grasp  the  primary  principles,  at  the  same  time  laying  a  broad  foundation  for  wider  study. 


McClellan's  Art  Anatomy  Recently  issued 

Anatomy  in  Its  Relation  to  Art.  By  George  McClellan,  M.D.,  Professor 
of  Anatomy,  Pennsylvania  Academy  of  the  Fine  Arts.  Quarto  volume,  9  by 
12^  inches,  with  338  original  drawings  and  photographs,  and  260  pages  of 
text.      Dark  blue  vellum,  $10.00  net  ;    Half  Russia,  $12.00  net. 

Howard  Pyle,  in  the  Philadelphia  Medical  Jo2i7'nal 

"The  book  is  one  of  the  best  and  the  most  thorough  text-books  of  artistic  anatomy  which  it  has  been 
the  writer's  fortune  to  fall  upon,  and,  as  a  text-book,  it  ought  to  make  its  way  into  the  field  for  which 
it  is  intended." 


Senn    on    Tumors  second  Revised  Edition 

Pathology  and  Surgical  Treatment  of  Tumors.  By  Nicholas  Senn, 
M.D.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery,  Rush  Medical  College,  Chicago. 
Handsome  octavo,  718  pages,  with  478  engravings,  including  12  full-page 
colored  plates.  Cloth,  $5.00  net  ;  Sheep  or  Half  Morocco,  $6.00  net. 

Journal  of  the  American  Medical  Association 

"  The  most  exhaustive  of  any  recent  book  in  English  on  this  subject.  It  is  well  illustrated  and  will 
doubtless  remain  as  the  principal  monograph  on  the  subject  for  some  years." 


Macdonald's  Diagnosis  and  Treatment 

A  Clinical  Text=Book  of  Surgical  Diagnosis  and  Treatment.     By  J.  W. 

Macdonald,  M.D.  Edin.,  F.R.C.S.  (Edin.),  Professor  Emeritus  of  the  Prac- 
tice of  Surgery  and  of  Clinical  Surgery  in  Hamline  University,  Minneapolis. 
Octavo,  798  pages,  illus.      Cloth,  $5.00  net  ;  Sheep  or  Half  Mor.,  $6.00  net 

British  Medical  Journal 

"  Care  has  been  taken  to  lay  down  rules  for  a  sj'stematic  and  comprehensive  examination  of  each  case 
as  it  presents  itself,  and  the  most  advanced  and  approved  methods  of  clinical  investigation  in  surgical 
practice  are  fully  described  " 


14  SAUNDERS'   BOOKS   ON 

Haynes*  Anatomy 

A  Manual  of  Anatomy.  By  Irving  S.  Haynes,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Prac- 
tical Anatomy,  Cornell  University  Medical  College.  Octavo,  680  pages, 
with  42  diagrams  and  134  full-page  half-tones.  Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

"  This  book  is  the  work  of  a  practical  instructor — one  who  knows  by  experience  the  require- 
ments of  the  average  student,  and  is  able  to  meet  these  requirements  in  a  very  satisfactory 
way." — The  Medical  Record,  New  York. 

American  Pocket  Dictionary  ,.^  llS"ed''ES 

The  American  Pocket  Medical  Dictionary.     Edited  by  W.  A.  Newman 

Borland,  A.M.,  M.D.,  Assistant  Obstetrician,  Hospital  of  the  University  of 
Pennsylvania,  etc.  566  pages.  Full  leather,  limp,  with  gold  edges,  |i.oo 
net;  with  patent  thumb  index,  I1.25  net. 

"  I  am  struck  at  once  with  admiration  at  the  compact  size  and  attractive  exterior.  I  can  recom- 
mend it  to  our  students  without  reserve." — James  W.  Holland,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Medical 
Chemistry  and  Toxicology,  and  Dean,  Jefferson  Medical  College,  Philadelphia. 

Beck's  Fractures 

Fractures.  By  Carl  Beck,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery,  New  York  Post- 
graduate Medical  School  and  Hospital.  With  an  Appendix  on  the  Practical 
Use  of  the  Rontgen  Rays.    335  pages,  170  illustrations.         Cloth,  $3.50  net. 

"  The  use  of  the  rays  with  its  technic  is  fully  explained,  and  the  practical  points  are  brought  out 
with  a  thoroughness  that  merits  high  praise." —  The  Medical  Record,  New  York. 

Barton  and  Wells*  Medical  Thesaurus  Recently  issued 

A  Thesaurus  of  Medical  Words  and  Phrases.  By  Wilfred  M.  Barton, 
M.  D.,  Assistant  to  Professor  of  Materia  Medica  and  Therapeutics,  and  Lec- 
turer on  Pharmacy,  Georgetown  University,  Washington,  D.  C.  ;  and  Walter 
A.  Wells,  M.  D.,  Demonstrator  of  Laryngology,  Georgetown  University, 
Washington,  D.  C.  i2mo  of  534  pages.  Flexible  leather,  ^2.50  net  ;  with 
thumb  index,  $3.00  net. 

Stoney's  Surgical  Technic  N^TadTEdSon 

Bacteriology  and  Surgical  Technic  for  Nurses.  By  Emily  M.  A.  Stoney, 
Superintendent  at  the  Carney  Hospital,  South  Boston,  Mass.  Revised  by 
Frederic  R.  Griffith,  M.  D.,  Surgeon,  of  New  York.  i2mo,  266  pages, 
illustrated.  ^i-5o  net. 

"  These  subjects  are  treated  most  accurately  and  up  to  date,  without  the  superfluous  reading 
which  is  so  often  employed.  .  .  .  Nurses  will  find  this  book  of  the  greatest  value."— 
Trained  Nurse  and  Hospital  Review. 

Grant  on  Face,  Mouth,  and  Jaws 

A  Text=Book  of  the  Surgical  Principles  and  Surgical  Diseases  of  the 
Face,  Mouth,  and  Jaws.  For  Dental  Students.  By  H.  Horace  Grant, 
A.M.,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery  and  of  Clinical  Surgery,  Hospital  College 
of  Medicine.     Octavo  of  231  pages,  with  68  illustrations.       Cloth,  I2.50  net. 

"  The  language  of  the  book  is  simple  and  clear.  .  .  .  We  recommend  the  work  to  those  for 
whom  it  is  intended." — Philadelphia  Medical  Journal. 


SURGERY  AND  ANATOMY  15 

Warwick  and  Tunstall's  First  Aid 

First  Aid  to  the  Injured  and  Sick.  By  F.  J.  Warwick,  B.A.,  M.B. 
Cantab.,  Associate  of  King's  College,  London  ;  and  A.  C.  Tunstall,  M.D., 
F.R.C.S.  Edin.,  Surgeon-Captain  Commanding  the  East  London  Volunteer 
Brigade  Bearer  Company. "    i6mo  05232  pages  and  nearly  200  illustrations. 

Cloth,  1 1. 00  net. 

"  Contains  a  great  deal  of  valuable  information  well  and  tersely  expressed.  It  will  prove 
especially  useful  to  the  volunteer  first  aid  and  hospital  corps  men  of  the  National  Guard."~ 
Journal  American  Medical  Association. 

Beck's  Svirgical  Asepsis 

A  Manual  of  Surgical  Asepsis.  By  Carl  Beck,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Sur- 
gery.  New  York  Post-graduate  Medical  School  and  Hospital.  306  pages  ;  65 
text-illustrations  and  12  full -page  plates.  Cloth,  $1.25  net. 

"  The  book  is  well  written.  The  data  are  clearly  and  concisely  given.  The  facts  are  well 
arranged.  It  is  well  worth  reading  to  the  student,  the  physician  in  general  practice,  and  the 
surgeon." — Boston  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal. 

Griffith's  Hand-Book  of  Surgery  Recently  issued 

A  Manual  of  Surgery.  By  Frederic  R.  Griffith,  M.  D.,  Surgeon  to  the 
Bellevue  Dispensary,  New  York  City.  i2mo  of  579  pages,  with  417  illus- 
trations. Flexible  leather,  $2.00  net. 

"  Well  adapted  to  the  needs  of  the  student  and  to  the  busy  practitioner  for  a  hasty  review  of  important 
points  in  surgery." — American  Medicine. 

Senn's  Syllabus  of  Surgery 

A  Syllabus  of  Lectures  on  the  Practice  of  Surgery.  Arranged  in  con- 
formity with  "American  Text-Book  of  Surgery."  By  Nicholas  Senn, 
M.D.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery,  Rush  Medical  College,  Chicago. 

Cloth,  $1.50  net. 

"  The  author  has  evidently  spared  no  pains  in  making  his  Syllabus  thoroughly  comprehensive, 
and  has  added  new  matter  and  alluded  to  the  most  recent  authors  and  operations.  Full  refer- 
ences are  also  given  to  all  requisite  details  of  surgical  anatomy  and  pathology." — British  Medi- 
cal Journal. 

Keen's  Addresses  and  Other  Papers  just  Ready 

Addresses  and  Other  Papers.  Delivered  by  William  W.  Keen,  M.  D., 
LL.D.,  F.  R.  C.  S.  (Hon.),  Professor  of  the  Principles  of  Surgery  and  of  Clin- 
ical Surgery,  Jefferson  Medical  College,  Philadelphia.  Octavo  volume  of 
441  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $3.75  net. 

Keen  on  tKe  Surgery  of  TypKoid 

The  Surgical  Complications  and  Sequels  of  Typhoid  Fever.  By  Wivr.  W. 
Keen,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  F.R.C.S.  (Hon.),  Professor  of  the  Principles  of  Surgery 
and  of  Clinical  Surgery,  Jefferson  Medical  College,  Philadelphia,  etc. 
Octavo  volume  of  386  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $3.00  net. 

"  Every  surgical  incident  which  can  occur  during  or  after  typhoid  fever  is  amply  discussed  and 
fully  illustrated  by  cases.  .  .  .  The  book  will  be  useful  both  to  the  surgeon  and  physician."— 
The  Practitioner,  London, 


l6  .  SURGERY  AND  ANATOMY 

Moore's  Orthopedic  Surgery 

A  Manual  of  Orthopedic  Surgery.  By  James  E.  Moore,  M.D.,  Professor 
of  Clinical  Surgery,  University  of  Minnesota,  College  of  Medicine  and  Surgery. 
Octavo  of  356  pages,  handsomely  illustrated.  Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

"  The  book  is  eminently  practical.  It  is  a  safe  guide  in  the  understanding  and  treatment  of 
orthopedic  cases.     Should  be  owned  by  every  surgeon  and  practitioner." — Annals  of  Surgery. 

Nancrede*s   Anatomy  and   Dissection.     Edmon 

Essentials    of    Anatomy  and    Manual    of   Practical    Dissection.      By 

Charles  B.  Nancrede,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery  and  of  Clinical  Surgery, 

University  of  Michigan,  Ann  Arbor.     Post-octavo  ;   500  pages,  with  full-page 

lithographic  plates  in  colors,  and  nearly  200  illustrations. 

Extra  Cloth  (or  Oilcloth  for  the  dissecting-room),  $2.00  net. 

"  The  plates  are  of  more  than  ordinary-  excellence,  and  are  of  especial  value  to  students  in  their 
work  in  the  dissecting-room."— yoz<rwa/  of  the  American  Medical  Association. 

Nancrede's  Principles  of  Surgery      New"2d)  Edition 

Lectures  on  the  Principles  of  Surgery.  By  Chas.  B.  Nancrede,  M.D., 
LL.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery  and  of  Clinical  Surgery,  University  of  Michigan, 
Ann  Arbor.     Octavo,  407  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

"  We  can  strongly  recommend  this  book  to  all  students  and  those  who  would  see  something 
of  the  scientific  foundation  upon  which  the  art  of  surgery  is  built." — Quarterly  Medical  Journal, 
Sheffield,  England. 

Nancrede's  Essentials  of  Anatomy.    fe'el'^ESn 

Essentials  of  Anatomy,  including  the  Anatomy  of  the  Alscera.     By  Chas. 

B.  Nancrede,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Surgery  and  of  Clinical  Surgery,  University 

of  Michigan,  Ann  Arbor.     Crown  octavo,  388  pages;   180  cuts.     With  an 

Appendix  containing  over  60  illustrations  of  the  osteology  of  the  body.     Based 

oxs.  Gray  s  Anatomy .         Cloth,  $1.00  net.     In  Sau7iders    Question  Co7npends. 

"  The  questions  have  been  wisely  selected,  and  the  answers  accurately  and  concisely  given."— 
University  Medical  Magazine. 

Martin's  Essentials  of   Surgery.     ^^"'Xvifed""'" 

Essentials  of  Surgery.  Containing  also  Venereal  Diseases,  Surgical  Land- 
marks, Minor  and  Operative  Surgery,  and  a  complete  description,  with  illus- 
trations, of  the  Handkerchief  and  Roller  Bandages.  By  Edward  Martin, 
A.M.,  M.D.,  Professor  of  CHnical  Surgery,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  etc. 
Crown  octavo,  338  pages,  illustrated.  With  an  Appendix  on  Antiseptic  Sur- 
gery, etc.  Cloth,  $1.00  net.     In  Saunders   Qiiestio7i  Conipe^ids. 

"  Written  to  assist  the  student,  it  will  be  of  undoubted  value  to  the  practitioner,  containing  as  it 
does  the  essence  of  surgical  wox"^:''— Boston  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal. 

Martin's   Essentials  of  Minor  Surgery.  Band- 
aging,   and   Venereal    Diseases.       ^"'^°£i!^o1r"^'* 

Essentials  of  Minor  Surgery,  Bandaging,  and  Venereal  Diseases.     By 

Edward  Martin,  A.M.,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Clinical  Surgery,  University  of 

Pennsylvania,  etc.    Crown  octavo,  166  pages,  with  78  illustrations. 

Cloth,  $1.00  net.     hi  Sannders'   Question  Compends. 

"  The  best  condensation  of  the  subjects  of  which  it  treats  yet  placed  before  the  profession,"-" 
The  Medical  News,  Philadelphia. 


f  *rr«^-' 


f/5S| 


